ETAP 11.0.0 User Guide

ETAP 11.
0
User Guide
Operation Technology, Inc.

Registered to ISO 9001:2008
Certification No. 10002889 QM08
September 2011
Copyright 2011
All Rights Reserved
This manual has copyrights by Operation Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Under the copyright
laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Operation
Technology, Inc. The Licensee may copy portions of this documentation only for the exclusive use of
Licensee. Any reproduction shall include the copyright notice. This exception does not allow copies to
be made for other persons or entities, whether or not sold. Under this law, copying includes translating
into another language.
Certain names and/or logos used in this document may constitute trademarks, service marks, or trade
names of Operation Technology, Inc. or other entities.
Access, Excel, ODBC, SQL Server, Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 2003,
Windows 2008 and Microsoft Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
AutoCad is a registered trademark of Autodesk.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
PowerPlot is a registered trademark of Jackson & Associates.
Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Seagate Software.
MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of MathWorks
Screen shot(s) reprinted by permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Operation Technology, Inc. believes that the information contained herein is accurate as of its publication
date, and such information is subject to change without notice. This information is provided as is
without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to the implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. Operation
Technology, Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this publication or any other
documents referenced in this publication.
The current revision includes modifications from Version ETAP 7.5.2 Release to ETAP 11.0 Release.
The modifications are marked in blue for easy identification. Note: ETAP 11.0 may also be referred to as
ETAP 11 in this document.

Southern California
(949) 462-0100 Sales
(949) 462-0200 Fax
(949) 462-0400 Technical Support
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Specification........................................................................................................................... 3
Capabilities........................................................................................................................... 24
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) ................................................................................. 25
File Structure ........................................................................................................................ 26
Libraries ............................................................................................................................... 29
Help ...................................................................................................................................... 30
Automatic Backup of ETAP Projects................................................................................... 33
Chapter 2 Setup
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 2

ETAP 11.0 Installation ........................................................................................................... 3
ETAP User Guide Installation ............................................................................................. 15
ODBC Configuration ........................................................................................................... 18
ETAP License Wizard.......................................................................................................... 20
ETAP License Information .................................................................................................. 26
ETAP Licensing .................................................................................................................. 28
License Manager Server....................................................................................................... 29
License Manager Installation ............................................................................................... 30
License Manager Verification .............................................................................................. 35
Installation Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 38
User Guide Removal ............................................................................................................ 41
License Manager Removal ................................................................................................... 42
System Optimization ............................................................................................................ 44
Chapter 3 Overview
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
System Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 6

Project View........................................................................................................................... 8
Network Systems ................................................................................................................... 9
Mode Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 10
Star Systems ......................................................................................................................... 15
Underground Raceway Systems (UGS) ............................................................................... 18
Ground Grid Systems ........................................................................................................... 21
Panel Systems ...................................................................................................................... 25
Cable Pulling Systems.......................................................................................................... 28
Real-Time Systems (PSMS) ................................................................................................ 30
GIS Systems ......................................................................................................................... 37
Control Systems ................................................................................................................... 38
User-Defined Dynamic Model Graphical Editor. 41
System Dumpster ................................................................................................................. 44
Library.................................................................................................................................. 47
Cable Systems ...................................................................................................................... 49
Project Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 52
Study Case Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 63
Message Log ........................................................................................................................ 64
ii
ETAP 11.0 User Guide
3.20 Tutorial ................................................................................................................................. 65
Chapter 4 Options (Preferences)

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Options (Preferences) Editor .................................................................................................. 2

PSGRID.INI ........................................................................................................................... 6
OTIGraph.INI ........................................................................................................................ 7
Themes (OTH file) ................................................................................................................. 9
ETAPS.INI ........................................................................................................................... 12
Chapter 5 Database and Project Management

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.4
Presentations .......................................................................................................................... 3
Configuration Status............................................................................................................... 7
Revision Data ....................................................................................................................... 32
Data Manager ...................................................................................................................... 35
ETAP Wizards ..................................................................................................................... 73
Chapter 6 User Access Management

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Access Levels ......................................................................................................................... 3

User Management ................................................................................................................ 14
Creating A New Project File ................................................................................................ 18
Opening An Existing Project File ........................................................................................ 19
Chapter 7 Printing and Plotting

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Schedule Report Manager ...................................................................................................... 3

Library Report Manager......................................................................................................... 4
Printing One-Line Diagrams .................................................................................................. 7
Printing Star Views .............................................................................................................. 22
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 34
Plots...................................................................................................................................... 40
Chapter 8 Engineering Libraries

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
8.17
Library Utility Tools .............................................................................................................. 3

Convert ETAP DOS Libraries ............................................................................................. 11
Cable ................................................................................................................................... .12
Cable Fire Coating ............................................................................................................... 21
Cable Fire Stop..................................................................................................................... 25
Cable Fire Wrap ................................................................................................................... 28
Transmission Line Library (Phase Conductors) .................................................................. 31
Motor Nameplate ................................................................................................................. 37
Motor Circuit (CKT) Model................................................................................................. 42
Motor Characteristic Model ................................................................................................. 46
Motor Load Model ............................................................................................................... 50
Fuse ...................................................................................................................................... 54
Relay .................................................................................................................................... 67
Recloser................................................................................................................................ 98
Electronic Controller .......................................................................................................... 119
HV Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 144
LV Circuit Breaker............................................................................................................. 149
iii
8.18 Solid State Trip Device Library ......................................................................................... 164

8.19 Thermal Magnetic Trip Library ......................................................................................... 204
8.20 Electro-Mechanical Trip Device Library ........................................................................... 220
8.21 Motor Circuit Protector Library ......................................................................................... 241
8.22 Overload Heater Library .................................................................................................... 255
8.23 Harmonic Library ............................................................................................................... 268
8.24 Interruption Cost Library ................................................................................................... 273
8.25 Reliability Library .............................................................................................................. 276
8.26 Battery ................................................................................................................................ 281
8.27 Control System Device Contact ...................................................................................... 286
8.28 Control System Device Control Relay ............................................................................ 290
8.29 Control System Device - Solenoid ..................................................................................... 307
8.30 Photovoltaic / Solar Panel .................................................................................................... 323
8.31 Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) Library ............................................................................ 334
Chapter 9 One-Line Diagram GUI

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Edit A One-Line Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3

Display Options.................................................................................................................... 76
Default Display Options....................................................................................................... 84
Annotation Font ................................................................................................................... 85
Result Annotation ................................................................................................................ 87
Text Box ............................................................................................................................... 88
Chapter 10 Menu Bars

10.1 Start-Up Menu Bar................................................................................................................... 3
10.2 One-Line Diagram Menu Bar .................................................................................................... 5
10.3 Project View Menu Bar ....................................................................................................... 114
10.4 Underground Raceway System Menu Bar ............................................................................ 117
10.5 Dumpster Menu Bar.............................................................................................................. 123
10.6 Cable Pulling Menu Bar....................................................................................................... 124
10.7 Ground Grid Menu Bar ........................................................................................................ 126
Chapter 11 AC Elements
Part 1
11.1 Bus ........................................................................................................................................... 2
11.2 Transformer, 2-Winding ........................................................................................................ 39
11.3 Transformer, Open Delta ....................................................................................................... 77
11.4 Transformer, 3-Winding ...................................................................................................... 101
11.5 Bus Duct .............................................................................................................................. 130
11.6 Cable .................................................................................................................................... 140
11.7 Transmission Line ................................................................................................................. 186
11.8 Reactor ................................................................................................................................. 219
11.9 Impedance ............................................................................................................................ 228
11.10 Power Grid ......................................................................................................................... 240
11.11 Synchronous Generator ...................................................................................................... 258
11.12 Wind Turbine Generator - WTG........................................................................................ 297
11.13 Photovoltaic (PV) Array .................................................................................................... 346
Part 2
11.14 Inductiion Machine ............................................................................................................ 262
iv
11.15 Synchronous Motor............................................................................................................ 318

11.16 Lumped Load ..................................................................................................................... 375
11.17 Motor Operated Valve ....................................................................................................... 396
11.18 Static Load ......................................................................................................................... 423
11.19 Capacitor ............................................................................................................................ 449
11.20 Power Panel ....................................................................................................................... 467
11.21 Harmonic Filter ................................................................................................................. 469
11.22 Remote Connector ............................................................................................................. 484
11.23 Phase Adapter .................................................................................................................... 487
11.24 Grounding/Earthing Adapter.............................................................................................. 493
11.25 Static Var Compensator ..................................................................................................... 495
11.26 High Voltage DC Link (DC Transmission Line) .............................................................. 505
11.27 AC Composite Motors ....................................................................................................... 512
11.28 DC Composite Motors ....................................................................................................... 514
11.29 Composite Networks .......................................................................................................... 516
11.30 Fuse .................................................................................................................................... 521
11.31 Contactor ............................................................................................................................ 540
11.32 HV Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 548
11.33 LV Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 561
11.34 Recloser ............................................................................................................................. 605
11.35 Ground Switch662
11.36 Overload Heater ................................................................................................................. 671
11.37 In-line Overload Relay....................................................................................................... 686
11.38 Single-Throw Switch ......................................................................................................... 703
11.39 Double-Throw Switch ........................................................................................................ 711
11.40 Ground Grid ....................................................................................................................... 720
Chapter 12 Instrumentation Elements

12.1 Current Transformer ................................................................................................................. 2
12.2 Potential Transformer ............................................................................................................. 10
12.3 Voltmeter ............................................................................................................................... 16
12.4 Ammeter ................................................................................................................................ 22
12.5 Multimeter ............................................................................................................................. 27
12.6 Protective Relay ..................................................................................................................... 34
12.7 Voltage Relay Editor Overview ............................................................................................. 84
12.8 Frequency Relay .................................................................................................................... 91
12.9 Reverse Power Relay ............................................................................................................. 98
12.10 MV Solid State Trip Relay ................................................................................................ 105
12.11 Tag Link ............................................................................................................................. 123
Chapter 13 AC-DC Elements

13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)..................................................................................... 2

VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) ........................................................................................ 23
Charger ................................................................................................................................. 46
Inverter ................................................................................................................................. 65
Chapter 14 DC Elements
14.1 DC Bus ................................................................................................................................... 2
14.2 DC Cable ................................................................................................................................ 9
14.3 DC Impedance...................................................................................................................... 45
14.4 DC Converter ....................................................................................................................... 51
14.5 Battery .................................................................................................................................. 59
14.6 DC Motor ............................................................................................................................. 73
14.7 DC Static Load ..................................................................................................................... 86
14.8 DC Lumped Load................................................................................................................. 97
14.9 DC Composite CSD ........................................................................................................... 109
14.10 DC Composite Motor ......................................................................................................... 119
14.11 DC Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 121
14.12 DC Fuse.............................................................................................................................. 157
14.13 DC Single-Throw Switch ................................................................................................... 174
14.14 DC Double-Throw Switch ................................................................................................. 181
Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Analysis

15.1 ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar .................................................................................................... 2
15.2 IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 6
15.3 Study Case Editor .................................................................................................................. 10
15. 4 Display Options...................................................................................................................... 35
15.5 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods .......................................................................................... 44
15.6 IEC Calculation Methods ........................................................................................................ 60
15.7 AC-DC Converter Models ..................................................................................................... 73
15.8 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 79
15.9 Output Reports ....................................................................................................................... 84
15.10 Alert View............................................................................................................................ 92
Chapter 16 STAR Device Cordination Analysis

16.1 Star Mode Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 2
16.3 Display Options ..................................................................................................................... 27
16.4 Star Sequence-of-Operation ................................................................................................... 36
16.5 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 40
16.6 Output Reports ....................................................................................................................... 45
Chapter 17 STAR View

17.1 Star Systems ............................................................................................................................. 2
17.2 Star TCC View......................................................................................................................... 5
17.3 Star View (TCC) Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 19
17.4 Relay Test-Set Interface ....................................................................................................... 130
17.5 Star Tutorial ......................................................................................................................... 139
17.6 ARTTS Tutorial ................................................................................................................... 201
Chapter 18 Arc Flash Analysis

18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
Bus Editor .............................................................................................................................. 3

Short-Circuit Study Case...................................................................................................... 25
Display Options.................................................................................................................... 41
Arc Flash Alert ..................................................................................................................... 47
Running Arc Flash Analysis ................................................................................................ 49
Calculation Methodology ..................................................................................................... 51
vi
18.7 Required Data .................................................................................................................... 109

18.8 NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002 ............................................................................... 114
18.9 Arc Flash Reports............................................................................................................... 117
18.10 Arc Flash Labels ................................................................................................................ 132
18.11 Arc Flash Report Analyzer ................................................................................................ 170
Chapter 19 Load Flow Analysis

19.1 Load Flow Toolbar..................................................................................................................... 2
19.2 Study Case Editor ..................................................................................................................... 6
19.3 Display Options ...................................................................................................................... 21
19.4 Calculation Methods ................................................................................................................ 33
19.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation .................................................................................... 39
19.6 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 41
19.7 Output Reports ....................................................................................................................... 45
19.8 Alert View.............................................................................................................................. 52
19.9 Load Flow Result Analyzer ................................................................................................... 54
19.10 Load Analyzer...................................................................................................................... 75
Chapter 20 Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis

20.1 Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar................................................................................................. 3
20.3 Display Options ...................................................................................................................... 23
20.4 Calculation Method ................................................................................................................. 35
20.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation .................................................................................... 43
20.6 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 45
20.7 Output Reports ....................................................................................................................... 49
20.8 Alert View.............................................................................................................................. 58
Chapter 21 Motor Starting Analysis

21.1 Motor Starting Toolbar ............................................................................................................ 2
21.2 Study Case Editor .................................................................................................................... 5
21.3 Display Options ...................................................................................................................... 27
21.4 Calculation Methods ............................................................................................................... 36
21.5 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 45
21.6 Output Reports ....................................................................................................................... 48
21.7 One-Line Diagram Displayed Results ................................................................................... 56
21.8 Alert View.............................................................................................................................. 57
21.9 Plots ....................................................................................................................................... 58
Chapter 22 Transient Stability Analysis

22.1 Transient Stability Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 3
22.3 Display Options....................................................................................................................... 30
22.4 Calculation Methods ................................................................................................................. 39
22.5 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 50
22.6 Output Reports ....................................................................................................................... 61
22.8 Plots ....................................................................................................................................... 72
22.9 Action List ............................................................................................................................. 78
vii
Chapter 23 Generator Start-Up

23.1 Study Case Editor................................................................................................................... 3
23.2 Calculation Methods .............................................................................................................. 5
23.3 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 11
Chapter 24 Dynamic Models

24.1 Induction Machine....................................................................................................................... 2
24.2 Synchronous Machine ............................................................................................................. 11
24.3 Power Grid ............................................................................................................................. 25
24.4 Excitation System.................................................................................................................... 26
24.5 Governor-Turbine .................................................................................................................. 98
24.6 Power System Stabilizer (PSS) ............................................................................................ 170
24.7 Mechanical Load.................................................................................................................. 176
24.8 Static Var Compensator Models .......................................................................................... 178
24.9 Dynamic Lumped Motor Load Model ................................................................................. 186
24.10 Wind Turbine Generator .................................................................................................... 187
Chapter 25 User Defined Dynamic Models

25.1 UDM Graphic Logic Editor ..................................................................................................... 2
25.2 Saving UDM Model Files ........................................................................................................ 4
25.2 Input and Output Blocks ........................................................................................................ 34
25.3 Control Blocks ....................................................................................................................... 37
25.4 Creating UDM Models .......................................................................................................... 68
25.5 EXC/ GOV MW/Var Sharing Modes .................................................................................... 86
25.6 Testing UDM Models ............................................................................................................ 88
25.7 Advanced Topics ................................................................................................................... 91
Chapter 26 Parameter Estimation

26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
26.6
Start Parameter Estimation..................................................................................................... 2

Parameter Estimation Editor .................................................................................................. 3
Motor Parameter Update Editor ............................................................................................. 9
Calculation Method .............................................................................................................. 13
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 15
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 16
Chapter 27 Harmonic Analysis

27.1 Study Toolbar........................................................................................................................... 4
27.3 Display Options ..................................................................................................................... 22
27.4 Calculation Methods .............................................................................................................. 30
27.5 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 37
27.6 Output Reports ....................................................................................................................... 44
27.8 Plots ....................................................................................................................................... 56
viii
Chapter 28 Optimal Power Flow

28.1
28.2
28.3
28.4
28.5
28.6
28.7
Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3

Study Case Editor................................................................................................................... 6
Display Options.................................................................................................................... 28
Calculation Methods ............................................................................................................ 37
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 38
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 43
One-Line Diagram Displayed Results.................................................................................. 51
Chapter 29 Optimal Capacitor Placement

29.1
29.2
29.3
29.4
29.5
29.6
Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 4

Display Options.................................................................................................................... 21
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 33
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 35
Chapter 30 Reliabitliy Analysis

30.1 Reliability System Analysis Toolbar ....................................................................................... 3
30.3 Display Options ..................................................................................................................... 13
30.4 Modeling and Calculation Method ........................................................................................ 22
30.5 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 27
30.6 Output Report......................................................................................................................... 30
30.7 Plots ....................................................................................................................................... 42
Chapter 31 Transformer MVA Sizing

31.1 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing .................................................................................... 2
31.2 Calculation Method ................................................................................................................ 8
31.3 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 9
Chapter 32 Transformer Tap Optimization

32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
Transformer Tap Optimization .............................................................................................. 2

Tap Optimization Page........................................................................................................... 3
Calculation Method ................................................................................................................ 9
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 10
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 11
Chapter 33 DC Short-Circuit Analysis

33.1
33.2
33.3
33.4
33.5
33.6
Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3

Display Options...................................................................................................................... 8
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 19
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 23
ix
Chapter 34 DC Load Flow Analysis

34.1
34.2
34.3
34.4
34.5
34.6
Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3

Display Options...................................................................................................................... 8
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 21
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 25
Chapter 35 Battery Sizing and Discharge

35.1
35.2
35.3
35.3
35.4
35.5
35.6
35.7
Battery Sizing Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 3

Display Options.................................................................................................................... 25
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 45
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 48
One-Line Diagram Displayed Results.................................................................................. 58
Plots...................................................................................................................................... 60
Chapter 36 Panel Systems

36.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI).............................................................................................. 3
36.2 Panel Schedule Editor ............................................................................................................ 7
36.3 Panel Schedule Editor - Info Page ......................................................................................... 8
36.4 Panel Schedule Editor - Rating Page.................................................................................... 12
36.5 Panel Schedule Editor - Schedule Page................................................................................ 24
36.6 Panel Schedule Editor Summary Page .............................................................................. 36
36.7 Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page ............................................................................... 39
36.8 Panel Schedule Editor Comment Page .............................................................................. 41
36.9 Calculation Methods ............................................................................................................ 42
36.10 Panels in System Studies ..................................................................................................... 53
36.11 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 54
Chapter 37 Data Exchange

37.1 DataX Levels of Exchange..................................................................................................... 2
37.2 ETAP Data Exchange Services .............................................................................................. 3
37.3 PowerPlot to ETAP Star Migration........................................................................................ 5
37.4 Import IEEE Format............................................................................................................. 25
37.5 Import Raw Format .............................................................................................................. 27
37.6 Import a Ground Grid in AutoCAD to ETAP ...................................................................... 31
37.7 Load Ticket ............................................................................................................................ 39
Chapter 38 CSD Elements

38.1
38.2
38.3
38.4
38.5
38.6
38.7
38.8
Pointer .................................................................................................................................... 2
Display Options...................................................................................................................... 3
DC Bus Editor ........................................................................................................................ 7
Node Editor .......................................................................................................................... 13
Fuse Editor ........................................................................................................................... 14
Circuit Breaker Editor .......................................................................................................... 32
Switch Editor........................................................................................................................ 68
Push Button Editor ............................................................................................................... 75
38.9 Control Relay Editor ............................................................................................................ 81

38.10 Solenoid Editor .................................................................................................................. 100
38.11 Light Editor ........................................................................................................................ 119
38.12 General Load Editor ........................................................................................................... 129
38.13 Contact Editor .................................................................................................................... 140
38.14 Macro Controlled Contact .................................................................................................. 143
38.15 Control Cable Schedule...................................................................................................... 151
38.16 Wire Editor ......................................................................................................................... 158
38.17 Impedance Editor ............................................................................................................... 169
Chapter 39 Control System Diagram (CSD)

42.1
42.2
42.3
42.4
42.5
Control System Diagram Presentation ................................................................................... 2

Edit Mode............................................................................................................................... 5
Voltage Drop Mode (Study Mode) ...................................................................................... 11
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 36
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 39
Chapter 40 Data Synchronization

40.1
40.2
40.3
40.4
40.5
40.6
Accessing the DataX Tools .................................................................................................... 2

Access Database ..................................................................................................................... 3
Excel - Fixed Format............................................................................................................ 16
Excel - Open Format ............................................................................................................ 28
e-DPP ................................................................................................................................... 45
SmartPlant Electrical............................................................................................................ 57
Chapter 41 Geographical Information System

41.1 GIS Map .................................................................................................................... .......... 2
41.2 Activating the GIS Map Module................................................................................. .. .......... 4
41.3 Creating a New GIS Presentation ............................................................................... .. .......... 5
41.4 GIS Map Toolbar ........................................................................................................ .. .......... 7
41.5 Data Transfer from GIS Map to ETAP ....................................................................... .. ........ 10
41.6 Data Synchronization .................................................................................................. .. ........ 13
41.7 Auto Layout Generation ............................................................................................. .. ........ 18
41.8 Performing System Studies ......................................................................................... .. ........ 19
41.9 Updating GIS Maps with Results ............................................................................... .. ........ 20
Chapter 42 Ground Grid Systems

42.1 Ground Grid Systems Presentation .......................................................................................... 3
42.2 FEM Editor Toolbar................................................................................................................. 8
42.3 IEEE Editor Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 9
42.4 Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar...................................................................................... 10
42.5 Edit A GGS ............................................................................................................................ 15
42.7 Ground Short-Circuit Current Values .................................................................................... 21
42.8 Soil Editor .............................................................................................................................. 24
42.9 IEEE Group Editor................................................................................................................. 26
42.10 FEM Group Editor ............................................................................................................... 30
42.11 Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM) .............................................................................................. 32
xi
42.13 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 39

42.14 Output Report....................................................................................................................... 41
42.15 Ground Grid Systems Report Manager................................................................................ 42
42.16 Plot Selection ....................................................................................................................... 51
Chapter 43 System Grounding

43.1 Quick Start Guide3
43.2 Definition of Earthing Types..5
43.3 Multiple Grounding/Earthing Handling.9
Chapter 44 Cable Ampacity and Sizing

44.1 Cable Editor Ampacity/Capacity Parameters .......................................................................... 2
44.2 Current-Carrying Capacity Calculations ................................................................................ 27
44.3 Current-Carrying Capacity Calculations Methodology ......................................................... 28
44.4 Cable Editor Sizing Phase ...................................................................................................... 29
44.5 Steps to Perform Cable Sizing Calculations .......................................................................... 40
Chapter 45 Protective Conductor Sizing and Shock Protection

45.1
45.2
45.3
45.4
45.5
45.6
PE/Grounding Conductor Thermal Sizing ............................................................................. 3

PE Conductor Sizing Calculation Inputs................................................................................ 4
Electric Shock Protection Calculation.................................................................................. 12
Required Electrical Shock Protection Calculation Inputs .................................................... 13
Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 22
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 27
Chapter 46 Underground Raceway Systems

46.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI) ............................................................................................... 3
46.2 Study Toolbar......................................................................................................................... 11
46.4 Display Options ..................................................................................................................... 18
46.5 Editing a UGS ........................................................................................................................ 22
46.6 Underground Raceway System Rule Book ............................................................................ 30
46.7 Duct Bank Raceway Wizard .................................................................................................. 48
46.8 Underground System Editor .................................................................................................. 56
46.9 Raceway Editor ...................................................................................................................... 59
46.10 External Heat Source ........................................................................................................... 64
46.11 Calculation Methods ............................................................................................................. 65
46.12 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 71
46.13 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 73
46.14 Plots ..................................................................................................................................... 80
46.15 Tutorial................................................................................................................................. 82
Chapter 47 Cable Pulling

47.1 Presentation .............................................................................................................................. 2
47.2 Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................... 3
47.4 Create a New Presentation ....................................................................................................... 8
47.5 Cable Pull Editor ...................................................................................................................... 9
xii
47.6 Pull Path Geometric View ..................................................................................................... 13

47.7 Conduit Cross-Section View.................................................................................................. 17
47.8 3-D View................................................................................................................................ 26
47.9 Cable Pulling Analysis ........................................................................................................... 27
47.10 Display Options ................................................................................................................... 29
47.12 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 32
47.13 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 33
Chapter 48 ETAP Real Time Overview

48.1 ETAP Real-Time .2
Chapter 49 References
49.1 Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................................. 1
xiii
Chapter 1
Product Description
ETAP is a fully graphical Enterprise package that runs on Microsoft Windows 2003, 2008, XP, Vista,
and 7 operating systems. ETAP is the most comprehensive analysis tool for the design and testing of
power systems available. Using its standard offline simulation modules, ETAP can utilize real-time
operating data for advanced monitoring, real-time simulation, optimization, energy management
systems, and high-speed intelligent load shedding.
ETAP has been designed and developed by engineers for engineers to handle the diverse
discipline of power systems for a broad spectrum of industries in one integrated package with
multiple interface views such as AC and DC networks, cable raceways, ground grid, GIS, panels, arc
flash, WTG, protective device coordination/selectivity, and AC and DC control system diagrams.
ETAP users must be proficient in using basic operations of Windows environment. Use of
ETAP does not require training. However, to facilitate the learning process, OTI provides
workshops throughout the year in several locations. (Refer to www.etap.com for the up-to-date
training schedule.)
ETAP allows you to easily create and edit graphical one-line diagrams (OLD),
underground cable raceway systems (UGS), three-dimensional cable systems,
advanced time-current coordination and selectivity plots, geographic information
system schematics (GIS), as well as three-dimensional ground grid systems (GGS).
The program has been designed to incorporate to three key concepts:
Virtual Reality Operation

The program operation emulates real electrical system operation as closely as
possible. For example, when you open or close a circuit breaker, place an element out
of service, or change the operating status of motors, the de-energized elements and
sub-systems are indicated on the one-line diagram in gray. ETAP incorporates innovative concepts for
determining protective device coordination directly from the one-line diagram.
1-1
Product Description
Overview
Total Integration of Data

ETAP combines the electrical, logical, mechanical, and physical attributes of system elements in the
same database. For example, a cable not only contains data representing its electrical properties and
physical dimensions, but also information indicating the raceways through which it is routed. Thus, the
data for a single cable can be used for load flow or short-circuit analyses (which require electrical
parameters and connections) as well as cable ampacity derating calculations (which require physical
routing data). This integration of the data provides consistency throughout the system and eliminates the
need for multiple data entry for the same element, which can be a considerable time savings.
Simplicity in Data Entry

ETAP keeps track of the detailed data for each electrical apparatus. Data editors can speed up the data
entry process by requiring the minimum data for a particular study. In order to achieve this, we have
structured the property editors in the most logical manner for entering data for different types of analysis
or design.
ETAPs one-line diagram supports a number of features to assist you in
constructing networks of varying complexities. For example, each element can
have individually varying orientations, sizes, and display symbols (IEC or ANSI).
The one-line diagram also allows you to place multiple protective devices
between a circuit branch and a bus.
ETAP provides you with a variety of options for presenting or viewing your electrical system. These
views are called presentations. The location, size, orientation, and symbol of each element can be shown
differently in each presentation. Additionally, protective devices and relays can be displayed (visible) or
hidden (invisible) for any particular presentation. For example, one presentation can be a relay view
where all protective devices are displayed. Another presentation may show a one-line diagram with some
circuit breakers shown and the rest hidden (a layout best suited for load flow results).
Among ETAPs most powerful features are the composite network and motor elements. Composite
elements allow you to graphically nest network elements within themselves down to an arbitrary depth.
For example, a composite network can contain other composite networks, a feature that provides the
capability to construct complex electrical networks while still maintaining a clean, uncluttered diagram
that displays what you want to emphasize - yet the next level of system detail is within easy reach of your
mouse. ETAP puts the power at your fingertips.
We consider ETAP to be the foremost-integrated database for electrical systems, allowing you to have
multiple presentations of a system for different analysis or design purposes.
1-2
ETAP 11.0.0 User Guide
Product Description
Specification
1.1 Specification
Modeling
Virtual reality operation

Total integration of data (electrical, logical, mechanical, and physical attributes)
Looped and radial systems
Unlimited isolated sub-systems
No system connection limitations
Multiple loading conditions
Multi-level nesting of sub-systems
Advanced sparse matrix techniques
User access control and data validation
Asynchronous calculations, allow multiple modules to calculate simultaneously
Database transitioning reduces the risk of database loss during a power outage
True 32-bit or 64-bit programming designed for Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista/7
3-phase and single-phase modeling including panels and sub-panels
Features
Five levels of automatic error checking

Dynamic help line and error messaging
Message logger to track program usage and access
Multiple user access levels
ODBC (open database connectivity) - use Microsoft Access, SQL, etc.
Manages maintenance data via info, remarks, and comment pages
Multi-user Management of Project Merge for a single project
Merge independent ETAP project files
Convert project files between databases such as Microsoft Access and SQL
Integrated 1-phase, 3-phase, and DC systems
Integrated one-line diagram and underground raceway systems
Integrated one-line diagram and device coordination/selectivity module
Common database for all studies
Simplicity in data entry
Multiple sub-systems and swing machines
User-controlled auto save and transaction
User-controlled default settings for all components
Typical data for motors, generators, transformers, reactors, governors, and exciters
Individual LTC time delays (initial and operating)
No voltage limitations
Unlimited protective and metering device connections to branches and loads
Unlimited load connections to a single bus
Any system frequency
English and metric unit systems
25 character component IDs
Raw manufacturer data entry
Individual and global load demand and diversity factors
1-3
Product Description
Specification
Temperature sensitive cable resistance for all studies

Element navigator
Lumped loading
Equipment cables for loads, eliminating requirement for terminal buses
Edited by and checked by data stamping
Date stamping of all data changes
Intelligent editors with user-defined data fields
Analysis-dependent data entry requirements
Multiple user network support
Compatible database with ETAP Real-Time for real-time monitoring, simulation, and supervisory
control
Toolbar accessible Preferences pane for preference modification while ETAP is running
One-Line Diagrams
Unlimited one-line diagram presentations

Single-phase system (2 and 3 wires)
Panel systems
Unlimited status configurations/scenarios (switching devices, motors, loads, etc.)
Multiple engineering properties (base and revision data)
Three-dimensional (3-D) database
Data Manager
Integrated Ground grid systems
Multiple loading categories (conditions) with individual percent loading
Unlimited one-line diagram nesting for sub-systems, MCCs, etc.
Simultaneous view of one-line diagram presentations
Simultaneous view of system configurations
Simultaneous view of different study results
Phase adapters to convert from three phase to mixed single phase networks
One-Line Templates
Automatic bus/node insertion
Find elements from editors or the project window
Graphical Auto Select
Grouping/ungrouping of elements
Change size, symbol, color, orientation, and alignment of elements and text, individually and
globally
Themed color schemes provide the flexibility to customize each one-line presentation independently
Symbol Library
ActiveX (programmable objects)
Graphically fault/clear fault from buses
Selectable zoom-to-fit
State-of-the-art built-in graphic user interface
Drag and drop, cut and paste, undo and redo, zooming, etc.
Built-in ETAP CAD system
XML data exchange
Export one-line diagrams to third party CAD systems via .dxf and metafile formats
Import OLE objects (text, pictures, spreadsheets, GIS maps, etc.)
Import ETAP DOS project files
1-4
Product Description
Specification
Import ASCII project files

Execute external programs
Customizable graphical display of results annotations
Customizable graphical display of nameplate data annotations
Interchangeable ANSI and IEC element symbols
Multiple sizing and rotation of element symbols
Multi-color symbols and annotations
Supports True Type fonts
Hide and show protective devices per presentation
Remote connectors for better one-line diagram layout
Graphical operation (open/close) of switching devices in edit or study modes
Dynamic continuity check shows de-energized devices as semi-transparent images and graphically
displays current system configuration
Configuration manager to easily compare open/close status for all switching devices
Display of fixed tap and load tap changer (LTC) positions on the one-line diagram
Direct device coordination from the one-line diagram
Build elementary diagrams within the same project and integrate with one-line diagram
Comprehensive printing/plotting capabilities
Individual and global section of elements, objects, and composites
Schedule manager for system components (input data)
Customizable output reports (Crystal Reports) with find functionality
Categorized output report manager for Crystal Reports
Access database output reports
Crystal Reports for library data
Comprehensive summary reports
Customizable output plots
Report status of loads and protective devices for all configurations
System dumpster with unlimited cells for storage and retrieval of deleted components
Resizable, floating/attachable toolbars for each study
Keyboard Shortcuts
Time-Current Device Coordination/Selectivity Plots (ETAP Star)
Sequence-of-Operation
Graphically adjustable device settings
Automatic detection of protection zones
Automatic selection of coordination paths
Protection and coordination zone viewer
Combine / Integrate multiple device curves
Extensive device library (verified and validated)
Auto-update short-circuit current
Time-current device coordination
Auto-coordinate devices
Integrated with one-line diagrams
Drag or calculate time differences
Multi-function (universal) relays
Built-in ARTTS hardware interface
Display of actual transient response
1-5
Product Description
Specification
Device Settings Report
Ground Grid
3-D, cross sectional, and top graphical interface views

IEEE 80 and 665 Methods
Finite element method
Rods and conductors in any 3-D direction
Rod and conductor optimization
3-D touch, step, and absolute potential plots
Graphical display of over limits
Underground Raceway Systems
Graphical user interface

Intelligent rule-based alignment and spacing tools
Automatic conduit distribution and spacing
Wizard for creating raceways based on rule-book
Utilize custom, NEC, or standard IEEE rule-based spacing
Multiple duct banks, direct buried, and external heat sources
Non-uniform placement of ducts and direct buried conduits
Transient cable temperature plotting
External heat sources
Grounded/ungrounded shielding
One-line diagram database integration
Place both AC and DC cables in raceway
Cable Pulling
3-D isometric view

Pull multiple cables
Pull different size cables
Vertical and horizontal levels
Checks for NEC requirements
Forward and reverse tension
Sidewall pressure
Transformer Sizing
Transformer MVA Sizing
Sizing based on the actual connected or operating load

Includes ANSI and IEC standard types, classes, and ratings
Considers ambient temperature, altitude, growth and load factors, etc.
Transformer Tap Optimization
IEEE CSF.116 Standard

Optimize transformers tap setting or turns ratio
Considers transformers primary and secondary side cables
Considers system voltage variation
1-6
Product Description
Specification
Plot generator Mvar output vs. system voltage
Motor Parameter Estimation
Estimate dynamic parameters of induction machines

Include parameter variations due to speed and/or deep-bar effects
Requires most readily-available characteristics published by MFRs
Calculate input parameters using estimated results and report deviations
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)
Utilize any database for which an ODBC driver exists (Microsoft Access and SQL Server)
Access the database from third party database managers
Integrate other project data into the same database
3D-Database
Within each project, ETAP provides three major system components. These system components are
organized in an orthogonal fashion (independent from each other) to provide you with the ultimate power
and flexibility when developing ETAP projects.
Graphical display of one-line diagrams (presentation)

Engineering properties (data revisions)
Operating status (configuration status)
Convert to EMF, WMF, and DXF Files

Export ETAP one-line diagrams to Enhanced MetaFiles (EMF), Windows MetaFiles (WMF), and
AutoCAD DXF files. These files can be imported into AutoCAD, Microsoft Word, etc.
Printing/Plotting of One-Line Diagram

The following options are available for each presentation including composite motors and composite
networks:
Print options
Printer setup
Zoom level for print size
Print coordinates and scrolling
Customizable print preview
Batch printing
OLE Client
OLE is a program-integration technology used to share information between programs. Many Windows
applications including Microsoft Office are OLE capable. Within ETAP, you can dynamically embed
OLE objects such as bitmaps, text, spreadsheets, tables, and metafiles directly into your one-line
diagrams.
1-7
Product Description
Specification
Active Error Viewer

ETAP provides five levels of error checking. The active error viewer appears when you attempt to run a
study with missing or inappropriate data. Double-click on each individual error message to locate and
open the component editor associated with the cause of the error message.
Alert View
ETAP displays this view to summarize possible problems with the electrical system including overloads,
under/over voltage bus conditions, stressed devices, etc.
Application Message Logging

Track ETAP usage and access by using the application message logger. It keeps track of who opens a
project, which level of access they have, and how long they were in the project.
Crystal Reports
Crystal Reports are full-color, printable reports for a variety of ETAP analyses. Each Crystal Report is
pre-configured for commonly requested output formats. The Crystal Reports browser/printer is available
within ETAP. Users can create and modify existing Crystal Reports using a Crystal Reports editor.
Crystal Reports can be exported to many other popular formats like MS-Word, Adobe PDF, MS-Excel,
etc. without any loss of information and formatting.
Output Report Manager

Provides more than 250 Crystal Reports for different studies including the following subsections:
Complete report
Input data
Results
Summary reports
Customizable subsections
Schedule Report Manager

When using Crystal Reports, it can provide different schedules such as bus, branch, load, and cable with
the following options:
Base and revision data

Energized/de-energized elements
Elements in the dumpster
Annotation Display Options

With independent display options for each ETAP mode (Edit, Load Flow, Short-Circuit, etc.), you can
display certain types of information in one mode and other types of information when in another mode.
Display ID, rating, kV, ampacity, and impedance of elements

Display Delta-Y connection and tap setting of transformers
Display winding connection of generators and motors
Display conductor size, type, and length of cables
User-selectable fonts for different groups of annotations (size, bold, font type, etc.)
Set default positions of annotations for each element
Independently rotate each annotation
Option to display different sets of study results including units (A, kW+jkVar, kVA, etc.)
1-8
Product Description
Specification
AC Elements, One-Line Diagram
Bus/node
Transformer, 2-winding
Transformer, 3-winding
Cable
Transmission line
Bus Duct
Reactor, current-limiting
Impedance
Power grid (utility system)
Synchronous generator
Wind Turbine Generator
Solar Panel (PV Array)
Induction motor/generator
Synchronous motor
Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Static load
Lumped load
Capacitor
Panel systems
Harmonic filter
Remote connector
Phase adapter
Static Var Compensator (SVC)
High voltage DC link
Fuse
Circuit breaker, high voltage
Circuit breaker, low voltage
Contactor
Reclosers
Ground Switch
Switch, single-throw
Switch, double-throw
Ground grid systems
Instrumentation Elements, One-Line Diagram
Current Transformer (CT)

Potential (voltage) Transformer (PT)
Voltmeter
Ammeter
Multi-meter
Voltage relay
Differential Relay
Reverse power relay

Frequency relay
Motor relay
Solid state trip relay
Overcurrent relay
Overload heater
In-line relay
Nested Sub-Systems, One-Line Diagram
AC composite motor
DC composite motor
Composite network
DC Elements, One-Line Diagram
Bus/node
Cable
Impedance
DC-DC converter
Battery
Motor
Lumped load
Static load
Elementary diagram
Circuit breaker
Fuse
Switch, double-throw
Macro-controlled contact
Wire
DC Elements, Control Circuit Diagram
Bus
Node
1-9
Product Description
Specification
Fuse
Circuit breaker
Push button
Contact
Form C contact
Impedance
General load
Light
Control relay
Solenoid
UPS
VFD
Duct bank raceway

Direct buried raceway
Conduit (duct bank)
Location (direct buried)
Triangular shaped grid

Rods
Conductors
AC-DC Elements, One-Line Diagram
Charger
Inverter
Elements, Underground Raceway System
Cable, one-line
Cable, equipment
Cable, UGS
External heat source
Elements, Ground Grid System
Rectangular shaped grid

T shaped grid
L shaped grid
Elements, Cable Pulling System
Cable, one-line
Cable, equipment
Cable, UGS
Cable, CP
Segments
Bends
Libraries
Cable (NEC, ICEA, and Manufacturer Published Data)

Cable Fire Coating (Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Stop (Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Wrap (Manufacturer Published Data)
Motor Nameplate
Motor Circuit Model (Single and Double Cage Motors)
Motor Characteristic Model
Motor Load Model
Fuse (Manufacturer Published Data)
Relay (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
HV Circuit Breaker (Manufacturer Published Data)
LV Circuit Breaker (Manufacturer Published Data )
Solid State Trip (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Thermal Magnetic Trip (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Electro-Mechanical Trip (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Motor Circuit Protector (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Reclosers
1-10
Product Description
Specification
Electronic Controllers
Harmonic (IEEE and Manufacturer Published Data)
Motor Overload Heater (Manufacturer Published Data)
Overload Heater (Manufacturer Published Data + Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Reliability Index Library
Interruption Cost Library
Load Profile
Pattern
Battery
Photovoltaic
Merge Data from Different Libraries
Export Library Data to MS Access File with Report Manager & Crystal Reports
50,000+ device time-current characteristic curves
Transformer Typical Data
Typical impedance data and X/R ratio based on transformer BIL level, MVA, and kV rating
Base Modules
ICEA P-55-440 Cable Tray Ampacity Calculator (Stolpe Method)

General power calculator
Transmission line constants
Transformer LTCs/regulator setting calculator
Motor nameplate data calculator
Motor inertia calculator
Generator nameplate data calculator
Power grid short-circuit data calculator
Cable Sizing
Cable Ampacity
Detailed equipment reports for buses, breakers, & loads
Device libraries
Load Flow Analysis
Newton-Raphson, fast decoupled, and accelerated Gauss Seidel

New double-precision Newton-Raphson Method with current injection
Advanced solution techniques for fast convergence
Voltage drop calculations
Auto-Run load flow based on system changes
Load forecasting
New alert view to display critical and marginal limit violations
Bus/transformer/cable overload warning
Single phase load flow display
Option to select any loading category
Global and individual bus diversity factors
Individual demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare operating conditions
Option to update the database from load flow solutions
1-11
Product Description
Specification
Lumped loads
Phase-shifting transformer
Power factor correction
Automatically adjust transformer tap and LTC/regulator settings
Generator governor/exciter control settings
New summary output report on bus loadings and overload conditions
Multi-Report Result Analyzer
Load Analyzer
Panel and Single-Phase Systems
3-phase 3-wire and 4-wire panels

1-phase 2-wire and 3-wire panels
Graphic user interface
Unlimited circuits with or without external connections
Unlimited sub-panel connections
External (graphical) load and branch connections
Load flow display
Spreadsheet load modeling
Column and standard layouts
ANSI and IEC standard panels
Extensive switching device libraries
Comprehensive circuit feeder/cable libraries
User-configurable defaults and layouts
Dynamic sub-panel and main-panel systems updates
User selectable load types (LCL, NCL, warehouse, receptacle, hospitals, etc.)
User modifiable demand and diversity factors (NEC and others)
Ten loading categories per circuit
Customizable panel system reports using Crystal Reports format
Intelligent panel calculations
Detailed panel loading summary
Customizable panel reports in MS-Excel
Short-Circuit Analysis
Complete compliance with ANSI/IEEE C37 series

Complete compliance with IEC 60056, 60282, 61363, 60781, 60909, 60947
IEEE Standard 141 and 399, UL 489
New Arc Flash Analysis module (NFPA 70E-2000) for determining incident energy and flash
protective boundary (ANSI and IEC)
Extensive manufacturer data for fuses, LV and HV breakers
Automatic crest and interrupting duty comparison
Automatic peak and breaking duty comparison
New alert view to display critical and marginal limit violations
3-phase, line-line, line-ground, and line-line-ground faults
Single Phase System Duty
cycle to 30 cycle faults including 2, 3, 5, and 8 cycle breakers
Generator Circuit Breaker IEEE Standard C37.013
1-12
Product Description
Specification
Breaking duty as a function of breaker time delay

Interrupting duty as a function of breaker cycle time
Fault impedance (Z1 and Z0)
User-definable voltage c factor for IEC analysis
Complete grounding modeling for motors, generators and transformers
CB duty calculation based on the maximum-through fault current (ANSI)
Phase-shifting transformer for ANSI unbalanced faults
Check making and breaking capabilities of protective devices against fault currents
Cable temperature adjustment
User-selected bus faulting
Report fault current contributions (IA and 3 I0) and voltage profiles (va, vb, and vc)
User-selected fault current contribution level reporting
Option to include motor delays
Option to include feeder and overload heater elements
Option to set pre-fault voltages (fixed values or load flow results)
Option to use different X/R methods and c factors
Option to consider motor contributions based on loading categories
Updates directly to device coordination
Calculation of Tie PD current
Load Terminal Short Circuit Calculation
Time-Current Device Coordination/Selectivity (Star)
Sequence-of-Operation (SQOP) with device highlighting

3 Phase, Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, Line-to-Line-to-Ground fault types
Protection and coordination zone viewer
Extensive device library (verified and validated)
Auto-update short-circuit current
Time-current device coordination
Auto-coordinate devices
Integrated with one-line diagrams
Drag or calculate time differences
Multi-function (universal) relays
Minimum short-circuit clipping (ANSI/IEC)
Short-circuit clipping for relay in ground distribution transformer
Append devices to existing Star views
User curve
Automatic curve shift for SQOP (S-TCC)
Crosshair to read out current and time
Minimum short-circuit current clipping fault arrow
Automatic color sequence for plotting curves
Fault arrow labels Min/Max clipping
Labels displayed front/behind curve
Extensive tooltips
1-13
Product Description
Specification
Relay curves extendable up to pickup

Batch printing Star views or TCCs
Export any view to metafile
Built-in ARTTS hardware interface
Display of actual transient response
Device Settings Report
Panel Main Disconnect and internal circuit plotting
Arc Flash IEEE 1584
IEEE 1584-2002 Standard

Integrates with Short-Circuit and Device Coordination
3 phase and 1 phase Arc Flash Calculations
PPE categories based on NFPA or user-defined
Automatically generate customizable arc hazard labels (including Avery)
Sequence-of-Operation viewer
Current Limiting Fuse (CLF) modeling
Incident Energy plots for Ia and Ibf
User-defined fault clearing times
Incident energy summary reports
Automatic source protective device search algorithms
NFPA 70E-2000, 2004, 2009
Use with both ANSI and IEC
Cubic box and open air
Load Terminal Faults
Arc Flash Report Analyzer
Work permits
Data sheets
Global data entry for equipment
Low voltage equipment handling
Motor Acceleration Analysis
Dynamic motor acceleration

Static motor starting
Multi-motor starting, stopping, and restarting in a single run
Group starting/acceleration of motors and loads using starting categories
Option to select any loading category for pre-start condition
Option to accelerate motors and loads by load transition (loading categories)
Option to use global or individual LTC time delays
Dynamic simulation of LTCs and regulators
Induction/synchronous motor/generator dynamic models
Single-cage, single-cage with deep-bars, double-cage, and double-cage with independent circuits
Start motors, loads, capacitors, MOV, etc.
Comprehensive MOV closing and opening operation
MOV voltage limit check during complete stroke time
Comprehensive motor starting alerts with critical and marginal settings
1-14
Product Description
Specification
Motor load modeling

Simulate voltage-boost effect at low frequency during starting
Consider various starting devices including autotransformer, resistor, reactor, and capacitor
Time-slider toolbar for continuous display of results on the one-line diagram
User-customizable plots with option to overlay
Harmonic Analysis
IEEE 519A Standard

Harmonic load flow
Harmonic resonance and frequency scan
Model harmonic sources using harmonic library
Model harmonic sources using converter firing angle and commutation reactance
Filter overloading
Filter design
User-definable frequency range (0 to 6000 Hz)
Generator and transformer saturation
Harmonic distortion limits
Total Root Mean Square Value (RMS)
Total Arithmetic Summation Value (ASUM)
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)
I*T Index (I*T)
I*TB (Balanced)
I*TR (Residual)
Customizable output reports using Crystal Reports format
Graphical display of harmonic characteristics for components
Harmonic-slider toolbar for display of harmonics on the one-line diagram
Frequency-slider toolbar for display of frequency scan results on the one-line diagram
Long line model for transmission line and cable
Transient Stability Analysis
Simulate any combination of system disturbances and operations

Induction/synchronous motor/generator dynamic models
Frequency dependent machine models
Frequency dependent network models
Extensive dynamic machine models
IEEE and selected manufacturer exciter, governor, and power system stabilizer models for generator
IEEE Standard Synchronous Motor Models (2.1 and 2.2)
Remote voltage control bus for all exciters
Synchronous motor exciter/avr system
User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM) interface for:
Exciter/AVR
Governor - turbine
1-15
Product Description
Specification
Power system stabilizer

Complete integration with User-Defined Dynamic Models for the Generator Start-Up Analysis
Unlimited time events and actions
Segment (fractional) faults for cables and transmission lines
Time-slider toolbar for continuous display of results on the one-line diagram
Automatic CB operation based on instantaneous relay settings:
Overcurrent (50)
Voltage (59/27)
Frequency (81)
Directional overcurrent (67)
Reverse power (32)
Motor overcurrent (50M)
Solid state trip (SST)
New plots for machine terminal impedance (for out-of-step relay setting)
New plots for branch flows (MW, Mvar, MVA, and Amps)
MOV starting
Motor acceleration
Motor load modeling
Loss of excitation action
Critical fault clearing time and system islanding time
Fast bus transfer studies
Impact loading and generator rejection
Combined action list and time slider for stepping through events
Configuration playback using dynamic continuity check
Voltage limits applied to MOV open and close stages
User-Defined Dynamic Modeling
Graphical model builder

Compile and test directly from the UDM builder
Control element toolbars including transfer blocks, input ports, output ports
Automatic UDM links to components
Build your own governor/turbine, exciter/AVR, and power system stabilizer control block diagrams
for Transient Stability Analysis
Lumped Load user-defined dynamic modeling
Large selection of control blocks and elementary functions
Stand-alone test model performance including isolated step response
Complete integration with Generator Start-Up analysis
Run-time compile within ETAP
Utilize models within the Transient Stability Analysis
Select user-built models within generator editors
Import and export to Simulink models
Implement system-wide operations such as load shedding, fast bus transfer, islanding, etc.
Generator Start-Up Analysis
Start generators from a cold state

Load generators prior to synchronous speed
1-16
Product Description
Specification
Connect motors and loads at any desired frequency and voltage

Generator and motor frequency dependent models
Frequency dependent models for network components
Requires Transient Stability Analysis and User-Defined Dynamic Modeling
Cable Derating Analysis
Neher-McGrath Method and IEC 287

Steady-state cable temperature analysis
Transient cable temperature analysis
Cable ampacity optimization uniform ampacity
Cable ampacity optimization uniform temperature
Cable sizing
Options to keep cable size and loading fixed
Ground Grid Systems
Analysis includes four different methods:

IEEE 80 1986, IEEE 80 2000, and IEEE 665 1995
Finite Element
Graphic user interface for conductors and rods
Graphic soil view
Copy and paste grid
Export to AutoCAD
Handles irregular configurations of any shape
Allows a two-layer soil model in addition to the surface material
Unlimited conductors and rods
Conductor segments can be oriented in any possible 3-D direction
Complete integration with one-line diagram for elements placed on the grid and short-circuit values
Calculates tolerable step and touch potentials
Calculates Touch and Step potential outside the parameter
Compares calculated step and touch potentials with tolerable limits
Optimizes number of conductors with fixed rods
Optimizes number of conductors and rods based on cost
Calculate the maximum allowable current for conductors
Compares allowable currents against fault currents
Calculates ground system resistance
Calculates ground potential rise (GPR)
User-expandable conductor library
Tabulates absolute, step, and touch potentials throughout the grid
3-D plot of grid configuration showing conductors and rods
3-D plots of absolute, step, and touch potentials
Optimal Power Flow
Comprehensive objectives and constraints

Determine all control settings
Ensure all controls are within limits
1-17
Product Description
Specification
Ensure all bus and branch constraints are met

Ensure all objectives are met
Minimize system operating cost
Maximize system performance
Minimize real and reactive power losses and circulating reactive power
Minimize real power exchange with other systems (utilities or power grids)
Maximize voltage security index
Maximize branch loading security index
Minimize series and shunt compensation
Minimize load shedding
Minimize control movements/actions
Minimize generation fuel cost
Generator fuel cost minimization
Utility electricity cost minimization
Advanced load forecasting
Transmission line flow constant
DC Load Flow and DC Short-Circuit Analysis
IEEE 308, 446, 485, 946 Standards

DC Short-Circuit
DC Load Flow
Voltage drop
DC-DC converter elements
Battery charger, inverter, and UPS elements
DC Battery Sizing and Discharge Analysis
Calculate battery discharge using an existing battery or using a battery that is automatically sized by
ETAP
Battery discharge using DC Load Flow method or load summation method
Generate plots and reports using Crystal Reports
Use different diversity and correction factors such as, temperature, aging, initial capacity, and initial
conditions
Plots for battery duty cycle, voltage, capacity, current, power and characteristics
Plots for branch flow, bus voltage, and bus loading
Use CSD options in battery discharge and sizing calculation
Control System Diagram
Drag and drop control relays, solenoid, cables, etc.

Control logic simulation (breakers, contacts, etc.)
Voltage drop calculation including inrush currents
Automatic alert for pickup and dropout voltages
Validate voltage requirements of controlling devices
Use either duty cycle or inrush and burden rating for flexible device modeling
Automatic overloading alerts
Observe detailed steps of operating sequences with event viewer
Comprehensive device library (verified and validated)
1-18
Product Description
Specification
Reliability Analysis
Analysis includes protective device effects on fault isolation and load restoration such as replacement
and alternative supply
Analysis also includes single and double contingency effects.
Radial, looped, and multiple isolated system configurations
Model each component with its own reliability characteristics
Implements the user-defined parameters and settings
Calculate load point and bus reliability indices:
Average Failure Rate []
Average Outage Duration [r]
Annual Outage Duration []
Calculate system reliability indices:
System Average Interruption Frequency Index [SAIFI]
System Average Interruption Duration Index [SAIDI]
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index [CAIDI]
Average Service Availability Index [ASAI]
Average Service Unavailability Index [ASUI]
Calculate reliability cost/worth indices for load points, buses, and system:
Expected Energy Not Supplied [EENS]
Expected Interruption Cost [ECOST]
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate [IEAR]
Rank element contributions to the cost/worth indices
Sensitivity analyses for EENS and ECOST:
Element contributions to the EENS and their rankings
Element contributions to the ECOST and their rankings
Unbalanced Load Flow
Unbalanced power flow

Phase and sequence voltage and current
Demand load and voltage drop
Transmission line coupling
Power factor correction
Automatic device evaluation
Automatic temperature correction
Real and reactive power losses
Transmission Line Sag, Tension, and Ampacity
Overhead line parameters and coupling

Sag/tension vs. temperature
Conductor ampacity vs. temperature
Physical parameter to impedance calculator
Multiple spans between dead-end structures
Level spans of unequal length
Solve spans of unequal length on different horizontal planes
Include effects of wind, temperature, and k factor
1-19
Product Description
Specification
High Voltage DC Systems
Detailed converter modeling

Composite AC/DC inverter/AC systems
Combined transformer model
Automatic harmonic spectrum calculation
Built-in control schemes
Easy-to-use dynamic modes
Optimal Capacitor Placement
Calculate most cost-effective installation locations

Calculate best bank size
Generate reports and plots of capacitor operating profit
Voltage support and power factor correction
Handle unlimited network configurations
Use only user selected installation locations
Constrain maximum capacitors installed at a location to user specified quantity
Utilize individual and global constraints
GIS Interface (ESRI ArcGIS)
Database mapping via a graphic user interface

Display unlimited GIS presentations
Perform add, modify, or delete actions
View modifications and accept/reject actions
Use map tools zoom in/out/extent, pan, etc.
Control of analysis results displayed on GIS map
Map attributes of GIS to ETAP elements
Synchronize GIS data to ETAP projects
Consistency checks during synchronization
Substitute missing information with ETAP data
Electrical Data Processing Program (e-DPP)
Simplify/standardize data entry process

Create data sheet and schedule templates
Auto-generate data sheets and schedules
Standard/user designed form sheets
Unlimited project size
ETAP e-DPP Interface

Map attributes of e-DPP to ETAP elements
Synchronize e-DPP data to ETAP projects
Consistency checks during synchronization
1-20
Product Description
Specification
ETAP - Excel Interface
Import from Excel spreadsheet with free style format of input data
Map attributes of Excel to ETAP elements
Customize logic for data dictionary
Add customized captions and headers to the spreadsheet
SmartPlant Electrical Interface (Intergraph SPEL)

View modifications and accept/reject actions via graphic user interface
Map attributes of SPEL to ETAP elements
Synchronize SPEL data to ETAP projects
Map attributes of ETAP to SPEL elements
Synchronize ETAP data to SPEL projects
Data consistency checks during synchronization
Data range checking
Library data addition
Typical data substitution for missing parameters
Log all mapping actions
Integrate with ETAP projects
Real-Time Advanced Monitoring
Continuous real-time monitoring

Thin client monitoring
Customizable Web-based interface and technology
On demand data retrieval
State estimator and load distributor
Data reconciliation and consistency check
Bad data detection and correction
Alarm management and processing
Energy cost monitoring
Multi-console with multi-screen monitoring
Graphical monitoring via ETAP one-line diagram
Visual monitoring via Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
Alarm annunciation with graphical interface
Alert of equipment out-of-range violations, de-energized, etc.
Real-Time Trending of electrical & non-electrical parameters
Pseudo measurements (override measured data)
OPC interface layer
Message logging
User-definable scan rates
User-access levels
Online control
1-21
Product Description
Specification
Real-Time Event Playback
Replay archived data at different speeds

Improve operator knowledge
Improve system operation
Investigate cause and effect
Explore alternative actions
Replay "what if" scenarios
Real-Time Energy Management System (EMS)
Shared decision making process

Generator Controller
Load Frequency Control
Chain of logic controls and action validations
Automatic steady-state optimization control
Energy cost assessment
Online control and automation
Generator Load Sharing
Demand Side Management
Intelligent generation control & load distribution
Autocontrol overload, overvoltage, undervoltage, etc.
Autocontrol LTCs, circuit breakers, relays, valves, etc.
Generation averaging with cost constraints
Minimize MW & Mvar losses
Peak shaving
Minimize power factor penalties
Intelligent inhibitive & permissive controls
Optimize spin reserve
Maximize voltage security index
Supervisory & advisory control
User-friendly logics & macros
Real-Time Intelligent Load Shedding
Optimize load preservation

Reduce downtime for critical loads
Redundancy with backup contingencies
Simulate various disturbances and display the results
Simulate and test ILS recommendations
Automatic generation of Transient Stability cases
Robust calculation methods
Response to mechanical & electrical disturbances
Display required minimum MW & selected loads
Trigger & time dependent load shedding
User-definable control logics & macros
Neural network knowledge base
User-definable system triggers
Operator friendly graphical interface
1-22
Product Description
Specification
Display operating & recommended spin reserve MW

Log & view ILS recommended load shedding
Log & view system load shedding actions
Unlimited load shedding schedules
User-defined load priority & groups
Link to annunciation systems (pagers, etc.)
Generate electrical and non-electrical output tags
Post updating load shedding report in XML to a web URL
Wind Turbine Generator (WTG)
Model wind turbine generators individually or in unlimited groups

Model detailed turbine and controller characteristics for dynamic stability analysis
Calculate MW and Mvar generation based on wind speed and turbine characteristics
Create multiple generation categories for predictive what if studies
Define the turbine model manually or based on a library
Define the wind model manually or based on a library
Run a one instance or continuous steady-state calculation in analysis mode
Perform individual or zone based actions in stability analysis
Photovoltaic Array
Performance adjustment coefficients

Solar farm modeling
Solar irradiance based on location & time
AC & DC system analysis
Inverter dynamic modeling & operation modes
Maximum Peak Power Tracking (MPPT)
Extensive Manufacturer/Model library
P-V & I-V curves
1-23
Product Description
Capabilities
1.2 Capabilities
Elements
Buses (License Dependent)
Load Terminal Nodes
Branches
Equipment/Feeder Cables
Transformers with Tap Setting
Motors, Loads, MOVs, Capacitors, Filters, etc.
Nested Composite Networks
Nested Composite Motors
Unlimited *
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Presentations/Configurations/Data Revisions
One-Line Diagram
Underground Raceway System
Control System Diagrams
Ground Grid Diagrams
Time-Current Characteristic Plots
Geographical Presentations (GIS Interface)
Configuration Status
Data Revisions (Base and Revision Data)
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Loading Categories
Each Motor, MOV, Load, etc.
10
Generation Categories
Each Generator and Power Grids
10
Short-Circuit Program (AC and DC)

Faulted Buses
Unlimited
Motor Starting Program

Motors Started Simultaneously
Starting Categories
Time Events
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Transient Stability Program

Dynamically Modeled Machines
Time Events
Unlimited
Unlimited
DC System
Duty Cycle Categories
Libraries
Headers and Records
Unlimited
1-24
Product Description
ODBC
1.3 ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)

ETAP organizes and accesses its database using the latest industry standard - Microsoft ODBC (Open
Database Connectivity). This allows ETAP to use any database for which an ODBC driver is available.
ODBC drivers are readily available for Microsoft Access and Microsoft SQL Server, among others.
Thus, data can be integrated into the ETAP database using a commercially available DBMS (Database
Management System).
ODBC is the database connectivity component of Microsoft Windows Open Services Architecture
(WOSA) and is based on a Call Level Interface specification, which was developed by a consortium of
over 40 companies (members of the SQL Access Group and others). ODBC provides a single system
level interface for connecting front-end applications (like ETAP) with back-end services (such as
DBMS).
ETAP does not access the various different databases through each databases native protocol or
Application Program Interface (API). Instead, ETAP accesses all database activities through ODBC API.
Database vendors provide the execution components for ODBC (ODBC drivers), allowing ETAP to
directly communicate with many DBMS.
Residing between ETAP and the DBMS is the ODBC Driver Manager. The ODBC Driver Manager
allows you to configure various data sources (databases or database descriptions) for ETAP (or other
applications) to allow exchange data. This configuration provides several benefits to you, the ETAP
user. It allows you to work with any of several DBMS, those which you may already be familiar with or
are already use in your facility. Additionally, you may use your existing DBMS to interrogate or browse
the database of an ETAP project.
ODBC enables you to access your ETAP databases by means of third party software such as Microsoft
Access. This allows you to manage your data and provides a simple method of transferring the data from
ETAP into other media. You may also insert additional fields (along with values provided by ETAP) into
the ETAP database tables. Certain limitations seen by various third party programs, such as Microsoft
Access, may exist. For example, Microsoft Access only allows 256 columns per table. Inserting further
columns may cause conflicts. Integration of the ETAP database at this level provides you with enhanced
opportunities to integrate ETAP, and its engineering analysis capabilities, into other programming or
database systems that possess additional functionality, which you may already employ.
The ETAP database tables can be added to an existing database in a future release of ETAP. For
example, you will be able to integrate ETAP into your electrical project database.
This release of ETAP has been tested with Microsoft Access and Microsoft SQL Server DBMS.
Additionally, ETAP provides all database components you require, allowing you to directly construct and
edit Microsoft Access databases so that they may be used with ETAP.
1-25
Product Description
File Structure
1.4 File Structure

Project Database
When you construct an ETAP project it builds a new database, which contains all required ETAP tables.
In addition to the actual DBMS database constructed (e.g., PROJECTNAME.MDB for Microsoft
Access), ETAP creates a project control file named PROJECTNAME.OTI. The project control file is an
OTI-proprietary file, which contains relevant project control information, including all user information.
Each ETAP project creates two basic files for Microsoft Access:
PROJECTNAME.OTI
PROJECTNAME.MDB
In addition, there may be other files associated with your project:
PROJECTNAME.LDB
PROJECTNAME.PSO
PROJECTNAME.GRD
PROJECTNAME.CPX
Present only when using early versions of Microsoft Access (pre-8.0 or

Office 97) or while the project is opened via A Microsoft Access or ETAP
Present when you have placed OLE objects in your ETAP Project
Present when a Ground Grid System has been created
Present when a Cable Pulling System has been created
Note: The .MDB and .LDB extensions will be different if you are using SQL Server.
An ETAP project can be copied and renamed outside of ETAP if it does not require a password. To do
this, make copies of all four files (if your project has created them): *.OTI, *.MDB, *.LDB, *.PSO. Then
rename all four files to the new name. The first time this new project is opened, ETAP will update the
internal name of the project to its new name. The best way to copy a project file is within ETAP.
WARNING: If you delete any of these files after ETAP has created them, you may not be able to open
and retrieve your project database.
A bus property table for the Microsoft Access database is shown below. In this table, the first row
represents the bus default properties (IID=32). The next four rows represent the four buses that exist in
this project.
1-26
Product Description
File Structure
A Bus Table as seen from Microsoft Access

ETAP copies a pre-built database with default values for Microsoft Access when you create a new
project file. ETAP uses a template database named DEFAULTE.MDB for the English unit system and
DEFAULTM.MDB for the Metric unit system. In contrast, ETAP executes a series of SQL statements
that inserts and populates all required tables when you are using SQL Server.
Modifying the ETAP Database

When viewing the ETAP database via a DBMS (such as Microsoft Access), it is very important that
certain fields in the database are not changed. General rules for modifying the ETAP project database are
given below:
You cannot change any database field labeled IID, Revision, Issue, ID (Name), or any field, which
contains Check, Alter, or Rev as part of its name.
NEVER alter any field whose type is BLOB (binary large object), Stream, or OLE object. Modifying
any of these fields may invalidate your database and cause you to lose the valuable time spent
constructing the database.
You may change the engineering data and comments of elements in the database. However, many
engineering data fields are related because of the engineering logic built into ETAP editors. For
example, the motor fields HP, FLA, PF, EFF, and kVA are all related. Changing only one of these
fields may cause problems in ETAPs editors because it calculates some fields based on values in
other fields.
You cannot add or delete records in any table created by Microsoft Access or SQL Server.
Records with an IID equal to 32 contain the default values for that element. You should change these
default values directly from ETAP and not from the third party software.
1-27
Product Description
File Structure
Operation Technology, Inc. cannot guarantee the repair of a database if you have made modifications in
some of the above-mentioned fields and problems occur.
Inserting Additional Columns into the ETAP Database

General guidelines for inserting additional columns/fields into the ETAP project database are given
below:
Construct the database using ETAP.

Add all system elements using ETAPs graphical one-line diagram and underground raceway system
design tools. ETAP internally allocates the correct database identifiers (IIDs) for all components.
IIDs CANNOT be changed or allocated by the user.
Add any new column you may want to embed in ETAPs tables. ETAP will NOT directly utilize the
columns nor assign default values to them. ETAP will not remove the additional columns.
Adding Elements and Data to a ETAP Project Database

This section describes how to modify data for existing elements in an ETAP project file or to transfer
data from a third party software such as Microsoft Access, Excel, etc.
Open an ETAP project file or create a new one.

Add (drag and drop) the new elements (buses, transformers, motors, etc.) graphically to the one-line
diagram.
Save your ETAP project and exit ETAP.
Open your ETAP database from the third party software. For example, with Microsoft Access,
projectname.mdb (where project name is the name of your project file).
For each existing field in ETAP, you can copy the contents of that field from your existing database
into the appropriate field of the ETAP record. This can be accomplished by copying and pasting
individual fields or columns. For large databases, SQL commands can be used to do this
programmatically.
Save your project database while inside the third party software.
Start ETAP; load your project and check the changed data.
These precautions must be adhered to while conducting this procedure:

The structure of your database and the ETAP database do not need to match. However, corresponding
fields must be of the same type. ETAP stores data in one of three types of fields: double, character, or
OLE Stream [BLOB]. All numerical data (including integer, float, or double) are stored in double fields.
Textual data are stored in character fields. This restriction is due to limitations imposed by some
databases that ETAP must support through ODBC.
ETAP sometimes splits an equipment record across two or more tables. The table names of these records
are related and easily identified. For example, static loads appear in two tables named StaticLoad and
StaticLoadH1. The records in the StaticLoad and StaticLoadH1 tables are associated by the element IID
and ID (name) fields.
Do not modify the contents of tables whose names are suffixed with "_R". These tables are used for
revisions and, therefore, their contents should not be altered.
1-28
Product Description
Libraries
1.5 Libraries
ETAP libraries use Microsofts compound storage file structure (binary format). The contents of these
files may be viewed using any DOC file viewer (DOC files, in this context, refer to compound storage
files, not Microsoft Word.DOC files). DOC file viewers are intended to allow you to view, but not alter
the libraries in any way other than through ETAP.
ETAP library files (or portions thereof) may be exported. (Refer to the Engineering Libraries section for
details on how to do this.)
Example of an ETAP library structure:
1-29
Product Description
Help
1.6 Help
The complete contents of this User Guide are included in the online Help file. There are several methods
for displaying Help contents in the ETAP program.
Help Search
Help for all Editors
Help Line
Function Key <F1> Help
Help from the Project Toolbar
Help Search
Click on Help on the ETAP menu bar to conduct a Help search by using the Index or by doing a word
search. The Help Search Editor contains Contents, Index, and Search pages. The Contents page
allows you to browse the Help file chapter-by-chapter, just as in the ETAP User Guide.
From the Index page you can view the Help index and display the contents of any item listed. To
facilitate your search, type in the first few letters of the word or subject you are looking for. The index
listing highlights the index item closest to what you have entered.
The Search page enables you to look for words and phrases in the Help Topics instead of searching for
information by category. Use this page to type or select the word(s) to define your search.
1-30
Product Description
Help
Help for Editors

Help buttons are provided for all editors. Click on the Help button to display the description for all pages
of the selected editor.
Help Line
Help lines for all entry fields are available in ETAP. To view the Help line, click in any entry field. Its
description will be displayed at the bottom of your screen. For example, this image has the Generator
Saturation Factor field selected.
1-31
Product Description
Help
Function Key <F1> Help

Press <F1> to display Help in the currently active window. For example, open the Bus Editor and select
the Load page, then press <F1>. The Load page Help screen will be displayed.
Help on the Project Toolbar

Click on the Help button located on the Project toolbar to display Help screens. The Help button is
indicated by a question mark. Click once on the Help button. A question mark (?) will appear beside the
cursor. Move the cursor to any item that you need more information about, and then click again. The
Help screen for that item will be displayed.
1-32
Product Description
Backup Projects
1.7 Automatic Backup of ETAP Projects

In order to maximize protection of the ETAP projects and prevent loss of data, ETAP is enhanced to
maintain backup copies of the project files. Backup files are created when any of the following actions
are performed:
Conversion from a previous version of ETAP

Opening of a project
Saving of a project
Backup During Conversion

When you open a project that was created with a previous version of ETAP, the program automatically
creates a backup of the project. During this process, the following message is displayed:
When you click on Yes, the program automatically creates a backup of the project, and then performs the
conversion. The backup copy of the project is created inside a directory named BACKUP, which is a
subdirectory of the project directory.
1-33
Product Description
Backup Projects
The backup project name is the project name with the version number of the original file appended. For
instance, if you are converting a project from ETAP 4.0.4 named EXAMPLE, then the backup file is
named: EXAMPLE-v404 as seen on the image below:
Note that only the ETAP project files are backed up (*.OTI, *.MDB, *.PSO, *.GRD, and *.CPX).
Output report files must be backed up manually.
During the backup process, ETAP logs the files that are backed up in the message log.
Backup During Opening

When you open a project file, ETAP automatically creates a backup of your project. This is saved in the
backup directory as ProjectName~ as seen on the image below. If the project ProjectName~ already
exists, then ETAP overwrites the previous version with the latest backup.
This feature allows you to keep a backup copy of your project every time you open the project.
When opening a LocalSQL ETAP project, ETAP automatically creates a backup of the SQL database in
the directory LocalSQL/Backups and gives the name of the project ProjectName~ followed by the
extension *.bak. This is a standard SQL Database backup file.
Backup During Saving

When you save your project, ETAP creates a backup copy of the project files in the backup directory.
The backup copy is named ProjectName~~ as seen on the image below.
These project files are temporary. Every time you save the project, ETAP overwrites the files, allowing
you to keep a previously saved project. However, when you decide to close the project, ETAP clears the
temporary backup whether you save the project or not.
In the case that ETAP is shutdown abnormally, the temporary backup files will not be cleared; therefore,
you will have the last saved copy of your project. In addition, the backup copy of the project created
when you first opened the project is also available.
1-34
Product Description
Backup Projects
Disabling/Enabling Backup Function

By default, ETAP is set up to create and update backup files during the opening of the project and before
every save. To disable the backup feature, go to Options (Preferences) under the Project Database section
and across from the Automatically Create Project Backup and change True to False. When this entry is
set to False, ETAP does not create backup files of the current version. However, it does create backup
files when converting from a previous version.
Opening Microsoft Access Backup Files

Backup projects are opened the same as any ETAP project. However, when you open a backup project, a
backup directory is created within the backup directory. The Backup function operates inside the backup
file, and the backup operates until the limit of 128 characters is reached.
Opening LocalSQL Backup Files

LocalSQL backup files are stored at *.bak files in the LocalSQL/Backup directory of the OTI project.
When you open a project that was created with a previous version of ETAP, the program creates a
backup of the project. You may restore from one of those backup database files at any time.
Close ETAP and launch the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio and login with your credentials.
Right-click on the database you wish to restore and click Tasks->Restore->Database...
1-35
Product Description
Backup Projects
Select From Device and locate the *.bak file you wish to restore from and click OK.
Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio will notify you when the restore is complete.
You may now launch ETAP and open the project and the state of the database will be that of the restore
file.
1-36
Chapter 2
Setup
This chapter describes how to install ETAP for stand-alone systems and network licenses. It contains the
following sections:
System Requirements for ETAP includes minimum and recommended settings.
ETAP installation provides a step-by-step procedure for installing ETAP and the License Manager.
ETAP User Guide installation provides a step-by-step procedure for installing ETAP User Guide.
ODBC Configuration provides detailed instructions on the successful installation of SQL Server.
SQL server requires an advanced knowledge of Windows networking, application installation, and a
licensed copy of SQL Server.
Note: ETAP 11 no longer supports Oracle Database.
ETAP Startup illustrates how to start the program after successful installation.
ETAP Licensing describes security hardware keys and different ETAP licensing configurations,
where they are applied, how they work, and which operating systems are required.
License Manager Installation describes the installation of the ETAP License Manager for network
licensing of ETAP.
License Manager Verification shows how to verify the ETAP License Manager installation.
Installation Maintenance (Uninstall) describes how to remove or modify the currently installed
version of ETAP.
User Guide Removal describes how to uninstall the ETAP User Guide.
License Manager Removal describes how to uninstall the ETAP License Manager.
System Optimization describes the computer hardware, virtual memory file size, and ODBC DSN
buffer size requirements to increase the speed of ETAP operation.
2-1
Setup
System Requirements
2.1 System Requirements

2.1.1 Operating System (32-bit or 64-bit)
Microsoft Windows 7 (Home Premium, Professional, Ultimate) (Service Pack 1)

Microsoft Windows Vista (Home Premium, Business, Enterprise) (Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Windows XP (Service Pack 3) Professional or Home Edition
Microsoft Server 2003 (Service Pack 2), Microsoft Server 2003 R2 (Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Server 2008, Microsoft Server 2008 R2
2.1.2 Other Software Requirements
Internet Explorer 5.01 or higher (or minimum version level as specified by the Operating System)
Microsoft .NET Framework v3.5 (Service Pack 1)
Microsoft SQL Server CE 3.5 (Service Pack 1)
2.1.3 PC Configuration Requirements
USB port (if stand-alone licensing required)

Ethernet port w/network access (if network licensing required)
DVD Drive
10 to 80 GB hard disk space (based on project size, number of buses)
19" monitors recommended (dual monitors highly recommended)
Recommended display resolution - 1280x1024
2.1.4 Recommended Hardware Requirements

100 Bus Projects
Intel Dual/Quad core 2.0 GHz or better (or equivalent)

2 GB of RAM
500 Bus Projects
Intel Dual/Quad core 2.0 GHz or better (or equivalent)

4 GB of RAM
1,000 Bus Projects
Intel Dual/Quad core 3.0 GHz with Hyper-Threading, or better, with high speed bus (or
equivalent)
8 GB of RAM (high-speed)
64-bit Operating System
10000 Bus Projects and Higher
Intel Dual/Quad core 3.0 GHz with Hyper-Threading, or better, with high speed system bus (or
equivalent)
12 GB RAM - (high-speed)
64-bit Operating System
2-2
Setup
ETAP 11.0 Installation
2.2 ETAP Installation

This section describes the installation procedure for Windows XP/Vista/Windows 7 and Windows Server
2003/2008, of ETAP 11.0.0 using a Microsoft Access, SQL Server, or localSQL database. ETAP
provides all the necessary tools to build and maintain the Microsoft Access databases used for your ETAP
projects. Other database formats such as Microsoft SQL Server require a separate license from the
appropriate software developer/distributor.
2.2.1 Uninstalling Previous Versions of ETAP

The ETAP 11.0.0 installation can coexist with earlier releases of ETAP and it is not necessary to remove
older versions of ETAP to run the latest version.
If you would like to uninstall earlier versions of ETAP go to the Control Panel and select Add or Remove
Programs. Then select and uninstall any earlier ETAP installations. Any user-created files, as well as the
ETAPS.INI file and the ETAPLIBX.LIB file (where X is 4, 5, 6, and 7 depending on the version) will not
be removed by the uninstall procedure.
ETAP Setup uses the uninstaller of the previous versions to uninstall them.
2-3
Setup
2.2.2 Installing ETAP

The installation program installs ETAP and all of its components including libraries, example and help
files. It also installs the ETAP License Manager since all stand-alone and network keys use this service to
provide authorization for ETAP 11.0.0.
In this installation procedure, your DVD drive is designated as the D: drive. If this is not the case, replace
the letter D with the correct designation of your DVD drive.
The same installation procedure is used to install ETAP regardless of the licensing method (stand-alone
system or network).
1. To install ETAP, you must have administrative access to your computer.
For Windows Vista Operating Systems, in addition to the administrative access, we recommend to
turn the User Account Control (UAC) off during this installation. You can do so by going to the
Control Panel\User Accounts and Family Safety\User Accounts\Turn User Account Control ON or
OFF and uncheck the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer option. The
Firewall must be turned off as well.
2. Close all applications and insert the ETAP DVD into your DVD drive.
3. For Windows Vista Operation Systems, the installer will start up and present the following screen.
Select the Run ETAPINSTALLER.exe option.
4. The ETAP Installer Program will then appear.

In the Installations section, select the ETAP 11.0.0 option to install ETAP and the License Manager
or select the ETAP License Manager option to install the License Manager only.
For the Stand-Alone licenses ETAP 11.0.0 and ETAP key reside on the same PC.
2-4
Setup
For the Network licenses ETAP 11.0.0 shall be installed on the client machines and the ETAP
License Manager shall be installed on a PC designated as the License Manager Server. In this
configuration the ETAP key will be located at the License Manager Server.
5. ETAP 11.0.0 requires installation of Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5, SP1, and Microsoft SQL
Server CE 3.5 (Service Pack 1). If these installations are not available on your operating system,
ETAP proceeds with installing them. If prompted to restart the machine during the installation of
these programs, select to restart the machine later.
2-5
Setup
6. Click Next on the Welcome screen to continue.
7. The installation and use of ETAP is governed by the terms and conditions of the ETAP License Grant
and Agreement. These terms must be accepted before the installation can continue. Click Next.
2-6
Setup
8. The Information screen displays hardware and software requirements as well as other useful
information. Click Next to continue with the installation.
9. For Stand-Alone licenses, select "Stand-Alone Key" and insert the ETAP Security Key in the same
computer. With this option, ETAP and the ETAP License Manager will be automatically installed on
your computer.
For Network licenses, select "Network Key" to install ETAP on the client computer. Then install the
"ETAP License Manager" on a computer designated as the ETAP License Manager Server. In this
configuration, the ETAP Security Key must be located at the ETAP License Manager Server.
2-7
Setup
10. By default, the output reports are created in English. Select each box to create output reports in
different languages.
Verify the correct language package settings are installed with an English Operating System to
properly view the translated output reports. The settings for each operating system are provided
below:
Operating System
Windows XP Professional
Vista Enterprise
Vista Ultimate
Win7 Ultimate & Enterprise
Language Package Settings

Install the multi language user interface (MUI)
1. Control Panel/ Regional and Language Options
2. Browse to the language package you want to use
1. Control Panel/Windows Update/ Restore hidden Updates/
Select the language
1. Control Panel/Windows Update/ Restore hidden Updates/
Select the language
Note: The operating systems listed above are required to properly view Japanese and Chinese Output
Reports with an English operating system.
For more information on Windows Language Package Settings, view Microsoft Technical Support for
Language Package Settings.
2-8
Setup
11. Reports created in previous versions of ETAP were created in a different format. If this option is not
selected, output reports created in previous versions will not display. The user must re-run each study
in ETAP 11.0.0 to activate any output reports created in an earlier version of ETAP. Note that the
output report formats installed include formats from ETAP 5.0 and above.
12. Setup requires the name of a destination folder on your hard drive where you would like the ETAP
application to be installed. The default destination folder is C:\ETAP 1100. To install the program in
a different location, click Browse and select or type a new destination folder. Click Next.
2-9
Setup
13. The next screen provides the opportunity to verify the setup information. If the setup information is
correct, click Next to start copying files.
The following is an example of typical folders created by ETAP:
2-10
Setup
14. The installation program then continues with installing the License Manager. You will see several
messages stating that the License Manager is being installed followed by a License Manager 11.0.0
Welcome screen. Click Next to continue.
Note: If a License manager for a previous version is detected, the installer will remove it before
installing the updated License Manager.
15. The installation and use of ETAP License Manager is governed by the terms and conditions of the
ETAP License Grant and Agreement. These terms must be accepted before the installation can
continue. Click Yes.
2-11
Setup
Due to the nature of virtual machines, it is possible to replicate the ETAP License Manager in
violation of its intended number of users as per the ETAP License Grant and Agreement; therefore,
ETAP prevents the operation of the License Manager on a virtual machine.
16. Remove the ETAP security key and disable any Antivirus Program scanning at during this installation
process.
17. A message will appear informing that the driver installation for the ETAP security key was
successfully installed. Click Ok to continue with the installation.
18. When the installation of ETAP License Manager is complete, the installer displays the ETAP 11.0.0
License Manager Installation Setup Complete screen. Click Finish to continue with the
installation.
2-12
Setup
19. The installer displays the Setup Status screen and starts copying files to your installation of ETAP.
The installer also adds an ETAP shortcut to the program folder. By default, the Setup program will
create a program folder named ETAP 1100.
Billboards will be shown during the file transfer period. These billboards highlight some of the latest
features and technologies of ETAP.
20. When the installation is complete, the installer displays the ETAP 11.0.0 Installation Complete
screen. You can check the Launch ETAP 11.0.0 option and click Finish to automatically run ETAP.
If you choose not to run ETAP automatically, leave the box unchecked.
Depending on your operation system and your system configuration, the installer might display the
ETAP 11.0.0 Installation Complete screen and ask you to restart the machine. Select to restart the
machine so that any configuration changes that were made can take effect.
2-13
Setup
2.2.3 Installing the ETAP Library File

If the installation folder chosen during the ETAP installation contains an ETAP library with the name
etaplib1100.lib, the installation program will preserve the existing ETAP library.
The installation program renames the existing ETAP library to oldetaplib1100.lib before installing the
new library etaplib1100.lib. If an oldetaplib1100.lib already exists on the target computer, the installation
program directs you to make a backup copy of the old file or move the old file into a different subfolder.
Otherwise, the installation program will overwrite the current oldetaplib1100.lib with a copy of the
existing etaplib1100.lib.
2.2.4 Registering Data Source Name

The installation program automatically sets up and registers the ODBC Data Source Names (DSNs)
otiaccess and otireport. Additional DSNs, otisql, otilocalsql, and otireportsql (required for reporting), can
be added by the user to support SQL and LocalSQL, respectively.
2.2.5 Completing the ETAP Installation

When the ETAP installation is completed, an ETAP program shortcut is automatically placed on your
desktop. The Setup program also creates an ETAP program shortcut in the Start menu under All
Programs.
2-14
Setup
User Guide Installation
2.3 ETAP User Guide Installation

The installation program also installs ETAP 11.0.0 User Guide along with other documents such as:
ETAP Product Overview, ETAP 11.0.0 New Features, ETAP Real-Time Overview, System
Requirements, Installation Guide, and ReadMe. The ETAP 11.0.0 User Guide and related documents can
be viewed through the Installer Program without having to install the User Guide. This can be done by
simply clicking on the User Guide option below the Documentation (PDF) section of the Installer
Program.
1. To install the ETAP User Guide, select the ETAP User Guide option that appears below the
Installations section of the Installer Program.
2. Click Next on the Welcome screen to continue.
2-15
Setup
3. Setup requires the name of a destination folder on your hard drive where you would like the ETAP
User Guide application to be installed. The default destination folder is C:\ETAP User Guide 1100.
To install the program in a different location, click Browse and select or type a new destination
folder. Click Next.
4. Setup displays the Setup Status of the ETAP User Guide installation process.
2-16
Setup
5. When the installation is complete, the installer displays the ETAP User Guide Installation
Complete screen. Click Finish, to complete the installation of the User Guide.
When the ETAP User Guide installation is completed, the Setup program also creates an ETAP User
Guide program shortcut in the Start menu under All Programs.
2-17
Setup
ODBC Configuration
2.4 ODBC Configuration

A System Data Source Name (DSN), versus a User DSN, gives any user logged into the computer access
to this driver. By default, the ETAP Setup program will configure and register two system DSNs
necessary to run ETAP with Microsoft Access (otiaccess and otireport). Three additional DSNs can be
setup to allow ETAP to run with SQL Server (otisql), LocalSQL (otilocalsql), and otireportsql (for
reporting).
2.4.1 SQL Server Database

SQL Server requires a custom installation with information specific to your network and the SQL Server
setup. ETAP requires you to already have SQL Server 6.5 or higher installed on your network.
1. In the Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Data Sources (ODBC) or (ODBC 32bit Administrator). Windows displays the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box.
2. Click the System DSN page, and then click the Add button.
3. Select the SQL Server entry in the Name column. Click Finish.
4. In the Name text box, enter otisql.
5. In the Description text box, type a description of this data source that you will recognize.
6. In the Server text box, type the name of the server you will be using. Consult your network
administrator or SQL Server administrator for this information.
7. Click Next twice, and then make sure the following options are selected (ETAP runs at least four
times faster if selected):
Note: The SQL Server may require some system-dependent installation procedures. Contact your
network administrator or Operation Technology, Inc. for technical assistance.
2.4.2 Local SQL Database

Local SQL is defined as any SQL Server in which the ETAP User is assigned as the Sysadmin Server
Role on the SQL Server. This allows the user to have sufficient SQL Server rights to automatically
perform actions on the SQL Server that allow the database to be added, attached, detached, and destroyed
without IT (or other) intervention.
2-18
Setup
ODBC Configuration
4. In the Name text box, enter otilocalsql
6. In the Server text box, type the name of the server you will be using.
2.4.3 SQL Reporting

In order to support Crysal Reports with SQL and Local SQL, an additional DSN must be included with
the otisql or otilocalsql dsn for projects. The same SQL Server used when setting up otisql or otilocalsql
is used for this dsn.
4. In the Name text box, enter otireportsql
6. In the Server text box, type the name of the server you will be using.
2-19
Setup
ETAP License Wizard
2.5 ETAP License Wizard

After the complete installation, launch ETAP using the ETAP shortcut on your desktop or go to the Start
menu and select All Programs, ETAP 11.0.0.
When ETAP is launched for the first time, it may generate the ETAP License Wizard. The ETAP License
Wizard allows you to setup the location of the ETAP licenses. This Wizard was introduced in ETAP
5.5.0. For previous license setups refer to their appropriate documents.
1. Upon launching ETAP, the ETAP License Wizard prompts you with the ETAP License Path
Selection Editor. In this editor the first option is automatically selected to be your computer. If
the Stand-Alone or the ETAP Network key is located on your computer, click OK to continue.
2. If the ETAP Network key is located on a server machine, then select another path option and
enter the server name or the IP address in the provided field. The five entries are designed to
easily switch between ETAP Network keys. You may have several network keys with different
configurations. ETAP keys must be installed on separate PCs. Click OK to continue.
2-20
Setup
ETAP License Wizard
Refer to section 2.8, License Manager Server, for details on installation.

ETAP Key is Found Successfully
If the installation is done properly, the ETAP License Wizard displays a message that the ETAP key is
found successfully!
Click OK.
ETAP Key is Not Found

If the ETAP license key is not found at the port that was previously specified, the ETAP License Wizard
displays a message that the ETAP key is not found or the License Manager is not ready.
ETAP License Manager Service (Etaps Lic Mgr)

In that case, verify that the License Manager is installed on the specified location and that the service is
started. You can do so by going to the Control Panel\Administrative Tools\Services. Find the Etaps Lic
Mgr entry from the listing of services. This entry should exist and the Status should show as Started.
2-21
Setup
ETAP License Wizard
If this service does not exist you must install the License Manager from the ETAP 11.0.0 DVD.
If the Etaps Lic Mgr is not started then right-click on the entry and Start it. You can also double-click on
this service and Start it.
Firewall
If the service starts but the client machine fails to receive authorization, check the server machine to
ensure that the Windows firewall is not blocking incoming traffic.
To do this, go to the server machine and select Run/Control Pane/Windows Firewall. On the General
page, note whether the Firewall is On or Off. If it is on, go to the Exceptions page and see if the License
Manager is listed and checked. If not, select the Add Port... button. Enter the Etaps Lic Mgr for the
Name and enter 6260 as the Port Number. Ensure that TCP is selected. Also check the checkbox that
requests a notification if a program is blocked and click OK. Click OK on the previous pages until you
return to the Control Panel. You may have to coordinate with your IT department to open this port.
Next, go to the client machine and select Run/Control Pane/Windows Firewall. If it is on, go to the
Exceptions page and check the checkbox that requests a notification if a program is blocked and click OK
on all pages until you return to the Control Panel. This should cause Windows to notify you if it blocks a
request from ETAP to access the License Manager.
ETAP License Manager Uses TCP/IP
To determine if you have TCP/IP installed, go to Control Panel/Network Connections.
1. It should list all network connections for your computer. Locate the appropriate connection under
LAN or High-Speed internet.
2-22
Setup
ETAP License Wizard
2. Right-click on the connection and select properties.

3. If you have TCP/IP installed, there will be an item listed and checked "Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)".
4. If you do not have TCP/IP installed, the item may be listed but NOT checked. In such case, there
is no need to continue with this procedure, since you do not have TCP/IP installed.
5. If it is checked, select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click on properties. The resulting
Properties will have a general tab. I need to know the settings on this page. Generally, most
companies use Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically.
Now that we know you have TCP/IP installed, please do the same thing (exact same procedure) on the
computer running the License Manager.
If both your computer and the License Manager computer have TCP/IP installed, do the following on the
computer running the License Manager:
1. Open a Command Prompt (Start/All Programs/Accessories/Command Prompt).
2. Type the following in the Command Prompt (without the quotes of course) "netstat -a". (This will
tell us what ports are set up on the Etaps lic mgr server).
3. You should see an entry that lists "TCP the_server_computer_name:6260 ... LISTENING" which
shows that the computer is listening for a TCP connection on port 6260. Port 6260 is the License
Manager default port.
4. Next enter the following in the Command Prompt - "ipconfig". You should see a listing which
contains the IP address of the computer. Note the address to ensure that it matches the address
that you have entered at the ETAP client computer.
Next, go to your client computer, open a Command Prompt, and enter "ping ip_address" where
ip_address is a placeholder for the IP Address that you obtained above from your License Manager
computer. The ping results should indicate the time that it took to ping the computer. If the ping is not
successful, it will print a timeout message.
You should also use ping to check address translation from your computer by entering "ping
lic_manager_computer" where lic_manager_computer is a placeholder for the computer name on which
you have installed the License Manager. If both pings pass, you can enter either the name of the License
Manager computer *or* its IP Address in the ETAP client. Both should succeed. Otherwise, make sure
that you have entered the IP address of the License Manager computer in the ETAP client License
Wizard.
ETAP Activation Code
If this is the first time you are launching ETAP 11.0.0, ETAP prompts you for an Activation Code. Enter
the 36 character Activation Code (case sensitive).
The following entries are generated in the ETAPS.INI file and the Activation Code is saved as shown
below.
[Etap PowerStation]
LicIndex=0
2-23
Setup
ETAP License Wizard

[AppVariables]
LicPath0=Your Server Name or IP Address
LicKeyCode0=Your ETAP Activation Code
When authorization is received, it generates the License Administrator dialog box. It shows the total
number of licenses and what users are connected to the License Manager Server and displays a message
that the ETAP key is found successfully.
2-24
Setup
ETAP License Wizard
The following entries are generated in the ETAPS.INI file and the Activation Code is saved as shown
below.
[Etap PowerStation]
LicIndex=1 to 5 depending on LicPath
[AppVariables]
LicPath1= to LicPath5=
LicKeyCode1= to LicKeyCode5=
The ETAP License Wizard may be launched when opening an existing ETAP project. The ETAP Logon
Editor includes an ETAP License Wizard button to launch the Wizard. The ETAP Logon Editor is the
first editor that appears when you open a project. This option may be used to get ETAP license
authorization from different locations.
2-25
Setup
ETAP License Information
2.6 ETAP License Information

To view information regarding your ETAP license, launch ETAP, go to Help on your main toolbar and
select About ETAP.
Selection of the About ETAP option opens the ETAP Enterprise dialog box. ETAP Enterprise consists of
three pages: About, Capabilities and License.
About
The About page includes the following information regarding your ETAP:
- ETAP version
- Copyright information
- OTI address and web site
- ETAP support contact information
- Sales contact information
- Licensee information
Licensee name
ETAP serial number
2-26
Setup
ETAP License Information

Number of buses
Configuration (Network/Stand-alone)
License type (Nuclear, Commercial, Advantage, Educational)
Capabilities
This page of the ETAP Enterprise lists all the available ETAP modules. Modules included in your
package will be shown in black letters. Modules not included in your packaged will be grayed out.
License
In the License page, information regarding your license usage is displayed.
Stand- Alone Licenses
For the stand-alone licenses, the port used for your hardware key and your ETAP Activation Code is
displayed. You can update the ETAP Activation Code from this page. You may need to change your
ETAP Activation Code if you have purchased new modules/capabilities or you wish to switch to another
key which has a different configuration than your current one.
The Display License Managers button allows you to view any network licenses that you have specified as
options for connection. This feature also provides information regarding the selected network license such
as the following:
Server name
Total number of licenses
Number of users connected
Connected computer name
User name
Login time
Ticket number (ETAP assigns a unique ticket number to each connection and for duration of that
connection.)
To connect to a specific network license, you must open your project and from the ETAP Logon Editor
click on ETAP License Wizard. The ETAP Logon Editor is the first editor that appears when you open a
project.
2-27
Setup
ETAP Licensing
2.7 ETAP Licensing

2.7.1 Security Hardware Keys
Starting with ETAP 11.0.0, ETAP will utilize the following type of security hardware key to license the
use of the software:
Stand-Alone Hardware Key
Network Hardware Key
Placed and resides on the back of your computer

Placed and resides on a License Manager Server
OTI will provide an ETAP key for USB ports.
ETAP-OTI 1600
The driver for the ETAP-OTI-1600 key is located in the following path:
32-bit machines:
C:\Program Files\Operation Technology Inc\ETAP License Manager 1100\haspdInst.exe
64-bit machines:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Operation Technology Inc\ETAP License Manager 1100\ haspdInst.exe
Please contact sales at sales@etap.com or 949-900-1000 for any key replacement.
Note: ETAP will no longer support the black parallel keys and the blue USB-1410 keys.
2.7.2 Stand-Alone System Version of ETAP Licensing

A stand-alone system hardware key is placed directly on the USB or parallel port of the computer that
will be running the software. Starting from ETAP 6.0.0, the ETAP License Manager will be automatically
installed for the stand-alone systems. The ETAP License Manager program and the stand-alone key
provide authorization for ETAP operation.
2.7.3 Network Version of ETAP Licensing

A network security hardware key requires a Windows XP, Professional/Vista Business/Windows 7 or
above, or Server 2003/2008 workstation or server. Place the network hardware key on the back of the
computer/server designated to license ETAP. This will be the permanent location of the key do not
remove it once it is operational.
Installation on Windows must be performed by a user account with Windows Administrative privileges.
The network installation can be done with the License Manager 11.0.0 Setup program provided on the
ETAP 11.0.0 DVD, started from the ETAP Installer program, or installed manually. Regardless of how
the network installation is done, the steps to be performed are the same.
2-28
Setup
License Manager Server
2.8 License Manager Server

For the purpose of running ETAP, the computer containing the network hardware key is called the
License Manager Server. The License Manager Server needs to be on and running to issue authorization
for client computers to run ETAP. Each computer running ETAP (Windows XP/Vista/7, Server
2003/2008) requests authorization from the License Manager Server via a LAN or WAN. If the License
Manager Server does not issue the requested authorization, ETAP will not run.
The License Manager Server computer does not need to have the ETAP program software installed.
2.8.1 ETAP License Manager

The ETAP License Manager is a Windows XP/Vista/7, Server 2003/2008 workstation/server program
that assists the network security hardware key in licensing the use of ETAP. The network hardware key
provides licensing of up to 254 simultaneous users of ETAP via a local area network (LAN) and/or a wide
area network (WAN). The ETAP License Manager manages the administration of simultaneous ETAP
users as set forth in the terms of your ETAP license agreement.
Due to the nature of virtual machines, it is possible to replicate the ETAP License Manager in violation of
its intended number of users as per the ETAP License Grant and Agreement; therefore, ETAP prevents
the operation of the License Manager on a virtual machine.
Note: Proper operation of ETAP requires the installation of the ETAP License Manager on the License
Manager Server and, during each user system ETAP installation, entering the License Manager Server
name or IP address.
To connect to a specific network license you must open your project and from the ETAP Logon Editor
click on ETAP License Wizard. The ETAP Logon Editor is the first editor that appears when you open a
project.
The network hardware key and the ETAP License Manager use minimal processor time and do not
require more than 10MB of free disk space for proper operation. Make sure the system meets the ETAP
minimum hardware requirements.
2-29
Setup
License Manager Installation
2.9 License Manager Installation

ETAP 5.0 or higher will use this method of installation. Earlier versions will use the manual installation
method described in the following section. You can also use the manual installation procedure if the
ETAP License Manager Installation program does not successfully install the ETAP License Manager.
2.9.1 Automated ETAP License Manager Installation

On the ETAP DVD, a separate Setup program is provided to install the ETAP License Manager. To
install the License Manager on a Windows XP/Vista/7, Server 2003/2008 workstation or server, do the
following:
1. Insert the ETAP DVD into the DVD drive. The installer displays ETAP Installer dialog box.
Select ETAP License Manager.
2-30
Setup
2. ETAP Setup displays the ETAP License Manager Welcome dialog box for version 11.0.0. Click
Next.
3. The ETAP License Agreement is displayed. Click Yes to accept the terms of the agreement.
2-31
Setup
Due to the nature of virtual machines, it is possible to replicate the ETAP License Manager in
violation of its intended number of users as per the ETAP License Grant and Agreement; therefore,
ETAP prevents the operation of the License Manager on a virtual machine.
4. Remove the ETAP security key and disable any Antivirus Program scanning at during this installation
process.
5. A message will appear informing that the driver installation for the ETAP security key was
successfully installed. Click Ok to continue with the installation.
6. When the installation of ETAP 7.5.1 License Manager is complete, the installer displays the ETAP
11.0.0 License Manager Installation Setup Complete screen. Click Finish to complete the
installation.
2-32
Setup
2.9.2 Installing ETAP for Network Licensing

For each client machine, install ETAP per installation instructions in section 2.2 of this document.
To run ETAP, each user must be a registered user on the License Manager Server. As a minimum, each
user must be a member of the Users group on the License Manager Server. If you use Domain
Administration as provided by the Windows server, it is sufficient to add the Domain Users group to the
License Manager Servers User Manager/Policies/User Rights/Access.
In addition, during each user system ETAP installation, proper operation of ETAP requires entering the
License Manager Server name. You can change the key selection and License Manager Server name
setting on a user system at any time after the installation.
To change the server name launch ETAP, open your project and from the Logon Editor, click on the
ETAP Key Wizard and change the Server Name.
To change your key from one model to another, insert the new key, click on the Start\All Programs\Reset
License Manager. This program configures the License Manager for the key model you have selected.
2.9.3 Updating the ETAPS.INI File

For each computer that needs permission from the License Manager Server to run ETAP, you can update
the ETAP.INI file manually to indicate the location of the License Manager Server.
ETAP License Manager Uses TCP/IP Protocol

Update the ETAPS.INI file by doing the following:
1. Using Notepad or a similar text editor, open the ETAPS.INI file in C:\ETAP 1100. If the ETAPS.INI
file is not in the application folder then ETAP will use the ETAPS.INI file in the C:\WINDOWS
folder.
2-33
Setup
2. Add the LicPath1= line In [AppVariables] section and Add LicIndex=1 in [Etap PowerStation]
section.
3. Insert the name of the License Manager Server with domain information (for example, LicPath1=
tcplm.oti.com).
4. To use an IP address instead, add the line LicPath1=, and then insert the IP address of the License
Manager Server (for example, LicPath1=10.10.10.191).
5. After the TCP Server or IP address is set, you may configure to use a specific port by appending the
port number after the LM server name separated by :, that you would like to use (for example,
LicPath1=tcplm.oti.com:2526). Furthermore, you have to verify if your target LMServer having the
same TCP Port setup. Check with your IT department before you do so.
2-34
Setup
License Manager Verification
2.10 License Manager Verification

2.10.1 Verifying ETAP License Manager Installation
1. Restart the License Manager Server system.
2. Open a Command Prompt window, type in regedit, and then Enter. Windows displays the Registry
Editor.
3. For the 1600 USB key, if the device is installed properly, you can find the following device entry
from the Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager.
4. In the Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon then the Services icon.
5. Find the Etaps Lic Mgr service, and then verify that the service status is started. If you cannot find the
Etaps Lic Mgr, you have not installed ETAPSLMT.EXE properly. The Etaps Lic Mgr Status value
should be Started or blank.
2-35
Setup
6. If the status is blank, right-click the ETAPS Lic Mgr icon, and then select Start.
2.10.2 Verifying ETAP License Manager Operation

1. In the Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon then the Event Viewer icon. The
Event Viewer window is displayed.
2. Click on the Application icon. The ETAP License Manager program logs all licensing events to the
applications log, so you should find a License Manager Application logs to view.
3. When the ETAP License Manager starts, you will see several events in the log identified as Source
Etaps LMService. The ETAP License Manager uses this source when it writes event information to
the Applications log.
2-36
Setup
4. Double-click the first ETAP License Manager event to view the Event Properties dialog box. The
message references a description similar to the following:
Etaps LMService message: 0, ETAPS License Manager starting
5. The next ETAPS LMService message indicates that ETAPSLM has detected a valid security
hardware key.
6. For the next message you should see a message indication similar to the following:
Key SN: 3087007744-345610626 Licensed to: <Your Company Name> Version: 020000 Users: 5.
(Your serial number, the licensee, version, and number of users will be specific to your network
hardware key.)
You have now verified your ETAP License Manager is correctly installed and running properly. The
latest issue of ETAP License Manager is version 11.0.0 and is intended to work with ETAP 4.7.0 to 7.5.2
versions. The earlier ETAP releases require version 5.2.3.102601 either TCP/IP version or Named piped
version depending on selected protocol by ETAP, see early ETAP version documentation for details.
You can check your version of the ETAP License Manager by viewing Properties in the file; C:\Program
Files\OperationTechnologyInc\ETAPLicenseManager1100\Etapslmt.exe or
C:\WINDOWSSYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETAPSLM.EXE if you have installed the License Manager
manually. The file version is displayed at the top of the Version sheet.
2.10.3 Network License Manager Troubleshooting

If you get the message Could Not Find the Security Key or Failed to Receive Authorization, verify that
the following statements are true:
The latest ETAP License Manager is installed.

Network hardware key is installed on the License Manager Server.
The License Manager Server is turned on.
The License Manager Server has user permissions set correctly.
LicIndex=1 and LicPath1= is in the ETAPS.INI file on the local computer and it has been modified to
include the location of the License Manager Server.
The local computer and the License Manager Server are connected to the network.
If ETAP is still not running, contact Operation Technology, Inc. technical support at:
(949) 462-0400 or support@etap.com
2-37
Setup
Installation Maintenance
2.11 Installation Maintenance

You can modify, repair, or remove your ETAP installation as required. To access these options, do the
following:
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the Add or Remove Programs icon.
2. Select ETAP 11.0.0 in the list of currently installed programs.
3. Click the Change/Remove button. ETAP Setup displays the ETAP 11.0.0 Maintenance Wizard.
Select the type of installation maintenance you want, and then click the Next button. Each maintenance
option is discussed below. Note that: both the Repair and Modify options will require that you insert the
ETAP DVD during the installation maintenance.
2.11.1 Modify
This is the default setting for the installation maintenance of ETAP. If you select this option and click
Next, ETAP Setup will display the Select Features step of the Maintenance Wizard. Use this step to
remove some of the components you installed during installation.
2-38
Setup
2.11.2 Repair
The Repair Installation Maintenance option reinstalls any program files that are missing from your
original installation. ETAP Setup displays the Setup Status step of the Maintenance Wizard while it
makes the changes.
2.11.3 Remove
This option lets you remove all ETAP files you have installed onto your computer. Select OK when asked
whether you want to remove ETAP completely.
Note: During the uninstall process you may be asked to remove files installed as shared files. Generally,
you should not remove these files to avoid disruption of other programs.
2-39
Setup
Click Finish after modification, repair, or uninstall is complete.
Note: Depending on the modifications to your ETAP installation, you may be prompted to restart your
computer for the changes to take effect.
2-40
Setup
User Guide Removal
2.12 User Guide Removal

You can remove the ETAP 11.0.0 User Guide, by following the steps below:
2. Select ETAP User Guide 11.0.0 in the list of currently installed programs.
3. Click the Uninstall/Remove button. Setup displays the ETAP User Guide 11.0.0 Setup Wizard.
4. When asked whether you want to remove the application and all of its features, click OK.
5. When the ETAP User Guide Setup Wizard displays the Uninstall Complete dialog box, click
Finish.
2-41
Setup
License Manager Removal
2.13 License Manager Removal

There may be instances when you want to remove the ETAP License Manager from your system. For
example, to install a new version of the ETAP License Manager, you need to remove the previous one
first. Use the following procedure to remove the ETAP License Manager from your Services list.
2.13.1 Removing ETAP License Manager

2. In the list of currently installed programs, select ETAP License Manager 11.0.0.
3. Click the Change/Remove button. Setup prepares the ETAP License Manager Setup Wizard.
4.
When asked whether you want to remove the application and all of its features, click OK.
Note: During the uninstall process, you may be prompted to remove the files installed as shared files.
Generally, you should not remove shared files to avoid disruption of other applications.
5. When the ETAP Setup Wizard displays the Maintenance Complete dialog box, click Finish.
2-42
Setup
License Manager Removal
2.13.2 Removing ETAP License Manager Manually

1. Logon to the computer you are using as your License Manager Server. Make sure to use an account
that has Administrator privileges in Windows.
2. Make sure that no one is currently using ETAP. Removing the ETAP License Manager may disrupt
their activities.
3. In the Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon then the Services icon. The Services
window is displayed.
4. If the Etaps Lic Mgr status is started, select Etaps Lic Mgr in the Services list and (with it
highlighted) click the Stop Service button in the toolbar. In a few moments, Etaps Lic Mgr status will
change from Started to blank.
5. Open a Command Prompt, and then go to the folder in which ETAPSLMT.EXE is installed (usually
C:\Program Files\Operation Technology Inc\ETAP License Manager 11.0.0\Etapslmt.exe).
6. In the prompt line, type Etapslmt remove and press the Enter key. You should receive the message
Etaps Lic Mgr removed.
The ETAP License Manager is now removed from your system.
2-43
Setup
System Optimization
2.14 System Optimization

If ETAP takes a long time to load or save a project file (more than several minutes), you can modify your
system settings to optimize program speed. There are several system attributes that control the speed at
which ETAP loads and processes a project database, including the following:
ODBC DSN Buffer Size
Computer CPU speed
ODBC DSN Page Timeout
Computer RAM Size
Operating System Virtual Memory File
Size
2.14.1 Computer CPU Speed

We recommend Intel Dual/Quad core or faster processors.
2.14.2 Computer RAM Size

We recommend a minimum of 2 GB of RAM. For very large network databases within ETAP, 4 GB of
RAM is recommended.
2.14.3 Operating System Virtual Memory File Size

This can be changed through the System icon in the Control Panel. Note that your Virtual Memory file is
stored on your hard disk. Therefore, if you increase the size of this file, it will use a proportional amount
of space on your hard disk. You should consult your system administrator before changing this setting.
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the
System icon. Windows displays the
System Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Advanced tab, and then click
the Settings button in the Performance
group.
Windows
displays
the
Performance Options dialog box.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Make sure you have at least 200MB of

disk space free, and then change the
Initial Size and Maximum Size to at
least 200 MB.
6. Click OK. Windows returns you to the
Performance Options dialog box.
7. Click OK, and restart your computer
when prompted. Once your computer
restarts, the virtual memory will be
changed.
4. In the Virtual Memory group, click the
Change button.
2-44
Setup
ODBC DSN Buffer Size
2.14.4 ODBC DSN Buffer Size

The Data Source Name (DSN) buffer size is the internal buffer, in kilobytes, that is used to transfer data
to and from ETAP to the associated project database. The Microsoft Access default is 2048; however,
ETAP's otiaccess and otireport drivers are defaulted to 4096. 4096 or larger should be used for all
Microsoft Access ETAP databases.
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the
Administrative Tools icon. Windows
displays the Administrative Tools
window.
2. Double-click the Data Sources (ODBC)
icon. Windows displays ODBC Data
Source Administrator dialog box.
3. Click the System DSN tab.

4. Select otiaccess, and then click the
Configure button.
Note: If the entry otiaccess is not
present, run ETAP once and it will place
it there. If otiaccess is still not present
after running ETAP, then add it in
manually.
5. Click Add. Windows displays the
ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog
box.
6. Make sure that otiaccess is the Data

Source Name, and then click the
Options button. This will expand the
ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog
box to show the advanced options. The
buffer size is defaulted to 2048.
7. Change the buffer size to 4096 and click

OK. This will return you to the ODBC
Data Source Administrator.
Note: The Data Source Name (DSN)
page Timeout specifies the period of
time, in tenths of a second that an
unused page of data remains in the
buffer before being removed. The
Microsoft Access default is 5, or 0.5
seconds. ETAP projects are optimized
for a setting of 5 when using Microsoft
Access as the project database.
8. Click OK.
2-45
Chapter 3
Overview
ETAP is the most comprehensive solution for the design, simulation, and analysis of generation,
transmission, distribution, and industrial power systems.
ETAP organizes your work on a project basis. Each project that you create provides all the necessary
tools and support for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. A project consists of an
electrical system that requires a unique set of electrical components and interconnections. In ETAP, each
project provides a set of users, user access controls, and a separate database in which its elements and
connectivity data are stored.
3-1
Overview
Introduction
Your access to an existing project file is through a special project file with an .OTI extension. The ETAP
database is stored in an ODBC compliant database file such as Microsoft Access (*.MDB). These files
work together to provide access control and storage for each project and use the project name. ETAP
places all output reports from your project into the same sub-directory where this database resides.
ETAP has been designed and developed by engineers for engineers to handle the diverse discipline of
power systems in one integrated package with multiple interface views such as AC and DC networks,
cable raceways, ground grid, GIS, panels, protective device coordination/selectivity, and AC and DC
control system diagrams.
Encompassing all these systems and views in one package allows engineers to model and analyze all
aspects of an electrical system from control system diagrams to panel systems, as well as large
transmission and distribution systems.
All interface views are completely graphical and the engineering properties of each circuit element can be
edited directly from these views. Calculation results are displayed on the interface views for your
convenience.
3-2
Overview
Introduction
Project Toolbar
Files, Printing, Cut, Copy, Paste, Pan, Zoom In and Out, Back and Forward, Undo and Redo,
Zoom Fit to Page, Text Box, Grid Lines, Theme, Continuity Circuit Check, Hyperlinks, Get
Template, Add to Template, Power Calculator, Find, and Help
Select ETAP System
Select interface views or systems
AC Elements
(Edit Toolbar)
Drag-and-drop
AC elements.
DC Elements
(Edit Toolbar)
Place DC elements
including UPS, VFD,
Charger, and Inverter.
Instruments
(Edit Toolbar)
Place PT, CT, Rel
ays, and Meters.
Base and Revision Toolbar
Data Manager
Unlimited
Revisions to save
multiple sets of
engineering
properties. View
Base & Revisions
data differences.
Presentations
Composites
Unlimited
Presentations to set
different views of
the same system.
List of Composites
in project for quick
lookup and access.
3-3
Configurations
Unlimited
Configurations to
save switching
status of
devices/loads
Overview
Introduction
Select Analysis Mode
Edit Mode: Drag-and-Drop Connect Elements

Study Mode: For example, Load Flow or Short-Circuit
Menu
Includes commands for files, printing, conversions, project standards, settings, options,
editing libraries, setting defaults, selecting annotation fonts, printing libraries, base and
revision data, setting for Real-Time Modules, etc.
Base & Revision

Toolbar
Project View
One-Line Diagram
Create new and

manipulate one-line
diagram
presentations,
underground cable
raceways, ground
grid systems,
configurations, and
study cases; access
System Dumpster,
libraries, and all
elements.
In Edit Mode
Schedule Report
Manager
Print bus, branch, and
load schedules using
Crystal Reports.
Display Options
MSG Logger
View the latest messages
related to ETAP projects.
These can be expanded or
reduced.
Nested
Composite Network
3-4
Dumpster
Can have
unlimited
cells.
Options to display
annotations of
elements on the oneline diagram for Edit
Mode
Overview
Introduction
All ETAP systems take advantage of a common database. For example, a cable not only contains data
representing its electrical properties but also contains the physical routing information to indicate the
raceways through which it is routed. A relay not only contains information pertinent to analysis like load
flow and short-circuit but also contains time current characteristic information that allows the engineer to
perform protection or coordination studies.
Trip times set in these studies are also used by transient analysis to determine the total operating time of a
breaker during a transient condition when the relay pickup value is reached. ETAP can therefore simulate
automatic relay actions based on the relay settings. This type of integration makes ETAP a true power
system simulator program.
ETAP also contains built-in libraries that are accessible from project files. New libraries can be created or
existing libraries can be modified to include custom manufacturer data.
ETAP systems and interface views can be accessed using the System toolbar.
3-5
Overview
System Toolbar
3.1 System Toolbar

The System toolbar is a convenient and efficient method of switching between ETAP systems.
Project View
Network Systems (AC or DC One-Line Diagrams)
Star Systems (Star Views)
Underground Raceway Systems (UGS)
Ground Grid Systems (GGS)
Cable Pulling Systems
ETAP Real-Time Systems (PSMS)
Geographical Information Systems (GIS Map)
Control System Diagrams (CSD)
User-defined Dynamic Model Graphical Editor (UDM)
System Dumpster
Scenario Wizard
Study Wizard
Project Wizard
When navigating from one ETAP system to another using this toolbar, ETAP will open the last accessed
presentation for the selected system. For example, if you are switching from Network Systems to Star
Systems, ETAP will check for an existing Star View. If Star Views exist, ETAP will open the last
accessed Star View and make it the active window.
If there are no existing presentations, ETAP will prompt you to create a new presentation, with the
exception of Ground Grid. The button for Ground Grid will be disabled if no presentation has been
created. See Ground Grid Systems Chapter 42 for instructions on how to create Ground Grid
presentations.
3-6
Overview
System Toolbar
3.1.1 Existing Views

If you are switching from Network Systems to Star Systems, ETAP will check for an existing Star View.
If Star Views files do exist, ETAP will open the last accessed Star View and make it the active window.
3.1.2 New Views

If you are switching from Network Systems to Cable Pulling Systems and ETAP does not find any
existing Cable Pulling Systems, it will then prompt you to create a new interface view for this system.
3-7
Overview
Project View
3.2 Project View

ETAP provides a special view of your project called the Project View. The Project View is a graphical
tree representation that includes the presentations, configurations, study cases, libraries, and components
associated with your project.
Click the Project View button on the System toolbar
The project tree can be expanded to display these items. Clicking a "+" icon (inside a square) increases
the tree expansion, showing more details. Clicking a "" icon (inside a square) decreases the tree
expansion, showing fewer details. Selecting an item by right-clicking it will display a context-sensitive
command menu that allows you to perform actions on the selected item.
User ID and access level
Project filename
One-line diagram presentations.
Right-click to create new presentations.
Double-click to view a presentation.
UGS presentations can be created from the Project View.
Dumpster can be accessed from the Project View.
Configurations can be created from the Project View.
Right-click to rename, purge, or duplicate configurations.
Right-click to create new study cases.
Right-click to Open, Save, Save As,
Create, and Purge libraries.
Right-click to
View, Copy/Merge,
and Purge Motor
Characteristic
library.
3-8
Right-click to find an
element or edit its
properties. You can find
elements in the last active
one-line diagram
presentation, or in any
desired presentation.
Overview
Network Systems
3.3 Network Systems

ETAP provides a graphical editor to construct your one-line diagram. You can graphically add, delete,
move, or connect elements by using the one-line diagram Edit toolbar; zoom in or out; display grid on or
off; change element size, orientation, symbol, or visibility; enter properties; set operating status; etc.
Click here to access

AC Network Systems
You can use composite networks and motors with

unlimited nesting capabilities to create uncluttered and
easy to follow one-line diagrams. Composite networks
allow up to 20 connections from outside
the network, making them very flexible
so they can be used in a variety of
configurations.
Note: The nesting capabilities of a oneline diagram do not affect the
calculation results in any way.
Calculation programs consider all oneline diagram components nested in any
level.
3-9
Overview
Mode Toolbar
3.4 Mode Toolbar

When you click the One-Line Diagram (Network Systems) button on the System toolbar, the Mode
toolbar becomes available that contains all the study modules related to the one-line diagram.
In general, ETAP has three modes of operation under Network Systems; Edit, AC Study, and DC Study.
The AC Study mode consists of analyses such as Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor Acceleration,
Transient Stability, and Protective Device Coordination.
Mode Toolbar with Motor Starting Mode Selected
3.4.1 Edit Mode

Edit Mode enables you to build your one-line diagram, change system connections, edit engineering
properties, save your project, and generate schedule reports in Crystal Reports formats. You can select
this mode by clicking the Edit button (graphically represented by a pencil). The Edit toolbars for AC
Elements, DC Elements, and Instrumentation Elements will be displayed to the right side of the ETAP
window.
Mode Toolbar with Edit Mode Selected

This mode provides access to editing features that include:
Dragging and Dropping Elements

Connecting Elements
Changing IDs
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Elements
Moving Items from System Dumpster
Inserting OLE Objects
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting OLE Objects
Merging Two ETAP Projects
Hiding/Showing Groups of Protective Devices
Rotating Elements
Sizing Elements
Changing Symbols
Editing Properties
Running Schedule Report Manager
3-10
Overview
Mode Toolbar
3.4.2 Study Mode

Study Modes enable you to create and modify study cases, perform system analysis, view alarm/alert
conditions, and view output reports and plots. When a Study Mode is active (selected), the toolbar for the
selected study is displayed on the right side of the ETAP window. By clicking the buttons on the Study
toolbar, you can run studies, transfer data, and change display options. The available Study Modes and
associated Study toolbars are shown in the table below.
Study Mode
Toolbar
Study Mode
Toolbar
Load Flow
Auto-Run Load Flow
Short Circuit
ANSI Short-Circuit Duty
ANSI 30 Cycle Faults
ANSI Unbalanced Faults
IEC Short-Circuit Duty
IEC 909 Short-Circuit
IEC Unbalanced Faults
IEC 363 Short-Circuit
Arc Flash Analysis
Motor Starting
Dynamic Acceleration
Static Starting
Harmonics
Harmonic Load Flow
Harmonic Frequency Scan
Transient Stability
Protective Device Coordination
3-11
Overview
Mode Toolbar
Transient Stability
Generator Star-Up
Sequence of Operation
Max and Min SC
DC Load Flow
DC Short-Circuit
Battery
Battery Sizing
Battery Discharge
Optimal Power Flow
Reliability
3-12
Overview
Mode Toolbar
Switching Sequence
Management
In addition to the Study toolbar, a Study Case toolbar is displayed automatically when one of the Study
Modes becomes active. The Study Case toolbar allows you to control and manage the solution parameters
and output reports. The Study Case toolbar is available for all ETAP configurations.
3-13
Overview
Mode Toolbar
Motor Starting Study Case Toolbar
Select and edit Motor Starting study cases, set output report file name, and
select to view a report of Motor Starting results in Crystal Reports format.
Time Slider
Display study results on the one-line diagram at

different simulation times.
Nested Networks
Open Composite Motors
or Networks to see the
results in various units.
Motor Starting Study

The Study toolbar changes
according to the selected
Study Mode.
Run
Run dynamic
acceleration or
static starting
studies.
Display Options
Display results and
info annotations.
Get
Get online or
archived data.
3-14
Overview
STAR Systems
3.5 Star Systems

The ETAP Star systems allow you to perform steady-state and dynamic device coordination, protection,
and testing. Star systems utilize intelligent one-line diagrams, comprehensive device libraries, and an
integrated three-dimensional database.
The ETAP library database provides comprehensive and up-to-date protective device information. The
ETAP device libraries are validated and verified using the published manufacturer data and industry
standards. In addition, ETAP allows you to create and add new device TCC curves using state-of-the-art
digitization points and formulation techniques.
Click here to access Star systems.
Star systems enable system engineers to efficiently perform protective device coordination studies. The
intelligent features provide informed and reliable recommendations regarding the feasibility of the
devices under consideration. This helps system engineers and planners to quickly identify possible design
3-15
Overview
STAR Systems
issues and make informed decisions to improve system reliability, increase system stability, and realize
cost savings.
3.5.1 Key Features & Capabilities

Sequence-of-operation
Embedded analysis modules
Verified and validated device libraries
Multi-function and multi-level relays
Built-in interface with relay hardware
Display Actual Relay Transient Response
User-definable device library database
Ground & Neutral conductors damage curves
Illustrate system wide coordination
Automatic layout of the one-line diagram in Star TCC View
Click & drag curves to adjust settings
Phase & ground coordination modes
Automatic current & voltage scaling
Integration of short-circuit analysis with protective devices
Motor starting curves based on motor acceleration studies
Comprehensive relay interlocks
User-definable display options
Graphical time-difference calculator
Fixed point/damage curve modeling
Graphical printing/plotting
Comprehensive print functionality, legends, & device labeling
Customizable reports
Not only can you work with the time-current curves with ETAP Star, you can also determine the
operating time of protective devices simply by placing a fault on the one-line diagram.
Coordinate via One-Line Diagram
Graphically place a fault anywhere on the one-line diagram

Automatically detect local zones of protection
Automatically select and define paths for coordination
Automatically calculate and display the fault current contributions on the one-line diagram
Determine the operating time and state of all protective devices based on the actual fault current
contribution flowing through each individual device
Globally view post fault actions and associated operating time via a tabulated event viewer
Graphically examine the operation of protective devices via the one-line diagram
3-16
Overview
STAR Systems
Drag & Drop a Fault

One Action Resulting in a Complete Solution
3-phase and ground faults
Display fault currents on the one-line diagram
Illustrate system wide coordination
Tabulate operating times via an event viewer
Customizable reports
3-17
Overview
3.6 Underground Raceway Systems (UGS)

ETAP provides graphical Underground Raceway Systems (UGS). Each ETAP project supports multiple
views of the underground raceway systems. Each view is a conceptual cross-section of desired raceways
and heat sources that are in the same vicinity.
Click here to access underground raceway systems.
The figure above shows how to access underground raceway systems. Use the underground raceway
systems Edit toolbar to add raceways (duct bank and direct buried), conduits for duct bank raceways, and
locations for direct buried raceways, external heat sources, and cables to the underground raceway
system. From underground raceway systems presentations, you can graphically arrange raceways,
conduits, cables, and external heat sources to represent cable routing and provide a physical environment
to conduct cable ampacity derating studies. These studies include cable temperature calculation, ampacity
optimization, cable sizing, and transient cable temperature calculation.

When working with the underground raceway system presentations, the Mode toolbar changes as shown
below.
3-18
Overview
3.6.1 Edit Mode

Edit Mode enables you to build your underground raceway system, change system
configurations, automatically adjust conduit distribution and spacing, edit engineering
properties, and save your project. This mode allows access to editing features including
drag-and-drop, copy, cut, paste, size elements, as well as the Edit Properties command.
Note: Elements can be added directly to the system from the underground raceway system
Edit toolbar.
3.6.2 Study Mode

The Study Mode enables you to create and modify solution parameters (study cases),
perform steady-state and transient temperature calculations, optimize cable ampacities, size cables, and
view output reports and plots.
Study Toolbar for Underground Cable Raceway Systems
3.6.3 Features & Capabilities
Neher-McGrath Method
IEC 287 Method
Utilize custom, NEC, or standard IEEE rule-based spacing
Automatic conduit and distribution spacing
Uniform and non-uniform conduit arrangements
Steady-state temperature
Ampacity optimization
Automatic cable zizing
Transient temperature
Graphical manipulation of raceways, cables, conduits, etc.
Drag & drop cables from one-line diagrams
Cable of different sizes in the same raceway
Separate phases into different conduits or locations
Unsymmetical positioning of raceways
Transient calculations use a dynamic thermal circuit model
Option to fix cable size and/or loading
Calculate thermal R, dielectric losses, Yc, Ys, etc.
User-defined armor cables
3-19
Overview
Unbalanced load factors

Multiple duct banks & direct buried cables
Place raceways in multiple cross-sections
Flexible Operation
Multiple raceways
Multiple external heat sources
Optimization of new cables in existing raceways
Utilize rule-book based wizard for creating raceways
Cross-sectional analysis
Duct banks & direct buried raceways
Integrated with cables in one-line diagrams
Integrated with load flow results
Integrated with cable pulling analysis
Plotting
Transient temperatures calculations based on load profile

Option to display multiple cables simultaneously
Zoom to any detail level
Export data to Microsoft Excel
Line, bar, 3-D, and scatter plots
Customize text and axes
Reporting
Flag critical & marginal cable temperatures

Reports all physical & calculated data
Use Crystal Reports for full color, customizable reports
Export output reports to your favorite word processor
Graphical display of raceway results
3-20
Overview
Ground Grid Systems
3.7 Ground Grid Systems

The safety of people who work and live around electric power installations is of paramount concern. The
proper design of a grounding system is key to improving safety conditions and protecting the lives of all
individuals who are in close proximity of electrical power systems. During unbalanced faults, the ground
potential rise of a grounded structure presents a risk of electrocution to anyone who comes in contact with
the grounded structure. ETAP provides a three-dimensional, fully graphical tool that allows for the design
of a ground grid system that adheres to IEEE or Finite Element Method (FEM) standards.
Ground Grid
To begin working with the ground grid systems, you must first insert a ground grid on the one-line
diagram. To do so, click the Ground Grid button located on the AC Edit toolbar. After choosing the
standard (IEEE or FEM) you will use for the design, you can access the Ground Grid Editor by doubleclicking the ground grid on the one-line diagram. To open an existing ground grid view, use the Ground
Grid Systems button from the System toolbar.
Click here to access existing ground grid systems.
3-21
Overview
Ground Grid Systems
Some of the design features of the Ground Grid Systems module include:
Calculation of the safe step and touch potentials for any type of ground grid shape
Generation of three-dimensional graphic profiles and tabular results from the step and touch
voltage values
Optimization of the numbers of parallel ground conductors and rods
Calculation of ground resistance and ground potential rise
Calculation of cost of conductors and rods used
Inclusion of soil type and configuration in calculations
Ground Grid Systems Plot Sample

When working with a ground grid presentation, the Mode toolbar changes as shown below.
3.7.1 Edit Mode

Edit Mode enables you to build your ground grids based on the
IEEE (regular shapes) or FEM (Irregular shapes) standard.
3.7.2 Study Mode

Study Mode enables you to create and modify solution parameters
(study cases), perform calculations, optimize the number of conductors,
optimize the number of conductors and rods, and view output reports
and plots.
IEEE 80 Method
IEEE 665 Method
Finite Element Method
Rod and conductors in any 3-D direction
3-22
EDIT and Calculation

Toolbars
Overview
Ground Grid Systems
Rod and conductor optimization

Two-layer soil configuration plus surface material
Table of potentials at the earth surface
External boundary extensions
Handle irregular configurations of any shape
Variable weight and temperature options
Compare allowable currents against fault currents
Ground grid configurations showing conductor and rod plots
Flexible Operation
Automatically use short-circuit results

Optimize number of conductors with fixed rods
Optimize number of conductors and rods based on cost
Check the allowable current for grid conductors
Standards & Methods
IEEE: 80-1986, 80-2000, 665-1995

Finite Element
Calculate
Reflection factor (K)

Decrement factor (Df)
Ground potential rise (GPR)
Ground system resistance (Rg)
Surface layer derating factor (Cs)
Compare potentials to tolerable limits
Step, touch, and absolute potentials inside and outside grid
Plot Options
Rotation animation
Rotation increment (-15 to 15 degrees)
Rotation detail - wire frame/plotting style/full detail
Viewing style - color/monochrome
Shading style - white/color
Font size - small/medium/large
Numeric precision - 0, 1, 2, 3 decimals
Grid lines - no grid, X and/or Y axes
Plotting method - wire frame/surface/surface with frame/surface with contouring/pixels
Show bounding box - while rotating always/never
2-D contour
Off
3-23
Overview
Ground Grid Systems
Lines on top/bottom
Color on top/bottom
Plotting/Reporting
3-D touch potential plots

3-D step potential plots
3-D absolute voltage plots
Color coded contour plots
Graphical display of overlimit voltages
Conductor segments oriented in any 3-D direction
Output results in Microsoft Access databases format
3-24
Overview
Panel Systems
3.8 Panel Systems

ETAP allows you to model the electrical panels used in electrical power systems directly on the one-line
diagram. The number of panels that can be represented is unlimited, since ETAP supports the nesting of
panels. Therefore, a panel can be connected to a sub-panel, and in turn, a sub-panel can be connected to
yet another downstream panel elsewhere in the circuit. Each panel can be modeled as either a 3-phase or a
single-phase panel. The 3-phase panels can be either 3-wire or 4-wire configurations, while single-phase
panels can be 2-wire or 3-wire configurations. Internally, each panel is comprised of protective devices
and a collection of circuits that supply system loads.
Panel Systems
Panels are added to the one-line diagram by clicking the Panel Systems button located on the AC Edit
toolbar, and placing the panel anywhere on the one-line diagram. Once added to the diagram, doubleclicking the panel symbol will open the Panel Editor, and allow for panel and circuit information to be
specified. The user can customize useful information such as panel ID, phase connections, panel rating,
number of circuits, circuit schedule, and load summary.
3-25
Overview
Panel Systems
Flexible Operation
Panel design and analysis

1-Phase and 3-Phase
ANSI and IEC standards
NEC load factors
Automatic update of upstream panels
3-Phase 3-Wire
3-Phase 4-Wire
1-Phase 2-Wire
1-Phase 3-Wire
Column and standard layouts
Unlimited branch circuits
Unlimited sub-panel connections
External network representation
Internal (spreadsheet) load modeling
Detailed panel loading summary
Dynamic panel schedule updates
Continuous and non-continuous load
calculations
Study Options
3-26
Ten loading categories per circuit

User-definable load types and factors
Libraries
Diverse operating conditions

Multiple loading categories
Multiple demand factors
Unlimited configurations
Different nameplate data
Global and individual bus load diversity
factors
Extensive protection and control device

libraries
Comprehensive feeder and cable
libraries
Customizable libraries
Overview
Panel Systems
User-configurable defaults and layouts
Panel Code Factors
NEC load demand factors

Customizable multiplying factors
Reporting
Customizable panel schedules in Crystal

Reports format
Comprehensive load summary for panel
sizing
Customizable reports for branching
circuit evaluation
Export one-line diagrams with results to
third party CAD systems
3-27
Overview
3.9 Cable Pulling Systems

The accurate prediction of cable pulling force is essential for the design of underground cable systems.
This knowledge makes it possible to avoid overly conservative design practices and to achieve substantial
capital savings during construction.
ETAP Cable Pulling Systems is used to determine the forward tension, reverse tensions, and sidewall
pressures a cable is subjected to when pulled through conduits. The module can account for cables of
different sizes and permits complex pulling path geometry. A point-by-point calculation method is
performed at every conduit bend and pull point. Both the forward and reverse pulling tensions are
calculated for determining the preferred direction of pull.
To begin working with Cable Pulling Systems, click the Cable Pulling Systems button on the System
toolbar.
Click here to access Cable Pulling Systems
Once created, double-click the cable pulling (CP) symbol to access the CP presentation. The CP
presentation is divided into three different views: the schematic configuration view, conduit cross-section
view, and 3-D pulling path view. The conduit cross-section view is primarily to edit the properties of the
cables and the conduit (which the cables will be pulled into).The 3-D pulling path view applies only to the
three-dimensional display of pulling path geometry. The CP presentation allows you to graphically
arrange cables, segments, and bends, to provide a physical environment to conduct cable pulling design
studies.
3-28
Overview
3.9.1 Features and Capabilities
Integrated with one-line diagram cables

Integrated with underground raceways cables
Pull multiple cables
Allow any pull geometry
Full ETAP cable library integration
Display 3-D pulling path geometry
Provide reduction factors for calculating allowable tension when pulling multiple cables
Evaluate possible conduit jamming
Allow segments to have non-zero slopes as well as horizontal bends (non-planer segments)
Account for the equivalent tension for cables pulled from reels
Provide tolerance for cable weights and outside diameters
Summary and alert windows
Flexible Operation
Calculate forward and reverse pulling tensions

Calculate pulling tensions at all bend points
Calculate the maximum tension limited by sidewall pressures
Calculate the maximum allowable pulling tension
Compare the maximum tension limitations against the calculated pulling tensions
Calculate the conduit percent fill
Calculate the total length of run (pull)
Cradled and triangular cable configurations
Reporting
Fundamental cable pulling results

Flag cable tensions that exceed limits
Flag conduit percent fill limits
Flag non-conforming NEC code requirements
Graphical display of cable pulling results
Report sidewall tension, forward pull, and reverse pull including violation flags
Pulling schematic showing segment and bend plots
Conduit cross-section showing conduit and cable plots
3-29
Overview
Real-Time Systems
3.10 Real-Time Systems (PSMS)

ETAP Real-Time (PSMS) is an intelligent PC-based
energy management software application that runs as an
operator workstation to monitor, control, and optimize the
operation of your power system. While monitoring your
system, the workstation can simultaneously be used to
perform full spectrum power system analyses on real-time
data.
ETAP Real-Times unique combination of supervisory and
simulation capabilities provides a powerful new set of
management tools for more effective operation of your
power system. ETAP Real-Time simulation capabilities
also provide an environment for operator training and
assistance. Compared to traditional training methods,
operator training is accelerated and becomes an ongoing
process.
ETAP Real-Time is an online extension to ETAP power system analysis software. By combining
Windows client-server modular architecture with state-of-the-art remote monitoring, simulator, and
supervisory control applications, Real-Time can interface with any combination of computer
workstations, data storage devices (historians), IEDs, and other SCADA systems.
ETAP Real-Time enables you to connect your existing power system to your ETAP model; collect,
monitor, and log live data; set alarms; simulate system responses; execute control actions; run What if"
studies; and view output reports and plots.
While Real-Time monitors and maintains logs in the background, you can simulate load flow, shortcircuit, motor starting, transient stability, optimal power flow, or operation of the system with data that
reflects the current status and loading of the system. Previously stored system configuration data and
loading can also be used for simulations.
You access the ETAP Real-Time System on the System toolbar as shown in the example below.
Click this button to access ETAP Real-Time Systems.
When working with ETAP Real-Time Systems, the toolbar changes to allow access to the following RealTime capabilities:
Advance Monitoring
Real-Time Simulation
Event Playback
On-Line Control
3-30
Overview
Real-Time Systems
Advisory and Supervisory Control

Intelligent Load Shedding
3.10.1 Advanced Monitoring

Click the On-Line Monitoring button on the Real-Time toolbar to put the active one-line diagram
(presentation) into on-line monitoring mode. ETAP acquires real-time data from the electrical system via
the monitoring devices while in monitoring mode, processes the data (using State Estimator and Load
Distributor), resets the alarms, stores all parameters, and then graphically displays the data on the one-line
diagram.
Advanced Monitoring provides intuitive, intelligent, and integrated real-time monitoring via a state-ofthe-art graphical user interface. Monitoring functions include checking the condition of the network,
estimating missing system states, detecting network abnormalities, and initiating alarms based on
operating conditions and status changes.
Features and Capabilities
Continuous real-time monitoring

On demand data retrieval
State estimator and load distributor
Data reconciliation and consistency check
Bad data detection and correction
Alarm management and processing
Energy cost monitoring
Multi-console and multi-screen monitoring
Multi-state breaker monitoring
Graphical monitoring via intelligent one-line diagrams
Visual monitoring via watch windows (MMI)
Dynamic coloring of de-energized and overload elements
Archived (historical) data retrieval and display
Pseudo measurements (override measured data)
OPC interface layer
Message logging
User-definable scan rates
User-access levels
Energy Usage and Cost Analysis
Predict system-wide energy usage and cost

User-definable cost functions and heat rates
Track energy related costs
Cost of energy calculations
State Estimator
Extended estimations of non-observable sub-systems
3-31
Overview
Real-Time Systems
Rule-based comparison of measured vs. estimated values

Dependable and fast convergence solution
Minimum system measurements requirement
State-of-the-art estimation techniques
Data consistency checking
Bad data and error detection
Load distribution
Alarms & Warnings
Annunciate local and system-wide alarms and warnings based on equipment ratings
Alarm priority setting and event triggering
Annunciate out-of-range measurements
Graphical, tabulated, and audible annunciation
Predict abnormal conditions and critical failures
3.10.2 Real-Time Simulation

ETAP Real-Time Simulation is a powerful analysis tool that allows for prediction of system behavior in
response to actions and events via the use of real-time and archived data. Virtual testing of operator
actions prior to implementation can reveal potential problems, hence reducing human errors and the risk
of service interruptions. ETAP Real-Time Simulation assists operators, engineers, and planners to make
informed and logical decisions to reduce operating costs and improve system reliability.
Real-time simulation
Predict system behavior
Perform "What If" operating scenarios
Simulate archived offline data
Built-in training tool for engineers and operators
Full spectrum AC and DC analysis modules
Emulate response of protective devices
Evaluate protection and control systems
Get online data on demand
Retrieve archived data for system analysis
One-touch simulation
Graphical display of simulation results
Intelligent interactive graphical user interface
Operator friendly interface
Online simulation alerts
Customizable reports via Crystal Reports
Integrated database with ETAP
Automatic scenario simulation using project wizard
Power analysis techniques
3-32
Overview
Real-Time Systems
3.10.3 Event Playback

On the Real-Time toolbar, click the Playback button to put the active one-line diagram (presentation) into
playback mode. Once in Playback Mode, ETAP Real-Time retrieves data from the historian and displays
it on the one-line diagram.
The Event Playback Mode provides seamless retrieval of data from the ETAP Real-Time Playback
Historian for any events from any ETAP Real-Time Console. ETAP Real-Time can be configured to
provide a complete picture of the electrical system from the stored data. This includes playback of a
previously recorded monitored data, calculated system parameters, sequence of events, and message log.
The Event Playback feature is especially useful for root cause and effect investigations, improvement of
system operations, exploration of alternative actions, and replay of "What if" scenarios. ETAP Real-Time
Event Playback capabilities translate into reduction of maintenance costs and prevention of costly
shutdowns.
The system operator can control playbacks to re-run at original or accelerated speeds, single-step, fastforward, or rewind through the message log. Playback resolution is operator controlled and determined by
the scan rate of field devices. Since full simulation capabilities are available to the system operator at any
point during the replay, the operator can explore the effects of alternative actions at any point of recorded
data.
Additionally, the event log can be synchronized and displayed while the playback is in progress. This
allows the operator to precisely determine, at a specific time, what events were occurring in the power
system, what was being reported to the operator, and what operator action resulted, if any.
The playback data is stored in an ODBC/SQL database as a binary stream and can be transferred to any
user with the appropriate authorization and software. Stored information can be accessed from any ETAP
Real-Time Console. There is no requirement that the Playback Console be online or connected with
ETAP Real-Time Server.

Improve operator knowledge
Improve system operation
Investigate cause and effect
Explore alternative actions
Replay "What if" scenarios
Playback of event views
Historical alarm database
3.10.4 On-Line Control

This mode allows the user to open or close circuit breakers and receive status confirmations.
ETAP Online Control Mode gives the operator full remote access over system elements such as motors,
generators, breakers, and other switching devices. Subsystems that operate independently within the load
3-33
Overview
Real-Time Systems
area under ETAP Online Control will need device coordination through either hardware or software
interlocks with the ETAP Real-Time Server to ensure safety and stable operations.
Automation
ETAP Real-Time provides user-definable actions that can be added or superimposed on the existing
system for automating system control. This is like adding PC-based processors/controllers (kV, kW, kvar,
PF, etc.) or simple breaker interlocks to any part of the system by means of the software.
3.10.5 Automatic Generation Control

ETAP Real-Time offers a range of state-of-the-art control and real-time optimization capabilities for your
electrical power system. ETAP Real-Time optimization algorithms assist energy consumers to
automatically operate their system and minimize system losses, reduce peak load consumption, or
minimize control adjustment. For energy producers ETAP Real-Time can minimize generation fuel cost,
optimize system operation, optimize power exchange, or maximize system security.
ETAP Real-Time can dynamically manage your system to respond to disturbances faster than standard
hardware time-delay operations. The appropriate system response can be determined for a variety of
changes and disturbances by using electrical and physical parameters, loading and generation levels,
network topology, and control logic. In addition, ETAP Real-Time can determine the source of a potential
problem and advise on corrective actions to avoid interruption.
The optimization of a power system through the utilization of available controls including:
Voltage/var Control
MW Control
Transformer LTC Control
Multi-State Breaker Control
Shunt Compensation Control
Series Compensation Control
Switching Capacitor Control
Load Shed Control
Furthermore, the appropriate application of ETAP Real-Time leads to a more reliable and economical
operation, while maintaining system voltages and equipment loading within the required range and
constraints. ETAP Real-Time provides intelligent load flow solutions to minimize system operating costs
and maximize system performance. ETAP Real-Time maximizes the value of your energy investment.
ETAP Real-Time pays for itself through an immediate realization of savings in operating and
maintenance costs.
Reduce kWh Costs

Reduce Peak kWh Costs
Reduce kvar/Power Factor Penalties
Increase Equipment Life Time
Increase System Capacity
3-34
Overview
Real-Time Systems
ETAP Real-Time allows you to monitor, analyze, control, coordinate, and predict load/generation
demands, real-time costs, and other system parameters while maintaining proper reliability levels
throughout the system.
Supervisory Control mode provides automatic implementation of recommended settings to achieve
continuous optimum system operation. Advisory Control mode allows the systems operator to implement
the ETAP Real-Time recommendations.

Advisory and/or automatic control
Shared decision making process
Chain of logic controls and action validations
Steady-state optimization control
Energy cost assessment
Online control and automation
3.10.6 Intelligent Load Shedding

The Intelligent Load Shedding (ILS) uses a neural network to dynamically determine the best load
shedding priority. The decision is made based on the actual operating condition of the system and location
of the disturbance. ILS provides faster execution of load shedding, as compared to conventional
frequency relays thus further reducing the load relief requirements.
Fast and reliable response

System islanding generator logic
VFD load reduction control
Automatic generation of transient study cases
Optimize load preservation
3-35
Overview
Real-Time Systems
Reduce downtime for critical loads

Training of neural network
User-defined load priority tables (LPT)
Load shedding scheme redundancy with back-up contingencies
Redundancy with backup contingencies
Simulate various disturbances and display the results
Robust calculation methods
Fast Corrective Control Based on a Neural Network

The load shedding operation of ETAP Real-Time is based on maintaining system stability (transient and
steady-state) with minimum load shed. Load shedding can be initiated by under frequency, over
frequency, circuit breaker status, reverse power, ground current, etc. In response to electrical or
mechanical disturbances in the system, load shedding will commence based on a user-defined Load
Priority Table (LPT) and a pre-constructed Stability Knowledge Base (SKB). SKB is constructed from a
number of transient stability studies for determining the stability limits of the system.
3-36
Overview
GIS Systems
3.11 GIS Systems

The ETAP graphical user interface integrates GIS data and maps.
The GIS Data Exchange module enables you to visualize GIS maps
and sub-maps, as well as utilize the associated data to run power
system simulations.
This sophisticated data exchange module always keeps the latest GIS
data within ETAP, thereby providing consistent and viable results.
ETAP automatically updates the GIS database with analysis results
ensuring that the most current information is available for all users.
Click here to access GIS map files.
View GIS maps in ETAP

Display analysis results on GIS map
Synchronize GIS data to ETAP projects
GUI database mapping
Use GIS map tools
Map attributes of GIS to ETAP elements
Consistency checks for data synchronization
Display unlimited GIS presentations
Perform add, modify, or delete actions for data synchronization
View modifications and accept/reject actions via graphical user interface
Use map tools - zoom in, zoom out, full extent, pan, etc.
Full control of analysis results displayed on the GIS map
3-37
Overview
Control Systems
3.12 Control Systems

ETAP seamlessly integrates the analysis of power and control circuits within one electrical analysis
program. The Control System Diagram (CSD) simulates the sequence-of-operation of control devices
such as solenoids, relays, controlled contacts, multi-sequence contacts, and actuators including inrush
conditions. CSD has the capability of determining pickup and dropout voltages, losses, and current flows
at any time instance as well as overall marginal and critical alerts. A large library of equipment enables
engineers to quickly model and simulate the action of relays associated with control interlocks after given
time delays.
Click here to access Control Systems

Diagram (CSD)
Simulation-of-operation sequence
Pickup and dropout voltage calculation
Automatic alerts
Burden and inrush modes
Controlled contacts
Integrated with battery discharge calculation
Detailed representation of control systems
Step-by-step simulation of control system operation sequence
3-38
Overview
Control Systems
Simulation of logic interlocks between controlling devices and contacts

Calculation of device operating voltage and current
Modeling of device burden and inrush modes
Alert violations for operating voltage, current, and voltage pickup
Built-in logic between control devices and contacts
Multiple sources to a control system
User's selectable modeling of protective device and contact resistance
Coil/solenoid resistance temperature adjustment
Cable/wire length adjustment
Battery discharge calculation using sequence-of-operation control diagrams
Study Cases
Saves solution control parameters for each scenario

Make changes to your system and re-run studies instantly
Conduct unlimited "what if" studies within one database
Option to update initial conditions, voltage profiles, and duty cycles
Elements
Extensive libraries
Control relay
Coil
Solenoid
Light
Generic load
Wire
Fuse
Circuit breaker
Single-throw and double-throw controlled contacts
Single-throw and double-throw switches
Macro-controlled contacts
Display Options
Dynamically adjust the display of calculation results

Customize display of device names and ratings
Customize display of equipment impedance
Customize font types, sizes, styles, and colors
Customize display of voltage drop calculation results directly on the one-line diagram
Reporting
Customize output reports using Crystal Reports

Generate output reports in any language
Voltage drops, losses, power flows, etc.
Sequence-of-operation action summary log
3-39
Overview
Control Systems
Input data, detailed voltage drop, and summaries

Flag device pickup/dropout voltage violations
Flag element current violations
State-of-the-art graphic display of results
Export outputs to your favorite word processing program
Export one-line diagrams including results to third party CAD systems
3-40
Overview
System Dumpster
3.13 User-Defined Dynamic Model Graphical Editor

The ETAP User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM) program is graphical logic editor (GLE) an interpreter
tool which allows the creation of user-defined governor, exciter, and Power System Stabilizer (PSS)
models for synchronous machines, generic load and wind turbine generator models. This module allows
the models to be linked to ETAPs transient stability program. The models can be built in the ETAP
UDM Graphical Logic Editor or can be imported from Matlab Simulink files. ETAP uses these dynamic
models at run time when conducting Transient Stability Studies. This tool has been extremely enhanced
and is now fully integrated into ETAP to allow the creation of dynamic models without the need to buy
additional Matlab Simulink software.
Click here to access the UDM Graphical Editor.
The main application of the UDM module is to model dynamic control elements which are not part of the
standard ETAP dynamic model library.
This chapter covers the scope of the application of the UDM Graphical Logic Editor and how it is used to
create the following types of control / dynamic models:
1. Synchronous Motors Exciter / AVR models
2. Synchronous Generator Exciter / AVR models
3. Synchronous Generator Turbine, Engine / Speed Control models
4. Synchronous Generator PSS (Power System Stabilizer) models
5. Wind Turbine Generator Models
6. Generic Load Models (Lumped Load Element Dynamic Models)
Accessing the UDM Interface

There are two ways to access the UDM Editor. The first method is from the system toolbar. A new Icon is
added at that location. The second method to access the UDM Editor is from the synchronous generator
editor individual pages (Governor, Exciter & PSS pages), synchronous motor exciter page, dynamic page
of the lumped load editor and the Info page of the wind turbine generator editor. Please note that the
model type is inherited from the editor from which the UDM GLE interface was accessed.
If you open the UDM Editor from the Individual Editors:

If the UDM Editor is opened from the synchronous generator, synchronous motor, lumped load or wind
turbine editor, any content that is not related to the individual element is filtered out. This means that only
the models created specifically for the given machine will be listed in the model selection drop list. If
there is no model created, then the UDM model selection drop list is blank. Clicking on the UDM Editor
Button opens the UDM GLE Interface. At this time, a new model can be created. When the model is
3-41
Overview
System Dumpster
saved, it will be associated it with the element from which the editor was accessed. The model can be
associated with other elements or added to the model library later on if required.
Once the UDM editor is opened from the generator element, the default directory for the file save and
open is the current project directory.
The following image illustrates the process of opening a UDM model for the first time from the generator
editor:
Once the model is saved the model will be linked to the element for which it was created using the
following naming convention
<Element ID>_<Type>_<Model Name>.
More on the naming convention is presenting under the file saving section of this chapter.
If you open the UDM Editor from the System Toolbar:

Opening the UDM Editor from the system toolbar allows you to modify all model files including the ones
in the current project directory or the ones from the library. The program file open and file save directory
are defaulted to the UDM library directory (\\ETAP Installation Directory\UDM). However, it is possible
to save and link to an element as long as the model is saved in the project directory with the proper
naming convention. If this is done, the model would be linked exclusively to an element and can be
accessed from the element itself.
Please refer to Chapter 25: User Defined Dynamic Models for additional information.
Graphical model builder

Library of pre-defined UDM models
Customize existing UDM models
Create more complex UDM models using library pre-defined UDM models
Compile and test directly from UDM builder
Wide variety of blocks for building models
Control element toolbars including transfer blocks, input ports, output ports, etc.
Import and export Simulink models
3-42
Overview
System Dumpster
Automatic UDM links to components

Creat and edit models for Exciter, Governor, Power System Stabalizer, and Lumped Load
Various model testing methods
3-43
Overview
System Dumpster
3.14 System Dumpster

The System Dumpster consists of a number of cells that contain elements that you have deleted or copied
from the one-line diagram or underground raceway systems. When you initially cut an element or group
of elements from the one-line diagram or an underground raceway system, ETAP places these in a
dumpster cell. These cells are kept within the System Dumpster until you explicitly purge them. When a
cell is purged from the System Dumpster, ETAP automatically deletes all elements in the cell from the
projects database. While an element or groups of elements are inside a dumpster cell, you may move or
paste copies of the contents of the cell back into the one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Therefore, the System Dumpster provides a convenient holding location for elements while you are
actively constructing a one-line diagram or an underground raceway system. The System Dumpster
presentation can be accessed using the System toolbar or the Project View.
Click here to access the System Dumpster.
What Happens to IDs When Elements are Copied or Cut into the System Dumpster?
Elements that are copied into the System Dumpster using the Copy command will have new IDs.
Elements that are copied into the System Dumpster using the Cut command will retain their original
IDs.
IDs of the elements purged from the System Dumpster are reusable.
What Happens to IDs when Elements are Pasted or Moved from the System Dumpster?
Elements that are cut and pasted from the System Dumpster will have new IDs.
3-44
Overview
System Dumpster
Elements that are moved from the System Dumpster will retain their original IDs.
Purging Elements from a Project
When you purge a dumpster cell, elements within that cell are removed from the project database
completely and permanently.
All the dumpster cells (entries) may be removed from the project using the Purge All command.
Editing Within the System Dumpster
You cannot copy, size, rotate, or change symbols of elements inside the System Dumpster.
Elements may be relocated inside the System Dumpster.
You can hide or show protective devices (PDs) inside the System Dumpster.
Status of PDs and loads cannot be changed inside the System Dumpster.
Navigators within the editors are not functional for elements in the System Dumpster.
Elements cannot be reconnected inside the System Dumpster.
Controlled Dumpster
The Controlled Dumpster is a mechanism for locking information into the System Dumpster and is used
only when the ETAP project is password-enabled.
When ETAP cuts any elements from an underground raceway system (UGS) or a one-line diagram, the
dumpster cell to which the elements are assigned is designated as a controlled dumpster cell, unless the
element is newly created and has never been seen by the checker. When the dumpster cell is designated as
a controlled dumpster, the designation has no meaning unless the project is password-enabled.
Two INI file entries have been added to override the option of not making a cell a controlled cell when
the elements being cut and pasted into the System Dumpster are newly created:
[Etap PowerStation]
Relax UGS Dumpster Controls=1
Relax OLD Dumpster Controls=1
The default for both entries is 1, which does not allow the cell to become controlled if the element is
newly created. If you change the entry to 0, the cells become controlled if the elements you cut and paste
into them are newly created.
When passwords are enabled, the Controlled Dumpster is treated as a special entity with the following
attributes:
1. The controlled dumpster is displayed as a Controlled Dumpster by displaying the designation (C) or
(CC) as part of its title in the System Dumpster list window.
The designation C (Controlled Dumpster cell) is used to indicate that this is a controlled dumpster
cell that is not checked. These cells cannot be purged until they are checked.
The designation CC (checked Controlled Dumpster cell) is used to indicate that this is a
controlled dumpster cell that has been checked. A user with Project or Base editor permissions
can purge these cells.
3-45
Overview
System Dumpster
2. The background color of a (C) Controlled Dumpster cell is set by Options (Preferences) command
line Controlled Dumpster Background Color (UGS Elements) or (One-Line Elements). The
background is colored only when the project setting has Project/Options/Display Changed Data in red
selected or the project user is a checker.
3. When moving a cell from a Controlled Dumpster cell to the one-line diagram or UGS, two behaviors
are exhibited:
If the Controlled Dumpster cell is a (C) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal. That is, no
special action is taken to flag elements as checked or unchecked.) The dumpster cell is then
destroyed as normal.
If the Controlled Dumpster cell is a (CC) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal but, in
addition, all property values are forced dirty and are flagged as unchecked (displayed in red in the
editors). This is the same as placing a new element on the one-line diagram or UGS. The
dumpster cell is then destroyed as normal.
4. When in Checker Mode, the Controlled Dumpster cells appear in the checkers list and can be
checked like any other element. The act of checking a Controlled Dumpster changes its designation
from (C) to (CC). This also sets the dumpster background color to normal.
5. A Project Editor (or Base Editor) cannot purge a Controlled Dumpster with the designation (C). The
Project Editor can purge a Controlled Dumpster with the designation (CC). The checker must check a
Controlled Dumpster cell before it can be purged.
3-46
Overview
Library
3.15 Library
ETAP provides the library structure for the
following circuit elements: cable, cable fire
protection (coating, stop, wrap), transmission
line (ground wire, phase), control system
devices (button, coil, contact, and solenoid),
motor (nameplate, model, characteristic, and
load), low voltage circuit breaker, high voltage
circuit breaker, fuse, relay, trip devices (electromechanical, motor circuit protector, solid state,
thermal magnetic), overload heater, harmonic
sources, load interruption cost, device reliability,
solar panel, wind turbine generator, and battery.
3-47
The
ETAP
library
file
is
named
ETAPLIB1100.LIB and is located in the Lib
folder. Using Library Quick Pick you can view
and retrieve library data from the element editors
in your project.
To edit or add library data, double-click the
Libraries folder in Project View to expand the
folder. Then double-click the library of your
choice to open its editor. From a library editor
you can add, edit, copy, and delete library data.
You can also access and edit library data from
the Library menu in the menu bar. You can
create an unlimited number of library headers
and data entries for each library.
Overview
Library
You can also create new libraries by rightclicking the Library folder in Project View and
selecting the Create command. Use the rightclick menu options to locate and open other
ETAP library files, or to Save, Save As, or
Purge the library currently in use.
To convert ETAP DOS library files, select
Convert ETAP DOS Lib command from
Library menu, select the library type to
converted, and then locate and convert
ETAP DOS library file.
the
the
be
the
Each ETAP project file can be attached

(associated with) one library only. To attach a
project file to a different library, use the Open
command from the Project View (right-click
Libraries) or from the Library menu in the menu
bar.
3-48
There are a number of libraries available for

many devices in ETAP. Each library is
customized for a specific device.
Overview
Cable Systems
3.16 Cable Systems

Data integration between the one-line diagram and underground raceway system (UGS) includes
electrical properties, routing, and physical attributes of cable. For example, a cable contains data used for
load flow studies representing its electrical properties and bus connections. The cable also contains the
physical data and routing information associated with the raceways through which it is routed.
Cables in ETAP are categorized in three groups: One-Line, Equipment, and UGS
3.16.1 One-Line Cable

One-line cables, cables that are placed in the one-line diagram, appear as a graphical element in the oneline diagram or System Dumpster presentations. This is a cable that you add to the one-line diagram as a
branch to connect buses. To route a one-line cable through a raceway, click the Existing Cable button on
the Edit toolbar in an underground raceway presentation, select a cable from the drop-down list, and then
place it inside a raceway conduit or location. You can also route a one-line cable through a raceway from
the Routing page in the Cable Editor.
Note: This action will attach (assign) the cable to the raceway but will not place it in a specific conduit or
location.
3.16.2 Equipment Cable

An equipment cable is a cable that is placed in an editor as a feeder for a load. Equipment cables are
attached to equipment such as motors and static loads as a feeder cables, but do not appear graphically as
branch elements on the one-line diagram. You add these cables to equipment from the Property editors
(Cable/Vd page) of static load and motors. To route an equipment cable through a raceway, do the
following:
1. Click the Existing Cable button on the Edit toolbar in an underground raceway presentation.
3-49
Overview
Cable Systems
2. Select a cable from the drop-down list.

3. Drop the cable inside a raceway conduit or location.
You can also route an equipment cable through a raceway from the Routing page in the Cable Editor.
Note: This action will attach (assign) the cable to the raceway but will not place it in a specific conduit or
location.
3.16.3 Underground Raceway System (UGS) Cables

UGS cables are cables that are placed only in underground raceways. These cables are used exclusively
within the underground raceway system. They are routed through an underground duct bank or direct
buried raceway, but do not exist in the one-line diagram or as an equipment cable. Raceway cables can be
graphically placed in raceway conduits or locations by clicking the New Cable button on the Edit toolbar
in underground raceway presentations. To make it into a one-line cable, raceway cables can be
graphically dragged to a one-line diagram. However, a raceway cable cannot become an equipment cable.

Neher-McGrath method
IEC 287 method
Intelligent rule-based alignment and spacing tools
Temperature analysis
Ampacity optimization
Automatic cable sizing
Transient temperature analysis
Multiple duct banks and direct buried cables
External heat sources
Graphical manipulation of raceways, cables, conduits, etc.
Drag and drop cables from one-line diagrams
Cable of different sizes in the same raceway
Separate phases into different conduits or locations
Unsymmetical positioning of raceways
Transient calculations use a dynamic thermal circuit model
Option to fix cable size and/or loading
Calculate thermal R, dielectric losses, Yc, Ys, etc.
User-defined armor cables
Unbalanced load factors
Multiple duct banks and direct buried cables
Place raceways in multiple cross-sections
3-50
Overview
Cable Systems
Flexible Operation
Multiple raceways
Multiple external heat sources
Custom, NEC or standard IEEE rule-based spacing
Optimization of new cables in existing raceways
Cross-sectional analysis
Duct banks and direct buried raceways
Integrated with cables in one-line diagrams
Integrated with load flow results
Integrated with cable pulling analysis
Plotting
Transient temperatures calculations based on load profile

Option to display multiple cables simultaneously
Zoom to any detail level
Export data to Microsoft Excel
Line, bar, 3-D, and scatter plots
Customize text and axes
Reporting
Flag critical and marginal cable temperatures

Reports all physical and calculated data
Graphical display of raceway results
3.16.4 Cable Ampacity

ETAP calculates cable ampacity based on NEC 70, ICEA P.54-440, IEEE 399, BS 7671, and IEC 603645-52 Methods for U/G duct banks, U/G direct buried, A/G cable trays, A/G conduits, and air drops. The
process is systematic and simple. For example, for A/G trays, simply enter the tray height, width, and
percent fill, ETAP calculates the derated ampacity based on user specified ambient and conductor
operating temperatures. For duct banks, specify the number of rows, columns, ambient temperature, and
soil thermals resistivity, ETAP calculates the derated ampacity based on the hottest location not
exceeding the maximum operating temperature.
3.16.5 Cable Sizing

ETAP provides optimal and alternative cable sizes based on voltage drop, short circuit, maximum or
average phase operating current, load current requirements, and protective device requirements. Load
current can be based on the full-load amp of any element on the one-line diagram or as a user-specified
value.You can size cables (motor feeders, transformer cables, etc.) instantly based on the cable derated
ampacity for any type of installation (direct banks, trays, conduit in air, etc.).
3-51
Overview
Project Toolbar
3.17 Project Toolbar
The Project toolbar contains buttons that allow you to perform shortcuts using many commonly used
commands in ETAP. All of these commands are described in detail in different parts of this manual (e.g.,
Section 5.2, One-Line Diagram Menu Bar and Chapter 6, One-Line Diagram GUI both describe the
graphical user interface of the one-line diagram).
Command
Command Function
New
Open
Save
Print
Print Preview
Cut
Copy
Paste
Pan
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Back
Forward
Zoom to Fit Page
Undo
Redo
Text Box
Show Grid Lines
Check Circuit Continuity
Get Template
Add OLV Template
Hyperlinks
Power Calculator
Find
Help
Theme Editor
Theme Name
Theme Color Coding
Create a new project file.

Open an existing project file.
Save the project file.
Print active interface views like one-line diagrams or underground raceways.
Preview the print layout of the active interface view.
Cut the selected elements from an active interface view.
Copy the selected elements from an active interface view.
Paste elements from a dumpster cell to an active interface view.
Pan the one-line diagram or underground raceway view using a mouse.
Magnify the one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Reduce the one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Undo zoom level for the one-line diagram.
Redo the zoom level for the one-line diagram.
Resize the one-line diagram to fit the window.
Undo previous task on the one-line diagram excluding removing an element.
Redo a task that was undone.
Click to place a textbox on an active interface view.
Display the grid lines on the one-line diagram.
Check the system continuity for non-energized elements.
Select pre-developed one-line diagrams to insert.
Create and save templates to the template library.
Click to add a hyperlink to a device or one-line diagram.
Activate Power Calculator.
Click to find a device on the one-line diagram.
Point to a specific area to learn more about ETAP.
Customizes the look of the One Line Diagram presentations.
Select from list of saved Theme configurations.
Select color coding of current Theme name.
3-52
Overview
Project Toolbar
Command
Command Function
Colors Normal
Colors Custom
Change selected component color to normal based on Theme Color Coding.

Change selected component color to custom color.
3-53
Overview
Project Toolbar
New
Click the New tool to start a new project. This opens the
Create New Project File dialog box, as shown below.
From the dialog box, enter a project file name with a maximum of 32 characters that is suitable for your
project. For the purpose of this manual, name the new project Test and click OK. This will open the User
Information dialog box. For more details on user information, see Chapter 5, User Access Management.
User Information Dialog Box

When you create a new project, ETAP automatically gives you all access level privileges. If you click on
OK and ETAP logs you on as a Project Editor (i.e., you have full access to all editors including Base
Data, Revision Data, Libraries, etc.), administrative functions such as adding and deleting users to the
project are not available to a Project Editor. To access these functions, you must log on as Admin.
For projects on which security is not an issue or if you are a single user of ETAP, we recommend that you
do not require a password and that you give yourself full access privileges. You can change the password
requirement for projects at any time.
If you forget your User Name or your password, log on as Admin. Type password as the password. We
recommend that you do not change the password for Admin unless you record it for later use. If you
forget your User Name or your password, this may be the only way you can access this project.
Enter your User Name (maximum 20 characters) in the User Name field. User Name is a mandatory field.
For the purpose of this manual, enter OTI and then click on OK. ETAP will create a one-line diagram
presentation named OLV1. You can start adding elements and editing the one-line diagram. Each time a
3-54
Overview
Project Toolbar
new project is created, the presentation displayed in the window will be named OLV1 (OLV1 is the
default name for the one-line diagram presentation). You can change the name of the one-line diagram
presentation at any time.
Open
You can open an existing (previously saved) project file by clicking on the Open toolbar. If you are
editing a project and you want to open a previously saved project, you will be prompted to save the
current project.
In order to open a previously saved project while you are editing a project, the currently opened project
must be in Edit or Study Mode. Note: you CANNOT save or close a project when you are in Revision
Data (i.e., you must first change to Base Data).
A file named Example.OTI is included in the ETAP installation program. To open this file, click on Open
toolbar. This will open the Open Project File dialog box, as shown here.
Open Project File Dialog Box

The file Example.OTI is located in the folder in the ETAPS\PowerStn directory called Example. Select
the file and click on Open.
The Example file contains a sample project complete with a one-line diagram and sample values entered
into the component editors. Performing the actions described in the remainder of this user guide will help
you to become familiar with ETAP.
Look in
Select a network, drive, and directory, where the ETAP project file that you want to open is located.
File Name
Type or select the file name you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List
Files of Type box.
3-55
Overview
Project Toolbar
Files of Type
ETAP project files have an extension of .OTI.
Save
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or a Study Mode. If you have logged on as a
Project Editor or Base Editor, you CANNOT save a project while the project is in a revision level of data.
Saving a project can be done by clicking the Save tool.
Print
The Print tool will print the active interface views to your default printer.
To access the print options, open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu on the menu
bar.
Print Preview
Click the Print Preview tool to preview the print layout of the active interface view.
There are a variety of tools available to modify the print layout in the Print Preview dialog box.
Print Preview Dialog Box

Close
Click on this button to save the settings and layout, close, and return to the one-line diagram.
Print
Click on this button to bring up the Print Dialog box to start a print job.
3-56
Overview
Project Toolbar
Print Setup
Click on this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to select
the destination printer and its connection.
Print Options
Click on this button to display the Print Options dialog box.
Next/Previous Page
If the extent of a one-line diagram exceeds one page you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next/Previous Page buttons.
Toggle Display
Click on this button to toggle between a preview of one or two pages at once.
Zoom In/Out View
Zoom In/Out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your one-line diagram prior to
printing. Zoom In/Out View does not affect the print results.
Fit to Page
Fit the extent of the one-line diagram into the selected page size and orientation.
Zoom In/Out
Zooms in/out of the one-line diagram so that the size of the diagram changes with respect to the page size.
Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels in the Print
Preview are independent of zoom levels in the one-line diagram. The default magnification level is 10
units. You can enter a specific magnification factor in the field provided.
Scroll
Scroll the one-line diagram to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll functions are provided for centering and/or adjusting the location of the one-line
diagram with respect to the selected paper size for this one-line diagram. Once you print or close Print
Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of
scrolling in the one-line diagram. The default scroll factor is 10 units. However, you can specify the scroll
length in the fields provided.
Cut
The Cut tool will delete selected elements from the one-line diagram and place them in the Dumpster.
You can cut elements in Edit Mode only.
Copy
The Copy tool will copy selected elements from the one-line diagram and place them in a Dumpster with
new ID Names while all other data and properties are preserved. You can copy elements in Edit Mode
only.
Paste
To paste an element or a group of elements from the Dumpster, select a cell from the Dumpster and
activate the view (one-line diagram or underground raceway) you want the element to be pasted into, then
click the Paste tool.
3-57
Overview
Project Toolbar
If more than one element is pasted, the pasted one-line diagram will be grouped to facilitate dragging the
one-line diagram to the desired location. To ungroup the one line diagram, right-click on the pasted
elements and select ungroup from the menu.
You can paste elements in Edit Mode only. When an element is pasted from the Dumpster, ETAP assigns
a new ID to it while all other data and properties are preserved.
Pan
Use the Pan tool to move the project around in the window without changing the scale of the view. Click
the Pan tool and drag the project to the desired view. Press the Esc key to release the Zoom In tool.
Zoom In
The are several ways to use the Zoom In tool to enlarge the view of your project.
Click the Zoom In tool once and click the location on the project where you want to magnify the
view. The view magnifies once and the tool is released.
Double-click the Zoom In tool to magnify your view many times. Press the Esc key to release the
Zoom In tool.
Click the Zoom In tool and drag an area on your project to magnify.
Zoom Out
Click the Zoom Out tool to reduce the view of your project. Continue to click the Zoom Out tool to the
desired reduced view.
Back
Click on the Back button to return to the previous Zoom level. The button will be grayed when you first
open the project or you have reached the first zoom level.
Forward
Click on the Forward button to return to the next Zoom level. The button will be grayed out when you
first open the project or you have reached the last Zoom level.
Zoom to Fit Page

Use the Zoom to Fit Page tool to view the entire project in the window. If all the elements will not fit
within the window, the window will be set to maximum reduction with the view located to the windows
upper left-hand corner.
You can select an area of the one-line diagram or select elements by holding down the Control button and
clicking on the element(s), then click the Zoom to Fit tool to fit only the selected elements to the window.
Undo
Undo hiding an element or undo the movement of an element. Also undo moving, adding or deleting a
connection. You may not use Undo to remove an element.
3-58
Overview
Project Toolbar
Redo
When undo is used, graphical Redo allows user to redo undone tasks.
Text Box
Click and move to the OLV, UGS, or Star presentation to drop a text box. Double click on the text box
to add text or fields from the editors to display in this box.
Show Grid Lines

Click on the Show Grid Lines tool to display grid lines on the one-line diagram. The grid is zoomdependent and will be enlarged or reduced proportionately with the elements when they are enlarged or
reduced. The grid size can be changed in the Edit Display Options.
Check Circuit Continuity

Use the Check Circuit Continuity tool to activate or de-activate this feature. If the Continuity Check is on,
ETAP determines which element in a presentation is energized. An energized element is an element,
which is connected by an uninterrupted path to a swing source (generator or utility). Elements, which are
not energized, are displayed in gray (grayed out) on your screen.
Out of Service elements are displayed grayed out if the Continuity Check is on, otherwise only their
annotations are displayed in gray. Motors and loads with Spare status are always shown with gray
annotations.
ETAP determines whether every branch in your system is energized or hot. An energized branch has an
uninterrupted path from an energized bus to another bus. A branch that is not connected to one energized
bus is considered de-energized. A branch is considered hot if it has one uninterrupted path to an energized
bus but its other terminal is not connected to another bus. When you run studies only energized buses,
branches, and loads are considered. De-energized elements, along with their connections, can be printed
in gray, black, or not printed at all. You can choose to print de-energized elements from Print Options.
Get Template
Select pre-developed one-line diagrams to insert into the presentation. Template files can be created
manually using the Add to OLV Templates icon or can be taken from the ETAP default templates. The
template files are created in a .xml format and are saved under the template folder located in the main
ETAP directory. Select any .xml template file in the folder and place the one-line diagram template in the
presentation. Select the template using the exact template IDs and/or properties or the default IDs and/or
properties. Templates are saved in the directory and therefore can be added to any project.
Add to Template
After creating a one-line diagram, the user can save the whole one-line or any section of the one-line
diagram to a template. The template will contain all electrical properties and IDs for the elements
included. The user can use this template in any project created. The saved template will save as a .xml
file.
Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks give you the flexibility of linking any document or web page to the ETAP project. Datasheets,
tables, pictures, manufacturer web pages, maintenance schedules, and much more information can be
linked directly to specific devices on the one-line diagram, raceways system, or to different presentations.
3-59
Overview
Project Toolbar
Click on the Hyperlinks tool. Drag-and-drop the hyperlink on any device on the one-line diagram,
raceway, or presentation including composite motors and networks.
Once you drop the hyperlink, the Hyperlinks Editor opens.
Enter the description, address, and tool tip.
Click on the Add button. If you want to add more hyperlinks, enter the information again and click the
add button to add the hyperlink to the list. When you complete entering the Hyperlinks, click on the OK
button.
If you placed the hyperlinks on the presentation background, the description text is displayed on the
diagram in black and the tool tip is displayed when you place your mouse cursor over the link. Your
cursor changes when you are over a hyperlink.
If you placed the hyperlink on a device, the tool tip is added to the device tool tip. In the image below, the
tool tip was entered as "Energy Cost Documents."
Using Hyperlinks
To activate a hyperlink placed on the presentation background, double-click on the hyperlink. To activate
a device hyperlink(s), right-click on the device and select the hyperlink(s). A menu is displayed listing the
hyperlinks for the selected device.
Editing\Removing Hyperlinks
To edit or remove a hyperlink, you need to access the Hyperlink Editor. To access the Hyperlink Editor,
click on the Hyperlink tool and drop it on the device you want the link to be edited\removed from or on
the link text on the presentation background.
To edit a hyperlink, click on the hyperlink in the list. The address, description, and tool tip appear on the
editor. Edit the necessary information and then click on the Add button. The hyperlink is edited.
To remove a hyperlink, select the hyperlink from the hyperlink list and click on the Delete button. The
hyperlink is removed.
Power Calculator
The Power Calculator relates MW, Mvar, MVA, kV, Amps, and %PF together for 3-phase systems and
displays them in either kVA or MVA units. You have the option to keep one of the four variables (MVA,
MW, Mvar, or %PF) fixed and calculate the rest.
3-60
Overview
Project Toolbar
Find
Use the Find tool to locate a device on the one-line diagram. Click on the Find tool and enter the ID of an
element to be found.
Help
Click on the Help tool and click any where on the screen to access help about the item you clicked on.
Double-click on the Help tool to access the ETAP Help files.
Theme Editor
Use this tool to customize the look of the One Line Diagram presentations. In the Theme Editor you
create customized themes and change element color squemes, annotations colors, background, grid color,
and grid size. You can display faulted buses based by symbol or color and can also change the
connectors wire type and color for single phase systems. Also create customized themes based on voltage
ratings, area, grounding type (solid, low-Z, high-Z, un-grounded), or earthing type (TT, TN, IT, NEC,
earthing elements).
Theme Name
This drop-down list allows you to switch between themes defined, named and saved in the Theme Editor.
Colors and styles are automatically switched to the last color configuration selected for the Theme Name.
Theme Color Coding

Select the active color code for the energized conductors as defined in the Theme Editor per each Theme
Name. The energized conductors can be color coded based on the following:
Standard Colors
Voltage
Area
Grounding
Earthing
3-61
Overview
Project Toolbar
Colors Normal
Select any individual or group of elements and click on Colors Normal to overwrite any custom color
editing and restore the defined colors per the Theme Color Coding corresponding to the Theme Name.
Colors Custom
Select any individual or group of elements and click on Colors Custom to customize the coloring for any
individual or group of elements. This will overwrite the custom color defined by the Theme Color
Coding per Theme Name.
3-62
Overview
Study Case Toolbar
3.18 Study Case Toolbar

This toolbar is displayed automatically when you are in one of the study modes. The Study Case toolbar
allows you to control and manage the study solution parameters and output reports.
New Study Case

Click this button to create new study cases. You can create unlimited study cases for each type of
analysis. New study cases can either be copied from a default study case or copied from any other
existing study case.
Study Case
The Study Case drop-down list lets you select a previously created study case name to display. The
solution parameters specified in the displayed study case are used when you run a new study. To create a
new study case, select Study Cases from the Project View and right-click the desired study case type such
as load flow, short-circuit, motor starting, transient stability, or underground raceway systems.
Edit Study Case

Click the Edit Study Case button to edit the selected study case. Study Case Editors include Load Flow,
Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, Transient Stability, and underground Raceway System, for example.
Output Report
The Output Report drop-down list lets you select a previously created output report and display it. When
you run a study, the displayed file name will be used for the output report and plot. To create a new file
name for your reports, select Prompt from the Output Report drop-down list and perform a study. ETAP
will prompt you to enter a new file name for the output report and plots.
List Output Reports

Click this button to list all ETAP output reports. From this drop-down list, you can preview all previously
created output reports, which can be in the Crystal Reports format or text reports.
Report Format
From this drop-down list, select a complete report or a particular part of a complete report to view.
Independent of the language version of ETAP being used at the time of executing a study, output reports
are available in English, Spanish, Chinese, Japanese, Russian, Portuguese, and German.
View Report Manager

Click the View Report Manager button to display the contents of the current output file. Crystal Reports
format is used to browse and print your customized report.
3-63
Overview
Message Log
3.19 Message Log

ETAP uses the message log to record activities when you are working with your ETAP project. For
example, ETAP records an entry whenever you open or close a project. In addition, ETAP records entries
when you delete OLE objects or update OLE links and whenever some internal errors are encountered.
The majority of use for the message log is reserved for the online operations (ETAP Real-Time Systems).
Message Logger
The display size of the message log can be changed by pulling the top end up or down. For most
applications you can minimize the display size of the message log to zero.
The operation of the message log is completely transparent. ETAP automatically maintains the log. You
may, however, customize the log by setting the maximum number of entries that ETAP can display in the
message log at any given time. Additionally, you may set the size of the text logs generated by ETAP. To
customize the message log, see Section 1.6, INI File. The default entries for MsgLog Size and Max
Display Msgs are:
MsgLog Size=128
Max Display Msgs=255
3-64
Overview
Tutorial
3.20 Tutorial
This tutorial provides a brief overview of the basic operation of the ETAP program. Once you finish this
tutorial, you will be familiar with some the key features and capabilities of the program and the various
modules available for performing power system analysis.
Starting ETAP
1. Start ETAP by double-clicking the icon on your desktop.
Opening the Example Project File

Follow these steps to open the EXAMPLE project file:
1. Type your User Name in the Logon Editor, and select the Project Editor option in the Select
Access Level Editor.
As previously mentioned, ETAP organizes all work as projects. Each project provides all the necessary
tools and support for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. Projects consist of electrical
systems that require unique electrical components and interconnections. The Example project includes a
one-line diagram of an electrical system. Notice the toolbars on the top and the right-hand side of the oneline diagram.
One-Line Diagram and Editors

ETAP provides a fully graphical user interface for constructing your one-line diagram. There are many
command options in the interface, including the following:
Graphically add, delete, relocate, and connect elements.

Zoom in or out.
Display grid off or on.
Change element size and orientation.
Change symbols.
Hide or show protective devices.
3-65
Overview
Tutorial
Enter properties.
Lock and unlock element properties.
Set operating status.
The ETAP one-line diagram is a one-line representation of a power system. The one-line diagram is the
starting point for all studies. You can graphically construct your electrical system by connecting the
buses, branches, motors, generators, and protective devices in any order from the one-line diagrams Edit
toolbar. You can connect the elements to the buses graphically or from their editors. You can double-click
elements to open their editors and edit the engineering properties, such as ratings, settings, and loading,
connections.
3-66
Overview
Tutorial
Editors
1. Double-click the Power Grid (Utility) symbol on the one-line diagram and view the Utility
Editor. This is where you enter data for the utility machine model.
2. Select different pages of this editor and look over the type of information that you can provide to
model a utility machine.
3. Click OK and close the editor.
4. Double-click other elements and explore their editors. Each available element has a customized
editor.
5. Double-click the synchronous motor Syn1 and view its editor. This is where you enter data used
for synchronous motor models.
3-67
Overview
Tutorial
Editors are designed so that you can enter a minimum amount of information and still be able to run
different studies. Voltage and HP data are all you need to perform most studies. If you are interested in
modeling a motor dynamically for motor acceleration or transient stability studies, you need to enter more
detailed information such as the motor model, inertia, and load model.
An exercise that illustrates this point is included at the end of this tutorial.
6. Click OK and close the editor.
3-68
Overview
Tutorial
Composite Networks
A composite network is an aggregate of all components in a subsystem, since it can contain buses,
branches, loads, sources, and even other composite networks or composite motors. You can nest your
subsystems to an unlimited number of layers. This allows you to construct systems and nest elements by
their voltage levels, by physical layout, by the geometrical requirements of elements, by study
requirements, by relays and control device requirements, by logical layout of elements, etc. You have full
control over how the system should be nested.
1. Double-click the composite network Sub3 Net. The Sub3 Net view, which is a one-line diagram
nested inside the main one-line diagram, is displayed.
2. To change the number of pins, right-click Sub3 Net and select Pins.
3-69
Overview
Tutorial
Composite networks can have 4, 8, 12, 16, or 20 external connection points (pins). These include
the top pin (~Top1), left pins (~Left1 to ~Left9), right pins (~Rt1 to ~Rt9), and bottom pin
(~Bot1).
3.
Right-click the background of the composite network Sub3 Net to hide or show unconnected
pins.
Composite Network Sub3 Net with 8 Pins
The pins for the composite motors can be connected to any bus, branch, load, or protective device. Once a
pin is connected internally or externally to an element, it becomes a proxy for that element and all
connection rules for the element apply to the connected pin. To illustrate this, both AC and DC elements
are added to Sub3 Net and are displayed here.
3-70
Overview
Tutorial
The number of levels where you can nest composite networks inside of other composite networks is
unlimited. There is no limitation on the number of elements that you can include inside a composite
network. The user interface characteristics of composite networks are the same as the one-line diagram
where you can include both AC and DC elements.
Composite Motors
1. Double-click the composite motor Comp Mtr1. The Comp Mtr1 view, which is a one-line
diagram nested inside the main one-line diagram, appears.
Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors in the system. The elements that you can
include inside a composite motor are:
AC Composite Motor
DC Composite Motor
Induction Motor
Synchronous Motor
Lumped Load
Static Load
MOV
Composite Motor
Circuit Breaker (LV and HV)
Fuse
Contactor
Switch
Instrument Transformers
Relays
DC Motor
DC Lumped Load
DC Static Load
DC Elementary Diagram
DC Composite Motor
DC Circuit Breaker
DC Fuse
You can nest composite motors inside each other for an unlimited number of levels.
3-71
Overview
Tutorial
One-Line Diagram Menu
The One-Line Diagram menu bar above is displayed when a one-line diagram is active. The One-Line
Diagram menu bar contains a list of menus, each of which contain a drop-down list of commands. Some
of the menu commands also have pulldown submenus (an arrow pointing to the right denotes a submenu).
For example, you can select Project, point to Settings, then select the Data Type command.
Project Toolbar
The Project toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts for many of the commonly used commands in
ETAP.
Mode Toolbar
In general, ETAP has three modes of operation: Edit, AC Study, and DC Study. The AC Study Mode
consists of the following:
Balanced Load Flow

Short Circuit
Motor Starting
Harmonics
Transient Stability
Protective Device Coordination (ETAP Star)
Optimal Load Flow
Switching Sequence Management
The DC Study mode consists of DC Load Flow, DC Short-Circuit, and Battery Sizing Analysis.
3-72
Overview
Tutorial
Edit Mode
Edit Mode enables you to build your one-line diagram, change system connections, edit engineering
properties, save your project, and generate schedule reports in Crystal Reports formats. The Edit toolbars
for both AC and DC elements will be displayed to the right side of the ETAP window when this mode is
active.
To Add Elements on the One-Line Diagram View

1. Click any of the elements on the AC Edit or DC Edit toolbars. The mouse pointer changes to the
element button icon.
2. On the one-line view, move the pointer to the desired location and click. The element is added to
the one-line view.
To Connect Elements in the One-Line View

For this example, add a bus and a transformer to the one-line view by doing the following:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the top pin of the transformer so that a red square is displayed.
2. Left-click and drag the transformer to the bus so that the bus is displayed red.
3. Release the mouse button. The connection is completed.
3-73
Overview
Tutorial
Study Modes
Study Modes allow you to create and modify study cases, perform system analysis, and view output
reports and plots. When a study mode is active (selected), the Study toolbar for the selected study is
displayed on the right side of the ETAP window.
You can run studies, transfer data, and change display options by clicking the buttons on the Study
toolbar. As an example, Load Flow Analysis Mode is described next.
Working in Load Flow Analysis Mode

1. Go to Load Flow Mode by clicking the Load Flow Analysis button on the Mode toolbar.
Note: The Load Flow toolbar is now displayed on the right side of the ETAP. Also, the top
toolbar becomes the Study Case toolbar.
2. Click the Run Load Flow button on the Load Flow toolbar.
The study results will be displayed on the one-line diagram.
3. Review the calculation results and familiarize yourself with the type of
information displayed on your one-line diagram.
4. Click the Display Options button and explore the variety of options available for the displayed
results.
5. Click the Alert button to display critical and marginal limit violations for the selected output
report.
6. Click the Report Manager button to view or print any part of the output report.
3-74
Overview
Tutorial
7. Click the Edit Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar and study the solution parameters and
alert settings available for load flow analysis.
After you run load flow, results are displayed on the one-line diagram.
3-75
Overview
Tutorial
Operating
Bus Voltage
Capacity
Exceeded
Motor
Terminal
Voltage
3-76
Marginal
UnderVoltage Bus
(color defined by user)
Overview
Tutorial
ETAP Program Tutorial

Complete this tutorial to familiarize yourself with how the program works. In this tutorial, you will add a
new 13.2 kV induction motor to the system and run a Load Flow study. This tutorial also shows the
minimum data required to perform studies for a motor.
1. Click the Edit Mode button of the Mode toolbar.
2. Add an induction motor to the one-line diagram.

3. Connect the motor to the bus Sub2B.
4. Double-click the motor. The motors editor is displayed.

5. Go to the Nameplate page of the Motor Editor.
Note: The motor voltage is automatically set to 13.2 kV since it was connected to a 13.8 kV bus.
You can change the voltage.
6. Enter 2000 in the HP text box and click in any other text box. The program automatically enters
typical nameplate data for the specified motor size.
3-77
Overview
Tutorial
7. Click OK.
8. On the Mode toolbar, click the Load Flow Analysis button. ETAP changes to Load Flow Mode.
9. On the Load Flow toolbar, click the Run Load Flow button.
Note: The study case (solution parameters) for this run is LF 100A and the output report file name is
LF100RPT.
3-78
Overview
Tutorial
10. Compare the results displayed below for before and after Mtr2 is added. In ETAP, use the Display
Options to change the display.
3-79
Overview
Tutorial
Energized Branch Required for System calculation

In ETAP, all system calculations, such as Load Flow, Short-Circuit, and Motor Starting, require to set up
the system Y matrix. In order to set up this matrix, the energized system must include at least one branch.
A branch in ETAP is a two-terminal or three-terminal element that has non-zero impedance values, such
as a cable, line, two-winding transformer, and three-winding transformer, etc. A tie circuit breaker is not
considered as a branch since it has zero impedance value.
Considering the system given in Figure 1 below, it has two buses but no branches. CB-1 is a tie
circuit branch with zero impedance value. When you run the Load Flow calculation in ETAP, it
will give you a message indicating the system has no energized branches.
Figure 1. System without Energized Branch

In case you need to perform system calculations on a system that has no energized branches, you
can add a dummy branch and a dummy bus to the system as shown in Figure 2. ETAP will then
carry out system studies on the system. Please note that addition of this dummy branch does not
affect calculations and it will provide the same results as your original system.
3-80
Overview
Tutorial
Figure 2. System with An Energized Dummy Branch
3-81
Chapter 4
Options (Preferences)
ETAP contains initialization files (INI files) that are used to set various preferences and parameters for
the local PC where the software resides. These changes can be as simple as defining a favorite project to
open automatically, or as varied as selecting Arc Flash analysis results to be also sent to MS Excel format.
ETAP automatically maintains a PSGRID.INI and an ETAPS.INI file in your application folder (ETAP
700 or current version). Normally, you would not need to make any changes in this file. However, you
may want to manipulate certain fields to customize ETAPs behavior.
4-1
Preferences
Options Editor
4.1 Options (Preferences) Editor

Entries in ETAPS.INI can be changed by using the Options (Preferences) Editor. The advantage of using
this interface is that the majority of the changes are applied to ETAP without requiring the software to
restart.
This editor can be accessed from the Tools Menu within the ETAP environment as shown below.
4-2
Preferences
OTIGraph
Sorting
By default the entries for ETAPS.INI are shown in a categorized view based on the analysis module, oneline diagram, printing or any other functionality.
If the name of the entry is known, then you may also search for it alphabetically by sorting the list of INI
entries as shown below.
4-3
Preferences
OTIGraph
Description
Click on the INI entry to view a brief description as well as ranges and default values for that field.
The following categories have been included to allow quicker access to a particular entry.
CATEGORY NAME
Battery Sizing / Discharge
Control Circuit Diagram
ETAP Application
Harmonic Analysis
Load Flow
Motor Starting
One-Line
Optimal Capacitor
Placement
DESCRIPTION
This group contains INI entries that affect Battery
Sizing and Discharge calculation
This group contains INI entries that affect Control
Circuit Diagram Load Flow calculation
This group contains INI entries that control the
ETAP application
This group contains INI entries that affect
Harmonic Load Flow calculations
This group contains INI entries that affect Load
Flow calculations
This group contains INI entries that affect Motor
Starting calculations
This group contains INI entries that change the
behavior of the ETAP one-line diagram
This group contains INI entries that affect Optimal
Capacitor Placement calculations
4-4
Preferences
Optimal Power Flow
Printing / Plotting
Project Database
Real-Time
Reliability
Short Circuit
Star
Transient Stability
UGS
OTIGraph
This group contains INI entries that affect Optimal
Power Flow calculations
This group contains INI entries that changes the
print style of the ETAP one-line diagram
This group contains INI entries that sets how ETAP
handles ODBC compliant databases
This group contains entries that are used when
ETAP is running in Real-Time Mode
Reliability Assessment calculations
This group contains INI entries that affect ANSI
and IEC Short-Circuit calculations
This group contains INI entries that affect display
and behavior of ETAP Star and ARTTS
This group contains INI entries that affect Transient
Stability calculations
Underground Raceway System calculations
Unbalanced Load Flow calculations
If you are manually editing the ETAPS.INI file, you will notice that there are four sections in this file
[ETAP], [AppVariables], [Colors] and [Recent File List]. You are permitted make entries in three of
these sections [ETAP], [AppVariables], and [Colors]. The allowable entries below are listed by section.
Default values for the indicated entries are shown below. You will NOT find all of these entries in your
INI file since ETAP automatically use the default values without making an entry in the INI file.
4-5
Preferences
PSGRID
4.2 PSGRID.INI
This initialization file referred to Ground Grid Systems. If a Ground Grid is created within ETAP, the
PSGRID.INI file will be automatically created.
The first entry in the INI file is:
[Grid]
Initialized=1
If this entry is set to 1, then ETAP recognizes that Ground Grid Systems have been activated on the local
PC.
FEM Timeout=1800
FEM Timeout indicates the maximum time allowed (in seconds) for a FEM calculation to be completed.
Minimum allowable time is 0. Maximum allowable time is 86400 (twenty four hours). The default
setting allows 30 minutes.
IEEE Timeout=60
IEEE Timeout indicates the maximum time allowed (in seconds) for an IEEE calculation to be completed.
Minimum allowable time is 0. Maximum allowable time is 86400 (twenty four hours). The default
setting allows 60 seconds.
4-6
Preferences
OTIGraph
4.3 OTIGraph.INI
The default Star View Plot Options settings (Defaults Plot Options Star View) are saved in the
OTIGraph.INI file. The location of OTIGraph.INI file can be specified in Options (Preferences) editor
(Tools Options) by setting ETAP Star TCC Plot Options Path located in ETAP Application
category. The location of the INI file can be set to App, User, Common, or Local.
App
Select App to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in ETAP application folder (i.e. ETAP 7.0.0 or
current version). The ETAP application folder is set the path chosen during installation.
User
Select User to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Application Data folder. For example, if a
user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John
Smith\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Common
Select Common to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in All Users Application Data folder. The
OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0
(or current version).
Local
Select Local to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Local Settings Application Data
folder. For example, if a user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and
Settings\John Smith\Local Settings\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Application Data and Local Settings are hidden folders. Windows folder options should be set
accordingly to view these folders and the OTIGraph.INI file
4-7
Preferences
OTIGraph
Changing the OTIGraph.INI file location in Options (Preferences) editor requires ETAP to be restarted
for the changes to take effect. When ETAP application is restarted, a new OTIGraph.INI file, with
default ETAP settings (factory settings) is created in the new location (if it does not already exist).
Note: In order to use your existing/customized Star View Plot Option defaults, it is necessary to manually
copy the OTIGraph.INI file from the old location to the new location.
For more details on the default Star View Plot options settings, refer Chapter 17 Star View.
4-8
Preferences
Themes
4.4 Themes (OTH file)

The Theme Manager allows (Project Toolbar) changing color and line styles for devices, device
connectors and one-line background. New themes created are saved as .OTH files (i.e. Theme1.oth). The
location of theme files can be specified in Options (Preferences) editor (Tools Options) by setting
Theme File Location located in ETAP Application category. The location of the OTH file can be set to
App, User, Common, or Local.
App
Select App to access the theme files located in ETAP application folder (i.e. ETAP 7.0.0 or current
version). The ETAP application folder is set the path chosen during installation.
User
Select User to access the theme files located in users Application Data folder. For example, if a user
logs in as John Smith, the theme files are saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John Smith\Application
Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Common
Select Common to access the theme files located in All Users Application Data folder. The theme
files are saved in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current
version).
Local
Select Local to access the theme files located in users Local Settings Application Data folder. For
example, if a user logs in as John Smith, the theme files are saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John
Smith\Local Settings\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
4-9
Preferences
Theme
accordingly to view these folders and the theme files.
Changing the theme file location in Options (Preferences) editor requires ETAP to be restarted for the
changes to take effect. Note: In order to use your existing/customized themes, it is necessary to manually
copy the theme files from the old location to the new location.
For more details on the Theme Manager settings, refer Chapter 9 One-Line Diagram GUI.
Notes:
1. The location of mslog.txt and psrept.log files can also be set in the Options (Preferences)
editor to App, User, Common or Local as explained above for OTIGrpah.INI and Themes.
2. If older versions of ETAP do not exist (new installation of ETAP 7.0 or current version), the
default locations for Themes, OTIGraph.ini, Msglog.txt and Psrept.log files set in the ETAP
Preferences editor are:
Themes - App
OTIGraph - User
4-10
Preferences
Theme
Msglog.txt - User
Psrept.log - User
3. If one or more versions of ETAP exist (upgrade to ETAP 7.0 or current version), the default
locations for Themes, OTIGraph.ini, Msglog.txt and Psrept.log files set in the ETAP Preferences
editor are:
Themes - App
OTIGraph - App
Msglog.txt - User
Psrept.log - User
4-11
Preferences
ETAPS
4.5 ETAPS.INI
[ETAP PowerStation]
AllowProjectRename=1
A default value of 1 indicates automatic renaming of project files when they are copied outside of ETAP.
ArcFlashMaxDuration=2
This entry specifies the number of plotted points in the Arc-Flash Analysis Tabulated Report. The default
value is 2 (120 Cycles) which equals 2 sec @ 60 Hz and 2.4 sec @ 50 Hz. Two extra points for every
second past the default value will be added. The maximum value is 999 seconds.
AutoRecover=1
This entry creates a temporary entry in each subsequent project database that is opened by your local PC.
This entry tells ETAP that there is an unregistered One-Line-Element. This allows ETAP to deal with the
element. Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to report the error and shut down the application rather
than dealing with the unregistered One-Line-Element.
AverageSourceBranchNumber=10
This entry indicates the average source contributing branches on a faulted bus. A source contributing
branch contains short-circuit current from a power grid or a synchronous machine. The range for this
entry is 5 999.
Calc3CCableG1ByIECMethod=1
When the NeherMcGrath Method is selected in the Cable Derating Study Case for UGS calculations,
this entry indicates to ETAP to use the same method specified in IEC 60287 to calculate the geometric
factor G1 for insulation thermal resistance calculation for 3/C cable.
ConversionY=40
ConversionX=20
Shown above are the conversion default factors for setting element layout in a one-line diagram when
converting ETAP DOS database files into ETAP. Reduction of the Conversion Y value results in a
vertically compressed bus distance. Reducing the Conversion X value results in horizontally compressed
bus distances.
CzNetPins=4
This controls the number of pins initially assigned to a new-style composite network when the network is
newly created. Valid values are 4-20.
DisplaySynMachineAbsoluteRotorAngleOrVoltageAngleDifference=1
If this is set to 1 the results for the synchronous generator absolute rotor angle plots stay the same as
previous versions. The program will plot the rotor angle deviation from the initial angle determined
during initial steady-state conditions. This plot indicates if the generator rotor speeds up or slows down. If
this entry is set to 0, the program will plot the difference between the terminal voltage angle and the rotor
angle. This plot is useful to see how much power angle deviation occurs during a transient event.
DrawDown=1
DrawLeftRight=1
4-12
Preferences
ETAPS
DrawArrow=1
These values indicate the default values for the position of the branch flows (power and current) and
arrows on the one-line diagram. DSN Version=2
ETAP maintains and updates the ODBC System Data Source Name version for 'otiaccess' automatically.
This value will be set to 2 during the installation of ETAP. Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to
create an ODBC System Data Source 'otiaccess' during startup. Setting the value to 1 will cause ETAP to
reconfigure the ODBC System Data Source 'otiaccess'.
Dump OL IncX=15
Dump OL IncY=15
Dump OL MaxX=3000
When a database audit is performed, ETAP may recover orphaned database items to a Dumpster cell.
The recovered one-line diagram elements are placed in rows with Dump OL IncX distance apart up to a
maximum width of Dump OL MaxX with Dump OL IncY distance between the rows, i.e., Dump OL
IncX controls the X-interval, Dump OL IncY controls the Y-interval, and Dump OL MaxX is the
maximum X of successive elements recovered to the Dumpster. For example, given the default values
(above), ETAP would place the first element at X=15, Y=15; the second at X=30, Y=15, etc., until the
3000 logical units is encountered. At that point, the next elements would be placed at X=15, Y=30, and
next at X=30, Y=30, etc.
Dump UGS IncX=20

Dump UGS IncY=20
Dump UGS MaxX=3000
When a database audit is performed, ETAP may recover orphaned database items to a Dumpster cell.
The recovered UGS elements are placed in rows with Dump UGS IncX distance apart up to a maximum
width of Dump UGS MaxXwith Dump UGS IncY distance between the rows, i.e., Dump UGS IncX
controls the X-interval, Dump UGS IncY controls the Y-interval, and Dump UGS MaxXis the maximum
X of successive elements recovered to the Dumpster. For example, given the default values (above),
ETAP would place the first element at X=20, Y=20; the second at X=40, Y=20, etc., until the 3000
logical units is encountered. At that point, the next elements would be placed at X=20, Y=40, next at
X=40, Y=40, etc.
EstimateAtFixedAmp=1
This entry is used to interpolate points from battery characteristic curves for battery sizing and discharge
calculations. If this entry is set to 1, the interpolation will be done at a fixed amp value; otherwise, it is
done at fixed AH or Time depending the value of UseAH_AmpCurve entry also in the INI file.
IncludeFLAInSCMaxThrough=1
This entry indicates to the Short-Circuit program to include (or exclude) the rated Full Load Amps (FLA)
of induction/synchronous machines in the calculation of the maximum through short-circuit current duty
(momentary or interrupting) of protective devices directly connected to those machines. If this entry is set
to 0, the FLA will not be considered (this includes generator circuit breakers). This entry only applies for
ANSI Short-Circuit calculations (IEC Short-Circuit does not consider the FLA and thus is not affected by
this option).
Initialized=1
If this entry is set to 1, then ETAP has been activated on your local PC.
4-13
Preferences
ETAPS
LoadBusKVMatch=40
LoadBusKVMatch is the percent deviation allowed between load voltages and the bus kV to which the
load is attached. The allowable range is 1 to 99.
MaxBusAngMismatch=1
This entry defines the maximum angle mismatch at a bus. When the transformer angle shift is considered
in a calculation, it can cause angle mismatch in a looped system if angle shifts of transformers involved in
a loop are not compatible, which will cause circulating power flow in the loop. ETAP identifies such a
situation and informs the user before a system study. The value defined by this entry is used as the
threshold for checking bus angle mismatch. The allowable range is 0 to 360.
MaxBusIniAngDiff=10
This entry defines the maximum difference between the bus initial voltage angle from the Bus Editor and
the angle calculated with consideration of transformer angle shift, for determining the initial voltage angle
used in load flow calculation. In load flow calculation, if the Apply XFMR angle shift option is
checked and the bus voltage is used as the initial value, ETAP calculates bus voltage angle considering
transformer angle shift. The calculated bus angle is referenced at the angle of first swing machine. Then
this calculated voltage angle is compared with the bus initial voltage angle displayed in the Bus Editor. If
the difference between the two angles is smaller than the MaxBusIniAngDiff value, the angle from the
Bus Editor is used as the initial bus voltage angle in the calculation; otherwise, the calculated angle is
used as the initial bus voltage angle.
MaximumPhaseShift=1
The continuity check will determine whether a looped transformer (2W or 3W) has a mismatched phase
angle shift by comparing the phase shifts with the allowable shift specified in this entry. ETAP checks
for the violation when running the following studies: SC ANSI Max, 4 Cycle, Min, IEC 60909, and 1Ph
Device Duty. This is also checked for Sequence of Operation and 1Ph ANSI Arc Flash.
MaxIterForAmpCalc=200
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations for the Underground Raceway System
(UGS) for Uniform-Temperature and Uniform-Ampacity calculations.
MaxIterForCableSizeCalc=1000
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations performed by the Underground System
(UGS) for Cable Sizing calculations.
MaxIterForTempCalc=50
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations performed by the Underground Raceway
System (UGS) for Steady-State and Transient Temperature calculations.
Max Open LightRS=10

Max Open HeavyRS=10
These values indicate the default number of database handlers kept open at any time by ETAP in the
current session. The default values should be sufficient for most cases involving ODBC drivers for
Microsoft Access and Microsoft SQL Server.
Due to the limitation imposed on the Microsoft ODBC Driver for Oracle (driver version 2.00.006325),
Oracle users may need to reduce the aforementioned values to 5 (set Max Open LightRS=5 and Max
Open HeavyRS=5).
4-14
Preferences
ETAPS
MaxSourcelfLevel=3
This entry defines the number of levels of source contributing branches for a faulted bus. A source
contributing branch contains short-circuit current from a power grid or a synchronous machine. The
short-circuit currents for these branches are calculated by the Arc Flash program to determine arcing
current clearing time. The range for this entry is 1 20.
MaxTransientStep=5000
This is the default value for the maximum number of steps for the Underground System (UGS) for the
Transient Temperature calculations.
MinOLVScale=1
Some video cards may have difficulties drawing ETAPs one-line diagrams at their minimum scaling
factors. These difficulties may even cause application errors on some computers. If you experience these
difficulties, try setting the MinOLVScale to a higher number. Allowable values are 0 through 16. A
value of 16 effectively disables scaling and zooming on the one-line diagrams.
Mouse Wheel Timer=400

The Mouse Wheel scrolling is driven by a timer whose value is set by this INI entry. Normally, this value
does not need to be changed. If, however, you want to increase or decrease the initial speed, it may be
changed within the following bounds (minimum = 10ms, maximum=1000MS)
MsgLogInitialSize=12
MSSoftStarterConstSOnly=0
When this value is 1, the soft starter input load (to terminal bus) is always treated as constant power.
When this value is 0, it is modeled as constant power load if the bus voltage is higher than the control
settings, otherwise it is modeled as constant Z load.
MSSoftStarterLFEpsilon=0.005
This is the threshold value used to check convergence of load flow calculations for adjusting soft starter
operating values at a given time. The value is in pu for voltage. (Range is from 0.0000001 to 1.0)
MSSoftStarterLFMaxIterNo=100
This is the maximum iteration number used in Load Flow calculations for adjusting soft starter operating
values at a given time.
NonLoadBusKVMatch=40
The nominal kV of the two terminal buses (From Bus and To Bus) of a branch, excluding a transformer,
should be the same or very close. This field defines the maximum difference allowed between the
nominal kV values of such two buses. If the difference is more than this limit (defaulted to 40%), an error
message will be given and ETAP exits the calculation. User can set it to a different value to tighten or
relax the error checking.
For transformers this limit is used to compare transformer rated kV with the nominal kV of the terminal
bus on the same side.
OLDSpaceManagerCols =10
OLDSpaceManagerRows=10
CxSpaceManagerCols=10
CxSpaceManagerRows=10
4-15
Preferences
ETAPS
These entries dimension the internal space manager used by the one-line diagram views or composite
network views to speed up redrawing. The columns and rows define the internal resolution for the space
manager. Higher values of columns and rows will result in faster redrawing, but requires additional
memory. Additional memory is allocated on the basis of Rows * Columns.
ReloadLastProject=0
When set to 1, ETAP will automatically load the last project that was open.
Report Font / Report Scaling Factor

When viewing a localized version of ETAP, make sure the following settings are applied:
Localized ETAP
Report Font Scaling Factor (%)
Report Font
90
ReportFontTypeFace= ;
OLVPrintFooterFontTypeface=
Japanese
90
ReportFontTypeFace= ;
OLVPrintFooterFontTypeface=;
PlotGraphFontTypeface=
Spanish
90
Times New Roman
Chinese
If installing multiple language output reports, also including Portuguese and German, with the English
version, the default Report Font Scaling Factor will be set to 90. If only English output reports are
selected, the default will be set to 100.
Note: To view any output reports in a language other than English, make sure the operating system
contains the proper language package settings for that selection. Refer to Chapter 2 - ETAP Installation Step 10 for details regarding the language package settings for each type of operating system.
Save Initial Bus Updates=0

The initial bus updates obtained from Load Flow calculations are not written to the database by default.
Setting this value to 1 will cause ETAP to write the values to the project database when it is saved.
Scrub Database=0
When this is set to 0, ETAP will not automatically scrub the database during startup.
Scrub Database=1
When this is set to 1, ETAP will scrub the Database Automatically during startup.
The Scrub Database function uses the Compact Database utility provided by Microsoft Access. As you
change data in a database, the database file can become fragmented and use more disk space than is
necessary. Additionally, items deleted, from your one-line diagram and Dumpster, are retained within the
database file until the database is Scrubbed. The Compact Database utility will compact your database
to de-fragment existing data and remove deleted data from the database file. Compacted databases are
usually smaller in size and generally run faster.
The Scrub Database function is only available for Microsoft Access 7.0 and higher databases. ETAP will
automatically scrub the database when converting 1.4.1 project files to 2.0 project files.
4-16
Preferences
ETAPS
SerializeAudit=1
This entry verifies all elements in the serialized stream and reports errors on unexpected elements found
in the stream. Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to skip the verification process.
SpanDischDutyCycleToOneMinute=1
IEEE Standard 485 requires that when sizing a battery, is a discrete sequence load can be established, the
load for a one minute period should be assumed to be the maximum current at any instant within that
minute. Hence, the maximum load is expanded to the whole minimum time span of one minute.
In ETAP Calculation of battery discharge, if SpanDischDutyCycleToOneMinute=1, the minimum span
of 1 minute will be applied to the battery duty cycle. If SpanDischDutyCycleToOneMinute=0, the
actual battery duty cycle will be used in the discharge calculation. The default value is set to 1. This
gives more conservative results. Please note that for battery sizing calculations, the minimum time span
of 1 minute is used for calculations.
Star FitMaxScaleFactor
Integer value, default = 400
This is the maximum scale factor that will be used by Star when Zooming the one-line diagram elements
to fit in the lower corner of the Star View.
Star FitBottomPercent
This is the percent of the graph width and height that will be used to display the one-line diagram
elements when zooming in on the one-line diagram to fit in the lower corner of the Star View.
Star GroupByDefault
If 1, elements are grouped when they are dropped on a Star View. If 0, they are not grouped.
SVCCoefficient=0.01
//0.01 is default
SVCCoefficient is used to control SVC adjustment step. The default value is 0.01. You may set it to a
smaller value to improve load flow convergence or a bigger value to increase load flow converging speed.
Time-outs
The following entries are calculation time-out defaults in seconds:
CDTimeOut=60
HATimeOut=60
LFTimeOut=60
MSTimeOut=600
OPFTimeOut=600
RATimeOut=60
SCTimeOut=60
TSTimeOut=600
TS_Flag1=0
If entry is set to zero (default) the ETAP Transient Stability Module uses the frequency dependent model
for the induction machines and calculates bus frequency based on weighted machine speed.
If this entry is set to 1, the ETAP Transient Stability Module uses a non-frequency dependent model for
induction machines and bus frequency is calculated based on bus voltage phase angle.
4-17
Preferences
ETAPS
UseWeightedFrequency=1
The default setting for this field in the ini file is UseWeightedFrequency =1. This ini entry is used for
Transient Stability to select Use Weighted Machine Frequency. To change Synchronous Machine
Damping to Use Nominal System Frequency set the ini entry UseWeightedFrequency =0. The system
frequency will affect the synchronous machine damping effect.
SwingEquation=1
If this parameter is set to 1, which is set by default, Transient Stability program will use an enhance
integration method for synchronous generator swing equations.
tsSVCInitialLoadFlowMethod=1
If this parameter is set to 1, which is set by default, Transient Stability program will employ a method to
automatically adjust SVC reference voltage (Vref) to achieve the best possible voltage regulation by SVC
during the initial load flow solution. If this parameter is set to 0, Transient Stability program will keep
SVC reference voltage (Vref) to the editor defined value during the initial load flow solution. Depending
on the system configurations and SVC locations and parameters, the automatically adjusting Vref method
sometimes may experience difficulty in initial load flow convergence. When this occurs, the parameter
can be set to 0.
VoltageAnnotation orientation=15
These values determine the slope for display of annotation results for bus voltages. Some video cards
may not be able to draw the rotated annotations used by ETAP. If this is the case at your site, set the
orientation entries to 0.
CurrentAnnotation orientation=15
These values determine the slope for the displays of annotation results for short-circuit currents. Some
video cards may not be able to draw the rotated annotations used by ETAP. In that case, set the
orientation entries to 0.
UGS MaxX=10000
UGS MaxY=10000
These values determine the maximum size of the Underground Raceway System (UGS). These values
can range from 5000 to 50000. However, this value should be altered only on Windows 2000 or NT since
Win 98 or Me do not have enough resources.
UseAH_AmpCurve=1
This entry determines the type of battery characteristic curves used for battery sizing and discharge
calculations. The battery characteristic curves entered in the Battery Library describe the relationship
between the discharging current and the time of the discharging with respect to a certain cell voltage,
referred to as the Time-Amp curve. If this entry is set to 1, the Time-Amp curve is converted to an AHAmp curve and then used in the calculation; otherwise the Time-Amp curve is used in the calculation.
UTAmpAccelFactor=0.7
This parameter is used in the Uniform-Temperature Ampacity calculation in the Underground Raceway
System (UGS). The allowable range is 0.0 to 2.0. The value can be set higher than the default setting of
0.7 to speed up the calculation; however, the calculation may diverge.
4-18
Preferences
ETAPS
SQL_TextSize 79152
This establishes the maximum length of a binary stream that can be written to SQL Server. If you get
SQL Server errors when writing a large project to SQL Server, you may need to increase the size of this
variable.
UpdateConnections=0
If set to 1, ETAP will automatically update the connections for all of the elements in the project database
every time the project database is saved.
Message Log
The following entries are related to the ETAP message log.
Max Display Msgs=255
ETAPs message log, displayed within ETAP, shows up to 255 messages. The maximum value that can
be entered is 16384.
MsgLogInitialSize=12
This entry sets the initial height of the log window displayed at the bottom of the screen in logical units.
ETAP will save the height of the log window into this entry during the shutdown process.
MsgLog Size=128
ETAP maintains a text message log on disk that records all messages sent to the message log. This file is
named ~msglog.tmp. ETAP maintains the last completed messages up to the maximum file size as set
by this INI file entry. The size of the message log files is in kilobytes, i.e., 128 is 128 kb. Setting
MsgLogSize=0 will disable message text logging. The maximum size you can set for the message.log
file is 1024 kb.
Bus and Node Drawing and Printing

The following entries are related to the width of a vertical bus, or height of a horizontal bus, and diameter
of the nodes. These entries will define how the bus and the node are printed.
INI Entry
Print Bus Substitutes
Default value
0
Bus 1 Print
Bus 2 Print
Bus 3 Print
Bus 4 Print
Bus 5 Print
0
0
0
0
0
Print Node Substitutes
Node 1 Print
Node 2 Print
Node 3 Print
Node 4 Print
Node 5 Print
0
0
0
0
0
Valid values and notes

Not limited. This enables the use of the following entries if
non-zero.
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
Not limited. This enables the user of the following entries if
non-zero.
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
0-5. Disabled if 0
4-19
Preferences
ETAPS
These INI entries allow the user to over-ride the automatic selection provided by the tables in the
following manner. If the Print Bus Substitutes, or Print Node Substitutes entry is non-zero, the print draw
routines consult the appropriate Bus n Print, or Node n Print (n stands for the symbol size). If the Bus n
Print, or Node n Print, value is 0, that entry is disabled and the standard table look-up is used. If that
value is 1-5, ETAP treats the bus, or node, as using the symbol size specified by value.
For example, if the Print Node Substitutes is set to 1, ETAP will retrieve the values from Node 1 Print .
Node 5 Print as each node of the specific symbol size is printed. If Node 1 Print is set to 5, all nodes of
symbol size 1 are printed as if they were of symbol size 5. If Node 1 Print is set to 0, ETAP disregards
the Node 1 Printing substitution and prints the node with its normal size (symbol size 1).
Print Gray Line=1

Some printers cannot print a gray line. Setting this value to 0 will cause the printer to print a black line
instead of a gray line for de-energized connectors.
Relax UGS Dumpster Controls=1
Relax OLD Dumpster Controls=1
The controlled dumpsters provide security for a password-protected ETAP project by prohibiting the
deletion of elements on the dumpster unless the dumpster has been checked by the checker. Subsequent
to normal operation, the checker is presented with the controlled dumpster to check. If the checker
checks the dumpster, the dumpster may then be safely deleted by the engineer.
This revision modifies the controlled dumpster logic in the following manner. When an element(s) is cut
to the dumpster, the dumpster checks the element to determine if the Checked by Name is blank. If so,
this is taken to indicate that the element is a newly created element that has never been seen by the
checker. In such conditions, the element is placed on a non-controlled dumpster when it is deleted from
the OLD or the Underground.
When any elements are cut from the OLD, or UGS, the newly created dumpster must recursively check
all elements involved in the cut to determine if there is any element that has been previously seen by the
checker. If so, the dumpster is designated a controlled dumpster and the normal checker controls are
applied. If the recursive check passes, the dumpster is left in an un-controlled state. Recursively
checking the elements means that the dumpster must check every element, not only on the OLD, but in
any nested composites regardless of depth. This same logic applies to the UGS.
The two INI entries are established to over-ride this behavior. Both entries default to 1, which implements
the revised behavior. Changing the entry to a 0 causes the dumpster to ignore the revised logic (uses the
old behavior).
PanelSystemLFMaxIteration=200
This entry gives maximum number of iterations for panel system load flow calculation.
PanelSystemLFPrecision=0.00001
This entry gives the precision value for checking panel system load flow convergence. The precision is
applied on bus per unit voltage values.
Name
PanelSystemLFMaxIteration
PanelSystemLFPrecision
Type
Int
Float
4-20
default
200
.00001
Min
Max
.0000001
.001
Preferences
ETAPS
ConvertToMSAccess2000Format=1
Due to support of the features available later to the international version, ETAP needs to convert the
project databases (*.MDB, *.GRD, and *.CPX files in the current project location) to the format of the
database engine (Jet engine) used in the Microsoft ACCESS 2000 program. Setting this value to 0 will
cause ETAP to skip the conversion. The default setting for this entry is 1.
AutoConversion = 0
Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to ask for user permission to convert the project databases
(*.MDB, *.GRD, and *.CPX files in the current project location) each time ETAP opens a project. Set
this value to 1 means ETAP will no longer ask for permission to convert. The permission to convert the
project databases itself is based on the setting in the entry "ConvertToMSAccess2000Format". The
default setting is 0.
CompactDBIni = 1
The value of this setting determines the value of the checkbox "Compact Database When Saving" in the
Logon dialog when opening the next project. Upon closing the current project, ETAP will update this
setting in the configuration file (ETAPS.INI). The default value is 1.
[AppVariables]
DCSC LFPrecision=.0001
This is the default precision for load flow resolutions in DC Short-Circuit. Valid range is .0000001 to
0.1.
DefaultStandard=English
ETAP uses English units as a default for all new projects created. This may be changed to metric by
replacing English with Metric.
LastLibrarySubDir=C:\etaps\powerstn\lib
ETAP stores the location of the library file associated with a project.
LastProject=C:\etaps\powerstn\example\example.oti
ETAP stores the name of the last project opened.
LastSubDir=C:\etaps\powerstn\example
ETAP stores the location of the last project opened.
Project Default Path=C:\etaps\powerstn

ETAP will use its own directory as the default project path unless this entry is placed into the ETAPS.INI
file. The ETAP default path is C:\etaps\powerstn if ETAP is installed using default settings. For
example, if you set: Project Default Path=D:\temp\testproj, then a new ETAP project named userproj will
have a folder created with the name of the project. ETAP will store all associated project files, output
reports, plots, etc. in the subdirectory shown: Project Default Path=D:\temp\testproj\userproj
KeyAdapter=U
Use this entry if you are using an USB Key.
KeyAdapter=P
Use this entry when using a Parallel port key. This is the default configuration.
4-21
Preferences
ETAPS
KeyAdapter=S[, [COMx][, [nnnn]]]

1. COMx means COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. Default is COM1 if it is not provided.
2. nnnn means bauds rate. Default is 9600 if it is not given.
3. For Example, KeyAdapter=S, or KeyAdapter=S, COM2, 9600
License Manager Server

Two options are available for the licensing of ETAP. The primary option utilizes Microsoft Name Pipes
(text names for PCs). The secondary option is direct TCP/IP communication where the Name Pipe
service is not available, for example, Novell networks.
The Named Pipe License Manager is named ETAPSLM.exe.
The TCP/IP License Manager is named ETAPSLMT.exe.
ETAPSLMT and ETAPSLM cannot run simultaneously on the same License Manager Server.
LM Port=
LM Port=<Communication Port>
<Communication Port> specifies the port number that ETAP uses to communicate with the TCP/IP
server. If this entry does not exist, the port number defaults to 6260. However, this can be configured by
modifying the following registry entry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Operation Technology, Inc.\LM\Port
LM Server=
LM Server=<Server Name>
This entry identifies the location of the License Manager Server where the ETAP License Manager and
network hardware key are installed. Default <Server Name> is blank. This entry is required if you are
using a network hardware key for simultaneous usage of ETAP, i.e., this entry is not required if you have
a stand-alone license.
When LM Server=<Server Name> is available, ETAP will ignore the values of <TCP/IP Server Name>,
<Servers IP Address>, and <Communication Port>. In such a case, Named Pipes are used for
communications.
When <Server Name> does not exist, ETAP will find the value of <TCP/IP Server Name> and try to
connect to it. If <TCP/IP Server name> is also missing, ETAP seeks to connect to the server with IP
Address found in <Servers IP Address>. In the event when none of <Server Name>, <TCP/IP Server
Name>, and <Servers IP Address> exist, ETAP will try local license authentication.
LM Server IP=
LM Server IP=<Servers IP Address>
<Servers IP Address> allows the user to enter the License Manager Servers IP address when <TCP/IP
Server Name> is not available. This entry can only be made if the Server is using a fixed IP address.
LM TCP Server=
LM TCP Server=<TCP/IP Server Name>
<TCP/IP Server Name> indicates the License Manager Servers TCP/IP address. The name is resolved to
an IP address using any available Domain Name Service (DNS) or the HOSTS file can be used to point to
a fixed IP address.
Examples of different License Manager Server INI setups:
4-22
Preferences
ETAPS
CD Key=XXX-YYY-ZZZ
ETAP automatically creates this entry when you enter the Activation Code provided with your ETAP
CD-ROM. This sequence of letters and numbers needs to match with your companys specific license.
This sequence changes with each major release.
LM Server=lm
LM TCP Server=tcplm.oti.com
LM Server IP=10.10.10.191
LM Port=5000
Specifies that the host lm will be used as License Manager through Named Pipes. All TCP/IP entries are
ignored.
Specifies that the host with IP address 10.10.10.191 will be used as License Manager through TCP/IP via
default port number 6260.
LM TCP Server=tcplm.oti.com
LM Port=5000
Specifies that the host tcplm.oti.com will be used as License Manager through TCP/IP via port number
5000.
ReportProcessor=C:\program files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe

ETAP uses Notepad by default to view the output report of calculations. You can change this entry to use
your preferred viewer. In most cases, you must enter the fully qualified path and application name as
shown above for Microsoft Word.
%N=String
Enter a customized macro (string) to be used within the ETAP INI file. You can set up to 10 macros (%0,
%1%9).
The following is a list of macros available for use within the ETAP INI file:
%o
%p
%d
ODBC connect string including the path and name of the project source database
Fully qualified path (path+project name) of the currently open ETAP Project
Path of the currently open ETAP Project
Note that macros can only be used for arguments for the Tool entry. In all cases, the trailing \ is not
provided by macro expansion. Expansion does wrap the appropriate phrases in "" to allow for long
filenames and spaces, etc.
ETAP provides a mechanism allowing you to define external programs (external tools) in the ETAPS.INI
file. ETAP lists external programs on its Tools menu bar allowing you to launch and execute the external
programs. You may define up to 20 external programs (menu entries).
You can define each external programs menu entry in ETAP, the name and location where the program
resides, and arguments to be passed. Overall, this mechanism provides a flexible interface to external
programs from ETAP.
Tool1=text|path|argument1|argument2|argument3|argument4
4-23
Preferences
Tool1
text
path
argument
ETAPS
Up to 20 external tools (Tool1, Tool2, Tool20)

Text to be displayed in ETAP submenu Tools
Fully qualified path (path + program name) of the external program
Arguments to be passed to the external program
Macros may be entered into the path and arguments (argument 1, argument 2 etc.). The macros are
expanded when the tool is invoked according to the following rules:
MACRO
%p
%d
%o
expansion
expands to the fully qualified project path and project name
e.g. -f%p.MDB expands to -fD:\fullProjDir\ProjName.MDB
expands to the fully qualified project path
e.g. |%d\pdconfig.exe|... expands to d:\FullProjDir\pdconfig.exe
expands to the full ODBC connect string which would be utilized to allow
an external program to make an ODBC connection to the project database.
%0...%9 expands to the contents of ETAPS.INI entry 0...9 as defined in the

ETAPS.INI
[AppVariables]
0=string0
1=string1
...
9=string9
In all cases, the trailing \ is not provided by macro expansion
Expansion does wrap the appropriate phrases in ""
Using Tools examples:
Start Microsoft Word from ETAP:
Tool1=MS Word| C:\program files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe
Launch PDConfig as an external tool within ETAP:
Tool2=Configuration Report|C:\ETAPS\PowerStn\PDConfig.exe|%o|C:\etaps\powerstn\target.mdb
PDConfig is an external program that creates an MS Access database that contains the status of all
protective devices, motors, and loads for each Configuration Status you have defined. In this example,
PDConfig.exe requires an argument for the ETAP project file (including ODBC connect string) and an
argument for the target file where the results are saved. Macros may be used to simplify the entries.
Tool2=Config Tables|C:\ETAPS\PowerStn\PDConfig.exe|%o|%d\Target.mdb
Oracle database users have three additional entries in the INI file. These entries store the name, user ID,
and password of the associated Oracle database.
ORACLE Database=MyOracleDB
Name of the Oracle database (default 2: for local Oracle)
ORACLE UserID=MyOracleID
4-24
Preferences
ETAPS
Oracle user ID (default SCOTT for local Oracle)

ORACLE UserPassword=MyPassword
Oracle user valid password (default TIGER for local Oracle)
Wizard Path=""
//NULL is default
This entry defaults to "". Typically, the ETAP Wizard is located in the ETAP directory and ETAP
directory is used if the Wizard Path entry is blank (its default). If you want to relocate the ETAP Wizard
to another directory, set Wizard Path="d:\someotherDirectory" where d:\someotherDirectory is the
directory where you want to place the ETAP Wizard file.
[Colors]
Refer to the Theme Manager for details on using colors for the one-line diagram.
[Recent File List]

ETAP stores the last nine ETAP project names and locations for easy access directly from the File Menu
inside ETAP.
File1=C:\etaps\powerstn\example\example.oti
File2= C:\etaps\powerstn\sample\sample.oti
File3= C:\etaps\powerstn\userproj\userproj.oti
File4= C:\temp\example\example.oti
File5= D:\powerstn\example\example.oti
File6= D:\powerstn\sample\sample.oti
File7= D:\powerstn\userproj\userproj.oti
File8=D:\temp\projfile\sample\sample.oti
File9= D:\temp\projfile\example\example.oti
4-25
Chapter 5
Database and Project Management
ETAP organizes an electrical system into a single project. Within this project, ETAP creates three major
system components:
Presentation - Unlimited, independent graphical presentations of the one-line diagram that

represent design data for any purpose (such as impedance diagram, study results, or plot plan).
Configuration - Unlimited, independent system configurations that identify the status of

switching devices (open and closed), motors and loads (continuous, intermittent, and spare),
Generator Operating Modes (swing, voltage control, reactive power control, power factor control)
and MOVs (open, closed, throttling, and spare).
Revision Data - Base Data and unlimited Revision Data IDs that keep track of the changes and
modifications to the engineering properties (for example, nameplate or settings) of elements.
These three system components are organized in an

orthogonal fashion to provide great power and
flexibility in constructing and manipulating your
ETAP project. Using this concept of Presentation,
Status Configuration, and Revision Data, you can
create numerous combinations of networks of
diverse configurations and varying engineering
properties that allow you to fully investigate and
study the behavior and characteristics of the
electrical networks using one database. This means
that you do not need to copy your database for
different system configurations, What If studies,
etc.
ETAP relies on a three-dimensional database concept to implement all Presentations, Configurations, and
Base and Revision Data. The use of this multi-dimensional database concept allows you to independently
select a particular Presentation, Configuration Status, or Revision Data within the same project database.
These selections can be used in conjunction with multiple loading categories and multiple Study Cases to
quickly and efficiently perform system design and analysis, while avoiding inadvertent data discrepancies
created when multiple copies of a single project file are used to maintain a record of various system
changes.
5-1
Multi-Dimension Database
Overview
5-2
Presentations
5.1 Presentations
When a new project is created, a one-line diagram presentation named OLV (one-line view) is be created
and displayed in your ETAP window. This is where you build a one-line diagram presentation of your
electrical system. ETAP supports the creation of an unlimited number of presentations of a one-line
diagram. This powerful feature provides you with the ability to customize each one-line diagram
presentation to generate different graphical representations, as shown below. One presentation may have
some or all protective devices visible, while another presentation may have a completely different layout
best suited for displaying load flow results, and so on.
Four Different Presentations of the same One-Line Diagram
5.1.1 Presentation Customization Features

One-line diagram presentations have the following features:
Graphical location of elements and connectors

Graphical representation of connectors based on Phase type (i.e. 3-Phase, 1-Phase)
Sizing of elements (five sizes)
5-3
Presentations
Sizing of buses (five sizes)

Colors of elements and connectors
Ground grid elements
Symbols (ANSI and IEC Standard symbols for AC and DC elements)
Element grouping including connectors
Element orientation (0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees)
Annotation orientation (-90, -45, 0, 45, and 90 degrees)
Visibility options (hide and show) for switching and protective devices
Display options of Annotations (results, AC, AC-DC, and DC elements)
Display options for each Operating Mode (for example, Edit, Load Flow, or Short-Circuit)
Grid display and size option
Continuity check option (on or off)
Status configuration association
Print options (such as print size, centering, printer type, or paper size)
OLE objects independent of each presentation
ActiveX object independent of each presentation
Themed Appearance
Additionally, each presentation stores the last configuration, Operating Mode, zoom ratio, view location,
print setup, etc.
5.1.2 Adding Elements to a Presentation

When you add an element to one presentation, the same element with identical engineering properties will
automatically be added to each of your other presentations. Modification of the engineering properties of
an element in one presentation will be reflected in all presentations, because all presentations share a
common database.
5.1.3 Creating New Presentations

You can create new one-line diagram presentations by copying any one of the existing one-line diagram
presentations.
1. You can make a copy of a presentation by using one of these two techniques:
Click the New Presentation button on the Presentation toolbar. ETAP displays the Create
Presentation dialog box, or:
In the Project View window, right-click the One-Line Diagrams folder (under the
Presentations folder), then select the Create New command. ETAP displays the Create
Presentation dialog box.
OR
5-4
Presentations
2. In the From drop-down list, select the existing one-line diagram presentation that you want to
copy. The new presentation will be assigned OLV1 by default, or you can enter a new name in
the To text box.
3. Click OK. ETAP displays the new presentation.
5.1.4 Changing Presentation Names

A presentation name can be changed at any time by double-clicking the one-line diagram windows
background while you are in Edit Mode. Using the One-Line Diagram dialog box, enter the new name in
the Name text box. You can change the presentation name to any name that is 25 or less alphanumeric
characters in length.
5-5
Presentations
5.1.5 Purging Presentations

The purging of a presentation can only be accomplished from the Project Editor. Once you purge a
presentation, it is permanently deleted from the project, so use caution. To purge a presentation, do the
following:
1. In the Project View window under the Presentations folder, expand the folder that contains the
presentation you want to purge.
2. Right-click the presentation folder you want to purge, and then select the Purge command. ETAP
will require you to confirm that you want to purge the presentation.
5-6
Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard
Status Configurations
5.2 Configuration Status

ETAP possesses a powerful configuration capability that allows you to configure the operating status of
each of the various electrical elements included in the one-line diagram of your project. Electrical
components such as circuit breakers, fuses, and switches can be set to open or closed status. Loads and
motors may be operating continuously, intermittently, or can be assigned as spares. Power sources can be
operating in swing, voltage control, Mvar control, or power factor control modes. Implementation of this
configuration concept follows the guidelines described below:
When you attach a configuration to a one-line diagram presentation, all elements in that
presentation assume its predefined status, just as if they have been saved under that configuration.
Each configuration is independent of all others since the status of elements can be set
independently for each configuration.
Any configuration can be attached to any one-line diagram presentation. Conversely, any or all
one-line diagram presentations can be attached to the same configuration simultaneously.
You can create an unlimited number of configurations.
To attach or associate a configuration to a presentation, make the presentation window active, and
select a configuration status from the Configuration toolbar. The figure below shows the changes
in presentation when changed from Normal to TSEvents configuration.
Switching Status Configuration from Normal to Stage 1

By using this status configuration feature, it becomes unnecessary to maintain several copies of one
project to perform electrical system studies for different configurations. In addition, when you modify
engineering properties or add new elements to the one-line diagram, the changes will be automatically
saved for all configurations.
5-7
Status Configuration
5.2.1 Changing the Status of Devices

The status of switching devices (fuse, contactor, HV circuit breaker, LV circuit breaker, switch, doublethrow switch, and the panels main disconnect) can be changed from their editors, the configuration
manager or from the menu displayed when you right-click the device on the one-line diagram.
5-8
Status Change of a Switching Device for Configuration Normal

The status of load devices (synchronous motor, induction motor, lumped load, MOV, static load,
capacitor, and filter) can be changed from their editors, as shown in the figure below.
5-9
Status Change of Load Devices for Configuration Stage1

The status of source devices (power grids and synchronous generators) can be changed from their editors,
as shown in the figure below.
5-10
5.2.2 Configuration Manager (Project Editor Access Level)

The purpose of the configuration manager is to provide an interface for the following capabilities:
Viewing the configuration status of each device in the active project in a tabular fashion
Ability to change the configuration status of any PD / Source / Load in the project
Ability to track changes in the configuration status of any PD / Source / Load in the project
Ability to check (checker) configuration status any PD / Source / Load in the project
The configuration manager can be accessed by clicking on the Configuration Manager button on the main
ETAP interface, as shown below.
5-11
The configuration manager may also be accessed from Project View as shown below.
5-12
The configuration manager interface is shown below:
Configuration List
This list contains all existing configurations in the project. If the Project Editor has deleted checked
configurations they will not show up in this list because they have been hidden. The configuration view
will show the configuration status for only the selected configurations from the configuration list.
The following devices (AC and DC) are considered by the configuration manager and tracked for the
checker
a. HVCB
b. LVCB
c. SPST Switch
Protective / Switching Devices
d. SPDT Switch
e. Fuse
f. Contactor
g. Induction Motor
Motors
h. Synchronous Motor
Loads
5-13
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
Lumped Load
MOV
Static Load
Capacitor
Panels
Harmonics Filters
Phase Adapter
UPS
AC / DC
Charger
Inverter
Synchronous Generator
Sources
Utility
Device Selection
Devices shown in the configuration view may be filtered based on the following categories:
a. AC
b. DC
c. AC & DC
5-14
Based on your selection, the following device lists are displayed. By default, AC elements are always
shown in the configuration view.
AC
All AC Elements
All Protective Devices
All Loads
All Motors
All Sources
All AC/DC
Circuit Breaker, HV
Circuit Breaker, LV
Switches, Single-Throw
Switches, Double-Throw
Fuses
Contactors
Induction Motors
Synchronous Motors
Lumped Loads
MOVs
Panels
Phase Adapters
Harmonic Filters
Static Loads
Capacitor
Generators,
Synchronous
Power Grids, Utility
UPSs
Charger
Inverter
DC
All DC Elements
All DC Protective Devices
All DC Loads
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Fuses
DC Lumped Loads
DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Switches, Double-Throw
DC Switches, Single-Throw
AC & DC
All Elements
All Loads
All Motors
All Sources
All AC/DC
Circuit Breaker, HV
Circuit Breaker, LV/DC
Fuses
Contactors
Induction Motors
Synchronous Motors/DC
Motors
Lumped Loads
MOVs
Panels
Phase Adapters
Harmonic Filters
Static Loads
Capacitors
Generators, Synchronous
UPSs
Charger
Inverter
Configuration View
When a device is selected from the device selection list, corresponding device IDs are shown in the
configuration view (column 1). For example, if All Devices is selected then all device IDs will be
shown that are included and controlled by your various configurations.
Clicking on the device ID will trigger an automatic search for that device on the active one-line diagram.
ETAP will show the selected device in Red even if it exists in nested / composite networks. This can be
accomplished without having to close the configuration manager.
5-15
Since the configuration view lists the status of each device, the user can change the status of any device
from the configuration manager rather than having to go to the individual Device Editor. Select the
required status (open or close in case of circuit breaker) and click OK to apply the changes. An example
of this is shown below.
5-16
5-17
Show Normal Status

Selecting this option causes the normal status of all devices to be displayed in the configuration view.
Unselecting this option will filter the configuration view and show the off-normal or alternate status for
all selected devices. The table below lists devices displayed in the configuration view based on their
operating status.
Show Normal Status (Checked)
Circuit Breakers - Closed
DT Switches Position A
Switches Closed
Fuses Closed
Generator Voltage Control
Power Grid Swing
Load Demand Factor Continuous
MOVs Open
Panel Closed
Show Normal Status (Unchecked)

Circuit Breakers Open
DT Switches Position B
Switches Open
Fuses Open
Generator Swing / Mvar Control / PF Control
Power Grid Voltage Control / Mvar Control/ PF Control
Load Demand Factor Intermittent / Spare
MOVs Closed / Throttle / Spare
Panel Open
5-18
Phase Adapter Closed
Harmonic Filter Continuous
Phase Adapter Open
Harmonic Filter Intermittent / Spare
Show Differences
Selecting this option will compare the selected configurations from the configuration list and show only
those devices with differences between their configurations. For instance, the example below shows that
three configurations have been selected (Normal, Stage 1 and TSEvents). When Show Difference is
selected, based on your device selection (All AC Elements), ETAP will be displaying the differences
across all selected configurations, and CB2 and CB10 have different status across at least two of the four
selected configurations.
5-19
5-20
The results of selecting Display Changed Data in Red and Show Normal Status logic are summarized in
the table shown below:
Device ID
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
M1
M2
G1
G2
Config
Change
Config 1
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Continuous
Intermittent
Swing
VoltControl
Open Close
Config 2
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Continuous
Intermittent
Swing
VoltControl
Open Close
Show Normal Status

Dont display
changed data in Red
Show Normal Status

Display changed data
in Red
Open
Config 3
Config 4
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Intermittent
Swing
VoltControl
Open Close
Intermittent
Swing
VoltControl
Open Close
Dont Show Normal

Status
Dont Display
changed data in Red
Dont Show Normal

Status
Display changed data
in Red
Creating New Configurations

You can create new status configurations in the follow manner:
On the Configuration Manager, click the New button. ETAP then displays the New Configuration
dialog box. From this dialog box you can create a new configuration using default settings, as
shown in the following figure:
5-21
In the Project View, right-click the Status folder under Configurations folder, and select Create
New. ETAP displays the New Configuration dialog box along with the status of the elements for
your new configuration.
5-22
Create a New Status Configuration
Copying Existing Configurations

You can copy existing status configurations using one of the two following methods:
On the Configuration Manager, click the Copy button. The Copy From option allows you to copy
an existing configuration. From the drop-down list, select the configuration you want to duplicate.
The Create a New Configuration with Default Settings option allows you to create a new
configuration with the default settings listed in the dialog box. Enter a name for the new
configuration in the To text box.
5-23
If you right-click the specific configuration you want to duplicate and select the Duplicate
command, ETAP displays the Copy From option and allows you to create a new configuration
based on an existing one.
5-24
Delete Configurations
Click to delete the selected configuration(s) from the project. If these configurations were previously
checked then they will be hidden in access levels other than checker access level. If the configurations
were not checked previously, then they will be deleted permanently. Confirmation dialog is provided
when deleting a configuration.
Once you choose to accept the delete action, the configuration will be permanently removed and another
configuration with the same name can be created once the configuration manager is closed and reopened.
Note that if the configuration was checked then it will not be permanently removed from the system even
if the project is closed. Such a configuration can only be deleted if the checker approves the delete action.
5-25
Rename Configurations
Clicking the Rename button will bring up the Rename Configuration Editor, as shown below.
Print Configurations
Click OK to export the configuration settings to an Access Database.
5-26
5.2.3 Configuration Manager (Checker Access Level)

When the checker access level is accessed, the following screen will appear. Checking information for
configurations can be accessed by selecting Configuration option. Make sure the Display
Configuration Manager option is selected to display configuration manager in checker access level. The
purpose of the configuration checker is to validate changes made to configuration settings of various
devices in a project. This is similar to the checker for engineering properties. The Configuration Manager
Editor is similar to the one described for Project Editor Access Level with just a few limitations and
modifications, as shown in the figure below.
5-27
Edited By
The previous user name (ID) and the Date are displayed here for the selected configuration.
Checked By
Clicking on the Check button will insert your user name (ID) and the date in the Checked By area for the
selected configuration.
Skip Checked Configurations

Use this filter if checked configurations should not be included in the configuration list.
Display Configuration Manager

Click this checkbox to display the configuration manager. All changes or modifications of individual
configuration status are displayed in red by the configuration manager.
Check / Uncheck Data
When you click on the Check button, the color changes to blue, and a red check mark appears in the
corner. If you click again, the selected element will be unchecked.
5-28
Restore
The Restore function will only be active for configurations that were previously checked and then deleted.
These configurations have been hidden from the Project Editor (because they were deleted) however they
are visible in Checker Access Level. The Checker can choose to permanently delete these configurations
by checking them, i.e. accepting the delete action or by clicking on the restore button to unhide them in
Project Editor Access Level.
In the example below BatterySize is a checked configuration that has been deleted by the Project
Editor.
When you (as checker) log into this project, ETAP will display all configurations (Normal, NewConfig,
and Stage 1) that must be checked in addition to the BatterySize configuration since this was a checked
configuration that was deleted by the Project Editor.
5-29
You can check the BatterySize configuration, in which case this configuration will be permanently
deleted from the project, or you can chose to restore this configuration name along with the status for
every device. To restore a configuration, click on the BatterySize configuration column and then click
Restore. ETAP will prompt you with the confirmation dialog shown below:
5-30
5.2.4 Reserved Configurations

Some status configurations are reserved for ETAP Real-Time and cannot be renamed or purged. These
configurations are active when ETAP is online and include the following:
Reserved Configurations
Mode
On-Line
On-line Monitoring
Playback
Playback
Advisory
Advisory Control
Supervisory
Supervisory Control
5-31
Revision Data
5.3 Revision Data

Revision Data is the third orthogonal system component provided by ETAP. The engineering data
associated with the elements in your project are stored in the project database. ETAP provides ready
access to an unlimited number of unique engineering Revision Data associated with each element.
ETAP establishes a revision level of zero for the data used as Base Data. You may assign a revision at
any time to distinguish the engineering parameters associated with any or all of the elements on the oneline diagram without impacting or changing the Base Data. An element cannot exist in Revision Data
without also existing in the Base Data. ETAP constrains your project to using the engineering data in one
Revision Data ID (name) at a time. You must be working with the Base Data to add or delete system
elements or to make connectivity changes to your one-line diagram. Also, the Base Data must be active
(instead of Revision Data being active) for you to be able to save or close a project.
5.3.1 Using What If Studies

The primary use for Revision Data is to enable you to run What If studies for an electrical system
where you vary the engineering data of the networks components and compare these results with the
Base Data or other Revision Data. For example, you can change the impedance of a transformer in the
Revision Data (leaving the Base Data untouched) and compare the short-circuit results with the Base
Data.
Other applications of Revision Data allow the creation of future modifications of the system without
changing your Base Data. For example, you can add a new substation to an existing system and keep all
of your modifications in Revision Data. In this example, the Base Data represents your existing system
and the Revision Data represents your design for future modifications.
To take this example further, first add the new elements for the substation to the Base Data and flag them
as Out of Service so they will not affect the study results of the existing system. In the Revision Data, you
then set the flag to In Service and enter all other required properties. When the new substation is
commissioned, merge the Revision Data to Base Data to implement and save the modification.
5.3.2 Changing Engineering Data in Revisions

To exchange engineering data for Revision Data, you need to activate the Revision Data in your system.
This is accomplished through the Revision toolbar (located on the top left hand corner of the ETAP
window by default). From the Revision toolbar drop-down list, select the Revision Data ID (name) you
want to modify. ETAP 11 onwards, new projects only have Base revision, instead of the default 15
Revision Data IDs, but you can add an unlimited number of new IDs to your project.
After selecting the Revision Data ID, you can modify device data just as you would while in the Base
Data. The changes you make will not affect the Base Data, unless they are changes common to all
Revision Data (such as configurations, Study Cases, and presentations).
Revision Data is integrated with user access control to keep users from manipulating Base Data. Only
users with the access level of Project Editor or Base Editor can manipulate Base Data. User access
restrictions insure that specific sections of the project can only be altered by those authorized to make
changes.
5-32
Revision Data
ETAP keeps track of delta differences between Revision Data and the Base Data. The delta is zero when
you activate a Revision Data ID for the first time. When you are in Revision Data and you change a single
property of an element, that element (with its new engineering properties) is saved for that Revision Data
ID. In our future substation example, the delta between this Revision Data ID and the Base Data is one
element only. Any subsequent change to the properties of this element in the Base Data will not affect the
elements properties in the Revision Data. However, any changes to the Base Data for other elements that
have not been altered in this Revision Data will be used when you run studies with this Revision Data ID
active.
5.3.3 Identifying Changed Elements

The ETAP Project Editor displays the delta difference between Revision Data and the Base Data.
Changed elements and the folders in which they are stored are colored green. In the example below, Gen3
is flagged as an element that has parameters that differ from the Base Data. Also note that the Cable
folder is colored green with the integer 2 added to it, meaning that there are two cables under this
Revision Data ID that are different from the Base Data. ETAP 11 includes a Data Manager that can also
be used to identify changed elements as well as changed properties. See Data Manager section of this
chapter for more details.
5-33
Revision Data
5-34
Data Manager
5.4 Data Manager

The data manager is a new functionality in ETAP 11. The purpose of the data manager is to provide an
interface for the following:
View engineering properties of each device in a tabular fashion for each revision
Ability to merge complete revisions
Ability to merge individual devices
Ability to reset / remove delta for entire revision
Ability to reset / remove delta for individual devices
Ability to print difference report based on device type
Filter properties based on engineering studies and/or non-engineering data
The data manager can be accessed by clicking on the data manager button on the main ETAP interface as
shown below.
The data manager interface is shown below:
5-35
Data Manager
Revision Control Selection

The revision control selection allows the user to view and organize the revision control list based on
Revision Name, Change # or Group #.
All Data Revisions

Select this option to view list of all available data revisions in the project. The revision control list will be
populated with revision names in alphabetically order.
Change #
Select this option to view list of all available Change #s in the project. The dropdown list displays the
available Change # in the current project. For the selected Change #, the revision control list is populated
with revisions that are members or part of the selected Change #.
5-36
Data Manager
Group #
Select this option to view list of all available Group #s in the project. The dropdown list displays the
available Group # in the current project. For the selected Group #, the revision control list is populated
with revisions that are members or part of the selected Group #.
Revision Control List

This list contains all existing revisions in the project including base. If the project editor has deleted some
revisions they will be hidden and will not show up in this list. The revision view will show the revision
data for only the selected revisions from the revision control list. Default: Nothing Checked. When data
manager is closed these selections are saved so that the next time the data manager is launched the
previously saved selections are recalled. The selections are saved in the data manager based on active
ETAP session. Selection settings would be reset to default whenever ETAP is restarted.
5-37
Data Manager
All AC and DC one-line elements that have engineering properties associated with them are tracked by
the data manager.
Device Selection
Devices shown in the data manager may be filtered based on the following categories:
a. AC
b. DC
c. AC & DC
5-38
Data Manager
Based on your selection, the following device lists are displayed. By default, AC elements are always
shown in the configuration view.
AC
All AC Elements
All AC Loads
All AC Motors
All Sources
All AC/DC
Circuit Breaker, HV
Circuit Breaker, LV
AC Switches, Single-Throw
AC Switches, Double-Throw
AC Switches, Ground
AC Fuses
Contactors
Recloser
Induction Motors
Synchronous Motors
MG Sets
AC Lumped Loads
MOVs
AC Static Loads
Capacitors
Panels
Phase Adapters
Grounding/Earthing Adapter
Harmonic Filters
Generators, Synchronous
UPSs
Chargers
Inverters
PV Array
AC Buses
AC Cables
Impedance Branch
Bus Duct
Ammeters
Multi-Meters
Voltmeters
Reactor, Current Limiting
Relays, Frequency
Relays, Reverse Power
Relays, Solid State Trip
Relays, Voltage
Relays, Multi-Function
DC
All DC Elements
All DC Protective Devices
All DC Loads
All DC Branches
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Fuses
DC Lumped Loads
DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Switches, Double-Throw
DC Switches, Single-Throw
VFDs
Batteries
DC Buses
Dc Converters
Dc Composite CSD
DC Impedances
DC CSD Wires
DC CSD Contacts, MacroCtrl
DC CSD Contacts
DC CSD Push Buttons
DC CSD Control Cables
5-39
AC & DC
All Elements
All Loads
All Motors
All Sources
All AC/DC
Circuit Breaker, HV
Circuit Breaker, LV/DC
AC Switches, Ground
Fuses
Contactors
Reclosers
Induction Motors
Synchronous Motors/DC
Motors
MG Sets
Lumped Loads
MOVs
Static Loads
Capacitors
Panels
Phase Adapters
Grounding/Earthing
Adapter
Harmonic Filters
Generator, Synchronous
UPSs
Chargers
Inverters
PV Array
AC Buses
AC Cables
Impedance Branch
Bus Duct
Ammeters
Multi-Meters
Voltmeters
Relays, Frequency
Relays, Reverse Power
Relays, Solid State Trip
Data Manager
Transformers, 2W
Transformers, 3W
Transformers, Current
Transformers, Potential
Transmission Lines
Ground Grids
Overload Heaters
DC Link, High-Voltage
Static Var Compensator
Relays, Voltage
Relays, Multi-Function
Transformers, 2W
Transformers, 3W
Transformers, Current
Transformers, Potential
Transmission Lines
Ground Grids
Overload Heaters
DC Link, High-Voltage
VFDs
Batteries
DC Buses
Dc Converters
Dc Composite CSD
DC Impedances
DC CSD Wires
DC CSD Contacts, MacroCtrl
DC CSD Contacts
DC CSD Push Buttons
DC CSD Control Cables
Revision View
When a device selection is made from the device selection list (for example All AC Motors),
corresponding devices (all AC motors, induction and synchronous) are shown in the revision view
(elements column).
Clicking on the device ID will trigger an automatic search for that device on the active one-line diagram.
ETAP will show the selected device in Red even if it exists in nested / composite networks. This can be
accomplished without having to close the data manager.
5-40
Data Manager
Display Options
Use the display options in order to select between element status information or individual element
engineering properties. This section also allows the user to view differences across multiple revisions for
multiple elements in the ETAP project as well as perform advanced filtering on engineering properties.
Elements
When this option is selected, the data manager revision view shows the list of elements based on the
device selection (AC, DC or AC & DC).
When Elements is selected corresponding drop down list shows additional filters
- Engineering Data
- Service
- State
- Lock
- Edited By
- Checked By
- Unchecked
Engineering Data
When Engineering Data is selected, the data manager shows the list of elements based on device selection
filters. Further it color codes the cells in Red whenever it encounters a revision record set for each
displayed element. For example Cable 9 data is not revisioned however Cable 13 has revisioned data in
2007 and 2010 revisions. Note that revisioned properties based on this engineering data are shown with
red color in the cell background color.
5-41
Data Manager
Rev. Record Exists

Whenever this checkbox is clicked, the data manager displays elements with revision record sets, i.e.,
elements that are not revisioned (based on revision control selection) are discarded from the list. For
example, Cable 9 was not revisioned and hence it will be removed from the list when Rev. Record Exists
option is checked.
5-42
Data Manager
Service
When Service is selected, then the data manager displays In / Out / Same As Base condition for each of
the displayed elements. In Service is shown as In and Out of Service is displayed as Out. Same as
Base implies that the element in revision inherits the same service condition as base. In/Out/Same As
Base condition can be setup from the individual property editor. Note that revisioned properties based on
this engineering data are shown with red color in the cell background color.
5-43
Data Manager
Changing Service Information from Data Manager

The data manager can also be used to directly change the In/Out/Same As Base condition directly from
the data manager element grid. Click on row to select a particular element, for example LUMP1.
Click In in the Base column in order to change the condition from In to Out of Service. A drop down
list will be provided with the appropriate options.
5-44
Data Manager
The following reflects the new base information for LUMP1. Not only is the element out of service in the
data manager but the continuity check now reflects that this equipment is indeed not in service. Since all
the other revisions are set to Same As Base; all revisions will now inherit this out of service status
automatically for LUMP1. In order to independently change the condition in other revisions, the same
steps as above can be followed to switch from Same As Base to any other condition without having to
go to the property editor.
Show Default
When the Show Default option is selected, the data manager shows elements that are Out of Service as
Out for Base and any other selected revisions. Elements that are In Service, i.e. In have the text
blanked out and not displayed.
Differences
When this checkbox is clicked then the data manager displayed only those elements that have differences
in their service status for the selected revisions.
In / Out / Same As Base (Filters)
Filters are a quick and efficient way of viewing the information most important. In / Out / Same As Base
state of the elements can be used to filter the elements displayed in the data manager. If In is unchecked
then the data manager will only show elements that have Out and Same As Base settings.
5-45
Data Manager
State
Equipment states are available in ETAP 11 onwards. States allow the user to not only define engineering
states of various equipment in the network but also connect the In/Out of Service condition of the
equipment with its state.
State
In / Out of Service
As-Built
In or Out
New
In or Out
Future
In or Out
Moved
In or Out
Modified
In or Out
Removed
Out
Warehouse
Out
Abandoned
Out
Repair
Shop
Out
Other
Out
Intended Usage
Engineering properties in the data revision is based on nameplate
information found in the system.
Engineering properties in the data revision as well as In/Out Service
condition are based on the fact that this is new equipment added to the
system.
condition are based on the fact that this is equipment that is to be
added in the future.
condition are based on the fact that this is equipment that is moved to
a different location in the system.
condition are based on the fact that this is equipment nameplate or
other parameters have been modified.
Engineering properties in the data revision as well as Service
condition is based on the fact that this is equipment has been removed
from the system and will automatically not participate in any system
calculations.
condition is based on the fact that this is equipment is in a warehouse
and has not been installed in the system. This equipment will
automatically not participate in any system calculations.
condition is based on the fact that this is equipment is not in service
permanently or equipment is not in commission (ENIC). The
equipment however may still be on its skid / pad but disconnected
from the electrical system.
condition is based on the fact that this is equipment has been removed
temporarily for maintenance / repairs. This equipment will
automatically not participate in any system calculations.
Any other reasons not covered by the above status
5-46
Data Manager
When State is selected, then the data manager displays the state (one of 10) for each of the displayed
elements and whether the revision data for the element is different or same as base. Note that revisioned
properties based on this engineering data are shown with red color in the cell background color. The
following states are fixed in ETAP and have the following In / Out of Service condition associated with
each one.
Changing State Information from Data Manager

Just like service condition, data manager can also be used to directly change the State information directly
from the data manager element grid. Click on row to select a particular element, for example LTG Load.
5-47
Data Manager
Click Same As Base in any of the revision columns in order to change the state. A drop down list will
be provided with the state options.
Once the selection is made, Base and Revision will not be the same and the state of the element will be
revisioned and displayed in a red color.
5-48
Data Manager
As-Built / New / Future (Filters)

Filters are a quick and efficient way of viewing the information most important. State filters (As-Built,
Future, Moved, etc.) can be used to filter the elements displayed in the data manager. If As-Built is
unchecked then the data manager will only show elements that have other states. Note that if only Base is
selected then the filters automatically hide/show elements based on the filter selection. If Base and
Revision(s) are selected together then the Same As Base filter may need to be unchecked first in order
to effectively utilize the other filters.
5-49
Data Manager
Lock
When Lock is selected, then the data manager displays the lock / unlock status for each of the displayed
elements. Note that different properties based on this engineering data are shown with red color in the cell
background color. The equipment can be locked / unlocked from the individual property editor as well as
the data manager.
Lock / Unlock are available in ETAP 11 onwards. This functionality allows a user with
Project/Base/Revision editor privileges, the ability to show that their changes to an Elements Property
Editor are finalized by disabling property fields on the Editor. This excludes Service and State fields
(In/Out/State/SameAsBase), Configuration fields (Open/Close), as well as the OK Button. Below is an
example of the new Property Lock in the locked state in the Base Revision and below that, an example of
the Property Lock in the disabled state in a Revision without revision data.
The lock button toggles a Browser-like-level access on an Elements Property Editor. The difference
being that the Configuration Fields (Open/Close) and OK button are still active. The lock is enabled when
the user is a Project or Base Editor in the Base Revision, and when the user is a Project, Base, or Revision
Editor in a Revision with revision properties.
When the Editor is in the locked state, the Property Editor restricts direct user modification of property
fields. In a revision, if the revision has no saved properties and is the same as the base revision; then the
property lock will be unlocked and disabled. The reasoning behind this is that there are no revision
properties to lock and thus the user should not be able to lock/unlock.
5-50
Data Manager
Changing Lock/Unlock Information from Data Manager

Just like service and state, data manager can also be used to directly change the lock/unlock information
from the data manager element grid.
5-51
Data Manager
Show Default
This option is unchecked by default. Default is Unlocked. When this option is unchecked then any Base
or Revision with this status will show blank cells and the text Unlock will not be displayed.
Differences
When this checkbox is clicked then the data manager displayed only those elements that have differences
in their lock status for the selected revisions.
Lock / Unlock (Filters)
If Lock is unchecked then the data manager will show elements that are unlocked, i.e. in state other than
Lock across Base and Revision.
5-52
Data Manager
Edited By
When Edited By is selected, then the data manager displays the account names who have edited
properties for each of the displayed elements. Note that revisioned properties based on this engineering
data are shown with red color in the cell background color. Edited by information cannot be changed from
the data manager.
Differences
When this checkbox is clicked then the data manager displays only those elements that have differences
in their edited by status.
Edited By Account (Filters)
If any of the accounts is unchecked then the data manager will show elements that are edited by the
remaining accounts. For example if OTI is unchecked then all elements not modified by OTI will be
displayed.
Checked By
When Checked By is selected, then the data manager displays the account names that have checked
properties for each of the displayed elements. Note that revisioned properties based on this engineering
data are shown with red color in the cell background color.
5-53
Data Manager
Differences
in their checked by status.
Account Filters
If any of the accounts is unchecked then the data manager will show elements that are checked by the
remaining accounts. For example if Checker is unchecked then all elements not modified by Checker
will be displayed.
Unchecked
When unchecked is selected, then the data manager displays elements that are not checked.
5-54
Data Manager
Differences
in their unchecked status.
5-55
Data Manager
Properties
When an element is selected and Properties option is selected then the data manager grid switches from
element list and displays properties for the elements as found in the project database.
If only Base is selected, then based on the device selection, the property grid can show data for individual
element or data for all elements within one specific device type. This concept is illustrated with a few
examples.
Example
1
Revision Control
Base Only
Device Selection
All AC Elements
Note that in this example, all AC elements are displayed with element IDs in a drop-down list and the
property for each element is arranged row-wise.
5-56

Example
2
Data Manager
Revision Control
Base Only
Device Selection
Circuit Breakers, HV
Note that in this example, all HVCB are displayed with element IDs arranged row-wise and the property
for each element is arranged column-wise.
Study Filters
When any of the study filters is checked then the properties used for the selected study will be displayed
and all others will be hidden. The following study filters are available in ETAP 11.
Non-Engineering Data Lists all properties for selected element that is not associated with any
analysis / calculation
Load Flow - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with load flow analysis. In
addition, generation categories for power sources are also properties used for load flow type
studies. Generation categories will be added to this list in the future.
Short Circuit - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with short circuit
analysis
Arc Flash - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with arc flash analysis
Motor Acceleration - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with motor
acceleration. In addition, generation categories for power sources are also properties used for
motor starting studies. Generation categories will be added to this list in the future.
Other Studies - Lists all properties for selected element that are associated with all other
engineering studies
Differences
in their properties across Base and selected revisions.
Rev Data Only
When this option is selected, then the drop down element list is narrowed to show list of elements that
have revisioned properties. For example if Bus1 is not revisioned then it will be removed from the list
completely.
5-57
Data Manager
5.4.1 Find Tool

The data manager includes a find button similar to those within the element property editors. The find
button automatically closes the data manager, stores any selections made and finds the selected element
on the active single line diagram. The element is then highlighted using the selected element color (can be
set from the theme manager). This color is red by default.
5.4.2 Export
The data manager exports the data being viewed in the grid / spreadsheet view into excel while
maintaining the color codes of revisioned data. The Excel output is WYSIWYG hence it is possible to
export all the properties for individual device types into this format. The spreadsheet view also allows you
to export the data to excel by selecting the grid (using mouse to highlight the rows) and using Copy
(CTRL+C) and paste (CTRL+V) into any other document such as Excel.
5-58
Data Manager
5.4.3 Creating Revisions

In ETAP 7.5 and prior releases, you can create revisions from the revision control toolbar or from the
RevControl Menu. ETAP 11 onwards you can create new revisions from the RevControl menu or the
Data Manager. All data in a new revision is identical to the Base Data (delta is equal to zero), until you
begin to make changes.
You can create a new Revision Data ID by selecting any of the actions listed below:
From the RevControl menu, select the Create command.

From the Data Manager
ETAP displays the Create version of the Project Revision Control dialog box. In this dialog box,
you can create a new Revision Data ID or copy an existing one and use it as a base for your new
revision. For information about copying revision data for a new revision, see the Copying
Revision Data Section below.
5-59
Data Manager
Project Revision Control Dialog Box Create Version

2. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the New option is selected.
3. In the New option text box, enter the new Revision Data ID.
4. Enter the revision information in the text boxes on the right, including Change # (design change
notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description, Schedule, and
Remarks.
Note: When you want to merge Revision Data, you can merge by specifying the Revision Data
ID, Change #, or Group # entered in this dialog box. For more information about merging
Revision Data, see the Merging Revision Data Section below.
5. Click OK. ETAP adds the Revision Data ID to the Revision toolbars drop-down list.
Create revision records based on:

ETAP property editors such as bus and protective devices are updated with short circuit and arc flash
values. These values are stored with the property editor and hence revisioned in the event the analysis
results are different between Base and any other revision. This option allows the user to force ETAP to
create revision records based on Star and Arc Flash updates.
5-60
Data Manager
5.4.4 Copying Revision Data

You can create new revisions by copying Revision Data from existing Revision Data IDs (names). All
data in a copied revision is identical to the revision from which it was copied, until you begin to make
changes. You can also copy revisions by using the Data Manager Copy button.
1. From the RevControl menu, select the Copy command.
5-61
Data Manager
ETAP displays the Copy version of the Project Revision Control dialog box.
In this dialog box, you can also create a new Revision Data ID by copying the
Base Data. For information about copying the Base Data for a new revision,
see
the
5-62
Data Manager
Properties
When an element is selected and Properties option is selected then the data manager grid switches from
element list and displays properties for the elements as found in the project database.
If only Base is selected, then based on the device selection, the property grid can show data for individual
element or data for all elements within one specific device type. This concept is illustrated with a few
examples.
Example
1
Revision Control
Base Only
Device Selection
All AC Elements
Note that in this example, all AC elements are displayed with element IDs in a drop-down list and the
property for each element is arranged row-wise.
5-63

Example
2
Data Manager
Revision Control
Base Only
Device Selection
Circuit Breakers, HV
Note that in this example, all HVCB are displayed with element IDs arranged row-wise and the property
for each element is arranged column-wise.
Study Filters
When any of the study filters is checked then the properties used for the selected study will be displayed
and all others will be hidden. The following study filters are available in ETAP 11.
Non-Engineering Data Lists all properties for selected element that is not associated with any
analysis / calculation
Load Flow - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with load flow analysis. In
addition, generation categories for power sources are also properties used for load flow type
studies. Generation categories will be added to this list in the future.
Short Circuit - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with short circuit
analysis
Arc Flash - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with arc flash analysis
Motor Acceleration - Lists all properties for selected element that is associated with motor
acceleration. In addition, generation categories for power sources are also properties used for
motor starting studies. Generation categories will be added to this list in the future.
Other Studies - Lists all properties for selected element that are associated with all other
engineering studies
Differences
in their properties across Base and selected revisions.
Rev Data Only
When this option is selected, then the drop down element list is narrowed to show list of elements that
have revisioned properties. For example if Bus1 is not revisioned then it will be removed from the list
completely.
5-64
Data Manager
5.4.5 Find Tool

The data manager includes a find button similar to those within the element property editors. The find
button automatically closes the data manager, stores any selections made and finds the selected element
on the active single line diagram. The element is then highlighted using the selected element color (can be
set from the theme manager). This color is red by default.
5.4.6 Export
The data manager exports the data being viewed in the grid / spreadsheet view into excel while
maintaining the color codes of revisioned data. The Excel output is WYSIWYG hence it is possible to
export all the properties for individual device types into this format. The spreadsheet view also allows you
to export the data to excel by selecting the grid (using mouse to highlight the rows) and using Copy
(CTRL+C) and paste (CTRL+V) into any other document such as Excel.
5-65
Data Manager
Creating Revisions Section above.
2. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the Existing option is selected.
3. Select the Revision Data ID you want to copy from the drop-down list.
4. In the text box under the To Revision Data group, enter the name of the new Revision Data ID.
5. Edit the revision information as required in the text boxes on the right, including Change #
(design change notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description,
Schedule, and Remarks. Change # and Group # can be any alphanumeric combination up to 36
characters.
Note: When you want to merge Revision Data, you can merge by the Revision Data ID, Change
#, or Group # entered in this dialog box. For more information about merging Revision Data, see
the Merging Revision Data Section below.
5-66
Data Manager
5.4.7 Edit Revision Data ID Name and Information

You can rename a Revision Data ID and edit any of its information by doing the following:
1. From the RevControl menu, select the Edit command. ETAP displays the Edit version of the
Project Revision Control dialog box.
Project Revision Control Edit Version

2. Edit the Revision Data ID name and information as required, and then click OK to save the
changes.
You can also edit the revision ID and information from the data manager using the edit button.
Note: The Revision Data ID information includes Change # (design change notification number) and
Group # (design group number), which may be used to merge Revision Data. For more information
about merging Revision Data, see the Merging Revision Data Section below.
5.4.8 Merging Revision Data

You can merge Revision Data to study the effects of multiple revisions changes and modifications on the
project simultaneously. When you merge Revision Data, the combined revision will consist of the
elements and engineering properties from the Base Data, except where properties of the Revision Data
have been changed. In those cases, the merged revision uses the Revision Data properties instead. Where
the same changed properties differ between two revisions, the revision that is being merged into is the one
that has its properties overwritten.
5-67
Data Manager
You can use the following three Revision Data types to merge Revision Data:
Revision Data ID (name)

Change # (design change notification number)
Group # (design group number)
5.4.9 Merging by Revision Data ID

You can merge one revision into another revision by using their Revision Data IDs. Where the same
changed properties differ between two revisions, the revision that is being merged into is the one that has
its properties overwritten. However, the merged revision keeps the Revision Data Info values of the
revision that is being merged into.
You can also merge Revision Data into the Base Data, if you have project, base, or Revision Editor logon
access. When you merge Revision Data into the Base Data, that Revision Data is deleted because there is
no longer any delta difference between it and the Base Data.
Note: You cannot merge the Revision Data of one ID into the same ID (for example, Revision 1 into
Revision 1).
To merge one revision into another revision, follow these steps:
1. From the RevControl menu, select Merge. ETAP displays the Merge version of the Project
Revision Control dialog box.
5-68
Data Manager
Project Revision Control Merge Version

2. In the From Revision Data group, select the ID option.
3. In the To Revision Data group, select the name of the Revision Data ID into which you want to
merge the selected Revision Data.
4. Click OK to merge.
To merge one revision into another revision, these steps can be followed as well.
1. Launch the Data Manager
2. Click the Merge button. ETAP displays the Merge version of the Project Revision Control dialog
box.
3. In the From Revision Data group, select the ID option.
4. In the To Revision Data group, select the name of the Revision Data ID into which you want to
merge the selected Revision Data.
5-69
Data Manager
5-70
Data Manager
5.4.10 Individual Element Merge

Merging using the Data Manager can be done graphically as well. Not only does the data manager allow
for complete data revision merges, it may also be used to merge individual elements as well.
Graphical merge of base / revision to another
1.
2.
3.
4.
Launch the Data Manager

Set the Display Options to Elements
Select the Base / Revision you want to review or merge
Drag the Base / Revision column name to the destination Revision / Base.
5. A confirmation dialog is displayed indicating the From and To Data Revisions that will be merge.
Click Yes to continue with the merge.
5-71
Data Manager
Graphical merge of base / revision data for individual element to another

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Launch the Data Manager

Set the Display Options to Elements
Select the Base / Revision you want to review or merge
Find the element you want to merge between data revisions
Drag and drop the cell corresponding to the element from one data revision column to another
6. A confirmation dialog is displayed indicating the From and To Data Revisions that will be merge.
Click Yes to continue with the merge.
5-72
Data Manager
7. If confirmation dialog is not required then you may check the option Do Not Ask for
Confirmation (This Session Only). When this option is checked, as long as the Data Manager is
not restarted, this confirmation dialog will not be displayed again.
5.4.11 Merging by Change # or Group #

The Change # (design change number) and Group # (design group number) options are used to merge
together phases of design projects. Each Revision Data ID can have both a Change # and a Group #
assigned and each can be considered a phase of a project.
For example, you can use Change # to associate the revisions of a project. If you want to study how the
phases (revisions) of the project are working together, you can merge all the revisions assigned to that
particular Change #. Then, you can use Group # to merge common revisions between one or more
projects to study how the projects work together.
In the above example, Group # is a meta-variable of Change #. However, you can use Change # and
Group # interchangeably to match the needs of a design project and the structure of your design group.
Either one can be used for any level of projects that have more than one design revision associated with
them, as long as you are consistent with the project levels where you are using them.
To merge revisions by Change # or Group #, do the following:
1. From the RevControl menu, select Merge. ETAP displays the Merge version of the Project
Revision Control dialog box.
5-73
Data Manager
Project Revision Control Merge Version

2. In the From Revision Data group, select the Change # or Group # option. Depending on your
option selection, ETAP displays one of the following versions of the Project Revision Control
dialog box.
5-74
Data Manager
Change # Option
Group # Option
3. In the Change # or Group # drop-down list, select the change number or group number whose
associated revisions you want to merge. ETAP displays the Revision Data IDs of all the revisions
that have the selected change or group number in the Revision Data box.
Note: Since both Revision 1 and Revision 2 were assigned Change # 1 and Group # A, both
revisions appear in the Revision Data box of the figures above when either Change # 1 or Change
# A is selected.
4. In the To Revision Data group, select the Revision Data ID of the revision into which you want to
merge the displayed Revision Data.
6. The Merge function can also be launched from the data manager.
5-75
Data Manager
5.4.12 Deleting Revision Data

If you are logged on at the project, base, or Revision Editor access level, you can delete Revision Data by
specifying the Revision Data ID. You cannot delete the Base Data.
Note: Once you have deleted Revision Data, it is not retrievable. Deleted Revision Data is not put into the
dumpster.
To delete a Revision Data ID, follow these steps:
1. From the RevControl menu, select the Delete command. ETAP displays the Delete version of the
Project Revision Control dialog box.
2. From the Revision Data Info drop-down list, select the Revision Data ID you want to delete.
3. Click OK to delete.
The delete function can also be launched from the Data Manager.
5-76
ETAP Wizards
5.5 ETAP Wizards

ETAP includes time-saving project management tools called the ETAP Wizards, which allow you to
record and run any study at any time. The ETAP Wizards include the Scenario Wizard, Study Wizard,
and Project Wizard. All three are described in more detail below.
Using the ETAP Wizards, you will be able to combine the orthogonal tools (Presentations,
Configurations, and Revision Data), study types, Output Reports, and Study Cases (the loading and
generation system operation factors together with solution parameters) to perform a complete system
study with the click of a button.
The three ETAP Wizards are located on the lower

portion of the System toolbar.
5-77
Scenario Wizard
Study Wizard
Project Wizard
ETAP Wizards
5.5.1 Scenario Wizard

A scenario allows you to group all study options into one place. For this reason, scenarios are useful
anytime you want to record a study for execution. Every project file contains a Scenario Wizard.
Scenarios are created and recorded in the Scenario Wizard and can be run individually at any time. A
project can have an unlimited number of scenarios. Scenarios are composed of the following parameters:
System (Network Analysis or CSD Analysis)

Presentation (for example, one-line diagram, UGS, or CSD)
Revision Data (Base or Revision Data)
Configuration Status (for example, Normal, Stage 1, or TSEvents)
Study Mode (for example, LOAD FLOW or SHORT-CIRCUIT)
Study Case (loading and generation system operation factors and solution parameters)
Study Type (vary depending on Study Mode)
Output Report (vary depending on Study Mode)
When a scenario is run in a project, it will automatically create an Output Report or overwrite an existing
report with the same name.
Scenario Wizard Editor
5-78
ETAP Wizards
You can create a scenario either by selecting parameters in the Scenario Wizard or by recording options
you have already selected for your study in the one-line view. To record the options already selected in
your study in the one-line view, follow these steps:
1. Open the Scenario Wizard
2. Click on the New button
ETAP sets up the options in the Scenario Wizard based on the selected Study Case, report, presentation,
revision, and Study Mode.
Scenario
Scenario ID
The Scenario ID is displayed in this text box. You can rename a scenario by deleting the old ID and
entering a new one. The Scenario ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters long. Use the navigator
buttons at the lower left of the dialog box to page through the existing scenarios.
New
Click the New button to save the current setup of the editor as a new study. In effect, a new scenario will
be created based on the existing System, Presentation, Revision Data, Config. Status, Study Mode, Study
Case, and Output Report settings. If there are multiple Study Types under the same Study Mode
parameter, the Study Type will default to the first type.
Note: When you click the New button, the Scenario ID is incremented by one to maintain an unique ID.
You can navigate to the previous or next scenario by using the navigator buttons at the lower left of the
editor.
Copy
Click the Copy button to copy the existing scenario. The Scenario ID is incremented by one to preserve
ID uniqueness. After copying the scenario you can modify and save any of the settings.
Delete
Click the Delete button to delete the selected scenario. There is one exception to this, you cannot delete
the last scenario in the project. There must be at least one scenario in a project.
Rename
Click the Rename button to rename the selected scenario. ETAP will save the System, Presentation,
Revision Data, Config. Status, Study Mode, Study Case, Study Type, and Output Report settings
specified in the Scenario Wizard under the new scenario name.
Run
Click the Run button to execute the selected scenario. ETAP will use the System, Presentation, Revision
Data, Config. Status, Study Mode, Study Case, Study Type, and Output Report settings specified in the
current scenario.
5-79
ETAP Wizards
Project & Library

Project File
The path to where the project is stored.
ETAP Default Library

Path to where the ETAP default library is located. Please note that this path location will be dynamically
updated for every release of ETAP once this option is selected. This means that if this option is selected,
the program will automatically select the library provided with the current release of ETAP being used
run the project file (i.e., C:\ETAP 700\LIB\Etaplib700.lib).
Project Specific Library

Path to where the library being used for this project is stored. The program will always look in the
specified path for the library to be used to run this project file.
Parameters
In this group you can select the parameter values ETAP will use when you execute this scenario.
System
This parameter is accessible from the drop-down list. Use it to select either the Network Analysis or CSD
Analysis system. The system selected determines the Study Mode and Study Type parameters that are
available.
Presentation
Use the drop-down list to select any of the presentations available under the system selected. The selected
presentation will be used when the scenario is executed.
Revision Data
Use the drop-down list to select any of the Revision Data IDs available under the system selected. The
selected Revision Data will be used when the scenario is executed.
Config. Status
When you select the Network Analysis System, use the drop-down list to select any of the available
configurations. This option is only available under Network Analysis, since it is the only system that uses
configurations.
Study Mode
Use the Study Mode drop-down list to select one of the available values. The Study Modes available are
dependent on the system selected. If you select CSD Analysis under the System parameter, only CSD is
available under the Study Mode parameter. If you select Network Analysis under the System parameter,
the figure below shows the available Study Modes (and the available study types for each):
5-80
ETAP Wizards
Study Case
Study Cases include the loading and generation system operation factors in combination with solution
parameters. Use the drop-down list to select any of the Study Cases available under the selected Study
Mode.
Study Type
Use the Study Type drop-down list to select one of the available values. These study types are dependent
on the System and Study Mode values selected. If you select CSD Analysis under the System parameter,
only Voltage Drop is available under the Study Type parameter. If you select Network Analysis under the
System parameter, the available Study Type parameters depend on the Study Mode parameter selected, as
shown in the figure in the Study Mode Section above.
Output Report
Enter an Output Report name or select a Study Mode and choose one from the drop-down list of reports
that are available there. When a scenario is executed in a project, ETAP will automatically create the
Output Report or overwrite an existing report of the same name.
Preferences/Ini File
Editing the ini entries through this editor will supersede the existing entries set globally in the etaps.ini
file or under the Options Preferences editor for the selected scenario. Ten ini entries can be set using this
editor.
Note: To include the ini updated in this field, the study must be run from the scenario wizard. If the study
is run from the study toolbar, the ini entry will not be considered.
Remarks
Enter any remarks you want saved with the current scenario.
5-81
ETAP Wizards
5.5.2 Study Wizard

Macros reduce the time it takes to run several scenarios. Every project file contains a Study Wizard. The
Study Wizard enables you to sequentially group existing scenarios into study macros. You must have
created the scenarios that will be included in the study macro before you can create the macro. You create
these scenarios using the Scenario Wizard. (See the Scenario Wizard Section above for additional
information.)
A project may include an unlimited number of study macros. When you run a study macro, all of the
scenarios included in it are run, and create new Output Reports or overwrite existing Output Reports,
much the same way as if they were run individually. For example, it is possible to group scenarios related
to load flow or a specific type of load flow into one study macro.
Study Wizard Editor
5-82
ETAP Wizards
To create a study macro, follow these steps:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the Study Wizard.

Click in the Scenario box, and then select the scenario you wish to run first.
Repeat Step 2 for the next empty row and repeat for each scenario you wish to include.
When you are finished selecting scenarios, click OK to save the study macro.
Study Macro
New
Click the New button to create a new study macro.
Note: When you click the New button, the macro ID is incremented by one to maintain a unique ID. You
can navigate to the previous or next scenario by using the navigator buttons at the lower left of the editor.
Delete
Click the Delete button (located at the top of the dialog box) to delete a selected macro. There is one
restriction, you cannot delete the last macro in the project. There must be at least one macro in a project.
Copy
Click the Copy button to copy the existing study macro. A new macro is created with the selected macro
settings. The macro ID is incremented by one to maintain an unique ID. Once you have copied the macro
you can modify and save any of its settings.
Rename
Click the Rename button to rename the selected study macro. ETAP will save the current settings under
the new macro name.
Run
Click the Run button to execute the selected macro. ETAP will use the System, Presentation, Revision
Data, Configuration Status, Study Mode, Study Case, Study Type, and Output Report settings specified in
the first scenario and then move to the next scenario according to the sequence recorded in the macro.
Parameters
Order
This defines the sequence in which the macros will be executed.
Active
Select this to activate the row. Any scenario not activated will be skipped during the execution of the
macro.
Scenario
Select one of the scenarios available in the project from the drop-down list.
Pause
Select Pause to cause macro execution to stop at the current scenario. This option allows you to
automatically stop the execution of the macro when you want to review the results after running the
scenario.
5-83
ETAP Wizards
UP / DOWN
Select a row and click the Up and Down buttons to change the sequence in which the scenarios are
executed.
Add
The Add button allows you to add a new row so that a new scenario can be added to the current study
macro.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected scenario from the current study macro. Please note that this
action simply removes the scenario from the current study macro list, but does not remove the scenario
from the project.
Insert
This button allows you to insert a new row above the selected one. This allows you to insert an scenario at
any point in the study macro list.
5-84
ETAP Wizards
5.5.3 Project Wizard

The Project Wizard is project independent and is saved within the ETAP folder. It enables the user to
group existing study macros into project macros. You should use a project macro when you have several
projects from which you want to run multiple study macros and their scenarios simultaneously. This
feature automates opening and closing project files and individually executing study macros and their
scenarios.
You create a project macro in the following manner:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the Project Wizard.

Click the macro field, and then select the study macro you want to execute first.
Repeat Step 2 for the next empty row and repeat for each study macro you wish to include.
When you are finished adding study macros, to save the project macro, click OK.
5-85
ETAP Wizards
Project Wizard Editor
Project Wizard
New
Click the New button to create a new project Wizard.
Note: When you click the New button, the Project Wizard ID is incremented by one to maintain a unique
ID. You can navigate to the previous or next project macro by using the navigator buttons at the lower left
of the editor.
Delete
Click the Delete button located at the top of the dialog box to delete the selected project wizard. There is
one restriction, you cannot delete the last project wizard (i.e. there must be at least one project wizard in
the list).
Copy
Click the Copy button to copy the existing project wizard. A new project wizard is created with the
current settings. The project wizard ID is increased by one to preserve ID uniqueness. After copying the
project wizard you can modify it and save any of the its settings.
Rename
Click the Rename button to assign a new name to the selected project wizard. ETAP will save the current
settings under this new project wizard name.
5-86
ETAP Wizards
Run
Click the Run button to execute the selected project wizard. ETAP will run the scenario settings specified
in the first study macro then move to the next one according to the sequence recorded in the project
macro.
Study Wizard Selection

Order
Defines the sequence in which the study macros will be executed.
Active
Select Active to activate the row. Uncheck this box if you want to skip the execution of this study macro
for the current project wizard.
Path
Enter the path to the project that contains the study macro you wish to run. If you do not know the path,
use the Browse button on the right to locate the project wizard and the desired study macro.
Project
Enter the name of the project that contains the study macro you wish to run. If you do not know the
project name, use the Browse button on the Right to locate the project wizard and the desired study
macro.
Macro
From the Macro drop-down list, select one of the study macros available in the selected project wizard.
Pause
Select to pause at the current study macro. This option allows you to automatically stop the execution of
the project macro when you want to review the results after running the study macro.
Note: If you include study macros that contain scenarios that have been set to pause during execution of
the study macro, the project macro will also pause after that scenario.
UP / DOWN
Select a row and click these buttons to change the sequence in which the study macros are executed.
Browse
If you do not know the project name that contains the study macro you wish to run, use the Browse button
on the Right to locate the project wizard and the desired study macro.
Delete
The Delete button on the right side of the dialog box will delete the selected row.
Insert
Select a row and click the Insert button to insert a row above the selected row.
5-87
ETAP Wizards
Add
Click on this button to add a new row to the current project wizard. This will allow you to specify a new
study macro.
Add Multiple
Click on this button to add multiple study macros to the current project wizard. The following editor
allows you to specify the path of the study macros you want to add. The Include Subfolders allows the
program to search all the subdirectories within the path specified. If there is any study macro in the
subdirectories, it will be added to the current project wizard.
5-88
ETAP Wizards
5.5.4 Wizard Example

This example illustrates how you can create macros for previously executed Load Flow, Short-Circuit
(Three-Phase Duty), and Reliability Study Cases and save yourself time later on. For this example, the
project file contains the following items:
Two sets of data (Base and Revision1)

Three configurations
Two different generation categories
Two different loading categories
According to these parameters, the example includes 24 different scenarios for each study.
Scenario Setup
As a first step, you would create the 72 scenarios (24 for each Study Case) using the Scenario Wizard. For
example, one of the scenarios would be a load flow analysis using Base Data, Config1 status, and
maximum loading and generation categories. To create this scenario, you would set it up normally from
within the one-line view, and then open the Scenario Wizard and click New. ETAP will automatically
capture all of the parameters and conditions related to the study.
5-89
ETAP Wizards
You would then create the remaining scenarios by repeating the above actions, or by selecting New from
the Scenario Wizard and then specifying the parameters manually.
For example, you would run this load flow study with the following options:
2 Loading Conditions (Summer Load and Winter Load)
2 Two optional settings on Generation (Generators set to Power Factor Control or Voltage
Control)
2 Two options for a Transformer Size (10MVA and 30 MVA)
For the above conditions, you would set up the following options in ETAP:
Two Study Cases:
LF-Case1 set to use Summer Load
LF-Case2 set to use Winter Load
Two Configurations:
Config-1 with generators set to Power Factor Control
Config-2 with generators set to Voltage Control
Two Revisions:
Revision-1 with Transformer set to 10 MVA
Revision-2 with Transformer set to 30 MVA
Given the above settings, in the Load Flow Mode you would select one case from the following, or any
other combination:
LF-Case1, Config-1, Revision1, and name the Output Report (Case1)
If you were to repeat the setup of these cases without the Study Wizard, you would have to remember all
of this setup information. Using the Study Wizard you can create multiple scenarios for each case. For the
example above, there would be one scenario for each combination of options.
Next, using the Study Wizard, you would organize the 72 scenarios into three study macros based upon
Analysis Type. For example, the first study macro would contain the 24 Load Flow scenarios and be
named LF_Study. To create the LF_Study macro, you would open the Study Wizard, click New, and then
add the 28 Load Flow scenarios.
5-90
ETAP Wizards
The other two study macros can be created by clicking New and adding the respective scenarios.
Next, you would link the three study macros, by opening the Project Wizard and adding the three study
macros.
5-91
ETAP Wizards
After completing all of the required steps for the ETAP Wizard, you have the choice of running all
scenarios using the Project Wizard, running only the scenarios related to a specific study using the Study
Wizard, or running one or more scenarios individually using the Scenario Wizard.
The more configurations and studies you have within a project, the more valuable ETAP Wizards will
become for you in terms of increased efficiency and time savings, time that might otherwise be expended
performing repetitive setup tasks.
5-92
ETAP Wizards
5.5.5 Output Database Comparison Program

The Output Database Comparison Program (DB Compare Program) is a console designed to compare two
Microsoft Access Database (MDB) files as instructed by a third MDB file (instruction database). This
console has been designed to interface with the scenarios in ETAP to allow the comparison of current
ETAP output database results against results from a benchmark Output Report database. The benchmark
results could have been generated using a previous version or the same version of ETAP.
This comparison console can be used for different purposes:
1) It can be used as a raw database comparison utility. In this form, it can compare all the tables
inside a database (current results) against the same tables in another database (benchmark).
Depending on the results of the comparisons, the program will generate pass/fail reports for each
table/database being compared.
2) It can be used as an automatic validation tool to compare ETAP results generated in one computer
against the same results generated from a different machine. This can be the case with the
installation tests required for ETAP under a high impact software program (i.e. nuclear grade
software application ETAP installation tests).
3) It can be used to compare the deviation on ETAP results between different scenarios (i.e.
deviation caused by using different Study Case parameters, configurations, revisions, preferences
(options) etc.
The DB compare program has the following components:
1) The Output Report database file: This Output Report database file is created by ETAP upon
execution of the current scenario.
2) The benchmark report database file: This Output Report database is the benchmark file. The DB
compare console compares the output database against this database to create the comparison
results.
3) The comparison instruction database file: This database contains instructions on the comparison
that should be executed. This instruction database tells the DB compare console what tables to
compare and/or which tables to skip. It also has command instructions on how each table should
be compared as well as what deviation is allowed.
4) The comparison results databases: These databases are created at the time the output database and
the benchmark database are compared. They contain the specific results of the comparison
including pass/fail items and the reasons for the failures (deviation report and global summary
report databases).
Output Data Comparison Editor

The Compare Output (Output Database Comparator) Editor can be accessed from the Scenario Wizard
window.
5-93
ETAP Wizards
Output Data Comparison Checkbox

You must check the Output Data Comparison checkbox in order to enable the Edit button. Clicking
on the Edit button will bring up Compare Output Editor:
Compare
The Output Report comparison is launched automatically from this button. You can launch the
comparison by clicking on this button once you have setup the Compare Output Editor options and you
have specified which Output Report Microsoft access database is to be considered the benchmark in the
comparison.
Edit
The edit button opens the Compare Output Editor window. This is where all the comparison
preferences and instruction databases can be specified.
View
The view button allows you to quickly open the Output Report comparison result database. This database
contains the results of the comparison.
Benchmark File Path

This path shows the name and directory which contains the benchmark Output Report database. This path
is display only and can be changed from the Compare Output Editor window.
5-94
ETAP Wizards
Compare Output Editor (DB Compare Console)
Database Comparison
The Compare Output Editor allows you to setup the DB compare program so that it can automatically
compare the newly generated Output Report database from the scenario against the benchmark database.
Selected Report
This is the path of the current output result database to be generated by the current scenario. Once the
scenario finishes generating this report database, it will be compared to the benchmark database. This
path is automatically selected by the program once the scenario is configured and you have selected an
Output Report name for the particular scenario.
Benchmark Report
This is the Output Report database which serves as the benchmark in the comparison. This means that the
comparison is taken as:
5-95
ETAP Wizards
View (selected report)

This button allows you to open the selected Output Report database. Once this button is clicked, the
program opens the report database using Microsoft Access. This serves as a quick way to open the
selected Output Report database (instead of using windows explorer and/or launching it directly from MS
access).
Browse (for benchmark report path)

This button opens a browse window so that the path to the benchmark Output Report database can be
specified.
View (benchmark report)

This button allows you to open the selected benchmark Output Report database. Once this button is
clicked, the program opens the report database using Microsoft Access. This serves as a quick way to
open the selected benchmark Output Report database (instead of using windows explorer and/or
launching it directly from MS access).
Comparison Results
This section allows you to specify the name and location of the databases which contain the results of the
Output Report database comparisons.
Deviation Report (Comparison Results Database)

This path points to the location of the database which contains the detail results of the comparison
between the output and benchmark report databases. This path is automatically selected by the program
faster setup; however, it can be modified by specifying a new path and name by clicking on the Browse
button.
Browse (deviation report)

This button opens a browse window in which you can specify the name and location of the Deviation
Report database (comparison results database).
View (deviation report)

This button allows you view the Deviation Report (comparison results database) using Microsoft Access.
Global Summary (Pass/Fail) Report

This path points to the location of the database which contains the global results of the comparison
between the output and benchmark report databases. This path is automatically selected by the program
and it defaults to the ETAP installation directory under a file called GlobalSummaryReport.mdb. The
DB Compare Console will write the location path of the Global Summary Report Database into the
ETAPS.ini file. Once this is done, all the global comparison results for each scenario will be created in
that location. This means that if you set this path and report name, the program will utilize it for any
scenario unless it is changed again.
Browse (Global Summary)

This button opens a browse window in which you can specify the name and location of the Global
Summary (Pass/Fail) Report Database.
View (Global Summary)

This button allows you view the Deviation Report (comparison results database) using Microsoft Access.
5-96
ETAP Wizards
Options
This section has the purpose of providing global comparison options for the DB Compare Console. These
options allow you to skip comparing some parameters such as project names, database versions, and dates
which do not need to be compared since they are not part of any calculation results.
Skip Records that Pass with Deviation < 0.1%

If this box is selected, The DB Compare Program will not report any comparison result whose deviation
is less than 0.1%. This means that all records with a percent deviation less than 0.1% automatically will
pass and will not be reported in the deviation report. The records with a deviation percentage higher than
0.1 % will be reported as failures in the deviation report. It is recommended to use a default value of 0.1%
as the default for the comparison values to allow for different calculation precision and small deviations
in significant figures.
Skip Project Information

The project information for the load flow Output Report database will not be compared. Please note that
this option only applies to load flow Output Report database. The project information is typically
included inside a table called Header. This checkbox instructs the program to automatically skip the
comparison of the fields inside this table. However, for some other modules, the project information may
be contained inside of a table with slightly different name like HeaderRA, HeaderTS, etc. and thus this
option only applies to LF Output Report databases.
The instruction database provided with ETAP 7.0.0 (or current version) already provides specific
instructions for skipping the comparison of the project information for all modules including load flow.
Because of this situation, this option may not have any impact on the comparison results.
Instructions Database
This section allows you to specify the name and location of the specific comparison instructions for the
DB Compare Console. The comparison instructions are provided in the form of a Microsoft Access
Database and also certain comparison instructions can be entered directly through the command-line
instructions (for advanced users)
Instruction Database Path

The instruction database contains the instructions for comparing the Output Report databases. The DB
Compare program has a default comparison instruction database provided with ETAP 7.0.0 (or current
version). It is located under C:\ETAP 700 (or current version)\ DB_CompareInstr.mdb. This
instruction comparison database has been configured by ETAP engineers to assist in the comparison of
ETAP results.
Browse (Instruction database)

This button opens a browse window in which you can specify the name and location of the Comparison
Instruction Database. This path only needs to be specified once since the DB Compare program stores this
location in the ETAPS.INI file. The program will use the same set of instructions for all the scenarios that
are executed (from the Study Wizard or Project Wizard).
Command-Line Instructions
This command line input field allows you to provide specific instructions to the DB Compare Console for
comparing the results and benchmark databases.
The following command can be added in this version of the DB Compare Console:
5-97
ETAP Wizards
-daction = Instructs the DB Compare program to compare only the tables listed in the comparison
instruction database Comparator Table. If a table is not listed in the Comparator table, then the program
will not compare it. This command can be very useful when you do not want to specify each table in the
comparator table (either to skip or compare), and you only want to compare the tables for which you add
specific instructions.
Comparison Instruction Database Setup

This section describes the commands which can be setup inside of the comparison instruction database.
This database contains two tables. The first table is called the Comparator table and it contains the
specific comparison instructions. The second table is called the LookupTable and it contains
translations for each of the table column headers (field names). These translations attempt to give a more
meaningful description of the data in each field (since the database may be abbreviated or has not so
meaningful names which may be hard to understand).
Comparator Table
This table has the following fields: TableName,
CompMethod, CompVariance and DoOrderBy.
FieldName,
Action, CompType,
The structure of the table and the possible commands which can be entered into this table are shown
below:
TableName
FieldName
Action
CompType
Name of the
table in the
database to
which this
entry
applies.
N/A (leave
blank)
C (Compare)
S (Skip)
CSN
(compare
skip new)
N/A (leave
blank)
Comp
Method
N/A
(leave
blank)
Comp
Variance
N/A
(leave
blank)
DoOrderBy
fieldname1, fieldname2,
fieldname3
Applies to table entry only.
Specifies the sort order of the
table in the Results and
Benchmark database. If no
entry, the primary key is used if
there is one. If no primary key,
the program guesses. Add
NOSORT for side-by-side
comparison.
5-98
ETAP Wizards
The following is a sample database comparison instruction Comparator table:
The following indicates how you would interpret the instructions on the second line of the Comparator
table:
The table name field specifies the name of the table for which the specific instructions apply. The action
field indicates that the AlertDeviceSum table will be compared based on CSN criteria. CSN stands for
compare but skip new. This means that this table will be compared but any new fields in the results table
which do not exist in the benchmark table will be ignored. Only the fields that exist in both the results and
benchmark Output Report database Alert table are to be compared.
The DoOrderBy field indicates which fields can be used by the program to create unique records to be
compared. In this case, the DeviceID and DeviceType fields can be used to establish unique records
for the comparison. If no unique records can be created (i.e. the table does not contain any fields which
can be used as unique keys to identify each row in the table), then the DB compare program cannot make
a comparison and the end result will be a failure in comparing this table. However, another command
called NOSORT can be added along with any field name to tell the DB compare program to continue
the comparison of this table on a record by record basis without establishing unique keys.
The NOSORT command will work in most cases as long as the sorting of the rows in the result and
benchmark tables remains the same. If the sorting is different, then this will result in a failure in
comparing the table.
Actions:
C = Compare = specifies that a table is to be compared. If there is any new field in the results database
which does not exist in the benchmark database, then the comparison will result in a failure.
CSN = Compare Skip New = Specifies that a table is to be compared, but any new fields which exist only
in the results database and do not exist in the benchmark database will be skipped. This may help to
compare tables between different versions of ETAP. In newer versions of ETAP, new fields may have
been added to a particular table. Since these fields do not exist in previous versions, there is no need to
compare them (or there is nothing to compare against).
S = Skip = specifies that this table is not to be compared. This can be specified for any table which
contains project information or data which is not calculation related.
5-99
ETAP Wizards
Field Name = Specifies the name of the table for the specific instructions
CompType = Specifies the type of comparison to be performed. This value can be left blank. Numbers
are treated as float comparisons and text as string comparisons.
CompMethod = Specifies the method of specifying the deviation results. This value can be left blank.
The default for this value is percent.
CompVariance = Specifies the deviation allowed for this table. This value can be left blank. The
variation allowed can be specified globally from the Compare Output Editor for each scenario. The
default is 0.1%.
DoOrderBy = DoOrderBy applies to tables only. The Do Order By field allows you to specify which
columns can be used to establish unique records in a table. If DoOrderBy includes an entry of NOSORT,
a different algorithm is used for selecting what rows to compare. NOSORT causes the DB Compare
program to start at the top of the table and compare the rows of each table in order, as if it were looking at
side-by-side printouts of the two tables. The purpose of the NOSORT instruction is to handle table
comparisons that have no unique keys.
LookupTable
The lookup tables in the comparison instruction database serve the purpose of translating the field names
(column names) to more meaningful descriptions.
As you can see in the image above, the LookupTable contains different output names for the field names
in different ETAP Output Report database. As an example, the table called BusArcFlash in the report
database is called Arc Flash Analysis and Summary in the Comparison Results Reports.
You can fully customize the comparison instruction table or the lookup table to whatever preferences you
may have by simply replacing the values.
Deviation Report (Comparison Result Database)

This deviation results or comparison results database contains the results of all the comparisons
performed by the DB Compare program. This database is divided into three tables and reports:
5-100
ETAP Wizards
Summary Results
Table Results
Detail Results
The DB compare program names the deviation report by default using the name of the result database
being compared. For example if the results database being compared is called LFReport, then the
deviation report will be automatically named LFReport_DBCompare.mdb. The browse button next to
the deviation report path can be used to change the name and location of the Deviation Report.
Summary Results
This table/report contains a summary of the comparisons for this test case. It indicates an overall pass or
failure for the comparison on the result and benchmark Output Report databases.
Summary Report
5-101
ETAP Wizards
Test Results Summary Table
This table/report can be accessed from the view button on the Compare Output and/or Scenario Wizard
Editors.
Table Results
This table/report contains a summary of pass/fail results for each compared table.
Table Comparison Summary Report
Table Comparison Results

This table/report can be accessed from the view button on the Compare Output and/or Scenario Wizard
Editors.
5-102
ETAP Wizards
Detail Results
This table/report contains detailed summary results for each comparison performed for each field in every
table compared. This summary can be shortened to only include the results with a deviation higher than
the specified value. This can be accomplished by selecting the option to skip records that pass with a
deviation < %Dev. This option is located in the Options section of the Compare Output Editor.
Detailed Results Report
Detailed Results Table
Global Summary Report Database

The Global Summary Report database contains the results of the comparison for the entire database. If all
the tables compared in the Output Report database for a particular scenario match the benchmark tables,
5-103
ETAP Wizards
then a Pass result will be written in the global summary database for this scenario. In the same fashion,
if any the tables in the database fails the comparison, then the overall result will be a **FAIL**.
The Global Summary Report can be accessed directly once the comparison process is complete by
clicking on the View button next to the Global Summary (Pass/Fail) Report path.
The image below shows the global summary report and table:
Global Summary Results Report
Global Summary Results Table
Setup of DB Compare for Example-Ansi

ETAP 7.0.0 (or current version) has a sample project called Example-ANSI. This project has been
configured to run for multiple scenarios on different ETAP modules. This section shows you step by step
how to configure the DB Compare program to compare all the scenarios in this example against the
benchmark reports contained within a directory called output. This example assumes that ETAP has been
installed under the default installation directory C:\ETAP 700 (or current version).
1) Open the Example-Ansi project:
5-104
ETAP Wizards
2) Open the Scenario Wizard Editor and open the Output Compare Editor by clicking on the Edit
button for any scenario. In this case 30Cyc-Un:
3) The Database comparison section has been configured to automatically compare the selected
report 30Cyc-Unbal.SA2 against the benchmark report with the same name inside of the
Output directory as shown in the image below:
5-105
ETAP Wizards
4) By default the deviation report should also be named 30Cyc-Unbal_DBCompare.mdb.

5) By default the Global Summary Report field will be blank. Click on the Browse button next to the
path for the global summary and name as follows: C\ETAP 700 (or current
version)\GlobalSummaryReport.mdb.
6) The options to skip records that pass with deviation less than 0.1% and to skip project
information should be selected.
7) The name and location of the instruction database may be blank. Click on the Browse button to
specify
the
following
name
and
location
C:\ETAP
700
(or
current
version)\DB_CompareInstructions.mdb.
5-106
ETAP Wizards
8) At this point you can close the Output Compare Editor and Scenario Editor. Click OK to save all
of your changes.
9) Open the Study Wizard. Select Phase-1 Macro and execute it (click on Run button). You must
wait until all the scenarios finish running and all the comparisons have completed. The DB
Compare program places some icons on the task bar during execution. You should also wait until
all the icons have been removed from the task bar before opening the global summary or
deviation results databases. The comparisons could take a considerable amount of time depending
on the size of the Output Report databases being compared.
You should wait until all the scenarios

have been executed and all the DB
compare comparisons have completed
(i.e. there is no more DB Compare
icons on the task bar)
10) You can reduce the number of scenarios to be executed by creating a new study macro or by
simply de-activating the scenarios that do not apply to your license. For example, you may only
want to run load flow and short-circuit calculation in one study macro.
11) If your installation directory is different from C:\ETAP 700 (or current version), then you may
need to reselect the name and location of the benchmark Output Report databases for each
scenario you want to run with the DB Compare tool. To do this, simply click on the Browse
5-107
ETAP Wizards
button and click on select the name of the benchmark report. The best way to setup the
comparisons is to place all the benchmark reports inside of a directory called output inside of
the current project that contains the reports you want to compare.
Click on this button to select the benchmark report to compare against the currently selected Output
Report.
5-108
Chapter 6
User Access Management

ETAP provides program security by relying on two tiers of user access control. The first level is
controlled by the operating system under which ETAP is running (Windows 2003, 2008, XP, Vista, and
Windows 7). In Windows 2003, 2008, XP, Vista, and 7 the user must be an authorized user as determined
by the operating system administrator.
ETAP provides the second level of access control by assigning one or more of the nine access level
permissions to an authorized user for each individual project. These access levels are listed in the
following table.
6-1

Access Level
Administrator
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
Overview
Off-Line
(ETAP)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
On-Line
(ETAP Real-Time)
X
X
X
X
Users may be assigned one, all, or any combination of access level permissions, but each user must have
at least one of the access level permissions to open a project. The level of access and responsibility are
different for each access level. A user may access a project under only one permission level at a time.
If a password is not required for a project, ETAP will automatically default to the highest assigned
permission level for that user and open the project. While passwords are recommended for optimal
security, they are not required.
The administrator is responsible for assigning and maintaining the status of the other users and their
permissions and passwords. As an administrator, you do not have access to the project one-line diagram,
underground system, or editors. The first level of authority on a given project is project editor, which has
access to all functions except disabling accounts and changing passwords.
Note: Project Editors and Base Editors cannot serve as checkers for engineering (equipment) data that
they have added or modified. You can have access to the same project as a checker (providing checker
access level permission has been assigned to you), but you cannot check any data that you have modified
under your user name.
The ETAP libraries, which are stored in Microsoft compound files, are opened in read-only mode for all
access levels except project editor and librarian. A project editor and librarian can open these libraries in
read/write mode. Consequently, only one user can access a library at any given time. Changes made to the
ETAP libraries are not permanent until the user saves the entire library, either explicitly or when
prompted while exiting the program.
ETAP project data are stored via ODBC (in non-exclusive mode) and cannot have multiple readers or
writers at the same time. ETAP data is structured in such a way so that transactioning support by the
database is not required.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
Access Levels
User Management
Creating a New Project File
Opening an Existing Project File
6-2
Access Levels
6.1 Access Levels

When an ETAP project file is created or opened, several functions can be performed on each device or the
entire project. The use of these functions varies for different access levels. These functions are
categorized into three groups in the following tables.
Group 1 Functions
Move elements
Group 2 Functions
Add (place) elements
Change element sizes
Cut (delete) elements to dumpster
Change element symbols
Copy elements to dumpster
Change element annotation orientation
Paste elements from dumpster
Edit engineering properties
Move elements from dumpster
Change operating status
Connect elements
Hide or show protection devices

Auto route connections
Change bus to node symbols or the reverse
Delete data revisions
Merge data revisions to other revisions
Purge elements from dumpster

Re-sizing elements (UGS)
Merge data revisions to base data
Graphical adjustment of Star Views
Group 3 Functions
Change Phase/Ground mode in Star View.
Compute Time Difference in Star View.
View Alerts.
View Device Setting Reports.
6.1.1 Administrator
The administrator access level is dedicated to user management only. When you are logged on as an
administrator, you cannot access projects for editing. An administrator can access any project file for
administration purposes, but is unable to edit the project. The administrator is in effect the project
supervisor responsible for establishing and maintaining all user access control on a specific project by
project basis. The administrator can add, modify, or delete user accounts, passwords, and access levels.
Administrators cannot delete themselves, or another user, while they have a project open and running.
Once assigned, only the default administrator, Admin, may delete a user from the administrator
permission.
6-3
Access Levels
Note: If two or more administrators have been assigned to a project, one can delete the other.
Every project must have at least one user with administrator access. This is a permanent administrator
with the user ID Admin and they cannot be deleted from the project. The password for Admin defaults to
password when you create a new project.
Note: If a project requires a password, Admin is the only administrator, and if you have changed and then
forgotten the Admin password, you cannot add, delete, or modify user access levels for this projectthat
is, you cannot open the project. ETAP has no backdoor method for circumventing this access level
lockout. Therefore, either do not require an Admin password, do not change the password, or make sure
you have multiple administrators and keep a record of all project passwords in a secure location for future
reference.
6.1.2 Project Editor

The Project Editor has the highest access level to project files. When a new project file is created, ETAP
will automatically log you on as a Project Editor.
In the On-line Mode (ETAP Real-Time), the Project Editor can construct the project database, create and
audit field equipment software interfaces, and upload the database to the ETAP Real-Time server. The
Project Editor can perform any function involved with the engineering, installation, or operation of ETAP
Real-Time, including taking the system off-line and performing control operations (if equipped). The
Project editor is the highest access level for editing project files.
Function
User access management
Project data/defaults
Base data
Revision data
Group 1 changes
Group 2 changes
Group 3 changes
Configuration status
Library data
Library path
Can Change
Cannot Change
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6.1.3 Base Editor

The Base Editor has read/write access to the base revision of the project. Base Editor access is more
restricted than Project Editor access, however. The Base Editor cannot change the library data or access
the user access management functions.
Function
Base data
Revision data
Can Change
Cannot Change
X
X
X
X
6-4
Access Levels
Function
Group 1 changes
Group 2 changes
Group 3 changes
Library data
Library path
Can Change
X
X
X
X
Cannot Change
X
X
6.1.4 Revision Editor

The Revision Editor access is more restricted than the Base Editor access. The Revision Editor can
change revision data only. The Revision Editor cannot change base revision data. And, similar to base
editors, revision editors cannot change the library data or access the user access management functions.
Function
Base data
Revision data
Group 1 changes
Group 2 changes
Group 3 changes
Library data & path
Can Change
Cannot Change
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X
X
X
Note: You must access a project as a Project Editor or Base Editor to add or rearrange the one-line
diagram or the underground raceway systems. Revision data reflects the difference (delta) between the
engineering properties in the base and revision data. Therefore, if a new substation needs to be added and
studied for future installation, you need to be logged on as a Base Editor to add it to the system. The
elements in this substation can be flagged Out of Service for the base data so they will not affect the
calculation results of the existing system. *Note: an exception to this is that Star Views can be graphically
adjusted for revision data and not for base data in Revision Editor.
6.1.5 Checker
The checker access level is provided to allow verification of changes to project engineering properties and
libraries for both base and revision data.
Function
Base data
Revision data
Group 1 changes
Group 2 changes
Can Check
Yes
Yes
6-5
Can Change
Cannot Change
X
X
X
X
X
X

Function
Group 3 changes
Library data
Library path
Access Levels
Can Check
Can Change
X
Cannot Change
X
X
X
When you log on as a checker, ETAP displays the Checking Information dialog box. (See the figure on
the left below.) You use this dialog box to verify that all changes to the engineering properties and library
data are correct.
Note: If you are the user who inserted data or made changes to the data, you cannot also be the checker
for that data. Another user with a different user ID will have to check your changes.
Checker Dialog Box for Bus1 Before and After Checked by a User
Edited By
This group displays the user ID (Name field) and the date that the selected element properties or libraries
were last changed (Date field). In this example, the last user who modified the element Bus1 was OTI on
03-03-2011.
Note: The user OTI might have changed one or a number of properties of Bus1.
6-6
Access Levels
Checked By
Once you click the Check button, your user ID and the date are entered in the Name and Date fields as the
checker for this element. If you edited the element or library data, you cannot also be the checker for the
data. Another user with a different user ID will have to logon and check the changes.
Project
Select the Project option to verify the changed element properties of the currently opened project. When
you select this option, the Element Type, Skip Checked Elements, and Date options are displayed in the
Filter By group.
Library
Select the Library option to verify changed libraries in the project library. When you select this option for
the first time you will open the project as a checker, and ETAP displays the Select a Project Library
dialog box.
Once you select and open a project library, its libraries are displayed in a window adjacent to the
Checking Information dialog box. Once you have selected a project library, ETAP displays the library
window automatically when you logon as a checker and select the Library option.
6-7
Access Levels
When viewing the Library window, libraries that are colored red have been changed but have not been
checked. Libraries with magenta colored icons have been checked, but have changed sub-libraries. To
find changed sub-libraries, expand magenta colored libraries until you find libraries with red icons. For
descriptions of the different icons in the Library window, see the table below:
Icon
Magenta with gray box
Magenta with blue check
Magenta with green check
Red
Red with green check
White with black check
White with gray box
Library Status
Unchanged
Checked
Just checked (can still be unchecked)
Unchecked
Just checked (can still be unchecked)
Checked
Unchanged
Sub-library Status
At least one not checked
At least one not checked
Checked or not checked
No unchecked sub-libraries
Checked
When you select a library in the Library window, ETAP will display that librarys information in the
Checking Information dialog box. Also, if you have selected a library with no sub-libraries and the
Display Editors option is selected, ETAP will display the editor for the library.
6-8
Access Levels
The data and options that have been changed for that library are displayed in red in the Library Editor, so
that you know what the last editor changed. If you have verified the changes for the selected library, click
the Check button in the Checking Information dialog box. ETAP changes the display of the data and
options in the editor from red to black and the Library icon in the Library window according to the table
above.
If you wish to uncheck the library, click the Check button again. You cannot uncheck a library after you
have selected another library in the Library window, however.
Note: If ETAP is not displaying changed data in red, you need to edit the project setup. Select Options
from the ETAP Project menu. In the Editor Options group of the Project Options dialog box, check the
Display Changed Data in RED option box, and click OK.
Configuration
Selecting Configuration option allows you to check information for configurations. Make sure the
Display Configuration Manager option is selected to display configuration manager in checker access
level. The purpose of the configuration checker is to validate changes made to configuration settings of
various devices in a project. This is similar to the checker for engineering properties. The configuration
manager editor is similar to the one described for Project Editor Access Level with just a few limitations
and modifications.
Filter By
You can select the project elements that you wish to check using the options in this group. The options in
this group only display when you select the Project option. If you select the Library option, use the
Library window to verify changed libraries.
Element Type
Select the element type you wish to display in the list box above the Check and Check All buttons. The
list of element types includes the following:
6-9
All AC&DC Elements

All DC Elements
All CSD Elements
All Cable Pulling Systems
All Ground Grids
All Generators & Loads
All Branches
All Meters
Access Levels
Dumpster
Individual AC Elements
Individual AC-DC Elements
Individual DC Elements
Individual UGS Elements
Composite Motors
Composite Networks
If you have the Display Editors option (see below) selected, ETAP displays the editor dialog box for the
specific project element you have selected in the list box above the Check and Check All buttons.
Skip Checked Elements

If you do not want to view elements that have already been checked just select this option.
Date
Select this option to display a range of dates during which changes have been made. You can change the
date ranges by clicking Select Dates and entering new dates, as shown in the dialog box below:
Display Editors
Use this command to display the editors for the project elements or libraries that you are checking.
Changes or modifications that have been made to individual fields are displayed in red in the editor dialog
box.
Note: If ETAP is not displaying changed data in red, you need to change the project setup. From the
ETAP Project menu, select Options. In the Editor Options group of the Project Options dialog box, check
the Display Changed Data in RED option box and click OK.
Check/Uncheck Data
6-10
Access Levels
When you click the Check button, the color of the check icon changes to blue and a red check mark
appears inside the corner box. If you click again, the selected element or library will be unchecked.
However, once you select another project element or library, you will no longer be able to uncheck the
previously checked item.
Check All
Click this button to check all the changed project elements or libraries. ETAP displays the dialog box
shown below that allows you to confirm that you wish to check them all.
If you are checking project elements (Project option selected), clicking this button checks all the elements
for your selected element type. If you are checking libraries (Library option selected), clicking this button
checks the library selected in the Library window and all its sub-libraries.
Controlled Dumpster
The controlled dumpster is a mechanism for locking information into the dumpster. This feature becomes
active only when the ETAP project is password-enabled.
When ETAP cuts any elements from a UGS or OLV, the dumpster cell to which the elements are
assigned is designated as a controlled dumpster cell. But, this controlled dumpster cell designation has no
meaning unless the project is password-enabled.
When passwords are enabled, the controlled dumpster is treated as a special entity with the following
attributes:
1. The controlled dumpster is identified as a controlled dumpster by the designation (C) or (CC) in its
title (in the Dumpster list window). These designations have the following meanings:
The designation C (Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a controlled
dumpster cell which is not checked. These cells cannot be purged until they are checked.
The designation CC (Checked Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a
controlled dumpster cell that has been checked by a checker. A user with project or base editor
permissions can purge these cells.
2. The background color of a (C) controlled dumpster is the color set in the command line Controlled
Dumpster Background Color (UGS Elements) or (One-line Elements). The background displays this
specified color only when the project setting has Display Changed Data in RED selected in the
Project Options dialog box or the project user is a checker.
3. When moving a cell from a controlled dumpster to the one-line diagram or UGS, two behaviors are
exhibited:
If the controlled dumpster cell is a (C) dumpster, the elements are moved as normalno special
action is taken to flag elements checked or unchecked. The dumpster cell is then destroyed
normally.
6-11
Access Levels
If the controlled dumpster cell is a (CC) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal but, in
addition, all element property values are flagged as unchecked, (and will be displayed in red in
the editors.) This is, for all practical purposes, identical to placing a new element on the one-line
diagram or UGS. The dumpster cell is then destroyed normally.
4. When in checker mode, the controlled dumpster cells appear in the checkers list and can be checked
as any other element can be checked. The act of checking a controlled dumpster changes its
designation from (C) to (CC). This also sets the dumpster background color back to normal.
5. A Project Editor (or Base Editor) cannot purge a controlled dumpster with designation (C). The
Project Editor can purge a controlled dumpster with designation (CC). The checker must check a
controlled dumpster cell before it can be purged.
6.1.6 Browser
Working at the Browser access level does not allow any modification of the project or library data. When
you have this access level you can view the one-line diagram and underground raceway systems, browse
the editors, and print, but the attached libraries cannot be opened. If you try to access Star Views with this
access level, only fixed-point curves will be displayed.
Function
Base data
Revision data
Group 1 changes
Group 2 changes
Group 3 changes
Library data
Library path
Can Change
Cannot Change
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6.1.7 Librarian
The librarian can browse the project file and modify library data.
Function
Base data
Revision data
Group 1 changes
Group 2 changes
Group 3 changes
Library data
Can Change
Cannot Change
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6-12

Function
Library path
Access Levels
Can Change
Cannot Change
X
6.1.8 Operator
Operator access level is used for On-line Mode (Real-Time). Operator access level allows you to
acknowledge alarms, playback system actions, and run simulation studies (predicting system response to
operator actions) based on the latest system or stored data.
6.1.9 Controller
Controller access level is used for On-line Mode (ETAP Real-Time). Controller access level authorizes
you to control, take elements out of service, set operating limits, set alarm levels, and set ETAP RealTime to supervisory control. The controller possesses all the permissions of an operator.
Acting as a controller, you can perform operations for monitoring and control of the electric system, but
you are restricted from reloading the ETAP Real-Time server database. A controller can take the ETAP
Real-Time system off-line, save the console database, perform electric system control operations, and set
pin protective devices and meters.
6-13
User Management
6.2 User Management

ETAP displays the User Manager dialog box when you log on as an administrator.
As an administrator you can add, modify, and delete user accounts, but you cannot access the project
itself. To access the project, you must close the User Manager dialog box and re-open the project with
another access level. There is a permanent administrator with the user ID Admin that cannot be deleted
from the project. The password for Admin defaults to password when you create a new project.
6.2.1 Change Password

Click this button to change the password of a user. Passwords can be up to 12 characters long.
6-14
User Management
6.2.2 Disable Passwords

Click this button to enable, disable, or change the password requirements for this project.
Project files can be set up with or without user password requirements. Passwords are recommended for
optimal security. If a password is required, every user must enter their user name and password before
accessing the project. If a user forgets their user name or password, the project administrator must reset
the passwords. If a password is not required for a project, ETAP will automatically add the user name to
the user list for the project and default to the highest assigned permission level (Project Editor) and open
the project.
Every project must have at least one user with administrator access. This permanent administrator is
assigned a user ID Admin that cannot be deleted from the project. When you create a new project, the
default password for Admin is password. You can log on at any time as Admin to open the User
Manager dialog box to disable or enable the password requirement.
6.2.3 User Info

Clicking the User Info button displays the User Information dialog box. This dialog box allows you to
add new users or modify the status of existing users (full name and password), and assign various
combinations of access level permissions. This dialog box is similar to the new project dialog box, except
that this version has added features that allow you, as administrator, to delete users and disable user
accounts.
User Name
The log on name of the user is displayed here. The user name cannot be changed in this field.
6-15
User Management
Full Name
Enter or modify the full name of the user here. This information will not be printed in any report and is
only available to the project administrator. It allows you to identify the users currently using ETAP.
Description
This field describes the type of user to allow further identification by the project administrator. The
information will not be printed in any report. For projects that do not require a password, the default for
this field is Instant User.
Access Level Permission

This allows you to assign the access levels permitted for this user, which could be as few as one level, or
access to all available levels.
OK
Saves the information you have entered on the page to the access list.
Delete
This button is active when you bring up the User Information dialog box from the User Manager dialog
box. The Delete button is used to delete a specified user from the user list.
Add User
The Add User dialog box is similar to the User Information dialog box except you use it to enter a new
users name and password and assign permission levels.
6.2.4 ODBC Parameters
6-16
User Management
Driver Options
Buffer Size
The Buffer Size option allows you to set the capacity of the internal buffer, in kilobytes, that is used to
transfer data to and from ETAP to an associated project database. The ETAP project default for the Buffer
Size is 4096.
Page Timeout
The Page Timeout option allows you to specify the time (in tenths of a second) that an unused page of
data remains in the buffer before being removed. The ETAP project default for the Page Timeout is 600.
Database
The User ID and Password are associated with the database itself. If you open the database using a third
party database manager (such as Microsoft Access), the User ID and Password is needed to open the
database. This User ID and Password are different from the ETAP logon and password, which enable you
to open and edit the ETAP project.
User ID
Enter the User ID in this field that the third party database manager will need to access the ETAP project
database.
Password
Enter the Password in this field that the third party database manager will need, in combination with the
User ID, to gain access to the ETAP project database.
6-17
Creating a New Project File
6.3 Creating a New Project File

To create a new project, select New Project from the File menu, or click the first button on the Project
toolbar.
Project File
Name
Enter a name for the new project file, which can be up to 30 characters long. ETAP will not allow you to
enter illegal characters in the project name.
Directory
ETAP automatically sets up a subdirectory in the ETAP directory for your new project. If you wish to
place your project in a different subdirectory, click Browse to locate and specify the directory.
Unit System
Select English or Metric as the default unit system for your project.
Note: you can change the unit system default from English to Metric, or vice versa, for a project at any
time. However, the defaults for each element type must then be changed individually. .
Password
Project files can be set up with or without passwords, but the use of passwords is recommended for
optimal security. When a password is required, all users must enter their user names and passwords before
accessing the project. If a password is not required for a project, ETAP will automatically add a new user
name to the user list when they open that project and assign them the highest permission level (project
editor). If you store project files locally on your computer and you can control access to your computer
and project files, you do not need to use the password function.
ODBC
Driver
Select MS Access, SQL Server or SQL Server (Local) from the list box.
Note: The ODBC driver must be installed on your computer with the data source set to otiaccess.
Advanced Parameters
See Section 5.2.5, Advanced ODBC Parameters.
6-18
6.4 Opening an Existing Project File

1. To open an existing project file, select Open from the File menu, or click the second button on the
Project toolbar.
2. In the Open Project File dialog box, select a file with an .OTI extension. ETAP displays the Log on
dialog box.
6.4.1 Logon
Enter your user name and password (if required) in the log on dialog box. The user name which you used
to log on to Windows is placed here as the default. If you have changed your user name for this project,
you will need to use that name to log on to this project.
6-19
If this project does not require a password and you are accessing it for the first time, you will be logged in
automatically as a project editor and will be added to the project user list as an Instant User. If your user
name is listed in the project user list (because you have opened this project before or the administrator has
added your name to the user list), then you will be logged in with the highest access level that is available
to you (for example, project editor, base editor, revision editor, or checker).
Project File
Name
Enter the file name of the project you wish to work on.
Path
This is the complete path to the project file you wish to open.
If your project requires a password, ETAP prompts you to open the project file with one of the access
levels available to you. Only those access levels assigned to you by the project administrator are available
for selection; the others are grayed out and unavailable. Select an access level (with the exception of
administrator, if it is available) in the Select Access Level dialog box. Click OK. ETAP will then open the
project file.
Note: If you have only one access level permission, ETAP does not prompt you for access level selection
and automatically logs you on with your access level.
6-20
Chapter 7
Printing and Plotting

ETAP provides you with a variety of options for printing and plotting one-line diagrams, Star device
coordination plots, underground raceway systems (UGS), control system diagrams (CSD), output reports,
plots, input data, and libraries.
7-1
Printing & Plotting
Overview
The table below provides an overview of how to use the printing and plotting features described in this
Section.
This section
Describes how to
Using
7.17.1
Schedule Report
Manager
View and print project (input)

data directly from the database
and in Crystal Reports format
The Schedule Report Manager

button from the AC Edit toolbar
in Edit mode
7.2
Library Report
Manager
View and print library data in

Crystal Reports format
The Export command under the

Library menu in the ETAP menu
bar
7.3
Printing One-Line
Diagrams
Preview, print, or batch print

one-line diagrams while
adjusting setup, scale, and other
options for each one-line
diagram and its nested
composite networks and motors
Print Preview, Print, and Batch

Print commands from the File
menu in the ETAP menu bar and
the right-click menus in the
Project Editor and the one-line
diagram
7.5
utput Reports
Preview and print output

reports of calculation results
from analysis modules in
Crystal Reports format
Report Manager button on the

study toolbar for the analysis
mode and the Study Case toolbar
7.6
Plots
Preview and print plots

generated by module studies,
after adjusting the plot graphs
for optimal presentation
Plots button on the study toolbar

for the analysis mode and doubleclicking elements in the plot
windows
7-2
Printing & Plotting
7.1 Schedule Report Manager

The Schedule Report Manager allows you to preview and print the input data, for elements shown on the
Branch, Bus and Load pages, using the Crystal Reports formats.
Schedule Report
Manager Button
To print the input data:

1. Go to Edit Mode.
2. Click the Report Manager button on the AC Edit toolbar.
3. Select and open the report format of your choice to preview or print. This editor allows for multiple
report selection.
The Project database is used to generate these reports.

The Report Manager provides a variety of options for printing input data including:
Using Base Data or any revision level of data.

Using Base and Revision Data or only Revision Data (the differences with respect to the Base Data).
Including or excluding energized, de-energized, and dumpster elements in your print selection.
Using any configuration.
Note: The impedance data on the Cable Data Schedule report originates from the Cable Editors. If the
cable is linked to a library, the impedance data will be extracted from the library. This may cause
differences between the reported data and the Cable Editor.
7-3
Printing & Plotting
Library Report Manager
7.2 Library Report Manager

Library data can be printed using the Crystal Reports formats.
To print library data:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Library on the ETAP menu bar.

Select the Export command.
Select all or a number of libraries from the Export Library Editor.
Use the Library Report Manager to open the format of your choice to preview or print.
Print with or without page breaks.
7-4
Printing & Plotting
Library data is not stored in the Project database. The Export feature exports your selected library data to
an MS Access file named LIBS.LB1. This file resides in the same directory as the project files being
used. The exported file is then used in Crystal Reports formats.
The Library Report Manager allows you to select your choice of report format.
Report for Motor Model Library Data
7-5
Printing & Plotting
Report for Cable Library Data
7-6
Printing & Plotting
Printing One-Line Diagrams
7.3 Printing One-Line Diagrams

When you are ready to print one-line diagrams in ETAP, you can select from any of the following
options:
Print Setup
Print Preview
Print
Batch print
One-line diagrams can be printed (in black & white or color) on any printer or
plotter supported by your operating system. Before printing, you can use the
ETAP Theme Editor to customize the text, element, bus, and background
colors to your specific requirements. The zooming scale inside ETAP (for a
one-line diagram) is independent of the print scale.
Note: Every one-line diagram, including nested composite networks and
motors, has an independent print setup, print options, and print scale. This
allows you to set the print zooming scale independently and print each one-line
diagram to a different printer or plotter.
The Print button always prints the currently active view. You may have several views displayed in your
ETAP window; however, only one view can be active at a time. The title bars of the active and inactive
windows are displayed in unique colors as specified in the Windows Control Panel. To activate a view,
click any part of its window.
Note: Unless you have rubber-banded or selected a specific portion of your presentation, your entire oneline diagram or underground raceway system will be printed.
To print a one-line diagram, follow these steps:

1. Go to the File menu, and select Print Preview
2. Make the desired adjustments
3. Print
A variety of options are available for printing one-line diagrams and underground raceway systems, such
as the following:
Print all or a selected portion of your one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Preview and print only energized elements.
Print or exclude OLE objects on the one-line diagram.
Print or exclude AC elements, DC elements, and AC-DC interface elements.
Print in color or black and white.
Print annotations such as element IDs and ratings.
Print study results as displayed in your ETAP window.
Include or eliminate the header or footer from the printed one-line diagram or underground raceway
system (the capability to edit header or footer information is not currently available).
7-7
Printing & Plotting
ETAP includes tools with print functions for convenience, flexibility, and control, which include:
Select any printer or plotter supported by your operating system.

Choose any paper size supported by your printer.
Select Portrait or Landscape for paper orientation.
Preview your diagram before printing.
From Print Preview, center or adjust the one-line diagram with respect to the page.
From Print Preview, increase or decrease the size of the printed one-line diagram by zooming in or
out on the diagram.
Batch Print your selection of one-line diagrams or any composite networks or motors.
Automatically save print preview adjustments so you can reprint using your final print layout.
35
30
25
20
Food
Gas
Motel
15
10
Utility
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Main Bus
SSD
T1
15/10/5 MVA
-2.5% TapP
DS
S
T2
10 MVA
Gen1
Sub 3
Sub2B
Sub2A
DS
NO
T4
1.5 MVA
Syn1
Sub3 Net1
Bus1
CAP1
Sub2A-N
DCSystem
Revised DCN # 99-1692

REVISION DESCRIPTION
FSP
DSN
DSN
JFD
KAG
KAG
KAG
JRB
DSN
JRB
JRB
JRB
ENGR
CHKD
APPVD
One-Line Diagram
Legend
Lake Forest, CA
E001-MAIN-0000315
Printout of a One-Line Diagram with OLE Objects
7-8
Printing & Plotting
Printout of a One-Line Diagram with Load Flow Results
7.3.1 Print Preview

Select this option to preview the print layout of the active one-line diagram.
Note: All print layout (print setup, options, zoom factors, and position) information entered here relates to
the selected one-line diagram only. Other diagrams have their own layouts.
You can access Print Preview from the File menu on the menu bar.
The tools available for this option allow you to modify the layout of
your one-line diagram prior to printing. Print Preview adjustments and
settings are saved when you print or close Print Preview. In addition,
each view has its own separate Print Preview adjustments and settings.
This means that you can have different settings for different views and
use the Batch Print option to print a number of views at once.
The Print Preview option is also available from the right-click menu on
the one-line diagram or the right-click menu from the Project View
window in the one-line diagram and U/G Raceway views.
7-9
Printing & Plotting
7-10
Printing & Plotting
ETAP provides a variety of tools that allow you to modify the print layout of your one-line diagram.
Close
Click this button to save the settings and layout, close, and return to the one-line diagram.
Print
Click this button to bring up the Print dialog box to start a print job.
Print Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to select the
destination printer and its connection.
Print Options
Click this button to display the Print Options dialog box.
7-11
Printing & Plotting
Next Page/Previous Page

If the extent of a one-line diagram exceeds one page, you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next Page and Previous Page buttons.
Single-Page/Two-Page View
Click this button to toggle quickly between the previews of one or two pages.
Zoom In/Zoom Out View

Zoom In or Zoom Out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your one-line diagram prior
to printing. Zooming in on the view does not affect print results.
Fit to Page
Zoom In/Zoom Out

Zooms In or Zoom Out of the one-line diagram so that the size of the diagram changes with respect to the
page size. Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels in
the Print Preview are independent of zoom levels in the one-line diagram. The default magnification level
is 10 units. You can enter a specific magnification factor in the field provided.
Scroll
Scroll the one-line diagram to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll functions are provided for centering and adjusting the location of the one-line
diagram with respect to the selected paper size for this one-line diagram. Once you print or close Print
Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of
scrolling in the one-line diagram. The default scroll factor is 10 units. However, you can specify the scroll
length in the fields provided.
7.3.2 Print Setup
7-12
Printing & Plotting
Printer
Select the printer you wish to use. You can choose the Default Printer or select one of the currently
installed printers from the Name list. To install printers and configure printer ports, use the Windows
Control Panel folder.
Paper
Size
Select the paper size on which you want to print the document.
Source
Select the paper tray here, providing your printer offers multiple trays for paper sources.
Orientation
Choose Portrait or Landscape.
Print Preview with Printer Orientation in Landscape
Network
Click this button to connect to a network location, assigning it a new drive letter.
7.3.3 Print Options

Click this button to display a dialog box that allows you to specify additional printing choices.
7-13
Printing & Plotting
Include
Select the elements you wish to print in the Include group.
AC Elements
Select this option to preview and print the AC elements in your one-line diagram.
DC Elements
Select this option to preview and print the DC elements in your one-line diagram.
AC-DC Interface Elements

Select this option to preview and print the AC-DC interface elements in your one-line diagram. These
elements include UPS, VFD, inverter, and charger/converter. Composite networks, which can be AC or
DC, are included in this category.
OLE Objects
Select this option to preview and print OLE objects inserted in your one-line view.
Text Boxes
Select this option to preview and print text boxes that have been added to your one-line view.
Print
De-energized Elements
Select this option to preview and print the de-energized elements of your one-line diagram. De-energized
elements are displayed as grayed out images on one-line diagram presentations if the Continuity Check is
on. Unless you select this feature, ETAP will suppress the printing of any branch with de-energized
elements in it and display only the active electrical components in your system.
7-14
Printing & Plotting
Un-selected Elements
Select this option to preview and print both selected and un-selected elements in your one-line diagram.
Header
Select this option to print the name of the one-line diagram presentation at the top of each page. The
capability to modify header information is currently not available.
Footer
Select this option to print the page number, time, date, and project file name at the bottom of each page.
The capability to modify footer information is currently not available.
7.3.4 Print
Open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu on the menu bar or by right-clicking on
the one-line diagram, selecting Print Preview, and clicking the Print button. The following options allow
you to specify how the document will be printed:
Printer
This is the active printer and printer connection. Click the Setup button to change the printer and printer
connection.
Print Range
Entire diagram
Select this option to print the entire document.
Selected elements only

Select this option to print the currently selected items.
Pages
Select this option to print the range of pages you specify in the From and To boxes; for example, From: 1 To:
4; From: 3 To: 6.
7-15
Printing & Plotting
Print Quality
Select the quality of printing. Generally, lower quality printing requires less time for the computer to setup and produce.
Copies
Specify the number of copies you wish to print.
Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box. The options in the Print Setup dialog box allow
you to select the destination printer and its connection. For information about print setup, see Section
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Click this button to display the One-Line Diagram Print Options dialog box. For information about print
options, see Section 7.3.3, Print Options.
7.3.5 Batch Print

Select this command to print any number of views at once. Views include any presentation and any
number of composite networks/motors that are nested in that presentation. Batch print allows you to print
without individually activating and printing each view. For best results, adjust each view in Print Preview,
and then perform a batch print. You can access Batch Print from the File menu on the menu bar.
7-16
Printing & Plotting
Batch Print Setup

The Batch Print dialog box displays a nesting tree that shows all the composite networks and composite
motors included in the one-line diagram. The nesting tree also shows the composite network or motor
path.
This is where you select all or a specified number of views to be printed. You can make your selection by
clicking the box provided for each view or clicking the selection buttons. Selection buttons are provided
for global selection.
Select All Composites

Clicking the Networks, AC Motors, and DC Motors buttons selects these views for printing.
De-Select All Composites

Clicking the Networks, AC Motors, and DC Motors buttons de-selects these views for printing.
Print Options
In the Print Options group, select the Save While Printing option to save any changes made to the Print
Options while making a batch print.
Batch Printing
The dialog box below appears after you click OK in the Batch Print dialog box.
7-17
Printing & Plotting
Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Print Range
You have the option to print the entire one-line diagram, selected elements only, or a range of pages.
When you select a range of pages, the entire diagram is printed for the selected pages.
OK
Press OK to proceed with printing of the next one-line diagram.
OK ALL
Print all one-line diagrams in the batch without confirmation.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will cancel the print action for the currently queued one-line diagram in the
batch without confirmation, and moves to the next diagram in the batch. The currently queued diagram is
specified in the title bar.
Cancel ALL
Cancel printing for all one-line diagrams in the batch without confirmation.
Print Quality
Copies
7-18
Printing & Plotting
7.3.6 Batch Print for Control System Diagrams (CSD)

Select this command to print any number of CSDs at once. Batch Print allows
you to print without individually activating and printing each CSD. For best
results, adjust each CSD file in Print Preview, and then perform a batch print.
You can access Batch Print from the File menu on the menu bar.
Batch Print Setup

The Batch Print dialog box displays the projects CSDs.
This is where you select all or a specified number of CSDs to be printed. You
can make your selection by highlighting the CSD name(s) in the list or
clicking on the Select All or Deselect All buttons or by using <Ctrl> or
<Shift> key in the keyboard.
Print Options
In the Print Options group, select the Save While Printing option to save any
changes made to the Print Options while making a batch print.
Select All
Clicking the Select All button selects all the listed CSDs.
Deselect All
Clicking the Deselect All button deselects all the selected CSDs.
Help
Clicking on the Help button sends you to the Help
Text topic for printing CSDs.
OK
Press OK to proceed with printing of the selected
CSDs.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button cancels any
selections you have made and closes the CSD
Batch Print pane.
7-19
Printing & Plotting
Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Click this button to display the CSD Print Options dialog box. For information about print options, see
Section 7.3.3, Print Options.
7-20
Printing & Plotting
Print Range
You have the option to print the entire CSD, selected elements only, or a range of pages. When you select
a range of pages, the entire diagram is printed for the selected pages.
OK
Press OK to proceed with printing of the next one-line diagram.
OK ALL
Print all CSDs in the batch without confirmation.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will cancel the print action for the currently queued CSD in the batch
without confirmation, and moves to the next diagram in the batch. The currently queued diagram is
specified in the title bar.
Cancel ALL
Cancel printing for all CSDs in the batch without confirmation.
Print Quality
Copies
7-21
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
7.4 Printing Star Views

When you are ready to print Star Views in ETAP,
you can select from any of the following options:
View Print Preview

Print
Setup printing
Select print options
Batch print
Star Views can be printed (in black & white or

color) on any printer or plotter supported by your
operating system.
Note: Every view has an independent print setup,
print options, and print scale. This allows you to
set the print zooming scale independently and print
each view to a different printer or plotter.
The Print button always prints the currently active
view. You may have several views displayed in
your ETAP window; however, only one view can
be active at a time. The title bars of the active and
inactive windows are displayed in unique colors as specified in the Windows Control Panel. To activate a
view, click any part of its window.
To print a Star View, follow these steps:
1. Go to the File menu, and select Print Preview. Alternatively, you can access the print preview right
from the selected Star View toolbar menu
2. Make the desired adjustments
3. Print
A variety of options are available for printing TCC views such as the following:
Include/exclude one-line diagrams.
Include/exclude OLE objects.
Include/exclude Text Boxes.
ETAP includes tools with print functions for convenience, flexibility, and control, which include:
Select any printer or plotter supported by your operating system.
Choose any paper size supported by your printer.
Select Portrait or Landscape for paper orientation.
Preview your TCC view before printing.
From Print Preview, center or adjust the TCC with respect to the page.
From Print Preview, increase or decrease the size of the printed TCC by zooming in or out.
Batch print your selection of TCCs.
Automatically save print preview adjustments so you can reprint using your final print layout.
7-22
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
7.4.1 Print Preview

Select this option to preview the print layout of the active Star View.
Note: All print layout (print setup, options, zoom factors, and position) information entered here relates to
the selected Star View only. Other Star Views may have their own layouts.
You can access Print Preview from the File menu on the menu bar or from the Star View toolbar menu.
7-23
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
The tools available for this option allow you to modify the layout of your Star View prior to printing.
Print Preview adjustments and settings are saved when you print or close Print Preview. In addition, each
view has its own separate Print Preview adjustments and settings. This means that you can have different
settings for different Star Views and use the Batch Print option to print a number of Star Views at once.
ETAP provides a variety of tools that allow you to modify the print layout of your Star View.
Zoom in for Viewing
Fit to Page
Print Setup
Next Page
Zoom in
(Enlarge OneLine Diagram)
Scroll up
Print Options
Scroll Left
Single/Two Page View
7-24
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Close
Click this button to save the settings and layout, close, and return to the Star View.
Print
Click this button to bring up the Print dialog box to start a print job.
Print Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to select the
Print Options
Click this button to display the Print Options dialog box.
Next Page/Previous Page

If the extent of a one-line diagram exceeds one page, you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next Page and Previous Page buttons.
Single-Page/Two-Page View
Click this button to toggle quickly between the previews of one or two pages.

Zoom In / Zoom Out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your one-line diagram prior to
printing. Zooming in on the view does not affect print results.
Fit to Page
Zoom In/Zoom Out

Zooms In or Zoom Out of the Star View so that the size of the diagram changes with respect to the page
size. Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels in the
Print Preview are independent of zoom levels in the Star View. The default magnification level is 10
units. You can enter a specific magnification factor in the field provided.
Scroll
Scroll the Star View to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll functions are provided for centering and adjusting the location of the Star View
with respect to the selected paper size for this one-line diagram. Once you print or close Print Preview, all
settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of scrolling in the Star
View. The default scroll factor is 10 units. However, you can specify the scroll length in the fields
provided.
7-25
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
7.4.2 Print Setup
Printer
Select the printer you wish to use. You can choose the Default Printer or select one of the currently
Control Panel folder.
Paper
Size
Source
Select the paper tray here, providing your printer offers multiple trays for paper sources.
Orientation
7-26
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Print Preview with Printer Orientation in Landscape
Network
7.4.3 Print Options

Click this button to display a dialog box that allows you to specify additional printing choices.
7-27
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Include
Select the elements you wish to print in the Include group.
One-Line Diagram
Select this option to preview and print the one-line diagram in your Star View.
Text Boxes
Select this option to preview and print text boxes that have added to your Star View.
7.4.4 Print
Open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu on the menu bar or selecting Print
Preview from the Star View toolbar menu and clicking the Print button. The following options allow you
to specify how the document will be printed:
7-28
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Printer
This is the active printer and printer connection. Click the Setup button to change the printer and printer
connection.
Print Range
Entire diagram
Select this option to print the entire document.
Selected elements only

Select this option to print the currently selected items.
Pages
Select this option to print the range of pages you specify in the From and To boxes; for example, From: 1 To:
4; From: 3 To: 6.
Print Quality
Copies
Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
7-29
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Options
7.4.5 Batch Print

Select this command to print any number of Star Views at once. Batch Print allows you to print without
individually activating and printing each Star View. For best results, adjust each Star View in Print
Preview, and then perform a batch print. You can access Batch Print from the File menu on the menu bar
when a Star View is active.
7-30
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Batch Print Setup

The Batch Print dialog box displays all available Star Views and their associated components.
This is where you select all or a specified number of Star Views to be printed. You can make your
selection by selecting each Star View in the list or clicking on the Select All or Deselect All buttons or by
using <Ctrl> or <Shift> key in the keyboard.
Star Views
The Star Views column lists all the Star Views in the project. Multiple Star Views can be selected by
using the Shift or Ctrl keys.
Select All
Select all the Star Views from the list to print.
Deselect All
Deselect all the Star Views from the list to print.
Components
The Components column lists the IDs of the element(s) that are included in the selected Star View(s).
When the Filter Star View list by selected component(s) is checked the Components column will list the
IDs of all elements in the project.
7-31
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Filter Star View list by selected component(s)

Checking this option will list the IDs of all the components (elements) in the project. This allows
selection of Star Views based on the elements that are contained within them.
Phase Mode
Check this option to print the Star View(s) in the Phase Mode.
Ground Mode
Check this option to print the selected Star View(s) in the Ground Mode.
Normalized TCC
Check this option to print the Star Views in Normalized TCC Mode. This check box is unchecked by
default. Normalized TCC option is a filter for Phase and Ground modes to allow you to print the Star
View(s) that have a valid Sequence-of-Operation output report associated with it. Checking this option
prints the selected Star Views in Normalized TCC Mode depending on the Phase / Ground Mode
selection above. This option is disabled (grayed out) if both Phase Mode and Ground Mode check boxes
are unchecked.
Skip Blank Star Views

Check this option to skip blank Star Views (without plots) from being printed.
Save while Printing

Check this option to save the print options for the selected Star View(s) while printing.
Batch Printing
The dialog box below appears after you click OK in the Batch Print dialog box.
7-32
Printing & Plotting
Printing Star Views
Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Click this button to display the Star Print Options dialog box. For information about print options, see
Section 7.3.3, Print Options.
Print Range
You have the option to print the entire Star View or a range of pages. When you select a range of pages,
the entire diagram is printed for the selected pages.
OK
Click OK to proceed with printing of the next Star View.
OK ALL
Click OK ALL to print all Star Views in the batch without confirmation.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will cancel the print action for the currently queued Star View in the batch
without confirmation, and moves to the next diagram in the batch. The currently queued Star View is
specified in the title bar. In the Print dialog box above, Bus 1 - TCC is queuing.
Cancel ALL
Click Cancel ALL to cancel printing for all Star Views in the batch without confirmation.
Print Quality
Copies
7-33
Printing & Plotting
Output Reports
7.5 Output Reports

ETAP allows you to view and print all calculation results of your project or study case in output reports
using Crystal Reports formats.
These reports can contain varying levels of detail, depending on your study case requirements. The report
header is printed on the top of each page of the output report and contains general information about the
project. This general information is entered in the Project Information Editor. The report header also
contains specific information related to the study case.
To view and print output report files, click the Report Manager button, included on all study toolbars,
then make your selection from the displayed report formats.
ETAP uses the Crystal Reports program to generate output reports. Crystal Reports is a reporting tool
with superior capabilities and presentation-quality output. Crystal Reports is a Business Objects product.
For more information, go to http://www.businessobjects.com.
ETAP provides you with report formats for input data (device schedule), library data, and output reports.
However, using Crystal Reports you can also customize the output reports. You can add or remove fields,
change fonts and sizes, include your company information and logo, add plots, even export your reports
to HTML format so you can publish your reports on the World Wide Web, etc.
Note: You must use your copy of Crystal Reports for any output report modifications.
7.5.1 Output Report Access File

After you run a study, ETAP generates an Access database file that contains data associated with the
study case, input, calculation results, and summary tables. Then Crystal Reports uses the data stored in
the Access database for producing output reports. Crystal Reports output reports are provided for all
ETAP analysis modules.
The Access database files for output reports are located in the same directory as your ETAP project files.
The database files have different extensions depending on the analysis type and include the following:
*.AAF
*.CA1
*.CD1
*.CP1
*.DB1
*.DL1
*.DS1
*.GR1
*.HA1
*.IAF
*.LF1
*.MS1
*.OP1
*.PE1
*.PN1
Arc Flash (ANSI)

Cable Derating Analysis
Cable Pulling
Battery Sizing Analysis
DC Load Flow Analysis
DC Short-Circuit Analysis
Ground Grid Systems
Harmonic Analysis
Arc Flash (IEC)
Load Flow Analysis
Motor Starting Analysis
Optimal Power Flow
Parameter Estimation
Panel Analysis
7-34
Printing & Plotting

*.RA1
*.SA1
*.SA2
*.SA3
*.SI1
*.SI2
*.SI3
*.SQ1
*.SQ2
*.TS1
*.UAF
*.UL1
*.VD1
*.XS1
Output Reports
Short-Circuit Analysis, ANSI, Device Duty
Short-Circuit Analysis, ANSI, Unbalanced Faults
Short-Circuit Analysis, ANSI, 30 Cycle, Balanced
Short-Circuit Analysis, IEC (909), Device Duty
Short-Circuit Analysis, IEC, Unbalanced Faults
Short-Circuit Analysis, IEC (363), Transient
Sequence of Operation (ANSI)
Sequence of Operation (IEC)
Transient Stability
Arc Flash (User-Defined)
Control Systems Diagram
For example, if you run a Load Flow study with the output report name LFresult, ETAP generates a file
named LFRESULT.LF1, which is the Access database file for Load Flow Report.
Crystal Reports Formats

Crystal Report formats have an extension of .RPT and are located in the ETAP 1100\FORMATS1100 (or
current version) folder. Crystal Reports output formats are divided into four categories: Complete, Input,
Result, and Summary, therefore, the directory for each study is categorized accordingly. The reports
stored here are displayed in each modules Report Manager Editor. Copies of report formats are also
added directly to a study folder, which can be viewed from the Study Case toolbar.
7-35
Printing & Plotting
Output Reports
7.5.2 View Output Reports

Output reports from the analysis modules can be viewed directly from ETAP. You can view output
reports by clicking the Report Manager button on the Study toolbar or on the View Output File button on
the Study Case toolbar.
Report Manager
Click the Report Manager button, which is provided for every Study toolbar, to view the Report Manager
Editor.
The Report Manager Editor for the output reports consists of four tabs: Complete, Input, Results, and
Summary. Output report formats are sorted into these categories. To view an output report, select a report
template and format and then click OK. The Complete output report is the compilation of input, results,
and summary reports.
Using the Report Manager you can view output reports in Crystal Reports Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich
Text Format, and MS Excel. The default format is set to the Crystal Reports Viewer. However, you can
set the default to other formats by selecting a format and checking the Set As Default option.
Note that PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, and MS Excel formats are exported from the report
templates created with Crystal Reports. In some cases the exported formats may not appear exactly as the
Crystal Reports templates.
The output filename, project name, and path are also displayed in this dialog box.
7-36
Printing & Plotting
Output Reports
View Output File

Another method of viewing the output reports is from each Study Case toolbar. Click the View Output
Report button on any study case toolbar to view output reports. A list of all output files in the project
directory is provided. This list only includes the output reports associated with the active study mode. To
view any of the listed output reports in Crystal Reports Viewer, select the output report name, select any
of the report templates from the list box, and then click the View Output File button on the Study Case
toolbar.
Report Viewer
The Report Viewer allows you to view reports, navigate to different pages, find by text search or element
ID, print, and export to a variety of formats.
7-37
Printing & Plotting
Output Reports
Viewer Toolbar
The Crystal Reports Viewer toolbar contains the following features: Find, Navigate, Print, Export, and
Zoom.
Find
To activate the Find feature click on the Find icon on the top toolbar or go to View on the main toolbar.
Find allows you to search by element ID or by text.
To find by Element ID, select the Element option in the Find dialog box. Then select an element type
from the Type list box. Based on the selected type IDs of the existing elements will be displayed in the
ID list box. Select the ID of your choice and click on the Find button. Find searches for all occurrences
of the selected ID and highlights them one by one. Note that for a complete search you must start your
search from the first page.
To find by Text, select the Text option in the Find dialog box. Then type in the text of your choice and
click on the Find button. Find searches for all occurrences of the specified text and highlights them one
by one. Note that for a complete search you must start your search from the first page.
Note that the Find option is not case sensitive.
Navigate
To view all report pages, click the navigation buttons (arrow icons) to move forward or backwards. Also,
you can type in a page number and click on enter to go the specified page.
Print
The Print option allows you to print all or a selected number of pages, to specify the number of copies to
be printed, and the capability to collate them.
7-38
Printing & Plotting
Output Reports
You can also set up the printer to be used, the paper size and source, and the paper orientation by clicking
the Printer Setup button.
Export
You can export your reports to a number of popular spreadsheet and word processor formats, into PDF,
HTML, ODBC, and a number of common data interchange formats as well. To achieve the best text
format results, use the Rich Text Format option.
Click the Export button to view a list of all available formats.
Zoom
Use the Zoom drop-down list to zoom in and out on your report. You can view your report from 25% to
400% of its actual size. The zooming capability relates to viewing only and does not affect the printed
results.
7-39
Printing & Plotting
Plots
7.6 Plots
The plot format is also available for viewing and printing. To preview and print plots, click the Plot
button on the Study toolbar.
Plot Button
Plots generated as a result of ETAP calculation modules such as motor starting analysis, transient stability
analysis, and transient temperature of cables can be printed to any printer supported by your Windows
platform. To view plots from motor starting or cable derating studies, click the Plot button from the Study
toolbar.
Plot views can be divided into two portions. The upper portion is the plot is generated using the axis
limits directly from the program parameters. The lower portion is designed to show a zoomed view of the
upper portion. You may display the zoomed view by moving the mouse pointer to the bottom edge of the
view until the Divide View pointer appears. Click and hold down the left mouse button, then drag the
divider upwards until the Zoom View is displayed to your satisfaction. Now use the right mouse button to
rubber band the area of the plot on which you wish to zoom in. The Zoom View is then displayed in the
lower section of the window.
7-40
Printing & Plotting
Plots
ETAP offers a split-screen view of plots for motor starting, harmonics, and transient stability studies
where the lower window is an enlarged (zoomed) view and can be sized to your specific needs. Either
view can be printed independently, but you cannot print both views simultaneously.
7.6.1 Modifying Plot Parameters

Parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the Plot View. For
example, to modify plot line type, double click the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameters Editor.
Plot Parameters
Double-click the plot line to open the Plot Parameters Editor. Using this editor you can specify line type,
attributes, and curve fitting algorithm.
Line Attributes
Click the LINE ATTRIBUTES button to modify line color, style, and width.
7-41
Printing & Plotting
Plots
Export Plot Data

You can also display the plot data by clicking the Data button. If you want to use the data in another
program, click the Copy option on the menu bar and paste the data into the other application. Copied data
has a tab-separated format.
Text Parameters
To modify horizontal and vertical axis titles or the plot title, double-click each cell to open the Text
Parameters Editor. Using this editor you can change the text, font, color, size, and style of the selected
title.
7-42
Printing & Plotting
Plots
Vertical & Horizontal Axis Parameters

To modify vertical and horizontal axis parameters, double-click either axis to open the Axis Parameter
Editor. Using this editor you can change the axis limits, interception point, line attributes, tick marks, grid
line, and scale type.
Axis Labels
To open this editor, double-click the axis label of the horizontal or vertical axis. This editor allows you to
modify the label position, format, text parameters, and precision.
7-43
Printing & Plotting
Plots
Legend Parameters
Double-click any displayed legend to open the Legend Parameters editor. This allows you to modify
legend parameters such as the legend rectangle size and color, text, text parameters, and border (providing
you have clicked on the Border check box).
7-44
Printing & Plotting
Plots
7.6.2 Printing Plots

The Plot View must be the active view in the window for you to be able to print a plot. You can have
several plot views displayed in your ETAP window; however, only one view can be active at any time.
The title bars of the active and inactive windows are displayed in unique colors, as specified in the
Windows Control Panel. To activate a view, click any part of it.
To print a plot, display the Plot View, make formatting modifications, if required, and print. The printed
plot size will be set to the size of the paper on which it is being printed.
To print plots with a split view, click the view you wish to print, make any necessary print modifications,
then print. Either view can be printed independently, but you cannot print both views simultaneously.
7.6.3 Printing Ground Grid Plots

You can use the Export Function of the 3D Plots to print these plots and selecting printer in the export
destination.
Export Plot Data

The data from the Ground Grid plots can be exported using a metafile, bitmap or text
file format by right-clicking on the 3D plot and selecting the export dialog option.
Export
Plot data can be exported using either image file formats like metafile (.wmf) or
bitmap (.bmp). The data can also be exported using the text (.txt) or data (.dat) file
formats.
7-45
Printing & Plotting
Plots
Export Destination
Once the file format is selected, the export destination option can be used to select the location of the
exported data. The data can be placed either on the clipboard (system memory) to be used later by some
other program, physical file, or sent directly to a default printer.
Object size
Use this option to adjust the size of the exported image file. When metafile format is used, the image can
be scaled during export by adjusting in millimeters, inches or points. When bitmap format is used, the
image can be scaled during export by adjusting the pixels only
7-46
Chapter 8
Engineering Libraries
ETAP provides customized libraries for many devices for which typical, standard, and manufacturer
information has been compiled. Additional devices may be added to each library through ETAPs Library
editors. This chapter provides an overview of each library and description of all the data and functions
available that allow you to create new libraries and access existing ones.
8-1
Overview
ETAP library files have the extension .lib and by default are located in the Lib folder within the ETAP
application folder. ETAP displays this path along with the name of the current library in the Project
View.
The Lib folder in ETAP includes two types of library files Complete and Incremental. These are
briefly described below:
Complete Library file

Complete Library file is designated with the prefix etaplib followed by the ETAP release number (i.e.,
etaplib5.lib, etaplib503.lib, etaplib550.lib). It includes all issued ETAP device libraries.
Incremental Library file

Incremental Library file is designated with the prefix Libchanges followed by a library release date.
(i.e. Libchanges_2005-86.lib, Libchanges_2005-232.lib). It includes only the changes made between
library releases.
8-2
Utility Tools
8.1 Library Utility Tools

ETAP provides a number of utility tools to manage your libraries.
Open
This option allows you to associate a library with your current ETAP project. When you open a new
library, the association between the ETAP project and its existing library will be disconnected. For
example, Motor Characteristic Model and dynamically linked cable library data associated with the
previous library, which does not exist in the new library, will be missing. A warning message as shown
below is issued.
There are two ways to retrieve this missing data:
1) Reselect the old library file
2) Merge the old library file into the new library file
To open a library, select Open from the Library menu and click Yes on the above warning message to
continue. The Select Library File to OPEN dialog appears. Navigate to the appropriate directory, select
the new library file, and then select Open. This library is now attached to the ETAP project.
Open a Read-Only Library File

When you to open a library file that is read-only, you will receive a message that restricts you from
opening the file. Select one of the three options in the editor, which are shown below:
Remove Read-Only attribute

Remove the read-only property from the library file and select the library file for the project. The library
file will be open to read and write capabilities.
8-3
Utility Tools
Degrade access level to Base Editor

Base editor allows the user to have all the same rights to the project as the project editor except for
library data. All other rights are active to the base editor but the library list is disabled, making the
library file still locked from write capabilities.
Select another Library file

Open the Windows open dialog to select another library file that has write privileges.
Note: This option is available if this is the first time the user is selecting a library file after opening the
project.
Go back to previous selection

If there is a library file that was previously used and is not a read-only file, the user can select to go back
to that library file. The third option will change as shown below:
Open a Network Library File already in use

Library files may be shared over a public network. When a second user tries to open a library file that is
currently in use, ETAP will display a message that will alert the user of the sharing violation.
Degrade access level to Base Editor

Base editor allows the user to have all the same rights to the project as the project editor except for
library data. All other rights are active to the base editor but the library list is disabled, making the
library file still locked from write capabilities.
8-4
Utility Tools
Select another Library file

Open the Windows open dialog to select another library file that has write privileges.
Note: This option is available if this is the first time the user is selecting a library file after opening the
project.
Go back to previous selection

If there is a library file that was previously used and is not used by another user, the user can select to go
back to that library file.
Copy/Merge
The Copy/Merge function can be accessed on the following two menus:
(a) Library menu on the main toolbar
(b) Right-click menu on the Library folder in the Project View
8-5
Utility Tools
The Copy/Merge function allows you to merge partial (selected device libraries) or complete library file
from one library (source) to another library (sink). The Copy/Merge function is enabled only for the
Project Editor and Librarian access levels. The source library overwrites any duplicate information found
in the sink library during the merge process.
Selecting the Copy/Merge option brings up the following editor:
8-6
Utility Tools
Library files to Copy/Merge

Click on the File button to navigate and select the library files you wish to copy/merge data to and
from. Note: The project is not required to be connected to a library to select library files for copy/merge.
However, if the project is connected to a library, the first selection displays the path of the connected
library file. If this is not the library file you wish to copy/merge, click on the File button to select
another library file. If a library selected (source or sink) has not been converted to the latest version,
ETAP asks you to convert the library.
If you select OK
If you select Cancel
Library is converted to the latest version

Select a different library
Release Number
The release number is displayed when a library is selected. Note: Libraries released before ETAP
version 5.0.1 displays a release number 2005-0. Also, for newly created library files the release number
is displayed as 2005-0. The final merged library will have the same release number as the source library.
8-7
Utility Tools
The Release Number is an internal revision designation issued by OTI for the purpose of tracking the
library file generations.
Copy/Merge Direction
The copy/merge direction can be controlled by clicking the arrow button. The arrow points to the sink
library file to which data will copy/merge.
The default direction of library merge is from the library with latest Release Number (i.e. 2006-126) to
an older Release Number (i.e. 2005-232). Thus, the merge arrow points to the older library file. Note:
Certain library merge functionalities are dependent on the Project Access Level.
For Project Editor Access Level, the direction of the merge arrow is always pointing from the
older to the newer Release Number library file. The arrow button is grayed out and the direction
cannot be changed.
For Librarian Access Level, the direction of the merge arrow can be changed in any direction.
For library files with same Release Number, the direction of copying/merging is user-selectable. The
direction of the merge arrow can be changed by clicking on the arrow button.
Connect the project to the merged library

Select this option to connect the project to the library where the data is merged to (sink library). This box
is unchecked by default.
Available Libraries List

The list of available library devices in the Source library file is provided in a tree structure. Devices
containing library data are marked as checked by default, and those without library data are displayed as
unchecked and grayed out. Note: Certain library merge functionalities are dependent on the Project
Access Level.
For Project Editor Access Level, only complete merge of the device libraries is allowed. The
status of the available source library list checkboxes cannot be changed with this Access Level.
For Librarian Access Level, partial merging of the device libraries is allowed. The status of the
available source library list can be changed to allow for partial library merge.
Note: The Trip Device library tree checkbox can be unchecked only if LV Breaker is unchecked.
Library Copy/Merge Confirmation

Clicking the OK button displays a Library Copy/Merge confirmation message in order to reconfirm your
Copy/Merge selections. The confirmation message displayed for different scenarios as described below.
8-8
Utility Tools
Clicking OK begins the merge process and clicking Cancel takes you back to Library Copy/Merge Editor
to change your merge selections.
Save
Select this option to save the entire associated library file. The Save option in the Library menu only
saves the associated library file and is independent of the ETAP Save Project function in the File menu.
Save As
Select this option to save the current library file as a new library file. This new library file contains all
the information in the current library file but now has a new name in an independent location. If the
name for the new library file already exists in the selected location, it will request permission to
overwrite the old library file, and then do so if you click Yes. The new library must have a .lib
extension.
Create
This option allows you to create a new library and associate it with the current project file. The old
library file will be disconnected. Motor Characteristic Model and dynamically linked cable library data
associated with the previous library, which does not exist in the new library, will be missing.
There are two ways to retrieve this missing data:
1) Reselect the old library file
2) Merge the old library file into the new library file
8-9
Utility Tools
Purge
This action will permanently delete all data from the current library file. Be certain that you no longer
require the library data prior to clicking on the Purge button. Motor Characteristic Model and
dynamically linked cable library data associated with the previous library, which does not exist in the
new library, will be missing.
Export
This option allows you to export the current device library data. You can select all or a portion of the
device libraries to be exported. ETAP exports the library data to an external MS Access database,
Libs.lb1. This file is created in your ETAP project folder. The selected libraries are exported and
displayed in Crystal Reports format. For more information on Crystal Reports, see Chapter 7, Printing
and Plotting.
8-10
Convert ETAP DOS
8.2 Convert ETAP DOS Libraries

You can convert your ETAP DOS libraries for Cables, Motor Nameplates, Motor Circuit Models, Motor
Characteristic Models, and Overload Heaters for use with current versions of ETAP.
Convert DOS Cable Library

Select this option to convert an ETAP for DOS Cable Library to ETAP. ETAP DOS Cable libraries
contain the extension .elb for English data and .mlb for metric data. Locate and select the files on your
hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Nameplate Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Nameplate Library to ETAP. ETAP
DOS Motor Nameplate Libraries contain the extension .emt for English data and .mmt for metric data.
Locate and select the file on your hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Model Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Model Library to ETAP. ETAP DOS
Motor Model Libraries contain file names similar to mtrparam.lib. Locate the file on your hard drive or
local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Characteristic Model Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Characteristic Model Library to ETAP.
Motor Characteristic Model Libraries contain file names similar to mtrtsc.lib. Locate the file on your
hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Overload Heater Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Overload Heater Library to ETAP. Overload
Heater Libraries contain file names similar to oh.lib. Locate the file on your hard drive or local area
network and click on Convert.
8-11
Cable
8.3 Cable
The Cable Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have unlimited cable
headers (Cable Types) within the library and unlimited cable sizes for each header as shown below.
Cable Library
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Header
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Size
Cable Size
8.3.1 Cable Library Header

Cable headers are used to indicate the type and construction of a cable. Cable headers consist of the
following items:
Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Installation
kV
% Class
Metric or English unit system; used for all cable physical dimensions
Rated base frequency of the cable in Hz
Copper or Aluminum
Magnetic or non-magnetic conduit installation
Line-to-line rated voltage of the cable in kV
Voltage Class in percent of rated kV. 100, 133, & 173%
8-12
Source
Insulation
#/Cable
U/G Ampacity
Ta
Tc
RHO
A/G Ampacity
Ta
Tc
Impedance
Ohms per
Temperature
Cable
- 100 Percent Level: Cables in this category may be applied where
the system is provided with protection such that ground faults will
be cleared as rapidly as possible, but in any case within 1 minute.
- 133 Percent Level: This insulation level corresponds to that
formerly designated for ungrounded systems. Cables in this
category may be applied in situations where the clearing time
requirements of the 100 percent level category cannot be met, and
yet there is adequate assurance that the faulted section will be deenergized in one hour or less.
- 173 Percent Level: Cables in this category should be applied on
systems where the time required to de-energize a grounded section
is indefinite. Their use is also recommended for resonant grounded
systems.
Library source name such as ICEA, NEC etc., up to 12 characters
Insulation type such as Rubber, XLPE, PE, XHHW, etc.
Single conductor cables (1/C), 3 conductor cables (3/C), etc.
Ta, Tc & RHO for base ampacity in U/G raceway installation
Ambient temperature of the Underground raceway in degree C
Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degree C
Soil thermal resistivity in degree C-cm/Watt
Ta, Tc for base ampacity in A/G raceway installation
Ambient temperature of the above ground raceway in degree C
Unit of length for cable impedance, /1000 ft, /km, /mile, etc.
Base temperature of the conductor resistance in degrees C
Magnetic/Non-magnetic Installation
Magnetically installed cables imply that there is a continuous raceway (conduit) around the cables with
circulating current due to the magnetic field of the cables. This circulating current will cause the cable
reactance (X1 and X0) to increase by up to 15% for smaller size cables, and 5 to 10% for larger size
cables. The following table shows when to use cable libraries designated as Magnetically and Nonmagnetically installed cables:
Cable Library Header
Magnetically Installed
U/G Duct PVC Conduits
Non- Magnetically Installed

X
U/G Duct Mag. Conduits
U/G Buried
A/G Tray No Cover
A/G Tray Solid & Mag. Material
A/G Conduit - PVC
A/G Conduit Mag. Conduit
Air Drop
X
8-13
Cable
8.3.2 Cable Library Selector
The Cable Library selector allows you to add new cable headers, or select existing cable headers to edit,
delete, or copy. To edit a Cable Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a cable, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will request a
confirmation before deleting the selected cable.
All available cable headers are displayed in the selector. Cable sizes are displayed for your convenience
for each cable header for both phase and grounding/neutral conductors. Cable size is in AWG or kcmil
for English cable data and in mm2 for metric cable data.
Add & Copy

This dialog box is used to add a new cable header (type) or copy an existing cable header.
8-14
Cable
A new cable header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new
cable header by changing any one of the items in the cable header information.
8.3.3 Cable Library Editor

To edit the Cable Library data, select a cable type from the Cable Library and click on the Edit button.
Each cable type (header) can contain an unlimited number of cable sizes. This Spreadsheet Editor allows
you to view and edit Cable Library data for a selected cable type. The name of the cable type is
displayed on top of the spreadsheet. Each cable record (row) is a unique set of data for each cable size.
Each cable record must have a unique identifier: conductor size. Duplicate records, which have the
same data, are overwritten. The conductor size must contain at least one character, which is different
from the other sizes. If a row of data duplicates a previous one, it will overwrite it.
Available
Enter Y (yes) or N (no) for availability of the cable size. Use this option to flag the cables you want to be
used for this project. ETAP selects cables from the library for cable sizing (Cable Editor). When you are
picking a cable from the library (Cable Library Quick Pick), you can pick from available cables only or
from all cables in the library. Note: When you use the drop-down list for Cable Sizes (in the Cable Type
section of Cable Editors), you can only select library cables that are flagged as available.
8-15
Cable
Code
Cable code is an alphanumerical field and is usually used to manufacturers serial number or code for
that specific Cable size. In converted cable Libraries, the cable code field is set equal to the phase size.
Size
Cable size is specified in AWG or kcmil for English cable data and in mm2 for metric cable data. English
cable sizes range from #12 to #1, 1/0 to 4/0, and 250 to 1000 kcmil. Metric cable sizes range from 6 to
400 mm2.
#
Number of Grounding/Neutral (ANSI systems) or PE (IEC system) per cable for the selected cable size.
Size
Grounding/Neutral (ANSI systems) or PE (IEC system) conductor size for the selected cable size.
Duct Bank
Duct Bank refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in an isolated duct
bank with an ambient temperature of 20C (Ta), a conductor temperature of 90C (Tc), and soil (earth)
thermal resistivity of 90 (RHO). The base ampacity is selected from the library when Duct Bank
Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for
the specified installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable Library should be
modified for the specified cable type and size.
Buried
Buried refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is directly buried underground with
an ambient temperature of 20C (Ta), a conductor temperature of 90C (Tc), and soil (earth) thermal
resistivity of 90 (RHO). The base ampacity is selected from the library when Direct Buried Installation
Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified
installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified for the
specified cable type and size.
Free Air
Free Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in free air or trays with
an ambient temperature of 40C (Ta) and conductor temperature of 90C (Tc). The base ampacity is
selected from the library when Cable Tray or Air Drop Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page
of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable
should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
Cond. Air
Conduit in Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in a conduit in air
with an ambient temperature of 40C (Ta) and conductor temperature of 90C (Tc). The base ampacity
is selected for the library when Conduit Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable
Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable should be selected
or the Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
R
R is the positive-sequence cable resistance in ohms per unit length. The resistance must be entered at the
base temperature specified for this cable header (type).
8-16
Cable
X
X is the positive-sequence cable reactance at the cable base frequency in ohms per unit length.
Y
PY is the positive-sequence cable charging susceptance in Siemens at the cable base frequency per unit
length.
R0
This is the zero-sequence cable resistance in ohms per unit length. The resistance must be entered at the
base temperature specified for the cable header (type).
X0
This is the zero-sequence cable reactance in ohms per unit length.
Y0
This is the zero-sequence cable charging susceptance in Siemens per unit length.
RDC (25C)
DC resistance is calculated at 25 degrees C in micro-ohms per ft or m.
R (G/N or PE)
This is the positive-sequence cable grounding/neutral or PE resistance at the cable base resistance AC
temperature in ohms per unit length.
X (G/N or PE)
This is the positive-sequence cable grounding/neutral or PE reactance at the cable base frequency in
ohms per unit length.
Cond. O.D.
This is the conductor outside diameter in inch or cm.
Ins. Thick
This refers to the thickness of the cable insulation layer in mil or mm.
Shielding
Cable shielding type. Right-click to select Non-Shielded or Shield Duct type from the list.
Sheath/Armor
Cable sheath/armor type. Right-click to select from the drop-down list.
8-17
Cable
Examples of Sheath/Armor type definitions:
Type
St Armor/30dg/15w
St Armor/45dg/50w
Definition
Steel Armor with 30 Degree deviation from cable axis; 15 wires
Armor Thick
Thickness of cable sheath/armor in mil or mm
Jacket Type
Cable jacket type. Right-click to select from the drop-down list.
Jacket Thick
Thickness of cable jacket in mil or mm
Cable O.D.
Cable outside diameter in inch or cm
Cond. Const.
Cable Conductor Construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for
calculating the AC to DC ratio parameters. Several choices of conductor construction are available from
the list box provided. These are:
ConRnd
ConRnd-Coated
ConRnd-Treated
CmpRnd-Treated
CmpSgm
CmpSgm-Coated
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Compact Round
Compact Segmental
Compact Segmental
8-18
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
None Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Treated
None Treated
Treated
Treated
None Treated
None Treated
CmpSgm-Treated
CmpSct-Treated
Cable
Compact Segmental
Compact Sector
None Coated
None Coated
Treated
Treated
Coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to a
drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.
Cable Weight
Weight of the cable in units of lbs/kft or kg/km
Max. Tension
Maximum allowable cable tension in lbs/kcmil or kg/mm2. In case of a multiple-conductor cable, the
entered permissible maximum pulling tension is for each conductor. In the Cable Pulling calculation, the
cable permissible maximum pulling tension will be computed by multiplying this value by the number of
conductors.
Max. SW Pres.
Maximum allowable sidewall pressure in lbs/ft or kg/m
Calculation Parameters
The following table displays the cable properties and the studies that data affects:
Properties
Avail.
Size
Duct Bank
Direct Burial
Free Air
Conduit Air
Ampacity
R
X
Y
R0
X0
Y0
Rdc 25
Conductor O.D.
Insulation
Thickness
Shielding
Sheath Armor
Armor Thick.
Jacket Type
Jacket
General Description
Cable size availability status: Y (Yes) or N (No)
Cable size in AWG/kcmil or mm^2
Base ampacity (Duct Bank)
Base ampacity (Direct Burial
Base ampacity (Free Air)
Base ampacity (Conduit in Air)
Pos. seq AC resistance in ohms / unit length
Pos. seq. reactance in ohms / unit length
Pos.seq. susceptance in siemens / unit length
Zero seq. AC resistance in ohms / unit length
Zero seq. reactance in ohms / unit length
Zero seq. susceptance in siemens / unit length
Rdc at 25 degree C (micro-ohm per ft or m)
Conductor outside diameter (OD) in inches or cm
Insulation thickness (mil or mm)
Conductor shielding type from the list box
Sheath/armor type from the list box
Sheath/ armor thickness (mil or mm)
Jacket type from the list box
Jacket thickness (mil or mm)
8-19
Studies Used
All Studies
Cable Ampacity
Cable Ampacity
Cable Ampacity
Cable Ampacity
AC Studies
AC Studies
AC Studies
AC Studies
AC Studies
AC Studies
Underground Raceway
Underground Raceway
Underground Raceway
Underground Raceway
Underground Raceway
Underground Raceway
Underground Raceway
Underground Raceway
Cable
Thickness
Cable O.D.
Cable outside diameter (OD) in inches or cm
Cond. Const.
Cable Weight
Max Tension
Max SW Pres
Cable construction type from the list box

Cable weight in lbs or kg per unit length
Max allowable tension, lbs/kcmil or kg/mm2
Max allowable sidewall pressure in lbs/ft or kg/m
Underground Raceway,
Cable Pulling
Underground Raceway
Cable Pulling
Cable Pulling
Cable Pulling
8.3.4 Library Quick Pick - Cable

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box by clicking on the Library button inside the Editor Info page.
The Library Quick Pick displays all of the cable information in the associated library file.
From this dialog box, select a Unit system, Frequency, Conductor Type, and Installation. This will
narrow the choice of available library selections to a group that you are interested in. Then, select a
voltage and class rating, a cable type (header) and cable size from the Cable Library. The Library Quick
Pick dialog box allows you to choose a cable size from all cable sizes in the library file or only cables
flagged as Available.
8.3.5 Source
ETAPs Cable Library data is obtained from the following standards and manufacturers:
National Electric Code (NEC)

Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
Okonite Cable Manufacturer
Kerite Cable Manufacturer
AmerCable Manufacturer
General Cable ManufacturerBritish Standard 7671
8-20
Cable Fire Coating
8.4 Cable Fire Coating

The Cable Fire Coating Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited fire coating types for each
manufacturer, as shown below.
A fire coating header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer. You can have unlimited
manufacturers for each installation type. The source for existing libraries is TVA. Three installation
types are available:
Tray
Conduit
Air Drop
Specifies cables located in cable trays

Specifies cables placed in conduits
Specifies cables installed as air drop cables
8.4.1 Fire Coating Library Selector
The Cable Fire Coating Library allows you to add new fire coating types, select existing fire coating
types for editing, deleting, or copying. To edit a Fire Coating Library, double-click on the item or click
on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire coating, click on the Delete button after
highlighting a selection. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire coating.
Add
Click on the Add button to specify the name of the manufacturer you wish to add to the library. Edit the
new library header, by selecting it, and then clicking the Edit button.
8-21
Cable Fire Coating
Copy
Click on the Copy button to copy the data from one library header to a new library header name. This
function can be used to change specifications in the library without modifying the original data. Edit the
new library header by selecting it, and then clicking the Edit button.
8-22
Cable Fire Coating
8.4.2 Fire Coating Library Editor
This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Cable Fire Coating Library data. Each library
record is a unique set of data for each cable fire coating type. Appending two columns,
Material+Configuration, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is
repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields
must contain at least one different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP
will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before adding any library data.
Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire coating. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire coating. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Enter the Ampacity Correction Factor (ACF). The ACF is used to calculate the derated ampacity of
cables in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor.
Remarks
Enter general remarks regarding the fire coating for the selected Cable Library coating type. Remarks are
a description only (The word default is used if the cable fire coating is part of the original ETAP
Library.)
8-23
Cable Fire Coating
8.4.3 Cable Fire Coating - Quick Pick

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Coating by checking the box next to Fire
Coating. The Fire Coating box only appears if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air
Drop. Click on the Coating Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.
Select a Manufacturer and a cable fire protection type from the dialog box. The cable fire protection type
includes the material, configuration, and Ampacity Correction Factor (ACF).
8-24
Cable Fire Stop
8.5 Cable Fire Stop

The Cable Fire Stop Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. There are unlimited
headers (manufacturers) included within the library and unlimited fire stop types for each manufacturer,
as shown below.
A fire stop header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer. You can have unlimited
manufacturers for each installation type. The source for existing libraries is TVA. The three installation
types available are:
Tray
Conduit
Air Drop

8.5.1 Fire Stop Library Selector
The Cable Fire Stop Library allows you to add new fire stop types or select existing fire stop types so
that you can edit, copy, or delete them. To edit a Fire Stop Library, double-click on the item or click on
the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire stop, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
selection. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire stop.
Add
new library header, by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.
8-25
Cable Fire Stop
Copy
new library header by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.
8.5.2 Fire Stop Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Cable Fire Stop Library data. Each library
record is a unique set of data for each cable fire stop type.
Appending two columns,
Material+Configuration, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is
repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields
will request confirmation before overwriting it.
Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire stop. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire stop. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Remarks
Enter general remarks concerning the fire coating for the selected Cable Library coating type. Remarks
are a description only (The word default is used if the cable fire coating is part of the original ETAP
Library.)
8-26
Cable Fire Stop
8.5.3 Library Quick Pick - Fire Stop

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Stop by checking the box next to Fire Stop. The
Fire Stop box only appears if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air Drop. Click on the
Stop Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.
Select a Manufacturer and a cable fire protection type from the dialog box. Cable fire protection type
8-27
Cable Fire Wrap
8.6 Cable Fire Wrap

The Cable Fire Wrap Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited fire wrap types for each
Fire Wrap Library
Header
Header
Header
Header
Fire Wrap Type

Fire Wrap Type
Fire Wrap Type
Fire Wrap Type
Fire wrap adjustment factors are used for cables routed through conduits, trays, etc. that have been
wrapped with a fire barrier. A fire wrap header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer.
You can have unlimited manufacturers for each installation type. The source for existing libraries is
TVA. The three installation types available are:
Tray
Conduit
Air Drop

8.6.1 Fire Wrap Library Selector
The Cable Fire Wrap Library allows you to add new fire wrap types or select existing fire wraps for
modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a Fire Wrap Library, double-click on the item or click on the
Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire wrap, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
selection. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire wrap.
8-28
Cable Fire Wrap
Add
new library header, by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.
Copy
new library header by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.
8.6.2 Fire Wrap Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit Cable Fire Wrap Library data. Each library record
is a unique set of data for each cable fire wrap type. Appending two columns, Material+Configuration,
forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is repeated, that row is deleted,
i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields must contain at least one
different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP will display a frame
requesting that you confirm this request before adding any library data.
Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire wrap. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire wrap. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Remarks
Enter general remarks concerning the fire coating for the selected Cable Library coating type. Remarks
are a description only (The word default is used if the cable fire coating is part of the original ETAP
Library.)
8-29
Cable Fire Wrap
8.6.3 Library Quick Pick - Fire Wrap

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Wrap by checking the box next to Fire Wrap.
The Fire Wrap box appears only if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air Drop. Click
on the Wrap Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.
Select a Manufacturer and a cable fire protection type from the dialog box. Cable fire protection type
8-30
Transmission Line
8.7 Transmission Line Library (Phase Conductors)

The Line Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have unlimited line
headers (Line Types) within the library and unlimited line sizes for each header as shown below.
8.7.1 Library Header
Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Temperature
o Base T1
o Base T2
o Ta
o Tc
Code
Size
Strands
Metric or English unit system; used for all line physical dimensions
Rated base frequency of the line in Hz
Available conductor types for the line
Ambient temperature of the line in degree C
Transmission Line Code Name. Used by different standards to identify
sizes
Size of the transmission line in Kcmil or mm2
Number of strands for the main conductor of the line
8-31
Transmission Line
8.7.2 Transmission Line Library Selector
The Transmission Line Library selector allows you to add new Transmission Line headers, select
existing Transmission Line headers to edit, delete, or copy Transmission Lines. To edit a Transmission
Line Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a
Transmission Line, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will request confirmation to
delete the selected Transmission Line.
All available Transmission Line headers are displayed in the selector. Transmission Line sizes are
displayed on each Transmission Line header for your convenience. The transmission Line size is in
kcmil for English Transmission Line data and in mm2 for metric Transmission Line data.
Add and Copy

This dialog box is used to add a new transmission line header (type) or copy an existing transmission line
header.
8-32
Transmission Line
A new transmission line header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create
a new cable header by changing any one of the items in the cable header information.
Editor
To edit the Transmission Line data, select a Transmission Line type from the Transmission Line Library
and click on the Edit Properties button. Each Transmission Line type (header) can contain an unlimited
number of Transmission Line sizes. This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit Transmission
Line Library data for a selected Transmission Line type. The name of the Transmission Line type is
displayed on top of the spreadsheet. Each Transmission Line record (row) is a unique set of data for each
Transmission Line size. Each Transmission Line record must have a unique identifier: Code and size.
Duplicate records, which have the same data, are overwritten. The conductor size must contain at least
one character, which is different from the other sizes. If a row of data duplicates a previous one, it will
overwrite it.
8-33
Transmission Line
Avail
Enter Y (yes) or N (no) for availability of the line size. Use this option to flag the lines you want to be
used for this project. When you are picking a line from the library (Line Library Quick Pick), you can
pick from available lines only or from all lines in the library. Note: When you use the drop-down list for
Line Sizes (in the Line Type section of Transmission Line Editors), you can only select the library lines
that are flagged as available.
Code
Depending on the standard, transmission line sizes can be identified by different codes. Some standards
use bird names, flower names, cities, fruit names, animals, etc. The name specified in this field must be
unique up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length.
Size
Cable size is specified in kcmil for English transmission line data and in mm2 for metric cable data.
Ampacity
This is the maximum allowed current for the transmission line in amps when the line is installed at a
temperature Ta and a conductor temperature of Tc.
Strands
Enter the number of strands for the conductor of the transmission line. In the case of a composite line
such as ACSR, the number of strands entered in this field would be the number of strands of the
aluminum conductor.
Strand Dia.
Enter the diameter of the conductor strands in inches for English transmission lines and centimeters for
metric transmission lines.
8-34
Transmission Line
Steel Strand
Enter the number of strands for the reinforcement conductor of the transmission line. In the case of a
composite line such as ACSR, the number of strands entered in this field would be the number of strands
of the steel conductor.
Strand Dia., Steel

Enter the diameter of the reinforcement conductor strands in inches for English transmission lines and
centimeters for metric transmission lines.
OD
Specify the Overall Transmission Line Diameter in inches for English lines and centimeters for metric
lines.
GMR
Specify conductor Geometric Mean Radius in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius.
Ra T1
This is the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile for English lines and
ohms per kilometer for metric lines. This value and Ra T2 will be used to calculate the impedance
variation of the line with respect to temperature using the methods of interpolation and extrapolation.
Ra T2
This is the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile for English lines and
ohms per kilometer for metric lines. This value and Ra T1 will be used to calculate the impedance
variation of the line with respect to temperature using the methods of interpolation and extrapolation.
Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per conductor per unit length at 1ft spacing.
Xa
Enter the conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per conductor per unit length at 1 ft spacing.
Rdc
Enter the conductor DC resistance in ohms per conductor per unit length.
Weight
Enter the weight of the cable in units of lbf/ft or N/m.
Strength
Enter the breaking strength capacity of the line in pounds.
Comment
Enter any notes or comments about this line.
8-35
Transmission Line
8.7.3 Transmission Line Library Quick Pick
Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box by clicking on the Library button inside the Editor Parameter
page for ground wires and phase conductors. The Library Quick Pick displays all of the line information
in the associated library file.
From this dialog box, select a Unit system, Frequency, Conductor, and Source Name. This narrows the
choice of available library selections to a group you are interested in. Then, select a Conductor type and
line size. The Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to choose a line size from all line sizes in the
library file or only lines flagged as Available.
8-36
Motor Nameplate
8.8 Motor Nameplate

The Motor Nameplate Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. Select the desired
frequency and unit. Units are converted automatically during calculations so the selection of either kW
or HP provides complete information to ETAP. Unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library
may be specified. Within each header, various voltage levels are available. Motor nameplate types for
each voltage level can be selected, as shown below.
Header
Motor Nameplate
Library
60 Hz
50 Hz
HP
kW
Record
kV
kV
kV
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
kV
Manufacturer
Type
Type
Type
Type
A motor nameplate header consists of the frequency, unit system, voltage level, and the manufacturer.
There can be unlimited manufacturers for each header.
Frequency
kW/HP
Manufacturer
Voltage
50 or 60 Hz
Select unit type
Up to 12 characters long
In kV
8.8.1 Motor Nameplate Library Header
8-37
Motor Nameplate
The Motor Nameplate Library allows you to add motor nameplate models or modify existing motor
nameplate models. Click on the Edit button to edit a motor nameplate model within the Motor
Nameplate Library. Click on the Delete button to delete a selected motor nameplate model. ETAP will
display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before removing any library data.
Add
Select this option to enter the manufacturer name and kV rating of the motor nameplate you wish to add
to the library. You can edit the properties of the new motor nameplate selection by highlighting it in the
provided list, then clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name and kV rating to a new manufacturer
name and kV rating. This function can be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in a library
entry while retaining the original data. You can edit the properties of the new nameplate selection by
highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
8.8.2 Motor Nameplate Editor
This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Motor Nameplate Library data. Select the motor
design operating frequency and units for motor mechanical rating of the selected motor. Appending two
columns, HP/kW+Frame Size, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns
is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields
will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before adding any library data.
HP/kW
Enter the motor nameplate power (HP or kW).
8-38
Motor Nameplate
Frame Size
Enter the motor frame size.
Design Letter
Enter the motor NEMA design letter.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the motor.
Syn. Speed
Enter the motor rated synchronous speed (RPM).
kVA
Enter the motor rated kVA.
Phase
Enter the number of phases for the motor.
SF
Enter the motor service factor.
LRC
Enter the locked-rotor current as a percentage of the rated full load current.
FLA
Enter the motor full load current in amperes.
Pflr
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent.
PF50%
Enter the motor power factor at 50% loading in percent.
PF75%
PF100%
EFF50%
Enter the motor efficiency at 50% loading in percent.
EFF75%
EFF100%
8-39
Motor Nameplate
Tlr
Enter the motor locked-rotor torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Tmax
Enter the motor maximum torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Tfl
Enter the motor full load torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Slip@Tmax
Enter the motor slip at maximum torque in percent.
Xsc Cycle
Enter the subtransient reactance of the motor in percent (machine base) to be used in short-circuit studies.
Xsc 1.5-4 Cycle

Enter the transient reactance of the motor in percent (machine base) to be used in short-circuit studies.
X
Enter the motor steady-state reactance in percent (machine base) to be used in the IEC 363 method.
X2
Negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base).
X0
Zero sequence reactance (machine base).
X/R
Induction motors X/R (X/Ra).
Td
Enter the motor transient time constant in seconds:
Td = X/(2 f Rr)
(Rr = rotor resistance)
This value is used in the IEC 363 short-circuit method.
Char. Model
Enter the characteristic model ID from the Motor Characteristic Model Library.
CKT Model
Enter the CKT model ID from the Motor Model Library; CKT models include types Single1, Single2,
DBL1, and DBL2.
8-40
Motor Nameplate
8.8.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Nameplate

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a motor in the one-line diagram,
and then clicking on the Library button in the Nameplate page of the Motor Editor. The Library Quick
Pick options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
Select a motor nameplate from the library from this dialog box. Specify HP tables or kW tables, and then
select the appropriate voltage level, manufacturer, and design from the Motor Nameplate Library. Motor
nameplate design includes the HP/kW, frame size, letter, poles, and synchronous speed (RPM).
8-41
Motor Circuit (CKT) Model
8.9 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model

The Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can
have unlimited headers (design classes) within each model type (Single1, Single2, or DBL1/DBL2), and
unlimited motor model IDs for each header, as shown below.
Motor Circuit
Model Library
Single1
Single2
DBL1/
DBL2
Design Class
Design Class
Design Class
Design Class
Model ID
Model ID
Model ID
Model ID
A motor circuit model header consists of the model type and design class. You can have unlimited model
IDs for each header.
8.9.1 Motor Circuit Model Selector
The Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library allows you to add new motor model design classes or select
existing motor model design classes, based on the selection made for Model Type, for modification,
deletion, or copying. To edit a motor model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a motor model design class, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
model. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting the selected
design class.
8-42
Add
Select this option to enter the design class of the motor model you wish to add to the library. You can
then edit the properties of the new motor model selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then
clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one design class to a new design class. This function can be
useful if you wish to change a few specifications in a library entry while retaining the original data. The
properties of the new model library selection can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, then
8.9.2 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library data. Each
library record is a unique set of data for each motor model type. A unique record is obtained by the
Model ID. If this name is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. If a row
(record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this
request before adding any library data.
8-43
Model Type (Single1)

This is an equivalent circuit (CKT) model of a single cage motor where the rotor resistance and reactance
are constant.
Model ID
Select an existing model ID. Model IDs are unique names with up to 12 characters.
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio.
X
Enter the transient reactance (= Xs+XmXr / (Xm+Xr) in percent (machine base).
Xoc
Enter the open circuit reactance (= Xs+Xm) in percent (machine base).
Tdo
Enter the open circuit time constant (= (Xr+Xm)/2fRr) in seconds.
Model Type (Single2)

This is a circuit (CKT) model of a single cage motor where the rotor resistance and reactance change as
functions of motor speed to represent deep-bar effects of the rotor.
Model ID
Rs
Enter the motor stator resistance in percent (machine base).
Xs
Enter the motor stator reactance in percent (machine base).
Xm
Enter the motor magnetizing reactance in percent (machine base).
Rr,fl
Enter the motor rotor resistance at full load in percent (machine base).
Rr,lr
Enter the motor rotor resistance at locked-rotor in percent (machine base).
Xr,fl
Enter the motor rotor reactance at full load in percent (machine base).
Xr,lr
Enter the motor rotor reactance at locked-rotor in percent (machine base).
Model Type (DBL1/DBL2)

This is a circuit (CKT) model of a double cage motor having two rotor cages.
8-44
Model ID
Rs
Enter the motor stator resistance in percent (machine base).
Xs
Enter the motor stator reactance in percent (machine base).
Xm
Enter the motor magnetizing reactance in percent (machine base).
Rr1
Enter the motor rotor resistance for the first rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Rr2
Enter the motor rotor resistance for the second rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Xr1
Enter the motor rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Xr2
Enter the motor rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
8.9.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Model

and then clicking on the Library button in the LR Model page of the Motor Editor. The Library Quick
Select a motor model from the library from this dialog box. Specify whether you would like a Single1,
Single2, or Double-Cage (DBL) model, then select the appropriate design class and model ID from the
library.
8-45
8.10 Motor Characteristic Model

The Motor Characteristic Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can
have unlimited headers, and each header is defined by a motor model ID specified within a design class,
as shown below.
Header
Motor Characteristic
Model ID
Header
Model Library
Model ID
Header
Model ID
Header
Model ID
A motor characteristic header consists of a design class and a model ID. You can have unlimited records
for each header.
8.10.1 Motor Characteristic Model Library Selector
Motor characteristic model libraries shipped with ETAP contain several design classes that are named
according to the following three criterions:
Voltage
HV (High Voltage)
LV (Low Voltage)
Slip
HS (High Slip)
LS (Low Slip)
Torque
HT (High Torque)
LT (Low Torque)
For example, HV-LS-HT means High Voltage, Low Slip, and High Torque.
8-46
These naming criterions are based on NEMA definitions:

NEMA Class A&B -
Normal Torque
Low Slip
NEMA Class C -
High Torque
Low Slip
NEMA Class D -
High Torque
High Slip
NEMA Class E&F -
Low Torque
Low Slip
Low voltage is considered to be devices rated at less than 1 kV.

The Motor Characteristic Model Library allows you to add new motor characteristic design classes and
models or select existing motor characteristic design classes and models for modification, deletion, or
copying. To edit a motor characteristic model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a motor characteristic model design class, click on the Delete button after
highlighting a model. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting
the selected design class.
Add
Select this option to input the name of the manufacturer and choose the design class you wish to add to
the library. You can edit the properties of the new Motor Characteristic Model Library selection by
highlighting it in the provided list, and then clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name and design class to a new one. This
function can be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in the library entry while retaining the
original data. The properties of the new Motor Characteristic Model Library selection can be edited by
highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
8-47
8.10.2 Motor Characteristic Model Editor
This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit selected motor characteristic design classes and
models. Each library record is a unique set of data for each motor characteristic design class. A unique
record name is defined by Slip. If the record is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are
overwritten. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP will display a frame requesting
that you confirm this request before overwriting any library data.
Model
Slip
Enter the motor slip as a percentage.
Torque
Enter the machine torque as a percentage of full load torque.
I
Enter the motor current as a percentage of full load current.
PF
Enter the motor power factor as a percentage.
8-48
8.10.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Characteristic Model

then clicking on the Library button in the Model page of the Motor Editor. The Library Quick Pick
options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
Pick a motor torque slip characteristic curve from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate
design class and model ID from the Motor Characteristic Model Library.
8-49
Motor Load Model
8.11 Motor Load Model

The Motor Load Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited models within the library, as shown below.
Motor Load
Model Library
Model
Model
Model
Model
8.11.1 Motor Load Model Selector

The Motor Load Model Library selector is used to add, modify, and select mechanical load models based
on torque curve characteristics.
8-50
Motor Load Model
Model Type
Polynomial
The Motor Load Library allows you to model the load based on the Polynomial equation:
T = A0 + A1 * + A2 * 2 + A3 * 3
Where is the per unit speed of the load and torque T is in percent of the rated torque of the driving
motor. For convenience, ETAP displays the load curve and prints the values of percent torque at 0, 25%,
50%, 75%, and 100% speed.
Curve
You can specify the model based on a torque slip curve by selecting this option.
Motor Load Model Library Editor

You can enter the model ID of the motor load selection you wish to add to the library in the editor. You
can also edit the properties of the new motor load selection by highlighting it from the list provided, and
then clicking on the Edit button.
8-51
Motor Load Model
Model ID
Select any one of the existing model IDs. Model IDs are unique names with up to 12 characters.
Coefficients (Polynomial)
While in Edit mode, you can change the values of A0, A1, A2, & A3 coefficients by entering a value
directly or by clicking the Up/Down arrows next to the coefficient. Note: The lower limit of the
coefficients is reached when the load torque becomes zero. The upper limit is reached when the load
torque is 999%.
The Motor Load selector window allows you to add new motor load types or select one from the existing
library for modification or deletion. To edit a load model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit
button after highlighting it. You may then change the coefficients. To delete a motor load model, click
on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this
request before deleting the selected load model.
%Speed, %Slip, %Torque (Curve)

Use the Torque-Slip or Torque-Speed Curve to read and enter the points in these fields. Speed is in
percentage, based on the Synchronous speed. Torque is in percentage, based on the Rated Machine
Torque.
The Motor Load selector window allows you to add new motor load types or select one from the existing
library for modification or deletion. To edit a load model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit
button after highlighting it. You may then change the coefficients. To delete a motor load model, click
8-52
Motor Load Model
on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this
request before deleting the selected load model.
8-53
Fuse
8.12 Fuse
The Fuse Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library
structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Standard, AC/DC, Manufacturer, Model, etc.) each containing a set
of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is as shown below.
Record
Header
Fuse Library
Library
ANSI
AC
IEC
DC*
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
Model
Max. kV
Max. kV
Max. kV
Max. kV
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Size
Size
Size
Size
Amps,
Short
circuit,
Curve
points
* - DC fuse will have Max. Volts in the header

The Fuse Library header consists of Standard AC/DC Manufacturer Model Max. kV (Max. Volts
for DC) Speed. For each header, you can have unlimited records of fuse size, for which ampere value,
short-circuit data and minimum melting / total clearing points curve points can be defined.
8.12.1 Fuse Library Editor
8-54
Fuse
The Fuse Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select the Library from
the menu bar and select Fuse. This will bring up the Fuse Editor. The fields of this Library Editor are
described in this section.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for fuse filtered by the selected standard and AC/DC.
Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified).
Link
Displays a manufacturer web link or URL address.
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of a fuse manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Enter the manufacturer name you wish to add to the library. This field is a required library parameter.
Reference
Enter the reference, if available, for the manufacturer. This field is provided for reference only and may
be left blank.
Link
Enter the manufacturer web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank
Lock
8-55
Fuse
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and
then clicking on Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited.
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
To delete a selected fuse manufacturer and all models provided by that manufacturer, select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. ETAP will
display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting the selected manufacturer.
Locked entries cannot be deleted from the library. If you attempt to delete a locked entry the following
message is displayed.
8-56
Fuse
Copy
To copy the selected fuse manufacturer and all models provided by that manufacturer, select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on Copy button. All models and
parameters for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer name.
Model
Model
Model lists all the Model-Max kV (Max V for DC)-Speed, for the selected fuse manufacturer.
Lock
Class, Type
Displays the class and type for the selected fuse model.
Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Application
Displays the reference for the selected fuse model.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the fuse model you wish to add to the library.
8-57
Fuse
Manufacturer
Displays the manufacturer name.
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library. This field is a required library parameter.
Max kV (Max V for DC fuse)

Enter the Max kV (Max V for DC fuse) for the fuse. This field is a required library parameter.
Speed
Select the speed of the fuse from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
Class, Type
Select the class and type of the fuse from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
CLF (checkbox)
Check if the fuse is a current limiting fuse. This field is a required library parameter.
Reference
Enter the reference, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Catalog #, Issue Date

Enter the catalog number and catalog issue date. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
8-58
Fuse
Brand Name
Enter the brand name, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Description
Enter the description for the fuse model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Application
Enter the application for the fuse model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Link
Enter the model web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Lock
Edit Info
You can edit properties of the new or existing model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
clicking on the Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited. The model link field is not displayed
for locked models.
8-59
Fuse
Delete Model
Delete
To delete a specific fuse model select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm the request.
Copy
Copy a fuse model by selecting the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then clicking on
the Copy button. The selected model will be copied to the user-specified Model name, Max kV, and
Speed.
8-60
Fuse
Help
Open the Help file for the Fuse Library.
Close
Close the Fuse Library Editor and save all changes.
Edit Parameters
Select a model and click on the Edit Parameters button to open the Parameters Editor. The Parameters
Editor allows you to specify available sizes for the selected fuse model, along with short-circuit data and
curve points. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you
can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows. Locked entries
cannot be edited or deleted, but can be copied.
The different fields in the Parameters Editor for entering data for ANSI fuse are described below.
8-61
Fuse
Standard
Displays the selected standard.
Manufacturer
Displays the selected manufacturer name.
Model
Displays the selected model name.
Speed
Displays the speed of the selected fuse model.
Max. kV (Max. V for DC fuse)

Displays the maximum voltage for the selected fuse model.
Size
Enter a size identification number up to 12 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
Cont. Amp
Enter the continuous ampere value in amperes for the selected size. This field is a required library
parameter.
8-62
Fuse
Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting value in kA for the selected size. This is an essential field; however, it
can be left blank if information is not available.
Test PF, Test X/R

Enter the Test PF or Test X/R for the short-circuit kA. Entering the Test PF will calculate the Test X/R
value and vice versa. These are essential fields; however, they can be left blank if information is not
available.
TCC
Click on the Points button to define the Minimum Melting, Total Clearing and Peak Let-Thru curves for
the selected size. The TCC points buttons are not available for locked entries.
Construction
Enter the construction type for the fuse size. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Note
Enter notes if required for the selected fuse size. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Lock
The parameters for IEC fuse are identical to ANSI fuse with the exception of short-circuit data, which is
described below.
8-63
Fuse
8-64
Fuse
Breaking kA
Enter the short-circuit breaking kA for the selected size. This is an essential field; however, it can be left
blank if information is not available.
Test X/R
Enter the Test X/R for the short-circuit breaking kA. This is an essential field; however, it can be left
blank if information is not available.
TRV
Enter the Transient recovery voltage (TRV) in kV, for the selected fuse size. This is an essential field;
however, it can be left blank if information is not available.
Fuse TCC Curve

Click on the Points button for ANSI / IEC fuse size to open the Fuse TCC curve window. The Fuse
TCCCurve Editor allows you to define the Minimum Melting, Total Clearing and Peak Let-Thru curves
for the selected fuse size. The TCC points are not available for locked entries.
The header for the Fuse TCC curve displays details of the fuse model and size selected for defining the
curve points.
TCC ID, Revision

Enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the Minimum Melting and Total Clearing curves, for the
selected fuse size.
8-65
Fuse
Notes
Enter notes for the TCC curve of the selected fuse size.
TCC Points
Enter the time in seconds and current in amperes for minimum melting and total clearing curves. You can
Add, Edit and Delete data using the Add and Delete buttons. Check Apply Smoothing to smooth the
minimum melting and total clearing curves.
Peak Let-Thru
The Peak Let-Thru page is available only if the fuse is defined as a current limiting (CLF) fuse. Enter the
short-circuit RMS and Instantaneous peak values in kA. You can Add, Edit and Delete data using the
Add and Delete buttons. Check Apply Smoothing to smooth the Peak Let-Thru curve.
8-66
Relay
8.13 Relay
The Relay Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library
structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Function, etc.) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, CT inputs, etc.). The library header structure is as
shown below.
Header
Relay Library
Library
Model
Model
Model
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Overcurrent
Overload
Differential
Distance
The Relay Library header consists of Manufacturer Model Function. A relay model can be single
function (i.e. ABB CO relay with overcurrent function only) or multiple functions (i.e. ABB SPAM 150C
with overcurrent, overload, voltage, frequency, etc.). You can have unlimited functions for a relay model
in the Relay Library. Each relay function has its own header classification, which is explained further in
this section.
8.13.1 Relay Library Editor

The Relay Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select a library from
the menu bar and then select Relay. This will bring up the Relay Editor. The fields of the Library Editor
are described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for relays.
Lock
Link
Displays the manufacturer web link or URL address.
Add
Click the Add button to input the name of relay manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
8-67
Relay
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Enter the manufacturer web link. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Lock
Edit Info
8-68
Relay
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
This selection allows you to delete a relay manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
manufacturer will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
Locked entries cannot be deleted from the library. If you attempt to delete a locked entry, the following
message will be displayed.
Copy
Copy the relay manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by
highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and parameters for
the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer name.
8-69
Relay
Filter
The Filter allows you to view all relay models for the selected manufacturer, based on the filter selected.
You can view all relay models or filter your selection by Protection Type and Function Type.
Model
Model
Lists all relay models for the selected manufacturer based on the filter selected.
Lock
Functions
Displays the functions (Overcurrent, Overload, etc.) for the selected relay model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected relay model.
Brand Name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected relay model.
8-70
Relay
Application
Displays the application for the selected relay model.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the relay model you wish to add to the library. An example of an
Overcurrent relay (ABB DPU-2000R) being added to the library is shown below.
Manufacturer
Model
Protection type
Select the protection type(s) of for the model by checking the box. This field is used for filtering the
model based on protection type and may be left blank, if no information is available.
Single Function
Select this option to define the model as a single-function relay. This option allows you to select the
function from a drop-down list.
8-71
Relay
Multiple Functions
Select this option to define the model as a multiple-function relay. This option allows you to select
different functions available for the relay.
Note: The available trip elements vary based on the relay function. Selecting the relay function(s) is a
required relay library parameter.
Trip Elements
Check the applicable trip elements for the selected relay function. This field is a required library
parameter.
The available trip elements for the Overcurrent function are Instantaneous, Time Overcurrent,
Directional, Voltage Control / Restraint, Short Time, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground, and Negative
Sequence.
8-72
Relay
The available trip elements for the Overload and Overload Inline functions are Thermal, Acceleration
Curve, Jam, Instantaneous, and Ground.
I2 Operates on
Select the multiples of negative sequence current (I2), which the relay uses to operate the negative
sequence element.
I0 Operates on
Select the multiples of zero sequence current (I0), which the relay uses to operate the neutral, ground, and
sensitive ground elements.
Differential Type
For the Differential function, select High Impedance or Percentage Type.
# of TOC Levels
Select the number of TOC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected relay model (Available only
for Overcurrent function).
# of IOC Levels
Select the number of IOC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected relay model (Available only for
the Overcurrent function).
Independent TOC/IOC
Check to indicate if the TOC and the IOC curves for the relay model are independent (Available only for
the Overcurrent function).
Brand name, Reference

Enter the model brand name and reference, if available. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.

Enter the catalog number and catalog issue date. These fields are provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Current Rating
Select a current rating for the relay from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
OC CT Inputs
Select the number of overcurrent (OC) CT inputs for the relay from the list box. Note: The CT input
number selected for the relay indicates the types of overcurrent CT terminals that are available for the
relay for CT inputs, not the number of connections. For example, if you select OC CT Inputs as 2, it
indicates that the relay has Phase and Ground terminals available for OC CT inputs. This field is a
required library parameter.
PT Inputs
Select the number of PT inputs for the relay from the list box. Note: The PT input number selected for
the relay indicates the types of PT terminals that are available for the relay for PT inputs, not the
number of connections. For example, if you select PT Inputs as 2, it indicates that the relay has Phase and
Ground terminals available for PT inputs. This field is a required library parameter.
8-73
Relay
DIF CT Inputs
Select the number of differential (DIF) CT inputs for the relay from the list box. Note: When the
Differential Type is High Impedance, this selection is fixed to a value of 1.
Link
blank.
Description
Application
Lock
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
clicking on Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited. The model link field is not displayed for
locked models.
8-74
Relay
Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected relay model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
8-75
Relay
Copy
Copy a selected relay model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on
the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the user-specified
model name.
Help
Open a Help topic for the Relay Library.
Close
Close the Relay Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
To access the function parameters for a model, select a relay model along with desired function and click
on the Parameters button. Note: The Parameters Editor is not available for the Differential function.
Parameters (Overcurrent Function)

The library header structure for Overcurrent function is as shown below.
8-76
Relay
Record
Header
Relay Library
Overcurrent
Function
Curve Type
Curve Type
Curve Type
Curve Type
Overcurrent
Instantaneous
51 Settings
Settings 1, Settings2,
51V (C/R)
Settings
50 Settings
Short Time
Settings
The Parameters Editor allows you to specify different relay characteristic curves, along with settings
associated with trip elements available for overcurrent function. The Parameters Editor for ABB DPU2000R relay is shown below.
Curve (51/ST) Tab
Manufacturer
8-77
Relay
Model
Function
Displays the selected function type.
Curve Type
Define different relay characteristic curves by equation or points.
Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
Assign
Assign the relay characteristic curve to selected trip element. You can assign the curves to Time
overcurrent or Short-Time elements or both (OC/ST). This field is a required library parameter.
Type
Select the type of curve (defined by equation or defined by points) from the list. This field is a required
library parameter.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the curve here.
Lock
Add, Delete, Copy, Paste

You can Add, Delete and Copy curves using the Add, Delete, Copy, and Paste buttons. Locked entries
cannot be deleted, but can be copied.
8-78
Relay
Edit
Click on the Edit button to enter the TCC Equation or TCC Points data depending on the type of the
selected relay curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries.
8-79
Relay
TCC Equation Data

TCC Equation Data Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by equation. The
parameters that are available are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Curve
Displays the selected curve name.
Equation
Enter the equation for the selected curve. You can enter the equation using basic math operators +, -, *, /.
You can also nest expressions using parentheses. The math functions can be entered in C# math syntax.
The equation is defined based on the following variables:
TD Time Dial
M Pickup Multiples
For example: An equation for Trip time = (80/(M^2-1))*TD
8-80
Relay
The C# syntax for this function is:

(80/(Math.Pow(M,2)-1))*TD
For more information on C# functions please visit the msdn website and search for math members.
Time Dial
Enter the time dial range for the curve type. You can enter the time dial as continuous (i.e. Min, Max, and
Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons.
Min Multiple / Max Multiple

Enter the minimum and maximum current multiple for the selected curve.
Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve is plotted as definite time curve beyond the max multiples.
Help
Open the Help topic for the TCC Equation Data Editor.
OK
This selection closes the TCC Equation Data Editor, saving all changes.
Cancel
This closes the TCC Equation Data Editor, discarding all changes.
TCC Points
The TCC Points Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by points. The different
parameters available are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Curve
8-81
Relay
Time Dial, Time, Multiples

Enter the Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples to define the curve for the specified
time dial. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can
select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows.
Time Dial
Enter the time dial range for the curve type. You can enter the time dial as continuous (i.e. Min, Max, and
Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons.

Definite
Help
OK
Close the TCC Equation Data Editor, saving all changes.
Cancel
Close the TCC Equation Data Editor, discarding all changes.
8-82
Relay
Curve Parameters
Enter the settings for Time Overcurrent (51) trip element. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using
the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete,
insert, copy and paste rows. The different parameters available are described below.
51 (Time Overcurrent) Tab

Enter pick up settings for the Time Overcurrent trip element for the selected curve type.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for Time Overcurrent pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
Min Trip, Max Trip, Trip Step

Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip, and Trip Step
values for the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Trip
Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for
the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the drop-down list.
Assign
Assign the selected pickup range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence,
Ground, etc. or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G
assigns the Time Overcurrent pickup range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the Time
Overcurrent pickup range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns the pickup
range to Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other assignments.
Burden, Burden unit

Enter the Burden value and Burden unit (VA or Ohm) for the selected pickup range.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the trip range here.
8-83
Relay
51 V(C/R) Tab
Enter the settings for Voltage control and restraint elements.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for voltage, i.e. Volts, Multiples or Percent from the list box. When the unit is selected as
Multiples or Percent, then the range entered is actually in multiples or percent of PT-sec.
Vmin, Vmax, VStep

Define the voltage setting as continuous values by entering Vmin, Vmax and VStep values for the
selected voltage unit (Volts, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Volts
Define the voltage setting as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Volts field, for the
selected voltage unit (Volts, Multiples or Percent).
Characteristic
Select a voltage restraint characteristic from the list box.
Notes
Short Time Tab

Enter the pickup settings for the Short Time trip element for the selected curve type.
8-84
Relay
Unit
Select the unit for Short Time pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list.

Define the Short Time pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values
for the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Trip
Define the Short Time pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the
selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the list box.
Assign
assigns the Short Time pickup range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the Short Time
pickup range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns the pickup range to Phase,
Neutral, Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other assignments.
Notes
Instantaneous (50) Tab

Enter the settings for Instantaneous (50). You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and
Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy
and paste rows. The available parameters are described below.
8-85
Relay
Instantaneous Trip Parameters

Enter the pickup settings for the Instantaneous trip element.
Unit
Select the unit for Instantaneous pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.

Define the Instantaneous pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step
Discrete Trip
Define the Instantaneous pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the
8-86
Relay
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the list.
Assign
assigns the Instantaneous Overcurrent pickup range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the
Instantaneous Overcurrent pickup range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns
the pickup range to Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other
assignments.
Notes
Instantaneous Delay Parameters

Enter the settings for the Instantaneous Time Delay.
Unit
Select the unit for Time Delay i.e. seconds or cycles from the list.
Min Delay, Max Delay, Delay Step

Define the Time Delay as continuous values by entering Min Delay, Max Delay and Delay Step values
for the selected unit (seconds or cycles).
Discrete Delay
Define the Time Delay as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Delay field, for the
selected unit (seconds or cycles).
Assign
Assign the selected time delay range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence,
assigns the Instantaneous time delay range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the
Instantaneous time delay range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns the time
delay range to Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other
assignments.
8-87
Relay
+Delay
Enter the built-in additional delay associated with the instantaneous operation here.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the delay range here.
Points (Instantaneous)
The Instantaneous Points Editor allows you to define the Instantaneous as a curve by points. You can
Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row
(highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows. The different parameters
available are described below.
Multiples, tmin, tmax

Enter the pickup multiples and corresponding minimum and maximum time in seconds. If the
Instantaneous curve does not have tolerance (i.e., line curve) then you can enter the same time interval
value for tmin and tmax.
Parameters (Overload and Overload Inline Function)
8-88
Relay
Curve (49/Accl.) Tab
Manufacturer
Model
Function
Displays the selected function type.
Curve Type
Define the different relay characteristic curves by equation or points.
8-89
Relay
Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
Assign
Assign the Overload relay characteristic curve to either 49 or Acceleration. This field is a required library
parameter.
Amb. Temp.
Enter the Ambient Temperature in degree Celsius for the selected curve type.
Type
Select the type of curve (defined by equation or defined by points) from the list. This field is a required
library parameter.
Notes
Enter details about the curve type up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.
Lock

Edit
selected relay curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries.
TCC Equation Data

The TCC Equation Data Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by equation. The
parameters that are available are described below.
Manufacturer
8-90
Relay
Model
Curve
Equation
TD Time Multiplier
M Multiples of pickup or FLA based on selection for Current Multiplier.
K k Multiplier
For example: An equation for Trip time = 60.00*TD*LN((((M*M)/(K*K))/(K*K)))/(((M*M)/(K*K))-1))
60.00*TD*Math.Log(((M*M)/(K*K))/(((M*M)/(K*K))-1))
8-91
Relay
Current Multiplier
Select the current multiplier from the drop-down list (FLA or pickup).
Time Multiplier
Enter the time multiplier range for the selected curve type. You can enter the time multiplier as
continuous (i.e. Min, Max, and Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons.
Display
Check to display and use the time multiplier for the selected curve type.
Label
Enter a name for the time multiplier up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
k Multiplier
Enter the k multiplier range for the selected curve type. You can enter the k multiplier as continuous (i.e.
Min, Max, and Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons. When used in the relay
equation, the k Multiplier shifts the curve similar to a time dial (time multiplier). The k Multiplier can
also alter the starting point of the relay curve depending on the type of the multiplier used in the equation
(K, E, or C) as described below.
For K multiplier , the min multiple (where the curve begins) of is shifted by 1.0001 * K (where K is the
value selected in the Overload Relay Editor). The relay curve starting point is shifted by (Current
Multiplier*Min Multiple*K).
For E multiplier, the min multiple is shifted by 1.0001 * sqrt(E/100) (where E is the value selected in
the Overload Relay Editor). The relay curve starting point is shifted by (Current Multiplier *Min
Multiple*sqrt(E/100)).
For C multiplier, the min multiple does not get shifted.
Display
Check to display and use the k multiplier for the selected curve type.
Label
Enter a name for the k multiplier up to 30 alphanumeric characters. The default label is k Factor.

Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve goes definite after the max multiples.
Help
OK
8-92
Relay
Cancel
TCC Points
The TCC Points Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by points. The different
Manufacturer
Model
Curve
Points
Current Multiplier
Select the current multiplier from the drop-down list (FLA or pickup).
8-93
Relay
Min Curve
Enter the Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples to define the min curve. You can Add,
Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row and rightclick to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows.
Max Curve
Enter the Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples to define the max curve. You can Add,
Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row and rightclick to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows.
If the Overload curve does not have tolerance (i.e. line curve), then you have to just enter the points for
the Max curve alone.

Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve goes definite after the max multiples.
Help
OK
Cancel
Curve Parameters
Enter the settings for the selected curve type. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and
Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste
rows. The different parameters available are described below.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for Overload pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
8-94
Relay
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the drop-down list.

Define the Overload pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values
for the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Trip
Define the Overload pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the
Burden, Burden unit

Enter the Burden value and Burden unit (VA or Ohm) for the selected pickup range.
Notes
Enter details about the Overload pickup range up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.
Jam / GND / 50 Tab
Trip Parameters
The pickup settings for the Jam/Ground/Instantaneous element is defined here.
8-95
Relay
Unit
Select the unit for the pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the list.
Min, Max, Step

Define the pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values for the
Discrete
Define the pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the selected trip
unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Notes
Enter details about the pickup range up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.
Delay Parameters
The time delay settings for the Jam/Ground/Instantaneous element are defined here.
Unit
Select the unit for time delay i.e. seconds or cycles from the list.
Min, Max, Step

Define the time delay as continuous values by entering Min Delay, Max Delay and Delay Step values for
the selected unit (seconds or cycles).
8-96
Relay
Discrete Delay
Define the time delay as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Delay field, for the selected
unit (seconds or cycles).
+Delay
Enter the built-in additional delay associated with the operation of the Jam/Ground/Instantaneous here.
Notes
Enter details about the time delay range up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.
8-97
Recloser
8.14 Recloser
The Recloser Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library
structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Standard, Manufacturer, Type, Model, etc.) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library header structure is shown below.
The Recloser Library header consists of Standard Manufacturer Device Type Model. You can have
unlimited records of short-circuit data and curve assignments defined.
Recloser device types available are:
Recloser Hydraulic
Recloser Electronic
HV Circuit Breaker
8-98
Recloser
8.14.1 Recloser Library Editor
The Recloser Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select the library
from the menu bar and select Recloser. This will bring up the Recloser Library Editor. The different
fields in the Library Editor are described in this section.
Standard
Click on either ANSI or IEC option to select that standard.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for recloser filtered by the selected standard.
Lock
Link
Add
Select Recloser Standard and then click on the Add button to input the name of the recloser manufacturer
you wish to add to the library.
8-99
Recloser
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Lock
Edit Info
8-100
Recloser
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Delete the selected recloser manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
Copy
You can copy a selected recloser manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and
Model
Device Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the recloser type. The recloser types include
Recloser-Electronic, Recloser-Hydraulic, and HV Circuit Breaker.
Model
Lists all the models for the selected recloser manufacturer.
Lock
8-101
Recloser
Type
Displays the type, single or three phase, for the selected recloser model.
Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Application
Displays the application for the selected recloser model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of a recloser model you wish to add to the library.
Standard
Displays the standard (ANSI or IEC) of the manufacturer.
Manufacturer
8-102
Recloser
Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected manufacturer is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified).
Device Type
Displays the type (Recloser-Electronic, Recloser-Hydraulic, or HV Circuit Breaker) of the new model.
Note: The new model will be of the type selected in the main Recloser Library window.
Model
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library.
Max kV
Select from the list box or enter the Max kV for the recloser.
Max Amps
Select from the list box or enter the Max amps for the recloser.
Interrupting (Break) Time

Enter the interrupting time is cycle or milliseconds. Note: When the standard is IEC this field is labeled
as Break time.
Time Unit
Select from the list box the unit (cycle or millisecond) for the interrupting time.
Rating Std.
Select the circuit breaker standard as Sym or Tot rated from the list box. Note: This is field is only
available when the device type is ANSI HV Circuit Breaker.
Sym Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis
Tot Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a total current basis
Model Info
Brand Name, Reference
Enter the model brand name and reference if available. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.
Int. Medium
Select from the list box the interrupting medium used in the recloser model. Available selections are Oil,
Vacuum, Gas, and Other.
Type
Select the operating type (single or three-phase) of the recloser model.
8-103
Recloser
Ground Trip
Check the Ground Trip box if the recloser model has a ground trip. This field is only available when the
recloser device type is Recloser-Hydraulic and operating type is Three Phase.

left blank.
Link
blank.
Description
Enter the description for the recloser model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Application
Enter the application for the recloser model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Lock
Edit Info
locked models.
8-104
Recloser
Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected recloser model. Select model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
Copy
Use this selection to copy the selected recloser model. Select model by highlighting it from the list
provided and then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be
copied to the user-specified model name.
8-105
Recloser
Help
Open the Help topic for the Recloser Library.
Close
Close the Recloser Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
Click on the Parameters button to enter the short-circuit data for the recloser model. The short-circuit
parameters are different depending on the recloser device type and standard.
You can Add, Edit and Delete the short-circuit data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you
ANSI/IEC Recloser-Electronic
When the ANSI or IEC standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Electronic, you can enter the
applied kV, interrupting kA, test X/R, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical),
short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, impulse withstand rating, and notes.
8-106
Recloser
kV
Enter the applied voltage in kV.
Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting capability in rms kA. Note: If the standard is IEC this field is labeled
Breaking kA.
Test X/R
Select from the list box or enter the test X/R rating. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the interrupting kA is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the following
table.
Inter. kA
kA <= 1.25
1.25 < kA <= 2
2 < kA <= 4
4 < kA <= 7
7 < kA <= 12
12 < kA < 20
kA >= 20
X/R
8
10
12
14
15
16
17
Making kA rms
Enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating in kA. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the
following equation.
8-107
Recloser
Making kA Peak
Enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA. Note: If the value in this field is
initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a
value according to the following equation.
Short-Time kA
Enter the short-time withstand rating for the recloser in kA.
Tkr
Enter the short-time withstand duration for the recloser in seconds.
BIL
Enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the recloser in kV.
Notes
Enter notes pertaining to the rating.
ANSI/IEC Recloser-Hydraulic
When the ANSI or IEC standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic, you can enter the coil
ID, continuous amps rating, minimum trip, and maximum amps for a coil. For each coil you can enter the
applied kV, interrupting kA, test X/R, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical),
short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, impulse withstand rating, and notes.
8-108
Recloser
Size
Coil ID
Enter the ID of the coil.
Amps
Enter the continuous rating of the coil in amps.
Min Trip
Enter the minimum trip rating of the coil in amps. This value is usually two times the coils continuous
rating.
Max Amps
Enter the maximum current rating of the coil in amps. This value is usually equal to the interrupting
current.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the coil here.
Short-Circuit Rating
The short-circuit rating for the selected coil is entered here. Note: This information is not required for
ground element.
8-109
Recloser
kV
Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting capability in rms kA. Note: If the standard is IEC this field is labeled
Breaking kA.
Test X/R
Select from the list box or enter the test X/R rating. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the interrupting kA is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the following
table.
Inter. kA
kA <= 1.25
1.25 < kA <= 2
2 < kA <= 4
4 < kA <= 7
7 < kA <= 12
12 < kA < 20
kA >= 20
X/R
8
10
12
14
15
16
17
Making kA rms
Enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating in kA. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the
following equation.
Making kA Peak
Enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA. Note: If the value in this field is
initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a
value according to the following equation.
Short-Time kA
8-110
Recloser
Tkr
BIL
Notes
ANSI HV Circuit Breaker

When the ANSI standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, you can enter the applied kV,
interrupting kA, close and latch rms, close and latch peak, short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand
duration, impulse withstand rating, and notes.
kV
Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting capability in rms kA.
C & L rms
Enter the closing and latching capability of the breaker in asymmetrical rms kA. This value is equal to
1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
8-111
Recloser
C & L Peak
Enter the closing and latching capability of the breaker in peak kA. This value is equal to 2.7 times the
maximum interrupting capability.
Short-Time kA
Tkr
BIL
Notes
IEC HV Circuit Breaker

When the IEC standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, you can enter the applied kV,
breaking kA, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), FPC factor, short-time
withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, impulse withstand rating, transient rated voltage, and notes.
kV
8-112
Recloser
Breaking kA
Enter the short-circuit breaking capability in rms kA.
Making kA rms
Enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating in kA.
Making kA Peak
Enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA.
FPC Factor
Select from the list box the first pole to clear factor.
Short-Time kA
Tkr
BIL
TRV
Enter the rated transient recovery voltage in kV.
Notes
Curve Assignment
Select a recloser model entry, by highlighting it and clicking on the Curve Assignment button to assign
curves to the selected recloser model. The Curve Assignment Editor is different depending on the
recloser device type.
ANSI/IEC Recloser-Electronic and HV Circuit Breaker

For Electronic Recloser or HV Circuit Breaker, the TCC curves can be assigned to the selected model(s).
8-113
Recloser
Assign All / Assign Individual

Select Assign All to assign all the curves of a controller when moving it from Available to Assigned.
Select Assign Individual if you want to assign specific curves from the controller.
Controller
The curves which the recloser uses can be assigned and unassigned here.
Available
The Available section will display all the units in the Electronic Controller Library which are under the
same manufacturer as the recloser. Check Show all to display all electronic controllers in the library.
Select the controller Manufacturer Model from the Available section and click on the Assign button
(<<), to assign the selected trip unit to the recloser. Once assigned, the trip unit Manufacturer Model
will be displayed in the Assigned section. Note: If Assign Individual is selected, curves must be selected
from the Curve list.
Assigned
Controllers that have been assigned to the recloser are displayed in the Assigned section. Controller can
be unassigned by selecting the Manufacturer Model of the controller and clicking on the Unassign
button (>>).
Assignment and unassignment of controllers to and from a locked recloser entry is allowed, since the
recloser manufacturer may allow retrofits and modifications of the controller.
Refer to the Electronic Controller Library section to learn more about electronic controller types and
specifications.
8-114
Recloser
ANSI/IEC Recloser-Hydraulic
For Hydraulic Recloser, the TCC curve parameters are directly entered in the editor.
Curve Type
The name of the curve, trip element assignment, speed, and type are defined here.
Name
Enter the name of the curve.
Assign
Assign the selected curve to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, or a combination of elements by
selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the curve only to Ground element, and
selecting P/G assigns the curve to Phase and Ground elements.
Speed
Assign the speed, fast or delayed, of the curve.
Type
Select the type of curve (defined by equation or defined by points) from the list.
Lock
8-115
Recloser
Current Unit
Select the current unit, Ampere or Multiples, the points are defined using. Note: If the curve type is
equation this can only be Multiples.
Clearing Curve
The points or equation of the clearing curve can be defined here.
Time, Multiples/Amperes
If the curve type is Points then enter Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples or amperes,
depending on the Current Unit selection, to define the curve. You can Add and Delete the data using
Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete,
insert, copy and paste rows.
Equation
If the curve type is Equation then enter the equation for the clearing curve. You can enter the equation
using basic math operators +, -, *, /. You can also nest expressions using parentheses. The math
functions can be entered in C# math syntax.
M Pickup Multiples
For example: An equation for Trip time = (80/(M^2-1))
(80/(Math.Pow(M,2)-1))

Enter the minimum and maximum current multiple for the selected curve. Note: This is hidden if the
Current Unit is Amperes.
Definite
Note: This is hidden if the Current Unit is Amperes.
Clearing Curve
Select whether to calculate the response curve using the clearing curve and interrupting time, or to define
the response curve.
Calculated Response Curve

Select the Calculated Response Curve to calculate the response curve using the clearing curve and
interrupting time. This is done by subtracting the interrupting time from the clearing curve.
Define Response Curve

Select the Define Response Curve to enter the response curve. If this is selected the response curve must
be entered using the method described above for the clearing curve. Note: The curve type and current
8-116
Recloser
unit are the same for the response and clearing curves, i.e. if the clearing curve is points-based with
amperes as the unit, then the response curve will also be points-based with amperes as the units.
Curve Info
Enter the curve TCC ID, revision date, and notes here.
TCC ID
Enter the manufacturer TCC ID.
Revision
Enter the revision date of the TCC.
Notes
Enter notes for the TCC curve.
Library Quick Pick - Recloser

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a Recloser in the one-line diagram,
and then clicking on the Library button in the Rating tab of the editor. The Library Quick Pick options
are a compilation of all the information you have specified for this element.
Pick a recloser from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate manufacturer and
specifications for the recloser, which is associated with this project file. The recloser specifications
include Model, Max kV, Rated Int. kA, Test X/R, Making kA rms, and Making kA Peak.
8-117
Recloser
8-118
Electronic Controller
8.15 Electronic Controller

The Electronic Controller Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical
library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Type, Model, etc.) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library header structure is as shown below.
The Electronic Controller Library header consists of Manufacturer Type Model. A manufacturer can
have microprocessor or static models depending on the models type. Each type has its own header
classification, which is explained further in this section. Furthermore, each model can be assigned
different trip elements (phase overcurrent, ground high current, etc.).
8-119
8.15.1 Electronic Controller Library Editor
The Electronic Controller Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select
the library from the menu bar and then select Electronic Controller. This will bring up the Electronic
Controller Library Editor. The fields of the Library Editor are described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for controllers.
Lock
Link
Add
Click on the Add button to input the name of relay manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
8-120
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Lock
Edit Info
8-121
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
This selection allows you to delete a controller manufacturer and all models provided by the
manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the
Delete button. The manufacturer will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
Copy
Copy the controller manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the manufacturer
by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and parameters for
Type
The Type allows you to view all controller models for the selected manufacturer, based on the controller
type selected. Available selections are Microprocessor and Static.
8-122
Microprocessor
Select this option to view the models provided by the selected manufacturer that are of microprocessor
type.
Static
Select this option to view the models provided by the selected manufacturer that are of static type.
Model
Model
Lists all controller models for the selected manufacturer based on the type selected.
Lock
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected controller model.
Brand Name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected controller model.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the controller model you wish to add to the library.
8-123
Manufacturer
Lock
Controller Type
Displays the type, Microprocessor or Static, selected.
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library.
Trip Elements
Check the applicable trip elements for the selected controller function.
The available trip elements are Phase TOC, Phase HC, Ground TOC, Ground HC, Sensitive Ground
TOC, Sensitive Ground HC, and Alternate Trip, where TOC stand for time overcurrent and HC for high
current.
# of TOC Levels
Select the number of TOC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected controller model. Available
only for Microprocessor Type.
8-124
# of HC Levels
Select the number of HC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected controller model. Available only
for Microprocessor Type.
Independent TOC/HC
Check to indicate if the TOC and the HC curves for the relay model are independent Available only for
Microprocessor Type.
Enforce same setting for all TOC levels

Check to indicate if all levels share the same TOC pickup setting. Available only for Microprocessor
Type.
Enforce same setting for all HC levels

Check to indicate if all levels share the same HC pickup and delay setting. Available only for
Microprocessor Type.
Label
Click on the Label button to assign specific names for the OC level.

Enter the model brand name and reference, if available.

Enter the catalog number and catalog issue date.
Current Rating
Select a current rating for the controller from the list box.
8-125
Link
Enter the model web link or URL address.
Description
Enter the description for the fuse model.
Application
Enter the application for the fuse model.
Lock
Edit Info
locked models.
8-126
Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected controller model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
Copy
Copy a selected controller model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the userspecified model name.
Help
Open the Help topic for the Controller Library.
Close
Close the Controller Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
Select a model and click on the Parameters button to open the Parameters Editor. The Parameters Editor
is available for both Microprocessor and Static type controllers and the editor is different depending upon
the model type.
8-127
Parameters
The Parameters Editor allows you to define different overcurrent curves, high current trip and delay
ranges, and modifier ranges.
Pickup Tab (Static)

Enter the settings for Time Overcurrent trip elements. This is for a static controller type.
Manufacturer
Model
Type
Displays the controller type.
Pickup (Min Trip Rating)

Define different pickups available for the controller model.
8-128
Label
Enter a label for the pickup.
Amps
Enter the value of the pickup in amps.
Assign
Assign the selected pickup to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground or a
combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the pickup
only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup to Phase and Ground, and similarly for other
assignments.
Note
Enter any notes pertaining to the selected pickup.
Lock

Curve Tab (Static)

Enter the curves for static controller type.
8-129
Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Assign
Assign the controller characteristic curve to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive
Ground, or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns
the curve only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and Ground
elements, and similarly for other assignments.
Speed
Select the speed, Fast or Delayed, to assign the curve to.
Type
Lock

8-130
Edit
selected controller curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries. More information on TCC
equation and points entry will be given below.
Curve Tab (Microprocessor)

Enter the curves microprocessor controller type.
Manufacturer
Model
Type
Displays the controller type.
Curve Type
Define different controller characteristic curves by equation or points.
8-131
Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Assign
Assign the controller characteristic curve to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive
Ground, or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns
the curve only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and Ground
elements, and similarly for other assignments.
Type
Group1-8
Curves can be associated to a curve group number (1-8) where applicable.
Lock

Edit
selected controller curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries.
TCC Equation Data

The TCC Equation Data Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by equation. The
parameters that are available are described below:
Manufacturer
Model
8-132
Curve
Current Unit
Select the current unit, Amperes or Multiples. Equation based curves can only be specified in multiples
of the pickup.
Response Curve
Equation
TD Time Dial
M Pickup Multiples
8-133
Time Dial
Check the box and enter the time dial range. You can enter the time dial as continuous (i.e. Min, Max,
and Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons.

Definite
Clearing Curve
Calculating Clearing Curve
Select this option to calculate the Clearing curve based on the Response curve. Clearing Time is
calculated by adding the interrupting time defined in the Recloser Editor to the response curve.
Define Clearing Curve

Select this to define the clearing curve. Use the same methods described for the response curve above.
8-134
TCC ID
Enter the TCC ID of the curve as defined by the manufacturer.
Revision
Enter the revision date of the curve.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the curve.
Help
OK
Cancel
TCC Points
The TCC Points Editor allows you to define the controllers characteristic curve by points. The different
Manufacturer
Model
8-135
Curve
Current Unit
Select the current unit of the points, Amperes or Multiples.
Response Curve
Time and Multiples/Amperes
Enter the time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples or amperes (depending on the current
unit selection) to define the response curve. You can add and delete the data using the Add and Delete
buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and
paste rows.

Definite
8-136
Clearing Curve
Calculating Clearing Curve
Select this option to calculate the Clearing curve based on the Response curve. Clearing Time is
calculated by adding the interrupting time defined in the Recloser Editor to the response curve.
Define Clearing Curve

Select this to define the clearing curve. Use the same methods described for the response curve above.
8-137
TCC ID
Enter the TCC ID of the curve as defined by the manufacturer.
Revision
Enter the revision date of the curve.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the curve.
Help
OK
Cancel
Time Overcurrent Parameters

Enter the settings for Time Overcurrent trip element. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the
Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete,
insert, copy and paste rows. The different parameters available are described below.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for Time Overcurrent pickup. This is currently fixed to Amps.

Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step
Discrete Trip
Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for
the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
8-138
Assign
Assign the selected pickup range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground or a
combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the Time
Overcurrent pickup range only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and
Ground, and similarly for other assignments.
Base
Select a base for the pickup. This is currently fixed to Primary.
Note
Enter any notes pertaining to the trip range.
High Current (HC) Tab

Enter the settings for High Current (HC). You can add and delete the data using the Add and Delete
buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and
paste rows. The available parameters are described below.
High Current Trip Parameters

Enter the pickup settings for the HC trip and HC lockout element.
8-139
Unit
Select the unit for HC pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.

Define the HC pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values for the
Discrete Trip
Define the HC pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the selected
trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Assign
Assign the selected pickup range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground, or
a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the HC
pickup range only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and Ground
elements and similarly for other assignments. To assign a range to the HC lockout element, select
Lockout Phase, Lockout Ground, and Lockout Sensitive Ground, or a combination of these.
Base
Select a base for the pickup. Currently this is fixed to Primary for a unit of Amps, and xTOC Pickup for
units of Multiples and Percent.
High Current Delay Parameters

Enter the settings for the HC Time Delay.
Unit
Select the unit for Time Delay i.e. seconds or cycles from the list.
8-140
Min Delay, Max Delay, Delay Step

Define the Time Delay as continuous values by entering Min Delay, Max Delay and Delay Step values
for the selected unit (seconds or cycles).
Discrete Delay
Define the Time Delay as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Delay field, for the
selected unit (seconds or cycles).
Assign
Assign the selected time delay range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground,
or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the HC
time delay range only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the time delay range to Phase and
Ground elements, and similarly for other assignments.
Note
Enter any notes pertaining to the delay range.
Modifiers Tab
Enter the settings for the constant time adder, minimum response time, and vertical shift modifiers. The
available parameters are described below.
Curve Modification Parameters

Check to indicate that this controller model contains modifiers.
8-141
Title
Displays the modifier type. CTA stands for constant time adder, MRT for minimum response time, and
VSM for vertical shift multiplier.
Label
Enter a name for the respective modifier, if one is given by the manufacturer. Leaving this blank will
result in the Title to be used.
Avail
Check to indicate that the respective modifier is available in the model.
Unit
Select the unit for Time Delay i.e., seconds or cycles from the list for CTA and MRT.
Min, Max, Step

Define the modifier as continuous values by entering Min, Max and Step values.
Discrete Delay
Define the modifier as discrete values separated by semicolons in the Discrete field.
Discrete Label
Enter labels for the discrete value as applicable. .
Use Discrete Label

Check this box to use the Discrete Labels for the modifier settings instead of the discreet values.
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a Recloser in the one-line diagram,
and then clicking on the Library button in the Controller tab of the editor. The Library Quick Pick
options are a compilation of all the information you have specified for this element.
Pick an electronic controller from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate manufacturer
and specifications for the device, which is associated with this project file. The electronic controller
specifications include Type and Model.
8-142
8-143
HV Circuit Breaker
8.16 HV Circuit Breaker

The High Voltage Circuit Breaker (HVCB) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory
system. ANSI or IEC libraries are available, depending upon which standard is selected for each
individual circuit breaker. The library header is defined by Standard and Manufacturer information.
You can have unlimited manufacturers within the library for each standard. Unlimited model/classes are
available within each manufacturer, as shown below.
Header
Record
High Voltage Circuit Breaker

Library
ANSI
Manufacturer
IEC
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model / Class
Model / Class
Model / Class
Manufacturer
Model / Class
High voltage circuit breaker headers consist of Standard and Manufacturer information. You can have
unlimited Models/Classes for each header.
8.16.1 HV Circuit Breaker Library Selector
The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library allows you to add new high voltage circuit breaker models or
select existing high voltage circuit breaker models and edit, copy or delete them. To edit a high voltage
circuit breaker model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete
a high voltage circuit breaker model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model. ETAP will
display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting the selected model.
8-144
HV Circuit Breaker
Add Manufacturer
Select this option to enter the name of the manufacturer for the element you wish to add to the library.
You can edit the properties of this new element by highlighting it from the list provided, and then
Copy Library
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name to a new name. This function is useful if
you wish to change specifications in the library entry while retaining the original data. The properties of
the new element can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, and then clicking on the Edit
button.
8.16.2 HV Circuit Breaker Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library data.
Each library record is a unique set of data for each high voltage circuit breaker header. Appending three
columns, Model+Continuous Amp+Max kV, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these
three columns is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination
of all three fields must contain at least one different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a
previous one, ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before overwriting the
record.
8-145
HV Circuit Breaker
ANSI Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or class name.
Std.
Select the circuit breaker standard as Sym or Tot rated from the list box.
Cy
Select the rated interrupting time for AC high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.
CB Cycle
2
3
5
8
Description
2-cycle AC high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle minimum contact parting time
3-cycle AC high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle minimum contact parting time
Continuous
Enter the continuous current rating of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from
the list.
Max. kV
Enter the rated maximum kV of the high voltage circuit breaker in rms kV or select the rating from the
list.
Rated Int.
Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA or
select the rating from the list box.
The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker is calculated by ETAP as:
(rated short-circuit current) X (rated maximum kV)/(operating kV)
The limit for this calculated interrupting capability is the rated maximum interrupting capability of the
circuit breaker. This value is then used to compare with the calculated short-circuit duty of the breaker.
Note: The value of the prefault voltage is not used in determining the interrupting capability, i.e., if Vf =
105%, the short-circuit duty is increased by 5%; however, the interrupting capability is not decreased by
5%.
C & L rms
Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in asymmetrical rms kA. This value is equal to
1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
8-146
HV Circuit Breaker
C & L Peak
Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in peak kA. This value is equal to 2.7 times the
maximum interrupting capability.
TRV T1
Enter the transient recovery voltage delay time in micro-seconds.
TRV T2
Enter the transient recovery voltage time to peak value in micro-seconds.
TRV R
Enter the transient recovery voltage rated increase rate in kV/micro-second.
IEC Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or class.
FPC Factor
Select the first-pole-to-clear factor of the high voltage circuit breaker from the list box.
Rated A
Enter the rated normal current of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from the
list.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the high voltage circuit breaker in kV or select the rating from the list.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the high voltage circuit breaker in kV.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the high voltage circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from
the list box. The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by the evaluation of the
maximum possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the high voltage circuit breaker in kA or select the rating from the
list.
AC Breaking
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA or select the rating from the list.
Min. Delay
Enter the minimum time delay, including the circuit breaker and relays, in seconds, or select the rating
from the list.
8-147
HV Circuit Breaker
8.16.3 Library Quick Pick - HV Circuit Breaker

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a HV Circuit Breaker in the oneline diagram, and then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a
compilation of all the information you have specified for this element.
Pick a high voltage circuit breaker from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate
manufacturer and specifications for the high voltage circuit breaker, which is associated with this project
file. The high voltage circuit breaker specifications include Model/Class, Test Std., Continuous Amp,
Cycle, Max kV, Rated Int. kA, Max Int. kA, C&L rms, and C&L Peak.
8-148
LV Circuit Breaker
8.17 LV Circuit Breaker

The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker (LVCB) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system.
The hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Standard, AC/DC, Type, Manufacturer,
Model, etc.) each containing a set of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The
library structure is as shown below.
Record
Header
LV Circuit Breaker Library

Library
ANSI
AC
IEC
DC*
Molded Case
Power CB
Insulated Case
Manuf.
Manuf.
Manuf.
Manuf.
Model
Model
Model
Model
Max. kV
Max. kV
Max. kV
Max. kV
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
Size
Size
Size
Size
Amps,
Short
circuit,
Trip
unit
* - DC breaker will have Max. Volts in the header.

The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker (LVCB) Library header consists of Standard AC/DC Breaker Type
Manufacturer Model Max. kV (Max. Volts for DC) Pole. You can have unlimited records of
breaker size for each header, for which ampere value, short-circuit data and trip units can be defined.
Low voltage circuit breaker types available are:
Molded Case
Power CB
Insulated Case
8-149
LV Circuit Breaker
8.17.1 LV Circuit Breaker Library Editor
The LV Circuit Breaker Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select
library from the menu bar and select LV Circuit Breaker. This will bring up the LVCB Editor. The
different fields in the Library Editor are described in this section.
Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the breaker type. The LV Circuit Breaker types
include Molded Case, Power and Insulated Case breakers.
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard.
AC/DC
Click on either the AC or DC option, to select AC / DC breakers.
8-150
LV Circuit Breaker
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for LVCB filtered by the selected standard, AC/DC and breaker type.
Lock
Link
Add
Select the breaker standard, AC/DC and the type, then click on the Add button to input the name of
LVCB manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Lock
8-151
LV Circuit Breaker
Edit Info
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Delete the selected LVCB manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
8-152
LV Circuit Breaker
Copy
You can copy a selected LVCB manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the
Model
Model
Lists all the Model-Max kV (Max V for DC)-Pole records for the selected LVCB manufacturer.
Lock
Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected LVCB model.
8-153
LV Circuit Breaker
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected LVCB model.
Trip Device Type

Displays the trip units that are defined for the selected LVCB model.
Application
Displays the application for the selected LVCB model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of LVCB model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model
Pole
Select the number of poles for the breaker from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
8-154
LV Circuit Breaker
Max kV (Max V for DC breaker)

Select from the list box or enter the Max kV (Max V for DC breaker) for the breaker. This field is a
Trip Device
Check the boxes to define the trip device types for the breaker. The trip device types are Thermal
Magnetic, Solid State, Motor Circuit Protector and Electro-Mechanical. The selection of trip devices
will define the type of trip device that the selected breaker will accept. This data is a required library
parameter.

Enter the model brand name and reference if available. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.

left blank.
Frame Type, Frame Size

Enter the frame type and size, for the breaker model. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.
Certification
Enter the certification standard (UL, IEC, etc.) for the model. This field is provided for reference only
and may be left blank.
Description
Application
Link
blank.
Lock
Edit Info
locked models.
8-155
LV Circuit Breaker
Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected LVCB model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
8-156
LV Circuit Breaker
Copy
Use this selection to copy the selected LVCB model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list
provided and then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be
copied to the user-specified model name.
Help
Open the Help topic for the LVCB Library.
Close
Close the LVCB Library Editor and save all changes.
Edit Short-Circuit Info

Click on the Edit Short-Circuit Info button to enter the short-circuit data for the low voltage breaker
model. The short-circuit parameters are different depending on breaker type, standard and if the breaker
is AC or DC.
You can Add, Edit and Delete the short-circuit data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you
ANSI Short-Circuit data (AC breaker)

When the ANSI standard is selected for AC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in kV
Short-circuit interrupting current in kA
Non-Instantaneous trip in kA
Close and Latch (C&L) current in kA
Short-time withstand current in kA
Withstand time Tkr in seconds
Test power factor in % or select from the list box
8-157
LV Circuit Breaker
Notes
Note: Non-Instantaneous trip, Close and Latch (C&L) current, Short-time withstand current, and
Withstand time Tkr are not utilized by ANSI short-circuit duty analysis for ANSI rated Molded case and
Insulated case circuit breaker types.
Check the Fused checkbox if the circuit breaker is integrally fused.
IEC Short-Circuit data (AC breaker)

When the IEC standard is selected for AC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in kV
Ultimate breaking capacity in kA (Icu)
Service breaking capacity in kA (Ics)
Making capacity in kA (Icm)
Short time withstand in kA (Icw)
Withstand time Tkr in seconds
Tripping time or delay in seconds
Notes
8-158
LV Circuit Breaker
ANSI Short-Circuit data (DC breaker)

When ANSI standard is selected for DC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in Volts

Short-circuit interrupting current in kA
Time constant in milliseconds
Notes
8-159
LV Circuit Breaker
IEC Short-Circuit data (DC breaker)

When IEC standard is selected for DC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in Volts

Ultimate breaking capacity in kA (Icu)
Service breaking capacity in kA (Ics)
Time constant in milliseconds
Notes
8-160
LV Circuit Breaker
Assign Trip Device

Select a circuit breaker model entry (Model, Max. Voltage, Pole), by highlighting it and clicking on the
Assign Trip Device button to enter available sizes for the circuit breaker model and assign the applicable
trip device for each size. The editor for entering the breaker sizes and assigning trip units is shown
below.
8-161
LV Circuit Breaker
Size
Enter available sizes for the circuit breaker model in amperes. This field is a required library parameter.
You can Add, Edit and Delete data using the Add and Delete buttons. Add Notes for the size, if required.
Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Trip Device
For a highlighted size, select the applicable trip device type and model (Thermal Magnetic, Solid state,
Motor Circuit Protector, Electro-Mechanical) to be assigned. Note: Trip device types are displayed in the
list box only if they are defined for the model.
Once the trip device type is selected, the Available section will display all the applicable trip units,
based on a search for identical breaker and trip device manufacturer and/or model. If no match between
the breaker and trip unit manufacturer and/or model is found, the Available section remains empty.
Check Show all to display all manufacturers and models for the selected trip device type.
Select the trip device Manufacturer Model ID from the Available section and click on the Assign
button (<<), to assign the selected trip unit to the breaker size. Once assigned, the trip unit Manufacturer
Model ID will be displayed on the Assigned to this CB section. Multiple trip unit IDs can be
selected for assignment by clicking on the IDs.
Trip units can be unassigned by selecting the Manufacturer Model ID of the trip device and clicking
on the Unassign button (>>).
Assignment and unassignment of trip devices to and from a locked size entry is allowed, since the circuit
breaker manufacturer may allow retrofits and modification of the trip device.
8-162
LV Circuit Breaker
Refer to the Trip Device Library section to learn more about low voltage trip device types and
specifications.
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a LV Circuit Breaker in the oneline diagram, then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a
compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
From this dialog box, pick a low voltage circuit breaker from the library. Select the appropriate
manufacturer and specifications for the low voltage circuit breaker which is associated with this project
file. The low voltage circuit breaker specifications include Model, Max kV, Pole number, Continuous
Amp, Rated kV, Interrupting kA, Test PF, and Fused/Unfused.
8-163
Trip Device Solid State
8.18 Solid State Trip Device Library

The Low Voltage Solid State Trip (LVSST) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory
system. The hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.)
each containing a set of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is
as shown below.
Record
Header
Low Voltage Solid State Trip
Library
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
Sensor ID
Sensor ID
Sensor ID
Manufacturer
Model
Sensor ID
Sensor, Plugs,
Long-Time,
Short-time,
Instantaneous,
Override,
Ground,
Maintenance Mode
The Low Voltage Solid State Trip (LVSST) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and Sensor
ID. For each header i.e. Manufacturer Model Sensor ID, you have a unique record consisting of the
Sensor, Plugs, Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, Override, Ground, and Maintenance Mode
settings.
8.18.1 Solid State Trip Device Library (LVSST) Editor

The Solid State Trip Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar.
Select library from the menu bar, and then select Trip Device and Solid State. This will bring up the
Solid State Trip Library Editor.
8-164
The fields of the Library Editor are described in this section.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists of all manufacturers for the LVSST device.
Lock
Link
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of LVSST manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
8-165
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of a new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided
and then clicking on Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited.
8-166
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Delete the selected LVSST manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by
highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The manufacturer will be
deleted from the list after confirmation.
Copy
Copy the selected LVSST manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select a manufacturer by
highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and parameters for
8-167
Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected LVSST manufacturer.
Lock
Reference
Displays cross-reference to another model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of the LVSST model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model
Reference
blank.
Description
Enter the Description, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Label
Select from the Pull-Down menu the model/sensor frame data.
8-168
Independent LT/ ST Band

This option is available for solid state trip library Model info page only. Check this option if the long
time band delay curve is capable of tripping faster than the available short-time band delay. This option
is un-checked by default which means the long-time delay curve stops at short-time pickup current
setting.
Link
blank.
Lock
Edit Info
locked models.
Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected LVSST model. Select a model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
8-169
Copy
Copy the selected LVSST model. Select a model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to user-specified
model name.
Help
Open the Help topic for the LVSST Library.
Close
Close the LVSST Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify the sensors and applicable plugs for the selected model, along with settings for
Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, Override, Ground trip, and Maintenance elements for each
sensor.
Note: The Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, Override, Ground, and Maintenance Mode tabs are
hidden for locked sensor entries.
8-170
The different fields in the Parameters page for entering data are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Rating
Add, edit, copy or delete sensors, rating plugs and units for the selected model.
Sensor ID
Enter a Sensor size identifier up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library parameter.
8-171
Sensor
Enter the ampere value for the Sensor ID. This field is a required library parameter.
Plug
Enter plugs, if available, separated by semicolons for the selected Sensor ID. If no plugs are available,
you can leave the field blank.
Unit
Select unit for plugs i.e. Amperes, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
Lock
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete sensors using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted but can be copied.
TCC ID
Enter the TCC curve ID for the selected Sensor ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Revision
Enter the revision date for the selected Sensor ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Notes
Enter notes for the selected Sensor ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Long Time
Enter the settings for Long-Time trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
8-172
Long Time (checkbox)

Check this box to indicate the Long-Time element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for long time pick up settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is LT Pickup.
LT Pickup
Discrete / Continuous
Select LT pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select the LT pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, or ST Pickup).
8-173
Discrete LT Pickup
Label
Enter a LT Pickup name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter a LT pickup value in the multiples column.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Enter minimum and maximum pickup tolerance in percent. Note: Minimum tolerance can be specified as
a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To model a pickup offset, the minimum
tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
Add
Add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Delete the selected pickup entry.
Continuous LT Pickup
8-174
Low
Enter the Low setting LT pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter the High setting LT pickup value in multiples.
8-175
Steps
Enter a LT pickup step value in multiples.
% Tolerance Min. / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum pickup tolerance as a percentage. Note: Minimum tolerance can be
specified as a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To model a pickup offset, the
minimum tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
LT Band
Label
Enter the label name tag for long time band settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is LT Band.
The following options are available to use when entering the long time band:
- Line (with Discrete and Continuous options)
- Curve (with Equation and Points options)
LT Band with Line Option

Add the long time band as a straight line without using an equation.
Select a LT band as discrete or continuous.
Discrete LT Band
Label
Enter a LT Band name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
8-176
Multiple
Enter a current value in the multiple column at which the LT band is defined.
Min. Clearing / Max. Clearing

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the LT band, at the current multiple, in seconds.
Add
Add a new discrete band.
Delete
Delete the selected band.
Track Pickup
Check this box to enable the LT band to track the LT pickup.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the slope value for LT band.
To calculate the slope in a Log-Log chart, find two points on the band and use the equation:
Slope =
LogY 1 LogY 2
LogX 1 LogX 2
8-177
Continuous LT Band
Multiple
Enter a pickup value in multiples at which the LT band is defined.
Calibration
Select the calibration reference for continuously adjustable LT band from the list box as Maximum,
Average or Mimimum. The calibration reference is set to Maximum by default. The calibrartion
reference for continuously adjustable LT Band is typically defined on the OEM TCC curve. For example,
Westhinghouse, Amptector I-A model has a continuously adjustable LT Band calibrated at 4, 12, 20, 28
and 36 seconds in reference to the Maximum LT Band curve.
Low (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Low band setting in seconds.
High (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the High band setting in seconds.
Steps
Enter the LT Band step value in seconds.
Track Pickup
Check to enable LT band to track the LT pickup.
8-178
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the slope value for LT band.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of the Long-Time Band
and the Short-Time pickup.
The smoothing radius is found by the equation below:
LT Band with Curve Option

Select the Equation or Points base option for the long time band curve that you need to model.
Equation
Name
Enter the long time band curve name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
8-179
Notes
Enter the notes for the long time band curve name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Add
Click to add the new curve name to the list.
Delete
Click to delete the selected curve name.
Edit
Click to open the equation curve editor window.
Copy
Click to copy the selected curve.
Paste
Click to paste the copied curve to the selected curve name.
Solid State Trip: TCC Curve - Equation Data
Equation
8-180
TD Time Dial
M Pickup Multiples
Current (Horizontal)
Enter the minimum and maximum current tolerance values in percent. The positive current tolerance
value shifts the equation curve band to the right and the negative current tolerance value shifts the curve
band to the left side.
Time (Vertical)
Enter the minimum and maximum time tolerance values in percent and /or in seconds. The positive time
tolerance value shifts the equation curve band to up side and the negative time tolerance value shifts the
curve band to down side. The time tolerance value entered in seconds adds up to the percent time
tolerance.
Time Dial (Band)

Check the box and enter the time dial range. You can enter the time dial (band) as continuous (i.e. Min,
Max, and Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) as individual settings time dial bands.
Label
Enter the label name tag for time dial (band) in this field up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag displays in LVCB editor next to the same field.

Definite
8-181
Solid State Trip: TCC Curve - Points

Select the Points option and click on Edit button to add the Long Time band by points.
8-182
Min/ Max Curve

Enter the curve points for the minimum and maximum clearing curves in these tables. Enter the time in
seconds and the current in multiples of the pickup multiplier unit. If you have the band curve points in
Excel format, you can copy and paste the data here in this list as well.

Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve is plotted as definite time curve beyond the last points entered in
this list.
8-183
Short-Time
Enter the settings for Short-Time trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
Short Time (checkbox)

Check the box to indicate the Short-Time element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for short time pick up settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is ST Pickup.
ST Pickup
Select a ST pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select a ST pickup multipler (i.e., Sensor, Rating Plug, etc.).
8-184
Discrete ST Pickup
Label
Enter a ST Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter a ST pickup value in the multiples column.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
This button allows you to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
This button allows you to delete a selected pickup entry.
Continuous ST Pickup
8-185
Low
Enter a Low setting ST pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter a High setting ST pickup value in multiples.
Steps
Enter an ST pickup step value in multiples.

ST Band
Label
Enter the label name tag for short time band settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is ST Band.
Following options are available to enter the short time band:
ST Band with Line Option

Select an ST band as discrete or continuous.
I^xt (checkbox)
Check the box to enable and enter settings for Ixt for the Short-time band. If the Ixt is checked, then the Ixt
related fields are displayed.
Discrete ST Band
8-186
Label
Enter a ST Band name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
(I^x)t Multiples
Enter the current value in multiples at which the Ixt band is defined.
(I^x)t Type
Select Ixt band type for each band as IN, OUT or IN/OUT.
Min. (I^x)t Clearing / Max. (I^x)t Clearing

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Ixt band, at the current multiple, in seconds.
Min / Max (I^x)t Slope

Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing short time band (only if the I^xt option is checked).
Add
Click this button to add a new discrete band.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected band.
Track Pickup
Check the box to enable ST band to track the ST pickup.
Continuous ST Band
Low
Enter the low value of clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
8-187
High
Enter the high value of clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
Steps
Enter the ST horizontal Band step value in seconds.
Tolerance
Enter the minimum and maximum time band tolerances in percent. These tolerances apply from Low to
High settings.
I^2t Multiples
Enter the current value in multiples at which the I2t band is defined.
I^2t Min / Max Clearing time

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time, at current multiple, in seconds.
Type
Select the Short Time band type can be I^2t as IN or IN/OUT.
Slope
Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing short time band (only if the I^2t option is checked).
Track Pickup
Smoothing Radius
For the Line band option, enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection
of the Short-Time Band and the Short-Time pickup.
ST Band with Curve Option

Apply the same method used when adding the long time band as a curve, to adding a short time band with
a curve. See the section for LT Band with Curve Option for more details on adding this section of the
TCC curve.
8-188
Instantaneous
Enter the settings for the Instantaneous trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
Instantaneous (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate the Instantaneous element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for instantaneous pick up in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Inst. Pickup
Select Instantaneous pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select Instantaneous pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, etc.)
8-189
Discrete Instantaneous Pickup
Label
Enter an Instantaneous pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Click this button to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected pickup entry.
8-190
Continuous Instantaneous Pickup
Low
Enter the Low setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter the High setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
Steps
Enter the Instantaneous pickup step value in multiples.

Band
Following options are available to model the instantaneous band:
- Definite
- Points
Definite
Clearing Time
Enter the clearing time value in seconds.
8-191
Opening Time
Enter the opening time value in seconds.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the clearing time Band for Instantaneous.
Inst. Band Points

The instantaneous opening and clearing band points can be entered in amperes or multiples.
Current Multiplier
This filed is available if the Amperes option is selected and track pickup option is unchecked.
The value entered in this filed applies to the Amperes current data entered to the instantaneous band
points table.
Track Pickup
Check this option if instantaneous band is shifted as instantaneous pickup changes.
Open - Clearing Curve

Click on Opening-Clearing Curve button to open the Inst. band points editor window:
8-192
Opening Curve/Clearing Curve

Enter the opening and clearing value time in seconds and current (in amperes or multiples of
instantaneous pickup). Data points from excel can be copied and pasted into this table.
Override
Enter the settings for the Instantaneous override trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
8-193
Override (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate the Override element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Multiplier
Select the Override pickup multipler (iSensor, Rating Plug, Amps and CB Withstand).
If the CB Withstand option is selected, then override pickup sees the LVCB editor, Rating page and
applies the ST Withstand kA value as base for the Override pickup current.
Override
Enter the Instantaneous override value pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating
plug and in amperes when the multiplier is Amps.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Clearing Time
Enter the clearing time value in seconds.
8-194
Opening Time
Enter the opening time value in seconds.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the clearing time Band for Override.
Ground
Enter the settings for the Ground trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
Ground (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate the Ground element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for ground pick up in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag displays in LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Ground Pickup
8-195
Allow Pickup above 1200 Amps (checkbox)

Check the box to allow the Ground pickup ampere value to exceed 1200 Amps. If unchecked, the Ground
pickup will be limited to 1200 Amps.
Ground Pickup
Select the Ground pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select the Ground pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, and Amps).
Discrete Ground Pickup
Label
Enter a Ground Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the Ground pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in amperes
when the multiplier is Amps.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Delete the selected pickup entry.
8-196
Continuous Ground Pickup
Low
Enter the low Ground pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in
amperes when the multiplier is Amps.
High
Enter the high Ground pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in
Steps
Enter the Ground pickup step value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in

Ground Band
Label
Enter the label name tag for ground band in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Ground Band
Following options are available to enter the ground band:
8-197
Ground Band with Line Option

For the Ground band select either the Discrete or Continuous button.
I^xt (checkbox)
Check the box to enable and enter settings for Ixt for Ground band. If the Ixt is checked, then the Ixt
related fields are displayed.
8-198
Discrete Ground Band
Label
Enter a Ground Band name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Ground horizontal band in seconds.
I^xt Multiples / Amps

Enter the current value at which the Ixt band is defined, in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor /
Rating plug and in amperes when the multiplier is Amps.
(I^x)t Type
Select Ixt band type for each band as IN, OUT or IN/OUT.
Min. (I^x)t Clearing / Max. (I^x)t Clearing

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Ixt band, at the current value in seconds.
Min / Max (I^x)t Slope

Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing ground band (only if the I^xt option is checked).
Add
Delete
Track Pickup
Check the box to enable Ground band to track the Ground pickup.
8-199
Continuous Ground Band
Low
Enter low value of clearing time for the Ground horizontal band in seconds.
High
Enter high value of clearing time for the Ground horizontal band in seconds.
Steps
Enter the Ground horizontal band step value in seconds.
I^xt Multiples / Amps

Enter the current value at which the Ixt band is defined, in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor /
Rating plug and in amperes when the multiplier is Amps.
I^xt Min / Max Clearing time

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time, at current value, in seconds.
Track Pickup
Check the box to enable the Ground band to track the Ground pickup.
Type
Select the Ground band type can be I^xt as IN or IN/OUT.
Slope
Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing ground band (only if the I^xt option is checked).
8-200
Ground Band with Curve Option

Apply the same method used when adding the long time band as a curve, to adding a ground band with a
curve. See the section for LT Band with Curve Option for more details on adding this section of the TCC
curve.
Maintenance Mode
Enter the settings of the Maintenance Mode for the selected Sensor ID.
Maintenance Mode (checkbox)

Check the box to indicate the Maintenance Mode is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Phase (Maintenance)
Phase
Check the box to indicate the Phase Setting for the Maintenance Model will display for the selected
Sensor ID.
8-201
Label
Enter the label name tag for Phase Maintenance Mode in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Maint Phase
Multiplier
Select the phase pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, LT Pickup, and ST Pickup).
Label
Enter a Phase pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters for the Maintenance Mode.
Multiples
Enter the phase value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Add a new entry.
Delete
Delete the selected entry.
Clearing Time
Enter the Phase clearing time value in seconds.
Opening Time
Enter the Phase opening time value in seconds.
Ground (Maintenace)
Ground
Check the box to indicate the Ground Setting for the Maintenance Model will display for the selected
Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for Ground Maintenance Mode in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Maint
Ground
Multiplier
Select the Maintenance Mode pickup base multipler.
Label
Enter a Ground pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters for the Maintenance Mode.
8-202
Multiples
Enter the Ground value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Add a new entry.
Delete
Delete the selected entry.
Clearing Time
Enter the Ground clearing time value in seconds.
Opening Time
Enter the Ground opening time value in seconds.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the opening and clearing band corners.
Help
Click on the Help button to open the Help topic for the Parameters page.
OK
Click on the OK button to close the Parameters window and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the Parameters window and discard all changes.
8-203
Trip Device Thermal Magnetic
8.19 Thermal Magnetic Trip Library

The Thermal Magnetic Trip (TM) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The
hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.) each
containing a set of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is as
shown below.
Record
Header
Thermal Magnetic Trip
Library
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
TM ID
TM ID
TM ID
Manufacturer
Model
TM ID
Amps,
Thermal,
Magnetic
settings
The Thermal Magnetic Trip (TM) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and TM ID. For each
header i.e. Manufacturer Model TM ID, ETAP provides you with a unique record consisting of TM
Amps, Thermal and Magnetic settings.
8-204
8.19.1 Thermal Magnetic Trip Library (TM) Editor

The Thermal Magnetic Trip Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar, then select Trip Device and Thermal Magnetic. This will bring up
the Thermal Magnetic Trip Library Editor.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for the TM device.
Lock
Link
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of TM manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
8-205
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
8-206
Edit Info
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Clicking the Delete button allows you to delete a selected TM manufacturer and all models provided by
that manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the
Delete button. The manufacturer will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
8-207
Copy
Clicking this button allows you to copy a selected TM manufacturer and all models provided by this
manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the
Copy button. All models for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer
name.
Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected TM manufacturer.
Lock
Link
Displays the model web link or URL address.
8-208
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of the TM model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model
Reference
blank.
Link
blank.
Lock
Edit Info
for locked models.
8-209
Delete Model
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected TM model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list
provided and then click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm
the action.
8-210
Copy
Click this box to copy a selected TM model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided
and then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the
model name that you specify.
Help
Clicking this button opens the Help topic for the TM Library.
Close
Clicking this button closes the TM Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify the sizes (TM ID) available for the selected model, along with settings for Thermal
and Magnetic trip elements for each size.
Note: For locked TM ID entries, the Thermal and Magnetic tabs are hidden.
8-211
The different fields in the Parameters page for entering data are described below.
Manufacturer
This field displays the selected manufacturer name.
Model
This field displays the selected model name.
Rating
This area allows you to add, edit, copy or delete sizes for the selected model.
TM ID
Enter a TM size identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library parameter.
8-212
Amps
Enter the ampere value for the TM ID. This field is a required library parameter.
Lock
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete TM IDs using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
Amperes / Multiples
Select Amperes or Multiples to enter the Thermal and Magnetic settings in Amperes or Multiples
respectively for the selected TM ID.
TCC ID, Revision

This field allows you to enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the selected TM ID. This field is
provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Notes
This field allows you to enter notes for the selected TM ID. This field is provided for reference only and
may be left blank.
8-213
Thermal
Enter the settings for Thermal trip element for the selected TM ID.
Thermal (checkbox)
Check this box to indicate the Thermal element is available for the selected TM ID.
Temp Shift
Click on the Temp Shift button to enter the shift factor for the thermal curve with respect to temperature
for the selected TM ID. Enter the temperature in degree Celsius and corresponding shift factor. You can
Add, Edit, and Delete shift factors using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or
deleted.
Click on Help to open the Help topic for temperature shift factors. Click on OK to close the Temp. Shift
Factor Editor and save all changes. Click on Cancel to close the Temp. Shift Factor Editor and discard
all changes.
8-214
Time, Mult/Amp Min (Minimum clearing curve)

Enter the time for thermal minimum clearing curve in seconds for the selected TM ID. Enter the
corresponding current in amperes or multiples depending on the unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and
Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Time, Mult/Amp Max (Maximum clearing curve)

Enter the time for thermal maximum clearing curve in seconds for the selected TM ID. Enter the
corresponding current in amperes or multiples depending on the unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and
Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Adjustable (checkbox)
Check the box to enable and enter Adjustable thermal trip.
% Trip
Enter the Adjustable thermal trip as a percentage. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the points using the
Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Smoothing radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of thermal and magnetic.
Magnetic
Enter the settings for Magnetic trip element for the selected TM ID. The magnetic trip element settings
include magnetic (instantaneous) trip setting and clearing time band.
The Magnetic trip setting can be defined as one of the following:
Fixed Magnetic
Discrete Adjustable Magnetic
Continuous Adjustable magnetic
The Clearing time band can be defined as one of the following:
8-215
Clearing time band defined by Slope

Clearing time band defined by Points
Magnetic (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate whether the Magnetic element is available for the selected TM ID.
Fixed / Discrete adjustable / Continuous Adjustable

Select one of the three buttons to define the magnetic trip as Fixed / Discrete Adjustable / Continuous
Adjustable for the selected TM ID.
Fixed Magnetic
Trip
Enter the minimum and maximum trip for the magnetic in amperes or multiples depending on the unit
selected.
Discrete Adjustable
8-216
Label
Enter a discrete magnetic trip identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the discrete magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.
% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum trip tolerance in percent. Note: minimum tolerance can be specified as
a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To model a pickup offset, the minimum
tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
Add
Click on this button to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected pickup entry.
Continuous Adjustable
Low
Enter the low continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
High
Enter the high continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum tolerance values for the low and high magnetic trip in percent. Note:
Minimum tolerance can be specified as a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To
model a pickup offset, the minimum tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
8-217
Band Define by Slope

Select a button to define the magnetic clearing time band using either slope or slope points (given by time
and current).
Time
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the time in seconds for slope point.
Current
Enter the current value for the slope point in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the slope value.
Band Define by Points

Select a button to define the magnetic opening time and clearing time band using either slope or points
(given by time and current).
Select the Points option and click on the Opening - Clearing curve button to define the opening / clearing
time curves by points. Enter the time in seconds and the current in multiples or amperes depending on the
current unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and Delete points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked
entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Click on Help to open the Help topic for Opening / Clearing curves. Click on OK to close the Opening
Clearing Curve Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the Opening Clearing Curve
Editor, discarding all changes.
8-218
Smoothing radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of magnetic trip and the
clearing time band. Note: The smoothing radius will not be considered when the band is defined by
points.
GFI/RCD
The Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) or Residual Current Device (RCD) is considered as additional
protection according to BS 7671:2008 section 415. Other names this feature is known by is Ground Fault
Current Interrupter (GFCI) and Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB). The GFI library data in ETAP
is utilized for cable protection only and has no application for Star TCC or Arc Flash.
Pickup
Click on Add and enter the current pickup setting in mA. Enter minimum and maximum trip current
tolerance in percent. Note that minimum tolerance can be specified as a negative value for tolerance to
the left of pickup multiples.
Delay
Click on Add and enter the time delay value in seconds. Enter minimum clearing and maximum clearing
time delay setting in seconds. Note that the Smoothing Radius Min and Max does not apply for GFI.
Help
OK
Cancel
8-219
Trip Device Electro-Mechanical
8.20 Electro-Mechanical Trip Device Library

The Electro-Mechanical trip device (EM) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system.
The hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.) each
shown below.
Record
Header
Electro-Mechanical Trip
Library
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
EM ID
EM ID
EM ID
Manufacturer
Model
EM ID
Amps,
Long-Time,
Short-time,
Instantaneous,
settings
The Electro-Mechanical (EM) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and EM ID. For each
header i.e. Manufacturer Model EM ID, you have a unique record consisting of EM Amps, LongTime, Short-Time, and Instantaneous settings.
8.20.1 Electro-mechanical Trip Device Library (EM) Editor

The Electro-Mechanical Trip Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar, then select Trip Device and Electro-Mechanical. This will bring up
the Electro-Mechanical Trip Library Editor.
8-220
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for the EM device.
Lock
Reference
This field lists a manufacturer reference, if available. If none is available this field is blank.
Link
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of EM manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
8-221
Manufacturer
Use this field to enter the manufacturer name you wish to add to the library. This field is a required
library parameter.
Reference
Use this field to enter the reference, if available for the manufacturer. This field is provided for reference
only and may be left blank.
Link
Use this field to enter the manufacturer web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference
only and may be left blank
Lock
Delete
Use this button to delete a selected EM manufacturer and all models provided by this manufacturer.
Select a manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
manufacturer will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
8-222
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of a new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided
and then clicking on the Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited.
Copy
Click this button to copy a selected EM manufacturer and all models for this manufacturer. Select a
8-223
Model
Model
This table lists all models for the selected EM manufacturer.
Lock
Reference
Displays reference information for the selected model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of the EM model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model
Reference
blank.
Link
blank.
8-224
Lock
Delete
Select this button to delete selected EM model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided
and then click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
Edit Info
locked models.
8-225
Copy
Copy selected EM model. Select model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the
Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to user-specified model
name.
Help
Open the Help file for the EM Library.
Close
Close the EM Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify the EM ID available for the selected model, along with settings for Long-Time,
Short-Time and Instantaneous for each EM ID.
Note: For locked EM ID entries, the Long-Time, Short-Time, and Instantaneous settings are hidden.
8-226
The fields of the Parameters page that allow you to enter data are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Rating
Add, edit, copy or delete EM ID for the selected model.
8-227
EM ID
Enter an EM size identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Amps
Enter the ampere value for the selected EM ID.
Lock
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete EM IDs using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
TCC ID, Revision

Enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the selected EM ID. This field is provided for reference
Notes
Enter notes for the selected EM ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Long Time
Enter the settings for Long-Time trip element for the selected EM ID.
8-228
Long Time (checkbox)

Check this box to indicate the Long-Time element is available for the selected EM ID.
LT Pickup
Define the LT pickup as discrete or continuous by clicking on the appropriate button.
Multiplier
Select a LT pickup multipler (i.e. Trip, ST Pickup and Inst. Pickup) from the drop-down list.
8-229
Discrete LT Pickup
Label
Enter a LT Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the LT pickup value in multiples.
Add
Delete
Continuous LT Pickup
Low
Enter a Low setting LT pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter a High setting LT pickup value in multiples.
8-230
Steps
Enter a LT pickup step value in multiples.
LT Band
Label
Enter a LT Band name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Add
Delete
Curve
Click on the Points button to enter the time and current points for LT Band.
8-231
Minimum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band minimum clearing curve. You can Add,
Edit, and Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Maximum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band maximum clearing curve. You can Add,
Click on Help to open the Help topic for LT Band curve. Click on OK to close the LT Band Curve
Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the LT Band Curve Editor, discarding all changes.
Short-Time
Enter the settings for Short-Time trip element for the selected EM ID.
Short Time (checkbox)

Check this box to indicate the Short-Time element is available for the selected EM ID.
8-232
ST Pickup
Select a ST pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select a ST pickup multipler (i.e. Trip, LT Pickup and Inst. Pickup).
Discrete ST Pickup
Label
Enter a ST Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter a ST pickup value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Use this button to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Use this button to delete the selected pickup entry.
8-233
Continuous ST Pickup
Low
Enter the Low setting ST pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter the High setting ST pickup value in multiples.
Steps
Enter a ST pickup step value in multiples.

ST Band
Select one of the two buttons to define the ST band as discrete or continuous.
Discrete ST Band
Horizontal / Curve
Choose one of the buttons to define the discrete ST band as a horizontal band or as a curve by points.
Discrete Horizontal
Define a ST band as a discrete horizontal band.
8-234
Band

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
Add
Delete
Discrete Curve
Define a ST band as a curve by points.
Band
Curve
Click on the Points button to enter time and current points for ST Band.
8-235
Minimum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band minimum clearing curve. You can Add,
Maximum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band maximum clearing curve. You can Add,
Click on Help to open the Help topic for LT Band curve. Click on OK to close the LT Band Curve
Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the LT Band Curve Editor, discarding all changes
Add
Delete
8-236
Continuous ST Band
Low (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Low band setting in seconds.
High (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the High band setting in seconds.
Steps
Enter a ST Band step value in seconds in this field.
Track Pickup
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of the Short-Time Band
and the Instantaneous.
Instantaneous
Enter the settings for the Instantaneous trip element for the selected EM ID.
8-237
Instantaneous (check box)

Check the box to indicate the Instantaneous element is available for the selected EM ID.
Click on the appropriate button to define Instantaneous pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select the Instantaneous pickup multipler (i.e. Trip, LT Pickup and ST Pickup) from the drop-down list.
8-238
Discrete Instantaneous Pickup
Label
Enter an Instantaneous Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter an Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Enter a minimum and maximum pickup tolerance as a percentage. Note: Minimum tolerance can be
Add
Delete
Continuous Instantaneous Pickup
8-239
Low
Enter the Low setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples in this field.
High
Enter the High setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples in this field.
Steps
Enter the Instantaneous pickup step value in multiples in this field.

Band
Define the magnetic clearing time band using slope and slope point (given by time and current).
Current
Enter the current value for the slope point in multiples in this field.
Max Clearing Time

Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the time in seconds for slope point.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the slope value.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the clearing time Band for Instantaneous
Pickup.
8-240
Trip Device Motor Circuit Protector
8.21 Motor Circuit Protector Library

The Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The
hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.) each
shown below.
Record
Header
Motor Circuit Protector Trip
Library
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
MCP ID
MCP ID
MCP ID
Manufacturer
Model
MCP ID
Amps,
Magnetic
settings
The Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and MCP ID. For
each header i.e. Manufacturer Model MCP ID, you have a unique record consisting of MCP Amps,
and Magnetic settings.
8.21.1 Motor Circuit Protector Library (MCP) Editor

The Motor Circuit Protector Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar, then select Trip Device and Motor Circuit Protector. This will
bring up the Motor Circuit Protector Trip Library Editor.
8-241
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
This field lists all manufacturers for the MCP device.
Lock
Link
Displays the manufacturer web link and URL address.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of a MCP manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
8-242
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
Edit Info
8-243
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected MCP manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it in the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The manufacturer
will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
Copy
Click this button to copy a selected MCP manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it in the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All
models and parameters for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer
name.
8-244
Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected MCP manufacturer.
Lock
Link
Displays a model web link or URL address.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the MCP model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model
Reference
blank.
Link
blank.
8-245
Lock
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing model by highlighting it in the list provided and then
for locked models.
Delete Model
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected MCP model. Select the model by highlighting it in the list
provided and then click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm
the action.
8-246
Copy
Click this button to copy the selected MCP model. Select the model by highlighting it in the list provided
and then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to
user-specified model name.
Help
Click this button to open the Help topic for the MCP Library.
Close
Clicking this button will close MCP Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify the sizes (MCP ID) available for the selected model, along with Magnetic settings
for each size.
Note: The Magnetic tab is hidden for locked MCP ID entries.
8-247
The fields for entering data on the Parameters page are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Rating
Use this scrollable list to add, edit, copy or delete MCP sizes for the selected model.
MCP ID
Enter a MCP size identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
8-248
Amps
Enter the ampere value for the MCP ID. This field is a required library parameter.
Lock
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete MCP IDs using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
TCC ID, Revision

Enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the selected MCP ID. This field is provided for reference
Notes
Use this field to enter notes for the selected MCP ID. This field is provided for reference only and may
be left blank.
Magnetic
Enter the settings for Magnetic trip element for the selected MCP ID. The magnetic trip element settings
include magnetic (instantaneous) trip setting and clearing time band.
The Magnetic trip setting can be defined as one of the following:

Continuous Adjustable magnetic
The Clearing time band can be defined as one of the following:
Clearing time band defined by Slope

Clearing time band defined by Points
Magnetic (checkbox)
Check to indicate the Magnetic element is available for the selected MCP ID.
Discrete adjustable / Continuous Adjustable

Select Magnetic trip as Discrete adjustable / Continuous Adjustable, for the selected MCP ID.
Amperes / Multiples
Select Amperes or Multiples to enter the Magnetic trip settings in Amperes or Multiples respectively for
the selected MCP ID.
8-249
Discrete Adjustable
Label
Enter a discrete magnetic trip identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters in this field.
Multiples
Enter a discrete magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.
% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum trip tolerance as a percentage. Note: Minimum tolerance can be
Add
Delete
8-250
Low
Enter the low continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
High
Enter the high continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum tolerance values for the low and high magnetic trip as a percentage.
Note: Minimum tolerance can be specified as a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup
multiples. To model a pickup offset, the minimum tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
Band Define by Slope

Define the magnetic clearing time band using slope and slope point (given by time and current).
Time
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the time in seconds for slope point.
Current
Enter a current value for the slope point in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.
8-251
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the slope value.
Band Define by Points

Define the magnetic opening time and clearing time band using points (given by time and current).
Select the Points option and click on the Opening - Clearing Curve button to define the opening / clearing
time curves by points. Enter the time in seconds and the current in multiples or amperes depending on the
current unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and Delete points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked
entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Click on the Help button to open the Help topic for Opening / Clearing Curves. Click on OK to close the
Opening Clearing Curve Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the Opening Clearing
Curve Editor, discarding all changes.
Smoothing radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of magnetic trip and the
clearing time band. Note: The smoothing radius will not be considered when the band is defined by
points.
Help
OK
Cancel
8-252
Library Quick Pick - Trip Device

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a LV Circuit Breaker in the oneline diagram, then clicking on the Library button in the editor on the Trip Device tab. The Library Quick
From this dialog box, pick a trip device from the library. Select the appropriate type, manufacturer,
model, and rating for the trip device which is associated with this project file.
Note: You may also select a trip device from the low voltage circuit breaker Quick Pick page, which is
assigned to the selected low voltage circuit breaker.
8-253
8-254
Overload Heater
8.22 Overload Heater Library

The Overload Heater (OLH) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The
hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is as shown below.
Header
Record
Overload Heater Library

Library
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
Model
Heater ID
Heater ID
Heater ID
Heater ID
Starter
Starter
Starter
Starter
Application
Application
Application
Application
Type
Type
Type
Type
Curve,
Trip
Amps,
Ohms
settings
The Overload Heater (OLH) Library header consists of Manufacturer and Model. For each header i.e.,
Manufacturer Model, you can have unlimited records consisting of Heater ID Starter Type
Application Type. Each record has Curve, Trip Amps and Resistance settings.
8.22.1 Overload Heater Library (OLH) Editor

The Overload Heater (OLH) Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar and select Overload Heater. This will bring up the Overload Heater
Library Editor.
8-255
Overload Heater
The fields of the library editor are described in this section.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
This field lists all manufacturers for the OLH device.
Lock
Link
This field displays the manufacturer web link or URL address.
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of the OLH manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
8-256
Overload Heater
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
8-257
Overload Heater
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it in the list provided and
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected OLH manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
manufacturer will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
8-258
Overload Heater
Copy
Click this button to copy the selected OLH manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All
models and parameters for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer
name.
Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected OLH manufacturer.
Lock
Link
This field displays the model web link or URL address, if one is available.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the OLH model you wish to add to the library.
8-259
Overload Heater
Manufacturer
This field displays manufacturer name.
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library in this field, which is a required library parameter.
Reference
blank.
Brand Name
Enter the Brand Name, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Issue Date
Enter the Issue Date, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Description
Enter a description for the model.
Application
Enter the application of the model.
Type
Select a type from the drop-down list, or enter a type for the model.
8-260
Overload Heater
Link
blank.
Lock
Edit Info
locked models.
Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected OLH model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
8-261
Overload Heater
Copy
Copy the selected OLH model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the user-specified
model name.
Help
Clicking this button opens the Help topic for the OLH Library.
Close
Clicking this button closes OLH Library Editor and saves all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify available records i.e. Heater ID Starter Type Application Type for the
8-262
Overload Heater
selected model, along with settings for the Curve type, Amp range and Ohm range for each record. The
curves applicable for the selected OLH model can be defined in the Curve Type section.
Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted, but can be copied, if the copy-paste tool is available.
The fields for entering data on the Parameters page are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Curve Type
This frame allows you to add, edit, copy or delete curve types for the selected model.
8-263
Overload Heater
Name
Enter a name for the curve of up to 12 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
Rated Temp
Enter the rated temperature value in degrees Celsius. This field is a required library parameter.
Note
You can use this field to enter notes for the selected curve type. This field is provided for reference only
and may be left blank.
Lock
TCC
Click on the Points button to define the hot start / cold start curves by points (given by time and current)
and temperature shift factors. The TCC points are hidden for locked entries.
8-264
Overload Heater
Cold Start (Maximum Curve) Time, Multiples

Select a value from the scrollable list or enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for the cold
start curve. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons.
Hot Start (Maximum Curve) Time, Multiples

Select a value from the scrollable list or enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for the hot
start curve. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons.
Ambient Temperature Shift

Enter the temperature in degrees Celsius and a corresponding shift factor, to define the curve shift factor
with respect to temperature. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the temperature shift factors using the Add
and Delete buttons.
R Characteristic
Select the format for defining the resistance of heater units. You can choose to define the resistance as a
nominal value with tolerance in percent or enter the minimum and maximum values (range) for the
8-265
Overload Heater
resistance. Note: If you enter the resistance as nominal value with % tolerance the Min and Max R values
will be calculated and vice versa.
Trip Amp
Click on the appropriate button to define the trip amperes for the selected OLH model as fixed or
adjustable.
Parameters
Clicking the Parameters button allows you to enter new parameters for each Heater ID Starter Type
Application Type record for the selected OLH model. You can also Add, Edit and Delete the shortcircuit data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and rightclick to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted, but can be
copied. The parameter categories are described below.
Heater ID
Double-click on this field to enter a heater unit identification number of up to 25 alphanumeric
characters. This field is a required library parameter.
Starter
Double-click on this field to enter the starter types applicable to the heater unit in this field. This is an
essential field; however it can be left blank if information is not available.
App.
Double-click on this field to enter the application for the heater unit. This is an essential field; however it
can be left blank if information is not available.
8-266
Overload Heater
Type
Define if the heater unit is an In-Line or CT type by selecting from the drop-down list. This field is a
Min / Max Amp

Enter the minimum and maximum ampere values (ampere range) for the heater unit by double-clicking in
these fields. These are essential fields; however they can be left blank if information is not available.
Trip Amp
Double-click to enter the trip current value for the heater unit in this field. This is an essential field;
however it can be left blank if information is not available.
Min R / Max R (Nom. R / % Tol.)

Double-click to define the resistance as a nominal value with tolerance in percent or enter the minimum
and maximum values (range) for the resistance. Note: If you enter the resistance as nominal value with %
tolerance the Min and Max R values will be calculated and vice versa. This is an essential field; however
it can be left blank if information is not available.
Curve
Select the curve applicable to the heater unit from the drop-down list. Note: The curves are displayed in
the list when defined in the Curve Type section. This field is a required library parameter.
Lock
Notes
You can enter notes for the selected heater unit in this field, which is provided for reference only and
may be left blank.
8-267
Harmonic
8.23 Harmonic Library

The Harmonic Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is
defined by Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers (manufacturers)
within the library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as shown below.
Depending upon which harmonic type is selected, both Current and Voltage Sources are available. The
library header is defined by harmonic type and manufacturer information. You can have unlimited
manufacturers within the library for each type. Unlimited models/classes are available within each
8.23.1 Harmonic Library Selector

The Harmonic Library allows you to add new harmonic library headers or select existing harmonic
library headers to edit, copy, or delete. Harmonic Library headers are used to indicate the type,
manufacturer, and model of a harmonic source. To edit a Harmonic Library, double-click on the item or
click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a harmonic model, click on the Delete button after
highlighting it. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected harmonic model.
8-268
Harmonic
8-269
Harmonic
Add
This dialog box is used to add a new Harmonic Library header.
Copy
This dialog box is used to copy an existing Harmonic Library header.
8-270
Harmonic
8.23.2 Harmonic Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit Harmonic Library data.
Harmonic Order
This column is pre-numbered from the 2nd to the 73rd order, based on the applicable harmonic orders.
Mag.
Double-click on the cells in this column to enter the percent magnitude of harmonic current or voltage
based on the selected harmonic type. This value is based on the fundamental current/voltage.
Angle
Double-click on the cells in this column to enter the harmonic current or voltage phase angles in degrees.
8-271
Harmonic
8.23.3 Library Quick Pick - Harmonic

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed via the Library button, which is located in the editor of
elements containing a Harmonic page.
From this dialog box, select a harmonic type, manufacturer, and model from the Harmonic Library. For a
selected harmonic header, the Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to pick a harmonic source model
from the list of models in the library.
The harmonic spectrum for Transformer Magnetizing current is based on no load current or core loss
which is normally a few percent of full load amps of transformer. Since the no load current is not
available in transformer editor for now then the harmonic magnitude needs to be reduced by the ratio of
no load current over full load current of transformer.
8-272
Interrupting Cost
8.24 Interruption Cost Library

The Interrupting Cost Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header
displays a list of all the interrupting cost load sector headers. You may have an unlimited number of
headers (load sectors) within the library. You may only have one set of interrupting cost data per load
sector as shown below.
8.24.1 Interruption Cost Library Selector

The Interrupting Cost Library Selector window provides you with several features that facilitate the
entering and removing of data. The user may add an unlimited number of load sectors, edit, copy, and
delete them. To edit an existing load sector, double-click or highlight and press edit.
Add
The Interrupting Cost Library Add dialog box is used to add a new interrupting cost load sector to the
library header.
8-273
Interrupting Cost
Copy
The Interrupting Cost Library Copy dialog box is used to duplicate any desired load sector. The dialog
box will ask you to enter a new name since the load sector names must be uniquely assigned.
8-274
Interrupting Cost
8.24.2 Interruption Cost Library Editor

The Interrupting Cost Library Editor is designed as a spreadsheet for the purpose of entering or removing
interrupting cost data. The user may add insert or delete rows at will.
Minute
This column has been pre-labeled and is used to specify the time in minutes for each Interrupting Cost
Data Point.
Cost ($/kW)
This column has been pre-labeled and is used to enter the Interrupting Cost in dollars per kilowatt for
each minute time interval.
8.24.3 Interruption Cost Library Load Sector Drop-Down List

Interrupting Cost Load Sectors are not selected from a Library Quick Pick dialog box. The Interrupting
Cost Load Sectors are selected from the element editors' reliability page. All AC loads have a drop-down
list that allows the user to select the desired load sector.
8-275
Reliability Library
8.25 Reliability Library

The Reliability Library is setup as a file directory system. The first library header is the ETAP element
for which reliability data is available, for example 2-winding transformers or buses. The first subdivision after the kind of element is the Source of the Reliability Data (IEEE, industrial maintenance
data, etc, etc). The next subdivision is the device type (in the case of 2-winding transformers the classes
would be dry or liquid type). After the device type the Reliability Data is sorted according to different
classes (kV, kVA ratings, etc).
The following diagram illustrates the way the Reliability Library is organized.
8.25.1 Reliability Library Selector

The Reliability Library Selector window allows the user to add or modify the contents of the Reliability
Library. From this window the user may edit, add, copy, or remove any set of reliability data for all the
different ETAP elements. Double-clicking on a header or class brings up the Add or Edit Reliability
Data dialog boxes.
8-276
Reliability Library
Add
The Add dialog box is used to insert a new set of Reliability Data for any given ETAP element. Pressing
the add button on the Reliability Library Selector brings up the Add dialog window, which prompts you
for new Source and Class names.
Copy
The Copy dialog window allows you to copy any set of Reliability Library Data for any given element.
The dialog window prompts the user for a new ETAP Element, Source, and Class name for the duplicate
data. If you inadvertently enter the Element, Source, and Class name the same as that of an existing set
of Reliability Data, ETAP displays an error message.
8-277
Reliability Library
8.25.2 Reliability Library Editor

The Reliability Library Editor is designed as a spreadsheet that allows the user to enter the Reliability
Data Values for a given class. Using this editor, you are able to edit, add, insert, or delete any row or
individual values. All the different columns within the Reliability Library Editor are pre-labeled
according to the kind of Reliability data that is used by the Reliability Analysis Program.
Note: The length unit for branches is per 1000 ft.
Class
This column allows you to enter the different class names under the given source and type for the given
device. The determining value for a class may be for example a voltage level, kVA rating, etc, etc.
Active Failure/yr.
This column is for entering the Active Failure per year rate of the device.
Passive Failure/yr.
This column allows you to enter the Passive Failure per year rate of the device. In ETAP Library, the
passive failure has been set to be same as the active failure, except for breakers for which the passive
failure has been set to 1.5 times the Active Failure rate.
MTTR
This column is for entering the Mean Time To Repair value in hours for the given device.
Switch Time
This column is for entering the device switching time.
8-278
Reliability Library
Replace Time
This column allows you to enter the time interval required to replace the given device.
8.25.3 Library Quick Pick - Reliability

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed via the Library button, which is located in the editor of
elements containing a reliability page. The Reliability Library Quick Pick is very similar to the
Reliability Library Editor. Using this dialog box the user may select the source, type and class of
reliability data to be used for the given device.
8-279
Reliability Library
Source
This box allows the user to select the Source of the reliability data to be used for the given device.
Type
This box allows the user to select the type of device for selecting the devices reliability data.
8-280
Battery Library
8.26 Battery
The Battery Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is defined
by Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the
library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as shown below.
Battery Library
Header
Header
Header
Header
Battery Model
Battery Model
Battery Model
Battery Model
Battery headers are used to indicate the model and type of battery. Battery headers consist of the
following items:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Manufacturer
Model
Characteristic Type
VPC
SG
Temp.
Time Constant
Discharge Time
Manufacturer Name
Battery Model
Characteristic Type: Time vs. Amp or Time vs. Kt
Nominal Voltage per Cell
Specific Gravity at Base Temperature
Base temperature in Degrees Celsius
Battery Time Constant in Second
Battery Rated Discharge Time in Hour
8.26.1 Battery Library Selector
8-281
Battery Library
The Battery Library allows you to add new battery headers or select existing battery headers so that you
can edit, copy, or delete them. To edit a Battery Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit
button after highlighting it. To delete a battery, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP
will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before removing any library data.
Add
This dialog box is used to add a new battery header.
Copy
This dialog box is used to copy an existing battery header.
8-282
Battery Library
A battery header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new battery
header by changing any one of the items in the battery header information.
8.26.2 Battery Library Editor

To edit the Battery Library data, select a battery type from the Battery Library and click on the Edit
button. Each battery type (header) can contain an unlimited number of battery sizes. This Spreadsheet
Editor allows you to view and edit Battery Library data for a selected battery type. The name of the
battery type is displayed on top of the spreadsheet. Each battery record (row) is a unique set of data for
each battery size. Each battery record must have a unique identifier: Plates.
8-283
Battery Library
Available Size
Plates
Double-click on this field to enter the total number of plates for the selected battery model.
Note: The total number of plates is always an odd number.
Cap
Double-click on this field to enter the nominal amp-hour capacity for the selected battery model.
1 Min SC Rating
Double-click on this field to enter the one minute short-circuit rating for the selected battery model. The
one minute rate is used for DC short-circuit calculations.
K
ETAP uses this value to calculate the constant current source values in DC Short-Circuit Studies. SC
Amps = the 1 Min. A times K. If the SC Amps are entered first, the program will automatically calculate
the K factor.
SCA
The Batterys Short-Circuit Current in Amperes specified by the manufacturer. If the K Factor is entered
first, the SCA is calculated automatically.
Rp
Resistance per Positive Plate in Ohms. Resistance of a battery cell equals to Rp divided by the number of
positive plates.
8-284
Battery Library
Performance Data
Enter the performance data for each available battery size in this spreadsheet by double-clicking on each
cell. You can add, insert, and delete rows and columns to the spreadsheet. Double-click on the column
header to enter the end voltage per cell values. Double-click on the row header to enter time value in
minutes. Note: The cell performance data should be entered, on a per positive plate basis.
8.26.3 Library Quick Pick - Battery

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a battery in the one-line diagram,
then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a compilation of the
information you have specified for this element.
From this dialog box, select a battery type (header) and battery size from the Battery Library. The
Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to pick a battery size from the list of all battery sizes in the
library for a selected battery header.
8-285
Control System Device - Contact
8.27 Control System Device Contact

The Contact Library is designed to have a flat setup. The library can be opened by selecting the Control
System Device, Contact option from the Library menu. You can add, delete, and modify library data for
a contact by using the Contact Library Editor. The Contact Library is divided into AC contacts and DC
contacts.
8.27.1 Control Circuit Contact Library Editor
AC/DC
In this section, you select AC or DC Contact Library data to display in the contact list.
AC Devices
Select the AC Device option to display all AC contacts in the contact list.
DC Devices
Select the DC Device option to display all DC contacts in the contact list.
Add
Click on the Add button to add a new contact entry at end of the contact list.
Delete
Click on the Delete button to delete the highlighted contact entry.
8-286
Help
Click on the Help button to open ETAP Help on the Contact Library topic.
Close
Click on the Close button to save the changes made in the Contact Library and close the Control Circuit
Contact Library Editor.
Contact List
The contact list contains all contact data in the library. Its spreadsheet layout allows easy viewing and
modification of contact data.
Part ID
Double-click on this field to enter up to 25 alphanumerical characters as the ID for a contact. The Part
ID can be used to identify contact manufacture and model of a contact.
Vrated
Double-click on this field to enter a contact rated voltage in volts.
%Vmax
Double-click on this field to enter the maximum allowable voltage applied on a contact. Enter the value
as a percent of Vrated.
R
Double-click on this field to enter contact resistance in milliohms. This value is the combined resistance
of the resistance when the contacts are touching each other, the resistance of the terminals and the
contact spring.
Amp,r
Double-click on this field to enter contact current rating in amperes for a resistive load. This rating is
applicable when the contact is in a circuit that does not contain any inductive coils.
Amp,i
Double-click on this field to enter the contact current rating in amperes for an inductive load. This rating
is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that contains inductive coils. Typically in control systems
for electrical power systems, there are usually control relays or solenoids and hence the inductive current
rating should be used. The inductive current rating is usually less than or equal to resistive current
rating.
VAbr,r
Double-click on this field to enter contact breaking capacity in VA (or W) for resistive load. This rating
is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that does not contain any inductive coils.
VAbr,i
Double-click on this field to enter the contact breaking capacity in VA (or W) for inductive load. This
rating is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that contains inductive coils.
8-287
VAmk,r
Double-click on this field to enter the contact making capacity in VA (or W) for resistive load. This
rating is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that does not contain any inductive coils.
VAmk,i
Double-click on this field to enter contact making capacity in VA (or W) for inductive load. This rating
is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that contains inductive coils.
Top
Double-click on this field to enter the operating time in milliseconds for the contact. Top is the time it
takes for a contact, initially at its normal state, to change to off-normal state, assuming that during the
period of Top the voltage drop across the controlling device (a control relay or a solenoid) of the contact
is maintained higher than or equal to the pickup voltage of the controlling device.
Trelease
Double-click on this field to enter the release time in milliseconds for the contact. Trelease is the time
for a contact, initially at its off-normal state, to change to normal state, assuming that during the period of
Trelease the voltage drop across the controlling device (a control relay or a solenoid) of the contact is
maintained below the dropout voltage of the controlling device.
Serial No.
Double-click on this field to enter the Serial Number of the contact, using up to 25 alphanumerical
characters.
Remark
Double-click on this field to enter a remark for the contact, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
8-288
Data Revision
Double-click on this field to enter the data revision of the contact, using up to 25 alphanumerical
characters.
Reference
Double-click on this field to enter a reference for the contact, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
8.27.2 CSD Library Quick Pick - Contact

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the Contact Library button from the
Contact page of the Control Relay Editor or the Solenoid Editor. The Library Quick Pick lists all contacts
in the library along with contact parameters. You can view contact parameters, retrieve contact data from
the library to the Device Editor, or remove previously selected Contact Library data in the Device Editor.
Help
Clicking on the Help button will display a frame of the Quick Pick Library Help for a contact device.
Help frames typically have a list of additional related topics for other devices and menu functions
displayed in green at the bottom. Click on a topic to view that information.
OK
Clicking on the OK button will substitute the selected Contact Library parameters into a Device Editor.
None
Clicking on the None button will remove the previously retrieved library data for selected contact in the
Device Editor where the CSD Contact Library Quick Pick dialog was invoked.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will close the CSD Contact Library Quick Pick dialog. No data will be
transferred.
8-289
Control System Diagram Control Relay
8.28 Control System Device Control Relay
The Control Relay Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is
defined by AC/DC Type, Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers within
the library and unlimited Models for each manufacturer, as shown below.
Control Relay headers are used to indicate the model and type of control relays. Control Relay headers
consist of the following items:
1) AC/DC
2) Manufacturer
3) Model
DC/AC Type
Manufacturer Name
Control Relay Model
8.28.1 Control Relay Selector

The Control Relay Library allows you to add new control relay headers or select existing control relay
headers so that you can delete, or copy, or edit these entries.
AC/DC
Select an AC or DC Control Relay Library to display in the Control Relay Library Selector.
AC Devices
Clicking this option displays all AC control relay manufactures in the Manufacturer list.
DC Devices
Clicking this option displays all DC control relay manufactures in the Manufacturer list.
8-290
Manufacturer
This section displays all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC control relays. You can also add or
delete control relay data for a manufacturer in this section.
Manufacturer List
This list contains all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC control relays. As you click on a
manufacturer in the list, the Model list below will display all the control relay models for that
manufacturer that are included in the library.
Reference
This field displays the Reference for the selected manufacturer. Reference information is entered when
you initially add a manufacturer and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Link
This field displays the internet web address of the selected manufacturer. The Link information is
entered when the manufacturer is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Add -- Manufacturer
Click on the Add button to add a new manufacturer for Control Relay Library. The Add dialog box will
appear so that you are able to enter information related to the manufacturer.
8-291
AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new control relay manufacturer you are adding.
OTI Created Library

This box can be checked by OTI engineers only. It indicates that this library was created and verified by
OTI, developer of ETAP.
Manufacturer
Enter a name for the new manufacturer, of up to 30 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, of up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Link
Enter an internet web address for the manufacturer, of up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Manufacturer
Click on the Delete button to remove control relay data for the selected manufacturer from the Control
Relay Library. Note: When you remove a manufacturer from the library, the control relay data for all
models under that manufacturer will also be removed. Before removing library data, ETAP will display a
frame asking you to confirm your request.
Edit Info -- Manufacturer

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected manufacturer. The Edit Info
dialog box will appear. It is similar to the Add dialog box. Notice that you can modify the Reference and
Link fields but not the Manufacturer, since Manufacturer is part of the library header information.
If the manufacturer has been created by OTI, you will not be able to modify the Manufacturer
information unless you have requested and been granted an OTI key (access number) that allows you to
edit library information.
8-292
Copy -- Manufacturer
Click on the Copy button to copy a selected manufacturer to a new manufacturer name. The Copy
Library dialog box will show up, which displays the selected manufacturer as the From manufacturer and
allows you to enter a name for the To manufacturer.
Note: When an existing manufacturer is copied to a new manufacturer, all device models listed under the
existing manufacturer will be copied to the new manufacturer. If there is a need to modify control relay
data from a manufacturer created by OTI, you can copy the data to a new manufacturer. This type of
modification will not be restricted by an OTI key.
Model
This section displays all models provided by the selected control relay manufacturer. You can also add to
or delete control relay data for a model in this section.
8-293
Model List
The list contains all models provided by the selected control relay manufacturer. As you click on a
model in the list, information related to the model, such as Reference, Class, and Description, will be
displayed in the same section.
Reference
This field displays the Reference information for the selected model. Reference information is entered
when the model is added and you can make modifications by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Class
This field displays the Class information for the selected model. Class information is entered when the
model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Description
This field displays Description information for the selected model. The Description information is
entered when the model is added and you can make modifications by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Add -- Model
Click on the Add button to add a new Model for the selected manufacturer. The Add dialog box will
appear and allow you to enter information related to the model.
8-294
AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new model that is being added.
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer name of the new model that is being added.
Model
Enter a name of the model, using up to 30 alphanumerical characters.
OTI Created Library

This box can be checked by OTI engineers only. It is an indication that the model has been created and
verified by OTI, developer of ETAP.
Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, of up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Class
Enter the Class information for the model, using up to 32 alphanumerical characters.
8-295
Description
Enter the Description for the model, of up to 100 characters.
Certification
Enter certification for the model, using up to 25 characters.
Catalog #
Enter a catalog number for the model, of up to 25 characters.
Issue Date
Enter the issue date for the model, using up to 50 characters.
Link
Enter the internet web address for the model, using up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Model
Click on the Delete button to remove control relay data for the selected model from the Control Relay
Library. Note: When removing a model from the library, control relay data for all devices under that
model name will be removed. Before removing library data ETAP will display a frame requesting that
you confirm this request.
Edit Info -- Model

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected model. The Edit Info dialog
box will appear which is similar to the Add dialog box.
Note: You are not allowed to modify the model name, since it is already being used as part of the header
for a branch of Control Relay Library.
If the Model has been created by OTI, you cannot modify the Model information unless you have an OTI
key that permits this level of access.
8-296
Copy -- Model
Click on the Copy button to copy the selected model to a new model name. The Copy Library dialog box
will appear, which displays the selected model as the From model and allows you to enter a name for the
To model.
Note: When an existing model is copied to a new model, all devices under the existing model will be
copied to this new model. If there is a need to modify the control relay data for a model created by OTI,
you can copy this data to a new model, an action that will not be restricted by the OTI key, and you will
be able to modify this model.
8-297
Parameters
Clicking on the Parameters button will bring up the Control Circuit Control Relay Library: Parameter
Spreadsheet. Use this frame to add new control relay data or modify existing data. When the spreadsheet
is open, the data for the selected model under the selected manufacturer is listed.
8.28.2 Parameter Spreadsheet

You can add a new control relay entry, delete an existing entry, or modify parameters for an existing
entry from the Control Circuit Control Relay Library: Parameter Spreadsheet.
Heading Information
The header displays information on device type, manufacturer, model and class.
AC/DC Devices
This field displays type of devices, AC or DC.
8-298
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer name of devices.
Model
This field displays the model name of devices.
Class
This field displays the class of devices.
Device Parameters
The Parameter Spreadsheet is where you enter device parameters. This spreadsheet lists all devices for
the manufacturer, the model and its class. You can modify parameters for an existing device entry, add a
new entry or delete an existing entry from the spreadsheet. Double-click on the field to enter or modify
data for that field.
ID
Enter the ID of a device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Vrated
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the device. This value serves as the base for other voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the device. The value is in percent based on the rated
voltage.
%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the device. This value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the minimum voltage across the device required to change the state of controlled contacts from
their normal state to off-normal state when the device becomes energized. If the voltage drop on the
device becomes less than the Vpickup value from the moment that the device becomes energized up to
the operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will fail to operate and stay in the normal state.
%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the maximum voltage across the device that will result in changing the state of controlled contacts
from their off-normal state to normal state. If the voltage drop on the device becomes less than the
Vdropout value for a duration of the release time of a controlled contact, while the device is energized,
the contact will change from its off-normal state to normal state.
VA
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the continuous power rating of a device. For a DC
device, the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the continuous power rating of a device.
Amp
Enter the current rating in Amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a device.
8-299
R
Enter the DC resistance in Ohms for a DC device under normal operating condition, that is, when the
rated voltage is applied across the device. For an AC device, this is the AC impedance in Ohms at the
rated frequency.
%Tol.
Enter the burden rating tolerance as a percentage. This value is used to adjust the burden load of a
device. The burden is adjusted in a conservative way in CSD calculations. When a 10% tolerance is
entered, the resistance of a constant Z device will be reduced by 10% and the VA (or I) of a constant VA
(or I) device will be increased by 10%.
PF
Enter the rated power factor of the device as a percentage. For a DC device, this field is display only and
the value is fixed at 100%.
VA,i
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the inrush power rating of a device. For a DC device,
the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W,i
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the inrush power rating of a device.
Amp,i
Enter the current rating in amperes. This is the inrush current rating of a device.
PF,i
Enter the inrush power factor of the device as a percentage. This field is display only for a DC device
and its value is fixed at 100%.
8-300
T,i
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds.
Duty Cycle
Select a duty cycle from the list or enter a number in this field. This parameter is applicable only to
solenoids. It is used to characterize the percentage of time that a solenoid is behaving as a functional part
of a circuit. This field is currently not used in CSD calculations.
Tmax
Enter the maximum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is currently not used in CSD
calculations.
Tmin
Enter the minimum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is currently not used in CSD
calculations.
NOfixed
Click on the NOfixed button to assign Normally Open contacts to this device. This will open the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from
the Contact Library. When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact
data will also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a Device Editor, the
status of NOfixed contacts will be fixed as NO. This status cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
NCfixed
Click on the NCfixed button to assign Normally Closed contacts to this device. This will open the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from
the Contact Library. When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact
status of NCfixed contacts will be fixed as NC. This status cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
Convertible
Click on the Convertible button to assign Convertible contacts to this device. This will open the Contact
Library Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from the
Contact Library. When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact
status of Convertible contacts will be initially set as NO. This status can be changed from the Device
Editor.
Form C
Click on the Form C button to assign Form C contacts to this device. This will open the Contact Library
Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from the Contact
Library. When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact data will
also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a Device Editor, the status of
Form C contacts will be initially set as Pos A. This status can be changed from the Device Editor.
8-301
Serial Number
Enter the Serial Number of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Remark
Enter a remark for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Data Revision
Enter the data revision of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Contact Library Add-On

When one of the four contact assignment buttons is clicked from the device parameter spreadsheet, the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box will open and allow you to select contacts and assign them to the
device.
8-302
Heading Information
The heading information section consists of three display fields: AC/DC device type, device ID, and
contact type. When you click a button the contact type that is displayed will match your selection.
Available Contact List

The Available Contact list shows all contacts in the Contact Library. The contacts to be assigned are
selected and deselected by a mouse click. Note: Multiple contacts can be selected at the same time.
<< Button
Clicking on the << button adds the highlighted contacts from the Available Contact list to the Selected
Contact list. Note: Each time the button is clicked, the highlighted contacts will be added to the Selected
Contact list.
>> Button
Clicking on the >> button removes the highlighted contacts from the Selected Contact list.
Selected Contact List

This list displays contacts that have been assigned and will be assigned to a device. This list shows the
contact ID along with contact parameters. When the Contact Library Add-On dialog is open, the
Selected Contact list displays the contacts that have been assigned to the device. You are able to unassign one or more assigned contacts by removing them from the list. You can also expand the list by
adding more contacts from the Available Contact list.
The number column, the first column in the list, can be used to select one or multiple contacts from the
Selected Contact list. When you click on the column for a contact, the contact will be highlighted while
deselecting all previous highlighted contacts. When you click on the column for a contact while pressing
down and holding the Ctrl key, you can select or deselect the contact without changing other previously
selected contacts. Used in combination with the Shift key, you can also create a group of contacts from
the list.
Help
Clicking on the Help button will display an ETAP Help frame.
8-303
OK
Click on the OK button to update the device with the newly assigned contacts. This will replace the
previously assigned contact list.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the dialog box without changing the previously assigned contact list.
8.28.3 CSD Library Quick Pick Control Relay

The Library Quick Pick dialog box can be accessed by clicking on the Library button from the Rating
page of the Control Relay Editor. The Library Quick Pick lists all control relays for a specified
manufacturer and model type. You can view control relay parameters and retrieve data from this library
to the Device Editor.
Device Library Type

From the Library Type section of the Control Relay Quick Pick dialog, you can specify manufacturer and
model type for a type of device. All devices from the specified manufacturer under the selected model
will be displayed in the device list for you to select.
AC/DC Device
This display field shows the AC/DC type of the device library, which matches the type of the device
invoked from the Control Relay Quick Pick dialog box.
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the list of all manufacturers that are included in the Control Relay Library.
Once a manufacturer is selected, all models from that manufacturer will be loaded into the Model list.
8-304
Model
Select a model in the list of all models from the specified manufacturer. Once a model is selected, all
devices under the selected model will be displayed in the device list.
Class
This display only field shows the class for the selected model.
Device List
The device list shows all devices for the selected control relay manufacturer and model, along with the
device parameters entered in the library. To select a device from the list, click on its row to highlight and
select it.
Buttons for Assigned Contacts

A device in the library can have one or more contacts assigned. You can click on the buttons under the
NOfixed, NCfixed, Convertible, or Form C column in the device list to view contacts assigned to the
device. Once one of the buttons is clicked, the Contact Library Viewer dialog box will appear and
display all assigned contacts of the type according to what button you clicked. The Contact Library
Viewer dialog box also displays all contact parameters in a spreadsheet format.
Help
OK
Clicking on the OK button will substitute your selected device library data into Device Editor. Note: If
the selected library device already has assigned contacts on the Contact page of the Device Editor, the
new contacts will be added (with their contact library data) to match the previously assigned contacts in
the library.
None
Clicking on the None button will remove the previously retrieved library type information from the
Device Editor, without changing any device parameters. If the previously retrieved device library data
includes assigned contacts, new contacts would have been added to the device on the Contact page.
8-305
These contacts will be removed from the Device Editor as well, if they have not been associated with
CSD contact elements and their Source is still Relay Lib. When a contact is not associated with a CSD
element, its Contact ID field will be blank.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will close the CSD Control Relay Library Quick Pick dialog without
transferring any data.
8-306
Control System Diagram - Solenoid
8.29 Control System Device Solenoid
The Solenoid library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is
defined by AC/DC Type, Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers within
the library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as in the example shown below.
Solenoid headers are used to indicate the model and type of solenoids. Solenoid headers consist of the
following items:
1) AC/DC
2) Manufacturer
3) Model
AC/DC Type
Manufacturer Name
Solenoid Model
8.29.1 Solenoid Selector

The Solenoid Library allows you to add new solenoid headers or select existing solenoid headers so that
you can edit, copy, or delete them.
AC/DC
Select an AC or DC solenoid Library to display in the Solenoid Library Selector.
AC Devices
Clicking this option displays all AC solenoid manufactures included in the Manufacturer list.
DC Devices
Clicking this option displays all DC solenoid manufactures included in the Manufacturer list.
Manufacturer
This section displays all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC solenoids. You can also add or delete
solenoid data for a manufacturer in this section.
8-307
Manufacturer List
The list contains all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC solenoids. As you click on a manufacturer
in the list, the Model list below will display all the solenoid models provided by this manufacturer that
are in the library.
Reference
This field displays the Reference for the selected manufacturer. Reference information is entered when
the manufacturer is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Link
This field displays the internet web address of the selected manufacturer. The Link information is
entered when the manufacturer is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Add -- Manufacturer
Click on the Add button to add a new manufacturer for Solenoid Library. The Add dialog box will
appear and allow you to enter information related to the manufacturer.
AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new solenoid manufacturer that is to be added.
OTI Created Library

8-308
Manufacturer
Enter the name of the new manufacturer, using up to 30 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Link
Enter the internet web address for the manufacturer, using up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Manufacturer
Click on the Delete button to remove solenoid data for the selected manufacturer from the Solenoid
Library. Note: When you remove a manufacturer from the library, solenoid data for all models under the
manufacturer will be removed. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before
removing any library data.
Edit Info -- Manufacturer

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected manufacturer. The Edit Info
dialog box will show up, which is similar to the Add dialog box. You can modify the Reference and Link
fields but not the Manufacturer, since Manufacturer is incorporated as part of the library header
information.
If the manufacturer data was created by OTI, you will not be able to modify the Manufacturer
information unless an OTI key is used.
Copy -- Manufacturer
Click on the Copy button to copy the selected manufacturer to a new manufacturer name. The Copy
Library dialog box will show up, which displays the selected manufacturer as the From manufacturer and
allows you to enter a name for the To manufacturer.
8-309
Note: When an existing manufacturer is copied to a new manufacturer, all models included under the
existing manufacturer will be copied to the new manufacturer. If there is a need to modify solenoid data
from a manufacturer created by OTI, you can copy this data to a new manufacturer, and since it will not
be restricted by an OTI key you will be able to make modifications.
Model
This section displays all the models provided by the selected solenoid manufacturer. You can also add or
delete solenoid data for a model in this section.
Model List
The list contains all models for the selected solenoid manufacturer. As you click on a model in the list,
information related to the model, such as Reference, Class, and Description, will be displayed in the
same section.
8-310
Reference
This field displays the Reference information for the selected model. Reference information is entered
when the model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Class
This field displays the Class information for the selected model. Class information is entered when the
model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button
Description
This field displays Description information for the selected model. Description information is entered
when the model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button
Add -- Model
Click on the Add button to add a new Model for the selected manufacturer. The Add dialog box will
appear and allow you to enter information related to the model.
AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new model that is to be added.
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer name for the new model that is to be added.
8-311
Model
Enter the name of the model, using up to 30 alphanumerical characters.
OTI Created Library

Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Class
Enter the Class information for the model, using up to 32 alphanumerical characters.
Description
Enter a Description for the model, using up to 100 characters.
Certification
Enter certification for the model, using up to 25 characters.
Catalog #
Enter the catalog number for the model, using up to 25 characters.
Issue Date
Enter the issue date for the model, using up to 50 characters.
Link
Enter the internet web address for the model, using up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Model
Click on the Delete button to remove solenoid data for the selected model from the Solenoid Library.
Note: When you remove a model from the library, solenoid data for all devices under the model name
will be removed. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before removing
any library data.
Edit Info -- Model

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected model. The Edit Info dialog
box will appear which is similar to the Add dialog box. Note: You are not allowed to modify the model
name, since it is already incorporated in the header for a branch of Solenoid Library.
If the Model is created by OTI, you will not be able to modify the Model information unless an OTI key
is used.
8-312
Copy -- Model
Click on the Copy button to copy the selected model data to a new model name. The Copy Library
dialog box will appear, and display the selected model as the From model and allow you to enter a name
for the To model.
Note: When an existing manufacturer is copied to a new manufacturer, all models included under the
existing manufacturer will be copied to the new manufacturer. If there is a need to modify solenoid data
from a manufacturer created by OTI, you can copy this data to a new manufacturer, and since it will not
be restricted by an OTI key you will be able to make modifications.
8-313
Parameters
Clicking on the Parameters button will bring up the Control Circuit Solenoid Library: Parameter
Spreadsheet, where you can add new solenoid data or modify existing data. When the spreadsheet is
open, the data listed are for the selected model under your selected manufacturer.
8.29.2 Parameter Spreadsheet

You can add new solenoid entry, delete an existing entry, or modify parameters for an existing entry from
the Control Circuit Solenoid Library: Parameter Spreadsheet.
Heading Information
The header displays information on device type, manufacturer, model and class.
AC/DC Devices
This field displays type of device, AC or DC.
Manufacturer
This field displays the name of the manufacturer of the device.
Model
This field displays the model name of the device.
Class
This field displays the class of the device.
8-314
Device Parameters
Device parameters are entered in the parameter spreadsheet. This spreadsheet lists all devices according
manufacturer, model and class. You can modify parameters for an existing device entry, add a new entry
or delete an existing entry from the spreadsheet.
To enter or modify data for a field, you must double-click on the field.
ID
Enter ID of a device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Vrated
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the device. This value serves as the base for other voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the
rated voltage.
%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the minimum voltage across the device required to change the state of controlled contacts from
their normal state to off-normal state when the device becomes energized. If the voltage drop on the
device becomes less than the Vpickup value from the moment that the device becomes energized up to
the operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will fail to operate and remain in the normal state.
%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the maximum voltage across the device that will result in changing the state of controlled contacts
from their off-normal state to normal state. While the device is energized, if the voltage drop on the
device becomes less than the Vdropout value for a duration of the release time of a controlled contact,
the contact will change from its off-normal state to normal state.
VA
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the continuous power rating of a device. For a DC
device, the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the continuous power rating of a device.
Amp
Enter the current rating in Amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a device.
R
Enter the DC resistance in Ohms of a DC device under normal operating condition, that is, when the
rated voltage is applied across the device. For an AC device, this is the AC impedance in Ohms at the
rated frequency.
%Tol.
Enter the burden rating tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the burden load of a device. In
CSD calculations, the burden is adjusted in a conservative way. When a 10% tolerance is entered, for a
8-315
constant Z device its resistance will be reduced by 10% and for a constant VA (or I) device its VA (or I)
will be increased by 10%.
PF
Enter the rated power factor of the device as a percentage. For a DC device, this field is for display only
and the value is fixed at 100%.
VA,i
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the inrush power rating of a device. For a DC device,
the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W,i
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the inrush power rating of a device.
Amp,i
Enter the current rating in Amperes. This is the inrush current rating of a device.
PF,i
Enter the inrush power factor of the device as a percentage. For a DC device, this field is display only
and the value is fixed at 100%.
T,i
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds.
Duty Cycle
Select a duty cycle from the list or enter a number in the field. It is used to characterize the percentage of
time that a solenoid in on duty. This field is not used in CSD calculations.
8-316
Tmax
Enter the maximum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is not currently used in CSD
calculations.
Tmin
Enter the minimum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is not currently used in CSD
calculations.
NOfixed
Click on the NOfixed button to assign Normally Open contacts to this device. This will open the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the
status of NOfixed contacts will be fixed as NO and it cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
NCfixed
Click on the NCfixed button to assign Normally Closed contacts to this device. This will open the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the
status of NCfixed contacts will be fixed as NC and it cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
Convertible
Click on the Convertible button to assign Convertible contacts to this device. This will open the Contact
Library Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the Contact
also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a device editor, the status of
Convertible contacts will be initially set as NO. This status can be changed from the Device Editor.
Form C
Click on the Form C button to assign Form C contacts to this device. It will open the Contact Library
Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the Contact
also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a Device Editor, the status of
Form C contacts will be initially set as Pos A. This status can be changed from the Device Editor.
8-317
Serial Number
Enter the Serial Number of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Remark
Enter a remark for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Data Revision
Enter the data revision of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Contact Library Add-On

When one of the four contact assignment buttons is clicked from the device parameter spreadsheet, the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box will open and allow you to select contacts to be assigned to the
device.
8-318
Heading Information
The heading information section consists of three display field: AC/DC device type, device ID, and
contact type. The contact type displayed is the same as the button clicked.
Available Contact List

The Available Contact list shows all contacts in the Contact Library. Select the contacts for assignment
by a mouse click. Note: Multiple contacts can be selected at the same time.
<< Button
Clicking on the << button adds the highlighted contacts from the Available Contact list to the Selected
Contact list. Note: Every time the button is clicked, the highlighted contacts will be added to the
Selected Contact list.
>> Button
Clicking on the >> button removes the highlighted contacts from the Selected Contact list.
Selected Contact List

This list displays contacts that have been assigned and will be assigned to a device. It shows contact ID
along with contact parameters. When the Contact Library Add-On dialog is open, the Selected Contact
list shows the contacts that have been assigned to the device and you can de-assign one or multiple
assigned contacts by removing them from the list. You can also expand this list by adding more contacts
from the Available Contact list.
The number column, the first one in the list, can be used to select one or more contacts from the Selected
Contact list. When clicking on the column for a contact, this will highlight the contact while deselecting
all previous highlighted contacts. When you click on the column for a contact while pressing down and
holding the Ctrl key, this will select or deselect the contact without changing other previously selected
contacts. In combination with the Shift key, you can also select multiple groups from the list.
Help
Clicking on the Help button will display the ETAP Help frame for this contact list.
8-319
OK
Click on the OK button to update the device with the newly assigned contacts. This will replace the
previously assigned contact list.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the dialog box without changing the previously assigned contact list.
Add
Click on the Add button to add a new device entry at the end of the Parameter Spreadsheet.
Delete
Click on the Delete button to delete the selected device from the Parameter Spreadsheet.
OK
Click on the OK button to close the Parameter Spreadsheet and save the modified data.
Cancel
Click on the OK button to close the Parameter Spreadsheet without changing any data.
Help
8.29.3 CSD Library Quick Pick Solenoid

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the Library button from the Rating page of
the Solenoid Editor. The Library Quick Pick lists all solenoids for a specified manufacturer and model
type. You can view solenoid parameters and retrieve data from a library to the Device Editor.
Device Library Type

You can specify the manufacturer and model type for a type of device from the Library Type section of
the Solenoid Quick Pick dialog,. All devices provided by the specified manufacturer under this model
name will be displayed in the device list. You can click on a row to select that device.
AC/DC Device
This display field shows the AC/DC type of the device library, according to the type of the device
invoked from the Solenoid Quick Pick dialog box.
8-320
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the list of all manufacturers that are included in the Solenoid Library. Once a
manufacturer is selected, all models provided by this manufacturer will be filled in the Model list.
Model
Select a model from the list of all models provided by the specified manufacturer. Once a model is
selected, all devices under your selected model will be displayed in the device list.
Class
This display only field shows the class of the selected model.
Device List
The device list shows all devices provided by the selected solenoid manufacturer and the model, along
with the device parameters entered in the library. To select a device from the list, click on the row
corresponding to the device to highlight your selection.
Buttons for Assigned Contacts

A device in the library can be assigned with one or more contacts. You can click on the buttons under
the NOfixed, NCfixed, Convertible, or Form C column in the device list to view contacts assigned to the
device. Once one of the buttons is clicked, the Contact Library Viewer dialog box will appear, which
displays all assigned contacts of the type according to the button you clicked. The Contact Library
Viewer dialog box also displays all contact parameters in a spreadsheet format.
8-321
Help
OK
Clicking on the OK button will substitute the selected device library data into Device Editor.
Note: If the selected library device has assigned contacts, on the Contact page of the Device Editor, new
contacts will be added with contact library data according to the contacts assigned in the library.
None
Clicking on the None button will remove the previously retrieved library type information from the
Device Editor, without changing device parameter. If the previously retrieved device library data
includes assigned contacts, new contacts would have been added to the device on the Contact page.
These contacts will be removed from the Device Editor as well if they have not been associated with
CSD contact elements and their Source is still Relay Lib. When a contact is not associated with a CSD
element, its Contact ID field will be blank.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will close the CSD Solenoid Library Quick Pick dialog without
8-322
Photovoltaic Array / Solar Panel Library
8.30 Photovoltaic / Solar Panel

The Photovoltaic Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library
structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Standard, AC/DC, Manufacturer, Model, etc.) each containing a set
of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer, Reference, Max Vdc, etc.). The library structure is as shown below
Record
Header
Photovoltaic Library
Library
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
Model
Max. Vdc
Max. Vdc
Max. Vdc
Max. Vdc
Size
Size
Size
Size
Vmp,
Voc,
Isc,
Imp,
Curve
The PV Array Library header consists of Manufacturer Model Max. Vdc (Max. Volts for DC). For
each header, you can have unlimited records of solar panel sizes, for which Impp, short-circuit data,
irradiance data, irradiance curve points can be defined. When the Photovoltaic option is clicked from the
library menu the following editor is launched.
PV Array library data verification is not completed at the time of the ETAP 11 release. We are providing
PV Array library data with unlock library designation. Please double check these values against the
manufacturer data and modify them if necessary.
8.30.1 Photovoltaic Panel Library editor
8-323
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for solar panel. Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Lock
Link
Displays a manufactures web link or URL address.
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of a photovoltaic manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
OTI Created Library

This option is available for OTI internal use only.
8-324
Edit Info
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
8-325
Copy
To copy the selected photovoltaic manufacturer and all models provided by that manufacturer, select the
Model
Model
Model lists all the Model-Max Vdc (Max V for DC), for the selected solar panel manufacturer.
Lock
Type
Displays the type for the selected solar panel model.
Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available for selected solar panel model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected solar panel model.
Application
Displays the reference for the selected solar panel model.
8-326
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the solar panel model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model
User-editable drop down list that includes model names of any existing solar panel models that may have
already been added to the library for a selected manufacturer.
Max Vdc
User-editable drop down list.
Type
User-editable drop down list that includes Mono-crystalline, Poly-crystalline, Amorphous. Note that this
selection is for information purposes only and does not impact the behavior of the curves.
Performance
Radio button selection between Parameters and Curve. The default selection is Parameters. This selection
is made to decide whether the panel electrical characteristics such as P-V and I-V curves are based on
limited parameters or point based.
8-327
When Parameters is selected then panel electrical characteristics such as P-V and I-V curves are
generated based on panel rated information such as Vmpp, Impp, Pmpp, Voc and Isc, etc.
When Curve is selected then panel electrical characteristics such as P-V and I-V curves are generated
based on points / user-defined curve.
@ W/m2
Specify the base irradiance value for the library data in W/ m2
Temperature (C)
Specify the base temperature in degrees Celsius for the library data.
Reference
blank.
Brand Name
left blank.
Model (Description)
Enter the description for the solar panel model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Application
Enter the application for the solar panel model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Link
blank.
Lock
Edit Info
for locked models.
8-328
Delete Model
Delete
To delete a specific solar panel model select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm the request.
8-329
Copy
Copy a solar panel model by selecting the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
clicking on the Copy button. The selected model will be copied to the user-specified Model name and
Max Vdc.
Help
Open the Help file for the Photovoltaic / Solar Panel Library.
Close
Close the Photovoltaic / Solar Panel Library Editor and save all changes.
Edit Parameters
Select a model and click on Edit Parameters button to open the Parameters editor. The Parameters editor
allows you to specify available sizes for the selected solar panel model, along with short circuit data and
curve points. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you
can select a row (highlight it) and right click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows. Locked entries
8-330
Manufacturer
Model
Max Vdc
Displays the maximum voltage for the selected fuse model.
Performance
Displays performance data is based on curve or parameters. Note that when curve based is selected, then
the editor has an additional button to enter the curve data point wise. If parameter based is selected then
no additional curve information needs to be specified.
Size
Enter the panel size identification.
# of Cells
Enter the number of cells in one solar panel. This field is not a required library parameter.
Vmp
Enter the maximum or peak rated voltage for the panel in volts.
Voc
Enter the open circuit voltage for the panel without any load connected at the panel terminals in volts. At
this voltage the panel current is equal to zero.
Isc
Enter the short circuit current generated by the panel in amps. At this current value, the panel voltage is
equal to zero.
Imp
Enter the maximum or peak rated current for the panel in amps. This value of current corresponds to
voltage Vmp.
8-331
Pmp
Enter the maximum or peak rated power for the panel in watts. This value of power corresponds to
product of Vmp and Imp.
P (Tol)
Enter the tolerance on Pmp as specified by the manufacturer. This field is not a required library
parameter.
Delta Voc
This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for open circuit voltage. This coefficient is used
to calculate the open circuit voltage based on irradiance levels other than base irradiance.
Alpha Isc
This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for short circuit current. This coefficient is used
to calculate the short circuit current.
Beta Voc
This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for open circuit voltage. This coefficient is used
to calculate the open circuit voltage of the panel.
% Eff
It shows the calculated panel efficiency in percent. Panel efficiency = Power / (Area in m^2 * Base
Irradiance in W/m^2).
Length
This allows the user to enter the panel length in inches.
Width
This allows the user to enter the panel width in inches.
Depth
This allows the user to enter the panel thickness in inches. It is optional.
Weight
This allows the user to enter the panel weight in lbs. It is optional.
NOCT
This allows the user to enter the normal operating cell temperature (NOCT) in degrees Celsius (C).
Default NOCT is 45 degrees C.
Note
Enter notes for the selected solar panel size.
Lock
8-332
Curve
When curve option is selected then Isc, Voc, Imp, Vmp and Pmp in the edit parameters dialog are grayed
out and are updated from the curve editor only.
The header for the solar panel curve displays details of the panel model and size selected for defining the
curve points.
Curve ID
Enter the curve ID and revision date for the I-V curves, for the selected panel size.
Notes
Enter notes for the I-V curve of the selected panel size.
I-V Curve Points

Enter the current in amps and voltage in volts for panel I-V characteristic. You can Add and Delete data
using the Add and Delete buttons. The power is calculated automatically based on current and voltage
inputs.
Photovoltaic Library Quick Pick

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box by clicking on the Library button inside the Editor PV Panel
page. The Library Quick Pick displays all of the PV Panel information in the associated library file.
From this dialog box, select a manufacturer, model, and size. This narrows the choice of available library
selections to a group you are interested in.
8-333
Wind Turbine Generator Library
8.31 Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) Library

The WTG Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library
structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, etc.) each containing a set of attributes (i.e.
Reference, Parameters, etc.). The library structure is as shown below:
Record
Header
WTG Library
Library
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Model
Model
Model
Model
Type 1 Turbine
Type 2 Aerodynamics
Dyn. Model
Type 3
Dyn. Controls
Type 4
The WTG Library header consists of Manufacturer Model. For each header, you can have unlimited
records of WTG models, for which turbine, aerodynamics, dynamic model and dynamic controls can be
defined. When the Wind Turbine option is clicked from the library menu the following editor is
launched.
8-334
8.31.1 WTG Library editor
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Displays a list of all wind turbine manufacturers included in the library. Select the manufacturer by
highlighting the manufacturer name.
Lock
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer.
Link
Displays a manufactures web link or URL address.
8-335
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of a WTG manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
OTI Created Library

This option is available for OTI internal use only.
8-336
Edit Info
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
8-337
Copy
To copy the selected WTG manufacturer and all models provided by that manufacturer, select the
Model
Model
Model lists all the WTG models for the selected WTG manufacturer.
Lock
WTG Type
Displays the WTG technology type for the selected WTG model Type 1 through Type 4.
Type 1: Conventional Induction Generator
Type 2: Variable Slip Induction Generator
Type 3: Doubly Fed Induction Generator (DFIG)
Type 4: Full scale power converter
WTG
Displays the WTG technology name for the selected WTG model
Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available for selected WTG model.
Release Date
Displays the release date of the model or the date of the model catalog used to enter the data into the
library.
8-338
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected WTG model.
Application
Displays the reference for the selected WTG model.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the WTG model you wish to add to the library. Highlight
the name of the manufacturer prior to clicking on Add to ensure that the model being entered is cataloged
under the correct manufacturer.
Manufacturer
Model
Enter the model names of any WTG model that is required to be entered into the library.
8-339
Type
Drop down list that includes the four wind turbine generator technologies.
WTG
Displays the WTG technology name for the selected WTG model
Release Date
Enter the release date of the model or the date of the model catalog used to enter the data into the library.
Reference
blank.
Brand Name
left blank.
Model (Description)
Enter the description for the WTG model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Application
Enter the application for the WTG model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Link
blank.
Lock
8-340
Edit Info
for locked models.
Delete Model
Delete
To delete a specific WTG model, select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm the request.
8-341
Copy
Copy a WTG model by selecting the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then clicking on
the Copy button. The selected model will be copied to the user-specified model name and wind turbine
technology type.
Help
Open the Help file for the WTG Library.
Close
Close the WTG Library Editor and save all changes.
8-342
Edit Parameters
Select a model and WTG type and then click on Edit Parameters button to open the Parameters editor.
The Parameters editor allows you to specify nameplate information for the selected WTG model together
with applicable Aerodynamics / Rotor, Dynamic Model and Dynamic Controls. \
Type 1 / Type 2 / Type 3 / Type 4 Turbine Generator Page

This page has fields that are common to all four wind turbine generator technology types.
MFR
Displays the name of the manufacturer.
Model
Displays the name of the model.
Notes
Enter notes or description for the WTG model.
Lock
Rated (kW)
Wind turbine generator rated real power in kW.
Rated kV
Wind turbine generator rated voltage in kV.
8-343
Poles
Wind turbine generator Poles.
PF
Wind turbine generator rated power factor in percent.
Eff
Wind turbine generator rated efficiency in percent.
LRC
Locked-Rotor Current (LRC) in percent of full-load current.
LRpf
Locked rotor power factor in percent.
X0
Zero-sequence reactance in percent (machine base).
X2
Negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base).
X/R
X/R ratio (X/Ra).
Td
Transient time constant in seconds.
Inertia
Generator WR^2 in lb-ft^2 or kg-m^2 based on system unit.
8-344
Type 1 / Type 2 Aerodynamics / Rotor Page

This page contains the fields used to define the aerodynamic or rotor properties.
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Cut-in Speed
Minimum wind speed in m/s for turbine to generate power
Cut-out Speed
Maximum wind speed in m/s for turbine to generate power
Air Density
Air Density in kg/m^3
Rated Speed
Turbine rated wind speed in m/s
Rotational Speed
Rotor/Turbine rated RPM
8-345
Swept Area
Rotor swept area in M^2 (pi*(D/2)^2 for horizontal type of turbine)
Rotor Diameter
Rotor diameter in meters
Pitch Angle
Rotor blade pitch angle in degrees
Inertia
Turbine WR^2 in lb-ft^2 or kg-m^2 based on system unit
C1 C9
Numeric constant for turbine Cp curve
8-346
Type 1 / Type 2 Pitch Control Page

This page contains the fields used to define the dynamics of the pitch controller.
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Kdroop
Droop gain of generator power in pu.
Kp
Proportional gain in pu.
Ki
Integral gain in pu.
Tpe
Power filter time constant in sec.
T1
Output filter 1 time constant in second.
8-347
T2
Output filter 2 time constant.
Pimax
Maximum output limit.
Pimin
Minimum output limit.
8-348
Type 2 Controls
This page contains the fields used to define the dynamics of the electronic controller.
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Kp
Power filter gain in pu
Kw
Speed filter gain in pu
Kpp
PI-controller proportional gain in pu
Kip
PI-controller integrator gain (=1/time constant, sec.) in pu
Tp
Power filter time constant in sec.
8-349
Tw
Speed filter time constant, sec.
Rmax
Rext output max limit
Rmin
Rext output min limit
8-350
Type 3 Aerodynamics / Rotor Page

MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Cut-in Speed
Minimum wind speed in m/s for turbine to generate power
Cut-out Speed
Maximum wind speed in m/s for turbine to generate power
Air Density
Air Density in kg/m^3
Rated Speed
Turbine rated wind speed in m/s
Rotational Speed
Rotor/Turbine rated RPM
8-351
Swept Area
Rotor swept area in M^2 (pi*(D/2)^2 for horizontal type of turbine)
Rotor Diameter
Rotor diameter in meters
Pitch Angle
Rotor blade pitch angle in degrees
Inertia
Turbine WR^2 in lb-ft^2 or kg-m^2 based on system unit
Kaero
Aerodynamic gain in pu
Theta2
Blade pitch angle in degrees
Theta0
Initial blade pitch angle in degrees
8-352
Type 3 Dyn Model Page

This page has fields required to define the dynamic model of the induction generator.
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
X
Generator effective reactance, pu on Gen MVA base
T1
First generator time constant in seconds
T2
Second generator time constant in seconds
T3
Third generator time constant in seconds
Lvpl1
Low voltage power logic point 1
8-353
Lvpl2
zerox
LVPL characteristic zero crossing, pu
brkpt
LVPL characteristic breaking point, pu
rrpwr
LVPL ramp rate limit, pu
Lvplsw
Low voltage power logic switch Connect (1) / Disconnect(0)
8-354
Type 3 Pitch Controller Page

This page contains the fields used to define the dynamics of the pitch controller.
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Kpp
Pitch control proportional gain, deg./pu speed
Kip
Pitch control integrator gain, deg./pu speed-sec
Kpc
Pitch compensator proportional gain, deg./pu P
Kic
Pitch compensator integral gain, deg./(pu P-sec.)
8-355
PImax
Maximum pitch angle, deg.
PImin
Minimum pitch angle, deg.
Tp
Blade response time constant, sec.
Pset
Power set point in pu
Wmax
Pitch control anti-windup upper limit
Wmin
Pitch control anti-windup lower limit
Pmax
Pitch compensator anti-windup upper limit
Pmin
Pitch compensator anti-windup lower limit
PIrate
Pitch rate limit, deg./sec.
8-356
Type 3 Controls
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Kiv
Integral gain in voltage regulator (pu Q / pu V sec)
Kpv
Proportional gain in voltage regulator (pu Q / pu V sec)
Kqi
Reactive control gain (pu Q / pu V sec)
Kqv
Terminal voltage control gain, pu V/pu Q
Fn
Fraction of WTG in Wind Plant that are on-line
Tr
Voltage transduce time constant, sec.
8-357
Tv
Proportional path time constant, sec.
Tc
Filter time constant in voltage regulator, sec.
Tp
Power factor regulator time constant, sec.
varflg
Var control type flag (0=constant Q cntl; 1=use wind plant reactive power cntl; -1=use PF regulator)
vltflg
Voltage flag (1=use closed loop terminal voltage cntl; 0=bypass closed loop terminal voltage cntl)
Qmax
Maximum reactive power limit in voltage regulator, pu
Qmin
Minimum reactive power limit in voltage regulator, pu
Vmax
Maximum voltage limit, pu
Vmin
Minimum voltage limit, pu
XlQmax
Terminal voltage regulator maximum limit, pu
XlQmin
Minimum voltage regulator maximum limit, pu
8-358
Type 4 Aerodynamics / Rotor Page

MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Kpp
Proportional gain in pu
Kip
Integral gain in pu
Kf
Turbine feedback gain in pu
Tpw
Turbine time constant in second
8-359
Tf
Turbine feedback time constant in second
dPmx
Maximum power change in pu
dPmn
Minimum power change in pu
Type 4 Dynamic Model Page

This page has fields required to define the dynamic model of the induction generator.
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
X
Generator effective reactance, pu on Gen MVA base
T1
First generator time constant in seconds
T2
Second generator time constant in seconds
T3
Third generator time constant in seconds
8-360
Lvpl1
Lvpl2
zerox
LVPL characteristic zero crossing, pu
brkpt
LVPL characteristic breaking point, pu
rrpwr
LVPL ramp rate limit, pu
Lvplsw
Low voltage power logic switch Connect(1)/Disconnect(0)
8-361
Type 4 Controls
MFR
Model
Notes
Lock
Kiv
Wind Control regulator integral gain
Kpv
Wind Control regulator proportional gain
Kqv
V control integral gain
Kqi
Q control integral gain
Fn
Fraction of WTGs in wind farm that are on the one-line
Tr
Wind Control voltage measurement time constant, sec.
Tv
Time constant in proportional path of WindCONTROL emulator, sec.
8-362
Tc
Time constant between Wind Control output and wind turbine, sec.
Tp
Time constant in power measurement for PFA control, sec.
varflg
Var control type flag (-1=constant Q cntl; 1=use wind plant reactive power cntl; 0=use PF regulator)
pfaflg
0=Q priority; 1=PF priority
Qmax
Maximum Q command, pu
Qmin
Minimum Q command, pu
Vmax
Maximum V at regulated bus, pu
Vmin
Minimum V at regulated bus, pu
ImaxTD
Converter current limit
Lqhl
Hard limit on reactive current, pu
Lphl
Hard limit on real current, pu
Pqflag
P, Q priority flag (0=Q priority; 1=P priority)
Vt1
Vt point 1 (qmax)
Vt2
Vt point 2
Iqmxv1
Iqmxv point 1
Iqmxv2
Iqmxv point 2
8-363
Chapter 9
One-Line Diagram GUI
ETAP provides an easy to use, fully Graphical User Interface (GUI) for constructing one-line diagrams.
Here you can graphically add, delete, relocate, connect elements, zoom in or out, display grid off or on,
change element size, change element orientation, change symbols, change equipment/device color, create
personalized viewing themes, hide or show protective devices, enter properties, set operating status, etc.
9-1
Overview
When you create a new one-line diagram presentation, you are initially in Edit Mode with the
configuration status set to Normal, the default condition. The Grid and Continuity Check are both
switched off. If you open (activate) an existing one-line diagram presentation, it opens with all the
attributes set that were saved last, i.e., mode (Edit, Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, etc.),
configuration status, display options, view size, and view location as the initial condition.
When you create a new project, a one-line diagram presentation is automatically created with an ID
(name) equal to the ID of the default one-line diagram, appended with a unique number. To create a new
one-line diagram presentation within an existing project, click on the New Presentations button on the
Presentation toolbar, as shown below.
You can change the ID (name) of a one-line diagram presentation from within the Project View (to
expand the presentations tree, right-click on the one-line diagram, and select properties from the menu),
or by double-clicking in the background of the one-line diagram presentation.
ETAPs electrical system diagram is a one-line representation of a balanced three-phase system. This
one-line diagram is the starting point for all of your studies. You can graphically construct your electrical
system by connecting the buses, branches, motors, generators, and protective devices in any order from
the One-Line Diagram Edit toolbar. You can connect elements to buses graphically (by dragging lines
from the device element) or by using the Info page of the Device Property Editor (double-click on the
element and its property editor will open). Using these editors you can assign the engineering properties
of the element, such as its ratings, settings, loading, connection, etc. You can also elect to set the defaults
for each element prior to placing them in the one-line diagram to minimize the time required for data
entry.
9-2
Edit
9.1 Edit a One-Line Diagram

In this section, some of the most common functions of the graphical user interface for the one-line
diagram are explained. The detailed instructions provided here will assist you in creating and editing
your one-line diagram presentation.
Mouse and Keyboard Functions

Key
A key on the keyboard is represented by its name enclosed in a pair of triangular brackets. For example,
the Control key is represented by <Ctrl>.
Click
Place the mouse cursor on an object or button, and then click the left mouse button. Click is used to
select an element in the one-line diagram, add elements from the toolbars, etc.
Right-Click
Place the mouse cursor on the object, and then click the right mouse button. For example, rightclicking on an element in the one-line diagram brings up a menu.
Double-Click
Place the mouse cursor on an object or button, and then click the left mouse button twice rapidly. For
example, double-clicking on an element in a one-line diagram brings up the Property Editor for that
element. For composite networks and motors, double-clicking brings up the nested one-line diagram for
that composite element.
<Ctrl> + Click
Place the mouse cursor on the object, then, while pressing the <Ctrl> key down, click the left mouse
button. Use <Ctrl> + click to select or deselect one-line diagram elements.
9-3
Edit
<Shift> + <Ctrl> + Click

Place the mouse cursor on a cable; then, while pressing the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys down together,
click the left mouse button to drag a cable from the one-line diagram to an Underground Raceway
System (UGS) or vice versa. Use <Shift> + <Ctrl> + click to place one-line cables in conduits or
locations in the underground raceways.
Drag
Place the mouse cursor on an element, click and hold the left button down, drag the mouse to the
required position while keeping the left button down, then release the left button to place the element.
9-4
Edit
Selecting
Make sure the mouse cursor is not on any element; click and hold the left button down. Drag the
mouse to the required position while keeping the left button down, and then release the left button. You
will see a rectangle marked with dotted lines indicating the area that you have selected. This is used for
selecting a group of elements.
9-5
Edit
Drag and Drop

Drag and Drop is the ability to copy elements using the mouse within an ETAP project and, in one mouse
motion, paste the elements onto an accepting location within ETAP. Drag and Drop is used in ETAP
only for copying elements (but not for cutting or purging elements).
Drag and Drop is implemented in the following manner:
1. Select the elements to be dragged and dropped.
2. Using Shift + Ctrl + Left-Mouse depressed, drag the elements to the desired location.
3. Release the element in the desired location by releasing the Mouse-Left button.
Drag and Drop can be performed between the following ETAP views:
OLV to OLV
OLV to Dumpster
Dumpster to OLV
UGS (Complete Raceway) to Dumpster
OLV to ETAP Star
ETAP Star to OLV
OLV to UGS
UGS to OLV
OLV to Composite Network
Composite Network to OLV
Note: Elements cannot be dropped onto an OLV view that is in Study Mode.
9-6
Edit
Add Elements
Every element in ETAP requires a unique ID. ETAP includes a Name Manager, which insures that the ID
of all elements, presentations, Star Views, configuration status, study cases, underground raceway
systems, etc. are unique. When you add a new element, the Name Manager automatically assigns an ID
to it by appending a number to the default ID of that element. Device elements are numbered sequentially
by type (Fuse 1, Fuse 2, etc.). When an element is deleted from the OLV it is moved to the Dumpster, but
its ID will still be in use until it is purged from the Dumpster.
Bus ID = (Default ID) + (A Unique Number) = Bus + 1 = Bus1

When you add an element, it is initialized with the default values. You can modify the default values for
each element either by selecting Defaults from the menu bar or from the components list in the Project
View.
9-7
Edit
Add One Element

Left-Click on an element symbol on the Edit toolbar, then move the cursor to the one-line diagram and
click again to drop it. It is unnecessary to hold the mouse button down when moving the cursor.
Add Multiple Elements

To add an element to your one-line diagram, click on any of the device element buttons on the Edit
toolbar. Notice how the cursor changes its shape to that of the elements icon. Now you can drag and
drop that element in any position on the one-line diagram by clicking the mouse. After dropping the
element, the cursor returns to its original arrow shape.
Double-click on an element on the Edit toolbar to add multiple copies of the same element to the one-line
diagram. As you click the mouse, a copy of the selected element will be placed at each location.
Rules
Elements can be added only in Edit Mode, i.e., they CANNOT be added in any Study Mode.
Elements can be added when Base Data is active, i.e., they CANNOT be added when any Revision
Data is active.
Select & Deselect Elements

Click on an element to select it. Click anywhere in the one-line diagram or in an underground raceway
system to deselect the element. Use <Ctrl>+Click to select or deselect any element.
To select an element, click the left mouse button while the cursor (arrow shape) is on top of the element.
When an element is selected, it is shown in red. To select multiple elements, you can either press
<Ctrl>+Click to add or delete elements to the selected group, or rubber band a group of elements.
9-8
Edit
To select a group of elements, click the left mouse button where there is no element and drag the mouse.
It will show you a dotted rectangle. When the mouse is released, all elements completely inside the
rectangle will turn red.
To select a group of elements, highlight the elements or the entire one-line diagram using the mouse. To
select other elements or deselect elements from the highlighted group use <Ctrl> + Click
When an element is selected, its color is shown in red. Deselected AC elements are displayed in black
and DC elements in blue.
Auto Select
ETAP implements an intelligent and proactive auto select feature that is time saving and intuitive. Use
the Alt button and the left mouse click together to select multiple elements in an instant.
Alt + Left Mouse Click on a bus

If a bus is selected and the ALT key is pressed, then ETAP will automatically select all the loads
connected to the bus. All protective devices connected to those loads will also be selected. If there are
branches connected to the bus, the branch components within a bounding box will be selected as well. In
the below example, the purple text box shows the bounding box for a low voltage bus. There is a breaker
and transformer T3 that fall within the bounding box, hence they will be selected. Note: The bounding
box is configured to be the same distance around the element as the element ID's adjustable radius.
Alt + Left Mouse Click on a load

When the ALT key is pressed and a load is selected, ETAP will automatically select all devices connected
to the load up to the bus.
9-9
Edit
Alt + Left Mouse Click on a load PD

The Auto select function can also be used on any load protective device. All elements in a straight line
with the protective device will be highlighted when Alt + left mouse click is used on the protective
device. The picture below shows the Auto Select function used when the devices are not in a straight
line. ETAP highlighted the breaker and the contactor after Alt + Click was used on the breaker. This
gives the user the ability to quickly select those two elements and drag them in line with the overload
heater, cable and motor.
Alt + Left Mouse Click on a branch or branch PD

If the ALT key is pressed and a branch is selected, then ETAP will automatically select all the
components connected to the branch in a straight line between the from bus and to bus of the branch.
If the elements are not in a straight line, ETAP will stop the auto select function at the last inline element
as done with the load pd shown above. Note: Using the Auto Select function on a branch pd will perform
the same results as using the Auto Select function on a branch.
Page
Up
Jump from the selected element to the upstream bus, selecting and highlighting all elements in between.
When parallel paths exist, all elements in the parallel path will be selected.
Page Down
Jump from the selected element to the downstream bus, selecting and highlighting all elements in
between. When parallel paths exist, all elements in the parallel path will be selected.
9-10
Edit
Element & Connector Colors

You can customize the colors of all elements and connectors by assigning their colors in the Preferences
Manager or by using the Theme Editor (see 9.1.6).
For example, if you want to color code regions of your system based on voltage level then you can
identify various voltage levels in the system and highlight the first voltage level components. Right-click
anywhere in the blank space around the one-line diagram and the following menu will be available.
Click on Custom and select the appropriate color you wish to use for this voltage level.
9-11
Edit
Continue with other regions of the system in a similar manner.
9-12
Edit
Theme Editor
The Theme Editor is used to change color and line styles for device connectors as well as device color
and background. Select from template themes or you can create custom themes that can be applied
globally or according to the presentation. The advantage of using a Theme Editor is that unlimited custom
styles may be stored on one computer and these styles are project independent so they are available when
switching from one ETAP project to another. Themes created using the Theme Editor can be easily
transported from one computer to another.
Note: Themes can be applied to one-line diagram and control circuit diagram presentations. Also, colors
applied manually using the right-click context menu will override theme colors.
Select the presentation for which you want to create and apply a custom theme. The Theme Editor can be
accessed from the Project toolbar, as shown below.
The Theme Editor appears as shown below. When ETAP is first installed, the standard theme applied to
all presentations is ETAP (Default) theme.
9-13
Edit
Note: Annotation Colors for an existing and new system are based on User-Defined Colors specified in
the Display Options for the presentation selected. Switch to Global Theme to use Annotation colors
specified in the Theme Editor.
Theme
This is controlled by a drop-down box that allows you to switch between themes. Colors are switched in
the Theme Editor when switching between different themes. Colors and/or styles are not applied until you
click Apply or OK. If the default colors are changed a new theme is created automatically Modified
Default xx.
Save As
Click on this button to rename the selected theme. The dialog box shown below will be displayed. It
allows you to assign a new theme name.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected theme. Note that ETAP (Default) theme cannot be deleted.
Set Global
If Set Globally is clicked then the following dialog is displayed.
9-14
Edit
From these presentations, select those that should be displayed in the ETAP (Default) theme or your
custom theme. Theme settings can also be applied to your entire project, including all the selected
presentations (excluding Ground Grid, Cable Pulling, GIS, and Star).
Active Color Code

Select the active color code for the energized conductors. The energized conductors can be color coded
based on the following:
Standard Colors
Voltage
Area
Grounding
Earthing
Note that the deenergized color is based on the color selection on the standard 3P & DC page
User-Defined
Select user-defined colors for the elements and annotations on your one-line diagram. User-defined
colors are based on colors defined within the 3 Phase AC & DC section.
Voltage
Select Voltage to define colors by their kV ratings. When kV based is selected, define colors under the
Voltage tab.
Area
Select Area to define colors by area assignment. When area based is selected, define colors under the
Area tab.
Grounding
Select Grounding to define colors by transformer neutral grounding assignment. When grounding based
is selected, define colors under the grounding/earthing tab.
9-15
Edit
Earthing
Select Earthing to define colors by systen earthing assignment. When earthing based is selected, define
colors under the grounding/earthing tab.
Standard 3P & DC
Energized
Select the color and line style for 3P AC & DC energized conductors and elements. Energized elements
are those connected to a swing source and are electrically energized by the source.
Deenergized
Select the color for 3P AC and DC deenergized conductors and elements. Deenergized elements are those
either not connected to a swing source or connected but other components in series are out of service or
with open status. These elements are therefore not energized by the source.
Pins
Select the color for the 3P AC and DC element connection pins. When the mouse is moved over the pins
the pin is highlighted with the selected color.
Selected
Select the color for the 3P and AC and DC selection color. Whenever the element is clicked the selected
color is use to show the highlighted color.
Faulted Bus
Select the color for the 3P AC and DC faulted bus color. This color is only used for Short Circuit and
Coordination modes.
Background
Select the color of the one-line diagram background.
Grid
Select the color and the grid size or spacing for the one-line diagram.
Faulted Bus
Select whether the faulted bus is shown based on the selected color or based on a symbol. Note that
symbol should be used when printing the one-line with short circuit results on a B&W printer.
The following default colors are used for different operating modes:
9-16
Edit
Energized AC Color
Element
Continuity
Check
Condition
All
AC Device
On
Energized
Black
All
AC Device
On
De-Energized
Gray
All
AC Device
Off
Any
Black
All
DC
On
Energized
Blue
All
DC
On
De-Energized
Gray
All
DC
Off
Any
Blue
On
Energized
Black
On
De-Energized
Gray
Mode
All
All
(Composite /
Remote connector)
(Composite /
Remote connector)
All
(Composite /
Remote connector)
Off
De-Energized
Fuchsia
All
AC Pins
Any
Any
Fuchsia
Element
Continuity
Check
Condition
DC Pins
Any
Any
Mode
All
9-17
Color
Comment
Color
Comment
Cyan
Edit
All
(Composite /
Remote connector)
Any
De-Energized
Lime
All
AC/DC/Composite
Selected Elements
Any
Any
Red
All
AC Annotation
Blue
All
1-Phase 2 Wire
Phase A
1-Phase 2 Wire
Phase B
1-Phase 2 Wire
Phase C
1-Phase 2 Wire
Phase C
On
Display
Options Themes
Energized
Teal
Dash-Dot
On
Energized
Teal
Dash Dot-Dot
On
Energized
Teal
Dash Dot-Dot
On
Energized
Teal
Dash Dot-Dot
All
All
All
1 Branch
1 Branch
1 Branch
On
On
Off
Energized
De-Energized
Any
Green
Gray
Black
Dotted Line
Solid Line
Solid Line
All
All
All
1, 3 Wire Branch
1, 3 Wire Branch
1, 3 Wire Branch
On
On
Off
Energized
De-Energized
Any
Bright Green
Gray
Black
Dotted Line
Solid Line
Solid Line
Run
Studies
Load
Flow
Bus
On/Off
Error
Magenta
Bus, Cable, Line,

Reactor,
Transformer, Panel,
PD, Generator
Bus
On/Off
Alarm
Red
On/Off
Warning
Magenta
Marginal Limits
Bus
On/Off
Fault
Dark Red
Faulted Bus
PD
On/Off
Alarm
Red
Overstressed
All
All
All
Load
Flow
ShortCircuit
ShortCircuit
9-18
Base
kV
Problem
Critical Limits,
Overload
Edit
Standard 1P &2P
This tab will bring up the Energized conductors editor so that you can change colors and line styles for
single phase connectors and elements. The single phase coloring is for 2W, 3W as well as for 2 Phase 2W
and 3W connected systems.
9-19
Edit
Voltage
Define colors based on the kV rating of the elements on your one-line diagram. This section is used when
Voltage is selected using the active color code.. Each color incorporates all kV ratings lower than or
equal to the listed rating until the next specified rating is reached.
Sort
Click Sort to view your ratings in ascending or descending order.
Add
Click Add to add a new kV rating with a selected color.
Delete
Click Delete to delete an existing kV rating and its selected color.
9-20
Edit
Area
Define colors based on the area classification of the elements on your one-line diagram. This section is
used when Area is selected using the active color code option. The area assignment is made using the bus
editor or graphically selecting the one-line diagram and using the classification option on the right-click.
Note that ETAP automatically propagates the area information based on bus area classification.
9-21
Edit
Grounding / Earthing
Define colors based on the area classification of the elements on your one-line diagram. This section is
used when Area is selected using the active color code option. The area assignment is made using the bus
editor or graphically selecting the one-line diagram and using the classification option on the right-click.
Note that ETAP automatically propagates the area information based on bus area classification.
Grounding Type
Select the grounding type color for the following:
- Solid
- Low Impedance
- High Impedance
- Ungrounded
For impedance grounded system, the break point between low impedance and high impedance grounded
systems need to defined. By default, low impedance systems are ones where the reactor, resistor or
transformer grounded impedance allows more than 50 A ground fault current.
9-22
Edit
Note that the color coding based on grounding type is applied to the entire network including MV and LV
systems. This is in contrast to the Earthing type color coding which is applied only to LV systems.
Protective Earthing (PE) Type (Low Voltage)

Select the earthing type color for the following:
- Earth Earth (TT)
- Earth Neutral Combined (TN-C)
- Earth Neutral Separate (TN-S)
- Earth Neutral Combined-Separate (TN-C-S)
- Isolated Earth (IT)
- National Electric Code
- Undetermined
9-23
Edit
Note that the earthing colors are used when the active color code is selected as earthing. Earthing colors
are used for IEC / BS Standard based systems while National Electric Code color is used primarily for
NFPA standard based systems.
Undetermined color is used when ETAP detects a conflict on the grounding connections or when the
grounding system is not correctly defined.
A Common cause of the Undetermined color could be due to the grounding system connected to
elements that are < 1 kV for AC systems and < 1.5 kV for DC systems. Another cause could be due to
multiple elements with different earthing types.
Earthing colors are used only for low voltage systems i.e. voltage levels < 1 kV. For elements greater than
1 kV, standard colors are used from the 3P and 1P tabs.
Instrumentation Elements
Choose the color option to use for instrumentation colors. Instrumentation elements include PT, CT,
Meters and Relays.
User-Defined
Choose User-Defined color when you want the instrumentation colors to be independent of the colors set
for the one-line diagram. For example, if the one-line diagram is colored using Voltage Based coloring,
the instrumentation colors can be setup independently.
Active Color Code

Choose Active Color Code when you want the instrumentation colors to be the same colors as the oneline diagram. For example, if the one-line diagram is colored using Voltage Based coloring, the
instrumentation colors would inherit the same colors.
PT Not Visible
Check if you want to hide the PT from the one-line diagram especially when using ETAP Real-Time
Monitoring. The PT is colored same as the background color so the element still exists on the one-line
diagram and it is possible to manipulate its orientation by selecting it.
9-24
Edit
Meters Not Visible

Check if you want to hide the Multimeters, Voltmeters and Ammeters from the one-line diagram
especially when using ETAP Real-Time Monitoring. The meters are colored same as the background
color so the element still exists on the one-line diagram and it is possible to manipulate its orientation by
selecting it.
Relays Not Visible

Check if you want to hide the Relays from the one-line diagram especially when using ETAP Real-Time
Monitoring. The relays are colored same as the background color so the element still exists on the oneline diagram and it is possible to manipulate its orientation by selecting it
Grounding Elements
Choose the color option to use for grounding elements colors. Grounding elements include the Delta
Wye symbols used for 2 winding and 3 winding transformers. The grounding element sybmols can be
turned on from the grounding page of the transformers as shown below.
When the grounding symbol is turned on, the Delta-Wye connections are shown as symbols on the oneline to which protective relaying may be connected. The grounding elements option controls the color of
these symbols.
User-Defined
Choose User-Defined color when you want the grounding elements color to be independent of the colors
set for the one-line diagram. For example, if the one-line diagram is colored using Standard colors, the
grounding element colors can be setup independently as shown in the image above.
9-25
Edit
Not Visible
Select if you want to hide the grounding elements from the one-line diagram especially when using ETAP
Real-Time Monitoring. The grounding elements are colored same as the background color so the element
still exists on the one-line diagram and it is possible to manipulate its orientation by selecting it.
Check if you want to hide the Relays from the one-line diagram especially when using ETAP Real-Time
Monitoring. The relays are colored same as the background color so the element still exists on the oneline diagram and it is possible to manipulate its orientation by selecting it.
Ground Switch
Choose the color option to use for ground switch element. Ground switches can be connected to the oneline diagram and have two states:
- Grounded
- Ungrounded
The color codes in this option control not only the color of the ground switch but also of the one-line
diagram in grounded state.
User-Defined
Choose User-Defined color when you want the ground switch element color to be independent of the
colors set for the one-line diagram. For example, if the one-line diagram is colored using area based
colors, the grounding element colors can be setup independently in order for them to stand out or easily
identifiable on the one-line.
Not Visible
Select if you want to hide the ground switch elements from the one-line diagram especially when using
ETAP Real-Time Monitoring. The ground switch elements are colored same as the background color so
the element still exists on the one-line diagram and it is possible to manipulate its orientation or status by
selecting it and accessing its editor.
Active Color Code

Choose Active Color Code when you want the ground switch color to inherit the same color as the oneline diagram. For example, if the one-line diagram is colored using Voltage Based coloring, the ground
switch color would inherit the connector color.
9-26
Edit
Grounded
Select the color for the one-line diagram that would indicate whether the system is grounded. This color
only applies to deenergized systems that may be grounded using a ground switch. This color does not
apply when the system is energized and the ground switch is closed since this is an invalid operation for
any electrical system.
Ungrounded System
Grounded System using Grounded Color Code
9-27
Edit
Relocate Elements
To drag an element or group of elements to a new location, first select the elements that you wish to
move. Selected elements are indicated in red. Move the cursor on top of the selected elements, click and
hold the left mouse button as you place them in the desired position, and then release the mouse button.
Relocate a Single Element

Select an element and move the cursor over it; the cursor changes shape to a move symbol. Drag the
element to a new position and release the left button.
Relocate a Group of Elements

Select the elements that you wish to relocate, move the cursor on top of the selected elements so it
becomes a move symbol, and then drag the selected elements to a new position.
Connect Elements
Each element has one or more (up to 20) pins. A pin is a graphical tool (represented by a small, red
square indicating the connection point) to connect elements together. The following is a list of elements
and their pins:
Sources (synchronous generator, power grid, and battery) have one pin.
Loads (synchronous motors, induction machines, DC motors, static loads, MOVs, capacitors, filters,
etc.) have one pin.
Branches (2-winding transformers, lines, cables, impedances, reactors, etc.), protective devices (high
& low voltage circuit breakers, fuses), and relays have two pins.
Three-winding, potential, and current transformers have three pins.
Switching devices have two pins.
Double-throw switches have three pins.
Overcurrent relays and ammeters have two pins.
Voltmeters, voltage relays, and frequency relays have one pin.
Composite motors have one pin.
Composite networks have up to 20 (4, 8, 12, 16, & 20) pins.
Converters (DC converters, chargers, inverters) have two pins.
Buses are considered to be one long pin (continuous pins along their length).
Connect Element to Bus
Place the cursor over the pin of an element (pin appears in red). Click and drag the mouse to a bus.
When the bus turns red, release the left button.
Drag an element and place its pin on a bus.
Drop a new element with its pin on top of a bus.
Buses are considered to be one long pin. Connections are always made from elements to buses.
Relays cannot be connected to buses.
Only one pin of an element can be connected to the same bus.
9-28
Edit
Connect Element to Element

You can graphically connect elements by moving the cursor to the end of an element until the connection
pin is highlighted in red. Click and drag the mouse to a bus or protective device and release the mouse
button when the bus or the connecting pin also turns red.
Place the cursor on the pin of an element. Click and drag the mouse to the element you wish to
connect. When the latter elements pin turns red, release the left button.
Drag & drop a protective device with its pin placed on top of the pin of any branch or load element.
Drag & drop a protective device onto a connection.
Branches CANNOT be connected to each other; ETAP automatically inserts a bus between them.
Branches CANNOT be connected to loads, utilities, composite motors, and composite networks.
Relays can only be connected to current transformers (CT) or other relays.

You CANNOT directly connect two buses with a connector or current transformer.
9-29
Edit
Voltage (kV) Propagation

Whenever two elements are connected together ETAP will identify all devices in the connection path that
have a null value for nominal / rated kV. Once identified, ETAP will automatically update them based on
the upstream or downstream voltage. Voltage (kV) propagation considers any remote connectors in the
system during the propagation. The following are some examples of voltage propagation throughout the
one-line diagram.
Connecting a Transformer to a Bus
Since Bus4 Nominal kV = 0, then Bus Nominal kV is set equal to connecting Transformer Rated kV =
4.16 kV, in this case. ETAP will continue propagating the voltage through the rest of the system starting
from Bus4. The result of this connection is shown below.
9-30
Edit
Connecting a Branch (Cable, Line, X, or Z) to a Bus
OR
9-31
Edit
Since Bus8 Nominal kV on one side of the branch is zero and the other side is non-zero, ETAP will set
Bus8 kV = Bus4 kV. Voltage will not be propagated from the primary side of the transformer to the
secondary side since ETAP does not know upfront the turn ratio of the transformer. For DC systems, DCto-DC converters behave in the same manner as transformers.
Shown below is an example that uses AC and DC components to illustrate the most efficient points to
start kV propagation.
9-32
Edit
The Remote Connector

Two sections, section 1 and section 2, form the Remote Connector element. This Remote Connector
allows you to connect elements together that are located in widely separated areas of the project, without
having to run a long, continuous branch circuit cable connector between them, as indicated in the figure
below.
9-33
Edit
The Remote Connector Find Feature

The Find Other End feature associated with the Remote Connector allows the user to quickly locate all
elements connected to either section 1 or section 2 of the Remote Connector. Right-click on either
section of the Remote Connector, and select Find Other End from the menu. The Program will
automatically locate the other section of the Remote Connector, regardless of its location in the one-line
diagram.
Insert Protective Devices (PD)

You can insert a protective device on any connector path by dragging and dropping it on top of the
connector. There is no limit to the number of protective devices that can be inserted and connected
together. If a connector element icon is horizontal, the orientation of the protective device is
automatically changed to 180 degrees and inserted in the connector path. If you later wish to change the
orientation, right-click on the element and select Orientation from the menu that appears. You can select a
new orientation from 0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees.
In this example, a circuit breaker and fuse are inserted between Bus1 and T1.
9-34
Edit
Cut, Copy & Paste

Cut (Delete)
Elements, along with their connectors, can be cut (deleted) from the one-line diagram and placed in the
Dumpster. There are four methods to cut selected elements:
Select Cut from the right-click menu.

Click on Edit on the menu bar and select Cut.
Click on the Cut button in the Project toolbar.
Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Cutting a Transformer using the Right-Click Menu
Rules
Elements can be cut in Edit Mode only when Base Data is active.
Elements have to be selected before cutting.
To cut a connection, the connection has to be selected (click on it).
When a protective device in a connecting path is cut, the connector remains intact.
Hidden protective devices become visible when a connector is cut.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be cut at the same time.
When an element or group of elements is placed in the Dumpster, ETAP creates a new Dumpster Cell to
hold them. ETAP assigns the name of the Dumpster Cell. When you cut an element or a group of
elements, they are deleted from the one-line diagram and placed in the Dumpster with the same ID. The
connections, properties, and status of the deleted elements are preserved.
9-35
Edit
Copy
Elements, along with their connectors, can be copied into the Dumpster by one of three methods:
Right-click on an element and select Copy.

Click on Edit in the Menu bar, and select Copy.
Click on the Copy button on the Project toolbar.
Rules
Elements can be copied in Edit Mode only when Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT be copied in a Revision Data.
You CANNOT copy a connector with hidden protective devices.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be copied at the same time.
When an element or group of elements is placed in the Dumpster, ETAP creates a new Dumpster Cell to
hold them. ETAP assigns the name of the Dumpster Cell. When you copy an element or group of
elements, they get copied into the Dumpster with new IDs. The connections, properties, and status of the
duplicated elements in the Dumpster are preserved.
Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram. Elements
can be pasted from the Dumpster by three methods:
Right-click on the one-line diagram and select Paste at the cursor location.
Click on Edit in the menu bar and select Paste at the cursor location.
Click on the Paste button on the Project toolbar to paste at the top left corner of the one-line diagram.
Rules
Paste can be done only in Edit Mode when the Base Data is active.
Paste CANNOT be executed if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
Paste will copy the active Dumpster Cell into the one-line diagram. You can change the active Cell
by opening the Dumpster presentation (from the Project View) and clicking on the Cell ID. When
you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the active Cell.
Dumpster Cells are not deleted after pasting.
You cannot copy part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are pasted.
You can paste the contents of any Dumpster Cell into any Composite Network. However, you cannot
paste Cells that contain buses and branches into Composite Motors.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be pasted at the same time.
When you paste a Dumpster Cell, it gets copied into the one-line diagram with a new ID.
connections, properties, and status of the pasted elements are preserved.
The
Move From Dumpster

Elements can be moved from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram with the same IDs by two methods:
Right-click on the one-line diagram and select Move From.

Click on Edit on the menu bar and select Move From.
9-36
Edit
Rules
Move From Dumpster can be done only in Edit Mode when Base Data is active.
Move CANNOT be done if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
When you move a Dumpster Cell to the one-line diagram, the desired Cell needs to be active and it
gets deleted from the Dumpster after being moved.
You can move any Dumpster Cell you desire by making it active from the Dumpster presentation.
When you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the active
Cell.
You cannot move part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are moved.
You can move any Dumpster Cell into any Composite Network. However, you cannot move Cells
that contain buses and branches into a Composite Motor.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be moved from the Dumpster at the same time.
When you move the contents of a Dumpster Cell into the one-line diagram, the IDs of the moved
elements, along with the connections, status, and properties are preserved.
9-37
Edit
Size
Element Size
When an element is added into the one-line diagram, its default size is 3. To assign it toanother size,
right-click on the element to bring up a menu. Use the Size command to select a size (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5).
The drawing below shows a 3-winding transformer that is changed from size 1 to size 5.
Alternatively, element size can be changed globally by highlighting an area of the one-line diagram and
right-clicking anywhere on the blank space of the presentation, selecting size and picking the new element
size. This procedure is illustrated below.
Bus Size may be controlled independently from all other components by using the Bus Size option in the
menu shown in the figure above.
9-38
Edit
Element Symbols
There are two families of graphic symbols (ANSI & IEC) available for one-line diagram elements. The
symbols of some elements, such as buses, are the same for both standards. Symbols can be assigned for
newly added elements or changed for any existing element.
Symbol of New Elements

When you add elements to the one-line diagram, ETAP uses the Project Standard for the ANSI or IEC
symbol of the new element. Note that the Edit toolbar also reflects the selected Project Standard.
Change Symbol of Existing Elements

Right-click on an element to bring up the menu, use the Symbols command, and then select ANSI or IEC.
Alternatively, element symbols can be changed globally by highlighting an area of the one-line diagram
and right-clicking anywhere on the blank space of the presentation, selecting symbol and picking the new
element size. This procedure is illustrated below.
9-39
Edit
Global Substitution
Alternative symbols are included in the symbols folder under C:\ETAP 700. These symbols can be
viewed and applied from the Symbols Quick Pick editor located under the Tools - Symbols drop down list
from the menu toolbar as shown below:
Alternatively, the global substitution editor can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere on the blank
space of the presentation, selecting symbol and clicking Global Substitution.
Select Global Substitution to activate the Symbols Quick Pick editor. This editor allows the user to
globally substitute alternative symbols for a selected element. Symbols cannot be substituted to a selected
group of elements.
9-40
Edit
Symbols
This section displays a list of all the elements that provide alternative symbols. Each element folder
contains the default ETAP symbols for ANSI and IEC along with alternative element symbol folders.
Select All Sizes

Select to enable symbol substitution for each size and substitute the symbol for all sizes.
Size 1 - 5
Individually select which symbol size to substitute. If size 1 and size 3 are checked, with sizes 2,4, and 5
unchecked, then the symbol substitution will only change the currently used symbols for sizes 1 and 3.
To view the new symbol, make sure the element symbol is on the correct size in the one-line diagram.
New Symbols
Display the symbol that will be used to replace the existing symbol. The five pictures represent the
symbol for each size.
Currently Used
Display the symbol currently used on the one-line diagram. The five pictures represent the symbol for
each size. After Substitute is clicked, the new symbol will replace the previous currently used symbol in
this section.
Project Standard
Displays the standard used for the project. To change the project standard, go to Project - Standards.
9-41
Edit
Change
Select which element standard symbol to replace after substituting a new symbol. To view the new
symbol, make sure the element symbol is on the correct standard in the one-line diagram.
Substitute
Click Substitute to accept the substitution.
OK
Click OK to accept the substitution and close the Symbols Quick Pick editor.
Rotation and Orientation

Element Rotation
To rotate an element, you need to right-click on the element to bring up a menu. Use the Rotate
command and then select one of the rotations (-90, 90, 180, or Orientation). The illustration below shows
the various rotate positions of the top pin of the 3-winding transformer.
Rules
When an element is added, its orientation is based on the system default as follows:
Buses are added at 0 degrees.

Composite networks are added at 90 degrees and do not rotate.
Protective devices are added or inserted based on the orientation of the connections.
All other elements are added at 90 degrees.
9-42
Edit
Element Orientation
To change the orientation of an element, you need to right-click on the element to bring up a menu. Use
the Rotate command, then select Orientation and use one of the orientations (0, 90, 180, or 270). The
illustration below shows the various orientation positions of the top pin of the 3-winding transformer.
9-43
Edit
Element Status
Element Lock/Unlock
To lock / unlock the editor properties of any element; double-click on the element to access its propoerties
editor and click on the lock image to toggle between lock / unlock. When the editor properties are locked,
all engineering data is displayed as read-only expect condition information. The user can change
condition information (service & state) even though the element properties are locked.
The user may also globally change a group of elements or an individual element from Lock to Unlock
status or vice versa without accessing the properties editor by highlighting a group of elements or a single
element, right-clicking anywhere on the blank portion of the one-line diagram and selecting Status
Lock.
9-44
Edit
Element In/Out of Service

To change the state of any device from In Service to Out of Service or vice versa; double-click
on the element to access it properties and toggle between In and Out of Service.
The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of Service element can be edited like an In
Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies.
When the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded
with the deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a deenergized element is grey.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can
set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision Data.
9-45
Edit
Alternatively, you can globally change a group of elements from In Service to Out of Service or vice
versa by highlighting a group of elements, right-clicking anywhere on the blank portion of the one-line
diagram and selecting Status - Service.
Element State
To change the state of any device, double-click on the element to access it properties editor and
select the elements state from the drop-down menu.
State is used to describe the service status of an element. Certain states have flexible service
status like As-Built, New, Future, Moved and Modified can be both In or Out of Service. Certain
states have fixed service status like Removed, Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Other
are out of service states.
9-46
Edit
Alternatively, the user may also change the state of a group of elements or an individual element without
having to access the properties editor by simply highlighting the group or individual element and rightclicking anywhere on the blank portion of the one-line diagram and selecting Status - State.
9-47
Edit
Element Classification
Zone, Area & Region
This functionality allows the user to group buses anywhere in the one-line diagram by area, zone, and /or
region in order to facilite the analysis and result filtering of specified groups. The area, zone, and / or
region assignment is made through the bus editor. Note that ETAP automatically propagates the area
information based on bus area classification.
Alternatively, the user may also define the area, zone and / or region of a single or group of buses by
highlighting the bus or buses and right-clicking anywhere on the blank portion of the one-line diagram
and selecting Classification.
9-48
Edit
Element Alignment
Alignment tools provide functionalities to arrange elements. To align the elements, you need to first select
the elements you want to align. Right-click on the one-line diagram, select alignment and choose from
one of the alignment options. There are 10 total features: Straight Align, Space Align, Align Center, Align
Middle, Align Top, Align Bottom, Align Left, Align Right, Distribute Horizontal, and Distribute Vertical.
The alignment is based on an anchor element. An anchor element is defined upon user selection. The
anchor element is shown with four blue corners surrounding the element.
9-49
Edit
Straight Align Application

Space Align Application
Align Center Application
Align Middle Application
Align Top Application
Align Bottom Application
Align Left Application
Align Right Application
Distribute Horizontal Application
Distribute Vertical Application
Straight Align
Use the straight alignment tool to vertically and horizontally align elements in a straight line. This tool
can be used to align all elements connecting a load to a bus. Select a load as your anchor element and use
the straight align tool to align the protective devices in a straight line between the load and the bus. You
may also select the bus as your anchor element and all the devices will be aligned in a straight line based
on the center of the bus. Also this tool is used to align all elements between two buses. When you have
multiple elements between two buses and they are not aligned, select one element as your anchor element
and align the other elements in a straight line with the selected element.
9-50
Edit
Space Align
Use the space alignment tool to vertically and horizontally align elements in a straight line while creating
an equal space between the elements. Select a load as your anchor element and use the space align tool
to align the protective devices in a straight line with equal spacing between the load and the bus. The
space before the load is double the space between two protective devices. This spacing is used for any
equipment cables that are in your one-line diagram. You may also select the bus as your anchor element
and all the devices will be aligned in a straight line with equal spacing based on the center of the bus.
Also this tool is used to align and space all elements between two buses. When you have multiple
elements between two buses and they are not aligned and spaced properly, select one element as your
anchor element and align and space the other elements in a straight line with the selected element. Using
the bus as anchor element, you may also equally space branches horizontally, as well as vertically, to
create an equal separation between branches on the same bus.
9-51
Edit
Align Center
Select multiple buses and horizontally align them in a straight line, based on the bus used as the anchor
element, using the Horizontal Center Alignment option. You may also use this option to horizontally
align different loads through the center of the anchor element. Two or more elements must be selected to
activate Align Center.
Align Middle
Align elements downstream from the bus in a straight line through the center of the selected elements
based on the anchor element. Also align multiple elements between two buses in a straight line. Two or
more elements must be selected to activate Align Middle.
9-52
Edit
Align Top
Align selected elements horizontally at the top location of the anchor element. Two or more elements
must be selected to activate Align Top.
Align Bottom
Align selected elements horizontally at the bottom location of the anchor element. Two or more elements
must be selected to activate Align Bottom.
9-53
Edit
Align Left
Align selected elements at the left side location of the anchor element. This tool can be used to align
multiple buses to their left most side with reference to the anchor element. It can also be used to align
elements at their bottom location if the elements are rotated to the right. If the elements are rotated to the
left, then it can be used to align the elements to the top side. Two or more elements must be selected to
activate Align Left.
Align Right
Align selected elements at the right side location of the anchor element. This tool can be used to align
multiple buses to their right most side with reference to the anchor element. It can also be used to align
elements at their bottom location if the elements are rotated to the left. If the elements are rotated to the
right, then it can be used to align the elements to the top side. Two or more elements must be selected to
activate Align Right.
9-54
Edit
Distribute Horizontal
Distribute selected elements horizontally with equal spacing in between each element. Use this tool when
you have three or more elements on different lines that need to be equally spaced across from each other.
One example of this is when you have multiple loads coming down from one bus, use this tool to equally
space all the loads.
9-55
Edit
Distribute Vertical
Distribute selected elements vertically with equal spacing in between each element. Use this tool when
you have three or more elements along the same vertical line that need to be equally spaced.
Protective Devices
Protective Device Status
Circuit breakers, fuses, relays, potential transformers, and current transformers are considered protective
devices. However, only switching devices (circuit breakers, switches, contactors, and fuses) have status
(open or closed). Note that when you change the status of a circuit breaker, you are changing it for the
active Configuration Status. When you switch to another configuration, the status may be different. This
statement is also true for the status of motors, MOVs, and loads.
Status can be changed by using the right-click menu, or from the editor.
From the Right-Click menu
Right-click on a circuit breaker in the one-line diagram to open the menu, and use the Closed
command. The check mark ( ) means the status of the circuit breaker is closed. If you click on it,
the check will disappear and the status of the circuit breaker will become Open. For a normally open
protective device, a NO (Normally Open) annotation is shown in the one-line diagram.
To close an open circuit breaker, use the Close command. The check will appear next to Closed in
the menu and NO will disappear from the one-line diagram.
9-56
Edit
Alternatively, you can globally change a group of protective devices from Open to Close or vice versa
by highlighting a group of elements, right-clicking anywhere on the blank portion of the one-line
diagram and selecting Switching Device Status from where you can choose Open or Close.
From the Editor
To change the status of a circuit breaker from its editor, open its editor and click on Closed or Open in
Configuration Status.
9-57
Edit
Mirror
Relays and Current Transformers are the only two protective devices that can be mirrored. Mirror allows
the user to view the relay or current transformer from the reflective view point of its original position. To
mirror a relay or current transformer, right-click on the device and select Mirror.
To mirror both the Relay and Current Transformer you must mirror each one separately.
9-58
Edit
Reverse Polarity
Current Transformer is the only protective device that allows reverse polarity. There are two ways to
reverse the polarity of a current transformer, from the right-click menu or selecting Reverse Polarity in
the info page of the current transformer.
From the Right-Click Menu
Select the Current Transformer, right-click and select Reverse Polarity.
From the Info Page
Double-click on the Current Transformer and check the Reverse Polarity box.
9-59
Edit
Hide Protective Devices (PD)

Protective devices (circuit breakers, fuses, current transformers, switches, contactors, potential
transformers, meters, and relays) can be made invisible for each individual one-line diagram presentation.
For example, one presentation could be your relay view where all protective devices are displayed.
Another presentation might be for load flow studies, and you may not want to show any protective
devices.
Protective devices can be hidden (so that they are invisible in the one-line diagram) individually or in
groups.
Hiding Protective Devices

Select a protective device from the one-line diagram and right-click on it to open the menu, and then click
on Visible. The protective device will become hidden and will be shown as a red diamond on the
connector when the connector is selected. The red diamond is an indicator for hidden elements and
appears whenever you click on the connector.
9-60
Edit
Select one or more protective devices, right-click on the background then select Hide All PDs to hide all
selected protective devices.
9-61
Edit
Rules
A protective device with one end open (a pin not connected to any element) cannot be hidden.
You CANNOT copy a one-line diagram with hidden protective devices.
A potential transformer (PT) can be hidden only if both pins located on the primary (line) side of the
PT are connected to elements.
If a one-line diagram with hidden protective devices is cut or deleted, the protective devices will be
visible in the Dumpster.
Protective devices CANNOT be hidden in the Dumpster.
Protective devices can be hidden or visible regardless of their status.
Showing Protective Devices

Select a connection with a hidden protective device. The hidden protective device will be shown as a red
diamond on the connector. Right-click on the hidden protective device (switch S1) to open the menu and
select Show PD.
9-62
Edit
After selecting one or more connectors with hidden protective devices, right-click anywhere on the oneline diagram where there is no element, then click on Show All PDs.
Sometimes there are two or more hidden protective devices on one connection. If you decrease the length
of the connection, the hidden protective devices will be shown as two small, red diamonds next to each
other. In this case, if you repeat one of the above methods, all the protective devices will be made visible
on this connection. To avoid this, stretch the connection by separating the two elements connected to
these protective devices.
Rules on Show All PDs
For a connection with one or more hidden protective devices, there is no need to select or rubber-band
the connection. Place the cursor on the connection and right-click to open the menu, and then click
on Show All PDs.
If there are any composite networks or motors within the rubber-banded area, the protective devices
inside of these composites will not be affected.
Hide or Show all PDs is specific to each one-line diagram presentation.
9-63
Edit
Group & Ungroup

To group elements; first select the elements, then right-click, and select Group. To ungroup, click on
grouped elements, then right-click, and select Ungroup.
9-64
Edit
Get Template and Add to Template

Get Template
Select pre-developed one-line diagrams to insert into the presentation of the current project. Template
files can be created manually using the Add to OLV Templates icon or can be taken from the ETAP
default templates. Select any .xml template file in the folder and place the one-line diagram template in
the presentation. Select the template using the template IDs and properties and/or the default IDs and
properties. To select a template, right click on the presentation background in edit mode and select Get
From Template.
After Get From Template is selected, choose the template to add to the one-line diagram from the
Template Quick Pick editor.
9-65
Edit
Template
Displays the folder and file names the templates are saved under. Click the file name to view the
template.
IDs
This section allows the user to select whether to use the template with the template IDs or the project
default IDs.
Template
Select Template to place the elements on the presentation with the same IDs as the IDs used when the
template was created. If an element has the same ID as one currently in the one-line diagram the template
ID will show a sequence number. For example, if an element ID in the template is shown as T2 and there
is an element with T2 in the project, the ID for the element from the template will be placed as T2-2.
Defaults
Select Defaults to place the elements on the one-line diagram with default ETAP IDs. These IDs will be
created the same way as dropping any element to the one-line from the Edit toolbars.
Properties
This section allows the user to select whether to use the template with the template properties or the
default properties.
9-66
Edit
Template
Select Template to place the elements on the presentation with the same properties as the properties used
when the template was created.
Defaults
Select Defaults to place the elements on the one-line diagram with default ETAP properties.
Description
Add a description to the template selected.
Save
Click Save to save the description.
Refresh
Changes made from Windows explorer to the template files, such as renaming or deleting, can be updated
in the template quick pick editor by clicking Refresh.
Add to Template
Add any section of the one-line diagram to the template quick pick list. Select the section of the one-line
diagram to add, right click and click Add to Template. Templates can be created and added from base
mode or any revision mode.
Create a template file name and save the file name in the template folder which is located in the ETAP
directory.
9-67
Edit
Nodes & Buses

The connecting point between two branches or a motor and branch requires a bus. If this bus is not a
MCC switchgear, or if you simply do not desire to emphasize the bus on your one-line diagram, change
the symbol of the bus from a bar shape to a dot shape. Note that nodes have separate annotation options
than buses, and power flows and current are not displayed into or out of nodes.
You can use the right-click menu to change a bus to a node or vice versa.
Right-click on a Bus to open the menu and use the Node command.
To change from Node to Bus, right-click on the node in the one-line diagram. Deselect Node to
change to Bus.
Composite Networks
Among ETAPs most powerful features are its composite networks. Composite networks allow you to
graphically nest network elements within themselves to any arbitrary nesting depths, i.e., a composite
network can contain, within itself, other composite networks. This feature provides you with the
capability to construct complex electrical networks while still maintaining a clean, uncluttered diagram
that displays what you wish to emphasize - and the next level of details are still within easy reach of your
mouse.
Composite Networks (PowerStation 2.0 and Prior Release)

These networks have only four pins for external and internal connections. Externally, these pins can only
be connected to buses. Internally, these pins can be connected to branches.
Old Composite Network Network1 with top pin connected to bus Sub3
9-68
Edit
You can replace the old composite networks with new ones by following these steps:
Cut all the elements inside of the old composite network.

Add a new composite network in place of the old one.
Open the new composite network.
Move the elements from the Dumpster into the new composite network.
Composite Networks (PowerStation 3.0 and Newer Release)

Composite networks have up to 20 entry points (pins). These are the top pin, left pins, right pins, and the
bottom pin. Externally, these pins can only be connected to elements. Once a pin gets connected to an
element, it becomes a proxy for that element, i.e., you can connect the internal pin just like you were
connecting the element to other elements.
The external pins and internal pins are the same points. They represent the connecting points of the
composite network to the outside and inside.
The internal pin of the composite network is the starting point for the composite network internal
connection. This element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the
outside system. This connecting point is not considered as an element for studies.
When you open a composite network for the first time, all pins are shown in their relative positions. You
can move these internal pins anywhere inside the composite network. If there is an external connection to
a pin, the ID of the connected element is displayed. If there is no external bus connection, the pins
indicate its position (Left1, Rt5, Bot, etc.). If there is an external connection, the ID of the externally
connected element is displayed.
9-69
Edit
A Composite Network with 12 pins

You can hide the uncounted internal pins by using the right-click menu and selecting Hide Unconnected
Pins.
You may place composite networks anywhere on a one-line diagram or within other composite networks.
These nested composite networks are part of the overall one-line diagram of the system. All studies that
are run include all the elements and connections nested within all composite networks and composite
motors.
9-70
Edit
Note: When you are working with a particular one-line diagram presentation, display attributes of
composite networks and composite motors are saved along with the one-line diagram presentations, i.e.,
composite networks are treated the same as the one-line diagram.
The ID (name) of a composite network can be changed by three methods:
<Ctrl>+Double-Click on the composite network symbol from the one-line diagram.

Open the composite network and double-click on the background where no device exists.
Double-click on it from the Project View (under Components, Networks Composite) to bring up the
Composite Network Editor.
You can change the ID to any unique 12-character name from the Composite Network Editor.
The following steps are used to move a subsystem (group of elements and connections) from the one-line
diagram to a composite network:
Select the desired elements including their connections using rubber band and <Ctrl>+Click.
Press Delete to cut the elements into a Dumpster Cell.
Activate the composite network by double-clicking on it.
Right-click inside the composite network and select Move From.
Metafile
Attach any symbol created with an .emf extension. Many symbols are located in the ETAP directory
under the symbols folder.
9-71
Edit
Composite Motors (AC & DC)

Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements you can
include inside the AC Composite Motors are:
3 Induction Motors
3 Synchronous Motors
1 Induction Motors
Static Loads
MOV
3 Lumped Loads
1 Lumped Loads
Capacitors
Filters
Circuit Breakers
Contactors
Switches, Single Pole Single Throw
Fuses
Current Transformers
Potential Transformers
Voltmeters
Ammeters
Multi-meters
Overcurrent Relays
Frequency Relays
Voltage Relays
Composite Motors
MVSST
Multi-Function Relay
The elements you can include inside the DC Composite Motors are:
DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Lumped Loads
DC Elementary Diagrams
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Fuses
DC Switches, Single Throw
DC Composite Motors
9-72
One-Line Diagram
Edit
The number of levels that you can nest inside composite motors is unlimited.
Composite motors have 2 single pins that can be connected externally to buses only, i.e., directly
connected to buses or indirectly through protective devices. Internally, this pin looks and behaves like the
external bus. Other than this limitation and the types of elements that you can include inside a composite
motor, the user interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as composite networks.
Here is an example of composite motor Mtr C1, which is connected to bus MCC 1 inside the composite
network Sub2.
AC Composite Motor Mtr C1 with four motors, one static load, and one composite motor
Grounding Symbols
Grounding elements like resistors, reactors and transformer grounding can be displayed on the one-line
diagram. These grounding elements are like other AC elements. You can modify existing grounding
connections to create new configurations.
By default, the grounding is displayed as a font as shown below. The grounding font can be displayed via
the Display Options.
9-73
One-Line Diagram
Edit
To display the grounding symbols for transformer or generator go to the grounding page and select
Symbol as the Display Type.
9-74
One-Line Diagram
Edit
Editing Grounding Symbols

Grounding Symbols can be edited just like other elements on the one-line diagram. For example if a
transformer grounded symbol was to be changed to a resistor grounded symbol, you can either change the
selection from the editor or simply edit the grounding symbol as shown below.
9-75
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
9.2 Display Options

ETAP allows different display options for the one-line diagram when you are working in different modes.
Here we describe the display options for Edit Mode. The display options for Study Modes are described
in their respective sections.
9.2.1 AC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC elements.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ID of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
9-76
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
Show Eq. Cable

This checkbox displays or hides equipment cables from the one-line diagram. Equipment cables are
specified as part of the loads. Double-clicking on the equipment cable will bring up the Equipment Cable
Editor.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC elements on the oneline diagram.
Device Type
Generator
Power Grid (Utility)
Motor (Synchronous and Induction)
Load/Panel
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA and HP/kW and kvar/Mvar and Panel Phase
Bus
Node
kA Bracing (Asymm. RMS)

Bus Bracing (Asymm. RMS kA)
CB
Fuse
PT & CT
Rated Interrupting (kA)

Interrupting (kA)
Transformer Rated Turn Ratio
Branch (Impedance and Reactor)

Transformer
Cable(Size)
Line (Size)
Relay
Base MVA and Continuous Amps

Rated kVA/MVA
# of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable - Size
Line Phase Conductor Code
Display Tag for OC, Multi-Function and MTR Relays
9-77
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
kV
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements
on the one-line diagram.
For transformers, the kV checkbox is replaced by %Tap checkbox which displays both transformer rated
kV as well as total % Tap (Fixed Tap + LTC setting) for both 2-winding and 3-winding transformers.
For cables/lines, the kV checkbox is replaced by type checkbox. This checkbox displays the cable/line
conductor type (CU/AL) on the one-line diagram.
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings (continuous or full-load ampere)
of the selected elements on the one-line diagram.
For cables/lines, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display
the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
For transformers, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the Tap checkbox. Select this checkbox to display the
Fixed Tap value on the one-line diagram.
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the winding connection types of the selected elements
For circuit breakers, fuses and switches, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with the N.O. checkbox. When
checked, switching devices that are normally open have a N.O. designation on the one-line diagram.
For relays, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with the Tag checkbox. When checked, it displays user-defined
tag for OC, Multi-Function and Motor Relays.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated impedance of the selected AC elements on
the one-line diagram.
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Branch
(Impedance
and Reactor)
Impedance
Subtransient reactance Xd
Positive Sequence Impedance in % on 100 MVA base (R + j X)
% LRC
Impedance in % (R+jX) or Ohms
9-78
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
Device Type
Transformer
Impedance
Positive Sequence Impedance PS (%Z) for 2-winding transformer
and PS/PT/ST (%Z) for 3-winding transformer
Cable
Line
Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in ohms or per unit length)

Use Default Options

Click on this checkbox to use ETAPs default display options.
AC-DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC and DC elements.
9-79
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC and DC elements on
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC and DC elements
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Battery
Motor
Load
Composite CSD
Converter
Cable (Size)
Rating
AC kVA & DC kW (or MVA/MW)
DC kW & AC kVA (or MW/MVA)
kVA
HP/kW
Ampere Hour
HP/kW
kW/MW
kW/MW
kW/MW
# of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable Size
kV
Click on the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected
elements on the one-line diagram.
For DC elements, voltage units are changed from kV to V. For cables, the Voltage checkbox is replaced
with the Type checkbox. When this checkbox is selected, cable conductor type (CU/AL) is displayed on
A
Click on the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Motor
Load
Composite CSD
Converter
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Input, output, & DC FLA
FLA
FLA
FLA
DC-DC Converter Input/Output FLA
For cables, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the Length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display the
DC cable length (one way) on the one-line diagram.
9-80
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
For CB, Fuse and Switch, the N.O. checkbox displays the N.O annotation on the one-line diagram when
the switching devices are in normally open state.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the cables and impedance
branches on the one-line diagram.
Use Default Options

9-81
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
Colors Page
This page allows you to set up the colors used for displaying annotations on the one-line diagram.
Color Theme
Select the annotation colors specified in the Theme Editor by selecting the appropriate theme name.
Theme
Click this button to access the Theme Editor in order to quickly change the theme colors for annotations.
Annotations
Select the source of colors to be used for displaying annotations. Annotation colors can be used from the
Display Options Editor or from the Theme Editor. By default, ETAP will use user-defined (Display
Option Editor) colors to display annotation colors. Switch to Global Theme to use the selected theme
annotation colors.
9-82
One-Line Diagram
Display Options
Colors
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
9-83
One-Line Diagram
Default Display Options
9.3 Default Display Options

ETAP allows different display options for the one-line diagram in different modes. These are the display
options for Edit Mode. Display options for Study Modes are described in their respective sections.
Default display options are set by selecting the Defaults Menu Display Options One-Line Diagram.
9-84
One-Line Diagram
Annotation Font
9.4 Annotation Font

From the One-Line Diagram toolbar, select Default, and then click on Fonts to arrive at the Annotation
Font dialog box. This dialog box allows for the customization of font type, style, and size of the text used
to ID and describes elements on the one-line diagram.
ID
Select the font type, style, and size to display all IDs selected in display options.
Ratings
Select the font type, style, and size to display all ratings selected in display options.
Voltage
Select the font type, style, and size to display all voltages selected in display options.
Impedance
Select the font type, style, and size to display all impedance selected in display options.
Current
Select the font type, style, and size to display all currents selected in display options.
Delta-Y
Select the font type, style, and size to display all connection types selected in display options.
9-85
One-Line Diagram
Annotation Font
Bus kV & A
Select the font type, style, and size to display study results selected in their respective display options
such as bus operating voltages for load flow studies and bus short-circuit currents for short-circuit
analysis.
Branch
Select the font type, style, and size to display all branch flows selected in their respective display options.
9-86
One-Line Diagram
Result Annotation
9.5 Result Annotation

In the ETAP one-line diagram, the direction of the arrows for power flow results matches the positive
direction of the real power flows (kW). In the output reports, however, the printed power flow values
indicate flows from the From Bus to the To Bus.
For 3-winding transformers, the arrow indicates the positive direction of the real power flow (kW), i.e.,
positive kW can be going into or coming out from each winding. However, in the output reports the
printed power flow values indicate flows from the From Bus to the To Bus.
A 3-winding transformer may be represented as a star or a delta circuit in the calculation modules.
In the ANSI Short-Circuit Device Duty calculation, a 3-winding transformer is represented as a star
circuit. A center bus is added to the system that takes the transformer ID as its bus ID and the primary
winding kV as its nominal kV. In this case, the output report prints the short-circuit current contributions
between the three terminal buses and the center bus.
Contributions
=========================
From Bus
To Bus
ID
ID
------------ -----------Bus P
Total
XFMR 1
Bus S
Bus T
Bus P
XFMR 1
XFMR 1
For the above example, the following fault current contributions are printed for a fault at Bus P.
From Bus
To Bus
ID
ID
------------ -----------Bus P
Bus S
Bus P
Bus T
Bus S
Bus T
In all the other calculation modules, a 3-winding transformer is represented as a delta circuit. The printed
power flows (or currents) are reported between two of the three terminal buses of the transformer.
9-87
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
9.6 Text Box

Custom text can be entered directly on the one-line diagram by using the Text Box feature. The text box
eliminates the need to use OLE Objects when you add notes to the one-line diagram. Many device
properties can also be displayed directly in the text box and are dynamically linked to the device property
in the database.
Text boxes can be added to the following ETAP Views:
One-Line View (OLV)
Underground Raceway View
Star View
To drop a text box on one of the views, select the text box from the Project toolbar as shown.
Double-click on the text box to access the Text Box Editor.
The text box includes two pages of properties:
Text Page
Format Page
9-88
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
Text Page
Using the text box you can define custom text as well as properties to be displayed from the ETAP
database for any element on the single line.
Selection
This section is used to select the element and its properties to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Device Type
Select the device type or element type from the drop-down list. Note that this list will only display those
types of devices that exist on the one-line diagram. Elements in the Dumpster will not be displayed in this
list.
Device ID
Based on the Device Type selected, ETAP will list all available device IDs that exist on the one-line
diagram.
Properties
The properties in this list are displayed based on the Device Type and Device ID selected in the Text Box
Editor. Using these properties it is possible to display engineering data stored inside the device editor.
ETAP ensures that once the property is selected in the text box, it will always be dynamically linked with
the text box. The illustration below shows selection of some of the properties for a 2-Winding
Transformer.
9-89
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
Click OK to close the text box and save changes, or Apply to save changes but keep the editor open. The
following text will be displayed in the text box.
9-90
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
If changes are made to the transformer properties selected, the text box will be dynamically updated as
shown below.
Note that for checkboxes or radio buttons the database returns either a value of 1 or 0. A value of 1
indicates yes or available, while a value of 0 indicates no or not available.
Multiplier
When a property is selected from the database to be displayed in the text box, the multiplier field can be
used to manipulate the data being retrieved from that property. For example, for the MW property, if the
data stored in the database is in MW units then you can use a multiplier of 1000 to display the same data
in kW units.
Precision
Move up or down to either increase or decrease the precision of the data being retrieved from the
database.
Insert
Click to display the selected property inside the text box. The property will be inserted at the location of
the cursor within the preview text region. Text
Custom text or data from database property can be entered or setup in this section.
Editing Tools
Basic editing tools are available for the text region in this editor. They include Font, Cut, Copy, and Paste
9-91
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
Format Page
This page may be used to control the display format for the text box. Text box border, shape, margins,
and colors can be controlled from this page.
Fill
Color
A color palette is available in the drop-down list to select a fill color for the text box.
Transparent
Select to apply transparency to the text box fill color.
9-92
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
Transparency Level
Select to adjust the amount of transparency for the fill color.
9-93
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
Border
Select this to change the border style including color, line style, line thickness, and line shape.
9-94
One-Line Diagram
Text Box
Internal Margin
This is the padding or spacing the text box will have when text is added to it.
9-95
Chapter 10
Menu Bars
ETAP menu bars provide a list of menu options that include drop-down lists of commands. Menu
commands with an arrow icon pointing to the right denote the existence of a drop-down menu that offers
access to additional commands. For example, select the Project menu option and then select Settings to
view more menu options, as in the example below.
Menu Bars
Overview
The contents of the menu bars will vary depending on the type of window or view that is active. Five
different types of menu bars exist in ETAP, as listed below:
Start-Up Menu Bar
One-Line Diagram Menu Bar
Project View Menu Bar
U/G Raceway System Menu Bar
Dumpster Menu Bar
10-2
Menu Bars
Start-Up
10.1 Start-Up Menu Bar
The Start-Up menu bar is displayed when you start ETAP and have not yet opened a project file. This
menu bar contains a limited number of menu options.
The Start-Up menu bar offers the following menu options:
File
View
Help
Open a new or existing project file

Show or hide Status Bar (help line) and Message Log
ETAP Help
10.1.1 File Menu
Select the File menu option from the Start-Up menu bar to create new project files, open existing project
files, or to exit ETAP.
The File menu offers the following commands:
New Project
Open Project
Recently opened file list
Exit
Creates a new project file

Opens an existing project file
List of recently opened ETAP projects
Exits and closes ETAP
10-3
Menu Bars
Start-Up
10.1.2 View Menu
Select the View menu option from the Start-Up menu bar to show or hide the Status Bar (help line) at the
bottom of your screen where the help message, error message, and revision data are displayed.
10-4
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2 One-Line Diagram Menu Bar

The One-Line Diagram menu bar is displayed when a One-Line Diagram presentation is active. The OneLine Diagram menu bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options.
The One-Line Diagram menu bar offers the following menu options:
File
Edit
View
Project
Library
Rules
Defaults
Tools
RevControl
Real-Time
Window
Help
File management and conversions

Cut, copy, and paste
Display different toolbars
Project standards and settings
Library access and management
Set engineering rules and best practices
Fonts and default settings of elements
Global sizing/symbols and element grouping
Base and revision data control
EMS, ILS, Tag File, and Active X operations
Window Management
Help access
10-5
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.1 File Menu

The File menu option on the One-Line Diagram menu bar provides commands to open/close project files,
log off/on users, save/copy project files, print/print preview one-line diagrams, convert one-line diagrams
to WMF/EMF files, convert ETAP DOS or CSV files to ETAP files, and export to and import from the
clipboard. The File Menu also has number of capabilities for Data Exchange between ETAP and other
applications such as MS Excel, etc. The File menu for One-Line Diagram offers the following commands:
New Project
Open Project
Close Project
Log Off
Save Project
Copy Project To
Save Library
Print Setup
Print Preview
Print
Batch Print
Data Exchange
Convert Old
Relay
Exit
Create a new project file

Open an existing project file
Close an opened project
Log off or onto an open project as a different user or change access levels
Save the project file
Save an open project to a specified file name and continue to function within
original project
Save Library file
Select a page layout as well as a printer and printer connection
Display the one-line diagram on-screen as it will appear when printed
Print the one-line diagram
Print all or any number of views that belong to a presentation at once. Views
consist of the main one line diagram and nested composite networks and
composite motors.
Access number of data exchange functions to import / export data with
ETAP
Option is provided when relay elements created in ETAP version 3.0.2 and
earlier are detected. This allows the migration of the old overcurrent relays
to the new relay format.
Close project file and exit ETAP
10-6
Menu Bars
Data Exchange
Export DXF
Export Metafile
Export Protective Device
Import Object (OLE)

Import ETAP DOS
Import CSV File
Import IEEE Format
Import Raw Format
Import PowerPlot
Clipboard
Project Merge
XML File
Access Database
Excel Fixed Format
One-Line Diagram
Export your one line diagram directly to AutoCAD DXF format

Convert the one-line diagram into a WMF or EMF file format
Export protective devices used in the active ETAP project to
Excel
Insert an OLE object onto the one line diagram
Import an ETAP DOS file into a ETAP Windows project file
Import a comma separated file (CSV) into a ETAP project file
Import a file to ETAP using IEEE text format
Import a file into ETAP using RAW text format
Import PowerPlot project and convert it to ETAP Star
Import or Export selected one-line diagram elements and
properties between multiple ETAP project files
Compare and merge projects by assigning a source project
(master) and creating sync projects (copies) in which edits are
made and then synced back to source project
Import or Export project database via XML format
Import or Export the project configuration status between MS
Access database
Import from a MS Access database
Import MS Excel file using fixed column types specified by
ETAP
10-7
Menu Bars
Excel Open Format
Export Load Ticket
e-DPP
SmartPlant Electrical (SPEL)
E-Mail Project Files
One-Line Diagram
Import MS Excel file with user-defined or custom column types
and arrangement
Generate equipment datasheets from an ETAP project file using
MS Excel format
Import from an e-DPP exported MS Access database
Import or Export project data or cable data between ETAP and
SPEL
Zip and E-mail, FTP, or store your project files to a remote
location in order to share it with other engineers or ETAP
technical support
New Project
To start a new project, click on File and select New Project. This opens the Create New Project File
dialog box, as shown below.
From the dialog box, enter a Project File Name with a maximum of 30 characters that is suitable for your
project. For more information about this dialog box, see Create a New Project File.
10-8
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
For the purpose of this manual, name the new project Test and click on OK. This will open the User
Information dialog box. For more details on User Information, see User Access Manager.
When you create a new project, ETAP automatically gives you all access level privileges. Project Editor
provides you with full access to all editors including Base Data, Revision Data, and Libraries.
Administrative functions such as adding and deleting users to the project are not available to a Project
Editor. To access these functions, you must log on as Administrator.
We recommend that you do not require a password for projects if you are a single user of ETAP or
security is not an issue. You can change the password requirement at any time.
If you forget your user name or your password, log on as Admin and type password as the password. We
recommend that you do not change the password for Admin unless you record it for later use. Do not
forget your User Name or password, as this may be the only way you can access this project.
Enter your user name (maximum 20 characters) in the User Name field. User Name is a mandatory field.
For the purpose of this manual, enter OTI, and then click on OK. ETAP will create a one-line diagram
presentation named OLV1. You can start adding elements and editing the one-line diagram. Each time a
new project is created, the presentation displayed in the window will be named OLV1. You can change
the name of the one-line diagram presentation at any time.
10-9
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Open Project
You can open an existing project file by clicking on Open Project in the File menu. You can also select
Open Projects from the menu by right-clicking on the project name in the Project View.
If you are editing a project and you wish to open an existing project, you will be prompted to save the
current project.
In order to open an existing project while you are editing a project, the currently opened project must be
in Edit or Study mode. You CANNOT save or close a project when you are in Revision Data. You must
first change to Base Data.
An example project file is included in the ETAP installation program named Example.OTI. To open this
file, click on Open Project from the File menu. This will open the Open Project File dialog box. Locate
the folder in the ETAPS directory called Example. The file Example.OTI is located in this folder. Select
the file and click on Open.
The example project file contains a sample project complete with a one-line diagram and sample values
entered into the component editors. Performing the actions described in the remainder of the manual will
help you to become familiar with ETAP.
Note that you can also drag and drop the .OTI file onto the ETAP window. If no ETAP project is open the
ETAP will attempt to open the project dropped graphically. If an ETAP project is already open then
ETAP will attempt to close the existing project and open the project that was dropped graphically.
10-10
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Open Project File Dialog Box

The following options allow you to specify which file to open:
Look in
Select a network, drive, and directory, where the ETAP project file that you want to open is located.
File Name
Type or select the file name you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List
Files of Type box.
Files of Type
ETAP project files have an .OTI extension.
Close Project
A project can be closed when you are in Edit or Study mode. However, you CANNOT close a project file
when you are in Revision Data. A project must be in Base Data. It is recommended that you save the
project prior to closing it. Closing a project can be done by clicking on Close Project in the File menu or
on Close in the pop-up menu by right-clicking on the project name in the Project View.
Before a project file is closed, you are promoted to save the project file.
If you click on Yes, all data is saved when the project is closed.
Save Project
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or Study mode. If you have logged on as a Project
Editor or Base Editor, you CANNOT save a project while the project is in a revision level of data. Saving
a project can be done by clicking on Save Project in the File menu or on Save in the menu by rightclicking on the project name in the Project View.
You can schedule a project to save for any pre-defined time interval. This may be done from the Project
Options dialog box, as shown below. To open the Project Options dialog box, click on Project in the
menu bar and click on Options or click on Options from the menu by right-clicking on the project name
in the Project View.
10-11
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Click on AutoSave and enter a time interval (maximum 999 minutes). The number 30 has been entered
here as an example. Your current project will be saved automatically every 30 minutes from this point on.
If you have selected Prompt before saving project in this dialog box, ETAP will request your
confirmation before saving the project. This is required if you want to save the connections between
elements in your database.
When AutoSave is active, the following dialog box appears:
10-12
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
The AutoSave Project dialog box allows you to:

Change the scheduled autosave time period
Disable autosave
Save element connections in the project database
Note: Every time the program autosaves your project, it will backup to your project name~~ file.
Copy Project To
This command makes a copy of the project file but does not open that copy. The copied file does not
contain the passwords and user information of the original project file. A copy of the project file can be
made only when you are in Edit mode or Study mode. You CANNOT make a copy of your project if you
are not in Base Data. You may copy a project file to a new project file name or to a previously saved
project file name. In order to copy the project file to a new one, click on Copy Project To from the File
menu, as shown below:
From this dialog box, select a directory for the new file name. Enter the new name Example-1 or a
previously saved project file name for the new File Name, and click on Save. A message will confirm
that the copy has been successfully saved. The new project file name will be saved as Example-1.oti.
10-13
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Note: ETAP uses file transitioning for saving project files. When you copy projects, ETAP prompts you
with the following dialog box confirming your request to save the project file before copying.
Select Yes to save the project file and then copy it to a new name. Select No to copy the project file
without saving.
Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, and Batch Print

ETAP allows you to preview and print/plot one-line diagrams, underground raceway systems, text output
reports, motor starting plots, transient stability plots, and cable temperature plots. For more details on
Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, Batch Print, and Plot capabilities, see the Printing and Plotting chapter.
Print Setup
Every one-line diagram view, including composite networks and composite motors, has their own
individual print setup and print options. This menu bar item opens the Print Setup dialog box for the
active view.
10-14
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog box allows you to change the printer setup, options, print size (zooming), and
print adjustment (moving the OLV graphic up, down, left, and right). All settings are only associated with
the displayed view and are saved for that view.
Print
This item will display the Print dialog box for the active view. You can change the Setup and Options
from this dialog box.
10-15
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Batch Print
Batch printing allows you to print all views associated with one presentation. Each one-line diagram
(including composite networks and motors) will be printed based on the last saved print setup, options,
and zooming. You can globally select or deselect all composite networks, composite AC motors, and
composite DC motors.
10-16
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Export DXF File

The Export DXF File command can be invoked by going to the File \ Data Exchange\ Export DXF.
When this function is invoked, ETAP will create a one-line diagram file in AutoCAD (Release 2000)
DXF format. The DXF file is compatible with AutoCAD or any other software supporting DXF format
file.
ETAP View
AutoCAD View
The Export DXF File command exports all ETAP elements including their annotations as displayed
on the one-line diagram. The DXF file when opened in AutoCAD represents an exact replica of the oneline diagram as seen in ETAP.
Note: When opening the exported DXF file in AutoCAD, it is necessary to Zoom Extents to view the
schematic.
10-17
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
The location and name of the DXF file is specified in the Save As dialog box as shown below:
Composite Networks and Composite Motors

Separate DXF files are created for each composite motor and composite network in the one-line diagram
along with a DXF file for the main one-line diagram (henceforth referred as the Main DXF file).
Therefore, a set of DXF files may be created for an ETAP project. The name of the DXF files
representing composite networks and composite motors in a one-line diagram depends on the name used
to save the Main DXF file. The location of the DXF files representing composite networks and composite
motors in a one-line diagram is the same as the location of the Main DXF file.
For example, consider the case when an ETAP one-line diagram has a composite network Net1 and a
composite motor CM1, which in turn have a composite network Net2 and composite motor CM2. If the
Main DXF file is saved as C:\Example\Main.DXF, the name and location of the DXF files representing
composite networks and composite motors will be:
C:\Example\Main_Net1.DXF
C:\Example\Main_CM1.DXF
C:\Example\Main_Net1_Net2.DXF
C:\Example\Main_CM1_CM2.DXF
10-18
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
It may not be necessary to know the location of all the DXF files created for an ETAP project as the
composite motors and composite networks in the DXF files contain hyperlinks. The composite motor and
composite network hyperlinks point to the DXF files representing the one-line diagram within them. Use
the following steps for opening composite motor / composite network DXF files from another DXF file:
Select the composite motor / composite network

Right-click on the selected composite motor /
composite network
Click on the Open command in the Hyperlink
menu
The ETAP DXF Converter gives you an option to

create DXF files for one or more composite networks
and/or motors in addition to the main one-line
diagram.
10-19
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Presentation, Configuration
The DXF file created by the Export DXF File command in ETAP represents the active Presentation
and Configuration. For example if a relay is hidden in the active presentation it is not displayed in the
DXF file. If the status of a breaker is open in the active configuration, it is shown as open in the exported
DXF file.
Note: For small size projects, dashed and dotted lines in the ETAP presentation set from the theme editor
will remain as dashed and dotted lines in the exported .DXF files; however, for larger ETAP projects,
they will appear as solid lines in the exported .DXF files.
Analysis Results
The results of an analysis performed in ETAP may be exported to the DXF File. To export the results,
perform the analysis and display the results on the one-line diagram as required, use the Export DXF
File command while the results are displayed on the one line diagram. The DXF file(s) created will
include the results as displayed on the ETAP one-line diagram.
10-20
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
For example in order to export power flows and the voltage profile perform the load flow analysis before
using the Export DXF File command. Note: you may use the Display Options editor to select the
information displayed on the ETAP one-line diagram and hence the exported DXF files.
Conversion Progress
The time taken to export an ETAP one-line diagram to a DXF file is proportional to the number of
elements in the one-line diagram, especially on the number of composite networks and composite motors.
During the process of conversion, an icon is displayed in the System Tray.
10-21
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Grounding Grids
When you convert an ETAP file into a DXF file, the buses are hidden behind the ground grids. The figure
below shows the DXF file with the buses hidden behind the ground grids.
The buses can be made visible by performing the following steps in AutoCAD. Select the Ground Grid.
Click on the Tools menu, select Display Order, and then select Send to Back.
10-22
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Export Metafile
ETAP can convert the contents of one-line diagrams into disk-based Enhanced Metafiles (EMF format) or
16-bit Windows Metafiles (WMF format). To convert a one-line diagram into a metafile, select the
Export Metafile option.
The Enhanced Metafile format (EMF) improves the drawing scalability and accuracy by adding more
extensive information into the metafile header along with new drawing instructions. EMF files can be
used for programs such as Microsoft Word. The Windows Metafile (WMF) consists of deviceindependent drawing instructions that help Windows to recreate the drawing element and display it on
any display device such as AutoCAD.
Metafile Type
Select the metafile format (EMF, WMF, or both). You must specify at least one format for the conversion
to work. The default setting is Enhanced Metafile format only.
Instruction Set
Select between GDI (Graphic Device Interface) and GDI+. The GDI is responsible of displaying the
graphics in screen and printer. Windows XP and Windows 2003 use GDI+ (successor of GDI). If the
graphics should be displayed in operating systems other that the ones mentioned above, GDI should be
used, otherwise GDI+ should be used.
Element Range
You can convert all elements in the one-line diagram (including OLE objects) or only elements that you
have selected. The default setting is All Elements.
10-23
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Convert Viewable Area Only

Convert only the area of the one-line diagram that can be seen in the one-line view.
Draw Background
This option allows you to select to include the background of the presentation to the metafile.
ETAP will ask you to specify the path location where the metafile is on your system.
Import WMF Files into AutoCAD

AutoCAD can only support the Windows Metafiles format. To create an AutoCAD drawing from a WMF
file exported from ETAP, make sure that both options Wire Frame and Wide Line in the AutoCAD menu
File/Options/WMF Options are unchecked. To import the metafile into AutoCAD, select the File/Import
menu item and browse or type the name of the WMF metafile complete with path location. Note: the
resolution of the WMF files gets better as you zoom in the one-line diagram.
10-24
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Export Protective Device

Extract and get a listing of all protective devices in your ETAP project. The extracted information
includes Device ID, Type, Manufacturer, Model, and other information pertaining to the protective device
type. The extracted information is exported to a Microsoft Excel file which is placed in the ETAP project
directory.
10-25
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Import Object (OLE)

This command inserts an OLE object onto the one-line diagram. This command runs the OLE Insert
Object dialog box.
The OLE Insert Object dialog box displays a list of all the OLE objects registered on your computer. You
may select any object from the list and specify whether to create a new object or use an object that resides
in a file (i.e., a Microsoft Word document). Additionally, you may specify whether to have the object
display an icon for itself in place of its normal visual appearance. The following one-line diagram
includes these OLE objects: a Microsoft Excel chart, Microsoft Word document (legend), and a WordPad
text.
10-26
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
After you have selected the OLE object you wish to insert, ETAP checks the registry to determine if the
selected object is a programmable object. If it is, ETAP will automatically recommend that you NOT
insert a programmable object into ETAP.
Note: inserting a programmable OLE object into ETAP may lead to unpredictable results.
Import ETAP DOS

ETAP provides a tool to convert and insert ETAP DOS files or comma-separated files (CSV) into the
ETAP project that is currently open. The conversion can be initiated from the File Menu or from the
Project View by right-clicking on the project name. When you choose to convert ETAP DOS files, the
Select ETAP DOS Project File to Convert dialog box will be displayed, which lists all the ETAP DOS
project files with a .gen extension, as shown below. You can type a file name in the File Name field and
then click on the Open button or double-click on a file name in the list to start the conversion.
10-27
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Ensure that the DOS files are located in a path with folder names of 8 characters or less. Also, the path
should not include any illegal characters such as a space, a dash, or a period. After selecting the DOS file
for conversion, a dialog box such as the one shown below will be displayed, allowing you to specify
options for bus coordinates and motor models.
10-28
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Bus Coordinates
There are two options: using the existing X and Y coordinates assigned in ETAP DOS files or letting
ETAP automatically assign new X and Y coordinates. In the current version of ETAP, only the first
option is available.
Note: If you have never produced a one-line diagram from the DOS version of ETAP, the X and Y
coordinates for buses and branches are set equal to one (1). In order for the ETAP DOS program to assign
the coordinates for all the buses, you need to open the file from ETAP DOS, access the Overall One-Line
module from the Analysis menu, press F3 to enter the Graphical Bus Editor, and then press F9 to save the
X and Y coordinates assigned by the ETAP DOS program.
Design Class for Motor Models

Enter a Design Class from one of the existing Design Classes for motor models. You can select from:
HV-HS-HT
HV-HS-LT
HV-LS-HT
HV-LS-LT
LV-HS-HT
LV-HS-LT
LV-LS-HT
LV-LS-LT
Note: the existing Motor Model Library of ETAP includes Low Voltage, High Voltage, Low Speed, High
Speed, Low Torque, and High Torque models.
The conversion from ETAP DOS files to an ETAP project is implemented in two steps:
Conversion from ETAP DOS files to comma separated files

Conversion from the comma separated files to ETAP project files
In the first step of conversion, the program checks for errors in the ETAP DOS files that may obstruct the
second step of conversion. If any errors are detected, they are printed in a file named ETAP2CSV.ERR,
which is located in the directory where the ETAP DOS files are placed. A message box will be posted to
review the error file first, as shown below. If you click on the Yes button, the error file will automatically
be opened for you to view. If you click on the No button, the conversion process will proceed with the
second step, but there may be errors that will halt the conversion or cause invalid results. It is strongly
suggested that you review the error message file first.
If no error is detected in the first step, the conversion from comma-separated files to ETAP continues,
creating elements and converting engineering properties in the process. If the ETAP DOS file contains
10-29
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
both Bus Editor data and Load Schedule data, there are two sources for motor and static load data and
they may not be in agreement with each other. In this case, the conversion program will open a dialog box
allowing you to specify the source for motor and static load data, as shown below.
The default option is to convert load data from the Load Schedule, because it contains more detailed data.
If you select this option, each motor and static load will be converted to ETAP. If there is only one motor
or a static load connected to a bus, a load will be created and connected to the bus. Otherwise, a
composite motor will be created and all the loads will be contained in the composite motor.
When the Load Schedule option is selected, although motors and static loads in the Bus editor may be in
conflict with the Load Schedule data, they are disregarded. Note: a motor in the Bus editor, in most cases
an equivalent motor for a group of motors in the Load Schedule, and the dynamic model and load model
entered in the Machine editor may not be valid for any of the motors in the group. This model information
is not converted. If motors in the Load Schedule do not have dynamic motors and load models, you will
need to enter the dynamic motor and load model information for each motor. Dynamic models are
required for dynamic motor acceleration studies.
If the second option is selected, a motor will be created for each motor in the Bus editor, the typical
nameplate data will be used, and the dynamic motor and load models (specified from the Machine editor)
will be converted. The percent loading of each motor will be set to match the total bus motor load
according to its rating. If the bus motor loading is nonzero, but there is no machine number for motors
connected to this bus, a motor will be created in ETAP using typical data to match the bus motor loading.
If there is a static load in the ETAP DOS Bus editor, a static load will also be created to match the bus
static load.
Import CSV File

CSV project files are comma-separated files. Contact OTI to provide you with the complete format of the
CSV file. Once you choose to convert CSV files, the Select CSG Files to Convert dialog box will be
displayed which lists all the files with a .csg extension, as shown below. You can type a file name in the
File Name field and then click on the Open button, or double-click on a file name in the list to start the
conversion.
10-30
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Import IEEE Format

You can import IEEE formatted files into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and
then select Import IEEE Format File. Type in the name of the file you wish converted. Refer to Chapter
40 under section Import IEEE Format for detailed information.
Import RAW Format

You can import raw data files into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and then
select Import Raw Format. Select the raw data file that you wish to convert. Note that the Raw data
10-31
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
conversion is applicable for Version 29 and Version 30 Raw data files. For converting a version other
than these contact Operation Technology, Inc. Refer to Chapter 40 under section Import RAW Format for
detailed information.
Import PowerPlot
You can import the TCCs in an existing PowerPlot project to the ETAP project. From the ETAP File
menu, point to Data Exchange, and then select Import PowerPlot Project.
If a library file has not been associated with the ETAP project prior to using the Import PowerPlot Project
command, ETAP will ask you to select a library file, when the PowerPlot TCCs are imported into an
ETAP project that was associated with user modified ETAP 4.x or lower version library.
Note: the Import PowerPlot Project utility requires an ETAP 5.x library file containing information
related to time current characteristics of protective devices. Lower versions of ETAP library files do not
have this information.
10-32
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Once a library file is specified, the following editor is displayed.
Select PowerPlot Project

Select the PowerPlot project file, which has the TCCs to be imported into the ETAP project. PowerPlot
project files have the extension .PLT.
Select Location of Project Reports

Select the location of PowerPlot project reports. PowerPlot project reports are CSV files and may be
imported in PowerPlot by selecting the Project Report command from the Tools menu. PowerPlot project
reports are required for importing PowerPlot TCCs into ETAP.
STAR TCC Labels - Label ID

Select this option to show only the ID of different devices on the TCCs in ETAP STAR.
STAR TCC Labels - Label ID + Setting

Select this option to show the ID as well as settings of different devices on the TCCs in ETAP STAR.
10-33
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
System Frequency
Select the system frequency used in the ETAP project. This is used to convert seconds to cycles for time
delays.
Fuse Short-Circuit Ratings Update using ETAP 5.x values

This option is applicable when PowerPlot TCCs are imported into an existing ETAP project. Selecting
this option will overwrite the existing Fuse Short-Circuit ratings with values from ETAP 5.x library. This
will be applied for all fuses in the ETAP project with ID same as that in PowerPlot project.
Fuse Short-Circuit Ratings Keep existing values

this option will preserve the existing Fuse Short-Circuit ratings in ETAP project.
CT Ratios Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot

this option will update the CT ratios of CTs connected to relays with the CT ratio specified on the relay /
motor relay editor in PowerPlot. Note that the motor relay editor does not specify the CT secondary
rating; hence this value is not updated.
CT Ratios Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio

this option will preserve the existing CT ratios in the ETAP project.
Importing Time
The time for importing the TCCs in PowerPlot project into an ETAP project depends on the number of
TCCs and the number of devices in the PowerPlot project. It may range from a minute for small projects
to 25 minutes for large PowerPlot projects with 150 or more TCCs.
Motor / Cable / Transformers

If motors, cables, and transformers with IDs the same as in PowerPlot project exist in an ETAP project,
data in ETAP project for these devices will not be updated from PowerPlot project, since PowerPlot does
not have detailed information.
10-34
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Clipboard
This option allows the exporting and importing of a selected one-line diagram to and from the clipboard
as a method of merging files. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and then select
Clipboard.
Export to Clipboard
You can export an entire one-line diagram, or a portion of it, to the clipboard as a method to temporarily
save it so that it can be merged into other project files or the same project file.
ETAP only exports the active status and revision data (engineering properties). Before you select the
elements from the one-line diagram, choose the configuration status and revision data that you wish to
have associated with the exported one-line diagram, highlight all of the elements you wish to export to the
clipboard, and then click on Export to Clipboard selection in the File Menus Data Exchange pull down
menu.
The elements exported into the clipboard include elements inside of composite networks and composite
motors, as well as their properties and status.
Import from Clipboard

Importing from the clipboard is another method used to merge ETAP project files. Before you can import
from the clipboard, the export action into the clipboard procedure must have completed. To import the
content of the clipboard, open the ETAP project file you wish to have the exported elements imported
into, and then click on the Import from clipboard. The imported elements include elements inside of
composite networks and composite motors.
10-35
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
The imported elements can now be utilized just like any other elements. ETAP checks for the uniqueness
of elements ID. If an element with the same ID exists, the ID of the importing element will be appended
with -1 or other integers to make it unique.
Merging ETAP Projects

Individual project files within ETAP can be merged together. The process involves the following steps:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Open the ETAP project file.

Export (temporarily save) the project file or a portion thereof to the clipboard.
Close the first project file and open the next project file.
Import (merge) the temporarily saved project file into the second project file.
10-36
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Project Merge
Project merge provides the capability of comparing and merging projects being worked on
simultaneously. A source project (master) is created along with the sync project (copy) in which
comparisons or changes are made. Finally, the sync project changes are merged back to the source
project.
Master/Source Project: is supposed to be a project which all the copy projects will be merged into it.
Copy/Sync Project: is a copy retrieved from the master project in order to make required changes which
at the end can be merged into master project
XML File
This option allows the exporting and importing of project database files via XML format. In order to
perform the transfer of files in this format, it is necessary to have a PDE activation code. Please contact
OTI to obtain further information concerning this process.
This option allows the user to export or import a portion of the project configuration to a new project. The
user may also export or import the complete project configuration. From the ETAP File menu, point to
Data Exchange and then select Status Configuration.
Access Database
You can import data from a MS Access database into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data
Exchange and then select Access Database. Refer to Chapter 43 DataX MS Access for more detailed
information regarding importing data from a Microsoft Access database.
Excel Fixed Format

You can import data from a MS Excel file into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange
and then select Excel Fixed Format. Refer to Chapter 43 DataX Excel Fixed Format for more
detailed information regarding importing data from a fixed format excel sheet.
Excel Open Format

Import generic Microsoft Excel files with data arranged in columns for synchronous motors, induction
motors, lumped loads, static loads two-winding transformers, cables and buses. Refer to Chapter 43
DataX Excel Open Format for more detailed information regarding importing data from an Open format
excel sheet.
Export Load Ticket

Load ticket is a method to generate equipment data from an ETAP project file in a flexible excel format.
e-DPP
You can import data from an e-DPP exported MS Access database into ETAP. From the ETAP File
menu, point to Data Exchange and then select e-DPP. Refer to Chapter 43 DataX e-DPP for more
10-37
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
SmartPlant Electrical
You can import SPEL project data as an XMF file into ETAP or export ETAP project data for use in
SPEL. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and then select SmartPlant Electrical. Refer to
Chapter 43 DataX SmartPlant Electrical for more detailed information regarding transferring project
data between ETAP and SPEL.
E-Mail Project Files

This ETAP function collects licensing, project, and computer information when invoked. It collects the
information into a zip file and offers you options to send the collected data to a remote destination via
e-mail or FTP. Alternatively, you may save the collected information to a disk file.
When this function is invoked, ETAP creates a zip file containing by default the following files (if
present):
*.oti
*.mdb
*.ldb
*.pso
*.cpx
*.grd
**.lib
Operation Technology, Inc. interface file

Project database
Database
OLE objects container file (only if you have OLE elements in the project)
Cable pulling project file (only when cable pulling presentation has been created)
Ground grid design project file (only when Ground Grid Presentation has been created)
Connected project library
Where * = your project name and ** can be any name given to the connected library.
In addition, ETAP also includes a *.oli file. This file includes licensing and computer information. This
file also includes all contents of ETAPS initialization file (etaps.ini) and is intended to help OTI provide
better user support and trouble shooting, as well as data collecting and reporting.
This file will be created in your Project directory and also included in the zip file. For security purposes,
the project .oli OLI file is encrypted.
ETAP provides options that allow the user to exclude the library file and/or output reports to minimize the
size of the generated zipped file. See Send Project Files Dialog for more details.
Send ETAP Project Files Dialog Box

The Send ETAP Project Files dialog box is invoked by selecting File/Data Exchange/Email Project Files.
10-38
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Options
Select one of the three available options:
Send by E-mail
Select this option if you want to send this project
via email. ETAP will create the zip file containing
the project files opens your default e-mail
program, create a new e-mail, and attach the zip
file to it.
Send by FTP
Select this option if you want to upload this project
to an FTP Site. If this option is selected, the Send
Project Files by FTP Dialog is invoked.
Save on Hard Disk

If this option is selected, ETAP will create a zip file of the project files, and then it will prompt you to
Save As:
10-39
Menu Bars
Save In
File Name
Save as Type
One-Line Diagram
Select the location in your hard drive or network drive where you wish to
save the Zip file.
Enter a name for the Zip File.
Displays Zip Files by default. You can save it as a generic file by selecting
all files, but when you want to open or unzip the file, you will need to add
the extension ZIP to the created file.
Once you have selected a location and named the file, click on the OK button.
Include
Libraries
Check this option to include the project library file into the Zip file. The project library file does not have
to be in the project directory to include it in the zip file.
All Files
Check this option to include all files saved under the same project directory as the ETAP project. This
will allow you to include reports and reference information saved under the same project directory. Subdirectories will not be included in the zip file.
Zip File Password

Enter Password
Enter a password if you want to add password protection to the zip file, otherwise leave blank.
Confirm Password
After you have entered your password, this field will become editable so you can confirm your password.
10-40
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Send ETAP Project Files by FTP

This dialog box lets you connect to a FTP site and upload the project zip file.
FTP Site
Address
Enter the FTP Site address. The FTP address should be in FTP URL format such as
FTP://www.etap.com:80 or in IP address format such as 128.121.97.137.
User ID
Enter your FTP User ID. If the User ID is not entered, an anonymous FTP connection would be
established if the FTP site allows for this connection.
Password
If you entered a User ID, then enter your password to the FTP site here. Otherwise leave this field blank.
Connect
Click on this button after entering the FTP address, User ID, and Password. If the connection is
successful, you will see the FTP site directory tree in the dialog box center space.
Zip File
This box displays the location of the project zip file that is being uploaded.
Send
Click on this button to start the uploading of the projects zip file.
10-41
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Convert Old OC Relay

You can convert relay elements created in earlier versions of ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to
Convert old OC Relay. This is a special conversion tool provided to move the "old" overcurrent relays
created in ETAP version 3.0.2 and earlier to the new relay format for relay elements.
Note: if you are importing a PowerPlot project you must first convert the old relay elements to the new
relay format in ETAP prior to converting the PowerPlot project.
Exit
Using this command will save and close your ETAP project file and close the ETAP program.
10-42
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.2 Edit Menu
The Edit menu on the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar offers the following commands:
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Move From
DeSelect All
Cut
Copy
Clear
Paste
Paste Special
Insert New Object
Links
Object
Dumpster
Dumpster
Dumpster
Dumpster
OLE
OLE
OLE
OLE
OLE
OLE
OLE
OLE
Moving or hiding an element or moving, adding, deleting a connection is

can be undone. Also triggered using CTRL-Z
Redo a task that was undone through Undo. Also triggered using CTRL-Y
Deletes selected element(s) from the one-line diagram and moves it to the
Dumpster
Copies selected element(s) from the one-line diagram to the Dumpster
Pastes selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram
Moves selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram
Deselects all elements in the one-line diagram
Deletes selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram to the clipboard
Copies selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram to the clipboard
Deletes selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram
Pastes object(s) from the clipboard into the one-line diagram
Pastes as object or image from the clipboard into the one-line diagram
Inserts new OLE object(s) in the one-line diagram
Edit any linked OLE objects on the one-line diagram
Placeholder for OLE object verbs
10-43
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Undo
Undo hiding an element or undo the movement of an element. Also undo moving, adding or deleting a
connection. You may not use undo to remove an element. There are two methods to Undo:
Click on Edit in the menu bar and select Undo

Select Undo from the ETAP main tool bar
Here is an example of moving a transformer back to its original place:
Redo
When undo is used, graphical Redo allows user to redo undone tasks. There are two methods to redo:
Click on Edit in the menu bar and select Redo

Select Redo from the ETAP main tool bar.
Cut
The Cut command on the Edit menu will delete selected elements from the one-line diagram and place
them in the Dumpster. You can cut elements in Edit Mode only. You can also cut selected elements by
right-clicking and selecting the Cut command from the pop-up menu. Another way to cut an element or a
group of elements is to select the elements and click on the Cut button from the toolbar or press the Delete
key. To select a group of elements, click and hold the left mouse button down while dragging the pointer
across the elements you want to select. When you cut an element or a group of elements, they are deleted
from the one-line diagram and placed into the Dumpster.
Copy
The Copy command from the Edit Menu will copy selected elements from the one-line diagram and place
them in a Dumpster cell. You can also copy an element or a group of selected elements by right-clicking
and selecting the Copy command from the pop-up menu. Another way to copy an element, or a group of
elements, is to select the elements and click the Copy button on the toolbar. To select elements, press and
hold the left mouse button down while dragging the pointer across the elements you want to select.
You can copy elements in Edit Mode only. When you copy an element or a group of elements, they are
copied into the Dumpster with new ID Names while all other data and properties are preserved.
Paste
To paste an element or a group of elements from a Dumpster Cell, select a cell from the Dumpster and
activate the view (one-line diagram or U/G raceway) where you wish the element to be pasted. Then
10-44
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
select the Paste command from the Edit menu or click on the Paste button on the toolbar. You can also
right-click and select the Paste command from the pop-up menu.
If more than one element is to be pasted, the pasted one-line diagram will be grouped to facilitate
dragging the one-line diagram to the desired location. To ungroup the one line diagram, right-click on the
pasted elements and select ungroup from the menu.
You can paste elements in Edit Mode only. When an element is pasted from the Dumpster, ETAP assigns
a new ID to it while all other data and properties are preserved.
Move From
This command will move the contents of a Dumpster cell and place them in the one-line diagram. Note:
when you move elements from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram, the element IDs are not changed
as the elements are extracted from the Dumpster.
You can move elements in Edit Mode only. The Move From command is available from the Edit Menu
and also from the pop-up menu generated when you right-click on the one-line diagram or U/G raceway
system. The Move From Dumpster command moves the active Dumpster cell.
DeSelect All
This command deselects all elements in the one-line diagram. Use this feature before you print a one-line
diagram to ensure that the print file will include the entire one-line diagram. If you have selected
elements, only those selected elements will be displayed in the print preview and print.
Cut (OLE)
This command removes the selected OLE object from your one-line diagram and places it on the
clipboard. This command is available only in Edit mode and only if you have selected an OLE object.
Copy (OLE)
This command copies the selected OLE object onto your one-line diagram and to the clipboard. This
command is available if you have selected an OLE object on your one-line diagram.
10-45
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Clear (OLE)
This command deletes all selected OLE objects onto your one-line diagram. None of the OLE objects are
placed on the clipboard. This command is available only in Edit mode and only when you have selected at
least one OLE object on your one-line diagram.
Paste (OLE)
This command pastes an OLE object from the clipboard onto your one-line diagram. The OLE object is
always pasted in its embedded form (the object is always embedded into ETAP). An embedded object is
always completely inserted into ETAP. The embedded object can be edited only from within ETAP and is
completely contained within ETAP. This command is available only in the Edit mode and only when
there is an OLE object on the clipboard.
Paste Special (OLE)

This command pastes an OLE object from the clipboard onto your one-line diagram. Unlike the Paste
command, you may select any specific format of the OLE object to paste on the one-line diagram. This
command runs the OLE Paste Special dialog box.
The OLE Paste Special dialog box lets you select the format (link, metafile, bitmap, object, or iconic) of
the OLE object to be pasted onto the one-line diagram. The selection is, of course, limited to the formats
supported by the OLE object on the clipboard. In the example shown above, the OLE object is a bitmap.
If a linked format is available, ETAP inserts a linked object onto the one-line diagram. In contrast to an
embedded object, a linked OLE object does not live within ETAP. ETAP contains only a reference to
the object. This allows the linked object to be automatically updated when the original object is changed.
If the object is an embedded object, editing the object from within ETAP is the only way to make a
change.
Some formats, such as metafile or bitmap, are static objects and may not be editable after they are inserted
into ETAP. This command is available only in Edit mode and only when there is an OLE object on the
clipboard.
10-46
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Insert New Object (OLE)

This command inserts an OLE object onto the one-line diagram. This command runs the OLE Insert
Object dialog box.
The OLE Insert Object dialog box displays a list of all the OLE objects registered on your computer. You
may select any object from the list and specify whether to create a new object or use an object that resides
in a file (i.e., a Microsoft Word document). Additionally, you may specify whether to have the object
display an icon for itself in place of its normal visual appearance. The following one-line diagram
includes these OLE objects: a Microsoft Excel chart, Microsoft Word document (legend), and a WordPad
text.
10-47
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
After you have selected the OLE object you wish to insert, ETAP checks the registry to determine if the
selected object is a programmable object. If it is, ETAP will automatically recommend that you NOT
insert a programmable object into ETAP.
Note: inserting a programmable OLE object into ETAP may lead to unpredictable results.
Worksheet Object (OLE)
This command is a placeholder for the selected OLE object in which the OLE object will place its OLE
verbs. An OLE object must be selected for this function before it becomes active. The specific contents of
this menu location will vary depending upon which verbs are supported by the selected OLE object.
Typically, OLE objects support such verbs as Open, Edit, Replace, etc. When you select one of these
verbs, ETAP will execute the verb for the selected OLE object. In the example shown above, an Excel
worksheet displays two verbs Edit and Open. This command is only available in Edit mode.
10-48
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Edit OLE Object Document Properties

You can right-click on the OLE object and select Properties to change the OLE object to an icon or to
scale it.
General
This displays the general information on the particular type of import.
and location of the file.
10-49
General tab lists the type, size,
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.3 View Menu
The View menu on the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar provides commands for zooming and displaying
toolbars, time-sliders, etc.
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom to Fit
Zoom to New
Window
Message Log
Show more detail in the one-line diagram

Show less detail in the one-line diagram
Re-size the one-line diagram to best fit the window
This function is available for Star View. ETAP will open TCC rubberbanded area in a new window for detailed display of selected portion.
Show or hide the Message Log
10-50
Menu Bars
Project Toolbar
System Toolbar
Mode Toolbar
Realtime Toolbar
Study Case Toolbar
Presentation Toolbar
Status Bar
Show Toolbars for
Current Mode
Mode Toolbars
Help Line
Grid
Continuity Check
One-Line Diagram
Show or hide the Project Toolbar
Show or hide the System Toolbar
Show or hide the Mode Toolbar
Show or hide the Real Time Toolbar
Show or hide the Study Case Toolbar
Show or hide the Presentation Toolbar
Show or hide the Status Bar
Show Toolbars for Current Mode
Show or hide current Mode Toolbars
Show or hide the Help Line
Show or hide the grid lines in the one-line diagram
Activate or de-activate Continuity Check
The following commands are available from the View menu under the Mode Toolbars header:
AC Edit Toolbar
DC Edit Toolbar
Load Flow Toolbar
Short Circuit Toolbar
Motor Starting Toolbar
Motor Starting Time
Harmonic Analysis Toolbar
Harmonic Order-Slider
Harmonic Frequency-Slider
Transient Stability Toolbar
Transient Stability Time-Slider
Star (PD Coordination) Toolbar
Star View (TCC) Toolbar
Relay Coordination Toolbar
DC Load Flow Toolbar
DC Short-Circuit Toolbar
Battery Sizing Toolbar
Battery Discharge Slider
Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar
Reliability Analysis Toolbar
Reliability Slider
Optimal Power Flow Toolbar
Toolbar
Switching Sequence Management
Toolbar
Real-Time Live Mode Indicator
Playback Monitoring
Playback Status
Automatic Generation
Control Toolbar
Online ILS Toolbar
Show or hide the AC Edit Toolbar

Show or hide the DC Edit Toolbar
Show or hide the Load Flow Toolbar
Show or hide the Short-Circuit Toolbar
Show or hide the Motor Starting Toolbar
Slider Show or hide the Motor Starting Time-Slider
Show or hide the Harmonic Analysis Toolbar
Show or hide the Harmonic Order-Slider
Show or hide the Harmonic Frequency-Slider
Show or hide the Transient Stability Toolbar
Show or hide the Transient Stability Time-Slider
Show or hide the Star (PD Coordination) Toolbar
Show or hide the Star View (TCC) Toolbar
Show or hide the Relay Coordination Toolbar
Show or hide the DC Load Flow Toolbar
Show or hide the DC Short Circuit Toolbar
Show or hide the Battery Sizing Toolbar
Show or hide the Battery Discharge Slider
Show or hide the Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar
Show or hide the Reliability Analysis Toolbar
Show or hide the Reliability Slider
Show or hide the Optimal Power Flow Toolbar
Show or hide the Optimal Capacitor Placement Toolbar
Show or hide Switching Sequence Management Toolbar
Show or hide Real-Time Mode Indicator Toolbar
Show or hide Playback Monitoring Toolbar
Show or hide Playback Status Toolbar
Show or hide Automatic Generation Control Toolbar
Show or hide the ILS Toolbar
10-51
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Zoom In
Select the Zoom In command from the View menu or click on the Zoom In button to enlarge your oneline diagram. A magnifying glass appears and can be placed directly over the element(s), which you
would like to enlarge. Clicking the left mouse button will activate the enlargement. All elements in the
window are enlarged and the screen is now centered on the location of the magnifying glass. The
magnifying glass will disappear. Double-clicking on the Zoom In button allows you to enlarge the project
many times. Pressing the escape key stops the Zoom In function and the magnifying glass disappears.
Zoom Out
Select the Zoom Out command from the View menu or click on the Zoom Out button to reduce the size of
the one-line diagram. All elements in the active window are automatically reduced by one magnification
level.
10-52
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Zoom To Fit
Select the Zoom to Fit command from the View menu or click on the Zoom to Fit button to resize
selected elements of the one-line diagram to fit within the window; i.e., you can rubber-band an area of
the one-line diagram or select elements by holding down the Control key and clicking on the element(s),
then Zoom to Fit. If no element is selected, the entire one-line diagram will be resized, and all the
elements within the project will be shown in the window. The elements may be enlarged or reduced,
depending on the number of elements and their placement. If all the elements will not fit within the
window, the window will be set to maximum reduction with the view located to the windows upper lefthand corner.
10-53
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Zoom To New Window
Select this command to zoom in on the Time Current Characteristic (TCC) in a new zoom window. This
function is available for Star View. When this command is selected and you rubber-band a specific area
on the Star View, ETAP will open a new window and display the selected portion there. You can resize
the zoom area by re-sizing the block displayed on the TCC.
Message Log
ETAP uses the message log to record certain activities when you are working with your ETAP project.
For example, ETAP records an entry whenever you open or close a project. In addition, ETAP records
entries when you delete OLE objects or update OLE links and whenever some internal errors are
encountered. The greatest use of the message log is reserved for the ETAP Real-Time power applications.
The operation of the message log is completely transparent. ETAP automatically maintains the log. You
may, however, customize the log by setting the maximum number of entries that ETAP can display in the
message log at any given time. Additionally, you may set the size of the text logs generated by ETAP.
Toolbars
The Toolbar commands from the View menu allow you to choose which toolbars, time-sliders, or
frequency sliders are shown or hidden. If the toolbar is available AND it has a checkmark in front of it,
the toolbar is active and available to use. The toolbar will not be visible or available for use when the
checkmark is removed (by selecting the toolbar from the list). Toolbars that are shown as grayed out are
not available in the current mode of operation. For example, if you are in Online ILS mode, then the ILS
toolbar will be active and all other toolbars will be inactive. Toolbars that are active and available may be
moved from their attached location using the mouse. Select the toolbar by clicking and holding the left
mouse button down on an area of the toolbar that does not contain an icon. The toolbar may then be
dragged to a new location.
10-54
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Project Toolbar
The Project toolbar contains buttons that allow you to perform shortcuts of many commonly used
commands in ETAP. All of these commands are described in detail in different parts of this manual such
as One-Line Diagram Menu Bar and One-Line Diagram Presentation which explains the graphical user
interface of the one-line diagram.
System Toolbar
The System toolbar is a convenient and efficient method of switching between ETAP systems. When
navigating from one ETAP system to another using this toolbar, ETAP will open the last accessed
presentation for the selected system. For example, if you are switching from Network Systems to Star
Systems, ETAP will check for an existing Star View. If Star Views exist, ETAP will open the last
accessed Star View and make it the active window.
If there are no existing presentations, ETAP will prompt you to create a new presentation, with the
exception of Ground Grid. The button for Ground Grid will be disabled if no presentation has been
created. See Ground Grid Systems Chapter 42 for instructions on how to create Ground Grid
presentations.
Mode Toolbar
When you click the One-Line Diagram (Network Systems) button on the System toolbar, the Mode
toolbar is available that contains all the study modules related to the one-line diagram. In general, ETAP
has three modes of operation under Network Systems; Edit, AC Study, and DC Study. The AC Study
mode consists of analyses such as Load Flow, Short Circuit, Motor Acceleration, Transient Stability, and
Protective Device Coordination.
Real-Time Toolbar
This toolbar enables you to take the selected One-Line Diagram presentation to any of the real-time
modes available.
Study Case Toolbar

The Study Case toolbar is displayed automatically when one of the Study Modes becomes active. The
Study Case toolbar allows you to control and manage the solution parameters and output reports. The
Study Case toolbar is available for all ETAP configurations.
Presentation Toolbar
This toolbar allows you to manage the project presentations. To Activate a presentation, click on the
down arrow. The drop down list displays the presentations available. Select the presentation from the list
that you want to activate.
Depending in the mode you presentation is, that is type of presentations that will be displayed in the drop
down. For Example, if you are in the STAR View, the drop down list all the STAR View available.
Click on the button on the left on the toolbar to create or copy presentations.
10-55
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Composite Network Toolbar

This toolbar allows the user to manage the projects composite networks. All composite networks are
created directly in the one-line diagram presentation; however this toolbar facilitates looking up specific
composite networks within any project, regardless of the size of the project and of the location of the
composite network within the project. Simply select the desired composite network name and the view of
the composite network opens up in a new window.
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the screen. The Help Line may be hidden from view if you
uncheck this option. The three parts of the Help Line are:
Help Message
Displays a brief description regarding most functions and properties. Each time you click on a button,
select a function or edit a property, the Help Line displays a brief description for it.
Error Message
Displays the last active error message. ETAP includes a number of error-checking modules. When you
run studies, an output error report is generated if data inconsistencies are found. From this report, if you
double-click on an error message, ETAP brings up the editor for the element, which generates the error
and displays the error message in the Help Line.
Revision Data
The active Revision Data is displayed here for your reference.
10-56
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Grid
Select the Grid command from the View menu or click on the Grid button to display grid lines on the
one-line diagram. The grid is zoom-dependent and will be enlarged or reduced proportionately with the
elements when they are enlarged or reduced. Use the Theme Manager to change the grid size.
10-57
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Continuity Check
The Continuity Check can be activated or de-activated from the View menu or by clicking on the
Continuity Check button for individual presentations. If the Continuity Check is on, ETAP determines
which element in a presentation is energized. An energized element is an element, which is connected by
an uninterrupted path to a swing source (generator or utility). Elements, which are not energized, are
displayed in gray on your screen.
Out of Service elements are displayed in a light gray color (grayed out) if the Continuity Check is on,
otherwise only their annotations are displayed in gray. Motors and loads with Spare status are always
shown with gray annotations.
ETAP determines whether every branch in your system is energized or hot. An energized branch has an
uninterrupted path from an energized bus to another bus. A branch that is not connected to one energized
bus is considered de-energized. A branch is considered hot if it has one uninterrupted path to an
energized bus but its other terminal is not connected to another bus. When you run studies only energized
buses, branches, and loads are considered. De-energized elements, along with their connections, can be
printed in gray, black, or not printed at all. You can choose to print de-energized elements from Print
Options.
Theme Editor
The Theme Editor is used to change color and line styles for device connectors as well as device color
and background. Select from template themes or you can create custom themes that can be applied
globally or according to the presentation. The advantage of using a Theme Editor is that unlimited custom
styles may be stored on one computer and these styles are project independent so they are available when
switching from one ETAP project to another. Themes created using the Theme Editor can be easily
transported from one computer to another.
Note: Themes can be applied to one-line diagram and control circuit diagram presentations. Also, colors
applied manually using the right-click context menu will override theme colors.
Please refer to Theme Editor for more details.
10-58
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.4 Project Menu
The options available in the Project menu are used to set parameters and options that affect your whole
project. This includes information such as system frequency, unit system, and names of loading
categories. It is highly recommended that you review and modify this information before you create your
one-line diagram. The Project menu for the one-line diagram and Project View menu bars offers the
following commands:
Information
Standards
Settings
Options
Relay Test-set Database
Enter general project information

Select project standards
List of project settings
Specify project options
Specify the paths for ARTTS and the ARTTS database
Mutual Coupling Group

Control Cable Schedule
Default Calendar
Add and specify lengths of transmission line coupling groups

Specify control cable schedule settings
Setup the default calendar including working times and
seasons. Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for more
information.
10-59
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Project Information
With the exception of Comments, all project information is printed as part of the header for the output
reports. The Study Case ID and Remarks are obtained from the Study Case editor. An example of an
output report header is shown below.
Any information specified in these fields is for project identification only and is not crucial to performing
any type of analysis. The Remarks field is common to all studies and is printed on all output reports.
10-60
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Standards
When you select Standards, the following dialog box opens:
Standard
Set the project standard as either ANSI or IEC. Setting the project standard will determine some of the
project defaults. Depending on whether you select ANSI or IEC Standard, ETAP uses different element
symbols by changing the Edit toolbar and sets the defaults for some properties and studies, such as the
short circuit method. Note: after you change the standard, the new standard is used as the default for any
new element that you add to the one-line diagram.
However, you can change the symbols of individual elements or groups of elements from ANSI to IEC or
from IEC to ANSI by right-clicking on the one-line diagram. You can also reset the short circuit study
method (ANSI or IEC Standards) for any study case. The study method can be changed in the Study Case
dialog box.
Frequency
Here you can enter the electrical system frequency in Hertz (Hz). Acceptable values are from 1 to 999 Hz.
The system frequency is used when you run transient stability and harmonic studies. The system
frequency is also used to correct the line and cable reactances and susceptances when these values are
obtained from the libraries. For example, if the system frequency is set to 50 Hz and the frequency of the
cable library is 60 Hz, the cable positive and zero sequence reactances are multiplied by 5/6 and
susceptances are multiplied by 6/5. It is important that you set the system frequency correctly prior to
entering data into ETAP.
Unit System (English, Metric)

The unit system entered here determines the display attributes used for underground cable systems but
will not change the defaults for the one-line elements. The defaults for the system elements are set when
you create a new project. That is why ETAP asks you to select a unit system at the time you are creating a
new project file. Note: you can edit the defaults for any element to meet your specific requirements.
10-61
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Date Format
You can use any one of the following formats for printing the date on the output report header:
USA
Europe
Japan, China
Literal
mm-dd-yyyy
dd-mm-yyyy
yyyy-mm-dd
mm dd, yyyy
11-23-2004
23-11-2004
2004-11-23
Nov 23, 2004
Settings
The Project Settings menu option allows you to select one of the following commands from the submenu
to modify:
10-62
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Loading Categories
By selecting Loading Categories, you can customize the name of any of the 10 loading categories
provided by ETAP. You can change these names at any time when running the project. Each name may
be up to 12 characters.
When you run load flow or motor starting, ETAP uses the percent loading of the specified loading
category to calculate the operating power factor and efficiency of motors and static loads from the values
of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. This is accomplished by using a
curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and efficiency. The calculated power
factor and efficiency are then used to calculate the operating kW and kvar loading, as well as the feeder
losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is specified for the load.
Avg Temp and Humidity

This is used for short-term load forecasting module. Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for more
information.
Duty Cycle Categories

Here you can modify (change) the names of duty cycles. ETAP provides five duty cycles for DC loads for
the purpose of battery sizing.
10-63
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Starting Categories
Motor starting categories provide ETAP with various percent loading at the starting time of motors. From
this dialog box you can customize the name of each starting category for your reference. Each name may
be up to 12 characters.
Starting Categories are a useful tool for group (gang) starting or acceleration of motors. They are also
used for setting the starting and final loading of each individual motor under different starting conditions.
When a motor is started, the general practice is to reduce the load on that motor until it reaches the final
speed and then increase the load to the required operating level. Starting and final percent loading
provides modeling of this adjustment in the motor load. These values are entered as a percent of the motor
full load current in the motor editors.
Load Priority
Motor and load priorities provide you with various options from which motors can be prioritized. Using
this dialog box, you can customize the name of each of the ten load priorities. Each name may be up to 12
characters long.
From the Motor/Load dialog box, you can select and assign a load priority to the motor or static load.
10-64
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Data Type
There are a total of ten data types. The name of each type can be customized from this dialog box. Each
name may be up to 12 characters.
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry for motors and static loads. Select one of the data
types (such as estimate, typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box and as the data is updated, this field
can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data.
User-Defined Fields
These fields are provided for various elements and can be custom named with a maximum of 12
characters.
User-Defined Fields are available for elements in the Remarks page of their respective editors.
Note: Elements allow for 7 user defined fields.
10-65
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Cable Ampacity App. MF

Cable Ampacity Application Multiplication Factors are provided for a number of typical applications of
motors, loads, etc.
Using this dialog box you can change the MF for the typical application and for four additional userdefined applications. You can select one of these applications for cable ampacity and/or voltage drop
calculations from the Ampacity page of the Motor, Static Load, and Cable editors.
10-66
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Panel Code Factors

The Panel Code Factors are used to specify the continuous code demand load, connected non-continuous
code demand load, and the total connected code demand load parameters.
The Panel Code Factors dialog box includes 14 fixed load type devices and ten user-defined load type
devices that could be customized according to specific user applications. For more details concerning the
calculation of the parameters shown in the dialog box, please see Chapter 36, Panel Systems.
Rate Schedule
Enter the electricity tariff for energy accounting application. Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for more
information.
10-67
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Fuel Cost Profile

The Fuel Cost Profile names are user definable and can be changed from the Project Setting Menu. By
selecting Fuel Cost Profile, you can customize the name of any of the 10 fuel/energy cost profiles
be up to 12 alphanumeric characters long. For more details refer to Chapter 23, Synchronous Generator.
10-68
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Emergency Handing
The Emergency Handing menu option allows you to select one of the following commands from a
submenu to modify:
Generator Emergency
Generator Emergency provides ETAP with
various Generator Emergency names. From
this dialog box you can customize the name
of each Generator Emergency for your
reference. Each name may be up to 20
characters long. This editor allows you to
specify the name of the Generator
Emergency Condition. This feature will only
take effect if in Remote Controlled Auto
Simulator mode in ETAP Real-Time. For
more information see the ETAP Real-Time
User Guide or contact OTI.
HVCB Emergency Tripping

HVCB Emergency Tripping provides ETAP
with various HVCB Emergency Tripping
names. From this dialog box you can
customize the name of each HVCB
Emergency Tripping for your reference. Each
name may be up to 20 characters long. This
editor allows you to specify the name of the
tripping emergency condition. This feature
will only take effect if in Remote Controlled
Auto Simulator mode in ETAP Real-Time.
For more information see the ETAP RealTime User Guide or contact OTI.
10-69
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
You can customize the name of any of the ten generation categories provided by ETAP by selecting
Generation Categories. You can change these names at any time when running the project. Each name
may be up to 12 characters long.
10-70
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Arc Flash
The Arc Flash menu option allows you to select one of the following commands from a submenu to
modify:
PPE Requirements
This editor allows you to view the NFPA 70E category ranges as well as it allows you to specify your
own. PPE requirements can be entered for each hazard/risk category along with disclaimer and userdefined text. PPE requirements, disclaimer and user-defined text appear on labels generated from ETAP.
The Hazard/Risk Category Levels for PPE window has the following sections
Method Selection Section: which includes the two pre-defined sets of hazard
/ risk categories as described in NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and 2009 and the
user-defined categories.
PPE requirements section: where you can specify the personal protective
equipment list for each category.
Disclaimer section: Where you can enter text that can be used as a disclaimer
about the arc flash analysis results that are printed on a label
User-Defined Text: Enter any extra notes or comments you want to display
on the label.
10-71
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
User Defined
ETAP gives you the option to create your own user-defined categories. You can define up to ten
categories. Note: if the User-Defined Hazard/Risk Categories are used, then there will be a message
displayed in the result section that indicates that user-defined levels are being used for the selection of the
equipment. The user-defined levels are interpreted by the Arc Flash module as described in the following
table:
User-Defined Hazard/Risk Category Level Ranges
Category
Range (example)
Defaults
0
0 < cal/cm2 <C0
2
1
4
C1 > cal/cm2 C0
2
2
8
C2 > cal/cm C1
3
25
C3> cal/cm2 C2
4
40
C4 > cal/cm2 C3
5
100
C5 > cal/cm2 C4
6
120
C6> cal/cm2 C5
2
7
0
C7> cal/cm C6
2
8
0
C8> cal/cm C7
2
9
0
C9> cal/cm C8
The category ranges are always from low values to higher values. For example, this means that the
category 4 value cannot be equal to or higher than the value in category 3. This is true for all the
categories. If any category (6, 7, 8, and 9) is left as zero, it is ignored by the program and it only uses the
5th category for any value higher than the maximum value in the 5th category. This should also apply if
category 6 is the last one and 7, 8, and 9 are left as zero. You cannot skip a category.
NFPA 70E-2000
These ranges are listed on Table 3-2.9.3 of NFPA 70E-2000.
Incident Energy Range for the Determination of Hazard Risk Categories
Incident Energy
Exposure cal/cm2
0 < cal/cm2 <1.2
5 > cal/cm2 1.2
8 > cal/cm2 5
25> cal/cm2 8
40 > cal/cm2 25
cal/cm2 > 40
10-72
Hazard Risk
Category
0
1
2
3
4
N/A
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
NFPA 70E-2004
These ranges are listed on Table 130.7 (c)(11) of NFPA 70E 2004.
Incident Energy
Hazard Risk
Exposure cal/cm2
Category
0 < cal/cm2 <2.0
0
2
1
4 > cal/cm 2.0
2
8 > cal/cm2 4
2
3
25> cal/cm 8
4
40 > cal/cm2 25
2
cal/cm > 40
N/A
NFPA 70E-2009
Incident Energy
Exposure cal/cm2
0 < cal/cm2 <1.2
4 > cal/cm2 1.2
8 > cal/cm2 4
25> cal/cm2 8
40 > cal/cm2 25
cal/cm2 > 40
Hazard Risk
Category
0
1
2
3
4
N/A
The Hazard /Risk Category Level for PPE Editor have the following properties and behavior:
The NFPA 70E 2000, NFPA 70E 2004, NFPA 70E 2009 Hazard/Risk category Ranges are not
customizable and follow the definitions published by NFPA 70E standards. The only items that
can be customized are the list of equipment (requirements) for each category.
If you select the User-Defined Values option, then the Category ID fields become editable and
you can define a name for the each category level, which can be composed of up to 12
alphanumeric characters (i.e. a Cat IV or Cat A, etc).
If you select the User-Defined Values option, the Incident Energy Range fields become editable
you may type the different limits in cal/cm2.
You have the option to type in some text for a disclaimer statement. This disclaimer statement
may appear in some selected label templates. This field holds up to 250 alphanumeric
characters.
You have the ability to create a user-defined text field, which may be used to type in custom
information (such as engineering company name and address). This information is included in
10-73
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
certain label templates or is stored in the output report database. This field holds up to 125
alphanumeric characters.
You can navigate using the scroll arrows allows you browse the different PPE descriptions for
each category.
There are 4 sets of PPE descriptions. One for each of the options NFPA 70E 2000 (5
descriptions), NFPA 70E 2004 (5 descriptions), NFPA 70E 2009 (5 descriptions) and one
for the User-Defined Categories (10 descriptions. The description fields hold up to 250
The Hazard/Risk Category Level for PPE window has some default descriptions based on the simplified
Two-Category Level PPE system published in Table F-1 of NFPA 70E 2000 and Annex H of NFPA 70E
2004 and 2009.
Note: The following descriptions are provided only as examples of PPE requirement descriptions as
described by NFPA 70E standards. These descriptions are not recommendations made by ETAP on how
to protect personnel from Arc Flash or Shock Hazards. Please exercise caution in applying these
descriptions follow all the remaining recommendations made in the PPE matrix tables provided in NFPA
70E 2000, 2004, and 2009.
Table 9: User Defined Hazard/Risk Category Default Descriptions based on NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and
2009
10-74
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10-75
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Note: The default values can be fully customized by simply typing in the new description in the
Hazard/Risk Category Levels for PPE description fields for each set of categories.
Approve PPE
This button opens the PPE Requirements editor. This editor can be used to modify and approve the PPE
Requirements which can be used to be printed on the arc flash labels.
Note: The PPE Requirements will not be printed on the arc flash labels, reports or arc flash analyzer until
they have been approved by the engineer in charge or the facility safety manager. A warning message will
appear when running the Arc Flash study if the PPE Requirements have not been approved.
10-76
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Arc Flash Analysis Data

This editor allows you to view the type of equipment and working distances to be used by the Arc Flash
program. Select to use the values which are based on IEEE 1584 2002 or select User-Defined Values and
manually adjust the values to user defined settings. After you select User-Defined Values, the Gap and
Working Distance columns become editable. The X-factor is not user definable and is based on the
factors given from IEEE which cannot be changed.
Note: Not all devices listed in the table are listed in the table given in IEEE 1584. Values given for
devices such as switchboard and switchrack are derived from comparable items such as the Switchgear,
whose values are listed in IEEE 1584.
10-77
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Shock Hazard Analysis Data

This editor displays the typical NFPA 70E 2004 and 2009 settings, or allows you to enter the user-defined
parameters for the different approach boundaries. You can also view or change the class settings given by
the ASTM D 120-02 standard in regards to voltage-rated protective gloves.
The Limited Approach Boundary (LAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E as the approach limit at a
distance from an exposed live part within which a shock hazard exists.
Limited Approach Boundary to Exp. Movable Conductor
The LAB for exposed movable conductors is the distance, which unqualified persons may not cross when
approaching a conductor that is not properly braced in a fixed position.
Limited Approach Boundary to Fixed Circuit Part
The Limited Approach Boundary for Fixed Circuit Parts is the distance, which unqualified persons may
not cross when approaching a conductor that is fixed (not movable).
Restricted Approach Boundary
The Restricted Approach Boundary (RAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E as the approach limit at a
distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due to electrical arc
over combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity to the live part.
10-78
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Prohibited Approach Boundary

The Prohibited Approach Boundary (PAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E as the approach limit at a
distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making contact with the
live part.
Bus Arc Flash Typical Data

This editor is used to select the data to be used for each bus. The Arc Flash Analysis Data editor and the
Shock Hazard Analysis Data editor are used to view the values or edit the read-only values. The radial
button selection in this editor is used to determine which values are used for each bus. You can view this
editor from the Bus Rating page by clicking Data Options. For more information on selecting typical data
for each bus, refer to ETAP user guide chapter for Arc Flash.
Note: PPE Hazard/Risk Categories editor is not selected from this set of Data Options. The standard
used for the Hazard/Risk Categories is defined in the Arc Flash Data tab in the Short Circuit Study Case
editor and is a global selection for all the faulted buses in the project.
10-79
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Star View Reference kV

Star View Reference kV sets the Plot kV of all TCC Curves based on either the Calculated Base kV or
Nominal Bus kV. The recommended setting is Calculated Base kV where ETAP will automatically take
care of the curve shift due to base voltage transformation.
Area & Zone

This functionality allows the user to group buses anywhere in the one-line diagram by area and / or zone
in order to facilite the analysis and result filtering of specified groups. The area, zone, and / or region
assignment is made through the bus editor. Note that ETAP automatically propagates the area information
based on bus area classification. This information is used to filter all alert views such as load flow, short
circuit, motor starting, etc. The area information is also used to color code the one-line diagram based on
area classification via the theme manager.
Classification Editor
Click Add for Zone, Area or Region to add # and name for the zone, area or region you want to consider
in the ETAP project database. Note that the classification information is stored as part of the ETAP
project.
10-80
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Options
The Project Options dialog box allows you to select options specific to your project.
AutoSave
AutoSave will save your project automatically every X minutes, where X is the number of minutes you
have specified in this dialog box. The AutoSave default time is 30 minutes and can be changed at any
time.
Prompt Before Saving Project

Selecting this option initiates a message that asks for confirmation before saving your project.
Reload Last Project

If you select this option, ETAP automatically reloads the last project opened whenever ETAP is started.
Confirm Before Saving Editor Changes

This option will display a message asking for confirmation before saving editor changes when you
navigate inside the editors.
10-81
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Display Changed Data in Red

Changed or modified data appears in red typeface in the property editors if this option is selected. After a
user (with Checker access level) checks (validates) the data, the data is then displayed in black typeface.
Note: Microsoft Vista Display Problem for Certain Drop Lists
MS Vista may not show certain drop lists in red because of the selected theme graphics. However, the
checker function still detects all changes made to these drop lists and still prompts the checker for
acceptance of the changes. The following images show the problem and the suggested workaround for
this issue:
Go to Project Options to set Editor Options
10-82
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Open an editor and verify with a combo box. Note that the combo box has a 3D effect and the
background may not show up in Red due to visual themes option in Windows Vista and Windows 7
operating systems. The red color is only displayed if the list is expanded.
10-83
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Work-around:
1. Disable the visual themes as shown below. Right-click on the ETAP program shortcut, select the
Property command and then the Compatibility tab. Click on Apply and OK.
2. Run ETAP and verify the solution. Note that the background of the combo box is now shown in
red color without having to select the combo list.
10-84
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
AutoSave Project
ETAP will prompt you before saving the project if you have checked the Prompt before saving option
from the Project Option dialog box.
You can set the time interval for autosaving, disable/enable autosaving, and decide if you want to be
prompted before ETAP saves your project from this dialog box.
Saving connections for external use means that the bus connections for branches, loads, and sources will
be written in the property tables along with the other properties of the elements. If you do not check this
option, the property tables of the elements will not include the bus connections, or they may indicate the
wrong bus connections if you change the connections from the one-line diagram and do not save them
into the property tables again.
Note: the bus connection information in the property tables is for external use and is not read or used by
ETAP.

Selecting this function allows you to specify the paths for Relay Test-set and the Relay Test set database
so that ETAP is able to find and communication with the ARTTS test set and the relay under test.
10-85
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Mutual Coupling Group

Selecting this function allows you to add, name, and specify the length of different transmission line
coupling groups. ETAP gives you the flexibility of adding as many groups as needed.
After adding these groups, you can assign different lines to the groups by going to the Transmission Line
editor, Grouping page.
10-86
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram

Selecting this function allows you to add a cable, assign a name, specify connections, add the length and
other variables of the cables used in your Control System Diagram and project.
Click Add to insert a new cable into the schedule, or click Delete to remove it. If you wish to add a cable
the CSD Control Cable Schedule Edit window (shown below) will open and allow you to specify the
cable information.
If you wish to select a cable from the ETAP cable library, click the Cable Library button and the Library
Quick Pick window for cables will appear. Once you have made your selection, click Ok to close the
library window and accept the information, or click Cancel to close the window without inserting the
information into the Control Cable Schedule.
10-87
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Click Ok to close the CSD Cable Schedule Edit window.

Click the Print Schedule button to make a printout of the CSD Cable Schedule information. Click the
Close button to accept your changes to the CSD Cable Schedule and close the window.
10-88
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Default Calendar
The default calendar is used to define the working day and season information for energy accounting
application. Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for more information.
10-89
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.6 Library Menu

The Library menu for the One-Line Diagram menu bar offers the following commands:
Cable
Cable Fire Protection
Transmission Line
Motor Nameplate
Motor CKT Model
Motor Characteristic
Model
Motor Load Model
Fuse
Relay
Recloser
HV Circuit Breaker
LV Circuit Breaker
Trip Device
Overload Heater
Harmonic
Interruption Cost
Reliability
Load Profile
Pattern
Battery
Control System Device
Photovoltaic
Wind Turbine
Open
Save
Save As
Create
Copy/Merge
Purge
Export
Open the Cable Library

Open the Cable Fire Protection Libraries
Open the Transmission Line Libraries
Open the Model Nameplate Library
Open the Motor Model Library
Open the Motor Characteristic Library
Open the Motor Load Library
Open the Fuse Library
Open the Relay Library
Open the Recloser Library
Open the Electronic Controller Library
Open the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library
Open the Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library
Open the Trip Device Libraries
Open the Overload Heater Library
Open the Harmonic Model Library
Open Interruption Cost Library
Open Reliability Library
Available with ETAP Real-Time
Available with ETAP Real-Time
Open the Battery Library
Open the Control System Libraries
Open the Photovoltaic / Ssolar panel library
Open the Wind Turbine Generator library
Open a new ETAP Library
Save an ETAP Library
Save an ETAP Library as a new library
Create an ETAP Library
Copy or Merge an ETAP Library
Purge an ETAP Library
Export library data for printing.
For more information see Chapter 8, Engineering Libraries.
10-90
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.7 Defaults Menu
Annotation fonts, default display options, and default properties of elements can be set from this menu
item. It is a good practice to go through your options for each relevant editor in the defaults section before
creating your one-line diagram and underground raceway system.
ETAP maintains default values for each element in the project database. As each new element is created,
ETAP initializes the element with these default values. You may modify the default properties of any
element through the Defaults menu. ETAP will then use the modified values to initialize each new
element.
The Defaults Menu for the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar offers the following commands:
Display Fonts
Display Options
Plot Options
Text Box
Presentations
Bus
Branch
Load/Motor/Shunt
Source
Panel
Annotation fonts for element information and study results

Edit defaults Display Options
Edit defaults Plot Options
Edit Text Box
Edit defaults Presentation
Edit defaults for Bus properties
Edit defaults for Cable, Impedance, Reactor, Transmission Line,
Transformer, and 3-W transformer properties
Edit defaults for Ind. Machine, Synch. Motor, Lump Load, Static
Load, Capacitor, and MOV properties
Edit defaults for Utility and Synch. Generator properties
Edit defaults for panel schedule, load information, panel information.
10-91
Menu Bars
Phase Adapter
Switching Device
Meter
Relay
Overload Heater
Instrument Transformer
AC-DC Interface
DC Elements
Control System Elements
One-Line Diagram
Edit defaults for the phase adapter, load connected to Phase Adapter
Edit defaults for the Grounding / Earthing Adapter.
Edit defaults for Fuse, HV Circuit Breaker, LV Circuit Breaker,
Contactor, SPST Switch, SPDT Switch, and Overcurrent Relay properties
Edit defaults for Ammeter, Voltmeter, and Multi-Meter properties
Edit defaults for Relay properties
Edit defaults for Overload Heater properties
Edit defaults for Current Transformer (CT) and Potential Transformer
(PT) properties
Edit defaults for AC-DC Interface elements
Edit defaults for DC Components
Edit defaults for Control System Diagram elements
10-92
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.8 Tools Menu

The Tools menu is provided to control and change one-line diagram graphics in a global manner.
Options (Preferences)
Entries in ETAPS.INI can be changed by using the Options (Preferences) Editor. The advantage of using
this interface is that changes are applied to ETAP without requiring a restart.
Size
This command will globally change the size of the selected elements in the one-line diagram. Global size
change can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu.
Bus Size
This command will change the size of the selected bus editor in the one-line diagram. Global size change
can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu.
Symbols
This command will globally change the symbols of the selected elements in the one-line diagram to ANSI
or to IEC symbols.
Orientation
This command will change the orientation of a selected element in the one-line diagram to 0, 90, 180, or
270 degrees.
10-93
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Status
This option allows the user to control the Lock, Service and State status of each element or group of
highlighted elements.
Lock
This command allows the user to Lock or Unlock the editor information for any selected elements. When
the editor properties are locked, all engineering data is displayed as read-only expect condition
information. The user can change condition information (service & state) even though the element
properties are locked.
Service
This command allows the user to change the service status of any selected element to In Service or Out of
Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of Service element can be edited like an
In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies. When
the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the
deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a deenergized element is grey.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can set a
branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision Data.
State
This command allows the user to change the state of any selected element. State is used to describe the
service status of an element. Certain states have flexible service status like As-Built, New, Future, Moved
and Modified can be both In or Out of Service. Certain states have fixed service status like Removed,
Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Other are out of service states.
Switching Device Status

This command allows the user to change the status of any selected switching devices to Open or Close.
Circuit breakers, fuses, relays, potential transformers, and current transformers are considered protective
devices. However, only switching devices (circuit breakers, switches, contactors, and fuses) have status
(open or closed). Note that when you change the status of a circuit breaker, you are changing it for the
active Configuration Status. When you switch to another configuration, the status may be different. This
statement is also true for the status of motors, MOVs, and loads.
Colors
This command will change the color of the selected elements in the one-line diagram.
10-94
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Classification
Zone, Area & Region
This functionality allows the user to group buses anywhere in the one-line diagram by area, zone, and /or
region in order to facilite the analysis and result filtering of specified groups. The area, zone, and / or
region assignment is made through the bus editor. Note that ETAP automatically propagates the area
information based on bus area classification.
Alignment
This functionality allows the user to change the alignment on the selected elements. There are 10 total
features: Straight Align, Space Align, Align Center, Align Middle, Align Top, Align Bottom, Align Left,
Align Right, Distribute Horizontal, and Distribute Vertical. The alignment is based on an anchor element.
An anchor element is defined upon user selection. The anchor element is shown with four blue corners
surrounding the element.
Rotate
This functionality allows the user to change the orientation of any selected elements. The orientations
available are (-90, 90 and 180).
Note: When an element is added, its orientation is based on the system default as follows:
Buses are added at 0 degrees
Composite networks are added at 90 degrees and do not rotate
Protective devices are added or inserted based on the orientation of the connections
All other elements are added at 90 degrees
Group
This command will group the selected elements in the one-line diagram into one group. Grouped elements
can be selected by selecting any one of the elements in the group. Note: each element can belong to one
group only. To add elements to an existing group, click on a member of the group in the one-line diagram,
then select the other elements by holding down the control key and clicking the left mouse button, then
clicking on the Group command. Grouping can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu.
Ungroup
This command will ungroup the selected elements in the one-line diagram. Ungrouping can also be done
using the right-click pop-up menu.
Use Default Annot. Position

This command will set the position of the annotations of the selected elements in the one-line diagram to
their default position. This command can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu. Note: you can
set the default annotation position of each element by selecting the element and using the right-click popup menu.
10-95
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Miscellaneous Tools
Additional tools may be setup using the Options (Preferences) editor to invoke external programs. Up to
25 additional tools may be added using the Options editor.
These tools would appear at the bottom of the menu based on the sequence setup in the options editor.
10-96
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.9 RevControl Menu

This menu item allows you to create, copy, edit, merge, and delete different Revision Data and to manage
them. ETAP provides unlimited different levels of engineering properties for each element. Base Data is
the default data supplied by ETAP. If you wish to modify your project data but do not wish to modify the
Base Data, you may create a revision.
While in a Revision Data level, you cannot save the project. To save the project, switch to Base Data.
Create a Revision Data
Create
Copy data to another revision
Copy
Edit information for each revision
Edit
Merge data to another revision
Merge
Delete a revision
Delete
10-97
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Create
ETAP displays the Create version of the Project Revision Control dialog box. Using this dialog box, you
can create a new Revision Data ID or copy an existing one on which to base a new revision.
This option is provided to create any one of the unlimited Revision Data. Once a revision level is selected,
any subsequent modification of engineering properties made from the property editors will be reflected in
that revision level only.
To create a new revision:
1. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the New option is selected.
2. In the New option text box, enter the new Revision Data ID.
3. Enter the revision information in the text boxes on the right, including Change # (design change
notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description, Schedule, and
Remarks.
the Database and Project Management section of this user guide.
10-98
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Copy
You can create new revisions by copying Revision Data from existing Revision Data IDs (names). All
data in a copied revision is identical to the revision from which it was copied, until you begin to make
changes.
To copy a revision:
1. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the Existing option is selected.
2. Select the Revision Data ID you want to copy from the drop-down list.
3. In the text box under the To Revision Data group, enter the name of the new Revision Data ID.
4. Edit the revision information as required in the text boxes on the right, including Change #
(design change notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description,
Schedule, and Remarks. Change # and Group # can be any alphanumeric combination up to 36
characters.
the Revision Data Section in Chapter 5.
10-99
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Edit
You can rename a Revision Data ID and edit any of its information by doing the following:
Edit the Revision Data ID name and information as required, and then click OK to save the changes.
Note: The Revision Data ID information includes Change # (design change notification number) and
Group # (design group number), which may be used to merge Revision Data. For more information about
merging Revision Data, see Chapter 5 Merging and Purging Revisions
10-100
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Merge
You can merge one revision into another revision using their Revision Data IDs. Where the same changed
properties differ between two revisions, the revision being merged into has its properties overwritten.
However, the merged revision keeps the Revision Data Info values of the revision that is being merged
into.
Note: You cannot merge the Revision Data of one ID into the same ID (for example, Revision 1 into
Revision 1).
See chapter for 3-D Database for more details how to merge revisions.
10-101
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Delete
You CANNOT delete the Base Data; however, you may delete Revision Data levels. Deleting any
Revision Data will delete all changes that exist in that Revision Data that relates to your project
permanently. Deleting a Revision Data is equivalent to merging the Base Data into the Revision Data. Be
certain you do not need the Revision Data before proceeding.
10-102
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.10 Real Time Menu

This menu used for ETAP Real-Time power applications and server / console connectivity to IEDs,
SCADA, PLC, DCS, relays, etc. ETAP Real-Time is expanded the traditional offline capabilities of
ETAP in order to acquire real-time data from external systems. Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for
more information.
Real-Time Server
Playback Server
EMS
ILS
Tag File
On-Line Viewer
Active X
Tag Link
Manage ETAP Real-Time servers in the complex

Enter server name and access Playback Server options
Access circuit breaker and Logic Editor
Access ILS logic editor, load control and trigger editors
Enter the path for a Tag File, and create or audit the file
Access the online template editor and assignments
Insert new ActiveX controls
Access tag link display options
Selections related to ETAP Real-Time will be grayed out unless ETAP Real-Time is enabled on your
ETAP license.
Real Time Server

Manage ETAP Real-Time servers in the complex. Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for more
information.
Playback Server
Type-in a server name to assign a server as the playback server.
EMS
This menu item is used to access the ETAP Energy Management System (EMS) logic editor. This logic
editor may be used to setup conditional logic for demand management when using ETAP as real-time
monitoring and analysis tool.
ILS
This menu item is used to access the ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding (ILS) logic editor, load control
editor and load shedding trigger editor.
10-103
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
ILS Load Control editor

This editor is used to add and assign the circuit breaker order.
ILS Trigger Editor

This editor is used to define and associate one-line diagram elements with actual system triggers. These
triggers are events (electrical or non-electrical) that are known or potential reasons for initiating load
shedding in an electrical network.
ILS Logic Editor

Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for more information.
Tag File
Use this menu to create, audit or specify the location of a tag database for online / real-time operation.
10-104
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Create
Use this command to create a new tag database in MS Access format. Note that all real-time information
would be automatically entered in the tag database except for the DCS Tag name that must be determined
based on type of connection (directly to relay / directly to meter / via SCADA or DCS system, etc.)
Audit
Audit a previously created tag file to remove or append information based on changes made to the oneline diagram.
Path
Specify the path and name of the tag database to be loaded into the Real-Time Server when the system is
switched to Online or Real-Time mode.
Open
Refer to ETAP Real Time Help File for more information
Tag Composer
Composite Tag Editor

On Line Viewer
Template Editor
Element Assignments
Close All
10-105
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Active X
Insert New ActiveX
Use this command to insert an ActiveX control directly onto the One-Line Diagram. ActiveX Controls are
primarily used for monitoring purposes using ETAP Real-Time. The following window will appear when
you run this command.
Macro Options
Select an existing Visual Basic macro to apply from the list, as shown below. These macros are used to
relay electrical or non-electrical information being read from the real system to virtual instruments setup
in ETAP. Virtual instruments are setup using Insert New ActiveX menu item as mentioned above.
10-106
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Options
Use this page to assign keyboard shortcuts using custom macros
Links
Tag Link
10-107
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.11 Window Menu
The Window menu offers the following commands, which enable you to arrange multiple views of
multiple projects in the application window:
Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
Close All Presentations
1, 2, 3...
Arrange windows in an overlapped fashion

Arrange windows in non-overlapped tiles
Arrange the icons of closed windows
Closes all open presentations
Activates specified window
Cascade
Use this command to arrange multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion.
Tile
Use this command to vertically arrange multiple opened windows in a non-overlapped (side-by-side)
fashion.
Arrange Icons
Use this command to arrange the icons for minimized windows at the bottom of the main window. If
there is an open project window at the bottom of the main window, then some or all of the icons may not
be visible because they are underneath this project window.
Close All Presentations

This command closes all open presentations. User must go to Project View on Systems Toolbar to reopen any of the available presentations.
1, 2, 3...
ETAP displays a list of currently open project windows at the bottom of the Window menu. A checkmark
appears in front of the project name of the active window. Choose a project from this list to make its
window active.
10-108
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
10.2.12 Help Menu
This option enables you to learn about functions and concepts in ETAP. The Help shortcut button creates
a question mark that can be used to point to an area for which you have a question or would like more
details on. This includes being able to select keywords in the Project menu bar. The entire contents of this
user guide are included in the Help file.
The Help menu offers the following commands, which provide assistance for this application:
Help Search
Offers you an index to topics on which you can get help
About ETAP
Displays ETAP version, license and usage as well as licensed capabilities
10-109
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Help Search
Use this command to display the opening screen of Help. From this screen, you can jump to step-by-step
instructions for using ETAP and various types of reference information. Once you open Help, you can
click on the Contents button to return to the opening screen. You can also use Index to search for
information on a specific topic.
About ETAP
This editor provides useful information about how to contact Operation Technology, Inc. In addition,
there is information about the functions activated through your license and other program functions that
can be added to your ETAP package.
When contacting Technical Support, please have this information on hand. This will help support
engineers identify and solve problems much faster. The three pages of About ETAP contain the following
information.
ETAP
This area displays the copyright notice, version number of your copy of ETAP, and OTIs Corporate
Headquarters information.
ETAP User Support

The contact information for the ETAP Technical Support Department is displayed in this group. With a
valid Upgrade and Support Agreement, you may contact this group for any technical support question
about ETAP and ETAP Real-Time.
If you do not have valid Upgrade and Support Agreement and would like to have technical support, please
contact the ETAP Sales for available options on updating your contract.
10-110
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
ETAP Sales
The contact information for the ETAP Sales Department is displayed in this group. Feel free to contact
ETAP Sales for information about upgrades and licensing.
Licensee
This section displays the ETAP license information
Serial Number
This is the serial number for this copy of ETAP.
Number of Buses
Total bus capability purchased for this license of ETAP.
Configuration
Displays license delivery method - Network or Stand Alone
Stand-Alone
The stand-alone hardware key is placed directly on the parallel, USB, or serial port of the computer that
will be running the software. No installation is required other than ETAP itself. Licensing for the
computer will be automatically done by the stand-alone hardware key and the accompanying software
installed by the ETAP setup program.
Network
The network hardware key requires a Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008/ workstation or
server. Place the network hardware key on the back of the computer/server designated to license ETAP.
This will be the permanent location of the key, and therefore it should not be removed once it is installed
and operating. The computers obtaining permission to run ETAP may run Windows XP/Vista/7/Server
2003/Server 2008 operating systems.
Installation on Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 requires that the installation be performed
by a user account with Windows NT Administrative privileges. The network installation can be installed
with the License Manager 7.0 (or current version) Setup program provided on the ETAP 7.0 (or current
version) DVD, launched from the ETAP Installer Program, or installed manually. In each case, the steps
to be performed are the same.
License Type
Displays the type of ETAP license - Nuclear (N), Commercial (C), Educational (E), or Training (T)
10-111
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
Capabilities
The active ETAP capabilities purchased for the license being used are displayed in black on the
Capabilities page. Capabilities displayed in gray are not active and may be added to ETAP by contacting
ETAP Sales by email sales@etap.com or by phone (949) 462-0100.
License
This page displays a list of users currently using ETAP via a network license. The fields show the type of
license, the number of users online and the number of licenses assigned to your site. This is a useful
feature if you the number of users or workstations where ETAP is installed is greater than the number of
available ETAP licenses.
Click the Refresh button to update the information on the page if it has been open for some minutes.
10-112
Menu Bars
One-Line Diagram
ETAP License Manager

This section contains information about the license manager being accessed
LAN Local Area Network license type. Note that with a LAN license, it would not be possible to access
the license manager in case it is installed on a server behind a router.
WAN Wide Area Network license type. With a WAN license, it is possible to access the license
manager in case it is installed on a server behind a router. This is particularly useful in case your offices
are in different time zones and you would like to share the license between the offices.
Server Name
Displays the server name on which the ETAP license manager is running and the software is successfully
connected to.
Users Connected
Displays the total number of connected users or the users utilizing ETAP licenses across a LAN or WAN
Total Licenses
Displays the total number of purchased licenses
Display License Manager

This brings up a list of available license managers in a network. This button is disabled if there is only
one license manager in a network.
Activation Code
Alphanumeric code found on the DVD Sleeve used to activate your ETAP license. You can update the
activation code by pressing the Update button. If you add new capabilities, Operation Technology, Inc.
will send you a new activation code. Click on the Update button to change the Activation Code. Note that
you can copy and paste the code into the update dialog box.
10-113
Menu Bars
Project View
10.3 Project View Menu Bar

The Project View menu bar is displayed when the Project View is active.
The Project View menu bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options, which are almost the
same as those for the One-Line Diagram menu bar. The items that are different in this menu bar are
Change Password in the File menu and Display Options in the Defaults menu. This menu bar offers the
following menus:
File Menu
View Menu
Project Menu
Library Menu
Rules
Defaults Menu
RevControl Menu
Window Menu
Help Menu
File management and conversions

Access Rule books
Base and Revision Data control
Window management
Help access
Note: that most of the menu commands for the Project View menu bar are the same as those for the OneLine Diagram menu bar. Menu items that are not common with the One-Line Diagram menu bar are
explained here.
10-114
Menu Bars
Project View
10.3.1 File Menu

The File menu option from the Project View menu bar provides commands to open/close project files,
logoff/on users, save/copy project files, and convert ETAP DOS or CSV files to ETAP files.
The File menu for the Project View menu bar offers the following commands:
New Project
Open Project
Close Project
Save Project
Copy Project To
Save Library
Convert ETAP DOS File
Convert from CSV File
Convert Access to SQL
Change Password
Log Off
Exit

Close an active project
Save an opened project to a specified file name and continue to function
within the original project
Save the Library File
Convert an ETAP DOS file into an ETAP project file
Convert a comma separated file into an ETAP project file
Convert an Access database file into a SQL database file
Change the password for the project file
Logoff and on to an opened project file as a different user or change
access levels
Exit ETAP
10-115
Menu Bars
Project View
Change Password
If the password option for a project in enabled, each user can change their password by using this
command from the File menu on the Project View menu bar. The password requirement for a project is
enabled or disabled from the User Manager dialog box when you logon as an administrator or can be set
when a new project is created.
10-116
Menu Bars
10.4 Underground Raceway System Menu Bar

The Underground Raceway System (UGS) menu bar is displayed when a U/G raceway presentation is
active.
The UGS menu bar contains a comprehensive collection of menus that are listed here:
File Menu
Edit Menu
View Menu
Project Menu
Library Menu
Rules
Defaults Menu
RevControl Menu
Window Menu
Help Menu
File management and printing

Cut, copy, and paste
Access Rule books
Base and Revision Data control
Window management
Help access
Note: many of the menu commands for the UGS menu bar are the same as those for the One-Line
Diagram menu bar. Menu items that are not common with the One-Line Diagram menu bar are explained
here.
10-117
Menu Bars
10.4.1 File Menu
The File menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
New Project
Open Project
Close Project
Log Off
Save Project
Copy Project To
Save Library
Page Setup
Print Preview
Print
Data Exchange
E-mail Project Files
Exit

Close an existing project file
Logoff and logon as a different user or change access levels
Save an opened project to a specified file name and continue to function within
the original project
Save the Library file
Select a page layout as well as a printer and printer connection
Display the one-line diagram on the screen as it would appear printed
Print the one-line diagram
Access all Data Exchange options (Refer to Data Exchange)
Zip and E-mail, FTP, or store your project files to a remote location
Exit ETAP
10-118
Menu Bars
10.4.2 Edit Menu
The Edit menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Cut
Copy
Paste
Select All
DeSelect All
Delete selected element(s) in the UGS and move it to the Dumpster

Copy selected element(s) in the UGS to the Dumpster
Paste selected element(s) from the Dumpster into the UGS
Select all elements in the UGS
Deselect all elements in the UGS
10-119
Menu Bars
10.4.3 View Menu
The View menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom to Fit
Message Log
Project Toolbar
Mode Toolbar
Study Case Toolbar
Edit Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
Help Line
Show more detail

Show less detail
Re-sizes objects to best fit the window
Show or hide Message Log
Show or hide the Project Toolbar
Show or hide the Mode Toolbar
Show or hide the Study Case Toolbar
Show or hide the Edit Toolbar
Show or hide the Analysis Toolbar
Show or hide the Help Line
10-120
Menu Bars
10.4.4 Library Menu
The Library menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Cable Library
Cable Fire Protection
Open
Save
Save As
Create
Copy/Merge
Purge
Export
Open the Cable Library

Open the Cable Fire Protection Libraries
Open a new ETAP Library
Save an ETAP Library
Save an ETAP Library as a new library
Create an ETAP Library
Copy or Merge an ETAP Library
Purge an ETAP Library
Export library data for printing purposes. Crystal Reports formats are used
for viewing and printing library data.
10-121
Menu Bars
10.4.5 Defaults Menu
ETAP maintains default values for each element in the project database. As each new element is created,
ETAP initializes the element with these default values. You may modify the default properties of any
element through the Defaults menu. ETAP will then use the modified values to initialize each new
element.
To save time in data entering, it is advisable to go though the defaults for each element before creating
your one-line diagram and underground raceway system.
The Defaults menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Display Options
Cable
Heat Source
Direct Buried Raceway
Duct Bank Raceway
Conduit (duct bank)
Location (direct buried)
U/G System
Select defaults for Display Options

Cable Editor defaults
External Heat Source Editor defaults
Direct Buried Raceway Editor defaults
Duct Bank Raceway Editor defaults
Conduit Editor defaults
Location Editor defaults
Underground Raceway System Editor defaults
10-122
Menu Bars
Dumpster
10.5 Dumpster Menu Bar

The Dumpster menu bar is displayed when the System Dumpster is active. This menu bar contains the
three menus listed below:
Edit
Window
Help
Purge or Purge All elements from the Dumpster

Window management
Help access
Note that the Window and Help menu items for the Project View menu bar are the same as those for the
One-Line Diagram menu bar. Menu items that are not common with the one-line diagram menu bar are
explained here.
10.5.1 Edit Menu

Purge
This option deletes the selected cell from the Dumpster permanently. All elements in the selected
Dumpster Cell will be erased from the database and cannot be recovered.
Purge All
This option deletes all cells in the system Dumpster from the Dumpster permanently. All elements in all
Dumpster Cells will be erased from the database and cannot be recovered.
10-123
Menu Bars
Cable Pulling
10.6 Cable Pulling Menu Bar

The Cable Pulling menu bar is displayed when a Cable Pulling Presentation is open and active.
Note: the Cable Pulling Presentation opens in an external window to ETAP.
This menu bar contains the four menus listed below:
File Menu
Study Case Menu
View Menu
Help Menu
Project Management
Create New Study Case
Show/Hide Toolbars
Help Access
10.6.1 File Menu

Save
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or a Study mode. If you have logged on as a
Project editor or Base editor, you CANNOT save a project while working with a revision of the project.
The project can be saved by clicking on Save Project in the File menu or the Save button on the Project
toolbar.
Print
reports, motor starting plots, transient stability plots, Ground Grid and cable temperature plots. For more
details on Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, Batch Print, and Plot capabilities, see Printing and Plotting.
Currently the Cable Pulling Printing Options are disabled
Print Preview
Print Setup
Exit
Using this command will save and close your Cable Pulling project file and take you back to the main
ETAP program.
10-124
Menu Bars
Cable Pulling
10.6.2 Study Case Menu

Create New
Click to create a new Cable Pulling Study Case. ETAP allows you to have unlimited number of study
cases.
10.6.3 View Menu

Toolbar
Click to hide/show the Project toolbar. Functions on this toolbar are Save, Cut, Copy, Paste, Print, Print
Preview, and What is this? Help assistant.
Status Bar
Click to hide/show the Status toolbar. ETAP displays help lines on the Status Bar. The help line provides
brief information about the field where the cursor is placed.
CP Toolbar
Click to hide/show the Cable Pulling toolbar.
Study Toolbar
Click to hide/show the Cable Pulling Study Case.
10.6.4 Help Menu

Help Topics
About Cable Pulling

This editor provides contact information for Operation Technology, Inc. as well contact information for
sales and technical support.
10-125
Menu Bars
Ground Grid
10.7 Ground Grid Menu Bar

The Ground Grid menu bar is displayed when a Ground Grid Presentation is open and active.
Note: the Ground Grid Presentation opens in an external window to ETAP.
This menu bar contains the four menus listed below:
File Menu
Edit Menu
View Menu
Study Case Menu
Default Menu
Help Menu
Project management
Editing functions
Show/Hide toolbars
Create new presentation
Set defaults for editors
Help access
10.7.1 File Menu

Save Project
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or a Study mode. If you have logged on as a
Project editor or Base editor, you CANNOT save a project while the project is in a revision level of data.
A project can be saved by clicking on Save Project in the File menu or the Save button on the Project
toolbar. Shortcut key is available [Ctrl + S].
Print
reports, motor starting plots, transient stability plots, Ground Grid and cable temperature plots. For more
details on Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, Batch Print, and Plot capabilities, see Printing and Plotting.
Clicking on this command will allow you to print the Ground Grid Top View. The following editor is
brought for selecting the printer, the number of copies, etc.
Print Preview
Clicking on this command activates the print preview for the Ground Grid System. The Top View of the
grid is placed in a report format for you to print. The Project information (Project Name, Location, etc)
is entered through the One-Line Project menu \ Information.
Print Setup
Dialog box to select and setup the printer to be used with this project.
Import from XML File

Allows you to select an Extensible Markup language (XML) file and import its data into a Ground Grid
System. This is useful when importing existing ground grid designs from AutoCAD files.
Export to XML File

This option allows you to export selected areas of a Ground Grid System to an XML file.
10-126
Menu Bars
Ground Grid
Exit
Using this command will save and close your Ground Grid project file and return to the ETAP base
program.
10.7.2 Edit Menu

Cut
This selection allows you to cut selected elements of a Ground Grid System.
Copy
This selection allows you to copy elements of a Ground Grid System.
Paste
This selection allows you to paste elements of a Ground Grid System that have been selected and copied.
10.7.3 View Menu

Toolbar
Clicking on this command will allow you to display the Project toolbar. Clicking again will disable the
display and the toolbar will be hidden. Functions on this toolbar are Save, Cut, Copy, Paste, Print, Print
Preview, and What is this help?
Status Bar
Clicking on this command will allow you to display the Status toolbar. Clicking again will disable the
display and the toolbar will be hidden. ETAP displays help line on the status bar. This help line describes
the field where the cursor is placed.
Grid
This selection is inactive on this version of the Ground Grid System Program.
10.7.4 Study Case Menu

Create New
Clicking on this function will allow you to create a new Ground Grid Study Case. ETAP allows you to
have unlimited number of study cases.
10-127
Menu Bars
Ground Grid
10.7.5 Default Menu

Conductor
The Conductor editor default specifies the values to be placed in the Conductor editor for each new
conductor created. Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the overall
time required to develop the grid.
Rod
The Rod editor default specifies the values to be placed in the Rod editor for each new rod that is created.
Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the overall time required to
develop the grid.
IEEE Grouper
The IEEE Grouper editor default specifies the values to be placed in the IEEE Grouper editor for each
new IEEE grouper created. Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the
overall time required to develop grid.
FEM Grouper
The FEM Grouper editor default specifies the values to be placed in the FEM Grouper editor for each new
FEM grouper created. Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the
overall time required to develop the one-line grid.
10.7.6 Help Menu

Help Topics
About PSGrid
This editor provides very useful information to contact Operation Technology, Inc. for sales and technical
support.
10-128
Chapter 11
AC Elements
This chapter addresses editors for all AC elements in the One-Line Diagram. Except for the element IDs,
bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties,
which are subject to Base and Revision Data. The following table lists all the AC elements in ETAP that
are included on the AC toolbar.
Bus/Node
Pointer
Transformer, 2-Winding
Branches
Transformer, Open-Delta
Cable
Power Grid (Utility System)
Induction Machine
Lumped Load
Sources and Loads
Static Load
Panel System
Remote Connector
Composites
Composite Motor
Fuse
Protective Devices
Recloser
Overload Heater
Single Throw Switch
Settings and Reports
Instrumentation Toolbar
Display Options
11-1
Bus/Node
Bus Duct
Transmission Line
Impedance
Generator, Synchronous
PV Array
Motor, Synchronous
Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Capacitor
Harmonic Filter
Phase Adapter
MG Set (Rotary UPS)
HVDC Transmission Link
Composite Network
Contactor
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
Ground Switch
In-line Overload Relay
Double Throw Switch
Ground Grid
AC Elements
Bus
11.1 Bus
You can enter the properties associated with AC buses (nodes) of the electrical distribution system in this
Data Editor.
The ETAP Bus Editor allows you to model different types of buses in an electrical system. The data
entered in the Bus Editor is used when running all types of system studies.
Note: Specifying bus generation or loading is not done from the Bus Editor. Generators, motors, and
static loads are elements and can be connected to any desired bus. ETAP can display all loads,
generators, and utilities that are directly connected to the bus from the Bus Editor. Protective devices are
ignored when ETAP determines connections to buses.
A bus is defined as a point (node) where one or more branches are connected. A branch could be a cable,
transformer, etc. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus is the bus nominal kV which can
be entered in the Info page of the Bus Editor. Once entered, this value is defined as a unique bus in the
system model, which can be connected to other buses/nodes by placing branches between them.
Buses have two types of graphical presentation, i.e., Bus or Node. You can change a bus to a node or
vice versa at any time. This option gives you the flexibility to display annotation of buses and nodes
differently.
The Bus Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info
Protection
Phase V
Harmonic
Load
Reliability
Motor/Gen
Remarks
Rating
Comment
Arc Flash
11-2
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.1 Info Page

You use the Info page to specify the bus ID, Service & State, Nominal kV, Initial/Operating Voltage
(Magnitude and Angle), Diversity Factors (Maximum and Minimum), FDR Tag, and Equipment Name
and Description.
Info
ID
This is a unique ID name containing up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each bus. The assigned IDs consist of the default bus ID plus
an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increase. The default bus
ID (Bus) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Recommendations for assigning buses are as follows:
Every piece of major equipment, such as switchgear, switchrack, and motor control centers
(MCCs).
11-3
AC Elements
Bus
On the primary side of transformers when the primary line/cable feeder is more than:
250 feet for high voltage cables
100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
Utility and generator terminals when the cable is more than:

250 feet for high voltage cables
100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
Induction and synchronous motors do not need buses assigned at their terminals since motors can
include equipment cables.
Nominal kV
Enter the nominal voltage of the bus in kilovolts (kV). This input is a required entry, which is used by
ETAP to convert the final bus voltages to the actual values for graphical display and output reports, i.e.,
bus nominal kV is used as the base kV for the reported percent voltages.
Note: The nominal voltage and actual base voltage of a bus can be different values. Actual base voltages
of buses are calculated internally by ETAP, starting from a swing bus. The rest of the base values are
calculated using the transformer turn ratios. A swing bus is defined as a bus that has a power grid and/or
generator (in swing mode) connected to it.
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a bus can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of
Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of Service element can be edited like an
In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies.
When the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the
deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a deenergized element is grey.
State
State is used to describe the service status of an element. Certain states have flexible service status like
As-Built, New, Future, Moved and Modified can be both In or Out of Service. Certain states have fixed
service status like Removed, Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Other are out of service states.
Bus Voltage
Initial% V
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage as a percentage of the bus nominal kV. This value is used as the
initial bus voltage for load flow studies including motor starting, harmonics, and transient stability
studies. For unregulated buses which do not have any utility or generator connected to them, the
operating voltage is calculated during load flow analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or
initial value. For regulated buses, which have a utility or generator (in swing or voltage control mode)
connected to them, this value is not used. Voltage magnitude defaults to 100%.
11-4
AC Elements
Bus
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value will
reflect the operating voltage of the bus after you run a load flow study.
For ANSI short-circuit studies, this value is used as the prefault bus voltage if you select the Vmag X
Nominal kV option from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor, Standard page.
Initial kV
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in kV. The %V is calculated if the Nominal kV has already been
entered. This value is used the same as %V, as explained above.
Angle
Enter the phase angle of the bus voltage in degrees. For non-swing buses (buses which do not have any
utility or Generator in Swing Mode connected to them), voltage angles are calculated during load flow
analysis using the values entered here as a first guess. This value is ignored for swing type buses. The
voltage Angle default is 0.0.
Operating Voltage %V / kV / Angle

After you run load flow studies, the operating voltage magnitude in %, kV and phase angle of the bus are
displayed here.
Connection
The phase connection for the bus can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase 2W, or 1 Phase 3W. The
default connection is 3 Phase. You can change the default connection from the Defaults menu or from the
Project View.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the bus to any device. Once the bus is
connected to a device, the phase connection selections will be grayed out. To change the connection type,
you need to disconnect the bus from all devices.
3 Phase
Select to define the bus as a three-phase bus. Three-phase and single-phase loads can be connected to this
bus. Single-phase branches must be connected through a phase adapter before connecting to a threephase bus.
1 Phase 2W
Select this to define the bus as single-phase two-wire bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected to
this bus.
1 Phase 3W
Select this to define the bus as single-phase three-wire bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected
to this bus.
Load Diversity Factor

Minimum and Maximum
The minimum and maximum diversity factors (loading limits) of each individual bus can be specified as a
percentage of the bus loading. These values are used when the Minimum or Maximum Loading option is
selected from the Study Case Editor for load flow, motor starting, Harmonic Analysis, Transient Stability,
11-5
AC Elements
Bus
and Optimal Power Flow Studies. When the Minimum or Maximum Loading option is used for a study,
all motors and static loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied by their diversity factors.
Equipment
Tag #
This allows the user to enter the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
This allows the user to enter the equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
This allows the user to enter the equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
Click to lock / unlock the editor properties of the current element. When the editor properties are locked,
Classification
Zone
Enter the zone where the bus is located, or click the counter arrows to change the values.
Area
Enter the area where the bus is located, or click the counter arrows to change the values.
Region
Enter the region where the bus is located, or click the counter arrows to change the values.
11-6
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.2 Phase V Page
Initial Voltage
Line-to-Neutral %V
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in a percentage of Phase A to ground, B to ground or C to ground
kV.
Note: The kV is calculated if the Nominal kV in the Bus Info page has already been entered.
This value is used as the initial bus voltage for unbalanced load flow study. For unregulated buses which
do not have any utility or generator connected to them, the operating voltage is calculated during load
flow analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value.
For regulated buses, which have a utility or generator (in swing or voltage control mode) the internal
voltage per phase is calculated and used to maintain the voltages at that level.
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor,
this value will reflect the operating voltage of the bus after you run a load flow study.
11-7
AC Elements
Bus
Line-to-Neutral kV
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in kV. Notice that the %V is calculated if the Nominal kV in the
info page has already being entered. This value is used same as %V, as explained above.
Line-to-Neutral Angle
Enter the phase angle of the bus voltage in degrees. For non-swing buses (buses which do not have any
utility or Generator in Swing Mode connected to them), voltage angles are calculated during unbalanced
load flow analysis by using the values entered here as a first guess; unless, the angle difference between
the calculated value based on phase-shift is larger than the specified MaxIniAngDiff, in which case the
program would use the calculated value.
The MaxIniAngDiff is defaulted to 10. To modify this default, consult the ETAPS.INI Section.
Line-to-Line %V, kV, Angle

These values are the calculated line-to-line (Phase A to B, B to C, and C to A) voltages based on the
defined Line-to-Neutral voltage magnitudes and angle.
Operating Voltage (Line-to-Neutral and Line-to-Line)

After you run unbalanced load flow studies, the operating voltage magnitude in %, kV, and angle line-toneutral and line-to-line of the bus are displayed here.
Voltage Unbalance
%LVUR
Line Voltage Unbalance Rate. This is the maximum voltage deviation from the average line voltage in
percent.
%PVUR
Phase Voltage Unbalance Rate. This is the maximum voltage deviation from the average phase voltage in
percent.
%VUF
Voltage Unbalance Factor. This is a negative sequence to positive sequence voltage ratio in percent.
11-8
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.3 Load Page

The Load page is used to display the total Constant kVA, Constant Z, Constant I and Generic loads
directly connected to a bus for each loading category. The displayed kW and kvar (or MW and Mvar)
indicate the algebraic sum of the operating load of all loads that are either directly connected to the bus or
connected through composite networks, composite motors, or power panels. These values are obtained
from the actual loads connected to the bus.
Click the individual rows to view the total per phase load directly connected to the bus. ETAP updates
the fields at the bottom of the editor MW, Mvar, %PF, Amp (according to the loading category per phases
A, B, C) and provides a total.
11-9
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.4 Motor/Gen Page

The Motor/Generator page displays each individual induction motor, synchronous motor, and generator
that is directly connected to the bus you are editing. The motors displayed on this page can be located
inside a composite motor that is directly connected to the bus.
11-10
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.5 Rating Page

The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e. open air, switchgear, MCC, etc). It also
contains typical data for approach boundaries and equipment gap between conductors based on IEEE
1584 2002. The user also may enter custom data according to equipment manufacturer specifications.
Standard
ANSI
Select this option if the bus is rated under ANSI Standards. By selecting this option, the bus bracing will
change to ANSI Standard fields.
IEC
Select this option if the bus is rated under IEC Standards. By selecting this option, the bus bracing will
change to IEC Standard fields.
Note: There is no IEC Arc Flash Standard, selecting IEC will change the short-circuit parameters for
bracing to peak currents, but the arc flash results are unaffected by this option. This option only applies
for short-circuit 60909-0 2001 device evaluation and not for AF at this point.
11-11
AC Elements
Bus
Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment that are supported for Arc Flash
Analysis and Short-Circuit. The available equipment types are as follows:
Other
MCC
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Panelboard
Cable Bus
Open Air
Note: These types come from IEEE 1584-2002 Table 4. The switchboard and switchrack are handled in
the same fashion as the switchgear. The Type drop-down list plays a very important role in the
determination of the incident energy for systems with voltage levels less than or equal to 15 kV. Note that
for voltages above 15 kV the selection of equipment type does not make any difference in the arc flash
calculations since the Lee Method is used for those voltage levels.
For new buses the default value is Other which is handled in the same manner as a cable bus, since in
previous versions of ETAP the Cable Bus option was tied to this selection.
If the option Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data is enabled, the fields in the
bus editor related to arc flash are immediately populated with typical or user-defined IEEE 1584 and
NFPA 70E 2009 parameters depending on the selection on the Data Options for Bus editor default editor.
Note: Bus type is different from the bus symbol that is displayed graphically. A normal bus symbol is a
bar that can be stretched from both ends. You can change the bus to a node, which is displayed as a small
circle. Nodes are provided so you can place them where you do not wish to emphasize a bus and do not
wish to display the current or power flow from or into the element.
Protective Device Isolation

This is a major change on the calculation methodology of ETAP. This option can be used to configure the
program to produce more conservative results by making the assumption that the main source protective
device(s) (PDs) are or are not adequately isolated from the bus and may fail to operate and be capable of
de-energizing the arc fault before it escalates into a line-side arc fault.
If this option is checked, then the program assumes that there is enough isolation and that the directly
connected source protective device (main pd(s)) can de-energize the bus arc fault. If the option is
unchecked, then it is assummed that no adequate isolation exists (i.e. no sheet metal or suficient barriers
preventing the bus side arc fault from damaging the protective device itself and possible scalation into a
line-side fault) and the directly connected source PDs are ignored.
Note: This option (checked or unchecked) is not considered or applied into the calculation until the study
case option Main Protective Device is not Isolated is enabled.
The following table lists the default values of this option for different types of equipment.
11-12
AC Elements
Bus
Default Values for Main PD is Isolated check box
Isolation Check Box for
Default
Equipment Type
Other
Isolated (checked)
MCC
Not Isolated (unchecked)
Switchgear
Isolated (checked)
Switchboard
Switchrack
Isolated (checked)
Panelboard
Cable Bus
Isolated (checked)
Open Air
Isolated (checked)
The operational logic for the Main PD is Isolated Checkbox is listed below:
The check boxes get updated in the same way the Gap and X-Factors get updated as part of the
typical data routine. That is:
Clicking on the Typical Data button resets the checkbox to the default value
displayed in the table above.
If the bus nominal kV or equipment type are modified, then the checkbox is
automatically updated back to default value.
The option is not available for buses with Nominal kV greater than15kV.
Continuous
Enter the continuous current rating of the selected bus in amps. If this value is exceeded during load flow
calculations and the overload settings are set in the Load Flow Study Case, then ETAP will generate an
alert.
Bracing
Symmetrical, Asymmetrical, Peak
When a symmetrical value for low voltage buses is entered, ETAP calculates the asymmetrical value
based on the type of bus and NEMA & UL test power factors. These are just preferred rating factors
based on common standards and practices. If the actual asymmetrical value is available from the
manufacturer, those numbers need to be entered and utilized.
For low voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated symmetrical and
asymmetrical fault currents with the symmetrical and asymmetrical bus bracing entered in this page.
For medium voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated asymmetrical
and peak fault currents with the asymmetrical and peak (Crest) bus bracing entered in this page.
Under IEC fault analysis, ETAP compares the calculated peak fault currents with the peak bus bracing
entered in this field.
11-13
AC Elements
Bus
Arc Flash Parameters

Gap between Conductors / Buses
This Gap is defined in IEEE 1584-2002 Section 9.4 as the gap between conductors or buses for the
equipment at the fault location. This value is to be entered in millimeters (mm).
This value entered must be within the specified range in Table 1. Gap values higher than those tested in
the standard are not allowed (i.e. higher than 153 mm). The minimum a gap value is 1 mm, for each
device type.
Table 1 shows the default values used for each device type. There is no gap between conductors for buses
greater than 15.0 kV. This logic is implemented to avoid using equipment gaps that do not follow Table 4
of IEEE 1584; however, the value can be changed to any other value within the specified range.
Distance X Factor
The Distance X Factor field is for display only. The values it displays are selected according to the
equipment type and voltage as described in Table1, under the column X Factor Value. This value is a
constant for each type of device and is used in equation 5.3 of IEEE 1584-2002 as an exponent. There is
no Distance X Factor for buses greater than 15.0 kV.
Typical Gap & Boundary

The Typical Gap & Boundary button brings in default values and ranges for the equipment gap, X-factor,
Limited, Restricted, and Prohibited Approach Boundaries. The defaults and ranges are shown in Tables 1,
2, and 3.
Please refer to the Arc Flash Analysis Data Editor for a complete list of the typical data values used. Of
course if the user-defined options are used as the source of data for the bus, then the bus values will be
populated with the customized values as defined by the user.
The following table summarizes the typical default values for the Conductor Gap under the column Gap
Default Value (mm).
Table 1: Range Values and Default Values for Gaps between Conductors and X Factors
Bus Nominal
kV Range
Bus Nominal
kV <= 1.0
kV*
1.0 kV < Bus
Equipment
Type*
Typical Gap
Range mm.
Gap Default
Value (mm)
40
Open Air
Cable Bus
MCC
Other
Panelboard
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Open Air
1 to 999
1 to 999
11-14
13
25
13
25
32
32
32
102
X Factor
Value
2.000
2.000
1.641
2.000
1.641
1.473
1.473
1.473
2.000
AC Elements
Bus Nominal
kV Range
Nominal kV
<= 5.0 kV
5.0 kV < Bus

Nominal kV
<= 15.0 kV*
Bus
Equipment
Type*
Typical Gap
Range mm.
Cable Bus
MCC
Other
Panelboard
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Open Air
Cable Bus
MCC
Other
Panelboard
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Gap Default
Value (mm)
X Factor
Value
13
102
13
102
102
102
102
153
13
153
13
153
153
153
153
2.000
0.973
2.000
0.973
0.973
0.973
0.973
2.000
2.000
0.973
2.000
0.973
0.973
0.973
0.973
1 to 999
* Note: Any bus whose nominal voltage is less than 0.208 kV and higher than 15kV has the same default
values as that of a 0.208 kV bus and a 15 kV bus; however the Lee method is used instead of the
empirical IEEE 1584 equations to determine the arc flash result if the voltage is below 0.208 kV and
higher than 15kV. This means that the gaps and x-factors are disregarded for such cases.
Shock Protection
The Limited Approach Boundary (LAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2009, as the approach limit at
a distance from an exposed live part within which a shock hazard exists.
approaching a conductor that is not properly braced in a fixed position. The value should be entered in
feet or meter. The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009.
The module will select this value according to the kV of the bus. NFPA 70E 2004 values may also be
used depending on the selection on the Bus Arc Flash Typical Data default editor.
Defaults for Limited Approach Boundaries

The range and default values for the Limited Approach Boundaries are defined according to the values
listed in NFPA 70E-2009 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock Protection). If you
click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated according to the
values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be reset to the default
ones. Tables 2-3 list the limited approach boundaries for the 2004 and 2009 editions of NFPA 70E.
11-15
AC Elements
Bus
Table 2: Limited Approach Boundary for Different kV Levels (NFPA 70E 2004)
Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries
Bus Nominal kV
Range
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
0.751 kV to 15 kV
15.1 kV to 36 kV
36.1 kV to 46 kV
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
72.6 kV to 121 kV
138 kV to 145 kV
161 kV to 169 kV
230kV to 242 kV
345 kV to 362 kV
500 kV to 550 kV
765 kV to 800 kV
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.66
11
11.66
13
15.33
19
23.75
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10.66 to 30
11 to 30
11.66 to 30
13 to 45
15.33 to 45
19 to 45
23.75 to 45
3.5
3.5
5
6
8
8
8
10
11.66
13
15.33
19
23.75
3.5 to 30
3.5 to 30
5 to 30
6 to 30
8 to 30
8 to 30
8 to 30
10 to 30
11.66 to 30
13 to 45
15.33 to 45
19 to 45
23.75 to 45
* Note: If the Bus kV is higher than 800 kV, the boundary distances remain the same as those for the
800 kV
Bus Nominal kV
Range
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
0.751 kV to 15 kV
15.1 kV to 36 kV
36.1 kV to 46 kV
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
72.6 kV to 121 kV
138 kV to 145 kV
161 kV to 169 kV
230kV to 242 kV
345 kV to 362 kV
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.66
11
11.66
13
15.33
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10 to 30
10.66 to 30
11 to 30
11.66 to 30
13 to 45
15.33 to 45
3.5
3.5
5
6
8
8
8
10
11.66
13
15.33
3.5 to 30
3.5 to 30
5 to 30
6 to 30
8 to 30
8 to 30
8 to 30
10 to 30
11.66 to 30
13 to 45
15.33 to 45
11-16
AC Elements
Bus
Bus Nominal kV
Range
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
19
23.75
19 to 45
23.75 to 45
19
23.75
19 to 45
23.75 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV
765 kV to 800 kV
800 kV
The units of the limited approach boundary can be set to metric units if the project standards are set to
Metric units.

not cross when approaching a conductor that is fixed (not movable). The value should be entered in feet.
The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009. ETAP will select
this value according to the kV of the bus. This value may be displayed on the Arc Flash Hazard Label if
selected in the appropriate template.
See Table 2 & 3 above for definitions of the range and default values for Limited Approach Boundaries.
Limited Approach Boundary Toggle Radio Button

This Toggle Radio button allows you to select which limited approach boundary to display on the Label.
Depending on the selection, the label from the bus arc flash page or the global arc flash calculation labels
will show the Exposed Movable Conductor or the Fixed Circuit Part limited approach boundary.
This Toggle Radio button basically serves the purpose of telling the program which one of these values
should be passed to the arc flash labels.
This value may be displayed on the Arc Flash Hazard Label if selected in the appropriate template.

The Restricted Approach Boundary (RAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2004 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due to electrical
arc over combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity to the live part.
The value should be entered in feet.
Defaults for Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries

The range and default values of the Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries are defined according
to the values listed in NFPA 70E-2004 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock
Protection). If you click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated
according to the values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be
reset to the default ones.
11-17
AC Elements
Bus
Table 4: Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundary for Different kV levels (NFPA 70E 2004)
Bus Nominal kV
Range
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
0.751 kV to 15 kV
15.1 kV to 36 kV
36.1 kV to 46 kV
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
72.6 kV to 121 kV
138 kV to 145 kV
161 kV to 169 kV
230kV to 242 kV
345 kV to 362 kV
500 kV to 550 kV
765 kV to 800 kV
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
1
1
2.16
2.58
2.75
3.16
3.25
3.58
4
5.25
8.5
11.25
14.91
1 to 30
1 to 30
2.16 to 30
2.58 to 30
2.75 to 30
3.16 to 30
3.25 to 30
3.58 to 30
4 to 30
5.25 to 45
8.5 to 45
11.25 to 45
14.91 to 45
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.8
1.41
2.08
2.66
3.08
3.5
4.75
8
10.75
14.41
0.1 to 30
0.1 to 30
0.6 to 30
0.8 to 30
1.41 to 30
2.08 to 30
2.66 to 30
3.08 to 30
3.5 to 30
4.75 to 45
8 to 45
10.75 to 45
14.41 to 45
800 kV

Bus Nominal kV
Range
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
0.751 kV to 15 kV
15.1 kV to 36 kV
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
1
1
2.16
2.58
1 to 30
1 to 30
2.16 to 30
2.58 to 30
0.1
0.1
0.6
0.8
0.1 to 30
0.1 to 30
0.6 to 30
0.8 to 30
11-18
AC Elements
Bus
Bus Nominal kV
Range
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
2.75
3.25
3.33
3.83
4.25
5.66
9.16
11.83
15.91
2.75 to 30
3.25 to 30
3.33 to 30
3.83 to 30
4.25 to 30
5.66 to 45
9.16 to 45
11.83 to 45
15.91 to 45
1.41
2.16
2.75
3.33
3.75
5.16
8.66
11.33
15.41
1.41 to 30
2.16 to 30
2.75 to 30
3.33 to 30
3.75 to 30
5.16 to 45
8.66 to 45
11.33 to 45
15.41 to 45
36.1 kV to 46 kV
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
72.6 kV to 121 kV
138 kV to 145 kV
161 kV to 169 kV
230kV to 242 kV
345 kV to 362 kV
500 kV to 550 kV
765 kV to 800 kV
800 kV.
The units of the Restricted and Prohibited approach boundaries can be set to metric units if the project
standards are set to Metric units.

The Prohibited Approach Boundary (PAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2004 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making contact with
the live part. The value should be entered in feet.
For definitions of the range and default values for Prohibited Approach Boundaries, see Table 4 and 5
above.
Insulating Glove Class

The insulating glove class field shows the insulating glove class and voltage rating determined based on
the bus nominal kV. This information is updated automatically as soon as the bus nominal kV is known.
The following table shows the nominal bus kV ranges and the corresponding insulating glove classes and
voltage ratings according to ASTM D120/IEC903 Standards.
Note: In ETAP 7.0.0 the default values are editable and can be customized to allow only for higher glove
classes than those specified by ASTM D120. To modify the glove classes used by the program you need
to access the user-defined portion of the Shock Hazard Analysis Data editor from the
Project\Settings\Arc Flash menu.
Table 6: ASTM Insulated Glove Voltage Classes: (ASTM D120/IEC903) Standards

Maximum use
ETAP Bus Nominal kV
Types of Insulating Glove
voltage rating
Class
Range
AC Volts L-L
Low Voltage Gloves
500
00
Bus kV 0.500
11-19
AC Elements
Bus
High Voltage Gloves

No available class per ASTM
1000
7500
17000
26500
36000
N/A
0
1
2
3
4
N/A
0.500 kV < Bus kV 1.0 kV

1.0 kV < Bus kV 7.5 kV
7.5 kV < Bus kV 17.0 kV
17.0 kV < Bus kV 26.5 kV
26.5 kV < Bus kV 36.0 kV
Bus kV > 36.0 kV
Note: ASTM does not define the insulating glove voltage rating or class for voltage higher than 36000
Volts. As a result of this, the voltage rating is set to the bus nominal kV if the bus nominal voltage is
higher than 36 kV and the glove class is omitted in the labels.
Shock hazard when
The Shock hazard when field may be used to provide additional information about electrocution (shock
hazard) so that it may be printed on some label templates or the MS Excel arc flash report. You can use it
to add a description about when there is a shock hazard present. You can type up to 50 alphanumeric
characters and define your own informational message. The following table contains three possibilities
that have been built into the program.
Note: This information is only to be displayed on certain arc flash label templates and will not cause any
effect on the arc flash results (i.e. effect of covers open or closed, etc). The default for this field is covers
removed
Table 7: Possible additional descriptions of the Shock Hazard for the AF labels
Field
Shock Hazard when
Default
Comments
covers removed
This could read doors are open
enclosure doors are closed
This could read covers are on
hinged covers are open
This could read opening hinged doors
Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data

This option configures the bus editor to automatically update arc flash data every time the bus nominal
kV or the equipment type are modified. Selecting this checkbox saves you an extra click to update the
typical or user-defined values for each bus that is configured. This option is selected by default.
This button opens the default Bus Arc Flash Typical Data editor. This editor allows you to configure the
bus editors data source for the Gaps, X-factors, working distances and protection boundaries. The bus arc
flash typical data editor can also be accessed from the project \settings\Arc Flash\Bus Arc Flash Typical
Data menu. For more details refer to Chapter 18 - Arc Flash Analysis.
Data Options
Data menu. See Chapter 18 - Arc Flash Analysis for more details.
11-20
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.6 Arc Flash Page

The Bus Arc Flash page contains the quick incident energy calculator, which is a powerful analysis tool
that allows you to perform a quick arc flash analysis at the bus level if you already know some of the
input data necessary to calculate the incident energy. Also, it displays the calculated arc flash analysis
results from the global calculation. The quick incident energy calculator allows you to perform a
hazard/risk assessment for an individual bus. This tool can be particularly useful in some of the following
cases:
The short-circuit results are already known.
The arc fault clearing time is known or can be conservatively estimated.
You need to modify part of the system and want to know the impact of the changes on the
hazard/risk assessment.
You want to perform some What if scenarios to help increase the safety margin of the arc flash
You need to produce a label for the equipment, but do not want to run the global calculation.
This page contains several input parameters needed for the global system calculated arc flash analysis.
(See the Running Global Arc Flash Analysis section for more details.)
The Quick Incident Energy Calculator has the capability to perform arc flash calculations based on purely
user-defined parameters or based on system-calculated results. The fields marked as Calculated have been
updated by the global arc flash calculation to this page (as display only values). Those marked as UserDefined have been manually entered, except for the fault clearing time (FCT) and source PD arcing
current when you have selected a source PD. The quick incident energy calculator can display the
incident energy and flash protection boundary calculated based on either set of parameters.
11-21
AC Elements
Bus
Calculated
This section displays the results of the global arc flash calculation. The Bus Editor Arc Flash page uses
the update values to determine the incident energy.
Bus Fault Current

This field shows the total bus bolted (3-Phase/1-Phase) fault current in kA which is calculated by the
Short-Circuit Program {1/2 cycle, 1.5 to 4 cycle (ANSI) or initial symmetrical current (Ik for IEC)}.
This field may be updated from the global arc flash calculation if the option Update Fault Currents is
selected from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please note that this field is not updated if the
fault current decay method is used since there are several short-circuit current values calculated over
time in this case.
Bus Arcing Current

This field shows the total bus arcing current calculated based on the 3-phase short-circuit current (1/2
Cycle Symmetrical RMS or 1.5 to 4 cycle). This field may be updated by the global arc flash calculation
if the option Update Fault Currents is selected from the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case.
Please also note that if the fault current decay method is selected, then this value is not updated since it is
changing over time.
Source PD
This is the ID of the source protective device determined by the global arc flash calculation to be the
device which clears the fault at the bus (last operating device to de-energize the fault). If there are
multiple source branches with protective devices, ETAP will select the one that takes the longer to trip
(clear the fault).
11-22
AC Elements
Bus
The ID of the source PD is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the update options are selected in the arc
flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It
is only recalculated and updated by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a
successful global arc flash calculation.
Source PD Arcing Current

The fault current shown in this field is the actual arcing current in kA passing through the source PD that
clears the fault. Please note that the current shown here is expressed using the base kV of the location of
the protective device. This means that the current shown here could be the arcing current passing through
the protective device on the primary side of a feeder transformer.
This current value is passed to the bus arc flash page if the option Update Fault Currents is selected in
the Arc Flash Page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. Please note that this value is not calculated inside the
editor, but passed by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a successful
global arc flash calculation. Please also note that this value will not be updated if you are using the fault
current decay method since the current is changing over time.
Fault Clearing Time (FCT)

The arc duration is defined in ETAP as the Fault Clearing Time (FCT). This is the calculated time in
seconds, which is needed by the protective device to completely open and clear the arc fault (extinguish
the arc). The FCT value is calculated by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into this field.
The global arc flash calculation will update this value if the option Update Buses FCT is checked in the
Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor.
Note: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by the
global arc flash calculation.
Grounding
The Calculated system grounding for arc flash calculations is defined as grounded or ungrounded
according to IEEE 1584-2002. Grounded systems are those that have solidly grounded connections.
Ungrounded systems are those that are open (Delta, Wye-open) and those that are high and low resistance
grounded.
This Calculated System grounding is determined by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into
this field if the option Update Grounding is selected in the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study
Case. Its default value is grounded.
Note 1: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by
the global arc flash calculation.
Note 2: As different protective devices operate, the system grounding configuration may change (i.e. if a
source which is solidly grounded trips and the remaining sources are open or resistance grounded). ETAP
assumes that the grounding configuration remains constant during the fault duration. If it is possible that
the system grounding configuration will change during the fault, then assume that the system is
ungrounded. This will yield more conservative results.
11-23
AC Elements
Bus
Incident Energy
This is the calculated incident energy based on the system calculated parameters. The units for the
incident energy are Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the
empirically derived IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage). This
value is not updated if you are using the fault current decay method. For this method the energy is
determined in multiple stages and it is difficult to represent in this editor as a single value.
The incident energy is used to determine the Hazard/Risk Category and the Flash Protection Boundary
(ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough parameters or the user has no
authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002 Standards.
Note 1: THE RESULTS IN THE CALCULATED SECTION OF THE BUS EDITOR MAY NOT
AGREE WITH THOSE DETERMINED BY THE GLOBAL CALCULATION UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
1) You are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors
and x-factors which do not agree with the values you have (or may not have entered yet) in the
individual bus editor.
2) You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
This option is located in the tools\ Options (Preferences) editor under the Arc Flash section. The
reason is that the updated bolted fault current in the bus represents the total short-circuit current at
the beginning of the fault. If a source trips over time and the current contribution to the energy is
removed, then the value of energy will be less than the one calculated by the bus arc flash page
(since it only calculates based on the total short-circuit current).
Note 2: The incident energy results shown in the bus arc flash page can be determined based on the IEEE
1584 empirical equations or based on the theoretically derive Lee method equations. The Lee method is
used whenever the fault parameters are outside the range of the empirical method. A message indicated
this condition will be shown on the lower left hand side corner of the bus arc flash page.
Protection Boundary
The Flash Protection Boundary is the distance from the arc source at which the onset of a second-degree
burn could occur. This value is determined based on second-degree burn criteria of 1.2 Cal/cm2. This is
determined from the incident energy and fault clearing time. The unit of this field is in feet. This value is
empty unless the calculation is performed and you have logged into the current project with the access
level to run the Arc Flash module.
Note 1: The flash protection boundary calculated in the Bus Arc Flash page may be different from the
global arc flash calculated results if the EB value (AF Data Page of the study case editor) is set to a value
higher than 1.2 cal/cm2 or if notes 1& 2 from the incident energy section apply.
Note 2: The bus Arc Flash page always uses EB = 1.2 cal/cm2 to determine the flash protection boundary.
Please also note that the equations used to determine the flash protection boundary is different for the
empirical method or Lee methods. Depending on which method is used, the program automatically
determines the right equation to use.
11-24
AC Elements
Bus
Category (NFPA70E 2009)

The hazard/risk category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the system calculated
incident energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C)(11) of NFPA
70E-2009 is used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is
performed and you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash module.
The value may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA
70E 2009 (40 Cal/cm2).
Note: For the bus Quick Incident Energy Calculator, only the NFPA 70E-2009 categories are used.
User-Defined
The user-defined section of the bus arc flash page allows the user to define parameters other than those
automatically calculated by ETAP to perform an arc flash analysis. Some of the user-defined parameters
may also be used for the global arc flash calculation.
Bus Fault Current

This is the total 3-phase bolted fault current value in kA, which may be known before hand. The quick
incident energy calculator does not differentiate between 3-phase and line-to-ground short-circuit currents
for this field so if desired a line to ground short-circuit current value could be entered here. The program
will calculate the user-defined bus arcing current based on this value.
Bus Arcing Current

This field displays the total bus arcing current calculated based on the user-defined Bus Fault Current in
kA. This is a useful field since it shows the arcing current based on the available bolted 3-phase fault
current.
Source PD
This drop-down list allows you to select the protective device which you want to use to determine the
fault clearing time (FCT) for a fault at this bus. The drop-down list contains all the relays, fuses, and low
voltage circuit breakers in the system. The global arc flash calculation will use this protective device as
the source PD to determine the FCT if the option User-Defined Source PD (Bus Editor) is selected in
the arc flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, otherwise, it will be ignored when you run the global
arc flash calculation.
In ETAP, a relay must be interlocked with a breaker, contactor or switch. If you select a relay from this
list then the program will find the current passing through the current transformer connected to the relay
and then proceed to find the breaker from the interlock list that can actually clear the fault (breaker
connected to a source path to the faulted bus). If you select a fuse or a low voltage breaker with its own
trip device, the program will consider it to be the source PD to be used to determine the FCT.
If the Arc Flash program uses a PD from this drop-down list, it will use it to calculate the FCT based on
the actual arcing current passing through it. The arcing current is shown immediately below this dropdown list as a display only field. The FCT can be found from the reports only (i.e. analysis section or the
summary reports).
Note: If no protective device is selected from this drop list (blank option selected), then the user-defined
fault clearing time field becomes editable and you can define your own value. In previous versions of
ETAP (i.e. 5.0.0 to 5.0.3 running the user-defined source PD calculation would overwrite this value. This
is no longer true in version 5.5.0 since the only way to observe the source PD FCT is through the crystal
reports.
11-25
AC Elements
Bus

This display only field shows the arcing current (in kA) passing through the protective device selected in
the User-Defined Source PD drop-down list. This value can be updated if the update Buses Fault
Currents option has been selected in the arc flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. If the
global Arc Flash program fails to determine the FCT or the arcing current through this PD, this field will
not be updated.
Fault Clearing Time

This field is the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time in seconds. This value can be defined by the user as
the Fault Clearing Time to be used in the determination of the incident energy for the faulted bus.
The global arc flash calculation will use the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time if it fails to determine the
FCT automatically from the existing Star TCCs. A warning message will be shown on the reports if this
condition is present. This field will be hidden if a User-Defined Source PD has been selected from the
drop list right above this field.
The default value for this field is 0.1 seconds. Table 4 below contains some typical Fault Clearing Times
for different voltage levels:
Table 4: Typical Values for User-Defined Fault Clearing Time*

Opening Time at Opening time at
Opening Time in
60 Hz (Cycles)
50 Hz (Cycles)
Seconds
Buses less than 1000 V
6.0
5
0.100
Between 1.0 kV and 35 kV
6.0
5
0.100
> 35.0 kV
8.0
6.5
0.130
* Note: These typical values were taken from NFPA 70E-2000 Appendix B Section B-2-3.3.
Bus kV
Fixed FCT
If this checkbox is selected, then the global arc flash calculation shall use the user-defined Fault Clearing
Time (FCT) value to determine the incident energy of the faulted bus. The calculation would be the
same as that of the situation when the program does not find the FCT and has to use the user-defined time
from the bus except that in this case, the program does not try to find the faulted bus FCT automatically
but uses the user-defined value instead.
Using the Fixed FCT feature does not imply that the program will use this set time to evaluate the
incident energy of Source Protective Devices connected directly to the faulted bus. The program will
still try to find the energy for faults on the line side of source PDs by searching upstream protective
devices.
If this checkbox is selected, the fields Source PD ID drop List and Source PD Arcing Current will be
hidden since they are not applicable. The program will indicate that it used the Fixed FCT on the reports
by showing a flag next to the bus FCT field.
Grounding
This drop-down list allows you to define the type of grounding to be used at this bus. The default value
for this drop-down list is grounded. From the arc flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, you have
the option to use this selection for the global arc flash calculation.
11-26
AC Elements
Bus
Incident Energy
This is the incident energy based on the User-Defined parameters. The units for the incident energy are
Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the empirically derived
IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage).
This incident energy value is used to determine the User-Defined Hazard/Risk Category and the UserDefined Flash Protection Boundary (ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough
parameters or the user has no authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002
standards.
Flash Protection Boundary

determined from the User-Defined Incident Energy and Fault Clearing Time. The unit of this field is in
feet.

The hazard/risk category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the User-Defined incident
energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C) (11) of NFPA 70E-2009 is
used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is performed and
you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash module. The value
may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA 70E 2009
(40 Cal/cm2).
Allowable Incident Energy Exposure

In the Allowable field, you can define the incident energy rating of the personal protective equipment
(PPE). This value should be the rating of the equipment with the least protection. The units are in
Cal/cm2. This value is compared automatically by the global arc flash calculation to the calculated
incident energy. If the calculated value exceeds the available PPE protection, the module generates an
alert.
Working Distance
This group provides information about the working distance to be used for the calculation of the incident
energy.
Enter the distance from the possible arc point to the person in inches. This distance is defined as the
distance between the arc point and the persons face and torso. This value has a range of 1 to 999.99 in.
This is the distance value used to determine the incident energy. The default value is dependent on the
voltage level of the device and the equipment type selected in the rating page of the bus editor. When a
new bus is added to the one line diagram, the default equipment type is Other and the default working
distance is set to 18. Once the equipment type is changed, the default value will change according to the
typical values used which are based on IEEE 1584-2002 Table D.7.4. Open the Arc Flash Analysis Data
table to view the working distance values used for the voltage ratings and equipment types.
11-27
AC Elements
Bus
Note: The Arc Flash Analysis Data table is located in the Project menu under Settings Arc Flash. Refer
to Chapter 10 Menu Bars Section One-Line Diagram Menu Bars for more details.
TCC Plot / Print Label

This section allows you to generate labels or plot the incident energy curves on ETAP STAR.
Ib / Ia
This toggle radio box allows the use of bolted fault current or arcing current as the base for the incident
energy curve displayed on the TCC plot.
Calculated Input
The system calculated radio box determines what data is to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label and
what energy is to be displayed on the TCC plot. If this option is selected all the corresponding calculated
values will be used to create the label.
User-Defined Input
The user-defined radio box allows you to use the user-defined data to generate labels or to show the userdefined incident energy curve on the TCC. If this option is selected all the corresponding user-defined
11-28
AC Elements
Bus
Template
This drop-down list allows the user to select the template to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label for
the particular bus. There are several templates available generating the labels. Each one of the templates
has different styles.
Print
The print button starts the Crystal Report viewer. From this viewer, you can a print the generated label for
the same bus.
TCC Plot-Calculated or User-Defined Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the system calculated or user-defined incident energy curve as it
varies over time and fault current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the
corresponding curve will appear on the Star View that contains the same bus.
The curve that appears on the Star View is a function of the incident energy and the parameters that vary
are the time and current. If the incident energy value is kept constant, then any combination of FCT and
bolted fault current that falls below this curve yields an incident energy value that is lower.
TCC Plot-Allowable Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the Allowable Incident Energy Curve as it varies over time and fault
current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the corresponding curve will appear on
the Star View that contains the same bus.
Methodology for Quick Incident Energy Calculator

Method Used
For buses in the range of 0.208 kV to 15.0 kV, the empirically derived IEEE Std. 1584 Method is used.
For buses with kV greater than 15, the Theoretically Derived Lee Method is used. ETAP automatically
determines which method is being used according to the bus nominal voltage (bus info page).
Range of Operation
These calculations follow the methodology described in IEEE 1584-2002. The same limitations of this
method apply to the quick incident energy calculator.
1. If any of the following: the Bus Nominal kV, Bolted Fault Current or Fault Clearing Time are set
to zero the calculation is not triggered, and there are no displayed results. This applies to either
set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
2. If the bus nominal kV is less than 0.208 kV, this message is displayed: Lee Method is used
outside empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and
Calculated).
3. If the bolted fault current is outside the range of 0.7 kA to 106 kA and the bus nominal kV is
between 0.208 and 15 kV the following message is displayed: Lee Method is used outside
empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
4. If the fault current decay method is used (AF page of SC study case), then only the source PD ID
and the FCT are updated into the calculated results section.
11-29
AC Elements
Bus
5. If the user-defined source PD is selected, then there are no results updated into the calculated
section. The only item which may be updated is the arcing current variation flag (for systems
rated less than 1.0 kV) if applicable.
6. If you are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors
7. You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
If the IEEE 1584-2002 Arc Flash Method is not licensed, the calculation is disabled. To get the
authorization to run this program, contact Operation Technology, Inc.
The printing of labels is ruled by the Crystal Reports viewer, which has different export capabilities. You
may need to export the labels to a different file format that is compatible with your label printer. You may
choose to print the labels as templates that can be provided to a label making company.
The following table shows the parameters required to run an arc flash calculation in the Bus Arc Flash
page.
Table 6: Required Parameters for Bus Arc Flash Calculation

Info Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Bus Nominal KV
Equipment Type
Total 3-Phase Fault Current
Gap Between Conductors
Fault Clearing Time(FCT)
X-Factor
System Grounding
Working Distance
11-30
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.7 Protection Page

The Protection page is used to display various curves associated with bus operation and protection when
the bus is included in a Star View.
Bus Ampacity / Loading

Plot Bus Continuous Ampacity
Check to display the bus continuous amp rating in the Star View containing the bus. The bus continuous
rating is defined in the Rating page of the bus editor.
Reference kV
Calculated kV
This kV value is automatically updated with the calculated base kV when you Run/Update Short-Circuit
kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination mode with the bus faulted. This is a display only field.
Connected Transformer Inrush Current

When energizing a bus, the presence of any downstream transformers will cause the bus to experience a
large inrush current. Using the following options, the inrush current experienced by the bus can be
calculated or user-defined, and the results can be viewed in a Star View.
11-31
AC Elements
Bus
Plot Transformer Inrush Current

Check to display the calculated or user-defined downstream transformer inrush current curve in the Star
View containing the bus.
Calculated Transformer Inrush Current

When selected and the Update button is pressed, the inrush currents of all downstream transformers will
be summed together to give the cumulative inrush experienced by the bus. The inrush curves as defined in
each of the downstream transformers are utilized to calculate the cumulative inrush. When plotting the
bus in a Star View, the calculated cumulative inrush curve is displayed for that bus.
Note: Only downstream transformers are considered in this calculation. If no downstream transformers
are found, then the table will be blank.
Note: The inrush curve table cannot be edited with this option selected, and only calculated values are
displayed in the Star View.
Update
Click this button to run the inrush current calculation and update the curve table with the values
calculated.
User-Defined Transformer Inrush Current

When selected, the inrush curve table will become editable, and user-defined values can be entered. When
plotting the bus in a Star View, the user-defined cumulative inrush curve is displayed for that bus.
Inrush Curve Table

The cumulative inrush curve is displayed / specified in this table. The table may contain calculated or
user-defined values depending upon the selection above.
Insert
Insert new points above the row selected.
Add
Insert new points to the bottom of the list.
Delete
Click on a number and delete the selected row.
11-32
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.8 Harmonic Page

The Harmonic page is used to specify the harmonic limit information on a bus.
Harmonic Limit
Category
Select the appropriate designation from the drop-down list. The available choices are General, Special,
Designated, PCC, and Other. This list specifies the bus harmonic limit category per IEEE Standard. When
Point of Common Coupling (PCC) category is selected then ETAP automatically updates the VTHD and
VIHD limits based on bus nominal kV at PCC. These values are obtained from IEEE 519-1992
Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems (page 85).
VTHD Limit
Choose a value from the drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus
voltage Total Harmonic Distortion limit. The specified value will be compared with the calculated
VTHD from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the
output report.
11-33
AC Elements
Bus
VIHD Limit
Choose a value from the drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus
voltage Individual Harmonic Distortion. The specified value will be compared with the calculated VIHD
from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the output
report.
11.1.9 Reliability Page
Reliability Parameters
A
This parameter is defined as the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone
around the failed component. Therefore, this setting can cause the removal of other healthy components
and branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are
recluse. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. Note, however, that the
failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can
be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
11-34
AC Elements
Bus
The Mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
The Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/ A).
FOR
Forced Outage Rate (i.e.,
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
unavailability)
calculated
based
on
MTTR,
(FOR
MTTR
This is the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component
outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Replacement
Available
Check this box to enable rP.
rP
This is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is the time in hours for switching to an alternative supply after the device failure.
Library
Library Button
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick Editor for reliability data.
Source
This displays the Source Name of the library data selected
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected
Class
This displays the class of the library data selected.
11-35
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.10 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. The names of the
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu bar.
UD Field 1 (Eq. Ref.)

This is a number field with the default name Eq. Ref. You can change the name of this field and enter the
equipment reference number or any other number here, using up to five digits.
UD Field 2 (Last Maint.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can change the name of this field
and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field 3 (Next Maint.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Next Maint. You can change the name of this field
UD Field 4 (Tests Req.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Tests Req. You can change the name of this field and
enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
11-36
AC Elements
Bus
UD Field A5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field A5. You can change the name of this field
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, up to 50
alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, using up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element here, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element here, using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
11-37
AC Elements
Bus
11.1.11 Comment Page

Enter any additional data or comments regarding the condition, maintenance, tests, or studies associated
with this element. This field can be up to 64kb and the default size is 4kb. To increase the size of this
field, you need to change the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key
combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information.
11-38
AC Elements
11.2 Transformer, 2-Winding

The properties associated with 2-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in 2-Winding Transformer Editor.
In addition to information regarding the use of fixed taps and load tap changers (LTC), this editor
includes the following pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Impedance
Tap
Grounding
Sizing
Protection
Harmonic
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.2.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the 2-winding transformer ID, whether the transformer is in or out of
service, primary and secondary buses, the connection, FDR tag, name, and manufacturers data.
11-39
AC Elements
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID having up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of transformers increase. The
default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the Project View.
Prim. and Sec.

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 2-winding transformer are designated as primary and secondary
buses. If the primary or secondary terminal of a transformer is not connected to any bus, a blank entry
will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection, after you click OK.
For 3-phase and (3) 1-Phase transformers, only 3-phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists.
For 1-phase transformers, only 1-phase buses will be displayed. For the Prim. field, only 1-phase 2W will
be displayed. For the Sec. field, if the transformer has Secondary Center Tap selected in the Connection
group, only 1-phase 3W will be displayed in the drop-down list. Otherwise, only 1-phase 2W will be
displayed.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, that is,
you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a transformer is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus
(as shown in the figure below, where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4).
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the primary and secondary bus IDs.
11-40
AC Elements
Single-phase transformers can also be connected to phase adapters. If the transformer is connected to a
phase adapter, then the phase adapter ID will show in the Prim. or Sec. field.
Condition
Service
The operating condition can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of Service.
The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of Service element can be edited like an In Service
element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies. When the
continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the deenergized
color (theme manager). The default color for a deenergized element is grey.
State
Revision Data
The current revision name will be displayed.
Connection
The phase connections for a 2-winding transformer are defined by selecting 3-Phase or 1Phase, with or
without Secondary Center Tap. The default connection is 3-Phase and can be changed from the Defaults
menu or from the Project View.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the 2-winding transformer to any bus or phase
adapter. Once the transformer is connected, the phase connection selections will become unavailable.
You need to disconnect the transformer to change the connector type.
When the 3-Phase is selected, the (3) 1-Phase check box will become available. The (3) 1-Phase check
box can be checked or unchecked whether this transformer is connected to any bus or not.
11-41
AC Elements
3 Phase
Select this to define the transformer as three-phase. This transformer can only be connected to threephase buses.
1 Phase
Select this to define the transformer as single-phase. This transformer can only be connected to singlephase buses and phase adapter. In the adjacent field, it will display the input connection type. The
primary side of the Transformer is always 1 Phase 2 Wire.
Secondary Center Tap

Check this box to define the Secondary side of the transformer as single-phase 3 wire. By checking this
field, the transformer secondary winding will be grounded at the center. Only 1 Phase 3 Wire buses can
be connected to the secondary winding.
(3) 1-Phase
Check this box to define the transformer as made by 3 single-phase transformers. By checking this field,
the Per XFMR buttons on the transformer editor rating and impedance pages will become available for
individual entering the properties of the 3 single-phase transformers.
Standard
You can select either ANSI or IEC. The class selections will change based on the standard selected.
Equipment
Tag #
11-42
AC Elements
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
11.2.2 Rating Page

On the Rating page, specify the 2-winding transformer voltage and power ratings, type/class, operating
cooling, installation, and alert data.
11-43
AC Elements
Voltage Rating
Prim and Sec kV
Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the 2-winding transformer in kilovolts.
For the (3) 1-phase transformer, the two fields of the equivalent 3-phase transformer voltage ratings are
display only. The primary and secondary voltage ratings are the average voltages across the terminals of
the three single-phase transformers. If the three single-phase transformers are connected in Delta, the
equivalent 3-phase voltage rating is the average of the three single-phase transformers voltage ratings. If
the three single-phase transformers are connected in Wye, the equivalent 3-phase voltage rating is 1.732
times the average of the three single-phase transformers voltage ratings.
Note: When a transformer is connected to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal
to the bus nominal kV. ETAP uses the voltage at the lowest-numbered swing system as the base voltage
and calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. ETAP will display an error message
when it detects inconsistent voltage bases in parallel or looped systems during system analysis.
If there are parallel transformers in a system that has different voltage ratios, change the voltage ratio of
one of the transformers to make their voltage ratios equal. At the same time, a fictitious tap setting is
required, using the new voltage ratio to correct its turn ratio. A logical choice would be the transformer
winding with the less common kV rating in the system.
Note: Circulating currents are expected in this condition.
As an example, consider the two parallel transformers in the following diagram. To model the
transformers in ETAP, set the tap of the second transformer in such a way that the resulting turn ratio is
equal to the other transformer. If one transformer is rated 13.8-4.16 kV and the second transformer is
rated 13.2-4.16 kV, then both transformer data should be entered as 13.8-4.16 kV (same turn ratios). To
correct for the second transformer turn ratio, specify a tap setting which is equal to the actual kV rating
divided by the new kV rating as shown below.
% Tap = [(13.2/13.8) - 1.0] * 100 = -4.35 %
This transformer should be modeled with a negative tap setting of 4.35% on the primary side.
11-44
AC Elements
Remember that a positive tap setting tends to lower the operating voltage of the secondary bus, while a
negative tap raises it. In this case, the transformer turns ratio modeled in ETAP is larger than the actual
turn ratio, without the introduced tap setting. Because the secondary bus would operate at a voltage, use a
negative tap to raise the voltage at the secondary bus. Use this rule to determine whether the tap
correction should be positive or negative.
Note: If this transformer has an actual tap setting of 2.5%, this value should be added to the off-nominal
tap of -4.35%, i.e., -4.35% + 2.5% = -1.85%.
FLA
This displays the primary winding and secondary winding full load amperes corresponding to the smallest
and the largest power ratings.
Bus kVnom
This displays the bus nominal kV of the connected primary and secondary terminals.
Power Rating
Rated MVA
Based on the type/class of the transformer, up to three MVA fields may be available. The corresponding
class/temperature rise will be displayed below each rating field. Where available, Class1 MVA Class2
MVA Class3 MVA.
1. When Per Standard is selected, only Class1 MVA field is editable. Class2 and Class3 (where
available) are calculated from Class1 MVA based on American National Standard C57.12.10 and are
display only. This option also applies to (3) 1-Phase and other special 2-winding transformer.
2. When User-Defined is selected, in addition to Class1 MVA, the user can specify Class2 and Class3
ratings (where available). No calculation is enforced for user-defined option. This option also applies
to (3) 1-Phase and other special 2-winding transformer.
Per Transformer
This button is only available when the 2-winding transformer connection is set to (3) 1-phase
type. Select this button to enter the individual single-phase transformer ratings and impedances.
Fan/Pump
The required cooling equipment for the corresponding power rating. The field is checked to specify the
availability of the equipment.
Derated MVA
This displays the derated MVA for each class/temperature rise.
11-45
AC Elements
%Derating
These fields display the percentage of power derating for each class/temperature rise due to the
unavailability of the cooling equipment, installation altitude and ambient temperature. They are calculated
by the formula of "(1 - Derated MVA / Rated MVA) * 100" for the corresponding power rating.
Z Base
This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance and depends on the standard selection.
ANSI: Base MVA = Class1 MVA. IEC: Base MVA = the largest available class MVA.
Alert - Max
This value, if non-zero, is used to calculate the overload percentage of the transformer. If the maximum
MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the branch will be flagged on the overload
summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero and this
branch will not be included in the overload summary report.
1. When Derated MVA is selected, the maximum MVA capability will be set to the largest derated
value.
2. When User-Defined is selected, the user can specify the maximum MVA capability.
This value is also used as a base for the transformer flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
Installation
This is used to specify the base altitude and base temperature of the transformer.
Type/Class
Based on the standard selected, the fields below will provide different selection options. The tables
below show those options:
Type
Select the transformer type from the Type list box. The following transformer types are available for both
ANSI and IEC Standards:
Liquid-Fill
Dry
Liquid-Fill (C57.12) ANSI only
Sub Type
Select the transformer sub type from the Sub Type list box. The following table shows the subtypes
available based on the standard and type of transformer:
11-46
AC Elements
Standard
Type
Liquid
Fill
ANSI
Dry
Subtype
Standard
Mineral Oil
Flammable Liquid
Less-Flammable Liquid
Type
Mineral Oil
Synthetic Liquid <=300
Synthetic Liquid >300
Non-Flammable
Synthetic Liquid
Other
Sealed
Non-Enclosed
Enclosed
Totally Enclosed
Vent-Dry
Other
Liquid
Fill
Non-Flammable Liquid
Other
Ventilated
Non-Ventilated
Sealed
Other
Subtype
IEC
Dry
Class
Select the transformer class from the list box. The following transformer classes are available:
ANSI, Liquid Fill transformers for all subtypes:
OA
OA/FA
OA/FOA/FOA
OW
OA/FA/FA
FOA
OW/A
OA/FA/FOA
FOW
Other
ANSI, Dry transformers:
Subtype
Ventilated
Class
Subtype
Class
AA
AFA
Non-Ventilated
ANV
Other
Sealed
GA
Other
AA/FA
Other
Subtype
Class
Other
ANV
AA
AFA
AA/FA
GA
Other
IEC, Liquid Fill:
11-47
AC Elements
Subtype
Class
Subtype
Mineral Oil
Synthetic
Liquid <=300
Other
ONAN
ONWN
ONWN/ONAN
ONAN/ONAF
ONAN/ONAF/ONAF
ONAN/ONAF/OFAF
ONAN/OFAF/OFAF
OFAF
OFWF
ODWF
ONAN/OFAN/OFAF
OFAN
OFAN/OFAF
ONWF
Class
Subtype
KNAN
KNWN
KNWN/KNAN
KNAN/KNAF
KNAN/KNAF/KNAF
KNAN/KNAF/KFAF
KNAN/KFAF/KFAF
KFAF
KFWF
KDWF
KNAN/KFAN/KFAF
KFAN
KFAN/KFAF
KNWF
Synthetic
Liquid
>300
Class
LNAN
LNWN
LNWN/LNAN
LNAN/LNAF
LNAN/LNAF/LNAF
LNAN/LNAF/LFAF
Non-Flammable
LNAN/LFAF/LFAF
Synthetic
LFAF
Liquid
LFWF
LDWF
LNAN/LFAN/LFAF
LFAN
LFAN/LFAF
LNWF
IEC, Dry for all subtypes of transformers:
AN
GN
GNAN
GNAN
AF
GF
GNAF
Other
ANAN
GNAF
ANAF
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature (in degrees C) from the list box. The following transformer
operating temperatures are available:
Standard
Type
Class
Temp. Rise
All Classes
55/65
65
80
80/100
80/115
80/150
100
115/150
Liquid Fill
ANSI
Dry
11-48
AC Elements
Standard
Type
Class
Temp. Rise
Liquid Fill
All Classes
AN
AF
ANAN
GN
GNAF
GNAN/GN
AF
ANAF
GNAN
Other
65
60
75
80
100
125
IEC
Dry
150
150
150
150
MFR
Enter the 2-winding transformer manufacturers name.
11.2.3 Impedance Page

On the Impedance page, specify the 2-winding transformer impedance, variation, and tolerance data.
11-49
AC Elements
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances

These are the positive and zero sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the
transformer MVA and kV ratings as the base values. These values correspond to the nominal positive
and zero impedance, which are subject to manufacturer tolerance limits and tap position.
For the (3) 1-phase transformer, the positive and zero sequence impedances are identical and calculated
from the phase-by-phase admittance matrix of the (3) 1-phase transformer.
ETAP models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances. ETAP
takes the voltage of the swing bus (a bus with a connected swing machine) as the base voltage. It then
calculates the system base voltages using the transformer turn ratio. If the transformer turn ratio matches
the ratio of the base kVs of the buses between which it is connected, but the actual numbers are not the
same (e.g., the primary bus base kV is 13.8 and the secondary bus is 4.349 kV, while the transformer kV
ratings are 13.2-4.16 kV), ETAP adjusts the nameplate impedance to a new base with the following
formula:
Zt, new
= Zt, rated * (Transformer Rated kV/Bus Base kV)
In some cases, when you have parallel transformers with different voltage ratings, introduce a fictitious
tap setting so that the calculated base voltage at the load side of the transformers will be the same value
(refer to 2-Winding Transformer kV rating).
X/R and R/X Ratios

Enter the transformer X/R or R/X ratio. These values are used in ETAP to calculate the transformer
winding resistances and reactances from the given percent impedances.
%X and %R
These values are calculated from the given percent impedances using X/R or R/X ratios. These fields are
editable and can also be used to calculate the percent impedance as well as resistance and reactance ratios.
Typical Z and X/R and Typical X/R

Click the appropriate button to obtain the typical 2-winding transformer impedance together with X/R
ratio, or X/R ratio only. The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for ANSI 2-winding transformers are
based on two sources: American National Standard C57.12.10 and Industrial Power System Handbook by
Beeman.
The Industrial Power System Handbook by Beeman (page 96) specifies typical data for transformers that
has rating not larger than 500 kVA and primary voltage not higher than 12.47 kV.
Typical Impedance for Transformer Less Than or equal to 500 kVA:
Rating
kVA 5
5< kVA 25
25< kVA 50
50< kVA 100
100< kVA 167
167< kVA 500
Group 2+
Group 1*
%Z
2.3
2.3
2.6
2.6
4.0
4.8
X/R
0.88
1.13
1.69
1.92
3.45
4.70
11-50
%Z
2.8
2.3
2.4
3.7
3.7
5.2
X/R
0.77
1.00
1.54
2.92
3.60
5.10
AC Elements
* Group 1: Transformers with high voltage windings of less than or equal to 8.32 kV
+ Group 2: Transformers with high voltages of greater than 8.32 kV and less than or equal to 12.47 kV
American National Standard C57.12.10 specifies impedance values for transformers larger than 500 kVA.
Typical Impedance for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
High Voltage Side
kV 13.8
13.8 < kV 23
23 < kV 34.5
34.5 < kV 46
46 < kV 69
69 < kV 115
115 < kV 138
138 < kV 161
161 < kV (230)
Low Voltage Side 2.4 kV

Without LTC
With LTC
5.5**
6.5
7.0
7.0
7.5
7.5
8.0
8.0
8.5
8.5
9.0
9.0
9.5
9.5
10.0
10.0
10.5
Low Voltage Side

< 2.4 kV
5.75**
6.75
7.25
7.75
** Self-cooled transformers with greater than 5000 kVA values are the same as those for 23 kV high
voltage.
Typical X/R Ratios for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Rating
MVA 1
1 < MVA 2
2 < MVA 3
3 < MVA 4
4 < MVA 5
5 < MVA 6
6 < MVA 7
7 < MVA 8
X/R
5.790
7.098
10.67
11.41
12.14
12.85
13.55
14.23
Rating
8 < MVA 10
10 < MVA 20
20 < MVA 30
30 < MVA 40
40 < MVA 50
50 < MVA 100
100 < MVA 200
200 < MVA 1000
X/R
15.50
18.60
23.70
27.30
29.50
34.10
42.00
50.00
The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for IEC 2-winding transformers are based on IEC 60076-5
1994 and Areva Ch.5 Equivalent Circuits and Parameters of Power System Plant listed in the table
below:
Rating
MVA 0.63
0.63 < MVA 1.25
1.25 < MVA 3.15
3.15 < MVA 6.3
6.3 < MVA 12.5
12.5 < MVA 25
25 < MVA 200
200 < MVA
%Z
4
5
6.25
7.15
8.35
10
12.5
12.5
11-51
X/R
1.5
3.5
6
8.5
13
20
45
45
AC Elements
Z Variation
Use this field to enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values
are not zero, then the final 2-winding transformer impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap
impedance values (entered for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary
and secondary winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance
variation at 5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer
impedance.
% Variation @ -5% Tap

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at 5% tap position, in percent of the transformer
impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either
the primary and secondary winding tap changes.
Zt at 5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ 5% Tap)/100

% Variation @ +5% Tap
Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position, in percent of the transformer
Zt at +5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ +5% Tap)/100

%Z
These fields are used to display the %Z at -5% Tap and +5% Tap calculated by % Variation @ -5% Tap
and % Variation @ +5% Tap correspondingly. These fields are editable and can also be used to calculate
% Variation @ -5% Tap and % Variation @ +5% Tap by the same formula that is used to calculate %Z
based on % Variations.
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value in this field. This value
should be zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value. For a new transformer with a
11-52
AC Elements
designated impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer.
The value of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the
positive or negative value, which will result in a conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative
Load Flow
Short-Circuit
Motor Starting
Transient Stability
Harmonics
Optimal Power Flow
Positive
X
X
X
X
X
X
For instance, if 7.5% tolerance is specified, ETAP will use +7.5% tolerance for load flow, motor starting,
dynamic stability, and harmonic calculations, while using -7.5% for short-circuit calculations.
11.2.4 Single Phase Rating Page

Individual single-phase transformer ratings and impedances can be entered in this page. When this page is
available, the voltages and power ratings in the rating page and impedances in the impedance page of the
equivalent 3-phase transformer are display only and calculated from the 3 single-phase transformer
parameters.
Rated MVA
The power ratings of the equivalent 3-phase transformer are the smallest MVA among the 3 single-phase
transformer multiplied by 3 for each class. The 1st and 2nd stage power ratings are display only or
11-53
AC Elements
editable based on the selected option of Per Standard or User-Defined in the 3-phase transformer rating
page.
FLA
and the largest power ratings for each single-phase transformer.
kV
Enter primary and secondary line-to-neutral voltage ratings of each single-phase transformer in kilovolts.
Impedance
Enter the positive sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the transformer MVA
and kV ratings as the base values. Click the appropriate button to obtain the typical single phase 2winding transformer impedance together with X/R ratio, or X/R ratio only.
The impedance and X/R ratio of the equivalent 3-phase transformer are calculated from the 3 single-phase
transformer impedances and X/R ratios.
11.2.5 Tap Page

Within the Tap page, specify the transformer tap data for both fixed taps and LTC taps. Transformer
winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.
11-54
AC Elements
Fixed Tap
% Tap and kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage in these fields, while the button is set on % Tap, or click
the Tap button for kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in kV.
Note: In either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
You can click the up/down arrows next to the fields. By clicking on the arrows, you will be stepping to
the available tap settings based on the entries on the Prim/Sec Fixed Tap Range Editors. You can
access the editor by clicking on the Prim/Sec buttons on the left of the fields.
ETAP allows modeling of an off-load tap (fixed tap) changer on either side or both sides of transformers.
Standard off-load tap changer transformers typically have 5.0% settings available, with two steps above
and two steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, 2.5, 0, 2.5, or 5.0.
The transformer is treated as a simple circuit impedance for transformers without voltage taps or where
the tap is set at nominal value (n = 0). ETAP uses the following Pi circuit representation to model
transformer tap settings:
where
Yt
N
n
=
=
=
1/Zt
Transformer admittance in per unit
1 + n/100
Turn ratio in per unit
100 ( N - 1 )
Tap setting in percent
Positive (+) tap setting on the primary side (P) decreases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
Negative (-) tap setting on the primary side (P), increases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
As this model indicates, placing +10% tap setting (n=+10%, or N=1.1) at the primary side is not
equivalent to -10% tap at the secondary side. ETAP will correctly model a transformer with a tap setting,
as long as the tap setting is indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap
changer). To increase the voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value.
Note: however, that this will only work if current flows from the tap changer bus to the bus where the
voltage is being corrected.
Prim/Sec Buttons
Click these buttons to access the Primary or Secondary Fixed Tap Range Editors and set the maximum
and minimum tap positions as well as the tap step for the transformer fixed taps.
11-55
AC Elements
Per Unit Turn Ratio

Display the transformer turn ratio in per unit, using the fixed tap setting.
Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 - %Tap/100
LTC/Voltage Regulator
You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on both transformer
windings. However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on both windings of the transformers.
AVR Prim.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the primary
winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, else it is in manual mode.
AVR Sec.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the secondary
LTC Button
When the associated checkbox is selected, the LTC button is enabled. Click this button to enter LTC
data.
Manual or Operating Tap

Here you can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC
automatic mode by clicking on the up or down arrows.
The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies providing the option for Update Transformer
LTCs is selected in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Note: the tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in automatic
mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is used as the initial value.
Real Time Scanned

When in On-Line monitoring mode, Real-Time will display the Scanned Tap Position value for this
transformer in this field.
Power Station
Unit Transformer for Generator
Check this box to define this transformer as a unit transformer. A drop-down field is displayed to assign
this transformer to a generator.
In addition, the Tap Optimization button is displayed.
Tap Optimization
Clicking the Tap Optimization button will display the Transformer Tap Optimization Editor. In this
editor, you can calculate the optimal tap position. See Transformer Optimization Chapter for more
details.
11-56
AC Elements
11.2.6 Primary/Secondary Fixed Tap Range

Clicking on the Prim/Sec button in the Fixed Tap group brings up the Fixed Tap Range dialog box to
enter parameters
Tap Settings
% Tap/kV
Enter the transformer tap settings below in percent, while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap
button for kV tap selection and enter the settings in kV. Note that in either case, ETAP calculates the
equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min.
Enter the minimum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Max.
Enter the maximum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Step
Displays the step size in percent or kV based on the %Tap/kV.
# of Taps
Enter the number of Taps or click the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the number of taps of the
transformer. Based on this entry and the Maximum and Minimum tap settings, the program calculates the
step size and displays it on the Step field.
11-57
AC Elements
11.2.7 Load Tap Changer Dialog Box

Transformer load tap changers (LTC) can be accessed through the editors of either the 2-winding or 3winding transformers. To activate an LTC for any transformer winding, click the box on the left side of
the LTC button. Then click the LTC button to access its editor and enter the LTC data.
Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Select the bus ID of an existing bus for which the LTC will be regulating or controlling the voltage. The
default bus is the secondary bus.
Note: The load flow routine may not be able to regulate the voltages of the buses that are not affected by
the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may reach its limit before the desired voltage is reached for the
controlled bus. Possible examples of this are when the regulated bus is not downstream of the
transformer, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in between the two components. When this occurs, the
LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated bus.
Voltage Control
Voltage
Enter the desired voltage of the regulated bus in percent of the bus nominal voltage, i.e., the regulated bus
voltage. In the load flow type analysis; ETAP will adjust the LTC setting until the voltage of the
regulated bus is within the upper or lower bands of the desired voltage.
11-58
AC Elements
Upper Band
Enter the upper band value above the desired voltage.
Lower Band
Enter the lower band value below the desired voltage.
The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram,
when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band (green area), the LTC will not move; if
the voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or less than (Desired
Voltage Lower Band), the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus voltage close to its
desired value.
In order for the LTC to work properly, ETAP forces the sum of the upper and lower bands to be larger
than or equal to the LTC step.
Tap
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer load tap changer (LTC) tap setting as a percentage while the button is set on % Tap;
or click the Tap button for kV Tap selection and enter the transformer LTC tap setting in kV. In either
case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min
Enter the lower limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (-15 for 15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV
value of the lower range of the LTC setting.
Max
Enter the upper limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (15 for 15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value
of the upper range of the LTC setting.
Step
Enter the LTC step size in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 0.625 for a
10% range with 33 steps (sixteen steps on each side plus the nominal setting). If the kV Tap is
selected, enter the step size of the LTC in kV.
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. Tap, and Step.
# of Taps
This value is automatically calculated and displayed according to the following formula:
# of Taps = 1 + (%Max Tap - %Min Tap)/(%Step)
You can adjust this value to change Step:
%Step = (%Max Tap %Min Tap)/(# of Taps 1)
11-59
AC Elements
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds. This is the time duration from the moment when the
regulated bus voltage goes outside and stays outside the voltage control band to the time when the LTC
triggers the first step change.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds. This is the time duration that the LTC takes to complete a
step change.
11.2.8 Grounding Page
Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify the phase shift associated with the transformer and displays the
grounding connection in vector group or winding connection on the one-line diagram.
Font
Display the connection using ETAP Font or IEC vector string. For Example:
11-60
AC Elements
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Winding Connection
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Vector Group
Symbols
Display grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line element
can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the standard. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded

The benefit in using symbols is that you can place ground CTs to connect protective devices such as
relays.
Vector Group
Select this option to display the transformer connection in IEC vector strings, such as YNyn3, Dd0, Yd1,
Dyn1, etc. In the vector group designation, the upper case portion describes the winding connection and
grounding type of the high voltage side while the lower case portion describes the winding connection
and grounding type of the low voltage side. The number represents the angle shift, in clock position, of
the high voltage side leading the load voltage side. Therefore, 1 and 3 indicate angle shifts of 30 and 90
degrees respectively. For example, Dyn1 means that the high voltage side is Delta connection and the
low voltage side is Y connection with solid ground, and the voltage angle on the high voltage side leads
that on the low side by 30 degree.
Winding Connection
Select this option to display the transformer connection as DY, DD, YD or YY.
Angle
The phase shift angle can be selected or specified in the field. The phase shift angle determines the high
voltage angle with respect to the low voltage angle. For example, a value of -30 indicates that the high
voltage leads the low voltage by -30 degrees or, equivalently, the low voltage leads the high voltage by 30
degrees.
11-61
AC Elements
Grounding Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:
Type
Open
Solid
Resistor
Reactor
Xfmr-Reactor
Xfmr-Resistor
Description
Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded)
Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path
A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path
A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path
A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the secondary of
the transformer.
A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the secondary
of the transformer.
Resistor \ Reactor Grounding Ratings:

V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded generators, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohm)
Ohm
Resistor or Reactor impedance in ohms
Transformer-Resistor \ Transformer Reactor Grounding Ratings

V ln
kV1
Transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms)
Prim Ohms
Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer
kV2
Transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
Secondary current in amps. This calculated based on the primary amps and the transformer turn ratio.
11-62
AC Elements
Sec Ohms
Resistor / Reactor impedance in ohms. This is calculated based on the grounding transformer turn ratio
and secondary current. If sec. Ohms are entered first, then the primary amps and ohms will be calculated
automatically.
Transformer kVA
Grounding transformer kVA rating.

Earthing Type
Select a system earthing type. The available earthing types are listed based on the system grounding type.
Note that this field is applicable only for low voltage side.
Distributed Neutral
Check this box if neutral is distributed for the IT earthing type.
Resistance to Ground/Earth
Enter the resistance between the chassis and ground in Ohms.
11.2.9 Sizing Page

Refer to Chapter 31, Section 31.1 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing for information on this page for
the 2-winding Transformer.

This page contains options for plotting the transformer damage curve on an active Star View. Even
though transformers are the simplest and most reliable devices in an electrical system, transformer
failures can occur due to any number of internal or external conditions that make the device incapable of
performing its proper function.
Some of the common failures are:
Winding failure
Terminal and no-load tap changer failure
Bushing failure
Load tap changer failure
Insulation breakdown
Appropriate transformer protection should be used with the following objectives:

Protect the system in case of a transformer failure
Protect the transformer from system disturbances
Overcurrent protective devices such as fuses and relays have well defined operating characteristics. The
characteristic curves for such devices should be coordinated with transformer through-fault withstand
capability curves or transformer damage curves.
11-63
AC Elements
Short-Circuit
Calculated
Three phase short-circuit fault current (kA) is calculated / updated based on the through-fault current as
seen by the transformer for a fault placed on primary and/or secondary side of the transformer. System
impedance is calculated based on 3-phase fault current. The 3-phase fault current is updated automatically
when Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked on the Star (PD Coordination) toolbar in
Star Mode.
The primary / secondary fault kA is calculated based on prefault voltage of the faulted bus to the rated
primary/ secondary kV of the transformer, respectively.
11-64
AC Elements
Fault on Prim.
When Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar for a fault placed on the
primary side of the transformer, the primary through-fault current (kA) is calculated and updated.
Fault on Sec.
When the Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked on the Star (PD Coordination) toolbar
for a fault placed on the secondary side of the transformer, the primary through-fault current (kA) is
calculated and updated.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on fault placed on
primary or secondary side.
Zs (Fault on Prim.)
Calculates system impedance from short-circuit update. This is the system impedance in percent on the
secondary side of the transformer as seen by the fault on the primary side.
Zs (Fault on Sec.)
Calculates system impedance from short-circuit update. This is the system impedance in percent on the
primary side of the transformer as seen by the fault on the secondary side.
11-65
AC Elements
Xs/Rs (Fault on Prim.)

Calculates system X/R ratio. This is the system X/R ratio on the secondary side of the transformer based
on a fault on the primary side of the transformer.
Xs/Rs (Fault on Sec.)

Calculates system X/R ratio. This is the system X/R ratio on the primary side of the transformer based on
a fault on the secondary side of the transformer.
Zs+Zt (Fault on Prim.)

Equivalent percent impedance (system + transformer rated) as seen from the primary side of the
transformer. The Zs+Zt calculation contains the affect of transformer taps as well as impedance tolerance.
Zs is the difference between total impedance (Zs+Zt) and Zt (rated transformer impedance). Hence Zs
may include the affect of transformer tap and tolerance and may not represent true system impedance.
Zs+Zt (Fault on Sec.)

Equivalent percent impedance (system + transformer rated) as seen from the secondary side of the
transformer. The Zs+Zt calculation contains the affect of transformer taps as well as impedance tolerance.
Zs is the difference between total impedance (Zs+Zt) and Zt (rated transformer impedance). Hence Zs
may include the affect of transformer tap and tolerance and may not represent true system impedance.
Xs+t/Rs+t (Fault on Prim.)

Equivalent X/R (system + transformer rated) as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
Xs+t/Rs+t (Fault on Sec.)

Equivalent X/R (system + transformer rated) as seen from the secondary side of the transformer.
User-Defined
If it is not possible to run short-circuit to update fault current for every transformer, user-defined values
for short-circuit current, impedance, and X/R may be used.
Note: Zs+Zt and Xs+t/Rs+t are displayed only for the user-defined option.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on the fault placed on
the primary or secondary side depending on the selection in Plot Options.
Location
Unsupervised
Select this option if the transformer is located in an area where no qualified persons monitor and service
the transformer installation. See the National Electric Code for further details.
Supervised
Select this option if the transformer is located in an area where only qualified persons monitor and service
the transformer installation. See the National Electric Code for further details.
11-66
AC Elements
Fault Frequency
Fault frequency determines the shape of the transformer damage curve depending upon the application of
the transformer in an electrical system.
Note: The fault frequency option is not available (is grayed out) if the IEC Transformer Standard is
selected.
Frequent
For applications in which faults occur frequently, the through-fault curve represents the fact that the
transformer is subjected to both thermal and mechanical damage. An example of this is transformers with
secondary side overhead lines.
Infrequent
For applications in which faults occur infrequently, the through-fault curve represents the fact that the
transformer is subjected primarily to thermal damage. An example of this is transformers with secondary
side conductors enclosed in a conduit.
Short-Circuit Update
Pin (Disable Short-Circuit Update)
Select this option to disable the auto update of the short-circuit current from 3-phase Short-Circuit
Analysis. When this option is selected and Run / Update Short-circuit Clipping kA button is clicked, Fault
on Prim. And Fault on Sec. values remains unchanged or pinned.
Curve Shift
Apply Curve Shift
Select to apply transformer curve shift. The ANSI curve shift is applied as a multiplier to the current
(horizontal axis) components of the entire transformer damage curve. The curve shift is dependent upon
the connection specified in the Grounding page of the Transformer Editor. The table below describes this
relationship:
11-67
AC Elements
Connection
Delta Delta
Delta Wye Solid Grounded
Factor
0.87
0.58
Source: IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRY. VOL. 1A-22 JULY/AUGUST 1986

Note: The Curve shift option is not available (is grayed out) if the IEC Transformer Standard is selected.
Magnetizing Inrush
Inrush Curve Type
Select the type of inrush curve to display: Points, Curve Piecewise, or Curve Equation.
Multiplier
Select current multiplier to plot the transformer inrush point on the Star View. Typical multiple values are
6, 8, 10 and 12. These are multiples of FLA of the transformer. The FLA of the transformer is selected
based on Device - Adjustment setting in Star Plot options. For example, if the FLA of the transformer is
1804 Amps based on the secondary winding and magnetizing inrush multiplier is 8, then the magnetizing
current would be 8 times 1804 or 14.4 kA based on secondary side.
Duration\Time Constant
When the inrush curve type is Point or Curve Piecewise, the inrush duration is entered here in cycles.
When the inrush curve type is Curve Equation, the time constant is entered here in cycles.
Damage Curve
Display on TCC Plot
Click to display transformer damage curve on the Star View. Transformer damage curves are always
shown on Star Views by default.
11-68
AC Elements
If ANSI is selected as the standard (on the Info page) of the transformer, then the damage curve is based
on the ANSI C57.109 Standard.
If IEC is selected as the standard (on the Info page) of the transformer, then the damage curve is based on
the IEC 76-5 Standard.
11-69
AC Elements

Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a
harmonic library needs to be defined here.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Harmonic Editor. Only current harmonic
sources can be added to transformers.
11-70
AC Elements
Pick a manufacturer name and a model name (using the current Source harmonic type) from the Library
Quick Pick - Harmonic Editor.
Type
Displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
Displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
Displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic library.
Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)

Prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
Prints the harmonic spectrum.
K-Factor
The transformer K-Factor defines the additional thermal capacity of the transformer to tolerate the heating
affects of harmonic currents.
FLA
Prim.
Transformer full load amps as seen from the primary side.
Sec.
Transformer full load amps as seen from the secondary side.
I Total (%)
Transformer full load current in percent of rated FLA, including additional capacity for harmonic current.
I Total
Prim.
Transformer full load amps including additional capacity for harmonic currents as seen from the primary
side.
Sec.
Transformer full load amps including additional capacity for harmonic currents as seen from the
secondary side.
11-71
AC Elements
A
This is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is
around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and
branches from service. When the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are
reclosed, this leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted,
however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed
component) could be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
P
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year. The passive failure rate is associated with
the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does
not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component
will restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of
breakers. Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated
with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore
does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed
component restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
11-72
AC Elements
MTTR
This is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR ( =
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P (MTTF = 1.0/(
A+ P)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR = MTTR/
(MTTR+8760/( A + P)).
Replacement
Available
Check this box to enable rP
rP
This is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
11-73
AC Elements
User-Defined Info



11-74
AC Elements

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, using up to 50
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
11-75
AC Elements

Enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with
this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field,
refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key
11-76
AC Elements
Transformer, Open Delta
11.3 Transformer, Open Delta

The properties associated with Open Delta transformers of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in Open Delta Transformer Editor.
This editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Impedance
Tap
Grounding
Protection
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.3.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the Open Delta transformer ID, whether the transformer is in or out of
service, primary and secondary buses, the connection, FDR tag, name, and manufacturers data.
11-77
AC Elements
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID having up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of transformers increase. The
default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the Project View.
Prim. and Sec.

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a Open Delta transformer are designated as primary and secondary
buses. If the primary or secondary terminal of a transformer is not connected to any bus, a blank entry
will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection, after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, that is,
transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus(as shown in the figure below, where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4).
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the primary and secondary bus IDs.
The Wye side of the Open Delta transformer can also be connected to phase adapters. If the transformer
is connected to a phase adapter, then the phase adapter ID will show in the Prim. or Sec. field.
11-78
AC Elements
Condition
Service
continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a de-energized element is grey.
State
Revision Data
The current revision name will be displayed.
Connection
In the connection section, the connected phases at Open Delta transformer Wye side can be selected from
the drop down list. For example, the Wye side is specified to be connected to the A and B phase when the
phase type AB is selected.
Both sides of the Open Delta transformer are allowed to be connected to a 3-phase bus. The Wye side of
the Open Delta transformer will not energize the 3-phase bus. The 3-phase bus can be energized by other
3-phase sources.
When the Wye side of the Open Delta transformer is connected to an isolated bus, the Open Delta
transformer will energize the bus and the phase type of the Open Delta transformer will be propagated to
the bus as a single phase bus.
11-79
AC Elements
Standard
You can select either ANSI or IEC. The class selections will change based on the standard selected.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
11-80
AC Elements
11.3.2 Rating Page

On the Rating page, specify the Open Delta transformer voltage and power ratings, type/class, operating
cooling, installation, and alert data.
Voltage Rating
Prim and Sec kV
For the Open Delta transformer, these two fields are the equivalent transformer voltage ratings and are
display only. The primary and secondary voltage ratings are the average voltages across the terminals of
the two single-phase transformers from the Wye connected side.
For the single-phase transformers connected in Delta, the equivalent voltage rating is the average of the
single-phase transformers voltage ratings. For the single-phase transformers connected in Wye, the
equivalent voltage rating is 1.732 times the average of the single-phase transformers voltage ratings.
FLA
and the largest power ratings.
11-81
AC Elements
Bus kVnom
This displays the bus nominal kV of the connected primary and secondary terminals.
Power Rating
Rated MVA
Based on the type/class of the transformer, up to three MVA fields may be available. The corresponding
class/temperature rise will be displayed below each rating field. Where available, Class1 MVA Class2
MVA Class3 MVA.
1. When Per Standard is selected, only Class1 MVA field is editable. Class2 and Class3 (where
available) are calculated from Class1 MVA based on American National Standard C57.12.10 and
are display only.
2. When User-Defined is selected, in addition to Class1 MVA, the user can specify Class2 and
Class3 ratings (where available). No calculation is enforced for user-defined option.
Per Transformer
Select this button to enter the individual single-phase transformer ratings and impedances.
Fan/Pump
The required cooling equipment for the corresponding power rating. The field is checked to specify the
availability of the equipment.
Derated MVA
This displays the derated MVA for each class/temperature rise.
%Derating
These fields display the percentage of power derating for each class/temperature rise due to the
unavailability of the cooling equipment, installation altitude and ambient temperature. They are calculated
by the formula of "(1 - Derated MVA / Rated MVA) * 100" for the corresponding power rating.
Z Base
This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance and depends on the standard selection.
ANSI: Base MVA = Class1 MVA. IEC: Base MVA = the largest available class MVA.
11-82
AC Elements
Alert - Max
This value, if non-zero, is used to calculate the overload percentage of the transformer. If the maximum
MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the branch will be flagged on the overload
summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero and this
branch will not be included in the overload summary report.
1. When Derated MVA is selected, the maximum MVA capability will be set to the largest derated
value.
2. When User-Defined is selected, the user can specify the maximum MVA capability.
Installation
This is used to specify the base altitude and base temperature of the transformer.
Type/Class
Based on the standard selected, the fields below will provide different selection options. The tables
below show those options:
Type
Select the transformer type from the Type list box. The following transformer types are available for both
ANSI and IEC Standards:
Liquid-Fill
Dry
Liquid-Fill (C57.12) ANSI only
Sub Type
Select the transformer sub type from the Sub Type list box. The following table shows the subtypes
available based on the standard and type of transformer:
Standard
Type
Liquid
Fill
ANSI
Dry
Subtype
Standard
Mineral Oil
Flammable Liquid
Less-Flammable Liquid
Liquid
Fill
Non-Flammable Liquid
Other
Ventilated
Non-Ventilated
Sealed
Other
Type
IEC
Dry
11-83
Subtype
Mineral Oil
Synthetic Liquid <=300
Synthetic Liquid >300
Non-Flammable
Synthetic Liquid
Other
Sealed
Non-Enclosed
Enclosed
Totally Enclosed
Vent-Dry
Other
AC Elements
Class
ANSI, Liquid Fill transformers for all subtypes:
OA
OA/FA
OA/FOA/FOA
OW
OA/FA/FA
FOA
OW/A
OA/FA/FOA
FOW
Other
ANSI, Dry transformers:
Subtype
Ventilated
Class
Subtype
Class
AA
AFA
Non-Ventilated
ANV
Other
AA/FA
Other
Sealed
GA
Other
Subtype
Class
Other
ANV
AA
AFA
AA/FA
GA
Other
IEC, Liquid Fill:
Subtype
Class
Subtype
Mineral Oil
Synthetic
Liquid <=300
Other
ONAN
ONWN
ONWN/ONAN
ONAN/ONAF
ONAN/ONAF/ONAF
ONAN/ONAF/OFAF
ONAN/OFAF/OFAF
OFAF
OFWF
ODWF
ONAN/OFAN/OFAF
OFAN
OFAN/OFAF
ONWF
Class
Subtype
KNAN
KNWN
KNWN/KNAN
KNAN/KNAF
KNAN/KNAF/KNAF
KNAN/KNAF/KFAF
KNAN/KFAF/KFAF
KFAF
KFWF
KDWF
KNAN/KFAN/KFAF
KFAN
KFAN/KFAF
KNWF
Synthetic
Liquid
>300
Class
LNAN
LNWN
LNWN/LNAN
LNAN/LNAF
LNAN/LNAF/LNAF
LNAN/LNAF/LFAF
Non-Flammable
LNAN/LFAF/LFAF
Synthetic
LFAF
Liquid
LFWF
LDWF
LNAN/LFAN/LFAF
LFAN
LFAN/LFAF
LNWF
IEC, Dry for all subtypes of transformers:
AN
GN
GNAN
GNAN
AF
GF
GNAF
Other
ANAN
GNAF
ANAF
11-84
AC Elements
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature (in degrees C) from the list box. The following transformer
operating temperatures are available:
Standard
Type
Class
Temp. Rise
All Classes
55/65
65
80
80/100
80/115
80/150
100
115/150
Type
Class
Temp. Rise
Liquid Fill
All Classes
AN
AF
ANAN
GN
GNAF
GNAN/GN
AF
ANAF
GNAN
Other
65
60
75
80
100
125
Liquid Fill
ANSI
Dry
Standard
IEC
Dry
150
150
150
150
MFR
Enter the Open Delta transformer manufacturers name.
11-85
AC Elements

On the Impedance page, specify the Open Delta transformer impedance, variation, and tolerance data.
Positive Sequence Impedance

These are the positive sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the transformer
MVA and kV ratings as the base values. These values are subject to manufacturer tolerance limits and
tap position.
For the Open Delta transformer, the positive and zero sequence impedances are identical and calculated
from the phase-by-phase admittance matrix of the single-phase transformers.
X/R and R/X Ratios

The equivalent X/R and R/X ratios are calculated from the single-phase impendaces and displayed.
%X and %R
The equivalent %X and %R are calculated from the single-phase impendaces and displayed.
11-86
AC Elements
Z Variation
Use this field to enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values
are not zero, then the final Open Delta transformer impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap
impedance values (entered for Positive Sequence Impedance, %Z fields), transformer primary and
secondary winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance
variation at 5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer
impedance.

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at 5% tap position, in percent of the transformer

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position; in percent of the transformer

%Z
These fields are used to display the %Z at -5% Tap and +5% Tap calculated by % Variation @ -5% Tap
and % Variation @ +5% Tap correspondingly. These fields are editable and can also be used to calculate
% Variation @ -5% Tap and % Variation @ +5% Tap by the same formula that is used to calculate %Z
based on % Variations.
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value in this field. This value
should be zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value. For a new transformer with a
designated impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer.
11-87
AC Elements
The value of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the
positive or negative value, which will result in a conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative
Load Flow
Short-Circuit
Motor Starting
Transient Stability
Harmonics
Optimal Power Flow
Positive
X
X
X
X
X
X
11.3.4 Single Phase Rating Page

The single phase transformer ratings and impedances can be entered by clicking the Per Transformer
button on the open delta transformer editor rating or impedance page.
Rated MVA
The single phase transformer T1 is the bank connected to the phase A at the Wye connected side. The
single phase transformer T2 is the bank connected to the phase B at the Wye connected side.
11-88
AC Elements
The single phase transformer T3 is the bank connected to the phase C at the Wye connected side. One of
the 3 single-phase transformers will be hidden for the open delta transformer.
The equivalent power ratings of the Open Delta transformer are 2 times of the smaller power ratings
between the two available single phase transformers. Note that the equivalent power ratings are not the
required de-rated power ratings for operating. The factor of 0.87 may be taken for a 3-phase load at the
Delta connected side to avoid the overloading of the transformer.
The Class 2 and Class 3 power ratings (when they are available) are calculated and displayed only when
the Per Standard button is selected in the Open Delta transformer editor rating page. The User-Defined
option must be selected in the Open Delta transformer editor rating page in order for them to be editable.
Note: the equivalent power ratings and impedances of the Open Delta transformer are not used in the
calculations. The phase-by-phase model is used for the Open Delta transformer instead.
FLA
and the largest power ratings for each single-phase transformer.
kV
Enter primary and secondary line-to-neutral voltage ratings of each single-phase transformer in kilovolts.
Impedance
Enter the positive sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the transformer MVA
and kV ratings as the base values. Click the appropriate button to obtain the typical single-phase
transformer impedance together with X/R ratio, or X/R ratio only.
The impedance and X/R ratio of the equivalent Open Delta transformer are calculated from the 2 singlephase transformer impedances and X/R ratios.
Typical Z and X/R and Typical X/R

Click the appropriate button to obtain the typical single-phase transformer impedance together with X/R
ratio, or X/R ratio only. The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for ANSI 2-winding transformers are
based on two sources: American National Standard C57.12.10 and Industrial Power System Handbook by
Beeman.
The Industrial Power System Handbook by Beeman (page 96) specifies typical data for transformers that
has rating not larger than 500 kVA and primary voltage not higher than 12.47 kV.
Typical Impedance for Transformer Less Than or equal to 500 kVA:
Rating
kVA 5
5< kVA 25
25< kVA 50
50< kVA 100
100< kVA 167
167< kVA 500
Group 2+
Group 1*
%Z
2.3
2.3
2.6
2.6
4.0
4.8
X/R
0.88
1.13
1.69
1.92
3.45
4.70
11-89
%Z
2.8
2.3
2.4
3.7
3.7
5.2
X/R
0.77
1.00
1.54
2.92
3.60
5.10
AC Elements
* Group 1: Transformers with high voltage windings of less than or equal to 8.32 kV
+ Group 2: Transformers with high voltages of greater than 8.32 kV and less than or equal to 12.47 kV
American National Standard C57.12.10 specifies impedance values for transformers larger than 500 kVA.
Typical Impedance for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
High Voltage Side

kV 13.8
13.8 < kV 23
23 < kV 34.5
34.5 < kV 46
46 < kV 69
69 < kV 115
115 < kV 138
138 < kV 161
161 < kV (230)
Low Voltage Side 2.4 kV

Without LTC
With LTC
5.5**
6.5
7.0
7.0
7.5
7.5
8.0
8.0
8.5
8.5
9.0
9.0
9.5
9.5
10.0
10.0
10.5
Low Voltage Side

< 2.4 kV
5.75**
6.75
7.25
7.75
** Self-cooled transformers with greater than 5000 kVA values are the same as those for 23 kV high
voltage.
Typical X/R Ratios for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Rating
MVA 1
1 < MVA 2
2 < MVA 3
3 < MVA 4
4 < MVA 5
5 < MVA 6
6 < MVA 7
7 < MVA 8
X/R
5.790
7.098
10.67
11.41
12.14
12.85
13.55
14.23
Rating
8 < MVA 10
10 < MVA 20
20 < MVA 30
30 < MVA 40
40 < MVA 50
50 < MVA 100
100 < MVA 200
200 < MVA 1000
X/R
15.50
18.60
23.70
27.30
29.50
34.10
42.00
50.00
The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for IEC 2-winding transformers are based on IEC 60076-5
1994 and Areva Ch.5 Equivalent Circuits and Parameters of Power System Plant listed in the table
below:
Rating
MVA 0.63
0.63 < MVA 1.25
1.25 < MVA 3.15
3.15 < MVA 6.3
6.3 < MVA 12.5
12.5 < MVA 25
25 < MVA 200
200 < MVA
%Z
4
5
6.25
7.15
8.35
10
12.5
12.5
11-90
X/R
1.5
3.5
6
8.5
13
20
45
45
AC Elements
11.3.5 Tap Page

Within the Tap page, specify the transformer tap data for both fixed taps and LTC taps. Transformer
winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.
Fixed Tap
% Tap and kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage in these fields, while the button is set on % Tap, or click
the Tap button for kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in kV.
Note: In either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
You can click the up/down arrows next to the fields. By clicking on the arrows, you will be stepping to
the available tap settings based on the entries on the Prim/Sec Fixed Tap Range Editors. You can
access the editor by clicking on the Prim/Sec buttons on the left of the fields.
ETAP allows modeling of an off-load tap (fixed tap) changer on either side or both sides of transformers.
Standard off-load tap changer transformers typically have 5.0% settings available, with two steps above
and two steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, 2.5, 0, 2.5, or 5.0.
11-91
AC Elements
the tap is set at nominal value (n = 0). ETAP uses the following Pi circuit representation to model
transformer tap settings:
where
Yt
N
n
=
=
=
1/Zt
Transformer admittance in per unit
1 + n/100
Turn ratio in per unit
100 ( N - 1 )
Tap setting in percent
Positive (+) tap setting on the primary side (P) decreases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
Negative (-) tap setting on the primary side (P), increases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
As this model indicates, placing +10% tap setting (n=+10%, or N=1.1) at the primary side is not
equivalent to -10% tap at the secondary side. ETAP will correctly model a transformer with a tap setting,
as long as the tap setting is indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap
changer). To increase the voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value.
Note: however, that this will only work if current flows from the tap changer bus to the bus where the
voltage is being corrected.
Prim/Sec Buttons
Click these buttons to access the Primary or Secondary Fixed Tap Range Editors and set the maximum
and minimum tap positions as well as the tap step for the transformer fixed taps.
Per Unit Turn Ratio

LTC/Voltage Regulator
You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on both transformer
windings. However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on both windings of the transformers.
AVR Prim.
11-92
AC Elements
AVR Sec.
LTC Button
data.
Manual or Operating Tap

Here you can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC
automatic mode by clicking on the up or down arrows.
Note: the tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in automatic
mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is used as the initial value.
Real Time Scanned

When in On-Line monitoring mode, Real-Time will display the Scanned Tap Position value for this
transformer in this field.
Power Station
Unit Transformer for Generator
Check this box to define this transformer as a unit transformer. A drop-down field is displayed to assign
this transformer to a generator.
In addition, the Tap Optimization button is displayed.
Tap Optimization
Clicking the Tap Optimization button will display the Transformer Tap Optimization Editor. In this
editor, you can calculate the optimal tap position. See Transformer Optimization Chapter for more
details.
11-93
AC Elements
11.3.6 Primary/Secondary Fixed Tap Range

Clicking on the Prim/Sec button in the Fixed Tap group brings up the Fixed Tap Range dialog box to
enter parameters
Tap Settings
% Tap/kV
Enter the transformer tap settings below in percent, while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap
button for kV tap selection and enter the settings in kV. Note that in either case, ETAP calculates the
equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min.
Enter the minimum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Max.
Enter the maximum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Step
Displays the step size in percent or kV based on the %Tap/kV.
# of Taps
Enter the number of Taps or click the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the number of taps of the
transformer. Based on this entry and the Maximum and Minimum tap settings, the program calculates the
step size and displays it on the Step field.
11-94
AC Elements

Transformer load tap changers (LTC) can be accessed through the editors of either the 2-winding or 3winding transformers. To activate an LTC for any transformer winding, click the box on the left side of
the LTC button. Then click the LTC button to access its editor and enter the LTC data.
Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Voltage Control
Voltage
11-95
AC Elements
Upper Band
Lower Band
The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram,
when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band (green area), the LTC will not move; if
the voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or less than (Desired
Voltage Lower Band), the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus voltage close to its
desired value.
In order for the LTC to work properly, ETAP forces the sum of the upper and lower bands to be larger
than or equal to the LTC step.
Tap
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer load tap changer (LTC) tap setting as a percentage while the button is set on % Tap;
or click the Tap button for kV Tap selection and enter the transformer LTC tap setting in kV. In either
case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min
Max
Step
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. Tap, and Step.
# of Taps
# of Taps = 1 + (%Max Tap - %Min Tap)/(%Step)
11-96
AC Elements
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds. This is the time duration from the moment when the
regulated bus voltage goes outside and stays outside the voltage control band to the time when the LTC
triggers the first step change.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds. This is the time duration that the LTC takes to complete a
step change.
Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify the phase shift associated with the transformer and displays the
grounding connection in vector group or winding connection on the one-line diagram.
11-97
AC Elements
Font
Display connection using ETAP Font or IEC vector string. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Winding Connection
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Vector Group
Symbols
can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the standard. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded

The benefit in using symbols is that you can place ground CTs to connect protective devices such as
relays.
Vector Group
Select this option to display the transformer connection in IEC vector strings.
Winding Connection
Select this option to display the transformer connection.
11-98
AC Elements
Angle
Phase shift angle has to be either 30 or -30 degrees for the Open Delta transformer. The phase shift angle
is determined by the connection of the Open Delta transformer. For example, when the Wye connected
side is connected to the high voltage system, then the connections which are high voltage, lead the low
voltage by +/-30 degrees are illustrated in the following diagrams.
Wye side Leads Delta side by 30 degree
Wye side Leads Delta side by -30 degree
Grounding Type
Open Delta transformer has to be Wye connected at one side and Delta connected at the other side. The
Delta connected terminal has to be connected to a 3-phase bus, while the Wye connected terminal can be
connected to a 3-phase bus or a 2-phase bus.
When the Wye connected terminal is connected to a 3-phase bus, the 3-phase bus must have a neutral
return. When the Wye connected terminal is connected to a 2-phase bus, the 2-phase bus shall have the
same phase type as the Open Delta transformer. For example, an Open Delta transformer of the phase
type AB, which is specified from the Open Delta transformer editor Info page, must be connected to a 2phase bus of the phase type AB. If not, the Open Delta transformer will be de-energized.
When the Open Delta transformer is connected to a bus, either primary or secondary side, the buttons for
the grounding type will be disabled. When the Open Delta transformer is not connected to a bus at both
sides, the grounding type buttons will be enabled.
11-99
AC Elements
Earthing Type
Note that this field is applicable only for low voltage side.
Distributed Neutral
Enter the resistance between the chassis and ground in Ohms.

Refer to Chapter 11, Section 11.2.9 2-Winding Transformer Protection Page for information on this page
for the Open Delta Transformer.

Refer to Chapter 11, Section 11.2.11 2-Winding Transformer Reliability Page for information on this
page for the Open Delta Transformer.

Refer to Chapter 11, Section 11.2.12 2-Winding Transformer Remarks Page for information on this page

Refer to Chapter 11, Section 11.2.13 2-Winding Transformer Comment Page for information on this page
11-100
AC Elements
11.4 Transformer, 3-Winding

The properties associated with 3-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor. In addition to information regarding the use of load tap changers (LTC), the 3-Winding
Transformer Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Tap
LTC
Grounding
Protection
Harmonic
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.4.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the 3-winding transformer ID, In/Out of Service, Primary, Secondary, and
Tertiary Buses, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and Manufacturers data..
11-101
AC Elements
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default
transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of transformers
increase. The default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Primary, Secondary and Tertiary

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 3-winding transformer are designated as Primary, Secondary, and
Tertiary buses. If the primary, secondary, or tertiary terminal of a transformer is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus
from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, i.e., you
cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where T2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Connection
Displays the transformer phase connection type. Currently 3-Winding Transformers are 3 Phase only.
Condition
Service
11-102
AC Elements
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Type/Class
MFR
Enter the 3-winding transformer manufacturer name.
Type
Select the transformer type from the list box. The following transformer types are available:
Cast-Coil
Gas-Fill-Dry
Liquid-Fill
Non-Vent-Dry (non-vented dry type)
Sealed-Dry
Vent-Dry
Other
Class
AA
AA/FA
AFA
FOA
FOW
OA
OA/FA
OA/FA/FA
OA/FA/FOA
OA/FOA/FOA
OW
OW/A
ANV
GA
Other
NAF
NAN
NWN
NWN/NAN
NAN/NAF
NAN/NAF/NAF
NAN/NAF/FAF
NAN/FAF/NAF
FAF
11-103
FWF
DWF
NAN/FAN/FAF
FAN
FAN/FAF
NWF
AN
AF
ANAN
ANAF
GN
GF
GNAF
GNAN/GNAF
GNAN
AC Elements
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature from the list box. The following transformer operating
temperatures are available:
55
60
65
80
115
130
150
Other temperatures can be typed directly into the temperature box.
BIL
Select the transformer basic impulse level (BIL) in kV from the list box. The following transformer basic
impulse levels are available:
10
20
30
45
60
95
110
125
150
200
250
350
550
650
750
900
1050
1300
1550
1800
2050
11.4.2 Rating Page

Within the Rating page, specify the 3-winding transformer ratings, impedance and its variation and the
tolerance data.
11-104
AC Elements
Rating
Prim - Sec - Ter kV Rating
Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary voltage ratings of the 3-winding transformer in kilovolts.
Note: When connecting a transformer to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal to
the bus nominal kV. ETAP uses the voltage at the lowest-numbered swing system as the base voltage and
calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. ETAP gives an error message when it
detects inconsistent voltage bases in parallel or looped systems during system analysis.
Prim - Sec - Ter MVA Rating

Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary MVA or kVA ratings of the 3-winding transformer. The MVA
rating of the primary winding is used as the base MVA for all transformer impedances. For example, for
a 20/15/5 MVA transformer with an OA 55/FA 65 C rating, the nameplate transformer impedances
should be entered in 20 MVA base (OA 55C rating).
Max MVA Capability

These values, if non-zero, are used to calculate the percent overload of the transformer windings. If the
maximum MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the branch will be listed on the
overload summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero
and this branch will not be included in the overload summary report. For a transformer with OA 55/FA
65 C ratings, the FA 65 C rating should be used as the maximum MVA capability if fans have been
installed on the transformer.
FLA
This displays the FLA of the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings in amperes.
Connected Bus
This displays the nominal kVs of the connected buses to the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances
For 3-winding transformers, specify three impedance values in percent on the primary winding MVA
base:
Zps
=
=
Zpt
=
=
Zst
=
=
Leakage Z between the Primary and Secondary windings with the Tertiary winding open
circuited.
Rps + j Xps = Rp + Rs + j ( Xp + Xs ) % (base MVA = MVAp)
Leakage Z between the Primary and Tertiary windings with the Secondary winding open
circuited.
Rpt + j Xpt = Rp + Rt + j ( Xp + Xt )
% (base MVA = MVAp)
Leakage Z between the Secondary and Tertiary windings with the Primary winding open
circuited.
Rst + j Xst
= Rs + Rt + j ( Xs + Xt )
% (base MVA = MVAp)
11-105
AC Elements
These are the nameplate impedances of the transformer; no further calculations are needed to extract the
impedances of the 3-winding representation, as ETAP already does this internally. The following example
is provided to indicate how the impedance parameters of a three-winding transformer must be entered in
ETAP.
30/25/5 MVA
230/13.8/4.16 kV
MVAp = 30
MVAs = 25
MVAt = 5
Zps
Zpt
Zst
= 9.5 %
= 9.4 %
= 18.1 %
kVp = 230
kVs = 13.8
kVt = 4.16
MVAb = 30,
MVAb = 30,
MVAb = 30,
X/R ps = 48.2
X/R pt = 46.9
X/R st = 42.5
ETAP models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances. ETAP
takes the voltage of the swing bus (a bus with a connected swing machine) as the base voltage. It then
calculates the system base voltages using the transformer turn ratio. If the transformer turn ratio matches
the ratio of the base kVs of the buses between which it is connected, but the actual numbers are not the
same (e.g., the primary bus base kV is 13.8 and the secondary bus is 4.349 kV, while the transformer kV
ratings are 13.2-4.16 kV), ETAP adjusts the nameplate impedance to a new base with the following
formula:
Zt,new = Zt,rated * (Transformer Rated kV/Bus Base kV)2
In some cases, parallel transformers with different voltage ratings are present. If this happens, a fictitious
tap setting is required. In order to calculate this setting, refer to 2-Winding Transformer kV rating.
X/R Ratio
Enter the transformer X/R ratios. For 3-winding transformers, three X/R values are needed,
corresponding to the 3-winding impedances Zps, Zpt, and Zst.
X/R ps = Xps/Rps
X/R pt = Xpt/Rpt
X/R st = Xst/Rst
These ratios are used in ETAP to calculate the transformer winding resistances and reactances from given
percent impedances.
Z Variation
Enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then
the final transformer impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap impedance values (entered
11-106
AC Elements
for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary, secondary, and tertiary
winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at 5%
tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer impedance.

Enter transformer impedance variation at 5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at
nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either the primary ,
secondary, or tertiary winding tap changes.

Enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position in percent of the transformer impedance at
nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either the primary ,
secondary, or tertiary winding tap changes.
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value. This value should be
zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value. For a new transformer with a designated
impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer. The value
of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the positive or
negative value for all the impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst, which will result in a conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative
Load Flow
Short-Circuit
Motor Starting
Transient Stability
Harmonics
Optimal Power Flow
Positive
X
X
X
X
X
X
11-107
AC Elements
Depending on loading conditions, more conservatism can be achieved by applying the positive or
negative tolerances to the impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst independently. For instance, if the transformer
primary side is connected to a source while the secondary and tertiary sides are both connected to
induction motors, then when the positive tolerances are applied to Zps and Zpt and negative tolerance is
applied to Zst, the voltage will drop more across the transformer for load flow type studies. Therefore,
when the tolerances can be applied to the impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst independently, ETAP recommends
that the tolerances become incoporated into the impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst manually based on user's
discretion while the tolerance is entered as 0.
11.4.3 Tap Page

You can specify the 3-winding transformer tap data for both fixed tap and LTC tap within the Tap page.
Transformer winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.
11-108
AC Elements
Fixed Taps
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button for
kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in percent or kV. In either case, ETAP calculates
the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
ETAP allows modeling a tap off-load (fixed tap) changer on all three sides of the transformer. Standard
off-load tap changer transformers typically have 5.0% settings available, with two steps above and two
steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, -2.5, 0,
2.5, or 5.0.
the tap is set at a nominal value (n = 0),.
Placing a +10% tap setting (n=+10% or N=1.1) at the primary side is not equivalent to -10% tap at the
secondary side. ETAP will correctly model a transformer with a tap setting as long as the tap setting is
indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap changer). To increase the
voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value.
Note: This will only work if current flows from the tap changer bus to the bus where the voltage is being
corrected.
Per Unit Turn Ratio

Connection
These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and rating of the grounding device in amperes.
Grounding can be placed on any transformer winding.
Prim./Sec./Ter. Buttons
The transformer grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the
desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Auto LTC (Load Tap Changer)

You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on all transformer windings.
However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on more than 2-windings of the 3-winding
transformers.
Prim.
Sec.
winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is in manual mode.
11-109
AC Elements
Ter.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the tertiary
winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is in manual mode.
LTC Button
data.
LTC Tap Position

Operating
You can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC
automatic mode here.
Note: The tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in
automatic mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is used as the initial value.
OnLine Scanned
If in the On-Line Monitoring mode, Real-Time will display the scanned Tap Position in this field.
Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify phase-shift associated with the transformer. Phase-shift for a 3winding transformer can be uniquely defined by two values. ETAP uses Sec. and Ter. to describe phaseshift of a 3-winding transformer. The value displayed in the Sec. field is the secondary voltage angle with
respect to primary voltage angle and the value displayed in the Ter. field is the tertiary voltage angle with
respect to primary voltage angle. For example, a value of 30 in the Ter. field indicates that the tertiary
voltage leads the primary voltage by 30 degree, or equivalently it actually lags the primary voltage by 30
degrees. The phase-shift between the secondary and the tertiary windings can be calculated from the
values in the Sec. and Ter. fields.
Std Pos. Seq.

Select this option to specify positive sequence phase-shift, which means that when the primary and
secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high voltage side leads the
low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec field displays 30
degrees; otherwise, the Sec field shows 30 degrees. When the primary and the secondary have the same
connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules apply to the primary and tertiary windings and
the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter field.
Std Neg. Seq.

Select this option to specify negative sequence phase-shift, which is the opposite of the previous case.
When the primary and secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high
voltage side lags the low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec.
field displays 30 degrees; otherwise, the Sec. field shows -30 degrees. When the primary and the
secondary have the same connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules apply to the primary
and tertiary windings and the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter. field.
11-110
AC Elements
Special
When this option is selected, the Sec. and Ter. fields become enabled and you can specify the phase-shift
in these two edit boxes.
Sec.
This field is for display only when one of the first two options is selected. It shows the angle at which the
secondary winding with respect to the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter
the phase-shift in the field.
Ter.
When one of the first two options is selected, this field is for display only and it shows the angle at which
the tertiary winding with respect the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter
the phase-shift in the field.
11-111
AC Elements
Display
The button options Font and Symbols allow you to determine how the grounding connection is displayed
Font
Display connection using ETAP Font. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor-Wye Solid Grounded
Symbols
can be sized, rotated, deleted, and changed depending on the grounding connection type. For Example:
11-112
AC Elements
Delta-Wye Resistor-Wye Solid Grounded

The main purpose of using symbols is to show ground CTs on the one-line and connect them to devices
such as relays.
Primary / Secondary/ Tertiary

These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and rating of the grounding device in amperes.
Grounding can be placed on any transformer winding.
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:
Type
Open
Solid
Resistor
Reactor
Xfmr-Reactor
Xfmr-Resistor
Description
A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the secondary of
the transformer.
A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the secondary
of the transformer.
Resistor \ Reactor Grounding Ratings:

V ln
Amp
Enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes for a resistor or reactor grounded generators.
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohm)
Ohm
This is the resistor or Reactor impedance in ohms.
Transformer-Resistor \ Transformer Reactor Grounding Ratings:
11-113
AC Elements
V ln
The line-to-neutral voltage is calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2
kV1
This is the transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms)
Prim Ohms
This is the Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
kV2
This is the transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
This is the secondary current in amps. This calculated based on the primary amps and the transformer
turn ratio.
Sec Ohms
This is the Resistor / Reactor impedance in ohms. This is calculated based on the grounding transformer
turn ratio and secondary current. If sec. Ohms are entered first, then the primary amps and ohms will be
calculated automatically.
Transformer kVA
This is the grounding transformer kVA rating.Enter the resistance between the chassis and ground in
Ohms.
Rg
This field is for the inclusion of the elements grounding in electric shock protection calculation. This
field reflects both the elements grounding grid (if the transformer is big enough) and the soil resistance
between the grounding grid and the load grounding electrode. The Rg result from ETAPs ground grid
module can assist in determining this value.
11-114
AC Elements
Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Voltage Control
Voltage
Upper Band
11-115
AC Elements
Lower Band
The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram
below, when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band (gray area), the LTC will not
move; otherwise, if the voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or
less than (Desired Voltage Lower Band), the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus
voltage close to its desired value
Upper Band
Desired Voltage
Lower Band
Tap
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer LTC tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button
for kV Tap selection and enter the transformer LTC tap setting in kV. Note: in either case ETAP
calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min
Max
Step
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. tap, and Step.
# of Taps
# of Taps = 1 + ( %Max Tap - %Min Tap)/(%Step)
11-116
AC Elements
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds.

This page provides options that allow you to plot the transformer damage curve on an active Star View.
Even though transformers are the simplest and most reliable devices in an electrical system, transformer
failures can occur due to any number of internal or external conditions that make the device incapable of
performing its proper function.
Some of the common failures are:
Winding failure
Terminal and no-load tap changer failure
Bushing failure
Load tap changer failure
Insulation breakdown
Appropriate transformer protection should be employed with the following objectives:
Protect the system in case of a transformer failure

Protect the transformer from system disturbances
Overcurrent protective devices such as fuses and relays have well defined operating characteristics. The
characteristic curves for such devices should be coordinated with the transformer through-fault withstand
capability curve or transformer damage curve.
11-117
AC Elements
Short-Circuit
Calculated
Three phase short-circuit fault current (kA) is calculated / updated based on the through-fault current as
seen by the transformer for a fault placed on primary and/or secondary and/or tertiary side of the
transformer. System impedance is calculated based on 3-phase fault current. The 3-phase fault current is
updated automatically when Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked in Star Mode.
The primary / secondary / tertiary fault kA is calculated based on prefault voltage of the faulted bus to the
rated primary/ secondary kV of the transformer, respectively.
11-118
AC Elements
Fault on Prim.
When Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar, the primary throughfault current (kA) is calculated and updated for a fault placed on the primary side of the transformer.
Fault on Sec.
When Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar, the primary throughfault current (kA) is calculated and updated for a fault placed on the secondary side of the transformer.
Fault on Ter.
When Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar, the primary throughfault current (kA) is calculated and updated for a fault placed on the tertiary side of the transformer.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on the Protection and
Fault selected from Plot Options.
Pin (Disable Short-circuit Update)

Select this option to disable auto update of short-circuit current from 3-phase short-circuit analysis. When
this option is selected and Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked, Fault on Prim.,
Fault on Sec. and Fault on Ter. values remain unchanged or pinned.
11-119
AC Elements
Fault Frequency
Fault frequency determines the shape of the transformer damage curve depending upon the application of
the transformer in an electrical system.
Note: For ANSI Category I and IV, frequent and infrequent curves are considered identical. Curves are
drawn based on transformer Type selected on the Info page. A Liquid-Fill selection is treated as LiquidFill Type transformer. All other Type selections are treated as Dry Type transformer.
Frequent
For applications in which faults occur frequently, the through-fault curve shows how the transformer is
subjected to both thermal and mechanical damage (for example, transformers with secondary or tertiary
side overhead lines).
Infrequent
For applications in which faults occur infrequently, the through-fault curve shows how the transformer is
subjected primarily to thermal damage (for example, transformers with secondary or tertiary side
conductors enclosed in a conduit).
11-120
AC Elements
Curve Shift
Apply Curve Shift
Select to apply transformer curve shift. The ANSI curve shift is applied as a multiplier to the current
(horizontal axis) components of the entire transformer damage curve. The curve shift is dependent upon
the connection specified on the Grounding page of the Transformer Editor. The table below describes
this relationship:
Connection
Delta Delta
Delta Wye Solid Grounded
Factor
0.87
0.58
Source: IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRY. VOL. 1A-22 JULY/AUGUST 1986

For 3-winding transformers, the curve shift is applied based on the connection from Primary Secondary
or Primary Tertiary, depending the of plot side (Secondary or Tertiary).
Magnetizing Inrush
Inrush Curve Type
Select the type of inrush curve to display: Points, Curve Piecewise, or Curve Equation.
Multiplier
Select current multiplier to plot the transformer inrush point on the Star View. Typical multiple values are
6, 8, 10 and 12. These are multiples of FLA of the transformer. The FLA of the transformer is selected
based on Device - Adjustment setting in Star Plot options. For example, if the FLA of the transformer is
1804 Amps based on the secondary winding and the magnetizing inrush multiplier is 8, then the
magnetizing current would be 8 times 1804 or 14.4 kA based on the secondary side. Typical inrush
multipliers for 3-winding transformers are given below.
kVA
Multiplier
0 1000
1000 10000
10000-100000
> 100000
9.5 12
5.9 11.4
3.6 7.5
2.5 4.8
Source: Siemens Power Engineering Guide, Transmission and Distribution, 4th Edition
Duration\Time Constant
When the inrush curve type is Point or Curve Piecewise, the inrush duration is entered here in cycles.
When the inrush curve type is Curve Equation, the time constant is entered here in cycles.
11-121
AC Elements
Damage Curve
Show on TCC
Check the box to display the transformer damage curve on the Star View. Transformer damage curves are
shown on Star Views by default.
11-122
AC Elements

Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a
harmonic library needs to be defined on this page.
Type
This displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
This displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
This displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic library.
Wave Form
This displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)

This prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
This displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
11-123
AC Elements
Print (Spectrum)
This prints the harmonic spectrum.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Note: Only current harmonic sources can be added to transformers.
From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, pick a manufacturer name and a model name (Current
Source harmonic type).
11-124
AC Elements
A
This is the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the
component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone around the failed
component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
service. When the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this
leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could
P
breakers.
Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated with the
component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does not
have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component
restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
11-125
AC Elements
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A+ P)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(A+ P)).
MTTR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
This displays the class of the library data selected
11-126
AC Elements
11.4.9 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info



and enter any extra data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

11-127
AC Elements
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
and enter any additional data for this element here, up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-128
AC Elements
11-129
AC Elements
Bus Duct
11.5 Bus Duct

Bus Duct is used for the effective and efficient supply of electricity in mostly industrial locations. Copper
or aluminum is used for the conductor of the bus duct that can be insulated and enclosed for protection
against mechanical damage and dust accumulation. Bus duct system is a popular way of distributing
power to switchgears from generators and to connected loads.
You can enter the properties associated with AC Bus Duct of the electrical distribution system in this
Data Editor.
The ETAP Bus Duct Editor allows you to model different types of bus ducts in an electrical system. The
data entered in the Bus Editor is used when running all types of system studies.
A bus duct is defined as an element that connects two other devices without the need to insert additional
nodes. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus duct is the bus duct ID which can be
entered in the Info page of the bus duct editor. Once entered, this value is defined as a unique bus duct in
the system model, which can be connected to other buses/nodes directly or automatically inserted
between nodes similar to protective devices.
The Bus Duct Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info
Remarks
Rating
Comment
Reliability
11-130
AC Elements
Bus Duct
11.5.1 Info Page

You use the Info page to specify the bus duct ID, Service & State, FDR Tag, Data Type and Equipment
Name and Description.
Info
ID
A unique ID name having up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to
each Bus Duct. The assigned IDs consist of the default Bus Duct ID (BD) plus an integer, starting with
the number one and increasing as the number of bus ducts increase. The default bus duct ID (BD) can be
changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From
Element ID of the connected device. The connected element for the bus duct can be a bus / node, branch,
load or source. Note that Bus duct cannot be connected directly between two buses. Include a switching
device or branch in series with the bus duct in order to connect a bus duct between two buses.
To
Element ID of the connected device. The connected element for the bus duct can be a bus / node, branch,
load or source.
11-131
AC Elements
Bus Duct
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a bus duct can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or
Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of Service element can be edited
like an In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system
studies. When the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded
bus duct to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision Data.
State
Connection
The phase connection for the bus can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase 2W, or 1 Phase 3W. The
default connection and only connection allowed currently is 3 Phase. You can change the default
connection from the Defaults menu or from the Project View.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the bus to any device. Once the bus is
connected to a device, the phase connection selections will be grayed out. To change the connection type,
you need to disconnect the bus from all devices.
3 Phase
Select to define the bus as a three-phase bus. Three-phase and single-phase loads can be connected to this
bus. Single-phase branches must be connected through a phase adapter before connecting to a threephase bus.
1 Phase
Select this to define the bus as single-phase bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected to this bus.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate,
Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to
11-132
AC Elements
Bus Duct
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names,
navigate to the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Lock / Unlock
11.5.2 Rating Page

The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e. isolated phase, segregated phase, etc).
Standard
ANSI
Select this option if the bus is rated under ANSI Standards.
IEC
Select this option if the bus is rated under IEC Standards.
11-133
AC Elements
Bus Duct
Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment types as follows. These options are
for information / one-line display purposes only and currently not used in any calculations.
Isolated Phase
Non-Segregated Phase
Segregated Phase
Feeder
Plug-In
Lighting
Trolley
Other
Typically HV Applications
Typically LV Applications
General
The Type option also allows the user to select different types of material for the bus duct as follows.
These options are for information / one-line display purposes only and currently not used in any
calculations.
CU Copper
AL - Aluminum
11-134
AC Elements
Bus Duct
A
around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and
branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are
reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted,
P
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and
therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the
failed component will restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and
inadvertent opening of breakers.
11-135
AC Elements
Bus Duct
This is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P
(MTTF = 1.0/(A+P)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P
(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(A+P)).
MTTR
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
11-136
AC Elements
Bus Duct
11.5.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




11-137
AC Elements
Bus Duct
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-138
AC Elements
Bus Duct
11.5.5 Comment Page

Enter any additional data or comments regarding the condition, maintenance, tests, or studies associated
with this element. This field can be up to 64kb and the default size is 4kb. To increase the size of this
field, you need to change the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
11-139
AC Elements
Cable
11.6 Cable
The properties associated with cables of the electrical distribution system one-line diagram can be entered
in this Data Editor.
ETAP allows you to place cables in the one-line diagram to connect two elements (two buses, a motor to
a bus, or a static load to a bus) and place the same cable in a cable raceway. However, you can add cables
to the one-line diagram without placing them in a cable raceway, or add cables to the raceway without
adding them to the one-line diagram. To explain this further, here are the definitions of the four types of
cables in ETAP.
1. One-Line Cable appears as a graphical element on the one-line diagram.
This is a cable that you add to the one-line diagram to connect buses, but
has not been previously routed through any cable raceway, i.e., does not
exist in any raceway.
2. Equipment Cable can be attached to equipment such as motors and

static loads, but do not appear graphically as a separate element on the
one-line diagram. This is a cable that you add to equipment from the
Equipment Editor, and has not been placed in any raceway.
3. Raceway Cable is used exclusively within the cable raceway system

only. This is a cable, which is routed through a raceway such as an
underground cable system, but does not exist in the one-line diagram
or as an equipment cable.
4. Compound Cable represents a cable that is included in the cable

raceway system as well as the one-line diagram (either as a oneline or equipment cable). This cable is added to the one-line
diagram as a one-line or equipment cable, and then is placed
inside a raceway (graphically or from Cable or Raceway
Editors). Or, conversely, the cable is added as a raceway cable,
and then is placed in the one-line diagram as a one-line cable.
11-140
AC Elements
Cable
Compound Cables
The following paragraphs describe three different methods of changing a one-line or equipment cable to a
compound cable (routing an existing cable through a raceway):
From the underground raceway presentation, click the Existing Cable button on the Edit toolbar and place
the cable in the desired location. Then select the desired one-line or equipment cable from the selection
box provided.
From the Cable Editor, Routing page, route the cable through any raceway that exists in the system.
These cables are attached or associated with the raceways without being placed in a specific location
inside the raceway. From the underground raceway system, you can then graphically move the cable to
the desired location.
To graphically place a one-line cable inside a cable raceway, select the cable from the one-line diagram
and press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button down). The pointer will now have an X over it
indicating that you can only drop it in an underground cable system. Hold the mouse button down until
you have moved the pointer from the one-line view to the UGS view, place the pointer on top of a conduit
or the desired location in a raceway, and then release the mouse button. Since an equipment cable is not
displayed graphically in the one-line diagram, you can only use the first two methods explained above to
route an equipment cable.
Note: a raceway cable cannot be changed to an equipment cable. However, an equipment cable can be
changed to a compound cable.
You can add a raceway cable to the one-line diagram and make it a compound cable in two ways:
1. First select the cable from the raceway and cut it to the Dumpster. Now you can add it back to the
same raceway as an existing cable while a copy of it stays in the Dumpster. To add this cable to the
one-line diagram, use the Move From Dumpster command.
2. Select the cable from the raceway and then press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button
down). The pointer will change to a cable shape with an X over it. Hold the mouse button down
until you have moved the pointer from the UGS view to the desired location on the one-line view, and
then release the mouse button.
The Cable Editor includes the following eleven pages of properties.
Info
Impedance
Physical
Protection
Routing
Loading
Ampacity
Sizing
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11-141
AC Elements
Cable
11.6.1 Info Page

You can specify the cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Length, Size, number of
conductors per phase, and Library link from within the Info page of the Cable Editor.
Cable Type
This information is displayed on top of every page of the Cable Editor to reflect the cable type and size
selected from the Cable Library. This is a partial list of the library header which includes the library
source name (ICEA, NEC), rated voltage (0.6, 5, 15 kV), voltage class (100%, 133%), # of conductors
per cable (1/C, 3/C), conductor type (CU, AL), insulation type (Rubber, XLPE), installation type
(Magnetic/Non-Mag.), and cable size (350 kcmil, 180 mm2). The unit for cable sizes will be in
AWG/kcmil for English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables.
Note: ETAP provides list of all available cable sizes from the selected library for quick selection.
If you change the cable size, all library data will be substituted from the cable library into the Cable
Editor. If you modify any data that was extracted from the library, the color of Cable Type will change to
a dark blue color to indicate that there is a conflict between the editor and library data.
11-142
AC Elements
Cable
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each cable. The assigned IDs consist of the default cable ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of cables increase. The default
cable ID (Cable) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a cable branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of
a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show
the new connection after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you
For 3 Phase Cables, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For Single Phase Cables
only single phase buses will be displayed.
If a branch is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the branch to a
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown here
where Branch X is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the From and To bus IDs for your convenience.
Single Phase Cable can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as such, then the
Phase Adapter ID will be shown in the Primary or Secondary field.
11-143
AC Elements
Cable
Condition
Service
State
Connection
Cables can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase cable by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Defines the cable as a three-phase cable. This cable can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Defines the cable as a single-phase cable.
Library
Library Button
To select cables from the Cable Library, click the Library button and the Cable Library Quick Pick will
appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library type and size at the same time.
Note: After the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to the Cable Editor, the
cable size can be changed directly from the Cable Editor and the cable parameters are refreshed from the
library. Therefore, the most important action is to select the correct Cable Library type from the Cable
Library Quick Pick. When data are transferred from the Cable Library, ETAP automatically corrects the
cable reactance for the system frequency.
Link to Library
A library link is also available to use Cable Library data instead of the stored cable impedance and
dimension parameters that are displayed in the Cable Editor.
Note: Link to Library is only used at the time of execution of studies. For example, when you run a load
flow study, ETAP uses the cable library type and size as an identifier to extract data from the Cable
Library. This option is provided so that you can globally update the cable parameters by changing the
library data only.
11-144
AC Elements
Cable
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as
Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data is updated, this field
can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To
change the data type names, navigate to the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Data
Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load
priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are allowed. To
change priority names, from the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Length
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
miles, meters, and kilometers.
Note: Every cable in the system can have a different unit.
Tolerance
Enter the percent of tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to
consider +/- % tolerance in line length, effectively increasing or decreasing the impedance based on the
type of study being performed.
# Conductors / Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e. if 2-3/C cables or 6-1/C cables are used (6 conductors
total), then the number of conductors per phase is equal to two (2).
11-145
AC Elements
Cable
11.6.2 Physical Page
Dimensions
The physical properties of cables entered in this page are only used for calculating engineering data
needed for cable ampacity derating studies (U/G Raceway Systems) only.
Rdc
This is the DC resistance of the cable in micro ohm per foot/meter at 25 degrees C.
Cable OD
This is the overall cable outside diameter including the sheath, armor and/or jacket in inches or
centimeters.
Conductor OD
This is the physical outside diameter of the conductor in inches or centimeters.
Insulator t
This is the thickness of the conductor insulation in mil or mm.
Sheath t
This is the thickness of cable sheath or armor in mil or mm. This value becomes zero if the Sheath/Armor
option is set to None.
11-146
AC Elements
Cable
Jacket t
This is the thickness of outer cable jacket in mil or mm.
Weight
This is the weight of the cable in lbs/1000ft or kg/km.
Max. Tension
This is the maximum tension that the cable can withstand without damage in lbs/kcmil or kg/mm2.
Max. SW
This is the maximum Side Wall pressure in lbs/ft or kg/m.
Conductor Construction
Conductor construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for calculating the
ac to dc ratio parameters. Several available choices of conductor construction are:
ConRnd
ConRnd-Coated
ConRnd-Treated
CmpRnd-Treated
CmpSgm
CmpSgm-Coated
CmpSgm-Treated
CmpSct-Treated
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Compact RoundNone
Compact Segmental
Compact Segmental
Compact Segmental
Compact Sector None
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Treated
None Treated
Treated
Treated
None Treated
None Treated
Treated
Treated
The coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to
a drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.
Shielding
Choose shielded or not shielded.
Sheath/Shield End Connection

Choose either the open or grounded option. Grounded option implies that the sheath and shield are
grounded at more than one location.
Sheath/Armor Type
None
Lead Sheath
Aluminum Sheath
St Armor/30dg/15w
St Armor/30dg/20w
St Armor/30dg/25w
St Armor/45dg/15w
St Armor/45dg/20w
St Armor/45dg/25w
St Armor/45dg/30w
St Armor/45dg/40w
St Armor/45dg/50w
St Armor/45dg/60w
St Armor/45dg/70w
11-147
St Armor/45dg/80w
St Armor/45dg/90w
St Armor/45dg/100w
St Armor/45dg/9999w
Copper Armor
Steel Armor
Aluminum Armor
Cu Concentric Wire
Al Concentric Wire
Copper Sheath
AC Elements
Cable
Type
Definition
St Armor/30dg/15w
St Armor/45dg/50w

Note: Copper Armor, Steel Armor, Aluminum Armor, Copper Concentric Wire, and Aluminum
Concentric Wire are all assumed to have 15 wires inclined at 30 degrees (30dg/15w).
Note: Copper and Aluminum Concentric Wires are usually used for grounding and have different thermal
properties than regular wires that are taken into account in the UnderGround raceway System (UGS)
calculations.
Jacket Type
Jacket Types available:
None
Paper
PE
XLPE
EPR
SBR
Rubber
Rubber1
Rubber2
NeoPrene
PVC
FEP
FEPB
MI
MTW
PFA
PFAH
RH
RHH
RHW
SA
SIS
TA
TBS
TFE
THHN
THHW
11-148
THW
THWN
TW
UF
USE
V
XHHW
RHW2
THW2
THWN2
USE2
XHHW2
ZW
ZW2
XHH
Z
AC Elements
Cable
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R and R0)
Enter positive and zero sequence resistances at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per
conductor. This is for each conductor, not the total resistance per phase. ETAP corrects these resistances
for different studies based on the specified temperature limits. The zero sequence resistance is used only
for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactance (X and X0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence reactance levels, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor.
This is for each conductor, not the total reactance per phase. These reactance levels must be entered at
the system operating frequency specified for this data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or
Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically corrects for the system operating frequency. After this
value is entered here, ETAP will not make any adjustment to this value. The zero sequence reactance is
used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
11-149
AC Elements
Cable
Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y and Y0)

Enter positive and zero sequence susceptance levels in Siemens or Siemens per unit length, for each
conductor. If the value of Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the
charging susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the circuit. If Y=0, the cable is treated as a
simple impedance. This susceptance must be entered at the system operating frequency specified for this
data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically
corrects for the system operating frequency. After this value is entered here, ETAP will not make any
adjustment to this value. The zero sequence susceptance is used only for unbalanced fault current
calculations.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a
length should also be designated, including a unit from the list box. Units available are: feet, miles,
meters, and kilometers.
Cable Temperature
Base Temperature
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistances are entered.
Minimum and Maximum Temperature

Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero
sequence resistances (R and R0) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating
temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type. For example:
Temperature Limit
Min
Load Flow
Short-Circuit
Motor Starting
Transient Stability
Max
X
X
X
X
If this correction is not wanted, set both minimum and maximum temperature limits equal to the base
temperature. ETAP uses the following equations for temperature corrections:
R = R ( 234.5 + Tc )/( 234.5 + Tb )
R = R ( 228.1 + Tc )/( 228.1 + Tb )
Copper Conductors
Aluminum Conductors
where:
R = Resistance at base temperature Tb
R = Resistance at operating temperature Tc
Tb = Conductor base temperature in degrees C
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in degrees C
When the conductor type is not known (no cable library is selected), ETAP defaults to copper as a
conductor type.
11-150
AC Elements
Cable
11.6.4 Configuration Page (3 Phase and 1 Phase)

The Configuration page is utilized to set up cable configuration that details the cable components which
include Neutral and Protective conductors, Armor, and also auxiliary components (outside of cable)
which include Neutral, Protective, and Structure conductors.
Note: The conductors in this page not considered in Load Flow or Short Circuit based modules and are
only utilized in STAR module, Shock Protection, and protective conductor sizing features for this
release. For more information about shock protection calculation and protective conductor sizing, refer
to chapter 45. For more information about plotting the conductors in STAR, refer to the cable protection
page and chapter 17 in STAR.
The fields in configuration page are grouped inside and outside a table. The fields inside the table are
located below the following columns:
Cable
Conductor
No. of Conductors
Size
Type
R
X
Insulation
The checkboxes and buttons outside the table are located below the following columns:
Auxiliary Cable Bunched check box
Library button
Typical R, X button
Cable
The Neutral and Protective conductors can be part of the main cable that are the same size as the Phase
conductor or smaller.
Separate auxiliary conductors (neutral and protective) that are external to the main cable or structures can
also be selected.
11-151
AC Elements
Cable
The structure is only available when the cable is connected to a TT or IT earthing type system.
Main
The Main cable set contains the Phase, Neutral, Protective conductors, and Armor.
The Neutral and Protective rows grays out if one of the following conditions occur:
1. A cable is not selected from the library
2. The cable selected from the library does not have extra conductor for Neutral or Protective and there is
no Ground/Neutral conductor available.
Aux
Auxiliary section allows user to specify Neutral and Protective conductors that are external to the main
cable. If the cable is connected to a TT or IT earthing type system, user can also specify the structure
impedance.
Conductor
Phase
The values of the Phase conductor are associated with the information shown in the header at the top of
the editor. The conductors parameters can be loaded from the library by selecting the library button in
the info page or their impedance can be manually entered in the impedance page.
Main Neutral
This row is only visible for three phase cables and reflects the Neutral conductor of the main cable. If the
conductor is the same size as the Phase conductor, then it will share all its characteristics; otherwise, its R
and X values are loaded from the R (G/N) and X (G/N) from the impedance page of the cable library.
Multiple Neutral conductors can be selected under the No. of Cond. Column; for more information,
refer to the No. of cond. Section.
Main Protective
This reflects Protective conductor of the main cable. If the conductor is the same size as the Phase
conductor, then it will share all its characteristics; otherwise, its R and X values are loaded from the R
(G/N) and X (G/N) from the impedance page of the cable library. Multiple Protective conductors can be
selected under the No. of Cond. Column; for more information, refer to the No. of cond. Section.
Main Armor
This reflects the armor of the main cable which can be utilized as a protective conductor path for Shock
Protection calculation. Its R and X values can be populated manually or by using the Typical Armor Z
button. The typical Armor Z button will be displayed once the row is selected. In order to activate the
Typical Armor Z button, refer to the Typical Armor Z section.
Auxiliary (Aux) Neutral

This row is only visible for three phase cables and reflects the external Neutral conductors outside of the
main cable.
The auxiliary neutral cable parameters (Size, Type, R, and X) can be selected by clicking on either the
library button or the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the page. Multiple Neutral conductors can be
selected under the No. of Cond. Column; for more information, refer to the No. of cond. Section.
11-152
AC Elements
Cable
Auxiliary (Aux) Protective

This reflects external Protective conductor. The protective conductors parameters (Size, Type, R, and X)
can be selected by clicking on either the library button or the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the
page. Multiple Protective conductors can be selected under the No. of Cond. Column; for more
information, refer to the No. of cond. Section.
Auxiliary Structure
This can reflect the installation structure which can be used distribute fault current to ground. This field is
only visible when TT or IT earthing type is set by the source connected to the cable.
No. of Conductors
Phase
The number of conductors for the Phase conductor is calculated based on:
Phase configuration (e.g. 3 phase, 1 phase 2 Wire, 1 phase 3 Wire)
Number of conductors per cable displayed in the cable editor header(e.g. 1/C, 3/C)
Number of conductors per phase entered in the info page (e.g. 4 conductors/phase)
The calculation assumes that if:
The number of conductors in the cable (shown in cable editor header) is equal to or greater (e.g.
5/C) than the number of phases and wires (e.g. 1 phase 2 Wire which equates to 2 conductors),
then there will be excess conductors (i.e. 3 conductors) that can be utilized as Neutral or
Protective conductors inside of the main cable.
The number of conductors per cable (e.g. 1/C) is less than the number of Phases and wires (e.g. 1
phase 2 Wire); then there will not be enough excess conductors that can be utilized for phase as
well as Neutral or Protective conductors inside of the main cable. The calculation will assume the
existence of multiple cables in order to fulfill the phase configuration (two cables will be
assumed); however, the main Neutral and Protective conductor rows will be grayed out due to
lack of excess conductors.
The number of conductors per cable (e.g. 2/C) is less than the number of phases and wires (e.g. 3
phase); then there will not be enough excess conductors that can be utilized for Phase as well as
Neutral or Protective conductors inside of the main cable. The calculation will assume multiple
cables in order to fulfill the phase configuration (three cables with two cores each will be
assumed). The three phases will be distributed between the three cables and the remaining three
cores can be used as either Neutral or Protective conductors.
Main Neutral
The available number of conductors for the main Neutral conductor will be the excess conductors after
the distribution of Phase conductors. Refer to the Phase section for more information.
If the cable library provides dedicated Ground/Neutral (Protective Earth for IEC cables) conductors that
are of different size from the phase conductors, the main Neutral conductor row can utilize the conductors
that are loaded from the library.
11-153
AC Elements
Cable
Main Protective
The available number of conductors for the main Protective conductor will be the excess conductors after
the distribution of Phase conductors. Refer to the Phase section for more information.
If the cable library provides dedicated Ground/Neutral conductors that are of different size from the phase
conductors, the main Protective conductor row can utilize the conductors that are loaded from the library.
Aux Neutral
Select up to 10 auxiliary Neutral conductors.
Aux Protective
Select up to 10 auxiliary Protective conductors.
Size
Phase
The size reflects the size chosen from the library in the info page
Main Neutral
The main neutral size is either selectable or display only. It is selectable if there is a dedicated
Ground/Neutral (Protective Earth) conductor with a different size loaded from the library. It becomes
display only when there are no dedicated Ground/Neutral conductors that are of a different size that can
be loaded from the library.
Main Protective
The main protective size is either selectable or display only. It is selectable if there is a dedicated
Ground/Neutral conductor with a different size loaded from the library. It becomes display only when
there are no dedicated Ground/Neutral conductors that are of a different size that can loaded from the
library.
Aux Neutral
The auxiliary neutral conductor can have its size chosen manually from the size dropdown box, loaded
from the library using the library button available at the bottom of the page, or loaded using the Typical
R, X button at the bottom of the page. If the parameters are loaded from the library, then the phase
conductors of the library will be utilized as the Neutral conductors.
11-154
AC Elements
Cable
Aux Protective
The auxiliary protective conductor can have its size chosen manually from the size dropdown box, loaded
R, X button at the bottom of the page. If the parameters are loaded from the library, then the phase
conductors of the library will be utilized as the Protective conductors.
Type
Phase
The type reflects the conductor type chosen from the library in the info page.
Main Neutral
Main Protective
Aux Neutral
The auxiliary neutral conductor can have its type chosen manually from the type dropdown list, loaded
R, X button at the bottom of the page.
If user manually chooses a different type when the insulation displays as Library, then the R&X value
will be reset to 0.
Aux Protective
The auxiliary protective conductor can have its type chosen manually from the type dropdown list, loaded
R, X button at the bottom of the page.
If user manually chooses a different type when the insulation displays as Library, then the R&X value
will be reset to 0.
R, X
Phase
The R and X fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page and
displayed in the impedance page.
Main Neutral
The R and X fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page. These
values can be edited if the main neutral size is different from the size of the Phase conductor or can be
edited from the impedance page if the size is the same as the phase conductor.
Main Protective
The R and X fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page. These
values can be edited if the main protective size is different from the size of the phase conductor or can be
edited from the impedance page if the size is the same as the Phase conductor.
11-155
AC Elements
Cable
Armor
The Armor R and X are entered manually in ohms or ohms per unit length. Once one of those fields are
selected and the cable editor header voltage is 3.3 kV or less, the Typical Armor Z button will be
activated and typical low voltage cable Armor resistances will be loaded.
Aux Neutral
The auxiliary Neutral conductor can have the R and X values entered manually, loaded from the library
using the library button available at the bottom of the page, or loaded using the Typical R, X button at the
bottom of the page.
Aux Protective
The auxiliary Protective conductor can have the R and X values entered manually, loaded from the library
using the library button available at the bottom of the page, or loaded using the Typical R, X button at the
bottom of the page.
Structure
The Structure R and X can be entered manually in ohms or ohms per unit length. This field is only
displayed when the selected source earthing type is a TT or IT type.
Insulation
Phase
This is insulation type, also shown in the header, that is loaded from library.
Main Neutral
Main Protective
Aux Neutral
The choices shown in the insulation dropdown list will be utilized in a future release of ETAP. The
Library insulation will be displayed if the cable parameters are loaded from the library.
Aux Protective
The choices shown in the insulation dropdown list are utilized for protective conductor thermal sizing.
The Library insulation will be displayed if the cable parameters are loaded from the library.
Impedance Units
The impedance units reflects the impedance unit selected in the cable impedance page.
Size Units
The Size units reflect the impedance unit selected in the cable editor Info page which is also displayed in
the cable editor header.
No. of Conductors/Phase
This reflects how many conductors are assigned per phase and is selected from the cable editor Info page
Aux Cable Bunched

If selected, grounding/PE thermal sizing in the Sizing - GND/PE calculation considers this option.
11-156
AC Elements
Cable
Typical R, X / Typical Armor Z

If the Auxiliary Neutral, or Auxiliary Protective rows are selected, then the Typical R, X button will be
activated and the window ready to be launched.
If the Armor Row is selected and the main cable, loaded from library, is 3.3 kV or less, then the Typical
Armor Z button will appear and typical armor data will populate the armor R and X fields. If the selected
cable is above 3.3 kV, the Typical Armor Z button will not be displayed.
Library
If the Auxiliary Neutral or Auxiliary Protective rows are selected, then the Library button will be
activated and the quick pick window ready to be launched. The data selected from the quick pick will
only apply to the auxiliary row selected.
This button will not be activated for the Main Neutral, Main Protective, Armor, and Structure rows.
11.6.5 Loading Page

The Loading page provides information regarding cable loading (amp) and other parameters, which are
used in cable ampacity derating (Underground Raceway System) and cable sizing calculations.
Operating Load / Current

The operating load is specified in amps. This value is used for steady-state temperature calculation or as
the initial value of the cable load profile for the transient temperature calculation. The operating Avg.
Phase A, Phase B, and Phase C can be updated with the results from Load Flow Studies. You can do this
by checking the Update Cable Load Amp option in the Info Page of the Load Flow and Unbalanced Load
Flow Study Cases.
11-157
AC Elements
Cable
Growth Factor (GF)

The Projection Multiplying Factor (MF) must be specified in percent. This value is used to indicate
future load projection (load reduction or growth). You can select the option to use this Projection
Multiplying Factor for cable temperature calculations from the Cable Ampacity Derating Study Case.
Loading Current for Sizing

Operating Current
The operating load current specified for this cable in the Loading page will be used if this option is
selected.
Full Load Amps of Element

The continuous current rating (rated current or FLA) of the selected element will be used for sizing
requirements. The motor ID is displayed here for motor equipment cables and the FLA of the motor is
used.
User-Defined
Use this option to enter any value for the cable current.
NEC 430.6
The ampacity of the equipment cables is based on the motor ratings as determined by section 430.6 of
NEC Code. The current, in Amps, is derived based on the following:
Motor Type
DC Motor
AC Induction
AC Synchronous
AC Induction
AC Synchronous
AC Induction
AC Synchronous
Motor Nameplate HP
(or equivalent in kW)
1/4 to 200
1/6 to 10
1/6 to 10
1/2 to 200
1/2 to 200
1/2 to 500
25 to 200
Motor Rated kV
Motor Connection
0.090 to 0.550
0.115 to 0.23
0.115 to 0.23
0.115 to 2.3
0.115 to 2.3
0.115 to 2.3
0.23 to 2.3
Phase-to-Ground
Phase-to-Ground
Phase-to-Phase
Phase-to-Phase
3-Phase
3-Phase
NEC Table
Number
430.247
430.248
430.248
430.249
430.249
430.250
430.250
Harmonic
Zero Seq./Triple
Enter the zero sequence/triple harmonic content in percent of cable fundamental current.
Cf (Other Orders)
This field displays the Cf factor for other order of harmonics (excluding multiples of 3rd order harmonics).
This value is entered or calculated on the Harmonic Section of the Loading page.
The formula, from Section3 of Appendix 11of BS-7671 17th Edition Standard is used in the determination
of the Cf factor.
Spectrum
Clicking on this button brings up the Harmonic Spectrum dialog for the user to enter the harmonics
spectrum % Magnitude vs. Order. The harmonic magnitude is in percent of cable fundamental current.
11-158
AC Elements
Cable
Add/Delete
By clicking Add or Delete, user can add or delete harmonic orders to define the spectrum.
Library
User has the choice to select the harmonic spectrum from ETAP Harmonic Library by clicking on
Library.
Select
If user has previously run a harmonic load flow study, the associated harmonic spectrum can be selected
to be used by clicking on Select button.
Help
This option will guide user to the appropriate Help File section.
OK/Cancel
These options will accept or cancel the user-entered data in this window.
UnderGround Raceway (UGS)

Load Factor
The load factor is the ratio of average load to peak load in percent. Use the following equation to
calculate the load factor:
Load Factor
= 100 ( kWi x Ti )/( kWp x Tt ) %

= 100 E/( kWi x Tt ) %
where
i
kWi
Ti
= Interval of time when the load is non-zero

= Load at interval i
= Number of hours of interval i
11-159
AC Elements
kWp
Tt
Ton
Toff
E
=
=
=
=
=
Cable
Peak load
Ton + Toff
Total hours when the load is on
Total hours when the load is off
Energy (kWh) consumed by load over the interval
If the cable carries load (current) at every interval, then the equation can be simplified to the percentage
of time that the cable will be carrying the current:
Load Factor
= 100 Ton/Tt %
= 100 % (if it carries the load for 24 hours per day)
IEC 287 Method ignores the load factor. It uses 100% Load factor for the calculation of the conductor
temperature.
Sheath/Armor Current
The sheath/armor current can be specified as a percent of cable load current. This value indicates the
amount of neutral or ground current that is carried by sheath or armor, and is considered only by the
Neher-McGrath Method.
Transient Load Profile

The load profile provides up to 20 time and current entry fields for specifying the loading pattern of the
cable as a function of time.
#
1
2
3
4
Time
0.0
3.5
7.3
0.0
Current
230
560
400
0.0
(all data from this point are
ignored since time = 0.0)
In this example, the cable loading is changed from the steady-state (initial value) to 230 amperes at time
zero, to 560 amps at time 3.5 hours and finally to 400 amps after 7.3 hours. The steady-state or initial
value can either be 230 amps (value entered at the first time slot) or it can be set equal to the cable
operating load. You can set the option for the initial/steady-state value from the Cable Derating Study
Case Editor.
Time Unit
Select the time units for the load profile.
Optimization Options
These options are for ampacity and sizing calculations for the U/G raceway systems.
11-160
AC Elements
Cable
Fixed Current
If this box is selected, the cable current will remain unchanged for the ampacity calculations (Uniform
Temperature and Uniform Ampacity). Use this flag for cables that do not require ampacity optimization.
Fixed Size
If this box is selected, the cable size will remain fixed for the cable sizing calculations.
11-161
AC Elements
Cable
11.6.6 Ampacity/Capacity Page

Refer to Chapter 44 Cable Ampacity and Sizing for detailed information.
11.6.7
11.6.7 Protection Page (3 phase)

The Protection page provides options related to cable protection. It includes options for plotting the cable
thermal capability (I2t) curve on a Star View, updating short-circuit current, and entering cable protection
information. Cables do not have unlimited power handling capability and need protection to prevent
operation beyond that capability in the event of short-circuit conditions. The main cause of reduced cable
lifetime is high temperature generated by continuous overloading or uncoordinated fault protection. Cable
protection is required to protect personnel and equipment.
11-162
AC Elements
Cable
Thermal Damage Curve

The maximum current that a cable can carry for a given time period is defined by an I2t characteristic
curve. There are four standards which define this I2t characteristic: ICEA P-32-382, IEC 60949 / 60364-554, BS 7430/7454/7671, and GOST R 50571.10-96.
Initial Temperature
The initial temperature is the maximum allowable operating temperature of the conductor in the cable. It
represents the initial temperature of the cable before a fault or overload condition. The selections are
Base Temp
Operating Temp
These values are defined in the Ampacity page of the cable editor. The Base temperature is read from the
cable library, and the Operating temperature is a user-definable value. The selected temperature is
displayed in the damage curve plot table in the Initial C column.
Final Temperature
The final temperature is the maximum short-circuit temperature the insulation is capable of handling. This
value is dependent on the standard. Therefore, by selecting this value, the standard used to plot the
damage curve is also defined. The selections are:
ICEA P-32-382
IEC 60949 / 60364-5-54
BS 7430/7454/7671
GOST R 50571.10-96
The insulation type of the cable defines the maximum short-circuit temperature. The selected temperature
is displayed in the damage curve plot table in the Final C column.
Damage Curve Plot Table

The damage curve plot table displays the cables which have been defined, and the temperatures to use
when plotting each cable curve. The option to plot or not plot a damage curve is also set here.
Thermal Curve
The types of cables defined are listed here. Neutral and Protective Earth cables, if present, must first be
properly defined in the Configuration page of the cable editor in order for them to appear in this table.
Plot I2t
Check this to display the damage curve for the respective cable when it is plotted in a Star View.
Initial Conductor Temperature
The initial conductor temperature, as selected, is displayed here. This value will represent the maximum
conductor temperature when plotting the damage curve.
Final Conductor Temperature
The final conductor temperature, as selected, is displayed here. This value will represent the maximum
short-circuit temperature of the cable insulation when plotting the damage curve.
11-163
AC Elements
Cable
Number of Conductors to Plot

Select the number of conductors to plot the damage curve based on. The selections are 1, n-1, and n,
where n is the defined number of conductors per phase in the Info page of the cable editor. Typically the
damage curve is used to represent a fault on a single conductor of the cable. (IEEE Std. 242-2001)
Therefore, this value, by default, is set to 1.
Reference kV
Calculated Base kV
This kV value is automatically updated with terminal bus base kV when you Run/Update Short-Circuit
kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination Mode and at least one cable terminal bus is faulted.
This is a display only field.
Short-Circuit Current (Sym. rms)

This group allows specification of maximum and minimum short-circuit current when the terminal bus of
the cable is faulted. These short-circuit current are used for cable sizing as well as for determining the
equivalent system impedance. The short-circuit currents can also be updated automatically by running 3
Phase Run/Update Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination mode.
Calculated
Select Calculated to let ETAP update the:
11-164
AC Elements
Cable
3 phase maximum fault kA

3 phase minimum fault kA
Line to ground/earth maximum fault kA
Line to ground/earth minimum fault kA
Line to line maximum fault kA
Line to line minimum fault kA
Line to line to ground/earth maximum fault kA
Line to line to ground/earth minimum fault kA
Max. Fault kA is updated with selection of Cycle kA for standard ANSI and Max Short-Circuit Current
for standard IEC. Min. Fault kA is updated with 30 Cycle kA for standard ANSI and Min. Short-Circuit
Current for IEC. If both terminal buses of the cable are faulted the fault kA from the bus that has bigger
Max/ Fault kA will be used.
When running the 3 phase Run / Update Short Circuit kA in STAR mode, ETAP will update both Line
fault kA and ground fault kA.
User-Defined
Enter the maximum and minimum fault currents for the different fault types by selecting the UserDefined option. Once this option is selected, the different fault currents in this group become editable.
3 Phase Maximum
The 3 Phase maximum short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal
bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this field automatically when 1/2 cycle short
circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted. If both of the cable terminal buses are
faulted for one run of short circuit study, the bigger value will be displayed. All other fault currents are
based on this corresponding bus also.
3 Phase Minimum
The 3 Phase minimum short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal
bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this field automatically when 30 cycle short
circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Ground/Earth Maximum

The maximum Line to Ground short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable
terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this field automatically when 1/2 cycle
short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Ground/Earth Minimum

The minimum Line to Ground short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable
terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this field automatically when 30 cycle
Line to Line Maximum

The Line to Line maximum short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable
terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this field automatically when 1/2 cycle
11-165
AC Elements
Cable
Line to Line Minimum

The Line to Line minimum short-circuit current will be user defined or calculated in kA when cable
terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this field automatically when 30 cycle
Line to Line to Ground/Earth Maximum

The maximum Line to Line to Ground short-circuit current (3I0) user defined or calculated in kA when
cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this field automatically when 1/2
cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Line to Ground/Earth Minimum

The minimum Line to Line to Ground short-circuit current (3I0) user defined or calculated in kA when
cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP will updates field automatically when 30
cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Pin (Disable Update)

This checkbox is enabled only when the calculated option is selected. When this option is selected, the
Fault kA fields does not update when Run / Update Short Circuit kA in Star Mode is run.
Protective Device
Overload
This section is used only for BS 7671 and IEC 60364 based cable sizing. The available selections are
"None", "User-Defined" or "Device ID" option for overload protection. When the User-Defined option is
selected, the In, I2 and BS 3036 fields is enabled. When Device ID is selected, the Overload ID/Type
dropdown list becomes available Device ID selection.
In Nominal current of overload protection device in amperes.
I2 Operating current of overload protection device in amperes.
BS 3630
Check BS 3036 if the overload protection is a Fuse to BS 3036. This field is applicable only when the BS
7671 is selected as the installation standard in the Ampacity page.
ID/Type
The available overload protection devices (Fuse, Circuit Breaker, Recloser, Overload Heater and In-Line
Overload Relay) for the cable are displayed in the dropdown list. If either side of the cable does not have
a protective device, the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors,
transformer, double throw switch, source, or a load.
In and I2
Enter or display the In and I2 values for the selected Overload protection. If User-Defined is selected in
the Overload field, this field is editable and allows user to enter the values. If a protective device is
selected in the ID/Type dropdown list, these values are filled automatically.
Overcurrent
This overcurrent section is utilized for electric shock and touch voltage calculations, thermal protective
conductor sizing, and phase conductor sizing.
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", BS 7671 for overcurrent protection.
11-166
AC Elements
Cable
If User-Defined is selected, user can enter the Overcurrent Protection Time which is used in the Sizing Phase and Sizing GND/PE pages.
If Device ID is selected the Overcurrent ID/Type dropdown list becomes available for Device ID
selection.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical overcurrent protective devices from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes
available for selection. This selection only is available when BS 7671 Installation Standard is selected in
the Ampacity (Capacity) page.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overcurrent protection devices (Fuse,
Circuit Breaker, and Recloser) for the cable will be automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the
protective devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a
protective device the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors, a
transformer, a double throw switch, a source or a load.
Phase Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the highest thermal energy will be selected to
populate the Phase current field. ETAP will select from among the minimum and the maximum of the 3
phase, Line - to ground, and Line- to Line short-circuit current.
Phase Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the phase/line current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the
highest thermal energy applicable to Phase/Line current.
Ground Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the highest thermal energy will be selected to
populate the ground current field. ETAP will select from among the minimum and the maximum of the
Line - to Ground, and Line- to Line to ground short-circuit current.
Ground Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the highest
thermal energy applicable to Ground current.
BS 7671
Select an applicable BS7671 protective device for the clearing time. The clearing time will be based on
the curve points given in Appendix 3 of the standard. The protective device is assumed to be in the same
area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with a non 1-1 ratio.
Rating (A)
Select the applicable BS7671 protective device size. The clearing time will be displayed in the time
fields.
GFCI/RCD
This GFCI/RCD section is utilized for electric shock calculations in this release and not for modules such
as STAR.
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", BS 7671 for GFCI/RCD protection.
11-167
AC Elements
Cable
If User-Defined is selected, user can enter the GFCI/RCD Protection Time.

If Device ID is selected the GFCI/RCD ID/Type dropdown list becomes available for selecting a Device
ID.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical RCDs from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes available for selection. This
selection is only available when BS 7671 Installation Standard is selected in the Ampacity page. The
protective device is assumed to be in the same area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with a non
1-1 ratio.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from the dropdown list.
Trip (mA)
The trip setting will be displayed for the selected device or applicable BS7671 GFCI/RCD.
Trip (sec)
The maximum clearing time will be listed for the selected GFCI/RCD device.
11-168
AC Elements
Cable
11.6.8 Protection Page (1 phase)


Initial Temperature
Base Temp
Operating Temp
11-169
AC Elements
Cable
Final Temperature
The final temperature is the maximum short-circuit temperature the insulation is capable of handling. This
value is dependent on the standard. Therefore, by selecting this value, the standard used to plot the
ICEA P-32-382
IEC 60949 / 60364-5-54
BS 7430/7454/7671
GOST R 50571.10-96

Thermal Curve
Plot I2t

11-170
AC Elements
Cable
Reference kV
Calculated Base kV
This kV value is automatically updated with terminal bus base kV when you Run/Update Short-Circuit
kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination Mode and at least one cable terminal bus is faulted.
This is a display only field.

This group allows you to specify Line (lint to line fault) and Ground (line to ground fault) short-circuit
currents when the terminal bus of the cable is faulted. The short-circuit currents can be updated
automatically by running Run/Update 1 phase Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device
Coordination mode. Note that only Line current will be updated for this ETAP release.
Calculated
When running the Run / Update 1 phase Short Circuit kA in STAR mode, ETAP will only update the
Line fault kA.
User Defined
You may enter the fault currents for the different fault types by selecting the User-Defined option. Once
this option is selected, the different fault currents in this group become editable.
Line maximum fault in kA
Ground maximum fault kA
11-171
AC Elements
Cable
Line
If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP will update this field automatically for all cables when STAR Run
Update 1 phase short-circuit kA is run in STAR mode. Since both of the cable terminal buses are
automatically faulted in the short circuit study, the value that will be displayed will depend on the
selection in the Tools | Options (Preferences) | Cable Sizing | Update 1 Phase SC kA from Load Bus.
Ground
The Ground short-circuit current can be entered in the user-defined Ground field in the Short-Circuit
Current section. Automatic updating from short-circuit calculation will be available in a future release of
ETAP.

Fault kA fields does not update when Run / Update Short Circuit kA in Star Mode is run.
Protective Device
Overload
BS 3630
ID/Type
In and I2
Overcurrent
This overcurrent section is utilized for electric shock and touch voltage calculations, thermal protective
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", BS 7671 for overcurrent protection.
If User-Defined is selected, user can enter the Overcurrent Protection Time which is used in the Sizing Phase and Sizing GND/PE pages.
11-172
AC Elements
Cable
selection.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical overcurrent protective devices from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overcurrent protection devices (Fuse,
Circuit Breaker, and Recloser) for the cable will be automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the
protective devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a
Line Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section will be selected to populate the Line current field.
Line Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the line current in the Short-Circuit Current section.
Ground Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section will populate the ground/Earth current field.
Ground Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the current in the Short-Circuit Current section.
BS 7671
the curve points given in Appendix 3 of the standard. The protective device is assumed to be in the same
area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with a non 1-1 ratio.
Rating (A)
fields.
GFCI/RCD
as STAR.
ID.
11-173
AC Elements
Cable
selection is only available when BS 7671 Installation Standard is selected in the Ampacity page.
The protective device is assumed to be in the same area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with
a non 1-1 ratio.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from the dropdown list.
Trip (mA)
Trip (sec)
11.6.9 Sizing Phase Page

Refer to Chapter 44 Cable Ampacity and Sizing for detailed information.
11.6.10 Sizing GND/PE Page

Note: This page is for Protective Equipment (PE) conductor thermal sizing and Electric Shock
calculations. Load Flow and Short Circuit based modules do not utilize the parameters or results of this
page in this release.
Thermal Constraints
The input data required to perform PE sizing is in the Thermal Constraints section.
Ground Fault (kA)

This read only field is the value either calculated or user defined in the Short Circuit section of the
protection page
Ground Fault (s)

This read only field is the value either acquired or user defined in the Overcurrent section of the
protection page
Initial Temperature
This read only field displays the initial temperature used for thermal sizing calculation.
11-174
AC Elements
Cable
The initial temperature value for the Main Protective Equipment conductor (PE) can be set by the
selection of either the Table or Formula method.
If Table or Formula method is used for the Main PE, then the initial temperature value is acquired from
the Thermal Damage curve section from the Protection page.
If Table method is used for the Aux PE, then the initial temperature value is acquired from the applicable
standard.
If Formula method is used for the Aux PE, then the initial temperature value is acquired from the
Thermal Damage curve section from the Protection page.
Final Temperature
This read only field displays the final temperature used for thermal sizing calculation.
The final temperature value for the Main Protective Equipment conductor (PE) can be set by the selection
of either the Table or Formula method.
If Table or Formula method is used for the Main PE, then the final temperature value is acquired from
the Thermal Damage curve section from the Protection page.
If Table method is used for the Aux PE, then the final temperature value is acquired from the applicable
standard.
If Formula method is used for the Aux PE, then the final temperature value is acquired from the Thermal
Damage curve section from the Protection page.
.
Leakage Current
Enter the leakage current, if it is known, in order to size the conductor.
Factor k
Select the method for calculating the Factor k.
Thermal Required Size
11-175
AC Elements
Cable
Conductor In
This column indicates that the row belongs to the conductor either in the Main Cable or the Auxiliary
protective cable in the configuration page
Existing
For the selected row, Main or Auxiliary cable, the existing size is the size user has selected in the
configuration page.
Required
For the selected row, Main cable or Auxiliary cable, the required size is the minimum protective
conductor size calculated by ETAP based on thermal constraints using the selected standard in the
Ampacity page.
Size
Check the size check box in either the Main or Aux cable row for which to determine the minimum
required protective conductor size.
K2S2
This read only field is the calculated allowed thermal let through energy value of the cable in units of
kA2s. This value is to be compared to either the protective device manufacturers or standards let through
energy value for protective device disconnection times less than 0.1 seconds.
Update Size
After the required thermal size in the auxiliary row is calculated, this button will be activated. Once
clicked, the protective cable size in the auxiliary row of configuration page will be updated.
Electric Shock Constraints
Earthing Type
This read only field reflects the system earthing type determined by the source elements.
Distributed/Undistributed
This read only field, available for AC cables only, reflects if the ungrounded neutral is distributed or not.
Local Resistance to Ground/Earth

This is the combined resistances for all of the bus bar grounding electrodes, their bonding, and other
forms of resistance until the earth surface. This field does not include soil resistance.
11-176
AC Elements
Cable
Load Type
These are the various load types mentioned in BS7671 and IEC standards
Exclude Second Earth Fault for IT System

Checking this box will only include first fault touch voltage calculation for IT systems
EN 50122
Checking this box will utilize the EN50122 standard to determine the allowed touch voltage calculation.
The table below shows the conditions in which the touch voltages are calculated.
Standard
Earthing Type
BS7671
BS7671
IEC
IEC
BS7671
BS7671
EN 50122
Checkbox
checked
Unchecked
checked
Unchecked
checked
Unchecked
IEC
IEC
checked
Unchecked
IT-Collective
IT-Collective
BS7671
checked
BS7671
Unchecked
IEC
checked
IEC
Unchecked
IT-Individual, ITIn Groups

TN
TN
TN
TN
IT-Collective
IT-Collective
Actual voltage
Displayed?
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No (for second
fault)
Yes
No (for second
fault)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Electric Shock Results

This section contains the table of calculated Actual compared with Allowed results for the following
parameters:
First Fault Touch Voltage (IT systems)
Second Fault Touch Voltage (IT systems)
Touch Voltage (TN/TT systems)
Disconnection Time
Loop Impedance
Loop Current
This entire section is read only and is calculated automatically once all required parameters have been
entered.
Note: If the Actual value exceeds the Allowed, the value is displayed in magenta color.
11-177
AC Elements
Cable
Allowed Touch Voltage (V)

The allowed touch voltage as per the BS 7671 or IEC standard. However, If the EN50122 checkbox is
selected; then the allowed touch voltages are as per the EN 50122 standard.
Actual Touch Voltage (V)

The actual calculated touch voltage of this circuit in Volts.
Allowed Disconnection Time (s)

The allowed disconnection time, in seconds, as per the BS7671 or IEC standard
Actual Disconnection Time (s)

The actual disconnection time, in seconds, of protective devices designed to de-energize the circuit. If the
protective device is a low voltage circuit breaker tripped by an over current relay, the clearing time will
be the total of relay and breaker operating time.
Allowed Loop Current (Amps)

The minimum line to ground loop current allowed for this circuit based on the disconnection time of the
selected load type. If the protective device is a low voltage circuit breaker tripped by an over current
relay, the clearing time will be the total of relay and breaker operating time.
Actual Loop Current (Amps)

The actual calculated loop current in Amps.
Allowed Loop Impedance (ohms)

The loop impedance allowed for this circuit based on the allowed loop current.
Actual Loop Impedance (ohms)

The actual calculated loop impedance of this circuit
Report
Report Manager
Click on the report button to enter a report name and generate a report that will include Thermal Sizing
and Electric Shock Protection results for this cable. The default report name will be the same as the cable
ID.
11-178
AC Elements
Cable
Model Forms
Click this button to view and generate Model forms based on Appendix 3 of BS7671 standard.
Note: The xxx_2003 files are for MS Word 2003 users.
Standard
This read only field displays the standard selected from the Ampacity page. The standard displayed is
utilized in both Thermal and Electric Shock calculations.
11-179
AC Elements
Cable
A
branches from service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are
P
This is Enter the passive failure rate in number of failures per year f/yr per unit length. The passive
failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection
breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or
replacing the failed component will restores service. Examples of passive failures include opening
circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
11-180
AC Elements
Cable
per
Select the length unit for failure rate length unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
MTTR
Use this field to enter the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a
component outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based
on MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR) in Repair/yr.
MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P of
(MTTF = 1.0/( A+ P) in yr for unit length automatically).
FOR
Calculate and display the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability), calculated based on MTTR, A and P
(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/( A+ P)) for unit length automatically.
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
11-181
AC Elements
Cable
11.6.12 Routing Page

The Routing page provides lists of routed raceways and available raceways. The Cable ID and raceway
type are shown for both the routed and available raceways.
This is a list of raceways through which this cable is routed. When you add a raceway to this list (by
using the insert or add buttons), the cable is placed in a container attached to the raceway without being
placed in any specific conduit or location.
11-182
AC Elements
Cable
When you bring up the Graphical Editor for the underground systems, you will see the cables in a
container of cables that are assigned to this raceway but not assigned to a specific conduit. This container
is attached to the raceway and will disappear when it is empty. You must select and graphically move the
cable from the unassigned cable container to the desired location.
Available Raceways
This is a list of all existing available raceways in this project, i.e., raceways that this cable can be routed
through.
Note: Since you cannot route a cable twice through a raceway, this list does not include the raceways
listed under Routed Raceways.
Insert: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list,
i.e., insert the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Add: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list,
i.e., add the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Cut: Un-route this cable from the selected raceway.
11-183
AC Elements
Cable
User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-184
AC Elements
Cable

combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information
11-185
AC Elements
Transmission Line
11.7 Transmission Line

The properties associated with transmission lines of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
You can perform the following functions within this editor:
Calculate electrical parameters of Lines
Calculate conductor ampacity and temperature
Calculate Sag and Tension
Conductor transposition
The Transmission Line Editor includes the following twelve pages of properties:
Info
Parameter
Configuration
Grouping
Earth
Impedance
Protection
Sag and Tension
Ampacity
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.7.1 Info Page

You can use the Info page to specify the transmission line ID, From and To bus ID and kV, In/Out of
Service, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and Length.
11-186
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Line Type
The Transmission Line Editor type displays information from the transmission line header of the library
selected. It is arranged as follows:
Source
Displays the source of the transmission line data for the selected line.
Conductor Type
Displays the conductor material. The current types available are listed in the following table
Type
AAAC
AAC
AAC/TW
AACSR
ACAR
ACCC
ACCR
ACSR
ACSR/AW
ACSR/COMP
ACSR/TW
ACSS
ACSS/AW
ACSS/TW
AHC
AW
CU
CW
CWC
GTACSR
Description
All Aluminum Alloy Conductor
All Aluminum Conductor
All Aluminum Conductor / Trapwire
Aluminum Alloy Conductor Steel Reinforced
Aluminum Conductor Alloy Reinforced
Aluminum Conductor Composite Core
Aluminum Conductor Composite Reinforced
Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
Single Layer Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Clad Steel
Reinforced
Compact round Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced / Trapwire
Aluminum Conductor Steel Supported
Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Clad Steel Supported
Shaped Wire Concentric Lay Compact Aluminum
Conductor Aluminum Steel Supported
Anaconda Hollow Copper
Aluminum-Clad Steel Conductor
Copper
Copper Weld
Copper Weld Copper
Gas Type Thermal Resistant ACSR
11-187
AC Elements
Type
TACIR
TACSR
VR
Transmission Line
Description
Thermal Resistant Aluminum Conductor Invar Reinforced
Aluminum-Zirconium Alloy Conductor, Steel Reinforced
Wind Induced Motion Resistant Conductor
Base Temp.1 for R

Shows the Base Rated Temperature 1 for the Resistance value in degrees Celsius. This temperature plus
the rated temperature 2 are used to calculate the resistance variation for the line at various temperatures.
Base Temp.1 for R

Shows the Base Rated Temperature 2 for the Resistance value in degrees Celsius. This temperature plus
the rated temperature 1 are used to calculate the resistance variation for the line at various temperatures.
Frequency
Line rated frequency in Hz. This value indicates the frequency at which reactance, GMR, and other
parameters are specified by the manufacturer or standard. If the frequency of the system is different,
ETAP will automatically adjust these parameters to the system frequency.
Code
Shows the code name given to a transmission line by the data source. For most available lines, their code
(for example, bird, flower, city, or sport) has been entered in this field. In the case of T&D book, since
they do not use the bird names, size-strands has been used for the code.
Size
Shows the line size in AWG, kcmil, or mm2.
Con. # of Strands
The number of strands the main conductor has.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to
each transmission line. The assigned IDs consist of the default line ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of lines increase. The default line ID (Line) can be changed
from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a transmission line are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
For 3 Phase Transmission Lines, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For Single
Transmission Lines only single-phase buses will be displayed.
11-188
AC Elements
Transmission Line
new bus from the editors will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
Single Phase Transmission lines can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as
such, then the Phase Adapter ID will show in the Primary or Secondary field.
Next to the From and To bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses for your convenience.
Condition
Service
State
11-189
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Connection
Transmission Lines can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase lines by selecting any of the following
selections:
3 Phase
Define the line as a three-phase line. This line can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Define the line as a single-phase line.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Units
Length
Enter the length of the transmission line, in the units specified in the Unit field.
Unit
Select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
11-190
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Tolerance
Enter the percent tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to
11.7.2 Parameter Page

On the Parameter page you can select the phase and ground conductors from the library or enter the
conductor properties.
Phase Conductor
Conductor Type
Select the main conductor material (Copper or Aluminum).
R T1
This is the phase conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile or ohms per
kilometer.
R T2
This is the phase conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile or ohms per
kilometer.
11-191
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per mile at 1ft spacing.
Outside Diameter
Specify conductor outside diameter in inches or cm. ETAP calculates the equivalent diameter of the
bundled conductors (d) for bundled conductors by using following the formulas:
Two bundled conductors:
d = d * S
Three bundled conductors:
d = 3 d * S * S
Four bundled conductors:
d = 4 d *S *S * 2 *S
Where d is a single conductor diameter in inches and S is the separation between conductors in inches or
cm.
GMR
Specify conductor geometric mean radius (GMR) in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius. When Xa is entered and GMR has not been entered, the program will calculate GMR
using the following formula:
GMR GMR * S
11-192
AC Elements
Transmission Line
GMR = 3 GMR * S * S
GMR = 4 GMR * S * S * 2 * S
Where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled conductors in inches or
cm.
Xa
Enter the conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per mile or kilometer.
Conductor Lib
Click the Conductor Lib button to access the Library Quick Pick Transmission Line (Phase Conductor)
dialog box, which allows you to select line data from the library.
Ground Wire
Conductor Type
Select the main conductor material (Aluminum, Copper, or Steel).
R T1
Enter the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.
R T2
Enter the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.
Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per mile at 1ft spacing.
Outside Diameter
Specify conductor outside diameter in inches or cm. For bundled conductors, ETAP calculates the
equivalent diameter of the bundled conductors (d) using following the formulas:
11-193
AC Elements
Transmission Line
d = d * S
d = 3 d * S * S
d = 4 d *S *S * 2 *S
Where d is a single conductor diameter in inches and S is the separation between conductors in inches or
cm.
GMR
Specify conductor geometric mean radius (GMR) in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius. When Xa is entered and GMR has not been entered, the program will calculate using
the following formula:
GMR =
GMR = 3 GMR * S * S
11-194
RMR * S
AC Elements
Transmission Line
GMR = 4 GMR * S * S * 2 * S
Where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled conductors in inches or
cm.
Xa
Conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per mile or kilometer.
Ground Wire Lib

Click the Ground Wire Lib button to access the Library Quick Pick Transmission Line (Ground Wire)
dialog box, which allows you to select line data from the library.
11.7.3 Configuration Page
11-195
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Configuration Type
Several types of physical configurations are available for transmission lines to accommodate most setups.
Available options for transmission line placement are:
Horizontal
Vertical
Triangular
Parallel Vertical
Parallel Horizontal
General*
The general configuration allows you to specify the physical location of the conductors with respect to a
reference point. The reference point is located at the same level as the base of the tower or pole. This
defines the height of the lines with respect to the soil level. For example:
For this configuration, the following parameters would be

used:
The spacing is calculated automatically by ETAP. The ground wires are also entered with respect to the
reference point.
GMD
The geometric mean diameter (GMD) is calculated based on the spacing and configuration type. The
value is in feet or meters.
Phase
Height
Enter the height (in feet or meters) of the transmission line from the earth to the highest conductor in the
system.
Spacing
Specify the distance between the phase conductors as three pairs of conductors (AB, BC, and CA) in feet
or meters. This provides the ability to configure the wires to almost any shape. For parallel circuits, you
need to specify the distance between the two circuits. ETAP treats the triangular and parallel
configurations symmetrically (that is, AB = BC and CA<(AB+BC)).
11-196
AC Elements
Transmission Line
This field is dimmed when General is selected for the Configuration Type. In this case, the fields are
calculated based on the X,Y coordinates of the conductors.
Layout
Layout is a graphical representation of the location of the conductors and ground wires. The image is not
to scale and it does not update with changes in spacing.
d12
This is the distance between the closest conductors from each parallel circuit. It is used to define the
separation between the two circuits as indicated in the image below.
Ground Wires
GG
The distance between ground wires in feet or meters. This field is active if you have more than one
ground wire.
CG
The distance between the ground wires and a phase conductor closest to the ground wire in feet or meters.
The value of CG can be negative if ground wires are located under the phase conductors.
11-197
AC Elements
Transmission Line
G1 and G2
These fields are available only when you have selected General under the Configuration Type. Check G1
if you have at least one ground wire in the system. Then specify the X, Y coordinate of this wire with
respect to the reference. Check G2 if you have two ground wires in the system.
Conductors
Transposed
Select his option if the 3-phase transmission line is fully transposed. This option affects the calculation of
transmission line impedance values.
Separation
Enter the separation between the adjacent bundled conductors of the same phase in inches or centimeters.
Conductors/phase
You can specify up to four bundled conductors.
11.7.4 Grouping Page

The Grouping page of the Transmission Line Editor allows you to take the effect of mutual coupling into
account.
11-198
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Group
Name
This is the mutual coupling group name. Click in this field to select a coupling group from the drop-down
list. If you have not created a coupling group, you can create one by clicking on the Mutual Coupling
Group button located below the Tower area.
Length (M)
This is the length of the section in which the lines in the group are coupled. This value is defined in the
Mutual Coupling Group Editor.
X (ft)
Enter the horizontal distance between the reference point of this line and the reference point of the
coupling group. You can set the X value for one of the lines to make it the reference point. Then set the
X value for the rest of the lines with reference to the first line.
Y (ft)
Enter the vertical distance between the reference point of this line and the reference point of the coupling
group. You can take the line that has its pole or tower at the lowest elevation and set the Y of the line
equal to 0. Then for each of the rest of the lines, set Y equal to the difference in elevation between the
line and the first line.
Click this button to switch the start bus and end bus values. This indicates the starting and ending side of
all lines in the coupling group.
Start Bus
This is the bus on the side where the line coupling starts. The starting and ending buses of a line are used
to determine the terminal buses that are on the same side for all the coupled lines in the group. The start
bus affects the calculation of the voltage drops of coupled lines.
End Bus
This is the bus on the side where the line coupling ends.
Tower
Ground Resistance
Specify the value of the grounding resistance through the tower in ohms.
11-199
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Segmented Earth Wires

Select this option to make the earth wires segmented.
Average Distance
Specify the average distance between each tower in the unit specified in the Unit field.
Unit
Select the units in which the average distance is specified.
Mutual Coupling Group Button

Use this button to access the Mutual Coupling Group Editor. You can define the coupling groups here
and then select it on the group name filed above.
Note: You can also access the Mutual Coupling Group Editor from the Project Menu.
11.7.5 Earth Page

This page allows you to model the earth layers. This information is used to calculate the grounding
resistance of the line.
Earth Layers
This group allows you to specify up to 3 layers of ground and the properties of each layer.
11-200
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Number of Earth Layers

Select the number of earth layers you want to model. ETAP will display a row to enter properties for
each layer.
P (ohms-m)
Enter the earth resistivity for each layer in ohm-meters (ohms-m).
e
Enter the earth permittivity of each layer.
Enter the earth permeability of each layer.
Depth
Enter the depth of each layer in feet/meters.
11-201
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Impedance (per phase)

Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Resistances (R-T1,R-T2)
ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence resistances in ohms or ohms per unit
length, per phase, and at base temperature T1 and T2, according to the specified configuration and
grounding information of a transmission line. ETAP corrects these resistances for different studies based
on the specified temperature limits in the Operating Temperatures group. You can also specify positive
and zero sequence resistances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, and at base temperatures T1
and T2 specified for this data file.
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Reactances (X)

ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence reactances in ohms or ohms per unit
length, per phase, according to the specified configuration, grounding, and grouping information of a
transmission line. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP corrects
these reactances for the system operating frequency. The user can also specify positive and zero sequence
reactances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, at the system operating frequency specified for this
data file. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y)

ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence susceptances in microsiemens or
microsiemens per unit length, per phase, according to the specified configuration and grounding
information of a transmission line. If the value is Y>0, the transmission line is treated as a model, with
one half (1/2) of the charging susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the line. If Y=0, the
transmission line is treated as an external impedance. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or
Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP corrects these susceptances for the system operating frequency. The user
can also specify positive and zero sequence susceptances in microsiemens or microsiemens per unit
length, per phase, at the system operating frequency specified for this data file. The zero sequence
susceptance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Calculated
Select the Calculated option if you want ETAP to calculate the impedance of the line according to the
parameters, configuration, grounding, and grouping.
User Defined
Select the User-Defined option if you want to enter the impedance values.
Unit
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. Select a unit for unit length from the list box.
Units available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers. If you select ohms, the impedances calculated or
entered represent the total impedance of the line. ETAP uses ohms per mile as the unit of impedance
calculation.
R, X, Y Matrices
Select Phase Domain or Sequence Domain and click the buttons under this group to display the
Resistance (R), Reactance (X), or the Susceptance (Y) sequence matrixes.
11-202
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Library Temperatures
Base T1 and Base T2
If you have selected the phase conductors from the library, ETAP displays the temperatures (in degrees
Celsius) at which the resistance values where entered in the library. These temperatures allow ETAP to
determine the impedance variation versus temperature.
If you have selected to specify the impedance, then select or enter the temperatures (in degrees Celsius) at
which you have entered the resistances upstream in the Impedance (per phase) group.
Operating Temperatures
Minimum and Maximum
Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero
sequence resistances (R and R0) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating
temperature and the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type.
For example:
Temperature Limit Used by Some Modules
Min.
Load Flow
Max.
X
Short-Circuit
Motor Starting
Dynamic Stability
temperature. ETAP uses the Base T1 and Base T2 temperatures to calculate the impedance variation of
the line.
If R-T1 and R-T2 entered on the Parameters page are equal, it indicates that the line resistance does not
vary as conductor temperature fluctuates. In this case, the calculation will use a constant resistance at the
base temperature.
11-203
AC Elements
Transmission Line

This page contains options to plot transmission line thermal capability curve on a Star View.
Thermal Capability
Transmission line capability curve is an I2t characteristic curve, which depends on the following
parameters:
Conductor area
Number of conductors/phase
The thermal capability curve is always drawn between t = 1 to t = 10 seconds.
Plot Phase Conductor I2t on TCC

Click to plot conductor I2t on Star View. This option will plot or hide phase conductor thermal capability
curve from the Star View. This checkbox is only active when a phase conductor is selected from the
library.
11-204
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Plot Ground Wire I2t on TCC

Click to plot wire I2t on Star View. This option will plot or hide ground wire thermal capability curve
from the Star View. This checkbox is only active when a ground conductor is selected from the library.
11.7.8 Sag and Tension

It is important to perform a sag and tension calculation for a transmission line to ensure an adequate
operating condition for the line. If the tension applied on the line is beyond its tension limit, the line
conductor will be damaged, which will in turn reduce line capacity and decrease the life span of the line.
If the sag is too great, this may cause a short-circuit between the line and objects below it or a shortcircuit between lines in extremely windy conditions.
ETAP calculates the sag and tension of the line with a series of suspension spans based on the Ruling
Span Method on this page. It gives line sag and tension for the specified operating conditions, including
temperature, wind speed, and ice on the line and is based on the sag and tension under initial conditions
(called Known Conditions in the editor). The initial conditions may be at no load conditions or some
other operating conditions at which line sag or tension can be measured. The sag and tension to be
calculated should be for the worst operating conditions, such as in strong wind conditions and lines
covered with thick ice, etc.
The Ruling Span Method represents a series of suspension spans between two dead-end structures by a
level dead-end span. The level dead-end span, called ruling span, gives the same change in tension from
loading, temperature, and other operating conditions as that of the actual line. The method calculates sags
for each suspended section of the line. But it assumes that the tension of all the suspended sections is the
same as that of the ruling span.
11-205
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Line Section
You can specify the operating temperature and line sections of suspended spans in this group. ETAP
calculates the length of the ruling span, tension of the ruling span, and sags for each suspended section.
Same Tower Height

Select this option if the towers are at the same level. This option will allow you to calculate the Sag at the
Spans entered in the table below. If this option is not checked, ETAP will calculate the Sag and Tension
as seen from each tower.
11-206
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Op Temp.
Enter the operating temperature in degrees Celsius or check to use and display the operating temperature.
The operating temperature is calculated on the Ampacity page corresponding to the operating current. To
obtain more conservative tension and sag results, a lower operating temperature should be used.
Horiz. Tension
The calculated line horizontal tension is displayed in this field in lbs/kN.
Ruling Span
The calculated length of the ruling span in ft./m is displayed in this field. This filed is displayed when
Same Tower Height has been selected.
Span
Enter the individual span of suspended sections of the line in ft. or meters.
Height Diff
Enter the height difference between towers in feet or meters.
11-207
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Span Vs Sag Table

Span (Ft)
Enter the individual span of suspended sections of the line in ft. or meters in this column.
Sag
This field displays the calculated sag in ft. or meters for each suspended section of the line in this column,
Low Tower and High Tower Tension and Sag

These fields display the Sag and Tension seen from the Lower Tower and from the High Tower .when the
Same Tower Height option is not selected.
Loaded Conditions
This group includes operating parameters under loaded conditions that affect the line tension and sag
calculation. The parameters should be entered so as to yield more conservative results, such as higher
wind pressure and thicker ice on the line, etc.
Weight
Enter the conductor weight in lb/ft. or N/m. If you have selected the conductor from the library, the
information from the library automatically updates this field.
k Factor
Enter the constant to be added from NESC table 251-1 under the loaded conditions in lb/ft. or N/m.
Ice
Enter the ice thickness under the loaded conditions in cm/in.
Wind
Enter the NESC horizontal wind force requirement in lb/sq. ft. or N/sq. m under the loaded conditions in
cm/in.
Elongation Coefficient
Enter the coefficient of conductor elongation in 10-6/degrees C. Refer to the table below for nominal or
minimum properties of conductor wire materials. This table can be found in Overhead Conductor Manual
2nd Edition page 1.4.
Property
Elongation
Coefficient
106 per C
Intl.
Annealed
Copper
Standard
Commercial
Hard-Drawn
Copper
Wire
Standard
1350-H19
Aluminum
Wire
Standard
1350-0
Aluminum
Wire
16.9
16.9
23.0
23.0
11-208
Standard
Galvanized Aluminum
6201-T81 Steel Core Clad Steel
Aluminum Wire
Core Wire
Wire
23.0
11.5
13.0
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Al/Cu Strands
Enter the number and diameter of the conductor (Copper or Aluminum) strands. Diameter is specified in
inches or centimeters. If you have selected the conductor from the library, the information from the
library automatically updates this field.
Steel Strands
Enter the number and diameter of the reinforcement (steel or composite) strands. Diameter is specified in
inches or centimeters. If you have selected the ground wire from the library, the information from the
library automatically updates this field.
Modulus of Elasticity
Enter the modulus of elasticity for Aluminum / Copper or Steel in 106 psi if using English units or Mpa in
metric units. Refer to the table below for nominal or minimum properties of conductor wire materials.
This table can be found in Overhead Conductor Manual 2nd Edition page 1.4.
Property
Modulus
of
Elasticity
106 psi
106 Pascal
Intl.
Annealed
Copper
Standard
Commercial
Hard-Drawn
Copper
Wire
Standard
1350-H19
Aluminum
Wire
Standard
1350-0
Aluminum
Wire
17
117,000
17
117,000
10
69,000
10
69,000
Standard
Galvanized
Aluminum
6201-T81 Steel Core Clad Steel
Aluminum Wire
Core Wire
Wire
10
69,000
29
200,000
23.5
162,000
Known Conditions
In this group you enter the initial conditions under which line tension or sag value can be provided by
measurement or previous knowledge.
Ice
Enter the ice thickness on the line under the known conditions in cm or inches.
Wind
Enter the known NESC horizontal wind force requirement under the known conditions in lb/sq. ft. or
N/sq. m
k Factor
Enter the known constant to be added from NESC table 251-1 under the known conditions in lb/ft. or N/m
Temperature
Enter the known operating temperature in degrees Celsius.
Tension or Sag
Select to enter the known tension or sag. ETAP will calculate and display the other parameter. These
two values are based on the ruling span of the line.
11-209
AC Elements
Transmission Line
11.7.9 Ampacity Page

ETAP determines the current-temperature relationship for transmission lines in this page. The calculation
is based on IEEE Standard 738-1993, IEEE Standard for Calculating the Current-Temperature
Relationship of Bare Overhead Conductors. Conductor surface temperatures are a function of:
Conductor material
Conductor OD
Conductor surface conditions
Ambient weather conditions
Conductor electrical current
Based on the steady-state heat balance equation of a bear overhead conductor, the conductor current and
temperature relationship can be given as the following equation:
I=
qc + qr q s
R(Tc )
Where I is conductor current, qc is the convected heat loss, qr is the radiated heat loss, qs is the heat gain
from the sun, and R is the conductor AC resistance at conductor temperature Tc.
For a bare stranded conductor, if the conductor temperature (Tc) and the steady state weather parameters
are known, the heat losses due to convection and radiation, solar heat gain, and conductor resistance can
be calculated. While the calculation given in IEEE Std 738-1993 can be performed for any conductor
temperature and any weather condition, a maximum allowable conductor temperature and conservative
weather conditions are often used to calculate steady state thermal rating for the conductor.
ETAP calculates the operating temperature corresponding to the user entered operation current for the
specified installation and environment conditions, so that you can determine the maximum operating
temperature for given transmission line loading conditions. It also calculates the derated ampacity for the
conductor temperature limit you enter, so that you can determine the maximum loading current for your
transmission lines.
11-210
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Wind
Speed
Speed is wind velocity in ft./s. Conservative wind velocity is considered around 2 ft./s. Most wind speeds
obtained from the weather bureau records are often inaccurate, since most of the data has been recorded
by standard cup-type anemometer that has significant starting inertia. Therefore, readings at low wind
speeds are questionable.
Direction
Direction is defined as the direction of the movement of air relative to the line axis. The wind direction
and the line axis are assumed to be in a plane parallel to the earth.
Atmosphere
Ta
This shows the ambient temperature around the conductor in degrees Celsius.
Condition
Select the condition of atmosphere. The two options are Clear and Industrial. The atmosphere condition
affects the solar heat gain.
Sun Time
Local sun time used to calculate total solar heat gain. At different values of local sun time, the altitude
and azimuth of the sun will be different and yield a different solar heat gain.
11-211
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Installation
In this group, you enter parameters for the installation of the transmission line.
Elevation
Elevation of conductor above sea level in ft./meter. This value is used to determine air density for
calculating convection heat loss. Furthermore, height of conductors above ground is significant in terms
of wind shielding. High voltage lines normally have greater ground clearance and may be less shielded by
trees and terrain than low voltage lines. Select the highest altitude that is applicable at the location of the
line be selected, because this will give the most conservative results.
Azimuth
This represents Azimuth of line in degrees, measured clockwise from the Northern direction to the line
axis.
North Latitude
This represents North latitude of line location in degrees.
Solar Absorptivity
Solar absorptivity is typically 0.23 to 0.91, depending on the age of the line. The exact rate of increase
depends on the level of atmospheric pollution and the lines operating voltage. Absorptivity is usually
higher than emissivity.
Emissivity
Emissivity is typically 0.23 to 0.91, depending on the age of the line. The exact rate of increase depends
on the level of atmospheric pollution and the lines operating voltage. Emissivity is usually lower than
absorptivity.
Ampacity
This group displays conductor ampacity and temperature calculation results, as well as ampacity and
temperature values from the transmission line conductor library.
Lib Ta
This field displays the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius from the conductor library.
Base Ampacity
This field displays the conductor base ampacity in amperes from the conductor library. This ampacity
value is corresponding to the ambient and conductor temperature values from the conductor library.
Operating Ampacity
Enter the conductor operating current in amperes and ETAP will calculate the corresponding conductor
temperature, which is displayed in the Operating Conductor Temp. field.
Derated Ampacity
For the user entered Tc value, ETAP calculates the corresponding conductor ampacity and displays the
result in this field.
Lib Conductor Temp.

This field displays the conductor temperature limit in degrees Celsius from the conductor library.
11-212
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Top Conductor Temp.

This field displays the calculated operating temperature in degrees Celsius.
Tc Conductor Temp.
Enter the maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius.
conductor ampacity and displays the result in the Derated Ampacity field.
ETAP calculates the derated
Allowable Ampacity
This is the maximum allowable ampacity of the line. It is used in the load flow output reports to indicate
the percent of line overloading. This value is also used as a base for the line flow constraint in the
optimal power flow studies.
ETAP provides options for selecting the maximum allowable current:
Derated
Select this option to make the derated ampacity the

maximum allowable current for this line.
User-Defined
Select this option to enter the maximum allowable

current for this line
Note: the conductor Temperature Tc is calculated given the allowable ampacity.
11-213
AC Elements
Transmission Line
A
branches from service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are
P
failed component will restores service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and
Per
Select a length unit from the list box for the failure rate. The units of length available are: feet, miles,
11-214
AC Elements
Transmission Line
Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year. It is calculated automatically
based on MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR) in repair/yr automatically.
MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years. It is calculated automatically based on A and
P of MTTF = 1.0/( A+ P) in yr for unit length automatically.
FOR
Calculate and display the forced outage rate (unavailability). It is automatically calculated based on
MTTR, A and P (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/( A+ P)) for unit length.
MTTR
The MTTR (Mean Time To Repair) in hours is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
11-215
AC Elements
Transmission Line
User-Defined Info




enter any e additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
11-216
AC Elements
Transmission Line
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-217
AC Elements
Transmission Line
11.7.12 Comments Page

11-218
AC Elements
Reactor
11.8 Reactor
The properties associated with current-limiting reactors of the electrical distribution systems can be
entered in this editor.
The Reactor Editor contains the following five pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.8.1 Info Page
11-219
AC Elements
Reactor
Info
ID
This allows the user to enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each current-limiting reactor. The assigned IDs consist of the
default reactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of reactors
increase. The default reactor ID (X) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a reactor branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal
of a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect
or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to
show the new connection after you click OK.
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
For 3 Phase Reactors, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For single-phase
Reactors only single-phase buses will be displayed.
A single-phase reactor can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Reactor is connected as such, then
the Phase Adapter ID is displayed in the Primary or Secondary field.
11-220
AC Elements
Reactor
Condition
Service
State
Connection
Reactors can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Click the button to define the reactor as a 3 Phase. This reactor can be connected only to 3 phase buses.
1 Phase
Click the button to define the reactor as single-phase.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
11-221
AC Elements
Reactor
Priority
Lock / Unlock
condition information (service & state) even though the element properties are locked
11.8.2 Rating Page
Rating
Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the current-limiting reactor in amperes.
This value is also used as a base for the reactor flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the current-limiting reactor in kV.
11-222
AC Elements
Reactor
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedance (Z and Z0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence impedance in ohms. The zero sequence impedance is used only for
unbalanced fault current calculations. ETAP will make no adjustments to this value other than tolerance
correction.
Positive and Zero Sequence X/R

Enter the positive and zero sequence X/R of the reactor. This value is used for calculating the resistance
and reactance of the current-limiting reactor.
Typical X/R Button

Use typical X/R.
Tolerance
This is the tolerance of the nominal value of the positive and zero sequence reactance, in percent. This
value should be zero for an existing reactor with a known reactance. For a new reactor with a design
impedance value, this should be the tolerance range for the reactance specified by the manufacturer.
ETAP will automatically select the positive or negative tolerance value, which will result in the most
conservative solution. A negative value is used for short-circuit studies and a positive value for all other
studies.
11-223
AC Elements
Reactor
A
branches from service, after the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are
P
breakers. Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated
with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore
component restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
A+ P)).
FOR
It is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/( A+ P)).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
11-224
AC Elements
Reactor
rP
Library
Library Button
Source
This displays the Source Name of the library data selected.
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected.
Class
11.8.4 Remarks Page
11-225
AC Elements
Reactor
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of any additional data associated with this component. The names of
the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu
bar.




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
11-226
AC Elements
Reactor
Purchase Date

11-227
AC Elements
Impedance
11.9 Impedance
You can enter the properties associated with impedances of your electrical distribution system in this
editor. Impedance branches are used to specify circuit elements in per unit values. Impedance branches
can be used to represent lines and current-limiting reactors.
The Impedance Editor contains following five pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Reliability
Comment
Remarks
11.9.1 Info Page
11-228
AC Elements
Impedance
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters in this field.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch. The assigned IDs consist of the
default impedance ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
impedances increase. The default impedance ID (Z) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
bar or from the Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an impedance branch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
Connection
Select the connection type of the impedance.
3 Phase
Select to setup impedance as three-phase.
1 Phase
Select to setup impedance as single-phase.
11-229
AC Elements
Impedance
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
11-230
AC Elements
Impedance
11.9.2 Rating Page
Balanced Model
If Balanced is selected in the Model
group, the Impedance and Units
groups are displayed.
11-231
AC Elements
Impedance
Unbalanced Model
If Unbalanced is selected in the Model
group, the editor displays the R, X, Y,
and Units groups.
Model
Balanced
Select this option to model the impedance as balanced; in other words, the impedance will be equal for all
three phases.
Unbalanced
Select this option to model the impedance as unbalanced; in other words, the impedance at each phase is
different. Selecting this option allows you to express the impedance of the branch in either phase or
sequence domain. These options are available in the Data Format group.
Balanced Model
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R and R0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence resistances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified
base MVA or in ohms. The zero sequence resistance is used only for unbalanced fault current
calculations. Note: when these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected
buses as the base; however, this voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when
needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally. ETAP uses
the transformer turn ratios for determining the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics,
motor starting, and transient stability analyses.
11-232
AC Elements
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X and X0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence reactances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified
base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations. Note:
when these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected buses as the base,
however, this voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when needed, convert
these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally. ETAP uses the transformer
turns ratios to determine the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics, motor starting, and
transient stability analyses.
Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptance (Y and Y0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence charging (capacitive) susceptances as a percentage of the circuit
element on the specified base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault
current calculations. If Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the charging
susceptance connected to neutral at the end of the circuit. If Y=0, the circuit element is treated as a
simple impedance. These susceptances must be entered at the system operating frequency, which is
specified for this data file.
Units
Percent/Ohms and Bank kV/MVA
This function toggles between percent and ohmic units for impedance values. Upon selection of the
percent unit, the impedance values must be entered in a percent value with the base kV and MVA as
specified in this editor. If ohmic unit is selected, resistance, reactance, and susceptance must be entered
in actual ohms for the impedance branch.
Unbalanced Model
Data Format
Use this area of the rating page to enter the resistance, reactance, and susceptance data in the phase
domain or sequence domain. Depending on your selection, the R, X, and Y groups are updated so you
can enter the values in either domain.
Note: If you have already specified the R, X, and Y values in either domain, switching the option will
recalculate the impedances entered to the domain specified.
11-233
AC Elements
Impedance
R, X, and Y
Enter the phase or sequence matrix R (resistance), X (reactance), and Y (susceptance) values. ETAP
Unbalanced Load Flow and Short-Circuit Modules will use these values for calculations.
Units
Percent/Ohms and Base kV/MVA
This function toggles between percent and ohmic units for impedance values. Upon selection of the
percent unit, the impedance values must be entered in a percent value with the base kV and MVA as
specified in this editor. If ohmic unit is selected, resistance, reactance, and susceptance matrix values
must be entered in actual ohms for the impedance branch.
11-234
AC Elements
Impedance
A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads
to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed
component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be
restored to service only after repair or replacement.
P
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year.
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
11-235
AC Elements
Impedance
MTTF
A+ P)).
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(A+ P)).
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected.
Class
11-236
AC Elements
Impedance
11.9.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of additional data associated with this component. The names of the




11-237
AC Elements
Impedance
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-238
AC Elements
Impedance

11-239
AC Elements
Power Grid
11.10 Power Grid

Enter properties associated with power grids (utility systems) in this editor. A power grid is represented
with its Thevenin equivalent, a constant voltage source behind a short-circuit impedance. The default
mode of operating for a power grid is swing type.
The Power Grid Editor includes the following eight pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Short Circuit
Harmonic
Reliability
Energy Price
Remarks
Comment
11.10.1 Info Page

The Info page allows you to specify the utility ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name
and Description, and the power grid Type.
11-240
AC Elements
Power Grid
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each power grid. The assigned IDs consist of the default
power grid ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of power grids
increase. The default power grid ID (U) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the power grid. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a power grid to a bus, select a bus
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the power grid resides, i.e., you
If a power grid is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the power
grid to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next to the bus ID for your convenience.
Connection
The phase connection for the power grid can be defined by selecting 3 Phase or 1 Phase (AN). The default
connection is 3 Phase.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the power grid to any device. Once the power
grid is connected to a device, the phase connection selections will be grayed out. To change the
connection type, you need to disconnect the power grid from all devices.
3 Phase
Select to define the power grid as a three-phase source.
11-241
AC Elements
Power Grid
1 Phase
Select this to define the power grid as single-phase source. Only single-phase devices can be connected
to this source. Note that the connection available is Phase A.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
11-242
AC Elements
Power Grid
Lock / Unlock
Mode
The power grid mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor for your reference.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing power grid will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the
voltage magnitude and angle of the power grid terminals will remain at the specified operating values.
For motor acceleration and transient stability studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine
initial conditions. For the initial load flow, a swing power grid is represented as an infinite source. At
time 0+, the power grid is modeled as a voltage source behind its short-circuit impedance.
For transient stability studies, one of the swing machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the
reference machine for the entire system.
There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any
isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple swing machines connected to any bus
in the system.
Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line
diagram and will be included in for studies. Also, the rated voltage (kV) of a swing machine is used as
the base kV of the connected bus. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then calculated using
transformer turn ratios. For transient stability studies, a swing power grid becomes the reference machine
for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of the power grid is set to zero, and the voltage
angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this reference machine.
Voltage Control
A power grid can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the power grid
will adjust its Mvar output to control the voltage. Therefore, the terminal voltage magnitude, operating
real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and Min Q)
must be entered for voltage control power grids. A voltage control power grid means that the power grid
is base loaded (fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) controlling the terminal voltage
to a constant value. During load flow studies, if the calculated Mvar falls outside the Mvar capability
limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the value of the Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the power grid
mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
Using this option you can specify the amount of fixed MW and Mvar generation in the Rating page of the
Power Grid Editor. An Mvar control power grid means that the power grid is base loaded (fixed MW)
with a fixed Mvar generation (no AVR action).
PF Control
Setting the power grid in Power Factor (PF) Control allows you to specify the MW output as a fixed value
on the Rating page. The Power Factor is also specified, ETAP calculates the out Mvar of the grid into the
system.
11-243
AC Elements
Power Grid
11.10.2 Rating Page
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the power grid in kilovolts (kV). This entry is used by ETAP to convert the
utility short-circuit MVA to percent short-circuit. This value is also used as the power grid base kV.
Base voltages are calculated by ETAP beginning with the swing systems (swing power grids and/or swing
generators) and continuing for the rest of the system, using the rated kV of the transformer windings.
This group is used to assign the different power settings to each of the ten generation categories for this
power grid.. Each grid can be set to have a different operating power level for each generation category.
Depending on the operation mode, some of the values become editable as follows:
Swing Mode: %V and angle
Voltage Control Mode: %V and MW
Mvar Control: MW and Mvar
Power Factor Control: MW and PF
Note: You can select any of the generation categories from the load flow settings in the Study Cases such
as load flow, motor starting, transient stability, and others.
11-244
AC Elements
Power Grid
Gen. Cat.
This shows the names of the generation categories. To modify these names, from the Project menu, point
at Settings and then select Generation Categories. Modify the names in the Generation Category dialog
box.
% V (Voltage Magnitude)
Enter the magnitude of the power grid voltage as a percentage of the power grid nominal kV. This %
operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for swing and voltage control modes. This value
is used as an initial operating voltage for Mvar control power grids.
Vangle (Voltage Angle)

Enter the angle of the power grid voltage in degrees. This value is used as a reference angle for power
grids in swing mode. This value is used as an initial operating voltage angle for Mvar control power grids.
MW/kW
Enter the megawatt/kilowatt generation (real power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided
for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled power grids. This value will be held fixed for load flow
solutions.
Mvar/kvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided for
Mvar controlled power grid types only. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
%PF
This is the power factor setting of the power grid. This column is editable for PF controlled grid types
only. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
QMax and QMin

These entries specify the maximum and minimum limits for reactive power generation in Mvar/kvar.
These limits are required for voltage regulated power grid types only and should be obtained from the
capability curve (Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the specified
MW generation. If the value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at the limit
and the power grid type is changed to Mvar control.
Operating
Based on the latest load flow run, the operating voltage magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar are
displayed here; or, you may enter the operating voltage magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar. ETAP
will utilize these fields depending on the Operating Mode of the Power Grid. See Mode under the Power
Grid - Info page.
11-245
AC Elements
Power Grid
11.10.3 Short Circuit Page

The Short Circuit page provides the information to model the power grid as a source for studies such as
Short Circuit, Motor Starting, Transient Stability, Shock Protection, etc.
Short-Circuit Page of Three-Phase Power Grid
11-246
AC Elements
Power Grid
Short-Circuit Page of Three-Phase Power Grid
Grounding
Connection
The connection of the power grid can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta. Note that this option is available
only for 3 phase power grids.
Grounded
This field is available only for 1 phase power grids. Check this box if the power grid is earth grounded.
Earthing Type
The earthing type menu is available when the Power Grid voltage is 1 kV or less. The available earthing
types are dependent on the grounding connection and they reflect the sources earthing method.
Distributed Neutral
This option is available only when the Grounded option is not checked. Check this box if neutral is
distributed for the IT earthing type
Rg
This field is for the inclusion of the Power Grid grounding in electric shock protection calculation. This
field reflects both the elements grounding grid and the soil resistance between the grounding grid and the
load grounding electrode. The Rg result from ETAPs ground grid module can assist in determining this
value
11-247
AC Elements
Power Grid
SC Rating
The section is enabled only for 3 phase power grids.
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) faults. As you enter or
modify MVAsc or X/R, ETAP recalculates the corresponding short-circuit impedance values.
The short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) fault currents are calculated
from the following equations:
MVA3P = 1.732 * kV * I3P
MVA1P = 1.732 * kV * I1P
Where I3P and I1P are three-phase and single-phase short-circuit currents (kAsc). These values are
calculated and displayed.
kAsc
Enter the short-circuit contribution from the power grid. This value is updated if the MVAsc and X/R are
specified.
X/R
Enter the following X/R ratios for the positive and zero sequence impedances
3-Phase X/R = X/R ratio for positive sequence impedance of the power grid.
1-Phase X/R = X/R ratio for zero sequence impedance of the power grid.
SC Imp (100 MVA base)

Specify short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base. Short-circuit
impedance values include positive, negative, and zero sequences. As you enter or modify short-circuit
impedance values, ETAP recalculates the corresponding MVAsc and X/R for three-phase and singlephase faults. The section is enabled only for 3 phase power grids.
Earthing Conductor
Specify resistance (Re) and reactance (Xe) of the earthing conductor from the primary of the utilitys
distribution transformer, which is the point of separation between utility and customer, until the utilitys
substation. This section is only visible when a 3 phase power grid is 1 kV or less and the Earthing Type is
TN-S. For this release, these fields are used in the shock protection module. The section is enabled only
for 3 phase power grids.
Neutral Conductor
Specify resistance (Rn) and reactance (Xn) of the neutral conductor from the primary of the utilitys
distribution transformer, which is the point of separation between utility and customer, until the utilitys
substation. This section is only visible when a 3 phase power grid is 1 kV or less. For this release, these
fields are used in the shock protection module. The section is enabled only for 3 phase power grids.
Line SC Rating
11-248
AC Elements
Power Grid
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for line to line faults. As you enter or modify MVAsc or X/R, ETAP
recalculates the corresponding short-circuit impedance values.
The short-circuit MVA for line-to-line fault currents are calculated from the following equations:
MVALL = kV * ILL
where ILL is the line to line short-circuit current (kAsc).
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio for power grid impedance to a line to line fault.
kAsc
specified.
Line Impedance
Specify line to line short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base (or
in Ohms). As you enter or modify short-circuit impedance values, ETAP recalculates the corresponding
MVAsc and X/R for the line to line fault in the Line SC Rating section and for the Ohms fields (or in 100
MVA Base). The section is enabled only for 1 phase power grids.
Earth/Ground SC Rating
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for line to ground faults. As you enter or modify MVAsc or X/R, ETAP
recalculates the corresponding short-circuit impedance values. For this release, these fields are used in the
shock protection module.
The short-circuit MVA for line-to-ground fault currents are calculated from the following equations:
MVALG = kV * ILG
where ILG is the line to ground short-circuit current (kAsc).
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio for the power grid impedance to a line to ground fault.
kAsc
specified.
Ze: Earth/Ground Loop Impedance

Specify line to ground short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base
(or in Ohms). As you enter or modify short-circuit impedance values, ETAP recalculates the
corresponding MVAsc and X/R for the line to ground fault in the ground SC Rating section and for the
11-249
AC Elements
Power Grid
Ohms fields (or in 100 MVA Base). For this release, these fields are used in the shock protection module.

The Harmonic page provides the information to model the power grid as a harmonic source in harmonic
studies.
The Power Grid (Utility) can be modeled as a voltage harmonic source if it contains significant voltage
harmonic distortion. To model a Power Grid as a voltage harmonic source, a harmonic library needs to
be defined here.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Note: Only voltage harmonic source can be added to power grids.
11-250
AC Elements
Power Grid
From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, select a manufacturer name and a model name (Voltage
Type
This displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
This displays Manufacturer name of the selected harmonic library.
Model
This displays the model name of the selected harmonic library.
Wave Form
This displays one cycle of the voltage or current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time
domain.
Print (Wave Form)

This prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)
This prints the harmonic spectrum.
11-251
AC Elements
Power Grid
A
service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
11-252
AC Elements
Power Grid
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/A ).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/ A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
This displays the class of the library data selected
11-253
AC Elements
Power Grid
11.10.6 Energy Price Page

The Energy Price page contains the information on energy price (electricity price) from power grid, which
is used in optimal power flow, and the energy cost related calculation.
Model Type
Model for power grid energy price curve. Since most utilities bill customers in a fixed price for segment
of electricity usage, a Piecewise model is provided.
Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the power grid.
Note: This number can be negative, in which case, the system is exporting power into the power grid.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the power grid.
Model Parameter
Enter and change points in the list to specify an energy price curve. The data points are specified in pairs:
a MW value and the price of energy in Dollars/MWhr up to the MW value specified. For the example
shown in the graph, from 0 MW up to 1,000 MW, the price is $50 per MW.
11-254
AC Elements
Power Grid
Add
Click this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of list.
Insert
Click this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair.
Delete
Click this button to delete the highlighted data point pair.
Price Curve
This displays the curve from the data points entered.
Print
Click this button to print a hard copy of the price curve.
User-Defined Info
11-255
AC Elements
Power Grid




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-256
AC Elements
Power Grid

11-257
AC Elements
11.11 Synchronous Generator

The properties associated with synchronous generators of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor. Synchronous generator kV rating, MW rating, and Operating Mode are displayed on top of
each page for your information.
The Synchronous Generator Editor includes the following fifteen pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Capability
Imp/Model
Grounding
Inertia Exciter
Governor
Protection
PSS
Harmonic
Reliability
Fuel Cost
Remarks
Comment
11.11.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the synchronous generator ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Equipment Name and Description, and synchronous generator type.
11-258
AC Elements
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous generator. The assigned generator IDs
consist of the default generator ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of generators increase. The default generator ID (Bus) can be changed from the Defaults menu in
the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous generator. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a synchronous generator to a
bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the
synchronous generator resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a synchronous generator is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of
the synchronous generator to a new bus from the editor, will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below, where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Next to the bus ID, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus for your convenience.
Condition
Service
11-259
AC Elements
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are allowed. To change priority
names, from the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Configuration
In ETAP, the Operation Mode of the synchronous generator is dependent on the configuration. This
provides the flexibility of using multiple configurations to take into account different modes of operation.
See the Status Configuration Section in the Overview Chapter for information about creating new
configurations.
Operation Mode
The Generator Mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing generator will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the
voltage magnitude and angle of the generator terminals will remain at the specified operating values.
11-260
AC Elements
For motor acceleration studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine initial conditions. For
the initial load flow, a swing generator is represented as an infinite source. At time 0+, the generator is
modeled as a voltage source behind its direct-axis transient impedance.
All generators are modeled dynamically from time 0+ for transient stability studies. One of the swing
machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the reference machine for the entire system.
There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any
isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple swing machines connected to any bus
in the system.
Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line
diagram and will be included in studies. Also, the rated voltage (kV) of a swing generator is used as the
base kV of the bus that the generator is connected to. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then
calculated using transformer turn ratios. For transient stability studies, a swing generator becomes the
reference machine for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of the generator is set to
zero, and the voltage angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this
reference machine.
Voltage Control
A generator can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the generator will
adjust its var output to control the voltage. Therefore, the generators terminal voltage magnitude,
operating real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and
Min Q) must be entered for voltage control generators. A voltage control generator means that the
generator is base loaded (droop mode with fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)
controlling the field excitation for a constant voltage operation. During load flow studies, if the
calculated generator Mvar falls outside the generator Mvar capability limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the
value of the Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the Generator Mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
Using this option you can specify the amount of fixed MW and Mvar generation in the Rating page of the
Synchronous Generator Editor. An Mvar control generator means that the generator is base loaded (droop
mode with fixed MW) with a fixed field excitation (no AVR action).
PF Control
In this mode, the governor is operating in Droop Mode, based loaded; therefore, the MW output is fixed
to the MW setting. On the other hand, the exciter AVR adjusts to the Power Factor Setting. The
generators MW and %PF settings must be entered on the Rating page for the generation category
selected when modeled in this mode.
11-261
AC Elements
11.11.2 Rating Page
Rating
kW/MW
Enter the rated real power of the synchronous generator in MW or kW. Choose from these two options
by clicking on the MW/kW button.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the synchronous generator in kV. This entry is used by ETAP to convert the
ohmic values of the circuit elements to per unit values for calculations. This value is also used to convert
the final synchronous generator voltage to the actual values for output reports. Base voltages are
calculated by ETAP, beginning with the swing systems (swing power grids and/or swing generators) and
continuing for the rest of the system using the rated kV of the transformer windings.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the synchronous generator in percent.
KVA/MVA
Enter the rated power of the synchronous generator in kVA or MVA.
11-262
AC Elements
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the synchronous generator in percent.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the synchronous generator.
% of Bus kVnom
This displays the Rated kV as a percent of the nominal kV of the terminal bus.
FLA
The generator full load current is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
RPM
ETAP displays the rated RPM (synchronous speed) of the synchronous generator based on the system
frequency and the number of poles entered (Ws=120 freq/pole).
This group is used to assign the different generation settings to each of the ten generation categories for
this machine. Each machine can be set to have a different operating generation level for each generation
category. Depending on the operation mode, some of the values are editable as follows:
Swing Mode: %V and angle
Voltage Control Mode: %V and MW
Power Factor Control: MW and PF
as load flow, motor starting, transient stability and others.
Gen. Cat.
This displays the names of the generation categories. To modify these names, from the Project Menu,
point at Settings and then select Generation Categories. Modify the names in the Generation Category
dialog box.
Enter the voltage magnitude setting of the regulated bus at the synchronous generator terminal as a
percentage of the bus nominal kV. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for
swing and voltage control modes. This value is used as an initial operating voltage for Mvar controlled
power grids.

Enter the voltage angle setting for the swing bus at the synchronous generator terminal in degrees. This
value is used as a reference angle for generators in swing mode. This value is used as an initial operating
voltage angle for Mvar control generators.
MW
Enter the operating megawatt generation (real power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is
provided for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled synchronous generator types. This value will be held
fixed for load flow solutions.
11-263
AC Elements
Mvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is
provided for Mvar controlled synchronous generator types only. This value will be held fixed for load
flow solutions.
%PF
Power factor setting of the synchronous generator. This column is editable for PF Controlled
synchronous generator type only. This value is fixed for load flow solutions.
Min and Max Q (Minimum and Maximum Mvar/kvar)

These entries specify the minimum and maximum limits for reactive power generation. These limits are
required for voltage controlled synchronous generator types only and should be obtained from the
generator capability curve (Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the
specified MW generation. If the value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at
the limit and the generator type is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Limits
Enter the Peak Mvar or kvar rating of the Generator. This limit may be User-Defined or obtained from
the Capability Curve. These parameters are used for alerts in the Motor Acceleration Program.
PrimeMover Rating
Enter the Continuous and Peak Horse Power, MW, or kW rating of the Generator Engine (Prime Mover)
in this group. These parameters are used for alerts in the Motor Acceleration program.
Operating
The results of the latest load flow run are displayed here; or, you may enter the operating voltage
magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar. ETAP will utilize these fields depending on the Operating
Mode of the Power Grid. See Mode under the Generator - Info page.
11-264
AC Elements
11.11.3 Capability Page
You can specify the steady-state operating capability region of the generator from the Capability page of
the Synchronous Generator Editor. This region is used to determine the maximum and minimum reactive
power (Qmax and Qmin) that a generator can provide for a given reactive power output. When the
generator is operating in Swing Mode or when operating generation values are applied in calculation,
these limits will be used for alert checking.
The steady-state operating capability region is enclosed by four curves: the stator MVA limit curve, the
excitation limit curve, the steady-state stability curve, and the minimum real power output curve. In
ETAP, you define the steady-state operating region by specifying four values: Qa, Qc, Qd, and Pmin,
along with the rated reactive power output, Qb, which is specified on the Rating page.
Parameters
Qa
This is the maximum possible reactive power output (point a) limited by generator excitation and the
generator MVA rating. Point a is at the intersection of the excitation limit curve and the vertical axis.
You can let ETAP calculate the value or enter it yourself. If you select the Calculate Qa option, ETAP
11-265
AC Elements
will compute the value, based on generator rated reactive power output (Qb), rated output voltage, and
synchronous reactance (Xd). When Xd is equal to zero, Qa will be set to Qb.
Qb
This is the rated reactive power output (point b) specified on the Rating page. Point b is the rated
operating point of the generator.
Qc
Qc is the reactive power output at point c. Point c is at the intersection of the stator MVA limit curve and
the steady-state stability curve.
Qd
Qd is the reactive power output at point d. Point d is at the intersection of the steady-state stability curve
and the vertical axis. Because it is difficult for you to obtain detailed data to calculate exact steady-state
stability curve, ETAP uses a straight line between points c and d to represent the steady-state limit curve,
which gives a conservative result.
Pmin
This is the minimum real power output that must be delivered by a generator, such as one with a steam
turbine engine.
11.11.4 Imp/Model Page
11-266
AC Elements
Impedance
Xd
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xd/Ra
This is the armature X/R ratio (Xd/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both
cycle and 1-4 cycle networks.
Ra (%)
This is the armature resistance in percent (machine base).
Ra (Ohm)
This is the armature resistance in ohms.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for Harmonic
Analysis, short-circuit, and unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X2/R2
This is the negative sequence X/R ratio.
R2 (%)
This is the negative sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R2 (Ohm)
This is the negative sequence resistance in ohms.
Xo
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for unbalanced faults
under ANSI Short-Circuit Studies.
X0/R0
This is the zero sequence X/R ratio.
R0 (%)
This is the zero sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R0 (Ohm)
This is the zero sequence resistance in ohms.
X/R
This is the armature X/R ratio (X/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both
Xd Tolerance
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the
reactance values during short-circuit calculations. The Short-Circuit analysis module uses the negative
tolerance value.
11-267
AC Elements
H
This displays the machine total inertia from the Inertia page.
Machine Type
This is the short-circuit designation of the generator is used for ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standard
requirements.
Gen. Type
The generator type is used only for determining the generator reactance for ANSI/IEEE short-circuit
calculations as shown in the following table.
Gen. Type
Cycle
Xsc
1-4 Cycle
Xsc
30 Cycle
Xsc
Turbo
X"
X"
Hydro
X"
X"
Hydro without Damper Winding
0.75 X
0.75 X
Rotor Type
Round-Rotor: For machines that are made of round-rotor.
Salient-Pole: For machines that are made of salient-pole.
IEC Exciter Type

Depending on the Rotor type, the IEC Exciter Type is used for determining the max factor for generators
in the calculation of steady-state short-circuit currents per IEC Standard 909. max is proportional to fmax,
which takes different values based on exciter types as shown in the following table.
Rotor Type
IEC Exciter Type
fmax
Round Rotor
Turbine 130%
1.3
Round Rotor
Turbine 160%
1.6
Round Rotor
Terminal Feed, Cylindrical 130%
N/A
Round Rotor
N/A
Salient Pole
Salient-pole 160%
1.6
Salient Pole
Salient-pole 200%
2.0
Salient Pole
Terminal Feed, Salient Pole 160%
N/A
Salient Pole
N/A
There is no generator contribution to the steady-state short-circuit current for generator exciter types
specified as terminal fed.
11-268
AC Elements
Compound Excitation
Generator exciter fields are designed with instantaneous and short-term overload capability. This is
important so that the field can be overexcited (forced) for short periods of time to provide high levels of
var output to support the power system during disturbances that cause voltage to decay. Field forcing can
help the power system to ride through such disturbances.
IkF
Enter the steady state short-circuit current for a 3-phase terminal short-circuit in percent of FLA.
PG
Enter or select the generators voltage regulation in percent. This filed is used for IEC Shot Circuit
calculations when generator is specified as a unit generator.
Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous generator. All of the
parameters listed under Dynamic Model are used only for Transient Stability Studies. Full descriptions of
these variables are found in Chapter 24, Dynamic Models.
Model Type
Description
Equivalent
A model that uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and
quadrature-axis reactance.
Transient
A more comprehensive model than the Equivalent model, including the

machines saliency.
Subtransient
A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine, including

both transient and subtransient parameters.
Xd
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xdu
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xd
This is the direct-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value). This is
used for both motor starting and Transient Stability Studies and It is used for 30-cycle fault analysis and
Motor Starting Studies.
XL
This is the armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xqu
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
11-269
AC Elements
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Tdo
This is the direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tdo
This is the direct-axis subtransient open circuit-time constant in seconds
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Sbreak
This is the per unit of terminal voltage at which the generator saturation curve skews from the air-gap line
S100
This is the saturation factor at 100% terminal voltage
S120
This is the saturation factor at 120% terminal voltage
Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:
S100 = If100/If
S120 = If120/1.2If
where:
If = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the air gap line (no saturation)
If100 = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open circuit saturation curve
If120 = Field current corresponding to 120% terminal voltage on the open circuit saturation curve
Sbreak
11-270
AC Elements
Damping
This is the shaft mechanical damping term in percent MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed (%
MW/Hz). Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10% (long shaft).
Display
The Font and Symbols options determine how the grounding connection is displayed on the one-line
diagram.
Font
Click on this button to display the grounding connection using the ETAP font. For Example:
Symbols
Display the grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line
element, can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the standard. For Example:
11-271
AC Elements
Connection
These entries specify the synchronous generator grounding connections, type, and rating. The generator
grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection button until the desired connection is
displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the following grounding types provided in the list box:
Grounding Type
Open
Solid
Resistor
Reactor
Xfmr-Reactor
Xfmr-Resistor
Description
A transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the
secondary of the transformer.
A transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the
secondary of the transformer.
Resistor and Reactor

The Resistor and Reactor connection types have the following grounding ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2.
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded generators, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes, where
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohms).
Ohms
This displays the Resistor or reactor impedance in ohms.
Xfmr-Resistor and Xfmr-Reactor
The Xfmr (transformer) Resistor and Reactor connection types have the following grounding ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2.
kV1
Transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
11-272
AC Elements
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms).
Prim. Ohms
This displays the Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
kV2
Transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
This displays the Secondary current in amps. This calculation is based on the primary amps and the
transformer turn ratio.
Sec. Ohms
This displays the Resistor and reactor impedance in ohms. This calculation is based on the grounding
transformer turn ratio and secondary current. If Sec. Ohms are entered first, primary amps and ohms will
be calculated automatically.
Transformer kVA
This displays the Grounding transformer kVA rating.
Rg
value.
11-273
AC Elements
11.11.6 Inertia Page
Inertia Calculator
PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator RPM, WR2, and H
Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft.2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when one of them is known and RPM
has been entered based on the following equation:
H = 2.31 * 10-10 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA
(for WR2 = Moment of inertia in lb-ft2)
H = 5.48 * 10-9 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA
(for WR2 = Moment of inertia in kg-m2)
Total RPM
The total RPM is equal to the Generator RPM.
Total WR2
The total WR2 is calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
This displays the arithmetic sum of the PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator H in MW-sec/MVA.
11-274
AC Elements
Shaft Torsion
Include Torsion Effect
Select this option to consider torsion effect between turbine, coupling gear, and generator during transient
stability calculation.
D1
This is the damping constant between turbine and coupling gear
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and generator
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of turbine and coupling gear
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and generator
11.11.7 Exciter Page

This Section allows you to define the representation of the excitation systems and automatic voltage
regulators (AVR) for synchronous generators.
11-275
AC Elements
The excitation and AVR systems for synchronous generators can be very sophisticated. Complete
modeling of these systems is usually necessary for Transient Stability Studies. The equivalent transfer
functions used for the excitation and AVR systems and their variable/parameter names are either provided
by exciter manufactures or in accordance with the IEEE recommended types as found from the following
references:
IEEE Working Group Report, "Computer Representation of Excitation Systems", IEEE
Transaction on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp.1460/1464.
IEEE Committee Report, "Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981,
pp.494/509.
IEEE Std 421.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992.
In general, exciter manufacturers should be contacted to determine the applicability of the IEEE-type
representations to their excitation systems.
Type
You can specify the excitation/AVR type by selecting one of the following models from the list box.
Refer to the Chapter on Dynamic Models for additional details.
Type
Description
1
2
3
1S
DC1
DC2
Continuously acting regulator with rotating exciter system

Rotating rectifier exciter with static regulator system
Static system with terminal potential and current supplies
Controlled rectifier system with terminal voltage
DC commutator exciter with continuous voltage regulation
DC commutator exciter with continuous voltage regulation and supplies from terminal
voltage
DC commutator exciter with non-continuous voltage regulation
Potential-source controlled-rectifier exciter
Compound source-controlled rectifier exciter
Alternator-rectifier exciter system with non-controlled rectifiers and field current
feedback
High-initial-response alternator-rectifier exciter system with non-controlled rectifiers
and field current feedback
Field-controlled alternator-rectifier exciter
High-initial-response alternator-supplied controlled rectifier exciter
Simplified rotating rectifier exciter
IEEE type AC8B
Basler SR8F and SR125A exciter
HPC 840 AVR/exciter model
Jeumont Industrie excitation/AVR system
DC3
ST1
ST2
ST3
AC1
AC2
AC3
AC4
AC5A
AC8B
SR8F
HPC
JEUM
11-276
AC Elements
Type
Description
ST1D
AC1A
ST4B
Fixed

IEEE type AC1A
IEEE type ST4B
Constant excitation (that is, no regulator action). This can be used for generators with
constant excitation or when the machine voltage regulator is operating under PF or
Mvar control.
User defined dynamic model
UDM
Some exciter types require that you select a control bus from the dropdown list that appears when they are
specified.
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of exciter to provide a set of sample data for the
selected exciter and AVR type.
Excitation System Symbols

The following table contains common symbols used to define the parameters of the various excitation
systems. For other exciter parameters not listed, refer to the Help Line for such parameters in the
particular exciter parameter. In most cases, constants and gains are in per-unit and time constants are in
seconds. The base voltage for the excitation system is defined so that one per unit exciter voltage will
produce rated generator voltage on the generator air-gap line.
Term
Efdmax
Description
Maximum exciter output voltage (applied to generator field)
FEX
Rectifier loading factor
Ifd
Generator field current
IN
Normalized exciter load current
KA
Regulator gain
KB
Second stage regulator gain
KC
Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance
KD
Demagnetizing factor, function of exciter alternator reactances
KE
Exciter constant related to self-excited field
KF,KN
Regulator stabilizing circuit gains
KG
Inner loop feedback constant
KH
Exciter field current feedback gain
KI
Current circuit gain coefficient
KL
Gain of exciter field current limit
KLV
Gain of exciter low voltage limit signal
11-277
AC Elements
Term
Description
KP
Potential circuit gain coefficient
KR
Constant associated with regulator and alternator field power supply
KV
Fast raise/lower contact setting
SE
Exciter saturation function
TA, TB, TC
Regulator amplifier time constants
TE
Exciter time constant
TF
Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant
TF1,TF2
Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants (rotating rectifier system)
TR
Regulator input filter time constant
TRH
Travel time of rheostat drive motor
VA
Regulator internal voltage
VERR
Voltage error signal
VG
Inner loop voltage feedback
VI
Internal signal within voltage regulator
VLR
Exciter field current limit reference
VLV
Exciter low voltage limit reference
VN
Rate feedback input variable
VR
Regulator output voltage
VR max
Maximum value of VR
VR min
Minimum value of VR
Vref
Regulator reference voltage setting
VRH
Field rheostat setting
Vt
Vthev
XL
Generator terminal voltage

Voltage obtained by vector sum of potential and current signals, Type 3 system
Reactance associated with potential source
HV Gate
High value gate: If A > B, C = A; if A < B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is
output
LV Gate
Low value gate: If A < B, C = A; if A > B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is
output
UDM Model
ETAP gives you the ability to model your own Exciter through UDM (user defined models). When the
UDM model option is selected, you can select any of the predefined UDM models form the Type list.
11-278
AC Elements
Clicking on the UDM Model button brings up the UDM Graphic Logic View, where you can create,
modify, and compile a UDM model. ETAP will use the selected Exciter model for its calculations.
See the chapter on User-Defined Dynamic Models for more information.
11.11.8 Governor Page

This Section describes the representation of speed governing and engine control systems for synchronous
generators. The majority of models provided here are consistent with the IEEE committee report for
governors and turbines, "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System Studies,"
IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and System, Vol PAS-92, July/Dec 1973, pp.1904-1915. Other
models are vendor specific.
Governor/Turbine Type
You can specify the governor/turbine type by selecting one of the following models from the drop-down
list. Refer to the chapter on Dynamic Models for more information.
11-279
AC Elements
Type
ST
ST1
ST2
ST3
STM
GT
GTF
GP
DT
505
UG8
2301
GTH
GTS
MARS
GHH
DDEC
HYDR
SGT
PL-A
ST60
ST70
GT-2
GT-3
CT251
GGOV3
None
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Description
Steam-Turbine Governor System
Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
Tandem-Compound, Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
Tandem-Compound, Double-Reheat Steam Turbine
IEEE General Steam-Turbine Representation
Gas-Turbine Governor System
Gas Turbine including Fuel System
General Purpose Governor-Turbine System
Diesel Engine Governor
Woodward 505E PID Governor for Extraction Steam Turbine
Woodward Governor
Woodward 2301A Governor for Diesel Unit
GE Heavy Duty Gas Turbine Model
GE Simplified Single Shaft Gas Turbine Model
Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set
GHH Brosig Steam Turbine Governor
Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine
Woodward Hydraulic Governor and Turbine
IEEE Gas-Turbine
Power Logic Governor and Turbine Model A
Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
Gas-Turbine Governor System
Gas-Turbine Governor System (Non wind-up limit)
Combustion Turbine Governor Model
GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers
No Governor action, i.e., the mechanical power (Pm) is kept constant throughout
the time simulation studies.
Mode
Droop or Isoch Mode of operation.
LS GP#
From the dropdown list
Sample Data
selected governor/turbine type.
Compile UDM
ETAP allows you to model your own Governor through UDM (user defined models). When the UDM
model option is selected, you can select any of the predefined UDM models form the Type list.
modify, and compile a UDM model. ETAP will use the selected Governor model for its calculations.
See the chapter on User Defined Dynamic Models for more information.
11-280
AC Elements

This page provides options to plot the generator (I2)2 t curve and short-circuit decrement curve for a
generator on a Star View.
Thermal Capability
Generator thermal capability curve (I2)2 t is calculated based on the negative sequence current, where the
negative sequence current is expressed in multiples of machine rated stator current or FLA.
Plot (I2)2 t
Check this box to plot (I2)2t characteristic curve of the generator on a Star View.
11-281
AC Elements
(I2)2 t Factor
For synchronous generators with a rotor type defined as round rotor, this factor is typically equal to 30,
whereas for salient pole, this factor is typically equal to 40.
The table below lists some of the other common generator types and their (I2)2 t factors.
Model Type
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Round-Rotor
Round-Rotor
Round-Rotor
Salient-Pole with damper
winding
Salient-Pole without damper
winding
Type of Generator
Turbine Generator
Synchronous Condenser
Frequency-changer
Hydraulic Turbines
Engine-Driven Generators
Indirectly Cooled
Directly Cooled 0-800 MVA
Directly Cooled 8011600MVA
(I2)2t product (K)

30
30
30
40
40
30
10
10 (0.00625*(MVA-800))
Range ~ 5 to 10
Salient Pole
40
Salient Pole
40
11-282
AC Elements
Short-Circuit Decrement
Short-Circuit Plot Decrement Total
Use this selection to draw the generator decrement curve (Sum of AC and DC components) on all Star
Views containing the selected generator.
Plot Decrement AC Only

Use this selection to draw the generator decrement curve (AC component only) on all Star Views
containing the selected generator.
Initial Loading Condition No Load Condition

When No Load Condition is selected, ETAP will use load power factor angle = 0 degrees to calculate
machine internal voltage.
Initial Loading Condition Full Load Condition

When Full Load Condition is selected, ETAP will use power factor angle based on rated load to calculate
machine internal voltage. The magnitude of fault current will be higher for a generator in full load
condition when compared to no load condition.
Compound Excitation
This is the armature current in percent of rated FLA of the generator. If compound excitation (Imp/Model
Page) is checked then its value will be shown on the protection page as a display only field. Including
compound excitation affects the magnitude of the steady state fault current contribution from the
generator.
11-283
AC Elements
11.11.10 PSS Page

Power system stabilizer (PSS) is an auxiliary device installed on synchronous generator and tuned to help
with system stability.
ETAP provides two standard IEEE type models:
IEEE Type 1 PSS (PSS1A)
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of PSS to provide a set of sample data for the selected
stabilizer type.
Compile UDM
ETAP allows you to model your own PSS through UDM (user defined models). When the UDM model
option is selected, you can select any of the predefined UDM models form the Type list.
modify, and compile a UDM model. ETAP will use the selected PSS model for its calculations.
11-284
AC Elements

The Harmonic page contains the information to model the synchronous generator as a harmonic source in
Harmonic Studies.
Harmonic Library
A synchronous Generator can be modeled as a voltage harmonic source if it contains significant voltage
harmonic distortion. To model a Synchronous Generator as a voltage harmonic source, a harmonic
library must be defined on this page.
Library
Click the Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Note: Only voltage harmonic source can be added to generators.
11-285
AC Elements
From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, select a manufacturer name and a model name (Voltage
Type
Displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
Displays Manufacturer name of the selected harmonic library.
Model
Displays the model name of the selected harmonic library.
Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the voltage or current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)

Prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
Prints the harmonic spectrum.
11-286
AC Elements
A
service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This
MTTR
Enter the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
8760/MTTR).
11-287
AC Elements
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/ A).
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library
11.11.13 Fuel Cost Page

The Fuel Cost page contains the information on generator fuel cost, which is used in optimal power flow
and the energy cost related calculation.
11-288
AC Elements
Model Type
Model for generator fuel cost curve. Three models are available:
Piecewise
Equation
V Curve
Profile
Profile list is added to this page and can include up to 10 Fuel Costs ($/Mbtu) (Profile 1 Profile 10).
This is similar to the loading category in ETAP.
The Fuel Cost Profile names are user-definable and can be changed from the Project Setting menu.
By selecting Fuel Cost Profile, you can customize the name of any of the 10 fuel/energy cost profiles
be up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
11-289
AC Elements
The 10 cost profiles will keep track of the Fuel Cost for each generator. That is there can be 10 fuel cost
($/MMBtu) per generator (one for each profile).
Optimal Power Flow Study Case includes a selection list for Fuel/Energy Cost profiles. For the selected
cost profile of the generation and power grids, the Optimal Power Flow program will calculate the
minimum fuel source and minimize fuel cost.
Curve Type
The following options are available for the Piecewise model:
Heat Rate vs. Output
Cost vs. Output
The following options are available for the Equation model:
Input vs. Output
Cost vs. Output
The following options are available for the V Curve model:
Cost vs. Output
Depending on the above selection Model Parameters heading and data are changed to reflect the
appropriate heading. The plot is also updated based on the curve type selection.
Model Parameter
Piecewise Model
For this model, data points for series fuel cost ($/hr) and average incremental fuel cost ($/MWh) for
generating the corresponding MW are specified.
11-290
AC Elements
Note: The initial cost such as Operation and Maintenance costs can be specified for 0 MW.
The model parameter columns/headings for Cost vs. Output curve type are as follows for the Piecewise
Model:
MW
$/hr
Incremental $/MWh
Output MW (x axis)
Input / Output (y axis)
Average Incremental Cost (y axis)
The model parameter columns/headings for Heat Rate vs. Output curve type are as follows for Piecewise
model:
MW
1000 Btu/hr
Incremental Btu/kWh
Output MW (x axis)
Input / Output Heat Rate (y axis)
Average Incremental Heat Rate (y axis)
Add
Click this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of model parameter list. This feature is
available with the Piecewise models.
Insert
Click this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair. This feature is
available with the Piecewise models.
Delete
Click this button to delete the highlighted data point pair. This feature is available with the Piecewise
models.
Equation Model
For equation based model the incremental plot is the instantaneous value (dy/dx) and not the average
incremental. For Cost curve y is defined as $/hr. For Input-Output Curve y is defined as 1000 Btu/hr and
x = MW.
Instantaneous Incremental Cost = dy / dx
Where y = $/hr and x = MW
Instantaneous Incremental Heat Rate = dy / dx
Where y = 1000 Btu/hr, and x = MW
11-291
AC Elements
CO, C1, C2, C3, K

Enter the coefficients for the equation based cost curve
Y = C0 + C1*x + C2*x2 + C3*e(K*x)
V-Curve Type
For this model, a desired MW generation point MidPoint is entered in MW and the slope of fuel cost
curve is entered in Weight. This model can be utilized to represent energy cost at various MW output
levels based on pre-defined power generation rate schedules.
For V-Curve Model type, the Curve is set to Cost vs. Output and the list box is disabled (grayed out).
11-292
AC Elements
Fuel Cost
Fuel cost is used for the conversion of Heat Rate values to Cost values. The fuel cost is given in $/MBtu.
(Note MBtu = 10-6 Btu) The fuel cost field is displayed for Heat Rate vs. Output curve types only in the
Model Parameter group. There can be up to 10 fuel costs for a given generator (10 profiles).
$ / hr = 1000 Btu/hr * $/MBtu
Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the generator.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the generator.
Cost Curve
Displays the curve from the data points entered.
For Piecewise and Equation models:
Curve Type = Cost vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Cost ($)
Y2 Axis: Incremental Cost ($/MWh)
X Axis: Output (MW)
11-293
AC Elements
Curve Type = Heat Rate vs. Output

Y1 Axis: Input (1000 Btu/hr)
Y2 Axis: Incremental Heat Rate (Btu/kWh)
X Axis: Output (MW)
For V-Curve model:
Curve Type = Cost vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Cost ($)
X Axis: Output (MW)
Print
Click this button to print a hard copy of the cost curve.
User-Defined Info
11-294
AC Elements




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-295
AC Elements

11-296
AC Elements
11.12 Wind Turbine Generator - WTG

You can enter the properties associated with wind turbine generators including wind aerodynamics of the
electrical distribution system using Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) Editor. WTG converts mechanical
energy to electrical energy. Wind turbine rotor supplies fluctuating mechanical power (torque) from wind
to the connected generator. Wind generation is an important category of renewable energy, micro-grid,
smart grid, etc.
The Wind Turbine Generator Editor includes the following pages of properties that are variable
depending upon the wind turbine technology type selected and whether the control types are based on
WECC, generic or UDM models.
Info
Wind
Reliability
Rating
Pitch Control
Remarks
Imp/Model
Controls
Comment
Turbine
Inertia
The following abbreviations are used for wind turbine generator user guide.
Abbreviation
Definition
WTG
WECC
UDM
FDR
MFR
SC
MF
Cp
RPM
EFF
FLA
FOR
MTTR
MTTF

Western Electric Coordination Council
User Defined Dynamic Model
Feeder
Manufacturer
Short-circuit
Multiplying Factor
Power Coefficient
Revolution Per Minute
Efficiency
Full Load Ampere
Forced Outage Rate
Mean Time To Repair
Mean Time To Failure
11-297
AC Elements
11.12.1 Wind Turbine Technologies

With high wind penetration levels being planned globally, the need for grid operators to quickly assess
the impacts of wind generation on system stability has become critical. In the planning phase, this
assessment is normally done with positive sequence time-domain analysis, which allow for simulation of
the dynamic response of a power system to major disturbances (e.g., short circuits). The lack of suitable
dynamic models for the wide variety of wind turbines available in the marketplace has been an obstacle in
performing accurate analyses of this type, though efforts led by the Western Electricity Coordinating
Council (WECC) to develop industry-standard wind turbine models are addressing this issue.
WECC Modeling & Validation Working Group initiated an effort to develop and validate a series of
generic dynamic models for wind turbine generators (WTG). The objectives of this effort were to
1) Allow performance of transient stability studies in early stages of interconnection process when WTG
manufacturer/model may be undetermined
2) Reduce WTG manufacturer confidentiality concerns with respect to proprietary aspects of dynamic
models
3) Improve the quality and usability of models, consistent with the level of accuracy expected in an initial
system impact evaluation.
ETAP includes reduced-order, simplified wind turbine models developed by the WECC Modeling &
Validation Working Group. These models were developed for analyzing the stability impact of large
arrays of wind turbines with a single point of network interconnection. Dynamic simulations have been
performed with these models, and comparisons made with results derived from higher-order models used
in manufacturer-specific representations of aero conversion and drivetrain dynamics.
Generic WECC models were developed for four major WTG topologies. The first topology, referred to
as a Type 1 WTG. This machine is pitch-regulated, and drives a squirrel cage induction generator which is
directly coupled to the grid.
Type 2 WTG is a variation on the Type 1, operating with variable slip. It utilizes a wound rotor induction
generator whose rotor winding is brought out via slip rings and brushes. An external rotor resistance is
electronically modulated to effect dynamic changes in the machines torque-speed characteristics.
11-298
AC Elements
The doubly fed induction generator (DFIG), or partial conversion, topology is designated as WECC Type
3. The turbine is pitch-regulated and features a wound rotor induction generator with an AC/DC/AC
power converter connected between the rotor terminals and grid. The generator stator winding is directly
coupled to the grid. The power converter in the rotor circuit allows for independent control of generator
torque and flux, providing fast active and reactive power control over a wide range of generator speeds.
Finally, the full conversion topology is designated as WECC Type 4. The turbine is pitch-regulated and
features an AC/DC/AC power converter through which the entire power of the generator is processed.
The generator may be either induction or synchronous type. As with the Type 3 WTG, the power
converter allows for independent control of quadrature and direct axis output currents at the grid interface,
providing fast active and reactive power control over a wide range of generator speeds.
The above information has been extracted from NREL Development and Validation of WECC Variable
Speed Wind Turbine Dynamic Models for Grid Integration Studies.
11-299
AC Elements
11.12.2 Info Page

You can specify the wind turbine generator (WTG) ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag #, Name, Description, Data Type, Priority, Generator MFR (manufacturer), Type,
Control, Configuration, Operation Mode, WTG Library, and Connection Quantity within the fields of the
Info page.
Info
ID
each WTG. The assigned IDs consist of the default WTG plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of WTGs increase. The default WTG ID can be changed from the Defaults
menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the WTG. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an induction machine to a bus, select a bus
from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on
OK.
11-300
AC Elements
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the WTG resides, i.e., you cannot
connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a WTG is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the wind turbine
to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where WTG is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
11-301
AC Elements
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
WTG Type
MFR
WTG MFR (manufacturer) displays the manufacturer name from the library. If no library is selected, it
will show Generic as default.
Type
Select a generator type for this WTG from the drop-down list where Type 1 is fixed-speed, conventional
induction generator; Type 2 is variable slip, induction generators with variable rotor resistance; Type 3 is
variable speed, doubly-fed asynchronous generator with rotor-side converter; and Type 4 is variable
speed, asynchronous generators with full converter interface. Default is Type-1.
Control
Select a control model from the drop-down list. WECC, Generic and UDM controls are available when
Type 3 is selected. For all other types, WECC and UDM are available. The default selection is WECC. It
will be hidden if library is selected. When UDM is selected, it will show a UDM type list to choose
compiled UDM model from WTG folder.
Configuration
In ETAP, the Operation Mode of the WTG is dependent on the configuration. This provides the flexibility
of using multiple configurations to take into account different modes of operation. For information about
creating new configurations, see the Status Configuration Section in the Overview Chapter.
Select the operating status of the WTG for the selected configuration status from the list box.
11-302
AC Elements
Operation Mode
The Generator Mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor. Operation modes
for different types and controls are shown in the following list. When Type and Control selection change,
operation mode will be pre-set and disabled/enabled or shown/hidden based on the following table.
Type
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 3
Type 4
Control
WECC/UDM
WECC/UDM
WECC/UDM
Generic / Existing Model (ETAP 5.0 onwards)
WECC/UDM
Operation Mode
Induction Generator
Induction Generator
Voltage Control
Mvar Control
Voltage Control
WTG Library
WTG Library quick launches existing data for simulation. When the library is selected, the control list is
hidden and type list is disabled. Operation mode will be changed based on Type 1 through Type 4.
Connection
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of similar WTGs in the electrical network. The maximum number is 999 and
the default is 1.
11-303
AC Elements
11.12.3 Rating Page

On this page, you can specify the rating of the WTG, its Mvar Limits, its operating values, and the WTG
categories.
Ratings
MW/kW
You can toggle between these two options by clicking on the MW/kW button. Enter the rated real power
of the WTG in MW or kW.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the WTG in kV. This entry is used by ETAP to convert the ohmic values of the
circuit elements to per unit values for calculations. This value is also used to convert the final WTG
voltage to the actual values used for output reports.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the WTG as a percentage.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the machine, in percent, at 100% loading. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The
efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when
11-304
AC Elements
you change the efficiency at 100% loading, the machine full load current is recalculated. All three values
of the efficiencies are used for determining the machine efficiency under different percent loading, i.e.,
when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder losses for all
loading categories are recalculated.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the synchronous generator. As the number of poles is changed, the
synchronous speed of the machine is recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per minute).
RPM = 120 * Freq/Poles
RPM
ETAP displays the rated RPM (synchronous speed) of the WTG based on the system frequency and the
number of poles entered (Ws=120 Freq/Poles).
MVA
ETAP displays the rated power of the wind turbine generator in MVA.
% of Bus kVnom
ETAP displays the percentage of nominal bus kV.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the machine calculated and displayed in amperes. This is the current
the WTG will pull from the system when it is fully loaded (that is, when the system is operating at the
rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency). When you modify FLA, the WTG efficiency at 100%
loading is recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot
exceed 100% or be below 10%.
Mvar Limits
The Mvar Limits (Qmax and Qmin) can be user-defined or calculated based on the controller parameters.
When the WTG operating mode is Mvar Control (Type 3, Generic Control), both options for Mvar Limits
will be enabled. When the operation mode is Voltage Control or Induction Generator, it will be fixed at
User-Defined.
Wind Speed
This field displays the average wind speed in the Avg Wind Speed field in meters per second (m/s). You
can enter or modify average wind speed in Wind page of WTG Editor.
This group is used to assign the various generation settings to each of the ten generation categories for
this WTG. Each WTG can be set to have a different operating generation level for each generation
category. Depending on the operation mode, some of the values are editable as follows:
Voltage Control: % Voltage
% wind speed will use the Cp curve data to calculate operating kW and kvar for each generation category
to be used by load flow analysis and all other modules that require pre-start generation levels.
11-305
AC Elements
Operating Values
%V
Enter the operating terminal voltage magnitude in this field as a percentage, using up to 7 numeric
characters..
Vangle
Enter the operating voltage angle in this field, using up to 5 numeric characters.
MW
Enter the WTG operating real power (MW) in this field, using up to 7 numeric characters.
Mvar
Enter the WTG operating reactive power (Mvar) in this field, using up to 7 numeric characters
11-306
AC Elements
11.12.4 Impedance Model Page

The impedance model page describes the dynamic machine model used for the WTG. Depending upon
the type of WTG technology, this page utilizes either the circuit model or a transfer function to describe
the dynamic machine model.
Impedance/Model Page for Type 1 & Type 2 WECC

and Type 3 - Generic Model
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
Enter the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the
motor, using up to 5 numeric characters.
% PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent, using up to 5 numeric characters.
ANSI Short-Circuit Z
Std MF/Xsc
If you select Std MF, ETAP uses the following ANSI Multiplying Factors for calculating the positive
sequence short-circuit impedances. If you select the Xsc option, you can directly enter the short-circuit
11-307
AC Elements
impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base. Note: the IEC Short-Circuit Method does not use
these impedances.
Xsc
Xsc
HP
kW
RPM
Cycle Network
1.5-4 Cycle Network
> 1000 HP
>745.7
1800
1.0/LRC
1.5/LRC
> 250 HP
> 186.4
3600
1.0/LRC
1.5/LRC
50 HP
37.28
other
1.2/LRC
3.0/LRC
< 50 HP
<37.28
1.67/LRC
Infinity
Parameters
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base); used for calculating short-circuit currents
for unbalanced faults. Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base); this value is used for Harmonic
Analysis, Short-Circuit, and Unbalanced Load Flow Studies. Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
X/R
This is the induction motors X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra). Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
Td
This is the induction motor transient time constant in seconds. Enter up to 5 numeric characters. This
value is used in the IEC 363 Method.
Td = X/(2*f* Rr) where Rr = rotor resistance, f=frequency and X= sub-transient reactance
Grounding
You can select entries from drop-down list to specify grounding connection, grounding type, and earthing
type of WTG.
Connection
The grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
11-308
AC Elements
Grounding Type
Choose one item from these four grounding types provided in the drop-down list for Wye connection:
Open
Solid
Resistor
Reactor
Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded).

Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path.
A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.
A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path.
Earthing Type
Note that this field is applicable only for low voltage WTG.
Distributed Neutral
Check this box if neutral is distributed for the IT earthing type. Note that this field is enables only for IT
earthing type.
Rg
value.
Note: The Rg field will not appear if Wye (star) resistor or reactor Grounding Types have been selected.
Model
The Model section is hidden if the UDM control model is selected from the Info page. In this case, the
WTG representation is completely dependent on the UDM model. When the UDM model is not selected,
for Type 1 and Type 2 WTG, this section allows the user to select a circuit model from WTG model
library. For Type 3 and Type 4 WTG, this section allows the user to select a model from Model Type list
and specify parameters.
WTG CKT Model Library Type 1 &2 WTG

The Model area provides performance graphs and a field that displays the generator model type. Clicking
on the Lib button causes the Library Quick Pick box to appear. You can select from the provided list of
Design IDs and Models to specify the Model Type, Design Class and Model ID using the Library Quick
Pick.
You can access Motor Model Library data by selecting CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to
open the Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor model data from the library can be obtained and
transferred to the Motor Editor by selecting the Model Type (Single1, Single2, DBL1, or DBL2) and then
highlighting a Design Class and model ID. Motor model is used for dynamic motor starting and transient
stability analysis.
After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the WTG CKT Model Editor and the WTG
Parameter Update Editor appears, which displays the updated WTG parameters. Click on the UPDATE
button to apply these parameters or the Cancel button to reject them and close the editor without apply
any changes. ETAP recalculates model parameters after you select a new circuit or characteristic model.
11-309
AC Elements
The update occurs when you click OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to
another motor.
WTG Model for Type 3 & 4

WTG Type 3 and Type 4 technologies are based on dynamic transfer functions that represent the machine
model rather than a conventional machine equivalent circuit model as those used for Type 1 and Type 2
WTG. For WT3G and WT4G models the generator is modeled as a controlled current injection having a
single or two-mass shaft model.
Impedance/Model Page for Type 3 WTG
11-310
AC Elements
Impedance/Model Page for Type 4 WTG

The generator model includes the converter model including blocks for high voltage reactive current
management, low voltage active current management and low voltage power logics. For more
information on the dynamic fields please refer to the Dynamic Models chapter in the ETAP user guide.
Parameter
X
T1
T2
T3
Lvplsw
Lvpl1
Lvpl2
zerox
brkpt
rrpwr
Definition
Generator effective reactance
First generator time constant
Second generator time constant
Third generator time constant
Low Voltage Power Logic Switch
Low Voltage Power Logic Point 1
LVPL characteristic zero crossing
LVPL characteristic breaking point
LVPL ramp rate limit
Unit
p.u. (rated MVA base)
sec.
sec.
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Inverter SC Contribution
This section is applicable only for Type 4 WTG and it is hidden for all other Types of WTG. For Type 4
WTG, it is interfaced to system through an inverter. This section allows the user to specify the inverter
short-circuit parameter used for AC short-circuit calculations.
11-311
AC Elements
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent based on FLA of WTG.
Isc
This field displays the short-circuit current in amperes for a fault at the WTG terminal, calculated based
on the K factor and the FLA of the WTG.
11-312
AC Elements
11.12.5 Turbine Page

The turbine page describes the rotor aerodynamics used for the WTG. Depending upon the type of WTG
technology, this page utilizes either a power coefficient Cp curve or a transfer function to describe the
rotor aerodynamics.
Turbine Page for Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 (Generic) WTG
Aerodynamics
This area contains rotor, air density and air speed data that are used to generate the curve displayed in the
Power Curve field.
V Rated
This is the turbine rated wind speed in meters-per-second (m/s). Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this
field.
Cut-in Speed
This is the minimum wind speed in m/s required for the turbine to generate power. Enter up to 9 numeric
characters in this field.
Cut-out Speed
This is the maximum wind speed in m/s required for the turbine to generate power. Enter up to 9 numeric
characters in this field.
11-313
AC Elements
Swept Area
This is the rotor swept area Pi*(D/2)^2 in square meters for a horizontal type of turbine (Pi = 3.1415926
and D=diameter in meters). Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Diameter
This is the rotor diameter (D) in meters. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Pitch Angle
This is the rotor blade pitch and angle in degrees. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Air Density
This is the air density in kg/m3. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
RPM
This is the rotor/turbine rated RPM. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Power Curve
This field displays a graph of the WTG power curve generated from either the Aerodynamics library data
or the user-defined data. Click on the Print button to print the graph.
Power Coefficient Cp
This area allows you to enter nine numeric constants for the turbine Cp (thrust coefficient) curve.
Clicking the Sample Data button refreshes the nine fields with ETAP default data. These data are used to
generate the graph displayed in the Wind Power Cp Curve field. The Cp curve data is analyzed by the
Transient Stability module to allow you to accurately model system disturbances and events while
performing studies such as impact of wind variation on running turbines.
The 9 fields of the Power Coefficient Cp area make up the coefficients for the equation based Wind
Power Cp Curve. Enter the coefficients for the equation based curve:
C1
This is the numeric constant for the first turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C2
This is the numeric constant for the second turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this
field.
C3
This is the numeric constant for the third turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C4
This is the numeric constant for the fourth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C5
This is the numeric constant for the fifth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C6
This is the numeric constant for the sixth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
11-314
AC Elements
C7
This is the numeric constant for the seventh turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this
field.
C8
This is the numeric constant for the eighth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C9
This is the numeric constant for the ninth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Wind Power Cp Curve

This field displays a graph of the wind power curve generated from the user-defined Power Coefficient
Cp data.
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
11-315
AC Elements
Power vs Angle
This is the turbine model for a single mass wind turbine generator based on Type 3 technology. See the
dynamic models chapter in the ETAP user guide for the detailed transfer function.
Turbine Page for Type 3 WECC Models
Kaero
This is the aerodynamic gain in per unit.
Theta2
Blade pitch angle in degrees.
Theta0
Initial blade pitch angle in degrees.
11-316
AC Elements
Pitch Angle Theta Initialization

This field displays a graph of the blade pitch angle in degrees versus Vw wind speed in per unit
generated from the power vs angle data.
Initial wind speed (vw) is used only if WTG is at rated power output and if vw is greater than rated wind
speed (to compute the initial pitch angle). Otherwise, this value is ignored, the pitch angle is set to its
optimum value (0 degree in most cases), and wind speed is initialized to give initial generator power
output.
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
11-317
AC Elements
Power Coefficient Cp
This is the turbine model for a wind turbine generator based on Type 4 technology. See the dynamic
models chapter in the ETAP user guide for the detailed transfer function. Note that the aerodynamics
section that applies to Type 1 through Type 3 does not apply for Type 4 machines.
Turbine Page for Type 4 WECC Models
Parameter
Kpp
Kip
Kf
Tpw
Tf
dPmx
dPmn
Definition
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Turbine feedback gain
Turbine time constant
Turbine feedback time constant
Maximum power change
Minimum power change
11-318
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec.
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
AC Elements
11.12.6 Wind Page

You can use the Wind page to enter wind information that ETAP can use to create a wind profile for an
individual or group of turbines. The average base speed is used for power flow calculations however the
remaining fields are used in transient stability calculations only. The wind page is common to all wind
turbine technology types.
Average Base Speed

This is the average wind speed in meter-per-second (m/s). The average wind speed entered on this page is
displayed on the rating page and becomes the base wind speed used to determine the rated wind power.
Wind Disturbance
This area allows you to enter wind-related data including wind ramp, wind gust and wind noise either
individually or as a combined effect.
Wind Profile
This field displays an ETAP generated graph of the wind profile based on the supplied data. Click on the
Print button to print the graph.
11-319
AC Elements
Ramp Wind
Use this area to define the ramp characteristics of wind.
Max. Ramp
This is the maximum ramp wind speed in meter-per-second (m/s).
Ramp Start
This is the ramp starting time in seconds.
Ramp Stop
This is the ramp stopping time in seconds.
Gust Wind
Use this area to define the gust characteristics of wind.
Gust Peak
This is the gust peak wind speed in m/s.
Gust Start
This is the gust starting time in seconds.
Gust Period
This is the gust stopping time in seconds.
Noise Wind
Use this area to define the drag coefficient, turbulence, mean speed, and frequency characteristics of
wind.
Surface Drag
This is the noise wind surface drag coefficient. As the terrain gets rougher, the surface drag value will
increase.
Turbulence Scale
This is the turbulence scale in meters. As the terrain gets rougher, the turbulence scale value reduces.
Mean Speed
This is the mean wind speed in m/s. The higher the mean speed the more turbulent the air will be.
Frequency
This is the Noise Fundamental Frequency in Radian per seconds.
N
This is the Frequency Component Number.
11-320
AC Elements
Sample Data
You can click on the Sample Data button in order to randomly generate wind noise / turbulence that will
be used for the simulation.
11-321
AC Elements
11.12.7 Controls Page

The data on the WTG Controls page is analyzed by the Transient Stability module. Using it, you can
define controls for each WTG based on Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4 wind turbine generators. Click on the
Sample Data button in each area to reload ETAP default data into these fields.
Type 2 WECC Control WT2E
Rotor Resistance Control

For more information about the dynamic transfer function for this controller, please refer to the dynamic
models chapter in the ETAP user guide.
Model Type
It shows model type of the control. The parameters are described below.
Kp
This allows the user to enter the power filter gain in pu.
Kw
This allows the user to enter the speed filter gain in pu.
11-322
AC Elements
Kpp
This allows the user to enter the PI controller proportional gain in pu.
Kip
This allows the user to enter PI controller integral gain in pu.
Tp
This allows the user to enter the power filter time constant in sec.
Tw
This allows the user to enter the speed filter time constant in sec.
Rmax
This allows the user to enter the rising rate limiter in degrees per second.
Rmin
This allows the user to enter the falling rate limiter in degrees per second.
P vs Slip Curve
Define the power (pu) versus slip curve (%) which is obtained from the turbine model and then passed to
the generator model as external rotor resistance adjustments.
11-323
AC Elements
Type 3 WECC Control WT3E

Reactive Power Control
Model Type
It shows model type of the control. Parameters are described below.
Kiv
Enter the Enter integral gain in voltage regulator.
Kpv
Enter the proportional gain in voltage regulator.
Kqi
Enter the reactive control gain.
Kqv
Enter the terminal voltage control gain.
Fn
Enter the the fraction of WTG in wind plant that are on line.
11-324
AC Elements
Tr
Enter the voltage control time constant in seconds.
Tv
Enter the proportional path time constant in seconds.
Tc
Enter the filter time constant in seconds.
Tp
Enter the power factor regulator time constant in seconds.
varflg
Enter the Var control type flag.
vltflg
Enter the voltage flag.
Qmax
Enter the maximum reactive power limit in voltage regulator.
Qmin
Enter the minimum reactive power limit in voltage regulator.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage limit.
11-325
AC Elements
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage limit.
XIQmax
Enter the terminal voltage regulator maximum limit.
XIQmin
Enter the minimum voltage regulator maximum limit.
Active Power (Torque) Control

Model Type
Kptrq
Enter the torque control proportional gain.
Kitrq
Enter the torque control integral gain.
Pmax
Enter the maximum active power limit.
Pmin
Enter the minimum active power limit.
Ipmax
Enter the maximum current.
Tsp
Enter the active power time constant in sec.
Tpc
Enter the power control time constant in sec.
Tmax
Enter the torque control block anti-wind upper limit.
Tmin
Enter the torque control block anti-wind lower limit.
dPmax/dt
Enter the active power control rate limit.
11-326
AC Elements
Type 3 - Generic Control

Converter Control
Model Type
Rc
Enter the compensating line resistance in ohms.
Xc
Enter the compensating line reactance in ohms.
Ti
Enter the converter time constant in seconds.
Tr
Tv
11-327
AC Elements
Tpc
Enter the power order control time constant in seconds
Kp
Enter the converter proportional gain factor in pu.
Ki
Enter the converter integral gain in pu.
Kpv
Enter the voltage control proportional gain in pu.
Kiv
Enter the voltage control integral gain in pu.
Pmax
Enter the maximum power order in percent.
Pmin
Enter the minimum power order in percent.
Qmax
Enter the maximum reactive power in percent.
Qmin
Enter the minimum reactive power in percent.
Vmax
Enter the maximum rotor voltage in percent.
Vmin
Enter the minimum rotor voltage in percent.
Rate_max
Enter the maximum power order rate of change in percent/sec.
Rate_min
Enter the minimum power order rate of change in percent/sec.
11-328
AC Elements
Type 4 WECC Control (WT4E)

Converter Electrical Control
Model Type
Kiv
Enter the integral gain in voltage regulator .
Kpv
Enter the proportional gain in voltage regulator .
Kqi
Enter the reactive control gain .
Kvi
Enter the terminal voltage control integral gain .
Fn
Enter the the fraction of WTG in wind plant that are on line .
11-329
AC Elements
Tr
Enter the voltage control time constant in seconds .
Tv
Enter the proportional path time constant in seconds .
Tc
Enter the filter time constant in seconds .
Tp
Enter the power factor regulator time constant in seconds .
varflg
Enter the Var control type flag.
pfaflg
Enter power factor flag (0= Q priority, 1=PF priority).
Qmax
Enter the maximum reactive power limit in voltage regulator.
Qmin
Enter the minimum reactive power limit in voltage regulator.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage limit .
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage limit .
Converter Current Limiter

Model Type
It shows the model type of the control. The Parameters are described below.
ImaxTD
Enter the converter current limit .
Iqhl
Enter the hard limit on reactive power in pu .
Iphl
Enter the hard limit on real power in up .
pqflag
Enter the PQ flag (0=Q priority, 1=PF priority).
Vt1
Enter Vt point 1.
11-330
AC Elements
Vt2
Enter Vt point 2.
Iqmxv2
Enter Iqmxv point 2 (qmax).
Iqmxv1
Enter Iqmxv point 1.
11.12.8 Pitch Control

A wind turbine is designed to produce a maximum of power at wide spectrum of wind speeds. All wind
turbines are designed for a maximum wind speed, called the survival speed, above which they do not
survive. The survival speed of commercial wind turbines is in the range of 40 m/s (144 km/h, 89 MPH) to
72 m/s (259 km/h, 161 MPH). The most common survival speed is 60 m/s (216 km/h, 134 MPH). The
wind turbines have three modes of operation:
Below rated wind speed operation

Around rated wind speed operation (usually at nameplate capacity)
Above rated wind speed operation
If the rated wind speed is exceeded the power has to be limited. There are various ways to achieve this.
A control system involves three basic elements: sensors to measure process variables, actuators to
manipulate energy capture and component loading, and control algorithms to coordinate the actuators
based on information gathered by the sensors.
Stall
Stalling works by increasing the angle at which the relative wind strikes the blades (angle of attack), and
it reduces the induced drag (drag associated with lift). Stalling is simple because it can be made to happen
passively (it increases automatically when the winds speed up), but it increases the cross-section of the
blade face-on to the wind, and thus the ordinary drag. A fully stalled turbine blade, when stopped, has the
flat side of the blade facing directly into the wind.
A fixed-speed horizontal axis wind turbine (HAWT) inherently increases its angle of attack at higher
wind speed as the blades speed up. A natural strategy, then, is to allow the blade to stall when the wind
speed increases. This technique was successfully used on many early HAWTs. However, on some of
these blade sets, it was observed that the degree of blade pitch tended to increase audible noise levels.
Vortex generators may be used to control the lift characteristics of the blade. The VGs are placed on the
airfoil to enhance the lift if they are placed on the lower (flatter) surface or limit the maximum lift if
placed on the upper (higher camber) surface.
Pitch control
Curling works by decreasing the angle of attack, which reduces the induced drag from the lift of the rotor,
as well as the cross-section. One major problem in designing wind turbines is getting the blades to stall or
furl quickly enough should a gust of wind cause sudden acceleration. A fully furled turbine blade, when
stopped, has the edge of the blade facing into the wind.
11-331
AC Elements
Standard modern turbines all pitch the blades in high winds. Since pitching requires acting against the
torque on the blade, it requires some form of pitch angle control, which is achieved with a slewing drive.
This drive precisely angles the blade while withstanding high torque loads. In addition, many turbines use
hydraulic systems. These systems are usually spring loaded, so that if hydraulic power fails, the blades
automatically furl. Other turbines use an electric servomotor for every rotor blade. They have a small
battery-reserve in case of an electric-grid breakdown. Small wind turbines (under 50 kW) with variablepitching generally use systems operated by centrifugal force, either by flyweights or geometric design,
and employ no electric or hydraulic controls.
One can define the Pitch Control factors for each WTG. Click on the Sample Data button to reload ETAP
default data for pitch control.
Type 1 - WECC Control (WT1P)

Pitch Control
Model Type
This displays the model type of the pitch control. Parameters are described below.
Kdroop
Enter the droop gain of generator power in pu .
Kp
Enter the proportional gain in pu .
11-332
AC Elements
Ki
Enter the integral gain in pu .
Tpe
Enter the power filter time constant in sec .
T1
Enter the output filter1 time constant in sec .
T2
Enter the output filter2 time constant in sec .
Pimax
Enter the maximum output limit .
Pimin
Enter the minimum output limit .
Type 2 - WECC Control (WT2P)

Pitch Control
Model Type
This displays the model type of pitch control. Parameters are described below.
11-333
AC Elements
Kdroop
This allows the user to enter the droop gain of generator power in pu .
Kp
This allows the user to enter the proportional gain in pu .
Ki
This allows the user to enter the integral gain in pu .
Tpe
This allows the user to enter the power filter time constant in sec .
T1
This allows the user to enter the output filter1 time constant in sec .
T2
This allows the user to enter the output filter2 time constant in sec .
Pimax
This allows the user to enter the maximum output limit .
Pimin
This allows the user to enter the minimum output limit.
11-334
AC Elements
Type 3 - WECC Control

Pitch Control
Model Type
This displays the model type of pitch control. Parameters are described below.
Kpp
Enter the pitch control proportional gain in deg./pu speed.
Kip
Enter the pitch control integrator gain in deg./pu P-sec.
Kpc
Enter the pitch compensator proportional gain in deg./pu P.
Kic
Enter the pitch compensator integral gain in deg./(pu Psec).
Plmax
Enter the maximum pitch angle in degrees.
11-335
AC Elements
Plmin
Enter the minimum pitch angle in degrees.
Tp
Enter the blade response time constant in sec.
Pset
Enter power set point in pu.
wmax
Enter pitch control anti-windup upper limit.
wmin
Enter pitch control anti-windup lower limit.
Pmax
Enter pitch compensator anti-windup upper limit.
Pmin
Enter pitch compensator anti-windup lower limit.
Plrate
Enter pitch rate limit in deg/sec.
11-336
AC Elements
Type 3 and Generic Control

Pitch Control
Model Type
It shows model type of the pitch control. Parameters are described below.
K
Enter the control gain in pu.
Ts
Enter the control time constant in seconds.
Rmax
Enter the rising rate limiter in degrees per second.
Rmin
Enter the falling rate limiter in degrees per second.
Theta_max
Enter the maximum pitch angle in degrees.
11-337
AC Elements
Theta_min
Enter the minimum pitch angle in degrees.
Wmax
This is the maximum generator operation speed in percent.
11-338
AC Elements
Inertia Calculator
Turbine, Gear, and Generator RPM, WR2, and H
Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
Turbine, Gear, and Generator. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when one of them is known and RPM has
been entered based on the following equation:
H = 2.31 * 10-10 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA

or
-9
H = 5.48 * 10 * WR * RPM / MVA
Total RPM
The Total RPM is equal to the Generator revolutions per minute.
Total WR2
The Total WR2 for Turbine, Gear, and Generator in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on system unit, as calculated
based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
11-339
AC Elements
Total H
This is the total inertia of the generator shaft including Turbine, Gear, and Generator in MW-sec/MVA.
As noted, some of the below fields accept user-defined data.
RPM/Turbine
This is the turbine rated speed in RPMs.
RPM/Gear
This is the gear rated speed in RPMs. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.
RPM/Generator
This is the generator rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPMs).
WR2/Turbine
This is the Turbine WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters
in this field.
WR2/Gear
This is the Gear WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in
this field.
WR2/Generator
This is the Generator WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters
in this field.
H/Turbine
This is the Turbine inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
H/Gear
This is the Gear inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
H/Generator
This is the Generator inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
11-340
AC Elements
A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this leads
MTTR
This is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR (=
8760/MTTR).
11-341
AC Elements
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/A).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR and A (FOR=
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick Editor for reliability data.
11-342
AC Elements
11.12.11
Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this element. The names of the UserDefined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu bar.




11-343
AC Elements
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-344
AC Elements
Comment Page
Enter any extra data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this
element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to
the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
11-345
AC Elements
Photovoltaic (PV) Array
11.13 Photovoltaic (PV) Array

PV array is one of the important elements of renewable energy, micro-grid, smart grid, etc. It converts
solar radiation energy into direct current using semiconductors and then to electric power through
inverters. ETAP PV Array is used to represent individual panels connected in series and parallel
combinations with a grid tied inverter and represents blocks of PV power. As shown below, a number of
modules make up a typical PV panel that can be connected in a string configuration in order to achieve
desired current and voltage at the inverter input.
You can enter the properties associated with Photovoltaic (PV) array including solar irradiance and
inverter of the electrical distribution system using PV Array Editor.
The physics of the PV cell is very similar to the classical p-n junction diode. When light is absorbed by
the junction, the energy of the absorbed photons is transferred to the electron system of the material,
resulting in the creation of charge carriers that are separated at the junction. The charge carriers may be
electron-ion pairs in a liquid electrolyte, or electron hole pairs in a solid semiconducting material. The
charge carriers in the junction region create a potential gradient, get accelerated under the electric field
and circulate as the current through an external circuit. The current squared times the resistance of the
circuit is the power converted into electricity. The remaining power of the photon elevates the
temperature of the cell.
Several PV cells make a module and several modules make an array. In ETAP we define the PV panel
information and specify the number of panels connected in series and parallel that make up the final PV
array.
11-346
AC Elements
The PV Array Editor includes the following seven pages of properties:

Info
Inverter
Comment
PV Panel
Physical
PV Array
Remarks
11.13.1 Info Page

You can specify the PV array ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment Tag #, Name,
Description, Data Type and Priority within the fields of the Info page. After selecting a PV array from the
library (see PV Panel page of PV Array Editor), its header information will be updated accordingly.
Info
This section is for PV array ID and connected bus information.
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each PV array. The assigned IDs consist of the default PVA
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of PV arrays increase. The
default ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar.
11-347
AC Elements
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the PV array. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a PV array to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the PV array resides, i.e., you
cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network. ETAP displays the
nominal kV of the bus next to the bus ID for your convenience.
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a PV array can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or
Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of Service element can be edited
like an In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system
studies. When the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
11-348
AC Elements
Lock / Unlock
11.13.2 PV Panel Page

A PV array can be made up of a number of PV panels in series and parallel. On this page, the user can
specify the individual PV panel rating including P-V and I-V curves that make up the entire PV array.
Current versus voltage (I-V) characteristics of the PV module can be defined in sunlight and under dark
conditions. In the first quadrant, the top left of the I-V curve at zero voltage is called the short circuit
current. This is the current measured with the output terminals shorted (zero voltage). The bottom right of
the curve at zero current is called the open-circuit voltage. This is the voltage measured with the output
terminals open (zero current).
If the voltage is externally applied in the reverse direction, for example, during a system fault transient,
the current remains flat and the power is absorbed by the cell. However, beyond a certain negative
voltage, the junction breaks down as in a diode, and the current rises to a high value. In the dark, the
current is zero for voltage up to the breakdown voltage which is the same as in the illuminated condition.
11-349
AC Elements
11-350
AC Elements
Rating
Power
Enter the individual panel rated power in watts (W). Note that if a model is selected from the library then
the power property is read-only since this information is linked to the library. The maximum power
delivered by the PV panel, Pmax, is the area of the largest rectangle under the I-V curve as shown below.
Tol. P
This allows the user to enter the panel power tolerance in watts. The tolerance is specified by the
manufacturer, however in ETAP this field is not used and is provided for information purposes only.
Vmp
This allows the user to enter the maximum peak power voltage of an individual panel in volts (V).
Voc
Enter the open circuit voltage of an individual panel in volts (V).
% Eff
It shows the calculated panel efficiency in percent.
Panel efficiency = Power / (Area in m^2 * Base Irradiance in W/m^2)
Area is calculated from length and width of Physical page of PV Array Editor.
Imp
Enter the maximum peak power current of an individual panel in amperes.
Isc
Enter the short circuit current of an individual panel in amperes.
11-351
AC Elements
% Fill Factor
It shows the calculated panel fill factor in percent. The % fill factor is the actual panel maximum power
output as a percentage of the theoretical maximum power output. Fill factor should be greater than 0.7
for higher quality panels.
Performance Adjustment Coefficients

Temperature affects the performance of the PV panels. The magnitude of this reduction is inversely
proportional to VOC; that is, cells with higher values of VOC suffer smaller reductions in voltage with
increasing temperature. For most crystalline silicon solar cells the change in VOC with temperature is
about -0.50%/C, though the rate for the highest-efficiency crystalline silicon cells is around -0.35%/C.
By way of comparison, the rate for amorphous silicon solar cells is -0.20%/C to -0.30%/C, depending
on how the cell is made. The amount of photogenerated current IL increases slightly with temperature
increases because of an increase in the number of thermally generated carriers in the cell. This effect is
slight, however: about 0.065%/C for crystalline silicon cells and 0.09% for amorphous silicon cells.
Most crystalline silicon solar cells decline in efficiency by 0.50%/C and most amorphous cells decline
by 0.15-0.25%/C. The figure above shows I-V curves that might typically be seen for a crystalline
silicon solar cell at various temperatures.
Temperature Alpha Isc

This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for short circuit current. This coefficient is used to
calculate the short circuit current.
Beta Voc
This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for open circuit voltage. This coefficient is used to
calculate the open circuit voltage of the panel.
11-352
AC Elements
Irradiance Delta Voc

This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for open circuit voltage. This coefficient is used to
calculate the open circuit voltage based on irradiance levels other than base irradiance.
Base
This section consists of Temp, Irrad and NOCT fields, and they are described below.
Temp
This allows the user to enter the base temperature used by manufacturer to determine rated panel power in
degrees Celsius (C). If data is not selected from the library then the base can be defined or changed.
Default base for temperature is 25 degrees C.
Irrad
This allows the user to enter the base irradiance used by manufacturer to determine rated panel power in
W/m^2. If data is not selected from the library then the base can be defined or changed. Default base for
irradiance is 1000 W/m^2. If data is selected from the library then base irradiance field cannot be edited
and is obtained from the library.
NOCT
This allows the user to enter the normal operating cell temperature (NOCT) in degrees Celsius (C).
Default NOCT is 45 degrees C.
P-V Curve
A P-V curve will be generated using the PV array rating data. Maximum power point will be shown in the
graph.
I-V Curve
An I-V curve will be generated using the PV array rating data. Maximum power point will be shown in
the graph as well.
Library
You can bring existing data from library. Click Library button and it will launch the Library Quick Pick
page with available PV array manufacturers. Select a desired manufacturer and model from the list and
bring the data for simulation.
11-353
AC Elements
11.13.3 PV Array Page
11-354
AC Elements
PV Panel
Watt/Panel
It shows the individual panel rated power in watts entered in PV Panel page of PV Array Editor. This
field is display only.
# in Series
This allows the user to enter the number of PV panels connected in series. Series connected panels
increase the overall string voltage.
# in Parallel
This allows the user to enter the number of PV panels connected in parallel. Parallel connected panels
increase the overall string current in amps.
PV Array (Total) # of Panels

This is a calculated field and shows the calculated total number of panels based on number connected in
parallel and series
Volts, dc
This is the total DC voltage calculated based on the number of panels in series.
11-355
AC Elements
kW, dc
This is the total DC power in kW calculated based on the number of panels in series and parallel that
make up the PV array.
Amps, dc
This is the calculated DC current of the entire PV array based on the number of panels in parallel.
Generation Category
This section shows names of the 10 generation categories. These names are defined in project settings and
are used for utility and generator components as well.
Irradiance
This is the value of direct solar irradiance incident on the PV panel in watts per square meter (W/m^2).
The collector tilt angle is assumed to be optimized such that it is always perpendicular to the solar
position. The value in this column is defaulted initially. Irradiance can be user entered or updated using
the solar position calculator (Irradiance Calc). Based on the irradiance value, the power output from the
PV array is calculated and displayed in the MPP kW column.
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius (C) where the PV panels are placed. Ta is user-defined
and based on the data, the power output from the PV array is updated and displayed in the MPP kW
column.
Tc
This is the PV array cell temperature. As irradiance and ambient temperature Ta are changed, the cell
temperature Tc is recalculated. The higher the Tc the lower the efficiency and power output from the
panel.
MPP kW
This is the maximum peak power output from the PV array in kW based on irradiance level and ambient
temperature.
Irradiance Calc.
This is an irradiance calculator. Click on the Irradiance Calc. button to launch the irradiance calculator.
The calculation is based on user entering location information, date and time, and the calculator will
determine the theoretical irradiance in W/m^2. All calculation results are given at sea level.
11-356
AC Elements
Latitude
Enter the latitude in degrees. North of the equator is defined as the positive direction.
Longitude
Enter the longitude in degrees. West of the Prime Meridian is defined as the positive direction.
Time Zone
Enter the time zone offset in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) for the specified latitude and longitude.
Local Time
This is automatically the system / computer time at the instant the calculator is launched and may be
changed to any other local time.
Date
This is automatically the current system / computer date at the instant the calculator is launched and may
be changed to another date.
Calculate
Click this button to use the location, time and date information in order to calculate solar position and
irradiance.
Declination
In astronomy, declination is one of the two coordinates of the equatorial coordinate system, the other
being either right ascension or hour angle. Declination in astronomy is comparable to geographic latitude,
but projected onto the celestial sphere. Declination is measured in degrees north and south of the celestial
11-357
AC Elements
equator. Points north of the celestial equator have positive declinations, while those to the south have
negative declinations.
Equation of Time
The equation of time is the difference between apparent solar time and mean solar time measured at a
given instant at the same point on the Earth. At any given instant that difference is the same everywhere.
Solar Altitude
The solar altitude is the elevation angle of the sun. It is the angle between the geometric center of the
sun's apparent disk and the (idealized) horizon.
Solar Azimuth.
For an observer, the solar azimuth is the angle measured clockwise from North to the vertical plane
formed by the sun and the location of the observer.
Solar Time
Solar time is a reckoning of the passage of time based on the Sun's position in the sky. The fundamental
unit of solar time is the day. When the Sun is visible, an observer at any longitude may measure the Sun's
position in the sky and calculate its hour angle, which is interpreted as local time for that observer.
Sunrise
Sunrise is the instant at which the upper edge of the Sun appears above the horizon in the east.
Sunset
Sunset or sundown is the daily disappearance of the Sun below the horizon in the west as a result of
Earth's rotation. The time of sunset is defined in astronomy as the moment the trailing edge of the Sun's
disk disappears below the horizon in the west.
Air Mass
The amount of sunlight either absorbed or scattered depends on the length of the path through the
atmosphere. This path is generally compared with a vertical path directly to sea level, which is designated
as air mass = 1 (AM1). Air Mass will be more than unity for non-vertical sun angles.
Irradiance
Solar Irradiance is the power per unit area available at a location due to solar radiation. This irradiance
varies throughout the year depending on the seasons. It also varies throughout the day, depending on the
position of the sun in the sky, and the weather.
11-358
AC Elements
11.13.4 Inverter Page

All fields in this page are display only.
PV Array - Total Rated

This section shows voltage (Volts, dc), power (W, dc) and current (Amps, dc) from the PV Array page of
PV Array Editor. It helps to see PV array ratings and inverter ratings together.
Inverter
This section summarizes the inverter AC and DC power information.
ID
It shows a unique inverter ID (name) with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
DC
This row summarizes the DC rating of the inverter.
kW
Input DC power rating in kW.
V
Input DC input voltage in volts.
11-359
AC Elements
FLA
DC current rating in amperes.
%EFF
DC to AC conversion efficiency of inverter in percent.
AC
This row summarizes the AC rating of the inverter.
kW
Output AC power rating in kVA.
kV
Rated AC output voltage in kV.
FLA
AC current rating in amperes.
%PF
Rated power factor in percent.
Inverter Editor
You can edit inverter data using the regular inverter editor. Click on the Inverter Editor button to launch
a regular Inverter Editor with Info page, Rating page, Generation page, Harmonic page, etc. You can
change/enter inverter data, AC operating mode and other characteristics using this regular inverter editor,
and this data will be reflected/affected to the Inverter section of Inverter page of PV Array Editor. For
more information on the Inverter editor refer to the section in the AC/DC elements chapter.
11-360
AC Elements
PV Array to Inverter Cable

By default the equipment cable does not exists and all fields in this section are left blank.
Cable Library
Click on Cable Library button to open the Cable Library Quick Pick and then you may pick a cable from
the list.
Cable Editor
When a cable has not been selected from library, this button is invisible. If it is visible, you can click on
this button to open the DC Cable Editor. The editor allows you to edit/enter DC cable data. For more
information on the DC Cable editor refer to the section in the DC elements chapter.
Delete Cable
This button is enabled only when a cable has been selected from the library. Clicking on the button will
null the cable selection and disable the Cable Editor and Delete Cable buttons.
11-361
AC Elements

This page allows you to enter physical structure information of the PV array (e.g. length, width, depth and
weight). If PV array is picked from the library then module physical information comes from the library.
If library information is not selected then users can enter this data manually.
Length
Enter the panel length in inches or centimeters.
Width
Enter the panel width in inches or centimeters.
Depth
Enter the panel depth in inches or centimeters. This field is optional.
Weight
Enter the panel weight in pounds or kilograms. This field is optional.
11-362
AC Elements
User-Defined Info
These fields allow the user to keep track of extra data associated with this element. The names of the




11-363
AC Elements
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
This allows the user to enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this
element, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or
specifications for this element.
Reference
This allows the user to enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, using
up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Manufacturer
Name
This allows the user to enter the manufacturers name for this element here, using up to 25 alphanumeric
characters.
Purchase Date
This allows the user to enter the date of purchase for this element here, using up to 8 alphanumeric
characters.

This allows the user to enter any extra data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or
studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase
the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
11-364
AC Elements
Induction Machine
11.14 Induction Machine

You can enter the properties associated with induction machines of the electrical distribution system
using this editor.
The Induction Machine Editor includes the following thirteen pages of properties:
Info
Inertia
Start Dev.
Cable Amp
Comment
Nameplate
Protection
Start Cat.
Reliability
Model
Load Model
Cable/Vd
Remarks
11.14.1 Info Page

You can specify the induction machine ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, Name, Description, Load Priority, Data Type, Configuration Status, Quantity of Induction Machines,
Phase Connection, and Demand Factor within the fields of the Info page.
Info
ID
11-262
AC Elements
Induction Machine
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each induction machine. The assigned IDs consist of the
default induction machine ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
of induction machines increase. The default induction machine ID (Mtr) can be changed from the
Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the induction machine. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an induction machine to a bus,
select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the induction machine resides,
i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If an induction machine is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
induction machine to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where Mtr3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
State
11-263
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Equipment
Tag #
This allows the user to enter the the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description
App. Type
Select the application type (either motor or generator) for this induction machine type.
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Configuration
Select the operating status of the induction machine(s) for the selected configuration status from the list
box. Options for operating status include the following:
Status
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare
Description
Continuously operating load
Intermittently operating load
Spare load (no short-circuit contribution)
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the machine is
determined for Load Flow and Motor Starting Studies.
11-264
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Note: Status is not a part of the machine engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the machine status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a machine
is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the induction machine. Select the phase connection type from the list box.
Options for phase connection include:
Selection
3 Phase
1 Phase
Description
3-phase machine
Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B or C.
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC, or CA
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of induction machines for this machine ID. This allows you to group
identical machines together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram. View the
explanations below to see how ETAP handles Quantity in Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Arc Flash, and
Sequence-of-Operation.
Load Flow:
Notice in the following example of a load flow calculation the current at Bus 2 is equivalent to the sum of
each current going to each load at bus 4. This occurs because the quantity of Motor 1 is changed to three.
ETAP simulates the effect of what you see in the system powered by U2 without having to display each
load.
11-265
AC Elements
Induction Machine
In the diagram above, the fuse is red which is showing a critical alert. In the alert view below, Fuse1 is
shown to be operating at 156.569. The critical alert for the protective device used on a load with a
quantity greater than one is based on the operating current calculated by the characteristics of a single
load.
Short-Circuit:
In the following Short-Circuit Analysis Motor 1 is contributing 1.13kA to the system. Because Motor 1
has a quantity of three, that current is three times the current that would be seen with a single motor. The
load terminal fault current is shown as the current for each load.
11-266
AC Elements
Induction Machine
shown to be operating at 30.645. The critical alert for the protective device used on a load with a quantity
greater than one is based on the operating short-circuit current calculated by the characteristics of a single
load.
11-267
AC Elements
Induction Machine
You cannot run Sequence-of-Operation if you have a Quantity greater than one. Sequence-of-Operation
is not used to run simultaneous faults on loads.
Arc Flash
In the following Arc Flash example, the bus Arc Flash characteristics of Bus 2 is equal to Bus 4. The
reason is that Motor 1 has a quantity of three which is a quick way of showing what you see in the system
under Utility 2.
11-268
AC Elements
Induction Machine
The Arc Flash Analysis report shows the incident energy at the terminal of Motor 1 is equal to the
incident energy of the terminal at each motor in the equivalent One-Line View. The incident energy of a
motor with a quantity greater than one is shown as the incident energy calculated by the characteristics of
a single load.
11-269
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Demand factor
Modify the demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status in the provided entry fields.
Demand factor is the amount of time the induction machine is actually operating. Demand factor affects
the following calculations:
Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
This pertains when the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified
% loading from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.
Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
demand factors are a part of engineering properties, ETAP uses the same factors for all configurations.
11.14.2 Nameplate Page

On this page, you can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings). Select Motor Library data, specify %
loading, and display motor loading and feeder losses for all Loading Categories.
11-270
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Ratings
Design
The list for induction motor design standard has two options to select: NEMA and Other. Select the
NEMA standard to indicate that the motor follows the NEMA design standard. Note that NEMA
standard is applicable only to motors equal to or less than 500 hp.
HP/kW
Enter the machine output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two
options by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equations for the nameplate
parameters:
Rated kVA
= HP * 0.7457/( PF * Eff )
= kW/( PF * Eff )
Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA/(3 * kV )

= Rated kVA/kV
Rating in HP
Rating in kW
3-phase machines
Single phase machines
where the PF and Eff are at full load condition (100% loading).
MVA/kVA
You can toggle between these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button. The machine rating will
be displayed in MVA or kVA and the machine operating load and feeder losses in (MW + j Mvar) or (kW
+ j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the machine in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for 3-phase machines.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the machine in amperes. This is the current the machine will pull
from the system when it is fully loaded (that is, when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW),
rated kV, and rated frequency). When you modify FLA, the machine efficiency at 100% loading is
recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100%
or be below 10%.
OL % -- Over-Load Percent
Enter motor over-load level in percent. The default value, 100%, is entered in the field, the corresponding
%PF and %EFF fields displays the rated PF and EFF. When a value different from 100% is entered, the
%PF and %EFF fields for over-load become editable for you to enter values for the specified overloading
condition.
Note that the value in this field also determines the method used for calculating PF (or EFF) for motor
power displayed in the Loading section when the %Loading is larger than 100%. If the value is 100%,
then the same method as in the previous version of ETAP is used to calculate PF (or EFF) for overloading
conditions. If the value is different from 100%, the PF (or EFF) for overloading conditions will be
calculated by linear interpolation/extrapolation based on the PF (or EFF) values at the rated and this
specified over-load condition.
11-271
AC Elements
Induction Machine
% PF
Enter the machine power factor in percent at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading as well as the no-load and
over loading conditions. The power factor at 100% loading is the rated power factor and is used for
calculating the rated values. (That is, when you change the power factor at 100% loading, the machine
full load current is recalculated.) All five values of the power factors are used for determining the
operating power factor of the machine under different percent loading. (In other words, when you change
any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading categories are
recalculated.)
The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. Since induction machines always
take reactive power (kvars) from the system, they have a lagging power factor, which must be entered as a
positive value.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the machine, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading as well as the no-load
and over loading conditions. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% and the value for 0% load is fixed at 0. The
efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when
you change the efficiency at 100% loading, the machine full load current is recalculated. All five values
of the efficiencies are used for determining the machine efficiency under different percent loading, i.e.,
when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder losses for all
loading categories are recalculated.
% FLA or Amp
Displayed in this line is the machine current, in percent of FLA or Amp, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading
as well as the over loading condition. The current values are calculated based on the PF and EFF for the
corresponding loading level. The No-Load (NL) current is an editable field for the user to specify motor
input current due to losses. By default, the NL current is set to zero. Clicking on the %FLA/Amp button
toggles the unit for the displayed current values.
Rated %Slip and RPM

Enter the rated slip or rated RPM (Speed in revolutions per second) for this machine. Slip is in percent.
When one of these values is entered, the other is calculated based on the following relation:
Rated RPM = (100 - %Slip)*Nominal RPM
where Nominal RPM is calculated based on the poles.
The maximum rated speed is used by ETAP to calculate the torque at full load.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the machine is
recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per minute).
RPM = 120 * Freq./Poles
SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. Service factor is not used for calculation of
loading or feeder losses. ETAP gives you the option to use the service factor for voltage drop
calculations of the machine feeder.
11-272
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Library
Access the Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library
Quick Pick - Motor. Motor Nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by
highlighting and double-clicking on the selection. Library data includes motor ratings such as HP/kW,
kV, FLA, PF, Eff, and Pole (transferred to the Nameplate page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR
PF, X, X, X, X2, X0, X/R, and T (transferred to the Model page). The library selected is displayed
next to the library button.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this machine,
i.e., each machine can be set to have a different operating loading (generator) level for each loading
category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column.
The loading value can be entered in percent or in HP (kW). When a new value is entered in one field, the
other field will be calculated accordingly.
Note: You can select any of these loading categories when conducting Load Flow and Motor Starting
Studies.
ETAP uses the specified percent loading of each loading category to calculate the operating power factor
and efficiency from the values specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading as well as the no-load and over
loading conditions. This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for
power factor and efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and
display the operating kW and kvar loading, as well as the feeder losses, if an equipment cable with a nonzero length is specified for this load.
Note: Although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and feeder losses, the value
of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating power factor and efficiency.
To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project Menu.
11-273
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Operating Load
Operating Load can be updated from the Load Flow Study Case Editor. The operating load option is
available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Management System) feature.
When the operating load box is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor, the calculation results are
updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP
key does not have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the Element Editor;
however, this data cannot be used in a later study.
11.14.3 Typical Nameplate Data

You can choose from typical nameplate data, once a voltage and kW/HP are specified in a Machine
Editor.
NEC
NEC data is available for a selected range of machine sizes and voltage levels. NEC specifies an
ampacity. ETAP calculates %Efficiency and kVA using the NEC Ampacity value and a typical %Power
Factor.
MFR
Manufacturer typical data is available for any machine size. Ampacity and kVA are calculated using
typical %Power Factor and %Efficiency.
Existing
A machine is considered to have an existing set of data after NEC or MFR have been selected. You can
decide not to update parameters after changing a size or voltage level by choosing to keep the existing set
of data.
Library Button
This button will bring up the Motor Library Quick Pick.
11-274
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
This is the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the
motor. Note that the three fields (%LRC, LRA and LR kVA/HP) are related to each other. When a new
value is entered in one of the fields, the other two fields will be updated automatically.
LRC
This is the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in ampere. Note that the three fields (%LRC,
LRA and LR kVA/HP) are related to each other. When a new value is entered in one of the fields, the
other two fields will be updated automatically.
LR kVA/HP
This is the ratio of machine locked-rotor kVA over rating in HP. Note that the three fields (%LRC, LRA
and LR kVA/HP) are related to each other. When a new value is entered in one of the fields, the other two
fields will be updated automatically.
For a machine by NEMA design standard, this field is also related to the Code Letter and Ratio Range
fields. When a new LR kVA/HP value is entered, the Code Letter and Ratio Range fields will be updated
accordingly. Note that per NEMA standard, the higher boundary value of the ratio is excluded from the
11-275
AC Elements
Induction Machine
range. For example, for code letter E the range shows 4.5 to 5.0 and for code letter F it shows 5.0 to 5.6.
The ratio 5.0 belongs to code letter F. Therefore, if you select code letter E from the list, the LR kVA/HP
filed will be updated as 4.99 which is the highest value in the range for code letter E.
Code Letter
When Design standard in the Nameplate page is selected as NEMA, this field shows the NEMA design
code letter for the motor. Note that the three fields (Code Letter, Ratio Range and LR kVA/HP) are
related to each other. If a new code letter is selected from the list, the corresponding ration range will be
displayed and the high end ratio will be set in the LR kVA/HP field.
Code Letter Ratio Range

When Design standard in the Nameplate page is selected as NEMA, this field displays the LR kVA/HP
ratio range according NEMA standard.
% PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent. This field is related to the locked-rotor X/R field next to
it. Whenever when one of the fields is changed, the other is updated automatically.
X/R
This is the locked-rotor X/R. It is related to the locked-rotor power factor field next to it. Whenever when
one of the fields is changed, the other is updated automatically.
T
This is the induction motor transient time constant in seconds. This value is used in the IEC 363 method.
Td = X/(2 f Rr)
Sequence Z
X
This is the transient reactance in percent (machine base), used for IEC short-circuit calculations. It is a
displayed value calculated based on %LRC and locked-rotor X/R.
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base), used for calculating short-circuit currents
for unbalanced faults.
X2
Analysis, Short-Circuit, and Unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X/R
This is the induction motors X/R ratio.
ANSI Short-Circuit Z
Std MF
sequence short-circuit impedances.
11-276
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Note: The IEC Short-Circuit Method does not use these impedances.
Xsc
HP kW
> 1000 HP
> 250 HP
50 HP
< 50 HP
RPM
>745.7
> 186.4
37.28
<37.28
1800
3600
other
Cycle Network
1.0/LRC
1.0/LRC
1.2/LRC
1.67/LRC
Xsc
1.5-4 Cycle Network

1.5/LRC
1.5/LRC
3.0/LRC
Infinity
User Defined
If you select the User Defined option, you can directly enter the short-circuit impedances in percent with
motor ratings as the base.
From T
This option considers decay in symmetrical short-circuit current contribution from induction motor based
on the time constant T. When this option is selected, the cycle Xsc value is calculated based on motor
LRC and T at cycle time. The 1.5-4 cycle Xsc is calculated based on motor LRC and T at the time
define in the Cycle field next to it.
Cy
This is time in cycles for calculating motor reactance from T and LRC. This reactance value is used to
compute motor contribution during 1.5-4 cycle.
Torque
LR Torque
This is the locked Rotor Torque of the machine. You may enter the value as a percentage of the full load
torque or in actual unit. Once a new value is entered in one field, the other field is updated accordingly.
Max Torque
This is the maximum torque of the machine. You may enter the value as a percentage of the full load
torque or in actual unit. Once a new value is entered in one field, the other field is updated accordingly.
11-277
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Rated Torque
These two fields display machine rated torque as in percentage or in actual unit. The value in percent is
always 100.
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
The motor grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
Grounding Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:
Open
Solid
Resistor
Reactor

A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.)
Amp Rating
Enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes for resistor or reactor grounded motors.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohm Value)
Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the rated voltage of the machine divided by 3.
11-278
AC Elements
Induction Machine
11.14.5 Model Page
Clicking on this button will call up the Parameter Estimation module. See Chapter 30, Parameter
Estimation for more information on parameter estimation.
Model
stability analysis.
Note: The data in the Motor CKT model library is sample data. For a specific motor, enter the Motor
CKT Model provided by the manufacturer.
11-279
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Motor Designs (NEMA MG-1)
Classificati
on
Design B
Normal locked
rotor torque
and normal
locked rotor
current.
Design C
High locked
rotor torque
and normal
locked rotor
current.
Design D
High locked
rotor torque
and high slip.
Design E
IEC 34-12
Design N
locked rotor
torques and
currents.
Locked
Rotor
Torque
(% Rated
Load
Torque)
Breakdo
wn
Torque
(% Rated
Load
Torque)
Locked
Rotor
Current
(%
Rated
Load
Current
)
70-275*
175-300*
600-700
0.5-5
200-250*
190-225*
600-700
1-5
275
275
600-700
5-8
75-190*
160-200*
800-1000
0.5-3
11-280
Slip
(%)
Typical Applications
Fans, blowers, centrifugal

pumps and compressors,
motor-generator sets, etc.,
where starting torque
requirements are relatively
low.
Conveyors, crushers,
stirring machines, agitators,
reciprocating pumps and
compressors, etc., where
starting torque under load
are required.
High peak loads with or
without fly wheels such as
punch presses, shears,
elevators, extractors,
winches, hoists, oil-well
pumping, and wire-drawing
machines.
Fans, blowers, centrifugal
pumps and compressors,
motor-generator sets, etc.,
where starting torque
requirements are relatively
low.
Relative
Efficien
cy
Medium
or
High
Medium
Medium
High
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Note: Design a motor performance characteristics are similar to those for Design B except that the locked
rotor starting current is higher than the values shown in the table above.
CKT Model Library

stability analysis.
After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or
navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the following message to update (modify) some of the
nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.
Characteristic Model Library

You can access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and
clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick - Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library
data (slip, torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting
a Model ID. When you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor CKT Model Library data, the
library data is not transferred to the Machine Editor, i.e., a reference to the selected library design class
and model ID is kept with the machine. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run
Motor Starting Studies.
Note: The characteristic data is not considered a dynamic model for Transient Stability Studies.
11-281
AC Elements
Induction Machine
After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select
another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the message shown above to
update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the selected
library.
Print
Click on this selection to print the torque, current, & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for
the selected model (CKT or characteristic).
11.14.6 Update Model Parameter Data

ETAP recalculates model parameters after you select a new circuit or characteristic model. The update
occurs when you click OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to another
motor. ETAP prompts you with the following message to update (modify) some nameplate parameters
that do not match the calculated values using the selected model.
11-282
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Inertia Calculator
Motor, Coupling, and Load RPM, WR2, and H
Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
Motor, Coupling Gear, and Load. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when one of them is known and RPM has
H = 2.31 * 10-10 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA

or
-9
H = 5.48 * 10 * WR * RPM / MVA
Total RPM
The Total RPM is equal to the Motor RPM.
Total WR2
The Total WR2 is calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
This is the arithmetic sum of the Motor, Coupling and Load H in MW-sec/MVA.
11-283
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Shaft Torsion
Select this option to consider torsion effect between turbine, coupling gear, and generator during transient
stability calculations.
D1
This is the damping constant between turbine and coupling gear.
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and generator.
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of turbine and coupling gear.
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and generator.
11-284
AC Elements
Induction Machine
11.14.8 Load Model Page
For starting and braking purposes, also for the choice of a variable-speed motor, the torque curve (load
torque) of the driven machine must be known as a function of the speed. This is the mechanical load
connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third order polynomial of the motor
speed or by points of %slip and %torque versus motor speed.
The third order equation is defined as follows:
T = A0 + A1 + A22 + A33
Load Torque
None, Polynomial, or Curve
Selecting None indicates to ETAP that the load is not being modeled. Transient stability and motor
acceleration analyses will not run without this model.
Selecting Polynomial or Curve will bring up the library quick pick from which you will be able to select a
predefined model from the library.
Load Model Lib

You can access the motor load library data by clicking the Load Model Lib button and opening the library
quick pick. Motor Load Library data can be obtained by double-clicking the selection.
11-285
AC Elements
Induction Machine
There are four basic torque curves valid for the following main applications:
1. Load Torque practically remains constant or power is directly proportional to speed. This is in the
case of cranes, reciprocating pumps and compressors when pumping against constant pressure,
enclosed blowers, rolling mills, conveyors, mills without fans, machine tools with constant
cutting force.
2. Load Torque rises proportionally with speed or power is proportional to square of speed.
3. Load Torque rises proportionally with square of speed and power rises with the cube of speed.
This applies to centrifugal pumps, blowers, and reciprocating machines feeding in an open tubing
system
4. Load Torque falls in inverse proportion to speed and power remains constant. This applies in case
of lathes, coilers and also for variable speed drives.
Acceleration Time (Static Starting)

Enter No Load (0% Loading) and Full Load (100% Loading) motor acceleration time in seconds.
ETAP uses these values along with the motor percent loading to calculate the acceleration time for static
motor starting (that is, the motor will carry the full LRC for the entire acceleration time). If the motor
percent loading (Defined by the start category selected in the Study Case) is between 0 and 100%, ETAP
interpolates to find the acceleration time. If the motor percent loading is outside this range, ETAP
extrapolates to find the acceleration time.
These parameters are ignored for dynamic motor starting and the motor model, load model, and inertia
are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.
The Full Load Motor Acceleration Time is also used by Star when Constant Terminal Voltage is selected
under the Motor Starting Curve in the Protection Page. Star uses this time in conjunction with the rated
locked rotor current to calculate and display the Starting Curve for this motor.
11-286
AC Elements
Induction Machine
11.14.9 Start Dev Page

You can select one of thirteen types of motor starting devices from the Starting Dev page and specify the
control scheme for the selected starting devices. ETAP preserves starting device data for all the types you
specified, so that you can experiment with and compare results for different types of starting devices. This
allows you to select the best device type to accomplish your task.
Type
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. ETAP provides the following starting device types:
Type
None
Auto-xfmr
Stator Resistor
Stator Reactor
Capacitor, Bus
Capacitor, Terminal
Rotor Resistor
Rotor Reactor
Description
No starting device
Auto-transformer
Series resistor to the stator
Series reactor to the stator
Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal
Series resistor to the rotor
Series reactor to the rotor
11-287
AC Elements
Type
Y/D
Partial Winding
Current Limit
Current Control
Voltage Control
Torque Control
Induction Machine
Description
Star - delta
Partial winding
Soft starter current limit
Soft starter current control
Soft starter voltage control
Soft starter torque control
There are thirteen types of motor starting devices from which you can select. The last four types (Current
Limit, Current Control, Voltage Control, and Torque Control) are commonly used control modes of soft
starters. To model a soft starter, you can select any of these four types and specify a control scheme as
needed.
A soft starter employs power semiconductors, such as thyristors, to regulate the voltage applied on the
motor according to a predefined scheme. The purpose is to reduce the current drawn by a starting motor
so that it has a soft impact on system operation. A soft starter is normally a reduced voltage starter,
being able to decrease, not to increase, the voltage applied on the motor comparing to the cross-line motor
starting. This behavior is also modeled in ETAP. When the control scheme of a soft starter, such as a
voltage starting, requires a voltage value that is larger than the bus voltage, the bus voltage will be applied
on the motor, as if the soft starter does not exist.
Current Limit
When the starting device type selected is either Voltage Control or Torque Control, this field will be
enabled so that you can enter a Current Limit value in percent of motor full load amperes. This current
limit value will be applied, along with motor voltage control scheme or torque control scheme, to ensure
that the actual voltage applied on the motor will not result in a motor current larger than this value.
Control Scheme
You specify a control scheme in this group for the selected starting device type. The control scheme is a
function of motor speed or time for most of the types, except the Y/D, Partial Winding, and Current Limit
types. When you specify a control scheme in multiple stages, ETAP will list the stages by motor speed or
time, first with all active stages and then followed by inactive stages.
You can add or remove a stage by clicking the Add, Insert, or Delete buttons. When you click the Add
button, a new stage is added before the last one. When you click the Insert button, a new stage is inserted
before the selected stage. When you click the Delete button, the selected stage will be removed. Note that
you cannot remove the first or the last stages.
Active
Check to activate the setting for the device. When you uncheck this box for a stage, ETAP will not
consider that stage in studies, but the data is still saved.
%Ws or Seconds
Select %Ws or Seconds as the variable based on which to specify the control scheme for your starter.
When Speed is selected, it is in percent of synchronous motor speed.
11-288
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Setting
Enter the setting for a control stage of the starter. The setting type varies by the type of starter you
selected. The table below indicates the setting type and the units:
Starter
None
Auto-xfmr
Stator Resistor
Stator Reactor
Capacitor, Bus
Capacitor, Terminal
Rotor Resistor
Rotor Reactor
Y/D
Partial Winding
Current Limit
Current Control
Voltage Control
Torque Control
Setting and Unit

Tap in percent
Tap in percent
Tap in percent
Capacitor at bus in kvar
Capacitor at motor terminal in kvar
Rotor external resistor in Ohm converted to
stator side
Rotor external reactor in Ohm converted to
stator side
N/A
N/A
Motor current in percent of FLA
Motor current in percent of FLA
Motor voltage in percent of rated voltage
Motor torque in percent of rated torque
Note: The Ohm values for Rotor Resistor and Reactor starters are the values converted to the stator side
based on the turn ratio of the stator and rotor windings.
Control Type
Select between Ramp and Fixed. If you select Fixed, the control variable will be fixed until the next
setting becomes active. This type is used when defining a control such as step starter.
If you select Ramp, the control variable will vary linearly from the setting in this stage to the setting in the
next stage. This type is used when defining a continuously controlled starter.
Note: The Control Type for the last stage is set as Remove and the Control Type for the stage before the
last one can only be Fixed.
Switching Off Starting Devices

When a motor that employs a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed. In
ETAP, the time to remove the starting device is specified in the last stage of the control scheme.
Depending on the option you selected, the starting device is removed at a specified speed or time.
In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than
the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off time will be set equal to the acceleration time.
This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or
the acceleration time, whichever is smaller.
11-289
AC Elements
Induction Machine
However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before
the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time specified by the user, regardless of whether it
is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Waveform
Displays the control scheme of the starter device. Click the Print button to print the control scheme plot.
11.14.10 Start Cat Page

Select motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting motor starting categories
tells ETAP which motor(s) to include in that starting category. The starting categories can be selected
from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories can be edited from Project Menu,
under Settings and Starting Categories.
Starting and Final % Loading

When a motor is started, in some cases such as a compressor, the motor is started with a reduced load
until it reaches the final speed and then the load is increased to the required operating level. Starting and
Final percent loading fields provide modeling of this adjustment in the motor load.
When entering a loading percent in the Start or Final loading fields, the value is related to the option of
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Motor Starting or Transient Stability Study Case as well as
the load model curve selected for the motor.
11-290
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Starting Load Option in Motor Starting Study Case

Considering the two load model curves given below, both curves have exactly the same shape, but the
load percent values at synchronous speed are different in the two models. In Model 1 it is less than 100%
while in Model 2 it is equal to 100%. In the Motor Starting and Transient Stability Studies, depending on
the option selected for the Starting Load of Acceleration Motors, the load model curve is applied
differently.
If the Based on Motor Electrical Load option is selected, the load curve will first be adjusted by
multiplying a constant factor so that at the synchronous speed the torque is equal to 100% and then used
in the calculation. This is assuming that the load torque curve only represents the shape of the load as a
function of speed. When this option is selected, load Model 1 and Model 2 given below will lead to the
same results, since both models have the same shape. If the Based on Motor Mechanical Load option is
selected, the load curve will be used in the calculation as it is entered without any adjustments. Note that
if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two options will make no
difference, since load torque adjustment for the option of Based on Motor Electrical Rating has no effect
on the load curve.
Motor Load Model Curves
Model 1: Load @ Rated Speed < 100%
Model 2: Load @ Rated Speed = 100%
Due to the difference in the two options for Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Study Case, the
values in the Start and Final % Loading columns in the Start Cat page may have different bases. If in the
Study Case the option of Based on Motor Electrical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated
output torque of the motor. If the option of Based on Motor Mechanical Load is selected, the %loading is
based on the rated output load torque described by the load curve. Please note that if a load model has a
torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two bases become the same.
11-291
AC Elements
Induction Machine
For example, lets consider a motor of rated output torque Tr and having a load curve described by Model
1 given above, which has a value of 80% at motor operating speed. When you enter 90% as the Start
%Loading for the motor,
Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Load Selected in Study Case:
Base for Start %Load = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load Selected in Study Case:
Base for Start %Load = Motor Load Torque @ Operating Speed * Tr
= 0.8* Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *0.8 * Tr = 0.72*Tr
Note that for the same motor, if load Curve Model 2 is selected instead, Case 1 and Case 2 will be the
same. Notice that in Model 2 the load torque value is equal to 100% at motor operating speed.
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 1.0* Tr = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *1.0 * Tr = 0.9*Tr
In Transient Stability Studies, only the Start % loading is used. The first starting category is used if the
start event is by a switching action in Transient Stability Studies.
Load Change Time

Specify the beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category in these fields.
The Load Change Time is not used for Transient Stability Studies.
11-292
AC Elements
Induction Machine
11.14.11 Cable/Vd Page

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable and overload
heater associated with this motor.
Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this motor.
Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and unit are provided here for
editing and displaying.
ID
To add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
For automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the
equipment Cable Editor.
11-293
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this load.
Overload Heater
When there is an Overload Heater directly connected to the motor, ETAP displays the properties as
shown in the example figure above.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking on the OL Editor button.
Heater resistance and % Tolerance are displayed in the group and will be used for voltage drop
calculations, if the heater selected is in-line. Otherwise the resistance and tolerance are ignored.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with motor terminal
voltage (Vt) and starting voltage (Vst) are calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Vd,
Vt, and Vst are displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vst
Vst represents the motor terminal voltage during starting conditions with the bus voltage fixed, i.e., it
includes voltage drop across the equipment cable only.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this load is connected to, if any) is displayed
here for reference.
Voltage Calculation for a Motor Directly Connected to a VFD

If this load is directly connected to a VFD, then the VFD output voltage, not the voltage of VFD input
bus, determines load terminal voltage and voltage drop on the equipment cable. Under this condition, the
VFD rated output voltage is used for Vt, Vd, and Vst calculation. The calculated values are in percent of
VFD output rated voltage instead of the bus nominal kV.
11-294
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
When you select this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for
voltage drop calculations.
Use SF
When you select this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
11.14.12 Cable Amp Page
Installation
The cable installation type can be specified based on the installation types or the standard used for
calculation. Refer to Chapter 11 Cable - Ampacity Page section for detailed descriptions regarding the
standards used.
Standard
If the option of Standard is selected, the Standard list field contains all the calculation standards currently
available in ETAP, including IEEE 399, ICEA P-54-440, NEC, and BS 7671. When one of these
standards is selected from the list, the Installation Type list will contain only the installation types
applicable to the standard. The table below gives all the installation types and applicable standards.
11-295
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Type
If the option of Installation Type is selected, the Installation Type list field contains all the installation
types currently available in ETAP. When one of these installation types is selected, the Standard list field
will contain only the standards applicable to the selected installation type. The table below gives all the
installation types and applicable standards.
Installation Type
IEEE 399
UG Duct
UG Buried
Trenches
Embedded Direct
A/G Trays
Brackets
Cleats
Ladder
10
A/G Conduit
11
Open & Clipped Direct
12
Air Drop
13
Building Voids
14
Trunking
ICEA P-54-440
NEC
BS 7671
Installation Pictures
X
X
11-296
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Sub-Type
When the BS 7671 Standard appears in the Standard field, the installation sub-type and Installation
Method will also show up along with the installation type. You can select different installation sub-type
from the list.
Method
This field displays the Installation Method for the selected sub-type per Table 4A1, BS 7671: 2001,
Requirements for Electrical Installations.
Note: Magnetic/Non-magnetic Installation

cables. The following table shows when to use cable libraries designated as Magnetically and Nonmagnetically Installed cables:

Magnetically
Installed
Non- Magnetically
Installed
X
U/G Buried
A/G Tray No Cover
A/G Conduit - PVC

Air Drop
11-297
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for comparison of base, derated and, required (I x MF) ampacities. The
method used here is based on a concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity to
calculate the derated ampacity.
Id = F Ib
FLA / Operating
If the FLA option is selected, the required current is the full load ampere of the load. If the Operating
option is selected, the required current will be the Average operating current entered or updated by load
flow calculations in the Loading page of the Cable Editor.
Derated Ampacity (Id)

This is the modified base ampacity (maximum allowable current) in amperes for the chosen cable under
the specified installation conditions.
Amp x App MF
Current is calculated by multiplying the operating current (or the full load current for equipment cables)
and the Application Multiplication Factor (App. MF) for the specified application type. This value is
displayed so it can be compared with the derated ampacity.
App MF
This Multiplication Factor (MF) is determined by the application type selected from the drop-down list
provided. You can modify the values of Application MF by selecting Project, Settings, and Cable
Ampacity MF from the menu bar. This Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity
(MF times operating or full load current).
U/G Duct
This refers to underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W).
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil for
underground installations. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library.
Base ampacity for UG systems are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for
the base ampacity is obtained from the library. This order is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the cable ampacity, the
number of rows and columns of the duct bank must be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment
factor.
The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on 7.5 inches center-to-center spacing. For more details
see the IEEE Brown Book.
11-298
AC Elements
Induction Machine
U/G Buried
This refers to directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is measured in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta
This is the ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where
the cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The
value is usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
number of rows and columns of the cable locations must be specified to determine a cable grouping
adjustment factor. The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on a 7.5-inch center-to-center
spacing. For more details see the IEEE Brown Book.
A/G Trays
This refers to above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the
base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Tray Specification
NEC
If chosen, NEC methods of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. NEC does not
provide ampacity derating due to bottom cover or correction of the ampacity multiplying factors due to
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fireproofing.
Top Cover
Select top cover if there is a removable top cover on the cable tray.
Bottom Cover
Select bottom cover if there is a bottom cover on the cable tray, whether it is removable or solid, of more
than 6 feet.
11-299
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Maintained Spacing
If cable spacing is maintained within the tray, then the effects of top cover, bottom cover, and fire wrap
are ignored. For 3-phase cables larger than 2/0 AWG in a single layer, the arrangement requires spacing
of 1/4 of overall effective diameter of the grouped circuit.
Cumulative Effect
The cumulative effect applies correction factors for combinations of barriers, fire coatings, and covers on
cable trays.
Grouping
In general, cable sizes of 2/0 AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner,
with a maximum of two cables high. Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at
a uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here
corresponds to a maximum fill condition and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal
depths. Therefore, the actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries are for display only.
Depth
Width
% fill
Depth of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters

Width of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
The total amount of cable tray cross-sectional area used by cables placed in the tray
Fire Protection
The fire protection area provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices.
Each of the three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with
the cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection
material specifications selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations. Each configuration has an ampacity
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity. For maintained
spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between adjacent cables or
groups to less than the required values, the cable shall be considered to be non-maintained spacing. On
the other hand, if the remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable coating and no other
cable can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.
11-300
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for cables in
trays routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
The Fire Wrap Library provides a selection of configurations. Each fire barrier configuration has an
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it. This ACF must be applied whenever the raceway is
wrapped for a length exceeding 6 feet and whenever the raceway has multiple, wrapped segments whose
combined length exceeds 6 feet and which are spaced less than 10 feet apart.
A/G Conduit
This refers to above ground cable conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. This is the temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
The maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the
base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Ampacity Adjustment
NEC (No Grouping Effect)
NEC Standards do not provide for grouping effects of cables, i.e., number of rows and columns. If the
checkbox is not selected, grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered.
50% and No Load Diversity

The level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be chosen as either 50% or none.
Grouping
number of rows and columns of conduit installed next to each other, as well as the total number of
conductors per location (this conduit), can be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.
# of conductors per location = (# of conductors per cable) x (# of cables per location)
Number of Conductors
Ampacity Correction Factor

for 50 % Load Diversity
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 24
25 through 42
43 and above
80 %
70 %
70 %
60 %
50 %

for No Load Diversity
11-301
AC Elements
Induction Machine
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 20
21 through 30
31 through 40
41 through 60
80 %
70 %
50 %
45 %
40 %
35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection methods. Each of the three
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the conduit. The
fire protection data is used to further derate the cable ampacities based on the fire protection material
specifications selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire protection is
based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations from which to choose. Each
configuration has an ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the
base ampacity. Fire retardant coating is not a standard procedure for A/G conduits.
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for conduits
routed through fire stops.
Note: There may not be any reason to derate the cable for fire stops since typical fire stops are
constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be insufficient to cause
an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it which must be applied whenever the raceway is
Air Drop
This refers to cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable groupings for air drop
cables are considered.
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. The temperature of the air surrounding the area where
the tray is to be installed is in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40
degrees Celsius. For cables in direct sun, the air temperature may be increased by a typical value of 15
degrees Celsius.
Tc
the base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Fire Protection
The Fire Protection area provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection devices. Each of the
three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the air drop
11-302
AC Elements
Induction Machine
cables. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable based on the fire protection
specifications selected from ETAP library is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop,
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity.
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for cables
Fire Wrap
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it. The ACF must be applied whenever the cable is

This page contains options to plot the Motor Starting curves, Thermal Limit curves, as well as the Stator
curve on a Star View.
11-303
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Starting Curves Constant Terminal Voltage

A motor starting curve can be plotted on a Star View for the purpose of determining overload settings for
motor protection devices. Constant Terminal Voltage can be used to plot the motor starting curve based
on a constant voltage at the motor terminal. Multiple approximate motor starting curves can be created
and used in this section in the event that a motor acceleration study was not created. In the %Vt fields, a
constant 100% Vt is given with the option of two more %Vt fields that are entered by the user. The curves
can be plotted on the TCC by selecting the checkboxes next to the %Vt fields. Star plots the acceleration
times using the Acceleration Time fields in the Starting Curve section.
11-304
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Include Starting Device, OLH, & Equipment Cable

When this option is not selected, the motor starting curve is generated using the rated locked rotor current
(from the Model page) and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any
overload heater, equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is ignored.
When this option is selected, the motor starting curve is generated by recalculating the locked rotor
current and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any overload heater,
equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is considered. A starting device can be
selected from the Start Dev page.
11-305
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Smooth Corners
Select this option to apply curve smoothing for the locked rotor to FLA transition period of the motor
starting curve.
11-306
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Starting Curve Study

When a Motor Acceleration study has been performed for a motor (static start or dynamic acceleration),
the current plot can be imported into Star View to use as a more accurate starting curve.
11-307
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Select
Click the Select Study to view list of available output reports to import data from. In the event a motor
has not been accelerated in a selected report then ETAP displays an alert message as shown below.
11-308
AC Elements
Induction Machine
If a motor has been accelerated in a selected report, ETAP displays detailed information about the output
report as shown below.
Asymmetrical LRC
Asymmetrical LRC multiplier adjusts the locked rotor current with respect to the adjustment value in the
editable drop-down list. Asymmetrical current decay to symmetrical current is fixed at 0.1 seconds.
LRC Asymmetrical = Asymmetrical Factor * LRC adjustment
11-309
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Thermal Limit Curve

Motor thermal limit curve is drawn based on the hot stall and cold stall time of the motor. Locked rotor
current used to calculate the thermal limit is always considered on base kV equal to motor rated kV for
both the Constant Terminal Voltage and Motor Acceleration Study options.
11-310
AC Elements
Induction Machine
Stall Time (Hot Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. Once
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may be damaged. This time is provided by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests on a motor that had been previously started and stopped
while not at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to
Hot Start.
Stall Time (Cold Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. When
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may get damaged. This time is given by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests for a motor that has not been started for duration of time and
is at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Cold
Start.
Stator Curve (Running Overload)

Stator curve defines the thermal limit curve for the stator. This time is provided by the motor
manufacturer. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Stator Curve.
Stator Curve Points (Running Overload)

The stator curve can be specified in Amperes or as Multiplies of the motor FLA.
Insert
Add
Delete
11-311
AC Elements
Induction Machine
11-312
AC Elements
Induction Machine
A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this leads
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
11-313
AC Elements
Induction Machine
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the load sector name (or customer type) for the load. In the reliability calculation, the user sector
information is used to get interruption cost from the Reliability Cost library to calculate Expected
Interruption Cost.
11-314
AC Elements
Induction Machine
User-Defined Info




11-315
AC Elements
Induction Machine
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
UD Field A8
UD Field A9
UD Field A10
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-316
AC Elements
Induction Machine

11-317
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
11.15 Synchronous Motor

You can enter the properties associated with synchronous motors of the electrical distribution system in
this editor.
The Synchronous Motor Editor includes the following 16 pages of properties:
Info
Nameplate
Protection
Exciter
Staring Mode Cable/Vd
Comment
Model
Load Model
Cable Amp
LR Model
Start Dev.
Reliability
Inertia
Start Cat.
Remarks
11.15.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the synchronous motor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name, Description, Data type, Configuration Status, Quantity or number
of synchronous motors, Phase Connection, and Demand Factor.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous motor. The assigned IDs consist of the
default synchronous motor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
11-318
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
of synchronous motors increase. The default synchronous motor ID (Syn) can be changed from the
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous motor. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a synchronous motor to a bus,
select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the synchronous motor resides,
If a synchronous motor is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
synchronous motor to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the
new bus, as shown below where Syn3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
State
11-319
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Configuration
Select the operating status of the synchronous motor(s) for the selected configuration status from the list
box.
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the motor is
Note: Status is not a part of the motor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the motor status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a motor is
shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
11-320
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this synchronous motor. Select the phase connection type from the list
box. Options for phase connection include:
3 Phase
1 Phase
3-phase machine
Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B, or C.
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC, or CA
Quantity
Load Flow:
load.
11-321
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
load.
Short-Circuit:
11-322
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
load.
11-323
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Arc Flash
under Utility 2.
11-324
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
The Arc Flash Analysis Report shows the incident energy at the terminal of Motor 1 is equal to the
a single load.
11-325
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the following
calculations:
Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Where the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified % Loading
from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.
demand factors are a part of engineering properties, ETAP uses the same factors for all configurations

You can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings), select Motor Library data, specify % loading, and
display motor loading and feeder losses for all Loading Categories in this page.
11-326
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Ratings
HP/kW
Enter the motor output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options
by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equations for the nameplate parameters:
Rated kVA
= HP * 0.7457/(PF * Eff)
= kW/(PF * Eff)
Rating in HP
Rating in kW
Full-Load Amp
= Rated kVA/(3 * kV)

= Rated kVA/kV
3-phase motors
Single phase motors
where the PF and Eff are at the full load condition (100% loading).
MVA/kVA
You can choose from these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button to display the motor rating
in MVA or kVA, and the motor operating load and feeder losses in (MW + j Mvar) or (kW + j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the motor in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for 3-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the motor in amperes. This is the current the motor would pull from
the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency.
When you modify FLA, the motor rated efficiency and the efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated.
ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be below
10%.
Rated PF and Eff

Enter the power factor and efficiency at the rated Horsepower and kV. Based on these two values, the
program will calculate the Full Load Amps (FLA) of this machine. This values will not be used any other
calculation.
% PF (100%, 75%, 50%)

Enter the motor power factor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. All three values of the power
factors are used for determining the operating power factor of the motor under different percent loading,
i.e., when you change any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading
categories are recalculated.
The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. The values of power factor can
range from -0.01% to -100% for synchronous motors operating at leading power factors (over excited)
and range from +0.01% to +100% for lagging power factor (under excited) operations. The following Vcurve indicates a synchronous motor with a rated (100% loading) power factor of 80% leading (-80%).
11-327
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
% Eff (100%, 75%, and 50%)

This is the efficiency of the motor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. Efficiency cannot exceed
100%. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency, therefore when the rated efficiency is
changed; this field is updated to the same value. All three values of the efficiencies are used for
determining the motor efficiency under different percent loading, i.e., when you change the value of any
one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading categories are recalculated.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the motor is

SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. The service factor is not used for calculation
of loading or feeder losses. ETAP gives you option to use the service factor for voltage drop calculations
of the motor feeder.
11-328
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Library (Motor Nameplate)

Access the Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library
Quick Pick - Motor. Motor nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by
highlighting and double-clicking on the selection. Library data include motor ratings such as HP/kW, kV,
FLA, PF, Eff, & Pole (transferred to the Nameplate page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR PF, X,
X, X, X2, X0, X/R, & Td (transferred to the Model page).
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this motor, i.e.,
each motor can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the
values of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading or HP (kW) column.
Note that you can select any of these loading categories when conducting Load Flow and Motor Starting
Studies.
The loading value can be entered in percent or in HP (kW). When a new value is entered in one field, the
other field will be calculated accordingly.
and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.
This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and
efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the
operating kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is
specified for this load. Note that although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load
and feeder losses, the value of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating power factor
and efficiency.
To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu on the menu bar.
Operating Load
available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Management System) feature. When the operating load
box is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor, the calculation results are updated to sources, loads,
and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not have the
online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the Element Editor; however, this data cannot be
used in a later study.
11.15.3 Model Page

This page includes the synchronous machine impedances and time constants.
11-329
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Impedance
Xd
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (machine base, saturated). This reactance is used
for ANSI Short-Circuit Studies.
Xd/Ra
This is the armature X/R ratio (Xd/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both
Ra (%)
This is the armature resistance in percent (machine base).
Ra (Ohm)
This is the armature resistance in ohms.
X2
Analysis, Short-Circuit, and Unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X2/R2
This is the negative sequence X/R ratio.
11-330
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
R2 (%)
This is the negative sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R2 (Ohm)
This is the negative sequence resistance in ohms.
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for unbalanced faults
under ANSI Short-Circuit Studies.
X0/R0
This is the zero sequence X/R ratio.
R0 (%)
This is the zero sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R0 (Ohm)
This is the zero sequence resistance in ohms.
Xd Tolerance
This is the direct-axis sub transient reactance tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the
reactance values during Short-circuit calculations. The Short-Circuit Module will use the negative
tolerance value.
H
This displays the machine total inertia from the Inertia page.
Machine Type
Application
Select the application type for this synchronous motor (motor or condenser).
Rotor Type
Round-Rotor For machines that are made of round-rotor.
Salient-Pole For machines that are made of salient-pole.
IEC Exciter Type

Depending on the Rotor type, the IEC Exciter type is used for determining the max factor for generators in
the calculation of steady-state short-circuit currents per IEC Standard 909. max is proportional to fmax,
which takes different values based on exciter types as shown in the following table.
Rotor Type
IEC Exciter Type
fmax
Round Rotor
Turbine 130%
1.3
Round Rotor
Turbine 160%
1.6
Round Rotor
N/A
11-331
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Rotor Type
IEC Exciter Type
fmax
Round Rotor
N/A
Salient Pole
Salient-pole 160%
1.6
Salient Pole
Salient-pole 200%
2.0
Salient Pole
N/A
Salient Pole
N/A
Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous machines. Except for Xd,
Tdo, which are also shared by IEC 363 Short-Circuit calculation, all of the parameters listed under
Dynamic Model are used only for Transient Stability Studies. Full descriptions of these variables are
found in Chapter 24, Dynamic Models.
Model Type
Model Type
Description
None
Equivalent
The machine will not be dynamically modeled in Transient Stability Study.

A model that uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and
quadrature-axis reactance.
Transient
A more comprehensive model than the Equivalent model, including the

machines saliency.
Subtransient
A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine, including

both transient and subtransient parameters.
Xd
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xdu
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xd
This is the direct-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value). This is
used for both motor starting and Transient Stability Studies.
XL
This is the armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xqu
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
11-332
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Tdo
This is the direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tdo
This is the direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used for
the equivalent model.
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used
for the equivalent model.
Sbreak
This is the per unit of Vt at which the generator saturation curve skews from the air-gap line.
S100
This is the saturation factor at 100% terminal voltage.
S120
This is the saturation factor at 120% terminal voltage.
Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:
S100 = If100/If
S120 = If120/1.2 If
Sbreak
where:
11-333
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
If = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the air gap line (no saturation)
If100
= Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open circuit saturation curve
If120
= Field current corresponding to 120% terminal voltage on the open circuit saturation curve
Damping
This is the shaft mechanical damping term, in percent, and MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed (%
MW/Hz). Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10% (long shaft).
A Note on the Synchronous Motor Excitation System

The excitation voltages for synchronous motors are assumed as constants for motors operating within the
speed range of 50% to 110% of the synchronous speed. During the transient, if a motor's speed goes out
of this range, the frequency relay should trip off the contactor to disconnect the motor from the system
and shut down the excitation system simultaneously. Correspondingly, the program sets the excitation
voltage to zero if this condition occurs.
A Note on Synchronous Motor Reactance Values
The saturated reactance values are required to enter in the Synchronous Motor Editor for general studies.
For transient stability study, the reactance values will be adjusted internally based on the motor saturation
factors (S100, S120 and Sbreak) and the terminal voltage or air-gap voltage during simulation.
11.15.4 LR Model Page
11-334
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the rated full load current of the motor, as specified in the
Nameplate page.
% PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent.
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
The motor grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:
Open
Solid
Resistor
Reactor

Amp
motors.
Resistor or reactor rating in amperes for resistor or reactor grounded
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohmic Value)

Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by (3)1/2.
LR Model (Starting)
The locked-rotor (LR) model is used only for the purpose of starting (accelerating) synchronous motors.
This model is not used for Transient Stability Studies.
11-335
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
LR Model Library
Access Motor Model Library data by selecting the CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to open the
Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor locked-rotor model data from the library can be obtained and
highlighting a design class and a model ID. The LR Model is only used for the dynamic starting of a
synchronous motor.
After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or
navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the following message to update (modify) some of the
nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.
Characteristic Library
You can access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and
clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick - Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library
data (slip, torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting
a model ID. When you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor Model Library data, the
library data is not transferred to the Motor Editor, .i.e., only a reference to the selected library design class
and model ID is kept with the motor. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run
dynamic Motor Starting Studies.
After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select
another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the message shown above to
update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the selected
library.
Print
This prints the torque, current & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for the selected model
(CKT or characteristic).
11-336
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Motor, Coupling Gear, and Load RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft^2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
Motor, Coupling Gear and Load. ETAP calculates WR^2 or H when one of them is known and RPM has
H = 2.31 * 10-10 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA

or
-9
H = 5.48 * 10 * WR * RPM / MVA
Total RPM
The total RPM is equal to the Motor RPM.
Total WR2
The total WR2 is calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
Arithmetic sum of the Motor, Coupling and Load H in MW-sec/MVA.
11-337
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Shaft Torsion
Select this option to consider torsion effect between motor, coupling gear and load during transient
stability calculation.
D1
This is the damping constant between motor and coupling gear
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and load
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of motor and coupling gear
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and load

This page contains options to plot the motor starting curves, Thermal Limit curves, as well as the Stator
curve on a Star View.
11-338
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Starting Curves Constant Terminal Voltage

A motor starting curve can be plotted on a Star View for the purpose of determining overload settings for
motor protection devices. Constant Terminal Voltage can be used to plot the motor starting curve based
on a constant voltage at the motor terminal. Multiple approximate motor starting curves can be created
and used in this section in the event that a motor acceleration study was not created. In the %Vt fields, a
constant 100% Vt is given with the option of two more %Vt fields that are entered by the user. The curves
can be plotted on the TCC by selecting the checkboxes next to the %Vt fields. Star plots the acceleration
times using the Acceleration Time fields in the Starting Curve section.
11-339
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Include Starting Device, OLH, & Equipment Cable

When this option is not selected, the motor starting curve is generated using the rated locked rotor current
(from the Model page) and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any
overload heater, equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is ignored.
Starting Device
(Ignored)
OLH
(Ignored)
Equipment Cable
(Ignored)
11-340
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
When this option is selected, the motor starting curve is generated by recalculating the locked rotor
current and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any overload heater,
equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is considered. A starting device can be
selected from the Start Dev page.
Starting Device
(Considered)
OLH
(Considered)
Equipment Cable
(Considered)
11-341
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Smooth Corners
Select this option to apply curve smoothing for the locked rotor to FLA transition period of the motor
starting curve.
11-342
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Starting Curve Study

When a motor acceleration study has been performed for a motor (static start or dynamic acceleration),
the current plot can be imported into the Star View to use as a more accurate starting curve.
11-343
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Select
Click the Select Study to view list of available output reports to import data from. In the event a motor
has not been accelerated in a selected report then ETAP displays an alert message as shown below.
11-344
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
If a motor has been accelerated in a selected report, ETAP displays detailed information about the output
report as shown below.
Reference kV
Star will plot the TCC curve based on the Calculated Base kV or the User-Defined kV in reference to the
Star View Plot kV.
11-345
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system-calculated Base kV value at the connected bus to the
element. The value will be updated when Short-Circuit Update is performed from Star Mode.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-Defined option allows the user to enter the base kV value.
Asymmetrical LRC
Asymmetrical LRC multiplier adjusts the locked rotor current with respect to the adjustment value in the
editable drop-down list.. Asymmetrical current decay to symmetrical current is fixed at 0.1 seconds.
LRC Asymmetrical = Asymmetrical Factor * LRC adjustment
11-346
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Thermal Limit Curve

Motor thermal limit curve is drawn based on the hot stall and cold stall time of the motor. Locked rotor
current used to calculate the thermal limit is always considered on base kV equal to motor rated kV for
both the Constant Terminal Voltage and Motor Acceleration Study options.
Stall Time (Hot Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. Once
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may be damaged. This time is provided by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests on a motor that had been previously started and stopped
while not at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to
Hot Start.
Stall Time (Cold Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. When
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may get damaged. This time is given by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests for a motor that has not been started for a duration of time
and is at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to
Cold Start.
Points (Stator Curve)

ETAP users can define their own plots by inserting points. Points require time, and multiples or amperes.
11-347
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Stator Curve Points (Running Overload)
Insert
Add
Delete
11-348
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
11.15.7 Exciter Page

This Section describes the excitation systems and automatic voltage regulators (AVR) for synchronous
motors.
The excitation and AVR systems for synchronous motors can be sophisticated. Complete modeling of
these systems is usually necessary for Transient Stability Studies. The equivalent transfer functions used
for the excitation and AVR systems and their variable/parameter names are either provided by exciter
manufactures or in accordance with the IEEE recommended types as found from the following references:
IEEE Working Group Report, "Computer Representation of Excitation Systems", IEEE Transaction
on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp.1460/1464
IEEE Committee Report, "Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981, pp.494/509
IEEE Std 421.5-1992, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies", IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992
In general, exciter manufacturers should be contacted to determine the applicability of the IEEE-type
representations to their excitation systems.
11-349
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Excitation/AVR Type
You can specify the excitation/AVR type by selecting one of the following models from the list box.
Refer to Machine and Load Dynamic Models for details.
Type
Description
Continuously Acting Regulator With Rotating Exciter System
Rotating Rectifier Exciter With Static Regulator System
Static System With Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
1S
Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage
DC1
DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation
DC2
DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and

Supplies from Terminal Voltage
DC3
DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation
ST1
Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter
ST2
Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
ST3
Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC1
Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and

Field Current Feedback
AC2
High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non

Controlled Rectifiers and Field Current Feedback
AC3
Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter
AC4
High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC5A
Simplified Rotating Rectifier Exciter
SR8F
Basler SR8F and SR125A Exciter
HPC
HPC 840 AVR/Exciter Model
Jeumont
Jeumont Industrie Excitation / AVR System
ST1D
IEEE Type ST1D
AC8B
IEEE Type AC8B
AC1A
IEEE Type AC1A
Fixed
Constant Excitation (i.e., no regulator action). This can be used for

generators with constant excitation or when the machine voltage regulator
is operating under PF or Mvar control.
UDM
User Defined Dynamic Models
Some exciter types require that you select a control bus from the dropdown list that appears when they are
specified.
11-350
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Sample Data
selected exciter and AVR type.
Excitation System Symbols

The following are some common symbols used to define the parameters of the various excitation systems.
For other exciter parameters not listed, refer to the Help Line for such parameters in the particular exciter
parameter. In most cases, constants and gains are in per-unit and time constants are in seconds. The base
voltage for the excitation system is defined so that one per unit exciter voltage will produce rated
generator voltage on the generator air-gap line.
Term
Description
Efdmax
= Maximum exciter output voltage (applied to generator field)
FEX
= Rectifier loading factor
Ifd
= Generator field current
IN
= Normalized exciter load current
KA
= Regulator gain
KB
= Second stage regulator gain
KC
= Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance
KD
= Demagnetizing factor, function of exciter alternator reactances
KE
= Exciter constant related to self-excited field
KF, KN
= Regulator stabilizing circuit gains
KG
= Inner loop feedback constant
KH
= Exciter field current feedback gain
KI
= Current circuit gain coefficient
KL
= Gain of exciter field current limit
KLV
= Gain of exciter low voltage limit signal
KP
= Potential circuit gain coefficient
KR
= Constant associated with regulator and alternator field power supply
KV
= Fast raise/lower contact setting
SE
= Exciter saturation function
TA, TB, TC
= Regulator amplifier time constants
TE
= Exciter time constant
TF
= Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant
TF1, TF2
= Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants (rotating rectifier system)
11-351
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Term
Description
TR
= Regulator input filter time constant
TRH
= Travel time of rheostat drive motor
VA
= Regulator internal voltage
VERR
= Voltage error signal
VG
= Inner loop voltage feedback
VI
= Internal signal within voltage regulator
VLR
= Exciter field current limit reference
VLV
= Exciter low voltage limit reference
VN
= Rate feedback input variable
VR
= Regulator output voltage
VR max
= Maximum value of VR
VR min
= Minimum value of VR
Vref
= Regulator reference voltage setting
VRH
= Field rheostat setting
Vt
= Generator terminal voltage
Vthev
= Voltage obtained by vector sum of potential and current signals, Type 3

system
XL
HV Gate
High value gate: If A > B, C = A; if A < B, C = B, where A & B are

inputs and C is output
LV Gate
Low value gate: If A < B, C = A; if A > B, C = B, where A & B are inputs

and C is output
UDM Model
ETAP allows you to model your own Exciter through UDM (User Defined Models). Once you select the
UDM model option, you can select a model from a list of pre-defined UDM exciter models in the Model
Type list.
UDM Editor
Clicking on the UDM Editor button brings up the UDM Graphic Logical Editor. From the editor, you
can create, modify and compile a UDM model.
11-352
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
11.15.8 Load Model Page

This is the mechanical load connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third
order polynomial of the motor speed or by points of %slip and %torque versus motor speed.
The third order equation is defined as follows:

T = A0 + A1 + A2 + A3
2
Load Torque
None / Polynomial / Curve
Selecting none indicates to ETAP that the load is not being modeled. Transient Stability and Motor
Acceleration will not run without this model.
Selecting Polynomial or Curve will bring up the library quick pick from which you will be able to select a
model that was defined in the library.
Motor Load Library

Access Motor Load Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the library quick pick.
Motor Load Library data can be obtained by highlighting and double-clicking on the selection.
Acceleration Time (Static Starting)

Enter No Load (0% Loading) and Full Load (100% Loading) motor acceleration time in seconds.
11-353
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
ETAP uses these values along with the motor percent loading to calculate the acceleration time for static
motor starting (that is, the motor will carry the full LRC for the entire acceleration time). If the motor
percent loading (Defined by the start category selected in the Study Case) is between 0 and 100%, ETAP
interpolates to find the acceleration time. If the motor percent loading is outside this range, ETAP
extrapolates to find the acceleration time.
These parameters are ignored for dynamic motor starting and the motor model, load model, and inertia
are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.
The Full Load Motor Acceleration Time is also used by Star when Constant Terminal Voltage is selected
under the Motor Starting Curve in the Protection Page. Star uses this time in conjunction with the rated
locked rotor current to calculate and display the Starting Curve for this motor.
11.15.9 Start Dev Page

From the Starting Dev page, you can select one of six types of motor starting devices and specify the
control scheme for the selected starting devices. ETAP preserves starting device data for all the types you
have specified, so that you can experiment with and compare results for different types of starting devices
and select the best one to accomplish your task.
11-354
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Type
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. ETAP provides the following starting device types:
Type
None
Auto-xfmr
Stator Resistor
Stator Reactor
Capacitor, Bus
Capacitor, Terminal
Partial Winding
Description
No starting device
Auto-transformer
Series resistor to the stator
Series reactor to the stator
Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal
Partial winding
Control Scheme
You can specify a control scheme for the selected starting device type in this group. The control scheme
is a function of motor speed or time for most of the types, except the Partial Winding type. When you
specify a control scheme with multiple stages, ETAP will list the stages by motor speed or time, with the
active stages first, and then followed by inactive stages.
You can add or remove a stage by clicking the Add, Insert, or Delete button. When you click on the Add
button, a new stage is added before the last one. When you click on the Insert button, a new stage is
inserted before the selected stage. When you click on the Delete button, the selected stage will be
removed. Note that you cannot remove the first and the last stages.
Active
Check this to activate the setting for the device. When you uncheck this box for a stage, ETAP will not
consider that stage in studies, but the data is still saved.
%Ws or Seconds
Select %Ws or Seconds as the variable on which to base the control scheme for your starter. When Speed
is selected, it is in percent of motor synchronous speed.
Setting
Enter the setting for a control stage of the starter. The setting type varies by the type of starter you
selected. The table below indicates the setting type and the units:
Starter
None
Auto Xfmr
Stator Resistor
Stator Reactor
Capacitor, Bus
Capacitor, Terminal
Partial Winding
Setting
Tap in percent
Tap in percent
Tap in percent
Capacitor at bus in kvar
Capacitor at motor terminal in kvar
N/A
11-355
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Control Type
Select either Ramp or Fixed. If you select Fixed, the control variable will be fixed until the next setting
becomes active. This type is used when defining a control such as step starter.
If you select Ramp, the control variable will vary linearly from the setting in this stage to the setting in the
next stage. This type is used when defining a continuously controlled starter.
Note: The Control Type for the last stage is set as Remove and the Control Type for the stage before the
last one can only be Fixed.
Switching Off of Starting Devices

When a motor that employs a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed. In
ETAP, the time to remove the starting device is specified in the last stage of the control scheme.
Depending on the option you selected, the starting device is removed at a specified speed or time.
In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than
the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off time will be set equal to the acceleration time.
This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or
the acceleration time, whichever is smaller.
However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before
the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time specified by the user, regardless of whether it
is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Waveform
Displays the control scheme of the starter device. You can click the Print button to print the control
scheme plot.

Select synchronous motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting synchronous
Motor Starting Categories tells ETAP which synchronous motor(s) to include in that starting category.
The starting categories can be selected from the Synchronous Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The
Starting Categories can be edited from the Project Menu, under Settings and Starting Categories.
11-356
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Starting and Final % Loading

When a motor is started, in some cases such as a compressor, the motor is started with a reduced load
until it reaches the final speed and then the load is increased to the required operating level. Starting and
Final percent loading fields provide modeling of this adjustment in the motor load.
When entering a loading percent in the Start or Final loading fields, the value is related to the option of
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Motor Starting or Transient Stability Study Case as well as
the load model curve selected for the motor.
Starting Load Option in Motor Starting Study Case
Considering the two load model curves given below, both curves have exactly the same shape, but the
load percent values at synchronous speed are different in the two models. In Model 1 it is less than 100%
while in Model 2 it is equal to 100%. In the Motor Starting and Transient Stability Studies, depending on
the option selected for the Starting Load of Acceleration Motors, the load model curve is applied
differently.
11-357
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
If the Based on Motor Electrical Load option is selected, the load curve will first be adjusted by
multiplying a constant factor so that at the synchronous speed the torque is equal to 100% and then used
in the calculation. This is assuming that the load torque curve only represents the shape of the load as a
function of speed. When this option is selected, load Model 1 and Model 2 given below will lead to the
same results, since both models have the same shape. If the Based on Motor Mechanical Load option is
selected, the load curve will be used in the calculation as it is entered without any adjustments. Note that
if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two options will make no
difference, since load torque adjustment for the option of Based on Motor Electrical Rating has no effect
on the load curve.
Due to the difference in the two options for Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Study Case, the
values in the Start and Final % Loading columns in the Start Cat page may have different bases. If in the
Study Case the option of Based on Motor Electrical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated
output torque of the motor. If the option of Based on Motor Mechanical Load is selected, the %loading is
based on the rated output load torque described by the load curve. Please note that if a load model has a
torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two bases become the same.
For example, lets consider a motor of rated output torque Tr and having a load curve described by Model
1 given above, which has a value of 80% at motor operating speed. When you enter 90% as the Start
%Loading for the motor,
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 0.8* Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *0.8 * Tr = 0.72*Tr
Note that for the same motor, if load Curve Model 2 is selected instead, Case 1 and Case 2 will be the
same. Notice that in Model 2 the load torque value is equal to 100% at motor operating speed.
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
11-358
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
= 1.0* Tr = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *1.0 * Tr = 0.9*Tr
In Transient Stability Studies, only the Start % loading is used. The first Starting Category is used if the
start event is by a switching action in Transient Stability Studies.
Load Change Time

The beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category can be specified here.
The Load Change Time is not used for Transient Stability Studies.
11.15.11 Starting Mode Page

The parameters entered in this page are used only in the Transient Stability Analysis. In Motor Starting
Analysis, the starting process of a synchronous motor is simulated in the same way as an induction motor.
That is, the field winding of a synchronous motor is shorted directly and the application of field excitation
is not simulated.
11-359
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Discharge Resistance
Enter the field winding discharge resistor value in ohms in this field. This discharge resistor is first
applied to short the field windings during acceleration of the synchronous motor in Transient Stability
Analysis.
Apply Excitation
Once the motor has reached a sufficient speed, the discharge resistance is automatically removed and field
excitation is applied to synchronize the motor speed with the system speed. The exact value of discharge
resistance and the time/speed of field excitation application should be entered according to the
manufacture data. Users can also enter them by trial and error to ensure that the motor can be started if
there is no manufacture data available.
Excitation can be applied automatically by ETAP based on the following criteria:
Fixed Time
Enter the time in seconds after which, the field excitation will be applied to this motor.
Note: This time duration is counted from the time the motor acceleration action is given in the Transient
Stability Study Case.
Motor Speed
Enter motor speed in seconds after which, the field excitation will be applied to this motor. ETAP
continuously monitors the speed of the machine and once the speed reaches the specified value, the
excitation is switched on. Exciters can be selected from the Exciter page of the synchronous motor.
Custom exciter models may be used with the help of UDM Module.
11-360
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor

heater associated with this motor.
Equipment Cable
ID
This field allows you to add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Cable Editor
This button brings up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
This field allows you to add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable
Library.
Size Cable
Delete Cable
11-361
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Overload Heater
When an Overload Heater is directly connected to the motor, ETAP displays the properties as shown in
the example figure above.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking the OL Editor button.
Heater resistance and % Tolerance are displayed in the group and will be used for voltage drop
calculations if the heater selected is in-line; otherwise the resistance and tolerance are ignored.
Voltage Drop
Vst
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus this load is connected to, if any) is displayed here for
reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
By selecting this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage
drop calculations.
Use SF
By selecting this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
11-362
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Installation
Five raceway installation types are available to choose from.
U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Each type uses a variety of conditions to determine its overall characteristics and determine the derated
ampacity of the cable installed under the specified raceway conditions.
Application MF
Ampacity
11-363
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Id = F x Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)

The full rated current value in amperes for the chosen cable before any derating occurs. This is the
ampacity stated or specified by the manufacturer or other authoritative sources, such as NEC or ICEA.

The modified base ampacity (maximum allowable current) in amperes for the chosen cable under the
specified installation conditions.
Overall Derating Factor (F)

Adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual installation
conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load capacity, which
results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several
components as listed below.
Fta =
Ftc =
Fth =
Fg =
Fc =
Fm =
Fce =
Fm =
Ffc =
Ffs =
Ffw=
Derating factor for ambient temperature

Derating factor for maximum allowable conductor temperature
Derating factor for underground soil thermal resistance
Derating factor for cable grouping
Derating factor for A/G tray covers
Derating factor for A/G tray maintained spacing
Cumulative effect factor for A/G trays
Derating factor for A/G conduit (NEC & diversity factor)
Derating factor for A/G fire coating
Derating factor for A/G fire stop
Derating factor for A/G fire wrap
Allowable Ampacity
ETAP provides a user-defined field to enter the maximum allowable ampacity for one-line and raceway
cables. This field is not provided for equipment cables. The maximum allowable ampacity is used in the
load flow output reports to indicate the percent of cable overloading.
I x MF
U/G Duct
This refers to underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
Ta
11-364
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Tc
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
This refers to directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is measured in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
Ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where the cable is
installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is
usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
This refers to above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
11-365
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Tray Specification
NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
Cumulative effect applies correction factors for combinations of barriers, fire coatings, and covers on
cable trays.
Grouping
a uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3- or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here
Depth
Width
% fill

Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices. Each of
the three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection material
Fire Coating
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity. In respect to
maintained spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between
adjacent cables or groups to less than the required values, the cable shall be considered to be nonmaintained spacing. On the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable
coating and no other cable can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill
below nominal value.
11-366
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Fire Stop
tray routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the air surrounding the
area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
Tc
The maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the
base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Ampacity Adjustment

11-367
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Grouping
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 24
25 through 42
43 and above

80 %
70 %
70 %
60 %
50 %

4 through 6
80 %
7 through 9
70 %
10 through 20
50 %
21 through 30
45 %
31 through 40
40 %
41 through 60
35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection method. Each of the three
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
11-368
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables is
considered.
Ta
degrees Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection devices. Each of the three
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the air drop
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
11-369
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, service is
restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed component itself
(and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to service
only after repair or replacement.
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
11-370
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption
Cost.
11-371
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
User-Defined Info




11-372
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element in this field, using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
11-373
AC Elements
Synchronous Motor

11-374
AC Elements
Lumped Load
11.16 Lumped Load

The properties associated with lumped loads can be entered in the Lumped Load Editor. This editor
includes the following pages of properties:
Info
Nameplate
Short-Circuit
Dyn Model
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.16.1 Info Page
Info
ID
11-375
AC Elements
Lumped Load
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each lumped load. The assigned IDs consist of the default
lumped load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of lumped
loads increase. The default lumped load ID (Lump) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the lumped load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a lumped load to a bus, select a bus
OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the lumped load resides,
Condition
Service
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the lumped load for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the lumped load
is determined for Load Flow and Motor Starting Studies.
Note that status is not a part of the lumped load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the lumped load to indicate that this is the lumped load
status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a lumped load is shown to be Continuous under
Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
11-376
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this lumped load. Select the phase connection type from the list box.
3 Phase
1 Phase
3-phase machine
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC or CA
11-377
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Demand Factor
You can modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry
fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the
following calculations:
Operating kW = Rated kW * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = Rated kvar * % Loading * Demand Factor
Demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined

The Nameplate page of the Lumped Load Editor allows for the specification of rating and loading. Since
the lumped load is designed to model a combination of different loads into one, several model types are
available to accomplish this task.
Model Type
The following models are available through the drop-down list:
Conventional
Unbalanced
Exponential
Polynomial
Comprehensive
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the lumped load in kV.
Based on the Model Type, the rest of the page is adjusted to accommodate the parameters required for
each model.
11-378
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Conventional Load Model
Ratings
Click on the MVA/kVA button to choose from MVA and kVA units for entering and displaying
MVA/kVA, MW/kW, and Mvar/kvar data.
ETAP uses the following equations to calculate kVA, kW, kvar, PF, Amps, and kV when one of the
variables is changed:
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the lumped load in kV.
Amps
Enter the lumped load rated current in amperes.
11-379
AC Elements
Lumped Load
%PF
This is the power factor of the lumped load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of
the power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging
and -80% indicates leading.
Motor/Static load
Select the percent motor and static loading of the lumped load by shifting the slider position.
When the lumped load is connected below a VFD, the reactance of the static loading will be adjusted
linearly based on the VFD operating frequency while the resistance of the static loading will keep
constant in calculations. The adjustment of the static loading will change the power factor of the total
loading. The calculated total loading will be displayed in the VFD editor loading page.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this lumped
load, i.e., each lumped load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading
category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column.
Studies.
Operating Load
available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Real-Time System) feature. When the operating load
box is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor, the calculation results are updated to sources, loads,
and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not have the
online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the Element Editor; however, this data cannot be
used in a later study.
Unbalanced Load Model

The Unbalanced Load Model is used to model unbalanced loading for three different types:
Motor Load, Static Load, and Constant Current Load.
11-380
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Ratings
kVA, kW, kvar, %PF, and Amp.
For Delta Connected load, you can specify the Line-to-Line (AB, BC, and CA) Ratings of the
total connected load.
For Wye- Solid Connected Load, you can specify the Phase A, B, C Ratings of the total
connected load
11-381
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Motor/Static Load
% Motor Load, % Static Load, and % Current Load
Specify the Motor Load and Static Load of the Lumped Load. ETAP automatically calculates the %
current load by subtracting the %motor plus static load from 100%.
Loading
When Unbalanced Load is selected, the Motor Load, Static Load, and Constant Current Load kW and
kvar are calculated based on the %Loading entered for the category.
Select Loading Category from the Project menu to edit the loading category names.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow or Unbalanced Load Flow, ETAP updates this field with the total per phase
resultant load.
Exponential Load Model
The Exponential model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and
reactive power components of the load:
11-382
AC Elements
Lumped Load
where P and Q are active and reactive components when the bus voltage magnitude is V and where f is
the frequency deviation (f fo)/fo.
Ratings
P0
This is the initial operating real power in MW / kW.
Q0
This is the initial operating reactive power in Mvar / kvar.
a, b
These exponents define the characteristic of the load as follows:
0 = Constant Power
1 = Constant Current
2 = Constant Impedance
Kpf,
This is the real power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf
This is the reactive power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 2.0 to 0
Loading
When Exponential Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on the
%Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load.
11-383
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Polynomial Load Model
The Polynomial model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and
where P and Q are the real and reactive components of the load when the bus voltage magnitude is V and
where f is the frequency deviation (f fo)/ fo.
Ratings
P0
Q0
11-384
AC Elements
Lumped Load
p1, q1, p2, q2, p3, q3

The polynomial model is composed of constant impedance, constant current, and constant power
components. Each portion is defined by these constants respectively.
Kpf,
This is the real power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf
This is the reactive power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 2.0 to 0
Loading
When Polynomial Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on the
%Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load.
Comprehensive Load Model

The Comprehensive model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and
11-385
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Where:
The expression for the reactive component of the load has a similar structure. The reactive power
compensation associated with the load is represented separately.
Ratings
P0
Q0
p1, q1, p2, q2, p3, q3, p4, q4, p5, q5

The Comprehensive model is composed of Polynomial and Exponential components. These constants
define the constant impedance, constant current, constant power, and exponential components of the load.
Kpf1, Kpf2
These are real power equation constants. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf1, Kqf2
These are reactive power equation constants. This constant typically ranges between 2.0 to 0
Loading
When Comprehensive Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on
the %Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load after running Load Flow.
11-386
AC Elements
Lumped Load
11.16.3 Short-Circuit Page

Enter the short-circuit parameters for the motor load portion of the lumped load here.
Note: All data in this page is based on the motor percentage of the total lumped load rating.
Short-Circuit Contribution
LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the motor load share of the lumped load current. For
example, a lumped load with 120 amperes at 80% motor loading will have a motor current of 96 amperes;
therefore, at 600% LRC, the actual LRC will be 576 amperes (600% * 96 A).
Short-circuit contribution levels are defined individually for ANSI and IEC methods.
ANSI Method short-circuit contributions are categorized per the following table:
Short-Circuit
Contribution
High
Medium
High Voltage (> 600 Volts)
Low Voltage ( 600 Volts)
Large (HP > 1000)

Large (100 < HP < 250)
Medium (50 HP 100)
Medium (250 HP 1000)
11-387
AC Elements
Low
Lumped Load
Small (HP < 50)
Small (HP < 250)
IEC method short-circuit contribution are categorized per the following table:
Short-Circuit Contribution
High
Medium
Low
HP
Large
Medium
Small
Speed
High RPM
Intermittent RPM
Low RPM
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the lumped motor.
Connection
The grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
Type
For Wye-connected lumped motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:
Open
Solid
Resistor
Reactor

Amp Rating
For resistor or reactor grounded lumped motor, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohmic Value)
where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by 3.
X/R Ratio
X/R
Lumped motors X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra)
Typical
If Typical is selected, typical X/R value will be substituted in the X/R field.
ANSI Short-Circuit
Std MF / Xsc
sequence short-circuit impedances. If you select the Xsc option, you can directly enter the short-circuit
11-388
AC Elements
Lumped Load
impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base. Note that the IEC Short-Circuit Method does not
use these impedances.
Motor Size
HP
> 1000 HP
> 250 HP
50 HP
< 50 HP
kW Equivalent
> 745.7
> 186.4
37.28
< 37.28
RPM
1800
3600
other
Xsc
Cycle Network
1.0/LRC
1.0/LRC
1.2/LRC
1.67/LRC
Xsc
1.5-4 Cycle Network
1.5/LRC
1.5/LRC
3.0/LRC
Infinity
IEC Short-Circuit
X
This is the motor subtransient reactance in percent (machine base)
m
This is the m factor.
Td'
This is the motor transient time constant in seconds; this value is used in the IEC 363 method.
Td' = X/(2 f Rr)
11.16.4 Dynamic Model Page

From the Dynamic page, you can specify a model used in Transient Stability Analysis to a lump load.
You may specify parameters of a build-in equivalent induction motor, or select a predefined User-Defined
Model (UDM).
11-389
AC Elements
Lumped Load
Build-in Model
Dynamic Power-Frequency Relationship for an Induction Motor

The build-in dynamic model provides a means to establish a dependency of real power absorbed by the
motor on the frequency of the power system.
This dependency is of the following form:
P
P :=
e
( + Ta) f
Ta
This is the inertia constant of the lump load dynamic model in seconds.
11-390
AC Elements
Lumped Load
This is the lump load power coefficient in MW/RPM.
UDM Model
ETAP allows you to have your own lump load dynamic model through UDM (User Defined Models).
Once you select the UDM model option, you can select a model from a list of pre-defined UDM models
in the model list.
UDM Editor
Clicking on the UDM Editor button brings up the UDM Graphic Logical Editor. From the editor, you
can create, modify and compile a UDM model.
A
11-391
AC Elements
Lumped Load
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
No of Loads
This is the number of loads (customers) represented by a lump load. This number is used to calculate
number of customer interrupted under a fault.
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
11-392
AC Elements
Lumped Load
User-Defined Info




11-393
AC Elements
Lumped Load
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-394
AC Elements
Lumped Load

11-395
AC Elements
Motor Operated Valve
11.17 Motor Operated Valve

The properties associated with a motor operated valve (MOV) can be entered in this editor.
The MOV Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Info
Nameplate
Loading
Start Cat
Cable/Vd
Cable Ampacity
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.17.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each MOV. The assigned IDs consist of the default MOV ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of MOVs increase. The
11-396
AC Elements
default MOV ID (MOV) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the MOV. Connection for MOV is identical to that of induction
motors. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To
connect or reconnect an MOV to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the MOV resides, i.e., you
Condition
Service
State
Configuration
Initial Status
Select the initial status of the MOV for the selected configuration from the list box.
Open
Close
Throttle
Spare
MOV is initially in open position

MOV is initially in close position
Throttle or jog control (provides flow control to achieve a desired valve position)
Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the MOV is
Note: Status is not a part of the MOV engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the MOV status under a specific configuration, i.e., you can have
a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status of an MOV is
shown to be continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
11-397
AC Elements
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this MOV. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options
for phase connection include:
3 Phase
1 Phase
3-phase machine
11-398
AC Elements
Quantity
Load Flow:
load.
load.
11-399
AC Elements
Short-Circuit:
load.
11-400
AC Elements
11-401
AC Elements
Arc Flash
under Utility 2.
11-402
AC Elements
a single load.
11-403
AC Elements
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for Closing, Opening, Throttling, and Spare status in the entry fields.
Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects these
calculations:
Operating kW = kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
kVA, PF, and RF are the normal operating values.
HP/kW
Enter the MOV rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on
the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equations for the nameplate parameters:
Rated kVA
= HP * 0.7457/(PF * Eff)
= kW/(PF * Eff)
Rating in HP
Rating in kW
Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA/(3 * kV)3-phase motors

= Rated kVA/kV
Single phase motors
11-404
AC Elements
where the PF and Eff are at full load condition (100% loading).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the MOV in kV. This is the line-to-line voltage for 3-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the MOV in amperes. This is the current, which the MOV would pull
from the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated
kV, and rated frequency. When you modify FLA, the efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated. ETAP
limits the entry of FLA in such a way that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be
below 10%.
% PF
Enter the MOV rated power factor in percent at full loading.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the MOV in percent at full loading.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the MOV is
Rated T
Enter the MOV rated torque (optional) in lb.-ft. or N-M.
Library
Access Motor Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick Pick Motor. MOV nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by highlighting and
11-405
AC Elements
double-clicking on the selection. Library data includes MOV ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff,
& Pole (transferred to the Nameplate page).
Hammer Blow
Check this box if the MOV is provided with the hammer blow feature. If hammer blow feature is
unchecked, the full speed stage (no load) stage is skipped (tnl = 0.).
Micro Switch
Check this box if a micro switch is used to control the operation of the MOV. The limit switch controls
the MOV by interrupting power to the motor contactor when the valve actuator has completed its preset
number of revolutions. If the micro switch feature is selected, the stall stage is skipped. For each
operating stage, the corresponding current, PF, and time should be specified.
Characteristics
% Current/Current
Toggle between %Current (percent of the rated current) or Current (in amperes). You can choose from
these two options by clicking on this button. Enter the corresponding value for each specified operating
stage.
% PF
Enter the MOV power factor in percent for the specified operating stage.
Time
Enter the time duration in seconds for the specified operating stage.
The characteristics of the MOV are defined in terms of the various operating stages of the valve. The
following operating stages are provided based on the MOVs initial status (open, close, throttle, and
spare) and selected features (micro switch and/or hammer blow).
Start
Full Speed
Travel
Seated or Unseated
Stall
MOVs, which are initially in the Open status travel, the following stages based on the selected features.
Note that without the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is set to zero value. Also, if micro
switch is used, the stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.
11-406
AC Elements
The following stages are provided for an MOV, which is initially in the Closed status. Note that without
the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is set to a zero value. Also, if a micro switch is used, the
stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.
For MOVs with throttle control, only the travel stage is displayed.
11-407
AC Elements
11.17.3 Loading Page

This page is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this MOV, i.e.,
each motor can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the
values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Studies.

ETAP allows you to specify which MOV are included in a given starting category. The starting
categories can be selected from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories can be
edited from the Project menu under Settings and Starting Categories. Note that starting categories are
particularly useful for group starting motors as opposed to specifying individual motors to start.
11-408
AC Elements
%Voltage Limit
Start
Enter the MOV voltage limit for normal operation, in percent of the MOV rated kV. If the MOV terminal
voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will maintain current drawn to %LRC for the duration of the
voltage limit violation for MOV start period.
Seating/Unseating
voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will switch current drawn to %LRC for the duration of the
voltage limit violation during Seating or Unseating period.
Travel
voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will switch current drawn to %LRC for the duration of the
voltage limit violation during travel period.

Equipment Cable
11-409
AC Elements
ID
To add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
Delete Cable
Overload Heater
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms. The Library button for selecting and retrieving
overload heaters from the Overload Heater Library is not active for this version.
11-410
AC Elements
Voltage Drop
Vst
Vbus
here for reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
By selecting this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage
drop calculations.
11.17.5 Cable/Amp Page
Installation
11-411
AC Elements
U/G Duct Bank

U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Application MF
Ampacity
Id = F Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)


The modified base ampacity (maximum allowable current) in amperes for the chosen cable under the
specified installation conditions.

Adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual installation
conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load capacity, which
results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several
components as listed below.
Fta =
Ftc =
Fth =
Fg =
Fc =
Fm =
Fce =
Fm =
Ffc =
Ffs =
Ffw=

11-412
AC Elements
Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
These are underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
Ta
Tc
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
These are directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
This is the ambient temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding
soil where the cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
Tc
Maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the base
ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
11-413
AC Elements
A/G Trays
These are above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of
the air surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
Depth
Width
% fill

11-414
AC Elements
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable coating and no other cable
can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the air surrounding the
area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
11-415
AC Elements
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment

This is the level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be chosen as either 50% or
none.
Grouping
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 24
25 through 42
43 and above
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 20
21 through 30
31 through 40
41 through 60

80 %
70 %
70 %
60 %
50 %

80 %
70 %
50 %
45 %
40 %
35 %
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
11-416
AC Elements
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables
are considered.
Ta
degrees Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
11-417
AC Elements
A
being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed component
itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to
service only after repair or replacement.
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
11-418
AC Elements
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
11-419
AC Elements
User-Defined Info




11-420
AC Elements
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-421
AC Elements

11-422
AC Elements
Static Load
11.18 Static Load

The properties associated with static loads of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
The Static Load Editor includes the following eight pages of properties.
Info
Loading
Cable/Vd
Cable Amp
Harmonic
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.18.1 Info Page

You can specify the static load ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag,
load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, Quantity or number of static loads,
Phase connection, and Demand Factor within the Info page.
11-423
AC Elements
Static Load
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each static load. The assigned IDs consist of the default static
load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of static loads
increase. The default static load ID (Load) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the static load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a static load to a bus, select a bus from the
list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note
that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides, i.e., you
If a static load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the static
load to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Service
State
11-424
AC Elements
Static Load
Configuration
Select the operating status of the static load for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Options for operating status include:
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

Spare load
Note: Status is not a part of the static load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the static load to indicate that this is the static load status
under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a static load is shown to be Continuous under Normal
configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
11-425
AC Elements
Static Load
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the static load. Select the phase connection type from the list box.
3 Phase
1 Phase
3-phase machine
Quantity
Load Flow:
load.
11-426
AC Elements
Static Load
load.
Short-Circuit:
11-427
AC Elements
Static Load
load.
11-428
AC Elements
Static Load
Arc Flash
under Utility 2.
a single load.
11-429
AC Elements
Static Load
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields.
calculations:

11-430
AC Elements
Static Load
11.18.2 Loading Page
Ratings
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the static load in kV. If this static load is a 3-phase load, kV is the line-to-line
voltage. For single-phase loads, kV load rated voltage must be consistent with the way this load is
connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A
and neutral, then the rated voltage of the load must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the
bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A and phase B, then the rated voltage of
the load must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
MVA/kVA Button
kVA =
kW 2 + kvar
PF = kW kVA
Negative PF means leading PF
11-431
AC Elements
Static Load
MVA/kVA
Enter the rated apparent power of the static load in MVA or kVA.
MW/kW
Enter the rated real power of the static load in MW or kW.
Mvar/kvar
Enter the rated reactive power of the static load in Mvar or kvar. To specify a capacitor, enter 0.0 for
MW and a negative value for the Mvar field.
%PF
This is the power factor of the static load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of the
power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging and
-80% indicates leading.
Amps
Enter the static load rated current in amperes.
Calculator
ETAP Power Calculator is set up to calculate complex power, power factor, and current. The following
equations are used to calculate these variables:
kVA =
PF = kW
kW 2 + kvar 2
kVA
Negative PF means leading PF
Amps = 1000 * kVA / ( kV * 3 )
3-phase
Amps = 1000 * kVA / kV
Single-Phase
11-432
AC Elements
Static Load
To use the calculator, select the variable units as kVA or MVA, and change one of the variables. For
example, if kW is changed and the value of the kvar is changed, new values of kVA, %PF, and Amp (if
kV is specified) will be calculated. If the value of PF is changed, new values of kvar and kVA are
calculated.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for this static load, i.e.,
each static load can have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the values
of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Studies.
and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.
This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and
efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the operating
kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is
specified for this load. Note: although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and
feeder losses, the value of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating power factor and
efficiency.
11-433
AC Elements
Static Load

heater associated with this static load.
Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this load. Partial
cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and Unit are provided here for
ID
Use this field to add a cable to a static load, select and retrieve the cable from the Cable Library on this
page.
Cable Editor
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a static load, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
Click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the equipment Cable Editor for automatic sizing of the
equipment cable.
11-434
AC Elements
Static Load
Delete Cable
Overload Heater
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms. The Library button for selecting and retrieving
overload heaters from the Overload Heater Library is not active for this version.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with static load
terminal voltage (Vt), are calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Both Vd and Vt are
displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vbus
here for reference.
Vd Calculation
By selecting this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for
11.18.4 Amp Page
11-435
AC Elements
Static Load
Installation
U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Application MF
Ampacity
Id = F Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)



This is the adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual
installation conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load
capacity, which results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is
composed of several components as listed below.
Fta =
Ftc =
Fth =
Fg =
Fc =
Fm =
Fce =
Fm =
Ffc =
Ffs =

11-436
AC Elements
Static Load
Ffw= Derating factor for A/G fire wrap
Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
Ta
Tc
ampacity is obtained from the library. This order is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
This is the ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where
the cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The
value is usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
11-437
AC Elements
Static Load
Grouping
A/G Trays
These are above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries is used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the
air surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. The conductor temperature for
Tray Specification
NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
11-438
AC Elements
Depth
Width
% fill
Static Load

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
11-439
AC Elements
Static Load
A/G Conduit
This is above ground cable conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
Maximum allowable conductor temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for
Ampacity Adjustment

Grouping
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 24
25 through 42
43 and above
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 20
21 through 30
31 through 40
41 through 60

80 %
70 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
80 %
70 %
50 %
45 %
40 %
35 %
11-440
AC Elements
Static Load
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for airdrop cables are
considered.
Ta
This is ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. The temperature of the air surrounding the area where the
tray is to be installed is in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees
Celsius. For cables in direct sun, the air temperature may be increased by a typical value of 15 degrees
Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature measured in degrees Celsius.
temperature for the base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Conductor
Fire Protection
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the airdrop
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
11-441
AC Elements
Static Load
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

Static Load can be modeled as either a harmonic voltage source or a harmonic current source.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click on Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
11-442
AC Elements
Static Load
Specify a harmonic type: Current Source or Voltage Source, a manufacturer name and a model name
using the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Type
This displays the selected harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
This displays Manufacturer name of the selected harmonic library.
Model
This displays the model name of the selected harmonic library.
Wave Form
This displays one cycle of the voltage or current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time
domain.
Print (Wave Form)

Select this to print harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)
Select this to print harmonic spectrum.
11-443
AC Elements
Static Load
A
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
11-444
AC Elements
Static Load
FOR
It is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
11-445
AC Elements
Static Load
User-Defined Info




11-446
AC Elements
Static Load
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-447
AC Elements
Static Load

11-448
AC Elements
Capacitor
11.19 Capacitor
The properties associated with a shunt capacitor can be entered in this editor.
The Capacitor Editor includes the following seven pages of properties.
Info
Rating
Cable/Vd
Cable Amp
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.19.1 Info Page

Specify the capacitor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, load
Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, Phase connection, and Demand Factor
within the Info page.
Info
ID
11-449
AC Elements
Capacitor
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each capacitor. The assigned IDs consist of the default
capacitor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of capacitors
increase. The default capacitor ID (CAP) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the capacitor. Connection for capacitors is identical to that of
static loads. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a capacitor to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the capacitor resides, i.e., you
Condition
Service
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the capacitor for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the capacitor is
determined for Load Slow and Motor Starting Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the capacitor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the capacitor to indicate that this is the device status
configurations. In the following example, status of a capacitor is shown to be Continuous under Normal
configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
11-450
AC Elements
Capacitor
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the capacitor. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options
for phase connection include:
3 Phase
3-phase machine
11-451
AC Elements
1 Phase
Capacitor

Demand factor
Modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields.
calculations:

11.19.2 Rating Page
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the capacitor in kV. If this capacitor load is a 3-phase load, kV is the line-toline voltage. For a single-phase capacitor, kV rated voltage must be consistent with the way this capacitor
11-452
AC Elements
Capacitor
is connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected between
phase A and neutral, then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV
(4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected between phase A and phase B
(AB), then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
Max. kV
Enter the maximum rated voltage of the capacitor in kV. Typically this value is 110% of capacitor rated
kV.
kvar/bank
Enter the capacitor reactive power per bank. This reactive power is the capacitive var to the system.
# of Banks
Enter the number of capacitor banks.
kvar/bank and # of banks.
ETAP automatically calculates the total kvar based on the
Mvar = (Mvar/Bank) (# of Banks)

kvar = (kvar/Bank)(# of Banks)
Mvar/kvar Button
Click on the Mvar/kvar button to choose from Mvar and kvar units for entering and displaying
Mvar/kvar data.
ETAP calculates and displays the amps and capacitor reactance as well as the capacitor size in
microfarads. The following equations are used to calculate these variables:
kvar
3 kV
kvar
Amps =
kV
kV 2
3
=
Xc 10
kvar
Amps =
3-phase
Single-Phase
Ohms
10 6
microfarad =
Xc 2f
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for the capacitor, i.e.,
each capacitor can have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the values
of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note: You can
select any of these loading categories when conducting Load Slow and Motor Starting Studies.

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable associated with
this capacitor.
11-453
AC Elements
Capacitor
Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this capacitor.
Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and Unit are provided here
for editing and displaying.
ID
You can add a cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
To set up automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this capacitor.
11-454
AC Elements
Capacitor
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable, along with capacitor terminal voltage (Vt) are
calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Both Vd and Vt are displayed in percent values
with a base kV equal to the rated kV of the capacitor.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this capacitor is connected to, if any) is
displayed here for reference.
Vd Calculation
When you select this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for
11-455
AC Elements
Capacitor
Installation
U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Application MF
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for comparison of base, derated, and required (I x MF) ampacities. The
Id = F x Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)

This is the full rated current value in amperes for the chosen cable before any derating occurs. This is the


This is the adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual
Fta
Ftc
Fth
Fg
Fc
Fm
Fce
Fm
Ffc
Ffs
Ffw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

11-456
AC Elements
Capacitor
Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
Tc
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is measured in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where the
cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value
is usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
The maximum allowable conductor temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature
for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
11-457
AC Elements
Capacitor
Grouping
A/G Trays
These are above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
The ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
11-458
AC Elements
Depth
Width
% fill
Capacitor

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
This is above ground cable conduit.
11-459
AC Elements
Capacitor
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the
air surrounding the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity
is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The conductor
temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90
degrees Celsius.
Ampacity Adjustment

Grouping
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 24
25 through 42
43 and above
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 20
21 through 30
31 through 40
41 through 60

80 %
70 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
80 %
70 %
50 %
45 %
40 %
35 %
Fire Protection
11-460
AC Elements
Capacitor
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
routed through fire stops. Note: There may not be any reason to derate the cable for fire stops since
typical fire stops are constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be
insufficient to cause an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables is
considered.
Ta
This is ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. The temperature of the air surrounding the area where the
tray is to be installed is in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees
Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The conductor
temperature for the base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Fire Protection
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
11-461
AC Elements
Capacitor
Fire Wrap
A
11-462
AC Elements
Capacitor
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Select a load sector name (or customer type) for the load from the Interruption Cost pull-down list. In the
reliability calculation, the user sector information is used to get the interruption cost from the Reliability
Cost library to calculate Expected Interruption Cost.
11-463
AC Elements
Capacitor
User-Defined Info




11-464
AC Elements
Capacitor
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 18 alphanumeric
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-465
AC Elements
Capacitor
Enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies that are
associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb, with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size
of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information on the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key
11-466
AC Elements
Power Panel
11.20 Power Panel

You can enter the properties associated with panel schedule of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. Every panel and subpanel can have unlimited circuits. Each circuit can be
comprised of a load, protective device, and/or a feeder. Circuits are displayed in the Panel Editor in
standard or column layout.
ETAPS Power Panel provides spreadsheet and graphical representations of the
panel loads. The graphical panel provides a quick review of loads via the one-line
diagram.
The Panel Schedule Editor contains six pages of properties.
Info page, Rating page, Schedule page, Summary page, Remarks page, and
Comment page.
Within the Schedule page, there are five tabs: Description tab, Rating tab,
Loading tab, Protective Device tab, and Feeder tab
11-467
AC Elements
Power Panel
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Lock / Unlock
For details on Panel Schedule, refer to Chapter 36 of the ETAP User Guide.
11-468
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
11.21 Harmonic Filter

The Harmonic Filter Editor contains the following five pages of properties:
Info
Parameter
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
In addition, a Harmonic Filter Sizing Editor is available through the Parameter page.
11.21.1 Info Page

You can specify the harmonic filter ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, and Phase connection within
the Info page.
Info
ID
11-469
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each harmonic filter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
filter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of filters increase.
The default filter ID (HF) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the harmonic filter. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a harmonic filter to a bus, select a bus
OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides,
If a harmonic filter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
harmonic filter to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
State
11-470
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
Configuration
Select the operating status of the harmonic filter for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the filter is
determined for Load Flow, Motor Starting, and Transient Stability Studies.
Note that status is not a part of the harmonic filter engineering properties. For this reason, the name of
the configuration status is shown above the status of the harmonic filter to indicate that this is the
harmonic filter status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under
different configurations. In the following example, status of a harmonic filter is shown to be Continuous
under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
11-471
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Grounding
Specify the grounding connection type of harmonic filter. Y grounded connected filters are considered as
solidly grounded.
11.21.2 Parameter Page

Within the Parameter page, specify the filter type and its parameters. For the Single-Tuned filter, you
also can use the filter sizing facility to automatically size the filter.
Filter Type
Choose a pre-defined filter type from the dropdown list. Four types of filter structures are available.
By-Pass
A filter type that has by-pass frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Damped)
A filter type that has high-pass with damped frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Undamped)
High-pass undamped filter. A filter type that has high-pass with undamped frequency characteristic
Single-Tuned
A filter type that has a single tuned frequency point.
3rd Order Damped

Special high-pass damped filter where the inductance is replaced with a series LC Circuit to provide zero
losses at the fundamental frequency and therefore avoiding parallel resonance.
3rd Order C-Type

Special high-pass undamped filter where the inductance is replaced with a series LC Circuit to provide
zero losses at the fundamental frequency and therefore avoiding parallel resonance.
11-472
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
Capacitor C1
kvar
This is 1-phase kvar for capacitor C1.
Rated kV
This is rated kV in rms for capacitors C1.
Max. kV
This is maximum kV in peak for capacitor C1.
In ETAP it is assumed that a harmonic filter is installed on a single phase. Therefore the capacitor
parameter value for kvar needs to be entered as single-phase. Since the harmonic filter may have a Wye
or Delta connection, the rated kV needs to be entered accordingly. For example, if a harmonic filter has a
Wye connection and it is connected to a 3-phase bus, then, the rated kV to be entered should be VL-L/3
(or if Delta connection then VL-L). Refer to the following examples for details.
Case 1: Wye Connection.
For demonstration purposes a harmonic filter with capacitor parameters only is used. It has a Wye
connection and it is connected to a 3-phase bus with a nominal kV = 4.16 kV. Note that the rated kV =
2.4 kV. Since each phase should provide 100 kvars, the load flow calculation shows that the 3 phases
should provide about 300 kvars.
11-473
AC Elements
Harmonic filter connection
Harmonic Filter
Harmonic filter parameters
Load flow results
Case 2: Delta Connection

Same harmonic filter is used with Delta connection and rated kV = 4.16 kV. Note that the load flow
calculation shows similar results for the harmonic filter (about 300 kvars.)
Harmonic filter connection
Harmonic filter parameters
Load flow results
Capacitor C2
kvar
This is 1-phase kvar for capacitor C2.
Rated kV
This is rated kV in rms for capacitors C2.
Max. kV
This the maximum kV in peak for capacitor C2.
Inductor L1
XL1
This is XL1 in ohms for inductor L1.
Q Factor
This is the Q factor (XL1/RL1) for inductor L1.
11-474
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
Max. I
This is the maximum I in rms for inductor L1.
Inductor L2
XL2
This is the XL2 in ohms for inductor L2.
Q Factor
This is the Q factor (XL2/RL2) for inductor L2.
Max. I
This is the maximum I in rms for inductor L2.
Resistor R
This is the external resistance of the filter in ohms.
Sizing Button
When single-tuned is specified as the filter type, click on this button to activate the Harmonic Filter
Sizing Editor. (See the Harmonic Filter Sizing Section.)
11-475
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
A
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
11-476
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.
11-477
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
11-478
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-479
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter

11-480
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
11.21.6 Harmonic Filter Sizing Editor
Harmonic Info
Harmonic Order
Use this filed to specify a harmonic order for sizing the filter.
Harmonic Current
Use this field to provide harmonic current for the specified harmonic order in amps.
Include Filter Overloading

Click on this checkbox to include filter overloading checking. Filter ratings that will be checked are the
capacitor maximum peak voltage and inductance maximum rms current.
Sizing Option
Click one of the buttons to define the filter sizing criteria per the following:
PF Correction
Size the filter based on the power factor correction criteria.
11-481
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
Minimize Initial Cost

Size the filter based on minimal initial cost.
Minimize Operating Cost

Size the filter based on minimal operating cost.
Initial Installation Cost

Specify the initial installation costs for the capacitor and inductor.
Capacitor
Use this field to enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the capacitor.
Inductor
Use this field to enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the inductor.
Operating Cost
Specify the operating cost for the capacitor.
Capacitor Lost Factor

Enter the capacitor loss factor in percent of the capacitor total rating in this field.
PF Correction
Use this area to specify system operating conditions. These values are used only if PF Correction is
selected as sizing option.
Existing PF
Enter the existing PF in percent for the load connected to the filter terminal bus in this field.
Desired PF
Enter the desired PF in percent after the filter is installed on the filter terminal bus in this field.
Load MVA
Enter the 1-phase load MVA on the filter terminal bus in this field.
Size Filter Button

Click on this button to size the filter based on the selections and data entered.
Substitute Button
Click on this button to substitute the calculated parameters (results) back to the Harmonic Filter
Parameter page.
Result
This area displays results from the sizing calculation.
1-Phase kvar
This is the filter 1-phase capacitor kvar.
11-482
AC Elements
Harmonic Filter
Xl
This is the impedance of XL1 in ohm/phase.
Vc
This is the computed capacitor peak kV (ASUM) using the sized filter parameters.
IL
This is the computed inductor current (rms amps) using the sized filter parameters.
11-483
AC Elements
Remote Connector
11.22 Remote Connector

The Remote Connector is a tool that allows two or more distinct elements to be connected to each other,
while located in separate areas of the One-Line Diagram. The Remote Connector Editor contains one
page of informationthe Info page. Section 8.17.3 illustrates how the Remote Connector is used in the
One-Line Diagram.
11.22.1 Info Page

The Info page displays the Remote Connector ID, Protective Devices, and Elements connected to Side 1
and Side 2 of the Remote Connector.
Remote Connector
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Remote Connector. The assigned IDs consist of the
default Remote Connector ID (CL) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of connectors increase.
Side Connection (Side 1 and Side 2)

This displays the IDs of the Protective Device and Element connected to each side of the Remote
Connector.
11-484
AC Elements
Remote Connector
Protective Device
This displays the ID of the Protective Device connected to each side of the Remote Connector.
Element
This displays the ID of the Element connected to each Side of the Remote Connector.
11.22.2 Editing the Remote Connector

When using the Remote Connector, the following tips are helpful to remember:
The Remote Connector is composed of two sides, Side 1 and Side 2

Each side can be located in a different area of the One-Line Diagram
When one side is deleted, the other end of the Remote Connector is also deleted, and cannot be
recovered from the system Dumpster.
Right click on either Side 1 or Side 2 of a Remote Connector and select Find Other End, to locate
the other side of the connector
Double-clicking on one end of the remote connector will prompt ETAP to find the corresponding
end
Copying the Remote Connector to a Composite Network

The Remote Connector can be used inside Composite Networks. To copy one side of the Remote
Connector to a Composite Network, follow these steps:
Select the Remote Connector from the Toolbar, and place it in the One-Line Diagram
Double-click on the Composite Network you wish to copy one side of the Remote Connector to.
The Composite Network window must be open.
Press and hold the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys, click on one side of the Remote Connector, and drag
it to its new location inside the Composite Network. Release the keys and buttons to place the
connector.
Add Elements to each side of the connector.
11.22.3 Remote Connector in the One-Line Diagram
11-485
AC Elements
Remote Connector
11-486
AC Elements
Phase Adapter
11.23 Phase Adapter

The Phase Adapter is a tool that allows a 1-phase element to be connected to a 3-phase bus. The Phase
Adapter Editor contains the following two pages of information:
Info
Load
The 1-phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter cannot be directly connected to a 1-phase load. It must
first be connected to a transformer. The figure in Section 8.18.4 illustrates how a Phase Adapter is used
in the One-Line Diagram.
11.23.1 Info Page

Specify the Phase Adapter ID, In/Out of Service, 3-Phase Primary Side Bus ID, Phase Connection, 1Phase Secondary Side Element ID, 1-Phase Feeder Name/Description, Configuration and Status within
the Info page.
11-487
AC Elements
Phase Adapter
Info
ID
each Phase Adapter. The assigned IDs consist of the default Phase Adapter ID plus an integer, starting
with the number one and increasing as the number of adapters increases. The default Phase Adapter ID
(PA) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Condition
Service
State
Primary Side
Bus ID
This displays the ID and the voltage of the 3-Phase Bus (or AB, BC, and CA phase bus) that the Primary
Side of the Phase Adapter is connected to.
Secondary Side
Element ID
This displays the ID of the element connected to the 1-Phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter.
Phase Connection
This allows for the selection of a specific phase for the 1-Phase output from the Phase Adapter to the
load. The choices are: Phase A, B, C, AB, AC, and BC. Each of these selections is uniquely color-coded.
Feeder
Name
Use this field to specify a customized name to the Phase Adapter, which differs from the ID.
Description
Use the field to specify a unique description for the Phase Adapter.
11-488
AC Elements
Phase Adapter
Configuration
Normal
Select the operating status of the Phase Adapter from the list below:
Close
Open
Provides a continuous connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.
Provides no connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.
Note: Status is not a part of the Phase Adapters engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration is shown above the actual status of the Phase Adapter to indicate that this is the Phase
Adapter status under the specific configuration.
11.23.2 Load Page

The Load page displays information about the characteristics of the load connected to the Phase Adapter.
The following information is displayed within the Load page: Phase Adapter Primary Bus Voltage, Total
Connected Load kW and kvar, Total Operating Load kW and kvar. The Loading Category can be chosen
from the Loading Category list box.
3-Phase Voltage
This field displays the norminal voltage of the bus that the Phase Adapter Primary Side is connected to.
11-489
AC Elements
Phase Adapter
Total Connected Load

Constant Power and Constant Impedance
This field displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total amount
of load that is connected to the Phase Adapter.
Total Operating Load

Constant Power and Constant Impedance
This field displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total
operating load amount that is connected to the Phase Adapter.
Loading Category
This pull-down list allows the user to select the Loading Category condition for the Total Operating load
connected to the Phase Adapter.
11.23.3 The Phase Adapter in the One-Line Diagram
11.23.4 Phase Adapter in System Studies

This Section describes how the Phase Adapter is considered in System Studies. In the current version of
ETAP, the elements downstream from a Phase Adapter are not considered in detail in a system study.
Instead, all the loads connected downstream from the Phase Adapter are summed up to the Phase
Adapter.
11-490
AC Elements
Phase Adapter
Load Flow Type System Studies And Reliability Study

The load flow type System Studies are ones that require performing load flow calculations, including load
flow, motor starting, harmonic load flow, transient stability, optimal power flow. In these studies as well
as in the reliability study, the downstream loads connected to a Phase Adapter are aggregated to get the
total load. Each Phase Adapter is considered as a single load in the System Studies.
Radial System
In order to sum up the load for a top panel in the current version of ETAP, it is required that the system
powered by a Phase Adapter must be a radial system. It is not allowed for downstream elements from a
Phase Adapter to form any loops. Furthermore, the Phase Adapter must be the only source for all the
downstream elements. Before carrying out a system study, ETAP checks if loops are involved in any
Phase Adapter. If a loop is detected, an error message will be displayed and the calculation is stopped.
Top Panel Load

The load aggregated to a Phase Adapter includes all downstream loads. Since downstream connections
may involve any elements except 3-winding transformers, utilities, and generators, it can form a full
radial system. In summing up the load for the Phase Adapter, ETAP considers all the loads connected.
Because no load flow calculations are conducted, the load summation does not include losses on the
branches and equipment cables.
The aggregated load values are displayed in the Phase Adapter Editor. Depending on the Study Case
options, appropriate load diversity factors can also be applied.
Short-Circuit Type System Studies

In the current version of ETAP, it is assumed that Phase Adapters do not make any short-circuit
contributions to any fault occurred in the system.
11.23.5 Equivalent Load Page

The Equivalent Load page shows parameters used for ETAP Power System Management System (PSMS)
applications. This page is hidden is your ETAP license does not include the PSMS capability.
11-491
AC Elements
Phase Adapter
Rated Connected Load

The rated connected load of a phase adapter can be summed-up from down-stream connected load or
entered by the user. The rated load serves as the base for the operating load in the Equivalent Load
section.
Constant Power/Impedance kW/kvar Load

When the Sum option is selected, these fields display the rated connected constant power and constant
impedance load of the phase adapter. When the User-Defined option is selected, these fields become
editable, allowing the user to specify rated load for the phase adapter.
Sum & Update

When the Sum option is selected, the rated load of the phase adapter will be calculated based on the rating
of down-stream connected loads when the Update button is clicked.
User-Defined
When the User-Defined option is selected, the fields for rated load will editable for the user to enter rated
connected load of the phase adapter.
Equivalent Load
This section allows the user to specify load percent for each loading category and ETAP will calculate
phase adapter load based on the rated connected load and the loading percent.
%Load
Enter loading percent for the loading category. Once a new value is entered, the phase adapter load for
the category will be calculated.
11-492
AC Elements
11.24 Grounding/Earthing Adapter
Info
ID
each Grounding/Earthing Adapter. The assigned IDs consist of the default Grounding/Earthing Adapter
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of adapters increases. The
default Grounding/Earthing Adapter ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Condition
Service
11-493
AC Elements
State
Primary Side
Bus ID
This displays the ID and the voltage of the bus that the Primary Side of the Grounding/Earthing Adapter
is connected to.
Earthing Type
This displays the grounding type of the upstream connected bus. If the bus does not contain a grounding
type, this field is hidden. Please note that in order for the Earthing Type field to be displayed, you need to
set True to the option in Preferences Option, Cable Sizing, Earthing Type Determination for
Grounding/PE Sizing.
Secondary Side
Element ID
This displays the ID of the element connected to the Secondary Side of the Grounding/Earthing Adapter.
Earthing Type
Select a system earthing type to switch to. The available earthing types are listed based on the system
grounding type. Please note that in order for the Earthing Type field to be displayed, you need to set True
to the option in Preferences Option, Cable Sizing, Earthing Type Determination for Grounding/PE Sizing.
The following table lists the earthing type associated with the grounding types
Grounding Type Earthing method
Ungrounded
IT type of the primary
Grounded
TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S, TT, and NEC
Feeder
Name
Use this field to specify a customized name to the Grounding/Earthing Adapter, which differs from the
ID.
Description
Use the field to specify a unique description for the Grounding/Earthing Adapter.
Grounded
Check this checkbox if the load side is solid grounded.
Rg
Enter the resistance to ground/earth in Ohms. This value is for the inclusion of the local grounding in
electric shock protection calculation.
11-494
AC Elements
11.25 Static Var Compensator

The properties associated with High-Voltage Static Var Compensators (SVCs) can be entered in this
editor.
The Static Var Editor includes the following seven pages of properties:
Info
Harmonic
Comment
Rating
Reliability
Model
Remarks
11.25.1 Info Page
Info
ID
This is a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each SVC. The assigned IDs consist of the default SVC ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of SVCs increase. The default
SVC ID (SVC) can be changed from the ETAP Defaults menu or from the Project View.
11-495
AC Elements
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the SVC. Connection for SVC is identical to that of static loads.
If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or
reconnect an SVC to a bus, select a bus from the list box, and then click OK. The one-line diagram will
be updated to show the new connection.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the SVC resides. In other words,
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next to the Bus ID.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
11-496
AC Elements
Priority
Lock / Unlock
11.25.2 Rating Page

The Rating page defines the control region of the Static Var Compensator (SVC).
Voltage Rating
kV
This is the rated Voltage of the SVC in kV.
Vmax
This is the maximum voltage in percent of rated voltage. This value is used to calculate the maximum
current of the SVC.
11-497
AC Elements
Vmin
This is the minimum voltage in percent of rated voltage. This value is used to calculate the minimum
current of the SVC.
Vref
This is the voltage setting as a percentage of rated voltage. When the SVC is in control range, the SVC
will maintain this voltage at its terminal.
Inductive Rating
These are the ratings of the inductive component of the SVC.
QL
The rated inductive reactive power in Mvar.
IL
The rated inductive current in kA.
BL
The rated inductive susceptance in Siemens.
Capacitive Rating
These are the ratings of the capacitive component of the SVC.
Qc
This is the rated capacitive reactive power in Mvars.
Ic
This is the rated capacitive current in kA.
Bc
This is the rated capacitive susceptance in Siemens.
Max Inductive Rating and Slope

QLMax
This is the maximum inductive reactive power in Mvars.
ILMax
This is the maximum inductive reactive current in Amps.
SLL
This is the slope of the operating terminal voltage in the inductive region.
Max Capacitive Rating and Slope

Qc Max
This is the maximum capacitive reactive power in Mvars.
11-498
AC Elements
Ic Max
This is the maximum capacitive reactive current in Amps.
SLC
This is the slope of the operating terminal voltage in the capacitive region.
11.25.3 Static Var Compensator Models

The Static Var Compensator Control model can be accessed from the Static Var Editor, Model page. It is
imperative to model this control when performing Transient Stability Studies to determine the dynamic
response of the SVC under different conditions.
ETAP contains the following SVC control models:
Type1SVC_Control_Model_Type1
See the Dynamic Models Chapter for more details.
11-499
AC Elements

The Harmonic page of the Static Var Editor allows you to specify the generation of Harmonics of this
device.
Harmonic Library
Select this option to define the content of the harmonics of this device by selecting a model from the
library (by clicking the Library button). When this option is selected, the Library group is activated while
the Parameters group is grayed out.
Static Var Parameters

Select this option to define the content of harmonics of this device by the pulse level and the rectifier
injection angle of the device. When this option is selected the Library group is grayed out and the
Parameters group is active.
Library
This group displays the properties of the library selected such as type, manufacturer, and model.
Parameters
Pulse #
Select the Thyristor pulse modulation. This selection has a direct impact on the modeling of the harmonic
generation of the SVC.
11-500
AC Elements
Shift Angle
Enter the transformer shift phase angle. ETAP enters the standard shift angles for different pulse
modulation when the pulse number is selected:
Pulse
12
24
48
Shift Angle
30
15
7.5
For 6 pulse, the phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model.
Alpha
Enter the advance angle in degrees.
Xc%
Enter the commutation reactance in percent of the rated reactive reactance.
Max Order
This is the maximum harmonic order to be modeled.

A
A is the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the
component to fail and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
restored to some or all of the load points. However, the failed component itself (and those components
that are directly connected to this failed component) can only be restored to service after repair or
replacement.
MTTR
MTTR is the mean time to repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
and restore the system to its normal operating state.
is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR ( =
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
MTTF is the mean time to failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/A).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate that is, unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
11-501
AC Elements
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
rP is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element with a spare one.
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick dialog box for reliability data.
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
information is used to get interruption cost from the reliability cost library to calculate expected
interruption cost.
11-502
AC Elements
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. You can change the
names of the user-defined (UD) fields from the Project menu by pointing to Settings and selecting the
User-Defined Fields command.




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
11-503
AC Elements

When entering information on the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key
11-504
AC Elements
High Voltage DC Link
11.26 High Voltage DC Link (DC Transmission Line)

The properties associated with High-Voltage DC Link (HVDC) can be entered in this editor.
The HVDC Editor includes the following 11 pages of properties:
Info
Inverter Control
Harm-Rect
Remarks
Rating
AC Control
Harm-Inv
Comment
Rectifier Control
Shut-Restart Control
Reliability
11.26.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC Link. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC Links increase. The
default transformer ID (DC_LINK) can be changed from the Defaults menu by pointing to Branch and
selecting High-Voltage DC Link or from the Project View.
11-505
AC Elements
From Bus, To Bus

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC Link are designated in the From Bus and To Bus drop-down
lists. If the DC Link is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a DC Link to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to
show the new connection, after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the DC Link resides. In other
words, you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a DC Link is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC Link
to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus. This is
shown in the figure below, where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Next to the From Bus and To Bus lists, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses.
Condition
Service
State
11-506
AC Elements
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the feeder tag number in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter the equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter the equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
11.26.2 Rating Page

The DC Link model includes the following components whose ratings can be defined on the Rating page
of the DC Link Editor.
11-507
AC Elements
Rectifier (Input)
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the input of the rectifier in kilovolts.
Note: When a DC Link is connected to a bus, the rated voltage is set equal to the bus nominal kV.
Hz
Enter the rated input frequency of the rectifier in Hertz.
Rectifier Transformer
Prim. kV and Sec. kV
Enter the primary and secondary voltage ratings of the rectifier transformer in kilovolts. ETAP will use
the voltage ratio to calculate the DC voltage output of the rectifier.
MVA
Enter the MVA rating of the rectifier transformer.
transformer impedance calculation.
This value is used as the base MVA for the
Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage.
Xc
Enter the rectifier transformer reactance as a percentage of rated reactance.
11-508
AC Elements
Tap Setting
Click this button to specify the Max%, Min%, and Step% settings of the rectifier transformer tap in the
Transformer Tap Setting dialog box.
Inverter (Output)
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the output of the inverter in kilovolts.
Note: When a DC Link is connected to a bus, the rated voltage is set equal to the bus nominal kV.
Hz
Enter the rated output frequency of the inverter in Hertz.
Inverter Transformer
Prim. kV and Sec. kV
Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the inverter transformer in kilovolts. ETAP will use the
voltage ratio to calculate the DC voltage output of the inverter.
MVA
Enter the MVA Rating of the inverter transformer. This value is used as the base MVA for the
transformer impedance calculation.
Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage.
Xc
Enter the inverter transformer reactance as a percentage.
Tap Setting
Click this button to specify the Max%, Min%, and Step% settings of the inverter transformer tap in the
Transformer Tap Setting dialog box.
DC Link
# of Bridges
Enter the number of bridges series.
Configuration
Select a configuration type for the DC link. The selections available are Bipolar, Monopolar, and
Homopolar.
Resistance
Enter the DC resistance of the DC link in ohms.
11-509
AC Elements
Rating
Imax
Enter the maximum DC current rating in percent.
Vdc
Enter the DC voltage rating of the DC link. This rating can be determined using the following equation:
Vdc = kVRe ctifier
Sec _ kV
BridgeNumber
Pr im _ kV (1 + Tap )
3 2
Idc
Enter the DC current in kiloamps.
Pdc
Enter the DC power rating of the DC Link in megawatts.
Min Alpha
Enter the minimum rectifier ignition angle in degrees.
Max Alpha
Enter the maximum rectifier ignition angle in degrees.
Min Gamma
Enter the minimum inverter extinction angle in degrees.
Max Gamma
Enter the maximum inverter extinction angle in degrees.
Operating
ETAP updates the Vdc, Idc, Pdc, Alpha, and Gamma results in this group.
11.26.3 Rectifier Control Page

The Rectifier Control model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Rectifier Control page.
Note: Contact OTI for information on the usage of this page.
11.26.4 Inverter Control Page

The Inverter Control model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Inverter Control page.
11-510
AC Elements
11.26.5 AC Control Page

The AC Control model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, AC Control page.
Shutdown-Restart Control Page
The DC Link Shutdown and Restart model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Shut-Restart
Control page.
11.26.6 Harmonic-Rectifier Page

The Harm-Rect model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Harm-Rect Control page.
11.26.7 Harmonic Inverter Page

The Harm-Inv model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Harm Inv page.
11-511
AC Elements
AC Composite Motors
11.27 AC Composite Motors

AC Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements that can
be included inside an AC composite motor are:
Induction and Synchronous motors

Static loads
MOVs
Circuit breakers (LV & HV), contactors,
fuses, ST switches, Reclosers, Overload
Heaters
AC composite motors
Voltmeters, Ammeters, and Multi-Meters
Uninterruptable Power Supply

Variable Frequency Drive
Lumped loads
Capacitors & filters
Instrument transformers (current &
potential)
Relays (overcurrent, frequency, voltage,
power, In-Line Overload, solid state trip
and motor)
The number of levels that you can nest composite motors inside composite motors is unlimited. Other
than the limitation on the types of elements that you can include inside a composite motor, the user
interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as the one-line diagram.
To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the
composite motor and double-click on the background where there are no elements
11-512
AC Elements
AC Composite Motors
To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.
11-513
AC Elements
DC Composite Motors
11.28 DC Composite Motors

DC Composite motors are used as a tool to group DC motors and loads. The elements that you can
include inside a DC composite motor are:
DC Motors
DC Loads (Static, Lumped, & Elementary Diagram)
Circuit Breakers, Fuses, & ST Switches
DC Composite Motors
To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the
composite motor and double-click on the background where there are no elements.
To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.
11-514
AC Elements
DC Composite Motors
11-515
AC Elements
DC Composite Motors
11.29 Composite Networks

You can consider a composite network an aggregation of all components in a subsystem since it can
contain buses, branches, loads, sources, and even other composite networks or composite motors. You
can nest your subsystems to an unlimited number of layers. This allows you to construct systems and nest
them by their order of importance, by physical layout, by the geometrical requirements of elements, by
study requirements, by relays and control device requirements, by logical layout of elements, etc. You
have full control as to how the system should be nested.
You may place composite networks anywhere on a one-line diagram or within other composite networks.
These nested composite networks are part of the overall one-line diagram of the system. All studies that
are run include all the elements and connections nested within all composite networks and composite
motors.
11.29.1 Old Composite Networks (ETAP 2.0.8)

Composite networks in ETAP 2.0.8 and earlier versions have four entry points (pins). These are top pin,
left pin, right pin, and bottom pin. Externally, these pins can only be connected to buses (directly or
through protective devices). They represent the connecting points of the composite network to the
outside. Internally, these pins cannot be directly connected to buses, i.e., they can be connected to
branches, motors, fuses, etc.
The bus-like element seen in the old composite network is the starting point for the composite network
(internal pin). This element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the
outside system. This connecting point is not considered as a bus for the studies.
When you open an old composite network for the first time, all of the four pins are shown in their relative
positions. You can move these internal pins anywhere inside the composite network. If there is an
external connection to a pin, the ID of the connected bus is displayed. If there is no external bus
connection, the pins indicate No Ext Bus. If there is an external bus connection, the bus ID is displayed.
Old Composite Network Network1 with top pin connected to bus Sub3
11-516
AC Elements
DC Composite Motors
11.29.2 New Composite Networks

These composite networks are available in ETAP 3.0 or later versions. The new composite networks can
have up to 20 pins. The default number of pins is 4 and can be change from the right mouse click as
shown below.
Changing Number of Pins from 4 to 20
You can hide the unconnected pins inside a composite motor by using the right mouse click as shown
below.
11-517
AC Elements
DC Composite Motors
Hiding Unconnected Pins

The pins for the new composite motors can be connected to any bus, branch, load, or protective device.
Once a pin is connected internally or externally to an element, it becomes a proxy for that element and all
connection rules for the element apply to the connected pin.
11-518
AC Elements
DC Composite Motors
Composite Network Connections

ETAP does not automatically convert the old composite networks to the new type. This can be done by
first cutting all elements from the old composite network, and then use the Move From Dumpster
command to place them in a new composite network.
The number of levels that you can nest composite networks inside composite networks is unlimited.
There is no limitation on the elements that you can include inside a composite network, i.e., the user
interface characteristics of composite networks are the same as the one-line diagram where you can
include both AC and DC elements.
Note: When you are working with a particular one-line diagram presentation, display attributes of
composite networks and composite motors are saved along with the one-line diagram presentations, i.e.,
composite networks are treated the same as the one-line diagram.
To change the ID (name) of a composite network, you can:
1) <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite network symbol from the one-line diagram.
2) Open the composite network and double-click on the background where no device exists.
3) Double-click on the composite network from the Project View (under Components, Networks
Composite).
You can change the ID to any unique 25-character name.
11-519
AC Elements
DC Composite Motors
The following steps are used to move a subsystem (group of elements and connections) from the one-line
diagram to a composite network:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Select the desired elements, including their connections, by rubber banding, and <Ctrl>+click.
Click Delete to cut the elements into a Dumpster Cell.
Activate the composite network by double-clicking on it.
Right-click inside the composite network and select Move From.
Adding A Composite Network

This describes how to add a composite network to the one-line diagram. The ID will automatically
default to Network1. To change the ID, press <Ctrl>+double-click. To construct a one-line diagram
inside this composite network, double-click on the composite network to bring up a composite network
View, which is just like another one-line diagram. Therefore, the steps required for constructing a
composite network are the same as those for constructing the main one-line diagram.
When you open the composite network and it is not connected to any bus in the system, you get a view
that indicates there is no external bus connection. When you open the composite network and it is
connected to a bus, you get a view that indicates the connecting bus for the composite network.
The bus-like element seen in the composite network is the starting point for the composite network. This
element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the outside system. This
connecting point is not considered as a bus for studies.
In order to move elements from one view to another (for example, from OLV1 to Network1), first select
the desired elements, including their connections, from OLV1. Select Delete to cut the elements into the
Dumpster, activate the view you want the elements to be moved into Network1, then click on Move
From.
11-520
AC Elements
Fuse
11.30 Fuse
The properties associated with fuses of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
Fuse protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.
The Fuse Editor contains the following eight pages of properties with header information.
Info
Rating
TCC kA
Model Info
Reliability
Checker
Remarks
Comment
11.30.1 Header Information

The header displays the information in the figure below for the selected fuse model on each page of the
AC Fuse Editor.
Manufacturer
Size ID
Max. kV
Model
Speed
Lock Icon
Short-Circuit Data
Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the fuse selected from the library.
Max. kV
This displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected fuse in kV.
Size ID
This displays the selected size ID for the fuse.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified).
Model
This is the model name of the fuse selected from the library.
Speed
This displays the speed classification of the selected fuse.
11-521
AC Elements
Fuse
Short-Circuit data
This displays the short-circuit interrupting kA for the selected fuse size.
11.30.2 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each fuse. The assigned IDs consist of the default fuse ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of fuses increase. The default
fuse ID (Fuse) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a fuse
From or To is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a fuse is
connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal
connection. To connect or reconnect a fuse to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram
will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect a fuse
to buses that reside in the same view where the fuse resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides
in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
11-522
AC Elements
Fuse
If a fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the fuse to a new
bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Fuse1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent manipulation
of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.
Note: Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration
status is shown above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status under the specific
configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a fuse is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open under
Emergency configuration.
11-523
AC Elements
Fuse
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Real-Time Status
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of the ETAP Real-Time module only.
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either closed or open status. This option is provided to
overwrite the actual status received from the real-time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real-Time will request
confirmation.
11-524
AC Elements
Fuse
11.30.3 Rating Page
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC button option to select that standard. Once the fuse is selected from the
Library Quick Pick - Fuse, the standard is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Rating, ANSI Standard

Click on ANSI Standard to enter the ratings for Fuse in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards.
When a Fuse is selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the value(s) after
selecting a fuse from Library Quick Pick will turn the header to blue color indicating that the substituted
library data has been modified.
11-525
AC Elements
Fuse
kV
Select from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the Fuse in kV. When a Fuse is selected,
the Rated kV value will be set equal to the Max. kV selected from Library Quick Pick.
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from Library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the Fuse in amperes. The
Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from Library Quick Pick.
Interrupting
Select from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for selected
fuse size from Library Quick Pick.
Test PF
Enter the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the fuse has been established. When a fuse
is selected, the Test PF is set to the Test PF value selected from Library Quick Pick.
Rating, IEC Standard

Click on IEC Standard to enter the ratings for Fuse in accordance with the IEC Standards. When a Fuse is
selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values
chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a fuse from
Library Quick Pick will turn the header to blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been
modified.
kV
Select a rating from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the Fuse in kV. When a Fuse is
selected, the Rated kV value will be set equal to the Max. kV selected from Library Quick Pick.
11-526
AC Elements
Fuse
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected fuse. Note that the Size
field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from Library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the Fuse in amperes. The
Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from Library Quick Pick.
Breaking
Select from the drop-down list or enter the AC breaking for the Fuse in kA. Note: When a Fuse is
selected, the breaking value will be set equal to the kA value for selected fuse size from library Quick
Pick.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the fuse in kV.
Library Quick Pick - Fuse

To select a fuse from the library, click the Library button and the Library Quick Pick Fuse dialog box
will appear. From the dialog box, select a fuse by selecting the Manufacturer name and the desired fuse
Model, Max kV, and Speed. This represents a unique record. Select the desired size and short-circuit
interrupting kA. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to
the editor.
Note: When you select library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name, along with other details, are
displayed in the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library
header will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the Fuse Library Quick Pick is described below.
11-527
AC Elements
Fuse
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard. The Standard selection in the Library Quick
Pick - Fuse (and hence the fuse models displayed) will default to the selectEd Standard on the Rating
page. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box if desired.
AC/DC
Displays that the Fuse is AC. This option is grayed out and unavailable.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Names
Displays a list of all AC fuse manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard. Choose a
manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
Lock Icon
When a library is locked, the lock icon is selected.
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, Siemens is
the reference manufacturer for ITE.
Link
Displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
11-528
AC Elements
Fuse
Model
Model Name
The Model column displays list of all fuse models for the selected standard and fuse manufacturer. The
models are displayed in the form of Model Max kV Speed, which forms a unique record name in the
fuse library. Select a Model Max kV Speed row by clicking it.
Lock
When a library is locked, the lock icon is selected.
Size and Short-Circuit Data

Size
Displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model Max. kV Speed record for the fuse. To
select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight its row.
Note: The sizes listed for the selected fuse model are not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere
value as provided by the manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.
Int. kA (ANSI Standard)

This displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA corresponding to each size for the selected ANSI
fuse model.
Breaking kA (IEC Standard)

This displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected IEC fuse model.
11-529
AC Elements
Fuse
Lock
The Lock column indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified). If the lock icon is displayed in the Lock column, the entry is locked.
Model Info
Class
This displays the class (E-rated, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This displays the type (Power Fuse, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected fuse model.
11-530
AC Elements
Fuse
11.30.4 TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page
TCC kA
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system-calculated 3-phase and line-ground short-circuit
current values at the connected bus to the element. The values will be updated when you run ShortCircuit Clipping kA from Star Mode.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-Defined option allows the user to enter the short-circuit 3-phase and line-ground kA
values. By default, the user-defined kA values are set to calculated kA where available.
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
11-531
AC Elements
Fuse
User-Defined
TCC Clipping Current

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the device curve in Star View are specified in the TCC
Clipping Current section.
Sym. rms and Asym. rms

These options are displayed only when the Calculated option is selected. The default is set to Asym. RMS
option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the ANSI cycle symmetrical or IEC Maximum /
User-defined symmetrical current as specified in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS
option will display the corresponding asymmetrical current values.
3-Phase Fault (Show on TCC)

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow and clip the curve in Star View.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical short-circuit
current. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.
Line-Ground Fault (Show on TCC)

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in Star View.
kA (Line-Ground Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground symmetrical or asymmetrical short-circuit
current. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
TCC Minimum Current (Sym)

The minimum short-circuit currents are specified in the TCC Minimum Current (Sym) section.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase minimum fault arrow in Star View.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase ANSI 30 cycle short-circuit current in kA or IEC
minimum initial symmetrical or IEC minimum steady state current based on the selection for minimum
short-circuit current in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-Defined option, the minimum 3Phase Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the minimum line-ground fault arrow in Star View.
For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground ANSI 30 cycle short-circuit in kA or, IEC
short-circuit current in Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault
kA field is editable.
11-532
AC Elements
Fuse

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated, short-circuit kA values for the selected
element. Note that calculated Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.
11.30.5 Model Info Page
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected fuse model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available for selected fuse model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected fuse model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected fuse model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected fuse model.
11-533
AC Elements
Fuse
Application
This displays the application for the selected fuse model.
Class
This displays the class (E-rated, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This displays the type (Power Fuse, for example) for the selected fuse model.
A
reclosed, and service is restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
11-534
AC Elements
Fuse
P
8760/MTTR).
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(A+P)).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P (MTTF =
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Source
This displays the source of the selected fuse reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type of fuse selected.
Class
This displays the class selected for reliability data.
11-535
AC Elements
Fuse
11.30.7 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
This field displays the name of the last person who changed any data.
Date
This field displays the date of change. The format for the date can be changed from the Projects menu in
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
This field displays the name of the person who logs in as a Checker and checks the data.
Date
This field displays date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed from the
Projects menu in the menu bar.
11-536
AC Elements
Fuse
User-Defined Info
UD Field 1 (Num. Field)

This is a number field with the default name Num. Field. You can change the name of this field and enter
the equipment reference number or any other number here, using up to five digits.
UD Field 2 (Install Date)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Install Date. You can change the name of this field


11-537
AC Elements
Fuse
UD Field 5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field 5. You can change the name of this field
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-538
AC Elements
Fuse

11-539
AC Elements
Contactor
11.31 Contactor
The properties associated with a contactor of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Contactor Editor contains the following four pages of properties.
Info
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.31.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each contactor. The assigned IDs consist of the default
contactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of contactors
increase. The default contactor ID (Cont) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
11-540
AC Elements
Contactor
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a contactor are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
contactor (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. If a
terminal of a contactor is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a contactor to a bus, select a bus from the
list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you
If a contactor is connected to a bus from this editor through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the contactor to a new bus will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where CONT3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Condition
Service
State
You can change the status of a contactor (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
of the status of an element (contactor, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.
11-541
AC Elements
Contactor
Note that the status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the contactor to indicate that this is the contactor status
configurations. In the following example, status of a contactor is shown closed under Configuration
Status Normal and open under Configuration Status Emergency.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the contactor in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the contactor in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Interrupting
Enter the rated short-circuit interrupting of the contactor in kA or select from the list box.
Dropout Time
Enter the dropout or operating time for the contactor in seconds or select a time from the list box.
When plotted in Star View, contactor curves show as a definite time plotted at the dropout time between
continuous amps and interrupting kA. This line is plotted at the entered dropout time. The contactor line
is plotted using the calculated base kV of the connected bus, where available.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
11-542
AC Elements
Contactor
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined
11-543
AC Elements
Contactor
A
reclosed, and service is restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
P
8760/MTTR).
11-544
AC Elements
Contactor
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate or unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A, and P FOR =
MTTF
MTTF is the mean time to failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P (MTTF =
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
This is the mean time to repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Source
This displays the source of the selected contactor reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type of contactor selected.
Class
11-545
AC Elements
Contactor
User Defined Info


This is a numeric field with the default name Num. Field. You can change the name of this field and
enter the equipment reference number or any other number here, using up to five digits.



11-546
AC Elements
Contactor
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

11-547
AC Elements
Contactor
11-548
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
11.32 High Voltage Circuit Breaker

The properties associated with high voltage circuit breakers of the electrical power system can be entered
in this editor. High voltage circuit breakers include all breakers above 1000V.
The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains the following five pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.32.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the default
circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of circuit
11-549
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the
menu bar or from the Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a high voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses.
If a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus
ID. If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e.,
If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where CB3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
State
11-550
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or
Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under
the specified configuration.
status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under the
specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a circuit breaker is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open
under Open Tie configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Real Time
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time (Real-Time).
Scanned
Displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP will request confirmation.
Alert
Select this option for ETAP Real-Time to report an alarm when the breaker opens or closes.
11-551
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
11.32.2 Rating Page
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option button to select that standard.
Application/Association
Generator CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a generator circuit breaker. When verifying circuit breaker
capability in ANSI short-circuit device duty calculation, for a generator circuit breaker, ETAP always
uses the maximum through symmetrical fault current, even if the Short-Circuit Study Case may have a
different option selected. When calculating the asymmetrical and peak short-circuit currents, the X/R used
is based on separate X and R networks for the whole system, which is in all practical cases more
conservative than the X/R obtained for the system with the generator removed.
A symmetrically rated generator circuit breaker has different rating for dc component of asymmetrical
interrupting capability from regular symmetrically rated circuit breaker. For a generator circuit breaker,
the time constant for dc component decay is equal to 133 ms, while for a regular circuit breaker it is 45
ms.
11-552
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
Feeder CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a feeder circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP
Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Power Grid CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a utility/power grid circuit breaker. This information is used by
ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Load CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a load circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP
Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Islanding CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a tie circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP
Intelligent Load Shedding System for correctly identifying subsystems or islanded systems.
TRV
Clicking on the TRV button will open the Transient Recovery Voltage Editor. The following variables
can be entered in this editor:
T1 Enter the rated delay time of transient recovery voltage in micro-seconds.
T2 Enter the rated time to peak value in micro-seconds.
R Enter the rate of rise of the transient recovery voltage in kV/micro-seconds.
Library Info
To access ANSI Standard library data, click on the ANSI selection, and then click on the Library button.
Use the same procedure for accessing IEC Standard library data. As you change the standard from ANSI
to IEC, the data fields change accordingly.
To select a circuit breaker from the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library, click on the Library button and
the Library Quick Pick - HV Circuit Breaker will appear. From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit
breaker by highlighting the manufacturer name and model/class ID. Then click on the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor. Note that upon selection of library
data, the manufacturer name and model number is displayed in the fields directly below the Library
button.
11-553
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library manufacturer name and model ID
will change to a dark blue color to indicate that the library data has been modified.

Click on ANSI to enter high voltage circuit breaker ratings according to the ANSI Standards.
Max kV
Enter the rated maximum kV of the high voltage circuit breaker in rms kV or select the rating from the
list box.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from
the list box.
Standard
Select the high voltage circuit breaker type as Symmetrical or Total rated from the list box.
Cycle
Select the rated interrupting time for AC high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.
CB Cycle
2
3
5
8
Description
2-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time
3-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time
CPT (Contact Parting Time)

You can either select a typical contact parting time from this field, or enter a value for your existing
circuit breaker. The typical values are based on the available curves for multiplication factors from
Annex A, IEEE Std C37.010-1999, which are dependent on the Cycle of a circuit breaker. The value you
11-554
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
can enter in the CPT field is also limited by the available curves from the standard. For example, for a 5cycle circuit breaker, since Figure A.10 in IEEE Std C37.010-1999 only provides curves for 3, 4, 5, and 6
cycles of contact parting time, the range for contact parting time is between 3 and 6 cycles.
Rated Interrupting
Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA or
select the rating from the list box.
Note: The rated interrupting kA is applied at maximum voltage. Adjust the rated interrupting kA if the
maximum voltage is changed.
Maximum Interrupting
Enter the maximum symmetrical interrupting capability in rms kA or select the rating from the list box.
The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker is calculated by ETAP as:
(Rated Short-Circuit Current) X (Rated Maximum kV)/(Bus Nominal kV)
The limit for this calculated interrupting capability is the rated maximum interrupting capability of the
circuit breaker. This value is then used to compare with the calculated short-circuit duty of the breaker.
Note: The value of the prefault voltage is not used in determining the interrupting capability, i.e., if Vf =
105 percent, the short-circuit duty is increased by 5 percent; however the interrupting capability is not
decreased by 5 percent.
C & L RMS
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in asymmetrical rms kA. This
value is equal to 1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
C & L Peak
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in peak kA. This value is
equal to 2.7 times the maximum interrupting capability.
Time Constant
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. It displays the time
constant for the dc component of asymmetrical capability of a circuit breaker. The value displayed equals
45 ms for a regular high voltage circuit breaker, based on IEEE Std C37.010-1999, and 133 ms for a
generator circuit breaker based on IEEE Std C37.013-1997.
S Factor
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The displayed S
factor reflects the symmetrically rated, high voltage, circuit breakers ability to interrupt fault current with
dc component. It is defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over symmetrical
interrupting rms rating of a circuit breaker.
% dc
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The %dc
interrupting capability of a circuit breaker is calculated based on the contact parting time and the time
constant of dc component.
11-555
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV

Click on the IEC button to enter the ratings of the high-voltage circuit breaker according to the IEC
Standards.
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current of the circuit breaker in amperes, or select the rating from the list box.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the circuit breaker in kV, or select the rating from the list box.
FPC Factor
Select the first-pole-to-clear factor of the circuit breaker from the list box.
Min Delay
from the list box.
Making Peak
Enter the rated making capacity of the circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from the list box.
The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluating the maximum possible peak
value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the circuit breaker in kV. If this voltage limit is exceeded, the arc
may re-ignite due to the voltage exceeding the dielectric capability of the contact gap developed across
the open contacts of the breaker and the heat from the previous arc. Note that this limit is not currently
used in ETAP.
AC Breaking
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Ithr
Enter the short-time rated withstand current in kA.
Tkr
Enter the short-time rated withstand time in seconds.
11-556
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
Reliability Page
A
reclosed, and service is restored to some or all of the load points.
It should be noted, however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly
connected to this failed component) could be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
P
11-557
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
FOR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
11-558
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
User-Defined Info




11-559
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-560
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, HV

11-561
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
11.33 Low Voltage Circuit Breaker

The properties associated with low voltage circuit breakers of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. Low voltage circuit breakers include power, molded, and insulated case breakers up
to 1000V.
The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains the following nine pages of properties with header
information for each page:
Info
Rating
Trip Device
TCC kA
Model Info
Reliability
Checker
Remarks
Comment
11.33.1 Header
The header displays the selected breaker model and trip device information on each page of the Low
Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor.
Breaker
Manufacturer
Breaker Max.
kV
Breaker
Interrupting Data
Lock Icon
Breaker Model
and Pole
Available
breaker sizes
Trip device
Manufacturer
Trip device
ID
Trip device
Model
Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the breaker selected from the library.
Max. kV
This displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected breaker in kV.
Interrupting data
This displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the breaker.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified)
depending on whether the icon is selected
11-562
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Pole
This displays the breaker pole selected from the library.
Size
Select from drop-down list and display the sizes in amperes that are available for the selected breaker.
Trip Device Manufacturer

This displays the manufacturer name of the selected trip device.
Trip Device Model

This displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Trip Device ID
This displays the trip ID selected from the library.
11.33.2 Info Page
Info
ID
11-563
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the default
circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of circuit
breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the
menu bar or from the Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a low voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If
a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID.
If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e.,
If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the breaker to a
new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where CB2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
11-564
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
State
.
Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on either the
Close or Open option. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under the
specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a circuit breaker is shown closed under Normal configuration and open
under Emergency configuration.
Real Time Status

Scanned
This displays the scanned status (Scanned or Not Scanned) of the switching device.
Pin
Click this button to pin the switching device to either the closed or open status. This option is provided to
Control
Click this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real Time will request
confirmation.
Equipment
Tag #
11-565
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
11.33.3 Rating Page
Standard
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the
library entry and is display only.
11-566
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Type
Select a type from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. Low voltage circuit breakers
include Molded Case, Power, and Insulated Case breakers. Once the breaker is selected from the breaker
Library Quick Pick, the LVCB type is set based on the library entry and is display only.
CB and Trip Device library

The low voltage circuit breaker data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the
Library button.
Exclude Trip Device

Select this option to exclude the trip device selection from LVCB Library Quick Pick. The breaker
Library Quick Pick will be launched without the trip device information. The Exclude Trip Device option
setting is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to deselect once the Rating page is
refreshed.
LV Circuit Breaker Library Quick Pick

To select a circuit breaker from the low voltage circuit breaker library click the Library button. ETAP
displays the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker dialog box. From the Library Quick Pick, select a
circuit breaker by highlighting the Manufacturer name and breaker Model-Max kV-Pole, which is a
unique record. Select the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the size and
the desired trip device for that size. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library
and transfer it to the editor.
11-567
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
After selection of the library data, the breaker manufacturer and model and trip device details are
displayed in the editor header. If any changes have been made in the retrieved library data, the library
header will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the breaker Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.
Standard
Select either the ANSI or IEC option. The Standard selection in the breaker Library Quick Pick (and
hence the breaker models displayed) will default to the selection made for the standard on the Rating
page. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
AC/DC
Displays that the LV breaker is AC. This option is grayed out and is not available for editing.
Type
Select from the drop-down list to display the breaker type. The LV breaker types include Molded Case,
Power, and Insulated Case breakers.
Note: That the Type selection in the breaker Library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed)
will default to the selection made for the breaker type on the Rating page. The breaker type selection can
be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of all AC LV breaker manufacturers included in the library for the selected breaker
standard and type. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
11-568
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Reference
This displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer.
Westinghouse is the reference manufacturer for Cutler Hammer.
For example,
Link
This displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Lock Icon
The icon is selected if the entry is locked.
Model
Model Name
The Model group displays a list of all models for the selected standard, breaker type, and breaker
manufacturer. The models are displayed in rows with values for Model, Max kV, and Pole. These values
make up a unique record name in the breaker library. Select a Model, Max kV, and Pole row by clicking
on it.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified). Locked entries have selected lock icons.
11-569
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Short-Circuit Data
ANSI Short-Circuit Data
When ANSI Standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit
interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA, and test power factor in %, for all breaker types. The
short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and
the short-circuit data by clicking the row.
IEC Short-Circuit Data

When the IEC Standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, ultimate
breaking capacity in kA (Icu), service breaking capacity in kA (Ics), making capacity in kA (Icm), short
time withstand in kA (Icw), short time in seconds (Tkr), and tripping time or delay in seconds, for all
breaker types. The short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an
applied voltage and the short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Fused/UnFused
This field displays whether the breaker is fused for unfused.
11-570
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Size
Size
This displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model, Max. kV, and Pole record for the breaker.
To select a size from the Library Quick Pick, highlight the size.
Lock Icon
Locked entries have selected icons.
Model Info
Additional information about the selected breaker is displayed using the parameters described below.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected breaker model.
Trip Device
The trip device(s) assigned to the selected breaker, can be chosen by selecting the trip device type,
manufacturer name, model name, and ID. The trip device types for LV breaker include Thermal
Magnetic, Solid state, Motor Circuit Protector, and Electro-Mechanical.
Trip Device Type

Select from drop-down list and display the trip device type for the selected breaker.
Note: A circuit breaker may include different trip device types.

Highlight an item to select the trip device manufacturer from the drop-down list, for the selected trip
device type.
11-571
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Trip Device Model

Highlight an item to select the trip device model from the list, for the selected trip device manufacturer.
ID
Select the desired trip device ID from the list for the selected Model, Max kV, and Pole.
Note: The ID is labeled as TM ID for Thermal Magnetic trip, Sensor ID for Solid State Trip, MCP ID for
Motor Circuit Protector trip, and EM ID for Electro-Mechanical trip.
When the Exclude Trip Device option is selected on the Rating page, the breaker Library Quick Pick is
displayed as shown below.
Note: The trip device assignment group is not displayed.
Ratings, ANSI Standard

Click on ANSI Standard button and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for LV circuit breaker in
accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards. When a breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, all
parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the
exception of Size, changing the values after selecting a breaker from Library Quick Pick will turn the
header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
11-572
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Size
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the low voltage circuit
breaker in amperes. The Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is
selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Rated kV
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the low voltage circuit breaker in
kV. When a breaker is selected, the rated kV value will be set equal to the applied kV selected from
Library Quick Pick.
Test PF
This is the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the circuit breaker has been established.
When a breaker is selected, the Test PF is set to the Test PF value selected from Library Quick Pick.
If a breaker is not selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick, the Test PF value changes depending on
the breaker type. The values for Test PF used for different breaker types are described below.
For Molded Case and Insulated Case breakers, per UL 489:
If Interrupting kA <= 10, Test PF = 50%
If Interrupting 11<= kA <= 20, Test PF = 30%
If Interrupting kA > 20kA, Test PF = 20%
For Power Breakers, per ANSI C37:
If breaker is fused, Test PF = 20%
If breaker is unfused, Test PF = 15%
Fused
For all breaker types, select either fused or unfused by selecting or clearing the checkbox. When a
breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the status as selected from the
Quick Pick. The value of Test PF will change appropriately for fused or unfused type, in case of power
breakers.
Interrupting kA
Select from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the low voltage circuit breaker in
kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for
selected applied kV from Library Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short time (Tkr) in seconds. Note that
when a breaker is selected, the Tkr value will be set equal to the Tkr value for the selected applied kV
from the Library Quick Pick. Default is one second.
ST Withstand
The rated short-time withstand current of a device is the kA value of the short-time withstand provided by
the manufacturer that the device (breaker) can carry without damage, under specified test conditions.
11-573
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Enter the value of the short-time withstand for the low voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when the
associated trip device has a solid state unit with an override multiplier selected as CB Withstand, the
rating ST Withstand kA in this field applies as base for override pickup current.

Click on IEC Standard and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for LV circuit breaker in
accordance with the IEC Standards. When a breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters
shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of
Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a breaker from Library Quick Pick will turn the header blue
color to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is chosen from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Rated Amps
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated ampere rating of the low voltage circuit breaker
in amperes. The Rated Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is selected from
Library Quick Pick.
Rated kV
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in
kV. When a breaker is selected, the Rated kV value will be set equal to the applied kV selected from
Library Quick Pick.
Min. Delay
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the minimum time delay, including circuit breaker and
relay operating time, where available, in seconds. When a breaker is selected, the Min. Delay value will
be set equal to the Tripping time of the circuit breaker selected from Library Quick Pick.
Making
The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum possible
peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
11-574
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Select from the drop-down list or enter the peak value of the making capacity of the low voltage circuit
breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the making kA value will be set equal to the Icm (making capacity) kA
value for selected applied kV from Library Quick Pick.
Ultimate Breaking
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of short-circuit breaking
capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under specified test conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the ultimate breaking capacity for the low
voltage circuit breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the ultimate breaking kA value will be set equal to the Icu (breaking
capacity) kA value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Service Breaking
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of service short-circuit
breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under specified test
conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the service breaking capacity for the low
voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the service breaking kA value will be
set equal to the Ics (service capacity) kA value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short time (Tkr) in seconds. Note that
when a breaker is selected, the Tkr value will be set equal to the Tkr value for selected applied kV from
the Library Quick Pick.
ST Withstand
The rated short-time withstand current of equipment is the kA value of the short-time withstand provided
by the manufacturer that the equipment (breaker) can carry without damage, under specified test
conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short-time withstand for the low voltage
circuit breaker in kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the short-time withstand kA value will be set
equal to the Icw (ST withstand) value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Fused
Select fused or unfused for all breaker types by selecting or clearing the Fused checkbox.
Note: The checkbox is displayed only when no breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick.
11.33.4 Trip Device Page

The trip devices for low voltage circuit breaker include Thermal Magnetic, Solid-State, Motor Circuit
Protector, and Electro-Mechanical types. The trip device version of the Library Quick Pick allows
selection and setting of these trip units.
11-575
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Library Quick Pick - Trip Device

The Library Quick Pick - Trip Device dialog box is described in this section.
Type
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types.
LVCB Info Box

This displays the circuit breaker information for the selected trip device when circuit breaker is already
selected in the LVCB Editor. For example, the Library Quick Pick shown above displays Solid-State Trip
units assigned to a Cutler-Hammer DS-416 power breaker. If a breaker is not selected, the breaker
information is not displayed.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of manufacturer names for the selected trip device. Choose a manufacturer by
selecting the manufacturer name.
Lock Icon
A library entry is locked if the lock icon is selected.
11-576
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. In the figure above,
for example, Cutler Hammer is the reference manufacturer for Westinghouse.
Link
This displays the manufacturers web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
This displays a list of model names for the selected manufacturer. Choose a model by selecting the model
name.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for a selected model.
Trip ID
This displays a list of trip IDs (label depending on the trip device type) for the selected model. Select the
trip ID by highlighting the ID. For example, the Quick Pick Library shown above displays Sensor ID
1600 for model RMS 510 Series DS.
LVCB & Trip Device Selection

ETAP provides several options to retrieve circuit breaker and/or trip device from the library. The
selection of the circuit breaker on the Rating page affects the trip device selection and the data displayed
on the Trip device Library Quick Pick. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 Circuit Breaker and Trip Device

When a circuit breaker is selected along with its associated trip unit from the Library Quick Pick on the
Rating page of the Circuit Breaker Editor, the Trip Device page displays the selected trip unit
(Manufacturer, Model, and ID).
11-577
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Since the circuit breaker and its trip units are selected as a combination, the Trip Device Library Quick
Pick list will be limited to trip devices assigned to the selected circuit breaker size. Thus, clicking on the
Library button to access the Trip Device Library Quick Pick will display only the pre-assigned trip units.
11-578
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Case 2 Circuit Breaker Only (Exclude Trip Device)

When a circuit breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page with Exclude
Trip Device box checked, the Trip Device page will not include the trip device information. No Trip
device selected message would appear in the Trip Device page status line.
To retrieve the pre-assigned trip device units for the selected circuit breaker, click on the Library button to
launch the Library Quick Pick - Trip Device. Since the circuit breaker is previously selected, the Library
Quick Pick - Trip Device is limited to the trip units assigned to the breaker.
11-579
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Case 3 Trip Device Only

When a circuit breaker is not selected from the circuit breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, the
Trip Device page is blank and status line will display: No trip device is selected.
The Library Quick Pick - Trip Device can be accessed by clicking on the Library button. Since no circuit
breaker is selected, all trip device unit types, manufacturers, and models will be available for selection.
11-580
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV

This Section describes the settings available for Thermal Magnetic trip unit on the Trip Device page.
11-581
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the trip device types. In this case, Thermal Magnetic
trip type is selected.
TM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the manufacturer name for Thermal Magnetic trip
type.
TM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
TM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display TM ID for the selected Thermal Magnetic trip model.
Next to TM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected TM ID.
Thermal
The Thermal element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed or adjustable trip. The settings
Fixed
Fixed thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve shape that cannot
be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the Thermal group displays FIXED in the thermal Trip field.
11-582
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Adjustable
Adjustable thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve shape that
can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the Thermal group displays a drop-down list of the
available adjustable thermal trip in percent of trip device ampere rating. Also, next to the adjustable Trip
drop-down list, the actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable, or
continuous adjustable. The settings available are described below.
Fixed
Fixed magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by fixed minimum and
maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed, the Magnetic group displays
FIXED in the magnetic Trip field.
11-583
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Discrete Adjustable
Discrete adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by discrete
values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a drop-down list of the
available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable Trip drop-down list.
Continuous adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by
continuously adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is continuously
adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a Trip field to enter the magnetic setting in multiples trip device
ampere rating or in actual amperes. Next to the Trip field, the actual value of the trip in amperes is
displayed. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.
Note: The Trip field is bounded by the Trip Range.
GFI/RCD
Pickup
Select a RCD selection from the Pickup drop-down list for the selected TM ID. The pickup settings are
discrete values.
Time Delay
Select a RCD selection from the drop-down list for the selected TM ID. The settings are discrete values.
Note: GFI/RCD is utilized only by the shock protection calculation.
11-584
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Low Voltage Solid State trip (LVSST) unit

This Section describes the settings available for low voltage Solid State Trip unit (LVSST) on the Trip
Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Click on the drop-down list to display the trip device types. In this case, the Solid State Trip type is
selected.
SST Manufacturer
Click on the drop-down list to display the manufacturer names for the Solid State Trip type.
SST Model
Click on the drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
Sensor ID
Click on the drop-down list to display the Sensor ID for the selected Solid State Trip model. The actual
value of trip in amperes is displayed next to the Sensor ID field for the selected Sensor ID. If the
selected solid state unit is labeled as Frame, then the tag for this field would be Frame ID instead.
11-585
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Rating Plug
The Rating Plug field is displayed only if the selected Sensor ID has rating plugs defined in the library.
Rating plugs can be defined in amperes, multiples, or percent. Click the drop-down list to display the
Rating Plug for the selected Sensor ID. The rating plug unit (amperes/multiples/percent) and the actual
value of trip in amperes are displayed next to the Rating Plug field for the selected Rating plug. An
example of rating plugs in multiples and the actual trip displayed is shown below.
Phase Settings
The Phase settings for Solid State trip unit include three elements: Long-Time, Short-Time, and
Instantaneous (or Override). Each element is defined by its pickup and band settings. The settings
Long -Time
Click on the Long-Time button to enable the Long-Time element for the selected Sensor ID. If the LongTime element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then long-time settings are not
displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the long-time pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual long-time
pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the LongTime Pickup field.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the long-time band setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable longtime band, the range of the band, the multiple at which the band is defined, the calibration reference for
11-586
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
band setting (Average, Minimum or Maximum) and band step are displayed next to the Long-Time Band
field.
If the selected LVSST has a long time band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows
as a subset of the long time band curve. The time dial setting can be either discrete or continuous
adjustable, and this would shift the long time band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the
time dial field is continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial
field.
Short -Time
Click on the Short-Time box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected Sensor ID. If the ShortTime element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then short-time settings are not
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the short-time pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Next to the Short-Time
Pickup field, the actual short-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable
pickup) are displayed.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the short-time band setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable
short-time band, the band step is displayed next to the Short-Time Band field.
If the selected LVSST has a short time band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows
as a subset of the short time band curve. The time dial setting can be either discrete or continuous
adjustable, and this would shift the long time band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the
time dial field is continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial
field.
11-587
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
I xT
Select the short-time IxT band setting from the IxT drop-down list. The short-time IxT band has IN and
OUT settings., the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the short-time band curve inward
(sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the short-time band curve outward (L-shaped).
Instantaneous
Select to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected Sensor ID. If the Instantaneous element is not
selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the
editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the instantaneous pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual
Instantaneous pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next
to the Instantaneous pickup field.
Instantaneous Override
For LVSST models with Instantaneous Override function, the instantaneous pickup ampere value is
displayed based on the circuit breaker rating. This function of the LVSST is activated when the
Instantaneous pickup is disabled or not available.
Ground Tab
The Ground element settings for Solid State trip unit includes the Ground Pickup, Band, and IxT settings.
These settings are described below.
11-588
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Ground
Click the Ground box to enable the ground element setting for the selected Sensor ID. If the Ground
element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Ground tab is not displayed in the
editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the ground pickup setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Next to the Short-Time pickup
field, the actual short-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are
displayed.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the ground band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Ground
band, the band step is displayed next to the Ground band field, for your convenience.
If the selected LVSST has a ground band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows as
a subset of the ground band curve. The time dial setting can be either discrete or continuous adjustable,
and this would shift the ground band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the time dial
field is continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial field.
11-589
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
I xT
Select the ground IxT band setting from the IxT drop-down list. The Ground IxT band has IN and OUT
settings, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the ground band curve inward (sloped line)
and the OUT setting shifts the ground band curve outward (L-shaped).
Maintenance Tab
The primary application for the Maintenance Mode is, applying the low setting temporarily in order to
reduce the short-circuit level specially the arc flash incident energy level during the initially energizing
the system and maintenance as well. So device coordination study is not the main concern for applying
Arc Flash Study would evaluate the Maintenance Mode curves independent from the Standard LVSST
curve. In this case, the report will show the FCT and the incident energy with the Maintenance mode
curve and with the Standard curve for the same LVCB. Similarly, the Maintenance Mode curves re
handled as separate curves from the Standard curves in Star Sequence-of-Operation analysis.
Phase
Click the Phase checkbox to enable the phase element setting for the Maintenance Mode.
Ground
If the Ground setting is provided for the Maintenance Mode then the Ground section will be displayed.
Click the Ground checkbox to enable the ground element setting for the Maintenance Mode.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The
pickup settings are discrete values. Next to the pickup field, the actual pickup in amperes is displayed.
Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) unit

This Section describes the settings available for Motor Circuit Protector trip device type on the Trip
Device page.
11-590
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types. In this case, the Motor Circuit
Protector type is selected.
MCP Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Motor Circuit Protector.
MCP Model
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
MCP ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the MCP ID for the selected Motor Circuit Protector
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed next to the MCP ID field for the selected MCP ID.
Magnetic (Instantaneous)
The Motor Circuit Protector unit can be set as discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The settings
11-591
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Discrete Adjustable
Discrete adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by discrete values. When the
magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a drop-down list of the available discrete
magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes.
Continuous adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by continuously adjustable
values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is continuously adjustable, the Magnetic
group displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in multiples of trip device ampere rating
or in actual amperes. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.
Electro-Mechanical Trip unit

This Section describes the settings available for Electro-Mechanical trip device type on the Trip Device
page.
11-592
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types. In this case, the ElectroMechanical trip type is selected.
EM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Electro-Mechanical trip
device type.
EM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
EM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the EM ID for the selected Electro-Mechanical trip
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed next to the EM ID field for the selected EM ID.
Long-Time
Long -Time
Click the Long-Time checkbox to enable the Long-Time element for the selected EM ID. If the LongTime element is not selected in the library for the selected EM ID, then long-time settings are not
11-593
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the long-time pickup setting, for the selected EM
ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Next to the Long-Time Pickup
field, the actual long-time pickup in amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are
displayed.
Band
Select the Long-Time band curve label from the Band drop-down list, for the selected EM ID. Each label
for the long-time band is associated with a fixed point based curve that defines the shape of the long-time
band curve.
Short-Time
Short -Time
Click the Short-Time checkbox to enable the Short-Time element for the selected EM ID. If the ShortTime element is not selected in the library for the selected EM ID, then short-time settings are not
Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the short-time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID. The
pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual short-time pickup in amperes
and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time Pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the short-time band setting for the selected EM ID. The
band settings can be discrete or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable short-time band, the
band step is displayed next to the Short-Time Band field.
When the short-time band is discrete, it can be defined as a horizontal band (minimum/maximum clearing
times) or as a point based curve. The example below shows discrete short-time band defined as a
horizontal band.
Note: The field is labeled Horizontal Band.
Another example with discrete short-time band defined as a curve is shown below. Note that the field is
called Band.
11-594
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Check the Instantaneous box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is not selected in the library for the selected EM ID, then instantaneous
settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the instantaneous pickup setting for the selected EM ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual instantaneous pickup in
amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous
Pickup field.
11-595
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
11-596
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
User-Defined


User-defined symmetrical current as selected from the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS

kA (3-Phase Fault)



kA (3-Phase Fault)

11-597
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV

11.33.6 Model Info page
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is accessed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected breaker model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected breaker model.
11-598
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Application
This displays the application for the selected breaker model.
11.33.7 Reliability page
A
A is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is
reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. However, the failed
component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can be
P
P is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is
11-599
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
8760/MTTR).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate (unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
MTTR is the mean time to repair in hours. This is the expected time for a crew to repair a component
outage and restore the system to its normal operating state.
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Reliability Data dialog box.
Source
This displays the source of the selected breaker reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type (for example, Fixed or Metal Clad) of breaker selected.
11-600
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Class
Replacement
Available
Select this option to enable rP.
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
11-601
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
This field displays the date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed from the
11-602
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
User-Defined Info




11-603
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

11-604
AC Elements
Circuit Breaker, LV
11-605
AC Elements
Recloser
11.34 Recloser
The properties associated with reclosers of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
The Recloser Editor contains the following nine pages of properties with header information for each
page:
Info
Rating
Controller
Reliability
TCC kA
Model Info
Checker
Remarks
Comment
11.34.1 Header
The header displays the selected recloser model and controller device information on each page of the
Recloser Editor.
Recloser
Manufacturer
Recloser
Device Type
Recloser SC
Interrupting Data
Lock Icon
Recloser Model
Phase Type
Controller
Manufacturer
Controller
Model
Recloser Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the recloser selected from the library.
Recloser Model
This is the model name of the recloser selected from the library.
Recloser Device Type

This displays the recloser type (Electronic, Hydraulic, or HVCB) of the selected model.
Phase Type
This displays the number of phases the selected recloser is designed to protect (Single Phase or Three
Phase).
SC Interrupting data
This displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the recloser.
11-606
AC Elements
Recloser
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified)
depending on whether the icon is selected
Controller Manufacturer
This displays the manufacturer name of the selected controller.
Controller Model
This displays the model name of the selected trip device.
11.34.2 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each recloser. The assigned IDs consist of the default
recloser ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of reclosers
increase. The default recloser ID (REC) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
11-607
AC Elements
Recloser
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a recloser are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
recloser (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of
a recloser is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a recloser to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The oneline diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the recloser resides, i.e., you
If a recloser is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the recloser to
a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where REC2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
State
11-608
AC Elements
Recloser
Configuration
You can change the status of a recloser (for the selected configuration) by clicking on either the Close or
Open option. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, recloser, motor, or static load) will be saved
under the specified configuration.
status is shown above the status of the recloser to indicate that this is the recloser status under the specific
following example, status of a recloser is shown closed under Normal configuration and open under
Emergency configuration.
Real Time Status

Scanned
This displays the scanned status (Scanned or Not Scanned) of the switching device.
Pin
Click this button to pin the switching device to either the closed or open status. This option is provided to
Control
Click this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real Time will request
confirmation.
Equipment
Tag #
11-609
AC Elements
Recloser
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
11.34.3 Rating Page
Standard
Note: Once the recloser is selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the
11-610
AC Elements
Recloser
Type
Select a type from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. The recloser library includes
RecloserHydraulic, RecloserElectronic, and HV Circuit Breaker. Once the recloser is selected from the
Recloser Library Quick Pick, the recloser type is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Recloser and Controller Library

The recloser data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library button.
Exclude Controller
Select this option to exclude the controller selection from Recloser Library Quick Pick. The Recloser
Library Quick Pick will be launched without the controller information. The Exclude Controller option
setting is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to deselected, once the Rating page is
refreshed.
Note: This will have no effect if the recloser type is set to RecloserHydraulic.
Recloser Library Quick Pick

To select a recloser from the recloser library click the Library button. ETAP displays the Library Quick
Pick - Recloser dialog box. From the Library Quick Pick, select a recloser by highlighting the
Manufacturer name and recloser Model, which is a unique record. Select the desired applied voltage and
short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the desired controller for that model. Then click the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: If the recloser type is RecloserHydraulic after selecting the model, the desired coil size needs to
selected, followed by the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Furthermore, no
controller information needs to be selected.
11-611
AC Elements
Recloser
After selection of the library data, the recloser manufacturer, model, and controller details are displayed in
the editor header. If any changes have been made in the retrieved library data, the library header will be
displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the recloser Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.
Standard
Select either the ANSI or IEC option. The Standard selection in the breaker Library Quick Pick (and
hence the recloser models displayed) will default to the selection made for the standard on the Rating
page. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of all recloser manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard. Choose
a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, Asea
Brown Boveri is the reference for ABB.
Link
11-612
AC Elements
Recloser
Lock Icon
The icon is selected if the entry is locked.
Model
Device Type
Select from the drop-down list the recloser type to display. The recloser device types include RecloserHydraulic, Recloser-Electronic, and HV Circuit Breaker.
Note: That the Device Type selection in the Recloser Library Quick Pick (and hence the recloser models
displayed) will default to the selection made for the device type on the Rating page. The device type
selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Model Name
The Model group displays a list of all models for the selected standard, manufacturer, and device type.
Choose a model by selecting the model name.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected recloser model.
Type
This displays the number of phases the selected recloser model is designed to protect (Single Phase or
Three Phase).
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected recloser model.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified). Locked entries have selected lock icons.
Rating
Coil
This displays the available coils for the selected recloser model.
Note: This only appears if the Device Type is set to Recloser-Hydraulic.
Lock Icon
Locked entries have selected icons.
Note: This only appears next to the Coil ID.
11-613
AC Elements
Recloser
ANSI Short-Circuit Data

When ANSI Standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic or Recloser-Electronic, the shortcircuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in
kA, test X/R, Making kA rms (asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). These short-circuit
parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the shortcircuit data by clicking the row.
When ANSI Standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, the short-circuit data shows the
applied voltage in kV, short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA, C&L rms, and C&L
Peak. These short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied
voltage and the short-circuit data by clicking the row.
IEC Short-Circuit Data

When the IEC Standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic and Recloser-Electronic, the
short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit breaking current for the applied voltage in
kA, test X/R, Making kA rms (asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). The short-circuit
parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the shortcircuit data by highlighting it.
11-614
AC Elements
Recloser
When the IEC Standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, the short-circuit data shows the
applied voltage in kV, short-circuit breaking current for the applied voltage in kA, Making kA rms
(asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). The short-circuit parameters are explained in more
detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Controller
The controller(s) assigned to the selected recloser model, can be chosen by selecting the manufacturer
name, controller type, and model. The controller types include Microprocessor and Static.
Note: This portion of the Recloser Library Quick Pick windows is not visible when the device type is set
to Recloser-Hydraulic.
Controller Manufacturer
Highlight an item to select the controller manufacturer from the list.
Controller Type
Select from drop-down list and display the controller type for the selected recloser.
Note: Selection is limited according to the controller assigned to the recloser model.
11-615
AC Elements
Recloser
Controller Model
Highlight an item to select the controller model from the list, for the selected controller manufacturer.
Operation Intervals
Select a standard and device type to enter the operating intervals for the recloser in accordance to these
selections. When a recloser is selected from Library Quick Pick, the Time Unit and Interrupting Time
fields will be filled in with the values defined in the library. Changing these values after selecting a
recloser from Library Quick Pick will turn the header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has
been modified. The Opening Time, Release Delay, and CPT are user-defined and can be edited without
turning the header blue.
Note: A relationship of Opening Time + Release Delay = CPT is always maintained, therefore, changing
one of these values will cause the others to be updated.
Time Unit
Select the time unit (Cycle or Millisecond) according to which the Interrupting Time, Opening Time,
Release Delay, and CPT are entered. When a recloser is selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick
the time unit is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is fixed
Cycle.
Interrupting Time
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting time for the recloser. When a recloser is
selected from the Library Quick Pick the interrupting time is set to the value in the library. The
interrupting time cannot be less than the opening time. When the standard is set to IEC this field is
labeled as Break Time.
Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is
limited to the values in the drop-down list.
Opening Time
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the opening time for the recloser. This is nonessential data
and is not stored in the library. The opening time cannot be greater than the interrupting time. When the
standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as Top.
Release Delay
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the release delay for the recloser. This is nonessential data
and is not stored in the library. When the standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as Tr.
Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the field is labeled
as Tripping Delay.
CPT
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the contact parting time (CPT) for the recloser. This is
nonessential data and is not stored in the library. When the standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as
Min. Delay.
Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is
limited to the values in the drop-down list.
11-616
AC Elements
Recloser
Ratings
Select a standard and device type to enter the ratings for the recloser in accordance with these selections.
When a recloser is selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. Changing the values after selecting a recloser from
Library Quick Pick will turn the header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been
modified.
When ANSI or IEC is selected as the standard and device type is set to Recloser-Hydraulic or RecloserElectronic, the rating data will display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse withstand
rating, interrupting kA, test X/R, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), shorttime withstand kA, and short-time withstand duration.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the recloser in kV. The rated kV
value will be set equal to the applied kV defined in the library when selected from Library Quick Pick.
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the recloser in
amperes. The Max. Amp value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the recloser in
kV. The BIL Limit value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the
Library Quick Pick.
Interrupting kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting kA rating for the recloser in kA. When
the IEC Standard is selected this field is renamed to Breaking kA. The Interrupting kA value will be set
equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
11-617
AC Elements
Recloser
Test X/R
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the test X/R rating for the recloser. The Test X/R value
will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA is changed this field will
automatically update to a value according to the following table.
Inter. kA
kA <= 1.25
1.25 < kA <= 2
2 < kA <= 4
4 < kA <= 7
7 < kA <= 12
12 < kA < 20
kA >= 20
X/R
8
10
12
14
15
16
17
Making kA rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating for the recloser in
kA. The Making kA rms value will be set equal to the value defined in the library selected from the
Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field
will automatically update to a value according to the following equation.
Making kA Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser
in kA. The Making kA Peak value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field
will automatically update to a value according to the following equation.
11-618
AC Elements
Recloser
ST Withstand
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the recloser in kA. The
ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when the recloser is selected from
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration for the recloser in
seconds. The Tkr value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
When ANSI is selected as the standard and device type is set to HV Circuit Breaker, the rating data will
display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse withstand rating, interrupting kA, close and
latch rms, close and latch peak, short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, time constant,
percent dc, and S factor.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the breaker in kV. The rated kV
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the breaker in
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the breaker in
Library Quick Pick.
Rating Std.
Select symmetrical (SYM) or total (TOT) from the drop-down list to specify the breaker type. Select
SYM if the breaker is rated on a symmetrical current basis, or TOT if the breaker is rated on a total
11-619
AC Elements
Recloser
current basis. The Rating Std. value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when elected from
Interrupting kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting kA rating for the recloser in kA. When
the IEC Standard is selected this field is renamed to Breaking kA. The Interrupting kA value will be set
equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
C&L rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the close and latch (C&L) rms asymmetrical rating for the
breaker in kA. The C&L rms value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when a breaker is
selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or C&L Peak is changed this
field will automatically update to a value according to the following equations.
When Int kA is entered the C&L rms will be automatically calculated as
C&L rms = Int kA * 1.6
When C&L Peak is entered the C&L rms will be automatically calculated as
C&L rms = C&L Peak * 1.6/2.7
C&L Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the close and latch (C&L) peak asymmetrical rating for
the breaker in kA. The C&L Peak value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when the
breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or C&L rms is changed this field
will automatically update to a value according to the following equations.
When Int kA is entered the C&L Peak will be automatically calculated as
C&L Peak = Int kA * 2.7
When C&L rms is entered the C&L Peak will be automatically calculated as
C&L Peak = C&L rms * 2.7/1.6
ST Withstand
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the breaker in kA. The
ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration in seconds. The Tkr
value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Time Constant
This field is available only for a breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. It displays the time
constant for the dc component of asymmetrical capability of a circuit breaker. The value displayed equals
45 ms for a regular high voltage circuit breaker, based on IEEE Std C37.010-1999, and 133 ms for a
generator circuit breaker based on IEEE Std C37.013-1997.
11-620
AC Elements
Recloser
S Factor
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The displayed S
factor reflects the symmetrically rated, breakers ability to interrupt fault current with dc component. It is
defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over symmetrical interrupting rms rating of a
breaker.
% dc
This field is available only for a breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The %dc interrupting
capability of a breaker is calculated based on the contact parting time and the time constant of dc
component.
When IEC is selected as the standard and device type is set to HV Circuit Breaker, the rating data will
display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse withstand rating, transient recovery voltage,
breaking kA, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), first-pole-to-clear factor,
short-time withstand kA, and short-time withstand duration.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the breaker in kV. The rated kV
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the breaker in
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the breaker in
Library Quick Pick.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage for the breaker in kV. The TRV value will be set equal to the value
defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
11-621
AC Elements
Recloser
Breaking kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the breaking kA rating for the recloser in kA. The
Breaking kA value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
Making kA rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating for the breaker in
kA. The Making kA rms value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the
Library Quick Pick.
Making kA Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA peak rating for the breaker in kA. The
Making kA Peak value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
FPC Factor
Select a value from the drop-down list for the first-pole-to-clear (FPC) factor of the breaker. The FPC
Factor value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick
Pick
ST Withstand
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the breaker in kA. The
ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration in seconds. The Tkr
value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
11.34.4 Controller Page

The controllers for recloser include Hydraulic, Static, and Microprocessor types. The layout and settings
available on this page will depend on the type of controller selected.
Controller Info
The recloser data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library button.
11-622
AC Elements
Recloser
Controller Type
When a controller is selected from the Library Quick Pick, the controller type is displayed here. The
possible values are Hydraulic-Three Phase, Hydraulic-Single Phase, Electronic-Microprocessor, and
Electronic-Static.
Info
Information about the controller and curves can be obtained by clicking on the Info button.
Controller Lib
To select a controller from the controller library click the Controller Lib button. ETAP displays the
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller dialog box.
Note: This button is hidden when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the drop-down list to select the manufacturer of the controller.
Note: The manufacturers in this list are limited to those which have controller models assigned to the
recloser selected from the Library Quick Pick. This field is hidden when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Model
Select a model name from the drop-down list to select the model of the controller.
Note: The models in this list are limited to those which are assigned to the recloser selected from the
Library Quick Pick. This field is hidden when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Control Info
To view further information about the controller selected click on the Info button. ETAP displays the
Control Info dialog box. The manufacturer name, model, controller type, model reference, brand name,
catalog number, issue date, description, and application of the controller are displayed. Furthermore, the
manufacturer TCC ID, revision, and notes can be obtained for different curve types available in the model
selected.
11-623
AC Elements
Recloser
Controller Info
The controller type, reference, brand name, catalog number, issue date, description, and application of the
selected controller model are displayed here.
Type
This displays type of controller selected. Possible values are Electronic-Static, Electronic-Microprocessor,
Hydraulic-Single Phase, and Hydraulic-Three Phase.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected controller model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected controller model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected controller model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected controller model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected controller model.
11-624
AC Elements
Recloser
Application
This displays the application for the selected controller model.
TCC Curve Info

The TCC ID, revision, and notes of the curves entered for this model are displayed here.
Note: Any changes made to the curve selection do not affect the selected curve on the main controller
page.
Curve Type
Select a curve from the drop-down list to display the TCC ID, revision, and notes for.
TCC ID
This displays the time-current characteristic (TCC) curve ID assigned by the manufacturer for the curve
selected.
Revision
This displays the revision date for the curve selected.
Notes
This displays any notes for the curve selected.
Controller Library Quick Pick

To select a controller from the controller library click the Controller Lib button. ETAP displays the
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller dialog box. From the Library Quick Pick, select a controller
by highlighting the Manufacturer name, the controller type (microprocessor or static), and Model, which
is a unique record. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to
the editor.
Note: If a recloser is already selected the manufacturer and model lists will be limited to those assigned to
that recloser.
After selection of the library data, the controller manufacturer and model are displayed in the editor
header.
The information available in the recloser Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.
11-625
AC Elements
Recloser
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of manufacturer names available for selection. Choose a manufacturer by selecting
the manufacturer name.
Note: If a recloser is already selected this list will be limited to those manufacturers that have a model
assigned to the selected recloser.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. In the figure above,
for example, Cooper Power Systems is the reference manufacturer for Cooper.
Link
This displays the manufacturers web link or URL address.
11-626
AC Elements
Recloser
Model
Type
Select the controller type, Microprocessor or Static, from the drop-down list to display the models of that
particular type.
Note: If a manufacturer does not have a model for a type, that type will not be available for selection.
Model Name
This displays a list of model names for the selected manufacturer and type. Choose a model by selecting
the model name.
Note: If a recloser is already selected this list will be limited to those models that are assigned to that
recloser.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for a selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected model.
Recloser & Controller Selection

ETAP provides several options to retrieve recloser and/or controller from the library. The selection of the
recloser on the Rating page affects the controller selection and the data displayed on the Controller
Library Quick Pick. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 Recloser and Controller

When a recloser is selected along with its associated trip unit from the Library Quick Pick on the Rating
page of the Recloser Editor, the controller page displays the selected controller (Manufacturer, Model,
and Type).
11-627
AC Elements
Recloser
Since the recloser and its controller are selected as a combination, the Controller Library Quick Pick list
will be limited to controllers assigned to the selected recloser. Thus, clicking on the Controller Lib button
to access the Controller Library Quick Pick will display only the pre-assigned trip units. The
manufacturer and model drop-down lists on the controller page will also exhibit the same behavior.
Case 2 Recloser Only (Exclude Controller)

When a recloser is selected from the recloser Library Quick Pick on the Rating page with Exclude
Controller box checked, the Controller page will not include the controller information. No controller is
selected message would appear in the Controller page status line.
11-628
AC Elements
Recloser
To retrieve the pre-assigned controllers for the selected recloser, click on the Controller Lib button to
launch the Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller. Since the recloser is previously selected, the
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller is limited to the controllers assigned to the recloser.
Case 3 Controller Only

When a recloser is not selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, the Controller
page is blank and status line will display: No controller is selected.
11-629
AC Elements
Recloser
The Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller can be accessed by clicking on the Controller Lib button.
Since no recloser is selected, all controller types, manufacturers, and models will be available for
selection.
When a controller is selected from the Controller Library Quick Pick, the controller page displays the
selected controller (Manufacturer, Model, and Type), and status line will display: Controller is selected,
but recloser is not specified.
11-630
AC Elements
Recloser
Operation
The settings available in the Operation section of the Controller page are described below.
Enabled (checkbox)
This field is displayed if the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor. Check this box to
enable the parameters for selected level.
Link TOC + IOC for this level (checkbox)

This field is displayed only if the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor and Independent
TOC/HC checkbox is checked in the Model Info page of the Electronic Controller Library. Check this
box to link the TOC and HC for the selected level (This applies for all available trip elements in the
level). When checked, this will override the independent TOC/HC checkbox in the relay library and will
have the TOC and HC curves displayed as one curve.
For example in the Cooper 4C curve shown below, Link TOC + HC for this level is unchecked in the
Recloser Editor. Hence, the TOC and HC curves are shown as two independent curves.
11-631
AC Elements
Recloser
For the curve shown below, Link TOC + HC for this level is checked. Hence, the TOC and HC curves are
linked.
11-632
AC Elements
Recloser
Sequence
Click on this button to open the Sequence Editor where the number of operations performed on the first
enabled curve and the total number of operations for each trip element can be defined.
Coordination
Click on this button to open the Coordination Editor where there a number of coordination curves that be
shown on the Star View.
Note: This button is not available for microprocessor controllers that have more than two levels, and/or
have Enforce same settings for all HC levels unchecked in the library.
Sequence
To set the operating sequence of the controller selected click on the Sequence button. ETAP displays the
Sequence dialog box. The number of operations on the fast curve (or first enabled curve) and total number
11-633
AC Elements
Recloser
of operations for each trip element can be set here. Furthermore, the reclosing duration, and reset time can
also be set here.
Note: These settings are not part of the library and must be entered properly for Sequence-of-Operation
Analysis.
Operation
The number of operations the fast curve or first enabled level and the total number of operations for each
trip element are defined here.
Operation 1st TCC

Select an item from the drop-down list for the number of operation(s) on the first enabled level or fast
curve. The available values are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. This selection must be made for each trip element. The
value selected will affect the Sequence-of-Operation Analysis. For example, if 2 is selected for phase,
then for the first two operations the phase fast curve will be considered. If 0 is selected then the phase fast
curve will be ignored for all operations.
Operation to Lockout
Select an item from the drop-down list for the operation at which the recloser will go to lockout if the
specific trip elements curves are used for tripping. The available values are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. This
selection must be made for each trip element. When running Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, if any of
the trip elements curves are used for the operation selected then the controller will go to lockout.
For controllers of type Electronic-Static, Hydraulic-Single Phase, and Hydraulic-Three Phase the number
selected for Operation 1st TCC will equal the number of operations the fast curve will be considered for
that trip element. The delayed curve will be considered for the remaining operations until the value
selected for Operation to Lockout is reached. For example if Operation 1st TCC is 1 and Operation to
Lockout is 4, then the fast curve will be considered for the first operation, and the delayed curve will be
considered for the second, third and fourth operations.
For controllers of type Electronic-Microprocessor, the number selected for Operations 1st TCC will equal
the number of operations the first enabled level will be considered for that trip element. The second
11-634
AC Elements
Recloser
enabled level will be considered once, and so on until the last enabled level is reached which will be
considered for any remaining operations. For example, suppose a microprocessor controller is selected
with four levels, and the second, third and fourth levels are enabled. The value selected for Operation 1st
TCC is 1 and Operation to Lockout is 4. The second level will be considered for the first operation, the
third level will be considered only for the second operation, and the fourth level will be considered for the
third and fourth operations.
Duration
The time the recloser should remain open between operations, and the time after the fault has been
removed the recloser should reset its operations counter are defined here.
Reclosing Duration #1
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the first operation. This value is reported in
the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the first operation.
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the second operation. This value is reported
in the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the second operation.
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the third operation. This value is reported in
the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the third operation.
Reset Time
Enter the time in seconds after the fault has been removed the recloser should close and reset its
operations counter.
To see the effect of the Operation and Duration settings on the Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, consider
the following example settings in the Sequence Editor shown below.
11-635
AC Elements
Recloser
When an L-G fault is placed and Sequence-of-Operation ran on the system with a recloser, the result in
normalized view with the phase clearing curves visible in ground mode is shown below.
11-636
AC Elements
Recloser
Due to the settings in the Sequence Editor, the first operation will compare the Phase-Fast and GroundFast curves, with the one tripping fastest being used. The recloser will then experience its first reclosing
duration (2 secs). The second operation will compare the Phase-Fast and Ground-Delayed curves, and trip
using the fastest curve. The recloser will then experience its second reclosing duration (2 secs). The third
operation will compare the Phase-Delayed and Ground-Delayed curves, and trip on the faster of the two.
The recloser will then experience its third and final reclosing duration (5 secs). The fourth operation will
then compare the Phase-Delayed and Ground-Delayed curves again, and tripping and locking out on the
faster of the two. Below is the result in the Sequence Viewer.
11-637
AC Elements
Recloser
Note: During Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, the fault cannot be removed, hence, the recloser will not
reset. Furthermore, other elements upstream or downstream may trip while the recloser is open, since they
still experience the fault.
Coordination
To view coordination curves in the recloser Star View click on the Coordination button. ETAP displays
the Coordination dialog box. The K Factor, Cumulative Sequences, or User-Defined coordination curve
can be enabled and set from here.
Note: Only one type of coordination curve can be enabled. Coordination Editor is not available for
Microprocessor Controllers having more than two levels, or having Enforce same settings for all HC
levels unchecked in the library.
K Factor
Coordination between a recloser and fuse links can be achieved by viewing the time-current curves
adjusted by a multiplying factor known as the K Factor. The K Factor coordination curves can be used for
source side or load side fuse coordination (Source: Electrical Distribution System Protection; 2005 - by
Cooper Power Systems). The fast or delayed clearing curve is multiplied by a factor found by considering
the number of operations on the first TCC, the total number of operations, and the reclosing durations.
Note: The coordination curve for phase and ground curves are independent from each other.
11-638
AC Elements
Recloser
Show Load Side

Check this box to calculate and display the coordination curve for load side fuse links. For Show Load
Side the fast clearing curve will be shifted vertically (time multiplier) by the applicable K Factor as
shown in the table below. The intersection of the coordination curve with fuse minimum melting time
curve determines the maximum coordinating current. The settings which affect the K Factor selected are
the number of Operation to Lockout, Operation 1st TCC, and Reclosing Duration #1.
11-639
AC Elements
Recloser
For Operation to Lockout 0 and Operation 1st TCC > 0, the following K Factors apply:
(Cycles)
t < 60
60 t < 90
90 t < 120
t 120
One Fast Operation

(Operation 1st TCC = 1)
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
Two or More Fast Operations

(Operation 1st TCC >1
1.80
1.35
1.35
1.35
For Operation 1st TCC = 0 or Operation to Lockout = 0 the coordination curve is not displayed in Star
View.
11-640
AC Elements
Recloser
Show Source Side

Check this box to calculate and display the coordination curve for source side fuse coordination. For
Show Source Side the delayed clearing curve will be shifted vertically (time multiplier) by the
applicable K Factor as shown in the table below. The intersection of the coordination curve with fuse
minimum melting time curve determines the maximum coordinating current. The settings which affect
the K Factor selected are Operation to Lockout, Operation 1st TCC, and Reclosing Duration.
Note: The reclosing duration used depends on the value of Operation 1st TCC.
11-641
AC Elements
Recloser
For Operation to Lockout = 4, the following K Factors apply:

Reclosing
Duration
(Cycles)
t < 30
30 t < 60
60 t < 90
90 t < 120
120 t < 240
240 t < 600
t 600
Column 1
No Fast Operations
(Operation 1st TCC = 0,
Reclosing Duration #1)
3.7
3.5
2.7
2.2
1.9
1.45
1.35
Column 2
One Fast Operation
3.2
3.1
2.5
2.1
1.8
1.4
1.35
Colum 3
Two Fast Operations
2.7
2.6
2.1
1.85
1.7
1.4
1.35
For Operation to Lockout = 4, the K Factors in Columns 1, 2, and 3 of the above table apply.
For Operation to Lockout = 3, Columns 1 and 2 apply.
For Operation to Lockout = 2, only Columns 1.
For Operation to Lockout < 2, no coordination curve is plotted in Star View.
Cumulative Sequences
The cumulative sequence is defined as the fast and delayed curves multiplied (time shifted) by the
number of operations assigned to the respective curves. This will only be done on the clearing curves. The
resulting curves can be displayed individually or summed together to display a total clearing curve. The
number of operations assigned to each curve is defined in the Sequence Editor.
11-642
AC Elements
Recloser
When Show Fast and Slow and/or Show Total Time (Fast + Slow) are checked in the Phase Curves
section the cumulative sequence coordination curves will appear for the Phase trip element.
When Show Fast and Slow and/or Show Total Time (Fast + Slow) are checked in the Ground Curves
section the cumulative sequence coordination curves will appear for the Ground and Sensitive Ground
trip elements.
Show Fast and Slow

When Show Fast and Slow is checked, two coordination curves will appear in Star. One will be the fast
curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it, the other will be the delayed curve multiplied
by the number of operations assigned to it.
Fast cumulative sequence coordination curve:
Fast curve * Operation 1st TCC
Delayed cumulative sequence coordination curve:
Delayed curve * (Operation to Lockout Operations 1st TCC)
Show Total Time (Fast + Slow)

When Show Total Time (Fast + Slow) is checked, coordination curve will appear in Star. This will be
the summation of the fast curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it and the delayed
curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it.
Total clearing coordination curve:
(Fast curve * Operations TCC#1) + (Fast curve * (Operations to Lockout Operations TCC#1))
11-643
AC Elements
Recloser
User-Defined
The user-defined coordination curve is created by defining a current shift, time shift, and constant time
adder, which are applied to either the clearing or response curve of the fast and delayed curves.
11-644
AC Elements
Recloser
The settings entered in the Phase Curves section will be applied to the Phase trip element. The settings
entered in the Ground Curves section will be applied to the Ground and Sensitive Ground trip elements.
Current Multiplier
Enter a value for the current multiplier which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain the
coordination curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve which is the selected curve shifted
horizontally (in amps) by the factor entered.
Time Multiplier
Enter a value for the time multiplier which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain the coordination
curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve which is the selected curve shifted vertically (in
time) by the factor entered.
Constant Time Adder

Enter a value, in seconds, for the constant time adder which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain
the coordination curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve which is the selected curve
with the time entered added to it.
Note: The constant time adder is applied after the time multiplier.
Apply to Clearing Curve

When selected the coordination curve will be created by applying the settings entered to the clearing
curve of the selected speed/level.
Apply to Response Curve

When selected the coordination curve will be created by applying the settings entered to the response
curve of the selected speed/level.
11-645
AC Elements
Recloser
Overcurrent Elements
The different elements for the overcurrent function are Phase, Ground, and Sen. Ground (Sensitive
Ground). These elements are defined as separate tabs on the Overcurrent page. The selection of controller
determines the overcurrent element tabs that will be displayed.
Phase
The Time Overcurrent, High Current, and High Current Lockout for the Phase trip element can be entered
in the Phase element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where
applicable can be entered here as well.
11-646
AC Elements
Recloser
Ground
The relay has a Ground element if the device provides ground fault protection. The Time Overcurrent,
High Current, and High Current Lockout for the Ground trip element can be entered in the Ground
element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where applicable can be
entered here as well.
Sen. Ground
Sensitive Ground elements are typically used for detecting low level ground faults. The Time
Overcurrent, High Current, and High Current Lockout for Sensitive Ground trip element can be entered in
the Sensitive Ground element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where
applicable can be entered here as well.
Overcurrent (51) Settings

The Time overcurrent settings available for Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground are described below.
When the selected controller type is Hydraulic-Single Phase or Hydraulic-Three Phase the fast curve,
delayed curve, and the coil ID can be assigned to the overcurrent protection of a trip element.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for selected trip element.
Fast Curve
Select from the drop-down list the fast time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Delayed Curve
Select from the drop-down list the delayed time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Coil
Select from the drop-down list the Coil ID for the selected curves.
Note: This is an ID which represents the coils amps and minimum trip amps to use for the curves.
Coil Amps
The coil rating in amps for the selected Coil ID is displayed.
11-647
AC Elements
Recloser
Trip Amps
The minimum trip (or pickup) for the selected Coil ID is displayed. This will be the pickup of the selected
fast and delayed curves.
When the selected controller type is Electronic-Static the fast curve, delayed curve, and the trip plug can
be assigned to the overcurrent protection of a trip element. Furthermore, the alternate trip and/or
modifiers, if available, can be defined.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for selected trip element.
Fast Curve
Select from the drop-down list the fast time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Delayed Curve
Select from the drop-down list the delayed time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Trip Plug
Select from the drop-down list the Trip Plug ID for the selected curves.
Note: This is an ID which represents the trip plug amps to use for the curves.
Trip Plug Amps

The minimum trip (or pickup) for the selected Trip Plug ID is displayed. This will be the pickup of the
selected fast and delayed curves.
Alternate Trip
Click on this button to open the Alternate Trip Editor for the selected trip element where the alternate trip
can be selected.
Note: This button is hidden if Alternate Trip is unchecked in the library of the selected controller
model.
Modifiers
Click on this button to open the Modifiers Editor for the selected trip element where the vertical shift
multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if available, can be defined.
11-648
AC Elements
Recloser
When the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor the curve type, trip range, trip, and time
dial can be defined for the selected level and trip element. Furthermore, the alternate trip and/or
modifiers, if available, can be defined.
Note: If Enforce same setting for all TOC levels is checked in the library then any changes made to the
trip range or trip settings in one level will be reflected to all levels.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for the selected level and trip element.
Curve Type
Select from the drop-down list the time overcurrent curve type for the selected level and trip element.
TCC Group
Select from the drop-down list the TCC group to use. This will limit the curve types to those assigned to
the selected group.
Note: If All is selected then curve type will contain all curves available in the controller. If a curve is
not assigned to any group in the library then when All is selected it will be listed in curve type.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the time overcurrent trip range for the selected curve. The trip range is
specified in amperes of the primary current.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the time overcurrent trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. This value represents the pickup of the recloser curve.
Time Dial
Select and display the Time Dial for the selected curve type. The time dial can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable.
Alternate Trip
Click on this button to open the Alternate Trip Editor for the selected level and trip element where the
alternate trip can be selected.
Note: This button is hidden if Alternate Trip is unchecked in the library of the selected controller
model.
11-649
AC Elements
Recloser
Modifiers
Click on this button to open the Modifiers Editor for the selected level and trip element where the vertical
shift multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if available, can be defined.
Alternate Trip
To select an Alternate Trip for the selected trip element, click on the Alternate Trip button. ETAP
displays the Alternate Trip dialog box. The alternate trip can be enabled and selected from here.
Note: This editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types,
and if Alternate Trip is unchecked in the library of the selected Electronic-Static or ElectronicMicroprocessor types.
Alternate Trip Rating / Setting

Check this box to enable the alternate trip to be applied to the time overcurrent settings for the selected
trip element.
Alternate Trip
Select the Alternate Trip to be applied to the time overcurrent curves for the selected trip element.
Modifiers
To apply Modifiers to the time overcurrent curves of the selected trip element, click on the Modifiers
button. ETAP displays the Modifiers dialog box. The modifiers can be enabled, and the vertical shift
multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if available, can be defined.
Note: This editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types.
11-650
AC Elements
Recloser
Constant Time Adder

Select or enter the Constant Time Adder, in seconds or cycles, to be applied to the time overcurrent
curves of the selected level and trip element. The constant time adder can be discrete values or
Note: The vertical shift multiplier is applied to the curve first.
Minimum Response Time

Select or enter the Minimum Response Time, in seconds or cycles, to be applied to the time overcurrent
curves of the selected level and trip element. The minimum response time can be discrete values or
Note: The vertical shift multiplier and constant time adder have no affect on this value.
Vertical Shift Multiplier

Select or enter the Vertical Shift Multiplier to be applied to the time overcurrent curves of the selected
level and trip element. The vertical shift multiplier can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Note: The vertical shift multiplier is applied before the constant time adder.
High Current (50) Settings

The High Current settings available for Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground are described below.
Note: If the controller type of the selected controller is Hydraulic-Single Phase or Hydraulic-Three Phase
then these settings will not be available.
Note: If Enforce same setting for all HC levels is checked in the library then any changes made to the
high current setting in one level will be reflected to all levels.
11-651
AC Elements
Recloser
High Current
Check this box to enable the High Current settings for the selected trip element.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current trip range for the selected trip element. The trip range is
specified in amperes of the primary current or multiples/percent of the overcurrent pickup.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the high current trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable.
Delay Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current delay range for the selected trip element. The delay range
is specified in seconds or cycles.
Delay
Select or enter the intentional delay for the high current. The delay can be in seconds or cycles, depending
on the selection of the delay range. The delay can be in the form of discrete values or continuously
adjustable.
Oper./Lockout
Click on this button to open the High Current Operation / Lockout Editor for the selected level and trip
element. The operations the high current is considered and the high current lockout settings can be
defined here.
High Current Operation / Lockout

To define the operations the high current is considered for a level and trip element, and the high current
lockout settings, click on the Oper. / Lockout button. ETAP displays the High Current Operation /
Lockout dialog box.
Note: This editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types,
and if the selected trip element does not have high current defined.
11-652
AC Elements
Recloser
Active Trip Number to Operate

Enter the operations the high current for the selected level and trip element is to be considered. For
example, if 3,4 is entered then the high current for that level and trip element will be considered for
tripping during the third and fourth operations.
Note: If this field is blank then the high current will be considered for all operations.
HC Lockout
Check this box to enable the High Current Lockout settings for the selected trip element.
Note: The settings entered below affect all levels of the selected trip element.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current lockout trip range for the selected trip element. The trip
range is specified in amperes of the primary current or multiples/percent of the overcurrent pickup.
Lockout Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the high current lockout trip setting. The trip setting can be
discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Active Trip Number to Lockout

Select from the drop-down list the operation from which to start considering the high current lockout. For
example, if 3 is selected then the high current lockout will be considered for the third and remaining
operations.
11-653
AC Elements
Recloser
11.34.5 Reliability page
A
A is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is
branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the recloser is reclosed. This leads
to service being restored to some or all of the load points. However, the failed component itself (and
those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can be restored to service only
after repair or replacement.
P
P is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of reclosers and therefore
component will restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent
opening of reclosers.
11-654
AC Elements
Recloser
8760/MTTR).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate (unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
MTTR is the mean time to repair in hours. This is the expected time for a crew to repair a component
outage and restore the system to its normal operating state.
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Reliability Data dialog box.
Source
This displays the source of the selected recloser reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type (for example, Fixed or Metal Clad) of recloser selected.
Class
Replacement
Available
Select this option to enable rP.
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
11-655
AC Elements
Recloser
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
11-656
AC Elements
Recloser
Calculated
User-Defined


User-defined symmetrical current as specified in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS

kA (3-Phase Fault)



kA (3-Phase Fault)

11-657
AC Elements
Recloser

11.34.7 Model Info page
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected recloser model is accessed on this page.
Control
This displays the recloser type (Recloser-Hydraulic, Recloser-Electronic, or HV Circuit Breaker) for the
selected recloser mode.
Type
This displays the number of phases (Single Phase or Three Phase) the selected recloser operates on.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected recloser model.
11-658
AC Elements
Recloser
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected recloser model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected recloser model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected recloser model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected recloser model.
Edited by
User Name
11-659
AC Elements
Recloser
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
This field displays the date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed from the
User-Defined Info
11-660
AC Elements
Recloser




UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-661
AC Elements
Recloser

11-662
AC Elements
Ground Switch
11.35 Ground Switch

The properties associated with Ground Switch in the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
The Ground Switch Editor includes five pages of properties and header information.
Info Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.35.1 Header
The header does not display any information and is always blank
11.35.2 Info Page
11-663
AC Elements
Ground Switch
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Ground Switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default
Ground Switch ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of Ground
Switches increases. The default Ground Switch ID (GroundSwitch) can be changed from the Defaults
To
Connection from above the Ground Switch to the element below is displayed in the From and the To
field. If the Ground Switch does not have a connection downstream, a blank entry will be shown for To
field
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
11-664
AC Elements
Ground Switch
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
11-665
AC Elements
Ground Switch
11.35.4 Interlock Page

In SSM mode, each switching device (i.e: HVCB, LVCB, DPST, SPST, Contactor, or Ground Switch),
for either the open or close action, has a pre-logic condition to determine the eligibility to change its own
status either from one state to another state (ex: Close/Open).
Additionally, as each status change is implemented, this will trigger other devices to change status based
on the post-action logic.
The following Sections will be covered:
Pre Switching Logic

Post Switching Logic
Miscellaneous buttons and fields
Add
When a row is selected in the Pre Switching Logic or the Post Switching Logic sections, click this
button to add a row beneath the selected row.
Delete
Click the Delete button to remove the selected row in the Pre Switching Logic or the Post Switching
Logic sections.
11-666
AC Elements
Ground Switch
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Clicking on this function will enable the Precondition Logic that you have entered. The Active function
will always be grayed out unless the logic syntax requirements have been met. Further help with the logic
syntax is provided in the tutorial sections.
Action
This is a display only field and the Open and Close actions are given. If you choose the row with the
Open action, then ETAP will apply the syntax entered in that row to the Open action. The same
procedure is applied with the Close action.
Logic Operator (Blank Header)

This field gives you a choice of { AND }, { ( }, { ) }, or { OR } to enter as part of the logic syntax
Type
This drop down menu gives you the choice of the type of device you would like to utilize in your logic.
Note: The Int. function is not utilized in this release of ETAP and will be utilized in a future release.
ID/Tag
When you have chosen the type of device to use in the Pre-Condition Logic, the ID/Tag field will drop
down to give you the available devices to choose from that type.
Logic Operator
This field gives you a choice of { = }, or { != }to enter as a part of the logic syntax
Status
This field gives you the option to either set Pos.A or Pos.B for the Double Throw Single Pole switch,
Ground or Open for the Ground Switch, a numerical value for the Multi-Meters, or Open or Close
for the rest of the devices.

This field gives you a choice of {AND}, { ( } ,{ ) }, or { OR } to enter as part of the logic syntax
Post Switching Logic

Active
Clicking on this function will enable the Post Switching Logic that you have entered. The Active function
will always be grayed out unless the logic syntax requirements have been met. Further help with the logic
syntax is provided in the tutorial sections.
Action
This is a display only field and the Open and Close actions are given. If you choose the row with the
Open action, then ETAP will apply the syntax entered in that row to the Open action. The same
procedure is applied with the Close action.
Delay
This field is entered in Milli-Seconds. ETAP will apply this delay before this Post Action logic is entered.
11-667
AC Elements
Ground Switch

This field gives you a choice of { IF }, { THEN }, { END }, { AND} , { ( } , { ) }, { OR} to enter as part
of the logic syntax.
Type
This drop down menu gives you the choice of the type of device you would like to utilize in your logic.
Note: The Int. function is not utilized in this release of ETAP and will be utilized in a future release.
ID/Tag
When you have chosen the type of device to use in the Pre-Condition Logic, the ID/Tag field will drop
down to give you the available devices to choose for that type.

This field gives you a choice of { = }, { != }, or { } to enter as part of the logic syntax Status.
Status
If the Logic Operator field before this field is set to { = }, { =! }, or { }, then this field gives you the
option to set to either Pos.A or Pos.B for the Double Throw Single Pole switch, Ground or Open
for the Ground Switch, a numerical value for the Multi-Meters, or Open or Close for the rest of the
devices.

This field gives you a choice of { IF }, { THEN }, { END }, { AND} , { ( } , { ) }, { OR} to enter as part
of the logic syntax.
Logic Description
This is a text field that allows you to describe the logics entered above and you can type up to 255
characters.
11-668
AC Elements
Ground Switch
User-Defined Info




11-669
AC Elements
Ground Switch
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
11-670
AC Elements
Ground Switch
combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information
11-671
AC Elements
Overload Heater
11.36 Overload Heater

The properties associated with Overload Heater of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
Note: The editor for a overload heater connected to induction motor, synchronous motor, static load or
MOV, can also be accessed from the Cable/Vd page of the respective Motor/Load Editor.
The Overload Heater Editor includes seven pages of properties and header information.
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.36.1 Header
The header displays the selected overload heater Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of
the Heater Editor.
11.36.2 Info Page
11-672
AC Elements
Overload Heater
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Overload heater. The assigned IDs consist of the default
Overload heater ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
Overload heaters increase. The default Overload heater ID (OL) can be changed from the Defaults menu
in the menu bar or from the Project View.
To
The Overload heater can be connected in between a bus and a load (Motor load, Static load or MOV)
only. The connection from the overload heater to the load is displayed by the To field. If the overload
heater is not connected to any load, a blank entry will be shown for To field. If the overload heater is
connected to a load (directly or indirectly), the ID of the load will be displayed in the To field.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
11-673
AC Elements
Overload Heater
Lock / Unlock
11-674
AC Elements
Overload Heater
11.36.3 Rating Page
Library Info
Starter
Displays the starter type for the selected heater model.
FLA Range
Displays the range of full load amperes for the selected heater model.
Type
Displays the type (In-Line or CT) for the selected heater model.
Application
Displays the application for the selected heater model.
Heater Unit
Select and display from the drop-down list the heater unit for the selected heater model. The heater units
available are displayed in the format Heater ID_Starter_Application_Type (FLA Range).
11-675
AC Elements
Overload Heater
Library
To access the Overload Heater library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
displays the Overload Heater library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the Overload Heater
by highlighting the Manufacturer name, Model name and desired heater unit. Then click on the OK
button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Library Quick Pick

The information available in the Overload Heater Quick Pick is described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays list of all overload heater manufacturers included in the library. Select a manufacturer by
highlighting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available for the selected manufacturer. For example,
Rockwell Automation in the reference manufacturer for Allen-Bradley.
Link
This displays the web link for the selected manufacturer or URL address.
11-676
AC Elements
Overload Heater
Lock
Model
Model Name
This displays list of available models for the selected manufacturer. Select a model by highlighting
model name.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available for selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available for selected model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected model.
Lock
ID
This displays the heater ID for the selected heater unit.
Starter
This displays the starter type for the selected heater unit.
App
This displays the application for the selected heater unit.
Nom. R
This displays the nominal value of resistance for the selected heater unit.
%Tol.
This displays the available tolerance for resistance in percent, for the selected heater unit.
Min Amp
This displays the minimum value of ampere range for the selected heater unit.
Max Amp
This displays the maximum value of ampere range for the selected heater unit.
Resistance
Ohm
Enter the resistance value in ohm for the selected heater unit.
11-677
AC Elements
Overload Heater
Note: When a heater is selected form the library, the ohm value is set to the nominal value of resistance
for the selected heater unit. If a range is available for the resistance value, then the ohm value entered is
bounded by the range displayed.
When no overload heater is selected from the Quick Pick, the ohm field is user-editable and a resistance
value can be entered.
Range
Displays the range of the resistance value in the form Min R Max R in ohms for the selected heater
unit. If the range is available, then the ohm value entered should be within the range displayed. This field
is non-editable and is blank when no heater is selected from library.
%Tolerance
Enter the tolerance for the resistance in percent.
Note: When a heater is selected form the library, the tolerance value is set to the % Tolerance of the
selected heater unit. Changing the tolerance after selecting a heater from library Quick Pick will turn the
header to blue color, to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Thermal Curve
Thermal (Checkbox)
Check to enable the thermal curve data.
Library Curve
Select this option to display the curve data for the selected heater from library. The default selection for
thermal curve is set to library curve.
Typical Curve
Select this option to display curve data for typical overload heater curves (Class 10, Class 20, etc.).
Curve
Displays the thermal curve type for the selected overload heater.
If Library Curve is selected, the Curve field is blank when no heater is selected and displays the name of
curve, when a heater is selected. In some cases, the name of the curve is displayed as Not available,
indicating that the curve data is not available for selected heater unit.
If the Typical Curve is selected, the Curve field changes to a list box and you can select a Class 10 or
Class 20 curve.
Trip Amps
Display or enter the trip current in amperes for the selected overload heater. The Trip amps field functions
as described below.
If no overload heater model is selected from the library, the Trip amps field is editable and you can enter
a value of trip current. Default value is 0.
11-678
AC Elements
Overload Heater
If no overload heater model is selected from the library, and if the heater is connected to a motor/load,
then the full load amperes for the connected motor/load is displayed in the Trip amps field. The field is
editable, so the current value can be changed if desired.
If an overload heater is selected from the library, and the Library Curve option is selected, the Trip amps
field displays the value of the Trip Amps in the library for the selected heater unit. Furthermore, the Trip
amps field is non-editable or editable, depending on the Fixed or Adjustable option selected in the library
for the heater unit.
If an overload heater is selected from the library, and the Typical Curve is selected, the Trip Amps field is
editable and you can enter a value of trip current.
11.36.4 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
11-679
AC Elements
Overload Heater
User-Defined
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the OLH curves in Star View are specified in the TCC

option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI Standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for short-circuit current for IEC
Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS option will display the corresponding
asymmetrical current values.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical -cycle shortcircuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
Standard. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.

For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground symmetrical or asymmetrical -cycle
short-circuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for
IEC Standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.


Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in Star View.
11-680
AC Elements
Overload Heater
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase 30 cycle short-circuit current in kA for ANSI
Standard and minimum initial symmetrical or minimum steady state current based on the selection for
minimum short-circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the UserDefined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star View.
minimum short-circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the UserDefined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated, short-circuit kA values only for the
selected OLH. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.
11-681
AC Elements
Overload Heater
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected Overload Heater model is displayed on this page.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected Overload Heater model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected Overload Heater model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected Overload Heater model.
Thermal Unit
This displays the thermal unit type for the selected Overload Heater model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected Overload Heater model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected Overload Heater model.
11-682
AC Elements
Overload Heater
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
11-683
AC Elements
Overload Heater
User-Defined Info




11-684
AC Elements
Overload Heater
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
11-685
AC Elements
Overload Heater

11-686
AC Elements
In-Line Overload Relay
11.37 In-line Overload Relay

The properties associated with the In-line Overload relay can be entered in this editor. The In-line
Overload Relay Editor includes seven pages of properties.
Info Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.37.1 Header
The header displays the selected In-line overload relay Manufacturer name and Model name on every
page of the Heater Editor.
11.37.2 Info Page

ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each In-line relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of relay increase. The
default In-line relay ID (OL) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View. Note that In-line Overload Relay and Overload Heater elements use the same default properties.
Condition
Service
State
11-687
AC Elements
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
11-688
AC Elements
11.37.3 Setting Page
Library Info
Library
To access the In-line Overload library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
displays the relay library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the relay by highlighting the
Manufacturer name and Model name. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the
library and transfer it to the editor.
Integrated Curves
Check this box to integrate the Thermal and Instantaneous curves.
Load Parameters
The parameters such as full load amperes and lock rotor current, for a connected load or a user-defined
load can be defined in this section, the default being set to the Connected load option.
Connected load
The Connected load option retrieves the parameters for the connected load protected by the overload
relay.
11-689
AC Elements
Load ID
The load ID field is displayed only when the Connected Load option is selected. It displays the ID of the
connected load protected by overload relay.
FLA
The FLA field displays the full load amperes for the Connected load or entered full load amperes in case
of User defined load. The FLA field is non-editable when the connected load option is selected.
%LRC
The % LRC field displays the locked rotor current in percent for the Connected load or entered % locked
rotor current for User defined load. The %LRC field is grayed out and non-editable when the connected
load option is selected. For Connected loads, the % LRC field is displayed only for motor loads.
11-690
AC Elements
Library Quick Pick
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays a list of all relay manufacturers included in the library. Select the manufacturer by highlighting
Lock
Reference
Link
Model
Model Name
Displays a list of all relay models or models filtered as per selection criteria, for the selected
manufacturer.
11-691
AC Elements
Lock
Functions
This displays all functions associated with selected relay model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected relay model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected relay model.
Thermal Settings
The settings for thermal trip unit can be entered in the Thermal element tab.
Thermal
Check the box to enable the parameters for the thermal trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the thermal curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the thermal element. The trip ranges can be
specified in amperes.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the Thermal trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values
or continuously adjustable.
11-692
AC Elements
Trip Amps
This field displays the relay current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Acceleration Settings
The settings for Acceleration trip unit can be entered in the Acceleration element tab.
Acceleration
Check the box to enable the parameters for the acceleration trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the acceleration curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the acceleration element. The trip ranges can
be specified in amperes.
11-693
AC Elements
Instantaneous
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the selected element. The trip ranges can be
Trip
Select or enter the element trip setting for the selected trip range. The trip setting can be discrete values or
Trip Amps
This field displays the relay secondary current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Prim. Amps
This field displays the relay primary current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Time Delay
Select and display the Time Delay in seconds or cycles. The time delay can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is specified in the library, it will be added to
the value selected.
11-694
AC Elements
Jam (50)
Trip Range
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the trip range for the selected element. The trip
ranges can be specified in amperes.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the element trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
the value selected.
11-695
AC Elements
Ground Settings
Trip Range
Trip
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
Select and display the Time Delay in seconds. The time delay can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is specified in the library, it will be added to the value
selected.
11-696
AC Elements
11.37.4 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined
11-697
AC Elements

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the trip device curves in Star View are specified in the TCC

option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI Standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for short-circuit current for IEC

kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical -cycle shortcircuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC

short-circuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for
IEC Standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.


Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in Star View.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
minimum short-circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the UserDefined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star View.
minimum short-circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the UserDefined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
11-698
AC Elements
Star
Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated, short-circuit kA values only for the
selected trip device. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.
11-699
AC Elements
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
11-700
AC Elements
User-Defined Info



11-701
AC Elements
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
11-702
AC Elements

11-703
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
11.38 Single-Throw Switch

The properties associated with a single-throw switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.
The Single-Throw Switch Editor contains the following four pages of properties:
Info
Remarks
Reliability
Comment
11.38.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default switch
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of switches increase. The
default switch ID (SW) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
11-704
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of
a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The oneline diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you
If a switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the switch
to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where SPST10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Next to the From and To bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses for your convenience.
Condition
Service
State
11-705
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
Configuration
You can change the status of a switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on Closed or Open
of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.
status is shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the switch status under the specific
configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations.
In the following example, status of a switch is shown to be closed under Configuration Status Normal
and open under Configuration Status Open Tie.
RatingX
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV.
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) short-circuit rating of the switch in kA.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
11-706
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
Lock / Unlock
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (Real-Time).
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. Real-Time will request
confirmation.
11-707
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-708
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
A
P
11-709
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
FOR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
11-710
AC Elements
Single-Throw Switch
11-711
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
11.39 Double-Throw Switch

The properties associated with a single pole double-throw (DT) switch of the electrical distribution
system can be entered in this editor.
The Double-Throw Switch Editor contains the following four pages of properties:
Info
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.39.1 Info Page
Info
ID
11-712
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default switch
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of switches increase. The
default switch ID (2SW) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an SPDT switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal
of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a
terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection.
To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you
If an SPDT switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where SPDT10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Unlike SPST switch, the SPDT switch has to be connected to a bus before being connected to loads and
branch elements.
.
Condition
Service
11-713
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
State
service status like Removed, Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Other are out of service states
11-714
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
Configuration
Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is
shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the switch status under the specific
following example, status of a switch is shown to be in position A under Configuration Status Switch A
and position B under Configuration Status Switch B.
Status
You can change the status of an SPDT switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Position
A or Position B. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the
specified configuration.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the SPDT switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the SPDT switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV.
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) short-circuit rating of the switch in kA.
Equipment
Tag #
11-715
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (Real-Time).
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (Position A or Position B) of the switching device.
Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either Position A or Position B status. This option is
provided to allow you to overwrite the actual status received from the Real-Time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (Position A or Position B) of the device. Real-Time will request
confirmation.
11-716
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
A
P
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
FOR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
11-717
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
User-Defined Info




enter any extra data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
11-718
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
11-719
AC Elements
Double-Throw Switch

11-720
AC Elements
Ground Grid
11.40 Ground Grid

The properties associated with ground grid design of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor. The ground grid system (GGS) has its own presentation composed of Top View, Soil View,
and 3D View.
To create a GGS presentation, a ground grid must first be added to the One-Line Diagram. Click on the
Ground Grid component located on the AC toolbar, and drop the GGS symbol anywhere on the OneLine Diagram.
Right-click on any location inside the ground grid box, and select Properties to bring up the Grid Editor.
The Grid Editor dialog box is used to specify grid information, grid styles, equipment information, and to
view calculation results. Click on the Grid Presentation button to bring up a GGS presentation.
For more information, see the Ground Grid Systems Chapter.
11-721
Chapter 12
This chapter addresses editors for all Instrumentation elements in the One-Line Diagram. Except for the
element IDs, bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors are considered
engineering properties, which are subject to Base & Revision Data. The following table lists all the
Instrumentation elements in ETAP as seen from the Instrumentation (Inst) toolbar.
Transformers
Meters
Relays
Current Transformer
Voltmeter
Multimeter
Voltage Relay
Frequency Relay
Motor Relay
Differential Relay
Potential Transformer
Ammeter
Power Relay
MV Solid State Relay
Overcurrent Relay
Tag Link
12-1
Current Transformer
12.1 Current Transformer

You can enter the properties associated with current transformers (CT) of the electrical distribution
system can be entered in this editor. The Current Transformer Editor contains five pages of properties.
Info Page
Rating Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.1.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each current transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the
default current transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
of current transformers increase. The default current transformer ID (CT) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
12-2
Current Transformer
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a current transformer are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of current transformer (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for
bus ID. If a terminal of a current transformer is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of
the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a current transformer to
a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the
current transformer resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a current transformer is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection
of the current transformer to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where CT2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Reverse Polarity
Check the Reverse Polarity box to change the polarity of the current transformer.
Condition
Service
State
12-3
Current Transformer
Standard
Select from either ANSI or IEC standard.
Type
Current transformers can be defined as Phase or Ground type.
Note: Phase CT can detect the phase and ground currents whereas Ground CT detects only the ground or
3I0 component of the current (i.e. zero-sequence CT).
The symbol for current transformer changes when the type is changed from Phase to Ground. A CT
placed in the grounding element of a transformer or generator is by default a ground CT.
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
12-4
Current Transformer
12.1.2 Rating Page
Ratio
Primary
Enter the primary rating of current transformer in amperes.
Secondary
Enter the secondary rating of current transformer in amperes.
Ratio
This field displays the current ratio of current transformer.
Burden
Burden
Enter the burden of current transformer in VA or ohm. This value is use for CT sizing and calculating CT
saturation.
Designation
Select the burden designation of current transformer from the list-box.
Note: The CT burden value is updated based on the burden designation selection.
12-5
Current Transformer
12.1.3 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
Date
This field displays the date of change. The format for the date can be changed from the Projects Menu in
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
Projects Menu in the menu bar.
12-6
Current Transformer
12.1.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the Menu bar.
UD Field 5
12-7
Current Transformer
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-8
Current Transformer
12.1.5 Comment Page

12-9
12.2 Potential Transformer

The properties associated with potential transformers (PT) of the electrical distribution system can be
The Potential Transformer Editor contains three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.2.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each potential transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the
default potential transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of potential transformers increase. The default potential transformer ID (PT) can be changed
from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
12-10
From & To
The primary terminal of the potential transformer has two pins as From and To which can be connected
directly to buses or in between branch elements. These primary pins are located on top of each other.
Also, if the primary terminal of a potential transformer is connected to a From bus, the ID of the To bus
will be hidden and visa versa. To connect or reconnect a potential transformer to a bus, select a bus from
the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you
cannot connect to a bus that resides in Dumpster or in another composite network.
The secondary terminal of a PT has only one pin, which can be connected to voltmeters, multimeters,
overcurrent relays, multi-function relays, motor relays, frequency relays, and voltage relays.
Condition
Service
State
12-11
Rating
Primary
Enter the primary rated voltage of potential transformer in kV or select from list box.
Secondary
Enter the secondary rated voltage of potential transformer in Volts or select from list box.
Connection
This is the type of connection of the potential transformer. Select the connection type from the list box.
L-G Line-to-ground connection
L-L Line-to-line connection
Ratio
This field displays the turn ratio of the potential transformer based on the primary and secondary voltages.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12-12
12.2.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
12-13
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-14
12.2.3 Comment Page

12-15
Voltmeter
12.3 Voltmeter
The properties associated with voltmeters can be entered in this editor.
The Voltmeter Editor contains three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.3.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each voltmeter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
voltmeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of voltmeters
increase. The default voltmeter ID (VM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or
12-16
Voltmeter
PT
Voltmeters have one pin, which can be connected to a potential transformer (PT). A blank entry will be
shown for the PT if the terminal of the voltmeter is not directly connected to a PT. If the terminal of a
voltmeter is connected to a PT, the ID of the PT will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This is the turn ratio of the potential transformer connected to the voltmeter.
Condition
Service
State
Voltage
Operating
This field displays the operating voltage in volts. This field is updated when used with the ETAP RealTime module.
Set Point
Enter the set point value of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time module only.
Std. Deviation
Enter the standard deviation of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time module only.
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time module.
Scanned
Displays the scanned value of the meter as it is obtained from the system.
Pinned
In ETAP Real-Time, you can pin a value for the meter that may be different from the real-time data. This
option is provided to overwrite the actual scanned value for the system.
Equipment
Tag #
12-17
Voltmeter
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12-18
Voltmeter
12.3.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
12-19
Voltmeter
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-20
Voltmeter
12.3.3 Comment Page

12-21
Ammeter
12.4 Ammeter
The properties associated with ammeters can be entered in this editor.
The Ammeter Editor contains three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.4.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each ammeter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
ammeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of ammeters
increase. The default ammeter ID (AM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
12-22
Ammeter
CT
Ammeters have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the other pin
can be connected to other relays and/or meters. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the terminal of
the ammeter is not connected directly to a CT or indirectly through other relays and/or meters. If the
terminal of an ammeter is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the CT
will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This is the turn ratio of the current transformer connected to the ammeter.
Condition
Service
State
Current
Operating
This field displays the operating current in amperes. This field is updated when it is used with the ETAP
Real-time module.
Set Point
Enter the set point value of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Std. Dev.
Enter the standard deviation of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time Module.
Scanned
Pinned
When used with ETAP Real-time, you can pin a value for the meter that may be different from the realtime data. This option is provided to overwrite the actual scanned value for the system.
12-23
Ammeter
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12.4.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
12-24
Ammeter

UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-25
Ammeter
12.4.3 Comment Page

12-26
Multimeter
12.5 Multimeter
The properties associated with multimeters of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Multimeter Editor includes three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.5.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each multimeter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
multimeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of multimeters
increase. The default multimeter ID (MM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or
12-27
Multimeter
Multimeters have three connection pins: two current pins that can be connected to a current transformer
(CT) and relays/meters, and a voltage pin, which can be connected to a PT.
CT
A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the CT terminal of the multimeter is not directly connected to a
CT or indirectly through other relays and/or meters. If the CT terminal of a multimeter is connected to a
CT or to a relay/ammeter, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the CT will be displayed for the terminal
connection.
PT
A blank entry will be shown for the PT if the PT terminal of the multimeter (bottom pin) is not directly
connected to a PT. If the terminal of a multimeter is connected to a PT, the ID of the PT will be displayed
for the terminal connection.
Ratio
The turn ratio of the current and/or potential transformer connected to the multimeter is shown here.
Condition
Service
12-28
Multimeter
State
Reverse Polarity
Check this box to reverse the voltage potential polarity.
Type
Voltage
Check this box to select a voltmeter function. A PT connection is required for this function.
Current
Check this box to select an ammeter function. A CT connection is required for this function.
kW/MW
Check this box to select a wattmeter function. Both CT and PT connection are required for this function.
Click on the kW/MW button to toggle between kilo and Mega units for Watt and var values for entering
and displaying multimeter data.
kvar/Mvar
Check this box to select a varmeter function. Both CT and PT connection are required for this function.
PF
Check this box to meter the Power factor. A CT connection is required for this function.
Freq.
Check this box for frequency measurement.
Operating
Displays the operating/metered values for selected multimeter functions.
Set Point
Enter the set point value of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Std. Dev.
Enter the standard deviation of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Real Time Data

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time Module.
Scanned
Pinned
For ETAP Real-Time, you can pin a value for the meter that may be different from the real-time data.
This option is provided to overwrite the actual scanned value for the system.
12-29
Multimeter
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12.5.2 Associations Page
The Associations page allows the association of various device types to the Multimeter. This feature is
mainly used by ETAP Real-Time application to provide link between the meter and the one-line diagram
elements.
12-30
Multimeter
12.5.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
UD Field 2 (Install Date.)
12-31
Multimeter
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-32
Multimeter
12.5.4 Comment Page

12-33
Protective Relay
12.6 Protective Relay

The properties associated with protective relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
Protective relay is classified in two categories: single or multiple functions. A single function relay
consists of only one protective feature such as overcurrent (i.e. ABB CO relay) where as a multi-function
relay may include several protective features such as overcurrent, overload, voltage, frequency, etc (i.e.
ABB SPAM 150C).
In addition to functional classification of the protective relays, the application must be considered when
selecting the relay type. For the above reasons, ETAP provides several protective relays categorized based
on their functionalities and applications: Multi-Function relay (R), Overcurrent relay (OCR), Motor relay
(MR), and Differential Relay (87).
Relay Types
Function / Application
Relay Editor
Page(s)
All applicable functions
OCR / OLR, etc.
Overcurrent Relay
Overcurrent
OCR
Motor Relay
Overload
OLR
Differential Relay
Differential
DIF
It should be noted that the various protective relay types share common editor properties and library data.
A multi-function relay can be modified to an overcurrent or a motor relay type or vice versa based on the
Relay Library Quick Pick selection.
The Relay Editor includes ten pages of properties and header information for each page.
Info Page
Input Page
Output Page
OCR Page
OLR Page
DIF Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.6.1 Header
The header displays the selected relay Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of the Relay
Editor.
12-34
Protective Relay
12.6.2 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default relay ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of relay increase. The default
relay ID (Relay) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Display Tag
Enter a display tag for the relay up to 12 alphanumeric characters in length.
The display tag can be utilized to show a user-definable annotation on the one-line diagram for the
selected relay such as relay trip element designations (i.e. 50/51/49). The relay display tag can be
displayed on the one-line diagram via the Display Options Editor.
12-35
Protective Relay
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12-36
Protective Relay
12.6.3 Input Page
The Current and Voltage inputs to the relay are specified in Input page. Relays have three pins, i.e.
Current In, Current Out, and Voltage.
The Current In pin can be connected to current transformers (CT) or Current Out of other current/power
relays. Current Out pin can be connected to Current In of other current/power relays. The Voltage Pin
can be connected to potential transformers (PT).
12-37
Protective Relay
Current
Terminal
The Terminal column displays the names of terminals of the Relay for assigning CT inputs. The selection
of the relay determines the names and number of terminals displayed in the Terminal column.
Note: The current terminal represents the number of terminal types (i.e., Phase, Ground, etc.) and not the
total number of current terminal connections.
Multiple CT input relays
For multiple current input relays, the current terminals are internally labeled as Phase, Ground and,
Sen. Ground (Sensitive Ground), etc. The number of current terminals is controlled by the relay library
selection.
Single CT input relays
For relays with one current transformer input (i.e. ABB CO relay), the current terminal is internally
designated as CT Input. Therefore, a single CT input relay can be assigned to a Phase or Ground type
current transformer.
A single CT input relay can be connected to detect the residual current (3I0) by checking Residual
checkbox. By definition, a residually connected relay detects ground/earth fault currents.
Current Summer
Check the current summer box to connect the phase CT terminal to a set of CTs connected in parallel. The
overcurrent relay element will then use the sum of the current of the paralleled CTs to operate on. The
12-38
Protective Relay
current summer directional relay uses the direction of the current through the first CT. This feature can be
used for modeling a partial differential relay.
Note: The current summer CTs must have the same ratio as the phase CT.
ID
The ID column displays the current transformers identifier that can be assigned to the selected terminal of
the relay. If the terminal is not connected to any CT, a blank entry will be shown for the terminal ID. To
connect or reconnect a Relay to a CT, select a CT from the list box.
Note: The terminal ID list box only displays those CTs that are connected to the relay on the one-line
diagram.
Once a terminal ID is selected the type and ratio of the connected CT is displayed for the selected
terminal. By default, the first connected CT is assigned to applicable current terminals of the relay.
Type
The Type column displays the type of the connected CT (Phase or Ground).
The following logic is used to allow connection of CT types to various Current Terminals.
Terminal
CT Input
Phase
Ground
Sen. Ground
Phase Type CT
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Ground Type CT
Allowed
Not Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Note: By definition, a Ground or Sen. Ground terminal of a relay connected to a Phase type CT will
detect the residual current of the phase CT.
Prim. Amp
Prim Amp column displays the primary rating of the connected current transformer.
Sec. Amp
Sec. Amp column displays the secondary rating of the connected current transformer.
If a relay is not graphically connected to any CT via the one-line diagram, the Prim, Amp and Sec. Amp
values are user-definable
12-39
Protective Relay
Differential
The differential section provides the user interface for defining the CT connections for either of the
following cases.
Note that for both cases the first row of the Differential Terminal is set to the same CT ID as specified in
the Phase CT Terminal.
Parallel CT Connection
Single CT input terminal which allows for summation (parallel connection of multiple connected CTs).
This is typically applies to High Impedance and Partial differential relays where multiple CTs can be
paralleled and their currents are summed. Note that the number of CTs in parallel is user-definable.
When Current Summer is checked, the CT ratios of the summation CTs must be the same as the CT
selected for the phase input. If a CT is connected that does not meet this requirement, then it will be
ignored during the summation, and a message will appear in the editor.
12-40
Protective Relay
Multiple Differential CT Connection

Multiple differential CT input terminals are used for Percentage differential relay. Note that the number of
CTs in parallel is user-definable when DIF relay is not selected from the library, otherwise this field is
display only.
Voltage
Terminal
The Terminal column displays the names of terminals of the Relay for assigning PT inputs. The selection
of the relay determines the names and number of terminals displayed in the Terminal column.
Multiple PT input relays
For relays that have multiple potential transformer inputs, the terminal names are internally designated as
Phase and Sync. If the relay selected allows two inputs for potential transformers, then both the
Phase and Sync terminals are displayed.
12-41
Protective Relay
Single PT input relays

For relays, which have only one potential transformer input, the terminal name is internally designated as
PT Input.
ID
The ID column displays the ID of the potential transformers that can be assigned to the terminals of the
Relay. If the terminal is not connected to any PT, a blank entry will be shown for the terminal ID. Select
a PT form the pull-down list to connect or reconnect a Relay to a PT.
Note: The terminal ID pull-down list only displays those PTs that are connected to the relay on the oneline diagram.
Once a terminal ID is selected the type and ratio of the connected PT is displayed for the selected
terminal. By default, the first connected PT is assigned to applicable current terminals of the relay.
Type
The Type column displays the type of the potential transformer assigned to the terminals of the Relay.
Prim. kV
Prim. kV column displays the primary rating of the connected potential transformer.
12-42
Protective Relay
Sec. Volts
Sec. Volts column displays the secondary rating of the connected potential transformer.
If a relay is not graphically connected to any PT via the one-line diagram, the Prim. KV and Sec. Volts
values are user-definable.
Note: When the PT ratio is entered manually, the connection type is assumed to be L-L.
Current Summer Handling for SQOP

The Current Summer function can be enabled from the relay editor Input page where the current
transformer (CT) assignment for differential / current summer are specified. The relay operation is
determined through vector summation of the through current for each valid Current Summer CT.
Note the following when modeling the current summer:
The flow of current with respect to the Current Transformer (CT) polarity will determine how the
currents are added. If the currents are entering into the CT on the same side as the polarity
indicator, then the currents can be considered as positive. If the currents are entering into the CT
on the opposite side as the polarity indicator, then the currents can be considered as negative. The
currents are then summed up taking into account the polarity.
In the example below, the direction of current flow in CT1 is the opposite of CT2 with respect to
their polarities. Therefore, the current summation is the difference between the currents through
CT1 and CT2.
12-43
Protective Relay
CTs connected to the relay should be assigned as current summing CTs in the relay editor Input
page.
Switching device (i.e. circuit breaker) interlocks should be specified in the relay editor Output
page.
All summing CTs must have the same ratio. CTs that do not have the same ratio as the Phase
Terminal CT are not considered for summation.
The phase elements (i.e. Phase, Thermal, Acceleration, Jam, and Instantaneous) operate on
highest summed phase current (IA, IB, or IC).
The neutral element will trip on the summation of zero sequence currents.
When a phase CT is assigned to the Ground / Sensitive Ground Terminal of the relay (i.e. residual
ground) and is also assigned as the first summing CT, then the ground elements will trip on the
summation of the zero sequence current. Note: If a summing CT, which is not the first one, is
assigned to Ground / Sensitive Ground Terminal, then the Ground / Sensitive Ground element
will not operate.
12-44
Protective Relay
In the example below, CT10 is assigned to both the Phase and Ground Terminals. Since current
summer is enabled and CT10 is a summation CT, the ground will operate on the zero sequence
calculated from the sum of current flow through CT10 and CT9.
12.6.4 Output Page
12-45
Protective Relay
Interlock
Add
Click on this button to open the Relay Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new control interlock,
including Relay element, Relay level/zone, Device type, device ID, and control Action.
Edit
Click on this button to open the Relay Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing control
interlock.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected control interlock.
Interlock Editor
Relay Element
Select the relay element for the desired tripping action.
Note: the Relay Element field is updated based on the library selection.
Relay Level/Zone
Select the relay level/zone for the desired tripping action. Note that the Level/Zone field is updated based
on the library selection.
Device
Select the device type for control interlock data.
ID
Select and display the ID of the interlocked device.
Action
Select interlock action (Open, Close, or None).
12-46
Protective Relay
12.6.5 Overcurrent (OCR) Page
Library
To access the overcurrent relay library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
OC level
Overcurrent relays can have multiple Time overcurrent (TOC) and/or Instantaneous overcurrent (IOC)
elements that can be simultaneously and independently set in the relay library. The OC level displays a
Drop-down list of the maximum number of overcurrent levels that are available for the selected relay.
For example, the Schweitzer 551 relay has 2 Phase TOC and 6 Phase IOC elements and only 1 Ground
TOC and 2 Ground IOC levels. In this case, the maximum number of OC levels set to 6, as these levels
are applicable to the model as a whole, and not to individual trip elements.
Enabled (checkbox)
Check this box to enable the parameters for selected OC level.
12-47
Protective Relay
Link TOC + IOC for this level (check box)

This field is displayed only if Independent TOC/IOC checkbox is checked in the Model Info page of
the Relay Library. Check this box to link the TOC and IOC for the selected OC level (This applies for all
available trip elements). When checked, this will override the independent TOC/IOC checkbox in the
relay library and will have the curve displayed in Star as it used to be in ETAP 5.0.3 version.
For example in the ABB DPU-2000R curve shown below, Link TOC + IOC for this level is unchecked in
the OCR editor. Hence, the TOC and IOC curves are shown as two independent curves.
12-48
Protective Relay
For the curve shown below, Link TOC + IOC for this level is checked. Hence, the TOC and IOC curves
are linked.
Integrated Curves (check box)

Check this box to enable the integration of all active OC level curves to a single curve in Star view. For
relay models with multiple OC levels, you may integrate curve levels to display one single curve. Also,
for relay models with single OC level, you may integrate the TOC with the IOC to display one single
curve.
12-49
Protective Relay
For example in the Alstom P121 curve below, Integrated curves is disabled and the Link TOC + IOC are
unchecked for both OC1 and OC2. Hence all the curves are shown as independent curves.
12-50
Protective Relay
For the curve shown below, the Integrated Curves is enabled and Link TOC + IOC are unchecked for
both OC1 and OC2. Hence, the curve is shown as single integrated curve. When an integrated curve is
unselected on the Star view, Star will display a single integrated curve based on the lowest time at each
value of current.
12-51
Protective Relay
When an integrated curve is selected on the Star view, all individual OC level curves are displayed,
allowing you to graphically adjust their settings as shown below.
12-52
Protective Relay
Note that, when both Link TOC + IOC for this level and Integrated Curves checkboxes are both
checked for relay models with single OC level, then Link TOC + IOC for this level takes precedence
over the Integrated Curves for all cases except for the case when the IOC is defined as a Short Time.
The curve below shows such a case wherein the short time curve is integrated and linked with TOC.
When Link TOC + IOC for this level is checked for all available OC levels and Integrated Curves is
also checked, then all the linked TOC/IOC curves are combined into a single curve.
12-53
Protective Relay
Overcurrent Elements
The different elements for the overcurrent function are Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sen. Ground (Sensitive
Ground) and Neg. Seq. (Negative Sequence). These elements are defined as separate tabs on the
Overcurrent page. The selection of relay determines the overcurrent element tabs that will be displayed.
Phase
The Time overcurrent, Instantaneous and directional settings for Phase trip element can be entered in the
Phase element tab. Voltage restraint (51V) settings are applicable and can be entered only for the Phase
element.
Neutral
The relay has a Neutral element if the residual current is calculated internally by the device from the
phase current transformers, for ground fault protection.
The Time overcurrent, Instantaneous and directional settings for Neutral trip element can be entered in the
Neutral element tab.
Ground
The relay has a Ground element if the device has a separate input for the ground current, for ground fault
protection.
The Time overcurrent, Instantaneous and directional settings for Ground trip element can be entered in
the Ground element tab.
Sen. Ground
Sensitive Ground elements are typically used for detecting low level ground faults. The Time overcurrent,
Instantaneous and directional settings for Sensitive Ground trip element can be entered in the Sensitive
Ground element tab.
Neg-Seq
Negative Sequence elements are used for detecting negative sequence currents. The Time overcurrent,
Instantaneous and directional settings for Negative Sequence trip element can be entered in the Negative
Sequence element tab.
Overcurrent (51) Settings

The Time overcurrent settings available for Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative
Sequence are described below.
12-54
Protective Relay
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the Time overcurrent settings for selected element.
Curve Type
Select from drop-down list and display the Time overcurrent curve type for the selected model.
Pickup Range
Select from drop-down list and display the Time overcurrent Pickup range for the selected curve. The
pickup range can be specified in amperes of the secondary or primary current rating. It can also be in
multiples/percent of the CT secondary.
Pickup Setting
For the selected pickup range, select or enter the Time overcurrent pickup setting. The pickup setting can
be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Relay Amps
This field displays the relay secondary current in amperes, for the selected pickup setting.
Prim. Amps
This field displays the relay primary current in amperes, for the selected pickup setting.
Time Dial
Select and display the Time Dial for the selected curve type. The time dial can be discrete values or
Instantaneous (50) Settings

The Instantaneous settings available for Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative
Sequence are described below.
Instantaneous
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous settings for selected element.
Instantaneous / Short time
Some relays like ABB DPU-2000R have the capability to set a level between the Time overcurrent and
Instantaneous, in addition to the Instantaneous settings. This element is referred to as Short time and
provides a curve-based instantaneous operation. If the relay selected has the Short time feature, you can
choose between Instantaneous or Short time element using the drop-down list.
12-55
Protective Relay
Curve Type
This field with a drop-down list of curves is available only if the selected relay has Short time feature and
if the Short time is selected. Select from the drop-down list and display the Short time curve type for the
selected model.
Pickup Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the Instantaneous Pickup range (for the selected curve in case
of Short time). The pickup range can be specified in amperes of the secondary or primary current rating.
It can also be in multiples/percent of the CT secondary or 51 pickup.
Pickup Setting
For the selected pickup range, select or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting. The pickup setting can be
discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Relay Amps
This field displays the relay secondary current in amperes, for the selected pickup setting.
Prim. Amps
Delay Range
This field is available only if the relay has Instantaneous function. Select from the drop-down list and
display the Instantaneous Delay range. The delay range could either be in seconds or cycles.
Delay
Select or enter the intentional delay for the instantaneous. The Delay can be in seconds or cycles,
depending on the selection of relay. The delay can be in the form of discrete values or continuously
adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is specified in the library, it will be added to the value
selected.
Time Dial
This field is available only if the selected relay has Short time feature and if the Short time is selected.
Select or enter the Time Dial for the selected curve type. The time dial can be discrete values or
12-56
Protective Relay
Directional (67) Settings

The Directional settings available for Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative Sequence
are described below. These settings are used if a specific relay function is set as a directional element.
Directional
Check this box if the relay pickup current is directional. If checked, the Sequence-of-Operation and Arc
Flash Analysis will consider the direction of the current flow through the CT when calculating the trip
time.
Direction
Select the relay pickup current direction either in Forward or in Reverse.
Note: If the value selected here does not match the direction of the flow of current through the CT (when
running Sequence of Operation or Arc Flash), then the 51/50 curve will be ignored for the selected trip
element.
Maximum Torque Angle
Select the lead or lag maximum torque angle.
Polarizing
Select the polarizing input used to provide directional control. The inputs listed are Voltage, Current and
Dual.
Voltage Restraint / Control (51V) Settings

Relays with Voltage Restraint / Control are primarily used for backup protection of generator. Their
application is essential in cases where it is difficult to differentiate between normal overloads (no fault
condition) and abnormal operating conditions (faults), on the basis of current sensing only. Since the
system voltage drops considerably during faulted conditions, the system voltage along with the current
would give a clear indication of the operating state of the system.
Relays with Voltage Restraint / Control have a voltage input (from a PT) and a current input (from a CT).
The operating characteristics of these devices are a function of both voltage and current. Depending upon
the sensed voltage, the TCC of the device is modified to adjust the sensitivity of the relay.
12-57
Protective Relay
Note: The connection type of the PT (L-L or L-G) and the fault type affect the value of the voltage sensed
from the input.
The settings for voltage-controlled and voltage-restrained overcurrent relay types are described below.
Voltage
Check this box to enable Voltage Restraint / Control element.
Voltage Setting
Select and display the setting in volts, multiples or percent based on library selection.
Voltage Control
Enter the voltage control setting for the selected voltage setting. The voltage setting can be discrete values
or continuously adjustable. The units can be in volts or multiples/percent of the PT secondary rating.
In these types of devices, the operating torque is controlled by the voltage element. The voltage setting on
this element can be adjusted over a range. When the input voltage (from the system) is above the voltage
setting, the relay does not operate, regardless of the current magnitude. When the voltage falls below the
setting, the overcurrent relay operates according to its normal TCC. A clear distinction can thus be made
between normal no-fault conditions and abnormal, faulted conditions.
During the Sequence of Operation Analysis, the voltage measured through the PT input will be compared
to the Voltage Control settings. If the measured voltage is below the setting, the relay will use the 51
curve. However, if the measured voltage is above the setting, the relay will ignore the 51 curve.
Note: If no PT is connected or no PT ratio defined, then the 51 operation will ignore the voltage control
settings.
12-58
Protective Relay
Voltage Restraint
Enter the voltage restraint setting for the selected voltage setting. The voltage setting can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. The units can be in volts or multiples/percent of the PT secondary
rating.
A restraining coil takes the voltage input in these types of devices. The voltage on this restraining coil, as
the name suggests, produces a (restraining) torque that opposes the operating torque produced by the
current coil. This restraining torque is proportional to the voltage on the restraining coil and it effectively
controls the pickup current of the relay. The current required to operate the relay for a particular tap
setting drops with a corresponding drop in the restraining voltage. During faulted conditions, the system
voltage drops significantly, with a subsequent drop in the restraining voltage, thus making the relay more
sensitive.
The voltage setting on the restraining coil can be varied over a range. The relation between the voltage on
the restraining coil (as percentage of the setting) and the pickup current of the relay (as percent of the tap
setting) is typically piecewise linear. These characteristics are pre-defined and selectable in the
overcurrent relay library. A typical restraint characteristic is shown below.
Pickup as % of Tap setting
Typical Restraint characteristic

110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
Voltage as % of setting
During the Sequence of Operation Analysis, the voltage measured through the PT input will be compared
to the Voltage Restraint settings and the percentage is calculated. The pickup of the 51 curve will then be
adjusted according to the linear characteristic of the device, and the trip time will be determined using this
adjusted curve.
Note: If no PT is connected or no PT ratio defined, then the 51 operation will ignore the voltage restraint
settings.
An example of Voltage restraint characteristic plotted in STAR View for GE Multilin 750/760 relay is
shown below.
12-59
Protective Relay
12-60
Protective Relay
12.6.6 Overload (OLR) Page
Library Info
Library
To access the Overload/Motor relay library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
Curve Display
Integrated Curves
Check this box to integrate the Thermal and Instantaneous curves.
Load Parameters
The parameters such as full load amperes and lock rotor current, for a connected load or a user-defined
load can be defined in this section, the default being set to the Connected Load option.
12-61
Protective Relay
Connected Load
The Connected Load option retrieves the parameters for the connected load protected by the overload
relay.
Load ID
The Load ID field is displayed only when the Connected Load option is selected. It displays the ID of the
connected load protected by overload relay.
User Defined
The User Defined option allows the user to enter parameters for defining the load.
12-62
Protective Relay
FLA
The FLA field displays the full load amperes for the Connected Load or entered full load amperes in case
of the User Defined load. The FLA field is grayed out and is non-editable when the connected load option
is selected.
%LRC
The % LRC field displays the locked rotor current in percent for the connected load or entered % locked
rotor current for the User-defined load. The %LRC field is grayed out and non-editable when the
connected load option is selected. For Connected loads, the % LRC field is displayed only for motor
loads.
Overload Elements
The different elements for overload function are Thermal, Acceleration, Instantaneous, Jam and Ground.
These elements are defined as separate tabs on the Overload page. The selection of relay determines the
overload element tabs that will be displayed.
Thermal (49) Settings
The settings for thermal trip unit can be entered in the Thermal element tab.
Thermal
Check the box to enable the parameters for the thermal trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the thermal curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the thermal element. The trip ranges can be
specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating or the full load
amperes of the protected device.
12-63
Protective Relay
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the Thermal trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Multiplier
Select and display the Time Multiplier for the selected curve type. The time multiplier can be discrete
Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the time multiplier
can be specified as Heating Time constant, t6x time, Curve multiplier, Stall time, etc. If the time
multiplier data is not defined for a selected relay from the relay library, then the time multiplier field is
not displayed.
k Multiplier
Select and display the k Multiplier for the selected curve type. The k multiplier can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. Based on the value defined for the k multiplier in the OLR editor, the min
multiple for the curve in Star will be shifted by 1.0001 * K.
Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the k multiplier can
be specified as k factor, Overload Constant (k) etc. If the k multiplier data is not defined for a selected
relay from the relay library, then the k multiplier field is not displayed.
Acceleration Settings
The settings for Acceleration trip unit can be entered in the Acceleration element tab.
12-64
Protective Relay
Acceleration
Check the box to enable the parameters for the acceleration trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the acceleration curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the acceleration element. The trip ranges can
be specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating or the full
load amperes of the protected device or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the Acceleration trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Multiplier
Select and display the Time Multiplier for the selected curve type. The time multiplier can be discrete
Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the time multiplier
can be specified as Heating Time constant, t6x time, Curve multiplier, Stall time, etc. If the time
multiplier data is not defined for a selected relay from the Relay Library, then the time multiplier field is
not displayed.
k Multiplier
Select and display the k Multiplier for the selected curve type. The k multiplier can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. Based on the value defined for the k multiplier in the OLR editor, the min
multiple for the curve in Star will be shifted by 1.0001 * K.
Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the k multiplier can
be specified as k factor, Overload Constant (k) etc. If the k multiplier data is not defined for a selected
relay from the relay library, then the k multiplier field is not displayed.
12-65
Protective Relay
Instantaneous
Trip Range
specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating, the full load
amperes of the protected device, or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
Select or enter the element trip setting for the selected trip range. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
the value selected.
Jam (50)
12-66
Protective Relay
Trip Range
ranges can be specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating,
the full load amperes of the protected device, or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
the value selected.
Ground Settings
Trip Range
ranges can be specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating,
the full load amperes of the protected device, or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
Select or enter the element trip setting from the selected trip range. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
12-67
Protective Relay
Time Delay
the value selected.
12-68
Protective Relay
12.6.7 Differential (DIF) Page Protective
The DIF page provides the means to model a differential relay. The differential trip is considered in Arc
Flash evaluation study as well as Star PD Sequence-of-Operation analysis.
Library
To access the Differential relay library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
displays the Relay Library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the relay by highlighting the
Differential Type
If not, the differential relay is selected from the library the Differential Type selection can be Percentage
or High Impedance. For relay libraries with Differential element this field will be display only.
12-69
Protective Relay
Differential
Operating Time
This is a user-definable operating time for differential trip in seconds. Note that the differential
box must be checked in order for the differential relay to be considered in the studies.
Differential Relay Model for SQOP

In ETAP, Differential Relays operate by comparing the difference of currents. The program utilizes the
positive sequence currents I1 to determine if the fault is placed inside the zone of protection of the
differential relay. The program collects the necessary currents from the connected current transformers;
however, it neglects the current transformer turn ratio. If the difference in the positive sequence currents
is zero, then this indicates that the fault is external and the relay does not trip. If the difference in the
positive sequence current is not equal to zero the differential relay will trip. This is the case for internal
faults.
The ETAP Differential Relay model has the capability to operate for unbalanced faults as well (Line-toGround). Since the differential relay model can detect the direction of positive sequence current flows and
also the phase shift angles associated with unbalanced faults, it can determine whether the LG fault is
internal or external as long as there is positive sequence current flow. If the system is ungrounded (i.e. 3Io
= 0 kA), then there is no positive sequence current flow and the relay does not trip. Line-to-Line and
Line-to-Line-ground faults are not considered by the sequence of operation model.
This algorithm can be considered a generic model for simulating the operation of differential relays, and it
will work well for 3-phase and Line-to-Ground faults as long as the following conditions are met:
The Current Transformer (CT) polarities must be pointing away from the element which they
protect. For example, if the relay is a bus differential, then all CT polarity markings must be
pointing away from the protected bus. If the CT polarities are not configured as shown in the
images below, then it is possible that the relay will trip on external faults as may be the case in
real life operation of differential relays.
12-70
Protective Relay
Bus Differential CT Polarity
Transformer Differential CT Polarity Configuration
12-71
Protective Relay
All the CTs must be connected to the differential relay and all the circuit breakers must be
interlocked to the device as well. The differential relay will not operate if it only has one current
transformer connected to its input. It needs at least two CT connections to operate.
The differential relay operating time must be specified. The default value is zero seconds.
However, it is recommended that you enter a value between 10 to 30 msec. This value should be
obtained from the relay manufacturer documentation and it should be applied in a conservative
fashion. The differential relay operating time may change depending on the severity of the fault.
The operating time of a differential relay may be a lot higher for unbalanced faults. The longest
possible operating time should be used.
The total fault clearing time for a differential relay will be the sum of the Operating time plus the
breaker time. In the case of three cycle breakers, the FCT = 0.020 + (3/60) = 0.070 sec.
The selection of Percentage or High Impedance from the Differential Type drop-down list does
not make any difference in the way the program determines if the fault is internal or external to
the differential relay. This field will be utilized in future versions of the sequence of operation
program as the internal operation of the differential relay is modeled.
12-72
Protective Relay
Relay Library Quick Pick
The Relay Library Quick Pick allows the selection and setting of single or multiple functions relays with
different protection types. Relays of all function and protection types such as overcurrent relay,
differential relay, overload and motor protection relays are stored in the same library and can be selected
from same Quick Pick. The Quick pick also allows selection of relays by filtering them on basis of
Protection Type and Function Type.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays a list of all relay manufacturers included in the library. Select the manufacturer by highlighting
Lock
Reference
Industrial Systems is the reference manufacturer for GE Multilin.
For example, GE
Link
12-73
Protective Relay
Model
Model Name
Displays a list of all relay models or models filtered as per selection criteria, for the selected
manufacturer.
Lock
Functions
This displays all functions associated with selected relay model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected model. For example model reference for ABB SPAM
150C relay is SPCJ 4D34.
Brand Name
Application
For Multi-Function relay, the relay selection in the Quick Pick is defaulted to allow the selection of relays
with multiple functions and protection types. Furthermore, if the relay selected is only for Overcurrent
protection, the Multi-Function relay editor displays only the overcurrent page and changes the element
symbol to an Overcurrent relay (OCR). If the relay selected is only for motor protection, the MultiFunction relay editor displays only the overload page and changes the element symbol to a Motor relay
(MR).
Alternatively, if you drop an Overcurrent relay (OCR) element on the one-line view, the relay selection in
the Quick Pick is defaulted to filter by Overcurrent function. This allows selection of all overcurrent
function relays.
12-74
Protective Relay
If you drop a Motor Relay (MR) element on the one-line view, the relay selection in the Quick Pick is
defaulted to filter by Motor protection type. This allows selection of only motor protection relay models.
12-75
Protective Relay
12.6.8 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
12-76
Protective Relay
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the relay curves in Star View are specified in the TCC
option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for Short Circuit Current for IEC
standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS option will display the corresponding
Terminal
The Terminal displays the relay terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground, Sen. Ground or CT input) for the selected
relay and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected relay and
is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the relay based on the type and
location of the CT connected to the relay.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical cycle shortcircuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
standard. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.
Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground symmetrical or asymmetrical cycle
short-circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the STAR Mode Short-Circuit.
For the User-Defined option Base kV is editable.
Note: The selected device curve is plotted in reference to its base kV value. For example, if a device base
kV equals 4 and the Star View plot kV is set to 4.16, the device curve will be shifted by a factor of Base
kV/Plot kV or 0.962.

12-77
Protective Relay
Terminal
The Terminal displays the relay terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground, Sen. Ground or CT input) for the selected
relay and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected relay and
is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the relay based on the type and
location of the CT connected to the relay.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
standard and minimum initial symmetrical or minimum steady state current based on the selection for
minimum short circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-Defined
option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.
Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star view.
minimum short circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode study case editor. For the User-Defined
option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the STAR Mode Short-Circuit.
kV equals 4 and the STAR View plot kV is set to 4.16, the device curve will be shifted by a factor of
Base kV/Plot kV or 0.962.
Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the
selected relay. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.
12-78
Protective Relay
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected relay model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected relay model.
Brand Name
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected relay model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected relay model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected relay model.
Application
12-79
Protective Relay
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
12-80
Protective Relay
User-Defined Info
12-81
Protective Relay
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-82
Protective Relay

12-83
Voltage Relay
12.7 Voltage Relay Editor Overview

The properties associated with voltage relays are specified in Voltage Relay Editor.
Voltage relays can be used in transient stability study and Star SQOP. According to the specified circuit
breaker control interlock functions and settings, transient stability program will check the monitored
system quantities and compare them with the relay settings. When the control conditions are met, the
associated control actions will be triggered.
For Star SQOP, if the voltage setting and/or the voltage restraint conditions are met, the voltage relay will
trip and the associated tripping information will be displayed in the Output Report.
Voltage relays should be connected to a bus via a potential transformer.
The Voltage Relay Editor contains four pages of information.
Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.7.1 Info Page
12-84
Voltage Relay
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each voltage relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
voltage relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of voltage
relays increase. The default voltage relay ID (VR) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu
PT
Displays the connected PT ID.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12-85
Voltage Relay
12.7.2 Setting Page
OverVoltage (59) Control Interlock

Set and display the over-voltage control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new overvoltage control interlock.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
over-voltage control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted over-voltage control interlock.
UnderVoltage (27) Control Interlock

Set and display the under-voltage control interlock data.
12-86
Voltage Relay
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new undervoltage control interlock.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
under-voltage control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted under-voltage control interlock.
Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor
Setting
Enter the setting for overvoltage or undervoltage control interlock in percent of the selected unit.
Voltage relay setting is based on the nominal bus kV.
Unit
Select the unit for relay setting in V% or V/Hz%.
Note: V/Hz% is not considered in Sequence of Operation.
Circuit Breaker ID
Select the ID of the circuit breaker to be controlled.
Action
Select action type of the circuit breaker, i.e., Open or Close.
Time Delay
This is the time delay of the control action in seconds. The relay action will be reset if the operating
voltage falls within the limit during the time delay period.
12-87
Voltage Relay
12.7.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
12-88
Voltage Relay
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-89
Voltage Relay
12.7.4 Comment Page

12-90
Frequency Relay
12.8 Frequency Relay

The properties associated with frequency relays are specified in Frequency Relay Editor.
Same as voltage relays, frequency relays can be used in Transient Stability Study. According to the
specified circuit breaker control interlock functions and settings, transient stability program will check the
monitored system quantities and compare them with the relay settings. When the control conditions are
met, the associated control actions will be triggered.
Frequency relays should be connected to a bus via a potential transformer.
The Frequency Relay Editor contains four pages of information.
Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.8.1 Info Page
12-91
Frequency Relay
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each frequency relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
frequency relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
frequency relays increase. The default frequency relay ID (FR) can be changed from the Defaults Menu
in the menu bar or from the Project View.
PT
Display the connect PT ID.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12-92
Frequency Relay
12.8.2 Setting Page
Over-Frequency Control Interlock

Set and display the over-frequency control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new
over-frequency control interlock.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the properties of an
existing over-frequency control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted over-frequency control interlock.
Under-Frequency Control Interlock

Set and display the under-frequency control interlock data.
12-93
Frequency Relay
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new
under-frequency control interlock.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an
existing under-frequency control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted under-frequency control interlock.
Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor
Setting
Enter the setting for under-frequency or over-frequency relay in percent of the selected unit in this field.
Unit
Select the unit for relay setting in Hz% or Hz/sec% from the drop-down list.
Circuit Breaker ID
Select the ID of the circuit breaker to be controlled from the drop-down list.
Action
Select action type of the circuit breaker, i.e. Open or Closed from the drop-down list.
Time Delay
Enter the time delay of the control action in seconds in this field. The relay action will be reset if the
operating voltage falls within the limit during the time delay period.
12-94
Frequency Relay
12.8.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
12-95
Frequency Relay
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-96
Frequency Relay
12.8.4 Comment Page

12-97
Reverse Power Relay
12.9 Reverse Power Relay

The properties associated with reverse power relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.
The Reverse Power Relay Editor includes four pages of properties.
Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.9.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each reverse power relay. The assigned IDs consist of the
default reverse power relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
of reverse power relay increase. The default reverse power relay ID (RP) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
12-98
Reverse Power Relay
CT
Reverse power relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the
other pin can be connected to other current/power relays. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the
terminal of the reverse power relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If
the terminal of a reverse power relay is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the
ID of the CT will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This field displays the relay connected CT ratio.
Condition
Service
State
Interlock
Add
Click on this button to open the reverse power Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new reverse power
control interlock, including Device type, device ID, and control Action.
Edit
Click on this button to open the reverse power Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing reverse
power control interlock.
Delete
Interlock Editor
12-99
Reverse Power Relay
Device
Select and display the device to be controlled by the reverse power relay.
ID
Select and display the ID of the interlock device.
Action
Select interlock action (Open or Close).
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
12-100
Reverse Power Relay
12.9.2 Setting Page
Setting
Real Power
Select this option if real power is used as trip setting. Enter the Pickup power base in MW.
Reactive Power
Select this option if reactive power is used as trip setting. Enter the Pickup power base in Mvar.
Over Power
Over Power (check box)
Check to enable over power trip settings.
Pickup
Enter the setting for over power trip. If the measured power exceeds this value, the relay will trip. The
setting is entered in percentage of the pickup power base.
12-101
Reverse Power Relay
Time Delay
Enter the intentional relay time delay for over power trip in second.
Under Power
Under Power (checkbox)
Check to enable under power trip settings.
Pickup
Enter the setting for under power trip. If the measured power drops below this value, the relay will trip.
The setting is entered in percentage of the pickup power base.
Time Delay
Enter the intentional relay time delay for under power trip in second.
12.9.3 Remarks Page
12-102
Reverse Power Relay
User-Defined Info
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-103
Reverse Power Relay
12.9.4 Comment Page

When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start new paragraph. Standard key combinations
such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information.
12-104
MV Solid State Trip Relay
12.10 MV Solid State Trip Relay

The properties associated with MV Solid-State Trip Relays of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. The MV Solid State Trip Relay Editor (MVSST) includes nine pages of properties
and header information.
Info Page
Input Page
Output Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.10.1 Header
The header displays the selected MVSST Relay Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of
the MVSST Relay Editor.
12.10.2 Info Page
12-105
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each MVSST relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
MVSST relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of MVSST
relays increase. The default MVSST relay ID (SST) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu
CT
MVSST relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the other
pin can be connected to other current/power relays. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the
terminal of the MVSST relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If the
terminal of a MVSST relay is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the
CT will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This field displays the relay connected CT ratio.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
12-106
Description
Lock / Unlock
12.10.3 Input Page
The Input page is used to define Phase and Ground current transformers inputs to the MV Solid-State Trip
Relay.
Current
Terminal
The Terminal column displays the names of terminals of the MVSST relay for assigning CT inputs. The
terminal names are internally designated as Phase and Ground.
ID
The ID column displays the current transformers identifier that can be assigned to the selected terminal of
the MVSST relay. If the terminal is not connected to any CT, a blank entry will be shown for the
terminal ID. To connect or reconnect a MVSST relay to a CT, select a CT from the list box.
12-107
Note: The terminal ID list box only displays those CTs that are connected to the MVSST relay on the
one-line diagram.
Once a terminal ID is selected the type and ratio of the connected CT is displayed for the selected
terminal. By default, the first connected CT is assigned to applicable current terminals of the MVSST
relay.
Type
The Type column displays the type of the connected CT (Phase or Ground).
The following logic is used to allow connection of CT types to the Phase/Ground current Terminals.
Terminal
Phase
Ground
Phase Type CT
Allowed
Allowed
Ground Type CT
Not Allowed
Allowed
Prim. Amp
Prim Amp column displays the primary rating of the connected current transformer.
Sec. Amp
Sec. Amp column displays the secondary rating of the connected current transformer.
If a MVSST relay is not graphically connected to any CT via the one-line diagram, the Prim. Amp and
Sec. Amp values are user-editable.
12-108
12.10.4 Output Page
Interlock
Add
Click on this button to open the solid state trip Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new MVSST
control interlock, including Device type, device ID, and control Action.
Edit
Click on this button to open the solid-state trip Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
MVSST control interlock.
Delete
Interlock Editor
Relay Element
Select the solid-state relay element (Phase or Ground) for the tripping action.
Device
Select and display the device to be controlled by the MVSST relay.
12-109
ID
Select and display the ID of the interlock device.
Action
Select interlock device action (Open or Close).
12-110
12.10.5 Setting Page
Library Info
Library
Click on the Library button to access the MV Solid-State Trip Library data. Clicking the Library button
displays the MVSST Library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the MVSST relay by
highlighting the Manufacturer name and Model name. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the
selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Library Quick Pick

The information available in MV Solid-State Trip Relay Library Quick Pick is described below.
12-111
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays list of manufacturers included in the library. To select a manufacturer, highlight the
manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference for the selected manufacturer, if available.
Link
This displays the manufacturer web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
This displays list of models for the selected manufacturer. Select a model by highlighting it.
Reference
This displays the reference for the selected model, if available.
Application
This displays the application of the selected model.
Phase Settings
The Phase element of the MV Solid-State Trip Relay can be set using the Phase page.
Long -Time
Check this box to enable the Long-Time element.
12-112
Long -Time Pickup

Select from drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting for the selected curve type. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Long-Time pickup,
the pickup step is displayed next to the Long-Time pickup field.
Curve Type
Select the Curve Type (ANSI MOD, FLAT, I2T, etc.) for the Long-Time band.
Long -Time Band
Select from drop-down list or enter the Long-Time band setting, for the selected curve type. The band
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Long-Time band,
the band step is displayed next to the Long-Time band field.
Short -Time
Check the box to enable the Short-Time element.
Short-Time Pickup
Select from drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting. The pickup settings can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Short-Time pickup, the pickup step is
displayed next to the Short-Time pickup field.
Curve Type (I2t)
Select the Curve Type for the Short-Time band.
Short -Time Band
Select from drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting. The band settings can be discrete values
or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Short-Time band, the band step is displayed next
to the Short-Time band field.
Instantaneous
Check to enable the Instantaneous element.
Instantaneous Pickup
Select from drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting. The pickup settings can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. The pickup step is displayed next to the Instantaneous pickup field for
continuously adjustable Instantaneous pickup.
Ground Settings
The Ground element of the MV Solid-state trip relay can be set using the Ground page. The Ground page
has a Ground checkbox to enable the parameters for Ground element.
The Long-Time, Short-Time and Instantaneous element settings for Ground are identical to Phase, and
can be set as described above for the Phase element.
12-113
12-114
12.10.6 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined
12-115

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the MVSST curves in Star View are specified in the TCC
option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for Short-Circuit Current for IEC
Terminal
The Terminal displays the MVSST terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground or CT input) for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the MVSST based on the type
and location of the CT connected to the MVSST.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical -cycle shortcircuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
short-circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the Star Mode Short-Circuit.

12-116
Terminal
The Terminal displays the MVSST terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground or CT input) for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the MVSST based on the type
and location of the CT connected to the MVSST.
Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in STAR view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
minimum short circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the UserDefined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.
Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star view.
minimum short circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the UserDefined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the Star Mode Short-Circuit.
Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the
selected MVSST. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.
12-117
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected MV Solid-State Trip Relay model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
12-118
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
12-119
User-Defined Info
12-120
UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
12-121

12-122
Tag Link
12.11 Tag Link

The properties associated with a Tag Link of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Tag Link is an element used by ETAP Real-time module only to display monitored data not
related to state estimation. It can also be used to send commands out to control specific devices.
When you double click on the Tag Link icon, the Real Time Tag Link Database Path editor may appear if
no tag database is associated with this project Otherwise the Tag link editor opens.
The Tag Link Editor includes one page of properties and header information.
12-123
Tag Link
12.11.1 Info Page
ID
Enter a unique ID name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Type
Click the check box to specify if the meter or other monitoring device uses control.
Digital or Analog
Click the appropriate button to specify if the monitoring device is digital or analog.
Display
Enter the text to be displayed, using up to 32 characters
Font
These fields display the currently selected font, its style and size.
Font button
Click this button and the Font editor appears, allowing you to specify a font, its style and size. The
Sample area shows the fonts appearance. The Pull-down Script list below Sample allows you to choose a
script option.
12-124
Tag Link
Symbol
Type the path to the Tag link device, or click the Browse button to navigate to the device and set the path
in this manner.
DCS Tag
The DCS tag appears in this field.
Digital
If the Digital button is checked, the Digital area appears and allows you to edit the status and alert
indicators.
Online Status
The status of the Tag link device appears in this field.
True
Enter a description of the True condition in this field, using up to 20 characters.
False
Enter a description of the False condition in this field, using up to 20 characters.
Alerts
Use this area to define the alert indicators.
12-125
Tag Link
True
Use this area to specify the sound and color to be assigned to this alert condition.
Sound
Type a file name or navigate to .WAV alert sound for the True condition.
Color
Select a color for the True condition from the drop-down list.
False
Use this area to specify the sound and color to be assigned to this alert condition.
Sound
Type a file name or navigate to a .WAV alert sound for the False condition.
Color
Select a color for the False condition from the drop-down list.
Analog
If the Analog button is checked, the Analog area appears and allows you to edit the Upper and Lower
bound ranges and their alert indicators. You can also specify a color for the Between Bounds alert.
Format
Select the format from the drop-down list.
Multiplier
The multiplier appears in this field.
Unit
Check the box to display the unit name and type an identifier in the field, using up to 10 characters.
Online Value
Enter Online value in this field, using up to 20 characters.
Control Value
The Control value will be displayed in this field.
Alerts
Specify the upper, lower, and between bounds ranges, sounds and colors in this area.
12-126
Tag Link
Upper Bound
Specify the Upper bound range in this field, using up to 6 characters.
Sound
Color
Select a color for the Upper Bound from the drop-down list.
Lower Bound
Specify the lower bound range in this field, using up to 6 characters.
Sound
Color
Select a color for the Lower Bound from the drop-down list.
Between Bounds
Select a color for the Between Bounds alert from the drop-down list.
12-127
Chapter 13
AC-DC Elements
Editors are available for each element type in the one-line diagram and in the underground raceway
system. Except for the element IDs, bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors
are considered engineering properties.
One-Line Diagram Element Editors

Each element available on the One-Line Diagram toolbar has a customized editor. This chapter addresses
the AC-DC Element Editors:
AC-DC Elements
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
VFD (Variable Frequency Drive)
Charger
Inverter
13-1
AC-DC Elements
UPS
13.1 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)

The properties associated with an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) of the electrical system can be
entered in this editor. A UPS consists of two AC terminals (input & output) and one DC terminal. The
DC terminal is located on the side and can be connected to a DC bus (node).
The UPS Editor contains the following nine pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
SC Imp Page
Duty Cycle Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.1.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the UPS ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment Tag #, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, AC Connections, and Demand Factor.
13-2
AC-DC Elements
UPS
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique
ID to each UPS. The default IDs consist of the word UPS plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of UPS increases.
The default ID (UPS) for UPS elements can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
In Bus, Out Bus and DC Bus

These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the UPS. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a UPS to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the UPS to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that reside in the Dumpster.
If a UPS is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the UPS to a new
bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where
Ups1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV in AC terminal buses and nominal V in DC terminal buses next to the bus
ID for your convenience.
Condition
Service
13-3
AC-DC Elements
UPS
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the UPS(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options
for operating status include:
Continuous
Intermittent Intermittently operating load
Spare Spare load (no short-circuit contribution)
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the UPS is
determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the UPS engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the UPS status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a UPS is
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as estimate,
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect
13-4
AC-DC Elements
UPS
the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types and you can change their name from the
Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this UPS from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priority names
can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
AC Connection
3-Phase
For this release of ETAP, the connection type for the AC input is set to 3-Phase.
1-Phase
For this release of ETAP, there is no output from the UPS model.
Demand Factor
The Demand factor is the amount of time the UPS is actually operating. The Demand factor affects the
calculation of UPS loads for different Loading Categories.
Load kW = Rated kW * % Loading * Demand Factor
The Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
13-5
AC-DC Elements
UPS
13.1.2 Rating Page

You can specify the UPS ratings and select the UPS Operating Mode and type in this page.
AC Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the UPS (output power at full load). Click on the kW/MW button to choose either
kW or MW units for entering and displaying output power ratings of the UPS. When the kW rating is
modified, the rated power factor (including the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories) is
recalculated in order to keep the rated kVA fixed. ETAP limits the entry of kW/MW in such a way that
the power factor cannot exceed 100% or be below 1%.
kVA
Enter the rated output kVA (or MVA) of the UPS. When the kVA rating is modified, the rated kW and
full load current of the UPS are recalculated.
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the UPS in percent. When the efficiency is modified, the full load currents
for the AC input and DC sides are recalculated. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It
defaults to 90%.
13-6
AC-DC Elements
UPS
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the UPS output power. When the power factor is modified, the rated kW
is recalculated. Power factor cannot exceed 100%. It defaults to 85%.
Output
kV
Enter the rated AC output voltage of the UPS in kV. The rated AC output full load current is calculated
based on this value.
FLA
The rated AC output full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
Input
kV
Enter the rated AC input voltage of the UPS in kV. The rated AC input full load current is calculated
based on this value.
FLA
The rated AC input full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
DC Rating
V
Enter the rated DC input voltage of the UPS in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated based
on this value.
FLA
The rated DC full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
Imax
Enter the maximum DC output current of the UPS in percentage of the rated DC full load current. The
UPS becomes a constant current source when the DC load current exceeds the Imax in DC Load Flow
Studies. ETAP uses Imax as the constant current source value. Imax defaults to 150%.
DC Operating Voltage
When you select this option, the rated DC voltage is used as the regulated voltage source of the UPS for
DC Load Flow Studies. With these options, the user can use rated DC voltage or define a value by
selecting User-Defined.
DC System Charging
Blocked by Auction Diode
When the Auction Diode option is selected, the UPS is treated as a DC load in the DC system, i.e., DC
power can only flow into the UPS. In this case, the UPS will not provide power to the DC system for
Load Flow , Short-Circuit, or Shock Protection studies.
13-7
AC-DC Elements
UPS
Without the auction diode, DC power can flow in or out of the UPS.
Bypass Switch Status

When the Bypass Switch status is selected as Closed, the UPS is treated as a shorted branch crossed
between AC input and output terminals. If Bypass Switch is selected as Open, the UPS is not treated as
bypassed.
Load Flow Analysis

The Bypass Switch affects all AC Load Flow type studies.
Short Circuit Analysis

The Bypass Switch only affects all AC Short-Circuit type studies.
Note: In the editor mode, if any bypass switch is selected as closed, the bypass switch will be displayed in
the One Line Diagram. In any load flow type study mode, the bypass switch will be displayed only when
the bypass switch is selected as closed for Load Flow Analysis. In any short circuit type study mode, the
bypass switch will be displayed only when the bypass switch is selected as closed for Short Circuit
Analysis.
Bypass Switch displayed in One Line Diagram
13-8
AC-DC Elements
UPS
13.1.3 Loading Page

In this page, specify the percent output loading of the UPS for all Loading Categories. The kW and kvar
input load of the UPS based on the specified efficiency and power factor are calculated and displayed
here. Also, the DC operating load and losses in kW are displayed here.
UPS Load Based on

This section is used to specify the loading at UPS input side. When Loading Category is selected, the
UPS will be treated as a pure constant load and its output side will be de-energized.
UPS Output Side Is De-energized
13-9
AC-DC Elements
UPS
Loading Category
This selection is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for AC
loading and DC loading of this UPS, i.e., each UPS can be set to have a different operating loading level
for each Loading Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields
under the % Loading column.
Note that you can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting AC or DC Load Flow Studies.
To edit the Loading Category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu.
Connected Load
This selection is used to reflect UPS output loading onto the UPS input side. Refer to Chapter 19.4 for
details of modeling of UPS.
Operating Input PF
Rated
The UPS rated input power factor will be used to reflect the UPS output loading to its input side.
User-Defined
This selection is used for user to enter the power factor to reflect the UPS output loading to its input side.
Connected Load
The reactive power of the UPS output loading will be reflected to the UPS input side directly.
13-10
AC-DC Elements
UPS
13.1.4 SC Imp Page

Within the SC Imp page, specify the AC and DC short-circuit multiplication factors and the grounding
resistance of the UPS, and view calculated AC and DC short-circuit contribution currents.
SC Contribution to AC System
Kac
Enter the AC short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the output FLA. ETAP uses this value to
calculate short-circuit current contribution from the UPS to the AC output side. The AC multiplication
factor defaults to 150%.
Isc
The AC short-circuit current contribution from the UPS to the output side is calculated and displayed here
in amperes.
SC Contribution to DC System
Kdc
Enter the DC short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of DC FLA. ETAP uses this value to calculate
short-circuit current contribution from the UPS in DC Short-Circuit Studies. The DC multiplication
factor defaults to 150%.
13-11
AC-DC Elements
UPS
Isc
The DC short-circuit current contribution from the UPS is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
AC Secondary Grounding
Grounded
Check if the UPS offers grounding to the AC system
Earthing Type
Distributed Neutral
Enter the resistance to ground in Ohms
DC Grounding
Grounded
Check if the UPS offers grounding to the DC system
Earthing Type
Distributed Neutral
Enter the resistance between the elements chassis and ground in Ohms.
13-12
AC-DC Elements
UPS
13.1.5 Duty Cycle Page

Within the Duty Cycle page, specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle.
ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The data in
this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
Based on Amp/%Loading
This option specifies how the duty cycle is specified. When the Amp option is selected, the duty cycle is
specified as amperes and the %Load will be calculated. When the %Load option is selected, the duty
cycle is specified as percentage of FLA and the ampere values will be calculated.
The selection of this option also determines the column to be updated when the load FLA is changed.
When the Amp option is selected, if the load FLA is changed, the %Load column will be updated
according to the Amp values specified. In contrast, when the %Load option is selected, if the load FLA is
changed, the Amp column will be updated according to the %Load values specified.
13-13
AC-DC Elements
UPS
Duty Cycle Category

Select a Duty Cycle Category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each load can
have up to five Duty Cycle Categories with independent load profiles. You can name the Duty Cycle
Categories from the Project menu bar.
Load Profile
To add a load to the load profile, click on either the Ins or Add button, or click the Insert key to create a
row in the load profile table. Each row represents a segment of the load profile for this duty cycle.
To edit the load profile, click on the button under the Active column, and this segment of load will be
considered in studies. Click on the button under the Random column, and this segment of load will be
treated as a random load in studies. Click on the field under the Type column and pick one of the seven
types in the list box. Enter a load name, current in amperes, start time in seconds, and duration in seconds
for this segment of load. After the data of a row is entered, this segment of load curve will be drawn on
the Non-Random or Random window.
To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking the number of the row, then click on the Del button
or click the Delete key.
Click on either the <-Print or Print-> button, and the displayed load profile curve (random & nonrandom) for the selected duty cycle will be printed out.
Note: You can select any of the Duty Cycle Categories when conducting Battery Sizing Studies. To edit
the Loading Category names, select Duty Cycle Category from the Project menu.
13-14
AC-DC Elements
UPS

Within the Harmonic page, specify the harmonic source type of the UPS and view the harmonic source
waveform and frequency spectrum of the UPS.
13-15
AC-DC Elements
UPS
Harmonic Library
Library
UPS Parameters
injection angle of the device. When this option is selected, the Library group is grayed out and the
Parameters
Pulse #
Select the converter pulse modulation.
13-16
AC-DC Elements
UPS
Shift Angle
Pulse
12
24
48
Shift Angle
30
15
7.5
Note: The phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model for 6 pulse.
Alpha
Enter the rectifiers firing angle.
Beta
Xc%
Enter the commutation reactance in percent of the rated reactance.
Max Order
Maximum harmonic order to be modeled
13-17
AC-DC Elements
UPS
A
This is the Active Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Active Failure Rate is associated with
the Component Failure Mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone around the failed
component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from service.
It should be noted that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to it)
could be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.
This is Mean Repair Rate in number of repairs per year is automatically calculated and based on MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A
(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years is automatically calculated and based on A (MTTF = 1.0/A).
13-18
AC-DC Elements
UPS
MTTR
This is the Mean Time To Repair in hours is the expected time necessary for a crew to repair a failed
component and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is time in hours necessary to isolate a failure. It is the period of time starting from the moment a
switching operation is requested until the operation is completed.
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours needed to replace a failed component with a spare.
Library
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the Load Sector name for the load. The Load Sector information is used to obtain interruption cost
information from the Reliability Cost library in order to calculate Expected Interruption Costs.
13-19
AC-DC Elements
UPS
13.1.8 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




13-20
AC-DC Elements
UPS
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
13-21
AC-DC Elements
UPS
13.1.9 Comment Page

13-22
AC-DC Elements
VFD
13.2 VFD (Variable Frequency Drive)

The properties associated with VFDs (Variable Frequency Drive) of the electrical system can be entered
in this editor.
The Variable Frequency Drive Editor contains the following five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
Start Device Page
Control Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.2.1 VFD Connection and Phase Type

VFD Connection
ETAP allows flexible connection between a VFD and other elements. Some typical VFD connections are
shown in the figure below. On the input side, it can be connected to a bus or a branch, such as a cable, a
2-winding transformer, a line, or an impedance, etc. In order to represent connection of 12, 18 and 24
pulse VFD, the input of a VFD can be directly connected to the secondary and tertiary of a 3-winding
transformer or be directly connected to 2, 3 or 4 2-wingding transformers.
The output side of a VFD can be directly connected to a bus or a two-terminal branch. When you attempt
to connect an induction motor directly to the output side of a VFD, a node will be inserted automatically.
Please note that in the previous version of ETAP, it was allowed to connect a VFD between a motor and a
bus. When a project with such connections is converted to the current version of ETAP, the original
connection will be maintained as it is. However, if you disconnect the load and reconnect it to the VFD, a
node will be inserted.
In some industrial applications, such as submerged oil drilling, VFDs provide electric power to a subsystem that includes power distribution elements. These types of systems can also be easily represented
in ETAP. As shown in the picture below, you may set up a radial system on the output side of VFD with
buses and branches. The only elements that are not allowed are 3-winding transformer and power sources
(power grid, generator, etc). In the current version of ETAP, it also limits loads in a VFD-powered subsystem to only one energized motor for system studies.
VFD Phase Type

Most of VFDs for industrial applications are 3-phase VFD. Single phase VFD exists only for very small
ratings, in the range of fraction of horse power. When a VFD is directly connected to a single-phase load,
it becomes a single-phase VFD. In this version of ETAP, VFD editor pages are designed specifically for
3-phase VFDs. When a VFD is connected to a single-phase load, many fields in the VFD editor do not
apply. In the Rating page, only the rated capacity, output kV and rated efficiency are applicable. The
parameters in the Loading, Start Dev, and Control pages are not used in the calculations.
13-23
AC-DC Elements
VFD
In system calculations, ETAP handles a single-phase VFD the same way as the previous version. In all
load flow types of calculations, only the VFD rated efficiency is considered in the calculations. In shortcircuit types of calculations, if the bypass switch for short-circuit analysis is closed, the connected
motor/lump load will make short-circuit contributions to a fault. If the bypass switch is open, the
motor/lump load will be excluded in the short-circuit calculations.
13-24
AC-DC Elements
VFD
13.2.2 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the VFD ID, Connected Bus, branch and Load IDs, In/Out of Service, State,
Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, and Load Priority.
Info
ID
ID to each VFD. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of VFDs increases.
The default ID (VFD) for VFD elements can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Input/Output Element
These are the IDs of the connecting elements for the VFD. If the terminal is not connected to any
element, a blank entry will be shown for the ID. If the input of a VFD is connected to a bus, it can be
changed by selecting a different bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the
new connection after you click on OK. If the input of a VFD is connected to one or multiple branches,
the connected branches are displayed in the list and the connection cannot be modified from the editor.
The element connected on the output side is also displayed in the section and it cannot be changed from
the editor either.
13-25
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Note: You can connect the terminals of the VFD to AC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.
If the input side of a VFD is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of
the VFD to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where Vfd1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV next to the bus ID for your convenience.
Revision Data
The name of the currently selected revision is displayed in the field. All parameters, except configuration
related ones, shown in the editor are for the revision. Note that if a record has not been created for the
element in the revision, its revision data will be identical to the Base. The displayed revision should be the
same as the revision selected from the Revision Data list box.
Condition
Service
13-26
AC-DC Elements
VFD
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types and you can change their name from the
Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this VFD from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priority names
can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
13-27
AC-DC Elements
VFD
13.2.3 Rating Page

In this page, you can specify the VFD input and output ratings, short-circuit contribution and select the
VFD bypass switch.
Output Rating
HP/kW
Enter the VFD output rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by
clicking on the HP/kW button. The output HP/kW is also related to input kVA through input power factor
and efficiency
kVA
Enter the rated output kVA. This rated kVA is related to HP/kW, FLA, and PF by certain binding
equations. When a new kVA value is entered, the FLA and PF will be recalculated while the HP/kW
value stays unchanged.
kV
Enter the rated output voltage in kV.
Max Voltage
Enter the maximum operating output voltage in percent of rated output kV.
13-28
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Frequency
Enter the rated output frequency in Hz. This value is the base of operating frequency values entered from
other pages.
Max Frequency
Enter the maximum operating frequency in percent of the rated output frequency.
Min Frequency
Enter the minimum operating frequency in percent of the rated output frequency.
FLA
Enter the output full load ampere of the VFD. Once a new value is entered, the output kVA and PF
values will be recalculated.
PF
The rated output power factor of the VFD is displayed in this field. This only reflects the power factor
under rated condition and the actual operating power factor is determined by loads connected to the VFD.
Max Output Current

Enter the maximum output current in percent of the output FLA. This value is used to calculate threshold
for VFD over-current alert in load flow calculations.
Input Rating
kVA
Enter the rated Input kVA. This rated kVA is related to kV, FLA, and PF by certain binding equations.
When a new kVA value is entered, the FLA and PF will be recalculated. The input kVA is also related to
output HP/kW through input power factor and efficiency.
kV
Enter the rated input voltage in kV. The rated input and output kV values do not have to be the same.
When they are not equal to each other, it is assumed that a dedicated transformer is located on the input
or output side of the VFD and the transformer loss is included in the VFD efficiency.
Frequency
The rated input frequency of VFD is displayed in this field. The value is always equal to the project
frequency specified from the Project Standards dialog.
FLA
Enter the input full load ampere of the VFD. Once a new value is entered, the input kVA and PF values
will be recalculated.
PF
Enter the rated input power factor of VFD in percent. Once a new value is entered, the input kVA and
FLA values will be recalculated
EFF
Enter overall efficiency of VFD in percent. The output HP/kV and rated input real power are related by
the efficiency value. If there is a dedicated transformer within the VFD unit, its loss is also included in
this efficiency.
13-29
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Bypass Switch
The Bypass Switch only affects AC Studies. When Bypass Switch is closed, the VFD is treated as a
shorted switch crossed between input and output terminals of a VFD as shown in the one-line diagram. If
the input and output rated kV values are not equal, the bypass switch option will be hidden, since a direct
bypass switch will not be applicable in the case.
There are two bypass switch status flags used for load flow and short circuit type of studies respectively.
Load Flow Analysis Bypass Switch Flag

This flag applies to the Edit mode and the modes for load flow type of studies, including Load Flow,
Motor Starting, Harmonic Analysis, Transient Stability, Unbalanced Load Flow, Optimal Power Flow,
Reliability, Optimal Capacitor Placement, and Switching Sequence Management, etc.
Short Circuit Analysis Bypass Switch Flag

This flag applies to the modes for short circuit type of studies, including Short Circuit and STAR
Protective Device Coordination.
SC Contribution to Output Terminal

In the current version of ETAP, it considers VFD short circuit contributions to only a fault on the output
side of the VFD.
K
Enter the AC short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the output FLA. ETAP uses this value to
calculate short-circuit current contribution from the VFD to the output side. This factor defaults to 150%.
Isc
The AC short-circuit current contribution from the VFD to the output side is calculated and displayed
here in amperes. This is the short circuit contribution to a fault at the output terminal of the VFD and the
contribution decreases as the fault location moves away from the VFD terminal.
Output Grounding
Check if the VFD offers grounding to the system
Earthing Type
Distributed Neutral
Rg
13-30
AC-DC Elements
VFD
13.2.4 Loading Page

You can specify VFD operating parameters from the Load page, including VFD output frequency, V/Hz
ratio, and input operating power factor. The operating load of the VFD is also displayed in this page after
load flow calculations. These parameters apply to normal operating VFD in load flow type calculations.
Operating Input Power Factor

The VFD operating input power factor is specified in this section. The option selected will determine the
VFD input reactive power which can be very different from the output reactive power. There are three
options: Rated PF, User-Defined PF, and Connected Load PF.
Rated PF
Select this option to use the rated input power factor defined in the Rating page as the input operating
power factor. When this option is selected, the rated input power factor is displayed in the section.
User-Defined PF
Select this option to specify an operating input power factor. When this option is selected, the Operating
Input PF field is enabled for you to enter a value.
Connected Load PF
Select this option to determine VFD input reactive power based on the output reactive power. When this
option is selected, the input reactive power will be equal to the output reactive power, while the input real
power will be equal to the output real power divided by the VFD rated efficiency.
13-31
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Operating Input PF
This field is enabled when the User-Defined option is selected. The range for the input PF is from -100%
to 100%.
VFD Loading (Output)

The VFD operating output frequency and voltage for the 10 loading categories are specified in this
section. It also displays the VFD connected loads under the specified operating frequency values.
V/Hz %
Specify operating V/Hz in percent for calculation of operating output voltage of the VFD. This value is
defined as 100 multiplied by the ratio of output voltage over output frequency, both in per unit based on
the rated output voltage or output frequency specified in the Rating page.
This value is used together with the operating frequency defined in each loading category to establish the
operating output voltage of VFD. In Load Flow studies, a VFD will maintain its output voltage at the
specified value.
% Frequency
Specify operating output frequency in percent based on VFD rated output frequency. This value will be
used to determine load power based on load frequency characteristics.
%V
This column displays VFD output operating voltage in percent based on rated output voltage, calculated
using the V/Hz and operating frequency specified for each category. This is the voltage that VFD
maintains in Load Flow studies.
%Load on VFD Base

This column displays VFD connected load in percent based on VFD output rated kVA.
%Load on Connected Load Base

This column displays VFD connected load in percent based on the rated kVA of the connected loads.
Load kW & kvar

These two columns display the real and reactive power of all energized connected loads powered by
VFD. The calculated load considers the operating frequency, but does not include any losses for any
branch elements involved in the sub-system powered by the VFD.
VFD Loading Calculation Method

The load kW and kvar displayed in the loading page of the VFD editor include the effect of the operating
frequency on the VFD. The motor load equipment cable loss is considered in this calculation, but losses
on other branches in the sub-network powered by the VFD are not included. If a load is directly
connected to a VFD, the equipment cable loss is calculated based on the rated VFD output voltage. If a
load is connected to a bus, the initial voltage entered in the Bus editor is used in the loss calculation.
Motor Load Calculation --Frequency Factor

As the frequency of voltage applied on a motor load is changed, the motor operating speed and output
power will change accordingly. The motor load at different operating frequency values is calculated
based on the motor load curve. In VFD load calculation, if a motor has a load torque curve specified in
13-32
AC-DC Elements
VFD
the editor, this load curve will be used. If no load torque curve is specified, the quadratic load torque
curve will be used as default.
The figure below shows a typical motor load curve. As shown in the figure, at the operating speed op, the
output torque is op and the output power will be op* op. When calculating the motor load at a different
operating frequency, the frequency factor is used to consider operating frequency. In determining the
frequency factor, the load torque curve is first adjusted so that at the synchronous speed the torque value
is equal to 100%. This adjustment is needed only if on the given curve the load torque value at
synchronous speed, syn is not equal to 100%. The curve is adjusted by multiplying every point on the
curve by syn/100. Then based on the adjusted curve the frequency factor for an operating frequency fop is
calculated as
Frequency Factor = fop,pu* op, pu
where both frequency and torque values are in per unit and op, pu is the load torque in per unit at fop,pu on
the load torque curve.
Once the frequency factor is calculated, it is multiplied to the load percent for a loading category to give
the actual operating load in percent under the specified operating frequency. The rest of the calculation
for motor input power is the same as under the rated frequency. Note that the rated operating frequency is
the system frequency defined in ETAP Project Standard. It can be seen that if the operating frequency is
the same as the rated frequency, the frequency factor is equal to 1.
Lump Load Calculation

The load under different operating frequency from a lump load is calculated based on the Model Type of
a lump load specified in the Nameplate page to the lump load. For the Conventional model type, the
constant Z portion is adjusted based on the operating frequency, while the constant kVA portion is not
adjusted. For Unbalanced motor type, the Constant Z portion is adjusted for the applied operating
frequency, while the Constant kVA and Constant I portions are not adjusted. For the Exponential,
Polynomial, and Comprehensive model types, the operating frequency is applied in the load model
directly to calculate the load power. Note that the rated operating frequency is the system frequency
defined in ETAP Project Standard.
13-33
AC-DC Elements
VFD
13.2.5 Starting Device Page

The Start Device page provides parameters used for VFD control during motor starting. You can select
VFD control type and specify the control curve. Note that in the current version of ETAP, a VFD can be
used to start only one motor and parameters entered in this page are related to motor started using the
VFD.
Type of VFD Start Device

This group allows you to specify VFD control type for motor starting.
Type
Select the control type for VFD during motor starting. Currently the list includes two types: None and
Frequency Control. When the Frequency Control type is selected, you can specify VFD output frequency
and voltage as function of time. During motor starting simulations, the VFD output will follow the curve
specified. If the option None is selected, in motor starting simulations, the VFD output will maintain at
the rated output frequency and voltage. When the option None is selected, all other fields will be hidden
in the page because they are not applicable anymore.
13-34
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Note that one special handling related to the option None is when a motor is connected to a bus through
a VFD, that is, there is no bus between the motor and VFD. This is the only connection allowed for VFD
in previous versions of ETAP and users may have entered starting device parameters in the motor editor
for motor acceleration. In order to provide the same simulation results as in the previous version of
ETAP, if a motor is connected to a bus through a VFD, in motor acceleration simulation, the starting
device specified in the motor editor will be considered. In other cases, the starting device in the motor
editor is considered in motor acceleration simulations only when the VFD bypass switch is closed.
V/Hz
The Volt per Hz ratio of the VFD for motor starting can be specified in one of the two options. When the
Fixed V/Hz option is selected, the ratio is entered in the first line of Control Scheme section and the same
value will be displayed in the rest of lines. If the Variable V/Hz option is selected, you can specify V/Hz
ratio for each line in the Control Scheme.
Current Limit
This field is for you to enter the current limit permitted by the starting motor. The value is in percent
based on the FLA of the starting motor. During motor starting simulation, the motor current will be
limited to this value. In case the limit will be violated if VFD would be operating based on the specified
control scheme, the VFD output voltage will be reduced to limit motor current. In other words, the VFD
frequency curve will be followed, but the V/Hz curve will be compromised to meet the current limit
requirement.
Control Scheme
This section allows you to specify the VFD control curve used for motor acceleration.
Active
Check (or uncheck) the field to indicate whether the corresponding line will (or will not) be used in
studies. The uncheck line will keep the data, but will not be included in the simulations.
Time
Enter the time in seconds for the control parameters to apply. Note that the first line always has a value
of zero. The last time is only used to have a cut-off point to show the control curve in the graph and there
will be no change in VFD output frequency and voltage beyond this time.
Frequency in Percent
Enter the VFD output frequency in percent based on the VFD rated output frequency.
V/Hz in Percent
Specify V/Hz in percent in this column. It is defined as 100% multiplied by the ratio of VFD per unit
output voltage over per unit output frequency. The per unit voltage and frequency values are based on
VFD rated output voltage and frequency respectively. Note that if Fixed V/Hz is selected, only the first
row is editable.
Control Type
Two options can be selected from the list: Fixed and Ramp. When the Fixed option is selected, the
frequency and V/Hz values will be constant from the time in the current control step to the time in the
next control step. When the Ramp option is selected, the frequency and V/Hz values will be linearly
changed from the value in the current control step to the value in the next control step.
13-35
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Add
Click the button to add a new line to the control scheme list.
Insert
Click the button to insert a new row above the currently highlighted row.
Delete
Click the button to delete the currently selected line.
Print
Click the button to print the waveform of the control scheme.
13.2.6 Control Page

This page is only used by Transient Stability analysis module, when VFD Frequency Change is selected
as an action in study case.
Control
Control block diagram of the VFD is shown below.
13-36
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Control Type
Represents type of control that the block diagram represents.
Kp
Represents proportional gain of VFDs PI controller in per unit.
Ki
Ki is integral gain of VFDs PI controller in per unit.
Tr
Tr is the speed sensor time constant in second.
Wref
Wref represents the reference speed.
dw High/dw Low
dw High and dw Low are high and low limits of the wind-up limiter on PI controller.
DC Line
R
Losses of VFD can be entered into the DC Link resistance of R. Unit of this parameter is Ohm.
13-37
AC-DC Elements
VFD

You can specify the harmonic source type of the VFD, and display the harmonic source waveform and
frequency spectrum of the UPS within the Harmonic page.
13-38
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Harmonic Library
Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the VFD harmonic source data including harmonic source type,
device type, and manufacture/model.
Type
This area displays the VFD harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
13-39
AC-DC Elements
VFD
Manufacturer
This area displays the VFD device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the VFD Manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This area displays the harmonic source waveform of the VFD.
Spectrum
This area displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the VFD.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the VFD.
VFD Parameters
Parameters
Pulse #
Shift Angle
Pulse
12
24
48
Shift Angle
30
15
7.5
For 6 pulse, the phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model.
Alpha
Beta
Xc%
Max Order
13-40
AC-DC Elements
VFD
A
can be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.
P
This is the Passive Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Passive Failure Rate is associated with
a Component Failure Mode that does not cause the operation of the primary protection zone around the
failed component, and therefore, does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components and
branches of the system. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.
This is the Mean Repair Rate in number of repairs per year is automatically calculated and based on
MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR).
13-41
AC-DC Elements
VFD
FOR
MTTF
MTTR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is the time in hours necessary to isolate a failure. It is the period of time starting from the moment a
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library
13-42
AC-DC Elements
VFD
13.2.9 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




13-43
AC-DC Elements
VFD
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
13-44
AC-DC Elements
VFD

13-45
AC-DC Elements
Charger
13.3 Charger
The properties associated with DC chargers of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The Charger Editor contains the following eight pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
SC Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.3.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the Charger ID, Connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, Operating Type, and Demand
Factor.
13-46
AC-DC Elements
Charger
Info
ID
ID to each charger. The default IDs consist of the word charger plus an integer, starting with the number
one and increasing as the number of chargers increases.
The default ID (Charger) for chargers can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
AC Bus and DC Bus

These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the charger. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a charger to a bus, select a bus from
Note: You can connect the terminals of the charger to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view where
it resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.
If a charger is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the charger to a
new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Charger1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the AC terminal bus and nominal V of the DC terminal bus next to the
bus ID for your convenience.
Condition
Service
13-47
AC-DC Elements
Charger
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the charger(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Continuous
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the charger is
determined for AC Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the charger engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the charger status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a charger
is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Connection
3-Phase
For this release of Power Station the 3-phase connection type cannot be selected by the user, but it used
by ETAP to model the device.
1-Phase
For this release of Power Station the 1-phase connection type cannot be selected by the user.
Tag #
Name
Description
13-48
AC-DC Elements
Charger
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types and you can change their name from
the Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this inverter from the pull-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from.
Priority names can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Type
Select operating type as charger or converter.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the charger is actually operating. Demand factors affect the
calculation of the charger load.
Load kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Load kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Where the PF & RF are rated power factor and reactive factor of the charger.
13-49
AC-DC Elements
Charger
13.3.2 Rating Page

In this page, you can specify the charger ratings and DC voltage limits, and select the Charger Operating
Mode.
AC Rating
kVA
Enter the kVA rating of the charger. Click on the kVA/MVA button to choose from kVA and MVA units
for entering and displaying kW/MW and kvar/Mvar data of the charger. When the value of the kVA is
modified, the rated DC power, rated DC full load current, rated AC full load current and the operating
load and losses for all Loading Categories of the charger are recalculated.
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the charger in kV. The rated AC full load current is calculated based on
this value.
FLA
Enter the rated AC full load current of the charger in amperes. When the rated AC full load current is
modified, the rated kVA, rated efficiency and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of
the charger are recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of rated AC full load current in such a way that the
rated efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
13-50
AC-DC Elements
Charger
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the charger in percent. The rated kVA, rated AC full load current, and the
operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of the charger are recalculated when the efficiency is
modified. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It defaults to 90%.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the charger in percent. When the power factor is modified, the rated kVA,
rated AC full load current, rated firing angle, and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories
of the charger are recalculated. Power factor cannot exceed 100%. It defaults to 85%.
Alpha
The rated firing angle of the charger is calculated based on the rated power factor is displayed here in
degrees.
DC Rating
kW
Enter the DC kW rating of the charger. When the rated kW is modified, the rated kVA, rated AC full load
current, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of the
charger are recalculated.
V
Enter the rated DC voltage of the charger in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated.
FLA
Enter the rated DC full load current of the charger in amperes. When the rated DC full load current is
modified, the rated DC kW, rated kVA, rated AC full load current, and the operating load and losses for
all Loading Categories of the charger are recalculated.
Imax
Enter the maximum DC output current of the charger in percentage of the rated DC full load current. The
charger becomes a constant current source when DC load current exceeds the Imax in DC load flow
study. ETAP uses Imax as the constant current source value. Imax defaults to 150%.
Operating Mode
Constant Voltage
When you select this option, a constant voltage is used as the voltage source value of the charger in DC
Load Flow Studies. The constant voltage Vdc is calculated as follows:
Select Float:
Select Equalize:
Vdc = V * %Vfloat/100
Vdc = V * %Veq/100
Fixed Firing Angle

When you select this radio button, the voltage source value of the charger in DC Load Flow Studies is
calculated using a fixed firing angle (Alpha) and the input bus voltage.
13-51
AC-DC Elements
Charger
DC Voltage
Vdc
Displays the voltage source value of the charger in volts.
Max Limit
The Max Limit Equalize voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be entered when
Equalize is selected. ETAP limits the entry of Vequalize in such a way that Vequalize cannot exceed the
Max. Limit threshold.
The Max Limit Float voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be entered when Float is
selected. ETAP limits the entry of Vfloat in such a way that Vfloat cannot exceed the Max. Limit
threshold.
Min Limit
When Equalize is selected, the Min. Limit Equalize voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts
can be entered. ETAP limits the entry of Vequalize in such a way that Vequalize cannot be less than the
Min. Limit threshold.
When Float is selected, the Min. Limit Float voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be
entered. ETAP limits the entry of Vfloat in such a way that Vfloat cannot be less than the Min. Limit
threshold.
13-52
AC-DC Elements
Charger
13.3.3 Loading Page

You can specify loading percentage of the charger for all Loading Categories, and view updated AC and
DC operating load from DC Load Flow Studies in this page.
Loading Category
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for the loading
of this charger, i.e., each charger can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading
Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting AC Load
Flow Studies. Select Loading Category from the Project menu to edit the Loading Category names.
Operating Load
AC
Updated AC operating load of the charger in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar is displayed here when Update
Operating Load is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
DC
Updated DC operating load of the charger in kW or MW is displayed here when Update Operating Load
is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
13-53
AC-DC Elements
Charger
13.3.4 SC Page
You can select the charger short-circuit model, specify AC system short-circuit capacity and impedance
of the charger, and the grounding data within the SC page.
SC Contribution to DC System
Fixed SC Contribution
When you select the Fixed SC Contribution option, the charger is treated as an ideal constant current
source (K * FLAdc/100) in DC Short-Circuit Studies.
Based on AC System Z
When you select the Based on AC System Z option, the charger is treated as a constant voltage source in
DC Short-Circuit Studies.
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent. ETAP uses this value to calculate the constant
current source value for DC Short-Circuit Studies. The multiplication factor defaults to 150%.
Isc (k*FLAdc)
The constant current source (short-circuit contribution) of the charger is calculated and displayed here in
amperes.
13-54
AC-DC Elements
Charger
AC System Z
MVAsc
When you enter the AC system short-circuit capacity of the charger in MVA, the system short-circuit
impedance, including %R and %X in 100MVA base, are calculated.
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance for calculation of the %R and %X.
%R
Enter the resistance R of the system short-circuit impedance in percent (100 MVA base). When R is
modified, the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance is recalculated.
%X
Enter the reactance X of the system short-circuit impedance in percent (100MVA base). When X is
modified, the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance and the system short-circuit capacity are
recalculated.
DC Grounding
Check if the charger offers grounding to the system
Earthing Type
Distributed Neutral
Rg
13-55
AC-DC Elements
Charger

You can specify the harmonic source type of the charger and view the harmonic source waveform and
frequency spectrum of the charger within the Harmonic page.
13-56
AC-DC Elements
Charger
Harmonic Library
Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the charger harmonic source data including harmonic source type,
13-57
AC-DC Elements
Charger
Type
This area displays the charger harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the charger device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the charger manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This displays the harmonic source waveform of the charger.
Spectrum
This displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the charger.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the charger.
Charger Parameters
Parameters
Pulse #
13-58
AC-DC Elements
Charger
Shift Angle
Pulse
12
24
48
Shift Angle
30
15
7.5
Note: For 6 pulse, the phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model.
Alpha
Xc%
Max Order
13-59
AC-DC Elements
Charger
A
MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
FOR
MTTF
13-60
AC-DC Elements
Charger
MTTR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the Load Sector name for the load. The Load Sector information is used to obtain interruption cost
information from the Reliability Cost library in order to calculate Expected Interruption Costs.
13-61
AC-DC Elements
Charger
13.3.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info




13-62
AC-DC Elements
Charger
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
13-63
AC-DC Elements
Charger
13.3.8 Comment Page

13-64
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
13.4 Inverter
The properties associated with inverters of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The DC Inverter Editor contains the following eight pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
Generation Page
Duty Cycle Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.4.1 Info Page

You can specify the ID, Connected Buses, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, and Status within the Info page.
13-65
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Info
ID
ID to each inverter. The default IDs consist of the word Inv plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of inverters increases.
The default ID (Inv) for inverters can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
DC Bus and AC Bus

These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the inverter. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an inverter to a bus, select a bus from
Note: You can connect the terminals of the inverter to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view where
it resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.
If an inverter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the inverter to
a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Inv1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
ETAP displays the nominal voltage of DC terminal buses and nominal kV of AC terminal bus next to the
bus ID for your convenience.
Condition
Service
13-66
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
State
Configuration
DC Load Status
Select the DC load status of the inverter for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options
for DC load status include:
Continuous
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the inverter is
determined for DC Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the inverter engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the inverter status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status of an
inverter is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.
AC Operating Mode
Specify the AC operation mode of the inverter for the selected configuration status from the list box. The
available options include: Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control and PF Control. In order to be able to
flexibly model inverter operating conditions for all possible applications, ETAP provides AC operation
modes similar to a generator. For example, when an inverter is powering an isolated sub-system, it can be
set in the Swing or Voltage Control mode. For power grid connected inverters used in solar farms, they
can be set in the Mvar or PF Control mode.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing inverter will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the
voltage magnitude and angle of the generator terminals will remain at the specified operating values.
For motor acceleration studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine initial conditions. For
the initial load flow, a swing inverter is represented as an infinite source. At time 0+, the inverter is
modeled as a voltage source behind its equivalent internal impedance.
13-67
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Voltage Control
An inverter can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) source, which means that the inverter will
adjust its var output to control the voltage. Therefore, the inverters terminal voltage magnitude,
operating real power (kW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and
Min Q) must be specified for voltage control inverters. During load flow studies, if the calculated
inverter kvar falls outside the inverter kvar capability limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the value of the kvar
will be set equal to the limit and the Operation Mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
Using this option you can specify the amount of fixed kW and kvar generation in the Generation page of
the Inverter Editor.
PF Control
In this mode, the kW output is fixed to the kW setting. The generators kW and %PF settings must be
entered on the Generation page for the generation category selected when modeled in this mode.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types and you can change their name from
the Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this inverter from the pull-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from.
Priority names can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the inverter is actually operating. Demand factor affects the
13-68
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Output Connection
Phase
The phase type of an inverter can be either a 3-phase or 1-Phase. When the 1-Phase type is selected, it is
defaulted as Phase A.
13-69
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
13.4.2 Rating Page

You can specify the inverter ratings, short-circuit current to a fault in the AC system, and AC grounding
parameter in this page.
DC Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the inverter. Click on the kW/MW button to choose between kW and MW units
for entering rated DC power and displaying data for the inverter. When kW rating is modified, the rated
AC kVA, rated DC full load current, rated AC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all
Loading Categories of the inverter are recalculated.
FLA
Enter the rated DC full load current of the inverter in amperes. When the rated DC full load current is
modified, the rated DC power, rated efficiency, and the operating load and losses for all Loading
Categories of the inverter are recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of rated DC full load current in such a
way that the rated efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
V
Enter the rated DC voltage of the inverter in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated from this
value.
13-70
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Vmax
Enter the maximum DC voltage of the inverter in percent of the rated voltage. It defaults to 110%.
Vmin
Enter the minimum DC voltage of the inverter in percent of the rated voltage. It defaults to 90%.
Eff
%Load
There are four %load fields to define inverter efficiency. The first field is fixed at 100% for the rated
efficiency of the inverter. The second field can be a specified value larger than 100% and the other two
fields must have values less than 100%. Note that the inverter load level is defined as its output AC kW
divided by the rated kW, which is calculated based on rated AC kVA and power factor.
%Eff
Enter the efficiency value in percent for the corresponding load level. These efficiency values affect
inverter power calculations in the Loading and Generation pages. When the efficiency for 100% load is
modified, the rated DC power, and rated DC full load current are recalculated. Efficiency cannot exceed
100% or be below 10%. The default value is 90%.
Imax
Enter the maximum current of the inverter in percentage of the rated full load current. Imax defaults to
150%.
AC Rating
kVA
Enter the rated AC kVA of the inverter. When the rated AC kVA is modified, the rated AC full load
current, rated DC power, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all Loading
Categories of the inverter are recalculated.
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the inverter in volts. The rated AC full load current is calculated.
FLA
Enter the rated AC full load current of the inverter in amperes. When the rated AC full load current is
modified, the rated DC power, rated AC kVA, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and
losses for all Loading Categories of the inverter are recalculated.
%PF
Enter the rated power factor of the inverter in percent. The rated DC power, rated DC full load current,
and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of the inverter are recalculated when the
power factor is modified. ETAP limits the entry of power factor in such a way that it cannot exceed Max.
PF or be below Min. PF. It defaults to 85%.
Min. PF
Enter the minimum power factor in percent. It defaults to 80%. This value is used to calculate Qmax and
Qmin when the inverter AC operation mode is Voltage Control.
13-71
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Max. PF
Enter the maximum power factor in percent. It defaults to 100%. This value is used to calculate Qmax
and Qmin when the inverter AC operation mode is Voltage Control.
SC Contribution to AC System
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent. ETAP uses this value to calculate the short-circuit
current contribution from the inverter for AC Short-Circuit Studies. The multiplication factor defaults to
150%.
Isc
The short-circuit current contribution from the inverter (Isc = K * FLAac/100) is calculated and displayed
here in amperes.
AC Grounding
Check if the transformer offers grounding to the system
Earthing Type
Distributed Neutral
Rg
13-72
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Loading Page
You can specify the loading percent of the inverter for all Loading Categories, and view updated DC and
AC operating load from Load Flow Studies in this page.
Loading Category
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for the loading
of this inverter, i.e., each inverter can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading
Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %loading
column.
Note that the inverter loading is defined as its output AC kW divided by the rated kW, which is calculated
based on rated AC kVA and power factor. The kW loss is calculated based on the specified loading and
the efficiency values from the Nameplate page.
Note: You can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting AC Load Flow Studies.
Operating Load
AC
This area displays the updated AC voltage, current, and operating load of the inverter in kW/kvar or
MW/Mvar when the Update Operating Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
DC
This area displays the updated DC operating load of the inverter in kW or MW when Update Operating
Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
13-73
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
13.4.3 Generation Page

The Generation page allows you to specify operating parameters for inverter AC operation mode used in
AC system calculations.
AC Operation Mode Swing
AC Operation Mode Voltage Control
This group is used to assign the different operating parameters to each of the ten generation categories for
this inverter. Each inverter can be set to have a different operating generation level for each generation
category. The list has several columns, including %V, Angle, kWac, kvar, %PF, Qmax, Qmin, kWdc,
and kWloss. Depending on the AC operation mode selected from the Info page, these fields may be
editable for user to enter operating parameters, Display only presenting calculated values, or Not
Applicable (greyed-out), as summarized in the table below.
Mode
%V
Angle
kWac
kvar
%PF
Qmax
Qmin
kWdc
kWloss
Swing
Edit
Edit
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Voltage Control
Edit
N/A
Edit
N/A
N/A
Mvar Control
N/A
N/A
Edit
Edit
PF Control
N/A
N/A
Edit
Display
Display Display Display Display
Display Display Display Display Display

Edit
Display Display Display Display
Edit The field is editable for the mode.

Display The field displays calculated values for the mode.
N/A The fields are not applicable for the mode and is blanked out.
as load flow, motor starting, transient stability and others.
13-74
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Gen. Cat.
Displays the names of the generation categories. To modify these names, from the Project Menu, point at
Settings and then select Generation Categories. Modify the names in the Generation Category dialog box.
Enter the voltage magnitude setting of the regulated bus at the inverter terminal as a percentage of the
inverter rated kV. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for swing and voltage
control modes. This value is used as an initial operating voltage for Mvar controlled power grids.

Enter the voltage angle setting for the swing bus at the inverter terminal in degrees. This value is used as
a reference angle for inverters in swing mode. This value is used as an initial operating voltage angle for
Mvar control generators.
MW
Enter the operating megawatt generation (real power supply) of the inverter. This field is provided for
voltage controlled and Mvar controlled inverter types. This value will be held fixed for load flow
solutions.
Mvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is
provided for Mvar controlled inverter types only. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
%PF
Power factor setting of the inverter. This column is editable for PF Controlled inverter type only. This
value is fixed for load flow solutions.
Min and Max Q (Minimum and Maximum kvar)

These entries display the minimum and maximum limits for reactive power output of inverters. These
limits are required for voltage controlled inverter types only, but they are also displayed for the Mvar or
PF Control types. The Qmax and Qmin values are calculated based on inverter rated kVA, Maximum PF,
Minimum PF, and the specified operating kWac. If the value of the calculated operating kvar falls
outside this range, the value is fixed at the limit and the inverter type is changed to Mvar control.
kWdc
Displays the calculated inverter DC input power based on the output real power and efficiency.
kWloss
Displays the calculated inverter loss, which is the difference between input DC power and output AC real
power.
Operating Load
AC
This area displays the updated AC voltage, current, and operating load of the inverter in kW/kvar or
MW/Mvar when the Update Operating Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
DC
This area displays the updated DC operating load of the inverter in kW or MW when Update Operating
Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
13-75
AC-DC Elements
Inverter

Within the Duty Cycle page, specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle.
ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The data in
this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
Duty Cycle Category

Select a Duty Cycle Category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each load can
have up to five Duty Cycle Categories with independent load profiles. You can name the Duty Cycle
Categories from the Project menu bar.
13-76
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Load Profile
types in the list box.
Enter a load name, current in amperes, start time in seconds, and duration in seconds for this segment of
load. After the data of a row is entered, this segment of load curve will be drawn on the Non-Random or
Random window.
13-77
AC-DC Elements
Inverter

You can specify the harmonic source type of the inverter, and view the harmonic source waveform and
frequency spectrum of the inverter within the Harmonic page.
Harmonic Library
Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the inverter harmonic source data including harmonic source type,
13-78
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Type
This area displays the inverter harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the inverter device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the inverter Manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This area displays the harmonic source waveform of the inverter.
Spectrum
This area displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the inverter.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the inverter.
Inverter Parameters
Parameters
Pulse #
13-79
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
Shift Angle
Pulse
12
24
48
Shift Angle
30
15
7.5
Note: The phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model for 6
pulseBeta
Xc%
Max Order
13-80
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
A
P
This is the Passive Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Passive Failure Rate is associated
with a Component Failure Mode that does not cause the operation of the primary protection zone around
the failed component, and therefore, does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components and
branches of the system. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.
MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
13-81
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
FOR
MTTF
MTTR
The Mean Time To Repair in hours is the expected time necessary for a crew to repair a failed component
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library
13-82
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
13.4.7 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




13-83
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
13-84
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
13.4.8 Comment Page

13-85
AC-DC Elements
Inverter
13.4.9 Inverter Embedded in PV Array

A PV Array element has an embedded Inverter element and its editor can be accessed by clicking on the
Inverter Editor button from the Inverter page. You can also navigate to a PV Array inverter from the
regular Inverter editor. As an embedded element, the Loading and Duty Cycle pages are hidden and the
Generation page is slightly different from a regular inverter.
Generation Page
The difference in the Generation page between a regular inverter and one from a PV array are kWac,
kWmpp fields.
kWac
For an inverter embedded in a PV Array, the kWac filed is display only. The value in this field is
calculated based on the kWmpp value and losses in the inverter and DC cable. This kWmpp is the DC
output power at the maximum power point from PV panels for the same generation category. When the
inverter is set as Swing mode, the actual output AC real power is calculated from the connected load, but
the kWac is used for alert in the load flow calculation when the operating value larger than it.
kWmpp
This is the DC output power at the maximum power point from PV panels for the same generation
category. The values should be the same as the MPP kW column in the PV Array page of the PV Array
editor.
kW Loss
This calculated loss includes inverter loss as well as the DC cable from the PV Array to the inverter.
13-86
Chapter 14
DC Elements
This chapter addresses editors for DC elements. Except for the elements ID, bus connections, and status,
all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties. Each element available on
the One-Line Diagram toolbar has a customized editor.
Bus
Branches
DC Cable
DC Impedance
DC Converter
Sources & Loads

Battery
DC Motor
DC Static Load
DC Lumped Load
DC Composite CSD
Composites
DC Composite Motor
DC Composite Network
Protective Devices
DC Circuit Breaker
DC Fuse
DC Switch, Single-Throw
DC
Switch,
DoubleThrow
14-1
DC Elements
DC Cable
14.1 DC Bus
The properties associated with DC buses (nodes) of the electrical system can be entered in this Data
Editor.
The DC Bus Editor helps to model different types of buses in an electrical system. The data entered in
the Bus Editor is used when running all types of System Studies. DC Branches, batteries, converters,
motors, static loads, and DC sides of chargers, UPS, and inverters can be graphically connected to any
desired DC bus. ETAP displays all loads that are directly connected to the bus from the Bus Editor.
Note: Protective devices are ignored when ETAP determines the connections to buses.
A bus is defined as a point (node) where one or more branches are connected. A branch can be a cable,
impedance, converter, etc. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus is the bus nominal
voltage, which can be entered in the Info page of the DC Bus Editor.
Buses have two types of graphical presentation, i.e., Bus or Node. You can change a bus to a node or a
node to a bus at any time. This option gives you the flexibility to display the annotations of buses and
nodes differently.
The DC Bus Editor includes four pages of properties:
Info Page
Loading Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14-2
DC Elements
DC Cable
14.1.1 Info Page

You can specify the Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Nominal kV, Initial/Operating Voltage (Magnitude &
Angle), Diversity Factors (Maximum & Minimum), Tag #, and Equipment Name and Description within
the Info page.
Info
ID
ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID dcBus plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.
The default ID (dcBus) for the DC bus can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Nominal V
Enter the nominal voltage of the bus in DC volts (V) in this field. This is a required input entry, which is
used by ETAP to convert the final bus voltages to the percent values for graphical display and output
reports, i.e., bus Nominal V is used as the base voltage for the reported percent values.
Note: The nominal voltage and actual base voltage of a bus can be different values. ETAP calculates
base voltages of buses internally.
14-3
DC Elements
DC Cable
Condition
Service
State
Initial Voltage
%V
Enter the initial bus voltage in percent of the bus nominal voltage. This value is used as the initial voltage
for Load Flow Studies including Short-Circuit and Battery Sizing Studies. For unregulated buses which
do not have any charger or UPS connected to them, the operating voltage is calculated during Load Flow
Analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value. Regulated buses that have a charger
or UPS connected to them do not use this value. Voltage defaults to 100%.
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value
reflects the study result, i.e., it is updated with the operating voltage of the bus after you run a DC Load
Flow Study.
Operating Voltage
After you run Load Flow Studies, the operating voltage of the bus is displayed here. This value will not
change until you run a new Load Flow Study, i.e., the operating voltage of the bus for the last load flow
run are displayed.

Minimum & Maximum
The minimum and maximum diversity factors (loading limits) of each individual bus may be specified as
a percentage of the bus loading. These values are used when the Minimum or Maximum Loading option
is selected from the Study Case Editor for Load Flow Studies. When the Minimum or Maximum Loading
option is used for a study, all loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied by their diversity
factors.
14-4
DC Elements
DC Cable
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Enter equipment name in this field, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description in this field, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
14.1.2 Loading Page

The Loading page is used to display the total motor and static loads directly connected to a bus for each
Loading Category. The displayed kW indicate the algebraic sum of the operating load of all constant
kVA and constant Z loads, either directly connected to the bus, or through composite networks or
composite motors. These values are obtained from the actual loads connected to the bus.
14-5
DC Elements
DC Cable
Total Bus Loading

Load Category
The Load Categories correspond to the individual Load Categories of the bus.
Const kW
Total constant kW load (in kW) connected directly to the bus. For example, motor loads.
Const R
Total constant resistance (impedance) load (in kW) connected directly to the bus. For example, static
loads.
14.1.3 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
14-6
DC Elements
DC Cable




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-7
DC Elements
DC Cable
14.1.4 Comment Page

14-8
DC Elements
DC Cable
14.2 DC Cable
The DC Cable Editor contains the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Impedance Page
Physical Page
Configuration
Protection Page
Routing Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.2.1 Info Page

You can specify the Cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Length, Size, number of
conductors per phase, and library link within the Info page.
14-9
DC Elements
DC Cable
Info
ID
ID to each cable. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of cables increases.
The default ID (Cable) for cables can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a cable branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of
a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated
to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the cable to DC buses that reside in the same view where the
element resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
where Branch X is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses next to the From and To bus IDs for your convenience.
Condition
Service
14-10
DC Elements
DC Cable
State
Connection
In this section, the connection type is displayed. It has been added for future use. Currently it displays
DC for all DC Cables.
Library
To select cables from the Cable Library, click on the Library button and the Cable Library Quick Pick
will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library type and size at the same time.
Note: After the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to the Cable Editor, the
cable size can be changed directly from the Cable Editor, and the cable parameters are refreshed from the
library. Therefore, the most important action is to select the correct Cable type from the Cable Library
Quick Pick. When data are transferred from the Cable Library, ETAP automatically converts the cable
reactance to inductance.
Equipment
Tag #
14-11
DC Elements
DC Cable
Name
Enter the equipment name in this field, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter the equipment description in this field, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
Units
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the list. The units of length available are: feet,
Note: Every cable in the system can have a different unit.
Tolerance
Enter the percent tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to
# Per Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e. if 2-2/C cables or 4-1/C cables are used (4 conductors
total), then the number of conductors per phase is equal to two (2).
14-12
DC Elements
DC Cable
Dimensions
The physical properties of cables entered in this page are only used for calculating engineering data
needed for Cable Ampacity Derating Studies (U/G Raceway Systems) only.
Rdc
Enter the DC resistance of the cable in micro ohm at 25 degrees C in this field.
Cable OD
Enter the overall cable outside diameter including the sheath, armor, and/or jacket in inches or
centimeters in this field.
Conductor OD
Enter the physical outside diameter of the conductor in inches or centimeters in this field.
Insulator t
Enter the thickness of the conductor insulation in mil or mm in this field
Sheath t
Enter the thickness of cable sheath or armor in mil or mm in this field. This value becomes zero if the
Sheath/Armor option is set to None.
14-13
DC Elements
DC Cable
Jacket t
Enter the thickness of outer cable jacket in mil or mm in this field.
Weight
Enter the weight of the cable in lbs/100ft in this field.
Max. Tension
Enter the maximum tension that the cable can withstand without damage in lbs/kcmil in this field.
Max. SW
Enter the maximum Side Wall pressure in lbs/ft in this field.
Conductor Construction
Conductor construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for calculating the
ac to dc ratio parameters. Several available choices of conductor construction are:
ConRnd
ConRnd-Coated
ConRnd-Treated
CmpRnd-Treated
CmpSgm
CmpSgm-Coated
CmpSgm-Treated
CmpSct-Treated
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Compact RoundNone
Compact Segmental
Compact Segmental
Compact Segmental
Compact Sector None
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Treated
None Treated
Treated
Treated
None Treated
None Treated
Treated
Treated
Coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to a
drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.
Shielding
Choose shielded or not shielded.
Sheath/Shield End Connection

Choose either the open or grounded option. Grounded option implies that the sheath and shield are
grounded at more than one location.
Sheath/Armor Type
None
Lead Sheath
Aluminum Sheath
St Armor/30dg/15w
St Armor/30dg/20w
St Armor/30dg/25w
St Armor/45dg/15w
St Armor/45dg/20w
St Armor/45dg/25w
St Armor/45dg/30w
St Armor/45dg/40w
St Armor/45dg/50w
St Armor/45dg/60w
St Armor/45dg/70w
St Armor/45dg/80w
St Armor/45dg/90w
St Armor/45dg/100w
St Armor/45dg/9999w
Copper Armor
Steel Armor
Aluminum Armor
Cu Concentric Wire
Al Concentric Wire
Copper Sheath
Type
St Armor/30dg/15w
Definition
14-14
DC Elements
DC Cable
St Armor/45dg/50w
Jacket Type
Jacket Types available:
None
Paper
PE
XLPE
EPR
SBR
Rubber
Rubber1
Rubber2
NeoPrene
PVC
FEP
FEPB
MI
MTW
PFA
PFAH
RH
RHH
RHW
SA
SIS
TA
TBS
TFE
THHN
THHW
THW
THWN
TW
UF
USE
V
XHHW
Impedance (per Conductor)

R
Enter the cable resistance at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor in this
field. This is for each cable, not the total resistance. ETAP corrects the cable resistance for different
studies based on the specified temperature limits, using the maximum temperature for DC Load Flow
Studies and minimum temperature for DC Short-Circuit Studies.
14-15
DC Elements
DC Cable
L
Enter the cable inductances, in henries or henries per unit length, per conductor in this field. This is for
each cable, not the total inductance. When cable data is recalled (substituted) from cable libraries, ETAP
automatically converts reactance to inductance based on library frequency. Once this value is entered
here, ETAP will not make any adjustment to this value.
Units
Z per
When you select Z per option, the cable impedance units are: R in ohms per unit length, and L in henries
per unit length. A unit length should also be specified, including a unit from the drop-down list. Units
available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Z
When you select Z option, the cable impedance units are: R in ohms and L in henries.
Cable Temperature
Base
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistance is entered.
Minimum & Maximum Temperature

Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting the cable resistance
(R) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating temperature; the second limit is the
maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most conservative temperature limit for each study
type. For example:
Temperature Limit
Min.
Load Flow
Short-Circuit
Max.
X
X
temperature. ETAP uses the following equations for temperature corrections:
R = R ( 234.5 + Tc )/( 234.5 + Tb ) Copper Conductors
R = R ( 228.1 + Tc )/( 228.1 + Tb ) Aluminum Conductors
where:
R = Resistance at base temperature Tb
R = Resistance at operating temperature Tc
Tb = Base temperature in degrees Celsius
Tc = Operating temperature in degrees Celsius

The Configuration page is utilized to set up cable configuration that details cable components which
include Protective conductors, Armor, and also auxiliary (outside of cable) components which include
Protective, and Structure conductors.
14-16
DC Elements
DC Cable
Note: The conductors in this page are not considered in DC Load Flow or DC Short Circuit based
modules and are only utilized in STAR module, Shock Protection, and protective conductor sizing
features for this release. For more information about shock protection calculation and protective
conductor sizing, refer to chapter 45. For more information about plotting the conductors in STAR, refer
to the cable protection page and chapter 17 in STAR.
The fields in configuration page are grouped inside and outside a table. The fields inside the table are
located below the following columns:
Cable
Conductor
No. of Conductors
Size
Type
R
L
Insulation
The checkboxes and buttons outside the table are located below the following columns:
Auxiliary Cable Bunched check box
Library button
Cable
The Protective conductors can be part of the main cable that is the same size as the Phase conductor or
smaller.
Separate auxiliary conductors (Protective) that are external to the main cable or structures can also be
selected.
The structure is only available when the cable is connected to a TT or IT earthing type system.
Main
The Main cable set contains the Phase conductor, Protective conductor, and Armor.
The Protective row grays out if one of the following conditions occurs:
1. A cable is not selected from the library
2. The cable selected from the library does not have extra conductor for Protective and there is no Ground
conductor available.
14-17
DC Elements
DC Cable
Aux
Auxiliary section allows user to specify Protective conductors that are external to the main cable. If the
cable is connected to a TT or IT earthing type system, user can also specify the structure impedance.
Conductor
Phase
The values of the Phase conductor are associated with the information shown in the header at the top of
the editor. The conductors parameters can be loaded from the library by selecting the library button in the
info page or their impedance can be manually entered in the impedance page.
Main Protective
This reflects the Protective conductor of the main cable. If the conductor is the same size as the Phase
conductor, then it will share all its characteristics; otherwise, its R and L values are loaded from the R
(G/N) and X (G/N) from the impedance page of the cable library. Multiple Protective conductors can be
selected under the No. of Cond. Column; for more information, refer to the No. of cond. section.
Main Armor
This reflects the armor of the main cable which can be utilized as a protective conductor path for Shock
Protection calculation.
Auxiliary (Aux) Protective

This reflects the external Protective conductor. The protective conductor parameters (Size, Type, R, and
L) can be entered by either loading the data using the library button or manually entering them. Multiple
Protective conductors can be selected under the No. of Cond. Column; for more information, refer to
the No. of cond. section.
Auxiliary Structure
This can reflect the installation (e.g. Cable Tray) structure which can be used as an earthing conductor.
This field is only visible when TT or IT earthing type is set by the source connected to the cable.
No. of Conductors
Phase
The number of conductors for the phase conductor is calculated based on:
phase configuration (i.e. DC which consists of 2 conductors)
Number of conductors per cable displayed in the cable editor header(e.g. 1/C, 3/C)
Number of conductors per phase entered in the info page (e.g. 4 conductors/phase)
The calculation assumes that if:
The number of conductors in the cable (shown in cable editor header) is equal to or greater (e.g.
5/C) than the number of phase conductors, then there will be excess conductors (i.e. 3 conductors)
that can be utilized as Protective conductor inside of the main cable.
The number of conductors per cable (e.g. 1/C) is less than the required number of phase
conductors; then there will not be enough excess conductors that can be utilized for phase as well
as Protective conductors inside of the main cable. The calculation will assume the existence of
multiple cables in order to fulfill the phase configuration (two cables will be assumed); however,
the Protective conductor row will be grayed out due to lack of excess conductors.
14-18
DC Elements
DC Cable
Main Protective
The available number of conductors for the main Protective conductor will be the excess conductors after
the distribution of phase conductors. Refer to the Phase section for more information.
If the cable library provides dedicated Ground conductors that are of different size from the phase
conductors, the main Protective conductor row can utilize the conductors that are loaded from the library.
Aux Protective
Select up to 10 auxiliary Protective conductors.
Size
Phase
The size reflects the size chosen from the library in the info page
Main Protective
The main protective size is either selectable or display only. It is selectable if there is a dedicated Ground
conductor with a different size loaded from the library. It becomes display only when there are no
dedicated Ground conductors that are of a different size that can be loaded from the library.
Aux Protective
The auxiliary protective conductor can have its size chosen manually from the size dropdown box, or
loaded from the library using the library button available at the bottom of the page. If the parameters are
loaded from the library, then the phase conductors of the library will be utilized as the Protective
conductors.
Note: If the R value is loaded from the library, then the Rdc value will be utilized.
Type
Phase
Main Protective
Aux Protective
The auxiliary protective conductor can have its type chosen manually from the type dropdown list, or
loaded from the library using the library button available at the bottom of the page.
14-19
DC Elements
DC Cable
If user manually chooses a different type when the insulation displays as Library, then the R&L value
will be reset to 0.
R, L
Phase
The R and L fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page and
displayed in the impedance page.
Main Protective
The R and L fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page. These
values can be edited if the main protective size is different from the size of the phase conductor or can be
edited from the impedance page if the size is the same as the Phase conductor.
Armor
The Armor R and L are entered manually in ohms or ohms per unit length.
Aux Protective
The auxiliary Protective conductor can have the R and L values entered manually, or loaded from the
library using the library button available at the bottom of the page.
Structure
The Structure R and L can be entered manually in ohms or ohms per unit length. This field is only
displayed when the selected source earthing type is a TT or IT type.
Insulation
Phase
This is insulation type, also shown in the header, which is loaded from library.
Main Protective
This is insulation type, also shown in the header, which is loaded from library.
Aux Protective
The choices shown in the insulation dropdown list are utilized for protective conductor thermal sizing.
The Library insulation will be displayed if the cable parameters are loaded from the library.
Impedance Units
The impedance unit reflects the impedance unit selected in the cable impedance page.
Size Units
The Size units reflect the impedance unit selected in the cable editor Info page which is also displayed in
the cable editor header.
No. of Conductors/Phase
This reflects how many conductors are assigned per phase and is selected from the cable editor Info page
14-20
DC Elements
DC Cable
Aux Cable Bunched

If selected, grounding/PE thermal sizing calculation in the Sizing - GND/PE page considers this option.
Library
If the Auxiliary Protective rows are selected, then the Library button will be activated and the quick
pick window ready to be launched. The data selected from the quick pick will only apply to the auxiliary
row selected.
This button will not be activated for the main Protective, Armor, or Structure rows.
14.2.5 Loading Page

The Loading page provides information regarding cable loading (amp) and other parameters, which are
used in cable ampacity derating calculations (Underground Raceway System).
Operating Load / Current

The operating load is specified in amps. This value is used for steady-state temperature calculations or as
the initial value of the cable load profile for transient temperature calculations.
Growth Factor (GF)

The Projection Multiplying Factor (MF) must be specified in percent. This value is used to indicate
future load projection (load reduction or growth). You can select the option to use this Projection
Multiplying Factor for cable temperature calculations from the Cable Ampacity Derating Study Case.
14-21
DC Elements
DC Cable
UnderGround Raceway (UGS)

Load Factor
The load factor is the ratio of average load to peak load in percent. Use the following equation to
calculate the load factor:
Load Factor
= 100 x ( kWi x Ti )/( kWp x Tt ) %

= 100 x E/( kWi x Tt ) %
where
i
kWi
Ti
kWp
Tt
Ton
Toff
E
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Interval of time when the load is non-zero

Load at interval i
Number of hours of interval i
Peak load
Ton + Toff
Energy (kWh) consumed by load over the interval
If the cable carries load (current) at every interval, then the equation can be simplified to the percentage
of time that the cable will be carrying the current:
Load Factor
= 100 x Ton/Tt %
= 100 % ( if it carries the load for 24 hours per day )
Sheath/Armor
Current
The sheath/armor current can be specified as a percent of cable load current. This value indicates the
amount of neutral or ground current that is carried by sheath or armor.
Transient Load Profile

The load profile provides up to 20 time and current entry fields for specifying the loading pattern of the
cable as a function of time.
#
Time
Current
1
0.0
230
2
3.5
560
3
7.3
400
4
0.0
0.0
(all data from this point are ignored
since time = 0.0 )
In this example, the cable loading is changed from the steady-state (initial value) to 230 amps at time
zero, to 560 amps at time 3.5 hours and finally to 400 amps after 7.3 hours. The steady-state or initial
value can either be 230 amps (value entered at the first time slot), or it can be set equal to the cable
14-22
DC Elements
DC Cable
operating load. You can set the option for the initial/steady-state value from the Cable Derating Study
Case Editor.
Time Units
Select the time units for the load profile from the drop-down list.
Optimization Options
Fixed Current
Check this box to have the current of this cable fixed for ampacity optimization/calculation in U/G
Raceway Systems, i.e., ampacity calculations for both Uniform Ampacity & Uniform Temperature
conditions.
Fixed Size
Check this box to keep the size of this cable fixed for cable sizing calculations in U/G Raceway System.
14.2.6 Ampacity Page
14-23
DC Elements
DC Cable
Installation
Type
You can choose from five available raceway installation types in the drop-down list:
U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
U/G Duct
This is the underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta
Ambient temperature in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil for underground
installations. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. Base ampacity
for UG systems are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
ampacity is obtained from the library. This value is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
The directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt
Ta
Ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil, where the cable is
installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is
usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
14-24
DC Elements
DC Cable
Tc
Grouping
adjustment factor. The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on a 7.5 inch center-to-center
A/G Trays
Above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries is used for cables installed in
trays.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
Tc
base ampacity is obtained from the library. This value is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Tray Specification
NEC
If chosen, NEC Methods of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. NEC does not
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fire proofing. In general, cable sizes of 2/0
AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner, with a maximum of two cables
high.
Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a uniform depth up to the maximum
of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here corresponds to a maximum fill condition
and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal depths.
ICEA
If chosen, an ICEA P-54-440 Method of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. The
actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries will be taken into account.
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
14-25
DC Elements
DC Cable
of 1/4 of the overall effective diameter of the grouped circuit.
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
with a maximum of two cables high. Base ampacity of randomly filled trays is based on installations at a
uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here
Height
Depth
Width
% fill
Height of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters

Fire Protection
specifications selected from the ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire protection
are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
14-26
DC Elements
DC Cable
Fire Stop
trays routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. This is temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from
the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
NEC w/o Grouping Effect (No Grouping Effect)
checkbox is not selected, the grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered.
NEC w/50% Load Diversity and NEC w/o Load Diversity

14-27
DC Elements
DC Cable
Grouping
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 24
25 through 42
43 and above

80 %
70 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 20
21 through 30
31 through 40
41 through 60

80 %
70 %
50 %
45 %
40 %
35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection methods. Each of
the three libraries can be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
conduit. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable ampacities based on the fire protection
material specifications selected from the ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
constructed with an expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be insufficient to
cause an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
14-28
DC Elements
DC Cable
Air Drop
Cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits.
considered.
No cable grouping for airdrop cables is
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. This is the temperature of the air surrounding the area where the
tray is to be installed in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees
Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices. Each of
the three libraries can be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
airdrop cables. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable based on the fire protection
specifications selected from the ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire protection
are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
App MF
The Multiplication Factor (MF) is determined by the application type selected from the drop-down list.
You can modify the values of Application MF by selecting Project, Settings, and Cable Ampacity MF
from the menu bar. Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity (MF times operating
or full load current).
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for easy comparison of base, derated, and required (I x MF) ampacities.
The method used here is based on the concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity
to calculate the derated ampacity.
Id = F Ib
14-29
DC Elements
DC Cable
Base Ampacity (Ib)


Allowable
I x MF
and the application multiplication factor (App. MF) for the specified application type. This value is

This is adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual
composed of several components, as listed below:
Fta
Ftc
Fth
Fg
Fc
Fm
Fce
Fm
Ffc
Ffs
Ffw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

14-30
DC Elements
DC Cable


14-31
DC Elements
DC Cable
Initial Temperature
Base Temp
Operating Temp
Final Temperature
The final temperature is the maximum short-circuit temperature the insulation is capable of handling.
This value is dependent on the standard. Therefore, by selecting this value, the standard used to plot the
ICEA P-32-382
IEC 60949 / 60364-5-54
BS 7430/7454/7671
GOST R 50571.10-96

Thermal Curve
Plot I2t

14-32
DC Elements
DC Cable

This group allows specification of Line and Ground short-circuit currents when the terminal bus of the
cable is faulted. The short-circuit currents can be updated automatically by running Run DC Short
Circuit in the DC Short Circuit mode.
Calculated
When running Run DC Short Circuit in the DC Short Circuit mode, ETAP will only update the Line
fault kA.
User Defined
You may enter the fault currents for the different fault types by selecting the User-Defined option. Once
this option is selected, the different fault currents in this group become editable.
Line fault in kA
Ground fault kA
Line
If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP will update this field automatically for all cables when Run DC Short
Circuit in the DC Short Circuit mode is run.
14-33
DC Elements
DC Cable
Ground
The Ground short-circuit current can be entered in the user-defined Ground field in the Short-Circuit
Current section. Automatic updating from short-circuit calculation will be available in a future release of
ETAP.

Fault kA fields does not update when Run DC Short Circuit in the DC Short Circuit mode is run.
Protective Device
Overload
BS 3630
ID/Type
In and I2
Overcurrent
This Overcurrent section is utilized for electric shock and touch voltage calculations, thermal protective
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", BS 7671 for Overcurrent protection.
If User-Defined is selected, user can enter the Line and Ground Overcurrent disconnection time which are
utilized in the Sizing - Phase and Sizing GND/PE pages respectively.
selection.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical Overcurrent protective devices from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes
14-34
DC Elements
DC Cable
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available Overcurrent protection devices
(Fuse, Circuit Breaker, and Recloser) for the cable will be automatically filled into this dropdown list. All
the protective devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a
Line Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section will be selected to populate the Line current field.
Line Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the line current in the Short-Circuit Current section.
Ground Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section will populate the ground/Earth current field.
Ground Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the current in the Short-Circuit Current section.
BS 7671
the curve points given in Appendix 3 of the standard.
Rating (A)
fields.
GFCI/RCD
as STAR.
ID.
selection is only available when BS 7671 Installation Standard is selected in the Ampacity page.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. If Device IR is selected, the available GFCI/RCD
protection devices for the cable will be automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the GFCI/RCD
devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a GFCI/RCD
device the collection is extended towards the source until the first GFCI/RCD protective device is found.
If BS 7671 GFCI/RCD is selected, General Non-delay and Delay 'S' types are available.
Trip (mA)
14-35
DC Elements
DC Cable
Trip (sec)
14-36
DC Elements
DC Cable
14.2.8 Sizing - Phase Page
Requirements
This area allows you to select one or both requirements for determining the recommended size of cable.
Ampacity
If ampacity is selected as one of the requirements, sizing will be based on the cable installation and
ambient conditions specified in the Ampacity page.
Vd
If you select Vd, ETAP will size the cable based on the percent voltage drop value you enter here.
Voltage drop is in percent of the nominal kV of the bus connected to the cable. If the nominal voltages of
the From bus and To bus are different, the nominal V of the From bus is selected. The following table
shows the methods used for calculating the voltage drop for different types of load currents flowing
through the cable:
14-37
DC Elements
DC Cable
Load Type
Motor
Static Load
Bus
Circuit Breaker
Fuse
Calculation Method
Constant Power
Constant Impedance
Constant Current
Constant Current
Constant Current
Short-Circuit
Sizing will be based on the cable short-circuit capacity to withstand the short-circuit current magnitude
specified below for the time defined.
Result
Using the selected cable type from the library, ETAP recommends an optimal cable size along with the
number of conductors per phase that meets the specified requirements. Additionally, ETAP provides one
cable size smaller than the optimal size for your selection.
Note: The required ampacity and percent voltage drop are displayed for your reference.
Cable Loading
Operating Current
The operating load current specified for this cable in the Loading page will be used if this option is
selected.
Full Load Amps of Element

The continuous current rating (rated current or FLA) of the selected element will be used for sizing
requirements. For motor equipment cables, the motor ID is displayed here and the FLA of the motor is
used.
User-Defined
Use this option to enter any value for the cable current.
14-38
DC Elements
DC Cable
Options
Use Available Cable Sizes Only
Use only cable sizes that are flagged as Available in the Cable Library for the specified cable type (cable
library header).
Use All Cable Sizes From Library

This option allows you to use all cable sizes that exist in the Cable Library for the specified cable type
(cable library header).
Use Load Projection Multiplying Factor

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Projection Multiplying Factor, as
specified for this cable in the Loading page.
Use Application Multiplying Factor (Equipment Cables)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Application Multiplying Factor
(AMF), as specified for the motor or static load in the Cable/Vd page of the equipment.
Use Motor Service Factor (Motor Equipment Cables)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the motor Service Factor (SF), as
specified for the motor in the Nameplate page.
Short-Circuit
kA
Enter the maximum short-circuit current in kA.
Time (S)
Enter the clearing time at the kA you are sizing this cable.
Tc
This field displays the conductor operating temperature for this cable.
Note: This parameter can be adjusted from the Ampacity page, Tc operating.
Min. Size
Displays the minimum calculated size of the cable calculates based on the short-circuit requirement.

This page displays output results of the Protective Earthing Conductor Thermal Sizing and Electric Shock
Protection Calculations.
For more information, refer to Chapter 11 AC Elements Cable Sizing Gnd/PE Page.
14.2.10 Routing Page

The Routing page provides lists of routed raceways and available raceways. The cable ID and raceway
type are shown for both the routed and available raceways.
14-39
DC Elements
DC Cable
This is a list of raceways through which this cable is routed. When you add a raceway to this list (by
using the Insert or Add buttons), the cable is placed in a container attached to the raceway without being
placed in any specific conduit or location.
When you bring up the Graphical Editor for the underground systems, you will see the cables in a
container of cables assigned to this raceway, but are not assigned to a specific conduit. This container is
attached to the raceway and will disappear when it is empty. You will need to graphically move the cable
from the unassigned cable container to the desired location.
14-40
DC Elements
DC Cable
This is a list of all existing available raceways in this project, i.e., raceways that this cable can be routed
through.
Note: Since you cannot route a cable twice through a raceway, this list does not include the raceways
listed under Routed Raceways.
Insert: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list, i.e., insert the
selected raceway into the list of routed raceways.
Add: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list, i.e., add the selected
raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Unroute: Unroutes this cable from the selected raceway.
14-41
DC Elements
DC Cable
User-Defined Info




14-42
DC Elements
DC Cable
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-43
DC Elements
DC Cable

14-44
DC Elements
DC Impedance
14.3 DC Impedance
The DC Impedance Editor has three pages of information:
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.3.1 Info Page

You can specify the Cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name and Description,
and Impedance value including resistance and inductance within the Info page.
Info
ID
ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID dcZ plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of impedances increases.
The default ID (dcZ) for the DC impedance can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
14-45
DC Elements
DC Impedance
Condition
Service
State
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an impedance branch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of impedance, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID.
To connect or reconnect impedance to a bus, select a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram
will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the impedance to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of
the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If impedance is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
impedance to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown here where DCImp1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
14-46
DC Elements
DC Impedance
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Impedance
Enter the impedance R & L in ohms and henries.
14-47
DC Elements
DC Impedance
14.3.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




14-48
DC Elements
DC Impedance
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element in this field, using up
to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element in this field, using up to 50
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-49
DC Elements
DC Impedance
14.3.3 Comment Page
14-50
DC Elements
DC Converter
14.4 DC Converter
The properties associated with DC converters of the electrical system can be entered in this editor. The
DC converter symbols (ANSI & IEC) are shaped to distinguish the DC input side and the DC output side.
The DC Converter Editor contains four pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.4.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC converter ID, Input and Output bus IDs, In/Out of Service, Tag #, Name,
Description, Data Type, and Priority within the Info page.
14-51
DC Elements
DC Converter
Info
ID
ID to each DC converter. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of DC converters increases.
The default ID (dcConv) for DC converters can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Input Bus and Output Bus

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC converter are designated as Input and Output buses. If the
input or output terminal of a DC converter is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for
bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC converter to a bus, select the bus from the drop-down list. The
one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the converter to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a DC converter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC
converter to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where dcConv1 is reconnected from dcBus10 to dcBus4.
Condition
Service
14-52
DC Elements
DC Converter
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
14-53
DC Elements
DC Converter
14.4.2 Rating Page
Rating
kW/MW
Enter the rated output power of the DC converter in kW or MW in this field. Choose from the two
options by clicking on the kW/MW button.
%Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the DC converter in percent in this field. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%.
The efficiency is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change
the efficiency, the converter input full load current is recalculated.
Input
V
Enter the rated input voltage of the DC converter in DC volts in this field.
14-54
DC Elements
DC Converter
FLA
The rated input full load current of the DC converter is calculated and displayed in this field in amperes.
When you modify the input FLA, the converter efficiency is recalculated.
Output
V
Enter the rated output voltage of the DC converter in DC volts in this field.
FLA
The rated output full load current of the DC converter is calculated and displayed in this field in amperes.
When you modify FLA, the rated kW of the DC converter is changed.
Imax
Enter the maximum output current of the DC converter as a percentage of the output full load current.
The DC converter will become constant current source when the output load current exceeds the Imax in
DC Load Flow Studies. ETAP will use Imax as the maximum constant current output value. Imax
defaults to 150%. This value is also used to determine the DC short-circuit contribution of the converter
(Imax = k).
Operating Parameters
Vout
Enter the regulated voltage setting of the DC converter output terminal as a percentage of the rated output
voltage of the converter. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value in DC Load
Flow Studies. The DC converter will become idle if the output bus voltage is higher than the converter
regulated voltage (Vregulated times output rated voltage) in DC Load Flow Studies. Vout defaults to
100%.
SC Contribution
K
This field displays the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the output FLA. ETAP uses this
value to calculate short-circuit current contribution from the converter in DC Short-Circuit Studies. The
multiplication factor defaults to 150%.
Isc (K*FLA out)

The short-circuit current contribution from the DC converter is calculated and displayed in this field in
amperes.
14-55
DC Elements
DC Converter
14.4.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




14-56
DC Elements
DC Converter
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-57
DC Elements
DC Converter
14.4.4 Comment Page
14-58
DC Elements
Battery
14.5 Battery
The properties associated with batteries of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The Battery Editor contains five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.5.1 Info Page

You can specify the Battery ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Tag #, Name,
Description, Data Type, Priority, and number of Strings within the Info page.
14-59
DC Elements
Battery
Header
After selecting a battery from the library (See Rating page Battery Editor), this header information will
be updated with the following information:
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Open-Circuit Voltage per Cell
Rp
This is the resistance per positive plate in ohms. Resistance of a battery cell equals to Rp divided by the
number of positive plates.
Time Const.
Battery time constant in Seconds
Model
Battery Model
Hour
Battery rated discharge time in hours.
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
This is the Rated/Base Temperature in degrees Celsius.
Type
Type of curves specified in the library for this battery
Plates Capacity 1MinA %K SCAmp

Displays: # of Plates, Capacity, 1 Minute SC Amps, percent K, Short-Circuit Amps. You can drop down
and select a different battery size under the same manufacturer and model.
Info
ID
ID to each battery. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number
one and increasing as the number of batteries increases. The default ID (Battery) for batteries can be
changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting DC bus for the battery. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a battery to a bus, select a bus from the
drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
14-60
DC Elements
Battery
Note: You can connect the terminal of the battery to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
If a battery is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the battery to a
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below,
where Battery1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Condition
Service
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
14-61
DC Elements
Battery
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Quantity
# of Strings
Enter the number of the battery strings in this field. The number of strings defaults to 1.
14-62
DC Elements
Battery
14.5.2 Rating Page

Within the Rating page, you can view battery specification (from the Battery Library) and specify the
number of battery cells and battery temperature. This page displays the calculated battery rated voltage in
V and total capacity in AH (Ampere Hour).
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp
Resistance per positive plate in ohms
Time Const.
14-63
DC Elements
Battery
Model
Battery Model
Hour
Battery rated discharge time in hours.
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
This is the Rated/Base Temperature in degrees Celsius.
Type

Rating
# of Cell
Enter the number of battery cells.
Rated Voc
The battery rated voltage (Open Circuit Voltage) is calculated and displayed here in volts.
Total Capacity
The battery total capacity is calculated and displayed here in AH (Ampere Hour).
Library
Click on this button to associate a battery library with this project.
Temp
Max and Min
Two battery temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered to adjust the voltage source value in
Short-Circuit Studies and correction factor in Battery Sizing Studies. The first limit is the minimum
operating temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type. For example:
Short-Circuit
Battery Sizing
Temperature Limit
Min
Max
X
X
14-64
DC Elements
Battery
14.5.3 SC Page
You can select the battery short-circuit model and open-circuit voltage source value, specify battery
external impedance and grounding data, and view battery data from the Battery Library within the SC
page.
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp
Time Const.
Model
Battery Model
14-65
DC Elements
Battery
Hour
Discharge Time in Hours
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
Rated Temperature
Type

Short-Circuit Model
Voc Behind Battery Z
When you select the Voc Behind Battery Z option, the battery is treated as a constant voltage source
behind the battery resistance in DC Short-Circuit Studies.
Constant Current
When you select the Constant Current option, the battery is treated as an ideal current source in DC
Short-Circuit Studies. A constant current source means that the battery short-circuit contribution is
constant regardless of the distance of the fault to the battery.
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent. ETAP uses this value to calculate the constant
current source value in DC Short-Circuit Studies. This multiplication factor is updated from the battery
library.
Isc
The constant current short-circuit value of the battery is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
# of PP
Number of positive plates for the selected battery is displayed on this field.
1-min-A/pp
1 Minutes Amps per positive plate is displayed on this field.
1-mim-A/String
1 Minute Amps per String is displayed on this field.
14-66
DC Elements
Battery
External & Inter-Rack & Inter-Tier R

R
Enter the total battery cable and connection resistance in ohms per string in this field. If Rp includes the
connection resistance per cell along with the resistance per positive plate, then user does not need to enter
a separate value for the external resistance.
L
Enter the total battery cable and connection inductance in micro henries per string in this field.
Voc per Cell

Rated Voc (Library)
When you select the Rated V model, the battery rated voltage per cell is used as battery open-circuit
voltage value per cell.
Calculated Value
When you select the Calculated Value model, battery open-circuit voltage per cell is calculated based on
the following formula:
Voc = (0.84 + SG) + (Tmax 25) * 0.0003
Where SG is the specific gravity of the battery and Tmax is the maximum operating temperature
specified in the Rating page.
Voc
The calculated battery open-circuit voltage per cell is displayed in this field in volts.
User Defined Value

Select the User Defined Value option to specify a value for Voc. When this option is selected, an edit
box will appear at right for entering Voc deviation from rated VPC (Voltage per Cell) in percent of VPC.
The rated VPC is from battery library and displayed in the header of the Battery Editor. Once a value is
entered in the Voc Deviation box, the adjusted Voc will be automatically calculated and displayed in the
Voc field.
The Voc deviation value can be either a positive of a negative value. The maximum deviation is defined
in an Options (Preferences) entry under Battery Discharge/Sizing, Max Deviation for Voc Per Cell. The
default value is 10 percent.
Grounding
Grounded
Click on the Grounded checkbox to specify that the battery is to be grounded.
Rg
Enter the battery grounding resistance in ohms in this field. This value represents the total grounding
resistance of this battery system including the cables and connections.
14-67
DC Elements
Battery
14.5.4 Remarks Page
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp
Time Const.
Model
Battery Model
14-68
DC Elements
Battery
Hour
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
Rated Temperature
Type

User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
14-69
DC Elements
Battery
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-70
DC Elements
Battery
14.5.5 Comment Page
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp
14-71
DC Elements
Battery
Time Const.
Battery time constant in Seconds (zero if not specified)
Model
Battery Model
Hour
Battery life in Hours (zero if not specified)
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
Rated Temperature
Type

14-72
DC Elements
DC Motor
14.6 DC Motor
The properties associated with DC motors of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
The DC Motor Editor contains six pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.6.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC Motor ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag,
Name, Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, Quantity of DC Motors, and Demand
Factor within the Info page.
14-73
DC Elements
DC Motor
Info
ID
ID to each motor. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of motors increases.
The default ID (dcMach) for DC motors can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC motor. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC motor to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can connect the terminal of the motor to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a DC motor is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC
motor to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where DCMach1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Condition
Service
14-74
DC Elements
DC Motor
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the DC motor(s) for the selected configuration status from the drop-down
list. Options for operating status include:
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the motor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the motor status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a motor is
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
14-75
DC Elements
DC Motor
Priority
Lock / Unlock
14-76
DC Elements
DC Motor
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of DC motors for this motor in this field. This allows you to group identical
motors together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC motor is actually operating. Demand factor affects the
14-77
DC Elements
DC Motor
14.6.2 Rating Page

You can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings) and view motor loading and losses for all Loading
Categories in this page.
Rating
HP/kW
Enter the motor output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options
by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equation for the DC motor full load current:
Full-Load Amp
= HP * 0.7457 *1000/ ( V* Eff )
Rating in HP
= kW *1000/ ( V* Eff )
Rating in kW
where the Eff is at full load condition (100% loading).
V
Enter the rated voltage of the motor in volts in this field.
RPM
Enter the motor speed in RPM (Revolutions Per Minute) in this field.
14-78
DC Elements
DC Motor
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the motor. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The efficiency is the rated efficiency
and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the efficiency, the motor full load
current and the operating load for all Loading Categories are recalculated.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the motor in amperes. This is the current the motor would pull from
the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated V, and
rated efficiency.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this motor,
i.e., each motor can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading Category. To edit
the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Note: You can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting DC Load Flow Studies.
14-79
DC Elements
DC Motor
14.6.3 SC Page
You can specify the multiplication factor, impedance and time constant associated with Short-Circuit
Studies within the SC page.
SC Parameters
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the motor FLA. ETAP uses this value to
calculate the short-circuit current of the DC motor for a terminal bus fault. When you change the
multiplication factor, the resistance, inductance, and short-circuit contribution are recalculated. The
multiplication factor defaults to 1000%.
Isc
The short-circuit current (Isc(K*FLA) contribution of the DC motor for a terminal bus fault is calculated
and displayed here in amperes.
Ra
Enter the resistance of the DC motor short-circuit impedance in ohms. When you change the resistance
value, the inductance, multiplication factor and short-circuit contribution is recalculated.
14-80
DC Elements
DC Motor
La
Enter the inductance of the DC motor short-circuit impedance in henries.
inductance value, the time constant is recalculated.
When you change the
Time Constant
Enter the time constant of the DC motor. When you change the time constant value, the inductance is
recalculated.

You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle. ETAP displays the load
profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The data in this page are used in
Battery Sizing Studies within the Duty Cycle page.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify the load profile to each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
14-81
DC Elements
DC Motor
Duty Cycle Category

Select a Duty Cycle Category from the drop-down list and view the load profile for it in this page. Each
load can have up to five Duty Cycle Categories with independent load profiles. You can name the Duty
Cycle Categories from the Project menu bar.
Load Profile
types in the list. Enter a load name, current in amperes, start time in seconds, and duration in seconds for
this segment of load. After the data of a row is entered, this segment of load curve will be drawn on the
Non-Random or Random window.
or click the Delete key. Click on either the <-Print or Print-> button, and the displayed load profile
curve (random and non-random loads) for the selected duty cycle will be printed out.
14-82
DC Elements
DC Motor
14.6.5 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info

equipment reference number or any other number in this field, using up to five digits.

and enter any extra data for this element in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

and enter any extra data for this element in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

enter any extra data for this element in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
14-83
DC Elements
DC Motor
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element in this field, up to 50
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-84
DC Elements
DC Motor
14.6.6 Comment Page
14-85
DC Elements
DC Static Load
14.7 DC Static Load

The properties associated with DC static loads of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The DC Static Load Editor contains five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.7.1 Info Page

You can specify the ID, Connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, Quantity, and Demand Factors for DC Static
Loads within the Info page.
14-86
DC Elements
DC Static Load
Info
ID
ID to each DC static load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of DC static loads increases.
The default ID (dcLoad) for DC Static Loads can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC static load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC static load to a bus, select a bus
from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminal of the load to DC buses that reside in the same view where it resides
or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of the
composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a DC static load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC
static load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where DCStLoad1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Condition
Service
14-87
DC Elements
DC Static Load
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the DC static load(s) for the selected configuration status from the dropdown list. Options for operating status include:
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the DC static
load is determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the DC static load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the DC static load status under the specific configuration, i.e.,
you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status
of a DC static load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
14-88
DC Elements
DC Static Load
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of DC static loads in this field. This allows you to group identical DC static
loads together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC static load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the
14-89
DC Elements
DC Static Load
14.7.2 Rating Page

You can specify the DC static load ratings, view loading, and losses for all Loading Categories in this
page.
Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the static load in this field. Click on the kW/MW button to choose either kW or
MW units for entering and displaying data. ETAP uses the following equation for the DC static load full
load current:
Full Load Amp
= kW*1000/V
= MW *1000000/V
Rating in kW
Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC static load in volts in this field.
FLA
The DC static load full load current is calculated and displayed here. When the full load current is
changed, the rated power of the DC static load is recalculated.
14-90
DC Elements
DC Static Load
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this DC
static load, i.e., each DC static load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading
Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
loading column.
Note: You can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting studies.
Select Loading Category from the Project menu to edit the Loading Category names.
14-91
DC Elements
DC Static Load

You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle. ETAP displays the load
profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing within the Duty Cycle page. The data
in this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify a load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle
CategoriesBased on Amp/%Loading
14-92
DC Elements
DC Static Load
Duty Cycle Category

Load Profile
Non-Random or Random window. To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking the number of
the row, then click on the Del button or click the Delete key.
14-93
DC Elements
DC Static Load
14.7.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info



14-94
DC Elements
DC Static Load

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-95
DC Elements
DC Static Load
14.7.5 Comment Page
14-96
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
14.8 DC Lumped Load

The properties associated with DC lumped loads of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The DC Lumped Load Editor contains six pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.8.1 Info Page

You can specify the ID, Connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder), Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, as well as the Quantity and Demand Factors
of DC Lumped Loads within the Info page.
14-97
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters in this field. ETAP automatically
assigns a unique ID to each DC lumped load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC lumped loads increases.
The default ID (dcLump) for DC lumped loads can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar
or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC lumped load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus,
a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC lumped load to a bus; select a
bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminal of the lump load to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
If a DC lumped load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
DC lumped load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where DCLump1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
ETAP displays the nominal V of the bus next to the bus ID for your convenience.
Condition
Service
14-98
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the DC lumped load(s) for the selected configuration status from the dropdown list. Options for operating status include:
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the DC lumped
load is determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the DC lumped load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the DC lumped load status under the specific configuration, i.e.,
you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a
DC lumped load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
14-99
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC lumped load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the
14.8.2 Rating Page

You can specify the DC lumped load ratings and select percentages of motor loads and static loads in the
Rating page. You can also display the kW loading (motor and static) for all Loading Categories.
14-100
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
Rating
kW
Enter the total kW loading (motor and static) for the lumped load. Click on the kW/MW button to choose
from either kW or MW units for entering and displaying data. ETAP uses the following equation for the
DC lumped load full load current:
Full-Load Amp
= kW*1,000/V
= MW *1,000,000/V
Rating in kW
Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC lumped load in volts.
FLA
The DC lumped load full load current is calculated and displayed here. When the full load current is
changed, the rated power of the DC lumped load is recalculated.
Motor/Static Load
Select the percent motor and static loading of the lumped load by shifting the slider position.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this DC
lumped load, i.e., each DC lumped load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
Loading Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the
% loading column.
14-101
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
14.8.3 SC Page
Within the SC page, specify the short-circuit multiplication factor, time constant and impedance,
including resistance and inductance of the DC lumped load. You can view the calculated short-circuit
current of the DC lumped load.
Note: The data in this page are only related to the motor load of the DC lumped load.
SC Parameters
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the FLA of the motor part of the lumped load.
ETAP uses this value to calculate the short-circuit current of the lumped load for a terminal bus fault.
When you change the multiplication factor, the resistance, inductance and the short-circuit current
contribution are recalculated. The multiplication factor defaults to 1000%.
Rd
Enter the resistance of the lumped load short-circuit impedance in ohms. When you change the resistance
value, the inductance, multiplication factor, and short-circuit current is recalculated.
14-102
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
Time Constant
Enter the time constant of the lumped load in seconds in this field. When you change the time constant
value, the inductance is recalculated.
Ld
Enter the inductance of the lumped load short-circuit impedance in henries in this field. When you
change the inductance value, the time constant is recalculated.
Isc
The short-circuit current contribution of the motor part of the DC lumped load for a terminal bus fault is
calculated and displayed here in amperes. If a lumped load is 100% static load, there will be no shortcircuit contribution.
14-103
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load

You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle within the Duty Cycle
page. ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The
data in this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify a load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
Duty Cycle Category

Load Profile
14-104
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
14-105
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
14.8.5 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info



14-106
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
14-107
DC Elements
DC Lumped Load
14.8.6 Comment Page
14-108
DC Elements
Composite CSD
14.9 DC Composite CSD

The properties associated with DC Composite CSD loads of the electrical distribution system can be
The DC Composite CSD Editor contains five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Duty Cycle Page

Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.9.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC Composite CSD Load ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, and Load Priority within the Info page.
14-109
DC Elements
Composite CSD
Info
ID
ID to each Composite CSD load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with
the number one and increasing as the number of Composite CSD loads increases. The default ID
(dcElem) for Composite CSDs can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the Composite CSD load. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a Composite CSD load to a bus,
select a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminal of the Composite CSD to the DC buses that reside in the same view
where it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a Composite CSD load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of
the Composite CSD load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to
the new bus, as shown below where DCED1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Condition
Service
14-110
DC Elements
Composite CSD
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
14-111
DC Elements
Composite CSD
14.9.2 Rating Page

You can specify the Composite CSD load ratings on the Ratings page. The Composite CSD load loading
for all Loading Categories is displayed.
Rating
kW
Enter the rating (total of all elements within this Composite CSD) in kW in this field. Click on the
kW/MW button to choose either kW or MW units for entering and displaying data. ETAP uses the
following equation for the full load current of the Composite CSD load:
Full Load Amp
= kW*1,000/V
Rating in kW
= MW *1,000,000/V
Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the Composite CSD load in volts in this field.
FLA
The full load current of the Composite CSD load is calculated and displayed in this field in amperes.
When the full load current is changed, the rated power of the Composite CSD load is recalculated.
14-112
DC Elements
Composite CSD
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this
Composite CSD load, i.e., each Composite CSD load can be set to have a different operating loading level
for each Loading Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields
under the % loading column.
14-113
DC Elements
Composite CSD

You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle within the Duty Cycle
page. ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The
data in this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile to each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
Duty Cycle Category

Load Profile
14-114
DC Elements
Composite CSD
14-115
DC Elements
Composite CSD
14.9.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info



14-116
DC Elements
Composite CSD

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-117
DC Elements
Composite CSD
14.9.5 Comment Page
14-118
DC Elements
DC Composite Motor
14.10 DC Composite Motor

Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements that you can
include inside a DC composite motor include:
DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Lumped Loads
Composite CSD Loads
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Single-Throw Switches
DC Fuses
DC Composite Motors
To open the DC Composite Motor Editor, open the composite motor by double-clicking on it. Doubleclick again on the blank background of the window.
14-119
DC Elements
DC Composite Motor
14-120
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
14.11 DC Circuit Breaker

The properties associated with DC circuit breakers of the electrical power system can be entered in this
editor. DC circuit breaker protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.
The DC Circuit Breaker Editor contains eight pages of information and the header information for each
page:
Header Information
Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.11.1 Header
The header displays the selected breaker model and trip device information on each page of the DC
Circuit Breaker Editor.
Breaker
Manufacturer
Breaker Max.
Volts
Breaker
Interrupting data
Lock Icon
Breaker Model
and Pole
Breaker
available sizes
Trip device
Manufacturer
Trip device
Model
Trip device
ID
Manufacturer
Manufacturer name of the breaker selected from the library.
V max.
Displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected breaker in Volts.
Interrupting data
Displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the breaker.
Lock
The lock indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified).
Model
Model name of the breaker selected from the library.
14-121
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Pole
This field displays the breaker pole selected from the library.
Size
Select from a drop-down list and display the sizes in amperes that are available for the selected breaker.
Trip device manufacturer

This field displays the manufacturer name of the selected trip device.
Trip device model

This field displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Trip device ID
Displays the trip ID selected from the library.
14-122
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
14.11.2 Info Page

You can specify the DC circuit breaker ID, connected bus/load, In/Out of Service, Ratings, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, and Configuration Status in the Info page.
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID in this field with a maximum of 25 characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increases as the number of CBs increases.
The default ID (dcCB) for DC circuit breakers can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If
a terminal of a DC breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC breaker to a bus, select a bus from
the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on
OK.
14-123
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Note: You can connect the terminals of the circuit breaker to other dc elements that reside in the same
view where it resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to elements that reside in the
Dumpster.
If a DC breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
DC breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where DCCB1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Condition
Service
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
status is shown above the status of the DC circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under
14-124
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In
the following example, the status of a DC circuit breaker is shown as closed under Normal configuration
and open under Emergency configuration.
Real Time Status

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real time module only.
Scanned Status
This field displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
14-125
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Lock / Unlock
14-126
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
14.11.3 Rating Page
Standard
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the breaker library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the
Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. DC circuit breakers include
Molded Case, Power, and Insulated case breakers.
14-127
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the breaker library Quick Pick the LVCB type is set based on the

The DC circuit breaker data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library
button.
Exclude Trip Device

Check this box to exclude the trip device selection from DCCB Library Quick Pick. The breaker library
Quick Pick will be launched without the trip device information.
Note: The Exclude trip device checkbox is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to
unchecked once the Rating page is refreshed.

To select a circuit breaker from the DC Circuit Breaker Library click on the Library button and the
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker window will appear. From the Library Quick Pick, select a DC
circuit breaker by highlighting the Manufacturer name and breaker Model-Max V-Pole, which is a unique
record. Select the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the size and the
desired trip device for that size. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library
and transfer it to the editor.
Note: Upon selection of library data, the breaker manufacturer, model and trip device details are
displayed on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library the
header text will be displayed in a dark blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been
modified.
14-128
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
The information available in the breaker library Quick Pick is described below.
Standard
Note: The Standard selection in the breaker library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed)
will be defaulted to the selection made for the standard on the Rating page. The Standard selection can be
changed on the Quick Pick if desired.
AC/DC
This field displays that the breaker is DC. This option is grayed out and non-editable.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the breaker type. The DC breaker types include Molded Case,
Power and Insulated Case breakers.
Note: The Type selection in the breaker library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed) will
be defaulted to the selection made for the breaker type on the Rating page. The breaker type selection can
be changed on the Quick Pick if desired.
14-129
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This field displays a list of all DC breaker manufacturers included in the library for the selected breaker
standard and type. Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This field displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example,
Westinghouse is the reference manufacturer for Cutler Hammer.
Link
This field displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Lock
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays list of all models for the selected standard, breaker type and breaker
manufacturer. The models are displayed in the form of Model Max V Pole, which forms a unique
record name in the breaker library. Select the Model Max V Pole by highlighting it.
Lock
Short-Circuit data
ANSI Short-Circuit data
When the ANSI Standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts and the
short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA for all breaker types. The short-circuit
parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and shortcircuit data by highlighting it.
14-130
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
IEC Short-Circuit data

When the IEC Standard is selected the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts, ultimate
breaking capacity in kA (Icu) and service breaking capacity in kA (Ics) for all breaker types. The shortcircuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and
short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Fused/UnFused
This field displays whether the breaker is fused or unfused.
Size
Size
This displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Pole record for the breaker. To
select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight it.
Lock
Model Info
Additional information about the selected breaker is displayed using the parameters described below.
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, for selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Application
This field displays the application for the selected breaker model.
Trip Device
The trip device(s) assigned to the selected breaker, can be chosen by highlighting the trip device type,
manufacturer name, model name and trip ID. The trip device types for DC breaker include Thermal
Magnetic, Solid state, Motor Circuit Protector and Electro-Mechanical.
14-131
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Trip Device Type

Select a type from drop-down list and display the trip device type for the selected breaker.

Highlight a row to select the trip device manufacturer from the list, for the selected trip device type.
Trip Device Model

Highlight a row to select the trip device model from the list, for the selected trip device manufacturer.
ID
Highlight a row to select the trip device ID from the list, for the selected trip device model.
Note: The ID is labeled as TM ID for Thermal Magnetic trip, Sensor ID for Solid-state trip, MCP ID for
Motor Circuit Protector trip, and EM ID for Electro-Mechanical trip.
When the Exclude Trip Device box is checked on the Rating page the breaker library Quick Pick
appears as shown below.
14-132
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker

Click on ANSI Standard and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for DC circuit breaker in
accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards. When a breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, all
parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the
exception of Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a breaker from library Quick Pick will turn the
header text to a dark blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select a rating from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.
14-133
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Continuous Amps
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC circuit breaker in
amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is selected
from library Quick Pick.
Rated V
Select a rating from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker in
Volts. When a breaker is selected, the Rated V value will be set equal to the applied voltage selected
from library Quick Pick.
Fused
You can select fused or unfused for all breaker types by clicking on the provided selection box.
Note: When a DC breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the status as
selected from the Quick Pick.
Max. V
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker
in Volts. When a breaker is selected, the Max.V value will be set equal to the maximum voltage for the
selected breaker.
Interrupting kA
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the DC circuit breaker in
kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for selected
applied voltage from library Quick Pick.

Click on the IEC Standard button and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for DC circuit breaker
in accordance with the IEC Standards. When a breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters
shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of
Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a breaker from library Quick Pick will turn the header to blue
color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select a rating from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
14-134
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.
Rated Amps
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the rated ampere rating of the DC circuit breaker in amperes.
The Rated Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is selected from library Quick
Pick.
Rated V
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker in kV.
When a breaker is selected, the Rated V value will be set equal to the applied voltage selected from
library Quick Pick.
Max. V
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker in kV.
When a breaker is selected, the Max.V value will be set equal to the maximum voltage for the selected
breaker.
Ultimate Breaking
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of short-circuit breaking
capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under specified test conditions.
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the value of the Ultimate breaking capacity for the DC circuit
breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the Ultimate breaking kA value will be set equal to the Icu (breaking
capacity) kA value for selected applied voltage from library Quick Pick.
Service Breaking
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of service short-circuit
breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under specified test
conditions.
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the value of the Service breaking capacity for the DC
circuit breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the Service breaking kA value will be set equal to the Ics (service
capacity) kA value for selected applied voltage from library Quick Pick.
Fused
For all breaker types, select fused or unfused by clicking on the provided selection box.
Note: The Fused checkbox is displayed only when no breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick.
14-135
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker

The trip devices for DC circuit breaker include Thermal Magnetic, Solid-state, Motor Circuit Protector
and Electro-mechanical types. The Trip device page allows selection and setting of these trip units.
CB & Trip Device selection logic

The selection of the circuit breaker on the Rating page can affect the data displayed on the Trip Device
page. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 DC Circuit Breaker & Trip Device

When a DC circuit breaker is selected along with its associated trip unit from the library Quick Pick on
Rating page of the Circuit Breaker Editor, the Trip Device page displays the selected trip unit
(Manufacturer, Model, ID).
Case 2 Circuit Breaker only (Exclude Trip device)

When a circuit breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, with Exclude
Trip Device box checked, the Trip Device page will not include the trip device information. No Trip
device selected message would appear in the Trip Device page status line.
14-136
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker

This section describes the settings available for Thermal Magnetic trip unit on the Trip Device page.
14-137
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Trip device types. In this case, Thermal
Magnetic trip type is selected.
TM Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Thermal Magnetic trip.
TM Model
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
TM ID
Select from drop-down list and display TM ID for the selected Thermal magnetic trip model. The actual
value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected TM ID next to the TM ID field.
Thermal
Fixed Thermal
be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the thermal section displays FIXED in the thermal trip field.
Adjustable Thermal
can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the thermal section displays a drop-down list of the
available adjustable thermal trip in percent of trip device ampere rating. Also, the actual value of the trip
in amperes is displayed next to the adjustable trip drop-down list.
14-138
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable or continuous
adjustable. The settings that are available to you are described below.
Fixed Magnetic
maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed, the magnetic section displays
FIXED in the magnetic trip field.

values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the magnetic section displays a drop-down list of
the available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable drop-down list.
Continuous Adjustable Magnetic

adjustable, the magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in multiples
trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed is
displayed next to the Trip field. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.
14-139
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker

This section describes the settings available for the Low Voltage Solid State trip unit (LVSST) on the
Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Trip device types. In this case, the Solid State
SST Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Solid State trip.
SST Model
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
Sensor ID
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Sensor ID for the selected Solid State trip
model. Next to Sensor ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected Sensor ID.
14-140
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Rating Plug
The Rating Plug field is displayed only if the selected Sensor ID has rating plugs defined in the library.
Rating plugs can be defined in amperes, multiples or percent. Select from drop-down list and display the
Rating Plug for the selected Sensor ID. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed is displayed next
to Rating Plug field, the Rating plug unit (amperes/multiples/percent) for the selected Rating plug. An
example of Rating plugs in multiples and the actual trip displayed is shown below.
Phase Settings
The Phase settings for Solid State trip unit includes three elements Long-Time, Short-Time, and
Instantaneous (or Override). Each element is defined by its pickup and band settings. The settings
Long -Time
Check to enable the Long-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Long-Time
Long -Time Pickup

Select from drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting for the selected sensor ID. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual long-time pickup in amperes and
pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-Time pickup field.
14-141
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Long -Time Band

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable LongTime band, the range of the band, the multiple at which the band is defined and band step are displayed
next to the Long-Time band field, for your convenience.
Short -Time
Check the box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
If the Short-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Short-Time
Short-Time Pickup
Select from drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time pickup in amperes and
pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For the continuously adjustable
Short-Time band, the band step is displayed next to the Short-Time band field, for your convenience.
Short-Time I2T Band

Make a selection for the Short-Time I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Short-Time I2T band has
two settings, i.e. IN and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Short-Time band
curve inward (sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the Short-Time band curve outward (L-shaped).
Instantaneous
Check the box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then
Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the editor.
14-142
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Instantaneous
pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the
Instantaneous pickup field.
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous Override setting. Checking this box displays the actual
instantaneous override in amperes, for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous Override is enabled, Instantaneous pickup is grayed out and vice versa.
Ground Settings
The Ground element settings for Solid State trip unit includes the Ground Pickup, Band and I2T settings.
The settings available are described below.
14-143
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Ground
Check this box to enable the Ground element setting for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Ground element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Ground tab is not
Ground Pickup
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Ground pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time pickup in
amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time
pickup field.
Ground Band
Make a selection from drop-down list or enter the Ground band setting for the selected sensor ID. The
band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The band step is displayed next to the
Ground band field for the continuously adjustable Ground band, for your convenience.
Ground Band I2T

Select the Ground I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Ground I2T band has two settings, i.e. IN
and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Ground band curve inward (sloped line)
and the OUT setting shifts the Ground band curve outward (L-shaped).

This section describes the settings available for Motor circuit Protector unit on the Trip Device page.
14-144
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Trip device types. In this case, the Motor
Circuit Protector type is selected.
MCP Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for Motor Circuit Protector.
MCP Model
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
MCP ID
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the MCP ID for the selected Motor Circuit Protector
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected MCP ID next to the MCP ID field.
The Motor Circuit Protector unit can be set as discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The settings
that are available are described below.
14-145
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Discrete Adjustable
The discrete adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by discrete values. When the
magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the magnetic section displays a drop-down list of the available
discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes.
The continuous adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by continuously
adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is continuously adjustable, the
magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in multiples of trip device
ampere rating or in actual amperes. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.
14-146
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker

This section describes the settings available for Electro-Mechanical unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the Trip device types. In this case, the ElectroMechanical trip type is selected.
EM Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Electro-Mechanical trip
unit.
EM Model
Make a selection from drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
EM ID
Make a selection from drop-down list to display the EM ID for the selected Electro-Mechanical trip
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected EM ID next to the EM ID field.
14-147
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Long-Time
Long -Time
Check the box to enable the Long-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Long-Time
Long -Time Pickup

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual long-time pickup in
amperes and the pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-Time
pickup field.
Long -Time Band

Select the Long-Time band curve label from the drop-down list, for the selected EM ID. Each label for
the Long-Time band is associated with a fixed point based curve that defines the shape of the Long-Time
band curve.
Short-Time
Short -Time
Check the box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Short-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Short-Time
Short-Time Pickup
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time pickup in
amperes and the pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time
pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected EM ID.
The band settings can be discrete or continuously adjustable. The band step is displayed next to the ShortTime band field for the continuously adjustable Short-Time band, for your convenience.
When the Short-Time band is discrete, it can be defined as a Horizontal band (Minimum/Maximum
clearing times) or as a point based Curve. The example below shows discrete Short-Time band defined
as a Horizontal band.
14-148
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Note: The field is termed as Horizontal Band.
Another example with discrete Short-Time band defined as a curve is shown below.
Note: The field is termed as Band.
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Instantaneous
Select from drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected EM ID. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Instantaneous pickup in amperes
and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous pickup field.
14-149
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC breaker trip unit curves in Star View are specified in
the TCC kA page of DC Circuit Breaker Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be set to Calculated or
User-Defined, the default being set to User-Defined option.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-defined option allows the user to enter the short-circuit kA values for TCC clipping.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value.
Fault (Show on TCC checkbox)

Check the box to enable the fault arrow in Star View.
Fault kA
This field displays the short-circuit current in kA for the Calculated option. For the User-defined option,
the fault kA field is editable.
14-150
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Base V
For Calculated option Base V is display only. For User-Defined option Base V is editable.
Note: The selected device curve is plotted in reference to its base voltage value. For example, if a device
base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device curve will be
shifted by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.

Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values for the selected
breaker only.
14-151
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available, for the selected breaker model
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number for the selected breaker model.
Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This field displays the description for the selected breaker model.
Application
14-152
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
14-153
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project in the menu bar.



14-154
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker

UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
14-155
DC Elements
DC Circuit Breaker
14-156
DC Elements
DC Fuse
14.12 DC Fuse
The properties associated with DC fuses of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
DC fuse protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.
The Fuse Editor contains seven pages of properties and header information displayed on each page:
Header Information
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.12.1 Header
The header displays the selected fuse model on each page of the DC Fuse Editor.
Fuse
Manufacturer
Fuse Model
Fuse Max. Volts
Speed
Selected Fuse
Size ID
Lock Icon
Short-Circuit data
for selected size
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer of the fuse selected from the library.
Max. Volts
This field displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected fuse in Volts.
Size
This field displays the selected size ID for the fuse.
Lock
Model
This field displays the model name of the fuse selected from the library.
Speed
This field displays the speed classification of the selected fuse.
14-157
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Interrupting data
This field displays the short-circuit interrupting kA for the selected fuse size.
14.12.2 Info Page

Specify the DC fuse ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and
Description, Configuration Status, and view the DC fuse online status in the Info page.
Info
ID
ID to each DC fuse.
The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, which starts with the number one and increases
as the number of DC fuses increases. The default ID (dcFuse) for DC fuses can be changed from the
14-158
DC Elements
DC Fuse
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
DC fuse (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal
of a DC fuse is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC fuse to a bus, select a bus from the drop-down list.
The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the fuse to other dc elements that reside in the same view where it
resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to elements that reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC fuse to
a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where DCFuse1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Condition
Service
State
14-159
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the buttons for the
status is shown above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status under the specific
following example, status of a fuse is shown as closed under Normal configuration and open under Open
Tie configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Real-Time Status
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Scanned Status
This field displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
14-160
DC Elements
DC Fuse
14.12.3 Rating Page
Standard
Note: Once the fuse is selected from the fuse library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the library
entry and is display only.
14-161
DC Elements
DC Fuse

Click on ANSI Standard to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards.
When a DC Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
selecting a fuse from library Quick Pick will turn the header text to a dark blue color indicating that the
substituted library data has been modified.
Voltage
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in Volts.
When a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. voltage selected from
library Quick Pick.
Size
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amps
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC Fuse in
amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from
library Quick Pick.
Interrupting
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the DC Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for selected
fuse size from library Quick Pick.

Click on IEC Standard to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with the IEC Standards. When a
DC Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
selecting a fuse from library Quick Pick will turn the header text to a dark blue color indicating that the
substituted library data has been modified.
14-162
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Voltage
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in Volts.
When a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. Voltage selected from
library Quick Pick.
Size
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC Fuse in
amperes. The Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from the
library Quick Pick.
Breaking
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the breaking for the DC Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the breaking value will be set equal to the kA value for selected fuse size
from the Library Quick Pick.
Library (Quick Pick)

To select a Fuse from the Fuse Library click on the Library button and the Library Quick Pick Fuse
window will appear. Select a Fuse from the Library Quick Pick by highlighting the Manufacturer name
and fuse Model-Max V-Speed, which is a unique record. Select the desired size and short-circuit
interrupting kA. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it
to the editor.
Note: Upon selection of library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name with other details are
displayed on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library the
header text will be displayed in a dark blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been
modified.
The information available in the Fuse library Quick Pick is described below.
14-163
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option buttons to select that standard.
Note: The Standard selection in the Fuse library Quick Pick (and hence the fuse models displayed) will
be defaulted to the selection made for the standard on the Rating page. The Standard selection can be
AC/DC
This field displays that the Fuse is DC. This option is grayed out and non-editable.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This field displays a list of all DC Fuse manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Lock
Reference
This field displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example,
Siemens is the reference manufacturer for ITE.
14-164
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Link
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays list of all fuse models for the selected standard and fuse manufacturer. The
models are displayed in the form of Model Max V Speed, which forms a unique record name in the
fuse library. Select the Model Max V Speed by highlighting it.
Lock
Size and Short-Circuit data

Size
This column displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Speed record for DC
fuse. To select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight it.
Note: The sizes listed for the selected Fuse model is not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere
value as provided by the manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This column displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.

This column displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA corresponding to each size for the selected
ANSI fuse model.

This column displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected IEC
fuse model.
14-165
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Lock
Model Info
Class
This field displays the Class (Fuse link, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This field displays the Type (Power Fuse, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
This field displays the application for the selected fuse model
14-166
DC Elements
DC Fuse

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC fuse curves in Star View are specified in the TCC kA
page of DC Fuse Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be set to Calculated or User-Defined, the
default being set to User-Defined option.
User-Defined
Clicking the button for the User-defined option allows the user to enter the short-circuit kA values for
TCC clipping.
Calculated
Clicking the button for the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value.

Check the box to enable the fault arrow in Star View.
14-167
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Fault kA
This field displays the short-circuit current in kA for the Calculated option. If you have selected the Userdefined option, the fault kA field is editable.
Base V
This field under Calculated option Base V is for display only. The option Base V is editable in the Userdefined option.
Note: The selected device curve is plotted in reference to its base voltage value. For example, if a device
base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device curve will be
shifted by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.

Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values only for the selected
fuse.
14-168
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected fuse model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available for selected fuse model.
Brand Name
Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected fuse model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number for the selected fuse model.
Description
This field displays the description for the selected fuse model.
Application
This field displays the application for the selected fuse model.
14-169
DC Elements
DC Fuse
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
14-170
DC Elements
DC Fuse
User-Defined Info



14-171
DC Elements
DC Fuse

UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date
14-172
DC Elements
DC Fuse
14-173
DC Elements
DC Single-Throw Switch
14.13 DC Single-Throw Switch

The properties associated with DC single-throw switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor.
The Single-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information:
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.13.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC Single-Throw Switch ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Ratings,
Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the online status of
the DC Single-Throw Switch within the Info page.
14-174
DC Elements
Info
ID
ID to each DC switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of DC single-throw switches increases.
The default ID (dcS) for DC single-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
To & From
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC single-throw switch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If
a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can connect the terminals of the switch to other dc elements that reside in the same view
where it resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC single-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPST1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Condition
Service
14-175
DC Elements
State
Note: The In/Out of Service option is an engineering property and is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a DC single-throw switch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Service in Revision Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC single-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Closed or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved
following example, status of a DC single-throw switch is shown as closed under Normal configuration
and open under Open Tie configuration.
Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC single-throw switch in volts in this field or select the rating from the
drop-down list.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC single-throw switch in amperes in this field or select the
rating from the drop-down list.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV. This value is not used in any calculations at this point.
14-176
DC Elements
Momentary
Enter the rated short-circuit withstand capability of the DC single-throw switch in kA or select the rating
from the drop-down list. This value represents the momentary capability (making or bracing) of the
switch and is used in DC Short-Circuit Studies to compare against the calculated fault duty of the
connected bus.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
OnLine Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (PSMS).
Scanned Status
The scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device is displayed in this field.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. PSMS will request confirmation.
Application/Association
Click the box to assign an association and make a selection from the drop-down lists to choose the
application and the ID for the switch.
14-177
DC Elements
User-Defined Info


14-178
DC Elements


UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-179
DC Elements
14-180
DC Elements
14.14 DC Double-Throw Switch

The properties associated with DC double-throw switches of the electrical distribution system can be
The Double-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information:
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.14.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the DC Double-Throw Switch ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Ratings, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the online
status of the DC Double-Throw Switch.
14-181
DC Elements
Info
ID
ID to each DC double-throw switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting
with the number one and increasing as the number of DC double-throw switches increases.
The default ID (dc2S) for DC double-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
From, Pos. A, and Pos. B

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC double-throw switch are designated as From, Pos. A, and Pos.
B buses. A blank entry will be shown for bus ID if a terminal of a switch (From Pos. A or Pos. B) is not
connected to any bus. If a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of
the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select
a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after
you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the double-throw switch to DC buses that reside in the same view
where it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC double-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPDT1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Unlike a single-throw switch, the double-throw switch has to be connected to a bus before being
connected to loads and branch elements.
Next to the From, Pos. A, and Pos. B bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses for your
convenience.
14-182
DC Elements
Condition
Service
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC double-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Position A and Position B options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved
following example, status of a switch is shown to be in position A under Configuration Status Switch A
and position B under Configuration Status Switch B.
Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC double-throw switch in V or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC double-throw switch in amperes or select the rating from the
drop-down list.
14-183
DC Elements
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV.
Momentary
Enter the rated breaking current of the DC double-throw switch in kA or select the rating from the dropdown list.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Lock / Unlock
OnLine Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (PSMS).
Scanned Status
The scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device is displayed.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. PSMS will request confirmation.
14-184
DC Elements
User-Defined Info




enter any extra data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
14-185
DC Elements
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
14-186
DC Elements
14-187
Chapter 15
Short-Circuit
The ETAP Short-Circuit Analysis program analyzes the effect of 3-phase, 1-phase, line-to-ground, lineto-line, and line-to-line-to-ground faults on electrical power systems. The program calculates the total
short-circuit currents as well as the contributions of individual motors, generators, and utility ties in the
system. Fault duties are in compliance with the latest editions of the ANSI/IEEE Standards (C37 series)
and IEC Standards (IEC 60909 and others).
This chapter describes definitions and usage of different tools you will need to run short-circuit studies. In
order to give you a better understanding of the standards applied to short-circuit studies and to interpret
output results more easily, some theoretical background, and standard information are also included.
The ANSI/IEEE Short-Circuit toolbar and IEC Short-Circuit toolbar sections explain how you can launch
a short-circuit calculation, open and view an output report, or select display options. The Short-Circuit
Study Case Editor section explains how you can create a new Study Case, what parameters are required to
specify a Study Case, and how to set them. The Display Options section explains what options are
available for displaying some key system parameters and the output results on the one-line diagram, and
how to set them.
The ANSI/IEEE calculation methods section lists standard compliance information and both general and
detailed descriptions of calculation methods used by ETAP. In particular, definitions and discussion of ,
1.5-4, and 30 cycle networks, calculation of ANSI multiplying factors, and high voltage and low voltage
circuit breaker momentary and interrupting duties are provided. The Required Data section describes what
data are necessary to perform short-circuit calculations and where to enter them. If you perform shortcircuit studies using IEC Standards, the IEC Calculation Methods section provides useful information on
standard compliance, definitions on most commonly used IEC technical terms, and general and detailed
descriptions of calculation methods for all important results, including initial symmetrical short-circuit
current, peak short-circuit current, symmetrical short-circuit breaking current, and steady-state shortcircuit current. Finally, the Short-Circuit Study Output Report section illustrates and explains output
reports and their format.
15-1
ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar
15.1 ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar

This toolbar is active when you are in Short-Circuit Mode and the standard is set to ANSI in the ShortCircuit Study Case Editor.
3-Phase Faults Device Duty

Panel/1-Ph UPS/ 1-Ph System Device Duty
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults Cycle
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults 1.5-4 Cycle
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults 30 Cycle
Arc Flash Hazard Calculation (3Ph and 1-Ph)
Short-Circuit Display Options
Alert View
Short-Circuit Report Manager
Halt Current Calculation
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
3-Phase Faults - Device Duty

Click on this button to perform a 3-phase fault study per ANSI C37 Standard. This study calculates
momentary symmetrical and asymmetrical rms, momentary asymmetrical crest, interrupting symmetrical
rms, and interrupting adjusted symmetrical rms short-circuit currents at faulted buses. ETAP checks the
protective device rated close and latching, and adjusted interrupting capacities against the fault currents,
and flags inadequate devices.
Generators and motors are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactance.
15-2
Note that device duty calculation for protective devices that are connected to single-phase loads is carried
out only when you run the Panel/UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty calculation.
Panel/1-Ph UPS/ 1-Ph System Device Duty

Click on this button to perform a Device Duty Short-Circuit study per ANSI Standards for the parts of
system below a main panel, a single phase UPS and a phase adapter. These subsystems are mostly singlephase systems, but there can be three-phase components below a main panel. This study calculates shortcircuit currents in the cycle network to evaluate Phase A, B, C, AB, BC, CA, three-wire center tap or
three-phase using protective device capabilities in these systems. Please note that motor load
contributions below panels, single phase UPS or phase adapters are not considered in the calculation.
Typically, these contributions are almost negligible for low voltage single phase motor loads and can be
ignored.
Note that in previous versions of ETAP, the 3-Phase UPS connected directly from the 3phase system
would be analyzed when launching the calculation from this icon. As of ETAP11, the 3-phase UPS is
handled as part of the 3-phase device duty calculation.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - Cycle (Max. Short-Circuit Current)
Click on this button to perform 3-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground fault
studies per ANSI Standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values at cycle at
faulted buses, which are considered the maximum short-circuit current values.
Generators and motors are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence subtransient reactance.
Generator, motor, and transformer grounding types and winding connections are taken into consideration
when constructing system positive, negative, and zero sequence networks. Any adjustment for the
impedance is taken as negative in order to produce smaller impedance and thus yield higher short-circuit
currents.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - 1.5 to 4 Cycle

studies per ANSI Standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values between 1.5 to
4 cycles at faulted buses.
Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence subtransient reactance, and motors
are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence transient reactance. Generator, motor,
transformer grounding types, and winding connections are taken into considerations when constructing
system positive, negative, and zero sequential networks. Any adjustment for the impedance is taken as
negative in order to produce smaller impedance and thus yield higher short-circuit currents.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - 30 Cycle (Min. Short-Circuit Current)
studies per ANSI Standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values at 30 cycles at
faulted buses, which are the minimum short-circuit current values.
Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence reactance, and short-circuit current
contributions from motors are ignored. Generator and transformer grounding types and winding
connections are taken into consideration when constructing system positive, negative, and zero sequence
networks. Any impedance adjustment can be applied as negative or positive. You may configure the
impedance tolerance and temperature adjustments to yield higher impedance value (and thus further
15-3
minimize the short-circuit current value) by selecting the option Apply Positive Tolerance and Max.
Temperature for ANSI Minimum Short-circuit Calculation. This option is located on the Adjustment tab
of the Short-Circuit Study Case.

See the Display Options section to customize the Short-Circuit Annotation Display options on the oneline diagram. This dialog box contains options for ANSI short-circuit study results and associated device
parameters. This includes displayed results for 3-phase and unbalanced faults (LG, LL, and LLG) and
their individual contributions. The display options also show Arc Flash Results.
Arc Flash Hazard Calculation

Click on this button to perform an Arc Flash Hazard analysis based on the options selected on the ShortCircuit Study Case Arc Flash page (NFPA 70E or IEEE 1584). The 3-phase and 1-phase bolted fault
currents are used to determine the Incident Energy (based on IEEE Standards)
Alert
After performing a short-circuit device duty calculation, you can click on this button to open the Alert
View, which lists all devices with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the Study Case.

Short-Circuit Output Reports are provided in Crystal Report format. The Report Manager provides four
pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report.
Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report Manager for ANSI shortcircuit studies. You can open and save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel format.
If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
You can open the whole Short-Circuit Output Report or only a part of it, depending on the format
selection.
15-4
You can also view output reports by clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case
toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for short-circuit calculations.
To view any of the listed output reports, click on the output report name, and then click on the View
Output Report button.

The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a short-circuit calculation has been initiated, this button
becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the calculation.
Get Online Data

When the ETAP Management System is set up and the Sys Monitor presentation is online, you can bring
real-time data into your offline presentation and run a load flow by pressing on this button. You will
notice that the Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the online
data.
Get Archived Data

When ETAPS Playback is set up and any presentation is in Playback Mode, you can bring this data into
your presentation and run a load flow by pressing on this button. You will notice that the Operating
Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the playback data.
15-5
IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar
15.2 IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar

This toolbar is active when you are in Short-Circuit Mode and the standard is set to IEC in the ShortCircuit Study Case Editor.
3-Phase Faults Device Duty (IEC 60909)

Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults (IEC 60909)
3-Phase Faults Transient Study (IEC 61363)
Alert View
Short-Circuit Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
3-Phase Faults - Device Duty (IEC 60909)

Click on this button to perform a 3-phase fault study per IEC 60909 Standard. This study calculates initial
symmetrical rms, peak, symmetrical and asymmetrical breaking rms, and steady-state rms short-circuit
currents and their DC offset at faulted buses. ETAP checks the protective device rated making and
breaking capacities against the fault currents and flags inadequate devices.
Generators and motors are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactance.
Note that device duty calculation for protective devices that are connected to single-phase loads is carried
out only when you run the Panel/UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty calculation.
15-6
Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty (IEC 60909)

Click on this button to perform a 1-phase device duty short-circuit fault per IEC 60909 Standards. This
study calculates initial symmetrical (Ik) currents for evaluation of protective device capabilities in parts
of the system which are below a main panel, a 1-Ph UPS, or a phase-adapter. These subsystems are
mostly single-phase systems, but there can be three-phase components below a main panel.
Note that when you run the Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Ph Device Duty, ETAP also performs device duty
calculation on protective devices that are connected between a single-phase loads and a three-phase
system bus. A three-phase system bus is one that is not below a panel or a UPS.
Note that motor load contributions below panels, UPS or phase adapters are not considered in the
calculation. Typically, these contributions are almost negligible for low voltage single phase motor loads
and can be ignored.
Note that as of ETAP11, the 3-phase UPS (connected directly from the 3-phase system) is no longer
handled as part of the 1-phase calculation. To analyze the short-circuit evaluation for this type of
equipment you must now use the 3-phase device duty calculation.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults (IEC 60909)

Click on this button to perform line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and 3-phase fault
studies per IEC 60909 Standard. This study calculates initial symmetrical rms, peak and symmetrical
breaking rms, and steady-state rms short-circuit currents at faulted buses.
Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence reactance, and motors are modeled
by their locked-rotor impedance. Generator, motor, and transformer grounding types, and winding
connections are taken into consideration when constructing system positive, negative, and zero sequence
networks.
3-Phase Faults - Transient Study (IEC 61363)

Click on this button to perform a 3-phase fault study per IEC 61363 Standard. This study calculates
instantaneous values of actual short-circuit current, DC offset, short-circuit current envelope, AC
component, and DC offset in percent for total short-circuit current at faulted buses. The results are
tabulated as a function of time.
Generators are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactance, and motors are modeled by
their locked-rotor impedance. Their subtransient and transient time constants and DC time constants are
also considered in the calculation.

See the Display Options section to customize the short-circuit Annotation Display options on the one-line
diagram. This dialog box contains options for IEC short-circuit study results and associated device
parameters.

Click on this button to perform an Arc Flash Hazard analysis based on the options selected on the ShortCircuit Study Case Arc Flash page (NFPA 70E or IEEE 1584). The fault current used to determine the
incident energy is based on IEC Standards.
15-7
Alert View
After performing a short-circuit study, you can click on this button to open the Alert View, which lists all
devices with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the Study Case.

Short-Circuit Output Reports are provided in Crystal Report forms. The Report Manager provides four
pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report.
Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report Manager.
toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for short-circuit calculations.
To view any of the listed output reports, click on the output report name, and then click on the View
Output Report button. You can open and save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel
format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
Short-Circuit Plots
Click on this button to open the IEC 61363 Plot Selection Editor. You can display the following plots:
15-8
Total Fault Current (i)

AC Component of Fault
Currents (Iac, rms)
DC Component of Fault
Current (Idc)
Percent DC Component of
Fault Current (Idc %)
Top Envelop of Fault Current
(ienv)
Combine Plots
When this box is checked, plots for all selected types will be displayed on the same plot.
Close All Plots

When this button is clicked, all open plots for IEC 61363 calculation will be closed.
Export to COMTRADE
When this button is clicked, all selected plots will be saved to file in COMTRADE format. A window
will open to allow you to specify the directory in which to save the file.

The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a short-circuit calculation has been initiated, this button
becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the calculation.
Get Online Data

You can bring real-time data into your offline presentation and run a load flow by pressing on this button.
You will notice that the Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the
online data. This requires ETAP to be online.
Get Archived Data

You can bring archived data from the ETAP Playback Server into your presentation and run a load flow
by pressing on this button. You will notice that the Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case
Editor will be updated with the playback data. This requires ETAP to be online.
15-9
Study Case Editor
15.3 Study Case Editor

The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, faulted bus selection, and a
variety of options for output reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study
Cases. Short-circuit calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the Study
Case selected in the toolbar. You can easily switch between Study Cases without the trouble of resetting
the Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you
time.
With respect to the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, Study Cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system components (i.e., for any configuration status, one-line diagram
presentation, and Base/Revision data).
The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor can be accessed from the Study Case toolbar by clicking on the
Study Case button. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Short-Circuit
Study Case folder.
To create a new Study Case, go to Project View, right-click on the Short-Circuit Study Case folder, and
select Create New. A new Study Case will be created, which is a copy of the default Study Case, and be
added to the Short-Circuit Study Case folder.
15-10
Study Case Editor
15.3.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and
entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the navigator button
at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to the next existing Study Case.
XFMR Tap
Two methods are provided for modeling transformer off-nominal tap settings:
Adjust Base kV
Base voltages of the buses are calculated using transformer turn ratios, which include the transformer kV
ratings as well as the off-nominal tap settings. In looped systems, there is a possibility of applying
different base voltage values from two different paths if the transformer tap positions are considered to
adjust the base kV. If this situation is detected, ETAP displays the message shown below:
15-11
Study Case Editor
If this situation is caused by transformer taps, then you may use the Use Nominal Tap as an alternative.
If you click the OK button on this error message window, the program will carry out the calculation
with the Use Nominal Tap method.
Use Nominal Tap

Transformer kV ratings are used as the transformer turn ratios for calculating base voltages of the buses
(i.e., all off-nominal tap settings are ignored and transformer impedances are not adjusted). However,
even if this option is used, in some cases a looped system may still contain transformers with
incompatible voltage ratios. This can lead to two different base voltage values being applied at the same
faulted bus, and this prevents the short-circuit calculation from continuing. An error message similar to
the one below may be generated by the SC program under this situation:
To correct this situation, you need to change the transformer kV rating of one of the transformers
involved in the loop.
Calc. Load Term. SC

Check this box to calculate the short-circuit current at the load terminals. The fault analysis is performed
at the terminals of induction motors, synchronous motors, static loads, capacitors and MOVs. The load
terminal fault calculation is carried out when you run Device Duty studies and is applicable to 3-phase
and 1-phase loads connected to three-phase buses.
Note that the load terminal fault current for three-phase loads is calculated when you run the 3-phase
Device Duty. The load terminal fault current for single-phase loads (connected to a three-phase bus) is
calculated when you run the Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty. The following images illustrate
this concept:
15-12
Study Case Editor
1-Ph/Panel/1-Ph UPS Subsystem

ETAP allows you to perform short-circuit device duty evaluations for 1-Ph systems, 3-Ph and 1-Ph Panels
and 1-Ph UPS. The Info page has three options which allow selecting which type of subsystem to include
in the device duty calculation.
Panel
When this option is selected, all panel subsystems (3-Phase and 1-Phase) are included in device duty
calculations.
1-Phase UPS
When this option is selected, all 1-Ph UPS subsystems are included in device duty calculations. The 1-Ph
UPS can be modeled as a constant current source or a voltage source behind an impedance depending on
the selected UPS Model option. Please refer to the calculation methodology section for more details.
1-phase
When this option is selected, all single phase subsystems connected below phase adapters will be included
in device duty calculations.
Please see the ANSI/IEEE calculation methods section for more details on the Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Ph
System Device Duty Evaluation.
Cable/OL Heater
Select the appropriate checkboxes in this option group to include the impedance of equipment cable and
overload heaters of medium and/or low voltage motors in short-circuit studies.
Report
Short-Circuit Output Reports have the following options:
15-13
Study Case Editor
Contribution Level
Choose how far away you want to see the short-circuit current contributions from individual buses to each
faulted bus by specifying the number of bus levels away in this section. For large systems, choosing to
report a high number of levels may result in very large output reports (the report grows exponentially with
the number of levels selected). The default is one. It is recommended not to report more than 3 levels
away for large systems unless it is required to report these far-away contributions.
When selecting contribution levels of n buses away, depending on the number of faulted buses, the
calculated results are displayed on the one-line diagram and printed in the output report as follows:
Fault 1 (one) bus
Displayed results: whole system

Reported output: n bus levels away
Fault more than one bus
Displayed results: 1 bus level away (from the adjacent buses)

Reported output: n bus levels away
Motor Contribution Based on

You can select the following options for considering motor contribution in short-circuit studies.
Motor Status
When this option is selected, motors whose status is either Continuous or Intermittent will make
contributions in short-circuit. Motors with Spare status will not be considered in the Short-Circuit
Analysis.
Loading Category
When this option is selected, you can choose a loading category from the selection box to the right. In the
short-circuit calculation, motors that have non-zero loading in the selected loading category will have a
contribution in short-circuit. Motors with zero loading in the selected loading category will not be
included in the Short-Circuit Analysis.
Both
When this option is selected, a motor will make contribution in short-circuit if it meets either the Motor
Status condition or the Loading Category condition. That is, for a motor to be excluded in the ShortCircuit Analysis, it has to be in the Spare status and have zero loading in the selected Loading Category.
Bus Selection
ETAP is capable of faulting one or more buses in the same run; however, in the latter case buses are
faulted individually, not simultaneously. Depending on the specified fault type, ETAP will place a 3phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground fault at each bus, which is faulted for shortcircuit studies.
When you open the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor for the first time, all buses are listed in the Dont
Fault list box. This means that none of the buses are faulted. Using the following procedures, you can
decide which bus(es) you want to fault for this Study Case.
To fault a bus, highlight the bus ID in the Dont Fault list box and click on the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Fault list box.
15-14
Study Case Editor
To remove a bus from the Fault list box, highlight the bus ID and click on the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Dont Fault list box.
If you wish to fault all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses, select that option and click
on the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Dont Fault list box to the
Fault list box.
To remove all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses from the Fault list box, select that
option and click on the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Fault list box to
the Dont Fault list box.
Note: Single-phase buses below the panel or phase adapter cannot be faulted and therefore will not be
displayed in the list of buses to fault.
Note: The fault selection may also be accomplished from the one-line diagram by selecting the buses in
the one-line and right clicking on the OLD background and selecting to fault the selected buses.
15-15
Study Case Editor
Study Remarks 2nd Line

Up to 120 alphanumeric characters may be entered in the Study Remarks 2nd Line field. Information
entered here will be printed on the second line of every Output Report page header line. These remarks
can provide specific information regarding each Study Case. (Note: The first line of the header
information is global for all Study Cases and is entered in the Project Menu field.)
15.3.2 Standard Page

Standard
Both ANSI and IEC Standards are available for short-circuit studies. Select the Short-Circuit Study
Standard by clicking on the standard notation. Different sets of solution control variables (prefault
voltage, calculation methods, etc.) are available for each standard.
When you create a new Study Case, the Short-Circuit Standard is set equal to the project standard you
have specified in the Project Standards Editor, which is accessible from the Project menu. The Study Case
standard can be changed independently of the project standard.
The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor ANSI Standard page is shown below:
When the IEC Standard is selected, the study options will change and you will see the page shown below:
15-16
Study Case Editor
Prefault Voltage - ANSI Standard

You can select either fixed or variable prefault voltages for all buses.
Fixed Prefault Voltage

This option allows you to specify a fixed prefault voltage for all the faulted buses. This fixed value can be
in percent of bus nominal kV or base kV. Bus nominal kV is the value you enter in the Bus Editor to
represent the normal operating voltage. The bus base kV is calculated by the program and is only reported
in the results section of the short-circuit report for each faulted bus.
The process of computing base kV starts from one of the swing machines, such as a utility or a generator,
by taking its design voltage as the base kV for its terminal bus. It then propagates throughout the entire
system. When it encounters a transformer from one side, the transformer rated voltage ratio will be used
to calculate the base kV for the buses on other sides. If the Adjust Base kV option is selected on the Info
page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor, the transformer tap values will also be used in the base kV
calculation along with transformer rated voltage ratio. It can be seen from this calculation procedure that
the base kV is close to the operating voltage, provided that the swing machine is operating at its design
setting.
Variable Prefault Voltage

If you select the Vmag x Nominal kV (in the Bus Editor) prefault voltage option, ETAP uses the bus
voltages entered in the Bus Editor as the prefault voltage for faulted buses. Using this option, you can
perform short-circuit studies with each faulted bus having a different prefault voltage. For instance, you
can perform short-circuit studies using the bus voltages calculated from a specific load flow study and
calculate fault currents for an actual operating condition. To do so, select Update Initial Bus Voltages
from the Load Flow Study Case Editor and run a load flow analysis.
15-17
Study Case Editor
As the short-circuit current is proportional to the prefault voltage, different options will most likely give
different results. However, with any one of the above options, the calculated fault current is the same as
long as the prefault voltage in kV is the same. The option to be used for a study depends on your
engineering judgment and objective of the study. If you wish to calculate the fault current to size
protective switching devices, apply the maximum possible prefault voltages in the calculation by using
the option of Fixed Base kV. If the bus normal operating voltage is entered in the Bus Editor as the bus
nominal voltage, you may also use the Fixed Nominal kV option.
HVCB Interrupting Capability- ANSI Standard

According to ANSI Standards, the rated interrupting capability entered in the High Voltage Circuit
Breaker Editor corresponds to the maximum kV of the circuit breaker. When the circuit breaker is utilized
under a voltage below this maximum kV, its capability is actually higher than the rated interrupting kA.
In this section, you specify the operating voltage to be used to adjust breaker rating.
Nominal kV
When this option is selected, the nominal kV of the bus, connected to the circuit breaker, is assumed to be
the operating voltage, and breaker, interrupting rating is adjusted to this voltage value.
Nominal kV & Vf
When this option is selected, the operating voltage of the breaker is calculated as the multiplication of the
prefault voltage and the nominal kV of the bus connected to the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker
interrupt rating is adjusted to this voltage value.
Machine X/R - ANSI Standard

Fixed and variable machine X/R options are available for short-circuit calculations. The selection of fixed
or variable machine X/R impacts only the interrupting (1.5-4 cycle) duty calculations of high voltage
circuit breakers.
Fixed X/R
ETAP uses the specified machine X/R ratio (=Xd/Ra) for both cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks. The
intention of this option is to account for the fact that ANSI Standard does not consider variable machine
X/R ratio.
The following example shows Ra calculations when X/R ratio is fixed:
Input:
Xsc
Input:
X/R = 10
Calculated:
Ra
Cycle Network
1.5-4 Cycle Network
15
25
1.5
2.5
Variable X/R
ETAP uses the specified machine X/R ratio and subtransient reactance (Xd) to calculate the armature
resistance (Ra). This resistance is then used for both cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks. The motor
reactance for 1.5-4 cycle network is larger than the motor reactance for cycle networks. Therefore, this
option results in a higher machine X/R ratio and a higher short-circuit contribution for the interrupting
fault calculation of a high voltage circuit breaker than the fixed X/R option.
15-18
Study Case Editor
The following example shows Ra and X/R calculations when variable X/R is considered:
Cycle Network
Input:
Xsc
Input:
X/R = 10
Calculated:
Final:
1.5-4 Cycle Network
15
25
Ra
1.5
1.5
X/R
10
16.7
LVCB Interrupting Capability

When running ANSI device duty, select to use either the ANSI Standard or a user-defined value to
compare the operating kV against the LVCB rated kV as defined in the LVCB editor.
Note: This option does not apply for Fused LVCB. The %Limit is fixed to 100% of the rated kV of the
LVCB.
C37.13/UL 489
Compare the operating voltage against 105.83% of the rated kV of the LVCB. ETAP will issue an alert to
indicate that the operating kV exceeds the LVCB rated maximum kV for the interrupting kA capability.
User-Defined kV
Compare the operating voltage against a user-defined percentage of the rated kV of the LVCB. ETAP will
issue an alert to indicate the operating kV exceeds the LVCB rated maximum kV for the interrupting kA
capability. The allowable range for this field is 100 - 106%.
Protective Device Duty ANSI Standard

You can select to use either the bus total fault current or the maximum current through a protective device
to compare against protective device duty.
Based on Total Bus Fault Current

Check this box to use the total bus fault current to compare against protective device rating. The
Maximum Through Fault Current is always used to compare against the protective device rating for
circuit breakers that are flagged as a generator circuit breaker due to its comparable contributions from
both generator and system sides, even if the Based on Total Bus Fault Current option is selected.
Based on Maximum Through Fault Current

Check this box to use the maximum through fault current to compare against protective device rating. The
Maximum Through Fault Current is determined as the larger value between the fault current contribution
through a protective device and the total bus fault current minus the contribution through the device.
For ANSI Device Duty calculation, if the faulted bus is the terminal bus of a generator or motor, the rated
or Full Load Amps (FLA) of the machine can be considered at the users choice to determine the
Maximum Through Fault c=Current. It is assumed that for a generator, the rated current is flowing out of
the generator, and for a motor, the full load current is flowing into the motor. Therefore, for a generator,
the rated current is added to generator short-circuit contribution to determine the Maximum Through
Fault Current. For a motor, the full load current is subtracted from motor short-circuit contribution to
determine the Maximum Through Fault Current.
15-19
Study Case Editor
There is an ETAP Preference entry which allows you to consider or not consider the FLA for the
calculation of the Maximum Through Fault Current. You can edit the Include Machine FLA Based on
Maximum Through entry by accessing the Options (Preferences) Editor from the Tools menu. It is
located under the short-circuit section.
This entry indicates to the short-circuit program to include (or exclude) the rated Full Load Amps (FLA)
of induction/synchronous machines in the calculation of the maximum through short-circuit current duty
(momentary or interrupting) of protective devices directly connected to those machines. If this entry is set
to 0, the FLA will not be considered (this includes generator circuit breakers). This entry only applies for
ANSI Short-circuit calculations (IEC Short-Circuit does not consider the FLA and thus is not affected by
this option).
C37.010 1999
Check this option to calculate the S factor for symmetrical rated high voltage circuit breaker based on the
contact parting time entered in the Circuit Breaker Editor. In calculating the S factor, the standard time
constant for DC component specified in ANSI Standards are used, 45 ms for regular circuit breaker and
133 ms for generator circuit breaker. Additionally, when calculating asymmetrical fault current, the
multiplication factors for local and remote contribution are also calculated based on the contact parting
time entered in the Circuit Breaker Editor. In case the curve for the specified contact parting time is not
available; the multiplication factor is interpolated based on available curves. See section ANSI/IEEE
Calculation Methods for more information.
C37.010 1979 and Older

When this option is selected, the standard contact parting time and corresponding S factor are used in the
calculation. These standard contact parting time and corresponding S factors are given in group High
Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation. When this option is selected, the contact parting
time entered in high voltage circuit breaker is ignored in the calculation.
MF for HV CB & Bus Momentary Duty

This group provides options for you to select a method to calculate the multiplication factors used for
computation of asymmetrical and peak values for high-voltage circuit breaker and high-voltage bus
momentary duty. Note that the asymmetrical and peak values of momentary duty are calculated based on
the symmetrical duty and X/R. Therefore, this group of options is for selection of X/R used in the
calculation. Figures below graphically show the calculated MF for each method.
15-20
Study Case Editor
Based on Calculated X/R

With this option selected, the multiplication factors used to compute the asymmetrical and peak duty for
high-voltage circuit breakers and high-voltage buses are based on calculated system X/R ratio. This X/R
ratio is calculated from the separate X and R networks for each faulted bus. From the figures given
above, it is seen that at about X/R = 25, the calculated multiplication factor for the asymmetrical duty
(MFm) is about 1.6. At about X/R = 17, the calculated multiplication factor for the crest duty (MFp) is
about 2.6. When the calculated X/R ratio is different from these values, the multiplication factors can be
larger or smaller than 1.6 or 2.6. Since this option provides the most accurate results for momentary duty,
it is the default option
Set to 1.6 & 2.6 (RMS & Peak) as Min.

high-voltage circuit breakers and high-voltage buses are based on calculated system X/R ratio with
minimum limits. The calculated multiplication factor for the asymmetrical duty (MFm) is limited at no
less than 1.6 and the calculated multiplication factor for the peak duty (MFp) is limited at no less than 2.6.
Note that the values of 1.6 and 2.6 are used in the examples in IEEE Std C37.010.
Set to 1.6 & 2.6 (RMS & Peak)

high-voltage circuit breakers and high-voltage buses are fixed values. The value of 1.6 is used as the
multiplication factor for the asymmetrical duty (MFm) and the value of 2.6 is used as the multiplication
factor for the peak duty (MFp). In this case, system X/R ratio has no effect on the calculation of
asymmetrical and peak duty. Note that the values of 1.6 and 2.6 are used in the examples in IEEE Std
C37.010.
MF for LV CB & (Molded & Insulated) Duty

This group provides options for you to select the method to be used for calculating multiplication factor
for low voltage molded case circuit breaker and insulated case circuit breakers.
Based on Peak Current

This method calculates multiplication factor (MF) based on the peak current, which is the same method
used for calculating MF for an unfused low voltage power circuit breaker.
15-21
Study Case Editor
Based on Asymmetrical Current

This method calculates multiplication factor (MF) based on the asymmetrical current, which is the same
method used for calculating MF for a fused low voltage power circuit breaker.
Higher MF (Peak or Asymmetrical)

When this option is selected, the method that yields higher MF will be used, which provides a more
conservative result. Study results have shown that depending on the sizing of a low voltage molded or
insulated circuit breaker and its testing power factor, either the peak current method or the asymmetrical
method may give a more conservative result. The following table shows results for some typical circuit
breakers.
Breaker
Rating
20 kA
(PF = 20%, X/R = 4.9)
10 -- 20 kA
(PF = 30%, X/R = 3.18)
<=10 kA
(PF = 50%, X/R = 1.73)
Peak Current
Method
Asymmetrical Current
Method
More Conservative
More Conservative
Slightly More Conservative
Short-Circuit Current - IEC Standard

In this group, you specify if the maximum or minimum short-circuit current to be calculated and based on
the selection, different c factors will be used to modify source voltage. There are three options available:
Max, User-Defined c Factor, and Min. When the Max option is selected, the maximum values for c factor
as defined in Table I of IEC 60909 Standard is used to calculate maximum fault current:
< 1001 V
1001 to 35000 V
> 35000 V
c Factor = 1.10
c Factor = 1.10
c Factor = 1.10
When the User-Defined c Factor option is selected, ETAP uses the user specified c factor. The ranges for
the c factors are as follows:
< 1001 V
1001 to 35000 V
> 35000 V
c Factor = 0.95 -- 1.10

c Factor = 1.00 -- 1.10
c Factor = 1.00 -- 1.10
When the Min. option is selected, the minimum values for c Factor, as defined in IEC 60909 Standard, are
used to calculate minimum fault current:
< 1001 V
1001 to 35000 V
> 35000 V
c Factor = 0.95
c Factor = 1.00
c Factor = 1.00
In each case, ETAP calculates ip, I"k, and Ik. Additionally, impedance tolerance, length tolerance, and
operating temperature that are used in calculations also vary according to the c Factor options selected.
15-22
Study Case Editor
If either the Max or User-Defined c Factor option is selected:
The negative tolerance value is used for synchronous generator and synchronous motor direct-axis
subtransient reactance (Xd).
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on impedance values, the negative tolerance
value is used for transformer impedance, reactor impedance, and overload heater impedance.
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on length, the negative tolerance value is
used to for line length and cable length.
If the option is set in the Study Case to adjust resistance value by individual operating temperature,
the minimum operating temperature is used to adjust cable and line resistance.
If the Min option is selected:
The positive tolerance value is used for synchronous generator and synchronous motor direct-axis
subtransient reactance (Xd).
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on impedance values, the positive tolerance
value is used for transformer impedance, reactor impedance, and overload heater impedance.
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on length, the positive tolerance value is
used for line length and cable length.
If the option is set in the Study Case to adjust resistance value by individual operating temperature,
the maximum operating temperature is used to adjust cable and line resistance.
It should be noted that when the Min option is selected, the IEC Duty button is disabled in the IEC toolbar
to prevent you from accidentally performing device duty calculation with minimum short-circuit current.
Calculation Method - IEC Standard

X/R for Peak Current
Method A Using the uniform ratio X/R in calculating the peak current
Method B Using the X/R ratio at the short-circuit location in calculating the peak current
Method C Using equivalent frequency in calculating the peak current
Protective Device Duty IEC Standard

You can select either the bus total fault current or the maximum current through a protective device to
compare against protective device duty.
Based on Total Bus Fault Current

Check this box to use the Total Bus Fault Current to compare against protective device rating for all
protective device ratings. The High Voltage Circuit Breakers (HVCB) flagged as generators are treated
accordingly only in ANSI short-circuit calculations. For an IEC short-circuit these are still considered as
non-generator HVCB (the generator HVCB only applies under ANSI Standards).
15-23
Study Case Editor
Based on Maximum Through Fault Current

Check this box to use the Maximum Through Fault Current to compare against protective device rating.
The maximum through fault current is determined as the larger value between the fault current
contribution through a protective device and the total bus fault current minus the contribution through the
device.
The rated current of a generator and full load current of a motor are not considered in determining
Maximum Through Fault Current due to the difference in short-circuit calculation methods between
ANSI and IEC Standards.
Report Breaking Duty vs. CB Time Delay

In the IEC Device Duty calculation, this option will report a list of breaking currents for a number of
different delay times in the individual fault calculation result page of the Crystal Report. You can select to
display the breaking duty based on the total fault current or based on the Maximum Through Fault
Current.
The breaking duty is not directly associated with any protective device; therefore the total bus fault
current and the Maximum Through Fault Current options below this checkbox are independent of the
option selected for the Protective Device Duty.
LVCB Breaking IEC Standard

This group allows you to specify what LVCB breaking current rating is used to compare against the
calculated fault current.
Use Ics
If this option is selected, ETAP will use the rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (kA) to compare
against the calculated breaking current by the IEC Duty (909) Short-Circuit Module.
Use Icu
If this option is selected, ETAP will use the rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (kA) to compare
against the calculated breaking current by the IEC Duty (909) Short-Circuit Program.
Cmax for Z Adjustment (<1000 V)

This group allows you to specify which constant value to use in the calculation of the K correction factors
used to adjust the impedance of devices like transformers and generators.
1.05 (+6% V Tolerance)

Use cmax = 1.05 for calculating the impedance correction factors for systems with 6% Voltage Tolerance.

Note: These constants are not used as c Factors for the adjustment of the prefault voltage. They are only
used to calculate the impedance adjustment (i.e. Kt, Kg, etc)
15-24
Study Case Editor
Zero Sequence MDL ANSI Standard and IEC Standard

Include Y for Branch and Static Load
This option allows you to consider the effect of zero-sequence capacitances of lines and cables as well as
shunt admittances of distinct static load elements. Y is considered by both ANSI and IEC LG and LLG
short-circuit calculations. This means that if a cable has a susceptance value specified under the Y field
(impedance page), ETAP will convert this value into the zero sequence capacitance and consider it in the
calculation of 3Io.
15-25
Study Case Editor
15.3.3 Arc Flash Method Page

The Arc Flash Hazard page allows you to select the analysis method and Study Case options to perform
an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. This page will be discussed in more detail in the Arc Flash Analysis
section in Chapter 18.
15-26
Study Case Editor
15.3.4 AF FCT Page

The Arc Flash FCT page allows the user to set the options for determining the FCT (Fault Clearing Time)
for arc faults. This page will be discussed in more detail in the Arc Flash Analysis chapter.
15-27
Study Case Editor
15.3.5 AF Data Page

The Arc Flash Data page allows the user to set the options for the selection of global or individual AF
input data for the calculation. Also select a global selection for the standard that defines the hazard risk
categories and PPE ratings you want to use for the arc flash study. This page will be discussed in more
detail in the Arc Flash Analysis chapter.
15-28
Study Case Editor
15.3.6 Adjustments Page

The Adjustments page of the Short-Circuit Study Case applies to both ANSI and IEC Standards. This
page contains different types of adjustments to conductor resistance, cable length, transformer impedance,
and others.
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to equipment resistance and impedance. Each
tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance setting or based
on a globally specified percent value.
Transformer Impedance Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the transformer impedance. The adjustment includes positive, negative, and
zero sequence impedance depending on the type of fault being performed (3-Phase or LG, LLG, and LL).
The net effect of the transformer impedance adjustment in short-circuit calculations is to decrease the
impedance by the specified percent tolerance value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12%
and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used in the short-circuit calculation will be 10.8%
resulting in a higher fault current.
15-29
Study Case Editor
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by using the tolerance percent value
specified in the Transformer Editor Rating page. A global transformer impedance adjustment can be
specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field
of short-circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global impedance adjustment overrides any
individual transformer tolerance value.
Reactor Impedance Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Short-Circuit Module reduces the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher
fault current. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by using the tolerance percent value
specified in the Reactor Editor Rating page. A global Reactor Impedance Adjustment can be specified as
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of shortCircuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any individual
reactor tolerance value.
Overload Heater Resistance Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the overload heater (OH) resistance. The Short-Circuit Module reduces the
OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller resistance and consequently a higher
fault current. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The Resistance Adjustment can be applied to individual overload heaters by using the tolerance percent
value specified in the Overload Heaters Editor Rating page. A global Overload Heater Resistance
Adjustment can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the
corresponding field of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Adjustment overrides any individual overload heater tolerance value.
The adjustments only apply if the Cable/OL Heater option is selected for MV and/or LV motors.
Synchronous Machine Direct-Axis Subtransient Reactance (Xd) Adjustment

The direct-axis subtransient reactance (Xd) for a synchronous generator or a synchronous motor will
always be adjusted by the Xd tolerance value entered in the Impedance/Model page of the Machine
Editor. The Short-Circuit module reduces the Xd value by the specified percent tolerance resulting in
smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the Xd value is 10% and its
tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted Xd value used in the short-circuit calculation is 9.5%.
Impedance Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit current Calculation

In general, in order to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the impedance
tolerance value is taken as a negative value, resulting in a smaller impedance value. However, in IEC
short-circuit current calculation, if the Min option is selected in the short-circuit current group of the
Standard page, the impedance tolerance value will be taken as a positive value. This leads to a larger
impedance value and a lower short-circuit current.
Length Tolerance
This group allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line length. Each
15-30
Study Case Editor
Cable Length Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Short-Circuit module reduces the cable length by the
specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For
example, if the length of the cable is 200 ft. and the tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted cable length used in
the short-circuit calculation is 190 ft.
The Length Adjustment can be applied to individual cables by using the tolerance percent value specified
in the Cable Editor Info page. A global Cable Length Adjustment can be specified as well by selecting
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of Short-Circuit Study Case
Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance value.
Transmission Line Length Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Short-Circuit module reduces the
transmission line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and
consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the
tolerance is 2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the short-circuit calculation is 1.95
miles.
The Length Adjustment can be applied to individual lines by using the tolerance percent value specified
in the Transmission Line Editor Info page. A global Transmission Line Length Adjustment can be
of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any
individual transmission line tolerance value.
Length Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit current Calculation

In general, in order to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the length tolerance
value is taken as a negative value, resulting in shorter length. However, in IEC short-circuit current
calculation, if the Min option is selected in the short-circuit current group of the Standard page, the length
tolerance value will be taken as a positive value. This leads to a longer length and a lower short-circuit
current.
Resistance Temperature Correction

This group allows you to consider resistance correction based on the minimum operating temperature for
cable and transmission line conductors. Each temperature resistance correction can be applied based on
the individual cable/line minimum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Resistance Temperature Correction for Transmission Line Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Short-Circuit module adjusts
the conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating
temperature is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the resistance is reduced.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified in the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page. A global temperature
correction can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum temperature value in the
corresponding field of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature
correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page minimum temperature.
Please refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page section in Chapter 11, AC Elements.
15-31
Study Case Editor
Resistance Temperature Correction for Cable Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Short-Circuit Module adjusts the
conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating temperature
is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is reduced.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified in the Cable Editor Impedance page. A global temperature correction can be
specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum temperature value in the corresponding
field of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature correction value
overrides any individual Cable Impedance Page minimum temperature. Please refer to the Cable Editor
Impedance page section in Chapter 11, AC Elements.
Resistance Temperature Correction for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit current Calculation

In general, in order to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the resistance
temperature correction is conducted according to the minimum operating temperature, resulting in a
smaller resistance value. However, in IEC short-circuit current calculation, if the Min option is selected in
the Short-circuit current section of the Standard page, the resistance temperature correction will be
conducted according to the maximum operating temperature. This leads to a higher resistance value and a
lower short-circuit current.
Fault Zf
You may consider fault impedance in the unbalance fault calculations. In this section, you specify the
fault impedance to be applied to all the faulted buses. Depending on the type of faults applied to a bus, the
specified fault impedance is assumed to be between locations as given below:
For a line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and the ground.
For a line-to-line fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and phase B.
For a line-to-line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between the ground and the
short-circuit point between phases A and B.
Include Fault Impedance Zf

Check this box to include fault impedance in the calculation. You can enter fault impedance in the editor
box below.
Fault Impedance Unit

You can enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent. If the Ohm option is selected, the values in
the R and X Editor boxes are in Ohms. If you select the Percent option, the values in the R and X Editor
boxes are in percent based on 100 MVA and the nominal kV of the faulted bus.
R and X
In these two editor boxes, you enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent, depending on the fault
impedance unit selected. These values apply to all the faulted buses.
15-32
Study Case Editor
Apply Positive Tolerance and Max. Temperature for ANSI Minimum Short-Circuit
Calculation
This checkbox option sets the impedance tolerance, length tolerance and resistance temperature
impedance corrections as positive adjustments instead of negative. This option is considered only when
you run the Minimum short-circuit calculation for ANSI Standards. The net effect of this option on the
calculation results is to increase the impedance/resistance of the elements in order to find the true
minimum short-circuit current.
15.3.7 Alert Page

The Alert page allows you to set up alerts on short-circuit calculation results. The objective is to alert you
to certain conditions of interest in short-circuit studies. The alerts are determined based on predetermined
device ratings and system topology after performing a short-circuit calculation.
15-33
Study Case Editor
Alert
There are two categories of alerts generated by the short-circuit calculations: Critical and Marginal. The
difference between the two is their use of different condition percent values for the same monitored
parameter. If a condition for a Critical Alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the alert view
window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for Marginal
Alerts, with the exception that the overloaded component will be displayed in the color magenta. Also,
the Marginal Alerts checkbox must be selected to display the Marginal Alerts. If a device alert qualifies it
for both Critical and Marginal alerts, then only Critical Alerts are displayed.
Bus Alert
Short-circuit simulation alerts for buses are designed to monitor crest, symmetrical, and asymmetrical
bracing conditions. These conditions are determined from bus rating values and Short-Circuit Analysis
results. The percent of monitored parameter value in the Short-Circuit Study Case Alert page is fixed at
100% for Critical Short-Circuit Alerts. The Marginal alert percent value is user-defined.
Protective Device Alert

The set up of protective device simulation alerts is similar to that of bus alerts. You can enter the
monitored parameter percent values for Marginal Alerts into the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor alert set
up page; however, this value is fixed to 100% for critical level alerts.
For all protective devices the current rating will be compared against the maximum through fault current
or the total bus fault current depending on the selection in the protective device duty in the Short-Circuit
Study Case Standards page.
Marginal Device Limit

ETAP flags all protective devices whose momentary and interrupting duties exceed their capabilities by
displaying the element in red on the one-line diagram and flagging it in the output report. Select the
Marginal Device Limit option and specify the marginal limit in percent of the device capability to flag
devices with marginal capabilities.
For example, consider a circuit breaker with an interrupting rating of 42 kA and a calculated short-circuit
duty of 41 kA. The capability of this circuit breaker is not exceeded; however, if the marginal device limit
is set to 95%, the circuit breaker will be flagged in the output report and will be displayed in purple in the
one-line diagram as a device with marginal capability.
Auto Display
The Auto Display feature of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Alert page allows you to decide if the
Alert View window should be automatically displayed as soon as the short-circuit calculation is
completed.
15-34
Display Options
15.4 Display Options

The Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
and Color information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
specific to that study.
15.4.1 Results Page

The Results page of the Display Options is where you select different result annotations to be displayed in
the one-line diagram. Depending on short-circuit study type, ANSI or IEC, this page gives you different
options for 3-phase fault results. If the study type is ANSI Short-Circuit Analysis, you will see the Results
page as shown below:
ANSI Page
IEC Page
If the study type is IEC Short-Circuit Analysis, the options in the 3-Phase Faults section are Peak or
Initial Symmetrical rms current. The rest of the groups are the same as that for the ANSI Short-Circuit
Analysis.
Show Units
Check the box to show units for voltage and current on the one-line diagram.
15-35
Display Options
Bus Voltage Unit

Select bus voltage display units in kV or in percent. Bus voltages are only displayed when you fault one
bus in the system.
Fault Current for Device Duty Calculations

Select which 3-phase fault current values are displayed on the one-line diagram. The ETAP Short-Circuit
Module provides results on the OLD when running the Duty and 1.5 to 4 cycle calculations.
Symmetrical Cycle or Symmetrical 1.5 to 4 Cycle kA

For the ANSI Short-Circuit Method (3-phase faults), select momentary (symmetrical 1/2 cycle) or
interrupting symmetrical (symmetrical 1.5 to 4 cycle) kA to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Peak or Initial Symmetrical kA

For the IEC Short-Circuit Method (3-phase faults), select peak or initial symmetrical rms kA to be
displayed on the one-line diagram.
Fault Type for Unbalanced Fault Calculations

After conducting an unbalanced fault calculation, the Fault Type section allows you to select the type of
fault for which the short-circuit results to be displayed. You have the option to display results in
sequence components or in phases.
3-Phase
In a three phase fault, the fault current for all phase are the same. In this case, ETAP displays the phase A
current in OLV.
L-G
When the Lind-to-Ground fault type is selected, there are three options for the fault results to be
displayed: voltage on phase B and zero sequence current, sequence voltage and current, and phase voltage
and current.
L-L and L-L-G

When the Lind-to-Line or Lind-to-Line-to-Ground fault type is selected, there are three options for the
fault results to be displayed: voltage on phase A and zero sequence current, sequence voltage and current,
and phase voltage and current.
Display Motor Contributions

Medium Voltage Motor
Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from medium voltage motors (more than
1kV) on the one-line diagram.
15-36
Display Options
Large Low Voltage Motor

Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from large low voltage motors (motor sizes
equal to or larger than 100 hp or kW) on the one-line diagram.
Small Low Voltage Motor

Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from small low voltage motors (motor
sizes smaller than 100 hp or kW) on the one-line diagram.
15-37
Display Options
15.4.2 AC Page
This page includes options for displaying information annotations for AC elements.
ID
diagram.
15-38
Display Options
Rating
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
Ground Switch
PT & CT
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
Connection Type (Number of Phases - Number of Wires)
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
Number of Cables - Number of Conductor/Cable - Size
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
50/51 for Overcurrent Relays
N/A
kV
For cables/lines, click the checkboxes to display the cable/line and the size, length and type on the oneline diagram.
A
Z
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
Positive Sequence Impedance in % of 100 MVA (R + j X)
% LRC
Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X per unit length)
Impedance in Ohms or %
Impedance in Ohms
Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in Ohms or per unit length)
15-39
Display Options
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the connection types of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
For transformers, the operating tap settings for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings are also
displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of the LTC.
Composite Motor
Click on this checkbox to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
color in which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options

15.4.3 AC-DC Page

This page includes options for displaying information annotations for AC-DC elements and composite
networks.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC elements on the oneline diagram.
15-40
Display Options
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC elements on the
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
kVA
HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
Click on this checkbox to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
Use Default Options

15-41
Display Options
15.4.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements on the one-line diagram.
Color Theme
A previously defined color theme can be selected from the list. The selected color theme will be used
whenever the Theme option button is selected.
Annotations
This area allows you to assign colors to AC and DC elements, composite elements, and displayed results.
Theme
This option allows the global color theme selected in the color Theme list for element annotations to be
applied globally throughout all CSD diagrams. When the option is selected, the name assigned to the
applied color theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.
User-Defined
Select this option to specify a color for CSD element annotations. When this option is chosen, the DC
element annotation color selection list will appear.
Theme Button
Click this button to make the Theme Editor appear.
15-42
Display Options
Theme Editor
The Theme Editor allows you to select existing color themes or define a new color theme. Note that color
themes are applied globally within a project file. Changes made on a color theme displayed on this page
may also affect other modes and presentations if the global color themes option has been previously
selected.
15-43
ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods
15.5 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods

ETAP provides two Short-Circuit Calculation Methods based on ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standards. You can
select the calculation method from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. This section describes the
ANSI/IEEE Standard Method of Calculation.
Standard Compliance
ETAP short-circuit calculation per ANSI/IEEE Standards complies with the latest ANSI/IEEE and UL
Standards, as listed below:
Standard
IEEE C37.04
IEEE C37.04f
IEEE C37.04g
IEEE C37.04h
IEEE C37.04i
IEEE C37.04
Pub. Year
1979 (1988)
1990
1986
1990
1991
1999
Title
Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis and Supplements
IEEE C37.010
IEEE C37.010b
IEEE C37.010e
IEEE C37.010
1979, 1988,1999
1985
1985
1999
IEEE Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers

Rated on a Symmetrical Basis and supplements
IEEE C37.13
1990
Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures
IEEE C37.013
1997
Standard for AC High-Voltage Generator Circuit Breakers Rated

on a Symmetrical Current Basis
IEEE C37.20.1
2002
Standard for Metal Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

Switchgear
IEEE Std 399
1990 & 1997
IEEE Std 141
1986,1993,2002
IEEE Std 242
1986 & 2001
IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems the Buff Book
1996,2000,2002
Standard for Safety for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, MoldedCase Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
UL 489_9
Power System Analysis the Brown Book

Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants the Red Book
General Description of Calculation Methodology

In ANSI/IEEE short-circuit calculations, an equivalent voltage source at the fault location, which equals
the prefault voltage at the location, replaces all external voltage sources and machine internal voltage
sources.
15-44
All machines are represented by their internal impedances. Line capacitances and static loads are
neglected. Transformer taps can be set at either the nominal position or at the tapped position, and
different schemes are available to correct transformer impedance and system voltages if off-nominal tap
setting exists. It is assumed that for 3-phase fault, the fault is bolted. Therefore, arc resistances are not
considered. You can specify fault impedance in the Short-Circuit Study Case for single-phase to ground
fault. System impedances are assumed to be balanced 3-phase, and the method of symmetrical
components is used for unbalanced fault calculations.
Three different impedance networks are formed to calculate momentary, interrupting, and steady-state
short-circuit currents, and corresponding duties for various protective devices. These networks are:
cycle network (subtransient network), 1.5-4 cycle network (transient network), and 30 cycle network
(steady-state network).
ANSI/IEEE Standards recommend the use of separate R and X networks to calculate X/R values. X/R
ratios are obtained for each individual faulted bus and short-circuit current. This X/R ratio is then used to
determine the multiplying factor to account for the system DC offset.
Using the cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks, the symmetrical rms value of the momentary and
interrupting short-circuit currents are solved first. These values are then multiplied by appropriate
multiplying factors to finally obtain the asymmetrical value of the momentary and interrupting shortcircuit currents.
Definition of Terms
The following terms are helpful in understanding short-circuit calculations using ANSI/IEEE Standards.
Cycle Network
This is the network used to calculate momentary short-circuit current and protective device duties at the
cycle after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its associated duties using the
cycle network.
Type of Device
Duty
High voltage circuit breaker
Closing and latching capability
Low voltage circuit breaker
Interrupting capability
Fuse
Switchgear and MCC
Bus bracing
Relay
Instantaneous settings
Cycle Network Duty
15-45
The cycle network is also referred to as the subtransient network, primarily because all rotating
machines are represented by their subtransient reactance, as shown in the following table:
Type of Machine
Utility
Turbo generator
Hydro-generator with amortisseur winding
Hydro-generator without amortisseur winding
Condenser
Synchronous motor
Induction Machine
> 1000 hp @ 1800 rpm or less
> 250 hp @ 3600 rpm
All other > 50 hp
< 50 hp
Xsc
X
Xd
Xd
0.75 Xd
Xd
Xd
Xd
Xd
1.2 Xd
1.67 Xd
(Xd = 1/LRC for induction motors)
1.5-4 Cycle Network

This network is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current and protective device duties 1.5-4
cycles after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its associated duties using the 1.54 cycle network.
Type of Device
Fuse
Switchgear and MCC
Relay
Duty
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
The 1.5-4 cycle network is also referred to as the transient network. The type of rotating machine and its
representation is shown in the following table:
Type of Machine
Utility
Turbo generator
Condenser
Synchronous motor
Induction machine
> 1000 hp @ 1800 rpm or less
> 250 hp @ 3600 rpm
All other > 50 hp
< 50 hp
Xsc
X
Xd
Xd
0.75 Xd
Xd
1.5 Xd
1.5 Xd
1.5 Xd
3.0 Xd
Infinity
(Xd = 1/LRC for induction motors)
15-46
30 Cycle Network
This is the network used to calculate the steady-state short-circuit current and duties for some of the
protective devices 30 cycles after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its
associated duties using the 30 cycle network:
Type of Device
Duty
N/A
N/A
Fuse
N/A
Switchgear and MCC
N/A
Relay
Overcurrent settings
30 Cycle Network Duty
The type of rotating machine and its representation in the 30 cycle network is shown in the following
table. Induction machines, synchronous motors, and condensers are not considered in the 30 cycle fault
calculation.
Type of Machine
Utility
Turbo generator
Condenser
Synchronous motor
Induction machine
30 Cycle Network Impedance
Xsc
X
Xd
Xd
Xd
Infinity
Infinity
Infinity
15.5.1 ANSI Multiplying Factor (MF)

The ANSI multiplying factor is determined by the equivalent system X/R ratio at a particular fault
location. The X/R ratio is calculated by the separate R and X networks.
Local and Remote Contributions

A local contribution to a short-circuit current is the portion of the short-circuit current fed predominately
from generators through no more than one transformation, or with external reactance in a series, which is
less than 1.5 times the generator subtransient reactance. Otherwise the contribution is defined as remote.
No AC Decay (NACD) Ratio

The NACD ratio is defined as the remote contributions to the total contributions for the short-circuit
current at a given location.
NACD =
I remote
Itotal
Total short-circuit current Itotal = Iremote + Ilocal

NACD = 0 if all contributions are local.
NACD = 1 if all contributions are remote.
15-47
15.5.2 Calculation Methods

Momentary (1/2 Cycle) Short-Circuit Current Calc. (Buses and HVCB)
The momentary short-circuit current at the cycle represents the highest or maximum value of the shortcircuit current before its AC and DC components decay toward the steady-state value. Although the
highest or maximum short-circuit current actually occurs slightly before the cycle in reality, the
cycle network is used for this calculation.
The following procedure is used to calculate momentary short-circuit current:
1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
I mom,rms,symm =
V pre fault
3Zeq
where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the cycle network
2) Calculate the asymmetrical rms value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
I mom,rms ,asymm = MFm I mom,rms ,symm

where MFm is the momentary multiplying factor, calculated from
MFm = 1 + 2e
2
X /R
3) Calculate the peak value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
I mom, peak = MFp I mom,rms ,symm

where MFp is the peak multiplying factor, calculated from
MFp = 2 1 + e X / R
This value is the calculated Asymmetrical kA Crest printed in the Momentary Duty column of the
Momentary Duty page in the output report.
In both equations for MFm and MFp calculation, X/R is the ratio of X to R at the fault location obtained
from separate X and R networks at cycle. The value of the fault current calculated by this method can
be used for the following purposes:
15-48
Check closing and latching capabilities of high voltage circuit breakers

Check bus bracing capabilities
Adjust relay instantaneous settings
Check interrupting capabilities of fuses and low voltage circuit breakers
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation

The interrupting fault currents for high voltage circuit breakers correspond to the 1.5-4 cycle short-circuit
currents, i.e., the 1.5-4 cycle network is used for this calculation.
Contact Parting Time

The magnitude of the DC component of the short-circuit current is dependent on the contact parting time
of the individual circuit breaker. On the Rating page of High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor, you can
specify the contact parting time for a circuit breaker. If the C37.010-1999 option is selected on the
Standard page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, then the contact parting time entered in the High Voltage
Circuit Breaker Editor will be used in the calculation.
If the C37.010-1979 and Older option is selected, then the default contact parting time given in the
following table will be used. The default contact parting time is dependent on the rated cycle of the circuit
breaker. In this case, the contact parting time entered in the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor will be
ignored in the calculation.
Circuit Breaker
Rating in Cycles
8
5
3
2
Contact Parting
Time in Cycles
4
3
2
1.5
S Factor
The S Factor reflects the ability of a symmetrically rated high voltage circuit breaker to interrupt a fault
current with a DC component. It is defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over
symmetrical interrupting rms rating of a circuit breaker.
If the C37.010-1999 option is selected on the Standard page of Short-Circuit Study Case, the S Factor for
a symmetrically rated circuit breaker is calculated using the contact parting time entered in the High
Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor and the standard time constant for the DC component provided in IEEE
Standards. According to IEEE Standard C37.10-1999, the time constant is equal to 45 ms for an AC high
voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. According to IEEE Standard C37.013-1997,
the time constant is equal to 133 ms for an AC high voltage generator circuit breaker rated on a
symmetrical current basis. The calculated S Factor is also displayed on the Rating page of the High
Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor.
If the C37.010-1979 and Older option is selected, the default S factor given in the following table will be
used. The default S Factor is dependent on the rated cycle of the circuit breaker. In this case, the S Factor
displayed in the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor will not be used in the calculation.
15-49
Circuit Breaker
S Factor
Contact Parting Time
4
1.0
3
1.1
2
1.2
1.5
1.3
S Factor for AC High Voltage Circuit Breaker
Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis
Calculation Procedure
The following procedure is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current for high voltage circuit
breakers:
1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current using the following
formula:
I int,rms,symm =
V pre fault
3Zeq
where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the 1.5-4 cycle network
2) Calculate the short-circuit current contributions to the fault location from the surrounding buses.
3) If the contribution is from a Remote bus, the symmetrical value is corrected by the factor of MFr,
calculated from
MFr = 1 + 2e
4
t
X /R
where t is the circuit breaker contact parting time in cycles

The following table shows the Multiplying Factors for Remote Contributions (MFr) for default contact
parting time.
100
90
80
70
60
8 Cycle CB
(4 cy CPT)
1.487
1.464
1.438
1.405
1.366
5 Cycle CB
(3 cy CPT)
1.540
1.522
1.499
1.472
1.438
3 Cycle CB
(2 cy CPT)
1.599
1.585
1.569
1.548
1.522
2 Cycle CB
(1.5 cy CPT)
1.63
1.619
1.606
1.59
1.569
50
45
40
35
30
1.316
1.286
1.253
1.215
1.172
1.393
1.366
1.334
1.297
1.253
1.487
1.464
1.438
1.405
1.366
1.54
1.522
1.499
1.472
1.438
25
1.126
1.201
1.316
1.393
X/R Ratio
15-50
20
18
16
14
1.078
1.059
1.042
1.027
1.142
1.116
1.091
1.066
1.253
1.223
1.190
1.154
1.334
1.305
1.271
1.233
12
10
9
8
7
1.015
1.007
1.004
1.002
1.001
1.042
1.023
1.015
1.009
1.005
1.116
1.078
1.059
1.042
1.027
1.190
1.142
1.116
1.091
1.066
6
5
4
3
2
1
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.002
1.00.
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.015
1.007
1.002
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.042
1.023
1.009
1.002
1.000
1.000
If the contribution is from a Local generator, the symmetrical value is corrected by the factor of MFl,
which is obtained from: ANSI/IEEE C37.010, Application Guide for AC High Voltage. Since the
standard only provides curves for several typical contact parting time values, if a curve exists for the
contact parting time of a circuit breaker, the factor MFl will be obtained from the curve. Otherwise, the
two curves with closest contact parting time values, one on each side, will be used to interpolate MFl. In
the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor, you can only enter a contact parting time that is within the range
limited by the curves available in the standard. This ensures that MFl will only be calculated by means of
interpolation on available curves, not extrapolation.
100
90
80
70
60
8 Cycle CB
(4 cy CPT)
1.252
1.239
1.222
1.201
1.175
5 Cycle CB
(3 cy CPT)
1.351
1.340
1.324
1.304
1.276
3 Cycle CB
(2 cy CPT)
1.443
1.441
1.435
1.422
1.403
2 Cycle CB
(1.5 cy CPT)
1.512
1.511
1.508
1.504
1.496
50
45
40
35
30
1.141
1.121
1.098
1.072
1.044
1.241
1.220
1.196
1.169
1.136
1.376
1.358
1.337
1.313
1.283
1.482
1.473
1.461
1.446
1.427
25
20
18
16
14
1.013
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.099
1.057
1.039
1.021
1.003
1.247
1.201
1.180
1.155
1.129
1.403
1.371
1.356
1.339
1.320
12
10
9
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.099
1.067
1.051
1.299
1.276
1.263
X/R Ratio
15-51
8
7
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.035
1.019
1.250
1.236
6
5
4
3
2
1
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.005
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.221
1.205
1.188
1.170
1.152
1.132
4) Calculate the total remote contributions and total local contribution, and thus the NACD ratio.
5) Determine the actual multiplying factor (AMFi) from the NACD ratio and calculate the adjusted rms
value of interrupting short-circuit current using the following formula.
Iint,rms,adj = AMFi Iint,rms,symm

where
AMFi = MFl + NACD (MFr MFl)
6) For symmetrically rated breakers, the adjusted rms value of interrupting short-circuit current is
calculated using the following formula:
Iint,rms,adj =
AMF i Iint,rms,symm
S
where the correction factor S reflects an inherent capability of AC high voltage circuit breakers,
which are rated on a symmetrical current basis.
The value of this current is applied to check high voltage circuit breaker interrupting capabilities.
For AC high voltage circuit breakers rated on a total current basis, the interrupting current rating
entered in the circuit breaker editor is the asymmetrical value. The short-circuit current used to
compare against the circuit breaker rating can be calculated by the same formula given above with the
S value equal to 1.0.
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation

Due to the instantaneous action of low voltage circuit breakers at maximum short-circuit values, the
cycle network is used for calculating the interrupting short-circuit current.
The following procedure is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current for low voltage circuit
breakers:
1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current from the following
formula:
15-52
I int,rms,symm =
V pre fault
3Zeq
where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the cycle network
2) Calculate the adjusted asymmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current duty using the
following formula:
I int,rms,adj = MF I int,rms,symm
where MF is the multiplying factor, considering the system X/R ratio and the low voltage circuit
breaker testing power factors
The following equation is used to calculate the multiplication factor for an unfused power, a molded,
or an insulated circuit breaker when the Based on Peak Current option is selected in the Short-Circuit
Study Case:
MF =
2 (1 + e
2 (1 + e
X /R
( X / R ) test
The following equation is used to calculate the multiplication factor for a fused power, a molded, or
an insulated circuit breaker when the Based on Asymmetrical Current option is selected in the ShortCircuit Study Case:
MF =
1 + 2e
1 + 2e
2
X /R
2
( X / R ) test
where (X/R)test is calculated based on the test power factor entered from the Low Voltage Circuit
Breaker Editor. The manufacturer maximum testing power factors given in the following table are
used as the default values:
Max Design (Tested)
Circuit Breaker Type
% PF
(X/R) test
Power Breaker (Unfused)
15
6.59
Power Breaker (Fused)
20
4.90
Molded Case (Rated Over 20,000 A)
20
4.90
Molded Case (Rated 10,001-20,000 A)
30
3.18
Molded Case (Rated 10,000 A)
50
1.73
Maximum Test PF for Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
The calculated duty value int,rms,adj can be applied to low voltage breaker interrupting capabilities.
15-53
If the calculated multiplication factor is less than 1, it is set to 1 so that the symmetrical fault current is
compared against the symmetrical rating of the device. If the symmetrical fault current is less than the
symmetrical rating of the device, the checking on asymmetrical current will certainly pass.
Fuse Interrupting Short-Circuit Current Calculation

The procedures for calculating the fuse interrupting short-circuit current is the same as those for the
Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty calculation.
Note: The current limiting effect of certain devices like current limiting fuses or circuit breakers are not
considered for short-circuit calculations or for device duty evaluations.
Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Circuit Duty

ETAP compares the rating of protective devices and bus bars with the fault duties of the bus. The
comparison results are listed in the Summary page of the output report. The device rating and fault duty
used in the comparison are shown below.
Device Type
Device Capability
Calculated Short-Circuit Duty
Momentary Duty
HV Bus Bracing
Asymm. KA rms
Asymm. KA rms
Asymm. KA Crest
Asymm. KA Crest
Symm. KA rms
Symm. KA rms
Asymm. KA rms
Asymm. KA rms
C&L Capability kA rms
Asymm. KA rms
C&L Capability kA Crest
Asymm. KA Crest
HVCB
Interrupting kA***
Adjusted kA
LVCB
Rated Interrupting kA
Adjusted kA
LV Bus Bracing
HVCB
Interrupting Duty
***The interrupting capability of a high voltage circuit breaker is calculated based on the nominal kV of
the connected bus and the prefault voltage (Vf ) if the flag is set in the Short-Circuit Study Case, as shown
below.
Interrupting kA = (Rated Int. kA) * (Rated Max. kV) / (Bus Nominal kV)
or
Interrupting kA = (Rated Int. kA) * (Rated Max. kV) / (Bus Nominal kV * Vf )
The calculated interrupting kA (as shown above) is then limited to the maximum interrupting kA of the
circuit breaker.
15-54
Generator Circuit Breakers

Determination of Generator Circuit Breakers
In order for ETAP to evaluate a circuit breaker as a generator CB according to IEEE C37.013 1997, it
must be associated with the corresponding generator, by making the selection from the rating page of the
high voltage circuit breaker. Also, the generator CB must be directly connected to the generator or it must
be located along the connecting path between the generator and the unit step-up transformer (as shown in
Figures A & B below).
Generator Circuit Breakers are only rated on a symmetrical current basis. In calculating the S factor, the
standard time constant for the DC component specified in IEEE Std. C37.013 1997 is 133 ms for a
generator circuit breaker.
If a circuit breaker is connected in a configuration similar to that shown in Figure C below (Gen CB1),
even if the circuit breaker is flagged as a generator circuit breaker in the editor, the program evaluates the
circuit breaker device duty as regular HVCBs. This method yields conservative results in most cases, but
they are not as accurate as the current per IEEE Std. C37.013 1997. Note that, for an HVCB assigned as a
generator CB even if it is handled as a regular HVCB, the time constant will change to 133ms and it is the
value used in the calculation.
Figure C: Gen CB directly connected in a configuration which will cause

the program to use the ETAP 5.5.0 Method
15-55
Short-Circuit Current Calculation for Generator Circuit Breakers

For a generator circuit breaker, ETAP calculates short-circuit current according to the guidelines specified
in IEEE Std. C37.013 1997. The short-circuit duty calculated includes symmetrical, asymmetrical, and
peak kA for momentary and interrupting duty, as well as the DC kA and degree of asymmetry for
interrupting duty.
For each circuit breaker, it determines short-circuit current when the system side is faulted (generatorsource) and when the generator side is faulted (system-source). For each fault location it calculates shortcircuit current for three generator pre-fault loading conditions: full load at lagging power factor, full load
at leading power factor and no load. The lagging power factor is the generator rated power factor and the
leading power factor can be set from the ETAP ini file. A default value of 95% is used for the leading
power factor. The calculation of short-circuit current for different loading conditions is necessary to
reveal the worst possible fault current values. For example, for the generator-source fault, the worst
asymmetrical duty occurs under lagging load power factor condition, while the worst degree of
asymmetry occurs under leading power factor condition.
System side network used
to determine X/R
Generator Side Fault
System Side Fault
For a fault on the system side of the circuit breaker (generator-source), the short-circuit current through
the circuit breaker is only from the generator. ETAP applies generator full dynamic model in the shortcircuit calculation, including transient and sub-transient impedance and time constant. This complete
model captures the detailed behavior of a generator under short-circuit, including both ac and dc current
decay. Tests have shown that ETAP calculation at no load is within 1% of the value calculated by hand
in Annex C37.013-1997. ETAP is more accurate and more conservative than the hand calculations in the
example based on the standard because ETAP does not ignore the impedances removed from the
equations given in the standard to simplify the hand calculations.
For a fault on the generator side (system-source), the system contribution is the only current flowing
through the circuit breaker. The program uses the system side symmetrical fault current and the X/R
calculated based only on the system side to determine the asymmetrical current. The symmetrical closing
and latching duty is calculated based on the symmetrical and dc fault current at 1/2 cycle.
The plot below displays an asymmetrical generator source short-circuit current and the pattern is identical
to the results shown in Figure A3 from C37.013-1997.
15-56
Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Ph Subsystem Device Duty Short-Circuit Calculation

ETAP can perform device duty short-circuit calculations for 3-phase and 1-phase subsystems. These
subsystems are defined as those connected to the output of a Panel, 1-Phase uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) or 1-phase elements connected below a phase adapter. ETAP performs these calculations if the
options are selected on the Info page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. The program faults every single bus
in the subsystem and it displays the fault current at every bus in the subsystem.
3-Phase Panel Subsystems Short-circuit Current

3-phase subsystems can be connected below panels. These elements are just an extension of the regular
3-phase system and ETAP will perform the device duty for these elements in similar fashion as if these
elements were connected directly to the 3-phase system (i.e. without the 3-phase panel). However, The
only differences are that the short-circuit contributions from the motors in the subsystem are not
considered. This simplification/method is acceptable since in real life applications the size of the motors
connected below 3-Phase panels are small and generally negligible in contributions to a fault.
15-57
The image below shows a 3-Phase panel subsystem with short-circuit results.
3-Ph Panel A and 3-Ph Panel B are similar buses. The image above shows both buses being faulted along
with Panel1, Pnl A and Pnl B. Every location below (and including) Panel1 are faulted when the Run
Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty button is pressed on the short-circuit toolbar. The program
also determines which device short-circuit ratings (momentary, interrupting, close and latch, etc) are
exceeded and it generates warnings in the alert view window or on the one-line diagram by changing the
color of the overstressed device. This mechanism is similar to the regular 3-phase system alert system.
1-Phase Subsystems Short-circuit current

These systems are classified as those with the following phase types: A, B, C, AB, BC, CA, LL, L1, and
L2 (center-tap 3-wire systems). The calculation method used by the program to determine the shortcircuit current depends on the type of connection and phase being faulted. The program considers the
upstream contributions (from the 3-phase system) towards the faulted elements in the 1-phase subsystem
by considering the impedance networks of the 3-phase system (i.e. positive, negative and zero sequence).
The contributions from 1-phase motor loads connected in the 1-phase subsystem are not considered by the
program. The following image shows examples of 1-phase subsystem faults:
15-58
Low voltage Circuit Breaker Device Duty below Panel/1-P UPS/1Ph Subsystem
This calculation is similar to the one for LVCBs connected in a regular three phase system. The cycle
network short-circuit currents are used to evaluate the breaker interrupting and momentary capability.
Low Voltage Fuse Device Duty below Panel/1-P UPS/1Ph Subsystem

This calculation is similar to the one for fuses connected in a regular three phase system. The cycle
network short-circuit currents are used to evaluate the fuse interrupting capability.
Medium Voltage Circuit Breaker Device Duty in 3-Ph or 1-Ph Subsystem

The program uses the cycle short-circuit current to determine the momentary and interrupting duty of
medium voltage circuit breakers connected below Panels/UPS/1Ph subsystems. The use of the cycle
currents for evaluating the interrupting capability should yield more conservative results for this device.
This simplification is applicable for both 3-phase and 1-phase medium voltage breakers. If more accuracy
is needed, then the regular 3-phase short-circuit calculation can be used for 3-phase medium voltage
breakers instead.
Device Duty Evaluation on Protective Devices for Panel Internal Circuits

In the Panel/1 Ph UPS/1Ph Subsystem Device Duty Short-Circuit Calculation, device duty evaluation also
includes protective devices for panel internal circuits. However, in order for ETAP to carry out the
device duty evaluation for an internal circuit, protective device parameters for the circuit must be selected
from the ETAP Library. This can be done from the Protective Device subpage of the Schedule page of
the Panel Editor.
15-59
IEC Calculation Methods
15.6 IEC Calculation Methods

ETAP provides two Short-Circuit Calculation Methods based on ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standards. You can
select the calculation method from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. This section describes the IEC
Standard Method of calculation.
Standard Compliance
ETAP short-circuit calculation per IEC Standards fully complies with the latest IEC documentation as
listed below:
Standard
IEC 62271-100
Pub. Year
2003
Title
High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 100: High-voltage
alternating-current circuit breakers
IEC 62271-200
2003
High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 200: AC metalenclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV
and up to and including 52 kV
IEC 62271-203
2003
High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 203: Gas-insulated

metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages above 52 kV
IEC 60282-2
1997
High-voltage fuses Part2: Expulsion fuses
IEC 61363-1
1998
Electrical installations of ships and mobile and fixed offshore units

Part 1: Procedures for calculating short-circuit currents in threephase a.c.
IEC 60909-0
2001
Short-Circuit Currents in Three-phase a.c. systems - Part 0:

Calculation of Currents (including 2002 corrigendum1) for systems
up to 500 kV.
IEC 60909-1
2002
Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems - Part 1: Factors for

the calculation of short-circuit currents according to IEC-60909-0
IEC 60909-2
1992
Electrical equipment - Data for short-circuit current calculations in

accordance with IEC 909 (1988)
IEC 60909-4
2000
Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems Part 4: Examples

for the calculation of short-circuit currents
IEC 60947-1
2004
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear, Part 1: General rules
IEC 60947-2
2003
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear, Part 2: Circuit breakers
These standards are for short-circuit calculation and equipment rating in AC systems with nominal
voltages operating at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. They cover 3-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-toground faults.
15-60
IEC 60909 and the associated standards classify short-circuit currents according to their magnitudes
(maximum and minimum) and fault distances from the generator (far and near). Maximum short-circuit
currents determine equipment ratings, while minimum currents dictate protective device settings. Near-togenerator and far-from-generator classifications determine whether or not to model the AC component
decay in the calculation, respectively.
IEC 61363-1 Standard calculates the short-circuit current as a function of time and displays its
instantaneous values using the machines subtransient reactance and time constants. This provides an
accurate evaluation of the short-circuit current for sizing protective devices and coordinating relays for
isolated systems such as ships and offshore platforms.
General Description of Calculation Methodology

In IEC short-circuit calculations, an equivalent voltage source at the fault location replaces all voltage
sources. A voltage factor c is applied to adjust the value of the equivalent voltage source for minimum
and maximum current calculations.
All machines are represented by their internal impedances. Transformer taps can be set at either the
nominal position or at an operating position, and different schemes are available to correct transformer
impedance and system voltages if off-nominal tap setting exists. System impedances are assumed to be
balanced 3-phase, and the method of symmetrical components is used for unbalanced fault calculations..
Zero sequence capacitances of transmission lines, cables and shunt admittances can be considered for
unbalanced fault calculations (LG and LLG) if the option in the study case is selected to include branch Y
and static load. This means that the capacitances of static loads and branches are considered based on IEC
60909-0 2001. The basic model used to consider these shunt admittances is shown below:
Calculations consider electrical distance from the fault location to synchronous generators. For a farfrom-generator fault, calculations assume that the steady-state value of the short-circuit current is equal to
the initial symmetrical short-circuit current and only the DC component decays to zero. However, for a
near-to-generator fault, calculations count for decaying in both AC and DC components. The equivalent
R/X ratios determine the rates of decay of both components, and different values are recommended for
generators and motors near the fault.
Calculations also differ for meshed and unmeshed networks. The factor , which is used to multiply the
initial short-circuit current to get the peak short-circuit current ip, is defined differently for different
system configurations and the methods selected to calculate the R/X ratios.
15-61
Definition of Terms
IEC Standards use the following definitions, which are relevant in the calculations and outputs of ETAP.
Initial Symmetrical Short-Circuit current (Ik)

This is the rms value of the AC symmetrical component of an available short-circuit current applicable at
the instant of short-circuit if the impedance remains at zero time value.
Peak Short-Circuit Current (ip)

This is the maximum possible instantaneous value of the available short-circuit current.
Symmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current (Ib)

This is the rms value of an integral cycle of the symmetrical AC component of the available short-circuit
current at the instant of contact separation of the first pole of a switching device.
Steady-State Short-Circuit Current (Ik)

This is the rms value of the short-circuit current, which remains after the decay of the transient
phenomena.
Subtransient Voltage (E) of a Synchronous Machine

This is the rms value of the symmetrical internal voltage of a synchronous machine which is active behind
the subtransient reactance Xd at the moment of short-circuit.
Far-From-Generator Short-Circuit
This is a short-circuit condition during which the magnitude of the symmetrical AC component of
available short-circuit current remains essentially constant.
Near-To-Generator Short-Circuit
This is a short-circuit condition to which at least one synchronous machine contributes a prospective
initial short-circuit current which is more than twice the generators rated current, or a short-circuit
condition to which synchronous and asynchronous motors contribute more than 5% of the initial
symmetrical short-circuit current (Ik) without motors.
Subtransient Reactance (Xd) of a Synchronous Machine

This is the effective reactance at the moment of short-circuit. For the calculation of short-circuit currents,
the saturated value of (Xd) is taken.
According to IEC Standard 60909-0, the synchronous motor impedance used in IEC short-circuit
calculations is calculated in the same way as the synchronous generator.
ZK = KG(R+ Xd)
kVn cmax
KG = kVr(1+Xd sin r))
where kVn and kVr are the nominal voltage of the terminal bus and the motor rated voltage respectively,
cmax is determined based on machine rated voltage, Xd is machine subtransient reactance (per unit in
motor base), and qr is the machine rated power factor angle.
Minimum Time Delay (Tmin) of a Circuit Breaker

This is the shortest time between the beginning of the short-circuit current and the first contact separation
of one pole of the switching device.
15-62
The time delay (Tmin) is the sum of the shortest possible operating time of an instantaneous relay and the
shortest opening time of a circuit breaker. Minimum time delay does not include the adjustable time
delays of tripping devices.
Voltage Factor c
This is the factor used to adjust the value of the equivalent voltage source for minimum and maximum
current calculations according to the following table:
Voltage Factor c
For Maximum Short-Circuit
Current Calculation
For Minimum Short-Circuit

Current Calculation
cmax
cmin
1.1
1.10
1.10
0.95
1.00
1.00
Nominal Voltage Un
Others < 1001 V
Medium voltage: > 1 kV to 35 kV
High voltage: > 35 kV to 230 kV
ETAP provides three options for you to select the c factors in the Short-Circuit Current Group of the
Standard page of the Study Case: Max, User-Defined c Factors, and Min. If the Max option is selected,
the maximum values given in the cmax column will be used in the calculation. If the User-Defined c Factor
option is selected, the user specified c factor values will be used. The user-defined values must be in the
range between the values given in the cmax and cmin columns. If the Min option is selected, the minimum
values given in the cmin column will be used in the calculation.
Calculation Methods
Initial Symmetrical Short-Circuit Current Calculation
Initial symmetrical short-circuit current (Ik) is calculated using the following formula:
I"k =
cU n
3Z k
Where Zk is the equivalent impedance at the fault location
Peak Short-Circuit Current Calculation

Peak short-circuit current (ip) is calculated using the following formula:
i p = 2 kI " k
where k is a function of the system R/X ratio at the fault location
IEC Standards provide three methods for calculating the k factor:
Method A - Uniform ratio R/X. The value of the k factor is determined from taking the smallest ratio
of R/X of all the branches of the network. Only branches that contain a total of 80 percent of the
current at the nominal voltage corresponding to the short-circuit location are included. Branches may
be a series combination of several elements.
15-63
Method B - R/X ratio at the short-circuit location. The value of the k factor is determined by
multiplying the k factor by a safety factor of 1.15, which covers inaccuracies caused after obtaining
the R/X ratio from a network reduction with complex impedances.
Method C - Equivalent frequency. The value of the k factor is calculated using a frequency-altered
R/X. R/X is calculated at a lower frequency and then multiplied by a frequency-dependent
multiplying factor.
Symmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current Calculation

For a far-from-generator fault, the symmetrical short-circuit breaking current (Ib) is equal to the initial
symmetrical short-circuit current.
Ib = I"k
For a near-to-generator fault, Ib is obtained by combining contributions from each individual machine. Ib
for different types of machines is calculated using the following formula:
I " k
Ib =
qI " k
for synchronous machines

for asynchronous machines
where and q are factors that account for AC decay

They are functions of the ratio of the minimum time delay and the ratio of the machines initial shortcircuit current to its rated current, as well as real power per pair of poles of asynchronous machines.
IEC Standards allow you to include or exclude AC decay effect from asynchronous machines in the
calculation.
DC Component of Short-Circuit Current Calculation

The DC component of the short-circuit current for the minimum delay time of a protective device is
calculated based on initial symmetrical short-circuit current and system X/R ratio:
2ft min
"
I dc = I k 2exp
X /R
Where f is the system frequency, tmin is the minimum delay time of the protective device under concern,
and X/R is the system value at the faulted bus.
ETAP plots the dc component of the fault current vs. time. The Idc component is printed in the Breaking
and DC Fault Current (kA) section of the short-circuit report for each fault location. The currents in this
report are always based on the total bus fault current.
Asymmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current Calculation

The asymmetrical short-circuit breaking current for comparison with circuit breaker rating is calculated as
the rms value of symmetrical and DC components of the short-circuit current.
15-64
ETAP plots the asymmetrical breaking current at every bus starting from 0.01 until 0.3 sec. This
information can be used in the selection of the circuit breaker breaking current depending on the tmin value
of the device. The Ibasym is printed in the Breaking and DC Fault Current (kA) section of the shortcircuit report for each fault location. The currents in this report are always based on the total bus fault
current.
Steady-State Short-Circuit Current Calculation

Steady-state short-circuit current Ik is a combination of contributions from synchronous generators and
power grid. Ik for each synchronous generator is calculated using the following formula:
I k max = max I rG
I k min = min I rG
where is a function of a generators excitation voltage, ratio between its initial symmetrical short-circuit
current and rated current, other generator parameters, and IrG is the generators rated current.
The steady-state short-circuit current calculated is dependent on the option selected for Short-circuit
current in the Study Case. If the Max and User-Defined c Factor is selected, the maximum steady-state
current short-circuit is reported. If the Min option is selected, the minimum steady-state short-circuit
current is reported.
This maximum steady-state short-circuit current is used to determine minimum device ratings. The
minimum steady-state short-circuit value is used for relay coordination purposes in preventing the
occurrence of nuisance trips and loading deviations.
Meshed and Non-Meshed Network

According to IEC 60909-0 Standard, short-circuit contributions from meshed and non-meshed sources are
calculated differently regarding various factors and R/X ratio. In ETAP calculations, the short-circuit
contribution in the following cases is considered as from a non-meshed network:
A contributing machine is connected directly to the faulted bus.
A contributing machine is connected to the faulted bus through a radial network in which the machine
is the only source making short-circuit contribution to the faulted bus.
In all other cases, the short-circuit contributions are considered as from a meshed network.
Adjustment of Ib
According to IEC Standard 60909-0, to improve accuracy of Ib calculation for a near-to-generator threephase short-circuit in a meshed network, the breaking current can be adjusted for decay in Ib from
synchronous and induction machines based on Equation (75) of the standard. This adjustment will reduce
Ib slightly from Ik.
15-65
In ETAP, this adjustment is implemented according to Equation (75) for each sub-network that has nearto-generator short-circuit contributions to the faulted bus. A sub-network with respect to a given faulted
bus includes all elements that are connected together, except through the faulted bus. When a sub-network
has multiple contributions to a faulted bus, the total Ib adjustment (a phase value) is distributed among all
contributions from the sub-network based on the phase ratio of individual Ik contribution over total Ik of
all the contributions from the sub-network.
Modeling of Power Station Unit

According to IEC Standard 60909-0, sections 3.7, 4.2.13, and 4.2.14, the impedance of a power station
unit needs to be modeled with special considerations. Depending on where the fault location is in the
system and if the unit transformer has on-load tap-changer, the impedance values of the generator and
unit transformer will be adjusted by different factors.
Designation of a Power Station Unit

To specify a synchronous generator and a two-winding transformer as a power station unit, check the
Unit Transformer for Generator option in the Tap page of the 2-Winding Transformer Editor and select
the generator in the list next to this field as the unit generator.
Note: A generator can be selected as a unit generator for only one unit transformer.
In short-circuit calculation, the generator and the transformer specified as a pair for a power unit will be
modeled as a power unit only when both the generator and the transformer are energized. If the
transformer is not energized, the generator will be modeled as a regular generator. If the generator is not
energized, the transformer will be modeled as a network transformer. The generator and the transformer
specified as a pair for a power unit must also be connected either directly or through branches other than
transformers; otherwise, they will be modeled as a regular generator and a network transformer.
Network Bus, Connecting Bus and Auxiliary System Bus for a Power Station Unit
According to IEC Standard 60909-0, the generator and the transformer in a power station unit will be
modeled differently depending on the fault location. In ETAP, a faulted bus can be classified as one of
three types with respect to a power station unit: a network bus, a connecting bus, and an auxiliary system
bus.
A connecting bus for a power station unit is the bus on the shortest connecting path between the unit
generator and the unit transformer. ETAP automatically determines the connecting path and connecting
buses for a power station unit.
An auxiliary bus is a bus that is in the auxiliary system of a power station unit, but not a connecting bus.
The auxiliary system includes all the elements that are connected to the connecting buses without going
across the unit transformer.
Network buses are all the rest of the buses that are neither connecting buses nor auxiliary buses.
Note: Bus type designation is with respect to a given power station unit. For the system given below,
generator Unit-Gen and transformer Unit-XFMR forms a power station unit. For this power station unit,
Gen-Bus is the connecting bus for the power station unit. Auxiliary system buses include Aux-Bus-1 and
Aux-Bus-2. The rest pf the buses are all network buses.
15-66
IEC Short-Circuit Mesh Determination Method

IEC Standards have published different benchmark sample calculation results based on IEC Standard
60909-0 2001. These calculation examples have been published in IEC Standard 60909-4 2000 and are
described in detail in sections 3.1, 4.1, 5.1 and 6.1 of IEC 60909-4. These examples appear to have been
created mostly for hand-calculation (except for example 4), and one problem which arises because of
these multiple solutions is that they do not establish a single calculation method which produces
consistent results for all four examples for a computer based solution. Because of these inconsistencies in
the standard, certain calculation assumptions have been added to ETAPs short-circuit program in order
for the results to match those published in these four examples.
These calculation preferences affect the selection of calculation methods for Idc, Ib and Ik. One of the
most important causes of the inconsistencies in the standard is the method used to determine the meshed
or non-meshed (radial) parts of the systems. This determination is very important since the results are
affected considerably once this determination is made.
Meshed/Non-Meshed Systems
A meshed system can be considered a looped system or one that has multiple source contributions meshed
together through the same contributing branch. A non-meshed system is defined as a radial system or one
which has only one contribution passing through a branch towards the faulted bus. The following images
illustrate the concept of meshed and non-meshed as described by IEC Standard 60909-0 2001:
15-67
IEC 60909-0
IEC 60909-4
The areas enclosed in red color represent the Meshed contributions in this system towards the faulted
buses. The areas enclosed in green color represent the non-meshed (radial) contributions to their
connected bus. In other words, the contributions of G2, G1, G3, M3 and M2 are considered to be nonmeshed as long as the fault is placed at the bus to which they are connected. These same contributions
could be handled as meshed contributions to faults in other parts of the system.
These engineering calculation preferences can be modified by changing the value of the entry IEC ShortCircuit Mesh Determination Method from the ETAP Options (Preferences) menu.
This entry can take on the value of 0, 1 or 2.
15-68
IEC Short-Circuit Mesh Determination Method = 0

For a faulted bus, ETAP checks if any contributions can be classified as Meshed network contributions. If
any contribution to a faulted bus is indeed classified as Meshed, then all contributions to the bus will be
treated as if they are coming from a meshed network. If none of the contributions can be classified as
meshed, then all the contributions are treated as coming from non-meshed parts of the system. In Figure
16 above, all buses can be classified as meshed since meshed contributions are part of every bus faulted
bus in the system. In Figure 12, all the contributions would be considered as non-meshed since none of
them are considered to be meshed.
For a faulted bus, meshed or non-meshed contributions are determined based on individual contributions.
That is, for non-meshed contributions, ETAP uses individual branch R/X ratios. For all the meshed
network contributions it uses the R/X of the equivalent meshed part of the system. For Figure 16, the
program will determine that the contributions of G1 and G2 are non-meshed for a fault at Bus 4 and 3.
The rest of the contributions to these faulted buses will be handled as meshed.
If a faulted bus is part of a PowerStation unit group (generator, unit transformer and auxiliary load
connecting bus), then ETAP will handle this part of the system with the methodology described for option
= 1. If the faulted bus is outside the PowerStation group (network bus), then ETAP will handle the
meshed/non-meshed determination as if option = 0 had been selected.
Impact of the Meshed/Non-Meshed Determination on Ib, Ik and Idc
Once the program has determined the meshed and non-meshed parts of the system, then it makes some
decisions based on this for calculating the value of Ib, Idc and Ik as described throughout IEC Standard
60909-0 2001.
1) Idc: If the branch contribution is considered to be coming from a non-meshed source, then the
R/X of the individual branch is used to determine the value of the Idc coming into the faulted bus.
The equivalent R/X value of the meshed network will be used to determine the value of Idc for
the meshed contributions. Please see sections 4.3.1.1, 4.3.1.2 and 4.4.
2) Ib: If a contribution is non-meshed, then the program will use the method described in section
4.5.2.2 Equations 71 and 72 to determine the contributions of Ib from different non-meshed
components. If the system is meshed, then the program uses a very different approach to
determine Ib, it will use section 4.5.2.3 Equations 74 and 75 to determine the value of Ib.
3) Ik: If the contribution or system is considered to be non-meshed, then the program will use the
method described in section 4.6.2 Equations 82 and 83. If the contribution of the system is
considered to be meshed, then the program will use the method described in section 4.6.3
Equations 84 and 85 to determine Ik. Note that the use of these equations may result in the value
of Ik being higher than Ib as can be observed in the results published in IEC Standard 60909-4
2000 for Example 4.
From the previous description in items 1-3, it becomes apparent that the determination of meshed and
non-meshed parts of the system can have a drastic effect on the results. The options that ETAP provides
are designed to provide choices on how the analysis should be performed. Comparison of Device Rating
and Short-Circuit Duty
15-69
In the 3-phase Device Duty calculation, ETAP compares the protective device rating against bus shortcurrent duty for the devices that are checked as complying with IEC Standard and also have device rating
entered. In case the short-circuit duty is greater than the device duty, ETAP will flag the device as
underrated in both one-line diagram and output reports. The following table lists the device ratings and
short-circuit duties used for the comparison for MVCB, LVCB, and fuses:
Device Type
Device Capability
Short-Circuit
Current Duty
MVCB
ip
Making
AC Breaking
Ib,symm
Ib, asymm
Ib,asymm *
Idc *
Ithr
LVCB
Ith
Ip
Ib,symm
Ib,asymm
Ith
Ib,symm
Ib,asymm
Making
Breaking
Ib,asymm *
Ithr
Fuse
Breaking
Ib,asymm *
Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Current Duty

*Device capability calculated by ETAP
Calculation of IEC Device Capability

As shown in the above table, some of the device capability values are calculated by ETAP based on
capability provided by users and default parameters given in IEC Standards.
MVCB The asymmetrical breaking and DC current ratings for MVCB are calculated as follows:
I b , Asymm = I b , Symm 1 + 2e
I dc = I b , symm ( 2 )e
( 2 T min
)
t min
where tmin is the minimum delay time and Ib,symm is the AC breaking current provided by the user.
Following IEC Standard 62271-100, is equal to 45 milliseconds.
LVCB The asymmetrical breaking current rating for LVCB is calculated as follows:
4ft min
I b,asymm = I b,symm 1 + 2 exp
X /R
15-70
where f is the system frequency, tmin is the minimum delay time, and Ib,symm is the breaking current
provided by the user. X/R is calculated based on a testing PF given in IEC Standard 60947-2, Table
11.
Fuse The asymmetrical breaking current rating for fuse is calculated as follows:
4ft min
I b,asymm = I b,symm 1 + 2 exp
X /R
where f is the system frequency, tmin is assumed to be a half cycle, and Ib,symm is the breaking current
provided by the user. X/R is calculated based on the default testing PF of 15 %.
Ithr The thermal withstand short-circuit current capability for LVCB and MVCB is calculated based
on specifications on IEC 60909-0 2001 Annex A as follows:
Tk
2
"
2
i dt = I K ( m + n )TK = I thTK
2
I th = I "K m + n
2
2
'
"

Td'
Td'
I K'
20TK / Td' I K
20TK / Td' I K
1 +
+
1 +
1 e
1 e
2
I
I
T
20TK
K
K
K

IK
'
2
'
'
"
'
'
'
2
T
T
I
I
I
1
d
1 e 10TK / Td K K + d 1 e TK / Td K 1 +
n= "
2
( I K / I K ) 5TK
TK
IK
IK IK
"
'
'
T'
I K I K
11TK / Td' I K
d
1 e
I I I 1
5,5TK
K
K K
m=
1
e 4* fTK ln( k 1) 1
2 fTK ln(k 1)
These equations represent the Joule Integral and the equivalent short-circuit current Ith that ETAP
determines in order to compare against the value of Ithr specified on the Circuit breaker rating page (LV or
MV).
ETAP compares the Circuit Breaker (CB) rated short-time withstand current (Ithr) with the calculated
thermal equivalent short-circuit current (Ith). The time for Ithr and Ith is the breaker rated short-time in
seconds (Tkr). The Comparison is reported in the Summary report.
You can select or enter Ithr and Tkr on the Rating page of the circuit breaker editor. For example you can
enter 1.0s for Tkr.
15-71
Transient Short-Circuit Calculation

In additional to device duty calculations, ETAP also provides transient short-circuit calculation per IEC
Standard 61363-1. The transient short-circuit calculation presents fault current waveforms as a function of
time, considering a number of factors that affect short-circuit current variations at different time after the
fault. These factors include synchronous machine subtransient reactance, transient reactance, reactance,
subtransient time constant, transient time constant, and DC time constant. It also considers decay of shortcircuit contributions from induction motors. This detailed modeling provides an accurate evaluation of the
short-circuit current for sizing protective devices and coordinating relays for isolated systems such as
ships and offshore platforms. The calculation can be conducted on both radial and looped system with one
or multiply sources.
The IEC 61363-1 performed by ETAP applies to both meshed and non-meshed systems since it is
unrealistic to expect an electrical system to be completely non-meshed. The same approach is used to
determine the contributions from meshed systems as is used for non-meshed systems since there is no
other methodology provided in the guideline to handle the transient short-circuit currents for meshed
systems.
As calculation results, ETAP provides short-circuit current as function of time up to 0.1 second at 0.001
second time increment. It also presents short-circuit current as function of cycles up to 1 cycle at 0.1 cycle
increment. Along with the instantaneous current values, ETAP also furnish calculated AC component, DC
component, as well as top envelope of the current waveform. In the summary page, it also provides the
subtransient, transient, and steady-state fault current for each bus.
15-72
AC-DC Converter Models
15.7 AC-DC Converter Models

Charger
When performing AC analyses, chargers and UPSs are considered as loads to their input AC buses. The
rectifiers in these elements block the current from flowing back into the AC system. Therefore, chargers
and UPSs are not included in an AC Short-Circuit Analysis.
3-Phase UPS in 3-Phase System Calculation

The 3-Ph UPS element is modeled as a voltage source behind impedance in 3-phase system short-circuit
calculations. This impedance is determined from the short-circuit current contribution (specified on the
SC Imp page of the UPS editor). This impedance value is determined using the rated output kV of the
UPS and the Isc fault current value. The maximum UPS current contribution will be limited by the
equivalent impedance of the UPS. It is a function of the pre-fault voltage at the faulted buses downstream
of the UPS.
The 3-Ph UPS has a bypass switch. If the bypass switch is open, then the UPS contribution is determined
from its internal impedance as described above. If the bypass is closed, then there is a tie-pd connection
between the input and output which allows the direct contribution of a short-circuit current towards the
output of the UPS. The bypass is not allowed if the UPS rated output voltage is not the same as the UPS
rated input voltage. If a bypass needs to be modeled under these conditions, then an external transformer
which steps the voltage up/down would be required and the UPS output and input voltage should then be
set to the same value.
The 3-Ph UPS output is modeled as a part of the regular 3-Ph short-circuit calculations. All short-circuit
calculations, except for the 1-Ph device duty calculation (Panel/1-Ph UPS/1-Phase System Device Duty),
model the 3-Ph UPS as an equivalent impedance behind an ideal voltage source. Since the 3-Ph UPS is
modeled as a part of the regular 3-Ph short-circuit network, it means that the UPS output can be operated
in loop configurations. This is a major enhancement for modeling short-circuit faults for higher reliability
designs (i.e. data centers) with multiple UPS units operating in parallel or looped systems. The following
image shows the short-circuit results for a looped 3-Ph UPS system.
15-73
The 3-Ph UPS has a grounding option which allows the unit to be modeled as solidly grounded or
ungrounded on the output terminal. Checking the Grounded option allows zero sequence currents to
flow for an unbalanced (i.e. phase to neutral) fault. The negative and zero sequence impedance of the 3Ph UPS are the same as the positive sequence. The grounding resistance Rg at the output is not
considered at this time.
15-74
UPS Modeling in 1-Phase System Calculation

UPS elements involved in 1-Ph device duty short-circuit calculations are mostly 1-ph UPS. However,
there can be 3-Ph UPS powered by a panel and it will be modeled the same way as a 1-Ph UPS described
in this section. The 1-Ph UPS element uses a slightly different modeling approach. The 1-Ph UPS output
short-circuit is modeled only as part of the 1-Ph device duty short-circuit calculation.
The modeling of the 1-Ph UPS consists of an impedance behind the prefault voltage or as a constant
current source. If the 1-Ph UPS is modeled as an impedance behind a voltage source, then its contribution
is determined similarly as the 3-Ph UPS in 3-Ph system calculations. The resistance of the UPS is
determined using the rated output voltage and rated Isc of the unit.
If the 1-Ph UPS is modeled as a constant current source, then it will provide a constant current towards
the fault location as long as the impedance between the output of the UPS and the fault location does not
limit the current below the rated Isc value. If it does, then the SC current is limited by the impedance of
the circuit up to the point of the fault. The following image illustrates this concept.
The impedance of the cable UPS Fdr Cab is high enough to limit the current below the rated Isc value
of the 1-Ph UPS. In the case of Panel A1, the impedance of the cable UPS Fdr Cab1 is not high enough
to limit the current below the constant current rating of the 1-Ph UPS1 unit.
The following image shows the voltage behind impedance results for the same pair of UPS units. In this
case, the short-circuit current of the 1-Ph UPS units can only be equal to Isc if the fault is at the output
terminals of the UPS. If the fault is anywhere downstream from the UPS output terminal (i.e. with
additional circuit impedance), then the fault current will be less and is limited by the sum of the UPS
equivalent resistance plus the impedance of the downstream output elements.
15-75
Inverter / Photo Voltaic (PV) Array / Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) Type 4
An inverter is a voltage source to the AC system. Under fault conditions, it will provide fault contribution
to the AC system. When its terminal bus is faulted, the contribution from an inverter is equal to the
multiplication of its AC full load amp by a constant K, which is entered on the Rating page of the Inverter
editor or Imp/Model page of the WTG editor. This is the maximum possible contribution from the
inverter. If the fault location is away from the terminal bus, then the contribution from the inverter
decreases. The inverter is modeled similar to that of the 3-Ph UPS.
The inverter elements have a grounding option which allows the units to be modeled as solidly grounded
or ungrounded on their output terminal. Checking the Grounded option allows zero sequence currents
to flow for an unbalanced (i.e. phase to neutral) fault. The negative and zero sequence impedance of the
inverter units are the same as the positive sequence (Rn = R0 = Rp). The grounding resistance Rg at the
output is not considered at this time.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

With the bypass switch for short-circuit set to open, the VFD element is modeled as a voltage source
behind an impedance. The resistance of the VFD is determined from the rated output voltage and Isc of
the unit. Similar to the 3-Ph UPS and Inverter elements, the short-circuit contribution is determined
assuming a voltage behind impedance approach. With the bypass switch open, no short-circuit
contribution from any motors on the output of the VFD can flow towards a fault on the input AC bus of
the VFD. This is due to the fact that the rectifiers in VFD block the current from flowing back into the
input AC system. The bypass is not allowed if the VFD rated output voltage is not the same as the VFD
rated input voltage.
15-76
There is no VFD operating output frequency variation considered for short-circuit calculations on the
output side of the VFD. This means that the short-circuit calculation for a VFD (with the bypass switch
open) only considers the system nominal frequency (typically 50/60 Hz or as defined in the Project
\Standards\Frequency value). The operating frequency and V/Hz settings do not have any effect in the
short-circuit current calculation. The effect of operating output frequency will be considered for both
short-circuit and arc flash in future versions of the program.
If the bypass switch condition is set to closed, then the VFD is not considered and the short-circuit
current flows directly from the input AC bus into the output of the unit and vice versa (similar to a tieprotective device). Also, any motor short-circuit contribution from the electrical network on the output
AC bus of the VFD can flow towards a fault on the input AC bus of the VFD. The following image
illustrates short-circuit results (at nominal system frequency) for the VFD with bypass switch open and
closed. It can be seen that full contribution from the AC Input bus flows into the VFD output fault and
that the output motor contributes towards a fault on the input AC bus with the bypass closed.
The VFD element has a grounding option which allows the unit to be modeled as solidly grounded or
ungrounded on its output terminal. Checking the Grounded option allows zero sequence currents to
flow for an unbalanced (i.e. phase to neutral) fault. The negative and zero sequence impedance of the
VFD unit are the same as the positive sequence (Rn = R0 = Rp). The grounding resistance Rg at the
output is not considered at this time.
Note: For Short-circuit / Arc-Flash studies: If you attempt to change the system nominal frequency by
changing the Project\Standards\Frequency setting, then all reactances need to be adjusted manually or
obtained again from the library (in case of cables), in order to adjust the reactances (which are typically
entered at nominal frequency). The program does not adjust most reactances automatically.
15-77
The reason for this is that in most cases the reactance is specified in the libraries and impedance fields at
nominal frequencies instead of specifying the actual inductance or capacitance (L & C) of the elements.
Careful considerations should be taken when performing such frequency manipulations.
However, for other load flow based studies, the reactances of all branch elements and loads are adjusted
based on the operating output frequency of the VFD. This means that the effect of frequency variations
for motor dynamic acceleration or for steady-state load flow VFD operation is considered. The frequency
limitation on the output of the VFD applies only to short-circuit based studies including sequence of
operation and STAR short-circuit.
High Voltage DC Link (HVDC)

When a bus on the inverter side of a high voltage DC link is faulted, the DC link will make short-circuit
contribution. Due to the application of Voltage Dependent Current Order Limiter (VDCOL), which is
very common in a DC link, the short-circuit contribution is limited about 150% of rated current and it
lasts only about 1.5 cycle.
In ETAP short-circuit calculations, a DC link is represented as a constant voltage source behind an
equivalent reactance. The voltage source has a constant voltage value equal to the prefault voltage. The
equivalent reactance is determined so that if a 3-phase short-circuit fault occurs at the inverter side
terminal bus, the contribution from the DC link is equal to maximum operating current Imax.
Due to the very short duration of short-circuit current contribution from a DC link, for ANSI Standard,
ETAP considers the contribution only in cycle (momentary) short-circuit current calculation. For IEC
Standard, the contribution is included only in calculation of ip, Ik, Ib, and Idc.
15-78
Required Data
15.8 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for short-circuit calculation for buses include:
Nominal kV (when the prefault voltage option is set to use nominal kV)
%V (when the prefault voltage option is set to use bus voltage)
Type (such as MCC, switchgear, etc.) and continuous and bracing ratings
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors (i.e., 3-Winding Transformer, 2-Winding Transformer,
Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and Impedance). Required data for short-circuit calculations for
branches include:
Branch Z, R, X, Y, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperatures, if applicable

Cable and transmission line length and unit
Transformer rated kV and MVA
Base kV and MVA of impedance branches
For unbalanced short-circuit calculations you will also need:
Zero sequence impedances
Transformer winding connections, grounding types, and grounding parameters
Power Grid Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for utilities include:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle
3-Phase MVAsc and X/R
For unbalanced short-circuit calculations, you will also need:
Grounding types and parameters

Single-Phase MVAsc and X/R
Synchronous Generator Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous generators include:
Rated MW, kV, and power factor

Xd, Xd, Xd/Ra, X2/R2, X0/R0, Ra, R2, R0.
Generator type
IEC exciter type
15-79
Required Data

X0 (Zero Sequence Impedance)
X2 (Negative Sequence Impedance)
Synchronous Motor Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous motor includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV and the number of poles

Xd, Xd/Ra, X2/R2, X0/R0, Ra, R2, R0.
% LRC, Xd, and Tdo for IEC short-circuit calculation

Induction Motor Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for induction motors include:
Rated kW/hp and kV

X/R plus one of the following for ANSI Short-Circuit calculation:
Xsc at cycle and 1.5-4 cycle if ANSI Short-Circuit Z option is set to Xsc, or
%LRC if ANSI Short-Circuit Z option is set to Std MF
% LRC, Locked Rotor RF and Td (IEC 363) for IEC short-circuit calculations

X0
Lumped Load Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for lumped load includes:
Rated MVA and kV

% motor load
% LRC, X/R, and Xsc for cycle and 1.5-4 cycle for ANSI Short-Circuit calculation
% LRC, X, m and Td(IEC 363) for IEC short-circuit calculation
Additional data for unbalanced short-circuit calculations include:
Inverter Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for inverters include:
15-80
Required Data
Rated kW, kV, and power factor

K factor in the Rating page
AC grounding status
UPS Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for UPS include:

Kac factor in the SC Impedance page
AC secondary grounding status
VFD Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for VFDs connected to a bus on output side include:
Rated HP, kV, and power factor

Output grounding status
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for high voltage circuit breakers include:
ANSI Standard Circuit Breaker:
Max kV
Rated Int. (rated interrupting capability)
Max Int. (maximum interrupting capability)
C & L rms (rms value of closing and latching capability)
C & L Crest (crest value of closing and latching capability)
Standard
Cycle
IEC Standard Circuit Breaker:
Rated kV
Min. Delay (minimum delay time in second)
Making (peak current)
AC Breaking (rms AC breaking capability)
Ithr (short-circuit withstand current)
15-81
Required Data
Tk (duration of short-circuit withstand current)
ETAP calculates the interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker from the rated and maximum interrupting
capabilities. This value is calculated at the nominal kV of the bus that the circuit breaker is connected to.
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for low voltage circuit breakers include:
Type (power, molded case, or insulated case)

Rated kV
Interrupting (interrupting capability)
Test PF

Rated kV
Breaking (rms AC breaking capability)
Fuse Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for fuses include:
Fuse ID
ANSI Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Test PF
IEC Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Test PF
Other Data
There are some Study Case related data, which must also be provided, and you can enter this data into the
Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The data includes:
Standard (ANSI/IEC)
XFMR tap option (transformer tap modeling method)
15-82
Required Data
Prefault voltage
Report (report format)
Machine X/R (machine X/R modeling method)
Faulted buses
Cable/OL Heater (select this option to include cable and overload heater elements)
Bus Duct
The bus duct element does not have any impedance and it will not limit any fault currents. Currently it is
just a symbol which illustrates the presence of the element in the actual system. In reality, bus duct
elements have impedance and its effect will be considered in a future version of ETAP.
Open Delta Transformers

The current version of ETAP does not perform any short-circuit calculations below open-delta
transformers. This will be done in a future release of the program.
15-83
Output Reports
15.9 Output Reports

ETAP provides short-Circuit Study Output Reports with different levels of detail, depending on your
requirements. The following are just some examples that show this flexibility. ETAP 5.0.0 reports show
total and individual fault current contributions for all the different types of faults (3-phase, LG, LL &
LLG).
15.9.1 View Output Reports from Study Case Toolbar

This is a shortcut for the Report Manager. When you click on the View Output Report button, ETAP
automatically opens the output report that is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format. In
the picture shown below, the output report name is short-circuit-Duty and the selected format is
Complete.
15.9.2 Short-Circuit Report Manager

To open the Short-Circuit Report Manager, simply click on the Report Manager button on the ShortCircuit Study toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary)
representing different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats
available for different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and
buttons common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the output report you want to view.
15-84
Output Reports
Project File Name

This field displays the name of the project file based on which report was generated, along with the
directory where the project file is located.
Help
Click on this button to access Help.
OK/Cancel
Click on the OK button to close the editor and open the Crystal Reports view to show the selected portion
of the output report. If no selection is made, it will simply close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to
close the editor without viewing the report.
15.9.3 Input Data Page

This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type,
including Bus, Cable, Cover, Adjustments, Generator, Loads, Reactor, Transformer, UPS, and Utility.
15-85
Output Reports
15-86
Output Reports
15.9.4 Results Page

This page allows you to select formats to view the Short-Circuit Result portion of the Output Report. If
you run a 3-phase fault, there is only one Short-Circuit Report format shown in the Report Manager. If
you run an unbalanced fault calculation, the results section will include short-circuit reports that include
individual contributions for LG, LL, & LLG faults. The same applies for IEC 3-phase or unbalanced
faults.
15-87
Output Reports
Short-Circuit Report
Load Terminal Fault Report
15-88
Output Reports
15.9.5 Summary Page

This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the Output Report.
15-89
Output Reports
15.9.6 Complete Page

In this page you can select the Complete report in Crystal Reports format, which brings up the complete
report for the Short-Circuit Study. The Complete report includes input data, results, and Summary reports.
You can open and save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text format, or Excel format. If you wish this
selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
15-90
Output Reports
15-91
Alert View
15.10 Alert View

To make it easier for you to check the device ratings after a device duty calculation, ETAP provides a
Short-Circuit Analysis Alert View that lists all devices that have a critical or marginal rating violation.
Open this view by clicking on the Alert View button. If the Auto Display box is checked in the Study
Case, the Alert View will be automatically open once the device duty short-circuit calculation is
completed.
15.10.1 Alert View Entries

Device ID
The Device Identification group of the Alert View window lists the names of the components that
qualified as alerts after the short-circuit calculation.
Type
The Type group of the Alert View window displays information about the type of the device having the
displayed alert.
Rating
The Rating group of the Alert View window provides the rating information being used to determine
whether an alert should be reported and of what kind of alert was found.
15-92
Alert View
Calculated
The Calculated group of the Alert View window displays the results (duty) from the short-circuit
calculation. The results listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to
determine the operating percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the ShortCircuit Study Case Editor Alarm page.
%Value
This group displays the percent operating values calculated based on the short-circuit results and the
different device ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of monitored
parameters entered directly into the Study Case Editor Alarm page. Based on the element type, system
topology and given conditions, ETAP uses these percent values to determine if and what kind of alert
should be displayed.
Condition
The Conditions group of the Alert View Window provides a brief comment about the type of alert being
reported. In the case of short-circuit alarms, the different conditions reported are the same as those listed
in the bus and protective device monitored parameters tables.
Phase
In future releases of ETAP, alerts for unbalanced fault conditions will be provided. Currently ETAP only
provides alerts for 3-phase faults (ANSI & IEC Duty).
15.10.2 Parameters Monitored and Conditions Reported

Bus Alert
Short-circuit simulation alerts for buses are designed to monitor crest, symmetrical, and asymmetrical
bracing conditions. These conditions are determined from bus rating values and Short-Circuit Analysis
results. The conditions reported for buses are the same for ANSI and IEC Project Standards. The
following table contains a list of monitored parameters and the conditions that their corresponding alerts
report.
Bus Alerts Monitored Parameters and Condition Reported

Type of Device
HV Bus (> 1000 Volts)
LV Bus (<1000Volts)
Monitored Parameter
Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA
Condition Reported
Bracing Asymmetrical
Momentary Asymmetrical. crest kA
Bracing Crest
Momentary Symmetrical. rms kA
Bracing Symmetrical
Bracing Asymmetrical

Short-circuit alerts monitor certain conditions of interest for both ANSI and IEC Project Standards. The
conditions reported by the alerts depend on whether you run ANSI or IEC Short-Circuit Analysis. ANSI
and IEC Standards have different sets of monitored parameters. The following table contains a list of
monitored parameters used for both standards.
15-93
Alert View
Protective Alerts Monitored Parameters

Device Type
LVCB
HVCB
FUSE
SPDT
SPST Switches
ANSI Monitored Parameters

Interrupting Adjusted Symmetrical. rms kA
Momentary C&L
Momentary C&L Crest kA
IEC Monitored Parameters

Breaking
Making
N/A
Breaking
Breaking
Making
Making
Short-circuit alerts for protective devices report different conditions depending on the monitored
parameters. The following table contains a list of the corresponding conditions reported in the Alert View
window.
Protective Device Reported Condition

Device Type
LVCB
HVCB
Fuse
SPDT
SPST Switches
ANSI Reported Condition

Interrupting
Interrupting
C&L
C&L Crest
Interrupting
C&L
C&L
15-94
IEC Reported Condition

Breaking
Breaking
Making
N/A
Breaking
Making
Making
Chapter 16
Star Device Coordination Analysis

Star is a fully integrated system protective device coordination and selectivity module within ETAP. Star
is the state-of-the-art tool for performing device coordination, protection, and testing. This is achieved by
utilizing intelligent one-line diagrams, comprehensive device libraries, and an integrated multidimensional database.
Star enables power engineers to easily and efficiently perform protective device coordination studies. The
built-in intelligent features provide informed and reliable recommendations regarding the feasibility of the
devices under consideration. Engineers can quickly realize possible design issues and make informed
decisions to improve system reliability, increase system stability, and boost financial savings.
This chapter provides an overview of the features and capabilities in Star. By exploring this chapter, you
will become familiar with many of the key concepts and capabilities of the Star module. Each section is
available in an interactive format, allowing you to visualize each step as it is explained in this chapter.
Note: Some of the directory paths shown in the figure below will be different if you have chosen a
custom installation path.
16-1
Star Device Coordination
Star Mode Toolbar
16.1 Star Mode Toolbar

Create Star View
Star View Manager
Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA
Run / Update 1-Phase Short-Circuit Clipping kA
Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation)
Sequence Viewer
Path Detection Tools
Protection Zone Viewer
Display Options
Report Manager
Device Settings Reports
Create Star View

Click this button to generate a new Star presentation. A Star View is a presentation that may contain
network paths (a set of one or many elements that reside in the one-line diagram) and their specific plots.
To activate the Create Star View toolbar button, select an element or a group of elements on the one-line
diagram. This is called rubber-banding a zone for a selected Configuration. Composites (nested networks)
can be opened up, rubber-banded, and grouped with their external connecting elements for coordination.
Star View Manager

Click this button to launch the Star View Manager editor. Star View Manager allows for the following
actions:
Append - Add element(s) from the One-Line View to existing Star View(s).
Purge Delete selected Star View(s)
16-2
Star Mode Toolbar
Filter Star View list by selected component(s)

Checking this option will list the IDs of all the components (elements) in the project. This allows
selection of Star Views based on the elements that are contained within them.
Star Views
The Star Views column lists all the Star Views in the project. By default, the last accessed Star View will
be selected (highlighted) from the list of Star Views. Multiple Star Views can be selected by using the
Shift or Ctrl keys.
Select All
Select all the Star Views from the list to append the selected element(s) or purge.
Deselect All
Deselect all the Star Views from the list to append the selected element(s) or purge.
Components
The Components column lists the IDs of the element(s) that are included in the selected Star View(s). The
Components column will list the IDs of all elements in the project.
16-3
Star Mode Toolbar
Append
The Append button in Star View Manager is activated only when an element or group of elements are
selected on the one-line diagram. Click on the Append button to add the selected elements to the Star
View(s).
Purge
The Purge button in Star View Manager allows for deletion of one or multiple Star Views. A
confirmation dialog is issued to verify the purge action.
Run / Update 1-Phase Short-Circuit Clipping kA

Click this button to perform a 1-phase short-circuit study to update the time-characteristics curve clipping,
short-circuit kA and minimum kA for the applicable elements. This button is activated when the 1Phase/Panel/1-Pahase UPS Subsystem option is enabled from the Star Study Case editor. If the output
name file is set to prompt, ETAP will prompt you to specify the output report name. Upon completion of
the study, the output report is generated and the study results are displayed on the one-line diagram.
16-4
Star Mode Toolbar
Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation)

Protective Device (PD) Sequence-of-Operation initiates upon placing a fault on the one-line diagram
using the Fault Insertion button from the Star Mode. The fault insertion icon changes based on the type
of fault selected from the Study Case.
3 Phase
Line-to-Ground
Line-to-Line
Line-to-Line-to-Ground
Once the fault insertion button is selected, the cursor icon changes to a fault symbol which can be
dropped on any valid AC one-line diagram elements (e.g., buses, connectors). As you move the Fault
Insertion cursor over the one-line diagram, the cursor color changes to red (or custom color) indicating an
allowable (valid) fault insertion location. The fault insertion cursor can be dragged and re-dropped on
any valid one-line diagram to initiate a new sequence-of-operation calculation. To cancel the fault
insertion, press the Esc key on the keyboard.
Fault Insertion is not allowed for the following:
De-energized elements
Panel systems
DC elements
Grounding elements
CT / Relay connections
Sequence Viewer
The Sequence Viewer button is enabled when you perform a Sequence-of-Operation Study. If you click
the Sequence Viewer button, ETAP displays the Sequence-of-Operation Events dialog box that displays a
tabulated sequence summary list of actions for the applicable protective devices.
16-5
Star Mode Toolbar
Path Detection Tools

The Path Detection Tools provide an easy way to automatically identify and define a protection /
coordination path.
Each path selection tool requires that elements be selected in order to determine the path. Only 3-phase or
1-phase elements can be selected on the OLV (DC elements are not included). De-energized element
selection is dependent on the setting of the Honor configuration Service Status for Path Detection in
Option (Preferences).
Extend Path to Nearest Source

After clicking on this button the cursor will change to an arrow pointer
[pb1] as it is moved over the
OLV. Once an element is clicked on, the path shall extend from the selected element to the nearest
source, and the cursor will return to normal.
Pressing ESC at any time will return the cursor to normal.
16-6
Star Mode Toolbar
The zone viewer is automatically launched after the element is selected. It will contain all zones for all the
paths identified. If more elements are selected, the additional zones will be added to the zone viewer tree
view.
Shortest Connecting Path

to select the first element as
it is moved over the OLV. Upon selecting the first element, the arrow pointer will change to
selection of the second element.
for
Two elements are required to be selected.[pb2] After selecting the two elements on the OLV, the shortest
path shall be or highlighted between the two elements and the cursor will return to normal. [pb3]
Note: The same element cannot be selected twice.
[pb4]Pressing ESC at any time will return the cursor to normal.[pb5]
The zone viewer is automatically launched after the two elements are selected. It will contain all zones for
the path identified.
Extend Path by Bus Level

as it is moved over the OLV.
Once an element is clicked on, the path shall be extended by a pre-defined number of bus levels in all
directions as defined in the Bus Levels Away for Path Detection in the Options (Preferences), and the
cursor will return to normal.[pb6]
Pressing ESC at any time will return the cursor to normal.
The zone viewer is automatically launched after the element is selected. It will contain all zones for all the
paths identified. As more elements are selected, the additional zones will be added to the zone viewer tree
view.
Protection Zone Viewer

TheProtection Zone Viewer (Zone Viewer) provides a user interface to view the zones of protection for
the elements highlighted on the OLV.
16-7
Star Mode Toolbar
The tree view will display the zones for the elements selected on the one-line. The zone tree toolbar
allows for sorting and filtering the tree view.
Zone Types
There are five types of zones:
Branch Zones
Bus Zones
Load Zones
Source Zones
Zone Level
The zone level displays the ID of the element which the zone is based on, i.e. the load, branch, bus, or
source element ID.
When this level is selected (highlighted) in the zone viewer, the elements which make up the zone will be
highlighted on the OLV.
16-8
Star Mode Toolbar
Element Level
The element level displays the IDs of the elements that make up the zone. When this level is selected
(highlighted) in the zone viewer, the element will be highlighted on the OLV.[pb7]
Ascending / Descending:
This button allows for sorting of the tree view into either ascending or descending alphanumeric order.
Zone Filter
Non-editable check list box with the following selections:
All (default)
Branch
Bus
Load
Source
According to the selection, the types of zones displayed in the tree view will change. Note: The OLV
selection will remain the same. For example, when Any is selected, all five types of zones will be
displayed. When Branch is selected, only those zones which are branch zones will be displayed in the
list.
Voltage Filter
According to the entries in this field, the zones displayed in the tree view will be filtered by analyzing the
kV rating of the zone elements. Note: The OLV selection will remain the same. For example, if <= 1
kV is entered, then only those zones whose elements have a rating of less than or equal to 1 kV will be
displayed in the tree. Any zone in which the all the elements are rated above 1kV will be filtered-out.
Select All / Deselect All

Select All will check all the boxes in the tree view. [pb10]Deselect All will uncheck all the boxes in the
tree view
Expand All / Collapse All

Expand All will expand all the levels in the tree view. Collapse All will collapse all the levels in the tree
view.
Star View TCCs[pb11]

To create Star Views of the checked elements in the tree view, select the method of Star View creation
and click on Create/Append button.
16-9
Star Mode Toolbar
Create individual Star Views per zone - When Create individual Star Views per zone is
selected, a star view will be created for each zone checked or in the intermediate state in the tree.
If a zone is not checked, then a star view will not be created for the zone.
Create single Star View[pb12] - When Create single Star View is selected, then only one Star
View will be created containing all the elements checked in the tree.
Append to existing Star View - When Append to existing Star View is selected then the
checked elements will be appended to an existing Star View. When the Append button is clicked,
the zone viewer dialog will close and the Append to Star View dialog will open. Since the
checked elements are selected on the OLV, only those will be appended to the star view.
Display Options
Refer to the Display Options section in this chapter for more information about customizing display
annotations and color themes on the one-line diagram. The Display Options Star (PD Coordination)
dialog box contains options for Star Short-Circuit Study and Sequence-of-Operation results, as well as
associated device parameters.
Report Manager
Short-Circuit Output Reports are provided in Crystal Reports format. The Star Report Manager contains
four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different sections of the Output
Report in Crystal Reports.
Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed on each page of the Report Manager for short-circuit
clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation studies.
16-10
Star Mode Toolbar
You can also view output reports by clicking the List Output Reports button on the Study Case toolbar.
List Output Reports Button
A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for the performed calculations. To
view any of the listed Output Reports, click the Output Report name, and then click the View Output
Report button.
The Output Reports for Star Short-Circuit Studies have an extension of .ST1; .ST3 for ANSI and .ST2;
.ST4 for IEC standards.
The output reports for Star Sequence-of-Operation studies have an extension of .SQ1 for ANSI and .SQ2
for and IEC Standards.
16-11
Star Mode Toolbar
Device Settings Reports

Click the Device Settings Reports button to display the Device Coordination Reports Manager. The
Report Manager allows you to preview and print the protective device setting data using the Crystal
Reports formats.
To print the device settings:
1. Click the Device Settings Reports button. The Device Coordination Report Manager Editor displays.
2. Select the desired report type for the all or selected element on the one-line diagram.
3. Select the Base or Revision data, and then click OK.
When you select a report, ETAP will ask if you would like to save the project prior to generating the
report.
16-12
Star Mode Toolbar
Clicking the OK button will save the latest changes to the database and launch the selected report. Click
Cancel to exit back to the previous editor. Note that the project database can only be saved in Base
revision.
The report displays device settings for the selected devices or all devices on the one-line diagram
including De-energized and Dumpster elements.

The Halt Current Calculation button is normally disabled. When a Star Study has been initiated, this
button is enabled allowing the user to terminate the current calculation. The display results will not be
shown on the one-line diagram if you terminate the calculation before it completes. The output report will
be incomplete.
16-13
Study Case Editor

The Star Mode Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, faulted bus selection, and a variety
of options for output reports. ETAP allows you to create and save unlimited number of study cases. Star
Short-Circuit and Sequence-of-Operation calculations are conducted and reported using the settings of the
study case selected in the toolbar. This allows you to switch between Study Cases without having to reset
the study case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you
time.
With respect to the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system components. The system components are configuration status,
one-line diagram presentation, and Base and Revision Data.
You can access the Star Mode Study Case Editor by clicking the Edit Study Case button on the Study
Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by double-clicking the Study Case
name in the Star Analysis folder.
To create a new study case, go to Project View, right-click the Star Analysis Study Case folder, and select
Create New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default study case, and
add it to the Star Analysis Study Case folder.
16-14
Study Case Editor
16.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
The Study Case ID is displayed in this text box. You can rename the study case by deleting the old ID and
entering a new one. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
buttons at the bottom of the editor to display any of the exiting Study Cases in the editor.
Transformer Tap
The following two methods are provided for modeling transformer off-nominal tap settings:
Adjust Base kV
Base voltages of the buses are calculated using transformer turn ratios, which include the transformer
rated kVs as well as the off-nominal, tap settings.
Use Nominal Tap

Transformer rated kVs are used as the transformer turn ratios for calculating the base voltages of the
buses (that is, all off-nominal tap settings are ignored and transformer impedances are not adjusted).
16-15
Study Case Editor
If a system contains transformers with incompatible voltage ratios (including taps) in a loop, it can lead to
two different base voltage values at a bus, which prevents the short-circuit calculation from continuing. If
this situation occurs, ETAP will post a message to inform you and give you the option to continue the
calculation with the Use Nominal Tap option. If you click Yes, it will carry out the calculation with the
Use Nominal Tap option.
Cable/OL Heater
Select the appropriate checkboxes in this group to include the impedance of equipment cable and
overload heaters of medium (MV Motor) and/or low voltage (LV Motor) motors in Short-Circuit Studies.
Motor Contribution Based on

Select one of the following options for considering motor contribution in short-circuit studies:
Motor Status
When this option is selected, motors with a status of either Continuous or Intermittent will make
contributions in short-circuit. Motors with Spare status will not be considered in the Short-Circuit
Analysis.
Loading Category
When this option is selected, you can select a loading category from the selection box to the right. In the
short-circuit calculation, motors that have non-zero loading in the selected Loading Category will have a
contribution in short-circuit. Motors with zero loading in the selected Loading Category will not be
included in the Short-Circuit Analysis.
Both
When this option is selected, a motor will make a contribution in the Short-Circuit Analysis if it meets
either the Motor Status or the Loading Category condition. That is, for a motor to be excluded from the
short-circuit analysis, it would have to be in the Spare status and have zero loading in the selected
Loading Category.
1-Ph/Panel/1-Ph UPS Subsystem

ETAP allows you to perform short-circuit clipping current and device reference kV update for 1-Ph
systems, 3-Ph and 1-Ph Panels as well as 1-Ph UPS elements. The Info page has three options which
allow selecting which type of subsystem to include in the calculation. Note: At least one of these options
must be checked to enable the 1-phase short-circuit update button in the Star Mode toolbar.
Panel
When this option is selected, all panel subsystems (3-Phase and 1-Phase) are included in the calculations.
1-Phase UPS
When this option is selected, all UPS subsystems (3-Phase and 1-Phase) are included in the calculations.
The 1-Ph UPS can be modeled as constant current Constant I option or as voltage source being an
impedance. Please refer to the Short-Circuit calculation methodology section for more details.
1-phase
When this option is selected, all single phase subsystems connected below phase adapters will be included
in the calculations.
16-16
Study Case Editor
Please see the Short-Circuit calculation methods section for more details on the Panel/UPS/1-Phase shortcircuit analysis.
Bus Selection
ETAP is capable of faulting one or more buses in the same run; however, multiple buses are faulted
individually, not simultaneously. Depending on the specified fault type, the program will place a 3-phase,
line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground fault at each bus that is faulted for Short-Circuit
Studies.
When you open the Star Mode Study Case Editor for the first time, all buses are listed in the Dont Fault
list box. This means that none of the buses are faulted. Using the following procedures, you can decide
which buses you want to fault for this study case.
To fault a bus, highlight the bus ID in the Dont Fault list box and click the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Fault list box.
To remove a bus from the Fault list box, highlight the bus ID and click the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Dont Fault list box.
If you wish to fault all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses, select the appropriate
options and click the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Dont Fault list
box to the Fault list box.
To remove all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses from the Fault list box, select the
appropriate options and click the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Fault
list box to the Dont Fault list box.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this field. Information entered here will be printed on
the second line of every output report page header line. These remarks can be used to provide specific
information about each Study Case.
Note: The first line of the header information must be the same for all Study Cases. To change the first
line, select the Project menu, select Information, and change the Remarks text box.
16-17
Study Case Editor
16.2.2 Standard Page

Standard
Both ANSI and IEC standards are available for Short-Circuit Studies. Select the Short-Circuit Study
Standard by clicking the Standard notation. Different sets of solution control variables (prefault voltage,
calculation methods, etc.) are available for each standard.
When you create a new Study Case, the Short-Circuit Standard is set equal to the project standard you
have specified in the Project Standards dialog box (from the Project menu, select Standards). You can
change the Study Case standard independently of the project standard.
When the ANSI standard is selected, this page will appear as shown below.
When the IEC Standard is selected, the study options will change and you will see the page shown below.
16-18
Study Case Editor
Prefault Voltage - ANSI Standard

You can select either fixed or variable prefault voltages for all buses.
Fixed
This option allows you to specify a fixed prefault voltage for all the faulted buses. This fixed value can be
in percent of bus nominal kV or base kV. Bus nominal kV is the value you entered in the Bus Editor to
represent the normal operating voltage. The bus base kV is calculated by the program and is only reported
in the results section of the Star Mode Short-Circuit Report for each faulted bus.
The process of computing base kV starts from one of the swing machines, such as a utility or a generator,
by taking its design voltage as the base kV for its terminal bus. It then propagates throughout the entire
system. When it encounters a transformer from one side, the transformer rated voltage ratio will be used
to calculate the base kV for the buses on other sides. If the Adjust Base kV option is selected on the Info
page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor, the transformer tap values will also be used in the base kV
calculation along with transformer rated voltage ratio. This calculation procedure demonstrates that the
base kV is close to the operating voltage, provided that the swing machine is operating at its design
setting.
Vmag X Nominal kV (from Bus editor)

If you select the Vmag X Nominal kV (from Bus Editor) prefault voltage option, ETAP uses the bus
voltages entered in the Bus Editors as the prefault voltage for faulted buses. Using this option, you can
perform Short-Circuit Studies with each faulted bus having a different prefault voltage. For instance, you
can perform Short-Circuit Studies using the bus voltages calculated from a specific Load Flow Study and,
therefore, calculate fault currents for an actual operating condition. To do so, from the Info page of the
16-19
Study Case Editor
Load Flow Study Case Editor, select Initial Bus Voltages from the Update group. Then, run a Load Flow
Analysis.
Since the short-circuit current is proportional to the prefault voltage, different options will most likely
give different results. However, with any of the above options, the calculated fault current is the same as
long as the prefault voltage in kV is the same. The options used for a study depend on your judgment and
the objective of the study. If you want to calculate the fault current to size protective switching devices,
you may want to apply the maximum possible prefault voltages in the calculation. This can be done by
selecting the Fixed option with Base kV. If the bus normal operating voltage is entered in the Bus Editor
as the bus nominal voltage, you may also use the Fixed option with Nominal kV.
Cycle kA ANSI Standard

Select the cycle kA option to calculate the short-circuit based on the ANSI Cycle Method
(momentary kA) and update the TCC clipping kA for applicable elements.
30 cycle (Minimum) kA ANSI Standard

Select the 30 cycle (Minimum) kA option to calculate the short-circuit based on the ANSI 30 Cycle
Method (steady state kA) and update the minimum kA for applicable elements.
Zero Sequence Z ANSI Standard

Include Branch Y & Static Load
This option allows you to consider the effect of zero-sequence capacitances of lines and cables, as well as
shunt admittances of distinct static load elements for ANSI LG short-circuit calculations. This means that
if a cable has a susceptance value specified under the Y field (Impedance page), ETAP will convert this
value into the zero sequence capacitance and consider it in the calculation of 3Io.
Short-Circuit Current - IEC Standard

When the IEC Standard is selected, you can specify the maximum or minimum short-circuit current to be
calculated and based on the selection, different c factors will be used to modify source voltage. There are
three options available: Max, User-Defined c Factor, and Min.
When the Max option is selected, the maximum values for c factor as defined in Table I of IEC 60909
Standard are used to calculate maximum fault current:
< 1001 V
c Factor = 1.10
1001 to 35000 V
c Factor = 1.10
> 35000 V
c Factor = 1.10
When the User-Defined c Factor option is selected, ETAP uses the user specified c factor. The ranges for
the c factors are as follows:
< 1001 V
c Factor = 0.95 - 1.10
1001 to 35000 V
c Factor = 1.00 - 1.10
> 35000 V
c Factor = 1.00 - 1.10
When the Min. option is selected, the minimum values for c Factor as defined in IEC 60909 Standard are
used to calculate minimum fault current.
< 1001 V
c Factor = 0.95
1001 to 35000 V
c Factor = 1.00
> 35000 V
c Factor = 1.00
16-20
Study Case Editor
With the Min option selected, there are two options to update the minimum TCC kA:
Ik Min: Steady-state Minimum current.
Ik Min: Initial symmetrical current.
Cmax for Z Adjustment (<1000 V)

This group allows you to specify which constant value to use in the calculation of the K correction factors
used to adjust the impedance of devices like transformers and generators.
Note: These constants are not used as c Factors for the adjustment of the prefault voltage. They are only
used to calculate the impedance adjustment (i.e., Kt, Kg, etc.)
Zero Sequence Z IEC Standard

Include Branch Y & Static Load
This option allows you to consider the effect of zero-sequence capacitances of lines and cables, as well as
shunt admittances of distinct static load elements for IEC 909 LG short-circuit calculations. This means
that if a cable has a susceptance value specified under the Y field (Impedance page), ETAP will convert
this value into the zero sequence capacitance and consider it in the calculation of 3Io.
16-21
Study Case Editor
16.2.3 Seq of Op. Page

This page provides the parameters for performing protective device Sequence-of-Operation analyses.
Fault Value
Select Asymmetrical or Symmetrical value to be considered for phase or ground fault type.
Fault Type
Select from 3 Phase, Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, or Line-to-Line-to-Ground fault type for protective
device sequence-of-operation study. This will change the Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation)
button accordingly.
Protective Devices Considered

Choose the maximum bus level away from the fault, which the study will check for protective device
operation.
Protective Devices Operated

Choose the number of devices to flash on the one-line diagram in chronological order upon performing a
Sequence-of-Operation Analysis. The default is set to 3 with a maximum of 9 devices to flash.
16-22
Study Case Editor
16.2.4 Adjustment Page
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to equipment resistance and impedance.
Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance setting or
based on a globally specified percent value.
Transformer
This adjustment is applied to the transformer impedance. The adjustment includes positive, negative, and
zero sequence impedance depending on the type of fault being performed (3-Phase or LG, LLG, and LL).
The net effect of the transformer impedance adjustment in short-circuit calculations is to decrease the
impedance by the specified percent tolerance value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12%
and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used in the short-circuit calculation will be 10.8%,
resulting in a higher fault current.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by using the tolerance percent value
specified on the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. A global transformer impedance adjustment can
be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding
field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global impedance adjustment
overrides any individual transformer tolerance value.
16-23
Study Case Editor
Reactor
This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher
fault current. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by using the tolerance percent value
specified on the Rating page of the Reactor Editor. A global reactor impedance adjustment can be
on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global impedance adjustment overrides
any individual reactor tolerance value.
Overload Heater
This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces
the OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller resistance and consequently a
higher fault current. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The resistance adjustment can be applied to individual overload heaters by using the tolerance percent
value specified on the Rating page of the Overload Heater Editor. A global overload heater resistance
adjustment can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the
corresponding field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global resistance
adjustment overrides any individual overload heater tolerance value.
The adjustments only apply if the Cable/OL Heater option is selected for MV or LV motors.
Synchronous Machine Direct-Axis Subtransient Reactance (Xd) Adjustment

The direct-axis subtransient reactance (Xd) for a synchronous generator or a synchronous motor will
always be adjusted by the Xd tolerance value entered in the Imp/Model page of the corresponding editor.
The Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces the Xd value by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller
impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the Xd value is 10% and its tolerance
is 5%, then the adjusted Xd value used in the short-circuit calculation is 9.5%.
Impedance Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit Current Calculation

In general, to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the impedance tolerance value
is taken as a negative value, resulting in a smaller impedance value. However, in an IEC short-circuit
current calculation, if the Min (Exclude Duty Calc) option is selected in the Short-Circuit Current group
of the Star Mode Study Case Standard page, the impedance tolerance value will be taken as a positive
value. This leads to a larger impedance value and lower short-circuit current.
Impedance Tolerance (Length)

This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line length. Each
Cable Length
If you select this option, the Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces cable length by the specified percent
tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the
length of the cable is 200 ft. and the tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted cable length used in the shortcircuit calculation is 190 ft.
16-24
Study Case Editor
on the Info page of the Cable Editor. A global cable length adjustment can be specified as well by
selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of Star Mode Study
Case Editor Adjustment page. The global length adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance
value.
Transmission Line Length

If you select this option, the Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces the transmission line length by the specified
percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if
the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the tolerance is 2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line
length used in the short-circuit calculation is 1.95 miles.
The length adjustment can be applied to individual lines by using the tolerance percent value specified on
the Info page of the Transmission Line Editor. A global transmission line length adjustment can be
on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global length adjustment overrides any
Length Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit Current Calculation

In general, to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the length tolerance value is
taken as a negative value, resulting in shorter length. However, in IEC short-circuit current calculation, if
the Min (Exclude Duty Calc) option is selected in the Short-Circuit Current group of the Star Mode Study
Case Standard page, the length tolerance value will be taken as a positive value. This leads to longer
length and lower short-circuit current.

This group allows the user to consider resistance correction based on the minimum operating temperature
for cable and transmission line conductors. Each temperature resistance correction can be applied based
on the individual cable/line minimum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit adjusts the
conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating temperature
is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is reduced.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified on the Impedance page of the Cable Editor. A global temperature correction
can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum temperature value in the
corresponding field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global temperature
correction value overrides any individual Cable Impedance page minimum temperature. For more
information, see the Cable Editor Impedance Page Section in Chapter 11, AC Elements.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit
adjusts the conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating
temperature is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the resistance is reduced.
16-25
Study Case Editor
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified on the Impedance page of the Transmission Line Editor. A global
temperature correction can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum
temperature value in the corresponding field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor.
The global temperature correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page
minimum temperature. For more information, see the Impedance Page in the Transmission Line Editor
Section of Chapter 11, AC Elements.
IEC Minimum Short-Circuit Current Calculation

In general, to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the resistance temperature
correction is conducted according to the minimum operating temperature, resulting in a smaller resistance
value. However, in an IEC short-circuit current calculation, if the Min (Exclude Duty Calc) option is
selected in the Short-Circuit Current group of the Star Mode Study Case Standard page, the resistance
temperature correction will be conducted according to the maximum operating temperature. This leads to
an higher resistance value and lower short-circuit current.
Fault Zf
You can consider fault impedance in the unbalanced fault calculations. In this group, you specify the fault
impedance to be applied to all the faulted buses. Depending on the type of faults applied to a bus, the
specified fault impedance is assumed to be between locations as given below:
For a line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and the ground.
For a line-to-line fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and phase B.
For a line-to-line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between the ground and the
short-circuit point between phases A and B.
Include Fault Impedance Zf

Select this option to include fault impedance in the calculation. You can enter fault impedance in the R
and X text boxes.
R and X
In these two editor boxes, you enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent, depending on the fault
impedance unit selected. These values apply to all the faulted buses.
Ohm or %
You can enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent. If the Ohm option is selected, the values in
the R and X Editor boxes are in Ohms. If you select the percent option, the values in the R and X Editor
boxes are in percent based on 100 MVA and the nominal kV of the faulted bus.
16-26
Display Options

The Display Options - Star (PD Coordination) Editor consists of a Results page and pages for AC, ACDC, DC annotations and color theme information. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each
study are specific to that study.
16.3.1 Results Page

The Results page of the Display Options is where you select different result annotations to be displayed in
the one-line diagram. Depending on short-circuit study type, ANSI or IEC, this page gives you different
options for 3-phase fault results. If the study type is for IEC Short-Circuit Analysis, you will see the
Results page as shown below.
If the study type is for ANSI Short-Circuit Analysis, you will see the Results page as Cycle kA or 30
Cycle kA depending on the option chosen in the Star Mode Study Case.
16-27
Display Options
Fault Type
Select to display the 3-Phase, Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, or Line-to-Line-to-Ground currents on the
one-line diagram for Short-Circuit Clipping Analysis. For PD Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, the
display result is fixed to the applied fault type.
For Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, or Line-to-Line-to-Ground fault the currents and voltages displayed
are dependent on the selection as described below.
16-28
Display Options
Fault I & V
For line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground faults you have the options of displaying the
total fault current for every faulted bus, along with the phase and sequence values for both current and
voltage.
You can select to display the value of three times the zero sequence current (3Io) in kA, as well as the
phase B (Vb) Voltage in kV.
You can select to display the positive sequence values for current (I1), negative sequence current (I2)
and zero sequence current (I0) in kA, along with the positive sequence voltage (V1), negative
sequence voltage (V2), and zero sequence voltage (Vo) in kV.
You can select to display the fault current values for phases A, B, and C in kA along with their
corresponding phase voltages in kV.
If multiple buses are faulted, the program shows the individual branch contributions for 3-phase and lineto-ground-faults only at the faulted bus level. If only one bus is faulted at a time, ETAP shows individual
contributions from the entire system for all types of faults.
16-29
Display Options
16.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
Device Type
Generator
Motor (Synchronous and Induction)
Load/Panel
Bus
Node
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA and HP/kW and kvar/Mvar and Panel Phase
kA Bracing (Asymm. RMS)
Bus Bracing (Asymm. RMS kA)
CB
Fuse
PT & CT

Interrupting (kA)
16-30

Branch (Impedance and Reactor)
Transformer
Cable (Size)
Line (Size)
Relay
Display Options
Base MVA and Continuous Amps
Rated kVA/MVA
Line Phase Conductor Code
Display Tag for OC, Multi-Function, and MTR Relays
kV
For transformers, the kV checkbox is replaced by %Tap checkbox which displays both transformer rated
kV as well as total % Tap (Fixed Tap + LTC setting) for both two-winding and three-winding
transformers.
A
For cables/lines, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display
the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the winding connection types of the selected elements
For circuit breakers, fuses and switches, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with N.O. checkbox. When
checked, switching devices that are normally open have a N.O. designation on the one-line diagram.
For relays, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with Tag checkbox. When checked, it displays user-defined tag
for OC, Multi-Function, and Motor Relays.
Z
16-31
Display Options
Device Type
Impedance
Generator
Positive Sequence Impedance in % on 100 MVA base (R + j X)
Motor
% LRC
Branch (Impedance
and Reactor)
Impedance in % (R+jX) or Ohms
Transformer
Positive Sequence Impedance PS (%Z) for two-winding

transformer and PS/PT/ST (%Z) for three-winding transformer
Cable
Line
Use Default Options

Show Eq. Cable

specified as part of the loads. Double-clicking on the equipment cable will bring up the Equipment Cable
Editor.
16-32
Display Options
16.3.3 AC DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC and DC elements.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC and DC elements on
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC and DC elements
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Battery
Motor
Load
Composite CSD
Converter
Cable (Size)
Rating
kVA
HP/kW
Ampere Hour
HP/kW
kW/MW
kW/MW
kW/MW
16-33
Display Options
kV
For DC elements, voltage units are changed from kV to V. For cables, the voltage checkbox is replaced
with Type checkbox. When this checkbox is selected, cable conductor type (CU/AL) is displayed on the
one-line diagram.
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Motor
Load
Composite CSD
Converter
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
FLA
FLA
FLA
DC-DC Converter Input/Output FLA
For cables, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the Length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display the
DC cable length (one way) on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the cables and impedance
branches on the one-line diagram.
For CB, Fuse and Switch, the Z checkbox is replaced by the N.O. checkbox which displays N.O.
annotation on the one-line when the switching devices are in normally open state.
Use Default Options

16-34
Display Options
16.3.4 Colors Page

This page allows you to setup the colors used for displaying annotations on the one-line diagram.
Color Theme
Select the annotation colors specified in the Theme Editor by selecting the appropriate theme name.
Theme
Click this button to access the Theme Editor in order to quickly change the theme colors for annotations.
Annotations
Select the source of colors to be used for displaying annotations. Annotation colors can be used from the
Display Options Editor or from the Theme Editor. By default, ETAP will use user-defined (Display
Option Editor) colors to display annotation colors. Select the color for information annotations for AC,
DC, AC-DC, Composites and Star Mode results to be displayed on the one-line diagram. Switch to
Theme to use the selected theme annotation colors.
16-35
Star Sequence-of-Operation
16.4 Star Sequence-of-Operation

With ETAP Star, not only can you work with the time-current curves, you can also determine the
operating time of protective devices simply by placing a fault on the one-line diagram. The Sequence-ofOperations are automatically calculated and listed in an Event Viewer, which is dynamically linked with
the one-line diagram. This one-step concept utilizes the intelligent one-line diagram and performs a
complete set of actions to determine the operation of all protective devices. This includes internal shifting
(normalizing) of each time-current characteristic curve based on the individual fault contribution level.
Sequence-of-Operation provides a system wide solution for an accurate and realistic operating time and
state of protective devices, such as relay, fuse, circuit breaker, trip devices, contactor, etc. The operation
time is calculated for each protective device based on its settings, time current characteristic, and
interlocks for a specified fault location and type.
Features & Capabilities
Graphically place a fault anywhere on the one-line diagram

Automatically calculate and display the fault current contributions on the one-line diagram
Determine the operating time and state of all protective devices based on the actual fault current
contribution flowing through each individual device
Globally view post fault actions and associated operating time via a tabulated event viewer
Graphically examine the operation of protective devices via the one-line diagram
Display / flash the tripped devices in chronological order on the one-line diagram
16.4.1 Protective Device Actions

The Sequence-of-Operation Study is essentially a time-domain simulation of protective devices action
based on a user-specified fault location and type. Protective device actions are determined at different
time instants (events).
When a fault is placed on a valid bus or connector on the selected one-line diagram configuration, a shortcircuit study is performed in accordance with the selected Star Mode Study Case parameters. The
calculated through fault current of each valid protective device is then compared with its settings, time
current characteristic, and applicable interlocks to determine the operating time band.
Protective device tripping actions can be categorized in two main groups:
Integral Trip
Non-Integral Trip
Integral Trip
The action of the integral trip components, such as low voltage circuit breaker (trip device), fuse, and
overload heater, is based on the internal tripping mechanisms or melting elements of the device which in
turn can cause the device to operate by melting or tripping, respectively.
16-36
Non-Integral Trip
Non-integral trip action of devices in power system is typically initiated by remote operation via a relay
or shunt tripping by a sensing device. The operation of circuit breakers in power systems are often
controlled via a relay or through a lock-out device. In the case of current sensing relays, the current
transformer will sense the fault current based on its relative location to the fault and the magnitude as well
as the type of the fault current. When the operating current exceeds that of the relay characteristic setting,
the relay will signal its pre-programmed trip contacts to operate accordingly. For instance, a current relay
will trip off circuit breakers once the measured current by relay exceeds a pre-set value. To use relaycontrolled actions, you can add a relay and connect it to the one-line diagram via a PT or CT, depending
on the type of relay. Next in the Relay Editor, the user specifies the relay-controlled device ID, action,
time delay, and other data related to the selected relay operation. During the SQOP simulation, if a relay
setting is met, then its controlled device (i.e., HVCB) will take an action as specified in the Relay Editor.
This method avoids requesting to give a pre-defined action time and is a true resemblance to power
system real operating conditions.
The following table shows the list of relay-interlocked devices as well as their inherent operating time
delay.
Device Type
ANSI HVCB
IEC HVCB
ANSI LVCB (PCB)
ANSI LVCB (MCCB, ICCB)
IEC LVCB
SPST
Contactor
Operating Time
Operating cycles as specified in the HVCB Editor
Min delay as specified in the HVCB Editor
3 cycles per IEEE Std 1584-2002
1.5 cycle per IEEE Std 1584-2002
Min delay as specified in the LVCB Editor
No time delay
Drop out time delay as specified in the Contactor Editor
Note that the operating time for Close and Open actions are assumed to be the same.
16-37
16.4.2 Sequence-of-Operation Events Viewer
Header
The first part of the header includes information regarding the type and location of the fault. The second
section of the header includes information on data revision, system configuration, and date for which the
study was performed.
Time
This is the total event time (in milliseconds) from the initiation of the fault in sequential order.
ID
Displays the Protective Device Identifier
If (kA)
Through fault current in kA as seen by the protective device. The fault current component that is used to
determine the operating time of a protective device is based on the current sensing characteristic of that
device. For example, a fuse may operate for phase and ground fault current depending on the fault current
magnitude where as a ground relay will only operate for ground fault. For relays the current sensing
characteristics is defined by the relay trip elements such as Phase, Ground, Neutral, Sensitive Ground,
Negative Sequence, etc. Furthermore, the location and type of the CT connected to a relay determine the
current sensing characteristic of the relay. For example, a Negative Sequence trip element of a relay will
operate for negative sequence current (I2) component of a ground fault. Similarly, for a ground fault, the
ground trip element of a low voltage solid-state trip device will operate for 3I0 current component (where
as a phase trip element of the LVSST will operate for line current (Ia).
16-38
T1 (ms)
Operating time event 1 in milliseconds for the protective device. This is the initial tripping or minimum
time of the device where applicable. For example, T1 represents the minimum melting time of the fuse or
the minimum trip time of a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
T2 (ms)
Operating time event 2 in milliseconds. This is the final tripping or maximum time of the device where
applicable. For example, T1 represents the total clearing time of the fuse or the maximum trip time of a
thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. Note that T2 will be zero for device with a single band or definite
operating time (i.e., HVCB operating time).
Condition
This column includes pertinent information regarding the device action. For relays this will include the
particular trip function and level for which the relay has operated on.
Footer
Include information on assumption or exception for Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.
16-39
Required Data
16.5 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculation for buses includes:
Branch Data
Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and Impedance). Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and
Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for branches include:

For unbalanced short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations, you will also need:

Power Grid Data

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for utilities include:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle

Single-Phase MVAsc and X/R

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for synchronous
generators include:

Xd, Xd, and X/R
Generator type
IEC exciter type
16-40
Required Data

Inverter Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for inverters
include:


Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for synchronous
motor includes:

Xd and X/R
% LRC, Xd, and Tdo for IEC Standard


Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for induction
motors include:
Rated kW/hp and kV

X/R plus one of the following:
% LRC, Xd, and Td for IEC Standard

X0
16-41
Required Data
Lumped Load Data

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for lumped load
includes:
Rated MVA and kV

% motor load
% LRC, X/R, and Xsc for cycle and 1.5-4 cycle
X, X, and Td for IEC Standard
Additional data for unbalanced short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations

include:
High Voltage Circuit Breaker / Recloser Data

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for high voltage
circuit breakers include:
Max kV
Rated Int. (rated interrupting capability)
Max Int. (maximum interrupting capability)
C & L rms (rms value of closing and latching capability)
C & L Crest (crest value of closing and latching capability)
Standard
Cycle
Rated kV
AC Breaking (rms AC breaking capability)
ETAP calculates the interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker from the rated and maximum interrupting
capabilities. This value is calculated at the nominal kV of the bus that the circuit breaker is connected to.\
Controller / Trip Device
Controller / Trip device type library parameters

Device settings / TCC curves
16-42
Required Data

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for low voltage
circuit breakers include:

Rated kV
Test PF

Rated kV
Trip Device
Trip device type library parameters

Fuse Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for fuses include:
Fuse library data including Size and TCC curves
ANSI Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Test PF
IEC Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Test PF
Overload Heater/49
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for OLH/49
includes:
Resistance / Tolerance
OLH library parameters
16-43
Required Data
CT/PT Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for CT and PT
includes:
Bus or Branch or Source or Load Connections

Rating (Ratio)
Relay/MVSST Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for Relay includes:
CT/PT Connections / Assignments

Interlocked Devices, Device ID, Action, Delay, Setting, Unit
Relay/MVSST Library parameters including settings and TCC curves
Other Data
There are some study case related data which must also be provided. You can enter this data into the Star
Mode Study Case Editor. The data includes:
Standard (ANSI/IEC)
Prefault voltage
Fault type (Phase / Ground) Sequence-of-Operation
Fault value (Asym/Sym) Sequence-of-Operation
Bus levels to be considered Sequence-of-Operation
Faulted buses
Cable/OL Heater (select this option to include cable and overload heater elements)
Adjustments
16-44
Output Reports
16.6 Output Reports

ETAP provides short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) clipping kA as well as Sequenceof-Operation Study Output Reports with different levels of detail, depending on your requirements. The
following are just some examples that show this flexibility. ETAP reports show total and individual fault
current contributions for all the different types of faults.

the picture shown below, the output report name is SM and the selected format is Adjustments.
16.6.2 Star Mode Report Manager

To open the Star Mode Report Manager, simply click on the Report Manager button on the Star Mode
Study toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing
different sections of the Output Report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for
different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons
common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name

16-45
Output Reports
Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel
of the output report. If no selection is made, it will simply close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to
close the editor without viewing the report.
Select Report Viewer Application

Choose the appropriate application to open the selected report in Crystal Report Viewer, Adobe PDF,
Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel.

This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type,
including Bus, Cable, Cover, Adjustments, Generator, Loads, Reactor, Transformer, UPS, and Utility.
16-46
Output Reports
16.6.4 Result Page

This page allows you to select formats to view the short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation)
result portion of the Output Report. The same applies for IEC faults.
16-47
Output Reports
16.6.5 Summary Page

This page allows you to select formats to view Summary Reports of the Output Report. Note that if the
Sequence-of-Operation Study Output Report is selected, the Summary page will include an additional
report for the Sequence-of-Operation Summary.
16-48
Output Reports

In this page you can select the Complete Report in Crystal Reports format, which brings up the complete
report for the short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) Study. The Complete Report
includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
16-49
Chapter 17
Star View
Chapter 16 describes how to create a new Star View and append elements to an existing Star View from
Star Mode. This chapter details the various tools and features available while working with Star Views.
A Star View is a presentation containing one-line diagram elements and their associated characteristic
curves and diagrams. Star View provides a graphical user interface for viewing, coordinating, and
customizing element curves and diagrams.
17-1
Star View
Star Systems
17.1 Star Systems

Star Systems provides all the necessary tools for accessing, navigating, and coordinating curves
associated with one-line diagram elements. Clicking the Star Systems button on the Systems toolbar
opens the last accessed Star View and makes it the active window.
Star View (TCC) Toolbar
Star Systems
Create / Open
Star View from
Project Editor
Star View Navigator

Create / Copy Star
Views
Star TCC View
Star Views are saved as presentations in Project Editor under the Star folder. You can create a new Star
View presentation by right-clicking the Star folder and selecting Create New or by clicking the Star New
Presentation button. You can create either a new Star View or copy an existing Star View.
17-2
Star View
Star Systems
Double-click the Star View name (for example Star1) in the Project Editor to open an existing Star View.
You can also right-click the Star View name to view, save, purge, rename (using Properties command),
and print the view.
17-3
Star View
Star Systems
You can access an existing Star View by selecting it from the Presentation toolbar while in Star Mode.
17-4
Star View
Star TCC View
17.2 Star TCC View

The Star Time Current Characteristic (TCC) View, displays the device characteristic curves on the Time
versus Current frame. The Time versus Current frame dimension can be graphically adjusted and repositioned.
In Star TCC View, you can graphically add, delete, adjust, zoom in or out, change properties, and more.
The tools from left to right are described below.
Pointer
Click the Pointer button to select one-line diagram elements and curves in Star View.
Zoom In One-Line Diagram

Click this button to zoom in on the one-line diagram in Star View.
17-5
Star View
Star TCC View
Zoom Out One-Line Diagram

Click this button to zoom out the one-line diagram in Star View.
17-6
Star View
Star TCC View
Zoom Fit One-Line Diagram

Click this button to zoom fit the one-line diagram to the left bottom corner of Star View. The scale of the
one-line diagram can be defined in the Options (Preferences) Editor (Tools Options) using the entries
Max. One-line Scaling Factor in Star TCC and One-Line Display Area in Star TCC. Refer to
Chapter 4, Preferences for more details.
17-7
Star View
Star TCC View
Pan
Use the Pan tool to pan around a Star TCC View time-current grid. Hold the left mouse button to grab the
Star View and move the hand pointer to pan the view.
17-8
Star View
Star TCC View
Zoom In, Zoom Out

To zoom in on the Star View, click the Zoom In button. Use the Zoom Out tool to zoom out of a Star
View.
17-9
Star View
Star TCC View
Zoom Fit
To fit entire Star layout in the Star View window, click the Zoom Fit button.
17-10
Star View
Star TCC View
Auto-Scale
Use the Auto-Scale tool to determine the best possible Star View scaling for displaying all plotted curves.
The tool can be used for both phase and ground views. For more details on auto-scaling, see section 17.3,
Star View (TCC) Toolbar.
Star View without Motor, Auto Scale ON
Star View with Motor, Auto Scale OFF
17-11
Star View
Star TCC View

Star View with Motor, Auto Scale ON
2nd Axis
Click to show the second X-axis.
Show/Hide Grid
Click to display the grid.
Show/Hide Legend
Click to show legend on the bottom of the Star View.
17-12
Star View
Star TCC View
17-13
Star View
Star TCC View
Hide/Show Range
Device curves can be graphically adjusted in the Star TCC View. Handles are provided on the device
characteristic curves to identify adjustable regions. Available ranges for a selected curve can be displayed
and identified by clicking the Hide/Show Range button. The available ranges are grayed out when an
adjustable curve is selected. The display of ranges is turned off by default.
Print Preview
Click the Print Preview button to view or modify the print layout of the selected Star TCC View.
Close
Click this button to save the settings and layout, close the preview, and return to the Star TCC View.
Print
Click this button to bring up the Print dialog box and start a print job.
Note: Star Views can be printed collectively via Star Batch Print menu. With a Star View open, go to
File menu and select Batch Print
17-14
Star View
Star TCC View
Print Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options for selecting the
Star Print Options
Click this button to display the Star Print Options dialog box, which contains options for printing (or not
printing) one-line diagram and text boxes.
Next/Previous Page
If the length of a Star View exceeds one page, you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next/Previous Page buttons.
Toggle Display
Click this button to toggle between previewing one or two pages at once.
Zoom in or zoom out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your Star TCC View prior to
printing. This zooms in/out does not affect the print results.
Fit to Page
This fits all of the Star View into the selected page size and orientation.
17-15
Star View
Star TCC View
Zoom In/Zoom TCC

Use this tool to zoom in or out of the Star TCC View so that the size of the view changes with respect to
the page size. Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels
for the Print Preview are independent of zoom levels for the Star TCC View. You can enter a specific
magnification factor in the field provided. The Star TCC will be printed with the zoom factor specified.
Scroll
Scroll the Star TCC View to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll capabilities are provided for centering and adjusting the location of the Star View
with respect to the selected paper size for the Star View. Once you print or close Print Preview, all
settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of scrolling in the Star
TCC View. However, you can specify the scroll length in the fields provided.
Print Setup
Printer
Select the printer you wish to use. You can choose the default printer or select one of the currently
Control Panel.
Paper Size
Paper Source
Select the tray, if your printer offers multiple trays for paper sources.
17-16
Star View
Star TCC View
Orientation
Network
Help
Click on Help to open the help topic on Print Setup options.
OK
Click on OK to close the Print Setup page and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on OK to close the Print Setup page without saving.
Star Print Options
Include One-Line Diagram

Check this box to include the TCC one-line diagram in the print. This box is checked by default.
Include Text Boxes
Check this box to include the text boxes in TCC in the print. This box is checked by default.
Help
Click on Help to open the help topic on Star Print options.
17-17
Star View
Star TCC View
OK
Click on OK to close the Star Print options page and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on OK to close the Star Print options page without saving.
Purge
Delete the active Star View. ETAP asks for confirmation before purging the Star View.
17-18
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3 Star View (TCC) Toolbar

The Star View (TCC) toolbar provides all necessary tools for viewing, coordinating, and plotting
applicable device curves. Star View (TCC) toolbar is displayed and applicable for the active Star View.
This section includes details on the various tools available on the Star View (TCC) toolbar.
17-19
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-20
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.1 Phase/Ground Mode

The Mode tool allows you to view device characteristic curves in Phase or Ground Mode. You can toggle
the Mode button to view the applicable curves for Phase or Ground Mode for the same Star View.
Therefore, the Phase and Ground Modes are essentially sub-views of each Star View. The icon on the
Mode button changes when you toggle between Phase and Ground Modes.
Phase Mode
Ground Mode
Phase Mode
Phase Mode, when selected, displays and includes device curves that respond to phase current. By
default, this includes all phase-responsive device curves and device damage curves/fixed points (for
example, motor starting and transformer damage/inrush point).
Ground Mode
When you select Ground Mode, Star View displays device curves that respond to ground and phase
current. By default, this includes ground current responsive device curves (for example, ground trip
functions or residual connected relays).
17-21
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Note: Phase-responsive devices can be plotted in the Ground Mode from Star View Plot Options.
17-22
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The table below shows a list of all devices plotted in Star View that can be displayed in Phase and Ground
Modes. X indicates available modes for the given device curve.
Device/Function
Trip Element
Phase Mode
Ground Mode
Fuse
Phase
Ground
Sensitive ground
Negative-sequence
Neutral
Residual connection
Thermal
Acceleration
Jam
Ground
Phase
Ground
Phase
Ground
Sensitive Ground
Phase
Ground
Phase Conductor
Ground Wire
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Overcurrent Relay
Overload Relay
Low Voltage Solid-State trip

Thermal Magnetic trip
Electro-Mechanical trip
Motor Circuit Protector
Overload Heater
Recloser
Medium-Voltage Solid State
Trip
Transformer (2W, 3W)
Cable
Transmission Line
Motor Damage / Starting
(Induction, Synchronous)
Generator
Contactor
Bus (Arc Flash Curve)
User Curve
ETAP
Default
Phase
Phase
Ground
Ground
Phase
Ground
Ground
Phase
Phase
Phase
Ground
Phase
Ground
Phase
Phase
Ground
Phase
Phase
Phase
Ground
Ground
Phase
Ground
Phase
Phase
Phase
Ground
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase
Phase &
Ground
Note: The default Plot Options for all devices plotted in Star View can be set globally for the project. To set
defaults, from the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View. Refer to section 17.3.7.
17-23
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.2 Zoom to New Window

Zoom to New Window
To zoom into a region on a Star TCC View, use the Zoom to New Window tool. Click the Zoom to New
Window button and draw a bounding outline around any section of the curve. The Zoomed TCC window
is opened, displaying the selected portion of the curve. The crosshair pointer (+) in the zoomed window
allows you to read the time and current coordinates at the bottom of the zoom window. Once you select a
section of the curve and open a Zoomed TCC window, you can move the selected area to view other
sections of the TCC View.
17-24
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-25
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.3 Time Difference

The time difference tool calculates the graphical time difference at the selected points between any two
device curves plotted in Star View. This tool helps you to display and verify possible mis-coordination or
false operation between various plotted curves.
The time difference can be displayed and graphically adjusted using the following tools:
Time difference measurement pointer
Time difference handle
Time difference indicator
17-26
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Time Difference Measurement Pointer

The time difference measurement pointer allows you to select the From and To curves between which the
time difference is to be calculated and displayed. Clicking the Time Difference button changes the mouse
pointer to the time difference measurement pointer as shown below. Click the curve to select the From
location. The pointer changes again, indicating you need to select the To location of the second curve.
Once the two locations are selected, the time difference indicator lines are displayed in red.
17-27
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-28
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Time Difference Handle

The time difference handle allows you to graphically adjust and view the time difference along the length
of the two curves. The handle can slide horizontally between the two curves, and the range of the handle
adjustment is determined by the shorter of the two curves with respect to the X (current) axis. The handle
is displayed upon the selection of the time difference location for the selected curves.
Once the mouse pointer is placed on the handle, the symbol changes to a horizontal arrow that indicates
you can adjust the handle to view the time difference along the length of the curves. Click to grab the
handle and adjust the time difference. The time difference value displayed changes as you move the
handle. The time values and current value at which the time difference is measured are indicated by red
lines for the existing time difference and the adjusted time difference.
Time Difference Indicator

The time difference indicator displays the value of the time difference measured. When you use the
handle to graphically change the time difference, the value displayed by the indicator changes with the
adjustment. The time difference indicator is displayed after the From and To points are selected for the
two curves or after you click the time difference value already measured. The indicator, when selected,
also displays the time values at which the difference is displayed by red lines.
The position of the indicator can be adjusted horizontally to display the time difference at any desired
location.
17-29
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-30
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Bringing the pointer near the indicator or handle also displays the time difference in a screen tip. The
screen tip displays the ID of the curves, the time difference, and the current in amperes at which the
difference is measured.
The time difference indicators or handles are added to a selected Star View. You can delete the time
difference by selecting either the indicator or handle and clicking the Delete key on the keyboard.
Note: The time difference is not calculated for two curves that do not have a common current value.
For relay curves that can be integrated or linked, the time difference moves to the nearest point available
on the curve, should the integration or TOC/IOC linking hides the portion of the curve where the time
difference was originally placed.
17-31
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.4 Crosshair
The Crosshair tool displays the current (in amperes) and time (in seconds) at any location on the Star TCC
View. Clicking on the Crosshair button changes the mouse pointer to a Crosshair cursor (+). The
Crosshair can be dropped at any location on the Star TCC View to indicate the current and time values.
As shown below, the crosshair is displayed with a label indicating the current and time values and an
arrow pointing to the cursor point. The current and time values change with adjustment of the Crosshair
cursor. Crosshair also works independently in Phase and Ground Modes.
To move an existing Crosshair, select the crosshair and move the mouse over the Crosshair cursor. The
mouse pointer changes to a four-way arrow as shown below using which the crosshair can be moved. The
Crosshair can be deleted by simply selecting it and pressing the Delete key on the keyboard.
17-32
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-33
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The Crosshair can also be assigned to a device curve. This provides a tracking tool for current and time
which can be moved along the device curve. To track a device curve using the Crosshair, first select the
device curve and then click on the Crosshair button. As shown in the figure above, the crosshair moves
only along the Fuse1 curve, (minimum melting curve or total clearing curve depending on the proximity
of the crosshair to the curve) when selected. A tracking crosshair dynamically moves with any curve
adjustment such as change in settings, Base kV (with respect to Plot kV), shift factor, etc. Also, in
Normalized TCC Mode Crosshair displays the current in per unit of the fault current with the actual
ampere value shown in parentheses. For more information on Normalized TCC Mode refer to section
17.3.11.
For relay curves that can be integrated or linked, the Crosshair moves to the nearest visible point available
on the curve, should the integrated or linked portion of the curve becomes hidden where the crosshair was
originally placed.
17-34
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.5 User Curve

The User Curve button enables you to enter a customized curve in Star TCC View. You can enter current
and time points, tolerances, and specify fault arrows. The User Curve parameters once defined and plotted
are saved with the Star View presentation. The User Curve can also be added and saved to the ETAP
library which allows for retrieval of the User Curve for use in other Star Views. User Curves are plotted
in Phase and Ground Modes by default. You can change the default modes for User Curves from the
Default Plot Options. User Curves are not element driven and hence revisions (different properties for
same User Curve ID in base and revision) do not apply.
Clicking on the User Curve button or double-clicking on an existing User Curve opens a Property Editor
as shown below.
Note that the different properties available can be viewed categorically (default) or alphabetically. With
the Categorized view, the properties are categorized into Info, Parameters, Remarks, and Settings.
Header
The header section displays the selected Category and Curve Name when User Curve is selected from the
User Curve Quickpick Library. The header is empty if no User Curve selected from library. The header is
displayed in blue color if the User Curves parameters in the editor are modified and differ from those of
the selected library.
17-35
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Info
ID
Enter the ID or name for the User Curve up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Pickup_Amps
Enter the pick up value in amperes (base Amps) for the User Curve. This field defines the base current
value for user curves that have their current Units set to multiples.
Units
Select the unit for the current values as either Amperes or Multiples.
Parameters
Curve_Points_1, Curve_Points_2
Clicking on Curve_Points_1 (or Curve_Points_2) button as shown below opens the Edit Curve_Points_1
(or Curve_Points_2) Editor. Enter the current (in amps or multiples as selected in units) and time (in
seconds). Use Curve Points_1 to specify the lower band (minimum) curve and Curve_Points_2 to specify
the upper band (maximum) curve.
17-36
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The different tools available are explained below:

Paste from Clipboard
Paste the current and time points copied into Clipboard. To paste the data, click on the first row and select
the Paste from Clipboard button. Note that data from Microsoft Excel cells or Microsoft Word tables
can be copied and pasted directly.
Insert
Click on this button to add a new row or insert a row above an existing row.
Delete
Delete selected rows. Multiple rows can be selected by either using the Shift/Ctrl key or by simply
moving the mouse (left-click) along the first column as shown below.
Move point Up / Down

The Up and Down arrows can be used to move the points entered to the desired order. The Up arrow is
disabled (grayed out) for the first point and Down arrow is disabled for the last point.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the Curve Points Editor without saving any changes.
OK
Click on OK to close the Curve Points Editor and save any changes.
17-37
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Curve Style
Choose the curve style from Line, Smoothed curve, or Points.
Percent_Tol_Max
Enter the tolerance in percent (-99.99 to +999%) specified from the nominal curve (as defined by
Curve_Points_1) to the maximum curve. The default value is set to zero. Entering a positive tolerance
draws the band to the right of the nominal curve and negative tolerance draws to the left. The
Percent_Tol_Max is not being applicable when Curve_Points_2 is defined; a Star alert message is issued
when this condition is detected.
Percent_Tol_Min
Enter the tolerance in percent (-99.99 to +999%) specified from the nominal curve (as defined by
Curve_Points_1) to the minimum curve. The default value is set to zero. Entering a positive tolerance
draws the band to the right of the nominal curve and negative tolerance draws to the left. The
Percent_Tol_Min is not being applicable when Curve_Points_2 is defined; a Star alert message is issued
when this condition is detected.
A single line curve can be defined by entering the points in Curve_Points_1 or Curve_Points_2.
A band curve can be defined by any of the following methods:
(a) Define Curve_Points_1 and Curve_Points_2
(b) Define Curve_Points_1 and Percent_Min_Tol / Percent_Max_Tol
Remarks
Additional information on the User Curve can be entered in Remarks. Remarks are provided for reference
Description
Enter the description up to 100 characters, for the User Curve.
Link
Enter the User Curve web link or URL address up to 100 characters.
Reference
Enter the reference, up to 50 characters, for the User Curve.
Settings
Base kV
Enter the User Curve base voltage in kV. Note: The User Curve is plotted in reference to its Base kV
value. For example, if a base kV equals 4 and the Star View Plot kV is set to 4.16, the User Curve will be
shifted by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.962. Default value is set to 0.
Fault_kA
Enter the clipping fault current in kA. Default value is set to 0. You can also define customized fault
arrows by entering only the fault current value in this field and not defining any User Curve points. Note
that when Normalized TCC Mode is enabled, the fault kA entered is taken as the through fault current.
For more information on Normalized TCC Mode, refer to section 17.3.10.
17-38
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Show_Fault_Arrow
The fault arrow display can be enabled or disabled using the True/False options in this property. Note that
the User Curve is clipped beyond the specified fault kA if the fault arrow is set to True.
Add to Lib
As mentioned previously, the User Curve can also be added and saved to the ETAP library. Click on the
Add to Lib button to open the User Curve Library: Add Editor. Note that that each User Curve record is
saved as a unique category-curve combination. Hence the Category and Curve must be defined and be
unique to add the User Curve to the ETAP library. You can also revise (overwrite) existing User Curve
entries in the library. Note that if you update an existing User Curve library data, the changes
automatically applies to all Star Views that use this User Curve.
Category
Enter a Category name up to 30 alphanumeric characters. Existing category names are available for
selection in the list box.
Curve Name
Enter a Curve name up to 30 alphanumeric characters. Existing curve names are be available for selection
in the list box.
Remarks
Additional information on the User Curve can be entered in Remarks. Remarks are provided for reference
only and may be left blank. By default, information in the User Curve Editor Reference field is entered.
17-39
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Reference
Enter the reference, if available, for the User Curve. By default, information in the User Curve Editor
Reference field is entered.
Link
Enter the User Curve web link or URL address. By default, information in the User Curve Editor Link
field is entered.
Description
Enter the description for the User Curve. By default, information in the User Curve Editor description
field is entered.
Help
Open the Help topic for User Curve.
OK
Click on OK to close the User Curve Library: Add Editor and save changes. The OK button is enabled
only if both Category and Curve name are specified. On clicking OK, the User Curve Properties Editor
displays the Category and Curve name as header information.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the User Curve Library: Add Editor without saving any changes.
Library Quickpick
Click on the Library button to open the Library Quickpick for the User Curve. All User Curves that are
added using the Add to Lib button are displayed in Quickpick. You may pick and retrieve parameters
from the User Curve Quick pick library by selecting a category / curve name.
17-40
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Category
Display list of all User Curve categories added.
Delete (Category)
Delete the selected category after confirming to warning. Note that all curves under the selected category
will also be deleted.
Curve Name
Display list of all User Curve names under the selected category.
Delete (Curve)
Delete the selected curve after confirming to warning.
Reference
Displays the reference information for the selected curve.
Link
Displays the URL address for the selected curve.
Description
Displays the description for the selected curve.
Help
Open the Help topic for User Curve.
OK
Click on OK to close the Library Quickpick and populate the selected curve in User Curve Editor. On
clicking OK, the User Curve Properties Editor displays the Category and Curve name as header
information.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close Library Quickpick Editor without saving any changes.
None
Click on None to close the Library Quickpick Editor and remove the selected library entry from the
header. Note here that None removes only the header information; the points are retained in the User
Curve Editor.
17-41
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.6 Plot Options

The Plot Options tool provides all the necessary options to customize the display of the Star Time Current
Characteristic (TCC) curve. You can customize the display of current and time axes, legend, grid, and
curve plotting properties. Plot Options apply to the active Star View and are saved with the Star View
once the options are set. In the figure below, the name of the Star View (Star1) is displayed on the header,
indicating that the options selected apply to Star1 View only. This section describes the different options
available for your plots. The Plot Options Editor consists of the following pages:
General
Axis
Grid
Legend
Devices
These pages can be accessed by using one of the following methods:

Click the Plot Options button and select a page.
17-42
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Double-click an area of the Star Time Current Characteristic (TCC) View to bring up the relevant
page. For example, double-click the grid space to bring up the Grid page.
Right-click a specific area of the Star TCC View and select the Plot Options command. For example,
right-click the X-axis and select Plot Options to bring up the Axis page. For more information, see the
Axis page section below.
Plot Options for a specific device curve or label can be accessed by right-clicking the device curve or
label.
17-43
Star View
TCC Toolbar
General Page
The General page allows you to set the following options:
Show Range
Check this box to display the available ranges for a selected curve in Star TCC View. The available
ranges are displayed in gray when an adjustable curve is selected. This checkbox is unchecked by default.
Toggling this checkbox changes the state of the Show/Hide Range button on the Star View tool palette.
Refer to section 17.2, sub-topic Show/Hide Range for more details.
17-44
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Show Extended Tooltip

Check this box to display the detail settings of device curves, time difference, cross hair, fault arrows, etc.
plotted on the TCC View. The detail settings are displayed when the mouse cursor is moved over the
device curve or label. This box is checked by default. Unchecking this box displays only the ID.
Extend relay curve to pickup
Check this box to connect the relay inverse and/or definite time curves (minimum multiple point of the
relay curve) to the pickup marker on the top X-axis of the TCC. This box is unchecked by default.
Checking the Extend definite time curve connects the definite time curve and the relay pickup with a
straight line. Checking the Extend inverse time curve extrapolates the inverse time curve connects it to
relay pickup.
Note: The connection to pickup is displayed using a dotted line style to indicate that it is not specified in
manufacturer published data. Also note that extend to pickup does not apply for integrated curves
(overcurrent or overload function).
17-45
Star View
TCC Toolbar
User Curve Default ID

Enter the default Curve ID to be assigned for a new User Curve in Star View. As shown in the General
page figure above, clicking on User Curve button for adding a new User Curve displays the Curve ID as
User Curve followed by number 1, 2, 3
ARTTS Max Test Current
Set the maximum relay amperes for export of relay curve to the ARTTS relay test-set. The default value
is set to 90A and any value between 5 and 250A may be entered. For example, entering a value of 30A
does not export relay curve points greater than 30A (relay amps).
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for the General page. The default options can be changed
globally from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options
and select Star View.) For more information, see section 17.3.7, Default Plot Options.
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the General page settings to the selected Star View. You can reset to
defaults by clicking the Default button.
OK
Click the OK button to close the Plot Options Editor and save all the changes.
Cancel
Click the Cancel button to close the Plot Options Editor and discard all the changes.
17-46
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Axis Page
The Axis page allows you to set different options for the X (current) and Y (time) axes. The Axis page
can be accessed by clicking the Plot Options button and then selecting the Axis page from the Plot
Options Editor. Alternatively, you can double-click an axis to display the Plot Options Editor on the Axis
page.
The various options available on the Axis page are described below.
Primary and Secondary X Axis (Current)

Auto-Scale
Star uses an intelligent automatic scaling algorithm to calculate the optimal current and voltage scale
setting for the displayed TCC curve. With the Auto-Scale option selected, whenever a device curve is
adjusted, appended, or deleted from the selected Star View, the current scale is recalculated.
By default, the Auto-Scale option is selected. You can set Auto-Scale separately for each Star View you
create. Auto-Scale works independently for Phase and Ground Modes. You can also change the default
setting for Auto-Scale (ON/OFF) from the Defaults menu by pointing to Plot Options and selecting Star
View.
With Auto Scale turned OFF, the Current Multiplier and Voltage Reference fields are user definable.
Voltage Reference selection list provides a list of Bus ID available on the selected Star View. The
17-47
Star View
TCC Toolbar
corresponding Plot kV is displayed in the Plot Voltage field. The Plot Voltage is based on either
Calculated Base kV or Nominal Bus kV depending on the Project Setting selection (see Project
Settings Star View Reference kV). With Auto Scale turned ON, the Voltage Reference Bus is
automatically selected where applicable. Uncheck Display kV to hide the Plot kV value on the X-axis.
Voltage Reference can also be set to <User-Defined> selection which allows for direct entry of the Plot
Voltage in kV.
The primary and secondary axes scaling (current multiplier and voltage) can be independently set for
different modes (Phase/Ground/Normalized).
Primary X-Axis (Current Phase): X-axis scaling for the Phase Mode.
17-48
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Secondary X-Axis (Current Phase): X-axis scaling for the Phase Mode.
Primary X Axis (Current Ground): X-axis scaling for the Ground Mode.
X Axis (Current Ground): X-axis scaling (primary/secondary axis) for the Ground Mode.
X Axis (Current Phase Normalized): X-axis scaling with current in per unit (primary/secondary axis)
for the Phase Mode of a Normalized TCC.
17-49
Star View
TCC Toolbar
X Axis (Current Ground Normalized): X-axis scaling with current in per unit (primary/secondary axis)
for the Ground Mode of a Normalized TCC.
17-50
Star View
TCC Toolbar
By default, the Secondary Axis is unchecked (not displayed). It can be enabled from the Axis page or by
clicking the 2nd Axis button on the Star View menu toolbar. Alternatively, the default setting for
Secondary Axis can be changed from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the Defaults
menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View.)
Y Axis (Time)
The Y axis allows you to set the minimum and maximum time scales in seconds for the Y (time) axis of
the Star View. You can set the minimum value of 0.1, 0.01, or 0.001 seconds and a maximum value of
1000 or 10000 seconds.
17-51
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Line/Label
Color
Set the color for axes lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size, and other font effects for the axes label by clicking the Font button.
17-52
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Tick Mark
Style
Choose the style for tick marks on the axes from the drop-down list. The options available are Cross,
Inside, Outside, and None.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size, and other font effects for axes tick marks and tick numbers by
clicking the Font button.
Minor Tick Numbers

Choose the format for tick numbers on the axes from the drop-down list. The options available are
Standard, All, and None. You can also enter a customized format for minor tick numbers as a series of
numbers separated by commas. (See figure above.) The axis minor ticks for the format 1, 3, 5, 7 are
17-53
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for the Axis page. The default options can be changed
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the axes settings to the selected Star View. You can reset to defaults
by clicking the Default button.
OK
Cancel
Grid Page
Grid page provides all options for customizing the display of the Star View grid. The Grid page can be
accessed by clicking the Plot Options button and selecting the Axis page on the Plot Options Editor.
Alternatively, you can double-click the grid to display the Plot Options Editor with the Grid page already
selected.
17-54
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Display
Select this option to enable the grid options and to display the grid on the Star View. By default, the
Display option on the Grid page is unchecked. The current setting can be changed either from the Grid
page (select the Display option) or by clicking the Grid button on the Star View menu toolbar.
Alternatively, the default setting for Display Grid can be changed from the Defaults menu by pointing to
Plot Options, and then selecting Star View.
Draw Grid on Top
Select this option to display the grid on top of the device curves.
Keep Grid Square
The user has the ability to resize the STAR TCC plot by selecting a border point (in the form of a black
square) and dragging to resize the plot. Select this option to maintain a square grid when resizing Star
TCC View. If this is unchecked, the user can drag horizontally or vertically without keeping the whole
TCC Curve in the shape of a square.
Major Grid
The settings for Major Grid are enabled if the Display option is selected on the Grid page.
Line Color
Set the color for major grid lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Set the style for major grid lines by selecting a line style from the drop-down list.
Minor Grid
The settings for Minor Grid, with the exception of the Ticks per Decade setting, are enabled if the Display
option is selected on the Grid page
17-55
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Line Color
Set the color for minor grid lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Set the style for minor grid lines by selecting a line style from the drop-down list.
Ticks per Decade
Set number of ticks per decade of the log-log grid from the drop-down list.
Background
Set the color and transparency for grid background.
Color
Set the color for grid background lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Transparency
Set the transparency for the grid background color by moving the slider. The positive sign indicates
maximum transparency (white background) and the negative sign indicates minimum transparency (color
fill).
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for Grid page. The default options can be changed globally
from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select
Star View.) For more information, see section 17.3.7, Default Plot Options.
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the grid settings to the selected Star View. You can reset to defaults
by clicking the Default button.
OK
Cancel
17-56
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Legend Page
The Legend page allows you to customize the legend contents for the Star View. This page can be
accessed by clicking the Plot Options button on the Star View (TCC) toolbar and then selecting the
Legend page. You can also double-click the legend box to display the Plot Options Editor with the
Legend page active.
Display
Select this option to display the legend on the Star View. By default, the legend is enabled for Star View.
You can disable the legend view either on the Legend page or by clicking the Show Legend button on
Star View menu bar. You can also change the default setting for the Display option for the legend from
the ETAP Defaults menu by pointing to Plot Options and then selecting Star View.
17-57
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Title
Name
Enter a unique name for the Star View with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. If the name option is
selected, the name you enter here is displayed in the Star View legend.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Star View. The assigned ID consists of the default Star
View ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of Star Views
increase. The default Star View ID (Star) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the ETAP menu bar.
(From the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View.)
Font (Name)
Choose the font, font style, font size, and other font effects for Star View name by clicking the Font
button.
Right (Logo or Text)
Click on the checkbox to display logo or text information on the upper right corner of the legend.
Toggle the button to Logo or Text to select a picture logo or enter a text label of up to 25 alphanumeric
characters, respectively. The file containing the logo is not embedded in the legend. The path defined for
accessing the logo picture is relative, so you should use a copy of the logo picture file that is placed in the
project folder.
Left (Logo or Text)
Click on the checkbox to display logo or text information on the upper left corner of the legend.
Toggle the button to Logo or Text to select a picture logo or enter a text label of up to 25 alphanumeric
characters, respectively. The file containing the logo is not embedded in the legend. The path defined for
accessing the logo picture is relative, so you should use a copy of the logo picture file that is placed in the
project folder.
Info
Project Title
Click on the checkbox to display the project title in Star View legend. Project Title must be changed from
Project Information menu and is non-editable in the Legend page.
17-58
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Location
Click on the checkbox to display the location in the Star View legend. Location can be changed using the
Information command from the Project menu on the ETAP menu bar but cannot be edited on the Legend
page.
Contract #
Click on the checkbox to display the contract number in the Star View legend. Contract # can be changed
using the Information command from the Project menu on the ETAP menu bar but cannot be edited on
the Legend page.
Engineer
Click on the checkbox to display the engineer name in the Star View legend. Engineer name can be
changed using the Information command from the Project menu on the ETAP menu bar but cannot be
edited on the Legend page.
Filename
Click on the checkbox to display the project file name and path in the Star View legend. This is a noneditable field.
Date / Rev.
Click on the checkbox to display the project date and revision in the Star View legend. These fields are
editable.
17-59
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Serial #
Click on the checkbox to display the ETAP license serial number in the Star View legend. This is a noneditable field.
Rev. Data
Click on the checkbox to display the revision name in the Star View legend. This field displays the
revision in which the Star View is created and is non-editable.
Fault
Click on the checkbox to display fault type in the Star View legend. This field displays the fault type
depending on the selected Phase or Ground Mode and is non-editable.
Circuit
Click on the checkbox to display the circuit information in the Star View legend. This field is editable and
accepts up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Project Remarks
Click on the checkbox to display the project remarks in the Star View legend. Project Remarks can be
changed from Projects Information menu and is non-editable in the Legend page.
Study Remarks
Click on the checkbox to display the study remarks in the Star View legend. This field is editable and
accepts up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size and other effects for the fields in the Info section by clicking Font
button.
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for the Legend page. The default options can be changed
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the legend parameters to the selected Star View. You can reset to
OK
Cancel
17-60
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Devices Page
The Devices page in Plot Options for Star View provides comprehensive and necessary options to
customize device curves plotted in Star View. This page can be accessed by clicking the Plot Options
button and selecting the Devices page. You can also access the Devices page for the selected device curve
or label by right-clicking on the device curve and selecting Plot Options.
The Devices page includes a graphical tree representation that lists the IDs of all elements plotted in
selected Star View. The figure below shows the relay OCR2 plotted in Star1 listed with all trip elements
(Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive ground, etc.), levels (OC1, OC2 under each element), settings (51, 50
under each level), and applicable fault arrows in a tree structure. Time difference and Crosshair used in
Star1 are also listed.
The Devices page includes three sub tabs; Appearance, Preferences, and Label which can be customized
for the selected device curve.
17-61
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Device List
The Device list provides a graphical tree representation that lists the IDs of all elements plotted in the
selected Star View including crosshairs, time difference, etc. The name of the Star View is displayed at
the top level under which all plotted devices are listed. For devices with sub layers (Relays with several
trip elements), the tree structure is configured to be expanded (by clicking on the + sign) to view the
individual sub elements or collapsed (by clicking on the - sign). When a specific device is selected, the
ID of the device is displayed as the header along with the name of the Star View. In the example, shown,
transformer T1 is selected in Star View Star1; so, the header displays Star1.T1.
17-62
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The settings in Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs can be applied to the any level in the tree
structure.
If the Star View name (top most level of the device list) is selected, the settings in the Appearance and
Preferences tabs are disabled. For the Label tab, all options with the exception of Label ID color Label
setting color/properties are available. Thus, you can set uniform label display options/fonts for all devices
belonging to the selected Star View.
Multiple trip / Multiple level elements

Elements such as Relays, LV Solid State Trip, MV Solid-State Trip, Transmission Line, etc have several
sub layers. The propagation of properties (in Devices page) between different elements/levels for these
devices is described below.
For devices with multiple trip elements/levels, any setting changes at a top level propagate to all the sub
levels. This feature is illustrated and explained with the following exercise.
Relay OCR2 is plotted in Star View (Star5) with time overcurrent (51) and instantaneous (50)
curves.
17-63
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Right-click on the 51 curve label and select Plot Options. The Plot Options Editor points to the Label
tab in the Devices page with the 51 curve selected as shown below. Note that the 51 and 50 curves
are under level OC1 in the tree for relay OCR2.
17-64
Star View
TCC Toolbar
With the 51 curve highlighted, check the Border checkbox.
Move up to select OC1 (top level to 51 and 50). Note that the Border checkbox in an indeterminate
state (checked and grayed out). This is to indicate that the Border setting has been changed at one or
more of the sub levels.
17-65
Star View
TCC Toolbar
With OC1 level selected, click on Border checkbox. Note that the state of the checkbox changes
from the indeterminate state to an unchecked state.
Now move down to select 51. Note that the Border checkbox is unchecked. The changes in setting at
top level (OC1) propagated to 51 and 50 (sub levels).
The above concept applies to all settings in Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs for devices with
multiple trip elements/levels. For more information refer to the Devices page in section 17.3.7.
17-66
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Property changed at the top level (OC1);

Label Border unchecked
Label Border unchecked for settings 51 and

50 (property propagates to sub levels)
17-67
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Appearance Tab
The Appearance tab allows you select the curve appearance from a color sequence list or use custom
settings.
Preview
The preview window allows you to preview the selected color sequence or custom settings before
applying them to the curve.
Color Sequence
The color sequence displays a list of 10 preset color settings and, the sequence number used for the
selected device curve is highlighted. As shown in the figure below, color sequence #2 is used for OCR2
OC1 51 curve.
The Color sequence feature uses preset color settings in the sequence (1, 2, 3 10) for multiple curves of
the same device plotted in a Star View. As an example, if you rubber-band five LV breakers and create a
new Star View (or append to an existing Star View), the breaker curves are assigned with color sequence#
1, 2 5.
17-68
Star View
TCC Toolbar
This automated color sequence functionality facilitates better viewing and also saves time. The color
sequence for each device curve can be set in Default Plot Options. It is important to note that color
sequence functions at a global level and only one sequence (1, 2, 3 10) can be set per device. For
example, multi-function relay device has one color sequence set that applies to all sub-functions,
elements, and settings. If the Star View has more than 10 curves of the same device the sequence is
repeated. For more information on the setting and functionality of color sequence, refer to section 17.3.7.
You can customize the settings of a selected color sequence by simply checking Use custom color/style
which brings up the custom color/style options. As shown in the figure below, note that checking Use
custom color/style for color sequence #2, transfers the color settings used in color sequence #2 to Line
width, style, fill color, etc. which can be customized.
17-69
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Use Custom color/style

Check this box to enter custom settings for line width, style, fill color, fill style, etc. for the selected
curve. Note that checking this box hides the color sequence list box and displays the custom color/style
options. If a color sequence was selected, the color/style used for the color sequence is transferred to the
corresponding custom options as shown in figure above. Unlike color sequence, custom colors can be set
different for every sub-level in a device. The options available are explained below. Note that for single
line curves (for example, damage curves) the fill style, fill color and foreground color are grayed out as
they do not apply.
Line Width
Select or enter a value for the line width (thickness) of the curve.
Line Style
Select the style for the curve lines by selecting a line style from the drop-down list.
Line Color
Set the color of the curve lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Fill style
Select the fill style (Solid, Forward Diagonal, etc.) for the curve from the drop-down list.
17-70
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Fill Color
Select the fill color for the curve from the drop-down list.
Foreground Color
Select the foreground color for the curve from the drop-down list.
Preferences Tab
The Preferences tab provides options to Show/Hide and apply Shift Factors to device curves.
Phase Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Phase Mode. This box is checked by default for all curves plotted
in Phase Mode. Ground trip elements cannot be displayed in Phase Mode, so this option is grayed out for
those elements. For more information, see section 17.3.1, Phase/Ground Mode.
Ground Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Ground Mode. This box is checked by default for ground trip
elements.
Shift Factor
The selected device curve can be shifted by the specified shift factor. By default, the shift factor
multiplier is set to 1 (no shift). The shift factor is available for all device curves.
17-71
Star View
TCC Toolbar
2-Winding Transformer Damage Curve Adjustment

For 2-winding transformers, the Preferences tab displays options for transformer damage curves, in
addition to the Show/Hide and Shift Factor options.
The Show Overload option is used to enable or disable the display of the transformer short-time overload
capability curve. This option is selected by default.
The Protection on Primary Side and Secondary Side options allow you to display the transformer damage
curve as seen for a fault on the secondary and primary sides, respectively. The default is set to Protection
on Primary.
17-72
Star View
TCC Toolbar
3-Winding Transformer Damage Curve Adjustment
The options are similar to the 2-winding transformer except that the Protection on includes the Tertiary
Side. The Fault on side can be any of the other sides, except the protection side. The default is set to the
Protection on Primary Side and fault on Secondary Side option.
17-73
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Label Tab
The Label tab allows you to customize the label for each device/element plotted in the Star View.
Display
Check this box to display the label for the selected device curve. This box is checked by default. The label
display setting can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and checking/un-checking the
Label option. Refer to the figure below.
Arrow
Check this box to show the label arrow from the device label to the selected device curve. This box is
checked by default. The label arrow setting can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and
checking/un-checking the Arrow option. Refer to the figure below.
Border
Checking this box draws a border around the label with a white background. The color of the label border
is automatically set to the line color of the device curve. Refer to the figure below. This feature makes
identifying labels for the different device curves easy, especially when a TCC has many curves. This box
is unchecked by default. The border setting can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and
checking/un-checking the Border option.
17-74
Star View
TCC Toolbar
In Front of the Curve / Behind the Curve

Click on the In Front of the Curve or Behind the Curve radio button to bring the label in front/behind
its corresponding curve. Note that this feature applies to the selected label and its corresponding curve
only and not other curves/labels in Star View. The default option is set to Behind the Curve. This setting
can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and checking/un-checking the Show Label in
Front option.
Label ID
Color
Select the color for the selected device/element label ID from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device/element label ID.
Label Setting
Check this box to display the Label setting for the selected device curve. Label setting displays an
expanded label with all parameters relevant to the selected device curve. This box is unchecked by
default. The Label Setting can also be turned on/off by right clicking on the device label and checking/unchecking the Setting option.
Color
Select the color for the selected device/element label from the drop-down list.
17-75
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device/element label by
clicking the Font button.
Edit
Click on Edit to edit the label properties. Clicking the Edit button opens a Label setting window which is
divided into two sections Properties and Label Setting. The Properties lists all applicable parameters
that define the device/element selected. Select a property and click the Insert button to add it to the Label
Setting list. You can add/insert any text before or after a label parameter. Click on OK to save the changes
to label or Cancel to not save the changes.
Label Preview Window

The Label preview window displays the label parameters as it will be displayed on the Star View. Here
again, you can add/insert any text before or after a label parameter. For example, you can type in a
manufacturer name before the label {Manufacturer}, and the text is included in the label. You can also
delete any label by selecting it and clicking the Delete button on the keyboard.
Default
Click the Default button to set default Plot Options. The Default button only applies to the selected
device/element selected in the device list after confirmation. Thus for the Multi-Function Relay, if the
Relay51 setting for Phase element and level OC1 (Phase OC1 Relay51) is selected, clicking the
Default button applies default settings to the Relay51 setting only.
17-76
Star View
TCC Toolbar
If the Star View name (top level) is selected, then clicking the Default button applies default settings to all
the devices in the Star View.
The default options can be changed globally from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the
Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View.) For more information, see section 17.3.7,
Default Plot Options.
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the settings to the selected Star View. Once you have applied your
changes, you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to defaults by clicking the
Default button.
OK
Cancel
It is important to note that the Default, Apply, OK and Cancel buttons on the Devices page apply to all
three tabs Appearance, Preferences and Label.
17-77
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.7 Default Plot Options

The Default Plot Options Editor allows you to set the default settings for Star View axes, grid, legend,
and device curves at a global (application) level. Thus, every new Star View created in an existing or new
project follow the default settings, unless you customize the display of the Star View or device curves
using the local Plot Options as described in section 17.3.6.
The Default Plot Options for Star Views can be accessed from Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar
(Defaults Plot Options Star View). The Default Plot Options Editor is similar to the Plot Options
Editor as described in section 17.3.6.
The default Star View Plot Options settings are saved in OTIGraph.INI file. The location of
OTIGraph.INI file can be specified in Options (Preferences) Editor (Tools Options) by setting ETAP
Star TCC Plot Options Path located in ETAP Application category. The location of the INI file can be
set to App, User, Common, or Local.
App
Select App to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in ETAP application folder (i.e. ETAP 700 or current
version). The ETAP application folder is set the path chosen during installation.
17-78
Star View
TCC Toolbar
User
Select User to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Application Data folder. For example, if a
user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John
Smith\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Common
Select Common to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in All Users Application Data folder. The
OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0
(or current version).
Local
Select Local to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Local Settings Application Data
folder. For example, if a user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and
Settings\John Smith\Local Settings\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
accordingly to view these folders and the OTIGraph.INI file
Changing the OTIGraph.INI file location in Options (Preferences) Editor requires ETAP to be restarted
for the changes to take effect. When ETAP application is restarted, a new OTIGraph.INI file, with
default ETAP settings (factory settings) is created in the new location (if it does not already exist).
Note: In order to use your existing/customized Star View Plot Option defaults, it is necessary to manually
copy the OTIGraph.INI file from the old location to the new location.
17-79
Star View
TCC Toolbar
General Page
The General page allows you to set the following default options:
Show Range
Check this box to display the available ranges for a selected curve in Star TCC View by default. The
available ranges are displayed in gray when an adjustable curve is selected. Refer to the images below.
Show Extended Tooltip
Check this box to display the detail settings of device curves, time difference, cross hair, fault arrows, etc.
plotted on the TCC View by default. The detail settings are displayed when the mouse cursor is moved
over the device curve or label. Refer to the images below.
Extend relay curve to pickup
Check this box to connect the relay inverse and/or definite time curves (Minimum multiple point of the
relay curve) to the pickup marker on the top X-axis of the TCC by default.
Checking the Extend definite time curve connects the definite time curve and the relay pickup with a
straight line. Checking the Extend inverse time curve extrapolates the inverse time curve connects it to
relay pickup. Note that the connection to pickup is displayed using a dotted line style to indicate that it is
not specified in manufacturer published data. Also note that extend to pickup does not apply for
integrated curves (overcurrent or overload function). Refer to the images below.
17-80
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-81
Star View
TCC Toolbar
User Curve Default ID

Enter the default Curve ID to be assigned for a new User Curve in Star View. As shown in the figure
above, clicking on User Curve button for adding a new User Curve displays the Curve ID as UserCurve
followed by number 1, 2, 3
ARTTS Max Test Current
Set the default maximum relay amperes for export of relay curve to the ARTTS test set. The default is
set to 90A and a value between 5 and 250A may be entered. For example, entering a value of 30A does
not export relay curve points greater than 30A (relay amps).
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the General page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the General page default settings. Once you have applied your changes,
you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Cancel
17-82
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Axis Page
Select the default settings for the Star View X and Y axes.
The options available on the Axis page are described below.
X Axis (Current)
The X Axis (Current) allows you to set the default current multiplier and plot voltage in kV for the
primary and secondary X axes.
Primary
Set the default Current Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the primary X-axis. The Current
Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the primary X-axis are disabled (non-editable) when the
Auto-Scale option is selected. Uncheck the Auto-Scale checkbox to enable the Current Multiplier and plot
Voltage (kV) options for the primary X-axis. Select the desired default current multiplier from the dropdown list and enter the plot voltage (in kV). Note that the Voltage Reference field is blank for the Star
View Defaults.
17-83
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Secondary X-axis
Set the default Current Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the Secondary X-axis. The Current
Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the Secondary X-axis are disabled (non-editable) when the
Display checkbox is unchecked. Check the Display box to enable the Current Multiplier and plot Voltage
(kV) options for the secondary X-axis. Select the desired default current multiplier from the drop-down
list and enter the plot voltage (in kV).
Note that you can set different the X axis current multiplier and voltage for Phase, Ground, Phase
Normalized and Ground Normalized modes for each Star View by using the local Plot Options (Refer to
section 17.3.6, Plot Options for details).
Y Axis (Time)
The Y Axis (Time) option allows you to set the default minimum and maximum time scales in seconds
for the Y axis of the Star View. You can set the default minimum value of 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 seconds and
a default maximum value of 1000 or 10000 seconds.
Line/Label
Color
Set the default color for X and Y axes lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the axes label by clicking the Font
button.
17-84
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Tick Mark
Style
Choose the default style for tick marks on the X and Y axes from the drop-down list. The options
available are Cross, Inside, Outside, and None.
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the axes tick marks and tick
numbers by clicking the Font button.
Minor Tick Numbers

Choose the default format for minor tick numbers on the X and Y axes from the drop-down list. The
options available are Standard, All, and None. Also, you can enter a customized default format for minor
tick numbers, as a series of numbers separated by commas as shown in the Minor Tick Numbers dropdown list above. The axis minor ticks for the format of 1, 3, 5, 7, is displayed as shown in the figure
below.
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the Axis page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the Axis page default settings. Once you have applied your changes, you
cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Click the OK button to close the Plot Options (Star Defaults) Editor and save all the changes.
Cancel
Click the Cancel button to close the Plot Options (Star Defaults) Editor and discard all the changes.
17-85
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Grid Page
Select the default settings for the Star View Grid.
Display
Check this box to display the grid on the Star View by default.
Draw Grid on Top
Check this box to display the grid on top of device curves, by default.
Keep Grid Square
Select this option to maintain a square grid, by default, when resizing the Star TCC View.
17-86
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Major Grid
Select the default settings for the major grid.
Line Color
Select the default color for major grid lines from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Select the default line style for major grid lines from the drop-down list.
Minor Grid
Select the default settings for the minor grid.
Line Color
Select the default color for minor grid lines from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Select the default line style for minor grid lines from the drop-down list.
Ticks per Decade
Select the default number of ticks per decade from the drop-down list.
17-87
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Background
Set the default color and transparency for the grid background.
Color
Select the default color for grid background lines from the drop-down list.
Transparency
Select the default transparency for the grid background color by moving the slider.
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the Grid page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the Grid page default settings. Once you have applied your changes, you
cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Click the OK button to close the Plot Options (Star defaults) Editor and save all the changes.
Cancel
Click the Cancel button to close the Plot Options (Star defaults) Editor and discard all the changes.
17-88
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Legend Page
Select the default settings for the Star View legend.
Display
Click on this checkbox to display the legend on Star Views by default.
Title
17-89
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Name
Check this box to display the Star View name in the legend by default. This field is non-editable for
defaults as it displays the unique Star View name.
Font (Name)
Choose the default font, font style, font size, and other font effects for Star View name by clicking the
Font button.
Right (Logo or Text)
Check this box to display, by default, the adjacent logo or text information in the upper right corner of the
legend. Define the path for a logo or enter the text to be displayed.
Left (Logo or Text)
Check this box to display, by default, the adjacent logo or text information in the upper left corner of the
legend. Define the path for a logo or enter the text to be displayed.
Info
The fields Project Title, Location, Contract #, Engineer, Serial #, Rev. Data, and Project Remarks are
non-editable and can be changed from the Projects menu on the ETAP menu bar. The Fault field is also
non-editable and is displayed as phase or ground depending on the Star View Mode.
17-90
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Date / Rev.
Check this box to display, by default, the project date and revision in the Star View legend. Enter the date
and revision.
Circuit
Check this box to display, by default, the details on the circuit plotted in the Star View legend. Enter up to
25 alphanumeric characters.
Study Remarks
Check this box to display, by default, the study remarks in the Star View legend. Enter up to 100
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the Info section by clicking the Font
button.
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the Legend page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the Legend page default settings. Once you have applied your changes,
you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Cancel
17-91
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Devices Page
The Devices page in Default Plot Options provides all necessary settings to customize and set the defaults
for all device curves plotted in Star View.
The Devices page includes a graphical tree representation that lists all the elements and functions plotted
in Star View. The Devices page includes three sub tabs: the Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs.
These tabs apply to the device selected in the device list.
The Device window provides a graphical tree representation that lists all the elements plotted in Star
View including crosshairs, time difference, etc. under Star Defaults. For devices such as relays, different
trip elements, levels and settings are layered as sublevels that can be expanded (using the + sign) to
view the individual sub elements or collapsed (using the - sign).
When a device type is selected, the name of device type is displayed as the header along with the name
Star Defaults. In the above example, relay 51 damage curve is selected and hence the header displays Star
Defaults.Multi-Function Relay.
17-92
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The settings in Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs can be set for selected device/element in the list.
If Star Defaults (top most level) is selected, the settings in the Appearance and Preferences tabs are
disabled. For the Label tab, all options with the exception of Label ID color Label setting color/properties
are available. Thus, you can set uniform label display options/fonts for all devices, if desired.
Multiple trip / Multiple level elements

The propagation of properties (in Devices page) between different elements/levels for these devices was
described briefly in Plot Options section 17.3.6. This section gives more details on this concept using
Mutli-Function relay as an example.
17-93
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Devices with multiple trip elements/functions are represented in a tree fashion with the different
elements/functions layered as sub levels. The figure below shows a simplified tree structure for
overcurrent relay with one trip element (Phase) and one OC level (OC1). Each level in the tree is marked
numbers 1 4. Other trip elements and OC levels for the overcurrent relay follow the same structure.
As seen from the simplified tree above, overcurrent relay (Level 1) has a Phase trip element (Level 2).
The Phase element has OC1 level (Level 3) which in turn has 51, 50 and Short-Time settings (Level 4).
The levels (1 4) follow a parent-child relationship for any setting changes in Appearance, Preferences or
Label sub tabs. Any setting changed at a parent level propagates to all child levels. Similarly any setting
changed at child level reflects as an indeterminate state at the parent levels.
Thus checking the Border checkbox on Label tab at the Function level propagates to all elements, OC
levels and settings. Refer to the images below.
17-94
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-95
Star View
TCC Toolbar
On the other hand, un-checking the Border checkbox on Label tab for 51 setting (Phase OC1 51)
changes the Border checkbox on Label tab for OC1, Phase, and Multi-function relay levels to an
indeterminate state (checked and grayed out). Refer to the images below.
17-96
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The table below shows how different settings in Appearance, Preferences or Label sub-tabs switch to an
indeterminate state from the default state.
Tab
Setting
Color Sequence
Type
List box
ETAP Default
*
Indeterminate State
No color selected
Use custom
color/style
Checkbox
Unchecked
Checked, grayed out
Line Width
Number
No value displayed
(blank)
Line Style
List box
Various displayed
Line Color
List box
Various displayed
Fill Style
List box
Various displayed
Fill Color
List box
Various displayed
Foreground Color
List box
Various displayed
Phase Mode
Checkbox
**
Checked, grayed out
Ground Mode
Checkbox
***
Checked, grayed out
Shift Factor
Number
No value displayed
(blank)
Display
Arrow
Checkbox
Checkbox
Checked
Checked
Checked, grayed out

Checked, grayed out
Appearance
Preferences
Label
17-97
Star View
Tab
TCC Toolbar
Setting
Border
In Front of the
curve
Behind the curve
Label ID Color
Label Setting
Label Setting
Color
Type
Checkbox
Radio
button
Radio
button
List box
Checkbox
ETAP Default
Unchecked
Indeterminate State
Checked, grayed out
Not selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
*
Unchecked
Various displayed
Checked, grayed out
List box
Various displayed
* - ETAP default as set for the selected device

** - Checked for Phase curves; grayed out for Ground curves.
*** - Checked for Ground curves; unchecked for Phase curves.
The above intelligent feature helps you to correctly choose and set your device options within any sublevels for the selected device.
17-98
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Appearance Tab
The Appearance tab allows you to set the defaults for curve automated color sequence or custom
color/style settings for each device.
Preview
The Preview window allows you to preview the selected color sequence or custom settings.
Color Sequence
The Color sequence displays a list of 10 color settings that can be set as default for the selected device.
Each color (1, 2, 3 10) can be set by using the custom color/style options (Line width, Line style, etc.)
on the right side of the Appearance tab. It is important to note that color sequence functions at a global
level and only color sequence set (1, 2, 3 10) can be defined per device. For example, multi-function
relay device has one color sequence set that applies to all sub-functions, elements, and settings.
17-99
Star View
TCC Toolbar
As explained in section 17.3.6, the Color sequence feature uses preset color settings in the sequence (1, 2,
3 10) for multiple curves of the same device plotted in a Star View. As an example, if you rubber-band
5 LV breakers and create a new Star View (or append to an existing Star View), the breaker curves are
assigned with color sequence# 1, 2 5.
This automated color sequence functionality facilitates better viewing and also saves time. If the Star
View has more than 10 curves of the same device the sequence repeats itself.
You can also choose to use custom color/style (and not color sequence) for the selected curve by simply
checking the Use Custom color/style.
Use Custom color/style
Check this box to enter custom settings for line width, style, fill color, fill style, etc. for the selected
device. Note that checking this box hides the color sequence list box and displays the custom color/style
options. If a color sequence was selected, the color/style used for the color sequence is transferred to the
corresponding custom options as shown in figures below. Unlike color sequence, custom colors can be set
different for every sub-level in a device. The options available are explained below. Note that for single
line curves (for example, damage curves) the fill style, fill color and foreground color are grayed out as
they are not applicable.
17-100
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The custom color/style settings available are explained below.

Line Width
Select or enter a value for default line width of the curve.
Line Style
Select the default line style for the curve lines.
Line Color
Select the default color for curve lines from the drop-down list.
Fill Style
Select the default fill style (Solid, Forward Diagonal, etc.) for the curve from the drop-down list.
Fill Color
Select the default fill color from the drop-down list.
Foreground Color
Select the default foreground color for the curve from the drop-down list.
Preferences Tab
Set the default options to Show/Hide and apply Shift Factors to device curves in the Preferences tab.
17-101
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Phase Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Phase Mode. This box is checked by default for all curves plotted
in Phase Mode. Ground trip elements cannot be displayed in Phase Mode, so this option is grayed out for
those elements. For more information, see section 17.3.1, Phase/Ground Mode.
Ground Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Ground Mode. This box is checked by default for ground trip
elements.
Shift Factor
Enter the default factor to be used for shifting the selected device curve. The Shift Factor is available for
all device curves.
2-Winding Transformers
For 2-winding transformer, the Preferences tab displays options for the transformer damage curve in
addition to the Show/Hide and Shift Factor options.
17-102
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Select the Show Overload option to display the transformer short-time overload capability curve by
default.
Select either the Protection on Primary Side or Secondary Side option to display the transformer damage
curve as seen for a fault on the secondary and primary sides, respectively.
17-103
Star View
TCC Toolbar
3-Winding Transformers
The options are similar to the 2-winding transformer except that the Protection on includes the Tertiary
Side. The Fault on side can be any of the other sides, except the protection side.
17-104
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Label Tab
The Label tab allows you to set the default label of each device/element plotted in the Star View.
Display
Check this box to display the label for the selected device curve by default.
Arrow
Check this box to show, by default the label arrow from the device label to the selected device curve.
Border
Check this box to draw a border around the label with a white background by default. The color of the
label border is automatically set to the line color of the device curve.
In Front of the Curve / Behind the Curve
Select the In Front of the Curve or Behind the Curve radio button to bring the label in front/behind its
corresponding curve by default. Note that this feature applies to the selected label and its corresponding
curve only and not other curves/labels in Star View.
Label ID
Color
Select the default color for the selected device label ID from the drop-down list.
17-105
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device label ID.
Label Setting
Check this box to display the Label setting for the selected device curve by default. Label setting displays
an expanded label with all parameters relevant to the selected device curve.
Color
Select the default color for the selected device/element label from the drop-down list.
17-106
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device label by clicking
the Font button.
Edit
Click on Edit to edit the label properties. Clicking the Edit button opens a Label Setting window which is
divided into two sections Properties and Label Setting. The Properties lists all applicable parameters
that define the device/element selected. Select a property and click the Insert button to add it to the Label
Setting list. You can also type text in the Label Setting window. Click on OK to save the changes to label
or Cancel to not save the changes.
Label Preview Window

The Label preview window displays the label parameters as it will be displayed on the Star View. You
can type text in the Label Setting window. For example, you can type in a manufacturer name before the
label {Manufacturer}, and the text is included in the label. You can also delete any label by selecting it
and clicking the Delete button on the keyboard.
Default
Click the Default button to set ETAP default options. The Default button only applies to the selected
device/element selected in the device list after confirmation. Thus for the Multi-Function Relay, if the
17-107
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Relay51 setting for Phase element and OC1 level (Phase OC1 Relay51) is selected, clicking the
Default button applies default settings to the Relay51 setting only.
If the Star View name (top most level) is selected, then clicking the Default button applies ETAP default
settings to all the devices.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the default settings for the selected device. Once you have applied your
changes, you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset the defaults to the ETAP
OK
Cancel
Note: The Default and Apply buttons on the Devices page are common for Appearance, Preferences and
Label tabs.
17-108
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.8 Display Options

The one-line diagram display options for the Star View can be accessed by clicking on the Display
Options button. Note that by default, the selected element display annotations from the OLV in Star Mode
are transferred to Star View upon creation of a new Star View. The Display Options Star View Editor
has the following three pages of properties:
AC
AC-DC
Colors
AC Page
17-109
Star View
TCC Toolbar
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the corresponding AC elements on the oneline diagram.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the corresponding AC elements on the
one-line diagram. The table below describes the different rating parameters that are displayed for the AC
elements:
AC Element
Generator
Motor
Load/Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous amps
# of cables - # of conductor/cable - size
kA bracing
Bus bracing (kA)
Rated interrupting (kA)
Interrupting (kA)
Relays display tag (from the Relay Editor)*
Transformer rated turn ratio
* Applies to Overcurrent, Multi-Function, and Motor Relays
kV
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the corresponding
A
of the corresponding elements on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated impedance of the corresponding AC
elements on the one-line diagram. The table below describes the different impedances that are displayed
for the AC elements:
17-110
Star View
AC Element
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
TCC Toolbar
Impedance
% LRC
Impedance in ohms or %
Impedance in ohms
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the connection types of the corresponding elements
Use Default Options
Select this option to use default display options. The default display options for Star View can be changed
by selecting Display Options from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar.
Show Eq. Cable
specified as part of the loads. Double-clicking on the equipment cable brings up the Equipment Cable
Editor.
17-111
Star View
TCC Toolbar
AC-DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC elements.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the corresponding AC-DC elements on the
one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the corresponding AC-DC elements on
the one-line diagram. The table below describes the different rating parameters that are displayed for
corresponding AC-DC elements.
AC-DC Elements
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
KVA
HP/kW
17-112
Star View
TCC Toolbar
kV
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the corresponding
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the corresponding elements on
the one-line diagram. The table below describes the different ampere parameters that are displayed for the
AC-DC elements.
AC-DC Element
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Use Default Options

Select this option to use default display options. The default display options for Star View can be
changed by selecting Display Options from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar.
17-113
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Colors Page
This page includes options for displaying color information annotations for elements and results.
Color Theme
This area is grayed out and not selectable in Star View.
Annotations
Select this option to assign colors to AC, DC, Composite, and AC DC elements, and to Results. The
default display options for Star View can also be changed by selecting Display Options from the Defaults
menu in the ETAP menu bar.
17-114
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.9 Alert View
The Alert View tool logs possible alerts or messages for devices in the selected Star View. When active,
clicking the Alert View button on the Star View (TCC) toolbar displays a summary of alerts that provides
hints as to why a particular device curve is not displayed and informs you of any missing or disabled
parameters for the device. The Alert View button is enabled only if an alert is detected; otherwise, the
button is disabled. The information in the Alert Summary is displayed in two categories:
(a) Alerts: Alerts are issued when data is missing for a device in the Star View. For example, a fuse not
selected from the library or relay CT not defined in Relay Editor is categorized as an alert. Alerts are
designated as Star Alert. When the Alert View Summary includes alerts, the Alert View button is
shown as red in color.
(b) Messages: Messages are lower priority alerts that are issued as a notification means to track the state
of the disabled or hidden trip devices. Star Messages are provided for information purposes. For
example, if you uncheck the Instantaneous element of relay from the Relay Editor it is categorized as
a message. Messages are designated as Star Message. When the summary includes messages, the
Alert View button is shown as yellow in color.
When you double-click an alert or message, ETAP opens the corresponding Device Editor.
17-115
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.10 Device Coordination Report Manager

Click the Device Settings Reports button to display the Device Coordination Reports Manager. The
manager allows you to preview and print the protective device setting data, as entered in the overcurrent
relay, overload relay, MV solid-state relay, fuse, low voltage circuit breaker, and overload heater using
the Crystal Reports formats:
The Report Manager generates reports using data from the active Star TCC View window.
To print the device settings:
1. Click the Device Settings Reports button.
2. From Device Coordination Report Manager select one of the listed devices or All Device Settings to
print settings for devices plotted in Star View.
3. Select the Base or Revision data, and then click OK.
Your projects database is used to generate these reports. When you select a report, ETAP asks if you
would like to save the project prior to generating the report.
17-116
Star View
TCC Toolbar
Clicking the OK button saves the latest changes to the database and launches the selected report. Click
Cancel to exit back to the previous editor.
Note: The project database can only be saved in Base revision.
The report displays device settings for the selected devices or all devices on the Star TCC View, including
De-energized and Dumpster elements.
Excel Report
The Report Manager also generates Excel reports using data from the active Star TCC View window.
To generate the excel report of the device settings:
1. Create the STAR TCC view of the device.
2. Click the Device Settings Reports button.
3. From Device Coordination Report Manager select Excel tab and select all device Settings.
An Excel report of all the device settings in the active Star TCC View is generated.
17-117
Star View
TCC Toolbar
The format of the template of the device setting Excel report can be edited by the user. The location of the
Template is in C:ETAP 700\Formats700\Device Coordination\Excel. (The ETAP folder name may
change depending on the ETAP version number).
17-118
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.11 Normalized TCC Mode

Normalized (Shifted) TCC Mode is an analysis feature in ETAP Star View which is based on Sequenceof-Operation calculation. This analysis mode provides a graphical view (TCC plot) of the operation times
of protective devices based on their corresponding settings and characteristics for specified fault location
and type. Normalized TCC Mode graphically displays the TCC curves of protective devices in relation to
one and another for a given fault.
Upon performing a Sequence-of-Operation analysis, you can display the Normalized TCC plots by
creating a new Star View. Alternatively, an existing Star View can be toggled to Normalized TCC Mode
by clicking on the Normalized TCC button from the Star View toolbar. Note: Since Normalized TCC is
based on a specific Sequence-of-Operation scenario, the corresponding output report must be selected in
the report list box (refer to the figure below) in order to activate the Normalized TCC Mode button.
In the Normalized TCC Mode, the curves are shifted by a factor calculated based on the ratio of the
through fault current seen by a PD and the total fault current at the point of the fault. The effected TCC
curves are then shifted according to the total fault current. Note: Fixed curves/points (equipment damage
curve, motor starting curve, FLA Marker, Fault Arrow) are not displayed in the Normalized TCC View as
they are not applicable to this mode. The features of the Normalized TCC Mode are explained by the
tutorial below.
1. From the File menu, select Open Project. Browse to the ETAP installation path for the ExampleOther folder, select StarExample.oti, and then click Open.
17-119
Star View
TCC Toolbar
2. Open the OLV1 presentation by selecting it from the drop-down list for presentations or by doubleclicking the OLV1 presentation in Project Editor.
17-120
Star View
TCC Toolbar
3. Using the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.
4. Select the StarMode1 Study Case and set the output report to Prompt. Click on the Fault Insertion
(PD Sequence-of-Operation) button on the Star Mode toolbar. Place the fault on Bus2 as shown
below.
17-121
Star View
TCC Toolbar
5. The calculation asks for an Output report filename. Enter SQOP-Bus2 as the name and click OK.
6. The Sequence-of-Operation calculation displays the through fault current of the devices including
braches, loads, and buses. It also displays a graphical animation of the sequence of PDs that trip for
the fault.
17-122
Star View
TCC Toolbar
7. Rubber band the section of one-line diagram containing Fuse1, T1, CB4, CB5 and Mtr1.
17-123
Star View
TCC Toolbar
8. Click on the Create Star View button on Star Mode toolbar to create a new TCC View. The TCC
View opens up in Normalized mode (only if Sequence-of-Operation calculation is active in Star
Mode) with the SQOP output report name (SQOP-Bus2) showing in the Output Report List and the
Normalized TCC Mode set to ON.
17-124
Star View
TCC Toolbar
9. The different features of the Normalized TCC Mode are marked as A G in the figure above and are
described below:
A The header displaying the Star View title also has Normalized for 3-Phase (Sym) fault at Bus2
added to it. This helps you to clearly identify the normalized TCC View.
B The parameters and description of the Sequence-of-Operation study is shown for a Normalized
fault arrow with the label displaying the fault location, fault type, total current, output report name,
data revision name, status configuration ID, and the date at which the study was preformed.
C For each displayed curve, the shift factor is calculated and displayed in the label. The label also
shows the actual operation times for the device.
D The X-axis scale is displayed as a per unit scale (multiples of device curve current). Note that by
default the normalized fault arrow (B) is placed at 1 per unit mark and all PD currents are normalized.
The per unit value base is the through fault current as seen be each device.
E Add a time difference between Fuse1 and CB4. The current at which a time difference is
measured is displayed in per unit in normalized mode.
F Drop a crosshair on the TCC. Crosshair, in normalized mode displays the current in per unit with
the actual ampere value in parentheses.
G Note that the fault type in Legend changes to Phase (Normalized) for normalized mode.
10. Double click on the per unit X-axis scale to open the plot option axis page in Normalized TCC Mode.
Note that the X-axis header reads X Axis (Current Phase Normalized). The X axis scaling for
17-125
Star View
TCC Toolbar
normalized TCC Mode (Phase and Ground), with current per unit and voltage in kV, can be
independently set and do not effect the scaling for normal TCC Mode or auto scale.
11. Go to the Devices page. Select any device ID and open the Preferences Tab. Note that the Shift factor
field is hidden for all devices in Normalized TCC Mode. The Auto Shift Factor for the curves that are
shifted in normalized TCC Mode is now displayed.
17-126
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17-127
Star View
TCC Toolbar
12. Toggling the Normalized TCC Mode button switches the TCC back to its normal mode. The Star
View can be saved in the normal or normalized TCC Mode.
17-128
Star View
TCC Toolbar
17.3.12 Sequence Viewer

The Sequence Viewer button is enabled when you perform a Sequence-of-Operation study and select the
output report from the report list box for the active Star View. Clicking the Sequence Viewer button,
displays the Sequence-of-Operation Events dialog box that provides a tabulated sequence summary list of
actions for the applicable protective devices.
17-129
Star View
Relay Test-Set Interface
17.4 Relay Test-Set Interface

The Relay Test-Set Interface provides a method to obtain actual relay response based on the settings and
fault currents calculated in ETAP. This powerful combination of relay test-set hardware and ETAP Star
facilitates seamless testing of overcurrent, differential and distance relays through ETAP. Because of the
fully integrated interface with ETAP Star, you can simulate and obtain the actual relay response under
steady-state and transient fault currents. The captured relay response can be compared with the
manufacturer published curve in ETAP Star TCC View. All test results are stored in a historical database
that can be retrieved for plotting and comparison. The Relay Test-Set Interface works with ETAP ARTTS
relay testing hardware and test software. The figure below shows a typical relay test system setup with
ARTTS-6 Relay Test Set.
17.4.1 Relay Steady-State Response

The relay actual steady-state response refers to the behavior of the relay under normal conditions. This
behavior is defined by the relay inverse and/or definite time curves as published by the manufacturer,
which can be plotted in Star TCC View. The process to compare the actual relay response with the
manufacturer data (as plotted in Star View) involves four simple steps:
(a) Export the relay curve from Star View to relay testing software (ETAP ARTTS).
(b) Load the exported curve into the relay testing software and test the relay connected to the relay testset (ARTTS-6).
(c) Import the results saved from the test to ETAP Star.
(d) Display and compare the results with the manufacturer curve in Star View.
Each step described above can be performed using the tools in the Star View toolbar, i.e. Export Curve,
Launch ARTTS, Import Results, and ARTTS Results.

The relay test points and results are saved in master database. The database location can be specified from
the Relay Test-Set Database menu item listed under the Project menu bar. The default database path is
set to sub-folder ARTTS under the project name folder.
17-130
Star View
Export (Relay test points) Databases

The relay test points exported from Star View are stored in a database that follows a fixed name format.
The database name reflects the selected relay ID(s) and trip element/level. This makes it easy for you to
load the database in ARTTS software when testing the relay. The following rules are followed while
naming the database:
(a) The name of the generated database is the ID of the relay along with OC Level name separated by a
dash (i.e. R1-OC2).
(b) If the relay curve is integrated, the database name will be Relay ID Integrated (i.e. R1Integrated).
(c) If Independent TOC/IOC is checked for the relay, separate files will be created for 51/50/ShortTime. The database file will be named in the format Relay ID-OC Level-Element.mdb (i.e. R1-OC150.mdb)
(d) If the relay level names have special characters (i.e. I>, I>>, etc.) it will replaced with an underscore
_ in the database name. For example, the database file for Relay R1, with level I> and 51 curve
will be R1-I_-51.mdb.
Import (Relay test results) Databases
Once the relay is tested using the test software, the results may be saved into the same export database or
a new database. Importing the relay results to Star creates a new database with the name
MasterDB.mdb. This database maintains a historical record of all tests conducted for each relay along
with the result points.
17-131
Star View
Export Curve
Select a relay curve in the Star View and click on the Export Curve button to export the curve points.
Multiple relay curves can also be selected by using the Ctrl button on the keyboard. Note that all trip
elements (Phase, Ground, Neutral, etc.) are included for each exported relay curve, where available and
enabled on the Relay Editor (not just the plotted curves). The export databases are named as explained in
the Relay Test-set Database section above.
Once the relay curve export is complete, ARTTS Export Summary window appears as shown below. The
ARTTS Export Summary window shows the relay ID(s), element(s), the export database name and path.
17-132
Star View
If the same relay ID is exported more than once to the database, the existing file will be overwritten.
ETAP will issue a confirmation message prior to overwriting the file.
If the export path defined in Relay test database path is invalid an error message is displayed. Check the
database path to ensure that the correct database path is specified.
17-133
Star View
ARTTS
Clicking on the ARTTS button launches the ARTTS Test Software Program for overcurrent relays
(OC5051.exe). Selecting a relay curve and clicking on the ARTTS button, launches the OC5150 program
and launches the Load database window pointing to the folder where the selected relay curve is
exported. Click on Open to access the desired database file.
17-134
Star View
With the relay curve loaded in the ARTTS OC5051 Program, the relay can be tested using the different
Test selections available in the program. Once testing is complete, all tests can be transferred to the
Results page and saved. As mentioned previously, the results may be saved to a new database or with the
same export database for the selected relay.
17-135
Star View
Import Results
Click on Import results button on Star View toolbar. This imports any new test results and creates a new
database MasterDB.mdb if not already existing. The database maintains a record of the date and time of
the relay test along with the test results.
ARTTS Results
With the desired relay curve selected, click on the ARTTS button to launch the ARTTS Test Results
window. Results can be displayed on Star View by checking the box next to it and clicking on Apply or
OK.
The options available in the ARTTS Results Editor are described below:
17-136
Star View
Device Window
The device window displays the list of all relays in the selected Star View in a tree structure.
Relay Test Results
The Relay Test Results window displays a list of all the test results available (imported) for the selected
relay. The test result displays the Test Name (ID), Fault type (L-L or L-G), and Date / Time. The
checkbox next to each result allows selection of multiple test results to be displayed on the Star View.
Click on the Test Name to rename it. Note that once renamed, the new name is saved with the database.
Relay Settings
Displays the detailed setting of the tested relay.
Delete
Delete the selected relay test results. Upon confirmation of the delete action, the data is permanently
deleted from the database.
Apply
Click on Apply to save and update the changes in Star View.
OK
Click on OK to close the ARTTS Test Result Editor and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the ARTTS Test Result Editor without saving.
Note that the relay test results are plotted as a point based User Curve in Star View. Double-clicking on
the relay test result points opens the User Curve Editor.
17-137
Star View
Note that the relay test results appearance, preference, and label can be customized from the Star View
Plot Options.
17.4.2 Relay Transient Response

The actual response of a relay to transient currents, comprising of AC and DC components may be
considerably different in comparison to operation under steady-state conditions. Transient simulation is
required to obtain the actual relay response time to the through fault current. This can be done using the
ETAP Short-Circuit module and the ARTTS test software. Current waveforms can be obtained from
ETAP Transient short-circuit study. These waveforms can be exported to COMTRADE format using the
Export Comtrade button. For more information, refer to Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Analysis.
These transient current waveforms can be generated and injected into the relay under test using the
ARTTS program R_Pro. R_Pro records the actual operation time of the relay for the test waveform.
This time may be plotted in Star View in order to get a visual interpretation of the relay actual transient
response.
17-138
Star View
Star Tutorial
17.5 Star Tutorial

This tutorial provides a brief overview of the capabilities available in the Star module. Once you finish
this tutorial, you will be familiar with the key features and capabilities of Star and the various options
available for accessing, navigating, and coordinating curves. Each section in this tutorial is presented in
an interactive format, allowing you to work through each step as it is explained.
Note: Some of the paths shown in the figures below may differ if you have chosen a custom installation
path.
The tutorial is divided into the following sections:
Section 17.5.1: Create a New Star TCC View
Section 17.5.2: Add a Device Curve to the Star View
Section 17.5.3: Star Example
Section 17.5.4: Star View Navigation Tools
Section 17.5.5: Star View (TCC) Toolbar
Section 17.5.6: Normalized TCC Mode
Section 17.5.7: Short-Circuit Clipping, Minimum kA
17.5.1 Create a New Star TCC View

This section shows you how to create a Star TCC View.
1. Start ETAP and, from the File menu, select New Project.
17-139
Star View
Star Tutorial
2. Enter a name for the new project file (for example, StarView), and click OK.
3. ETAP prompts you for your user information. Enter the user name and access level information (if
required) and click OK to continue. To learn more about setting up user accounts and access levels,
refer to User Access Management chapter of the User Guide or click the Help button.
17-140
Star View
Star Tutorial
4. By default, a one-line diagram view OLV1 opens in ETAP. The toolbars and menus you will be using
for this section of the tutorial are illustrated below.
17-141
Star View
Star Tutorial
5. Click the Edit button on the Mode toolbar.
6. Click the Overcurrent Relay button from Edit toolbar and drop it on the OLV1 presentation.
7. Double-click the overcurrent relay element to open the Relay Editor. The Select a project library
dialog to browse and load the library file for the project appears. Select the etaplib1100.lib (default)
file and click Open.
17-142
Star View
Star Tutorial
8. Click the OCR page, and then click the Library button. This brings up the Library Quickpick - Relay
dialog box as shown below.
17-143
Star View
Star Tutorial
9. Select manufacturer GE Multilin and model 735/737 and click OK. GE Multilin 735/737 relay data is
populated in the OCR page. Set the relay as shown in the figure below; ensure that Link TOC + IOC
for this level is checked for OC1. To learn more about relay settings, refer to the Relay section in
Instrumentation Elements chapter of the User Guide or click the Help button.
17-144
Star View
Star Tutorial
10. Click the Input page.

11. Enter primary and secondary ratings for Phase CT (800:5) and Ground CT (50:5) as shown below. CT
ratios can be entered directly in the Relay Editor where no CT is connected to the relay. To learn
more about Input page of Relay Editor, see the Relay section in the Instrumentation Elements chapter
of the User Guide or click the Help button.
17-145
Star View
Star Tutorial
12. From the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.
13. To create the Star View, select the relay, and then click the Create Star View button on Star Mode
toolbar on the right-hand side.
17-146
Star View
Star Tutorial
This opens a new Star TCC View with the selected Relay1 curve. Star Views for other protective devices
can be generated in a similar manner. Keep Star1 open for the next section of the tutorial.
17-147
Star View
Star Tutorial
17.5.2 Add a Device Curve to the Star View

1. Switch to Edit Mode, and then drop a fuse in the one-line diagram view OLV1.
2. Double-click the fuse symbol to open Fuse Editor.

3. Go to the Rating page and click the Library button to display the Library Quick Pick Fuse dialog
box.
4. Select manufacturer S&C, and model SMU-20, at 27 Max. kV, with Standard speed and size 13E.
17-148
Star View
Star Tutorial
17-149
Star View
Star Tutorial
5. Switch to Star Mode using the Mode toolbar. Select Fuse1 and click on Append to Star View button
open the Star View Selection Editor.
6. Select Star1 in the Star View Selection Editor to append Fuse1 to Star1 View and click OK.
17-150
Star View
Star Tutorial
7. Star1 View opens with the Fuse1 curve added. Element or group of elements on the one-line diagram
can be appended to one or more Star Views in a similar manner. To learn more about Append to Star
View feature, refer to Chapter 16 Star Device Coordination Analysis.
17-151
Star View
Star Tutorial
8. Another shortcut to add Fuse1 to Star1 View is to hold the Shift key down, and then select Fuse1 on
the one-line and drag it to the active Star View (Star1).
17-152
Star View
Star Tutorial
9. A fuse curve is added to the existing Star TCC View (Star1) as shown below.
17-153
Star View
Star Tutorial
10. Go to File menu and select Close project. ETAP will ask if you want save the project data. Select
Yes if you want to save your changes. Keep ETAP window open for the next section of the tutorial.
17-154
Star View
Star Tutorial
17.5.3 Star Example

In the previous section, you learned how to create a Star View for a device and append elements to an
existing Star View. In this section, you will learn how to create Star Views for existing ETAP one-line
diagrams.
1. From the File menu, select Open Project.
17-155
Star View
Star Tutorial
2. Browse to the ETAP installation path for the Example-Other folder, select STARExample.OTI, and
then click Open.
17-156
Star View
Star Tutorial
3. When ETAP displays the Logon dialog box, click OK to continue. ETAP displays the Select Access
Level dialog box.
4. Select Project Editor, and then click OK to load the StarExample file.
17-157
Star View
Star Tutorial
5. Open the OLV1 presentation by selecting it from the drop-down list for presentations or by doubleclicking the OLV1 presentation in Project Editor.
6. Using the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.
17-158
Star View
Star Tutorial
7. Draw a bounding outline around the elements from Utility U1 to Transformer T1 as shown, for which
the Star TCC View is to be created. The protective device models have been already selected in
STARExample file. You can also select a set of elements on the one-line diagram by holding the Ctrl
key and clicking each element.
8. To create the Star View, click the Create Star View button on Star Mode toolbar on the right-hand
side.
17-159
Star View
Star Tutorial
9. The Select a project library dialog to browse and load the library file for the project appears. Select
the etaplib550.lib (default) file and click Open.
10. The Star View generated for the selected one-line diagram is shown below. Keep this Star View
(Star4) open for the tutorial sections below.
17-160
Star View
Star Tutorial
17.5.4 Star View Navigation Tools

In this section, you will learn about the tools available to you for working with Star Views. Use the Star
TCC View (Star4) that you created in the previous section for the one-line diagram selected in the
STARExample file.
1. Star TCC Views are saved as presentations in ETAP in the Project Editor. You can access the Star
Views you created from the drop-down list for Star View presentations or by double-clicking on the
Star View name in Project Editor.
2. By default, the elements of the one-line diagram generated in a Star View are ungrouped. To group
the elements, draw a bounding outline around them, and then right-click and select Group.
Note: The default setting for grouping and ungrouping one-line diagram elements in Star View can be
defined in the Options (Preferences) Editor (Tools Options menu), using the entry Group One-line
in Star TCC. For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Preferences.
17-161
Star View
Star Tutorial
3. The Right-Click menu for the one-line diagram in Star View includes commands to cut, copy, change
element size, symbols, and orientation, set default annotation position, and edit element properties
(opens the elements editor).
17-162
Star View
Star Tutorial
4. The one-line diagram can be moved anywhere in Star View, even placed outside the Star TCC frame
as shown in the figure below.
5. Add existing devices from the one-line diagram to an open Star View using the Append to Star View
button or drag-and-drop operation.
6. The element connections in the one-line diagram are propagated in Star View. As an example, select
CB4 on the one-line diagram (Star Mode) and click on Append to Star View on the Star Mode
toolbar. CB4 connects to T1 secondary in the Star View one-line diagram.
17-163
Star View
Star Tutorial
17-164
Star View
Star Tutorial
7. Deleting the curve will delete the device from the Star View one-line diagram but not from the main
one-line diagram.
8. The Star TCC View allows you to graphically adjust, zoom in or out, customize the TCC View, print,
etc., using the tools described in the following steps:
17-165
Star View
Star Tutorial
a) Click the Zoom In One-Line Diagram button to zoom in on the one-line diagram in Star View.
Similarly, use the Zoom Out One-Line Diagram button to zoom out from the one-line diagram.
17-166
Star View
Star Tutorial
b) Click the Zoom Fit One-Line button to zoom fit the one-line diagram to the left bottom corner of
Star View.
17-167
Star View
Star Tutorial
c) Use the Pan button (with the hand icon) to pan around a Star TCC View time-current grid. Hold
the left mouse button to grab the Star View and move the mouse to pan around the Star View.
17-168
Star View
Star Tutorial
d) To zoom in on the Star View, click the Zoom In button. Similarly, use the Zoom Out button to
zoom out of a Star View.
e) To fit entire Star layout in the selected window size, click the Zoom Fit button.
17-169
Star View
Star Tutorial
f) Click Auto-Scale in phase and ground views to automatically determine the best possible Star
View scaling for all the plotted curves. Toggle the Auto-Scale button to OFF and append Mtr4
from OLV1 to Star4. Note how the Mtr1 curve is partly visible. Now toggle the Auto-Scale
button to ON to see how the scale is adjusted to properly view all curves.
Star4 with Mtr1, Auto-Scale OFF
Star4 with Mtr1, Auto-Scale ON
17-170
Star View
Star Tutorial
g) Click the 2nd Axis button to display a second axis with different current and voltage scales. Use
Show Grid button to display Log-Log Major/Minor Tics. The legend can be displayed by clicking
the Show Legend button. All three buttons toggle their features on and off.
Star View with Legend ON
Star View with 2nd Axis and Grid

ON
17-171
Star View
Star Tutorial
h) You can graphically display device curves on Star TCC View. Handles are provided on the
device characteristic curves to identify adjustable regions. Use the Show/Hide Range button to
toggle on and off the display of available ranges for a selected curve. The available ranges will be
displayed in gray when an adjustable curve is selected.
9. Keep Star4 open for the next section of the tutorial.
17-172
Star View
Star Tutorial
17.5.5 Star View (TCC) Toolbar

In this section of the tutorial, you will learn about the features of the Star View (TCC) toolbar. These
features include options for viewing, coordinating, and customizing the device curves. The toolbar is
shown below. Relay Test-Set Interface features in this toolbar will be covered in the ARTTS Tutorial.
17-173
Star View
Star Tutorial
1. Click the Mode button to toggle between phase and ground display. Note that the X-axis scales for
Phase and Ground Modes can be set independently.
Star View Shown in Ground Mode
Star View Shown in Phase Mode
17-174
Star View
Star Tutorial
2. To zoom into a region on the Star TCC View, click the Zoom to New Window button, and then draw
a bounding outline around the region. Star View opens a Zoomed TCC window to display the
zoomed region. Time and current can also be read from the bottom of the zoom window.
17-175
Star View
Star Tutorial
3. Click the Time Difference button to measure the time difference between any two curves in the Star
View. Click the Time Difference button, and then click any two points on the displayed curves
between which you want to know the time difference. Once you have selected the second point, the
time difference value is displayed.
17-176
Star View
Star Tutorial
4. Click on the crosshair button to drop a crosshair at any point on the TCC and view the current/time at
that point. Crosshair can also be dedicated to a curve by selecting that curve.
17-177
Star View
Star Tutorial
5. Click on the User Curve button to enter a customized curve in Star TCC View. You can enter current
and time points, tolerances, and specify fault arrows. The User Curve parameters once defined and
plotted are saved with the Star View presentation. The User Curve can also be added and saved to the
ETAP Library.
17-178
Star View
Star Tutorial
6. Click the Plot Options button to customize plot attributes such as device appearance/label and TCC
axis, grid and legend settings. You can also access Plot Options for a specific device by right-clicking
the device curve or label, and then selecting Plot Options.
17-179
Star View
Star Tutorial
7. Customize general attributes such as extended tooltips or extend relay curve to pickup using the
General page in Plot Options Editor.
17-180
Star View
Star Tutorial
8. Customize the X and Y axes settings for Star View on the Axis page of Plot Options Editor. For
example, display a secondary X-axis on Star View by selecting Display and then entering the current
and voltage multiplier in the Secondary boxes.
17-181
Star View
Star Tutorial
9. Customize the grid settings for Star View on the Grid page of Plot Options Editor. For example, you
can change the number of tics per decade for the minor grid, the line style for the major grid, or the
background transparency.
17-182
Star View
Star Tutorial
10. Customize the legend settings for Star View on the Legend page of Plot Options Editor. For example,
add a logo to the legend or change the name of the Star View.
17-183
Star View
Star Tutorial
11. Customize the appearance, adjustments, and label settings for a selected device or all devices in the
Star View, using the Devices page of Plot Options Editor. For example, you can choose a different
color sequence for Fuse1 from the pre-defined color sequence list or use custom color settings on the
Appearance Tab of Devices page.
17-184
Star View
Star Tutorial
12. You can choose not to display the short-time of the transformer damage curve by unchecking the
Show Overload option for transformer T1 on the Preferences tab of the Devices page.
17-185
Star View
Star Tutorial
13. Display the detail settings, label border and Base kV value for relay OCR2 by changing settings on
the Label tab of the Devices page. Check the label setting and border checkboxes. Click on the Edit
button and add Base kV property to Relay OCR2 Phase OC1 label.
17-186
Star View
Star Tutorial
14. Close Star4 TCC View. Go to OLV1 (Star Mode) and rubber band the section of one-line diagram
containing Fuse1, T1, CB4, CB5 and Mtr1. Click on Create Star View button on Star Mode toolbar.
17-187
Star View
Star Tutorial
15. The Star View generated for the selected one-line diagram (Star5) is shown below. Note that the
Label setting and grid display are turned on.
17-188
Star View
Star Tutorial
16. This step describes the right-click options available for device curves/labels. You can perform the
following tasks:
(a) Select CB4 curve, right-click and choose Bring Curve to Front. CB4 is now placed on top of
CB5 (bottom portion).
(b) Select Fuse1 label, right-click and uncheck Arrow. Label arrow for fuse1 is now hidden
(c) Select CB5 label, right-click and check Border. The label now has a border with white
background.
(d) Select T1, right-click and uncheck Setting. T1 label shows only the transformer ID.
(e) Select Fuse1-3P fault arrow, right-click and check Show Label in Front and Border. Notice
how the fault arrow label is now visible on top of the fuse curve.
17-189
Star View
Star Tutorial
17. To customize the display annotations for one-line diagram elements in Star TCC View, click the
Display Options button. For example, the transformer T1 rating / %Z and the breaker rating/kV can
be displayed on the one-line diagram in Star View by checking the applicable boxes in Display
Options. (See the figure below.)
17-190
Star View
Star Tutorial
18. With ETAP Star, you can troubleshoot your device coordination studies for any Star View TCC. The
Alert View button on the Star View (TCC) toolbar brings up a summary of alerts or messages (low
priority alerts) that provides hints as to how and why a particular device curve is not being displayed
or missing information regarding a device. The Alert View button is active if ETAP Star has detected
errors; otherwise, the button is grayed out.
19. Keep Star5 open for the next section of the tutorial.
17-191
Star View
Star Tutorial
17.5.6 Normalized TCC Mode

In this section of the tutorial, you will learn about the features of the Normalized TCC Mode in Star
View. Normalized TCC Mode provides a graphical view (TCC plot) of the operation times of protective
devices, based on their corresponding settings and characteristics, for specified fault location and type.
For more information on this feature, refer to section 17.3.11
1. Go to OLV1 in Star Mode. Select the StarMode1 Study Case and set the output report to Prompt.
Click on the Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation) button on the Star Mode toolbar. Place the
fault on Bus2 as shown below.
2. The calculation asks for an Output report filename. Enter SQOP-Bus2 as the name and click OK.
17-192
Star View
Star Tutorial
3. The Sequence-of-Operation calculation displays the through fault current of the devices including
braches, loads, and buses. It also displays a graphical animation of the sequence of PDs that trip for
the fault.
4. Select Star5 TCC View. Choose the output report SQOP-Bus2 from the report list above Star5 TCC
View.
17-193
Star View
Star Tutorial
5. Click on the Normalized TCC button to view Star5 in normalized (shifted) mode. The parameters and
description of the Sequence-of-Operation study is shown for a Normalized fault arrow. For each
displayed curve, the shift factor is calculated and displayed in the label. The label also shows the
actual operation times for the device. Also note that the Normalized TCC is displayed in per unit
scale (multiples of through fault current in amps as seen by the device).
Note: Fixed curves/points (equipment damage curve, motor starting curve, FLA Marker, Fault Arrow)
are not displayed in the Normalized TCC View as they are not applicable to this mode.
6. Toggle the Normalized TCC button to view Star5 TCC in normal mode.
7. Close Star5 TCC and proceed to next section of the tutorial.
8. Alternatively, while Sequence-of-Operation result is active in the OLV, you can create a new Star
View which will be automatically placed in Normalized TCC View.
17-194
Star View
Star Tutorial
17.5.7 Short-Circuit Clipping, Minimum kA

The Run/Update Short-Circuit kA button on the Star Mode toolbar allows you to perform a short-circuit
study to update the time-characteristics curve Clipping kA and Minimum kA for the applicable elements.
The Clipping kA can be used for clipping the TCC curves and are specified on the Short-Circuit page of
element editors. The clipping or minimum currents in kA can be set to Calculated or User-Defined.
1. Calculated option updates the short-circuit kA values for both 3-phase and Line-to-Ground fault fields
based on the Star Mode Short-Circuit Study.
2. To manually enter the clipping/minimum kA, double-click a device to open the Device Editor, and
then select the TCC kA page. For example, open Fuse1 Editor and select User-Defined option from
the TCC kA page to enter the 3-Phase Fault and Line-Ground Fault clipping/minimum kA values.
17-195
Star View
Star Tutorial
3. To run/update short-circuit clipping for various protective devices in the one-line diagram, open the
OLV1 presentation in StarExample. Switch to Protective Device Coordination (Star) Mode using the
Mode toolbar.
4. . Select the StarMode1 Study Case and set the output report to Prompt.
5. To update short-circuit clipping kA values; click the Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button
to perform 3-Phase and Line-to-Ground fault calculations.
17-196
Star View
Star Tutorial
6. ETAP will prompt you to enter an output report name for this study. Enter any suitable name (up to
64 characters) for this Short-Circuit Study.
7. Short-circuit calculation results are displayed directly on the one-line diagram. The results obtained
after running short-circuit study for StarExample are shown below.
The cycle symmetrical and asymmetrical fault clipping kA currents for 3-phase and line-ground are
updated for the protective devices. The minimum kA currents can be updated by choosing the 30
cycle kA (or Min kA for IEC) option in the Star Mode Study Case.
17-197
Star View
Star Tutorial
8. To view the updated current values, double-click a device adjacent to any faulted bus and go to the
TCC kA page of the Devices Editor. The updated 3-phase and line-ground short-circuit
clipping/minimum currents for Fuse1 are shown in the figure below.
17-198
Star View
Star Tutorial
9. Select the Show on TCC option to display the fault arrows in Star View. The examples below show
Fuse1 and circuit breaker CB4 curves with and without short-circuit clipping/minimum fault arrows.
17-199
Star View
Star Tutorial
This concludes the tutorial for Star View. To learn more about the features and capabilities of the Star
View Module, refer to the preceding sections in this chapter.
17-200
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
17.6 ARTTS Tutorial

This tutorial provides a brief overview of the basic operation of the Relay Test-Set Interface module.
Once you finish this tutorial, you will be familiar with the key features and capabilities of the interface.
Each section in this tutorial is presented in an interactive format, allowing you to work through each step
as it is explained.
Note: Some of the paths shown in the figures below may differ if you have chosen a custom installation
path.
The tutorial is divided into the following sections:
Section 17.6.1: Create a New Star TCC View
Section 17.6.2: Export Curve to Relay Test-Set
Section 17.6.3: Import Results
Section 17.6.4: Compare Relay test results with manufacturer published data
17.6.1 Create a New Star TCC View

This section shows you how to create a Star TCC View.
1. Start ETAP and, from the File menu, select New Project.
17-201
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
2. Enter a name for the new project file (for example, ARTTSInterface), and click OK.
3. ETAP will prompt you for your user information. Enter the user name and access level information (if
required) and click OK to continue. To learn more about setting up user accounts and access levels,
refer to the User Access Management chapter of the User Guide or click the Help button.
17-202
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
4. By default, one-line diagram view OLV1 will open in ETAP. The toolbars and menus you will be
using for this section of the tutorial are illustrated below.
17-203
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
5. Click the Edit button on Mode toolbar.
6. Click the Overcurrent Relay button from Edit toolbar and drop it on the OLV1 presentation.
17-204
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
7. Double-click the overcurrent relay element to open the Relay Editor. The Select a project library
dialog to browse and load the library file for the project appears. Select the etaplib1100.lib (default)
file and click Open.
17-205
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
8. Click the OCR page, and then click the Library button. This opens the Library Quickpick - Relay
dialog box as shown below. Select manufacturer GE Multilin, model 750/760 and click OK.
17-206
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
9. GE Multilin 750/760 relay data is populated in the OCR page. Set the Phase Overcurrent element of
the relay as shown below. Uncheck the Overcurrent and Instantaneous settings for other elements. We
will export/test the Phase Overcurrent element using the ARTTS Relay Test Set.
10. Click the Input page.

11. Enter primary and secondary ratings for the Phase CT terminal (1000:5) as shown below. CT ratios
can be entered directly in the Relay Editor where no CT is connected to the relay. Click OK to close
the Relay Editor.
17-207
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
12. From the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.
13. To generate the Star View, select the relay, and then click the Create Star View button from the righthand side Star Mode toolbar.
17-208
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
14. The Phase overcurrent element is plotted as shown below. Right click on the relay curve and select
Plot Options to customize the relay curve display / label settings. Keep the Star View (Star1) open for
the next section of the tutorial.
17-209
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
17.6.2 Export Curve to Relay Test-Set

1. The relay test points and results are saved in master database. The database location can be specified
from the Relay Test-set Database menu item listed under the Project menu bar. The Relay Test-Set
database location is set by default to the ARTTS sub-folder within the project folder. Refer to the
image below.
2. The relay test-set software (ARTTS) program location can be defined in Tools Options
(Preferences). The default path is shown below.
17-210
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
3. Go to Star1 TCC View and select the Relay1 curve. Click on the Export curve button on the Star TCC
View toolbar. Multiple relay curves can be selected using <Ctrl> button and exported.
4. Upon clicking the Export Curve button the ARTTS Export Summary window appears as shown
below. The ARTTS Export Summary window shows the relay ID(s), export database name
element(s) exported and the database location. Click OK to complete the export.
17-211
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
5. With the Relay1 selected, click on the Test-Set (ARTTS) button as shown below.
17-212
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
6. This will launch the ARTTS Overcurrent 50-51 program as shown below. Confirm the ARTTS model
(DTRS 6) and type of connection to the computer (Serial/USB).
7. The Load database window is displayed with the database of Relay1 curve selected in Star View.
Click on Open to load the database.
17-213
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
8. The database will load the Relay1 points exported from Star View. Click on Phase fault Tab to view
the curve as shown below to view the curve exported from Star View.
17-214
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
17.6.3 Import Results

1. Test the relay curve using the different Test selections available. Once tested store all tests in the
Results page and click on the Save button (on the Results page). The results may be saved to a new
database or the same export database for Relay1. Refer to the image below.
17-215
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
2. Open Star1 in ETAP and select Relay1 curve. Click on the Import Results button as shown below.
The test results are imported to the Master database.
17-216
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
17.6.4 Relay Test Results

1. With Relay1 curve selected, click on the ARTTS Results button to launch the ARTTS Test Results
Editor. The selected Relay1 curve (Relay-P-51, Phase Time Overcurrent curve) will be automatically
selected with test results shown in the Relay Test Results table. Results can be displayed on Star
View by checking the box next to it and clicking on Apply or OK.
17-217
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
2. Check the test result and click OK to plot it in Star View. The relay response plots as a point based
user curve in Star View.
17-218
Star View
ARTTS Tutorial
3. Right click on the test result points or label to access Plot Options. The appearance, label and other
preferences for the test result points can be set using Plot Options.
This concludes the tutorial on ETAP Relay Test-Set Interface. To learn more about the features and
capabilities of the Relay Test-Set Interface, refer to section 17.4 in this chapter.
17-219
Chapter 18
Arc Flash
The ETAP Arc Flash Analysis Module incorporates the latest software technology available to investigate
a workers potential exposure to arc flash energy, which may be required for the purpose of injury
prevention and determination of appropriate levels of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). The incident
energy and flash protection boundaries are determined based on the following standards for Arc Flash
Analysis:
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70E-2009 & Upcoming 2012 changes.
IEEE Standards 1584-2002 & IEEE 1584a 2009
CSA Z462
ETAP Arc Flash is a fully integrated module that takes advantage of all the capabilities already built into
ETAP. The program automatically determines the bolted short-circuit current (3-phase and 1-phase). It
also calculates the individual arcing current contributions and arc fault clearing time of all the protective
devices involved in the arc fault by interfacing with ETAP Star (Protective device selectivity and
coordination module). In addition, ETAP determines automatically the system grounding configuration
and other information required to determine the most adequate and conservative Hazard Analysis results.
All the automation dramatically reduces the time required to perform an Arc Flash Analysis according to
the standards.
With ETAP Arc Flash, you can perform an Arc Flash Analysis for a single bus or hundreds at a time. It
has built-in tools like the Arc Flash Report Analyzer and the Arc Flash Quick Incident Energy Calculator
that is available at every bus. ETAP also includes global typical boundaries, equipment gap between
conductors and working distances from IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E, which minimize the data entry
process. The global data options allow you to significantly reduce the AF data entry process to bare
minimum.
ETAP has all the analysis functionality recommended by NFPA 70E and IEEE 1584, including the arcing
current variation for systems with nominal voltage below 1 kV, the ability to change the prefault voltage,
and the ability to select different levels of bolted 3-phase fault current and a robust AC-Decay/Gen
Decrement curve method which allows you to model the decay in incident energy from different AC
sources during the arc fault. Along with the analysis tools, ETAP Arc Flash provides sophisticated
reporting which literally shows the arc flash results for every location on the one-line diagram or in
comprehensive analysis reports for every location. The program gives you the ability to print or create
18-1
Arc Flash Analysis
Overview
custom MS Excel report by using the export feature from the AF Report Analyzer. It also includes builtin Summary Crystal Reports for all the faulted buses in the systems, which include the flash protection
boundary and the Hazard/Risk category. The final analysis results can be shown on Arc Flash Labels that
can be placed on the equipment. The labels contain the necessary information to convey the arc flash
danger level in multiple languages or unit systems.
18-2
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
18.1 Bus Editor

The Bus Editor contains all the input data fields needed for the arc flash calculation. The pages that have
information related to arc flash are: Info, Rating, and Arc Flash.
18.1.1 Info Page

The only parameters which are related to arc flash on the Bus Info page are the Bus nominal kV and the
Equipment name and ID fields. ETAP uses the nominal kV value to allow you to select the right set of
typical data according to IEEE Standards. The Equipment ID and Equipment name may be displayed on
certain arc flash label templates.
18.1.2 Rating Page

The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e., open air, switchgear, MCC, etc.). It also
contains typical data for approach boundaries and equipment gap between conductors based on IEEE
1584 2002. The user also may enter custom data according to equipment manufacturer specifications. The
Rating page also includes information about the required insulated glove classes.
18-3
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Standard
Select either the ANSI or IEC Standard. There is no IEC Arc Flash Standard, selecting IEC will change
the short-circuit parameters for bracing to peak currents, but the arc flash results are unaffected by this
option. This option only applies for short-circuit 60909-0 2001 device evaluation and not for AF at this
point.
Type
Equipment Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment that are supported for Arc Flash
Analysis. The available equipment types are as follows:
Other
MCC
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Panelboard
Cable Bus
Open Air
Note: These types come from IEEE 1584-2002 Table 4. The switchboard and switchrack are handled in
the same fashion as the switchgear. The Type drop-down list plays a very important role in the
determination of the incident energy for systems with voltage levels less than or equal to 15 kV.
Note: For voltages above 15 kV the selection of equipment type does not make any difference in the arc
flash calculations since the Lee Method is used for those voltage levels.
For new buses the default value is Other which is handled in the same manner as a cable bus, since in
previous versions of ETAP the Cable Bus option was tied to this selection.
If the option Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data is enabled, the fields in the
bus editor related to arc flash are immediately populated with typical or user-defined IEEE 1584 and
NFPA 70E 2009 parameters depending on the selection on the Data Options for Bus editor default editor.
Protective Device Isolation

This is a major change on the calculation methodology of ETAP. This option can be used to configure the
program to produce more conservative results by making the assumption that the main source protective
device(s) (PDs) are or are not adequately isolated from the bus and may fail to operate and be capable of
de-energizing the arc fault before it escalates into a line-side arc fault.
If this option is checked, then the program assumes that there is enough isolation and that the directly
connected source protective device (main pd(s)) can de-energize the bus arc fault. If the option is
unchecked, then it is assummed that no adequate isolation exists (i.e. no sheet metal or suficient barriers
preventing the bus side arc fault from damaging the protective device itself and possible scalation into a
line-side fault) and the directly connected source PDs are ignored.
18-4
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Note: This option (checked or unchecked) is not considered or applied into the calculation until the study
case option Main Protective Device is not Isolated is enabled.
The following table lists the default values of this option for different types of equipment.
Default Values for Main PD is Isolated check box
Isolation Check Box for
Default
Equipment Type
Other
Isolated (checked)
MCC
Switchgear
Isolated (checked)
Switchboard
Switchrack
Isolated (checked)
Panelboard
Cable Bus
Isolated (checked)
Open Air
Isolated (checked)
The operational logic for the Main PD is Isolated Checkbox is listed below:
The check boxes get updated in the same way the Gap and X-Factors get updated as part of the
typical data routine. That is:
Clicking on the Typical Data button resets the checkbox to the default value
displayed in the table above.
If the bus nominal kV or equipment type are modified, then the checkbox is
automatically updated back to default value.
The option is not available for buses with Nominal kV greater than15kV.
Continuous
The Continuous Amp rating field is for new types and is not involved in the arc flash calculation. Do not
confuse this value with the calculated or user-defined bolted fault current values that the Arc Flash
Module uses in the calculation.
Bracing
The short-circuit bracing rating fields (Asymm. ms and Symm. ms) is for new types and is not involved in
the arc flash calculation. Do not confuse these values with the calculated or user-defined bolted fault
current values that the Arc Flash Module uses in the calculation.
Arc Flash Parameters

Gap Between Conductors / Buses
This Gap is defined in IEEE 1584-2002 Section 9.4 as the gap between conductors or buses for the
equipment at the fault location. This value is to be entered in millimeters (mm).
Table 1 shows the default values used for each device type. There is no gap between conductors for buses
lower than 0.208kV or greater than 15.0 kV. This logic is implemented to avoid using equipment gaps
that do not follow Table 4 of IEEE 1584; however, the value can be changed to any other value within the
18-5
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
specified range. Please also note that the gap between conductors is not used if the Lee Method is used to
determine the arc flash results (as is the case for systems lower 0.208kV and above 15 kV). Please refer to
calculation methodology for more details.
Distance X Factor
The Distance X Factor field is for display only. The values it displays are selected according to the
equipment type and voltage as described in Table1, under the column X Factor Value. This value is a
constant for each type of device and is used in equation 5.3 of IEEE 1584-2002 as an exponent. There is
no Distance X Factor for buses lower than 0.208kV or greater than 15.0 kV.
Typical Gap & Boundary

The Typical Gap & Boundary button brings in default values and ranges for the equipment gap, X-factor,
Limited, Restricted, and Prohibited Approach Boundaries. The defaults and ranges are shown in Tables 1,
2, and 3.
If you click this button, the gap, X factor and boundaries are set to the default value selected in the Bus
Arc Flash typical Data editor as shown below:
Please refer to the Arc Flash Analysis Data Editor for a complete list of the typical data values used. Of
course if the user-defined options are used as the source of data for the bus, then the bus values will be
populated with the customized as values as defined by the user.
The following table summarizes the typical default values for the Conductor Gap under the column Gap
Default Value (mm).
Table 1: Range Values and Default Values for Gaps between Conductors and X Factors
Bus Nominal
kV Range
Equipment
Type*
Typical Gap
Range mm.
18-6
Gap
Default
Value
(mm)
X Factor
Value
Arc Flash Analysis

Bus Nominal
kV Range
Bus Editor
Equipment
Type*
Typical Gap
Range mm.
Open Air
Bus Nominal
kV <= 1.0
kV*
1.0 kV < Bus

Nominal kV
<= 5.0 kV
5.0 kV < Bus

Nominal kV
<= 15.0 kV*
Cable Bus
MCC
Other
Panelboard
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Open Air
Cable Bus
MCC
Other
Panelboard
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Open Air
Cable Bus
MCC
Other
Panelboard
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
1 to 999
1 to 999
1 to 999
Gap
Default
Value
(mm)
40
13
25
13
25
32
32
32
102
13
102
13
102
102
102
102
153
13
153
13
153
153
153
153
X Factor
Value
2.000
2.000
1.641
2.000
1.641
1.473
1.473
1.473
2.000
2.000
0.973
2.000
0.973
0.973
0.973
0.973
2.000
2.000
0.973
2.000
0.973
0.973
0.973
0.973
* Note: Any bus whose nominal voltage is less than 0.208 kV and higher than 15kV has the same
default values as that of a 0.208 kV bus and a 15 kV bus; however the Lee method is used instead
of the empirical IEEE 1584 equations to determine the arc flash result if the voltage is below
0.208 kV and higher than 15kV. This means that the gaps and x-factors are disregarded for such
cases.

The Limited Approach Boundary (LAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2009, as the approach limit at
a distance from an exposed live part within which a shock hazard exists.
approaching a conductor that is not properly braced in a fixed position. The value should be entered in
feet or meter. The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009.
18-7
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
The module will select this value according to the kV of the bus. NFPA 70E 2004 values may also be
used depending on the selection on the Bus Arc Flash Typical Data default editor.
Defaults for Limited Approach Boundaries
The range and default values for the Limited Approach Boundaries are defined according to the values
listed in NFPA 70E-2009 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock Protection). If you
click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated according to the
values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be reset to the default
ones. Tables 2-3 list the limited approach boundaries for the 2004 and 2009 editions of NFPA 70E.
Bus Nominal kV
Restricted Approach
Prohibited Approach
Range
Boundary
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
10
10 to 30
3.5
3.5 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
10
10 to 30
3.5
3.5 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV
10
10 to 30
5
5 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV
10
10 to 30
6
6 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV
10
10 to 30
8
8 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
10
10 to 30
8
8 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV
10.66
10.66 to 30
8
8 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV
11
11 to 30
10
10 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV
11.66
11.66 to 30
11.66
11.66 to 30
230kV to 242 kV
13
13 to 45
13
13 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV
15.33
15.33 to 45
15.33
15.33 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV
19
19 to 45
19
19 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV
23.75
23.75 to 45
23.75
23.75 to 45
800 kV
18-8
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Bus Nominal kV
Restricted Approach
Prohibited Approach
Range
Boundary
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
10
10 to 30
3.5
3.5 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
10
10 to 30
3.5
3.5 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV
10
10 to 30
5
5 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV
10
10 to 30
6
6 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV
10
10 to 30
8
8 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
10
10 to 30
8
8 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV
10.66
10.66 to 30
8
8 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV
11
11 to 30
10
10 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV
11.66
11.66 to 30
11.66
11.66 to 30
230kV to 242 kV
13
13 to 45
13
13 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV
15.33
15.33 to 45
15.33
15.33 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV
19
19 to 45
19
19 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV
23.75
23.75 to 45
23.75
23.75 to 45
800 kV
The units of the limited approach boundary can be set to metric units if the project standards are set to
Metric units.

not cross when approaching a conductor that is fixed (not movable). The value should be entered in feet.
The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009. ETAP will select
this value according to the kV of the bus. This value may be displayed on the Arc Flash Hazard Label if
selected in the appropriate template.
See Table 2 & 3 above for definitions of the range and default values for Limited Approach Boundaries.
Limited Approach Boundary Toggle Radio Button

This toggle radio button allows you to select which limited approach boundary to display on the Label.
Depending on the selection, the label from the Bus Arc Flash page or the global arc flash calculation
labels will show the Exposed Movable Conductor or the Fixed Circuit Part limited approach
boundary.
This toggle radio button basically serves the purpose of telling the program which one of these values
should be passed to the arc flash labels.
18-9
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor

The Restricted Approach Boundary (RAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2004 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due to electrical
arc over combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity to the live part.
The value should be entered in feet.
Defaults for Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries
The range and default values of the Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries are defined according
to the values listed in NFPA 70E-2004 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock
Protection). If you click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated
according to the values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be
reset to the default ones.
Bus Nominal kV
Restricted Approach
Prohibited Approach
Range
Boundary
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
1
1 to 30
0.1
0.1 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
1
1 to 30
0.1
0.1 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV
2.16
2.16 to 30
0.6
0.6 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV
2.58
2.58 to 30
0.8
0.8 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV
2.75
2.75 to 30
1.41
1.41 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
3.16
3.16 to 30
2.08
2.08 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV
3.25
3.25 to 30
2.66
2.66 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV
3.58
3.58 to 30
3.08
3.08 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV
4
4 to 30
3.5
3.5 to 30
230kV to 242 kV
5.25
5.25 to 45
4.75
4.75 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV
8.5
8.5 to 45
8
8 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV
11.25
11.25 to 45
10.75
10.75 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV
14.91
14.91 to 45
14.41
14.41 to 45
800 kV
18-10
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Bus Nominal kV
Restricted Approach
Prohibited Approach
Range
Boundary
Boundary
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
Default (ft)
Range (ft)
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV
1
1 to 30
0.1
0.1 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV
1
1 to 30
0.1
0.1 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV
2.16
2.16 to 30
0.6
0.6 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV
2.58
2.58 to 30
0.8
0.8 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV
2.75
2.75 to 30
1.41
1.41 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV
3.25
3.25 to 30
2.16
2.16 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV
3.33
3.33 to 30
2.75
2.75 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV
3.83
3.83 to 30
3.33
3.33 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV
4.25
4.25 to 30
3.75
3.75 to 30
230kV to 242 kV
5.66
5.66 to 45
5.16
5.16 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV
9.16
9.16 to 45
8.66
8.66 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV
11.83
11.83 to 45
11.33
11.33 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV
15.91
15.91 to 45
15.41
15.41 to 45
800 kV.
The units of the Restricted and Prohibited approach boundaries can be set to metric units if the project
standards are set to Metric units.

The Prohibited Approach Boundary (PAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2009 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making contact with
the live part. The value should be entered in feet.
For definitions of the range and default values for Prohibited Approach Boundaries, see Table 4 and 5
above.
Insulating Glove Class

The insulating glove class field shows the insulating glove class and voltage rating determined based on
the bus nominal kV. This information is updated automatically as soon as the bus nominal kV is known.
The Table 6 below shows the nominal bus kV ranges and the corresponding insulating glove classes and
voltage ratings according to ASTM D120/IEC903 Standards.
Note: In ETAP 7.0.0 the default values are editable and can be customized to allow only for higher glove
classes than those specified by ASTM D120. To modify the glove classes used by the program you need
to access the user-defined portion of the Shock Hazard Analysis Data editor from the
Project\Settings\Arc Flash menu:
18-11
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Table 6: ASTM Insulated Glove Voltage Classes: (ASTM D120/IEC903) Standards

Types of Insulating Glove
Maximum use
Class ETAP Bus nominal kV range
voltage rating AC
Volts L-L
Low Voltage Gloves
500
00
Bus kV 0.500
1000
0
0.500 kV < Bus kV 1.0 kV
High Voltage Gloves
7500
1
1.0 kV < Bus kV 7.5 kV
17000
2
7.5 kV < Bus kV 17.0 kV
26500
3
17.0 kV < Bus kV 26.5 kV
36000
4
26.5 kV < Bus kV 36.0 kV
No available class per ASTM
N/A
N/A Bus kV > 36.0 kV
Note: ASTM does not define the insulating glove voltage rating or class for voltage higher than 36000
Volts. As a result of this, the voltage rating is set to the bus nominal kV if the bus nominal voltage is
higher than 36 kV and the glove class is omitted in the labels.
Shock hazard when

The Shock hazard when field may be used to provide additional information about electrocution (shock
hazard) so that it may be printed on some label templates or the MS Excel Arc Flash Report. You can use
it to add a description about when there is a shock hazard present. You can type up to 50 alphanumeric
characters and define your own informational message. The following table contains three possibilities
that have been built into the program.
Note: This information is only to be displayed on certain arc flash label templates and will not cause any
effect on the arc flash results (i.e., effect of covers open or closed, etc.). The default for this field is
covers removed.
Table 7: Possible additional descriptions of the Shock Hazard for the AF labels
Field
Default
Comments
Shock Hazard when
covers removed
This could read doors are open
enclosure doors are closed
This could read covers are on
hinged covers are open
This could read opening hinged
doors
18-12
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data

This option configures the bus editor to automatically update arc flash data every time the bus nominal
kV or the equipment type are modified. Selecting this checkbox saves you an extra click to update the
typical or user-defined values for each bus that is configured. This option is selected by default.
Data Options
Data menu:
ETAP brings data into the bus editor according to the selections on the Bus AF Typical Data editor. The
selections on this editor are global defaults and this means that if you change the default at one bus, then
the source of data changes accordingly for all buses. The fact that this editor can be opened from the bus
rating page is purely designed for convenience. The following image illustrates the concept of the global
data options:
18-13
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Arc Flash Analysis Data Sources
Bus Arc Flash Data
Shock Hazard Analysis Data Sources
Bus Arc Flash Typical Data

(Global Selection Switch)
When clicking on the typical

data button, the parameters
come from any of the sources
as specified by the default Bus
Arc Flash Typical Data editor
Voltage Rated Glove Class Sources
18-14
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
18.1.3 Arc Flash Page

The Bus Arc Flash page contains the quick incident energy calculator, which is a powerful analysis tool
that allows you to perform a quick Arc Flash Analysis at the bus level if you already know some of the
input data necessary to calculate the incident energy. Also, it displays the calculated Arc-Flash Analysis
results from the global calculation. The quick incident energy calculator allows you to perform a
hazard/risk assessment for an individual bus. This tool can be particularly useful in some of the following
cases:
The short-circuit results are already known.

The arc fault clearing time is known or can be conservatively estimated.
You need to modify part of the system and want to know the impact of the changes on the
You want to perform some What if scenarios to help increase the safety margin of the arc flash
You need to produce a label for the equipment, but do not want to run the global calculation.
This page contains several input parameters needed for the global system calculated Arc Flash Analysis.
(See the Running Global Arc Flash Analysis section for more details.)
The Quick Incident Energy Calculator has the capability to perform arc flash calculations based on purely
user-defined parameters or based on system-calculated results. The fields marked as Calculated have been
updated by the global arc flash calculation to this page (as display only values). Those marked as UserDefined have been manually entered, except for the fault clearing time (FCT) and source PD arcing
18-15
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
current when you have selected a source PD. The quick incident energy calculator can display the
incident energy and flash protection boundary calculated based on either set of parameters.
Calculated
This section displays the results of the global arc flash calculation. The Bus Editor Arc Flash page uses
the update values to determine the incident energy.
Bus Fault Current

This field shows the total bus bolted (3-Phase/1-Phase) fault current in kA which is calculated by the
Short-Circuit Program {1/2 cycle, 1.5 to 4 cycle (ANSI) or initial symmetrical current (Ik for IEC)}.
This field may be updated from the global arc flash calculation if the option Update Fault Currents is
selected from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please note that this field is not updated if the
fault current decay method is used since the there are several short-circuit current values calculated
over time in this case.
Bus Arcing Current
This field shows the total bus arcing current calculated based on the 3-phase short-circuit current (1/2
Cycle Symmetrical RMS or 1.5 to 4 cycle). This field may be updated by the global arc flash calculation
if the option Update Fault Currents is selected from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please
also note that if the fault current decay method is selected, then this value is not updated since it is
changing over time.
Source PD
This is the ID of the source protective device determined by the global arc flash calculation to be the
device which clears the fault at the bus (last operating device to de-energize the fault). If there are
multiple source branches with protective devices, ETAP will select the one that takes the longer to trip
(clear the fault).
The ID of the source PD is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the update options are selected in the Arc
Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It
is only recalculated and updated by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a
successful global arc flash calculation.

The fault current shown in this field is the actual arcing current in kA passing through the source PD that
clears the fault. Please note that the current shown here is expressed using the base kV of the location of
the protective device. This means that the current shown here could be the arcing current passing through
the protective device on the primary side of a feeder transformer.
This current value is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the option Update Fault Currents is selected in
the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please note that this value is not calculated inside the editor, but
passed by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a successful global arc
flash calculation. Please also note that this value will not be updated if you are using the fault current
decay method since the current is changing over time.

The arc duration is defined in ETAP as the Fault Clearing Time (FCT). This is the calculated time in
seconds, which is needed by the protective device to completely open and clear the arc fault (extinguish
the arc). The FCT value is calculated by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into this field.
18-16
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
The global arc flash calculation will update this value if the option Update Buses FCT is checked in the
Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case Editor.
Note: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by the
global arc flash calculation. Grounding
Grounding
The Calculated system grounding for arc flash calculations is defined as grounded or ungrounded
according to IEEE 1584-2002. Grounded systems are those that have solidly grounded connections.
Ungrounded systems are those that are open (Delta, Wye-open) and those that are high and low resistance
grounded.
This Calculated System grounding is determined by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into
this field if the option Update Grounding is selected in the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Its
default value is grounded.
Note 1: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by
the global arc flash calculation.
Note 2: As different protective devices operate, the system grounding configuration may change (i.e. if a
source which is solidly grounded trips and the remaining sources are open or resistance grounded). ETAP
assumes that the grounding configuration remains constant during the fault duration. If it is possible that
the system grounding configuration will change during the fault, then assume that the system is
ungrounded. This will yield more conservative results.
Incident Energy
This is the calculated incident energy based on the system calculated parameters. The units for the
incident energy are Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the
empirically derived IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage). This
value is not updated if you are using the fault current decay method. For this method the energy is
determined in multiple stages and it is difficult to represent in this editor as a single value.
The incident energy is used to determine the Hazard/Risk Category and the Flash Protection Boundary
(ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough parameters or the user has no
authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002 Standards.
Note 1: THE RESULTS IN THE CALCULATED SECTION OF THE BUS EDITOR MAY NOT
AGREE WITH THOSE DETERMINED BY THE GLOBAL CALCULATION UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
1) You are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors
2) You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
18-17
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Note 2: The incident energy results shown in the bus arc flash page can be determined based on the IEEE
1584 empirical equations or based on the theoretically derive Lee method equations. The Lee method is
used whenever the fault parameters are outside the range of the empirical method. A message indicated
this condition will be shown on the lower left hand side corner of the bus arc flash page.
Protection Boundary
determined from the incident energy and fault clearing time. The unit of this field is in feet. This value is
empty unless the calculation is performed and you have logged into the current project with the access
level to run the Arc Flash Module.
Note 1: The flash protection boundary calculated in the Bus Arc Flash page may be different from the
global arc flash calculated results if the EB value (AF Data Page of the study case editor) is set to a value
higher than 1.2 cal/cm2 or if notes 1& 2 from the incident energy section apply.
Note 2: The bus Arc Flash page always uses EB = 1.2 cal/cm2 to determine the flash protection boundary.
Please also note that the equations used to determine the flash protection boundary is different for the
empirical method or Lee methods. Depending on which method is used, the program automatically
determines the right equation to use.

The Hazard/Risk Category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the system calculated
incident energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C)(11) of NFPA
70E-2009 is used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is
performed and you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash Module.
The value may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA
70E 2009 (40 Cal/cm2).
User-Defined
The user-defined section of the Bus Arc Flash page allows the user to define parameters other than those
automatically calculated by ETAP to perform an Arc Flash Analysis. Some of the user-defined
parameters may also be used for the global arc flash calculation.
18-18
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Bus Fault Current

This is the total bolted fault current value in kA, which may be known before hand. The quick incident
energy calculator does not differentiate between 3-phase and line-to-ground short-circuit currents for this
field so if desired, a line to ground short-circuit current value could be entered here. The program will
calculate the user-defined bus arcing current based on this value.
Bus Arcing Current

This field displays the total bus arcing current calculated based on the user-defined Bus Fault Current in
kA. This is a useful field since it shows the arcing current based on the available bolted 3-phase fault
current.
Source PD
This drop-down list allows you to select the protective device which you want to use to determine the
fault clearing time (FCT) for a fault at this bus. The drop-down list contains all the overcurrent relays, inline relays, re-closers, differential relays, directional relays fuses, and low voltage circuit breakers in the
system. The global arc flash calculation will use this protective device as the source PD to determine the
FCT if the option User-Defined Source PD (Bus Editor) is selected in the Arc Flash page of the ShortCircuit Study Case, otherwise, it will be ignored when you run the global arc flash calculation.
In ETAP, a relay must be interlocked with a breaker, contactor or switch. If you select a relay from this
list then the program will find the current passing through the current transformer connected to the relay
and then proceed to find the breaker from the interlock list that can actually clear the fault (breaker
connected to a source path to the faulted bus). If you select a fuse or a low voltage breaker with its own
trip device, the program will consider it to be the source PD to be used to determine the FCT.
If the Arc Flash Program uses a PD from this drop-down list, it will use it to calculate the FCT based on
the actual arcing current passing through it. The arcing current is shown immediately below this dropdown list as a display only field. The FCT can be found from the reports only (i.e., Analysis section or the
Summary Reports).
Note: If no protective device is selected from this drop list (blank option selected), then the user-defined
fault clearing time field becomes editable and you can define your own value. In previous versions of
ETAP (i.e., 5.0.0 to 5.0.3 running the user-defined source PD calculation would overwrite this value. This
is no longer true in version 5.5 since the only way to observe the source PD FCT is through the Crystal
Reports).

This display only field shows the arcing current (in kA) passing through the protective device selected in
the User-Defined Source PD drop-down list. This value can be updated if the update Buses Fault
Currents option has been selected in the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. If the
global Arc Flash Program fails to determine the FCT or the arcing current through this PD, this field will
not be updated.
Fault Clearing Time

This field is the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time in seconds. This value can be defined by the user as
the Fault Clearing Time to be used in the determination of the incident energy for the faulted bus.
18-19
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
The global arc flash calculation will use the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time only if the Fixed FCT
checkbox is selected or if the User-Defined FCT option has been selected from the Study Case Arc Flash
page. This field will be hidden if a User-Defined Source PD has been selected from the drop-down list
right above this field. The default value for this field is 0.1 seconds.
Please note that the minimum time delay for overcurrent relays operating in their instantaneous region is
one cycle. This means that if the arcing current is above the instantaneous pickup of the relay and it has
no specified time delay, then ETAP Arc Flash will add at least one cycle as the operating (trip) time of the
relay. The trip time is then added to the operating time of the circuit breaker interlocked to the overcurrent
relay.
Please note that the minimum operating time for a fuse is 0.01 seconds for a case where the arcing current
is above the total clearing time at the bottom of the curve (based on IEEE 1584 2002 section 4.6).
Please note that the fault clearing time for circuit breakers with integral trip units will be determine solely
based on the manufacturer provided time current characteristic curve since these curves include both the
tripping and clearing time.
Fixed FCT
If this checkbox is selected, then the global arc flash calculation uses the User-Defined Fault Clearing
Time (FCT) value to determine the incident energy of this bus. The calculation would be the same as that
of the situation when the Study Case has the option User-Defined FCT selected. However in this case,
the program does not automatically try to find the FCT from the TCCs for this bus, but it automatically
searches for the FCT of other buses which do not have this checkbox selected.
Using the Fixed FCT feature does not imply that the program will use this set time to evaluate the
incident energy of Source Protective Devices connected directly to the faulted bus. The program will
still try to find the worst-case incident energy for faults on the line side of source PDs by searching
upstream protective devices.
If this checkbox is selected, the fields Source PD ID drop List and Source PD Arcing Current will be
hidden since they are not applicable. The program will indicate that it used the Fixed FCT on the reports
by showing a flag next to the bus FCT field.
Grounding
This drop-down list allows you to define the type of grounding to be used at this bus. The default value
for this drop-down list is grounded. From the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, you have
the option to use this selection for the global arc flash calculation.
Incident Energy
This is the incident energy based on the User-Defined parameters. The units for the incident energy are
Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the empirically derived
IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage).
This incident energy value is used to determine the User-Defined Hazard/Risk Category and the UserDefined Flash Protection Boundary (ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough
parameters or the user has no authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002
Standards.
18-20
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor

determined from the User-Defined Incident Energy and Fault Clearing Time. The unit of this field is in
feet.

The Hazard/Risk Category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the User-Defined incident
energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C)(11) of NFPA 70E-2009 is
used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is performed and
you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash Module. The value
may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA 70E 2004
(40 Cal/cm2).
Allowable Incident Energy Exposure

In the Allowable field, you can define the incident energy rating of the personal protective equipment
(PPE). This value should be the rating of the equipment with the least protection. The units are in
Cal/cm2. This value is compared automatically by the global arc flash calculation to the calculated
incident energy. If the calculated value exceeds the available PPE protection, the module generates an
alert.
Working Distance
This group provides information about the working distance to be used for the calculation of the incident
energy.
Enter the distance from the possible arc point to the person in inches. This distance is defined as the
distance between the arc point and the persons face and torso. This value has a range of 1 to 999.99 in.
This is the distance value used to determine the incident energy. The default value is dependent on the
voltage level of the device and the equipment type selected in the rating page of the bus editor. When a
new bus is added to the one line diagram, the default equipment type is Other and the default working
distance is set to 18. Once the equipment type is changed, the default value will change according to the
typical values used which are based on IEEE 1584-2002 Table D.7.4. Open the Arc Flash Analysis Data
table to view the working distance values used for the voltage ratings and equipment types.
18-21
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Note: The Arc Flash Analysis Data table is located in the Project menu under Settings
Arc Flash. Refer to Chapter 10 Menu Bars Section One-Line Diagram Menu Bars for more details.
TCC Plot / Print Label

This section allows you to generate labels or plot the incident energy curves on ETAP Star.
Ib / Ia
This toggle radio box allows the use of bolted fault current or arcing current as the base for the incident
energy curve displayed on the TCC plot.
Calculated Input
The system calculated radio box determines what data is to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label and
what energy is to be displayed on the TCC plot. If this option is selected all the corresponding calculated
User-Defined Input
The user-defined radio box allows you to use the user-defined data to generate labels or to show the userdefined incident energy curve on the TCC. If this option is selected all the corresponding user-defined
18-22
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
Template
This drop-down list allows the user to select the template to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label for
the particular bus. There are several templates available generating the labels. Each one of the templates
has different styles.
Print
The print button starts the Crystal Report viewer. From this viewer, you can a print the generated label for
the same bus.
TCC Plot-Calculated or User-Defined Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the system calculated or user-defined incident energy curve as it
varies over time and fault current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the
corresponding curve will appear on the Star View that contains the same bus.
The curve that appears on the Star View is a function of the incident energy and the parameters that vary
are the time and current. If the incident energy value is kept constant, then any combination of FCT and
bolted fault current that falls below this curve yields an incident energy value that is lower.
TCC Plot-Allowable Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the Allowable Incident Energy Curve as it varies over time and fault
current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the corresponding curve will appear on
the Star View that contains the same bus.
Methodology for Quick Incident Energy Calculator

Method Used
For buses in the range of 0.208 kV to 15.0 kV, the empirically derived IEEE Std. 1584 Method is used.
For buses with kV greater than 15, the Theoretically Derived Lee Method is used. ETAP automatically
determines which method is being used according to the bus nominal voltage (Bus Info page).
Range of Operation
These calculations follow the methodology described in IEEE 1584-2002. The same limitations of this
method apply to the quick incident energy calculator.
1. If any of the following: the Bus Nominal kV, Bolted Fault Current or Fault Clearing Time are set
to zero the calculation is not triggered, and there are no displayed results. This applies to either
set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
2. If the bus nominal kV is less than 0.208 kV, this message is displayed: Lee Method is used
outside empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and
Calculated).
3. If the bolted fault current is outside the range of 0.7 kA to 106 kA and the bus nominal kV is
between 0.208 and 15 kV the following message is displayed: Lee Method is used outside
empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
4. If the fault current decay method is used (AF page of SC study case), then only the source PD ID
and the FCT are updated into the calculated results section.
18-23
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Editor
5. If the user-defined source PD is selected, then there are no results updated into the calculated
section. The only item which may be updated is the arcing current variation flag (for systems
rated less than 1.0 kV) if applicable.
6. If you are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors
7. You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
If the IEEE 1584-2002 Arc Flash Method is not licensed, the calculation is disabled, and you will need to
contact Operation Technology, Inc. to get authorization to run this program.
The printing of labels is ruled by the Crystal Reports viewer, which has different export capabilities. You
may need to export the labels to a different file format that is compatible with your label printer. You may
choose to print the labels as templates that can be provided to a label making company.
The following table shows the parameters required to run an arc flash calculation in the Bus Arc Flash
page.
Table 8: Required Parameters for Bus Arc Flash Calculation
Info Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Bus Nominal KV Equipment Type
Total 3-Phase Fault Current
Gap Between Conductors
Fault Clearing Time(FCT)
X-Factor
System Grounding
Working Distance
18-24
Arc Flash Analysis
Short-Circuit Study Case
18.2 Short-Circuit Study Case

18.2.1 Arc Flash Method Page
The Short-Circuit Study Case has three pages dedicated to Arc Flash Analysis. The structure of the Arc
Flash Method page is shown below:
Method
This section is used to select which method to use when determining the incident energy for a faulted bus.
The NFPA 70E option uses the equations listed in their 2009 edition. The IEEE 1584 option uses the
equations listed in IEEE 1584-2002, but still uses sections of NFPA 70E-2000, 2004, and 2009 for
determining the Hazard/Risk Categories 0-4 (category, -1 not used by ETAP).
18-25
Arc Flash Analysis
NFPA 70E 2009

If this option is selected, the arc flash hazard calculation will be performed according to incident energy
equations listed in the NFPA 70E-2009 Standard.
Note: The remaining options in the Arc Flash page are hidden if this option is selected. The remaining
options apply only to IEEE 1584-2002. When this option is selected, the look up table from previous
versions will be generated as a result of running arc flash. There is no difference between this version and
the 4.7.6 version except for the new equation for open air equipment added in the 2004 version (Annex D
section D.7). Also note that the symmetrical current is used for this calculation.
IEEE 1584
If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Hazard Calculation will be performed according to the IEEE 15842002 and IEEE 1584a- 2004 equations.
Arc Current Variation %

Enter the arcing current variation in percent (0 to 30%). The Arc Flash Program will consider the arcing
current reduction factor for determining the Fault Clearing Time. The default value for this field is 15%
(or 85% of the original value), but ETAP provides a more flexible analysis tool by allowing you to
analyze the variation up to 30% if desired.
The arc current variation takes the original 100% of Ia value and the reduced Ia value to determine two
Fault Clearing times (FCT). The incident energy is calculated based on both sets of parameters and the
one which produces higher incident energy is selected as the set of values to be reported by ETAP. In
other words, the Arc Flash Program Reports the set of values which yield the higher incident energy (i.e.,
85%Ia and its corresponding FCT or 100%Ia and its corresponding FCT). The program shows in the
reports and the one-line diagram which set of values has been used to determine the incident energy.
Note: The arcing current variation is not considered for faulted buses with nominal kV > 1.
Bus Fault Current

This group of the Arc Flash page indicates the source of the bolted fault current to be used for the Arc
Flash Hazard calculations. ETAP uses the bolted fault current to determine the arcing current to be used
in the determination of the incident energy.
User-Defined (Bus Editor)

Use the Bus Editor User-Defined Fault Current to perform the incident energy calculation. The arc flash
calculation will use all the User-Defined values in the Bus Editor to perform the calculation. ETAP will
only report the bus information along with calculated cal/cm2, boundary and risk category (similar to the
bus quick incident energy calculation).
If this option is selected, some of the options on the editor no longer apply since an actual short-circuit
calculation may be needed to determine or apply such options. The unavailable options are those related
to the calculated short-circuit current, automatic determination of the FCT and updating of the shortcircuit and FCT results back to the faulted buses.
Calculate
Calculate the bolted fault current by means of a short-circuit calculation and use the calculated shortcircuit bolted fault current values in the arc flash calculation.
18-26
Arc Flash Analysis
3-Phase
Calculate the arc flash results at every faulted 3-phase bus. Select whether to use symmetrical cycle 3phase (momentary) fault current, symmetrical 1.5 to 4 cycle 3-phase (interrupting) fault, or the fault
current decay to determine the fault clearing time and incident energy level when running an Arc Flash
analysis on 3-phase buses.
1-Phase
If the 1-Phase option is selected, then the program will calculate the arc flash results for the buses
connected below UPS, Phase Adapters and Panels. ETAP will only calculate Arc Flash results for the
elements selected under the Panel/UPS/1Ph Subsystem section on the Info page. If single phase is
selected, ETAP will use the initial symmetrical half cycle bolted short-circuit current to determine the
arcing current.
Symm. Cycle
If this option is selected, ETAP will use the symmetrical cycle 3-phase (momentary) fault current to
determine the fault clearing time and the incident energy.
Symm. 1. 5 to 4 Cycle
If this option is selected, the module will use the symmetrical 1.5 to 4 cycle 3-phase (interrupting) fault
current to determine the fault clearing time and the incident energy for medium voltage elements (above
1.0 kV).
Fault Current Decay

When this option is selected, ETAP will automatically consider motor and generator current decay for the
calculation of the arcing current and fault clearing times. ETAP will use changing arcing current values to
determine the final protective device fault clearing time (FCT). The program determines automatically the
subtransient, transient and steady-state bolted fault currents and uses these currents to determine the
equivalent arcing current and final fault clearing time (by integrating the three equivalent arcing currents).
Steady-State Ibf at
This input field holds the time value in cycles at which the arc flash program will assumme a steady-state
bolted short-circuit current in order to determine the equivalent arcing current. At this time, the program
will assumme that all motor contribution has completely decayed and that the generator contribution is at
a steady state value. This option is hidden unless the option Gen Current Decay has been selected.
Syn. Gen Steady-State Ibf

Select whether to limit the steady-state bolted fault current to a global user-defined value (for all
generators) or have ETAP determine the steady-state bolted fault current based on each generators
decrement curve.
Limit Gen Ibf to
18-27
Arc Flash Analysis
This option allows the program to assumme steady-state short-circuit contribution from synchronous
generators assumming a current boost or forced sustained current value. The systained short-circuit
contribution in %FLA is used to detemine the steady-state arcing current values coming from the
generator.
Determine from Decrement Curve

Specify the generator contribution at steady-state conditions based on its equivalent impedance. This
equivalent impedance is determined based on the generator decrement curve. Please note that the
decreement curve of the generator may already contain sustained field forced current and thus the
program will account for it automatically.
Update Fault Current to Bus AF Page
If this box is checked, then the arc flash calculation will update all the buses in the system with the
calculated bolted arcing fault current values. Please note that the fault currents will not be updated if the
fault current decay method is used.
Motor Contributions
This section allows the user to define the time (between 5 & steady-state time which is typically 30
cycles) at which ETAP will not consider motor contribution for the calculation of the incident energy and
allows the user to remove small motor contributions from the simulation. These options are available if
the Fault Current Decay is used to determine the incident energy and fault clearing time.
Remove after
Check the box to remove the motor contribution from the calculation of the incident energy at a time in
between four cycles and the user-defined value for steady-state current conditions. This time value in
cycles has to be higher than 4 cycles and smaller or equal to the steady-state time value defined in the
Bolted Fault Current section.
Please notice that the program will assumme motor current decay at cycle, 1.5 to 4 cycle and at the
final steady-state current value (this value is set to 30 cycles by default). This current contribution decay
is automatically considered in the calculation of the fault clearing time.
Please also note that by default the time value at which the program assummes the motor contribution has
decayed to negligible values is 30 cycles and this happens to be the same default value for the steady-state
current simulation time.
Exclude if Motor 50 HP/kW

Check this option to entirely exclude small motors from making any contributions to the arcing fault
currents regardless of time (i.e. these small motors are not considered to make any contributions at the
cycle current calculation or any time after that). This value is entered in either Horsepower or kilowatts.
Please note that this option applies to motor loads and lumped loads with motor load ratings in kW less
than the limit.
Set Hazard Cat for LV Equipment

Specify how certain low voltage equipment arc faults should be handled since the equations in NFPA 70E
2009 may not yield adequate results for such locations (i.e. the results could be over conservative using
the IEEE 1584 2002 equations which are included in NFPA 70E annex D).
18-28
Arc Flash Analysis
Please note that the lower limits of the fault current and voltage which can be considered to generate a
sustained arc have not been determined. Current research and testing is being performed by NFPA and
IEEE 1584 groups to try to determine these limits. It is very likely that the short-circuit current limits
which can generate an arc will be lower. Engineering judgement and caution should be used when using
this option.
Voltage 208 and Xfmr < 125 kVA

Identify which transformers have relatively low voltage and relatively low kVA (bolted current capacity)
and thus have a small likelihood of being capable of generating arc flash incidents. Once the check box is
enabled, if any equipment has voltage ratings and is fed from a transformer rated less than 125 kVA (or
less), then the program will automatically assign a hazard category to the faulted equipment. This can be
Category 1 or 0.
Cat 0 if Ibf 5 kA
If this box is selected, you can define which bolted current is the limit to define a Category 0 for the arc
flash hazard for the faulted equipment. You can enter a value which is smaller than the category 1 Ibf
value. This option allows you greater flexibility to define at which point the engineer feels comfortable to
automatically set the risk as cat 0.
Cat 1 if Ibf 10 kA
If this box is selected, you can define which bolted current is the limit to define a Category 1 for the arc
flash hazard for the faulted equipment. You can enter a value which is higher than the category 0 Ibf
value. This option allows you greater flexibility to define at which point the engineer feels comfortable to
automatically set the risk as cat 1. The maximum value which can be entered is 15 kA.
Note: In the options above, Ibf refers to:
Ibf for 1-phase faults

Ibf or Ibf for 3-phase faults depending on Ibf value selected from the bolted fault current
section.
Ibf for these options never stands for steady-state bolted fault current.
%Z
Display only fields which show the calculated impedance in percent. The equations used are:
18-29
Arc Flash Analysis
Exceptions on the Arc Flash Page

Depending on the calculation methodology that you select, certain options are not enabled. The following
table gives you a list of all the features which are enabled with for each calculation method:
Method
Fault Current Decay
Cycle
1.5 to 4 Cycle
1-Phase Arc Flash
IEC Method
User-Defined Hazard/Risk Cat
Features Not Available

All features can be used
Motor contributions options are not available
AC decay options are not available
Set Hazard Cat for LV Equipment options are not available
Set Hazard Cat for LV Equipment options are not available.
You must use NFPA 70E categories if you want to use this
option.
18-30
Arc Flash Analysis
18.2.2 AF FCT Page

This page allows you to configure all the settings related to the determination of the fault clearing time
(FCT) based on different types of equipment and protective device operation (i.e. overcurrent and current
limiting).

This group of the Arc Flash page allows you to set the Study Case options of the Fault Clearing Time.
Auto Select Source PD FCT from TCC

If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Module will automatically determine the FCT from the available
TCC curves of the source protective devices that can clear the fault. If no element TCC information is
available, ETAP will display the message FCT not determined.
If there is more than one protective device that needs to open to clear the fault, ETAP will select the FCT
of the element that takes the longest to open.
User-Defined Source PD (Bus Editor)

If this checkbox is selected, the Arc Flash Program will determine the Fault Clearing Time (FCT) based
on the User-Defined Source Protective Device defined in the Bus Arc Flash page. The program calculates
18-31
Arc Flash Analysis
the FCT automatically for those buses that do not have a selection. If this option is not checked, the Arc
Flash Program will automatically calculate the FCT for all the faulted buses.
Limit Maximum FCT

This option allows you to set a maximum fault clearing time for all the buses. If the FCT determined is
greater than this value, then it will be clipped to this value. The program determines the incident energy
based on the maximum FCT if the actual FCT exceeds it. This maximum FCT value applies to both the
Bus and Source Protective Device FCT Incident Energy Calculations.
In some situations only the FCT for a fault at a source PD may exceed this value. In this situation only the
FCT for a fault at the source PD should be clipped to the Maximum FCT. The FCT for the bus is
unaffected in this case. There is a flag in the Analysis and Summary Reports which indicates that there is
a clipped value for the faulted bus FCT or source PD FCT. Please see the report section to see this flag.
The default value is 2 seconds.
Limit Maximum FCT field in Seconds.

Enter the maximum FCT allowed to determine the incident energy for any element in the system (Buses
and Source Protective Devices). The range is from 0.01 to 99 seconds. The default value is 2 seconds.
User-Defined FCT
If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Module will use the FCT values specified in the Bus Editor Arc
Flash page to calculate the incident energy for all the buses in the system. If this option is selected, the
program does not apply the arcing current variation nor update the FCT to the bus Arc Flash page (these
options are grayed out).
Update FCT to Bus AF Page

If this box is checked, the module will update the FCT (determined from TCCs) value into the Bus Editor
Arc Flash page.
Main Protective Device Isolation

This section brings a major change in the calculation methodology of ETAP. This set of options can be
used to configure the program to produce more conservative results by making the assumption that the
main source protective devices are or are not adequately isolated from the bus and may fail to operate or
be capable of de-energizing the arc fault before it escalates into a line-side arc fault. Please refer to the
calculation methodology section for more details on the implementation of this option.
Main Protective Device is not Isolated

If this option is checked, then the program considers the individual or global isolation settings for the
arc flash calculation. If the option is enabled, then the arc flash program considers the main protective
device isolation to determine the fault clearing time.
18-32
Arc Flash Analysis
Individual (Bus Editor) / Global

This toggle radio box determines which set of main PD isolation settings are used in the arc flash
calculation.
Typical IEEE 1584 / User-Defined

If the isolation settings are determined globally, then this toggle radio box determines the data source of
the global isolation settings. Please see the arc flash analysis data editor for details on these data sources.
Current Limiting Devices

This section enables the handling of current limiting fuses for arc flash calculations. Please refer to the
calculation methodology section for more details on the implementation.
Determine CLF operation based on Peak Let-Through Curves

This checkbox enables the determination of the current limiting operation of fuses based on the peak letthrough curves.
For Class L& RK1, use IEEE 1584 Equations (if applicable)
If this option is enabled, then the IEEE 1584 2002 current limiting fuse equations are used for class L &
RK1 fuses as defined in section 5.6 of that standard. If the operating conditions or fuse ratings are not
within the range of these equations, then the program can use the peak let-through curves to determine
current limiting operation. Please refer to the calculation methodology section for more details on this
implementation.
Use bottom of CLF TCC (if peak let-through curve is not available)
If this option is enabled, then the program will attempt to determine current limiting operation for a fuse
based on the time current curve in the library. This is for cases when the peak let-through curves for the
fuse model or class are not available in the fuse library and the only curve available is the current limiting
fuse TCC. Please refer to the calculation methodology section for more details on this implementation.
18-33
Arc Flash Analysis
18.2.3 AF Data Page

Set the options for the selection of global or individual AF input data for the calculation. Also select a
global selection for the standard that defines the hazard risk categories and PPE ratings you want to use
for the arc flash study.
Gaps, X-factor, Working Distance

Select the source of the arc flash paramters to be used in the global AF calculation. The data can be
defined in every single bus or it can be selected for all the buses depending on the nominal voltage of the
equipment from a global location. Under Project Settings Arc Flash, the Arc Flash Analysis Data table
is used to determine the values for the each parameter if global is selected.
Individual (Bus Editor)

If this option is selected, the program will use the gaps, x-factors and working distances defined in each
bus editor.
Global
If this option is selected, then the program will use the gaps, x-factors and working distances as defined in
the Arc Flash Analysis Data editor. The option to use the default typical IEEE 1584 2002 values can be
selected to use the read-only values from the data editor. If the user-defined option is used, the user has
the option to globally define gaps and working distances and use these gobal user-defined parameters in
the calculation.
18-34
Arc Flash Analysis
This option presents a tremendous adavantage since it may reduce the data entry requirements for all
similar equipment in your system. In essence all you have to define for each individual bus is the Bus
Nominal KV and the Bus Equipment type (i.e. MCC, Switchgear, Open air, etc). Once you define this for
every bus, you can globally control the rest of the arc flash parameters to be used in the global arc flash
calculation.
Note 1: PLEASE NOTE THAT IF THE INDIVIDUAL AF PARAMETERS ARE DIFFERENT AT THE
INDIVIDUAL BUSES, and the global values are different, then the results at the bus arc flash page
calculator may be different from the global af results. This is simply a result of making a different data
source selection for the required parameters.
Typical IEEE 1584 2002 / User-Defined

Select typical or user-defined global arc flash parameters.
Edit
This button open the arc flash analysis data editor. The global parameters can be defined from this editor.
PPE Requirements
This section allows you to select the set of PPE requirements which can be printed on the arc flash labels
or reports. There are four basic options to select. All four sets of PPE descriptions
NFPA 70E 2000

If this option is selected the PPE description is determined based on annex H of NFPA 70E-2000 and the
incident energy sorting range values come from Table 3-3.9.3.
NFPA 70E 2004

incident energy sorting range values come from Table 130.7 (C)(11).
NFPA 70E 2009

incident energy sorting range values come from Table 130.7 (C)(11).
User-Defined/AF Analysis
If this option is selected the PPE descriptions are determined based on the user-defined settings. Since by
new definitions in NFPA 70E 2012, it is likely that this option should be used in conjunction with a
power system analysis program method. There is some new information which is very likely to be added
to NFPA 70E 2012 which shows samples of PPE selection which can be used in conjunction with this
option of the program.
Note: The PPE Requirements provided by ETAP are only samples and are based on different versions of
NFPA 70E. It is recommended that all PPE Requirements be approved prior to implementation on any arc
flash labels or reports.
Edit/Approve PPE
This button opens the PPE Requirements editor. This editor can be used to modify and approve the PPE
Requirements which can be used to be printed on the arc flash labels.
18-35
Arc Flash Analysis
Note: The PPE Requirements will not be printed on the arc flash labels, reports or arc flash analyzer until
they have been approved by the engineer in charge or the facility safety manager. A warning message will
appear when running the Arc Flash study if the PPE Requirements have not been approved.
System Grounding
The System Grounding group allows you to specify to the Arc Flash Program how to determine the
grounding configuration of the faulted buses.
One-Line Diagram Connection

If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Program automatically detects the faulted bus grounding
connection. The Arc Flash Program runs a grounding system check on the elements connected around the
faulted bus and depending on their grounding connection; the module will return a value of grounded or
ungrounded.
18-36
Arc Flash Analysis
For example, a transformer connected 4.16/0.480 Delta/Wye-solid feeds a secondary bus at 0.480 kV.
The system is purely radial (no alternate source). If you run the Arc Flash Analysis on the secondary bus
and select the option One-Line Diagram Connection, ETAP will consider this bus as grounded for the
arc flash calculation.
Note: High and low resistance grounded systems are considered as ungrounded by the module. This is
according to IEEE 1584-2002 section 9.5.
User-Defined (Bus Editor)

If this option is selected, the module will use the User-Defined System-Grounding configuration specified
in the Bus Editor Arc Flash page.
Update Grounding to Bus AF Page

If this box is checked, then the program updates the calculated system grounding configuration to the Bus
Editor Arc Flash page.

Select the energy value to use to find the flash protection boundary. The default value is 1.2 cal/cm2. This
is based on the category 1 level from NFPA 70E 2009.
1.2 cal/cm^2
Select to use 1.2 cal/cm^2 as given by NFPA 70E 2009.
User-Defined EB
Enter a user-defined energy value to use to find the flash protection boundary. If your dafety program
requires everyone at all times to wear PPE rated for cat 1 or Cat 2, then based on engineering supervision,
the value of EB can be set to a higher value than 1.2. this will reduce the required flash protection
boundary to a smaller distance. The program only allows you to set this value to a maximum of 4.00
cal/cm2. As an example we can show the difference in the calculated flash protection boundary for two
cases:
18-37
Arc Flash Analysis
As you can see the flash protection boundary is reduced by almost 50% if you set EB to 4.0 cal/cm2.
Shock Hazard Analysis

Configure the parameters used to display the shock hazards for the equipment to the working personnel.
The values of the different boundaries and glove protection is selected based on the nominal bus voltage.
Under Project Settings Arc Flash, the Shock Hazard Analysis Data table is used to determine the values
for the each parameter if global is selected.
Individual
If this option is selected, the program will use the approach boundaries defined in each bus editor.
18-38
Arc Flash Analysis
Global
If global is selected, select to use the approach boundaries set by either NFPA 70E 2004, NFPA 70E
2009, or the User-Defined values as specified in the Shock Hazard Analysis Data table.
NFPA 70E 2004

Select to use the approach boundaries as defined by NFPA 70E 2004 table 130.2(C).
NFPA 70E 2009

Select to use the approach boundaries as defined by NFPA 70E 2009 table 130.2(C).
User-Defined
Select to use the user-defined approach boundaries as set from the Shock Hazard Analysis Data table.
Voltage Rated Gloves

Define which set of gloves to use for a particulat bus nominal voltage. The options allowed are ASTM D
120-02a (2006) or User-Defined. The user-defined option would allow the user to specify a higher glove
class to be used for certain equipment.
Note: Both of these options are global sets of data. There is no individual bus definitions for them.
ASTM D 120-02a (2006)

Select to use the class level for the gloves used as defined by ASTM D 120-02a (2006).
User-Defined
Select to use the class level for the gloves used as defined by the user-defined settins in the Shock Hazard
Analysis Data table.
Edit
This button opens the shock hazard analysis data editor. The shock hazard global definitions can be
defined from this editor.
18-39
Arc Flash Analysis

The adjustment page only has one option related to AF, but it is an important option. It allows you to
configure the program to run arc flash calculations using the maximum and minimum impedance
tolerances.
Apply Pos. Tolerance and Max. Temp. for ANSI Min. Short-circuit & Arc Flash
If you select this option, the program will set all impedance tolerances to a positive value. This means that
you will get a smaller fault current magnitude. This will tend to reduce the arcing currents. It is possible
that the worst case incident energy may occur when the system provides minimum short-circuit currents
because of the inverse overcurrent characteristic of several protective devices. A small reduction in the
arcing current may significantly increase the fault clearing time and thus the fault would release energy
for a longer time.
It may be a good idea to combine the positive tolerances option with the configuration which yields
minimum short-circuit currents in order to estimate smaller fault current magnitudes. This combination
should be considered when performing Arc Flash calculations.
18-40
Arc Flash Analysis
Display Options

This section describes the display of arc flash results on the one-line diagram (in Short-Circuit Mode).
The Arc Flash Display Options are shown below:
The type of 3-phase

fault that you selected
from the Arc Flash
Study Case Editor
Arc Flash results

shown on the one-line
diagram
18-41
Arc Flash Analysis
Display Options
Fault Type
This section allows you to display the bolted/arcing fault currents for different types of faults on the oneline diagram. This section also allows you to switch between the subtransient, transient and steady-state
fault currents when you run AF with the fault current decay method selected.
Logic for Fault Type Section

The display options shown in this section of the display options are determined based on the options
selected under the Bus Fault Current section of the AF page of the SC study case editor. The following
images illustrate this logic:
As can be seen by the image above, when you run the decay method, you can see six different sets of fault
currents displayed on the one-line diagram for any fault location. The AF program utilizes all six sets of
fault current to make the determination of the fault clearing time and the incident energy as the fault
currents reduce over time. Please note that all currents displayed are those obtained assuming that no
protective device operates and that the fault persists until steady-state conditions (i.e. 30 cycles or more).
The following relationships show how ETAP determines the individual arcing current contributions from
the bolted fault current values.
18-42
Arc Flash Analysis

I "
"= a * I "
ac I " bfc
bf
I "
I '= a * I '
ac I " bfc
bf
I "
I = a *I
ac I " bfc
bf
I
Display Options
Subtransient arcing current individual contribution
Transient arcing current individual contribution
Steady - state arcing current individual contribution
Where:
I " total subtransient arcing current

a
I ' total transient arcing current
a
I
total steady - state arcing current (typically set to 30 Cycles)
a
I " subtransient bolted fault current individual contributions
bfc
I
' transient bolted fault current individual contributions
bfc
I
steady - state bolted fault current individual contributions
bfc
I " total subtransient bolted fault current
bf
I ' total transient bolted fault current
bf
I
total steady - state bolted fault current
bf
Ibfc, Ibfc and Ibfc values represent the individual subtransient, transient and steady-state bolted fault
contributions
Arc Flash
This group provides display options for calculated results from an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. The results
are provided for every faulted bus in the system. The program shows both the arcing current and the
equivalent bolted fault currents used to obtain them. The arcing currents are denoted as Ia and the bolted
fault currents are denoted as Ibf.
Incident Energy
If this checkbox is selected, the Arc Flash Module will display the calculated incident energy on the oneline diagram for each faulted bus. The results are placed next to the faulted bus. The units for this value
are Cal/cm2.
FPB
If the FPB (Flash Protection Boundary) option is selected, the Arc Flash Program will display the
calculated Flash Protection Boundary on the one-line diagram. The results are placed next to the faulted
bus. The units for this value are ft.
18-43
Arc Flash Analysis
Display Options
Hazard / Risk
This is the Hazard / Risk Category assigned to each bus based on NFPA 70E or User-Defined criteria for
the amount of incident energy calculated at each bus. This is a simple integer number (0-10) and it has no
units. It is preceded by the word Category (for example, Category 3).
Total Arcing Current

This is the total arcing current calculated for each bus. This is the current used to determine the incident
energy at each bus. Its units are kA. It can be displayed in the same fashion as the total 3-phase fault
current for each bus. The arcing current is the same as the bolted fault current for buses with nominal
voltage > 15.0 kV.
Also note that the individual current contributions shown on the one-line diagram are not the arcing
current contributions, but the bolted fault current contributions. The individual arcing current
contributions are shown on the Arc Flash Analysis Crystal Reports for every bus.
FCT
This option can be used to display the final fault clearing time (FCT) for every faulted bus (FCT of the
bus only). The FCT can be displayed in seconds or cycles.
Arc Flash Warnings Displayed on the OLD

The Arc Flash Program provides certain warnings on the one-line diagram. The warnings are:
1) The FCT not determined: This message indicates one of the following conditions:
a. The user-defined FCT is set to zero
b. The program failed to determine the bus FCT because there is no TCCs selected for the
source PDs.
c. There is no protection on the source branches.
d. The source protective device is outside the regular search area of the program (one way
to correct this issue is to go to Options (Preferences) and increase the default value across
from Bus Levels Away To Find Source PD).
2) Beyond NFPA 70E Cat. 4: This message indicates that the incident energy calculated is higher
than 40 Cal/cm^2. Either one of the following options must be selected from the Arc Flash page
of the Short-Circuit Study Case:
a. NFPA 70E 2000
b. NFPA 70E 2004
c. NFPA 70E 2009
3) Arcing Current Variation %Ia (Bus only): This message indicates that the incident energy was
determined based on the reduced arcing current value. This may indicate problems with the
coordination in the system or may be corrected with adjustments to the instantaneous pickup
setting of overcurrent protective devices.
Arc Fault Location

This group provides display options for calculated results from an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. The results
are provided for every faulted bus in the system. Select to determine whether arc flash results should
show at the selected location. The same Arc Flash Display Options apply if the IEC short-circuit
calculation is performed.
18-44
Arc Flash Analysis
Display Options
Bus Load PD
This check box allows you to show the arc flash analysis results for a fault right at the buses. Typically,
the incident energy results for a fault at the load protective device are set the same as those as the bus.
Source PDs
This check box allows you to show the arc flash analysis results for a fault right at source protective
device. Typically, the incident energy results for a fault at the source protective device are a lot worse
than those of the fault at the bus. ETAP automatically determines the results at the source protective
devices assuming that the source protective device itself is not capable of clearing the fault. Usually PDs
upstream from the source PD location end up operating to clear this kind of fault.
Load Terminals
This check box allows you to display the arc flash analysis results for a fault at the load terminal junction
box. ETAP calculates the load terminal fault for every load connected to a faulted bus.
This option is shown only if the Tools/Options (Preferences) Calc Load Terminal Fault Arc Flash entry
is set to TRUE. If the entry is set to False, the option is not displayed in the Arc Fault Location section of
the display options.
The image below shows the location of this preference entry:
The following image shows how the options under the Arc Fault Location section work. You can see that
for a fault at Bus21, the source PD faults, load terminal faults and bus results are all shown at the same
time. Please note that the results for a fault at the source PDs are more severe (higher energy) as expected.
18-45
Arc Flash Analysis
Display Options
18-46
Arc Flash Analysis
Alert
18.4 Arc Flash Alert

The Arc Flash Alert is generated whenever the global arc flash calculation is performed. The only alert
available for the 5.5 release is the incident energy (calculated vs. allowable bus incident energy).
Alert View
The Alert View window will display according to the same rules that apply in short-circuit calculations.
The Automatic display option on the Short-Circuit Alert page determines if this window is opened
automatically after the arc flash calculation completes. You can open the Alert View by clicking the Alert
View button on the Short-Circuit toolbar.
Please note that the arc flash alerts only appear if you run the global arc flash calculation using the
Calculate short-circuit current option from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. If you select the
option User-Defined (Bus Editor) the alerts are not generated.
The format of the alert displayed is as follows:
Device ID
The ID of the faulted bus for which the arc flash calculation has found a critical violation
18-47
Arc Flash Analysis
Alert
Type
The bus type according to its setting on the Rating page of the bus (for example, Panelboard, Switchgear,
Cable Bus, or MCC)
Rating
This is the available protection incident energy level from the Arc Flash page of the bus. The units are
Cal/cm2. The range is the same as the bus field.
Calculated
This is the calculated incident energy level at the faulted bus. This value is compared against the rating on
the Arc Flash page of the bus. Its units are Cal/cm2.
%Value
The percent value for the violation is 100%. This means that you only have critical alerts and those
appear whenever the calculated incident energy is higher or equal to the available protection rating value
in the Arc Flash page of the bus.
Condition
The condition reported for this alert is that the available PPE rating has been exceeded at the faulted
buses.
Phase Type
3-Phase only
18-48
Arc Flash Analysis
Running Arc Flash Analysis
18.5 Running Arc Flash Analysis

The global arc flash calculation is started by clicking one of the arc flash calculation buttons on the Shortcircuit toolbar (either the ANSI or IEC version). This button runs an arc flash calculation for all the
faulted buses. You can perform a quick arc flash calculation for a single bus if you open the Bus Arc
Flash page that contains a Quick Incident Energy Calculator (See Section 18.2, Short-Circuit Study Case).
Setting Up the Short-Circuit Study Case

To open the Short-Circuit Study Case, click the button highlighted below:
Info Page
To begin, set up an arc flash calculation by selecting the buses to be faulted. You do this by right-clicking
the buses and selecting the Fault option while in Short-Circuit Mode. Or, you can open the Short-Circuit
Study Case, click the Info page, and select the buses to be faulted.
In general, an arc flash calculation depends on the Short-Circuit Analysis results. You can select the
different options for the short-circuit calculation. For Arc Flash Analysis, you want to get accurate, rather
than overly conservative, results. This means you should aim at running a calculation that yields realistic
values. Make sure to consider the equipment cables and overload heaters in the calculation.
Standards Page
The arc flash calculation can be performed using the ANSI or IEC 3-phase short-circuit calculation. You
can determine which standard you want to use to determine the short-circuit current by selecting the
appropriate option from the Standards page of the Short-Circuit Study Case.
Note: IEEE 1584 or NFPA 70E Standards are used to calculate the incident energy. Selecting the IEC
short-circuit calculation does not imply that the Arc Flash Analysis is performed based on any existing
IEC Arc Flash Standard except those standards used for short-circuit calculations. In future releases,
ETAP will implement IEC arc flash standards similar to the IEEE 1584 as they become available.
Please note that IEC and ANSI short-circuit results are different and this will cause the Arc Flash
Program to yield different results for each.
Arc Flash Page

There are two methods for running the arc flash calculation, the IEEE 1584-2002 and the NFPA 70E2004. You can select which method to use from the Arc Flash of the Short-Circuit Study Case. See the
Arc Flash page section of the Short-Circuit Study Case for a detailed description of the remaining options.
Note: If you select the NFPA 70E Method, you will only get the look up table report as an output of the
calculation. The remaining features are not supported for this method.
Starting the Global Arc Flash Calculation

To start the calculation, click the Arc Flash button on one of the Short-Circuit toolbars.
18-49
Arc Flash Analysis
Running Arc Flash Analysis
ANSI Toolbar Arc Flash Calculation

Click the Arc Flash button on the ANSI Short-Circuit toolbar to run an ANSI Short-Circuit-based arc
flash calculation.
IEC Toolbar Arc Flash Calculation

Click the Arc Flash button on the IEC Short-Circuit toolbar to run an IEC Short-Circuit-based arc flash
calculation.
18-50
Arc Flash Analysis
Calculation Methodology
18.6 Calculation Methodology

18.6.1 Guidelines / Standards
IEEE Standard 1584-2002 & IEEE 1584a 2004
The Empirically Derived model is used for voltages in the range of 0.208-15kV. The
Theoretically Derived Lee Model is used for voltage levels above 15kV and below 0.208 kV. The
Lee method is also used if the bolted fault current is outside the range 0.7 kA Ibf 106
The empirically derived model has a bolted fault current range of 0.7- 106kA.
Grounded and Ungrounded (high or low resistance) configurations are considered for faulted
buses with nominal voltage in the range of 0.208-15kV.
The Arc Flash Module determines the bolted fault current from the ETAP Short-Circuit Module.
The 3-phase and 1-phase fault current values are used. Depending on the voltage level and the
type of equipment, ETAP determines the Arc Fault Currents. Whenever the theoretically derived
Lee method is used, the arcing current is set the same as the bolted fault current.
ETAP uses the equipment type information from the Bus Editor Rating page to determine the
incident energy exposure values as a function of distance and location. The results are displayed
on the one-line diagram, the Bus Arc Flash page, AF Report Analyzer and in the Crystal Reports
(including labels).
NFPA 70E-2009 (not including the IEEE 1584 equations of annex D.7)
The bolted fault current range for the formulae is 16-50 kA.
The calculation of the incident energy exposure is valid for enclosed system voltages below 600
and only for open air equipment when the voltage is greater than 600 Volts (see Annex D section
D.7 of NFPA 70E 2004).
This method does not consider the type of equipment and the distance factors. The output of the
module is in the form of a look up table.
Equations Used to Calculate the Arc Flash Results

The ETAP Arc Flash Analysis Module uses the equations listed in standard IEEE 1584-2002 / IEEE
1584a 2004 and NFPA 70E-2000 and 2004 versions. You can refer to those standards to get all the
equations used by the module.
ETAP does not use the equation listed in sections 5.6 and 5.7 of IEEE 1584-2002 for determining the
energy of protective devices (Current Limiting Fuses and Low Voltage Circuit Breakers). These equations
are not used since the module takes a more conservative approach by interfacing to the actual TCCs of the
devices available in ETAP Star. This is generally considered a more accurate approach and more
conservative for current limiting fuses.
18.6.2 Determination of the Arcing Current Contributions

Once the bolted short-circuit current is calculated by the Short-Circuit Analysis Module, the arcing
current is determined using the equations listed in IEEE 1584-2002. (See the previous section.) The
following steps are taken to calculate the individual arcing current contributions:
18-51
Arc Flash Analysis
1. The total bus bolted short-circuit current is used to calculate the total bus arcing current.
2. The individual arcing currents are determined by distributing the arcing current proportionally
between all the contributing sources (branches, motor loads, sources, etc.).
3. The arcing current contribution ends up being proportional to the calculated bolted short-circuit
contribution.
The following diagram illustrates the process:
Short-circuit contributions
(not the arcing current
contributions)
The total bolted fault current is equal to 33 kA. The total arcing current is equal to 31.36 kA. In this case,
the arcing current distribution is as follows:
PD
CB12
CB23
CB4
Cable 4
Arcing Current Distribution

Bolted SC % of Total Bolted
Total Arcing Current (kA)
(kA)
(kA)
15.13
45.85
14.38
0.623
1.89
0.59
16.72
50.67
15.89
0.489
1.48
0.46
Only the current magnitudes are considered for the arc flash calculation. Note: For buses with
nominal voltage greater than 15.0 kV, the arcing current contributions is the same as the bolted
fault current.
The arcing currents or bolted fault currents can be displayed on the one-line diagram. To display the
calculated arcing currents on the one-line diagram, simply open the short-circuit display options editor
and select to show the arcing current values (denoted by Ia-Arcing currents) as shown in the image below.
18-52
Arc Flash Analysis
The image above shows the displayed arcing current values based on the fault current decay method being
selected to execute the calculation. ETAP has three different methods to determine the arcing current
contributions. The methods are the Cycle method, 1.5 to 4 Cycle method and the Fault Current Decay
method.
Half Cycle Current Method

This method utilizes the cycle (subtransient) bolted fault current (Ibf) to determine the arcing current
contributions (Ia). Typically this method will yield conservative results for fast operating protective
devices (i.e. devices which operate in their instantaneous region). This is the case with most low voltage
systems. The arcing current determined from either IEEE 1584 equations or directly taken as the bolted
fault current (Lee method) is assumed to be constant throughout the duration of the arc fault.
1.5 to Four Cycle Current Method

This method utilizes the 1 to 4 cycle (transient) bolted fault current (Ibf) to determine the arcing current
contributions (Ia). Typically this method will yield conservative results for longer operating protective
devices (i.e. devices which operate in their inverse overcurrent region). This is the case with medium
voltage systems. The arcing current determined from either IEEE 1584 equations or directly taken as the
bolted fault current (Lee method) is assumed to be constant throughout the duration of the arc fault.
Fault Current Decay Method

This method is very different from the previous two arcing current calculation methods. The program uses
a combination of the sub-transient; transient and steady-state short-circuit networks to determine the
arcing current values which would flow throughout the arc fault duration. The program is taking into
consideration the decay in asynchronous and synchronous machine short-circuit current contributions.
18-53
Arc Flash Analysis
The program will determine first the subtransient bolted fault current (Ibf). It will also determine the
transient bolted fault current (Ibf) and finally the steady-state bolted fault current (Ibf). ETAP
manipulates these three values to determine the equivalent Ia, Ia and Ia values which flow in the actual
arc fault event.
In low voltage systems, the change from Ia to Ia to Ia is not very high and thus the cycle method and
the fault current decay methods may yield very similar results for the majority of systems. However in
medium voltage systems with a lot of asynchronous (induction) motor contributions and also with large
generators contributions, the decay from Ia to Ia may be significant. This significant decay in current
allows you to model a slower operation of protective devices which in turn may significantly increase the
operating time of protective devices.
Also, another benefit of the fault current decay method is its removal of arc fault contributions from
motors. This allows the estimation of a more accurate amount of incident energy release. This may have a
significant impact for systems which have a large number of motor loads.
The subtransient and transient fault currents are obtained using the typical cycle and 4 cycle networks
as described in Chapter 15 (Short-circuit calculation methods). The steady-state short-circuit currents are
obtained typically at 30 cycles (this is the default value, but this can be user-defined). The following rules
apply to the determination of the steady-state arc fault currents:
1) No asynchronous motor contribution is considered pass the steady-state short-circuit time.
2) The synchronous generator contribution will be determined from its steady-state reactance (Xd) if
the generator has no decrement curve information available.
3) The synchronous generator contribution will be determined from its individual decrement curve if
the option Determine from Decrement Curve is selected from the Arc Flash page of the shortcircuit study case editor. Only the AC decay component is considered (no DC decay). The
program will determine the equivalent current contribution from the generator at the steady-state
time specified in the study case. Of course, the contribution of the generator to the fault is
determined taking into consideration the impedance of the system in between the fault and the
generator terminal bus. This means that the closer the faulted buses are to the generator terminal
bus, the bigger the decay in current contribution will be and the closer the current will be to the
one specified in the decrement curve.
4) The program will determine the synchronous generator steady-state arc fault current contribution
as a function of the generator full load ampere rating (Gen FLA) if the option Limit Gen Ibf to
is selected from the Arc Flash page of the study case. This feature allows you to specify what will
be the generator steady-state contribution for a fault at the generator terminals. This feature
mimics the forced excitation capability of certain generators to sustain a fault current level for a
few seconds to allow the operation of overcurrent protective devices. Please note that you may
accomplish the same by using the decrement curve feature as long as the decrement curve has
been configured to show the forced excitation steady-state current value (Imp/Model page
Compound Exc. Feature). In a sense, the Limit Ibf to feature is a quicker way to specify the
generator compound excitation contribution.
The following image shows the decrement curve for a generator with a steady-state fault current value of
371.9 amps or (100% FLA). This corresponds to a decrement curve option and the value of Xd = 100%.
18-54
Arc Flash Analysis
The study case option that you would have to configure to obtain the generator steady-state current
contribution would be as shown below:
18-55
Arc Flash Analysis
The steady-state current value is the only value obtained from the decrement curve. The steady-state time
in this case has been set to 103 cycles. The steady-state arcing current contribution is about 377 Amps.
The next image shows the same generator decrement curve, but this time with a forced excitation and a
sustained steady-state short-circuit current of 2.5*Gen FLA:
18-56
Arc Flash Analysis
In the image above the grey color curve represents the compound excitation curve. This forces the current
to a steady-state arcing current value close to 938 A instead of the 377 A (previous case) as shown below:
18-57
Arc Flash Analysis
The next images show that we can get similar generator steady-state arcing current contributions if we use
the global option Limit Gen Ibf to instead of configuring the compound excitation through the
decrement curve:
No excitation applied
Please note that the Ia contribution from the generator is 938 Amps (same as previous case). Please note
that the Limit Gen Ibf to option is a global option and it sets all generator contributions to the same
forced current value whereas the decrement curve option applies to individual generators. Of course this
may not be too much of a problem since similar generator sizes and models are often used in generator
farms/plants.
IMPORTANT: The fault current decay method is not a full transient solution (continuous fault current
calculation). It only determines three fault current values (subtransient, transient and steady-state). The
fault clearing time and the incident energy are determined by integration of these fault current values as
described in the next sections. The purpose of this method is to allow closer simulation to more complex
power system; however, the full transient behavior is not modeled yet and is left for future releases of the
program. This method will yield good approximations for calculating the decay of energy in most power
systems.
18-58
Arc Flash Analysis
1-Phase Method
Since there is no available methodology described in the guidelines for handling 1-phase system arcs,
ETAP uses the 3-Phase IEEE 1584 equations and applies it to 1-Phase systems. All the IEEE1584
equations are aimed at escalation into 3-phase faults. In general, applying the 3-phase equations for 1phase systems should be conservative. The intended use of this method in ETAP is to provide engineers a
way to estimate the energy for 1-phase installations.
18.6.3 Determination of the Fault Clearing Time (FCT)

The FCT is one of the major factors which affect the calculation of the incident energy. The FCT is the
time required to clear the fault (arc to get extinguished by an opening protective device). This time is
determined from the time current characteristic curves (TCCs) or the definite times of each protective
device that is considered to be a source protective device (source PD)
ETAP classifies protective devices (PDs) as two types. The first and most important are the source PDs.
These are the devices that energize the faulted bus, and once disconnected, completely isolate the system
from any power source. The other type of protective device is a Load PD. These are the PDs which carry
power to the loads or subsystems connected to a faulted bus, but do not provide power from a source (i.e.,
synchronous generator or power grid).
ETAP takes the most conservative approach when determining the fault clearing time (FCT). If there are
several parallel source PDs feeding the bus, it will select the longest FCT (or the time at which the last
source PD opens). If there is multiple source PDs in series on the same branch, it will take the shortest
opening time of such PDs. The FCT is then used to calculate the incident energy for the bus and load
PDs.
The process of obtaining the fault clearing time is dependent on the method selected to determine the
results. For 3-phase and 1-phase calculation methods with the and 1.5 to 4 cycle methods, the process
is relatively simple. The program determines the arcing current contribution passing through each source
PD and based on its TCC settings, the program automatically determines the estimated fault clearing time
of each PD. For these methods, a single current is obtained and plotted on a TCC to determine the trip
time or total clearing time (fuses). Image 1 shows the process for a simple radial system:
18-59
Arc Flash Analysis
The arcing fault current obtained using the half cycle method is 14.8 kA. This value is held constant over
the duration of the arc fault. The fault clearing times for CB22 and CB23 are taken from the curve at the
highest possible value as shown in the image.
The same process as shown in the previous image would apply if you were using the 1.5 to 4 cycle fault
current method except that the current magnitude would be slightly smaller.
The process of obtaining the fault clearing time is more complicated for the fault current decay method.
As mentioned in the previous section, the fault current decay method calculates three arcing current
values. These values represent a changing short-circuit current value. In order to determine the response
of the source protective device the program needs to account for the inverse overcurrent effect of
protective devices. This means that the higher the current the faster the travel time or melting point of a
fuse will be reached. This requires integration over the three current values which are calculated by ETAP
using the equation given below:
IEEE Std C37.112-1196 equation (3)
T0 is the operating time of the overcurrent device. The function t(I) represents the fault clearing times.
18-60
Arc Flash Analysis
In ETAP T0 can represent the trip time of an overcurrent relay or the total clearing time of a fuse. The
same equation is used for all time-inverse overcurrent protective devices. The following plot illustrates
the concept used by the fault current decay method.
As can be seen in the image above, the subtransient fault current is held constant for 4 cycles, the
transient current is held constant between 5 cycles and the steady-state current time (typically 30 cycles).
The final steady-state arcing current is held constant until the fault is cleared. The image below illustrates
this concept. Of course in this image, the initial fault current values are not high enough to cause the
overcurrent device to operate.
18-61
Arc Flash Analysis
The fault clearing time obtained from equation 3 will most likely predict a clearing time which is shorter
than the longest possible clearing time.
The determination of the fault clearing time is bound by several special rules and assumptions for
different types of protective devices. Also the program can determine the fault clearing time if it can find
it within a specified range or electrical distance from the fault location.
The following applies to the process of determining the FCT at a fault location:
ETAP determines the FCT for a faulted bus by searching up to 20 branch levels away from the
faulted bus. The program will search for source PDs as far away from the fault location as
specified in the option Bus Levels Away To Find Source PD. This option can be configured
from the project preferences window under the Arc Flash section.
The default value of the Bus Levels Away To Find Source PD entry is 10. The maximum level
is 20. It is recommended that this entry be left as default unless the protection for the faulted bus
resides in location that is more than 10 branch levels away (reducing this number speeds up the
calculation). If you know that the protection for all the buses can be found within 5 or less bus
levels away, then reducing this number of levels to search may speed up the calculation
considerably. The following image illustrates the concept of the bus levels away search for source
protective devices:
18-62
Arc Flash Analysis
The
protective devices circled in red color are considered part of the protective devices for a fault at
the location indicated above.
If ETAP cannot determine the FCT for any of the connected source protective devices which are
capable of de-energizing the fault, then it displays a warning message on the one-line diagram
and reports FCT not determined.
Protective devices which are considered as Load PDs are not considered in the determination of
the FCT for the bus; however they are considered when you decide to analyze arc faults at the
load terminals. Load PDs are not considered for determining the bus FCT since such devices
cannot isolate the fault at the bus. ETAP considers the Load PD contribution and decay in motor
current according to ANSI and IEC Standards. For example, in the Image below PDs CB16 to
CB18 are not considered in the determination of the FCT, but their contributions are considered
in the determination of the incident energy for a fault at the bus Bus11 as shown below.
18-63
Arc Flash Analysis
Directly connected load

PDs are not considered
when determining the
FCT of the bus (However,
these devices are
considered for load
Protective devices need to have their proper TCC curves selected from the ETAP Library to be
considered in the determination of the FCT. The reason for this requirement is to limit human
error when entering settings into a protective device editor directly. Also the analysis is far more
accurate if you use the actual TCC curves.
If a High Voltage Circuit Breaker is used to clear the fault, then it must be interlocked to a relay
which has the proper current transformer connections and has been selected from the Star relay
library. If any of these elements is missing, then ETAP will not find the FCT for this device.
Other examples of this situation include Low Voltage Breakers which are shunt tripped by relays.
The same is true for switches and contactors operated by relays.
Overcurrent relays cannot operate faster than one cycle. This has been done to keep conservative
results according to IEEE 1584 guidelines. This rule is applied even if the manufacturer TCC
shows no delay for this instantaneous part of the relay or if the instantaneous response is between
zero and 1 cycle. Typical operating times for overcurrent relays should be at least 10 msec.
Fuse total clearing time cannot be less than 0.010 sec. This has been configured per IEEE 1584
guidelines. If the fuse does not have a total clearing time curve (i.e., only average time), the
program applies a 10% additional time from the average melt time determined from the
manufacturer fuse curve plus 0.004 seconds to that time.
The determined FCT may be a combination of several steps involved before the device can
actually open and clear the arc fault. For example for a HVCB may have a rating interrupting
time of three cycles. The Arc Flash Module knows this and will combine this with the actual relay
trip time plus any other possible delay(s). For LVCB, the following times are added on top of the
time determined from a relay.
18-64
Arc Flash Analysis
Table 9: Relay Operated Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Operating Timea

Circuit Breaker Rating
Opening Time
Opening time
Opening Time
and Type
at 60 Hz
at 50 Hz
in Seconds
(Cycles)
(Cycles)
Molded Case (<1000 V)
3.0
2.5
0.050
(Integral Trip)
Insulated Case (<1000 V)
3.0
2.5
0.050
(Integral Trip or relay
operated)
Power CB (<1000) (Integral
3.0
2.5
0.050
Trip or relay operated)
a
None of the values listed in this table include the external trip time.
The search algorithm has certain limitations besides the number of levels away from the fault
location. The image below shows the protective devices along paths which energize the faulted
bus that the program can see because of the search limitation.
18-65
Arc Flash Analysis
Also, in previous versions of the program, the arc flash source PD search could not go across
three-winding transformers. The image below shows the PDs which are now visible on the other
legs of 3-winding transformers:
You may also use the User-Defined Source PD from the Bus Arc Flash page to efficiently
determine the FCT. You may select the ID of the source PD that should be used for the
determination of the FCT (Bus Arc Flash page). You must also check the option User-Defined
Source PD (Bus Editor) from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. ETAP will automatically
determine the arcing current passing through this protective device for a fault at the specified bus.
Based on this arcing current, the program finds the FCT and uses it to calculate the bus and load
PD incident energy. The following illustration shows the mechanism of the user-defined source
PD:
18-66
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Arc Flash Page for Bus1
Arc Flash page of SC Study Case
For the above system, Relay1 takes the longer time to trip in the event of a fault at Bus1. Once
you have selected the source PD, you can execute the arc flash calculation.
A contactor placed along a source branch can clear the fault if it is interlocked with a properly
configured relay. The Relay trip time and the dropout time of the contactor constitute the total
fault clearing time.
Switches can also be used as fault clearing source PDs, only if they are interlocked with a
properly configured relay.
Tie-Protective Devices placed in series cannot be considered to clear the fault for the same bus
level. Only those PDs that lay at least one branch or bus level away can be considered by the
program to be able to clear the fault at a source PD. Please see Image below:
CB10 will be
considered as the
Fault Clearing PD
CB134 will
not be
considered as
the Fault
Clearing PD
for a fault at
18-67
Arc Flash Analysis
ETAP is capable of modeling Recloser operation for arc flash. The FCT used for reclosers is
taken to be the total time the device remains closed on the fault for each TCC operation in the
sequence. For example, if the controller sequence is specified as 3 operations on the first TCC,
then the total fault clearing time would be three times the time for the 1st operation on the TCC as
shown in the image below:
1.
18-68
Arc Flash Analysis
The way the Arc Flash calculation handles fuses which have only the average melt time curves
has been modified. The new method is described below:
If Fuse has only average melt time curve, then
If Fuse has average melt time curve or both total and minimum clearing time curves, then
FCT determination for Fuse with Average Melt Time Curve Only
This modification has been done based on proposed changes in IEEE 1584b.
18-69
Arc Flash Analysis
18.6.4 Determination of the Incident Energy

After the fault clearing times have been determined, the next step is to determine the incident energy for
the fault location. ETAP is capable of determining the incident energy for a fault at any location in the
equipment by simply specifying a fault at the bus. The locations are categorized as follows:
1) Fault at the main bus
2) Fault on the source protective devices
3) Fault on load protective devices (typically the same as the bus fault, but different in some special
cases).
4) Fault on load terminals connected directly to the faulted bus or connected through equipment
cables
The process of determining the incident energy is simple. The program will use equations [D.7.3(c)]
(empirical method) or [D.7.4] (theoretical method) depending on the bus nominal voltage and bolted fault
current value.
[D.7.3(c)]
[D.7.4]
The empirical method is used for the range of parameters specified by IEEE 1584 2002. The Lee method
is used for any system with voltage or bolted fault current outside the range of the empirical method.
The IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E 2009 guidelines do not address how complex electrical system with
multiple sources should be handled. These guidelines only indicate that the incident energy can be
determined based on the fault clearing time of the first upstream protective device which de-energizes the
fault. This methodology is simple enough for radial systems; however, there is no mention on how to
handle looped or meshed systems with multiple source protective devices energizing the fault location.
ETAP has two methods of handling the calculation of the incident energy for power systems which have
more than one energizing source protective device. The first method (existing method before ETAP
7.0.0) takes the total bus arcing current and determines the energy using the fault clearing time of the last
protective device to de-energize the fault. For most power systems having multiple sources, it is likely
that the operating time of each source is similar and thus it is acceptable to use the entire arcing current up
to the final fault clearing time.
The second method was added to ETAP 7.0.0 to handle those situations for which the first method is not
acceptable. Mainly the cases there multiple sources have very different trip times. The new method is
called Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source Systems. There is an ETAP Options
(Preferences) setting which needs to be set to True in order to activate this method. The following
image shows the entry and its location in the preferences editor:
18-70
Arc Flash Analysis
For example, we can analyze a multiple source system and place an arc fault at Bus 5BM. Bus 5Bm is
fed from two different utility connections with source protective devices (HVCBs) 22 and 12. Each
breaker operates at different fault clearing times.
18-71
Arc Flash Analysis
The difference in the operating times is caused by the different relay time dial settings as shown in the
following TCC:
18-72
Arc Flash Analysis
The time difference averages about 2 to 3 seconds between the relay operations. In this case RelayA1
operates first (at approximately 1 second) and its arcing current contribution is removed at this time. This
constitutes almost 33% of the energy contribution to the fault location. The total incident energy
calculated with the removal of CB 12s contribution is nearly 80 cal/cm2 which is well above the
maximum value described for PPE in NFPA 70E 2009. By comparison if we were to run the same
calculation without using the incident energy subtraction method, the incident energy results would be as
shown in the images below:
18-73
Arc Flash Analysis
The incident energy removed between 1 and 3 seconds (33% of the total fault current) amount to about 20
cal/cm2. The new result is nearly104 cal/cm2.
The previous calculations were executed using the cycle method with/out applying with incident
energy subtraction for the multiple sources. We can also use the fault current decay method to perform
the same calculation. Please note that the asynchronous machine contribution to the fault was nearly 2.0
kA and it comes from substation SUB 5B. This contribution constitutes the only AC decay component
of the fault since the source contributions from CB 22 and 12 come from utility connections and such are
always assumed to be constant.
The result obtained using the fault current decay method with the incident energy subtraction option
enabled is shown below:
Motor Loads
18-74
Arc Flash Analysis
The decay from the asynchronous loads in substation SUB5B is also a significant decrease in the energy
calculation. The calculated energy is now down to nearly 68.9 cal/cm2. For this type of system, the fault
current decay method yields the least conservative results, however, its results should be the most
accurate of all the methods.
The fault current decay method produces many intermediate results. The intermediate results are arranged
according to the stage at which they occur. These intermediate values are usually denoted as E1, E2, E3,
FCT1, FCT2, FCT3, etc. The following table lists these intermediate values and provides a description of
the physical events they represent. These parameters are displayed in the Arc Flash Report Analyzer and
in the Arc Flash Analysis Reports. For the previous example we have the following parameters
generated:
Parameter
E1
FCT1
Total Ia
Total Ibf
E2
FCT2
Ia
Ibf
Description
Incident energy
accumulated over the
first 4 cycles. It is
obtained using the
subtransient fault current
contributions (Ia) from
every source in the
system.
Physical meaning
Duration of the first

stage
Total subtransient arcing
current
Total subtransient bolted
fault current
Incident energy
accumulated between 4
cycles and 30 cycles. It
is obtained using the
transient fault current
contributions (Ia) from
every source in the
system. In our example
the reduction in energy
in this stage comes from
the reduced motor
contribution.
Duration of the second
stage.
No protective device operates during this stage. The FCT1

value is set to 4 cycles.
Total transient arcing

current
Total transient bolted
fault current
Used to estimate Ia.
Typically 26 cycles if the steady-state time is set to 30

cycles. In our example only the motor contribution is
completely removed at the steady-state time.
18-75
Arc Flash Analysis
E3
Incident energy
accumulated between 30
cycles and the final fault
clearing time. In our
example E3 is actually
the sum of two
individual stages. The
motor contribution has
completely decayed in
this stage as can be seen
in the image.
Duration of the third
stage
FCT3
Total steady-state arcing

current
Ia
Ibf
Final FCT
Total Incident
Energy
Total steady-state bolted

fault current
This is the sum of
FCT1, FCT2 & FCT3
and it represents the
total arc fault duration.
This is the sum of E1,
E2 & E3 and it
represents the total
incident energy released
throughout the arc fault
duration.
In our example FCT3 is actually composed of two

individual stage durations. The first stage is set between 30
cycles to 1 second and the second stage time is set between
1 sec and 3 seconds. The difference between these two
stages is that the current from CB 12 is removed as the
protective device operates
The program always displays the total arcing currents for
any stage; however, internally it may reduce the current for
any stage as each source protective device is de-energized.
This is the case for Ia for stage E3. It experiences the
reduction because of motor decay and because of CB 12s
operation.
In our example the final FCT is determined as (FCT1 = 4
cycles) + (FCT2= 26 cycles) + (FCT3 = 150 cycles) =
(Total Fault Duration = 180 cycles).
In our example the Total Incident energy = (E1=1.9) +
(E2=11.5) + (E3=55.5) 69 cal/cm2. Any stage can be
split into intermediate smaller stages, but such are not
reported by the program. In our example this is the case of
stage E3 which is internally split into two smaller stages
which are not reported for simplicity.
For a description of all the calculation results displayed in the AF report Analyzer and AF analysis
reports, please refer to the AF Report Analyzer section of this chapter.
Source/Load PD Arc Fault Calculations

The previous examples described the calculation results for a fault at the Bus location. The same
methodology applies if the fault is located on the main protective device which energizes the bus or if it
happens on load protective devices connected to the bus. The difference in the calculation results are
summarized below:
18-76
Arc Flash Analysis
1) In the majority of cases the results of faults on load protective devices are the same as those for
those on the bus. Only for certain cases in differential protection applications, the program may
yield different results for the load PDs (if the Pd is inside or outside the differential protection
zone as defined by the location of the current transformers in the circuit).
2) The fault location for source PDs is almost treated as a completely different fault location. The
results for a fault at the source PDs are in most cases much different than the results for a fault at
the bus.
The following image illustrates how ETAP calculates and displays the results at these locations.
The previous image shows that the program calculates independently the AF results at the source PD,
Load Pd, Bus and Load terminals by simply specifying a fault only on the bus. The results show that the
most dangerous area is the source PD arc fault and that the least dangerous location is the load terminal
box arc fault.
18-77
Arc Flash Analysis
Load Terminal Arc Fault Calculation

ETAP Arc Flash gives you the flexibility to analyze hundreds of possible arc fault locations within the
same equipment without the need to add additional buses. This simple One Click and Fault operation
makes the Hazard Analysis far more efficient by reducing the setup time of the one-line diagrams, by not
having to use a large number of buses to represent every possible arc fault location. This feature works
seamlessly with the existing load equipment cable feature in ETAP.
In a power system, there could be hundreds of different arc fault locations within a large motor control
center or switchgear lineup. With this feature, the Arc Flash Program produces detailed analysis reports
for every faulted location and it can automatically generate AF labels for every incoming main circuit
breaker cubicle, load circuit breaker or for every load terminal point.
The Arc Flash Program can simulate arc faults at the load terminals of the following devices:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Induction Motors
Synchronous motors
Static Loads
MOVs
Capacitors
The following image illustrates the locations for which ETAP calculates the incident energy. The program
will calculate the incident energy at all of the locations shown below as long as the main bus (LV-MCC)
is faulted and the entries have been configured in the ETAP options (Preferences) Editor.
The load terminal arc fault simulation can be configured from the Options (Preferences) Editor by setting
the option Calculate Load Terminal Arc Flash = True.
18-78
Arc Flash Analysis
Calculate Load Terminal Arc Flash

This entry specifies if the Arc Flash Program will calculate the incident energy in the event of an arc fault
at the load terminals. The default value is set to False and it means that the load terminal arc fault is not
considered. If you set this entry to True, then the program determines the incident energy results for arc
faults at the load terminals.
Load Terminal Arc Fault Equipment Type
This entry specifies what type of equipment to use to determine the arcing current for an arc fault at the
motor terminals. The default is Panelboard = 0. The remaining options are Cable Bus = 1, Open Air = 2,
MCC = 3, Switchgear, Switchboard, Switchrack = 4. The values of the Gap and distance X-factor
parameters used are typical values according to the equipment voltage.
The reason that the panelboard has been set to default for modeling the load terminal faults is that the
program is trying to simulate an arc fault in a small enclosure like a terminal box. The enclosures used by
the IEEE 1584 test group to develop the equations for panelboards were the smallest in size of all the
enclosures tested and thus they are the best fit.
The values of the Gaps and X factor used by the program to simulate the load terminal arc fault are listed
in the following table:
Table 10: Default values for Gaps between Conductors and X factors for Load Terminal Faults
Gap Default
X factor
Equipment type*
Value (mm)
Value
0.208 1.0 kV
Open Air
40
2.000
0.208 1.0 kV
Cable Bus
13
2.000
0.208 1.0 kV
MCC
25
1.641
0.208 1.0 kV
Other
13
2.000
0.208 1.0 kV
Panelboard
25
1.641
0.208 1.0 kV
Switchgear
32
1.473
0.208 1.0 kV
Switchboard
32
1.473
0.208 1.0 kV
Switchrack
32
1.473
>1.0 5.0 kV
Open Air
102
2.000
>1.0 5.0 kV
Cable Bus
13
2.000
>1.0 5.0 kV
MCC
102
0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV
Other
13
2.000
>1.0 5.0 kV
Panelboard
102
0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV
Switchgear
102
0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV
Switchboard
102
0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV
Switchrack
102
0.973
>5.0 15 kV
Open Air
153
2.000
>5.0 15 kV
Cable Bus
13
2.000
18-79
Arc Flash Analysis
Equipment type*
>5.0 15 kV
>5.0 15 kV
>5.0 15 kV
>5.0 15 kV
>5.0 15 kV
>5.0 15 kV
>15.1 - 36 kV
MCC
Other
Panelboard
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
N/A
Gap Default
Value (mm)
153
13
153
153
153
153
N/A
X factor
Value
0.973
2.000
0.973
0.973
0.973
0.973
N/A
The program can generate detailed report for every faulted load terminal or load protective device as
shown in the image below:
The program can automatically generate load terminal and load protective device arc flash labels once the
options have been configured.
Load CB Label
Load Terminal Label
18-80
Arc Flash Analysis
Differential Relay Handling for AF

ETAP allows you to model different types of differential relays like bus, line and transformer
differentials. The program allows you to determine the incident energy which could be released for an
internal arc fault while at the same time; the program still considers the locations which may be outside
(or external to the differential relay) protection zone. The following image illustrates a bus differential
relay.
Differential Relay Setup

The differential relay must be configured before it can be used for Arc Flash Analysis. The following
items need to be considered for properly configuring the differential relay to trip on internal faults, but not
on external faults.
1) The Current Transformer (CT) polarities must be pointing away from the element which they
protect. For example, if the relay is a bus differential, then all CT polarity markings must be
pointing away from the protected bus.
18-81
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus Differential CT Polarity
Transformer Differential CT Polarity Configuration
18-82
Arc Flash Analysis
2) All the CTs must be connected to the differential relay and all the circuit breakers must be
interlocked to the device as well.
3) The differential relay operating time must be specified. The default value is zero seconds.
However, it is recommended that you enter a value between 10 to 30 msec. This value should be
obtained from the relay manufacturer documentation and it should be applied in a conservative
fashion. The differential relay operating time may change depending on the severity of the fault.
The operating time of a differential relay may be a lot higher for unbalanced faults. The longest
possible operating time should be used.
4) The total fault clearing time for a differential relay will be the sum of the Operating time plus the
breaker time. In the case of three cycle breakers, the FCT = 0.020 + (3/60) = 0.070 sec.
5) The selection of Percentage or High Impedance from the Differential Type drop-down list does
not make any difference in the way the program determines if an arc fault is internal or external to
the differential relay. This field will be utilized in future versions of the Arc Flash Program as the
internal operation of the differential relay is modeled.
6) The Current Transformer (CT) turn ratio does not affect the operation of the differential relay, but
of course you should enter the turn ratios as configured in the actual device.
7) The calculation of the incident energy for the source protective devices internal to the differential
protection zone is dependent on the fault clearing time of external upstream protective devices.
See the image below:
18-83
Arc Flash Analysis
8) Differential relay internal protection zones may be overlapped. That is, a protective device like a
circuit breaker can reside within the protection zone of two differential relays.
18-84
Arc Flash Analysis
Maintanance Mode Switch

ETAP gives you the ability to simulate the operation of Maintenance Mode switches. Newer Solid State
Trip Units are being equipped by the manufacturer with special Maintenance Mode switches which allow
the override of the normal settings to use instead very fast operation settings with very low pickup values.
The purpose of these trip units is to override normal coordination settings while energized work is being
performed in order to minimize the fault clearing time.
The Arc Flash Program can easily be configured to simulate the incident energy which could be released
under Maintenance or Non-Maintenance conditions. In order to do this, the Maintenance Mode must be
enabled in the ETAP LVSST trip unit library as shown in the image below:
18-85
Arc Flash Analysis
Next, you must select the device from the library for the each low voltage circuit breaker which has the
Maintenance Mode capability:
NORMAL
SETTINGS
CATEGORY 3 PPE
MAINT SWITCH ON
CATEGORY 0 PPE
18-86
Arc Flash Analysis
Current Limiting Fuse Handling

Current limiting fuses (CLF) are a great way of mitigating the arc flash energy. ETAP11 provides a
method of handling current limiting fuses for arc flash calculations. A current limiting device by
definition limits the current and also trips the arc faults very fast. This version of ETAP is allowing taking
credit for the fast operating time by determining of the fuse will operate in its current limiting range.
The current limiting fuse operation handling in ETAP is accomplished by using three methods.
1) Peak Let-Through Curves
2) Bottom of the Curve Method
3) IEEE 1584 2002 Section 5.6 Equations
Peak Let-Through Curve Method
This method allows the program to determine the current limiting operation of the fuse by comparing the
arcing current passing through the fuse against the peak let-through curves.
The logic used by the program when this option is applied is described below. The following image
shows the curve points used to determine the CLF operation.
Point A
Point B
Ia-Fuse
Peak Let-thru curves for a CLF
The following definitions are applicable:
18-87
Arc Flash Analysis
Let I Point A be the starting point at which the fuse can be considered to operate as CLF
Let Ia-Fuse be the arcing current which would flow through the CLF
Logic:
If I Point A Ia-Fuse 2* I Point A, then the fuse fault clearing time is set to cycle.
If Ia-Fuse > 2* I Point A, then the fault clearing time is set to cycle
If the arcing current passing through the fuse is below point A, then the TCC curves of the fuse are used
to determine the fault clearing time of the fuse. Please note that the bottom of the curve method is not
used in this case since it is only used when the peak let-through curves for the fuse are not available. It is
considered that the peak let-through curves are a more accurate method to determine CLF operation and
the bottom of the curve method is only used when the peak let-through curve is not present.
Note: This method does not offer any reduction in the arcing current passing through the fuse. It only
offers reduction in the fault clearing time. The incident energy results coming from the CLF will be
slightly higher because there is no reduction in the current.
Bottom of the Curve Method
This method can be used if there are no peak let-thru curves defined for the element. The value of the arc
fault current passing through the fuse is compared against the fuse TCC current value at 0.01 seconds.
The following image shows a CLF fuse TCC with the value of the arcing current at the 0.01 second time.
I Bottom-Curve
0.01 sec
CLF TCC showing the value of Ia passing through the fuse

The following definitions are applicable:
Let I Bottom-Curve be the point at the bottom of the curve at 0.01 sec.
Let Ia-Fuse be the arcing current which would flow through the CLF
18-88
Arc Flash Analysis
Logic:
If I Bottom-Curve Ia-Fuse 2* I Bottom-Curve, then the fuse fault clearing time is set to cycle.
If Ia-Fuse > 2* I Bottom-Curve, then the fault clearing time is set to cycle
The following conditions must be met for this method to be applied:
The CLF has no peak let-thru curves

The Study case option Use bottom of the CLF TCC (if peak let-through not available) is
enabled.
If the arcing current passing through the fuse is lower than the TCC curve value at 0.01 second then the
value from the TCC (total clearing time or average melt time) is used directly as the fault clearing time of
the fuse.
Note: This method does not offer any reduction in the arcing current passing through the fuse. It only
offers reduction in the fault clearing time. The incident energy results coming from the CLF will be
slightly higher because there is no reduction in the current.
IEEE 1584 2002 Section 5.6 Equations
This method uses the IEEE 1584 equations. This method does not determine the fault clearing time or the
arcing current reduction because of the CLF operation. The equations provide directly the incident energy
results for a fault downstream from the fuse. This method is very limited. It can only be used for systems
with particular configurations.
The IEEE 1584 CLF equations are only applied under the following conditions:
1) The system is radial. Multiple source systems are not allowed.
2) The system voltage must be 600 Volts or less.
3) The fuse class must be L & RK1 only.
4) The working distance must be 18 inch or higher
5) The bolted fault current values at the fault location downstream from the fuse must be within the
range of the equations provided by IEEE 1584.
If any of the previous conditions are not met, then the program will not use the equations. By default the
program will attempt to use the peak let-through curves for class L & RK1 first. If they are not available,
then the fuse TCCs will be used to determine the fuse fault clearing time. The following image shows a
radial system with some motor loads connected.
18-89
Arc Flash Analysis
The IEEE 1584 equations do not have any provisions or do not account for fault current contributions
from motor loads downstream from the fuse. To determine this energy, the program determines the
portion of the current which comes from the motor loads and adjusts the energy from the motor loads
based on the portion of the energy from the source.
ETAP does not know the fault clearing time (equations do not predict this) and thus the energy from the
motors is calculated based on the ratio of the motor contribution and the total fault current.
The following equations are used to determine the additional energy from the motor current:
Let:
Ibfuse be the current passing through the fuse
Ibftotal be the total fault current at the point of the fault
Efinal be the final incident energy including the motor contribution
Ratio =
E final =
18-90
Ib fuse
Ibf Total
E source
Ratio
Arc Flash Analysis
Overall Logic for Current Limiting Fuse Operation

The following diagram describes the logic used to determine the fault clearing time for current limiting
fuses. This logic has been designed to transition between methods if curves are not available or if the
parameters are not applicable based on the selected method.
The following logic flow diagram describes how the program determines the CLF operating time based
on the options selected in the AF FCT page of the short-circuit study case.
CLF Fuse
Unchecked
CLF
Enabled?
Checked
IEEE
Equations?
Checked
Yes
Equations
Applicable?
Determine Energy for

Class L & RK1
No
Unchecked
Let-Thru
curves
available?
No
Yes
Use Bottom
of Curve?
Determine CLF
FCT based on
bottom of curve
No
Yes
Determine CLF
FCT from Peak
Let-Thru
Determine FCT
from fuse TCC
18-91
Arc Flash Analysis

This feature allows the arc flash program to consider that the main source protective devices may not be
adequately isolated from the bus and may fail to operate or be capable of de-energizing the arc fault
before it escalates into a line-side arc fault.
The following rules and assumptions have been applied for this feature:
1. The main protective device isolation option only affects the results for a bus or load protective device
arc fault (directly connected). It also affects load terminal arc fault calculations if the load is directly
connected (since the results for the directly connected load terminals are set the same as those of the
connected bus). This option does not affect load terminal arc fault calculations if an equipment cable
has been assigned (i.e. there is an electrical distance between the cable and the main breaker)
2. If the Main PD is not isolated, then the program will not consider the first level (directly connected)
source PDs as possible devices which can clear the fault.
3. Since the effect on the results can be considerable, there are some flags displayed in the arc flash
result analyzer (AFRA). These flags indicate which locations were affected by the main PD isolation
assumption. The following table summarizes the flags which appear in the AFRA.
Main Protective Device Isolation Flags
AFRA Flag
Conditions for setting the Main PD Isolation Flags
This flag is set to blank for a bus, load PD or load terminal (directly
connected load) arc flash result for the following conditions:
Blank
The Main PD Isolation feature is not enabled (study case)
The load has equipment cable
This flag is set for a bus, load PD or load terminal (directly
Main PD is
Isolated
The Main PD Isolation feature is enabled (study case)
The device Main Source PD is not Isolated
Main PD is not
Isolated
The Isolation of the main PD does not affect the
determination of the final FCT.
Main PD Isolation
affects FCT
The Isolation of the main PD affects the determination of the
final FCT.
The following images illustrate the concept of main protective device isolation. The electrical panel and
corresponding one-line diagram representation are shown below. The main breaker is not isolated from
the load breakers and if the cover is removed, exposure to the load and line side of the main breaker is
18-92
Arc Flash Analysis
possible. The AF results for the bus shown on the one-line do not consider the effect of main PD
isolation.
18-93
Arc Flash Analysis
If the main PD isolation option is enabled and the panels are configured to consider this option, then the
results for the bus arc flash results no longer consider the directly connected main PDs UPSTREAM
CB and Panel 1B as capable of limitng the energy at the panels. In this case, the source PD for Panel
1B becomes the UPSTREAM CB and the source PD for the Main Swbrd becomes the Primary Side
Fuse. The arc flash results for two panels after considering the main PD isolation option are displayed in
the following image:
Without the main PD isolation option, the results of the line side arc fault of the source protective devices
had to be used for the bus as well. This feature is just one more way to guarantee that the most
conservative solution or arc flash scenario is considered for the calculation.
18-94
Arc Flash Analysis
Troubleshooting FCT not Determined Problems

There are several reasons why the Arc Flash Program may not determine the fault clearing time for a fault
at a particular bus or source protective device. The following are the seven most common issues which
can cause this message to be generated by the program:
1) There are no source protective devices properly configured to protect the arc fault location:
If you have not added the protective devices which actually de-energize the equipment in the
event of a fault, the program may display this error message. In the image below, the utility
connection does not have a protective device, and if there is a fault on the line side of the medium
voltage breakers, there is no physical protective device which can clear the fault. In this case, you
will see the FCT not determined message displayed on the one-line diagram, reports and arc
flash labels.
As you may see, there is no

protective device which can deenergize the fault at Bus39.
2) The relay interlocks, Current Transformers (CTs) are missing or there is no data selected
from the library: Overcurrent, directional, differential and overload relay protective devices
require circuit breakers to clear the fault. ETAP can determine automatically which relay will trip
and in which order, but it needs you to specify which breaker is interlocked to the relay (which
breaker will be tripped by the relay selected by ETAP). The FCT not determined message will
be displayed as well if you did not select the protective device from the library. This applies to
LVCB, Relays, Fuses, etc.
18-95
Arc Flash Analysis
For Relay48, there is no CT or

output
circuit
breaker
specified. Once you assign the
CT and breaker, the program
will consider this relays
output to determine the FCT
3) Arcing current is too Low and Source Protective Device does not trip: The arcing current
could be much smaller in magnitude than the available bolted short-circuit current for some
equipment (especially if the equipment is less than 1.0 kV). According to IEEE 1584 equations,
the arcing current may be less than the short-circuit current for systems up to 15 kV. Because of
this phenomenon, the protective devices may not trip at all under an arc fault (i.e., arcing current
is below the long time pickup). ETAP includes the arcing current variation automatically to
further reduce the calculated current. If ETAP detects that the source protective device does not
trip, then it will display the FCT not determined message. The following image shows you how
you can verify this:
18-96
Arc Flash Analysis
1.
In the case of a fault at Bus30, the arcing current is too low on the primary side of Transformer
T9. To determine the arcing current on the primary of T9, take the ratio of the SC contribution
over the total SC current and multiply the total arcing current by this ratio.
(34.33 kA/35.3 kA) * 24.27 kA = 23.59 kA
Then convert to the primary base kV.

23.58 kA * (0.48kV/13.2kV) = 0.857 kA
At this time all that is left to determine is if indeed the calculated arcing current on the primary is
too low for Relay28 to trip. You can confirm this by plotting the relay on a Star view TCC. In
the TCC shown below, the red arrow indicates the arcing current value at the beginning of the
fault. This clearly shows that the relay does not trip.
Sometimes the protective device will still trip, but it will do so in a very long time since it is using
the 51(overcurrent protection section of the relay). In this case, ETAP may calculate a very high
incident energy value. If the cal/cm^2 exceeds the limit of Category 4 (based on NFPA 70E), then
it will flag it on the one-line diagram by displaying the message Exceeds Max. PPE Arc Rating.
This is the case at Bus14 in the image above.
18-97
Arc Flash Analysis
4) The Source Protective Device is outside the Search Branch Level Number: In order to reduce
the calculation speed and computer system requirements, certain limits are set by ETAP. The
limitation consists of reducing the number of levels required in the search of the source protective
device. The source protective devices are of course used to determine the Fault Clearing Time.
In previous versions of ETAP (prior to 5.5.0), the number of branch levels away to be searched
was set to 3. For some special systems, the protection would be placed more than three branch
levels away and thus a bigger search number would have to be specified. If the program did not
find all the corresponding source protective devices within 3 branch levels away, it would again
show the message FCT not determined.
5) The source protective device is completely outside the search area of the program: For some
very special cases, the Arc Flash Program will not be able to determine the Fault Clearing Time
since the source protective device cannot be located. This means that the system does not have
protection within the searchable area of the system.
Logic for Determining the System Grounding

The arc flash calculation can automatically determine the grounding configuration of the faulted buses if
this option is selected from the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. IEEE 1584-2002
indicates that the factor K2 (used for the calculation of the incident energy) is zero for ungrounded or
low/high resistance grounded systems and -0.113 for grounded systems (solidly grounded).
18-98
Arc Flash Analysis
ETAP 7.0 uses the following rules to determine if an element is grounded or ungrounded:
If there is any device like a transformer or voltage source (generator or power grid) that is solidly
grounded, then the bus will be considered grounded.
If the system only has low/high resistance grounding connections, then it is considered ungrounded
unless there is at least one path that is solidly grounded. (See the figure below.)
Resistor
Grounded Paths
One Solidly
Grounded Path
If the system is wye-open or delta connected, then the Arc Flash Module will determine this bus to be
ungrounded.
No Solidly Grounded
Connection
Important! Note:
The motor grounding connection cannot be
considered as the only solidly grounded source for a bus. Only transformer or voltage sources are
considered as solid grounding points.
There may be some situations under which ETAP determines that the bus is ungrounded, but it may
actually be connected to a solidly grounded transformer. This situation may happen around transformers
that are solidly grounded on one side and resistor or reactor grounded on the other side.
Calculating Incident Energy for PDs

ETAP Arc Flash calculates the incident energy once the arcing current, the FCT and the system
grounding configurations have been determined. The module yields the incident energy results for the bus
and individual protective devices.
18-99
Arc Flash Analysis
The main goal of the Arc Flash Module is to provide you with flexibility to determine the correct
calculation of the incident energy. Even for individual cubicles (PDs), the module will assume the worstcase scenario.
The worst possible arc fault at a PD occurs at the input side of the PD (line side or side facing the feeder).
In this case, the PD itself cannot clear the fault, and it must be cleared by a typically slower operating
feeder PD upstream in the system.
For example, the figure below indicates the worst-case fault.
Arc Fault
happen here
could
The upstream breaker will clear the fault in this case. The current used to determine the incident energy
for the PD will be either the maximum through fault current or the total bus fault current depending on the
selection on the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case.
If there are multiple sources, the module will take the longest device operating time as the FCT used to
calculate the incident energy.
The energy of source protective devices is calculated based on the first upstream device that can clear the
fault. If multiple source PDs are connected to the faulted bus, ETAP will use the longest opening time
from the different source PDs, to calculate the energy. Load PD incident energy is always determined
based on the calculated bus FCT.
18-100
Arc Flash Analysis
Incident Energy Level Determination

The PPE Requirement level is determined by comparing the calculated incident energy in Cal/cm2 against
the ranges specified in the NFPA 70E. The selection depends on the option selected in the Arc Flash Data
page of the short-circuit study case editor.
ETAP gives the option of defining your own incident energy levels or to use those defined by NFPA 70E.
You can define up to 10 levels, but in the majority of the cases it proves impractical to define more than
three levels.
The PPE Requirements editor can be accessed from the Project menu by pointing to Settings Arc Flash
and selecting PPE Requirements.
18-101
Arc Flash Analysis
The PPE Requirements editor appears as follows:
The PPE Requirements window has the following sections:

1. Method Selection Section: which includes the 3 pre-defined PPE requirements as described in
NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and 2009 and a user-definable set of descriptions.
2. PPE requirements section: where you can specify the personal protective equipment list for
each level.
3. Disclaimer section: Where you can enter text that can be used as a disclaimer about the Arc
Flash Analysis results that are printed on a label
18-102
Arc Flash Analysis
NFPA 70E-2000 Incident Energy Levels

These ranges are listed on Table 3-2.9.3 of NFPA 70E-2000.
Hazard/Risk Categories based on NFPA 70E 2000
Incident Energy
Level
2
Exposure cal/cm
0 < cal/cm2<1.2
0
2
1
5 > cal/cm 1.2
2
8 > cal/cm2 5
2
3
25> cal/cm 8
2
4
40 > cal/cm 25
2
cal/cm > 40
N/A

Incident Energy Levels based on NFPA 70E 2004

Incident Energy
Level
Exposure cal/cm2
0 < cal/cm2<2.0
0
2
1
4 > cal/cm 2.0
2
2
8 > cal/cm 4
2
3
25> cal/cm 8
2
4
40 > cal/cm 25
2
cal/cm > 40
N/A

Incident Energy Levels based on NFPA 70E 2009

Incident Energy
Level
Exposure cal/cm2
0 < cal/cm2<1.2
0
2
1
4 > cal/cm 1.2
2
2
8 > cal/cm 4
2
3
25> cal/cm 8
2
4
40 > cal/cm 25
2
cal/cm > 40
N/A
18-103
Arc Flash Analysis
User-Defined Incident Energy Levels

The User-Defined levels are interpreted by the Arc Flash Module as described in the following table:
User Defined Incident Energy Levels

Level
Range (example)
Defaults
2
0
0 < cal/cm <C0
2
2
1
4
C1 > cal/cm C0
2
2
8
C2 > cal/cm C1
2
3
25
C3> cal/cm C2
2
4
40
C4 > cal/cm C3
2
5
100
C5 > cal/cm C4
2
6
120
C6> cal/cm C5
2
7
0
C7> cal/cm C6
2
8
0
C8> cal/cm C7
2
9
0
C9> cal/cm C8
The level ranges are always from low values to higher values. For example, this means that the level 4
value cannot be equal to or higher than the value in level 3. This is true for all the levels.
If any level (6, 7, 8, and 9) is left as zero, the module ignores it and uses the 5th level for any value higher
than the maximum value in the 5th level. This will also apply if level 6 is the last one and 7, 8, and 9 are
left as zero. You cannot skip a level.
The PPE Requirements editor has the following properties and behavior:
a) The NFPA 70E 2000, NFPA 70E 2004 and NFPA 70E 2009 Incident energy ranges are not
customizable and follow the definitions published by NFPA 70E Standards. The only items that
can be customized are the list of PPE equipment (requirements) for each level. This is an old
design which has been used in previous versions of the program.
b) If you select the User-Defined Values option, then the Level ID fields become editable and you
can define a name for the each level, which can be composed of up to 12 alphanumeric characters
(i.e., a Level0 or Level1, etc.).
c) If you select the User-Defined Values option, the Incident Energy range fields become editable
you may type the different limits in cal/cm2.
d) You have the option to type in some text for a disclaimer statement. This disclaimer statement
may appear in some selected label templates. This field holds up to 250 alphanumeric characters.
e) You have the ability to create a user-defined text field, which may be used to type in custom
information (such as engineering company name and address). This information is included in
certain label templates or is stored in the output report database. This field holds up to 125
f) You may navigate using the scroll arrows allows you browse the different PPE descriptions for
each level.
18-104
Arc Flash Analysis
g) There are four sets of PPE descriptions. One for each of the options NFPA 70E 2000 (5
descriptions), NFPA 70E 2004 (5 descriptions), NFPA 70E 2009 (5 descriptions), and one
for the User-Defined/AF Analysis (10 descriptions. The description fields hold up to 250
The PPE Requirements window has some default descriptions based on the simplified Two-Category
Level PPE system published in Table F-1 of NFPA 70E 2000 and Annex H of NFPA 70E 2004 and 2009.
Note: The following descriptions are provided only as examples of PPE requirement descriptions as
described by NFPA 70E Standards. These descriptions are not recommendations made by ETAP on how
to protect personnel from Arc Flash or Shock Hazards. Please exercise caution in applying these
descriptions and follow all the remaining recommendations made in the PPE matrix tables provided in
NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and 2009.
In previous versions of ETAP the incident energy levels were defined as incident energy categories. For
the purpose of keeping older projects or versions compatible, the word category is maintained and still
used for the 2000, 2004 and 2009 sets of energy levels.
Note: Starting with NFPA 70E 2012, that a new set of PPE descriptions specifically designed to be used
with for arc flash analysis has been approved and added. It is important to understand that the energy
levels or categories as they used to be called in previous versions are nothing more than a method of
sorting incident energy results and do not imply that the table method from NFPA 70e is being used.
These ranges have been used in the past versions of ETAP as a method of rationalizing or analyzing the
incident energy found at different locations in the system. It was convenient to use the incident energy
breakdown from the table method of NFPA 70E as a starting range to sort or present the incident energy
results.
Also, the PPE requirements in the past have been defaulted using the simplified two level clothing system
of annex H (2000 ~ 2009). This PPE description is the closest set of PPE requirements which can be
adapted to an arc flash analysis study. In fact the new annex H.3 in NFPA 70E 2012 is similar in the way
the incident energy levels have been created except that the breakdown between Level 1 and Level 2 is
done at 12 cal/cm2 instead of at 8. Clarifications added to NFPA 70E 2012 in annex H.3 can help the user
in the selection of PPE based on arc flash analysis results.
Default PPE Descriptions based NFPA 70E 2000, 2004 & 2009 and for User-Defined
NFPA 70E 2000

(Table F-1 Simplified , TwoCategory Flame Resistant
Clothing System)
Level
Category0
Category1
Category2
Category3
Default
Non-melting or untreated natural fiber longsleeve shirt and long pants
FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum ATPV of 5) worn
over an untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum ATPV of 8)
FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum ATPV of 5) worn
over untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum ATPV of 8)
Double-layer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls
worn over either FR coveralls (minimum ATPV
of 5) or FR long-sleeve shirt and FR pants (min
ATPV of 5), worn over untreated natural fiber
long-sleeve shirt and pants, worn over an
untreated cotton T-shirt.
18-105
Arc Flash Analysis
Category4
Double-layer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls

worn over either FR coveralls (minimum ATPV
of 5) or FR long-sleeve shirt and FR pants (min
ATPV of 5), worn over untreated natural fiber
long-sleeve shirt and pants, worn over an
untreated cotton T-shirt.
NFPA 70E 2004
Category0
(Annex H Simplified, TwoCategory, Flame Resistant

(FR) Clothing System)
Category1
Non-melting or untreated natural fiber longsleeve shirt and long pants.

FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4)
worn over untreated cotton t-shirt with FR pants
(minimum arc rating of 8).
(minimum arc rating of 8)
Multilayer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls
(minimum arc rating of 4) or FR long-sleeve shirt
and FR pants (minimum arc rating of 4) worn
over untreated natural fiber long-sleeve shirt and
pants, worn over an untreated cotton t-shirt.
Category2
Category3
Category4
NFPA 70E 2009
Category 0
(Annex H Simplified, TwoCategory, Flame Resistant

(FR) Clothing System)
Category 1
Category 2
Category 3
Category 4
User-defined
Cat A
(You can define your own

incident energy limits and PPE
Cat B
Non-melting or untreated natural fiber longsleeve shirt, long pants, safety glasses, hearing
protection, and leather gloves
FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4),
worn over untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum arc rating of 8) or FR coveralls
FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4),
worn over untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum arc rating of 8) or FR coveralls
A total clothing system consisting of FR shirt and
pants and/or FR coveralls and/or arc flash coat
and pants (clothing system minimum arc rating
of 4)
A total clothing system consisting of FR shirt and
pants and/or FR coveralls and/or arc flash coat
and pants (clothing system minimum arc rating
of 4)
Non-melting or untreated natural fiber longsleeve shirt and long pants.
18-106
Arc Flash Analysis

descriptions; however NFPA
only provides PPE
descriptions up to 40 cal/cm2 )
Cat C
Cat D
Cat E
Annex H.3
Cat F
Cat G
Cat H
Cat I
Cat J
Level0
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Level5
Level6
Level7
Level8
Level9

None available based on NFPA 70E
Non-melting or untreated natural fiber for long
sleeve shirt and pants/coverall, Face shield for
projectile protection, Safety glasses, Hearing
protection and Leather gloves.
Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt and arc-rated pants or
arc-rated coverall and/or arc flash suit, Arc-rated
face shield, Arc rated jacket, Hard hat, FR hard
hat liner, Safety glasses, Hearing protection,
Leather gloves and Leather work shoes.
Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt and arc-rated pants,
Arc-rated arc flash suit hood, Arc-rated gloves,
Arc-rated jacket, Hard hat, FR hard hat liner,
Safety glasses, Hearing protection, Arc-rated
gloves, Leather work shoes.
Not defined in annex H.3
Note: The default values can be fully customized by simply typing in the new description in the PPE
Requirements Levels for PPE description fields for each set of categories.
PPE Approval
The PPE requirements must be approved prior to printing any reports or printing arc flash labels. For this
reason, starting with ETAP11, an approval checkbox has been added to raise the awareness towards the
review and approval of the PPE which will be reported.
18-107
Arc Flash Analysis
The PPE requirements can be approved from the PPE Requirements editor by clicking on the Approve
PPE button. The following message window appears:
Logic for PPE Approval:
Once the PPE Requirements have been approved, the message window closes, and the PPE
requirements become display only (read-only). This is done to prevent further changes or
undesired PPE requirements once the approval has been done. If modifications are needed then
the PPE approval box should be unchecked.
If the PPE requirements have not been approved, the arc flash calculation will not write them into
the output reports or label databases.
Incident Energy Curves in ETAP Star

ETAP has the capability of showing the incident energy curves on the Star Views. The calculated incident
energy can be shown as a function of the fault clearing time and the bolted fault current. Any combination
of clearing time and bolted fault current that lies below the calculated incident energy curve can be
considered to yield less incident energy.
ETAP can also show the allowable incident energy level curve on the Star Views. The calculated incident
energy curve should always be below the available incident curve since this would mean that the
equipment protection ATPV rating is adequate for protecting personnel working on this equipment.
The calculated and allowable incident energy curves can be shown on the TCCs if you select them from
the Bus Editors Arc Flash page.
18-108
Arc Flash Analysis
Required Data
18.7 Required Data

The data required for an arc flash calculation is in essence the same data required for a 3-phase fault
analysis minus the device short-circuit capability ratings (i.e., device duty evaluation) and plus the
grounding and connection types for all source and branches (i.e., Y-solidly grounding, Delta connections,
resistor-grounded, etc.).
Bus Data
Required data for short-circuit calculation for buses include:
X-factor
Gap between conductors
Working Distance
Equipment Name (not actually required, but is displayed by the program on arc flash labels)
Insulated Glove Class (required for some labels)
Insulated Glove V-rating in Volts (required for some labels)
Branch Data
Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and Impedance). Required data for short-circuit calculations for
branches include:

Overload Heater Resistance (recommended to consider this resistance for Arc Flash calculations)
Equipment Cable Impedance (recommended to consider this resistance for Arc Flash calculations)
For determination of the incident energy you will also need:
Transformer winding connections, grounding types, and grounding parameters to determine the K2
factor per IEEE 1584.
Power Grid Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for utilities include:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle
18-109
Arc Flash Analysis
Required Data
Grounding types and parameters to determine the K2 factor per IEEE 1584.

Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous generators include:

Xd, Xd, and X/R
Generator type (i.e., Salient Pole, Round Rotor)
Data required for generator decrement curves.
Inverter Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for inverters include:


Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous motor includes:

Xd, Xd and X/R
% LRC, Xd, and Tdo for IEC short-circuit calculation

Required data for short-circuit calculations for induction motors include:
Rated kW/hp and kV

X/R plus one of the following:
% LRC, and Td for IEC short-circuit calculations
18-110
Arc Flash Analysis
Required Data
Lumped Load Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for lumped load includes:
Rated MVA and kV

% motor load
% LRC, X/R, and Xsc for cycle and 1.5-4 cycle
X and Td for IEC short-circuit calculation
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for high voltage circuit breakers include:
Max kV
Cycle (not the contact parting time but the rated interrupting time)
Rated kV
ETAP needs to know the opening time of the circuit breakers only. The SC Duty parameters are required
only for device evaluation (please see Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Required Data for device evaluation).

Required data for short-circuit calculations for low voltage circuit breakers include:
Type (power, molded case, or insulated case). This information is needed based on IEEE 1584 2002
Table1 (Power Circuit Breaker Operating Times).
Rated kV
Type (power, molded case, or insulated case). This information is needed based on IEEE 1584 2002
Table1 (Power Circuit Breaker Operating Times).
Rated kV
Trip Device
Trip device type library parameters
18-111
Arc Flash Analysis
Required Data
Fuse Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for fuses include:
Fuse ID
Fuse library data including Size and TCC curves
ANSI Standard Fuse:

Fuse rated kV
IEC Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Overload Heater/49
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for OLH/49
includes:
Resistance / Tolerance
OLH library parameters
CT/PT Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for CT and PT
includes:
Bus or Branch or Source or Load Connections

Rating (Ratio)
Relay/MVSST Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for Relay includes:
CT/PT Connections / Assignments

Interlocked Devices, Device ID, Action, Delay, Setting, Unit
Relay/MVSST Library parameters including settings and TCC curves
Other Data
There are some Study Case related data, which must also be provided, and you can enter this data into the
Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The data includes:
Standard (ANSI/IEC)
Prefault voltage
Machine X/R (machine X/R modeling method)
Faulted buses
Cable/OL Heater (select this option to include cable and overload heater elements for Arc Flash)
18-112
Arc Flash Analysis
NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002
18.8 NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002

18.8.1 Comparison of NFPA 70E-2000 and IEEE 1584-2002 Stds
NFPA 70E-2000
Calories / Cm2
208 V 600 V
Unit of Measure
Voltage Range
Current Range
Arc Duration Range
Installations
Arc Distance
16 kA 50 kA
cycle 120 cycles
IEEE 1584-2002
Calories / Cm2
208 V 15kV (empirical)
15kV+ (Lee Method)
0.7 kA 106 kA
cycle 120 cycles
Open Air, Cubic Box
Open Air, Cubic Box
18.8.2 Summary of a Results Comparison Between NFPA 70E-2000

and IEEE 1584-2002 Standards
Calculations using the NFPA 70E-2000 and IEEE 1584-2002 Standards were done on the same system.
The system contained buses at voltage levels varying from 208 volts to 35,000 volts. Based upon the
above table, the NFPA Standard is designed to specifically handle 208 - 600 volts and 16 - 50 kAsc.
Therefore, values shown in the 208V case, 4.16 kV case, and 35 kV case are all extrapolated results for
NFPA 70E-2000.
Summary Table
Open Air, 12.96 kAsc
NFPA 70E-2000
Conservative
IEEE 1584-2002
Non-Conservative
Cubic Box, 12.96 kAsc
Conservative
Non-Conservative
Similar
Similar
480 V, 18,
Non-Conservative
Conservative
600 V, 18,
Non-Conservative
Conservative
600 V, 18,
Non-Conservative
Conservative
4.16 kV, 18
Non-Conservative
Conservative
4.16 kV, 18
Non-Conservative
Conservative
208 V, 18
208 V, 18
480 V, 18
For 15 kV and above, the results for open air and cubic box calculations are similar; therefore, we
are displaying only the open air values during this comparison.
35 kV, 18
28.01 kAsc
Non-Conservative
18-114
Conservative
Arc Flash Analysis
NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002
Calculation Results Trends

Regardless of the standard selected, the incident energy exposure increases as a function of increased
voltage, and decreases as a function of increased distance from the source.
The variation in results due to an enclosure (cubic box) is most severe at lower voltages. As the voltage
levels increase, the results become similar. Mathematically, above 15 kV, the formulas become so similar
that only the open-air results are displayed.
At fixed distance of 18, NFPA is conservative at lower voltage levels, and becomes less conservative as
voltage is increased. The crossover point between NFPA and IEEE is seen in the test case at 480 volts in
open air. IEEE results become conservative at the higher voltage levels.
Graphical Comparisons
18-115
Arc Flash Analysis
NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002
For voltage levels above, 15000 Volts IEEE 1584-2002 uses the theoretically derived Lee Method. The
incident energy exposure equations used for the NFPA 70E are only valid below 600 Volts. The values
shown below are well outside the allowable range.
18-116
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
18.9 Arc Flash Reports

18.9.1 Opening the Arc Flash Report
To open the Arc Flash Report, do the following:
1. Click the Report Manager button on the ANSI or IEC Short-Circuit toolbar. ETAP displays
the Arc Flash Report Manager.
2. Click the Result page tab, select Arc Flash Analysis, and click OK to generate the report.
You may also start the Arc Flash Crystal Reports by selecting them from the Report Manager
located on the upper right-hand corner of ETAP as shown below:
18.9.2 Types of Arc Flash Output Reports

Arc flash calculations are performed using ANSI Short-Circuit, IEC Short-Circuit, or UserDefined values. Each type of arc flash calculation has Crystal Report databases with different
extensions. They are *.AAF (for ANSI), *.IAF (for IEC) and *.UAF (for user-defined).
The ANSI and IEC Reports are generated when you have selected either option from the ShortCircuit Study Case Standards page. You must also select the Calculate Fault Currents option from
18-117
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
the Arc Flash page. If you select the user-defined option, the report generated is not linked to any
standard regardless of which toolbar button (ANSI or IEC) you use to start the arc flash
calculation.
18.9.3 Structure of the Arc Flash Report Manager

The Report Manager is structured into different sections and each one of them contains some
information about the arc flash calculation.
Input
The Report Managers Input page also shows the input data for the short-circuit and arc flash
calculations. The Bus Arc Flash Input Data and the Hazard/Risk Categories can be accessed from
this group.
The bus input data for arc flash has the following information for the bus arc flash ratings:
Equipment type (Bus Rating page)

Gap (Bus Rating page)
X Factor (Bus Rating page)
Approach Boundaries
18-118
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
The following footnote may appear at the bottom of the Bus Arc Flash Input Data section. This
message indicates that for some locations, the program used the theoretically derived Lee method
instead of the empirical IEEE equations method.
The Gap and X-Factor are not utilized if the theoretically derived Lee method was used to
determine the incident energy and flash protection boundary. The Lee method is used if the bus
voltage and/or short-circuit parameters are outside the range covered by the IEEE 1584
empirical equations.
The gap and x-factor are not shown in this report if the any of the following conditions are true:
0.208 > Bus Nom kV, Bus Nom kV > 15, Ibf < 0.7 or Ibf >106)
The Hazard/Risk Categories Report contains information on the incident energy levels used to
determine the risk level. The report will contain information on the following:
NFPA 70E-2000
NFPA 70E-2004
NFPA 70E-2009
User-Defined Hazard/Risk Levels
18-119
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Complete
The Report Manager Complete page shows only
the Arc Flash Complete Report (it does not include the Short-Circuit Reports). The Complete
Report contains the arc flash input data, the analysis results (not including look-up tables), and
the summary.
18-120
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Summary
From the Report Manager Summary page, you can generate the Incident Energy Summary
Report. It does not include any Short-Circuit Summary Reports.
Result
The Report Manager Result page has two reports. The first one is the new ETAP 7.0 report
format called Arc Flash Analysis. The second is called the Arc Flash Look-Up Table. No ShortCircuit Reports can be accessed from the Result page.
18-121
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Analysis
The Analysis section contains information about the arc flash results. The report contains
information about the calculated fault currents, prefault voltage, system grounding, total arcing
current, working distance, and flash protection boundary. The report also contains the incident
energy results for the bus or for individual PDs.
The report has many flags that indicate special conditions found for the faulted buses in the Arc
Flash Analysis. The flags that may appear on the footer of the Analysis Reports are:
If the option to use the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time (FCT) from the bus is selected,
then the following flag will appear:
The User-Defined Fault Clearing Time value is used.
If the user has selected the option to use the User-Defined Fault Current, the following
flag will appear:
The User-Defined Fault Clearing Time and Bolted Fault Current values are used
for calculations.
If the user has selected the User-Defined System Grounding Configuration option rather
than letting the module determine it automatically, then the following flag will appear:
The User-Defined System Grounding is used.
Depending on the PPE Requirements option selected on the Study Case Editor Arc Flash
data page, one of the following flags will appear:
NFPA 70E 2000 Table 3-3.9. Protective Clothing Characteristics, is used to
determine the Hazard/Risk Level
NFPA 70E 2004 Table 130.7 (C)(11) Protective Clothing Characteristics, is used
to determine the Hazard/Risk Level
NFPA 70E 2009 Table 130.7 (C)(11), Protective Clothing Characteristics, is used
to determine the Hazard/Risk Level
User-Defined Levels are used to determine the Hazard/Risk Level
When the program forces the category to either 0 or 1 due to its low voltage
equipment, the following message will appear. This message and flag are tied to
the options for Hazard Cat for LV Equipment in the Arc Flash page of the study
case.
The arc flash calculation at this location was not performed since it is fed by a
radial low voltage transformer rated less than or equal to 125 kVA. The hazard
category has been automatically assigned a low hazard level.
18-122
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
The following footnote appears in the arc flash analysis crystal reports when the
following condition occurs ((0.208 <= Bus Nom kV and Bus Nom kV <=15) and (0.7>
Ibf or Ibf >106)) or (Bus Nom kV < 0.208).
The theoretically derived Lee method was used to determine the incident energy
and flash protection boundary for this location since the bolted fault current or
nominal voltage are outside the empirical method range
If the calculated incident energy exceeds the limit for category 4 of NFPA 70E (2000 or
2004), then the category will not be reported and the following message will appear in the
reports:
Beyond the limit specified in NFPA 70 E Std. for Category 4
If the arcing current variation set of values was used to determine the incident energy at
the faulted bus, then the report will show the percent current variation next to the bus
source protective device. This indicates that there is some device whose FCT settings
could potentially cause a large incident energy exposure if the arcing current variation
occurs. The report will show:
For Protective Device: SOURCE PD ID @ %Variation Ia = Arcing current in
kA. (i.e., For Protective Device: CB3@ 85% Ia = 3.45 kA).
A is shown next to the individual source/load terminal faults to indicate that
variation was applied for the results at this location.
The arcing current variation will not be shown for faulted buses with kV higher than 1.0.
The following message will appear at the footer of the Analysis Report if the user-defined
source protective device specified in the Bus Editor is not within the region that the
program can view and search.
**The User-Defined Fault Clearing PD, as specified in the Bus Editor, is outside
the region for calculating short-circuit contributions.
The following message will appear in the Analysis Report footer if the user-defined
source PD is a relay that is not connected to an energized Current Transformer or has not
been interlocked with a breaker, contact or switch.
**The User-Defined Relay, as specified in the Bus Editor, is not connected to an
energized phase CT nor has no interlock PDs.
The following message will appear in the Analysis Report footer if the user-defined
source PD is not energized.
**The User-Defined Fault Clearing PD, as specified in the Bus Editor, is not
energized.
18-123
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Arc Flash Analysis Report Structure

The Analysis Report is structured as follows:
SC input Data
Bus Arc Flash Results
Current Contributions
(Bolted and Arcing)
Incident Energy for

Individual PDs
3-Phase Bolted SC current

passing through this PD (kA)
Corresponding Arcing
current passing through
the same PD (kA)
Opening or tripping time (FCT)

for this source PD (Cycles)
18-124
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
PD that clears the fault at this location

(upstream PD)
Arcing Current: Bus Total

or Maximum thru (kA)
Fault clearing time for a fault at this

location
18-125
Arc Flash results

for this location
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Look Up Table Report

The Arc Flash Reports for the tabulated information, also known as Look-Up Tables, remain the
same as those of previous versions of ETAP. This approach of this report is to show incident
energy results for various working distances and for different fault clearing times.
The Fault Clearing Time (FCT) is varied from 0.025 seconds all the way up to 2 seconds. The
plotted arc duration can be extended well beyond this point by changing the default value of the
option Look-up Report Time Duration in the Options (Preferences) menu to a value higher than
2 seconds (default value). This option is not to be confused with the option Limit Maximum
FCT from the Arc Flash Study Case. The Look-up Report Time Duration option only affects the
amount of plotted arc duration points in the Look-up Tables Report.
Sample of the Look-up Tables Report:
18-126
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Arc Flash MS Excel Reports

ETAP can generate MS Excel Arc Flash Reports. The reports contain two sheets, one for the bus
arc flash results and the second sheet for the protective device arc flash results (both load and
source protective devices).
The MS Excel Report can be generated when the following ETAP Preferences Option is selected:
Export Results to Excel = True from the Options (Preferences) Editor.
Once this option has been selected, the program will generate Excel Output Reports which have
the same name as the Output Report name you specify for your Crystal Reports. The Excel
Reports may only be accessed by using Windows Explorer. You need to navigate to the project
directory to view the generated Excel Reports. The following image illustrates this process for
the ETAP Example-ANSI project file.
MS Excel Report
Project Directory
18-127
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
The MS Excel Arc Flash Bus Report sheet has the following fields:
Field Name
Bus ID
Equipment Name
Bus Nominal kV
Equipment Type
Gap
X factor
Grounding Type based
on IEEE 1584
Table 12: MS Excel Bus_Report Format

Data Type Description
Source of Field Data

in ETAP
Bus Info page
Bus Info page
Bus Info page
Bus Rating page
Bus Rating page
Bus Rating page
One-line diagram
connection or Bus Arc
Flash page
Bus Rating page
Limited Approach
Boundary to Exp. Mov.
Conductor
Bus Identification
Name field
Voltage in kV
MCC, Switchgear, etc
Gap between conductors in mm.
constant defined by IEEE (dimensionless)
Grounded or ungrounded (high/low
resistance/delta are considered as
ungrounded)
Limited approach boundary to Exposed
Movable conductors based on NFPA 70E
Standards in ft.
Limited Approach
Boundary to Fixed Part
Limited approach boundary to fixed circuit

parts based on NFPA 70E Standards in ft.
Bus Rating page
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Restricted Approach Boundary based on

NFPA 70 Standards in ft.
Bus Rating page
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach Boundary based on

Bus Rating page
Available PPE
Protection
Available personal protective equipment

ATPV rating in cal/cm2.
Bus Arc Flash page
Total Bus Bolted
Total 3-phase Short-circuit (SC) current for

a fault at the bus in kA.
Calculated arcing current at the faulted bus
in kA.
Amount of the total bus short-circuit current
that passes through the upstream source PD
in kA.
Amount of the total bus arcing current that
passes through the upstream source PD in
kA.
Identification of the protective device
considered to be the last one to trip the fault
Time it takes a relay to send the tripping
signal to breaker or fuse and LVCB tripping
time in cycles.
Time it takes the breaker to open once it has
received the relay trip signal in cycles.
Total arc fault clearing time (sum of relay
tripping and breaker opening times) in
cycles.
Flash protection boundary in ft.
Global AF calc or Bus

Arc Flash page
Global AF calc or Bus
Arc Flash page
Global AF calc
Total Bus Arcing

Source PD Bolted
Source PD Arcing
Source Trip Device ID

Trip Time
Open Time
Total FCT
FPB
18-128
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Arc Flash Analysis

Incident Energy
Working Distance (in)

Hazard /Risk Category
PPE Description
Arc Flash Report

Incident energy value based on the total
fault clearing time and total arcing current
in cal/cm2.
Working distance from the energized
conductors to the face and torso in inches.
Category level selection based on the
amount of incident energy (i.e. 0, 1, 2, 3,
etc.).
Description of the required personal
protective equipment based on the
determined Hazard/Risk Category.
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Insulated Glove Vrating
Insulated glove voltage rating in volts AC.
Hazard/Risk Category
Levels for PPE Editor
from the project
settings.
Bus Rating page
Insulated Glove Class
Insulated glove class rating (i.e., 00, 01, etc)
Bus Rating page
Sample of the MS Excel Arc Flash Report Bus_Report worksheet:
The MS Excel Arc Flash PD Report sheet has the following fields:
Field Name
PD ID
Equipment Name
Connected Bus ID
PD Type
Limited Approach
Table 13: MS Excel PD_Report Format

Data Type Description
Source of Field Data
in ETAP
Load or Source PD Identification
PD Info page
Name field
PD Info page
ID of faulted bus to which the PD is
Bus Info page
connected to.
LVCB, Fuse, HVCB, etc
Global AF calc
Limited approach boundary to Exposed
Connected Bus Rating
18-129
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Boundary to Exp. Mov.

Conductor
Movable conductors based on NFPA 70E

Standards in ft.
page
Limited Approach
Boundary to Fixed Part
Limited approach boundary to fixed circuit

parts based on NFPA 70E Standards in ft.

page
Restricted Approach
Boundary
Restricted Approach Boundary based on


page
Prohibited Approach
Boundary
Prohibited Approach Boundary based on


page
PD Bolted
Total 3-phase Short-circuit current

contribution passing through this device
towards the faulted bus in kA.
Calculated arcing current contribution
passing through this device towards the
faulted bus in kA.
Total opening time for this PD based on its
actual arcing current contribution to the
faulted bus in cycles.
This field shows the total bus arcing current
or the maximum through arcing current to
be used in the determination of the PD
incident energy.
Identification of the Source Protective
Device
Total opening time of the upstream PD in
the event of a fault at the line side of source
PDs or load PDs.
Flash protection boundary in ft.
Global AF calc
Incident energy value based on the total

fault clearing time and total arcing current
in cal/cm2.
Working distance from the energized
conductors to the face and torso in inches.
Global AF calc
PD Arcing
PD FCT
Arcing kA for Incident

Energy
Upstream Source PD
Upstream Source PD
FCT
FPB
Incident Energy
18-130
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Global AF calc
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Report
Sample of the MS Excel Arc Flash Report PD_Report worksheet:
Hazard /Risk Category
PPE Description
Category level selection based on the

amount of incident energy (i.e., 0, 1, 2, 3,
etc.).
Description of the required personal
protective equipment based on the
determined Hazard/Risk Category.
Global AF calc
Insulated Glove Vrating
Insulated glove voltage rating in volts AC.
Levels for PPE Editor
from the project
settings.
Bus Rating page
Insulated Glove Class
Insulated glove class rating (i.e. 00, 01, etc.)
Bus Rating page
18-131
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
18.10 Arc Flash Labels

The arc flash label templates can be accessed through the Arc Flash Report Manager Label page.
These templates are pre-designed. If you select the template that you want, all the buses will be
displayed with the same label template. The same is true for the Protective Device Arc Flash
labels.
You will notice from the image below that there are two templates for the same label format. One
template has an extension -Bus and the other template has an extension -PD and as their
name extensions imply one template is dedicated for the arc flash results at every faulted bus and
the other template is dedicated for the arc flash results for every protective device (PD) directly
connected to the faulted buses. The PD template shows the results for both Source and Load
protective devices for every faulted bus.
Note: Certain labels may be generated in Spanish and Portuguese. Each language has been
separated into different sections on the Report Manager.
ETAP labels can be printed to a Brady Label Printers or to DuraLabel printers as well. Some
templates are designed for Avery label templates. The Brady and DuraLabel machines have rolls
of label media that come with pre-printed headers like WARNING and DANGER. You can
select among three different sizes of labels for the Brady and DuraLabel (3x3, 4x4 and
4x6).
18-132
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
18.10.1 Arc Flash Label Formats

This section describes some of the features of the arc flash label templates available in ETAP 7.0.
The following templates can be printed to an 81/2 X 11 sheet of label media like the Avery
White Permanent Durable I.D Labels (6575). This media is used for labeling applications and it is
a full sheet. ETAP supports the following templates besides the 6575. You can also print the arc
flash labels to non-permanent durable I.D. Media as long as the label has the proper lamination
and adhesives (to ensure that the labels will endure harsh weather / chemical environments).
6579 Permanent ID labels (portrait) (color laser)

6575 Permanent ID labels (landscape) (color laser)
6575 Permanent ID (portrait) (color laser)
6878 Color Printing labels (landscape) (color laser)
6575 (portrait)
Full 8 x 11
6579 (portrait)
6878 (landscape)
6575 (Landscape)
Full 8 x 11
6575 (portrait)
Full 8 x 11
18-133
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Three Labels per Page

The following labels are designed to print three per page. You will need a color laser printer to
print to this media. Once the labels have been printed, then you can cut them to make them
individual labels.
3.5X7 Danger1-Bus
3.5X7 Danger1-PD
Arc Flash
Results
Shock
Hazard
Boundaries
18-134
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
The following images illustrate how ETAP generates these labels when you print to an 81/2 by
11 sheet of label media:
Note: that the unit of measurement of every label template is in inches.
18-135
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3.5X7 Danger2-Bus
3.5X7 Danger2-PD
18-136
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3.5X7 Warning1-Bus
3.5X7 Warning1-PD
18-137
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3.5X7 Warning2-Bus
3.5X7 Warning2-PD
18-138
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Danger1-Bus
3X6 Danger1-PD
18-139
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Danger2-Bus
3X6 Danger2-Bus
18-140
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Danger3-Bus
3X6 Danger3-PD
18-141
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Danger4-Bus
3X6 Danger4-PD
18-142
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Warning1-Bus
3X6 Warning1-PD
18-143
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Warning2-Bus
3X6 Warning2-PD
18-144
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels

3X6 Warning3-Bus
3X6 Warning3-PD
18-145
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Warning4-Bus
3X6 Warning4-PD
18-146
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Two Labels per Page (6575 and 6579)

The following labels are designed to print two per page. You will need a color laser printer to
print to this media. Once the labels have been printed, then you can cut them to make them
individual labels. Again these labels can be printed to the Avery White Permanent Durable I.D
Labels (6575).
4X6 Danger1-Bus
4X6 Danger1-PD
18-147
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels

4X6 Warning1-Bus
4X6 Warning1-PD
18-148
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Avery-6579 Danger-Bus
Avery-6579 Danger-PD
18-149
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Avery-6579 Warning-Bus
Avery-6579 Warning-PD
18-150
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
The 4X6 Danger1-Bus and PD labels would print to the 8 1/2 X 11 as shown in the image
below:
The Avery-6579 Danger-Bus and PD labels would print to the 8 1/2 X 11 as shown in the
image below:
18-151
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Four Labels per Page (6878)

The following labels are designed to print four to a page. You will need a color laser printer to
print to this media. Avery Label Template 6878 can be used to generate this label. The Avery
White Permanent Durable I.D. 6575 can be used as well, but the individual labels would have to
be cut to size. Please note that this label is formatted to print in landscape format.
Avery-6878 Danger-PD
18-152
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Avery-6878 Warning-Bus
18-153
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Printing AF Labels to Brady and DuraLabel Printers

Some of the available templates in ETAP have been formatted for printing to three different
media sizes in Brady and DuraLabel printers. The available sizes are 3X3, 4X4 and 4X6. These
labels are made from special materials that are weather and chemical resistant.
ETAP labels are formatted for the following Brady Label Printers:
Tagus T300
Tagus T200
300 MVP Plus
200 MVP Plus
ETAP labels are formatted for the following DuraLabel Printer
DuraLabel Pro 300

DuraLabel Pro
DuraLabel 4TTP
You must install the printer drivers for your printer prior to being able to print the labels from
your ETAP software. You must also select the Brady or DuraLabel printers as the default printer
prior to opening ETAP Crystal Reports to ensure that the format is opened using the correct
printer drivers.
The following are the catalog numbers for the Brady label rolls for which you have available arc
flash label templates in ETAP:
THTEL-25-483-1-WA = 4x6 labels with pre-printed Warning header

THTEL-25-483-1-DA = 4x6 labels with pre-printed Danger header
The recommended printer ribbon to print to these labels is the R6007.
The following are the catalog numbers for the DuraLabel label rolls for which you have available
arc flash label templates in ETAP:
70406-2 4x6 Danger Arc Flash Labels

70406-3 4x6 Warning Arc Flash Labels
70406-5 4x6 Black / Red DIE cut Arc Flash Labels
The recommended printer ribbon to print to these labels is the 7433010
18-154
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
The following image illustrates the concept of a pre-printed header arc flash label. The orange or
red header already contains the word Warning or Danger enclosed by an orange or Red
section. ETAP will print to the empty blank space below the header.
Pre-printed
label header
18-155
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
18.10.2 Labels from the Bus Arc Flash Page

You can also generate Arc Flash Labels for individual buses if you need to. You can go to the
Bus Arc Flash page, setup the arc flash calculation, and click the Print button in the Label group.
Please note that you can only generate arc flash labels for the bus itself from this page (no labels
for protective devices). The same rules apply to labels generated from the Bus Editor as those
generated by the global AF calculation.
Click on this button to generate the

Arc Flash label for this bus only
18-156
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
18.10.3 Arc Flash Labels Portuguese

You can generate Arc Flash labels in Portuguese. Here are the labels you can produce in
Portuguese.
3.5X7 Ateno1-Barra
3.5X7 Ateno2-Barra
18-157
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3.5X7 Perigo1-Barra
3.5X7 Perigo2-Barra
18-158
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Ateno1-Barra
3X6 Ateno2-Barra
18-159
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Ateno3-Barra
3X6 Ateno4-Barra
18-160
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Perigo1-Barra
3X6 Perigo2-Barra
18-161
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Perigo3-Barra
3X6 Perigo4-Barra
18-162
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
4X6 Ateno1-Barra
4X6 Perigo1-Barra
18-163
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
4X6 Perigo1-Barra1
18-164
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Avery-6579 Perigo-Barra
Avery-6579 Ateno-Barra
18-165
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels

Avery-6878 Ateno-Barra
Avery-6878 Perigo-Barra
18-166
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
Arc Flash Labels Spanish

You can generate Arc Flash labels in Spanish. Here are the labels you can produce in Spanish.
3X6 Advertencia1-Bus
3X6 Advertencia1-PD
18-167
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
3X6 Peligro1-Bus
3X6 Peligro1-PD
18-168
Arc Flash Analysis
Arc Flash Labels
18.10.4 Arc Flash Labels French

You can generate Arc Flash labels in French. The French labels are created from the English
labels and translated in French. To preview the French labels, see the English labels with the
same size and name above.
18-169
Arc Flash Analysis
18.11 Arc Flash Report Analyzer

The purpose of the arc flash result analyzer is to provide an easy way for the electrical engineer to
analyze the arc flash results from several scenarios. It is a difficult task to determine which
scenario produces the worst case results and thus manipulation of the results from several reports
is needed in order to find the desired final results to be placed on arc flash labels or summaries.
The Arc Flash Report Analyzer has the ability to bring to view the results of all the different
output reports and to filter them based on different conditions of special interest. The analyzer is a
powerful tool for exporting results to MS Excel in any fashion that you want since it allows you
to select different input/output fields.
Please note that the AF report analyszer only shows reports generated using ANSI AF studies.
Once IEC has an available guideline or adopts a guideline for AF calculations, the IEC results
will be added to the analyzer.
18.11.1 Report and Result Selections

Output Report
Select which Arc Flash study reports to compare by clicking on the check box. The results of the
selected study report(s) will appear in the display table.
Project Report
Select which project report(s) you would like active.
18-170
Arc Flash Analysis
Ref
This radio button selection allows you to set which output report should be considered reference
for the comparisons. When comparing multiple reports, the reference report serves as the source
of data for all the fields shown under the Info section of the analyzer.
All Projects in Active Directory

This selection allows the user to compare reports from different projects that are located within
the directory that the current (open) project file resides.
Active Project
This selection is defaulted to the open project file. This will limit you to all the reports generated
from this project.
Sort
The arc flash report analyzer has some very powerful sorting capabilities which can be applied
using different techniques. The sorting techniques which can be applied are described below:
You are able to sort the data according to each column or by combination of columns in
ascending or descending order. You can launch the sort utility from the Sort Button. For example,
one very useful way to present your results is to apply the maximum incident energy filter and
then sort the results by Hazard Category first, then by ID as second criteria. This process is shown
below:
Sorting by a double click on the column name is also possible and sometimes much faster. The
image below shows the double clicking process on the ID column.
18-171
Arc Flash Analysis
Note that if you sort the results by the connected bus field, then you can group all the results for
the same faulted location. That is all the bus results, source pd, load pd and load terminal results
will be grouped together by the sorting tool.
Copy
The AF report analyzer has some very powerful copy/paste features to MS Excel. Simply select
any combination of rows or cells and right click or press Ctrl+C to copy. Open a spreadsheet and
paste accordingly. The process is shown below:
First select the fields or cells you want to copy and right click and select the Copy command:
Next open a spreadsheet and select the paste command. The data will be transferred exactly as it
was selected.
18-172
Arc Flash Analysis
Please note that a better way to send results to MS Excel is to use the Export function.
Export
Export Data to MS Excel from the AF report analyzer. With this tool you can perform your
filtering of the results and then proceed to export the results to MS Excel by simply clicking on
the Export button. The process is described below:
First click on the export button. The AF report analyzer export function editor will come up:
Second enter the name of the MS Excel Spreadsheet that you want to create
18-173
Arc Flash Analysis
Last, click on the OK button and the analyzer will take care of the rest.
18-174
Arc Flash Analysis
Please note that you must have installed MS Excel 2003 or higher for this feature to work
properly.
Find
The program can find any of the faulted elements listed in the ID column. In order to do this,
you can select a cell and click on the Find button as shown below:
Please note that selecting any other single cell on any row will find work similarly as selecting
the cell on the ID column. The find function will not work if you select the entire row. Please
note that the find function locates the element in the active one-line diagram view.
18-175
Arc Flash Analysis
Bus
Select the Bus check box to display the bus arc fault results in the display table.
Protective Device
Select the Protective Device check box to display the arc fault results for individual protective
devices in the display table. This includes load and source protective devices.
Please note that you may choose not to show the load protective device results since they have
typically the same results as those of the connected bus. To accomplish this, you can set the
following setting from the Options (Preferences):
Report only Bus and Source PD = True
This setting must be configured prior to generating the arc flash results. All Load protective
device results will be ignored if this setting is enabled. The default setting is False.
Load Terminals
Select Load Terminals to display the results for arc faults at load terminals. The analyzer will
report the load terminal results for all scenarios for which you included to generate load terminal
results. Please note that to include the load terminal results in the analyzer, you must generate the
arc flash results with the following Options (Preferences) setting enabled:
Calculate Load Terminal Arc Flash = True
If you set this option to False (default setting), then ETAP will not generate arc flash results for
load terminal locations.
Info
View general information pertaining to the devices selected. This information is typically the
information that is reported in the input and summary pages of the study reports. The information
displayed for the protective devices and loads may come from the connected bus of that device.
Please also note that when multiple reports are selected, the info fields are taken from the
reference report. The following image shows you how to select the reference report. Of course, it
is highly unlikely that the input AF properties like the Gap and X-factor will be set differently for
different scenarios. Most likely the variations occur on protective device settings and/or fault
current levels or system configurations. This is why it is practical to include only the reference
report input data when comparing multiple reports.
18-176
Arc Flash Analysis
kV
Display the voltage rating of the element. This may be the bus nominal voltage, protective device
rated voltage or the load rated voltage.
Type
Display the specific type of bus, protective device, or load (i.e. MCC, Switchgear, HVCB,
Induction Mtr, etc).
Connected Bus
Display the bus ID of the bus connected to the protective device or load.
Bus Gap
Display the bus gap of each bus or connected bus. This is the gap between conductors or buses
for the equipment at the fault location.
X Factor
Display the distance X Factor for each bus or connected bus. This value is a constant for each
type of bus. There is no Distance X Factor for buses greater than 15 kV.
Grounding
Display if the bus or connected bus is grounded or not grounded.
Equipment Name
Display the equipment name of the device.
Working Distance
Display the working distance, which is used to calculate the incident energy, for each bus or
connected bus.
LAB to Exp. Mov. Conductor

Display the limited approach boundary of exposed movable conductors for each bus or connected
bus. This is the approach limit at a distance from an exposed live part that is movable within
which a shock hazard exists.
18-177
Arc Flash Analysis
LAB to Fixed Part

Display the limited approach boundary of fixed circuit parts for each bus or connected bus. This
is the approach limit at a distance from an exposed live part that is fixed within which a shock
hazard exists.
RAB
Display the restricted approach boundary of the bus or the connected bus. This is the approach
limit at a distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due
to electrical arc combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity
to the live part.
PAB
Display the prohibited approach boundary of the bus or the connected bus. This is the approach
limit at a distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making
contact with the live part.
Available PPE Protection

Display the maximum Allowable ATPV rating of the personal protective equipment which is
used for tasks at this location. Typically this value should be set to Cat 2 or 4 levels. The program
will generate a warning flag if the incident energy calculated from the arc flash study exceeds this
limit. This value of energy is also very useful for plotting on a TCC curve. The units for this field
are cal/cm2.
Glove V-rating
Maximum Insulated glove voltage rating per ASTM D120-02a (2006) standard. Please note that
if your safety program requires a higher voltage rating to be used, then the user-defined voltagerated glove feature can be used.
Glove Class
Insulated glove class per ASTM D120-02a (2006) standard
Results
This section determines which calculation values are displayed in the results windows. The
results displayed are determined by either the output reports selected or the different analysis
filters selected.
The following are descriptions of each field which can be displayed in the results window:
Total Incident Energy

Display the total incident energy (cal/cm2). This value is the most important piece of information
which is obtained from the calculation. It represents the total energy released by the fault up to
the final fault clearing time (Final FCT).
Incident Energy 1
Incident energy accumulated during the first stage (0 to 4 cycles) (cal/cm2). This energy
represents the energy accumulated during the subtransient current stage. If you are running AF
using the half cycle method, then this is the only value that will be reported.
18-178
Arc Flash Analysis
Incident Energy 2
Incident energy accumulated during the second stage (4 to typically 30 cycles) (cal/cm2). This
energy value represents the energy accumulated during the transient current stage. If the fault
clearing time is less than 4 cycles, then this result may be zero (i.e. the arc fault did not last long
enough to accumulate energy during this stage). If you are running AF using the 1.5 to 4 cycle
method, then this is the only value that will be reported.
Incident Energy 3
Incident energy accumulated during the third stage (typically 30 to final fault clearing time)
(cal/cm2). This energy value represents the energy accumulated during the steady-state current
stage. If the fault clearing time is less than the steady-state current time in cycles, then this result
may be zero (i.e. the arc fault did not last long enough to accumulate energy during this stage).
PPE Description
Description of the required Personal Protective Equipment required for performing energized
work based on the determined hazard category. This PPE is determined based on the total
incident energy accumulated during the arc fault.
FPB
The Flash Protection Boundary (ft/m) is the distance at which the energy exposure is less than or
equal to 1.2 cal/cm2 (typically the onset of a second degree burn). This boundary is always
determined based on the total incident energy accumulated over all stages of the fault.
Hazard Category
Hazard/Risk category based on either NFPA 70E or user-defined tables. The risk category is
always determined based on the total incident energy.
Final FCT
The Final Fault Clearing Time (FCT) is the time at which the final source protective device
operates to completely de-energize the arc fault. ETAP assumes that all sources must be
completely de-energized before the arc fault can be completely extinguished.
Ia at FCT
Total Fault Location Arcing current magnitude (without subtraction) flowing at the stage in
which the fault extinguished. Depending on the estimated fault clearing time, this current
magnitude is the total current which could flow in the circuit assuming that no protective device
has operated. Of course ETAP will reduce the current as each protective device operates if you
use the incident energy subtraction method, but this value is always printed as the total value for
reference purposes only.
Source PD ID
This is the ID of the last source protective device to operate to de-energize the fault. For radial
systems, this is the first device which operates which is capable of de-energizing the fault.
%Ia Variation
This is the arcing current variation in percent. It is only applied for systems with nominal voltage
less than 1.0 kV. The variation is considered for faults at the bus, source protective devices or
load terminals.
18-179
Arc Flash Analysis
FCT 1
Duration of the first stage of incident energy collection (sec/cycles)
FCT 2
Duration of the second stage of incident energy collection (sec/cycles)
FCT 3
Duration of the third stage of incident energy collection (sec/cycles)
Exceeds Max FCT

This is a warning flag which indicates if the final fault clearing time exceeds the maximum
allowed value which was entered by the user in the Arc Flash page of the short-circuit study case
editor.
Not All PDs have FCT

This check box will be used in a future release of ETAP. Currently, this option is not handled.
Total Ibf at FCT

Total bolted current at the stage in which the arc fault is expected to clear (kA)
Total Ibf
Total bolted fault subtransient current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ibf
Total transient bolted fault short-circuit current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ibf
Total steady-state bolted fault short-circuit current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal
(kA)
Total Ia
Total subtransient arcing fault current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ia
Total transient arcing fault current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ia
Total steady-state arcing fault current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Source PD Ibf at FCT

Bolted short-circuit current which would flow through the last operating source protective device
at the time it de-energizes the fault (kA)
Source PD Ibf
Subtransient short-circuit current which would flow through the source protective device for a
bolted fault
Source PD Ibf
Transient short-circuit current which would flow through the source protective device for a bolted
fault
18-180
Arc Flash Analysis
Source PD Ibf
Steady-state short-circuit current which would flow through the source protective device for a
bolted fault
Souce PD Ia at FCT
Arcing current which flows through the last operating source protective device at the time it deenergizes the fault (kA)
Source PD Ia
Subtransient arcing current which flows through the source protective device (kA)
Source PD Ia
Transient arcing current which flows through the source protective device (kA)
Source PD Ia
Steady-state arcing current which flows through the source protective device (kA)
Source Trip Relay ID

ID or name of the relay which operates the protective device which clears the arc fault
Source Trip Relay Type

Type of relay that trips the source protective device (i.e. overcurrent, differential, etc)
Trip Time
Time it takes the relay to operate (sec/cycles)
Open Time
Rated opening time of the source protective device breaker/contact
PD Ibf at FCT
Bolted fault current which would flow through the protective device during the expected fault
clearing time stage (kA)
PD Ibf
Bolted fault Subtransient current contribution used to determine the equivalent arcing current
which would flow/come from this element (kA)
PD Ibf
Bolted fault Transient current contribution used to determine the equivalent arcing current which
would flow/come from this element (kA)
PD Ibf
Bolted fault steady-state current contribution used to determine the equivalent arcing current
which would flow/come from this element (kA)
PD Ia at FCT
Arcing current contribution passing through the protective device during the stage at which the
arc fault is expected to clear (kA).
18-181
Arc Flash Analysis
PD Ia
Subtransient arcing current contribution which flows from this element towards a fault at the bus
(kA)
PD Ia
Transient arcing current contribution which flows from this element towards a fault at the bus
(kA)
PD Ia
Steady-state arcing current contribution which flows from this element towards a fault at the bus
(kA)
Total PD FCT
Total opening time of the protective device for the arc fault (sec/cycles)
PD FCT 1
Time duration of stage one of the arc fault (sec/cycles)
PD FCT 2
Time duration of stage two of the arc fault (sec/cycles)
PD FCT 3
Time duration of stage three of the arc fault (sec/cycles)
Force Cat for LV Equip

Warning flag which indicates that the program assigned a default NFPA 70E risk category for
this low voltage location.
CLF Method
This field displays the method used to determine the current limiting operation time of a fuse. The
following table describes the values of this flag:
Condition
Value of CLF
Method Flag
No CLF method is
used.
Let-Through Curve
Method has been
used.
TCC curve is used.
IEEE 1584
Equations are used.
0
1
2
3
Comments
If the Current Limiting Fuse Operation check box is
unchecked or if the regular TCC method is used.
If the Peak Let-Through curves Method has been used
to determine the FCT.
If the bottom of the TCC curve method has been
used to determine the FCT.
If the IEEE 1584 Equations were used to determine
the incident energy.
Effect of Main PD Isolation

This field or flag can be used to determine the effect of the Main PD Isolation on the FCT.
18-182
Arc Flash Analysis
Filter Results By
This section allows you to filter results based on special conditions which the program
determined during the calculation.
Incident Energy
Filter the results based on incident energy values. Only available if multiple reports are being
compared.
Max
Show only the results of the scenario which produced the worst-case incident energy exposure for
each location.
Min
Show only the results of the scenario which produced the minimum incident energy exposure for
each location
The following logic applies to the incident energy filter:
1) If the check box Incident Energy is selected, then the Max and Min Radio toggle field
should be enabled. The default position of the Incident Energy check box should be as
unchecked. Selecting this box should enable the Max/Min filters.
2) The default position of the filter is set to Max. This means that the filter will find the
highest incident energy values for every bus, protective device and or load terminal
amongst all the different output reports (scenarios).
3) The Min Incident Energy Filter is designed to do exactly the opposite of the Max filter. It
is looking for the minimum incident energy value (not including 0) amongst all the
selected output reports for every faulted element.
4) When the Incident Energy Filter Max or Min filters are enabled, the name of the
configuration and the output report ID are always displayed. This hleps to identify which
configuration or scenario produces the worst or minimum incident energy values.
5) By DEFAULT the following fields should be checked and displayed when the Incident
Energy Max/Min filter is enabled:
a. Total Incident Energy
b. Hazard Category
c. FPB
d. Output Report
e. Configuration
f.
Total FCT
g. Source PD ID (even though the image above does not show it as selected)
h. % Ia Variation
6) If the Incident Energy Filter is selected, the Ref. toggle radio box on the Output Report
window is hidden. However, if you choose to show information from the Info window,
it will come from the reference report.
18-183
Arc Flash Analysis
FCT Not Determined

Indicate which arc fault locations are potential hazards because the protective device did not
operate. This applies to arc faults at the bus, source protective devices or load terminals.
The following logic applies to the FCT Not Determined filter:
1) If the FCT Not Determined filter is enabled and the Bus result selection check box
is selected, then the program only shows the bus elements for which the program failed to
find a fault clearing time (FCT).
2) If the FCT Not Determined filter is enabled and the Protective Device and/or
Load Terminals result selection check boxes are selected, then the program only
shows the results for the PDs and load terminals for which the program failed to find a
fault clearing time.
%Ia Variation
Indicate which locations were determined to yield higher incident energy results because of
potential arcing current variation (LV only).
The following logic applies to the %Ia Variation filter:
1) This filter is designed to detect problems caused by the posible variation of the arcing
current magnitude for an arc fault at the buses. If the program determines that reduced
current may cause worse (or a lot higher) incident energy results, it generates a flag and
lists this bus in the results window. The variation is only applied to low voltage buses.
2) The filter will also check for arcing current variation problems for an arc fault at the
source protective devices or load terminals. Each one of these locations is treated
separately. This means that the program may indicate that the arcing current variation
causes problems for a fault at the main source protective device, but not for a fault at the
bus or load terminals below. Each location is treated separately.
3) The program indicates that the variation flag or warning has been raised by printing the
%Ia variation in the column called % Ia Variation. Typically the value will be 15% which
means 85% of the original current was used to determine the incident energy (as
recommended by IEEE 1584 guidelines).
FCT by Secondary PD
Indicate which locations have potential coordination problems under arc fault conditions (i.e. first
upstream protective device does not trip the first).
The following logic applies to the FCT by Secondary PD filter:
1) This filter applies for a fault at the bus, source PD, and load terminal.
18-184
Arc Flash Analysis
Exceeds Max. FCT

The arc flash analysis Exceeds Max. FCT filter is designed to easily filter out any bus,
protective device or load terminal fault which has a Fault Clearing Time higher than the
maximum allowed. Typically the maximum value is set by default to 2.0 seconds or 120 cycles.
The following logic applies to the Exceeds Max. FCT filter:
1) The filter detects this condition for faults at the bus, source PDs and load terminals. In
other words the program generates a warning flag for each location with a clearing time
greater than the maximum.
2) The program displays the message > Max. FCT in the Exceeds Max FCT column of
the result window whenever this condition is present.
3) The maximum FCT feature must be enabled in the AF page of the short-circuit study case
editor for the flag and the filter to work.
Effect of Main PD Isolation on FCT

This filter can be used to filter results according to the effect of the Main PD Isolation feature. All
results which are affected by this feature can be filtered automatically. The following table shows
the flag values and the conditions which are used by the program to set the flags.
AFRA Flag
Blank
Main PD is
Isolated
Main PD is not
Isolated
Main PD Isolation
affects FCT
Conditions for setting the Main PD Isolation Flags

This flag is set to blank for a bus, load PD or load terminal (directly
The Main PD Isolation feature is not enabled (study case)
The load has equipment cable
The Isolation of the main PD does not affect the
determination of the final FCT.
The Isolation of the main PD affects the determination of the
final FCT.
Filter Reports by Incident Energy Levels (Hazard Category)

The incident energy filter allows the user to filter out and color the incident energy results
according to the level ranges defined in NFPA 70E 2000, 2004 and 2009 guidelines. This filter
18-185
Arc Flash Analysis
obtains its current level definitions from the Project\Settings\Hazard/Risk Category editor
definitions as shown below:
Hazard Category/ Incident Energy Level Drop List

This drop list allows the user to select which group of category definitions to use and show in the
filter selection window below. The Image below shows the Hazard Category drop list. The
default selection of this drop list is the new NFPA 70E 2009 categories.
Show Colors Check Box

The show colors check box enables the coloring of the results according to the selected filter
colors from the category filter selection window. If this checkbox is not selected, then the
coloring is not enabled.
NFPA 70E 2000

Show only the results for the scenarios which were categorized using NFPA 70E 2000 risk levels.
NFPA 70E 2004

NFPA 70E 2009

User-Defined Values
Show only the results for the scenarios which were categorized using user-defined risk levels.
CAT 0
Show the incident energy results for locations with risk category 0
CAT 1
CAT 2
CAT 3
18-186
Arc Flash Analysis
CAT 4
>CAT 4
Show the incident energy results for locations with risk category higher > 4.
Not Det.
Show the incident energy results for locations for which a hazard/risk assessment could not be
determined.
Show Colors
Display the colors for each category in the results window of the analyzer.
Hazard Category Filter Selection Window

This window displays the category ID, the Category Max limit (cal/cm2) and the color selection
buttons for each category. To enable the colors, click in the color box to open the color selection
editor as shown in the image below:
18-187
Arc Flash Analysis
The default colors for the each of the categories are displayed in the following table:
Default
Category ID
NFPA 70 2009
Cat 0
Cat 1
Cat 2
Cat 3
Cat 4
> Cat 4
Not Det.
NFPA 70 2004
Cat 0
Cat 1
Cat 2
Cat 3
Cat 4
> Cat 4
Not Det.
NFPA 70 2000
Cat 0
Cat 1
Cat 2
Cat 3
Cat 4
> Cat 4
(cal/cm2)
Color
1.2
4
8
25
40
> 40
N/A
Yellow
Yellow
Orange
Orange
Red
Red
Red
2
4
8
25
40
> 40
N/A
Yellow
Yellow
Orange
Orange
Red
Red
Red
1.2
5
8
25
40
> 40
Yellow
Yellow
Orange
Orange
Red
Red
18-188
Arc Flash Analysis

Default
Category ID
Not Det.
User-Defined
Values
Cat A
Cat B
Cat C
Cat D
Cat E
Cat F
Cat G
Cat H
Cat I
Cat J
> Last Enabled Cat
Not Det.

(cal/cm2)
N/A
Color
Red
1.2
5
8
25
40
100
120
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
Yellow
Yellow
Orange
Orange
Red
Red
Red
No Color
No Color
No Color
N/A
Red
The following specific logic applies to the incident energy filter:

1) The results window filters out any result which does not match with the levels selected in
the incident energy level drop list. This means that if you ran some studies with the
NFPA 70E 2000 and and some other studies with the NFPA 70E 2004 energy levels, but
the drop list selection is NFPA 70E 2009, then the program only displays the reports
which were generated using the NFPA 70E 2009 selection in the AF Data Page of the
short-circuit study case editor.
2) The Not Det option of the filter shows all the results for which the incident energy level
could not be determined. One common cause of this condition is when the program fails
to determine the fault clearing time (i.e. FCT not determined condition). This means
that enabling the results of the FCT not determined filter will most likely produce similar
results to those of this filter option.
Display Options
This section will be enabled in a future release of the program.
Actual Value
Actual operating values of the incident energy results
Differences with Ref

Show the result difference between two scenarios
Skip if Same
Do not show results if they are the same in multiple scenarios.
18-189
Arc Flash Analysis
FCT Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the fault clearing time. Choose
between cycles, seconds, or milliseconds.
Cycles
Display the fault clearing times in cycles.
Seconds
Display the fault clearing times in seconds.
Milliseconds
Display the fault clearing times in millisecond
18.11.2 AF Report Analyzer Reporting Tools

Standard Label
The label button is a very powerful tool which allows you to make selections for printing labels.
Before ETAP 7.0, you had to go to navigate through each output report and print each label
depending on which report had the highest incident energy. With the Arc Flash Report analyzer,
this task has been tremendously simplified.
Now you can select to print individual labels from amongst dozens of different reports. The most
common case for printing labels is described below:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Select the Filter Results By Maximum Incident Energy Filter

Select the locations for which you want to print labels
Click on the Label button to open the Arc Flash Label Manager.
Select the language and template to user for printing. There are hundreds of predefined
templates available and several languages to choose from depending on your location.
5) Click OK to generate the label.
6) Send the print job to your label printer (Brady or DuraLabel) or color laser jet printer.
18-190
Arc Flash Analysis
The following logic applies for printing labels from the Arc Flash Report Analyzer:
1) If the maximum incident energy filter is not enabled and you are displaying results from
multiple results, then the selection for printing the labels should be done either selecting a
18-191
Arc Flash Analysis
column or only individual cells from each column. Selecting more than one result for
each element caused the Label button to be disabled. Please see the image below:
2) If the Maximum Incident Energy Filter is enabled, then you can select the labels to be
printed in almost any way you want. As long as a single cell or multiple cells are selected
for any element (row), causes the program to generate a label.
18-192
Arc Flash Analysis
3) Pressing the Esc key on the keyboard allows you to deselect the cells. Pressing the Ctrl
key on the keyboard allows you to select individual cells, rows or columns.
4) Simply selecting the entire ID column will force the program to generate labels for all
elements displayed in the results window.
Custom Labels
Labels are the end result of Arc Flash Studies. Many labels need to be customized according to
different regulations or preferences (i.e. CSAZ462, NFPA 70E, NEC, ANSI Z535, etc).
Unfortunately, NFPA 70E has not standardized on any label template and thus there may be
different interpretations of the same content.
To enable this button, valid fields must be selected. The logic to select valid fields is the same as
printing standard labels. See above under Standard Label for logic on how to select valid fields.
Click Custom Label to open the Custom Label template interface.
Custom Label Database

During the process of opening an Arc Flash Custom Template, ETAP creates an Excel Database
Spreadsheet. The database contains fields needed to create a label. See below for details on all
fields exported to this database.
18-193
Arc Flash Analysis
A message will appear that the Custom Label database is generating in the Arc Flash Report
Analyzer.
Note- This feature might take several minutes to generate depending on the amount of fields
selected.
18-194
Arc Flash Analysis
The Custom Arc Flash Label templates and the Custom Label Database are saved in the ETAP
folder. (By default, ETAP 7.5.0 is installed in the C Drive.)
C:\ETAP 750\Formats750\AF Custom Label Templates
Under this location, there is a folder called BACKUP. Inside the BACKUP folder, there are
duplicates of the templates in case a user wants to revert back to the original label template.
C:\ETAP 750\Formats750\AF Custom Label Templates\BACKUP
In order to open a new template and use the same Custom Label Database generated previously,
navigate to the location listed above using Windows Explorer. To see previews of the label
templates, see below under Custom Arc Flash Label Templates.
Once the label database is created from ETAP, the database and the label templates can be stored
in any location. As long as the label template is linked to the database, the template will import all
the information from that label database. From there, ETAP is not needed to create new label
templates.
Exported Fields in Custom Database

Below is the list of results generated to the Arc Flash Custom Database in chronological order.
The description of each field is located in the Info section under the Arc Flash Report Analyzer.
Note- Units for each field are updated based on the selection of the Project/Settings/Standards
section in ETAP.
Fields that are Exported to the Custom
Label Database
Fields in chronological order
Device ID
Arc Flash Protection Boundary (ft)
Total Energy (cal/cm)
Final FCT (cycles)
18-195
Arc Flash Analysis

Label Database
Device Nominal or Rated kV
Hazard Category Level
Hazard Category ID
PPE Description
LAB to Exp. Mov. Conductor (ft)
10
LAB to Fixed Part (ft)
11
Restricted Approach Boundary (ft)
12
Prohibited Approach Boundary (ft)
13
Source PD ID
14
Source Trip Relay ID
15
Source Trip Relay Type
16
Glove Class
17
Glove V-rating (VAC)
18
Shock Hazard Present When
19
Print Mov or Fixed LAB
20
Project File Name
21
Date
22
Engineer
23
Contract Number
24
Equipment Name
25
System Frequency
26
Unit System
27
User Defined Text
28
Avail. PPE Protection (cal/cm)
29
Hazard Disclaimer
30
Trip Time (cycles)
31
Open Time (cycles)
32
Total Ibf'' (kA)
33
Total Ia'' (kA)
34
% Ia Variation
35
Energy 1 (cal/cm)
36
Energy 2 (cal/cm)
37
Energy 3 (cal/cm)
38
Equipment Type
39
Exceeds Max FCT
40
FCT 1 (cycles)
41
18-196
Arc Flash Analysis

Label Database
FCT 2 (cycles)
42
FCT 3 (cycles)
43
Not All PDs connected have FCT
44
PD Ia (kA)
45
PD Ia' (kA)
46
PD Ia'' (kA)
47
PD Ia at FCT (kA)
48
PD Ibf (kA)
49
PD Ibf' (kA)
50
PD Ibf'' (kA)
51
PD Ibf at FCT (kA)
52
Total Ia at FCT (kA)
53
Total Ia (kA)
54
Total Ia' (kA)
55
Total Ia" (kA)
56
Total Ibf at FCT (kA)
57
Total Ibf (kA)
58
Total Ibf' (kA)
59
Total Ibf" (kA)
60
Bus Gap (mm)
61
Connected Bus
62
Grounding
63
Hazard/Risk Categories
64
LV Equipment Forced Category Flag
65
Not First Upstream PD Clears Fault
66
PD FCT 1 (cycles)
67
PD FCT 2 (cycles)
68
PD FCT 3 (cycles)
69
Source PD Ia (kA)
70
Source PD Ia' (kA)
71
Source PD Ia'' (kA)
72
Source PD Ia at FCT (kA)
73
Source PD Ibf (kA)
74
Source PD Ibf' (kA)
75
Source PD Ibf'' (kA)
76
Source PD Ibf at FCT (kA)
77
Total PD FCT (cycles)
78
18-197
Arc Flash Analysis

Label Database
X Factor
79
Base kV
80
Nominal kV
81
Prefault Voltage in % Base kV
82
Prefault Voltage in % Bus Nom kV
83
Custom Arc Flash Label Templates

Below are previews of some of the Arc Flash Label Templates that are provided.
Note- The templates seen below are duplicated for different types of headers. There are blank
headers, danger headers and warning headers provided in the AF Custom Label Templates folder.
4x6 Warning Header
18-198
Arc Flash Analysis
4x6 Warning Header NoHRC
4x6 Warning Header_Q3CanadianNoHRC
18-199
Arc Flash Analysis
4x6 Warning Header_Q4CanadianNoHRC
4x6 Warning Header_Z462Q3Canadian
18-200
Arc Flash Analysis
4x6 Warning Header_Z462Q4Canadian
4x6 Warning Text Header_SafetyPro
Create a New Custom Template
Open Microsoft Word and create a new document.

Go to Page Layout/Size/More Paper Sizes. Verify that the paper size is Custom Size.
Enter the width and height.
Note-There is a preview on the bottom to ensure the correct paper size is selected.
18-201
Arc Flash Analysis
Select OK after entering paper size.
Note- If the default printer is selected to a standard printer, a message will appear about how the
margins are set outside of the printable area of the page. Select Ignore.
18-202
Arc Flash Analysis
Go to Margins/Custom Margins and change the margins to 0.
Note- The error pertaining to the margins and the printable area of the page will appear again.
Select Ignore.
18-203
Arc Flash Analysis
Verify a 4x6 word document has been created for the label.
Link the AF Custom Label Database To a New Template
Go to Mailings/ Select Recipients/Use Existing List.
The program will ask to select a Data Source. Navigate to the Label Database which is
located in:
C:\ETAP 710\Formats710\AF Custom Label Templates

Note- This location assumes that ETAP was installed in the C: Drive.
18-204
Arc Flash Analysis
A window named Select Table will appear. Select the Arc Flash Report Analyzer table
and select OK. This will link the AF Custom Label Database to the new template.
Insert Fields to the Label
To insert fields to the label, draw a text box. The text box allows for easier formatting.
Note- Notice that there is an outline around the text box. To make the outline of the text box
invisible, right click on the outline and select no color.
Go to Mailings and select the Insert Merge Field drop down menu. This will give a list of
the fields that can be added to the label.
18-205
Arc Flash Analysis
Notice that the field is now entered in the text box. To view the results, select the Preview
Results button. To navigate to all entries, use the arrows located in the top toolbar.
18-206
Arc Flash Analysis
View the Label Database:

In order to view the label database that was created from the Arc Flash Report Analyzer, select
Edit Recipient List. This brings a window that contains the Custom Label database that is
currently linked to the Custom Label Template.
This window allows the user to view all the results listed in the database. Each field has a drop
down option which allows the user to sort or hide certain fields.
To print the labels in alphabetical order, click on the Device ID arrow. A drop down menu will
appear. Select Sort Ascending and click OK. Notice all the labels are in alphabetical order.
In order to not print any label that has a result FCT Not Determined, go to Edit Recipient List.
From there, Sort Ascending the Hazard Category Level field. Uncheck all the fields that have
the result FCT Not Determined and click OK. Navigate to all fields and notice that any label that
has FCT Not Determined is no longer in the collection of labels.
Rules Applied to Each Custom Label

Placed in the header of each template is a rule that skips all records that have the Hazard Category
listed as FCT Not Determined.
To add rule:
Place cursor in the upper most portion of the label template
18-207
Arc Flash Analysis
Go to Rules/Skip Record If
Preview results and navigate to all existing labels. Notice that you will still see a label
that states FCT Not Determined. This is correct. Select Finish & Merge/ Edit
Individual Documents.
18-208
Arc Flash Analysis
Increase the amount of significant figures
Insert field into text box.

Highlight field, right click and select Toggle Field Codes
Insert \#0.0 at the end of the field name. (There is a space after the field name. The
bold simply indicates the field name.)
Note- The 0 is a place holder. That means more significant figures can be inserted. For example,
to have two decimal places, type in \#0.00).
See below for example:
{ MERGEFIELD LAB_to_Exp_Mov_Conductor_ft \#0.0 }
Automatically change the units from English to Metric standard
Draw a text box

Type ft in the text box.
Highlight the text, select Rules/IfThen Else.
Set the rule and click OK.
18-209
Arc Flash Analysis
Highlight the text once more, right click and select Toggle Field codes. The entry should
match as seen below.
{ IF { MERGEFIELD Unit_System } = English ft m }
Add a Picture to the Label

First, the layout of the picture must be In Front of Text. This allows the picture to be placed
anywhere in the label without moving or shifting the text. To set the label to default, go to Word
Options/Advanced. There is a section called Cut, copy and paste. Change the setting for the
Insert/paste pictures as: field to In Front of Text.
18-210
Arc Flash Analysis
Work Permit
A work permit is part of the NFPA 70E Guidelines. It is required when performing work on
energized equipment. It contains information about the shock hazard and the arc flash analysis
results. The work permit needs to be generated for individual bus arc flash results. It is launched
from the Arc Flash Report Analyzer. Customize the report analyzer to fit the requirements of each
project.
The Energized Electrical Work Permit Editor can be accessed from the Arc Flash Report
Analyzer by clicking on the Work Permit Button. Please note that the work permit will be printed
for several buses, protective devices, and load terminal arc flash results if they are selected;
however, typical work permits would be created one at a time. The following image shows how
to access the work permit editor from the AFRA:
18-211
Arc Flash Analysis
Note: The two rows that were selected, represent two different work permits.
Once clicking on the Work Permit button, a Save As window will generate. This allows to create
a new or open an existing work permit template. If creating a new template, type the name in the
file name path and click Save. This will save the work permit document based on the name given
in the file name. If opening an existing work permit template, navigate to the file and click Save.
An alert message will appear stating to overwrite the existing file. What this means is that the
buses, protective devices, or load terminals arc flash analysis results that have been highlighted in
the Arc Flash Report Analyzer will be updated in Part II in the work permit editor. Note that the
description in the editor will not be changed.
Reset
The reset button will bring back the original settings of the work permit. In other words, this
deletes all the descriptions in the Work Permit. This information cannot be retrieved once this is
selected.
Open
To open an existing work permit template.
Save
To save all edits made in the work permit editor.
Print
Click to print document. If there was more than one row selected in the Arc Flash Report
Analyzer window, more than one work permit will be printed.
OK
To navigate out of the work permit editor. This automatically saves any changes made.
18-212
Arc Flash Analysis
Cancel
When clicking Cancel, this does not save any changes made to the editor window and navigates
back to the Arc Flash Report Analyzer window.
Electrical Work Permit PART I:

Part 1 of the electrical work permit can contain up to five different questions and answers. The
first three questions must be included by default into the editor since they correspond to the
wording of the questions as they appear in NFPA 70E 2004 Annex J Energized Electrical Work
Permit.
The user is free to modify the items as needed for their particular application of the work permit.
The user is capable of enabling (selecting the check boxes) three additional items to be shown in
the editor for this section. Note that 3000 characters are allowed in each question and answer
field.
Electrical Work Permit PART II:

Part II of the electrical work permit can contain up to 15 different questions and answers. The
first 9 questions must be included by default into the editor since they correspond to the wording
of the questions as they appear in NFPA 70E 2004 Annex J Energized Electrical Work Permit.
The user is free to modify the items as needed for their particular application of the work permit.
In fact, the user is capable of enabling (selecting the check boxes) six additional items to be
shown in the editor for this section.
The data for the bus or PD selected in the work permit editor includes the following fields:
BusID
Incident Energy
FPB (ft)
Nominal Voltage
Output Report Name
Limited Approach Boundary
Required PPE Level
Glove V-Rating
Glove Class
Working Distance
Part II of the electrical permit can contain up to 3 different Electrically Qualified Person
signatures.
Electrical Work Permit PART III:

Part III of the electrical work permit can contain up to 4 different approval signatures and one
general note field. The format correspond to the Approval section as they appear in NFPA 70E
2004 Annex J Energized Electrical Work Permit.
18-213
Arc Flash Analysis
Data Sheet
The Data Sheet is an enhanced version of the arc flash analysis report. It gives detailed
description of what selections were made in the SC study case and how the bus results were
obtained.
To access the Data sheet, navigate to the Arc Flash Report Analyzer. Select the entire row of any
bus and click on the Data Sheet button located on the bottom right corner. From there, an Arc
Flash Data Sheet Report Manager window will generate. Select the report and click OK. A report
will be created based on how the bus arc flash results were obtained such as what type of bus
fault current method was used, what type of system grounding, what PPE Hazard/Risk Categories
were chosen and so forth. More details are listed below.
Note: If multiple reports are filtered by Incident Energy Max or Min, the data sheet button will
not be active.
18-214
Arc Flash Analysis
Below is the generated Data Sheet report. There are 6 sections that describe how the bus results
were obtained.
Project/System Data
Describes how the project data was set based on the project settings. Information such as project
location, the project standard, unit system of the project, what date the report was ran, and report
name are located in this section.
Arc Flash Summary Results for this Location

The bus arc flash analysis results described are based on the Data Sheet in the Project/System
Data. It states Shock Hazard Voltage, Incident Energy, FCT, Source PD, Flash Protective
Boundary, Working Distance, Hazard Risk Category, the PPE description, and the Approach
Boundaries for the particular bus chosen.
If there are unique results for the bus, The Abnormal Condition descriptions will be shown.
These unique results are arc current variation, if second level protective devices clears the fault, if
the FCT exceeds the maximum specified in the Arc Flash page of the Short Circuit Study case,
and if the PPE Arc Rating has exceeded the maximum. Below are the flags that will be shown if
any of the conditions are met.
Arcing Current Variation of xx% was used.
Not the first upstream protective device clears the fault.
Fault Clearing Time Exceeds the Maximum!
Incident Energy Exceeds the Maximum. No PPE Available!
18-215
Arc Flash Analysis
Note-xx% is the arcing current variation specified in the SC study case.
Arc Flash Input Data

This information was gathered from the AF Data page of the Short Circuit Study Case. The Gaps,
X-Factor, Working Distance, Flash Protection Boundary, PPE Hazard/Risk Categories, and
Shock Hazard Analysis selections are displayed.
System Impedance Adjustments

Impedance tolerances and adjustments are displayed based Adjustment page of the SC Study
case.
Short-Circuit Contributions
This shows what type of bus fault current method was used, what type of motor contribution the
study was ran in, the prefault voltage and if the synchronous generator model was used.
Arc Flash Methodology

This shows what method the arc flash calculation was used to determine the results, the system
ground and if the Hazard Category for LV equipment was selected.
18-216
Chapter 19
Load Flow
The ETAP Load Flow Analysis Module calculates the bus voltages, branch power factors, currents, and
power flows throughout the electrical system. ETAP allows for swing, voltage regulated, and unregulated
power sources with multiple power grids and generator connections. It is capable of performing analysis
on both radial and loop systems. ETAP allows you to select from several different methods in order to
achieve the best calculation efficiency.
This chapter defines definitions and explains the usage of different tools you will need to run load flow
studies. Theoretical background for different load flow calculation methods is also provided.
The Load Flow toolbar section explains how you can launch a load flow calculation, open and view an
output report, or select display options. The Load Flow Study Case Editor section explains how you can
create a new study case, what parameters are required to specify a study case, and how to set them. The
Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system parameters
and the output results on the one-line diagram, and how to set them. The Load Flow Calculation Methods
section shows formulations of different load flow calculation methods. Comparisons on their rate of
convergence, improving convergence based on different system parameters and configurations, and some
tips on selecting an appropriate calculation method are also found in this section. The Required Data for
Calculations section describes what data is necessary to perform load flow calculations and where to enter
them. The Load Flow Study Output Report section illustrates and explains output reports and their format.
Finally, the Load Flow Result Analyzer allows you to view the results of various studies in one screen so
you can analyze and compare the different results.
19-1
Load Flow Analysis
Toolbar
19.1 Load Flow Toolbar

The Load Flow toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Load Flow Study Mode.
Run Load Flow Studies

Auto Run
Alert View
Load Flow Report Manager
Load Flow Result Analyzer
Load Flow Comparator
Load Flow Display Options
Unit Display Options
Power Flow Display Options
Voltage Display Options
Load Terminal Voltage
Line/Cable Voltage Drop
Panel/Single Phase System
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run SLE Load Flow
Load Analyzer
19-2
Load Flow Analysis
Toolbar
Run Load Flow Studies

Select a Study Case from the Study Case Editor. Then click on the Run Load Flow Study icon to
perform a load flow study. A dialog box will appear to specify the output report name if the output file
name is set to Prompt. The study results will then appear on the one-line diagram and in the Output
Report.
Auto Run
Click to Activate or De-activate the Auto Run. When the Auto Run is active, any one of the following
actions will run a load flow study:
A PD has changed its status.
An element has changed its properties.
The load flow study case is changed.

The Stop Sign button is normally grayed-out. When a Load Flow calculation has been initiated, this
button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the calculation.
Alert View
After performing a load flow study, you can click on this button to open the Alert View, which lists all
equipment with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the study case.
Load Flow Report Manager

Load Flow Output Reports are provided in the form of a Crystal Report. The Report Manager provides
four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report for
Crystal Reports. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report Manager
for load flow studies. You can view the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF,
MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click
the Set As Default checkbox.
Choosing any format in the Report Manager activates the Crystal Reports. You can open the whole load
flow output report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection. The format names and
corresponding output report sections are given below:
Adjustments
Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Branch Loading
Branch
Bus Loading
Bus
Cable
Complete
Cover
Equipment Cable
Impedance
Indicates tolerance and temperature correction adjustments

Provides complete report of system alerts
Provides summary of critical alerts only
Provides summary of marginal alerts only
Branch loading results
Branch input data
Displays overloaded bus information
Bus input data
Cable input data
Complete output report including all input and output
Title page of the output report
Equipment cable input data
High Voltage DC Link input data
Provides detailed information about impedance elements in the system
19-3
Load Flow Analysis
Toolbar
Line Coupling
Load Flow Report
Losses
NO Protective Devices
Panel Report
Reactor
Summary
SVC
Transformer
UPS Report
Displays Transmission Line coupling impedance data

Load Flow calculation results
Branch loss results
Displays Normally Open protective devices
Load Flow calculation results for panel systems
Reactor input data
Summary of load flow calculation
Static Var Compensator (SVC) input data
Transformer input data
Load Flow calculation results for UPS systems
toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for load flow calculations. To
view any of the listed output reports, click on the output report name, and then click on the View Output
Report button.

The Load Flow Result Analyzer allows you to view the results of various studies in one screen so you can
analyze and compare the different results.
Load Flow Comparator

When ETAP Real-Time is set up and after you run a Load Flow study with online data, you can press this
button to bring up the Load Flow Comparator view. It lists a comparison of all system operating values
between ETAP Real-Time output and Load Flow calculations.
Load Flow Display Options

The results from load flow studies are displayed on the one-line diagram. To edit how these results look,
click on the Load Flow Display Options icon. For more information see Load Flow Display Options.
Unit Display Options

Click to turn on/off the units in OLV display.
Power Flow Display Options

Click and hold to select the power flow display options.
or
19-4
Load Flow Analysis
Toolbar
Voltage Display Options

Click and hold to select the voltage display options.
Load Terminal Voltage

Click to display load terminal voltage.
Line/Cable Voltage Drop

Click to display line or cable voltage drop.
Panel/Single Phase System

Click to display panel or single phase system results.
Get Online Data

When ETAP Real-Time is set up and the Sys Monitor presentation is online, you can bring real-time data
into your offline presentation and run a Load Flow by pressing on this button. You will notice that the
Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the online data.
Get Archived Data

When ETAPS Playback is set up and any presentation is on Playback Mode, you can bring this data into
your presentation and run a Load Flow by pressing on this button. You will notice that the Operating
Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the playback data.
Load Analyzer
The Load Analyzer tool and its associated reports are designed for load schedule reporting of ETAP
models. This module allows the user to report loads of multilevel-connected elements in a system directly
(called Connected Loads), or by applying different multiplying factors (called Operating Loads).
19-5
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor

The Load Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, and a variety of
options for output reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases. Load
flow calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the study case selected in
the toolbar. You can easily switch between study cases without having to reset the study case options each
time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
As a part of the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system toolbar components, i.e. for any configuration status, one-line
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision data.
When you are in Load Flow Analysis Mode, you can access the Load Flow Study Case Editor by clicking
on the Study Case button from the Load Flow Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from
the Project View by clicking on the Load Flow Study Case folder.
There are two ways you can create a new study case. You can click on the New Study Case button in the
Study Case toolbar, as shown above. It will open the Duplicate Study Case dialog box for you to specify
names of an existing Study Case and the new study case you want to create.
You can also create a new Study Case from the Project View, by right-clicking on the Load Flow Study
Case folder and selecting Create New. ETAP will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the
default Study Case, and adds it to the Load Flow Study Case folder.
19-6
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
19-7
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
19.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and
entering the new ID. Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator button at
the bottom of the editor to go from one study case to the next existing Study Case.
Method
In this group you can select a load flow solution method. Three methods are available: Newton-Raphson,
Fast-decoupled, and Accelerated Gauss-Seidel.
For the Newton-Raphson, a few Gauss-Seidel iterations are made first to establish a set of sound initial
values for the bus voltages (since convergence of the Newton-Raphson Method is highly dependent on
the initial bus voltages).
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number for iterations in this field. If the solution has not converged before the
specified number of iterations, the program will stop and inform you. The recommended and default
values are 2000 for the Gauss-Seidel Method, and five for the Newton-Raphson and Fast-Decoupled
Methods.
19-8
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision in this field, which is used to check for convergence. This value
determines how precise you want the final solution to be. For the Gauss-Seidel Method, precision is
applied to check the difference between the bus voltages after each iteration. For the Newton-Raphson
and Fast-Decoupled Methods, the precision is compared with the difference in power for each bus (MW
and Mvar) between iterations. If the difference between the iterations is less than or equal to the value
entered for precision, the desired accuracy is achieved.
If the solution converges but the mismatch values are high, reduce the value of the precision to make your
results more precise and run the program again (you may need to increase the number of iterations).
Note: A smaller precision value results in lower mismatch (higher accuracy), as well as a longer run time.
The default (and recommended) values are 0.000001 pu volts for the Gauss-Seidel Method, and .0001 pu
power for the Newton-Raphson and Fast-Decoupled Methods.
Accel. Factor
This field is present if the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method is used. Enter the convergence acceleration
factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 1.2 and 1.7; the default is 1.45.
Apply XFMR Phase-Shift

Check this box to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found in the Transformer Editor.
Calc. 1-Ph/Panel Systems

Check this box to include 1-phase and/or panel system load flow calculations as part of the whole system
load flow calculation. A 1-phase/panel system is defined as a radial sub-system that is powered through a
top panel, 1-phase UPS, or a phase adaptor connected to a 3-phase bus. A power system may contain
several 1-phase/panel systems. Each 1-phase/panel system has a top element that is a 3-phase panel, 1phase UPS, or a phase adapter.
If this box is checked, bus voltages and branch flows in 1-phase/panel systems will be calculated in a load
flow run and calculation results will be reported in the one-line diagram and the crystal report. If this box
is not checked, the load for each 1-phase/panel system will be summed up to its top element for the
loading specified in the study case. This load summation is based on the load rated voltage and does not
consider any branch losses. The top element will be treated as a single load in the system.
The 1-phase/panel system must be a radial system. ETAP checks loop configurations in panel/1-phase
UPS systems when performing load flow calculations. Should a loop configuration be detected, the load
flow calculation will be terminated and a message will be posted.
Update
In this group, you can decide to update initial conditions of the buses and/or set the transformer taps to the
calculated value of LTCs. The selected options will be updated after the subsequent load flow run.
Initial Bus Voltage

Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of the load flow run.
Bus voltage update will result in a faster convergence of the subsequent load flow solutions since the
initial bus voltages will be closer to the final values.
19-9
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
Inverter Operating Load

In an AC load flow study, an inverter is represented as a constant voltage source. When this option is
checked, the load provided by the inverter will be updated to the inverter element, which can be used later
as DC load of the inverter in a DC Load Flow Study.
Operating Load & V

The option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the calculation
results will be updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies.
These values are also displayed in element editors. If your ETAP key does not have the online feature,
you can see the operating P, Q, and V in only element editors, and they cannot be used in a later study.
Transformer LTCs
Select this option to update the transformer taps to reflect the result of load tap changer (LTC) settings,
i.e., transformer taps will be set to values determined from the load flow solution for LTCs. This feature is
useful when you want to consider the impedance of the LTC taps for short-circuit calculations. Selecting
this option will also display the LTC settings on the OLV.
Cable Load Amp

Select this option to transfer cable load current data from the previously run load flow study. The data is
transferred to the Operating Load Current in the Cable Editor for each cable associated with the load flow
study.
Report
Rated Voltage In
Bus nominal voltages seen in the output report can be printed in V or kV. Select your preference from the
drop down list.
Bus Operating Voltage In

Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in V, kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference from the drop down list. For graphical display of bus voltages see Load
Flow Display Options.
Power In
Calculated power flows, loadings and generations seen in the output report can be printed in MVA or
kVA. Select your preference from the drop down list. For graphical display of the power flows see Load
Equipment Cable Losses and Vd

Select this option to print an equipment cable losses and voltage drop report. Once this option is selected,
you will have the option to Exclude Load Diversity Factor. Checking this option will exclude the load
diversity factor in the calculations of equipment cable losses and voltage drop in the report only. For more
information on load diversity factors, see the Loading page of the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Initial Voltage Condition

Initial conditions for all bus voltages and angles can be specified in this section for load flow calculation
purposes.
19-10
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
Bus Initial Voltages

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editors. Using this
option, you can simulate load flow studies with different initial conditions for bus voltage.
User-Defined Fixed Value

This option allows you to simulate load flow studies using a fixed bus voltage and angle for all buses.
When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage value as the percent
of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude and zero degree for
bus voltage angle.
Determination of Initial Bus Voltage Angle

When transformer phase-shift is considered in the load flow calculation, the initial bus voltage angle
should be taken into account. Otherwise, very poor initial bus voltage angle may be used and which may
affect load flow convergence. To resolve this issue, the ETAP Load Flow Module calculates the bus
voltage angle-based on transformer phase-shift and compares the calculated value against the initial bus
voltage angle from user selected option. If the difference between the two values is larger than the
specified MaxIniAngDiff, ETAP uses the calculated the values as the initial bus voltage angle, where
MaxIniAngDiff is an ETAP.INI file entry defaulted at 10. According to the selection for the initial bus
voltage and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift field, there are four different situations:
When the Use Fixed Values is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is also checked, the
calculated initial bus voltage angles are used in the load flow calculation.
When the Use Bus Voltages is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is also checked, the initial
bus voltage angle from the Bus Editor is compared against the calculated bus voltage angle. If the
difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the initial bus voltage angle from the Bus Editor is used;
otherwise the calculated value is used in the load flow calculation.
When the Use Fixed Values is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is not checked, the initial
voltage angle entered in the Load Flow Study Case is used in the load flow calculation. In this case,
all the buses have the same initial voltage angle.
When the Use Bus Voltages is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is not checked, the initial
bus voltage angles from the Bus Editor are used in the load flow calculation.
When the operating load is specified as the system load, the operating voltage angles are used as the
initial value. In this case, if the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is checked, the operating voltage angle is
compared against the calculated bus voltage angle. If the difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the
operating voltage angle is used; otherwise the calculated value is used in the load flow calculation.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remarks field. Information entered in this
location will be printed on the second line of every output page header line. These remarks can provide
specific information for each study cases. The first line of the header information is global for all study
cases and is entered in the Project Information Editor.
19-11
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
19.2.2 Loading Page
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories for the current Load Flow Study. With the selection of any
category, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified for the selected
category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Induction
Machine Editor and Synchronous Motor Editor and the Loading or Rating page of other load component
editors.
Operating P, Q
This option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the operating
loads updated from online data or a previous Load Flow Study will be utilized in the Load Flow Study.
Generation Category
Select one of the ten Generation Categories for the current Load Flow Study. With the selection of any
category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating page of
the Generator Editor. The generator controls will be different depending on the mode that the generator is
operating under. The mode of generation is selected on the Info page of the Generator Editor. The table
below shows the generation controls with respect to the mode of generation.
19-12
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
Mode
Swing
Voltage Control
MVAR Control
PF Control
Generation Category Control

%V and Angle
%V and MW
MW and MVAR
MW and PF
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the generator
operating values updated from online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load Flow
Study.

This section allows you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the loading category load. When
the Operating Load is selected, a diversity factor is not considered.
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Minimum
When the minimum bus loading option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each
bus will be multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow
studies with each bus having a different minimum diversity factor.
The minimum bus loading study option may be used to see the effect of transformer taps and capacitors
(if any) on the system voltages under a minimum (light) loading condition.
Bus Maximum
When the Maximum Loading option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus
will be multiplied by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow
studies with each bus having a different maximum diversity factor.
This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be considered and each
bus may be loaded at a different maximum value.
Global Diversity Factor

Enter the diversity factors for all constant kVA, constant Z, generic, and constant I loads. When you
select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all motors, static loads, constant current loads, and generic
loads of the selected Loading Category with the entered values for the respective load diversity factors.
Constant kVA
Constant kVA loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, conventional and unbalanced lumped
loads with % motor load, UPSs, and chargers.
Constant Z
Constant impedance loads include static loads, capacitors, harmonic filters, MOVs, and conventional and
unbalanced lumped loads with % static load.
Constant I
Constant current loads include unbalanced lumped loads with % constant current load.
19-13
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
Generic
Generic loads include lumped loads modeled using either the exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive
model.
Please refer to the Section 15.4 (Calculations Methods) for the load-modeling concepts used in ETAP.
Note: A motor load-multiplying factor of 125% implies that the motor loads of all buses are increased by
25 percent above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100 percent.
Charger Loading
You have the option to use the Loading Category or the Operating Load for chargers. The operating load
for a charger can only be updated from a DC Load Flow Study.
19-14
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor

This page allows you to specify tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and impedance.
Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance setting or
based on a globally specified percent value.
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to impedance values for transformer, reactor, and
overload heater.

This adjustment is applied to transformer impedance. The net effect of the transformer impedance
adjustment in load flow calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent tolerance value.
For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used
in the load flow calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.
The Impedance Adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by using the tolerance percent value
specified in the Transformer Editor Rating page. A global Transformer Impedance Adjustment can be
of Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any
individual transformer tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Load Flow Module increases the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
19-15
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor impedance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
The Impedance Adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by using the tolerance percent value
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Load
Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any individual
reactor tolerance value.
Overload Heater Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the overload heater (OH) resistance. The Load Flow Module increases the
OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
corresponding field of Short Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Length Tolerance
This section allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line lengths.

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Load Flow Module increases the cable length by the
specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop. For
the load flow calculation is 210 ft.
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Load Flow Study Case
Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Load Flow Module increases the
transmission line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently
a larger voltage drop. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the tolerance is
2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the load flow calculation is 2.05 miles.
of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any
19-16
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor

This group allows you to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature for
the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Temperature Correction for Cable Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Load Flow Module adjusts the
conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by using the maximum operating
specified as well by selecting and specifying a global maximum temperature value in the corresponding
field of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature correction value
overrides any individual Cable Impedance page maximum temperature. Please refer to the Cable Editor
Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).
Temperature Correction for Transmission Line Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Load Flow Module adjusts
the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the resistance is increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by using the maximum operating
correction can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global maximum temperature value in
the corresponding field of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature
correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum temperature.
Please refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).
19-17
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
19.2.4 Alert Page

The Alert page in the Load Flow Study Case Editor is used to specify the setup of all the Simulation
Alerts that are provided to notify you of an abnormal loading condition based on predetermined,
allowable, percent values and system topology. The functional capability of the Simulation Alert
System is to generate alerts when there is an overload in protective devices, buses, transformers, cables,
lines, panels, DC links, reactors, generators, and power grid. The alerts are reported by the generation of
different types of alerts, either graphically in the one-line diagram display or in the Alert View window.
Critical and Marginal Alerts

There are two types of simulation alerts generated after a Load Flow Study. The difference between
Marginal and Critical Alerts is their use of different percent value conditions to determine if an alert
should be generated. If a condition for a Critical alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the Alert
View window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for
Marginal Alerts, except that the overloaded component will be displayed in magenta color. Also, the
Marginal Alerts checkbox must be selected if you wish to display the Marginal Alerts. If a device alert
qualifies it for both Critical and Marginal alerts, only Critical Alerts are displayed. It should be noted that
in order for ETAP to generate alerts for an element type, both the element rating and the percent value
entered in this page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the following
sections.
Loading
This set of value fields allows you to enter the condition percent values of the monitored parameters used
to determine if an alert should be reported based on loading conditions determined by a load flow
calculation. The Load Flow Loading Alerts generate overload alerts.
19-18
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
Bus Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Bus Loading Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of
rated continuous current in the bus is exceeded. The rated continuous current in the bus is specified in the
Rating page of the Bus Editor.
Cable Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Cable Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of allowable
ampacity in the cable is exceeded. The allowable ampacity of the cable is specified in the Ampacity page
of the Cable Editor.
Line Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Line Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of derated
ampacity in the transmission line is exceeded. The derated ampacity of the transmission line is calculated
in the Ampacity page of the Transmission Line Editor.
Reactor Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Reactor Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of rated
current in the reactor is exceeded. The rated current in the reactor is specified in the Rating page of the
Reactor Editor.
Transformer Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Transformer Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of
maximum MVA of the transformer is exceeded. The maximum MVA of the transformer is specified in
the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. The simulation alerts work for both 2 and 3-winding
transformers.
Panel Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Panel Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of rated
current in the panel is exceeded. The rated current of the panel is specified in the Rating page of the Panel
Editor.

The Load Flow Module will generate Protective Device Alerts when certain predetermined parameter
value ratings are exceeded. The following table contains a list of the conditions used by the Alert
Simulation program to determine when to report an alert. Load flow results are compared to the
monitored parameters listed in the following table:
Protective Devices
Monitored parameters in percent of
Condition reported
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker

Fuses
Contactors
SPDT/SPST switches
Continuous rated Current

Rated Current
OverLoad
OverLoad
OverLoad
OverLoad
OverLoad
The Load Flow Module will generate Protective Device Alerts only if the monitored parameter rating is
larger than zero.
19-19
Load Flow Analysis
Study Case Editor
Generator Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Generator Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of rated
MW of the generator is exceeded. The rated MW of the generator is specified in the Rating page of the
Generator Editor.
Bus Voltage Alerts

Bus Voltage Simulation Alerts generate alerts if the voltage magnitude percent results from the load flow
calculation exceed or are below the specified nominal kV rating percent values. Bus Voltage Alerts report
over voltage and under voltage alerts.
Generator/Power Grid Excitation Alerts

Simulation Alerts for generator and power grid excitation monitor the percent rated var limits. An alert
for Over Excitation is reported if the Upper Excitation percent limit (Qmax) for the generator is exceeded
according to a load flow calculation. An alert for Under Excitation is reported if the generator Mvar result
from the load flow calculation is below the specified Lower Excitation percent limit (Qmin). You have
the option to run the load flow calculation without monitoring Under Excitation conditions. An alert for
Under Excitation will be reported if the UnderExcited (Qmin) checkbox is selected. The Under Excitation
percent limit for the generator is 100% of Qmin.
ETAP also has two alerts for the generator built into the load flow calculation. ETAP will produce an
Under-Power alert if the real power output of the generator, from the load flow calculation, is less than
the value of Pmin. You can specify Pmin in the Capability page of the Generator Editor. Pmin must be nonzero in order for ETAP to generate the alert. Also, if the generator is modeled in Swing Mode, it will
absorb real power in load flow if necessary; therefore, ETAP will produce a Pout<0 alert for Swing Mode
generators if the real power output from the load flow calculation is negative.
Marginal Limit
If the Marginal Limit option is checked, the Alert View window will display the marginal alerts as well. If
not selected, the Alert View window will display only the critical alerts.
Auto Display
If the Auto Display option is checked, the Alert View window automatically opens after the load flow
calculation completes. If not checked, the Alert View window can be opened by clicking the Alert View
icon on the Load Flow toolbar.
19-20
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options

19.3.1 Results Page
The Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for Results, AC, ACDC, and Colors information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
Show Units
Select this option to show units for power flow and current displayed on the one-line diagram.
Check All
Select this option to show all available result annotations. When this box is unchecked, the previous
settings are restored.
Voltage
Voltage
Select kV or percent for voltage display on the one-line diagram from the list.
19-21
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
Bus Mag.
Select this option to display bus voltages on the one-line diagram. Bus voltages are displayed at 15
degrees.
Bus Angle
Select this option to display bus angles in degrees on the one-line diagram. Bus angles are displayed at
-15 degrees.
Load Term. Mag.

Select this option to display load (motors and static loads) terminal voltages on the one-line diagram.
Load terminal voltages are displayed at 15 degrees. Load terminal voltages can be displayed based on
load rated kV or bus nominal kV, depending on the selection in Load Term. Base kV.
Load Term. Base kV

This group allows you to select base kV for load terminal magnitude, when the voltage is selected to be
displayed in percent. This group will be disabled if it is selected to display voltage in kV.
Load Rated kV
Select this option to use load rated kV as the base for load terminal voltage display.
Bus Nom. kV
Select this option to use bus nominal kV as the base for load terminal voltage display.
Voltage Drop
Line/Cable
Select this option to display line and cable voltage drops on the one-line diagram.
Load FDR
Select this option to display the load feeder voltage drops.
Panel/UPS Systems
Results
Select this option to display results for panel systems in the one-line diagram, assuming that the Calc. 1Phase/Panel System option has been checked in the study case when the load flow calculation was carried
out. If the Calc. Panel System option has not been checked in the load flow study case or the panel system
display option is not checked, no results will be displayed in the one-line diagram.
Average Values
Select this option to display average values for panel system results as shown in the following table.
Panel System Load Flow Results Displayed in Average Values
Phase Type
Voltage
Current
Power
3-Phase
Average Value
Average Value
Total Power
1-Phase, 3-Wire
LL Value
Average Value
Total Power
1-Phase, 2-Wire
Phase Value
Phase Value
Phase Value
19-22
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options

All Phases
Select this option to display individual phase values for panel system results. For 3-phase elements,
voltage, current, and power for phases A, B, and C are displayed in sequence, and for one-phase threewire elements, voltage, current, and power for phases LL, L1, and L2 are displayed in sequence.
Phase Type
3-Phase
1-Phase, 3-Wire
1-Phase, 2-Wire
Panel System Load Flow Results Displayed in All Phases

Voltage
Current
Power
Phase A, B, & C
Phase A, B, & C
Phase A, B, & C
Phase LL, L1, & L2
Phase LL, L1, & L2 Phase LL, L1, & L2
Phase Value
Phase Value
Phase Value
19-23
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
Power Flows
You can specify how the flows will be displayed in this area.
Units
Select the unit (kVA or MVA) to be used to display power flow on the one-line diagram.
kW + jkvar
Select the kW + jkvar radio button to display power flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar.
kVA
Select the kVA radio button to display power flow in kVA or MVA.
Amp
Select the Amp radio button to display current flow in amperes.
%PF
When the Amp or kVA radio button is selected, you can check this box to show power factor of power
flow along with the current.
19-24
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
Flow Results
Branch
Select this option to display power flow through all branches on the one-line diagram. ETAP displays the
power flow at one end of a branch, i.e., the end that has a positive kW value flowing into the branch. For
3-winding transformers, all three power flows are displayed.
Source
Select this option to display power flow for generators and power grids on the one-line diagram.
Load
Select this option to display power flow for motors, MOVs, capacitors, lumped loads, and static loads on
Composite Motor
Select this option to display power flow into composite motors.
Composite Network
Select the checkbox to display power flow into composite networks.
Branch Losses
Select this option to display branch losses on the one-line diagram. Losses are displayed inside a bracket
in [kW+jkvar] or [MW+jMvar].
Meters
Ammeter
Check this option to display primary current for the branch to which an ammeter is attached.
Voltmeter
Check this option to display primary voltage for the bus to which a voltmeter is attached.
Multi-Meter
Check this option to display the measurements of a multi-meter, including bus voltage, branch current,
branch power flow, power factor, and frequency.
19-25
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
19.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
19-26
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
Connection Type (# Phases - # Wires)
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
Display Tag, entered in Info Page of Relay Editor
kV
A
Z
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
Subtransient Reactance Xd
% LRC
Impedance in Ohms or %
Impedance in Ohms
D-Y
one-line diagram.
19-27
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings are also
Composite Mtr
Use Default Options

Click on this checkbox to use ETAPs default display options. The checkboxes on this page will be
grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

Click on this checkbox to display equivalent cables.
19-28
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
19.3.3 AC-DC Page

networks.
ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
KVA
HP/kW
kV
19-29
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
Use Default Options

19-30
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
19.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Annotations
Theme
applied globally throughout all diagrams. When the option is selected, the name assigned to the applied
color theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.
User-Defined
Select this option to specify a color for element annotations. When this option is chosen, the DC element
annotation color selection list will appear.
Theme Button
19-31
Load Flow Analysis
Display Options
Theme Editor
selected.
19-32
Load Flow Analysis
Calculation Methods
19.4 Calculation Methods

ETAP provides three load flow calculation methods: Newton-Raphson, Fast-Decoupled, and
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel. They possess different convergent characteristics, and sometimes one is more
favorable in terms of achieving the best performance. You can select any one of them depending on your
system configuration, generation, loading condition, and the initial bus voltages.
Newton-Raphson Method
The Newton-Raphson Method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:
P J 1
Q J
3
J 2
=
J 4 V
where P and Q are bus real power and reactive power mismatch vectors between specified value and
calculated value, respectively; V and represents bus voltage magnitude and angle vectors in an
incremental form; and J1 through J4 are called Jacobian matrices.
The Newton-Raphson Method possesses a unique quadratic convergence characteristic. It usually has a
very fast convergence speed compared to other load flow calculation methods. It also has the advantage
that the convergence criteria are specified to ensure convergence for bus real power and reactive power
mismatches. This criterion gives you direct control of the accuracy you want to specify for the load flow
solution. The convergence criteria for the Newton-Raphson Method are typically set to 0.001 MW and
Mvar.
The Newton-Raphson Method is highly dependent on the bus voltage initial values. A careful selection of
bus voltage initial values is strongly recommended. Before running load flow using the Newton-Raphson
Method, ETAP makes a few Gauss-Seidel iterations to establish a set of sound initial values for the bus
voltages.
The Newton-Raphson Method is recommended for use with any system as a first choice.
Fast-Decoupled Method
The Fast-Decoupled Method is derived from the Newton-Raphson Method. It takes the fact that a small
change in the magnitude of bus voltage does not vary the real power at the bus appreciably, and likewise,
for a small change in the phase angle of the bus voltage, the reactive power does not change appreciably.
Thus the load flow equation from the Newton-Raphson Method can be simplified into two separate
decoupled sets of load flow equations, which can be solved iteratively:
[ P ] = [J1 ][ ]
[ Q] = [J 4 ][ V ]
The Fast-Decoupled method reduces computer memory storage by approximately half, compared to the
Newton-Raphson method. It also solves the load flow equations using significantly less computer time
than that required by the Newton-Raphson method, since the Jacobian matrices are constant.
As with the Newton-Raphson Method, convergence criteria of the Fast-Decoupled Method is based on
real power and reactive power mismatches, which are typically set to 0.001 in the order of MW and Mvar.
19-33
Load Flow Analysis
Calculation Methods
Although for a fixed number of iterations it is not as accurate as the Newton-Raphson Method, the
savings in computer time and the more favorable convergence criteria makes for a very good overall
performance.
In general, the Fast-Decoupled Method can be used as an alternative to the Newton-Raphson Method, and
it should definitely be given a try if the Newton-Raphson Method has failed when dealing with long radial
systems or systems that have long transmission lines or cables.
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method

From the system nodal voltage equation
[I ] = [YBUS ][V ]
the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method derives the following load flow equation and solves it iteratively:
*
[P + jQ] = [V T ][YBUS
][V * ]
where P and Q are specified bus real and reactive power vectors, V is the bus voltage vector, and YBUS is
the system admittance matrix. Y*BUS and V* are the conjugates of YBUS and V respectively. VT is the
transpose of V.
The Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method has relatively lower requirements of the bus initial voltage values
compared to the Newton-Raphson Method and the Fast-Decoupled Method. Instead of using bus real
power and reactive power mismatch as convergence criteria, the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method
checks bus voltage magnitude tolerance between two consecutive iterations to control the solution
precision. The typical value for bus voltage magnitude precision is set to 0.000001 pu.
The Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method has a slower convergence speed. When you apply appropriate
acceleration factors, a significant increase in the rate of convergence can be obtained. The range for the
acceleration factor is between 1.2 and 1.7, and is typically set to 1.45.
Load Flow Convergence

As in any iterative solution method, the convergence of the load flow solution is affected by a number of
factors specific to power systems.
Negative Impedance
Negative resistance and reactance should be avoided. For example, the traditional method of modeling 3winding transformers by a Y equivalent model using one impedance and two 2-winding transformers,
could sometimes result in a negative impedance value for one of the impedance branches. In this case, the
negative impedance should be combined with other series circuit elements so that the result is a positive
impedance value. Load flow calculations may not converge if a large value of negative impedance is
used. ETAP can now model 3-winding transformers directly with no need for you to do any conversions.
Zero or Very Small Impedance

A zero or very small impedance value of any branch is not allowed, since this will result in infinity or a
huge number in the system admittance matrix. You should represent this type of impedance by a tie
circuit breaker to solve the problem.
19-34
Load Flow Analysis
Calculation Methods
Widely Different Branch Impedance Values

Widely different branch impedance values on the same per unit base may result in a slow convergence.
To avoid this situation, various techniques, such as combining series branches with low impedance
values, ignoring short length transmission lines and/or cables, or modeling a small impedance branch with
tie circuit breakers, can be employed.
Long Radial System Configurations

Long radial system configurations usually take a longer time to converge than loop configurations. In
general, the Fast-Decoupled Method works faster than the Newton-Raphson or the Accelerated GaussSeidel Method for radial system.
Bad Bus Voltage Initial Values

Solution convergence speed and computing time are functions of the initial voltages for load-type buses.
The closer the initial voltages are to their final profile, the faster the solution converges. The solution may
not converge if the initial voltages are too far from the final profile, thus it is recommended that the
Update Bus Voltage option be used to obtain a set of sound initial bus voltages.
Modeling of Loads
Constant Power Load
Constant power loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, conventional and unbalanced
lumped loads with % motor load, UPSs, and chargers. The power output remains constant for all changes
in input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant power load:
Constant Impedance Load

unbalanced lumped loads with % static load. The input power increases proportionally to the square of the
input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant impedance load:
Constant Current Loads

Constant current loads include unbalanced lumped loads with % constant current load. The current
remains constant for all changes in voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant
current load:
19-35
Load Flow Analysis
Calculation Methods
Generic Load
Generic loads include lumped loads using either the exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive model.
A generic load model expresses the characteristics of the load at any instant of time as algebraic functions
of the bus voltage magnitude and frequency at that instant. Refer to section 8.12 for more information.
Modeling of AC-DC Converters

In a Load Flow Study, chargers are represented as constant kVA loads connected to their AC input bus.
An inverter is represented as an AC source without considering the internal impedances, which can have
several operating modes as a generator can have.
Modeling of HV DCs
In a Load Flow Study, the HV DC link is represented as a branch, which consists of a Rectifier, a DC
line, and an Inverter. Both the Inverter and the Rectifier of the HVDC link require a connection either
directly to a swing bus or to a system containing a swing bus.
Modeling of SVCs
In a Load Flow Study, the SVC is represented as a variable static load. The SVC regulates voltage at its
terminal by controlling the amount of reactive power injected into or absorbed from the power system.
When running load flow on a system containing an SVC, load flow will first determine the system
voltages without the SVC. If the initial voltage of the bus connected to SVC is lower than the reference
voltage, the SVC will inject reactive power. And if the initial voltage of the bus connected to SVC is
higher than the reference voltage, the SVC will absorb reactive power. Refer to section 11 for more
information.
Modeling of UPS
In a Load Flow Study, the UPS is represented as a constant load at its input side and a swing source at its
output side (where the output side is energized).
When the UPS is selected as a load based on its loading category in its loading page, the system that is
connected to the UPS output side will be de-energized if there is not any other swing sources in the
system and the UPS is modeled as a pure constant load.
UPS Output Side is De-energized
19-36
Load Flow Analysis
Calculation Methods
When the UPS is selected as a load based on its connected load, the UPS output bus will be modeled as a
swing bus with the UPS rated output voltage as its regulating voltage for its output bus. Then the
calculated UPS output bus loading will be treated/shared as the UPS output side loading.
If multiple UPS selected as connected loads share the same output bus, the calculated UPS output bus
loading will be shared among all the UPS by their maximum rated currents. The UPS output side loading
will be reflected onto the UPS input bus by considering its efficiency and the operating input power factor
selection in its loading page. For example, if the UPS share of its output bus loading is P + j*Q, then the
UPS loading will be reflected onto its input bus based on the operating input PF selection as a load:
1. P/EFF + j*P/EFF*sqrt(1-PF*PF)/PF where EFF is the UPS efficiency and PF is the rated or userdefined power factor.
2. P/EFF + j*Q when connected load power factor is selected.
Modeling of VFD
In a Load Flow Study, the VFD is modeled the same way as the UPS except for:
The VFD is modeled as a load based on its connected load.
The VFD output swing bus voltage is specified by the VFD loading category.
The VFD output side loading will be reflected onto its input side and shared equally by its input
branches if the VFD is connected to multiple input branches. Otherwise, the VFD output side loading
will be reflected onto its input bus.
Different Factors Considered in Load Calculation

ETAP provides you with great flexibility in modeling load variations through different load factors, such
as demand factor, load percent, service factor, and application factor, etc. Depending on your
specifications, these factors are used differently in calculating loads under several circumstances:
Load Editor Calculation of load for loading categories and voltage drop
Input for Studies Calculation of load specification for load flow and initial load for motor starting
and transient stability studies
Studies Results Calculation of load displayed in one-line diagram from load flow, motor starting,
Bus Editor Sum of load connected to a bus
The following two tables describe how these factors are used in these cases:
Factors Used for Motor Load Calculation

Load Editor
Load Loss Vd
Bus Nominal kV
Bus Operating V
Demand Factor
Input to Studies
Load
Loss
x
Results from Studies

Load
Loss
Vd
x
x
x
19-37
Bus
Editor
x
x
Load Flow Analysis

Loading %
Calculation Methods
x
Bus Diversity Factor
Service Factor
App. Factor
Load Quantity
Factors Used for Static Load Calculation

Load Editor
Load Loss Vd
Bus Nominal kV
Bus Operating V
Input to Studies
Load
Loss
x

Load Loss
Vd
x
Bus
Editor
x
Demand Factor
Loading %
App. Factor
Load Quantity
*
x
* Indicates the factor is used in calculation if specified by the user in the related Load Editor or Study
Case.
Notes:
Motor load includes induction motor and generator, synchronous motor, and motor load portion of
lumped load.
Static load includes static load, capacitor, MOV, and static load portion of conventional and
unbalanced lumped loads.
19-38
Load Flow Analysis
1-Phase/Panel System Load Flow Calculation
19.5 1-Phase/Panel System Load Flow Calculation

When the Calc. Panel/UPS System option is checked in the Study Case, the panel/UPS system load flow
will be carried out along with the 3-phase system in a load flow run. Due to special conditions for
panel/UPS systems, the calculations are performed with a different method from the one used for the 3phase system.
When the Calc. Panel/UPS System option is not checked in the Study Case, loads from a panel/UPS
system is summed up for the specified load category to the top element (a panel, a phase-adaptor, or an
UPS) of the panel/UPS system and this top element is treated as a load to the 3-phase system. In this load
summation, loads are added up under rated voltage without considering losses and voltage drop.
1-Phase/Panel Systems
A panel system is defined as a radial sub-system that is powered through a top panel, a phase adaptor, or
an 1-phase UPS connected to a 3-phase bus. A power system may contain several panel systems. Each
panel system has a top element that is either a 3-phase panel or a phase adapter.
Special Conditions for 1-Phase/Panel System Load Flow Calculation

Looped 1-Phase/Panel System
A 1-phase/panel system should be a radial sub-system. There should be no loops involved. Before load
flow calculation, ETAP checks for loop configurations. In case any loops are detected in a 1-phase/panel
system, an error will be posted.
Transformer LTC
Transformer LTC is not considered for any transformer in 1-phase/panel systems. Even if the LTC field is
checked in the Transformer Editor, it will be ignored in 1-phase/panel system load flow calculation.
Branch Shunt Impedance

Shunt impedance for branches such as cable, transmission line, and impedance are not included in the 1phase/panel system load flow calculation.
Feeder Cable for Panel Internal Loads

In the load flow calculation, internal loads for a panel are lumped into an equivalent load. As a result,
losses caused by feeder cables of panel internal loads are not considered in panel system load flow
calculation. However, feeder cables for external loads are included in the calculation.
Calculation Method
The 1-phase/panel system load flow calculation is carried out sequentially with 3-phase load flow to
achieve accurate result. The calculation involved three stages.
Before the 3-phase system load flow calculation is performed, a load flow computation is carried out for
each 1-phase/panel system for the loading category and diversity factors specified in the study case. In
this computation, the terminal bus voltage of the top element is assumed to be fixed at its initial value
entered in the Bus Editor. The purpose of this pre-load-flow calculation is to accurately calculate 1phase/panel system load, including branch losses and effect of voltage drop on various types of loads.
19-39
Load Flow Analysis
1-Phase/Panel System Load Flow Calculation
Once the 1-phase/panel system load is calculated, it is stored in the top element. The 3-phase system load
flow calculation is then carried out, in which the top element of each 1-phase/panel system is represented
as a single load connected to a 3-phase bus.
After the 3-phase system load flow is completed, a load flow calculation is carried out again for each 1phase/panel system with the updated terminal bus voltage of the top element just calculated from the 3phase system load flow. The results of the calculation are reported on the one-line diagram and in Crystal
Report.
19-40
Load Flow Analysis
Required Data
19.6 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for load flow calculations for buses includes:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle (when Initial Condition is set to use Bus Voltages)
Load Diversity Factor (when the Loading option is set to use Diversity Factor)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors, i.e., Transformer, Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and
Impedance Editors. Required data for load flow calculations for branches includes:
Branch Z, R, X, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperature, if applicable

Cable and transmission line, length, and unit
Transformer rated kV and kVA/MVA, tap, and LTC settings
Impedance base kV and base kVA/MVA
Power Grid Data

Required data for load flow calculations for power grids includes:
Operating Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control, or PF Control)

Nominal kV
%V and Angle for Swing Mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode
MW and Mvar loading, and Mvar limits Mvar Control Mode
MW loading and PF, and Mvar limits for PF Control Mode

Required data for load flow calculations for synchronous generators includes:
Operating Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, or Mvar Control)

Rated kV
%V and Angle for Swing Mode of Operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax and Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode
MW and Mvar loading, and Mvar limits Mvar Control Mode
MW loading and PF, and Mvar limits for PF Control Mode
Note: The Mvar limits (Qmax and Qmin) can also be calculated from the capability curve. The required
additional data for this calculation includes:
All data on the Capability page

Synchronous reactance (Xd)
19-41
Load Flow Analysis
Required Data
Inverter Data
Required data for load flow calculations for inverters includes:
Inverter ID
DC and AC rating data
AC output voltage regulating data

Required data for load flow calculations for synchronous motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loadings
% Loading for desired Loading Category
Equipment cable data

Required data for load flow calculations for induction motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Static Load Data

Required data for load flow calculations for static loads includes:
Static Load ID
Rated kVA/MVA and kV
Power factor
Capacitor Data
Required data for load flow calculations for capacitors includes:
Capacitor ID
Rated kV, kvar/bank, and number of banks
19-42
Load Flow Analysis
Required Data
Lumped Load Data

Required data for load flow calculations for lumped loads includes:
Conventional
Load ID
Rated kV, kVA/MVA, power factor, and % motor load
Unbalanced
Load ID
Rated kV, kVA/MVA, power factor, % motor load, and % static load
Exponential
Load ID
Rated kV, P0, Q0, a, and b
Polynomial
Load ID
Rated kV, P0, Q0, p1, p2, q1, and q2
Comprehensive
Load ID
Rated kV, P0, Q0, a1, a2, b1, b2, p1, p2, p3, p4, q1, q2, q3, and q4
Charger and UPS Data

Required data for load flow calculations for chargers and UPSs includes:
Element ID
Rated AC kV, MVA, efficiency, and power factor, as well as DC rating data
HV DC Link Data
Required data for load flow calculations for HV DC links includes:
Element ID
All data on the Rating page is required for Load Flow calculations
Inverter current margin (Im)
19-43
Load Flow Analysis
Required Data
SVC Data
Required data for load flow calculations for SVCs includes:
Element ID
Rated kV
Inductive Rating (Either QL, IL, or BL)
Capacitive Rating (Either QC, IC, or BC)
Max Inductive Rating (Either QL(Max), or IL(Max))
Max Capacitive Rating (Either QC(Min), or IC(Min))
Note: QC, QC(Min), and BL must be entered as a negative value
Panel Data
Required data for load flow calculations for panels includes:
Element ID
Rated kV and Amps
Number of Branch Circuits
Loading and %Loading
Phasing, Number of Poles, and State
Connection Type, i.e. Internal, External, Spare, etc.
Other Data
There are some Study Case related data, which must also be provided. This includes:
Method (Newton-Raphson, Fast-Decoupled, or Accelerated Gauss-Seidel)

Max Iteration
Precision
Acceleration Factor (when Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method is selected)
Loading Category
Update (for bus voltages and transformer LTCs using load flow result)
The Study Case related data is entered into the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
19-44
Load Flow Analysis
Output Reports
19.7 Output Reports

The load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal Reports
format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows and voltage
drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be
displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and over- or under
voltage buses, in different colors.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a Load Flow Analysis. You can
utilize the Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the Output Report.
19.7.1 View from Study Case Toolbar

automatically opens the Output Report listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format. In the
picture shown below, the Output Report name is LF 100A and the selected format is Complete.
19.7.2 Report Manager

To open the Report Manager, simply click on the Report Manager button on the Load Flow toolbar. The
editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different sections of the
output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different portions of the
report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to every page, as
described below.
19-45
Load Flow Analysis
Output Reports
Output Report Name

Path
Help
OK/Cancel
of the Output Report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to close
the editor without viewing the report.
19.7.3 Complete
The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
Viewer and File Options

You can view the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
Format, or Excel format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default
checkbox.
19-46
Load Flow Analysis
Output Reports
19-47
Load Flow Analysis
Output Reports
19.7.4 Input Data

This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type. They
include:
Adjustments
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Equipment Cable
Impedance
Line Coupling
NO Protective Devices
Reactor
SVC
Transformer
19-48
Load Flow Analysis
Output Reports
19.7.5 Results
This page allows you to select the desired Output Report.
19-49
Load Flow Analysis
Output Reports
19-50
Load Flow Analysis
Output Reports
19.7.6 Summary
This page allows you to select different portions of the load flow summary to view.
Note: Some portions of the summary are available only when you have selected specific options in the
study case, such as Critical and Marginal Voltage options.
Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Branch Loading
Bus Loading
Losses
Summary
19-51
Load Flow Analysis
Alert View
19.8 Alert View

The functional objective of the Alert View is to provide an immediate list of all the alerts generated by the
load flow calculation. The Alert View window may be configured to automatically display as soon as the
load flow calculation is over by selecting the Auto Display checkbox in the Alarm page of the Load Flow
Study Case. It may also be accessed by a left-click on the Alert View icon. The Alert View provides
several tabulated sections of information about the reported alerts. You may refer to Section 15.2.3 Alert
page for detailed information on alerts for each type of elements.
Device ID
The Device Identification group of the Alert View lists the names of all the components that qualified as
alerts after the load flow calculation.
Type
The Type group of the Alert View displays information about the type of the device having the displayed
alert.
Condition
The Condition group of the Alert View provides a brief comment about the type of alert being reported.
In the case of load flow alerts, the different conditions reported are Overloads, Over Voltage, Under
Voltage, Over Excited, and Under Excited.
19-52
Load Flow Analysis
Alert View
Rating/Limit
The Rating group of the Alert View provides the rating information being used by the Load Flow Module
to determine whether an alert should be reported and of what kind. Section 15.2.3 Alert Page provides
detailed information on alerts for each type of elements.
Operating
The Operating group of the Alert View displays the results from the Load Flow calculation. The results
listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to determine the operating
percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the Alert page of the Load Flow Study
Case Editor.
% Operating
This group displays the percent operating values calculated based on the load flow results and the
different element ratings/Limits. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of
monitored parameters entered directly into the Alert page of the Load Flow Study Case Editor. Based on
the element type, system topology and given conditions, the Alert Simulation program uses these percent
values to determine if and what kind of alert should be displayed.
Phase Type
This group displays whether the alert being displayed is for a Single-Phase or 3-Phase component.
19-53
Load Flow Analysis
19.9 Load Flow Result Analyzer

The Load Flow Result Analyzer allows you to view the results of various load flow studies in one screen
so you can analyze and compare the different results. You can compare the results of general information
about the project or more specific information such as the results contained from buses, branches, loads or
sources in a load flow study. The Load Flow Result Analyzer is a time saving tool that allows you to
compare and analyze different reports coming from different projects, within the same directory, in a
single display.
Export
Export Load Flow Analyzer Data and create a report in Microsoft Excel format.
19-54
Load Flow Analysis
19.9.1 Report and Result Selections

Study Reports:
Select which Load Flow Study Reports to compare by clicking on the checkbox. The results of the
selected study report(s) will appear in the display table.
Ref
Select the study report that is used as the reference. The Display table also indicates which study
report is used as the reference by a green highlight on the study report name.
Report Type
Select which Report Type you would like displayed.
19-55
Load Flow Analysis
General Info
Selecting General will display the general information contained in the study report such as number of
elements, system generation, loads and losses, and conversion parameters.
Bus Results
Selecting Bus will display the bus information contained in the study report.
Branch Results
Selecting Branch will display the branch information contained in the study report.
Loads
Selecting Load will display the load information contained in the study report.
Sources
Selecting Source will display the source information contained in the study report.
Project Report
Select which project report(s) you would like active.
Active Project
The first selection is defaulted to the open project file. This will limit you to all the reports generated
from this project.
All Projects in Active Directory

This allows the user to compare reports from different projects that are located within the directory that
the current (open) project file resides.
19-56
Load Flow Analysis
19.9.2 General Info

Under this category, general information that summarizes the study and the information that is reported in
the first and last page of the output reports are displayed. When General Info is selected, the Display
Table is changed to show the following:
Study Case ID
Study case ID: unique name up to 25 characters.
Data Revision
This field indicates the name of the Data Revision used for the selected study report.
Configuration
This field indicates the configuration status being used for the selected study report.
Loading Cat
Display the name of the Loading Category used for the selected study report.
Generation Cat
Display the name of the Generation Category used for the selected study report.
Diversity Factor
Display the Load Diversity Factor used for the selected study report.
19-57
Load Flow Analysis
Buses
Display the total number of Energized Buses that exist in the selected study report.
Branches
Display the total number of Branches that exist in the selected study report.
Generators
Display the total number of Generators that exist in the selected study report.
Power Grids
Display the total number of Power Grids that exist in the selected study report.
Loads
Total number of Loads that exist in the selected study report.
Load-MW
Total Load in MW that exists in the selected study report.
Load-Mvar
Total Load in Mvar that exists in the selected study report.
Generation-MW
Display the total Generation in MW that exists in the selected study report.
Generation-Mvar
Display the total Generation in Mvar that exist in the selected study report.
Losses-MW
Display the total losses in MW that exist in the selected study report.
Losses-Mvar
Display the total losses in Mvar that exist in the selected study report.
Mismatch-MW
Display the total mismatch in MW that exists in the selected study report.
Mismatch-Mvar
Display the total mismatch in Mvar that exist in the selected study report.
19-58
Load Flow Analysis
19.9.3 Bus Results

Under this category, bus information and the load flow results for the buses are displayed. When Bus
Results is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Bus Type
This section determines what type of buses to display in the table.
19-59
Load Flow Analysis
Source Buses
These are Buses that are connected to a Generator or Power Grid.
Nodes
These are Buses that have been graphically displayed as Nodes.
MCC & SWGR

These are Buses that have MCC or SWGR as the type selected in the Rating page.
Load Buses
Buses that have loads connected to them.
Bus Info
This section determines which bus information to display in the table.
Nominal kV
Display the bus nominal voltage in kV of the selected bus.
Amp Rating
Display the ampere rating of the selected bus.
Type
Display the bus type information: Gen, SWNG, or Load.
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the bus loading results and operating bus
voltages.
Load Flow Results

This section determines which results to display in the table.
19-60
Load Flow Analysis
Note: When multiple study reports are selected, Calculated Results section becomes Radial buttons.
Voltage
Display operating voltage based on the result voltage unit (kV, % of Bus nominal kV, or Volts).
kW Loading
Display total bus loading (kW or MW).
kvar Loading
Display total bus loading (kvar or Mvar).
Amp Loading
Display Ampere Loading of the load directly connected to the bus.
% Loading
Displays the percent loading based on the calculated ampere loading and ampere rating of the bus.
Alert
This section allows you to enter the marginal and critical limits on the display table.
Note: The results will be highlighted based on these limits, not based on the limits set from the study
case.
19-61
Load Flow Analysis
Loading
Highlights bus loading alerts.
OverVoltage
Highlights bus over voltage alerts.
UnderVoltage
Highlights bus under voltage alerts.
Display Options
Actual Value
Display the actual value of the results.
Differences with Ref.

Display the delta differences between the calculated results with respect to the values from the reference
report.
Skip if Same - Delta is less than

Data that has the same results or a value within the delta limit, as the reference study will not be
displayed.
Find
Select any bus from the Bus ID list and click find to locate that bus on your one-line diagram.
19-62
Load Flow Analysis
Branch Results:
Under this category, branch information and the load flow results for the branches are displayed. When
Branch Results is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Branch Type
Select the Branch type(s) to display on the table. The list of branch types is below:
Transformer
Cable
Line
Reactor
Impedance
Equipment Cable
19-63
Load Flow Analysis
Branch Info
This section determines which branch information to display in the table.
From Bus
Display From Bus connection for that element.
To Bus
Display To Bus connection for that element.
Type
Display the element type on the display table.
Rating 1 and Rating 2

Display the Rating for each branch. See table below for each Rating:
Type
2-W Transformer
3-W Xfmr Primary
3-W Xfmr Secondary
3-W Xfmr Tertiary
Cable
Line
Reactor
Impedance
Equipment Cable
Rating 1
Primary kV / Secondary kV
Rated kV
Rated kV
Rated kV
Length Meters
Length Meters
Positive sequence impedance ohms
Positive sequence resistance
ohms/percent
Length Meters
Rating 2
Primary Winding Rating MVA/kVA
Size
Size
Reactor rating Amps
Positive sequence reactance
ohms/percent
Size
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the branch loading results and operating
branch voltages.
19-64
Load Flow Analysis
Load Flow Results

kW Flow
Display power flow (kW or MW)
kvar Flow
Display power flow (kvar or Mvar)
Amp Flow
Display ampere flow from one bus to another.
% PF
Display Power Factor (%)
% Loading
Display loading (%)
% Voltage Drop
Display voltage drop (%)
kW Losses
Display branch losses (kW or MW)
kvar Losses
Display branch losses (kvar or Mvar)
Alert
Note: The results will be highlighted based on these limits, not based on the limits from the Study Case.
19-65
Load Flow Analysis
Loading
Highlight branch loading alerts.
Voltage Drop
Highlight branch voltage drop alerts.
Display Options
Actual Value

report.

displayed.
Find
Select any branch from the ID list and click find to locate that element on your one-line diagram.
19-66
Load Flow Analysis
19.9.4 Loads
Under this category, load information and the load flow results for the loads are displayed. When Loads
is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Load Type
Select the load type(s) to display on the table. The list of load types is below:
Induction
Synchronous
Lumped
Static
MOV
Capacitor
SVC
Filter
19-67
Load Flow Analysis
Load Info
This section determines which load information to display in the table.
Terminal Bus
Bus connected to the load.
Type
Display the load type on the display table.
Rating and Rating kV

Display the Rating for each load. See table below for each Rating:
Type
Induction
Synchronous
Lumped
Static
MOV
Capacitor
SVC
Filter
Rating
HP/ kW
HP/ kW
MVA/kVA
MVA/kVA
HP/kW
Capacitor rated Mvar/kvar
Rated inductive/capacitive var kvar/Mvar
Capacitor rated Mvar/kvar per phase
Rating kV
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the operating load and load terminal voltage
results.
Load Flow Results

19-68
Load Flow Analysis
kW Loading
Total operating load (kW or MW)
kvar Loading
Total operating load (kvar or Mvar)
Amp Loading
Display the current loading results.
% PF
Display the Power factor (%).
% Loading
Displays the percent loading based on the calculated ampere loading and ampere rating of the load.
Terminal Voltage
Display the load terminal voltage results.
Alert
Note: The results will be highlighted based on these limits, not based on the limits from the study case.
19-69
Load Flow Analysis
Loading
This highlights loading alerts for loads.
OverVoltage
This highlights over voltage alerts for loads.
UnderVoltage
This highlights under voltage alerts for loads.
Display Options
Actual Value

report.

displayed.
Find
Select any load from the ID list and click find to locate that load on your one-line diagram.
19-70
Load Flow Analysis
19.9.5 Sources
Under this category, source information and the load flow results for the sources are displayed. When
Sources is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Source Type
Select the Source type(s) to display on the table. The list of source types is below:
Power Grid
Synchronous
Wind Turbine
19-71
Load Flow Analysis
Source Info
This section determines which source information to display in the table.
Terminal Bus
Display the bus connected to the source.
Type
Display the source type.
Rating and Rating kV

Display the rating for each source. See table below for each Rating:
Type
Power Grid
Synchronous
Wind Turbine
Rating
3 phase Short Circuit MVAsc Contribution
Rated Real Power MW/ kW
Rated Real Power MW/kW
Rating kV
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the total operating source generation and
the rating for each source.
Load Flow Results

19-72
Load Flow Analysis
kW Generation
Total operating source generation (kW or MW).
kvar Generation
Total operating source generation (kvar or Mvar).
Amp
Source current results
% PF
Power factor of the source (%)
% Generation
Source generation (%)
Display Options
Actual Value

report.
19-73
Load Flow Analysis

displayed.
Find
Select any source from the ID list and click find to locate that source on your one-line diagram.
19-74
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
19.10 Load Analyzer

The Load Analyzer module is designed as a generalized load-list to report load-schedules for power
system components such as switchgear, MCC, transformers, cables, lines, panels, etc. Different reports
provide informative data regarding all loads connected downstream to equipments.
This tool is helpful during the operating phase of a project, as well as design/planning phase where system
studies may not be possible due to incomplete one-line diagram or data.
Reports include the following user options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Base or Revision Data

Configuration
Loading Category
Connected / Operating Loads
Continuous / Intermittent / Spare Loads
Continuous / Non-Continuous Loads
Load Demand Factors
Global and Individual Bus Diversity (Deviation) Factors
In addition and in contrast with the regular Load Flow analysis, the Load Analyzer allows a deeper study
of the different loads present in a system. This gives the user more flexibility in analyzing individual
loads using Minimum/Maximum Bus Loading, or to simply determine the actual connected and operating
loads in a given system.
Notes:
Looped configurations or systems with two swing sources (utility or generator) are not currently
handled by the Load Analyzer. Only radial systems are handled.
In case the load voltage from the nameplate of an element is different from the upstream Bus
voltage, the Load Analyzer will not adjust the voltage of the element. Therefore, the Load
Analyzer results will be different from the Load Flow results.
Wind turbines, MG sets, Harmonic Filters (HF), and Static var Compensators (SVC) loads are not
considered by the Load Analyzer. These loads will be added in the future.
3-phase and 1-phase loads below an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) are not considered by
the Load Analyzer. Only the internal load of the UPS is considered.
Feeder losses and branch losses are ignored by the Load Analyzer. The Load Flow program
considers all branch losses.
19.10.1 Load Analyzer Editor

The Load Analyzer module is launched from the Load Flow mode and by clicking on the Load Analyzer
icon, which is located on the right hand side toolbar.
19-75
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Once the module is launched, the Load Analyzer Editor opens. Following is a list and description of the
different fields available in this editor.
Project
The project name is displayed in this field. This filed is for your information and cannot be edited.
19-76
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Revision
The project revision is displayed in this field. This field is for your information and cannot be edited. To
change the revision you must close this editor, go to the Revision toolbar and select another revision.
Configuration
The project configuration is displayed in this field. This field is for your information and cannot be
edited. To change the configuration you must close this editor, go to the Configuration toolbar and select
another configuration.
Output File Name

Enter the output report database filename. By default, ETAP enters the same name as the project name.
The output file name can contain upto 250 characters.
Note: Very long filenames can cause text wrapping on the report headers and affect the report format. It
is recommended to use up to 25 characters for the filename.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories for the current Load Analyzer study. With the selection of any
category, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified for the selected
category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of
the induction machine and synchronous motor editors and the Loading or Rating page of other load
component editors.
19-77
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer

In the Load Analyzer editor, you can choose the desired Load Diversity Factor applied to each of the
three Demand Factors for each load (i.e. Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare). The different Load
Diversity Factors are the following:
None (no load diversity factor is applied)

Bus Max (individual Bus Max diversity factor is applied to directly connected loads)
Bus Min (individual Bus Min diversity factor is applied to directly connected loads)
Global Value (Global load diversity factor is applied to all loads)
For each Bus in the system, the user can define the upper and lower bounds of the Load Diversity Factor
that will apply to the loads directly connected to that Bus. These individual Load Diversity Factors are
applied when Bus Max or Bus Min is selected from the Load Analyzer editor under each category Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare. These values will not be taken into account for loads since Load
Diversity Factors are set to a Global Value. For instance, if the user selects Continuous Load to have a
Global Value equal to 90%, then all Continuous Loads in the system will be multiplied by that unique
Global Value.
Demand Factor
In ETAP, operation of loads fall under three status categories:
Continuous (default is set to 100%, which means the load operates continuously)
Intermittent (default is set to 50%, which means the load operates for 12 hours)
Spare (default is set to 0%, which means the load is not operating)
The accounted percentage of the load falling under each category, called the Demand Factor, can be set
for individual loads from each editor in the Info page.
19-78
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Apply Bus Diversity Factor to Non-Directly Connected Loads

The Load Analyzer program allows the user to apply Load Diversity Factor to non-directly connected
loads in the system. This means that if the Apply Bus Diversity Factor to Non-Directly Connected Load
option is checked, then the Load Diversity Factor of all buses in the system will be considered (i.e.
multiple dipping is applied at all levels).
PF & EFF
For all induction and synchronous motors in the system, the user can select to either use the Rated Power
Factor (PF) and Efficiency of motors, or to use interpolated values for the specified motor % loading.
If the Rated PF and/or Eff options are selected, then Rated PF and Eff will be used for synchronous
motors, and PF and Eff of 100% loading will be used for induction machines.
If the Interpolate at Specified % Loading option is selected, then the program interpolates the Power
Factor and Efficiency entered for both induction and synchronous motors at the specified % Loading. The
interpolation occurs linearly based on the Power Factor and Efficiency values entered at 100, 75, and 50
% Loadings. The Power Factor and Efficiency values can be entered for individual motors from their
editor and Nameplate page.
19.10.2 Reports
Once the different settings have been selected from the Load Analyzer interface, click OK and the Load
Analyzer Report Manager will open to display the results of the study. The user has the choice to select
different reports from the following tabs:
19-79
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Bus Loading
Bus Summary
Load List
Schedules
Report Manager also displays the Output Report Name and the Path where project files are located. As a
reminder, Load Analyzer is the only module that skips reporting of nodes in some of its reports. For other
ETAP modules, nodes and buses are treated the same way in output reports.
Load Analyzer reports can export into Viewer (Crystal Reports format), PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
Format, and MS Excel and allows choosing any of these formats to be Set As Default.
For the Load Analyzer reports, ETAP creates Access databases with the extension of <filename>.LA1.
This database is used to produce load analyzer output reports.
All reports include a header, which displays project name, business location, contract number, the
engineers name, filename, ETAP logo, ETAP version number, report name, page number, date, serial
number (SN), revision number, configuration, and remarks with up to 120 characters. The project name,
location, contract number, engineers name, and remarks can be set from the ETAP toolbar
Project/Information. The filename is set in the Output Filename given in the Load Analyzer Editor.
Bus Feeder (FDR) Loading Reports

The Bus FDR Loading-1, 2 & 3 reports are sorted alphabetically by Bus ID.
19-80
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Bus FDR Loading-1 Report selected from Bus Loading tab in the Report Manager
19-81
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
19-82
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Bus Loading Summary Reports

The Bus Loading Summary-1 & 2 reports provide the sum of all loads for all Buses including Connected
and Operating Loads. These reports are sorted alphabetically by Bus ID.
Bus Loading Summary-1 report selected from Bus Summary tab of the Report Manager
19-83
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Bus Loading Summary-2 report selected from Bus Summary tab of the Report Manager
Load List Reports

The Load List reports provide load information ordered by Bus Loading Summary, by Bus, by Status, and
by Load. As a note, Panels are not included in Load List by Status Report. These reports are sorted
alphabetically by Bus ID.
19-84
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Load-List Bus Summary report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager
Load-List by Bus report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager
19-85
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Load-List by Status report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager
Load-List report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager
19-86
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Schedule Reports
The Bus Loading Schedule report displays the total load at each Bus including the effect of all
multiplying parameters (i.e. % Loading, Demand Factor, and Load Diversity Factor). This Report
tabulates only downstream Buses and Loads (no equipment). This report is sorted by Bus kV first and
then Bus ID.
The Cable Schedule Report tabulates all Equipment and Branch Cables present in the system. This report
also provides information about the Connected Buses, kV, and other physical parameters for each Cable.
Transformer Loading Schedule-1 & 2 reports tabulate all Transformers present in the system. These
reports also provide information about the Connected Buses, Impedance, and other electrical parameters
for each transformer.
Bus Loading Schedule Report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager
19-87
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Cable Schedule Report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager
Transformer Loading Schedule-1 report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager
19-88
Load Flow Analysis
Load Analyzer
Transformer Loading Schedule-2 report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager
19-89
Chapter 20
Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis
Many applications of distribution systems require a robust and efficient power flow solution method.
Such a power flow solution method must be able to model the special features of distribution systems in
sufficient detail. Distribution systems have a relatively unbalanced nature, which results from a mixture of
3-phase, 2-phase, and single-phase network components, including unbalanced loads and shunts.
Therefore, an Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis has become the preferred solution.
The ETAP Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Program calculates the bus voltages, branch power factors,
currents, and power flows for individual phases throughout the electric power system. The module allows
for swing, voltage regulated, and unregulated power sources with multiple utility and generator
connections. It handles both radial and loop systems. A powerful current injection method is provided in
order to achieve the best calculation efficiency.
This chapter gives definitions and explains how to use the various tools you will need to run Unbalanced
Load Flow Studies. It also provides theoretical background for the unbalanced load flow calculation
method. The chapter consists of the following sections:
Section
Description
Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar
This section explains how you can launch an

unbalanced load flow calculation, open and view an
Output Report, or select display options.
Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor
This section explains how you can create a new Study

Case, what parameters are required to specify a Study
Case, and how to set them.
Display Options
This section explains what options are available to

you for displaying some key system parameters and
the output results on the one-line diagram, and how to
set them.
Unbalanced Load Flow Calculation Method
This section shows formulations of current injection

load flow calculation method.
Required Data for Calculations
This section describes what data is necessary to

perform unbalanced load flow calculations and where
to enter them.
20-1
Overview
Section
Description
Unbalanced Load Flow Study Output Report
This section illustrates and explains Output Reports

and their format.
20-2
Toolbar
20.1 Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar

The Unbalanced Load Flow toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Unbalanced Load Flow
Study Mode.
Run Unbalanced Load Flow Studies

Running an Unbalanced Load Flow Study is a simple, two-step process:
1. Select a Study Case from the Study Case Editor.
2. Click the Run Unbalanced Load Flow Study button to perform an Unbalanced Load Flow Study.
A dialog box appears. Specify the Output Report name if the output file name is set to Prompt. The
study results appear on the one-line diagram and in the Output Report.
Unbalanced Load Flow Display Options

The results from Unbalanced Load Flow Studies are displayed on the one-line diagram. To edit how these
results look, click the Unbalanced Load Flow Display Options button. For more information, see Section
20.3, Display Options.
Alert View
After performing an Unbalanced Load Flow Study, you can click this button to open the Alert View,
which lists all equipment with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the Study Case.
20-3
Toolbar
Unbalanced Load Flow Report Manager

Unbalanced Load Flow Output Reports are provided in the form of Crystal Reports Report. The Report
Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of
the Output Report from Crystal Reports. Available file types for Crystal Reports are displayed in each
page of the Report Manager for Unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
Choosing any format in the Report Manager activates Crystal Reports. You can open the whole
Unbalanced Load Flow Output Report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection. You can
view the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or
Excel format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
The following table explains the format names and their corresponding Output Reports.
20-4
Toolbar
This format
Provides this information
Adjustments
Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Branch
Branch Loading
Bus
Bus Loading
Cable
Complete
Cover
Equipment Cable
Impedance
Losses
NO Protective Devices Displays
Reactor
Summary
Transformer
Unbalanced LF Report
Tolerance and temperature correction adjustments

Complete report of system alerts
Summary of critical alerts only
Summary of marginal alerts only
Branch input data
Branch loading results
Bus input data
Overloaded bus information
Cable input data
Complete Output Report, including all input and output
Title page of the Output Report
Equipment cable input data
Detailed information about impedance elements in the system
Branch loss results
Normally open protective devices
Reactor input data
Summary of the load flow calculation
Transformer input data
Unbalanced load flow calculation results
You can view Output Reports by clicking the Report Manager button on the Study Case toolbar. The List
Output Report window lists all of the output files in the selected project directory for unbalanced load
flow calculations. To view any of the listed Output Reports, select the Output Report name and click the
List Output Report button.

The Halt Current Calculation button is normally grayed-out. When an unbalanced power flow calculation
has been initiated, this button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will
terminate the calculation.
Get On-line Data

When Real-Time is installed and the Sys Monitor presentation is on-line, you can bring real-time data
into your offline presentation and run an unbalanced load flow calculation by clicking the Run
Unbalanced Load Flow button. The Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be
updated with the on-line data.
20-5
Toolbar
Get Archived Data

When ETAPS Playback is installed and any presentation is in Playback mode, you can bring this data into
your presentation and run an unbalanced load flow calculation by clicking the Run Unbalanced Load
Flow button. The Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the
playback data.
Unbalanced Load Flow Comparator

When ETAP Real-Time is set up and after you run a Load Flow Study with on-line data, you can click
this button to bring up the Load Flow Comparator view. It lists comparison of all system operating values
between ETAP Real-Time output and Load Flow calculations.
20-6
Study Case Editor

The Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions,
and a variety of options for Output Reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of
Study Cases. Unbalanced load flow calculations are conducted and reported using the settings of the
Study Case selected in the toolbar. You can switch between Study Cases without resetting the Study Case
options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
As a part of the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, Study Cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system toolbar components (that is, for any configuration status, one-line
diagram presentation, or base/revision data).
When you are in Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis mode, you can access the Unbalanced Load Flow
Study Case Editor by clicking on the Edit Study Case button from the Study Case toolbar when in
Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis mode. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking
on the unbalanced load flow project in the Study Case folder.
To create a new Study Case, go to the Project View, right-click the unbalanced load flow project in the
Study Case folder, and select Create New. The module will then create a new Study Case, which is a copy
of the default Study Case, and adds it to the unbalanced load flows Study Case folder.
20-7
Study Case Editor
20.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
In the Study Case ID group, you can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and entering the new ID.
The Study Case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use the arrow buttons at the bottom of the
editor to go from one Study Case to another.
Method
The currently available method is the Newton-Raphson Current Injection Method.
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged before the specified number of
iterations, the module will stop and inform you. The recommended and default values are 99.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision (used to check for convergence). This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. The precision is applied to check the difference between the bus
voltages after each iteration. If the difference between the iterations is less than or equal to the value
entered for precision, the desired accuracy is achieved.
20-8
Study Case Editor
If the solution converges but the mismatch values are high, reduce the value of the precision to make your
results more precise and run the module again.
Note: You may need to increase the number of iterations. A smaller precision value will result in lower
mismatch (higher accuracy), as well as a longer run time. The default value of 0.0001 pu volts is
recommended.
Update
In the Update group, you can decide to update the initial conditions of the buses and/or set the transformer
taps to the calculated value of load tap changers (LTCs). The selected options will be updated after the
subsequent unbalanced load flow run.
Initial Bus Voltages

Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of the load flow run.
Bus voltage update will result in a faster convergence of the subsequent load flow solutions, since the
initial bus voltages will be closer to the final values.
Inverter Operating Load

In an AC Load Flow Study, an inverter is represented as a constant voltage source. When this option is
checked, the load provided by the inverter will be updated to the inverter element, which can be used later
as DC load of the inverter in a DC Load Flow Study.
Operating Load & V

This option is available if your ETAP installation has the on-line feature. When you select this option, the
calculation results will be updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for
later studies. These values are also displayed in Element Editors. If your ETAP installation does not
include the on-line feature, you can only see the operating P, Q, and V in Element Editors, and they
cannot be used in a later study.
Transformer LTCs
Select this option to update the transformer taps to reflect the result of the Load Tap Changer (LTC)
settings (that is, transformer taps will be set to values determined from the load flow solution for LTCs).
Use this feature when you want to consider the impedance of the LTC taps for short-circuit calculations.
Cable Load Amp

Select this option to transfer cable load current data from the previously run Unbalanced Load Flow
Study. The data is transferred to the Operating Load Current in the Cable Editor for each cable associated
with the Unbalanced Load Flow Study.
Report
Rated Voltage In
Bus nominal voltages seen in the output report can be printed in V or kV. Select your preference from the
drop down list.
Bus Operating Voltage In

Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in V, kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference from the drop down list. For graphical display of bus voltages see Load
20-9
Study Case Editor
Power In
Calculated power flows, loadings and generations seen in the output report can be printed in MVA or
kVA. Select your preference from the drop down list. For graphical display of the power flows see Load
Equipment Cable Losses and Vd

Select this option to report losses and voltage drop associated with equipment cables in the Output
Report.

Initial conditions for all bus voltages and angles can be specified in this group for unbalanced load flow
calculation purposes.
Bus Initial Voltages

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editors. You can
simulate Unbalanced Load Flow Studies with different initial conditions for bus voltage using this option.

Select this option to simulate Unbalanced Load Flow Studies using a fixed bus voltage and angle for all
buses. When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage value as the
percent of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude and zero
degree for bus voltage angle.
Determination of Initial Bus Voltage Angle
The ETAP Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module calculates the bus voltage angle based on
transformer phase-shift and compares the calculated value against the initial bus voltage angle from
the user selected option. If the difference between the two values is larger than the specified
MaxIniAngDiff, ETAP uses the calculated values as the initial bus voltage angle, where
MaxIniAngDiff is an ETAP.INI file entry that is defaulted at 10.
When the operating load is specified as the system load, the operating voltage angles are used as the
initial value. In this case, the operating voltage angle is compared against the calculated bus voltage
angle. If the difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the operating voltage angle is used; otherwise, the
calculated value is used in the unbalanced load flow calculation.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this field. Information entered here will be printed on
the second line of every output page header line. These remarks can provide specific information for each
Study Case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all Study Cases and is entered in the Project
Information Editor.
20-10
Study Case Editor
20.2.2 Loading Page
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories in the Loading Category group for the current Unbalanced Load
Flow Study. ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified the category
you select.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Induction
Machine Editor and Synchronous Motor Editor and the Loading or Rating page of other Load Component
Editors.
Operating P, Q
This option is available if your ETAP installation has the on-line feature. When you select this box, the
operating loads updated from on-line data or a previous Unbalanced Load Flow Study will be utilized in
the Unbalanced Load Flow Study.
20-11
Study Case Editor
Generation Category
Select one of the ten Generation Categories in the Generation Category group for the current Unbalanced
Load Flow Study. When you select a category, ETAP uses the generator controls for that category, as
specified on the Rating page of the Generator Editor. The generator controls will be different depending
on the mode in which the generator is operating. The mode of generation is selected on the Info page of
the Generator Editor. The table below shows the generation controls with respect to the mode of
generation.
Mode
Swing
Voltage Control
MVAR Control
PF Control

%V and Angle
%V and MW
MW and MVAR
MW and PF
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if your ETAP installation has the on-line feature. When you select this box, the
generator operating values updated from on-line data or a previous Load Flow Study will be utilized in
the Unbalanced Load Flow Study.

The options in this group allow you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the Loading
Categorys load. When you select the Operating Load option, no diversity factor is considered.
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Minimum
When you select the Minimum Bus Loading option, all motors and other loads directly connected to each
bus will be multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate Load
Flow Studies with each bus having a different minimum diversity factor.
The minimum Bus Loading Study option may be used to see the effect of transformer taps and capacitors
(if any) on the system voltages under a minimum (light) loading condition.
Bus Maximum
When you select the Maximum Loading option, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus
will be multiplied by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate Load Flow
Studies with each bus having a different maximum diversity factor.
Global
Enter the global diversity factors for all constant kVA, constant Z, generic, and constant I loads. When
you select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all motors and static loads of the selected Loading
20-12
Study Case Editor
Category with the entered values for the motor and static load diversity factors. For information about
load-modeling concepts used in the module, see section 20.4, Calculation Method.
25% above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100%.
Const. kVA
Constant kVA loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, and conventional lumped loads with
% motor load, UPS, and chargers.
Const. Z
Constant impedance loads include static loads, capacitors, harmonic filters, MOVs, and conventional
lumped loads with % static load.
Const. I
Constant current loads include lumped loads operating in Unbalanced Node.
Generic
Generic loads include lumped loads operating in either exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive mode.
Charger Loading
For chargers, you can select the Loading Category or the Operating Load.
Note: The operating load for a charger can only be updated from a DC Load Flow Study.
20-13
Study Case Editor
The Impedance Tolerance, Length Tolerance, and Resistance Temperature Correction groups on the
Adjustment page allow you to consider tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and
impedance. Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance
setting or based on a globally specified percent value.
Impedance Tolerance
Transformer
The net effect of the transformer impedance adjustment in unbalanced load flow calculations is to
increase the impedance by the specified percent tolerance value. For example, if the transformer
impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used in the unbalanced load flow
calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by selecting the Individual option.
This option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. To
make a global transformer impedance adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance
other than 0% in the displayed text box. The global impedance adjustment overrides any individual
transformer tolerance value.
20-14
Study Case Editor
Reactor
This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module
increases the reactor impedance by the specified percent tolerance, resulting in a larger impedance and
consequently a larger voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its
tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted reactor impedance used in the unbalanced load flow calculation is 0.105
Ohm.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by selecting the Individual option. This
option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Rating page of the Reactor Editor. To make a
global reactor impedance adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance other than 0%
in the displayed text box. The global impedance adjustment overrides any individual reactor tolerance
value.

This adjustment is applied to the overload heater (OH) resistance. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis
Module increases the OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and
consequently a larger voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance
is 5%, then the adjusted OH resistance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
The resistance adjustment can be applied to individual overload heaters by selecting the Individual option.
This option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Rating page of the Overload Heaters Editor.
To make a global overload heater resistance adjustment, select the Global option and type a global
tolerance other than 0% in the displayed text box. The global resistance adjustment overrides any
individual overload heater tolerance value.
Note: The adjustments only apply if the Cable/OL Heater option is selected for MV and/or LV motors.
Length Tolerance
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module increases the
cable length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the length of the cable is 200 ft. and the tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted
cable length used in the unbalanced load flow calculation is 210 ft.
The length adjustment can be applied to individual cables by selecting the Individual option. This option
uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Info page of the Cable Editor. To make a global cable
length adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance other than 0% in the displayed text
box. The Global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance value.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module
increases the transmission line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and
consequently a larger voltage drop. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the
tolerance is 2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the unbalanced load flow calculation
is 2.05 miles.
20-15
Study Case Editor
The length adjustment can be applied to individual transmission lines by selecting the Individual option.
This option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Info page of the Transmission Line Editor.
To make a global transmission line length adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance
other than 0% in the displayed text box. The Global Length Adjustment overrides any individual
transmission line tolerance value.

This group allows you to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature for
the individual the cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis
Module adjusts the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum
operating temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is
increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by selecting the Individual option. This
option uses the maximum operating temperature value specified in the Cable Editor. To make a global
temperature correction, select the Global option and type a global maximum temperature value in the
displayed text box. The global temperature correction value overrides any individual Cable Impedance
page maximum temperature. For more information, see the Cable Editor Impedance Page section in
Chapter 8, AC-Editors.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Unbalanced Load Flow
Analysis Module adjusts the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the
maximum operating temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the
resistance is increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by selecting the Individual option. This
option uses the maximum operating temperature value specified on the Impedance page of the
Transmission Line Editor. To make a global temperature correction, select the Global option and type a
global maximum temperature value in the displayed text box. The global temperature correction value
overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum temperature. For more
information, see the Transmission Line Editor Impedance Page section in Chapter 8, AC-Editors.
20-16
Study Case Editor
20.2.4 Alert Page

The Alert page in the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor is used to setup primary simulation alerts
that notify users about an abnormal loading condition based on allowable percent values and system
topology. The functional capability of the Simulation Alert System is to generate alerts when there is an
overload in protective devices, buses, transformers, cables, lines, panels, reactors, generators, or the
power grid. The alerts are reported either graphically in the one-line diagram display or in the Alert View
window.

Simulation alerts generated after a Unbalanced Load Flow Study are either critical or marginal. Critical
and marginal alerts use different percent value conditions to determine if an alert should be generated. If
the condition for a critical alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the Alert View window and the
overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for marginal alerts, except that
the overloaded component will be magenta instead of red. Also, you must select the Marginal Limit
option if you want marginal alerts displayed. If a device alert qualifies as both a critical and a marginal
alert, only a critical alert is displayed.
Note: For ETAP to generate alerts for an element type, both the element rating and the percent value
entered on the Alert page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the
following sections.
20-17
Study Case Editor
Loading
This group of options allows you to enter the condition percent values of the monitored parameters used
to determine if an alert should be reported based on loading conditions determined by an unbalanced load
flow calculation. Unbalanced load flow loading alerts generate overload alerts.
Bus
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a bus loading alert if the critical or marginal
percent limit of rated continuous current in the bus is exceeded. The rated continuous current in the bus is
specified on the Rating page of the Bus Editor.
Cable
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a cable alert if the critical or marginal percent
limit of allowable ampacity in the cable is exceeded. The allowable ampacity of the cable is specified on
the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor.
Reactor
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a reactor alert if the critical or marginal
percent limit of rated current in the reactor is exceeded. The rated current in the reactor is specified on the
Rating page of the Reactor Editor.
Line
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a line alert if the critical or marginal percent
limit of allowable ampacity in the transmission line is exceeded. The allowable ampacity of the
transmission line is specified on the Ampacity page of the Transmission Line Editor.
Transformer
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a transformer alert if the critical or marginal
percent limit of maximum MVA of the transformer is exceeded. The maximum MVA of the transformer
is specified on the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. The simulation alerts work for both two and
three winding transformers.
Panel/UPS/VFD
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a panel/UPS/VFD alert if the critical or
marginal percent limit of rated current in the panel, UPS or VFD is exceeded. The rated current of the
panel is specified in the Rating page of the Panel Editor. The rated current of the UPS or VFD is specified
as the input currents in the Rating page of their editor. If VFD has multiple input connections, the total
current is checked against the VFD rated input current.
Note: If the UPS or VFD output current exceeds the maximum output current specified in their Rating
page, an Over-Current alert will be generated as a critical alert.
Generator
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a generator/power grid alert if the critical or
marginal percent limit of rated MW of the generator is exceeded. The rated MW of the generator is
specified on the Rating page of the Generator Editor.
20-18
Study Case Editor
Bus Voltage
The options in this group allow you to set bus voltage simulation alerts in situations where the voltage
magnitude percent results from the unbalanced load flow calculation exceed or are below the specified
nominal kV rating percent values. Bus voltage alerts report over- and under-voltage.
Generator/Motor Excitation
Simulation alerts for generator excitation monitor the percent rated Mvar limits. An alert for overexcitation is reported if the upper excitation percent limit (Qmax) for the generator is exceeded in an
unbalanced load flow calculation. An alert for under-excitation is reported if the generator Mvar result
from the unbalanced load flow calculation is below the specified under-excitation percent limit (Qmin).
You have the option to run the unbalanced load flow calculation without monitoring under-excitation
conditions. An alert for under-excitation will be reported if you select the UnderExcited option. The
under-excitation percent limit for the generator is 100% of Qmin.
Marginal Limit
If the Marginal Limit option is selected, the Alert View window will display the marginal alerts as well
critical alerts. If this option is not selected, the Alert View window will display only critical alerts.
Note: The critical and marginal alerts will not be displayed if the percent setting is set to zero.
Auto Display
If the Auto Display button is selected, the Alert View window automatically opens after the unbalanced
load flow calculation is completed. If Auto Display is not selected, you can open the Alert View window
by clicking the Alert View button on the Unbalanced Load Flow toolbar.
20-19
Study Case Editor
20.2.5 Adv Alert Page

The Adv Alert page of the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor is used to specify the setup of some
advanced simulation alerts provided to notify you of an abnormal loading condition based on allowable
percent values and system topology. The Simulation Alert System generates alerts when there is an
overload in buses, transformers, cables, lines, panels, reactors, generators, power grid, and meters. The
alerts are reported either graphically in the one-line diagram display or in the Alert View window.

Simulation alerts generated after a Unbalanced Load Flow Study are either critical or marginal. Critical
and marginal alerts use different percent value conditions to determine if an alert should be generated. If
the condition for a critical alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the Alert View window and the
overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for marginal alerts, except that
the overloaded component will be magenta instead of red. Also, you must select the Marginal Limit
option if you want marginal alerts displayed. If a device alert qualifies as both a critical and a marginal
alert, only a critical alert is displayed.
entered on the Alert page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the
following sections.
20-20
Study Case Editor
Voltage Unbalanced (Bus)

Voltage unbalanced (bus) alerts are generated if the percent voltage unbalance ratios resulting from the
unbalanced load flow calculation exceed the specified percent values. These percentage voltage
unbalanced ratios include those of line voltages, phase voltages, negative sequence voltages, and zero
sequence voltages. Voltage unbalanced (bus) alerts report over-voltage unbalance ratio alerts.
Note: The voltage unbalance ratio (VUR) is the ratio of the maximum voltage deviation from the average
voltage to the average voltage with the assumption that the average voltage is always equal to the nominal
value.
LVUR
Select LVUR to use the unbalance ratio of line voltages.
The NEMA (National Equipment Manufacturers Association) definition of voltage unbalance, also
known as the line voltage unbalance rate (LVUR) is given by:
LVUR =
Max voltage deviation from the avg line voltage

100(%)
Avg line voltage
PVUR
Select PVUR to use the unbalance ratio of phase voltages.
The IEEE definition of voltage unbalance, also known as the phase voltage unbalance rate (PVUR) is
given by:
PVUR =
Max voltage deviation from the avg phase voltage

100(%)
Avg phase voltage
VUF 2
An index used in European Standards to indicate the degree of unbalance is the voltage unbalance factor
(VUF), which is the ratio of the negative sequence voltage to the positive sequence voltage and is given
by:
VUF2 =
V2
100(%)
V1
VUF 0 (VUF 0)
The zero sequence voltage unbalance factor of phase voltages, which is given by:
VUF0 =
V0
100(%)
V1
Current Unbalanced (Branch)

Current unbalanced (branch) alerts are generated if the percent branch current unbalance ratios resulting
from the unbalanced load flow calculation exceed the specified percent values. These percent current
unbalance ratios include those of branch currents, negative, and zero sequence branch currents. Current
unbalanced (branch) alerts report over-current unbalance ratio alerts.
20-21
Study Case Editor
LIUR (IUR)
Branch current unbalance ratio (IUR), which is given by:
IUR =
Max branch current deviation from the average

100(%)
Average of branch currents
IUF 2 (IUF2)
The negative sequence branch current unbalance factor, which is given by:
IUF2 =
I2
100(%)
I1
IUF 0 (IUF0)
The zero sequence branch current unbalance factor, which is given by:
IUF0 =
I0
100(%)
I1
Meters
Meter alerts are generated if the percent meter measurements exceed the specified percent values. These
percent meter measurements include those of Current, Voltage, MW, Mvar, PF, and Freq. meter alerts
report over-meter measurements alerts.
20-22
Display Options

20.3.1 Results Page
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC,
AC-DC, and Colors information annotations.
Note: The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are specific to that study.
Show Units
Select this option to show units for power flow and current displayed on the one-line diagram.
Check-ALL
Select this option to show all available result annotations.
Note: When this box is unselected, the previous settings are restored.
Voltage
In the Voltage list, select kV or % for voltage display on the one-line diagram.
20-23
Display Options
Bus Mag.
Select this option to display bus voltages on the one-line diagram. Bus voltages are displayed at 15
degrees.
Bus Angle
Select this option to display bus angle in degree on the one-line diagram. Bus voltages are displayed at
-15 degrees.
Load Term. Mag.

Select this option to display load (motors and static loads) terminal voltages on the one-line diagram.
Load terminal voltages are displayed at 15 degrees. Load terminal voltages can be displayed based on
load rated kV or bus nominal kV, depending on the option selected in the Load Term. Base kV group.
L-N
Select this option to display bus phase voltages on the one-line diagram.
L-L
Select this option to display bus line voltages on the one-line diagram.
Load Term. Base kV

This group allows you to select base kV for load terminal magnitude, but only when voltage is displayed
in percent (% is selected in the Voltage list). This group will be disabled if voltage is displayed in kV.
Load Rated kV
Bus Nom. kV
Voltage Drop
Line/Cable
Load FDR
Select a unit for power flow or current flow from the list to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Average/Phases
Average Values
Select this option to display average values as shown in the following tables.
20-24
Display Options
Unbalanced Load Flow Results Displayed in Average Values
Phase Type
3-Phase
2-Phase
Single Phase
Voltage
Current
Power
Average Value
Average Value
Phase Value
Average Value
Average Value
Phase Value
Total Power
Total Power
Phase Value
Phase Type
3-Phase
Single Phase 3-Wire
Single Phase 2-Wire
Voltage
Current
Power
Average Value
L-L Value
Phase Value
Average Value
Average Value
Phase Value
Total Power
Total Power
Phase Value
Load Flow Results Displayed in Average Values
All Phases
Select this option to display individual phase values. For 3-phase element, voltage, current, and power for
phases A, B, and C are displayed in sequence and for single-phase 3-wire element, voltage, current, and
power for phases LL, L1, and L2 are displayed in sequence.
20-25
Display Options
Unbalanced Load Flow Results Displayed in All Phases
Phase Type
3-Phase
2-Phase
Single Phase
Voltage
Current
Power
Phases A, B, & C
Phases A&B, B&C,
or C&A
Phase Value
Phases A, B, & C
Phases A&B, B&C,
or C&A
Phase Value
Phases A, B, & C
Phases A&B, B&C,
or C&A
Phase Value
Phase Type
3-Phase
Single Phase 3-Wire
Single Phase 2-Wire
Voltage
Current
Power
Phases A, B, & C
Phase LL, L1, & L2
Phase Value
Phases A, B, & C
Phase LL, L1, & L2
Phase Value
Phases A, B, & C
Phase LL, L1, & L2
Phase Value
Load Flow Results Displayed in All Phases
Power Flows
In this group, you specify how the power flows will be displayed. From the Power Flows list, select the
units (kVA or MVA) to be used to display power flow on the one-line diagram.
20-26
Display Options
kW + jkvar
Select the kW + jkvar option to display power flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar, depending on the power
flow units you are using.
kVA
Select the kVA option to display power flow in kVA or MVA, depending on the power flow units you are
using.
Amp
Select the Amp option to display current flow in amperes.
%PF
When the Amp or kVA option is selected, you can select this option to show power factor of power flow
along with the current.
Flow Results
Branch
power flow at the end of the branch that has a positive kW value flowing into the branch. For threewinding transformers, all three power flows are displayed.
Source
Load
Composite Motor
Composite Network
Select this option to display power flow into composite networks.
Neutral
Select this option to display the neutral current. This option is only available when Amp is selected for
Power Flows.
Branch Losses
Select this option to display branch losses on the one-line diagram. Losses are displayed inside a bracket
in [kW+jkvar] or [MW+jMvar].
Meters
Ammeter
Select this option to display primary current for the branch to which an ammeter is attached.
20-27
Display Options
Voltmeter
Select this option to display primary voltage for the bus to which a voltmeter is attached.
Multi-Meter
Select this option to display the measurements of a multi-meter, including bus voltage, branch current,
AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
Select the AC elements for which you want to display the ratings on the one-line diagram. The following
table shows the ratings for each element.
20-28

AC Elements
Generator
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
Display Options
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
Connection Type (# Phases - # Wires)
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
50/51 for Over-current Relays
kV
Select the elements under this heading for which you want to display the rated or nominal voltages on the
one-line diagram.
A
Select the elements under this heading for which you want to display the ampere ratings (continuous or
full-load ampere) on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the AC elements under this heading for which you want to display the rated impedance on the oneline diagram.
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
Subtransient Reactance Xd
% LRC
Impedance in ohms
20-29
Display Options
D-Y
Select the elements under this heading for which you want to display the connection types on the one-line
diagram.
displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of the Load Tap
Changer (LTC).
Composite Mtr (Motor)

Select this option to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options

Select this option to use ETAPs default display options. The checkboxes on this page will be grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

20-30
Display Options
20.3.3 AC-DC Page

networks.
ID
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the IDs on the one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the ratings on the one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
KVA
HP/kW
kV
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages on the one-line
diagram.
20-31
Display Options
A
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the ampere ratings on the one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Input, Output, & DC FLA
Composite Network
Select this option to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
Use Default Options

Select this option to use ETAPs default display options.
20-32
Display Options
20.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for displaying information annotations for DC elements.
Color Theme
Annotations
20-33
Display Options
Theme
This option allows the color theme selected in the color Theme list for element annotations to be applied
globally throughout all diagrams. When the option is selected, the name assigned to the applied color
theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
The Theme Editor allows you to select existing color themes or define a new color theme.
Note: Color themes are applied globally within a project file. Changes made on a color theme displayed
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously
selected.
20-34
Calculation Method
20.4 Calculation Method

ETAP provides a novel and powerful technique of Newton-Raphson 3-phase power flow calculations
using the current injection method. The 3-phase current injection equations are written in rectangular
coordinates. An efficient sparse matrix technique for ordering, factorization, and forward/backward
substitution is applied. This method has been used to compute power flows on real balanced and
unbalanced distribution systems and has been shown to be very robust and to converge in less iterations
than other methods, especially for heavily loaded systems.
The current injection method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:
abc
[Vrmabc ][Y abc ] = [I mr
]
where Vrmabc is a 3-phase bus voltage vector in an incremental form, and Imrabc is a 3-phase bus current
injection mismatch vector between specified value and calculated value; and Yabc is the corresponding
Jacobian matrix. The off-diagonal elements of Yabc are identical to the corresponding elements of the node
admittance matrix; and the diagonal elements of Yabc are dependent on both the corresponding elements of
the node admittance matrix and the load model adopted for each phase at a given bus.
The current injection method has relatively lower requirements of the bus initial voltage values compared
to the Newton-Raphson Method and the fast-decoupled method. Instead of using bus real power and
reactive power mismatch as convergence criteria, the current injection method checks bus voltage
magnitude tolerance between two consecutive iterations to control the solution precision. The typical
value for bus voltage magnitude precision is set to 0.0001 pu.
Unbalanced Load Flow Convergence

As in any iterative solution method, the convergence of the unbalanced load flow solution is affected by a
number of factors specific to power systems.
Negative Impedance
Negative resistance and reactance should be avoided. As an example, the traditional method of modeling
three-winding transformers by a Y equivalent model, using one impedance and two two-winding
transformers, sometimes results in a negative impedance value for one of the impedance branches. In this
case, the negative impedance should be combined with other series circuit elements so that the result is a
positive impedance value. Load flow calculations may not converge if a large value of negative
impedance is used. ETAP can now model three-winding transformers directly with no need for users to
do any conversions.
Zero or Very Small Impedance

A zero or very small impedance value of any branch is not allowed, since this will result in infinity or a
huge number in the system admittance matrix. You should represent this type of impedance by a tie
circuit breaker to solve the problem.
Widely Different Branch Impedance Values

Widely different branch impedance values on the same per unit base may result in a slow convergence.
To avoid this situation, various techniques, such as combining series branches with low impedance
values, ignoring short length transmission lines and/or cables, or modeling a small impedance branch with
tie circuit breakers, can be employed.
20-35
Calculation Method
Long Radial System Configurations

Long radial system configurations usually take more time to converge than loop configurations.
Bad Bus Voltage Initial Values

Solution convergence speed and computing time are functions of the initial voltages for load-type buses.
The closer the initial voltages are to their final profile, the faster the solution converges. The solution may
not converge if the initial voltages are too far from the final profile, thus it is recommended that the
Update Bus Voltage option be used to obtain a set of sound initial bus voltages.
Modeling of Power Sources

Power sources include generators and utilities with a mode of swing, voltage control, or Mvar/PF control.
The internal sequence impedances of power sources are employed to represent the inherent source phase
imbalance due to distribution system imbalance. The sequence models of a power source are quite simple,
shown below, where y0, y1, and y2 are respectively the positive-, negative-, and zero-sequence
admittances, and II is an equivalent current source.
I0
I1
V0
y0
II
Zero
Sequence
I2
V1
y2
y1
Positive
Sequence
V2
Negative
Sequence
Sequence Models of a Power Source
Swing Mode
The specified constraints for a swing power source are the magnitude and the phase angle of the positive
sequence voltage at the swing source terminal. The use of positive sequence representation for voltage
magnitude regulation makes it possible to properly represent the automatic voltage regulation (AVR)
mechanism of a power source, where in most cases; the average voltage magnitudes of all three phases is
the voltage magnitude that is regulated. Under unbalanced conditions, the negative and zero sequence
voltages may be non-zero.
Voltage Control Mode

The constants for a power source of voltage control mode are the total output of 3-phase real powers and
the magnitude of the positive sequence terminal voltage.
Mvar/PF Control Mode

The constants for a power source of Mvar/PF control mode are the total output of 3-phase real powers and
the total output of 3-phase reactive powers.
Modeling of Loads
Constant Power Load
Constant power loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, conventional and unbalanced
lumped loads with % motor load, UPS, and chargers. The power output remains constant for all changes
in input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant power load:
20-36
Calculation Method
Note: The constant power loads of 3-phase induction motors, synchronous motors, and conventional and
unbalanced lumped loads with % motor load are all treated as the Mvar control mode sources with
negative power generations. These types of loads have the same structures as the synchronous and
induction generators of Mvar control mode, and only the total of 3-phase power outputs / inputs for such a
load remains constant for unbalanced situations. Because of the difficulty of multiple solutions, ETAP
does not allow for the constant power unbalanced lumped loads (with % motor load) connected in Y with
open neutral.
Constant Impedance Load

unbalanced lumped loads with % static load. The input power increases proportionally to the square of the
input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant impedance load:
Constant Current Loads

Constant current loads include lumped loads operating in unbalanced mode. The current remains constant
for all changes in voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant current load:
20-37
Calculation Method
Generic Load
Generic loads include lumped loads operating in either exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive mode.
A generic load model expresses the characteristics of the load at any instant of time as algebraic functions
of the bus voltage magnitude and frequency at that instant.
Exponential Model:
( ) (1 + K
Q = Q (V ) (1 + K
P = P0 V
pf
qf
f )
f )
For this and other generic models,
V =
V
V0
where P and Q are active and reactive components of the load when the bus voltage magnitude is V
and f is the frequency deviation ( f f 0 ) . The subscript
identifies the values of the respective
variables at the initial operating condition. Typically K pf ranges from 0 to 3.0, and K qf ranges from 2.0
to zero.
The parameters of this model are the exponents a and b . With these exponents equal to 0, 1, or 2, the
model represents constant power, constant current, or constant impedance characteristics, respectively.
Polynomial Model:
[
Q = Q [q V
]
+ q V + q ](1 + K
P = P0 p1V + p 2 V + p3 (1 + K pf f )
0
qf
f )
The polynomial model is composed of constant impedance, constant current, and constant power
components. The parameters of the model are the coefficients p1 , p 2 , p3 , q1 , q 2 , and q3 , which define
the proportion of each component.
20-38

Comprehensive Model:
Calculation Method
P = P0 [PPOLY + PEXP1 + PEXP 2 ]
where:
2
PPOLY = p1V + p 2 V + p3
( ) (1 + K
= p (V ) (1 + K
PEXP1 = p 4 V
PEXP 2
a1
pf 1
f )
a2
pf 2
f )
The expression for the reactive component of the load has a similar structure. The reactive power
compensation associated with the load is represented separately.
Modeling of Transmission Lines

A transmission line can be modeled as 3-phase, 3-phase, or single phase with any geometry configuration,
and can be coupled with other transmission lines. Currently, a transmission line can belong to one
coupling group only. The Kron Method is used to handle neutral wires, as the average grounding model is
typically used in distribution systems. The Kron Reduction Method makes the assumption that the neutral
voltage at a branch end is equal to zero.
Modeling of Transformers
ETAP uses a combined model of common transformers and regulating transformers. This model can
accommodate any phase shift, grounding impedance, and different positive/negative and zero sequence
impedance.
The (3) 1-phase transformer, open delta transformer are modeled phase by phase based on the single
phase transformer parameters. Single phase center-tap transformer is modeled by assuming the solid
connection to the reference point of the power grid at the center-tap point of the transformer.
Modeling of AC-DC Converters

In a Load Flow Study, chargers are represented as constant kVA loads connected to their AC input bus.
An inverter is represented as an AC source without considering the internal impedances, which can have
several operating modes as a generator can have.
Modeling of HVDC
An HVDC Link is not considered in the Unbalanced Load Flow Study. In the event any HVDC Link is
detected, an error will be posted.
Modeling of SVC
The voltage support capability of the SVC deteriorates with decreasing system voltage. The 3-phase SVC
is connected in Delta.
Modeling of UPS
In a Load Flow Study, the UPS is represented as a constant load at its input side and a swing source at its
output side (where the output side is energized).
20-39
Calculation Method
When the UPS is selected as a load based on its loading category in its loading page, the system that is
connected to the UPS output side will be de-energized if there is not any other swing sources in the
system and the UPS is modeled as a pure constant load.
UPS Output Side is De-energized

When the UPS is selected as a load based on its connected load, the UPS output bus will be modeled as a
swing bus with the UPS rated output voltage as its regulating voltage for its output bus. Then the
calculated UPS output bus loading will be treated/shared as the UPS output side loading.
If multiple UPS selected as connected loads share the same output bus, the calculated UPS output bus
loading will be shared among all the UPS by their maximum rated currents. The UPS output side loading
will be reflected onto the UPS input bus by considering its efficiency and the operating input power factor
selection in its loading page. For example, if the UPS share of its output bus loading is P + j*Q, then the
UPS loading will be reflected onto its input bus based on the operating input PF selection as a load:
1. P/EFF + j*P/EFF*sqrt(1-PF*PF)/PF where EFF is the UPS efficiency and PF is the rated or userdefined power factor.
2. P/EFF + j*Q when connected load power factor is selected.
Modeling of VFD
In a Load Flow Study, the VFD is modeled the same way as the UPS except for:
The VFD is modeled as a load based on its connected load.
The VFD output swing bus voltage is specified by the VFD loading category.
The VFD output side loading will be reflected onto its input side and shared equally by its input
branches if the VFD is connected to multiple input branches. Otherwise, the VFD output side loading
will be reflected onto its input bus.
Different Factors Considered in Load Calculation

ETAP provides you with great flexibility in modeling load variations through different load factors, such
as demand factor, load percent, service factor, and application factor. Depending on your specifications,
these factors are used differently in calculating loads under several circumstances:
Load Editor Calculation of load for Loading Categories and voltage drop
Input for Studies Calculation of load specification for load flow and initial load for motor starting
Studies Results Calculation of load displayed in one-line diagram from load flow, motor starting,
and Transient Stability Studies
Bus Editor Sum of load connected to a bus
The following two tables describe how these factors are used in these cases:
20-40
Calculation Method
Factors Used for Motor Load Calculation

Load Editor
Load Loss Vd
Bus Nominal kV
Bus Operating V
Input to Studies
Load
Loss
x

Load
Loss
Vd
x
Bus
Editor
x
Demand Factor
Loading %
20-41
Service Factor
App. Factor
Load Quantity
Calculation Method
Factors Used for Static Load Calculation

Load Editor
Load Loss Vd
Bus Nominal kV
Bus Operating V
Input to Studies
Load
Loss
x

Load Loss
Vd
x
Bus
Editor
x
Demand Factor
Loading %
App. Factor
Load Quantity
*
x
x
*

*
*
*
*
*
* Indicates the factor is used in calculation if you have specified it in the related Load Editor or Study
Case.
Notes:
Motor load includes induction motor and generator, synchronous motor, MOV, and motor load
portion of lumped load.
Static load includes static load, capacitor, and static load portion of lumped load.
20-42
Panel System Calculation
20.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation

The panel system load flow will be carried out along with the unbalanced system in an unbalanced load
flow run. Due to special conditions for panel systems, the calculations are performed with a different
method from the one used for the unbalanced multi-phase system.
The loads from a panel system are summed up for the specified Load Category to the top element (a
panel) of the panel system, and this top element is treated as a load to the up system. In this load
summation, loads are added up under rated voltage without considering losses and voltage drop.
Panel Systems
A panel system is defined as a radial sub-system that is powered through a most top panel. A power
system may contain several panel systems.
Special Conditions for Panel System Load Flow Calculation

Looped Panel System
A panel system should be a radial sub-system. There should be no loops involved. Before load flow
calculation, ETAP checks for loop configurations. If any loops are detected in a panel system, an error
will be posted.
Transformer LTC
A transformer load tap changer (LTC) is not considered for any transformer in panel systems. Even if the
LTC field is checked in the Transformer Editor, it will be ignored in panel load flow calculation.
Branch Shunt Impedance

Shunt impedance for branches such as cable, transmission line, and impedance are not included in the
panel system load flow calculation.
Feeder Cable for Panel Internal Loads

In the load flow calculation, internal loads for a panel are lumped into an equivalent load. As a result,
losses caused by feeder cables of panel internal loads are not considered in panel system load flow
calculation. However, feeder cables for external loads are included in the calculation.
Calculation Method
The panel system load flow calculation is carried out sequentially with 3-phase load flow to achieve
accurate results. The calculation involved three stages.
Before the 3-phase system load flow calculation, a load flow computation is carried out for each panel
system for the Loading Category and diversity factors specified in the Study Case. In this computation,
the terminal bus voltage at each phase of the top element is assumed to be fixed at its initial value as
entered in the bus Editor. The purpose of this pre-load flow calculation is to accurately calculate panel
system load, including branch losses and the effect of voltage drop on various types of loads.
20-43
Panel System Calculation
Once the panel system load is calculated, it is stored in the top element. The 3-phase system load flow
calculation is then carried out, in which the top element of each panel system is represented as a single
load connected to a 3-phase bus.
After the 3-phase system load flow is completed, a load flow calculation is carried out again for each
panel system with the updated terminal bus voltage at each phase of the top element just calculated from
the 3-phase system load flow. The results of the calculation are reported on the one-line diagram and in
Crystal Reports
.
20-44
Required Data
20.6 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for buses includes:
Nominal kV
%V and angle (when Initial Condition is set to use bus voltages)
Load diversity factor (when the Loading option is set to use diversity factor)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors (that is, the Transformer, Transmission Line, Cable,
Reactor, and Impedance Editors). Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for branches
includes:

Power Grid Data

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for power grids includes:
Operating Mode (swing, voltage control, Mvar control, or PF control)

Nominal kV
%V and angle for swing mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode
MW loading and PF for PF mode
Single-phase MVAsc and X/R

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for synchronous generators includes:
Operating Mode (Swing, voltage control, or Mvar control)

Rated kV
%V and angle for swing mode of operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode of operation
MW loading and PF for PF mode
20-45
Required Data
Xd, X2, X0, and X/R

Inverter Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for inverters includes:
Inverter ID

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for synchronous motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Loading Category ID and % loading
Phase type
Xd, X2, X0, and X/R (when 3-phase)
Grounding types and parameters (when 3-phase)

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for induction motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Phase type
Xsc, X2, X0, and X/R (when 3-phase)
Static Load Data

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for static loads includes:
Static load ID
Power factor
Phase type
Grounding types (when 3-phase)
20-46
Required Data
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Phase type
Grounding types (when 3-phase)
Lumped Load Data

Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % motor load
Phase type
Xsc and X/R (when 3-phase)
Charger & UPS Data

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for chargers and UPSs includes:
Element ID
Rated AC kV, MVA, efficiency, and power factor, as well as DC rating data
SVC Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for SVC includes:
Element ID
Rated kV
Vmax
Vmin
Vref
Rated Ql and Qc
Qlmax and Qcmin
Panel Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for panels includes:
Element ID
Rated kV and amps
Number of branch circuits
Phasing, number of poles, and state
Connection type (such as internal, external, or spare)
20-47
Required Data
Other Data
There are some Study Case-related data, which must also be provided. These include:
Maximum iteration
Precision
Loading Category
Initial condition
Update (for bus voltages and transformer LTCs using load flow result)
The Study Case-related data is entered into the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor.
20-48
Output Reports
20.7 Output Reports

The unbalanced load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in Crystal
Reports format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows, and
voltage drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the
content to be displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and overor under-voltage buses, in different colors.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for an Unbalanced Load Flow
Analysis. You can utilize the Unbalanced Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the Output
Report.

This is a shortcut for the Report Manager. When you click the View Output Report button, ETAP
picture shown below, the Output Report name is ULF and the selected format is Cable.
20-49
Output Reports

To open Report Manager, click the Report Manager button on the Unbalanced Load Flow toolbar. The
editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different portions of the
Output Report. The Report Manager allows you to select file types available for different portions of the
report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to every page, as
described below.

checkbox.
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the Output Report you want to view.
Path
Help
Click this button to access Help.
OK/Cancel
Click OK to close the editor and open the Crystal Reports view to show the selected portion of the Output
Report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click Cancel to close the editor without viewing
the report.
20-50
Output Reports
20.7.3 Input Data

This page allows you to select different file types for viewing input data, grouped according to type. They
include:
Adjustments
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Equipment Cable
Impedance and Line
Line Coupling
Line Impedance Matrices
Reactor
SVC
Transformer
20-51
Output Reports
20-52
Output Reports
20.7.4 Result
This page allows you to select file types to view the load flow result portion of the Output Report.
20-53
Output Reports
20-54
Output Reports
20.7.5 Summary
This page allows you to select different portions of the load flow summary to view.
Note: Some portions of the summary are available only when you select specific options in the Study
Case, such as critical and marginal voltage options.
Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Branch Loading
Bus Loading
Losses
Summary
20-55
Output Reports
20.7.6 Complete
The only file type available on this page is Complete, which brings up the Complete Report for the Load
Flow Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
20-56
Output Reports
20-57
Alert View
20.8 Alert View

The Alert View contains a list of all the alerts generated by the unbalanced load flow calculation. The
Alert View window may be configured to automatically display as soon as the unbalanced load flow
calculation is over, by selecting the Auto Display option on the Alert page of the Unbalanced Load Flow
Study Case. It may also be accessed by clicking the Alert View button. The Alert View provides tabulated
columns of information about the reported alerts. For information about the alerts for each element type,
see the Alert View section in Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Device ID
The Device Identification column of the Alert View lists the names of all the components that qualified as
alerts after the unbalanced load flow calculation.
Type
The Type column of the Alert View displays information about the type of device having the displayed
alert.
Condition
The Conditions column of the Alert View provides a brief comment about the type of alert being reported.
In the case of unbalanced load flow alerts, the different conditions reported are Overloads, Over Voltage,
Under Voltage, Over Excited, and Under Excited.
Rating/Limit
The Rating/Limit column of the Alert View provides the rating information being used by the unbalanced
load flow program to determine whether an alert should be reported and whether it is marginal or critical.
For detailed information on alerts for each type of element, see the Alert Page section in Chapter 15, Load
Flow Analysis.
20-58
Alert View
Operating A, B, and C
The Operating A, B, and C columns of the Alert View display the results from the unbalanced load flow
calculation. The results listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the Rating/Limit
column to determine the operating percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the
Load Flow Study Case Editor Alert page.
%Op. A, B, C
The %Value column displays the percent operating values calculated based on the unbalanced load flow
results and the different element ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of
monitored parameters entered directly into the Alert page of the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case
Editor. Based on the element type, system topology, and given conditions, the Alert Simulation program
uses these percent values to determine if and what kind of alert should be displayed.
20-59
Chapter 21
Motor Acceleration
During the motor starting period, the starting motor appears to the system as small impedance connected
to a bus. It draws a large current from the system, about six times the motor rated current, which therefore
results in voltage drops in the system and imposes disturbances to the normal operation of other system
loads. Since the motor acceleration torque is dependent on motor terminal voltage, in some cases the
starting motor may not be able to reach its rated speed due to extremely low terminal voltage. This makes
it necessary to perform a Motor Starting Analysis. The purpose of performing a motor starting study is
twofold: to investigate whether the starting motor can be successfully started under the operating
conditions, and to see if starting the motor will seriously impede the normal operation of other loads in
the system.
ETAP provides two types of motor starting calculations: Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor
Starting. In the Dynamic Motor Acceleration calculation, the starting motors are represented by dynamic
models and the Motor Acceleration Module simulates the entire process of motor acceleration. This
method is used to determine if a motor can be started and how much time is needed for the motor to reach
its rated speed, as well as to determine the effect of voltage dips on the system. In Static Motor Starting,
the starting motors are modeled by the locked-rotor impedance during acceleration time, simulating the
worst impact on normal operating loads. This method is suitable for checking the effect of motor starting
on the system when the dynamic model is not available for starting motors.
The Motor Acceleration Chapter is divided into the following sections:
The Motor Starting Toolbar section explains how to start a motor starting calculation, to open and
view an Output Report, and to select display options.
The Motor Starting Study Case Editor section explains how you can create a new Study Case, what
parameters are required to specify a Study Case, and how to set the parameters.
The Display Options Section explains available options for displaying some key system parameters
and the output results on the one-line diagram.
The Motor Starting Calculation Methods section describes calculation methods used by the module.
The Required Data for Calculations section describes what data are necessary to perform motor
starting studies and where to enter them.
The last three sections describe how to view calculation results.
21-1
Motor Acceleration
21.1 Motor Starting Toolbar

Run Dynamic Motor Starting
Run Static Motor Starting
Display Options
Alert View
Report Manager
Motor Starting Plots
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
Run Dynamic Motor Starting

Click this button to perform a time-domain simulation for starting and/or switching off motors and static
loads. Accelerating motors are modeled dynamically for this study; therefore, related motor parameters
such as dynamic model (or LR model for synchronous motors), inertia, and starting load must be
specified. Motors (induction and synchronous) and static loads can be switched off and on in any event
created.
Run Static Motor Starting

Click this button to perform a time-domain simulation for starting and/or switching off motors and static
loads. For this study, starting motors are modeled as constant impedance loads calculated from their
locked-rotor currents with a user-defined acceleration time. Required parameters for this study include the
locked-rotor current and power factor, acceleration time at no-load and full-load, and starting load.
Motors (induction and synchronous), MOVs, and static loads can be switched off and on in any event
created.
Display Options
Click this button to customize the information and results annotations displayed on the one-line diagram
in Motor Starting Mode.
Alert View
Click this button to bring up Motor Starting Analysis Alert View, which lists all critical and marginal
alerts for a study based on the set up in the Alert page of the Study Case used.
21-2
Motor Acceleration
Report Manager
Motor acceleration output reports are provided in Crystal Reports. The Report Manager provides four
pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report for both
text and Crystal Reports. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report
Manager for motor starting (dynamic and static) studies.
Crystal Reports formatted reporting is activated by choosing a format in the Report Manager. You can
open the whole study output report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection. You can view
the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel
format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
You can also view Output Reports by clicking the Output Report button on the Study Case toolbar. A list
of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for motor starting calculations. To view any
of the listed Output Reports, click the Output Report name, and then click the List Output Report button.
Motor Starting Plots

To view plots of accelerated motors, click this button to bring up a dialog box to select motors from a
drop-down list.
21-3
Motor Acceleration

The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a motor acceleration calculation has been initiated, this
button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking this button will terminate the current
calculation. One-line diagram display will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it
completes; but the Output Report and plots do store the calculation results up to the time when you
terminate the calculation.
Get On-Line Data

If your ETAP installation has the on-line feature (Real-Time Module), you can copy the on-line data to
the current presentation.
Get Archived Data

If your ETAP installation has the on-line feature (Real-Time Module), you can copy the archived data to
the current presentation.
21-4
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor

The Motor Starting Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, prestart loading conditions,
motor starting events, and a variety of options for output reports. The Study Case is used for both
dynamic and static motor acceleration studies.
ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases. Motor starting calculations are
conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the Study Case selected in the toolbar. You can
switch between Study Cases without resetting the options each time. This feature is designed to organize
your study efforts and save you time.
As part of the multi-dimension database concept of ETAP, Study Cases can be used for any combination
of the three major system toolbar components (Configuration Status, One-Line Diagram Presentation, and
Base/Revision Data).
The Motor Starting Study Case Editor can be accessed by first selecting the Motor Starting Analysis
Mode from the Status/Mode toolbar, then clicking the Study Case button from the Motor Starting toolbar.
You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking the Motor Starting Study Case folder.
To create a new Study Case, go to the Project View, right-click the Motor Starting Study Case folder, and
select Create New. The Motor Acceleration module will then create a new study case, which is a copy of
the default Study Case, and adds it to the Motor Starting Study Case folder.
21-5
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
21.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
The Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and
entering the new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters in length. Use the
Navigator button at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to the next existing Study Case.
Solution Parameters
This option allows you to choose solution control values for the load flow and motor starting solutions as
well as the plot resolution.
Max. Iteration
This value determines the maximum number of iterations ETAP can make while solving the load flow
equations. This means that the load flow should quit if it has not converged after the number of iterations
you specify here. Since dynamic and static motor starting calculation methods use the Newton-Raphson
algorithm, typical systems are solved within two to three iterations. We recommend choosing a minimum
of five iterations. If the solution does not converge, you may want to increase this number, as well as
decrease the value you have specified for precision.
21-6
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Precision
The load flow algorithm works by an iterating procedure until the motor loads, it calculates for each bus
match the motor loads which are scheduled for each bus. The difference is called system mismatch.
Solution Precision tells ETAP how many mismatches are allowed for a solution to be considered valid.
When the mismatch for the motor MW and Mvar on each individual bus is below the value you enter for
precision, ETAP halts the load flow solution and declares that the solution has converged. Try using a
value of 0.001 to begin. If your system will not converge, try increasing this value incrementally (for
example, to 0.005, etc.) until it converges.
Simulation Time Step

Enter the simulation time step for motor starting calculations. The recommended simulation time step is
0.001 second. If the simulation time step is too small, accumulation of the round off errors can cause
inaccurate results. On the other hand, if this value is too large, calculation results may not capture the
dynamic characteristics corresponding to very small time constants of the control equipment or system.
Plot Time Step

This value determines how often ETAP should record the results of the simulation for plotting. For
instance, if you specify 20 steps, ETAP will plot points at every 20 X simulation time step (for example,
for a simulation time step of 0.001 plot time step will be .02 seconds). The smaller this number is, the
smoother your plots will look, but also remember that the plot files on your hard disk may grow quite
large. The main thing to keep in mind is that ETAP records plot information at this interval throughout
the simulation. So if you specified a simulation time step of 0.001 seconds, plot time step of 10, and a
total time of 20 seconds, ETAP will write 20/(0.001*10)= 2000 points to disk, which is a large plot file.

Select this option to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found in the Transformer Editor.
Prestart Loading Category

This option allows you to specify how the system is loaded prior to starting any motors and/or switching
on any static loads. You can select prestarting loads by loading categories or from operating load.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for prestart loading in the motor starting study case. With the
selection of any category, ETAP uses the percent loading of all motors and other loads as specified for
that category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Motor
Editors and the Loading page of the Static Load Editors.
Operating P, Q
This option is enabled only if your installation of ETAP has the on-line feature (Real-Time Module).
When this option is selected, the operating load will be used as the prestart load instead of the Loading
Category.
Prestart Generation Category

This option allows you to specify how the generators and power grids are operating prior to starting any
motors and/or switching on any static loads. You can select prestarting generation by generation
categories or from operating values.
21-7
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Generation Category
Select one of the 10 generation categories for prestart generation. With the selection of any category,
ETAP uses the generation values as specified for that category in the Rating page of a generator or a
power grid. Depending on the operating mode of the source, the generation values may include voltage
magnitude and angle, real and reactive power, or power factor.
Operating P, Q, V
When this option is selected, the operating values will be used as the prestart generation instead of the
Generation Category.
Note: The operating values for a generator or a power grid can be entered from the Rating page of its
editor or be updated automatically from a load flow calculation.
Prestart Charger Loading

This group allows you to select the charger loading source.
Loading Category
When this option is selected, the load from the category specified in the Category field will be used to
calculate the charger load for the prestarting load flow.
Operating Load
When this option is selected, the charger operating load will be used for the prestarting load flow.
Note: The charger operating load is updated from DC Load Flow Studies when the Updating Charger
Load option has been selected in the DC Load Flow Study Case.

This group allows you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the loading category load. When
the Operating Load is selected, no diversity factor is considered.
None
Select this option to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Maximum
When this option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied
by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow studies with each bus
having a different maximum diversity factor.
Bus Minimum
When this option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied
by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow studies with each bus
having a different minimum diversity factor.
21-8
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Global
Enter the diversity factors for all Constant kVA, Constant Z, Constant I, and Generic loads. When you
select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all loads of the selected category with the entered load
diversity factors according to load types.
25 percent above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100 percent.
Report
Bus Voltage in Percent
Prints Calculated bus voltages in the Output Report as a percentage of the bus nominal voltages. For
information about graphical display of bus voltages, see Section 21.3, Display Options.
Bus Voltage in kV
Prints Calculated bus voltages in the Output Report in kV. For information about graphical display of bus
voltages, see Section 21.3, Display Options.
Skip Tabulated Plots

Check this box to skip generating tabulated plots in the Output Report. This will significantly reduce the
calculation time.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remark box. Information entered here will be
printed on the second line of every Output Report page header. These remarks can provide specific
information regarding each Study Case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all Study Cases and entered in the Project
Information Editor.
21-9
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
21.2.2 Time Event Page

ETAP allows you to set up unlimited number of events to simulate switching actions in a single Motor
Starting simulation. You can start or switch off individual loads or categorized motor groups with the
Action by Load and Action by Starting Category features, respectively. You can also change the
operating load by clicking the Load Transitioning option to change from one loading category to another.
You can start or switch off multiple loads by starting category and/or by individual load.
Note: The Motor Acceleration Module assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the
loads that are started or switched off in time events.
If you start an already running load, ETAP will ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an
already switched off load, ETAP will ignore the second switch off action.
Note: You can specify conflicting actions on a motor during the same time event by using the Action by
Starting Category and Action by Load options. In such an event, the Motor Acceleration module checks
the action specified by Action by Load first, and then checks the Action by Category event. The first valid
action gets executed in the simulation and the rest are ignored.
21-10
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Events
The Events Group lists all the events you specified in the study case according to their time of occurrence.
The active events are flagged by a * sign and are listed before inactive events. In the calculation, only
active events are simulated. For each event, it displays the event name and the time of occurrence. When
you click an event from the list, all the actions defined for the event are displayed in the other groups on
the page.
You may Add, Edit or Delete an event by clicking the corresponding buttons.
Add
When you click the Add button, it brings up the Event Editor for you to add a new event.
Active
Select this option to activate the event. When an event is inactive, it will not be considered in the motor
starting calculations.
Event ID
Enter a name for the event. It can be an alphanumeric string up to 12 characters long. This name does not
have to be unique, but it is suggested to use a unique name for each event within a given Study Case.
Time
Enter the time for each time event in seconds.
Note: ETAP lists events in the order of the time defined here.
Edit
When you click the Edit button while an event is selected from the Events list, it brings up the Event
Editor with all the information for the event for you to modify. For description of the Event Editor, see
the Add Section above.
Delete
When you click the Delete button while an event is selected from the Events list, it removes the events
and associated actions from the Study Case.
Note: All changes, including removing an event, will not take effect until you click the OK button or
navigate to another Study Case.
21-11
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Total Simulation Time

Total Simulation Time is the amount of time, in seconds, that you want the simulation to run. For
instance, let's say you set up the following scenario:
t1 = 0.00
t2 = 0.10
t3 = 0.20
Nothing happens during this time event

Start motor Mtr10 and switch on static load Stat2 on bus 20
Switch off Mtr8 on bus 10
Total Simulation Time = 2.00

This simulation will go as follows: at time t1 = 0, ETAP will run a load flow, using the prestart loading
you selected, to find the initial conditions of the system. At time t2 = 0.1 seconds, ETAP will begin
accelerating motor Mtr10 and switch on static load Stat2 on bus 20. At time t3 = 0.2 seconds, ETAP will
switch off the motor Mtr8 on bus 10. The simulation will continue for 1.8 more seconds, until time T =
2.0 seconds, when the simulation ends and the plots and summary reports are generated. As you can see,
the total time must be greater than your last event time.
Action by Element
This feature allows you to switch on/off any existing motor or static load or change Generation Category
of a generator/power grid in a time event. The list of loads and sources that have been selected is
displayed in the Action by Element list box.
Add
To add a switching action for a motor, MOV, static load, generator, or power grid, click the Add button to
open the Add Action By Element Editor. This editor allows you to add and/or modify a motor, MOV,
static load, generator, or power grid specifications, such as start/switch off, starting categories and
generation categories. Click the OK button and the specifications of the selected elements will be
displayed in the Action by Element list box.
21-12
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Element Type
Motor Starting studies simulate switching of three types of loads: induction/synchronous motor, static
load and capacitor, and MOV. ETAP also simulates change of Generation Category for a generator or a
power grid.
Action
Select this option to switch/stop motor, switch on/off a static load or a capacitor, start an MOV, or change
Generation Category for a generator or a power grid. If you start an already running load, ETAP will
ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an already switched off load, ETAP will ignore the
second switch off action.
Note: ETAP assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the loads that are started or
switched off in time events.
Motor, Load, MOV, Generator
ID
Select an element ID from the drop-down list. The content in this list varies according to element type
selected. For motor load, it contains all induction and synchronous motors; for static load, it contains all
static loads and capacitors; for MOV, it contains all the MOVs; and for Gen/Power Grid, it contains all
the generator and power grids in the system.
Starting Category
When Motor is selected from Element Type, this field shows up for you to specify a predefined starting
category from the list box. This list contains all ten motor starting categories. Information for starting
categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of Induction and Synchronous Motor Editors, including
starting and final loading percent, as well as begin and end time of load change. When starting a motor by
element, you do not need to select the Starting Category option to use the loading and time data defined
for the Starting Category.
Note: The Starting Category is not applicable to static loads.
Loading Category
When Static Load is selected from Element Type and the selected action is Switch On, this field shows up
for you to specify a predefined Loading Category from the drop-down list. This list contains all ten
21-13
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
loading categories. The loading percent of the specified Loading Category, as defined in the Loading page
of Static Load Editor, will be used to determine the amount of load to be switched on.
Generation Category
When Gen/Power Grid is selected from Element Type, this field shows up for you to specify a predefined
generation category from the list box. This list box contains all ten generation categories. The
generator/power grid operating data from the selected category, as defined in the Rating page of
Synchronous Generator Editor or Power Grid Editor, will be used to simulate its operating condition.
Edit
To edit an action, click its action item and then click the Edit button. The Edit button opens the Edit
Action By Element editor. This editor allows you to modify the data. The options in this editor are the
same as those for the Add Action by Element Editor. For information about the Add Action by Element
Editor, see the Add Section above.
Delete
To delete an action from the Action by Element list, select the element by clicking its action item and then
click the Delete button. The selected load will be removed from the action list.
Action by Starting Category

This feature allows you to start motors by predefined motor starting categories.
Note: Motor starting categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of the Induction Motor, Synchronous
Motor, and MOV Editors. The selected motor groups are displayed in the Action by Starting Category list
box.
Add
To start or switch off a predefined group of motors, click on the Add button to open the Add Action By
Starting Category Editor. This editor allows you to add and/or modify motor group specifications, such as
start/switch off, starting categories, and connected bus IDs. Click the OK button and the specifications of
the motor groups selected in this editor will be displayed in the Action by Starting Category list box.
21-14
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Action
Select Start or Switch Off for the selected motor group. If you start an already running load, ETAP will
ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an already switched off load, ETAP will ignore the
second switch off action.
Note: ETAP assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the loads that are started in time
events.
By Category
Starting Category
Select a predefined Starting Category from the list box. This list box contains all ten motor starting
categories. Motor starting categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of Induction and Synchronous
Motor Editors.
Bus ID
Select a bus ID to define the motor starting group from the drop-down list. This list contains all bus IDs
created for the electrical system under study. In addition, you can choose Start or Switch Off for all buses
defined by a Starting Category by selecting All Buses from the Bus ID list.
Edit
To edit a selected group of motors, click its action item and then click the Edit button. The Edit button
opens the Add Action By Starting Category Editor. This editor allows you to modify the data. For
information about the Add Action by Element Editor, see the Add Section above.
Delete
To delete a motor group from the Action by Starting Category listing, select the motor group by clicking
its action item, and then click the Delete button. The selected motor group will be removed from the
action list.
Action by Load Transitioning

This feature allows you to change operating load from one Loading Category to another. In changing the
loading category, if a motor load is changed from a zero percent to a non-zero percent load, it will create
an action to start the motor. However, once a motor is started by an action from Load Transition, the Load
Transition option will not apply to the motor anymore. Furthermore, once a load, including motors, static
21-15
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
loads, and capacitors, has been switched on or off through Action by Load or Action by Starting
Category, the Load Transition option will not apply to this load from that point on.
Active
Select this option to activate load transitioning in this event.
Loading Category
Select a new Loading Category from the list.
Exclude MV Load >=

Select this option to enable the kVA field on the right. Enter the kVA limit in the field for medium
voltage loads to be ignored in the Load Transition. If this option is cleared, medium voltage loads of all
sizes will be considered in the Load Transition. Loads with rated voltage higher than 1 kV are considered
as medium voltage loads.
Exclude LV Load >=

Select this option to enable the kVA field on the right. Enter the kVA limit in the field for low voltage
loads to be ignored in the Load Transition. If this option is cleared, low voltage loads of all sizes will be
considered in the Load Transition. Loads with rated voltage not higher than 1 kV are considered as low
voltage loads.
kVA
Once enabled, you can enter a limit for load capacity rating in this text box.
Note: A value of zero means that no loads are considered in the Load Transition.
21-16
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
21.2.3 Model Page

In the Model page specify model information for transformer LTCs and motor loads.
Transformer LTC
Include Automatic Action
In this group you can specify the transformer LTC feature to be simulated in motor starting studies.
For Prestart Load Flow
If this option is selected, automatic voltage regulation actions and LTCs of transformers, if there are any,
will be simulated in the prestart load flow calculation.
During & After Motor Acceleration
If this option is selected, LTCs of transformers, if there are any, will be simulated in calculations after the
prestart load flow.
Time Delay
During motor starting, the Motor Acceleration module will check the voltages of the LTC regulated buses
and set up an internal clock with a time delay. If a voltage is out-of-range and stays out-of-range, at the
end of the initial delay time (Ti), the module will check the voltage again and decide whether to reset the
21-17
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
clock or initiate an LTC tap adjustment. In the latter case, it will take a time duration equal to the
operating time (Tc) to complete the LTC tap change. This process will continue until the final voltage
falls within the regulating range or the LTC has reached its limits.
In this group you specify the LTC time delay used in the calculation. The information in this group is
applied in the study only when the During & After Motor Acceleration option is selected.
Use Individual LTC Time Delay

If this option is selected, the initial time delay and the operating time entered in the individual
Transformer Editor will be used in the calculation.
Use Global Time Delay

When this option is selected, the values entered in the Initial Time Delay and Operating Time fields will
be used in the calculation. This means that all of the LTCs in the system will assume the same initial time
delay and operating time.
Initial Time Delay

In this field you can enter the global initial time delay in seconds.
Operating Time
In this field you can enter the operating time in seconds.
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors

In the motor acceleration calculations, the difference between the motor torque and the load torque is the
motor acceleration torque and a non-zero changes acceleration torque the motor speed. In ETAP, the load
torque model is specified as torque in percent as a function of normalized motor speed. This load torque
may be based on motor electrical rating or on mechanical load. In this group, you indicate to the Motor
Acceleration Module which base you want to use.
Based on Motor Electrical Rating

When this option is selected, it is assumed that the load torque model you selected in the Motor Editor
only represents the shape of the load as a function of speed. The load torque values will be adjusted so
that at the synchronous speed the torque is equal to 100%. This means that, with the modified load curve,
the motor will consume the rated electrical power at 100% starting load, under the rated voltage and at the
rated speed. When this option is selected, the torque base used to construct load torque model has no
effect on calculation results.
Based on Motor Mechanical Load

represents the actual load based on rated output torque. The load curve will be applied as it is without any
adjustments.
To illustrate the implication of this selection, consider a motor that has a start load of 50% and rated
output torque Tr. On the Load page of the motor, the load torque curve is Model 1 given below, which has
a load torque of 80% at operating speed and the curve is based on Tr.
21-18
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Loading

In this case, the load torque curve will be shifted so that the torque at rated speed is 100% of the motor
rated torque. This means that the torque at each point on the load curve will be multiplied by a factor of
1.25 (equal to 1/0.8). This modified curve will be used as the load torque curve for the study. Note that
the modified curve is given as Model 2 above.
Since the starting load is 50%, the actual load will be 50% of the load based on the modified curve
(Model 2) as described above. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5 Tr.
Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load

In this case, the load torque curve will not be shifted because it is assumed to represent the actual load.
However, since the starting load is 50%, the load torque curve will be adjusted so that the torque at each
point of the curve is multiplied by 0.5. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5*0.8 Tr = 0.4 Tr.
Note: If the motor has a load model as given in Model 2 above, there is no difference in calculation
results between the two options.
21-19
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor

This page allows the User to specify tolerance adjustments to transformer, reactor, and overload heater
impedance, cable and transmission line length, and cable and transmission line temperature effect on their
resistance values. Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent
tolerance setting or based on a globally specified percent value.
Impedance Tolerance
In this group, you can specify impedance tolerance values for transformer, reactor, and overload heater.
Transformer
adjustment in motor starting calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent tolerance
value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted
impedance used in the motor starting calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.
specified in the Transformer Editor Rating page. Alternatively, a global Transformer Impedance
Adjustment can be applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the
corresponding field.
21-20
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Reactor
This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Motor Starting module increases the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger impedance value and consequently a
larger voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then
the adjusted reactor impedance used in the Load Flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
specified in the Reactor editor Rating page. Alternatively, a global Reactor Impedance Adjustment can be
applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding.
Overload Heater
This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Motor Starting module increases
the OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and consequently a
larger voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the motor starting calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
value specified in the Overload Heaters Editor Rating page. Alternatively, a global Overload Heater
Resistance Adjustment can be applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than
0% in the corresponding field.
Length Tolerance
You can specify length tolerance values for cables and transmission lines in this group. If Ohms is
selected as the unit for a cable in the Impedance page of Cable Editor, the length tolerance will not be
applied to the cable. Likewise, if Ohms is selected as the unit for a transmission line in the Impedance
page of Transmission Editor, the length tolerance will not be applied to the transmission line.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Motor Starting Module increases the cable length by
the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop. For
the motor starting calculation is 210 ft.
in the Cable Editor Info page. Alternatively, a global Cable Length Adjustment can be applied as well by
selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Motor Starting Module increases the
2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the motor starting calculation is 2.05 miles.
in the Transmission Line Editor Info page. Alternatively, a global Transmission Line Length Adjustment
can be applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding
field.
21-21
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor

This group allows the User to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating
temperature for cable and transmission line conductors. Each temperature resistance correction can be
applied based on the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified
value.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Motor Starting Module adjusts the
field. For more information, see the Cable Editor Impedance Page section in Chapter 11, AC-Editors.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Motor Starting Module
adjusts the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
the corresponding. For more information, see the Transmission Line Editor Impedance Page section in
Chapter 11, AC-Editors.
21-22
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
21.2.5 Alert Page

You can specify the limits for ETAP to raise critical and marginal alerts for a Motor Starting simulation
from the Alert page. The alerts consist of three categories: alerts on starting motor and MOV, alerts on
generator operating conditions, and alerts on bus voltage. Each category also consists of several types.
Select an alert type to have ETAP perform an alert check for that type. If an alert type is not selected,
ETAP will skip the alert check for that alert type.
Critical and Marginal

There are two levels of alerts for a Motor Starting Study: Critical Alert and Marginal Alert. The alert limit
values are set in the Critical and Marginal columns. The difference between Marginal and Critical Alerts
is their use of different percent value conditions to determine if an alert should be generated. If a
condition for a Critical Alert is met, an alert will be generated in the Critical Alert group of the Alert
View window. The same is true for Marginal Alerts. Also, the Marginal Alerts option must be selected to
display the Marginal Alerts. If a device alert qualifies it for both Critical and Marginal Alerts, only
Critical Alerts are displayed.
entered in this page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the following
sections.
21-23
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Starting Motor/MOV
ETAP checks alert for motor terminal voltage and fail to start for starting motors and MOVs.
MOV Terminal Voltage

ETAP checks the terminal voltage of a starting MOV against the limit you set in the Study Case. The alert
limit is a percentage based on MOV rated voltage.
Motor Terminal Voltage

ETAP checks the terminal voltage of a starting motor against the limit you set in the Study Case. The alert
limit is a percentage based on motor rated voltage.
Motor Slip (Fail To Start) >=

Motor slip alert is for identifying fail to start condition for a starting motor. It is applicable only for
Dynamical Motor Acceleration calculations. The alert limit is motor slip in percent. If after a motor is
switched on, its slip is always higher than this limit until the end of simulation, an alert will be generated
by ETAP.
Generator
In this group, you can specify alert limits for operating values of a generator, generator engine and
generator exciter.
You can specify a minimum time of violation for generating an alert for each type of alert in this group.
When a non-zero value is entered in this field, ETAP will generate an alert only when a continuous
violation lasts longer than the minimum time of violation.
Generator Rating
A generator rating alert is generated when the output power (MVA) from a generator is larger than the
alert limit. The alert limit is in percent based on generator rated MVA.
PrimeMover Continuous Rating

As the Prime Mover rating of a generator may not be the same as the generator itself, a separate alert for
Prime Mover rating is needed. A Prime Mover continuous rating alert is generated when the output real
power (MW) from a generator is larger than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent, based on
generator Prime Mover continuous rating, entered in the Prime Mover Rating group of the Rating page in
the Synchronous Generator Editor.
PrimeMover Peak Rating

A Prime Mover peak rating alert is generated when the output real power (MW) from a generator is larger
than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent, based on generator Prime Mover peak rating, entered in
the PrimeMover Rating group of the Rating page in the Synchronous Generator Editor.
Mvar Peak Rating

ETAP provides an alert on the maximum var peak rating for generators. A var peak rating alert is
generated when the output reactive power from a generator is larger than the alert limit. The alert limit is
in percent, based on generator peak var, entered in the Mvar Limits group of the Rating page in the
Synchronous Generator Editor.
21-24
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Bus Voltage
Due to large and heavily reactive currents drawn from starting motors, system under-voltage is always of
great concern in maintaining normal operations during motor starting. To quickly identify any potential
under-voltage problems, ETAP provides different levels of alerts for starting motor terminal buses,
generator and power grid terminal buses, and other buses with different voltage levels.
You can specify a minimum time of violation for generating an alert for each type of alert in this group.
When a non-zero value is entered in this field, ETAP will generate an alert only when a continuous
violation lasts longer than the minimum time of violation.
Starting Motor Term. Voltage

An under-voltage alert for starting motor terminal voltage is generated when the motor terminal voltage is
less than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent based on motor rated voltage. This alert helps
identify possible fail to start conditions, especially for Static Motor Starting studies which do not simulate
the motor acceleration process. The alert limit can be set based on the manufacturer provided minimum
voltage requirement for a motor to start.
Generator/Grid Term. Voltage

As a power source delivers heavy starting current, its terminal voltage can also suffer serious drop. It is of
great importance to monitor and maintain acceptable voltage level for a generator or power grid during
motor starting because it can affect a far larger area of loads than voltage drop on a starting motor
terminal bus. An under-voltage alert for generator or power grid terminal voltage is generated when the
source terminal voltage is less than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent based on the generator or
power grid rated voltage.
HV Bus, kV >=
An under-voltage alert for a high voltage bus is generated when the bus voltage is less than the alert limit.
The alert limit is in percent based on the bus nominal voltage. A bus is considered a high voltage bus if
its nominal kV is larger than or equal to the value entered in the field on the same line.
MV Bus, kV Between
An under-voltage alert for a medium voltage bus is generated when the bus voltage is less than the alert
limit. The alert limit is in percent based on the bus nominal voltage. A bus is considered as a medium
voltage bus if its nominal kV is between the voltages limits set for high and low voltage buses.
LV Bus, kV <=
An under-voltage alert for a low voltage bus is generated when the bus voltage is less than the alert limit.
The alert limit is in percent based on the bus nominal voltage. A bus is considered as a low voltage bus if
its nominal kV is less than or equal to the value entered in the field on the same line.
Auto Display
After the motor starting calculation is completed, ETAP checks for any abnormal operating conditions
according to alert limits you set in the Alert page of Motor Starting Study Case. If any abnormal
conditions have been determined, alerts will be generated and reported in Alert View as well as in the
Crystal Reports format report. If you select the Auto Display option and alerts are generated by the
calculation, the Alert View will open automatically. For information about the Alert View window, see
section 21.8, Alert View.
21-25
Motor Acceleration
Study Case Editor
Marginal
Select the Marginal option if you want the Alert View to display Marginal Alerts.
21-26
Motor Acceleration
Display Options

The Motor Starting Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
and color information annotations.
21.3.1 Results Page

Select the result information to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Voltage Magnitude
From the drop-down list, select a unit for bus voltage display. It can be in percent or kV.
Bus Magnitude
Select this option to display bus voltage magnitude in the selected unit. When the option is cleared, a bus
voltage will not be displayed on one-line diagram.
Load Term. Magnitude

Select this option to display the load terminal voltage magnitude in the selected unit. When the option is
cleared, a load terminal voltage will not be displayed on one-line diagram.
21-27
Motor Acceleration
Display Options
Load Term. Base kV

This group allows you to select base kV for the load terminal voltage when voltage magnitude is to be
displayed as a percentage. If the voltage is to be displayed in kV, this group is disabled.
Load Rated kV
Select this option to use the load rated kV as the base voltage.
Bus Nom. kV
Select this option to use the load terminal bus nominal kV as the base voltage.
Power Flows
Select a unit of measure for power flow from the drop-down list to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
This can be in kVA or MVA. The display unit options listed below change depending on this selection.
kW + j kvar or MW + jMvar
Select the kW + j kvar option (for kVA units) to display power flow in kW and kvar or MW + jMvar (for
MVA units).
KVA or MVA
Click the kVA button to display power flow in kVA or the MVA button to display power flow in MVA.
Amp
Click the Amp button to display the current flow in amperes.
%PF
Select the %PF option to display the power factor in percent.
Show Units
Select this option to show units for voltage and power flow annotations.
21-28
Motor Acceleration
Display Options
21.3.2 AC Page
ID
Select the options under this heading to display the ID of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select the options under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
21-29
Motor Acceleration
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
Display Options
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
Connection Type (# of Phases - # of Wires)
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
Display Tag, entered in Info page of Relay Editor
kV
Select the options under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements on
A
Select the options under this heading to display the ampere ratings (continuous or full-load ampere) of the
selected elements on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the options under this heading to display the rated impedance of the selected AC elements on the
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
% LRC
Impedance in ohms
21-30
Motor Acceleration
Display Options
D-Y
Select the options under this heading to display the connection types of the selected elements on the oneline diagram. For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings is
also displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of the LTC.
Composite Motor
Select this option to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
Use Default Options

Select this option to use ETAPs default display options. The checkboxes on this page will be grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

21-31
Motor Acceleration
Display Options
21.3.3 AC-DC Page

This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC elements and composite networks.
ID
Select the options under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select the options under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC elements on the oneline diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
kVA
HP/kW
21-32
Motor Acceleration
Display Options
kV
Click the options under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements on
A
Click the options under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the one-line
diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
Select this option to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
Use Default Options

21-33
Motor Acceleration
Display Options
21.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Annotations
21-34
Motor Acceleration
Display Options
Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
selected.
21-35
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods

ETAP provides two methods for motor starting: Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor Starting.
Both methods perform time-domain simulations and report results in both text report and plot formats.
The purpose of performing a motor starting study is twofold: to investigate whether the starting motor can
be successfully started under the operating conditions and to see if starting the motor will seriously
impede the normal operation of other loads in the system.
The Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor Starting differ in the way the starting motors are
modeled.
21.4.1 Dynamic Motor Acceleration

In Dynamic Motor Acceleration, a dynamic model throughout the whole simulation models the
accelerating motor. For this study, you also need to specify a load torque model for the load that the
motor is driving.
From the Model page for induction motor, or the LR Model page for synchronous motor, you can specify
motor dynamic model from one of the five different types:
Single1 - Equivalent (Thevenin) circuit model with constant rotor resistance and reactance
Single2 - Circuit model with deep-bar effect, rotor resistance and reactance change with speed
DBL1 - Double cage circuit model, with integrated rotor cages
DBL2 - Double cage circuit model, with independent rotor cages
TSC - Torque slip characteristic curve model
21-36
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
While the Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2 models are all based on an electrical circuit representation
of the motor, the TSC model allows you to model a starting motor directly from the manufacturers
performance curves. You can choose one of the existing library models or create your own motor model
in the Motor Library.
ETAP also allows you to model the load torque curve for each individual motor. You can choose one of
the existing library models or create your own motor model in the Motor Load Library.
Due to the difference in modeling of starting motors, you may perform the static motor starting study if
you are more concerned with the effect of motor starting on other operating loads in the system or if
information on dynamic model for the starting motor is not available. On the other hand, if you are
concerned with the actual acceleration time or whether the starting motor can be successfully started, a
dynamic motor acceleration study should be performed.
21.4.2 Static Motor Starting

In the Static Motor Starting method, it is assumed that the starting motor can always be started. You
specify from the Motor Editor motor acceleration time at 0% and 100% of the load, and the module
interpolates the acceleration time for the motor load based on these two values.
During the acceleration period, the motor is represented by its locked-rotor impedance, which draws the
maximum possible current from the system and has the most severe effect on other loads in the system.
Once the acceleration period has passed, the starting motor is changed to a constant kVA load and ETAP
simulates the load ramping process according to the starting and final loads specified in the Motor Editor.
Refer to Motor Starting Category page in the Motor Editor for more information.
21.4.3 Load Transition

In an event, you can specify a load transition to transfer system operating load from one Loading
Category to another. This allows you to globally adjust the system load during motor starting studies. You
may apply a load transition to all operating loads or to a group of loads by setting an upper limit of
capacity on loads to be involved in the load transition. Additionally, you can start motors through load
transition if the load percent is changed from zero to a non-zero value.
Due to the complexity involved in the interaction between normal motor starting actions and load
transition, the following rules are implemented to resolve conflicts in motor starting action preparation.
1. If, in an event, both action by Load or Starting Category and action by load transition call for change
of status or loading of a load, the action by Load or Starting Category takes priority.
2. If a load, whether a motor, an MOV, a static load, or a capacitor, is switched on/off through actions
by load or starting category in one event, the load transition will not apply to this load from that point
on.
3. If, in a load transition, the load percent of a motor (or an MOV) is changed from zero percent to a
non-zero value, this motor (or MOV) will be started at the new load percent (non-zero value). And
from this point on, the load transition will not apply on this motor (or MOV) any more.
4. Load transition does not apply on MOVs that have initial status as either Open or Closed.
5. In calculating load for a load transition, it takes into consideration the options for load diversity
factors entered in the Motor Study Case Editor for prestart load flow.
21-37
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
21.4.4 MOV Motor Starting

MOVs are specially designed motors that have different operational characteristics from regular motors.
Since these motors behave close to constant impedance load during operation, they are modeled as
constant impedance load in motor starting calculations.
The operation mode of an MOV may be opening or closing a valve, depending upon its initial status. To
start an MOV motor, its status has to be either open or closed. If the initial status of an MOV is open, its
operation mode will be closed and if the initial status is closed, its operation mode will be open. Both
modes involve several stages of operation as defined in the Characteristic group of the Nameplate page in
MOV Editor. For each stage, the impedance to represent the MOV is calculated based on the current and
power factor for the stage and the rated voltage.
For one motor starting simulations, a MOV is allowed to start only once due to infrequent operations of
MOV.
21.4.5 Starting Device

A starting motor can have one of thirteen types of starting devices modeled in the Motor Starting Studies,
including four general models for soft starter. You can specify starting device type and its control
characteristics from the Start Dev page of Induction Motor Editor or Synchronous Motor Editor.
Depending on the model type selected to represent a starting motor, certain types of starting device may
not apply. The following table gives applicable starting devices for each type of motor models.
Starting Device Modeled in Motor Starting Studies
Motor Model
Starting Device
Model
Auto-XFMR
Stator R
Stator X
Capacitor @ Bus
Capacitor @ Term
Rotor R
Rotor X
Y/D
Partial Winding
Current Limit
Current Control
Voltage Control
Torque Control
Static Motor
Starting
LRZ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Single 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
21-38
Dynamic Motor Starting

Single 2 Double 1 Double 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TSC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
21.4.6 Generation Category Change

In power system operations, it happens sometimes that while a larger motor is in the process of starting
up, a major source such as a power grid suddenly changes its operating values for the magnitude of
voltage at the interface point between the power grid and your electrical system. To simulate this
situation, ETAP allows you to change the Generation Category for generators and power grids. In any
event, you can change generation category from the existing one to any category. The operating values for
the ten generation categories are entered from the Rating page of Synchronous Generator Editor or Power
Grid Editor.
If a system contains multiple power sources (generators and power grids), change of generation for any
power source will potentially alter operating conditions of other power sources. In motor starting
calculation , whenever there is a change of Generation Category for a generator or a power grid, ETAP
uses the prestart system loading to determine internal voltage magnitude and angle of all generators and
power grids. These internal voltage magnitude and angle values stay constant until there is a new change
of Generation Category.
21.4.7 Motor Starting vs. Transient Stability Studies

The motor starting calculation is intentionally directed to investigate the behavior of a starting motor and
its effect on system operations, as facilitated by starting devices, etc. The transient stability calculation
can also simulate the motor starting process, with emphasis on the dynamic behavior of the whole system
under the impact of motor starting. The differences in objectives of the two types of calculation lead to
different modeling of system elements, as shown in the table below.
Comparison of System Element Models
Element
Generators
Load Flow
Infinite Bus
Transient Stability
Dynamically Modeled
Dynamic
Motor Acceleration
Constant Voltage
Behind Xd
Static
Motor Starting
Constant Voltage
Behind Xd
Exciter/Governors
Not
Applicable
Dynamically Modeled
Not Modeled
Not Modeled
Utility Ties
Infinite Bus
Constant Voltage
Behind X
Constant Voltage
Behind X
Constant Voltage
Behind X
Operating Motors
Constant kVA
Modeled Dynamically
or Constant kVA
Constant kVA
Constant kVA
Starting Motors
Not
Applicable
Single1, Single2,
DBL1, & DBL2
Models
Single1, Single2,
DBL1, DBL2, & TSC
Models
Locked-Rotor Z and
Power Factor
Starters
Not
Applicable
Modeled
Modeled
Modeled
21-39
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
21.4.8 Other Features of Motor Starting Study

Many features are included in the motor starting study to facilitate system design and analysis, including
the following:
A static load can be switched on and off repeatedly at any time during a simulation with user
specified Loading Category.
A motor can be started and switched off repeatedly at any time during a simulation.
The motor switching can be specified by an individual Load or by Bus and Starting Category.
In static motor starting, after the acceleration period is passed, it will be modeled as a constant power
load. The load level can vary at a rate specified by the user. Please see the Motor Starting Category
page for a detailed description on the model for load changes.
An MOV can be started at any time during the simulation.
21.4.9 Modeling of SVC

In the initial load flow calculation, an SVC is modeled the same way as in a standard load flow
calculation. It will adjust terminal bus voltage as specified in the SVC Editor and provide or absorb
reactive power as needed. However, after the initial load flow, it will be represented as a constant
impedance load with the value set based on the initial load flow.
21.4.10 Induction Motor with %Loading Equal to Zero

Since the induction motor editor has been enhanced to allow to specify the motor input current at zero
loading, in load flow calculations, a motor with %loading equal to zero may still draw power from the
system due the losses in the motor. This means that in load flow calculation a motor with zero loading
indicates that the motor has no output power, but the motor is still running.
In motor acceleration calculations, the meaning of loading being zero is different from load flow
calculation. If a motor has zero loading, it means that the motor is not connected and it draws zero current
and power from the system, even if the no-load current entered in the motor editor is larger than zero.
This applies to operating induction motors in both initial load flow and load transition.
Note that if an operating motor has loading equal to 0.01%, its input power will be calculated based on
the parameters from the Nameplate page of the Induction Motor Editor. So there may be a jump in input
power for operating motors in motor acceleration when the load is changed from 0.01% to 0%.
21-40
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
21.4.11 Modeling of Induction Generator

There is an option in the Info page of the Induction Machine Editor to set the Application Type as Motor
or Generator. If an Induction Machine is set as Induction Generator, its modeling can be different
depending on whether the machine is started in a Motor Stating simulation. For all operating induction
generators, the ones that are not started in a simulation, they are modeled the same way as in load flow
calculation. The induction generator provides real power to the system and draws reactive power from
the system. This rule applies to initial load flow as well as load transitions.
For induction generators that are started during a simulation, either through action by element, action by
Starting Category, or action by load transition, it is modeled differently before and after the induction
generator is started. In the initial load flow and during load transitions before the machine is started, it is
modeled as in induction generator in the same way as in the load flow calculations. Once the machine is
started, it will be modeled as an induction motor from that point on in the simulation. When modeled as
an induction motor, its rated kVA will be the same value as displayed in the editor, but its output
horsepower (or kW) will be recalculated based on the machine rated kVA, efficiency and power factor.
21.4.12 Modeling of VFD

VFD Connections
ETAP allows for very flexible connections for a VFD. Its input can connect to a bus, a branch, or multiple
transformers. Its output can be connected to a bus or a load (motor or a lump load). The following figure
shows some typical connections of VFD in ETAP. From the view point of calculation handling, there are
21-41
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
two types of VFD connections: VFD sub-network and load directly connected VFD. A load directly
connected VFD is shown as VFD-1 below where a load (a motor or a lump load) is connected to a bus
through a VFD. A VFD sub-network is a sub-system connected to the output of a VFD, consisting of
buses, loads and branches, as shown in VFD-2, VFD-3 and VFD-4 below. In the current version of
ETAP, it is required that a VFD sub-network be a radial system, contain only one energized motor, and
not include 3-winding transformers or source elements.
In Motor Acceleration Analysis, the sub-network powered by a VFD, i.e. the sub-system below VFD-4, is
aggregated along with motor equipment cable as one equivalent impedance. ETAP does not report the
voltages and flows on the buses and branches in the VFD sub-network. All adjustment options specified
in the study case are still applicable to these elements. The fixes or manual operating taps of transformers
in a VFD sub-network are considered in the calculation, but transformer LTC is excluded.
Typical VFD Connections
Modeling of VFD for Operating Loads

For an operating load (a motor or a lump load) powered by a VFD, either in the initial load flow or during
load transition, the VFD is modeled the same way as the regular load flow calculations. The VFD is
represented as a constant voltage source with the output voltage and frequency determined by the V/Hz
and operating frequency of the applicable generation category. On the input side, the VFD is modeled as a
constant power load with the input power equal to the output real power divided by its efficiency. The
input reactive power is dependent on the operating input PF option selected from the Loading page of the
VFD editor. When there are multiple input transformer connections, the input power is equally shared
among all connections.
Note that for a load that is directly connected to a VFD,( i.e. VFD-1 shown above) the equipment cable
loss is calculated based on the VFD operating voltage. For a VFD sub-network, i.e. VFD-4 shown above,
the losses associated with the sub0network is calculated based on the aggregated equivalent impedance.
21-42
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
Modeling of VFD for Starting Motors

For a starting motor powered by a VFD, the VFD output voltage and frequency follow the control scheme
specified in the Start Device page if the Frequency Control type is selected. If the option None is
selected, the modeling of VFD will be different depending on if the motor is directly connected to the
VFD or there is a bus in between (case for VFD sub-network). Additionally, the starting motor may have
its own starting device entered in the motor editor and this motor starting device may take effect in some
cases. The specific rules for handling all these cases are listed the section below.
Basic Rules for Starting Motors with VFD

a. If a starting motor is directly connected to a VFD (i.e. Mtr1 below) and the VFD Starting Device
type is set as None, the VFD is ignored in motor acceleration. This is similar to the bypass switch
being closed. The motor starting device takes effect if it is specified.
b. If a starting motor is directly connected to a VFD (i.e. Mtr5 below), but the VFD Starting Device
type is set as Frequency Control, the VFD will be modeled according to the specified Control
Scheme. The starting device of the motor is ignored.
c. If the VFD output is connected to a bus (i.e. VFD3 below), the VFD will be modeled according to
the specified Control Scheme. The starting device of the motor is ignored.
d. If the bypass switch of a VFD is closed, the VFD is simulated as a closed switch. The motor
starting device takes effect if it is specified.
VFD and Motor Modeling for Starting Motors

Starting Device
VFD & Motor
Motor Starting Controlled by
Connection
VFD
Motor
Cases
VFD1 & Mtr 1
Direct Connection
None
Yes
VFD2 & Mtr 2
Direct Connection
None
None
VFD3 & Mtr 3
None
Yes
VFD starting device, output maintained at rated

voltage and frequency
VFD4 & Mtr 4
None
None
VFD starting device, output maintained at rated

voltage and frequency
VFD5 & Mtr 5
Frequency
Control
Yes
VFD starting Device
VFD6 & Mtr 6
Frequency
Control
Yes
VFD starting Device
Bus in Between
Bus in Between
Direct Connection
Bus in Between
21-43
Motor starting device

Start as across line
Motor Acceleration
Calculation Methods
If a VFD has the Frequency Control type selected for motor acceleration and the starting motor has the
characteristic model selected, ETAP does not support Dynamic Motor Starting simulation for the motor,
since the characteristic model is only for rated frequency and it does not represent motor behavior under
different frequency. For the same reason, if a starting motor is powered by a VFD, it is not supported to
start this motor in the Static Motor Starting simulations, except that the motor is directly connected to the
VFD. This exception is primarily for compatibility to the older versions of ETAP.
Motor Plots for VFD Controlled Starting Motors

Due to the variable frequency applied on a starting motor, several new types of plots are added to starting
motors. The following table gives definitions for different plots. Note that the rated frequency for a
motor is the ETAP project frequency. If a VFD is connected to the starting motor through a sub-network,
the sub-network is modeled as an equivalent impedance for the motor. The table shows that when a
starting motor is controlled by a VFD, plots for the motor line current and input power are actually the
values at VFD input.
Plots for Starting Motors
Definition
Plot Type
Slip
Speed
Current (Line)
Current (Terminal)
Vt (Motor Base)
Vt (Bus Base)
V bus
Motor slip with respect to applied frequency. For a VFD controlled starting motor,
this plot does not indicate motor speed if the applied frequency is not the rated value.
Motor speed in percent of the synchronous speed for motor rated frequency.
VFD input current in percent of motor FLA.
Motor terminal current in percent of motor FLA.
Motor terminal voltage in percent of motor rated kV.
Motor terminal voltage in percent of VFD input terminal bus nominal kV.
VFD input terminal bus voltage in percent of bus nominal kV.
Accel. Torque
Motor acceleration torque in percent of motor rated torque.
Motor Torque
Motor acceleration torque in percent of motor rated torque.
Load Torque
Load torque in percent of motor rated torque.
kW (Electrical)
Kvar
kW (Mechanical)
VFD input real power in kW.

VFD input reactive power in kvar.
Motor output power in kW.
Frequency
VFD output frequency applied on motor
Voltage/Hz
Motor terminal Volt/Hz in percent on motor rated voltage and freuqnecy.
21-44
Motor Acceleration
Required Data
21.5 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for motor starting calculations for buses includes:
Bus ID
Nominal kV
%V and Angle (when Initial Condition is set to use Bus Voltages)
Load Diversity Factor (if the Loading option is set to use the Maximum or Minimum load)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors, including the 3-Winding Transformer Editor, 2-Winding
Transformer Editor, Transmission Line Editor, Cable Editor, Reactor Editor, and Impedance Editor.
Required data for motor starting calculations for branches includes the following:
Branch ID
Branch Z, R, X, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperatures, if applicable
Transformer rated kV and kVA/MVA, tap and LTC settings
Power Grid Data

Required data for motor starting calculations for power grids include:
Utility ID
Mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kV, and short-circuit MVA and impedance
Generation category data (%V and Vangle)

Required data for motor starting calculations for synchronous generators include:
Synchronous Generator ID
Mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Xd and X/R ratio
Generation category data, ( V%, MW and Mvar)

Required data for motor starting calculations for synchronous motors include:
Synchronous Motor ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading for operating motors
Loading Category IDs and % Loading for operating motors
21-45
Motor Acceleration
Required Data

Required data for motor starting calculations for induction motors include:
Induction Motor ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading
Loading Category ID and % Loading
Static Load Data

Required data for motor starting calculation for static loads include:
Static Load ID
Power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading
MOV Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for MOV includes:
MOV ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Current, PF, and time for each operation stage
Capacitor Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for capacitor includes:
Capacitor ID
Rated kV, kvar/bank and number of banks
Loading category ID and % Loading
Lumped Load Data

Required data for motor starting calculation for lumped load includes:
Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % for motor load
Loading category ID and % Loading
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Data

Required data for motor starting calculation for VFD includes:
VFD ID
Rated input/output kV, kVA, frequency, efficiency, and input power factor
Operating input power factor, frequency, and V/Hz ratio
21-46
Motor Acceleration
Required Data
Starting control type, control parameters, and current limit
Additional Data for Starting Motors

For Static Motor Starting studies, the additional data includes:
Motor locked-rotor impedance and power factor

Motor acceleration time at no load and full load
Start and final percent loading and begin and end of load change time
Starting device data when needed
No load and full load accelerated time (for static motor starting)
For Dynamic Motor Acceleration Studies, the additional data includes:
Dynamic motor model for induction motors

LR model for synchronous motors
Load torque model
Motor inertia
Study Case Data

There are some Study Case-related data, which must also be provided. This data includes:
Study Case ID
Maximum number of iteration
Precision of solution
Total simulation time, simulation time step, and plot time step
Prestart loading (Loading Category)
Initial condition
Transformer LTC data
Equipment adjustment options
Alert options
Report (Report Format)
The Study Case related data is entered into the Motor Starting Study Case Editor.
21-47
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports
21.6 Output Reports

The motor starting calculation results are reported in four different formats: Crystal Reports, a one-line
view display, and plots. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be displayed.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a Motor Acceleration Analysis.
You can utilize the Report Manager to help you view the output report.
The Output Report consists of several sections, as summarized in the following Section.
21.6.1 Output Report Sections

System Input Data
The beginning of the Output Report prints the system input data that is used in the Motor Starting Study,
including bus input data with the operating load connected to each bus, system branch data, branch
connection summary, and generator and utility machine data.
Initial Load Flow Report

An initial Load Flow Study is performed with the specified prestarting load. This load flow calculation is
carried out using the Newton-Raphson Method. The load flow result is printed for you to inspect system
operating conditions.
Switching Motor and Static Load Data

The switching motor and static load data printed include the motor nameplate data, equivalent cable data,
and the switching static load data.
For dynamic acceleration studies, the motor dynamic model and load model data are also printed in this
section.
Switching Event Data

This section of the Output Report lists every load-switching action, Generation Category change, and bus
loading change from load transitions in the sequence of time events. It provides you with a summary of
all the actions that are to be simulated in the study.
Event Load Flow Report

For each specified time event, whether there are switching actions or not, the module will run a load flow
calculation and report the result in this section. This feature provides you with a way to inspect system
operating conditions at any time during motor starting simulation. The module also runs a load flow at the
end of the total simulation time and prints the results in this section.
Tabulated Simulation Results

This section tabulates, the simulation results, for each switching motor, as functions of time at the
specified plot time step. The tabulated results include motor slip, motor terminal voltage, bus voltage,
motor current, and motor real power input.
21-48
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports

This is a shortcut for the Report Manager. When you click the View Output Report button, ETAP
automatically opens the Output Report, which is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format.
In the picture shown below, the Output Report name is MS-Stat and the selected format is Complete.
21.6.3 Motor Starting Report Manager

To open the Report Manager, click the View Report Manager button on the Motor Acceleration toolbar.
The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different sections of
the Output Report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different portions of
the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to every page, as
described below.
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the Output Report you want to view.
Path
This field displays the path of the project file based on which report was generated, along with the
Help
21-49
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports
OK/Cancel
Click the OK button to dismiss the editor and bring up the Crystal Reports view to show the selected
portion of the Output Report. If no selection is made, it will dismiss the editor. Click the Cancel button to
dismiss the editor without viewing the report.

include:
Acceleration Report
Events
Adjustments
Impedance
Alert Complete
Inverter
Alert Critical
Load Flow Report
Alert Marginal
Load Torque Model
Branch
Machines
Bus
Reactor
Cable
SVC
Complete
Switching Loads
Cover
Torque Slip Curve
Equipment Cable
Transformer
21-50
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports
21-51
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports
21.6.5 Result Page

This page allows you to select formats to view the result portion of the Output Report.
21-52
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports
21.6.6 Summary Page

This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the Output Report, including various
alerts, sequence of events, and switching motors and static loads.
21-53
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports

In this page there is only one format available, Complete, which brings up the Complete Report for a
Motor Acceleration Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
21-54
Motor Acceleration
Output Reports
21-55
Motor Acceleration
One-Line Diagram Displayed Results
21.7 One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

In addition to the report in Crystal Reports format, ETAP displays the calculation results on the one-line
diagram. Once a Motor Starting Study is finished, ETAP will display a Motor Starting Time-Slider in the
toolbar, as shown below. The ruler ranges from zero seconds to the final simulation time. Initially, the
reference pointer is at the far left, corresponding to t = 0 second. You may click either end of the ruler to
move the pointer one grid at a time, or hold the mouse button down to move the pointer continuously.
You may also click the pointer, hold the mouse button down, and then drag the pointer to the desired
position. The time corresponding to the pointer position is also displayed next to the ruler in seconds.
The one-line diagram displays the bus voltages and the current (or kW + jkvar or kVA) of the starting
motors for the simulation time specified on the ruler. As you move the pointer along the ruler, the
displayed results change accordingly, providing you with a quick way to examine the calculation results.
In the example one-line diagram shown below, the starting motors Pump 1 is drawing 644 kW and 2266
kvar, while the voltage of bus Sub3 Swgr is 97.58%.
21-56
Motor Acceleration
Alert View
21.8 Alert View

After the motor starting calculation is completed, ETAP checks any abnormal operating conditions
according to alert limits you set in the Alert page of Motor Starting Study Case. If any abnormal
conditions have been determined, alerts will be generated and reported in Alert View as well as in the
Crystal Reports format report. The Alert View can be brought up by clicking the Alert View button in the
Motor Starting toolbar. If you have selected the Auto Display option in the Alert page of Motor Starting
Study Case, the Alert View will open automatically when alerts are generated. The following is a sample
Alert View, which displays alerts for various bus Under Voltage and Motor Fail To Start alerts.
21-57
Motor Acceleration
Plots
21.9 Plots
ETAP also provides simulation plots for you to examine calculation results graphically. To view the
simulation plots, click the Motor Acceleration Plots button in the Motor Starting toolbar. It will bring up a
Motor Starting Plot Selection dialog box, where you can specify devices and types of plots to view.
Device Type
There are five types of devices for which you can plot: generators and power grids, starting motors,
starting MOVs, static loads and capacitors, and buses.
Device ID
This list contains IDs of all devices for the selected device type. Click a device ID to view its plots.
Clicking again will deselect it. Plots for up to 16 devices can be displayed on one plot view. If more than
16 devices have been selected, plots for the first 16 devices will be displayed.
Plot Type
The Plot Type group provides a selection of plots for the selected device type. The following table lists
available plots for the five device types. Plots for slip and starting motor torques are generated only by
dynamic motor starting calculations. The motor torque is in percent, based on motor rated torque.
21-58
Motor Acceleration
Plots
Available Plot Types for Motor Starting Studies

Generator Power
Grid
Current
Vt (Machine Base)
MW
Mvar
MVA
PF
Starting Motor
Starting MOV
Slip
Current
Vt (Motor Base)
Vt (Bus Base)
Vbus
Accel. Torque
Motor Torque
Load Torque
kW, Electrical
kvar
kW, Mechanical
Current
Vt (MOV Base)
Vt (Bus Base)
Vbus
kW
kVar
Static Load
Capacitor
Current
Vt (Load Base)
Vt (Bus Base)
Vbus
kW
kVar
kVA
Bus
Voltage
The Check All button allows you to check all available plot types for the selected plot type. Clicking the
Uncheck All button will clear all available plot types for the selected plot type.
Combine Plots
Select this option to plot curves for the selected plot types on one graph. This feature allows you to
compare different types of plots (for example, voltage, slip, and starting motor torque) on the same graph.
Close All Plots

Clicking the Close All Plots button will close all existing open plots.
When you click the OK button, ETAP will open plot views for all the selected plot types. ETAP opens
one plot view for each selected plot type to display the type of plots for the selected motors.
For information about viewing plots, see section 7.7, Plots.
21-59
Motor Acceleration
Plots
Modifying Plot Parameters

Plot parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the plot view.
For example, to modify plot line type, double-click the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameters Editor. For more information about modifying plot parameters, see section 7.7.1, Modify Plot
Parameters.
21-60
Chapter 22
The ETAP Transient Stability Analysis Program is designed to investigate the system dynamic responses
and stability limits of a power system before, during, and after system changes or disturbances. The
program models dynamic characteristics of a power system, implements the user-defined events and
actions, solves the system network equation and machine differential equations interactively to find out
system and machine responses in time domain. You can use these responses to determine the system
transient behavior, make stability assessment, set protective device settings, and apply the necessary
remedy or enhancement to improve the system stability.
This chapter describes different tools to assist you in running Transient Stability Studies. An overview on
the basics of Transient Stability Study is also provided.
This chapter is organized into 9 sections:
1. The Transient Stability Toolbar section explains how you can launch a transient stability calculation,
open and view an Output Report, select display options, view plots, view actions that are taken in the
study and perform Sequence of Operation playback.
2. The Study Case Editor section explains how to create a new Study Case, to define parameters for a
Study Case, to create a sequence of switching events and disturbances, to globally define machine
dynamical modeling method, to select plot/tabulation devices, and to set device tolerance adjustments,
etc.
3. The Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system
parameters and the output results on the one-line diagram, and how to set them.
4. The Calculation Methods section provides some theoretical backgrounds and quick reference for the
fundamentals on Transient Stability Study, which are very helpful for users who do not have extensive
experience on running Transient Stability Studies.
5. The Required Data section is a very good reference for you to check if you have prepared all necessary
data for transient stability calculations. These data range from the system side, such as bus and branch
information, to the machine side, such as machine model and parameters, exciter model and parameters,
and governor model and parameters.
6. The Output Reports section explains and demonstrates the format and organization of the Transient
Stability Text Reports.
22-1
Overview
7. The One-Line Diagram Displayed Results section explains the available one-line displaying results and
provides one example.
8. The Plots section explains what plots for transient stability are available and how to select and view
them.
9. The Action List section explains how to view the actions that are implemented in the study, and how to
observe the system sequence of operation by moving the time-slider.
22-2
Toolbar
22.1 Transient Stability Toolbar

The Transient Stability toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Transient Stability Study
Mode.
Run Transient Stability

Display Options
Alert View (Available in a future release of ETAP)
Report Manager
Action List
Transient Stability Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run Transient Stability

Select a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar. Then click on the Run Transient Stability button to
perform a Transient Stability Study. A dialog box will appear to ask you to specify the Output Report
name if the output file name is set to Prompt. When the calculation completes, the Transient Stability
Study results will appear on the one-line diagram and are stored in the Output Report, as well as in the
plot file.
Display Options
Click the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation options under the
Transient Stability Study Mode and to edit the one-line diagram display for transient stability calculation
results. See Display Options for more information.
Alert View
This button is disabled for ETAP. This feature will be available in a future release of ETAP.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view transient stability output reports.
Transient stability analysis reports are provided in Crystal Report Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich Text,
22-3
Toolbar
MS Excel formats. A number of predefined reports are found from here in Complete, Input, Results and
Summary pages respectively.
You can also select output files in Crystal Report Viewer format from the Output Report list box on the
Study Case toolbar.
The Output Report database for Transient Stability Studies has a. TS1 extension.
Action List
Click on the Action List button to view actions in the Study Case. The action list is updated every time
when a new Study Case is done. The information in the Action List will be also available in Action
Summary Report. The action list contains a complete list of actions including those defined in the
Transient Stability Study Case and those from relay operations. The invalid actions due to system
constraints are also reported in this list. Use the time-slider to observe the system Sequence-of-Operation.
Left and right arrow keys will advance the time-slider to the previous/next action or the previous/next plot
point.
22-4
Toolbar
Transient Stability Plots

Click on the Transient Stability Plots button to select and plot the curves of the last plot file. The
transient stability plot files have the following extension: .tsp. For more information see Plots section.

This button is normally disabled. When a transient stability study, this button becomes enabled and shows
a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the current calculation. The one-line diagram
displays and plots will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it completes, and the output
report will be incomplete.
Get On-Line Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is enabled in your ETAP. Press this
button to use Real-Time values such as loading, bus voltages, etc as your initial conditions for Transient
Stability.
Note: Operators can use this module to predict system response before taking an action in the real
system.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is enabled in your ETAP. Press this button
to use Archived values such as loading, bus voltages, etc as your initial conditions for OPF.
Note: Using archived values gives you the opportunity to study previous operating conditions from any
of ETAP modules and define alternate solutions.
22-5
Study Case Editor

The Transient Stability Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, event
and action specifications, machine modeling selections and a variety of options for output reports and
plots. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases. Transient stability
calculations are conducted and reported in accordance to the settings of the Study Case selected in the
Study Case toolbar. You can easily switch between Study Cases without the trouble of resetting the
Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision Data.
When you are in the Transient Stability Analysis mode, you can access the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Transient Stability Study Case toolbar. You can also
access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Transient Stability subfolder under the Study
Cases folder.
There are two ways to create a new Study Case. You can click on the New Study Case button on the
Transient Stability Study Case toolbar to copy an existing Study Case to the new Study Case.
Or you can go to the Project Editor, right-click on the Transient Stability Study Case folder, and select
Create New. The program will then create a new Study Case, which is a copy of the default Study Case,
and adds it to the Transient Stability Study Case folder.
22-6
Study Case Editor
The Transient Stability Study Case Editor consists of five pages: Info Page, Events Page, Plot Page, Dyn
Model Page and Adjustment Page.
22-7
Study Case Editor
22.2.1 Info Page

This page is provided for you to specify some general solution parameters and Study Case information.
Study Case ID
The Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by simply deleting the old
ID and entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the
Navigator button at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to another.
Initial Load Flow

In this section you can specify the solution parameters for initial load flow calculation in transient
stability analysis.
Newton-Raphson
Choose Newton-Raphson Method for initial load flow calculation.
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel
Choose Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method for initial load flow calculation.
22-8
Study Case Editor
Max Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged at the specified number of
iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default value is 2000.
Solution Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision that is used to check for convergence. This value determines
how precise you want the final solution to be. The default (and recommended) value is 0.0000000001.
Accel. Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 1.2
and 1.7. The default value is 1.45.

Select this option to include the transformer phase-shift specified in the Transformer Editors in both the
transient stability initial load flow calculation and the time simulation calculation. Otherwise, transformer
phase-shift will be ignored (i.e., 0 degree phase-shift regardless of the transformer winding connections).
Loading Category
In the Loading Category block, you can specify the system initial operating loads by selecting a loading.
The initial loading conditions will establish an initial normal operation condition for the transient stability
studies.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for this Study Case. With the selection of any category, ETAP
uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified for the selected category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories in the Nameplate page, Loading page, or
Rating page for most load components. Harmonic Filter loading is calculated from its parameters. SVC
loading is computed from the initial load flow.
Operating P, Q
This option is available if your ETAP key has ETAP Real Time. Check this option to use operating P and
Q as specified in the editors for load component. Operating P and Q for loads are from ETAP on-line
data.
Generation Category
Select one of the ten generation categories for the current transient stability study. With the selection of
any category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating page
of the Generator and Power Grid Editors. The generator controls will be different depending on the
Operating Mode that the generator and the power grid are operating under. The Operating Mode of a
generator and a power grid is selected on the Info page of the Generator and Power Grid Editors.
22-9
Study Case Editor
The table below shows the generation controls with respect to the Operating Mode.
Operating Mode
Swing
Voltage Control
MVAR Control
PF Control

%V and Angle
%V and MW
MW and MVAR
MW and PF
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if your ETAP key has ETAP Real Time. When this box is checked, the generator
operating values update from the online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load
Flow Study.

Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for transient stability initial load flow calculation. The choices
are:
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category, i.e., no
diversity factor is considered.
Bus Maximum
When the Bus Maximum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied
by the maximum diversity factor of the bus, which they are directly connected to. Using this option, you
can define the initial loading for Transient Stability Studies with each bus having a different maximum
diversity factor.
This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be considered.
Bus Minimum
When the Bus Minimum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied by
the bus minimum diversity factor of the bus that they are directly connected to. Using this option, you can
define the initial loading for Transient Stability Studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.
This study option may be useful in some cases where the effect of light loading condition needs to be
investigated.
Global
Enter the diversity factors for all Constant kVA, Constant Z, Generic, and Constant I loads. When you
Constant kVA
22-10
Study Case Editor
Constant Z
Constant I
Generic
model.
Charger Loading
Loading Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category section of the loading page of the
charger editor.
Operating Load
Select this option to use P and Q specified in the Operating Load section of the Loading page of the
Charger Editor. If this option is selected, a DC load flow calculation is required to run first in order to
estimate the charger load.

purposes.
Bus Initial Voltage

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editor. Using this
option, you can set load flow initial conditions to use bus voltages.

This option allows you to set initial load flow conditions using a fixed bus voltage magnitude and phase
angle for all buses. When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage
value as the percent of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude
and zero degree for bus voltage angle.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in the Remarks box. Information entered in this
location will be printed on the second line of the header information in every page of the output report.
These remarks can provide specific information and conditions for each Study Case.
Information Editor.
22-11
Study Case Editor
22.2.2 Events Page

This page is provided for you to design and store transient stability study scenarios and events, as well as
some solution parameters.
Events
In this list, all user-defined events are displayed in their time order to give you a clear picture of the
sequence of events in this study. The active events are marked by '*' and are listed first, followed by
those which are inactive.
Event ID
The Event ID is a unique name with a maximum length of 12 alphanumeric characters.
Time
This is the time when the associated event occurs. The unit is in second. To enter the time for an 8 Cycle
breaker opening on a 60Hz system, simply enter time as 0.133 seconds.
Add (Event)
A new event can be added by clicking on the Add (Event) button and opening the Event Editor.
22-12
Study Case Editor
Active
Select this option to make an event active. Clicking on the box again will make the event inactive. Only
active events will be included in the study. Use the active option to temporarily disable certain actions
without deleting them from the Study Case.
Edit (Event)
Click on the Edit (Event) button to open the Event Editor and edit an existing event. You can also
double-click on an event in the Event list to activate the Event Editor.
Delete (Event)
Delete an existing event from the list.
Actions
Each event can encapsulate a number of actions (system changes or disturbances). When you select an
event by highlighting that event in the Events list, the actions associated with that event will be displayed
in the Actions list.
22-13
Study Case Editor
Each action is composed of the information of the Device Type, the Device ID, an Action, Setting 1 and
Setting 2.
Note: The event ID is displayed on top of the Actions list for your reference.
Device Type
This shows the type of device that is going to take an action.
Device ID / Bus Zone #

This shows the ID of the device or bus zone number (for Wind Turbine (Zone)) that is going to take an
action.
Action
This option defines the action to be taken by the specified device and the device type. The following
table shows the device types and their associated actions:
Device Type
Bus
Cable
Line
Impedance
Circuit Breaker
SPST Switch
Fuse
Contactor
Generator
Actions
3 Phase Fault / Clear
Fault/
LG Fault 1
Fault / Clear Fault
Fault / Clear Fault
Fault / Clear Fault
Open / Close
Open / Close
Trip
Open / Close
Ref. Machine
Droop
Isoch
Start
Loss Excitation
Generation Impact
Generation Ramp
Setting 1
-
Setting 2
-
% of total length
% of total length
% of total length
-
% change in electrical power

% change in electrical power
Time (sec) for % change
LG Fault is only for non-frequency dependent models
22-14

Voltage Impact
Voltage Ramp
Delete
Utility
Ref. Machine
Voltage Impact
Voltage Ramp
Delete
Syn. Motor
Accel
Load Impact
Load Ramp
Delete
Ind. Motor
Accel
Load Impact
Load Ramp
Delete
Lumped Load
Load Impact
Load Ramp
Delete
MOV
Start
Wind Turbine
U-D Wind Disturbance
Wind Gust
Wind Ramp
Wind Turbine U-D Wind Disturbance
(Zone)
Wind Gust
Wind Ramp
VFD
Freq Change
None
Load Flow (no action,
print load flow at the
event time)
Study Case Editor

% change in reference voltage
% change in loading
% change in loading
% change in loading
% change in loading
% change in loading
% change in loading
-

-
% change in frequency setting

-
Setting1 and Setting 2

These columns display settings are for the action being performed. For example, for an induction motor,
you can define and load increase using the load ramp function. Setting 1 would be the percentage by
which the load needs to be ramped and Setting 2 would be the time it takes to ramp the load. Together,
Setting 1 and Setting 2 define the slope of the load ramp.
Add (Action)
A new action can be added by clicking on the Add (Action) button and opening the Action Editor. Select
a device type from the Device Type drop-down list. Select the device ID from the Device ID drop-down
list. Select an action from the Action drop-down list.
22-15
Study Case Editor
Edit (Action)
Click on the Edit (Action) button to edit an existing action. You can also double-click on a listed action
to bring up the Action Editor.
Delete (Action)
Delete an existing action.
Solution Parameters
The total simulation time for a Transient Stability Study. The unit is in seconds. The maximum value for
this field is 9999.

This is the integration time step in seconds in transient stability simulation. You should set this number
smaller than the smallest time constant in the system so you can see all the exciter and governor
responses.
Note: The smaller this number is, the more calculations are required, so the calculation time increases.
The recommended value is 0.001 seconds. If you feel you need higher resolution, decrease this number.
However, if the integration time step is too small, accumulated round up errors may increase.
Plot Time Step

This value determines how often ETAP should record the results of the simulation for plotting. For
instance, if you specify 20 steps, ETAP will plot points at every 20 simulation time step, i.e., for a
simulation time step of 0.001, the plot time step will be .02 seconds. The smaller this number is, the
smoother your plots will look, but also remember that the plot files on your hard disk may grow quite
large. Keep in mind that ETAP records plot information at this interval throughout the simulation. For
example, if you specified a simulation time step of 0.001 seconds, plot time step of 10, and a total time of
20 seconds, ETAP will write 20/(0.001*10)= 2000 points to disk, which may be a very large plot file,
depending on the number of machines and buses being plotted. The maximum value for this field is
1000.
Notes on Transient Stability Actions:
22-16
Study Case Editor
1. Opening and closing of a protective device (CB, Switch, or Fuse) that connects a
composite motor to a bus is not allowed.
If such a device is in the Transient Stability Study Case Action List (from the converted project from a
version prior to ETAP 3.0), the device will be removed from the list and ignored by the program.
The same rule applies to devices in the Voltage Relay or Frequency Relay Editor Interlock list.
2. Static loads cannot be added or deleted by the Transient Stability Program.

Static loads are not included in the Transient Stability Editor Action List. They must be added or deleted
from the system through protective device actions.
For projects converted from versions prior to ETAP 3.0 that include such actions, ETAP at the time of the
transient stability study will purge them from the list and ignore them.
3. Single-Pole Double-Throw (SPDT) Switch action is not allowed in the Transient

Stability Program.
For projects converted from versions prior to ETAP 3.0 that include such actions, ETAP will purge them
from the Transient Stability Study Case Editor Action List and ignored them.
4. Operation of the protective devices connected to an outside pin of the old composite
network is ignored.
Composite Networks included in converted files from versions prior to ETAP 3.0 need to be replaced if
the opening and closing actions of the protective devices connected to outside pins are desired.
Note: ETAP does not convert Composite networks automatically. To replace the composite networks, a
new composite network needs to be added. The content of the old composite network needs to be Cut
and then Moved from Dumpster into the new composite network.
22-17
Study Case Editor
5. Addition of a source element (Synchronous Generator or Power Grid) to a system when

directly connected to a protective device is not allowed.
A source must be connected to a terminal bus in order to be added to the system during the Transient
Stability Studies.
6. All actions to the devices in a completely de-energized subsystem are ignored.

Device actions in a portion of a system that is de-energized during the Transient Stability Simulation are
ignored.
7. Loads for a de-energized panel or a single-phase feeder are ignored.

When for an initially de-energized panel or a single-phase feeder, its loads are not calculated by ETAP.
Therefore, when such an element is switched on, it will not carry any loads.
8. Switching device operations for devices connected to a SPDT switch are ignored
When a SPST switch or breaker is connected to a SPDT switch without a bus in-between, the switching
action for the SPST switch or breaker is ignored. Therefore, a bus must be inserted to consider these
actions.
22-18
Study Case Editor
9. Induction Motor will not be modeled dynamically under the following conditions:
a. Motor is defined as None in the Induction Machine Model page
b. Motor is defined as Torque Slip Curve model in the Induction Machine Model page
c. Motor is less than the HP/kW for its kV class defined in the Dyn Model page of the Study
Case
d. Motor is connected to a bus through a VFD
10. Synchronous Motor will not be modeled dynamically under the following conditions:
a. Motor is defined as None in the LR Model page of the synchronous motor editor
b. Motor is less than the HP/kW for its kV class defined in the Dyn Model page of the Study
Case
c. Motor is connected to a bus through a VFD
22-19
Study Case Editor
22.2.3 Plot Page

The Plot page is used to plot/tabulate those devices whose results need to be displayed on the one-line
diagram at the end of the simulation.
Device Type
Select a device type or category.
Syn. Generators
This machine group consist all synchronous generators.
Syn. Motors, MV
This machine group consists of all dynamically modeled synchronous motors, which are rated above 1.0
kV.
Syn. Motors, LV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled synchronous motors which are rated equal to
or less than 1.0 kV.
22-20
Study Case Editor
Ind. Machines, MV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled induction machines, which are rated above 1.0
kV.
Ind. Machines, LV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled induction machines which are rated equal to or
less than 1.0 kV.
Buses
This device group consists of all buses.
MOVs
This device group consists of all MOVs with initially open or closed status.
Branches
The device groups, consisting of all different types of branches, with the exception of tie circuit breakers
(protective devices).
Lumped Loads
This device group consists of all lumped loads.
Note: The lumped load plot is available even if it is not dynamically modeled.
Wind Turbine
This device group consists of all wind turbines.
Plot Options
Once a machine or device group is selected, all devices in that group will be displayed in the Plot Options
list for you to select.
Device ID
Device IDs for the selected machine or device group, excluding the non-dynamically modeled machines.
Plot/Tabulation (column)
You can click on this column to select or deselect the plot/tabulation option for a particular device. Once
this option is set, an X will show in this column next to the selected device. By selecting this option,
information for the selected device will be tabulated at the end of the transient stability output report and
stored in the plot file to be plotted.
Plot/Tabulation (checkbox)
This provides another way to set the plot/tabulation option for the highlight device.
22-21
Study Case Editor
22.2.4 Dyn Model Page

This page is provided to globally assign dynamic modeling of synchronous and induction machines, and
lumped loads in the system. Motors are subdivided into medium voltage (above 1.0 kV) and low voltage
(less than or equal to 1.0kV) synchronous motor and induction machine groups.
A machine or a lumped load will be dynamically modeled if you have specified a dynamic model in its
editor and you select to globally model that motor group from this page.
Note: All synchronous generators and wind turbines are dynamically modeled.
Dynamic Modeling
Syn. Motors, MV
The machine group consisting of all synchronous motors, which are medium voltage (rated above 1.0
kV).
Syn. Motors, LV
This machine group consists of all synchronous motors that are low voltage (rated less than or equal to
1.0 kV).
22-22
Study Case Editor
Ind. Machines, MV
This machine group consists of all induction machines that are medium voltage (above 1.0 kV).
Ind. Machines, LV
This machine group consists of all induction machines that are low voltage (rated less than or equal to 1.0
kV).
Lumped Loads
This group consists of all lumped loads that are connected in the system.
Do Not Model Dynamically

If selected, the corresponding machine group will not be dynamically modeled in the transient stability
study for this Study Case, regardless of dynamic models specified for individual machines.
Model Machines Larger or Equal To

If selected, machines that are in the corresponding machine group and rated larger than the size specified
in the HP/kW field will be dynamically modeled, and machines in the same group that are rated less than
the size specified will not be dynamically modeled.
Note: For the machine to be dynamically modeled, it should also have a dynamic model specified for it
from its editor.
HP/kW (for Machines) or MVA (for Lumped Loads)

Specify the size of machines (HP or kW) or lumped loads (rated MVA) for the selected group to be
dynamically modeled.
Dynamic Modeling During Simulation (Time>0)

Include LTC Action
Check this option if you want to globally include or exclude LTC operation for time > 0 seconds. When
checked, ETAP will consider the individual LTC initial time delay and operating time specified for
transformers with LTC option (Tap page).
Include Starting Device

Check this option if you want to globally include or exclude starting device for accelerating motors.
When checked, ETAP will consider starting device control scheme for accelerating motors.
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors

In the motor acceleration calculations, the difference between the motor torque and the load torque is the
motor acceleration torque. In ETAP, the load torque model is specified as torque in percent as a function
of normalized motor speed. This load torque may be based on motor electrical rating or on mechanical
load. In this group, you indicate to the Transient Stability Module which base you want to use.
Based on Motor Electrical Rating

only represents the shape of the load as a function of speed. The load torque values will be adjusted so
that the synchronous speed of the torque is equal to 100%. This means that, with the modified load curve,
the motor will consume the rated electrical power at 100% starting load, under the rated voltage and at the
rated speed. When this option is selected, the torque base used to construct the load torque model has no
effect on the calculation results.
22-23
Study Case Editor
Based on Motor Mechanical Load

represents the actual load based on the rated output torque. The load curve will be applied as it is without
any adjustments.
To illustrate the implication of this selection, consider a motor that has a start load of 50% and rated
output torque Tr. On the Load page of the motor, the load torque curve is Model 1 given below, which has
a load torque of 80% at operating speed and the curve is based on Tr.
Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Loading

In this case, the load torque curve will be shifted so that the torque at rated speed is 100% of the motor
rated torque. This means that the torque at each point on the load curve will be multiplied by a factor of
1.25 (equal to 1/0.8). This modified curve will be used as the load torque curve for the study. Note that
the modified curve is given as Model 2 above.
Since the starting load is 50%, the actual load will be 50% of the load based on the modified curve
(Model 2) as described above. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5 Tr.
Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load
In this case, the load torque curve will not be shifted because it is assumed to represent the actual load.
However, since the starting load is 50%, the load torque curve will be adjusted so that the torque at each
point of the curve is multiplied by 0.5. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5*0.8 Tr = 0.4 Tr.
Note: If the motor has a load model as given in Model 2 above, there is no difference in calculation
results between the two options.
Constant Power Load

Threshold Voltage (VLC Limit)
This field is used to control the automatic conversion of a constant kVA load to a constant Z load for
Transient Stability calculations. If the connected bus voltage is below this value, a load type conversion
22-24
Study Case Editor
will occur for all applicable loads (constant kVA and constant Z). VLC Limit is specified in percent. Its
typical value is 80%. The allowable range is 0 to 200%.
Delta V
To avoid a sudden jump during the load type conversion, a 5% of voltage margin may be added to make
an undetermined region of VLCLimit +/- 5%, which means if the connected bus voltage drops below
VLCLimit 5%, a constant kVA load is to be converted to constant Z load. On the other hand, if the
connected bus voltage recovers about VLCLimit + 5%, the load is to be converted back to constant kVA
load.
Reference Machine
Auto Assign A Reference Machine for each Sub-system
By default this option is checked and disabled.
Synchronous Machine Damping

To activate selections in this section, set UseWeightedFrequency=1 in [ETAP PowerStation] section in
ETAPS.ini file.
Use Nominal System Frequency

System nominal frequency will be used in the swing equation to calculate the machine damping power.
This option assumes the actual network frequency remains constant during the transient, which is usually
the case when the system has a power grid.
Use Weighted Machine Frequency

An equivalent network frequency will be calculated by taking the weighted average of the speed of the
synchronous generators that are in the same subsystem. This equivalent frequency is then used in the
swing equation to calculate machine-damping power. This option is more accurate for the system that
does not have a power grid and thus the network frequency is not guaranteed to remain constant during
the transient.
Frequency Dependent Model

Use Dependent Models for Machines and Network
Use frequency-dependent models for subtransient synchronous machines, induction machines and
networks. Transient Stability utilizes the change in impedance based on the operating frequency for the
subtransient synchronous machines, induction machines and network if this option is selected. This option
has to be checked in order to perform the generator start-up study.
Synchronization Check to Close Tie CBs

Auto-Sync. Phase Angle
If selected, when merging sub-electrical systems by Transient Stability Study Case actions or relay
operations, voltage phase angles as well as machine internal angles in the merged systems will be
synchronized. By default this option is selected.
Phase Angle Deviation <

If selected, when merging sub-electrical systems by Transient Stability Study Case actions or relay
operations, voltage phase angles as well as machine internal angles in the merged systems will be
22-25
Study Case Editor
synchronized if the voltage phase angle difference across the closing CB (or any other valid protective
devices) is less than the specified value; otherwise, the action will be invalid.
Frequency Deviation <

If selected, additional validation for merging action is required by checking the frequency difference in
the percentage of the system frequency across the closing CB (or any other valid protective devices).
Bus Voltage Deviation <

If selected, additional validation for merging action is required by checking the voltage magnitude
difference in percentage of the bus nominal voltage across the closing CB (or any other valid protective
devices).
Salient-Pole Machine Modeling

Method 1 is using an enhanced IEEE model for silent-pole synchronous machine. This method in general
provides a faster convergence during a Transient Simulation Study.
Method 2 uses a regular IEEE model for salient-pole synchronous machine. Its convergence during a
Transient Simulation Study in general is slower.
Apply Saturation Factor Sbreak

Non-Freq. Dependent Model
When checked, the synchronous machine saturation break point Sbreak will be used to define the
machine saturation curve, together with the other two pieces of input data S100 and S120; otherwise, only
S100 and S120 are used. Please note that this option is only for non-frequency dependent model studies.
For frequency-dependent model studies, Sbreak is always used.
22-26
Study Case Editor

This page allows the user to specify tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to impedance values for transformer, reactor,
and overload heater.

adjustment in transient stability calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent
tolerance value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted
impedance used in the transient stability calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.
of Transient Stability Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides
any individual transformer tolerance value.
22-27
Study Case Editor

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Transient Stability Module increases the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor impedance used in the transient stability calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the
Transient stability Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any
individual reactor tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Transient Stability Module
increases the OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and
consequently a larger voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance
is 5%, then the adjusted OH resistance used in the transient stability calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
corresponding field of Transient Stability Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Length Tolerance
This section allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line lengths.

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Transient Stability Module increases the cable length
by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop.
For example, if the length of the cable is 200 ft. and the tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted cable length
used in the transient stability calculation is 210 ft.
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Transient Stability Study
Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance
value.

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Transient Stability Module increases the
2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the load flow calculation is 2.05 miles.
of the Transient Stability Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides
any individual transmission line tolerance value.
22-28
Study Case Editor

This group allows the user to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature
on the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Transient Stability Module adjusts the
temperature value specified in the Cable Editor Impedance Page. A global temperature correction can be
field of the Transient Stability Study Case Editor Adjustment Page. The global temperature correction
value overrides any individual Cable Impedance Page maximum temperature. Please refer to the Cable
Editor Impedance Page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Transient Stability Module
adjusts the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
the corresponding field of the Transient Stability Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global
temperature correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum
temperature. Please refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance Page section in Chapter 12 (ACEditors).
22-29
Display Options

The Transient Stability Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, ACDC, and Colors information annotations.
Results Page
The Results page allows you to define options for one-line diagram calculation results display. These
results can be displayed for each plot time step as selected from the time-slider at the Action List. The
results include bus voltage and frequency, synchronous machine power angle and speed, induction
machine speed, and power flows for the selected plot devices. The bus, machine and branch data that are
displayed on the one-line diagram are the same data as those are stored in the plot file, i.e., to show
calculation results for a device on the one-line diagram, you need to plot/tabulate that device from the
Transient Stability Study Case Editor Plot page.
22-30
Display Options
Bus
Display the calculated voltage and frequency of buses selected for plotting.
Voltage
Bus and machine terminal voltages in kV or in percent of the bus nominal kV.
Frequency
Bus frequency in hertz or in percent of system frequency.
Syn. Machine
Display the calculated power angle and frequency of synchronous generators and motors, which are
selected for plotting from the Study Case.
Power Angle
Machine power (rotor) angle in degrees or radians.
Speed
Display speed of synchronous machine as RPM or % speed
Ind. Machine
Speed
Display speed of induction machines (RPM or % Slip), which are selected for plotting from the Study
Case.
% Slip = 100 x
S -M
S
Power Flows
Specify how the flows will be displayed in (kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar), or (kVA or MVA) with or without
PF, or Amp with or without PF.
Show Units
Select the checkboxes under this heading to show units for the displayed results.
22-31
Display Options
Transient Stability Study Results Displayed on the One-Line Diagram at Time 0.701 Seconds
22-32
Display Options
AC Page
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ID of the AC elements on the one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
22-33

Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
Display Options
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
Automatic for Voltage, Reverse Power, Frequency
Relay. For Multifunction relay or UR, use the Display
Tag field in the Info Page to display the appropriate
designations
kV
A
Z
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
% LRC
Positive Sequence Impedance in %
Impedance in ohms
D-Y
one-line diagram. For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary
windings are also displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of
the LTC.
Composite Motor
22-34
Display Options
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

AC-DC Page
ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
22-35

Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Display Options
Rating
kVA
HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
Use Default Options

22-36
Display Options
Colors Page
Color Theme
Annotations
Theme
User-Defined
22-37
Display Options
Theme Button
Theme Editor
selected.
22-38
Calculation Methods

Performing the power system transient stability study is a comprehensive task. It requires knowledge of
machine dynamic models, machine control system models (such as excitation system and automatic
voltage regulators, governor and turbine/engine systems, and power system stabilizers), electric network
modeling, numerical computations, and power system electromechanical equilibrium theory. The full
discussion on this topic is far beyond the scope of this manual. In this section, we will brief you with
some fundamentals and underlying principles on the power system transient stability study, with the focus
on applications with ETAP.
Standard Compliance
ETAP Transient Stability Analysis Module fully complies with the latest version of the following standards:
IEEE Standard 1110-2002, IEEE Guide for Synchronous Generator Modeling Practices and
Applications in Power System Stability Analyses
IEEE Std 421.5-2002, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power System
Stability Studies
Purpose for Performing Transient Stability Study

Dynamic performance of a power system is significant in the design and operation of the system. The
transient stability study determines the machine power angles and speed deviations, system electrical
frequency, real and reactive power flows of the machines, power flows of lines and transformers, as well
as the voltage levels of the buses in the system. These system conditions provide indications for system
stability assessments. The results are displayed on the one-line diagram, and also can be printed or
plotted. For Transient Stability Studies, you should model particular groups of machines in the system,
which are known to have important influences on the system operation. The total simulation time for
each Study Case should be sufficiently long to obtain a definite stability conclusion.
Power System Stability Definition

Power system stability is the property of a power system that insures the system remains in
electromechanical equilibrium throughout any normal and abnormal operating conditions.
Because the power system stability is an electromechanical phenomenon, it is thus defined as the ability
of designated synchronous machines in the system to remain in synchronism with one another following
disturbance such as fault and fault removal at various locations in the system. It also indicates the ability
of induction motors in the system to maintain torque to carry load following these disturbances.
Synchronous Machine Power Angles

Synchronous machines play a decisive role in the power system stability because during and after
disturbances their power angles (also referred as rotor angles) will oscillate to cause power flow
oscillations in the system. Depending on the level of these oscillations, the electromechanical equilibrium
in the system could be destroyed and the instability could occur. Therefore, power system stability is
sometimes also referred to as synchronous machine power angle stability.
22-39
Calculation Methods
The following two equations are often referenced in power system Transient Stability Studies:
Torque Equation (Generator Case)
T=
where
T =
P =
air =
Fr =
=
P 2
8
F sin
air r
mechanical shaft torque

number of poles
air-gap flux
rotor field MMF
power (rotor) angle
The torque equation defines the relationship between the mechanical shaft torque, the stator voltage, the
excitation system, and the power angle. Changes in any one of them will cause the power angle to
readjust itself to a new position.
Swing Equation (Generator Case)
d 2
dt
where
M
D
Pmech
Pelec
=
=
=
=
+D
d
dt
=P
P
mech
elec
inertia constant
damping constant
input mechanical power
output electrical power
The swing equation shows that the solution of the power angle is a function of balance between the
mechanical power and the electrical power. Any change in the system that breaks this balance will cause
the power angle to undergo a transient and reach a new position in an oscillatory manner. This oscillation
is usually called the power angle swing.
Stability Limits
There are two types of stability limit for a power system, namely steady-state stability limit and transient
stability limit.
Steady-State Stability Limit

The steady-state stability is defined as the stability of a system under conditions of gradual or small
changes in the system. This stability can be either found by the load flow calculation for a steady-state
operation, or determined by a transient stability study if there are system changes or disturbances
involved. The system is said to be steady-state stable if, following any small and/or gradual disturbances,
all synchronous machines reach their steady-state operating condition identical or close to the predisturbance operating conditions. The steady-state stability limit for any synchronous machine is when its
power angle is less than 90 degrees.
Transient Stability Limit

Transient or dynamic stability is defined as the stability of a system during and after sudden changes or
disturbances in the system, such as short-circuits, loss of generators, sudden changes in load, line tripping,
or any other similar impact. The system is said to be transient stable if following a severe disturbance, all
22-40
Calculation Methods
synchronous machines reach their steady-state operating condition without prolonged loss of synchronism
or going out of step with other machines. The transient stability limit for any synchronous machine is its
power angle is less than 180 degrees.
Causes of Instability Problems

The major causes to industrial power system instability problems include, but are not limited to:
Short-circuits
Loss of a tie connection to a utility system
Loss of a portion of in-plant co-generation (generator rejection)
Starting a motor that is large relative to the system generating capacity
Switching operations of lines, capacitors, etc.
Impact loading (motors and static loads)
A sudden large step change of load or generation
Consequences of Instability Problems

The consequences of power system instability problems usually are very severe and can range from
permanent damage on equipment and shutting down processes, all the way to causing a whole area power
outage. Some typical consequences are listed below:
Area-wide blackout
Interruption of loads
Low-voltage conditions
Damage to equipment
Relay and protective device malfunctions
Power System Transient Stability Enhancement

Depending on the causes of instability problems in a particular system, a number of enhancements can be
made to improve the system stability. Typical enhancements include:
Improve configuration and system design.

Increase synchronizing power
Design and selection of rotating equipment use induction motors, increase moment of inertia,
reduce transient reactance, improve voltage regulator and exciter characteristics
Application of Power System Stabilizers (PSS)
Add system protection fast fault clearance, system separation, etc.
Add load shedding scheme
However, note that each of the above remedies requires careful consideration and we recommend that you
re-run all system studies again, because changes brought by those remedies very likely will impact system
load flow, short-circuit, and motor starting results.
Simulation of Time Events and Actions

Transient Stability Study is essentially an action driven time-domain simulation. Actions should be
specified at different time instants (events). There are two ways to specify events and actions. One way
is to use the Event Editor and Action Editor in the Transient Stability Study Case Editor. Another is to
use relay-controlled dynamic actions.
22-41
Calculation Methods
When using actions specified in the Transient Stability Study Case Editor, Action List, the exact time
instant for the action to take place needs to be given. Type of actions in this category includes all the prescheduled operations such as generator start-up and shutdown, generator control mode change, load
addition and rejection, motor acceleration, MOV start and others. When to simulate the system response
for existing events, such as a recorded fault in the system, user also can use this type of action, because
the recorded fault occurring time and duration are known. To specify this type of action, you would first
create a new event and the event occurring time in the Event Editor of the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor, Event page, as shown below.
Secondly, you can use the Action Editor in the same page to add as many actions as desired for this event.
22-42
Calculation Methods
22-43
Calculation Methods
Dynamic Modeling
For rotating machines and controlled devices, if selected to by dynamically modeled, they are then will be
modeled according the specifications given below. For more detailed information, please refer to chapter
24, Dynamic Models and descriptions for each individual element editor.
A synchronous generator is modeled by its dynamic model and associated controls, including exciter,
governor and PSS.

A power grids is modeled as constant voltage source behind an impedance determined by its short-circuit
rating.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is modeled by its dynamic model and exciter control, and connected load.
Induction Machine
An induction machine is modeled by its CKT model and connected load.

A wind turbine generator is modeled either by a build-in dynamic model and various associated controls,
or by an UDM model which will generate output P and Q feeding to the network.
Inverter
An inverter is modeled by a constant voltage source behind an impedance determined by its AC shortcircuit contribution parameter(s).
UPS
An UPS is modeled by a constant voltage source behind an impedance determined by its AC short-circuit
contribution parameter(s).
It is assumed an UPS has always powered up by a DC source, i.e., when its AC input side is disconnected,
its AC output side can continue to supply power to its connected network.
VFD
A VFD is modeled by its rated input and output AC ratings (voltage, frequency, power factor and
efficient), loading parameters (operating input PF, output V/Hz, and % Output Frequency), starting device
for starting study (control type, control scheme parameters), and PI controller for non-starting study.
Elements below a VFD are accounted for studies, but they are not displayed or plotted for calculation
results. In the current version, only induction motor is dynamically modeled and can be started with a
VFD drive.
SVC
A SVC is modeled by its control model.
HVDC
A HVDC is modeled by its various control models.
22-44
Calculation Methods
Relay Operation
In power systems, many actions occur without any pre-acknowledgment, instead, they are controlled by
sensors and relays. For instance, a current relay will trip off circuit breakers once the measured current by
relay exceeds a pre-set value. In another case, a voltage relay can be used to open or close circuit
breakers based on its monitored voltage and comparison with an upper and lower setting. These types of
action do not have a definite time of happening and are solely depending on the system dynamic
responses and relay settings. They, therefore, have to be implemented using the second method, i.e., relay
controlled actions. To use relay-controlled actions, user needs to add a relay and connect it to the oneline diagram via a PT or CT, depending on type of the relay. Next in the Relay Editor, user specifies
relay-controlled circuit breaker ID, control settings, time delay, and other data related to relay operations.
During the transient stability simulation in time-domain, if a relay setting is met, then its controlled circuit
breaker will take an automatic action. This method avoids requesting to give a pre-defined action time
and is a true resemblance to real power system operating conditions.
The following one-line diagram and Voltage Relay setting give an example of how you can use relaycontrolled actions. In the first picture, it is assumed that CB2 and/or CB11 are tripped off due to a fault in
transformer T2, causing substation Sub2A-N to lose power. To make a bus transfer for Sub2A-N to the
adjacent bus Sub2B, you can place a voltage relay (27) on bus Sub2A to monitor the bus voltage
magnitude and close a normally opened tie circuit breaker Tie CB when it is necessary.
To do this, you can set the voltage relay to pick up under-voltage at 90% and close Tie CB after 0.1 relay
delaying time and whatever the closing cycle by Tie CB itself. The settings for the voltage relay are
shown in the second figure down below.
22-45
Calculation Methods
Other relays like Reverse Power Relay, Frequency Relay, MV Solid State Trip Relay, Overcurrent Relay
and Motor Relay follow certain connection logic in the program for correct operation.
Operation of Reverse Power Relay (Device 32)
Device 32 uses a predefined reference direction for sensing the current flow in the one-line diagram.
Relay
32-1
32-2
32-3
32-4
32-5 & 32-6
Connection
Generator
Branch From
Branch From
Load
Tie-CB
Normal Flow
From the Generator to the Bus
Bus to the Branch
Bus to the Branch
From Bus to the Load
From Polarity (Dot) to other end
The diagram below shows the reference current direction for relays connected to sources, branches, loads
and tie circuit breakers.
22-46
Calculation Methods
Consider the following setting for Relay 32-2
22-47
Calculation Methods
Operate
Operate
Normal Flow
MW or Mvar
0.0
% Pickup
Under Power
-10%
(-1MW)
%Pickup
Over Power
100%
(10MW)
Therefore, the relay will not operate between the region of 10MW and -1 MW. It will operate outside this
region.
Operation of Directional Relay (Device 67)
Device 67 like Device 32 uses a predefined reference direction for sensing the current flow in the one-line
diagram along with the polarity of the CT (dot). Consider a UR element with Device 67 enabled.
Irrespective of where the Device 67 is connected, it will follow the polarity of the CT. The reference
direction is always from the CT polarity (dot) to the other end for forward and into the CT polarity (dot)
for reverse direction.
Therefore, if the relay were set in the forward direction, its operation region would be as shown below
based on the instantaneous setting.
Operate
Forward
Direction
0.0
Instantaneous
Setting
Operation of Multifunction Relays (Device 49/50/51)

For transient stability trip signals are send based on Any, Phase and 49/50 elements only. Multifunction
relays such as UR use the following logic for sensing tripping current. Note: Multifunction relays only
trip based on instantaneous settings. Overcurrent settings are ignored by transient stability. OCR(x)
denotes Overcurrent Level being used. For example OCR(1) means OCR with OC1 setting.
22-48
Calculation Methods
Relay Element
Any
Phase
Any or Phase
49/50
49/50
Any, Phase or 49/50
Level/Zone
Any
Any
OCR(1)
Any
OCR(1)
OCR(2)
Trip (if instantaneous selected)

Trip OCR(1) & OLR
Trip OCR(1)
Trip OCR(1)
Trip OLR
None
None
Any or Phase
49/50
No Library Selected
Any or OCR(x) Trip OCR(1)
Any or OCR(x) Trip OLR
If library data is not selected then OC levels are not considered. The trip signal is sent based on only
Phase or 49/50 settings.
If library data has been selected then ETAP considers only two Level/Zone - Any or OC1
If library data has been selected and the relay is not active, the trip signal is not sent. For example, if
output is 49/50, Level = (Any) and 49/50 is not active then no trip signal is sent.
If output is Any, Level = (Any orOC1) and Instantaneous (Phase and 49/50) is not active then no trip
signal is sent.
22-49
Required Data
22.5 Required Data

To run a Transient Stability Study, you need to provide all the data required for load flow calculation. In
addition to that, you need to provide machine dynamic model data, load model data, and any control
units, such as exciter and governor data. Required data for transient stability calculations include:
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Condition
Load Diversity Factor (when Load Diversity Factor option is set to Maximum or Minimum
diversity factor)
Branch Data
2-Winding and 3-Winding Transformers
Transform ID
Bus connections
Rated kV and MVA
Condition
Positive sequence impedance and X/R ration
Z Variation
Z Tolerance
Fixed Tap and LTC settings
Phase Shift as in Standard Positive or Negative Sequence connections, or User-Defined
configurations
Cable
Cable ID
Bus connections
Condition
Length, unit and tolerance
# conductors per phase
Cable type, rated kV and size if library data is used
Cable's positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if based on user entered data
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Minimum temperature
Transmission Line
Transmission Line ID
Bus connections
Condition
22-50
Required Data
Phase conductor, ground wire and configuration parameters (from library or user enter) if the
calculated value is used
Lines positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if a user-defined value is used
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Minimum temperature
Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus connections
Condition
Positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Units and associated parameters
Reactor
Reactor ID
Bus connections
Condition
Positive sequence impedance, X/R ratio
Tolerance
Protective Device Data
Protective Device ID
Condition
Bus and branch connections
Status
CT/PT Data
CT/PT ID
Bus or branch or source or load connections
Condition
Primary and secondary ratings
Relay Data
Relay ID
CT/PT connections
Condition
Setting, Unit, CB ID, Action, Delay for Voltage Relay (27) and Frequency Relay (81)
Device, ID, Action, Setting, Pickup, Time Delay for Reverse Power Relay (32)
Trip Element, Device, ID, Action, Instantaneous Pickup for MV Solid State Trip Relay (SST)
Relay Element, Level/Zone, Device, ID, Action, Instantaneous Trip Range, Trip, Time Delay for
Motor Relay (MR) and Overcurrent Relay (OCR)
22-51
Required Data
Power Grid Data
Power Grid ID
Bus connection
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control or PF Control)
Rated kV
Generation Category ID and associated data for each category
%V and Angle for Swing mode
%V, MW generation, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control mode
MW and Mvar generation, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Mvar Control mode
MW generation, operating %PF, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for PF Control mode
3-Phase MVAsc and X/R values
Synchronous generator ID
Bus connection
Condition
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control or PF Control)
Rated MW
Rated kV
Rated %PF
Rated MVA
Rated %Eff
Number of poles
Dynamic model type (None, Equivalent, Transient, or Subtransient)
Rotor type (Round-Rotor or Salient-Pole)
Equivalent model
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xq, Xdu, Xqu, Xd, XL, Tdo
Transient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo, Tqo
Subtransient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo, Tdo,
Tqo, Tqo
Transient model Salient-Pole machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo
22-52
Required Data
Subtransient model Salient-Pole machine type
Tqo
Sbreak, S100, S120, and Damping
Prime Mover RPM, WR2 or H
Coupling RPM, WR2 or H
Generator RPM, WR2 or H
Damping coefficients D1 and D2, Spring coefficients K1 and K2 for if include tensional effect
Exciter selection (Built-in or UDM)
Built-in
Fixed excitation, or exciter type and all associated parameters
UDM
UDM model file name (ID)

Control Bus ID
Governor selection (Built-in or UDM)
Built-in
None (no governor), or governor type and all associated parameters
UDM

PSS selection (Build-in or UDM)
Built-in
None (no PSS), or PSS type and all associated parameters
UDM
Synchronous motor ID
Bus connection
Condition
Status and the associated Demand Factors
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated power factor and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% loadings
Rated efficient and efficient factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% loadings
Loading Category ID and % Loading for each category
Dynamic model type (None, Equivalent, Transient or Subtransient)
Rotor type (Round-Rotor or Salient-Pole)
Equivalent model
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xq, Xdu, Xqu, Xd, XL, Tdo
22-53
Required Data
Transient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo, Tqo
Subtransient model Round-Rotor machine type
Tqo, Tqo
Transient model Salient-Pole machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo
Subtransient model Salient-Pole machine type
Tqo
Sbreak, S100, S120, and Damping
Motor RPM, WR2 or H
Load RPM, WR2 or H
Fixed excitation, or exciter type and all associated parameters, or UDM exciter model ID
Load Torque type (None, Polynomial, or Curve)
Load model from library if select Polynomial or Curve load torque type
Starting Category ID and Start % Loading for each category
Starting device type and associated parameters
Induction Machine Data
Induction machine ID
Bus connection
Condition
Application type (Motor or Generator)
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated % Slip or RPM
Number of poles
Model type (None or CKT)
Single1 CKT model
Xlr, Xoc, X/R, and Tdo
Single2 CKT model
Rs, Xs, Xm, Rr,fl, Rr,lr, Xr,fl, and Xr,lr
22-54
Required Data
DBL1 and DBL2 CKT models
Rs, Xs, Xm, Rrl, Rr2, Xr1, and Xr2

Motor RPM, WR2 or H
Load RPM, WR2 or H
Load Torque type (None, Polynomial, or Curve)
Load model from library if select Polynomial or Curve load torque type
Starting Category ID and Start % Loading for each category
Starting device type and associated parameters
HV DC Link Data
Element ID
Bus connections
Condition
All data on the Rating page
All data in Rectifier Control page
All data in Inverter Control page
All data in AC Control page
All data in Shut-Restart Control page
SVC Data
Element ID
Bus connection
Condition
Rated kV
Inductive Rating (Either QL, IL, or BL)
Capacitive Rating (Either QC, IC, or BC)
Max Inductive Rating (Either QL(Max), or IL(Max))
Max Capacitive Rating (Either QC(Min), or IC(Min))
All data in Model page
Wind Turbine Generator Data
Wind Turbine Generator ID

Bus connection
Condition
Quantity
WTG Type (Type1, 2, 3, 4)
WTG Control Type (WECC, Generic, UDM)
Rated kW/MW , kV, %PF, %Eff, and Number of poles
Type 1 WECC
% Generation, Qmax and Qmin for each category

Model (None or CKT)
22-55
Required Data
Data in Turbine page

Data in Wind page
Data in Pitch Control page
Inertia
Type 2 WECC
% Generation, Qmax and Qmin for each category

Model (None or CKT)
Data in Wind page
Data in Controls page
Inertia
Type 3 WECC
% Generation, % V, Qmax and Qmin for each category

Data in Imp/Model page, Model section
Data in Wind page
Inertia
Type 4 WECC
% Generation, % V, Qmax and Qmin for each category

Data in Imp/Model page, Model section
Data in Wind page
Inertia
Type 3 Generic
% Wind Speed, Mvar, Qmax and Qmin for each category

Model type (None or CKT)
Note: If None is selected, then it is modeled as constant Power Generator
Rs, Xs, Xm, Rr,fl, Rr,lr, Xr,fl, and Xr,lr for Single2 CKT model
Turbine Aerodynamics and Power Coefficient Cp
Wind Disturbance and Avg. Base Speed
Converter and Pitch control
Motor RPM, WR2 or H
Load RPM, WR2 or H
Type 1, 2, 3, 4 UDM
UDM Model file name (ID)
MOV Data
22-56
Required Data
MOV ID
Bus connection
Condition
Initial Status & associated Demand Factors
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated Power Factor
Rated Efficiency
Rated Torque
Hammer Blow & Micro Switch Flags
Locked Rotor (LR), No Load (NL), Normal, & Rated Torque (Rated T) % Current, %PF and Time
Duration
Loading Category ID & % Loading for each category
% Voltage Limits for Start, Seating/Unseating and Travel
Static Load Data
Static Load ID
Bus connection
Condition
Quantity
Status & associated Demand Factors
Rated kV
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated Power Factor
Lumped Load Data
Lumped Load ID
Bus connection
Condition
Rated kV
Model type (Conventional, Unbalanced, Exponential, Polynomial or Comprehensive)
Conventional
Rated kV, kVA/MVA, kW/Mw, kvar/Mvar, and power factor, and % Constant kVA load and %
Constant Z load
Unbalanced
Rated kV, kVA/MVA per phase, kW/MW, kvar/Mvar, and power factor per phase, % Constant MVA
load, % Constant Z load and % Constant I load
22-57
Required Data
Exponential
Rated kV, P0, Q0, a, b, Kpf and Kqf

Polynomial
Rated kV, P0, Q0, p1, p2, p3, Kpf, , q1, q2, q3, and Kqf
Comprehensive
Rated kV, P0, Q0, a1, a2, Kpf1, Kpf2, b1, b2, Kqf1, Kqf2, p1, p2, p3, p4, p5, q1, q2, q3, q4, Q5
Dynamic model type
Build-in
parameters Ta and
UDM
UDM Model file name (ID)
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus connection
Condition
Rated kV
Mvar/Bank and # of Banks
Panel Schedule
Panel Schedule ID
Phase connection
Condition
Rating per phase (circuit) for internal link (load)
Connection and loads for each external link (load)
Loading Category ID and % Loading for each loading category for each phase (circuit)
Harmonic Filter
Harmonic Filter ID
Bus connection
Condition
Filter Type
Rated kV & 1-Phase kvar for capacitors
Xl & Q factor for reactors
R, if applicable
22-58
Required Data
Grounding connection
UPS Data
UPS ID
Bus connections
Condition
AC Rating data
Imax
UPS load selection (based on Loading Category or Connected Load)
Operating Input PF (Rated or User-Defined)
% Loading for each Loading Category for UPS Load
SC Contribution to AC System (Kac and Isc)
VFD Data
VFD ID
Bus and load connections
Condition
Rated input/output kV, kVA, frequency, efficiency, and input power factor
Operating input power factor, frequency, and V/Hz ratio
Starting control type, control parameters, and current limit
Charger Data
Charger ID
Bus connections
Condition
AC Rating data
% Loading for each category
Inverter Data
Inverter ID
Bus connections
Condition
AC Operation Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control, or PF Control)
AC Rating data
SC Contribution to AC System data
Data in Generation page for each Gen Category
22-59
Required Data
Study Case Parameters
Study Case ID
Max. number of iterations
Solution Precision
Acceleration Factor
Apply transformer phase-shift flag
Initial Loading Category
Initial Loading Condition (Operating P, Q flag)
Initial Generation Category
Initial Generation Condition (Operating P, Q, V flag)
Load Diversity Factor (None, Bus Maximum, Bus Minimum, or Global)
Const. kVA, Const Z, Const. I and Generic load for Global Load Diversity Factor
Charger Loading Condition (from Loading Category or from Operating Load)
Initial Voltage Condition (use Bus Initial Voltage or use User-Defined Fixed Value)
Voltage magnitude and phase angle if use User-Defined Fixed Value
Report Skip Tabulated Plots check box
Study Remarks
Events & Actions
Plot Time Step
Devices/elements to be plotted
Dynamic Modeling Information
Dynamic Modeling During Simulation (for transformer LTC and starting device) information
Starting Load for Accelerating Motor information
Constant Power Load conversion information
Reference Machine selection flag
Synchronous Machine Damping modeling information
Frequency Dependent Models flag
Synchronization Check to Close Tie CBs specifications
Salient-Pole Machine Modeling method
Apply Saturation Factor Sbreak information
Adjustments information
Study Case parameters are entered into the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.
22-60
Output Reports
22.6 Output Reports

ETAP provides Transient Stability Study results at all different levels of detail, depending on your
requirements. The results are represented in three different ways: a Crystal Report output, a one-line
view display, and plots. Crystal Reports can be exported into a number of formats using the Crystal
Report export function.
Transient Stability Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Transient Stability toolbar to open the Transient Stability
Report Manager. The Transient Stability Report Manager provides five formats for report text. They are
Crystal Reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and MS Excel
formats. The Transient Stability Report Manager consists of four pages.
Complete Page
From this page you can select the report that gives you the complete output report.
Complete Report
The Complete Report gives the complete information for the system and the Study Case. It includes the
system summary, buses, branches, and machine input data, initial load flow and intermittent load flow
results, tabulated transient responses of the selected plot components and a list of actions. Below is the
first page from the Complete Report.
22-61
Output Reports
22-62
Output Reports
Input Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the input data Output Report. There are
twenty-one reports available under the Input Report page.
Adjustments Report
The adjustments Report gives the tolerance settings used during the study.
Branch Report
The Branch Report gives all branch impedance in per unit and the branch connections.
Branch Zero Sequence Z Report

This report gives the zero sequence impedance values for all branches.
Bus Report
The Bus Report gives all buses input data, including ID, voltage rating, generation, and loading.
Cable Report
The Cable Report gives all cable input data, including ID, length, impedance, and susceptance.
Cover Report
The Cover Report gives the system and the study overall information.
Exciter Report
The Exciter Report gives the excitation and AVR systems input data.
Governor Report
The Governor Report gives the engine/turbine and speed governor systems input data.
High Voltage DC Link Report

The HVDC link Reports gives the HVDC input data related to rating as well as dynamic model data.
22-63
Output Reports
Impedance Report
The Impedance Report gives all impedance branches input data.
Induction Machines Report

The Induction Machines Report gives all induction machine input data, including their rated, machine
model and load model parameters.
Lumped Load Report

The Lumped Load Report gives all lumped load input data including lumped load dynamic model data.
PSS Report
The PSS Report gives all PSS systems input data.
Reactor Report
The Reactor Report gives all reactor branches input data.
Relay Report
The Relay Report gives all relays input data, including their controlled protective device information.
Starting MOVs Report

The Starting MOVs Report gives input data for all MOVs to be started.
SVC Report
The SVC Report gives input data for all Static Var Compensators.
Synchronous Machines Report

The Synchronous Machines Report gives all synchronous machine input data, including their rated,
machine model, exciter and governor or load model parameters.
Transformer Report
The Transformer Report gives input data for all 2-winding and 3-winding transformers.
TSStartVFD Report
The TSStartVFD Report gives input data for all VFDs that are used in motor starting simulation study.
UPS Report
The UPS Report gives input data for all UPSs.
TSStartVFD Report
The VFD Report gives input data for all VFDs rating information.
Wind Turbine Generator Report

The Wind Turbine Generator Report gives input data for all WTGs that are used in dynamic simulation
study.
A sample report from the Synchronous Machines Report is displayed below.
22-64
Output Reports
22-65
Output Reports
Result Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the study result Output Report. There are
two reports available under the Result Report page.
Dynamic Stability Report

The Dynamic Stability Report lists dynamic responses of the selected components during the time
simulation.
Load Flow Report

The Load Flow Report gives the initial and intermittent load flow results. ETAP Transient Stability load
flow report reports dynamically modeled machine internal voltage source magnitude, voltage angle and
power flows from or to the internal voltage source. These values are in general different than the machine
terminal load flow values.
A sample report from the Dynamic Stability Report is presented below.
22-66
Output Reports
Summary Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the summary Output Report. There are
two reports available under the Summary Report page.
Action Summary Report

The Action Summary Report gives the summary of all actions taken during the study.
Below is a sample report from the Action Summary report.
System Islanding Index Report

The System Islanding Index Report contains information about the zones considered for each subsystem.
22-67

In addition to the text report, ETAP displays the transient stability calculation results on the one-line
diagram.
Transient Stability Time-Slider

Once a transient stability study is completed, a Transient Stability Time-Slider, as shown below, will
appear. The slider ranges from zero to the total simulation time. Initially, the reference pointer is at the
far left, corresponding to t = 0 seconds. You may click on Forward/Backward arrow buttons to move the
pointer one grid at a time, or click on Next/Previous TS Action arrow buttons to move the pointer to the
next/previous action. You may also click on the pointer, hold the mouse button down, and then drag the
pointer to the desired position. The time corresponding to the pointer position is also displayed one the
top of the ruler in units of seconds. As you move the pointer along the slider, the displayed results on the
one-line diagram change accordingly, providing you with a quick way to examine the calculation results.
The one-line diagram displays are only available for those devices that are selected for plot options.
Depending on the device type, different calculation results are displayed as defined below:
Buses
Voltage bus voltage magnitude in kV or percent

Frequency bus frequency in Hz or percent
Syn. Generators
Relative Power Angle synchronous generator power (rotor) angle in degree or radian
Speed synchronous generator speed in RPM
Efd synchronous generator field voltage in per unit
Real and Reactive Power synchronous generator electrical power generation in kW+jkvar or
MW+jMvar
Apparent Power synchronous generator electrical power generation in kVA or MVA
Current synchronous generator terminal current in Amp
PF synchronous generator generation power factor when either apparent power or current display is
selected
Syn. Motors, MV
Relative Power Angle synchronous motor power (rotor) angle in degree or radian
Speed synchronous motor speed in RPM
22-68
Voltage synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
when there exists an equipment cable)
Real and Reactive Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current synchronous motor terminal current in Amp
PF synchronous motor load power factor when either apparent power or current display selected
Syn. Motors, LV
Relative Power Angle synchronous motor power (rotor) angle in degree or radian
Voltage synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
Real and Reactive Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Ind. Machines, MV
Speed induction machine speed in RPM or percent slip

Voltage induction machine terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
Real and Reactive Power induction machine electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power induction machine electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current induction machine terminal current in Amp
Ind. Machines, LV

Voltage induction machine terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
Ind. Machines connected VFD

Voltage induction machine terminal voltage in kV or percent of machine rated kV
MOV
22-69
Real and Reactive Power MOV electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power MOV electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current MOV terminal current in Amp
PF MOV motor load power factor when either apparent power or current display selected
Branches
Real and Reactive Power Branch flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar

Apparent Power Branch flow in kVA or MVA
Current Branch flow current in Amp
PF Branch flow power factor when either apparent power or current display selected
Lumped Load
Real and Reactive Power Lumped Load electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power Lumped Load electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current Lumped Load terminal current in Amp
PF Lumped Load power factor when either apparent power or current display selected
Speed wind turbine generator speed in RPM or present slip

Voltage - wind turbine generator rated voltage
Real and Reactive Power wind turbine generator electrical power generation in kW+jkvar or
MW+jMvar
Apparent Power wind turbine generator electrical power generation in kVA or MVA
Current wind turbine generator terminal current in Amp
PF wind turbine generator generation power factor when either apparent power or current display is
selected
The units for the displayed results are defined in the Results Page of the Transient Stability Display
Options.
The following is a sample of a one-line diagram display from the Transient Stability Study.
22-70
22-71
Plots
22.8 Plots
ETAP also provides simulation plots for you to examine transient stability calculation results in a graphic
form. To view the plots, click on the Transient Stability Plots button on the Transient Stability toolbar. It
will bring up a dialog box for the Transient Stability Plot Selection, as shown below, from which you can
specify the devices and types of plots to view.
Device Type
Select a device type for plotting.
Device ID
From this list, select the devices (up to 16 devices at a time) to be plotted. This list contains the devices
that have been selected for plots from the Study Case Editors.
Plot Type
Check Plot Type(s) for plot. Different device types have different plot types.
Syn. Generators
Power Angle (Relative) synchronous generator power (rotor) angle with respect to the reference
machine in degree equals the generators absolute power (rotor) angle subtracting the reference
22-72
Plots
machines absolute power (rotor) angle; the relative power (rotor) angle is the indicator of the
generator stability
Power Angle (Absolute) synchronous generator absolute power (rotor) angle is solved from the
generator swing equation in degree
Speed synchronous generator speed in RPM
MW mechanical synchronous generator shaft mechanical power generation in MW
MW synchronous generator electrical power generation in MW
Mvar synchronous generator reactive power in Mvar
Current synchronous generator terminal current in Amp
Efd synchronous generator field voltage in per unit
Ifd synchronous generator field current in per unit
Machine Z synchronous generator terminal impedance in % on machine base
Syn. Motors, MV (medium voltage motors)
Power Angle (Relative) synchronous motor power (rotor) angle with respect to the reference
machine in degree equals the motors absolute power (rotor) angle subtracting the reference
machines absolute power (rotor) angle; the relative power (rotor) angle is the indicator of the motor
stability
Power Angle (Absolute) synchronous motor absolute power (rotor) angle is solved from the motor
swing equation in degree
MW mechanical synchronous motor mechanical power in MW
MW synchronous motor electrical power in MW
Mvar synchronous motor reactive power in Mvar
Vbus synchronous motor connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z synchronous motor terminal impedance in % on machine base
Syn. Motors, LV (low voltage motors)
Power Angle (Relative) synchronous motor power (rotor) angle with respect to the reference
machine in degree equals the motors absolute power (rotor) angle subtracting the reference
machines absolute power (rotor) angle; the relative power (rotor) angle is the indicator of the motor
stability
Power Angle (Absolute) synchronous motor absolute power (rotor) angle is solved from the motor
swing equation in degree
MW mechanical synchronous motor mechanical power in MW
MW synchronous motor electrical power in MW
Mvar synchronous motor reactive power in Mvar
Vbus synchronous motor connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z synchronous motor terminal impedance in % on machine base
Ind. Machine, MV (medium voltage machines)
Slip induction machine slip in %
22-73
Plots
Accel Torque induction machine acceleration power in MW

MWm induction machine mechanical power in MW
MWe induction machine electrical power in MW
Mvar induction machine reactive power in Mvar
Vbus induction machine connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal induction machine terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z induction machine terminal impedance in % on machine base (will not shown for VFD
connected machines)
V/Hz induction machine terminal voltage per Hz, where voltage is based machine connected bus
nominal voltage (except for VFD connected machines, which is based on machine rated voltage) and
frequency is based system frequency (except for VFD connected machines, which is based on VFD
AC output frequency)
Ind. Machine, LV (low voltage machines)
Slip induction machine slip in %

Accel Torque induction machine acceleration power in MW
MWm induction machine mechanical power in MW
MWe induction machine electrical power in MW
Mvar induction machine reactive power in Mvar
Vbus induction machine connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal induction machine terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z induction machine terminal impedance in % on machine base (will not shown for VFD
connected machines)
V/Hz induction machine terminal voltage per Hz, where voltage is based machine connected bus
nominal voltage (except for VFD connected machines, which is based on machine rated voltage) and
frequency is based system frequency (except for VFD connected machines, which is based on VFD
AC output frequency)
Buses
Voltage Angle bus voltage angle in degree

Frequency bus frequency in % of system frequency
MW bus real power loading in MW
Mvar bus reactive power loading in Mvar
Voltage/Hz bus voltage per Hz in % of bus nominal volt/system frequency in Hz
Voltage bus voltage magnitude in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
MOVs
kvar MOV reactive power loading in kvar

kW MOV electrical power loading in kW
Current MOV current in Amp
Vbus MOV connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal MOV terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Branches
22-74
Plots
MW (From) - Branch real power flow on From side in MW

Mvar (From) - Branch reactive power flow on From side in Mvar
I (From) - Branch current flow on From side in Amp
MVA (From) - Branch apparent power flow on From side in MVA
MW (To) - Branch real power flow on To side in MW
Mvar (To) - Branch reactive power flow on To side in Mvar
I (To) - Branch current flow on To side in Amp
MVA (To) - Branch apparent power flow on To side in MVA
Lumped Load
MW Lumped load electrical power loading in MW

Mvar Lumped load reactive power loading in Mvar
Current Lumped load current in Amp
Voltage Lumped load connected bus voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Wind Turbine
MW Wind Turbine machine electrical power in MW

Mvar Wind Turbine output reactive power in Mvar
Current Wind Turbine output current
Vterminal Wind Turbine Terminal Voltage
Speed Wind Turbine Speed in RPM
Wind Speed Wind speed in meters / Second
MW Mechanical Wind Turbine machine mechanical power in MW
Pitch Angle Rotor Blade Pitch Angle in degree
*
Note: Depending on type of wind turbine generators, some plots are not available for specific
types.
MG Set
Power Angle (Relative) MG set power (rotor) angle with respect to the reference machine in
degree equals the motors absolute power (rotor) angle subtracting the reference machines absolute
power (rotor) angle; the relative power (rotor) angle is the indicator of the motor stability
Power Angle (Absolute) MG set absolute power (rotor) angle is solved from the motor swing
equation in degree
Speed MG set speed in RPM
MW mechanical MG set mechanical power in MW
MW MG set electrical power in MW
Mvar MG set reactive power in Mvar
Current MG set terminal current in Amp
Vbus MG set connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal MG set terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z MG set terminal impedance in % on machine base
The following is a set of sample plots from the Transient Stability Study for synchronous motors:
22-75
Plots
Time Base
Select an option for the plot base in seconds or cycles.
Voltage Plots
Select an option for the voltage plot unit in kV or % of the bus nominal kV.
22-76
Plots
Plot the Difference between 2 Selected Devices

This section will be activated only when there are two buses are selected.
Active Diff.
Check this box to plot the difference for all potable curves between the selected two buses.
Pressing this button will toggle positions of the two buses in calculating the difference.
Plot Segment
A segment of plots can be selected by defining T begin and T end. Combination of several plots is also
available.
T begin
Enter the beginning of the time in second for a new plot. This value has to be greater or equal to 0. sec.
T end
Enter the ending of the time in second for a new plot. This value has to be less or equal to the total
simulation time.
Combine Plots
Curves for the selected item will be plotted on the same graph. Multiple scales will be used.
22-77
Action List
22.9 Action List

Clicking on the Toggle Action List button
shown below.
on the Time-Slider will turn it into the Action List as
This list shows all actions that are taken in the study, including those defined form the Study Case Editor,
Events page and those initiated by relays actions. Invalid actions, for example, an operation to a deenergized device, are also listed in this list with a special action type of Invalid action.
Using two pairs of arrow buttons on the list will guide you through the entire action list. Next and
Previous Transient Stability Action arrow buttons moves the pointer to the time for the next or previous
action. Forward and Backward arrow buttons advances the pointer one plot time step in the forward
direction or the backward direction. The list will display all actions that are taken up to the time where
the pointer is at.
Note: The one-line diagram will also change the display of study results dynamically corresponding to the
changes of the pointer, including the bus, machine and branch displays, as well as the protective device
status and the system continuity check results. Thus a sequence of operation display is truly available for
ETAP Transient Stability results from the Action List.
22-78
Chapter 23
Generator Start-Up
ETAP Generator Start-Up Analysis is a special feature of the ETAP Transient Stability Program. This
type of analysis is particularly necessary for nuclear generation plants and for special conditions when the
connection to a power grid is lost and recovery of the power supply to some critical loads is mandatory.
In these cases, a cold stand-by generator is started up as an emergency condition and progresses through
acceleration and load acceptance stages, before finally reaching steady state condition.
Generator frequency and motor kW power results from the ETAP Generator Start-Up Program compared
against field measurement data for an actual system are shown below.
23-1
Generator Start-Up
Overview
The generator start-up analysis is a very distinctive study for several reasons. First, at the time the
generator receives the emergency starting signal and is ready to start, its in a zero speed/zero voltage
state. There is no voltage on the generator terminal to feed the excitation system, thus an alternative
source has to be used. This alternative source usually stays online until the generator terminal voltage has
built up to a high enough level to support the excitation system. At this point, the alternative source is
withdrawn and the excitation source is switched to the generator terminal voltage. Second, the generator
parameters are not constant during the starting process; rather, they change significantly with the
generator speed. This fact must be considered and the generator parameters have to be re-calculated from
the generator instantaneous speed. Furthermore, the saturation effect also needs to be accounted for in
adjusting the generator parameters. Third, once the generator has reached the designated speed (or
frequency) and/or terminal voltage, the emergency loads are switched on. A frequency and/or voltage
controlled action is required to close the system circuit breakers. These actions are usually initiated by
frequency relays and voltage relays. Fourth, when the emergency system is energized, motors in the
emergency system are started at that point.
Note: At this time, system frequency and voltage are still under their nominal values, which mean a
special modeling technique must be developed to handle the motor starting at under frequency and under
voltage conditions. Finally, all system impedances must be adjusted according to system instantaneous
frequency.
The generator start-up analysis can simulate the entire process of a synchronous generator during start-up,
from the cold stand-by mode to the full operation mode. The synchronous generator and all of its
associated controls, including turbine/engine and governor system, excitation/AVR system, and other
associated controls, are modeled in a very detailed and extensive way, including both frequency
dependency and saturation correction. The Event and Action editors in the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor, along with Frequency and Voltage Relays, allow you to start the generator and operate circuit
breakers exactly the same as in a real system. Induction motors are dynamically modeled with frequency
dependent models to allow acceleration at under frequency and under voltage conditions. Other system
components are also correctly and accurately modeled.
Key features of the ETAP Generator Start-Up Analysis include:
Accurate Synchronous Generator Model with Completely Frequency Dependent Parameters

Synchronous Generator Parameter Correction Due to Saturation Effect
Initial Field Flashing Circuit & Switching Time
Sophisticated Turbine Model to Include Special Dynamics During the Generator Start-Up
Detailed & User-Programmable Speed Governor System Control
System Switching Actions Controlled by Relay Actions
Variety of Relay Settings (Volt, Hz, V/Hz, dHz/dt)
Frequency Dependent Network Impedance Model
Frequency Dependent Induction Machine Model
Induction Motor Starting at Under Voltage & Under Frequency Conditions
Full Text Report of Study Results for Viewing and Printing
One-Line Display of Study Results with Time Slider to Recapture the System Dynamic Responses
Graphic Plots of Study Results for Viewing & Printing
23-2
Generator Start-Up
Study Case Editor

The Generator Start-Up Analysis is part of the ETAP Transient Stability Program. To run a generator
start-up analysis, you need to be in Transient Stability Mode. The functions of all buttons on the
Transient Stability toolbar and the Study Case toolbar remain the same just as if you were performing a
Transient Stability Study. Here is a list of the additional settings that are required to run a generator startup analysis. These settings are made within the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.
Time Step
Because of the complexity involved in a generator start-up analysis, many differential equations need to
be solved. To ensure the accuracy of the solution, it is recommended that you use a smaller value for
simulation time step, for example, 0.0003 second. Consequently, a relatively large value can be used for
the plot time step, say 100.
23-3
Generator Start-Up
Study Case Editor
Event & Action

When performing a generator start-up analysis, it is very import to remember that starting the generator
should be the first action to take place. The generator start action is specified in the Transient Stability
Study Case Editor, as shown below. You need to create a time event and add one action with the Device
Type specified as Generator and the Action type as Start.
Dynamic Model
The generator start-up analysis requires that all system components be modeled with frequency
dependency. You can ensure this by putting a check in the Frequency Dependent Models for Network,
Motors, & Generators box in the Dyn Model page of the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.
23-4
Generator Start-Up
Calculation Methods

The major difference between the regular Transient Stability Study and a generator start-up analysis is
that in the latter case, the system frequency undergoes a drastic change from 0 Hz to an overshoot
(normally 20 to 30 percent of the nominal frequency,) and finally settles down at the nominal value. This
situation requires all power system components, especially rotating machines, be modeled correctly to
account for the frequency changes. The impedance of other components should also be able to be
adjusted to the true instantaneous system frequency. The ETAP Generator Start-Up Analysis can make
all these adjustments spontaneously if the correct models are selected. This section describes what you
need to do to select the right models for different components and how those components are being
modeled.
Starting Generator
To perform a generator start-up analysis, the following synchronous generator model needs to be selected.
This model is adapted from the latest IEEE Standard 1110 IEEE Guide for Synchronous Generator
Modeling Practices in Stability Analyses. It has one damping winding on each of the direct and
quadratic axis.
23-5
Generator Start-Up
Calculation Methods
The equivalent circuit for this model is illustrated below.
q
Ra
Lfd - Lad
Ll
id
Ld
Lfd
Lad
Vd
Rfd
+
Rd
Vfd
-
Direct-Axis Equivalent Circuit
Ra
Ll
iq
Lq
Laq
Vq
Rq
Quadrature-Axis Equivalent Circuit
23-6
Generator Start-Up
Calculation Methods
Turbine Governor Models

Any type of turbine-governor model that has the capability to simulate turbine starting dynamics can be
used in the generator start-up study. For example, a hydro turbine and speed governor model is shown in
the example below. It includes water tunnel and penstock dynamics and a very complex gate opening
control scheme.
23-7
Generator Start-Up
Calculation Methods
Exciter/AVR Models
The exciter/AVR system requires special controls in the Generator Start-Up Study. For example,
exciter/AVR model ST1D is shown below and can be used for the Generator Start-Up Analysis. This
model includes a special field flashing circuit to supply the initial DC excitation voltage to the generator
field winding. A voltage per Hz relay is also included to switch the excitation source from the initial DC
source to the normal source once the generator has built up enough voltage.
23-8
Generator Start-Up
Calculation Methods
Induction Machine Model

Induction machines, which are accelerated during the generator start-up process, should be modeled by
their frequency dependent circuit models. ETAP automatically uses the frequency dependent circuit
models that are selected from the Motor CKT Model Library Quick Pick Editor inside the Induction
Machine Editor. All four types of induction machine circuit models, namely Single1, Single2, DBL1, and
DBL2, can be used as the frequency dependent models for a Generator Start-Up Analysis.
Synchronous Motor Models

Accelerating synchronous motors in the system are modeled with their LR models just like induction
machines with frequency dependent circuit models, since they behave like induction motors during startup.
23-9
Generator Start-Up
Calculation Methods
Other Components
Other system components such as transforms, lines, and cables are modeled identically to Transient
Stability Studies except that the program will adjust their impedance according to the system
instantaneous frequency.
23-10
Generator Start-Up
Output Reports
23.3 Output Reports

Three types of outputs are available for a Generator Start-Up Analysis. They include Crystal Reports,
one-line display, and plots. Please refer to the Transient Stability chapter for more information on how to
access and manage the Output Reports.
Crystal Report
The Crystal Report for the generator start-up analysis is the same format as the Transient Stability
Analysis.
One-Line Display
The one-line display for the generator start-up analysis is the same format as the Transient Stability
Analysis.
Plots
The plots for the generator start-up analysis are the same format as the Transient Stability Analysis.
Representative sample plots from a Generator Start-Up Analysis are shown here.
23-11
Chapter 24
Dynamic Models
Motor dynamic models are required for dynamic motor starting, transient stability, and generator starting
studies. Generator dynamic models and the associated control units (exciters, governors, and Power
System Stabilizer [PSS]) are only needed for Transient Stability Studies. In addition, load torque
characteristics for different types of models are required for both motor starting and Transient Stability
Studies. Wind turbine generator dynamic models and the associated controls are required to do dynamic
simulation studies involving the wind turbine generators. Lumped load dynamic models are needed if the
dynamics for a lumped load in a study is desired. ETAP provides a variety of induction and synchronous
machine models, wind turbine generator models, lumped load dynamic models, plus extensive libraries
for exciters, governors, and PSS for you to select from to perform your studies.
When performing dynamic Motor Acceleration Studies using the Motor Starting Module, only the motors
that are accelerated must have a dynamic model, i.e., generators, exciters, and governors are not
dynamically modeled. For transient stability studies, all generators, exciters, and governors are
dynamically modeled. Motors, which have dynamic models and are designated to be dynamically
modeled from the Study Case, will be dynamically modeled. For generator starting and frequency
dependent Transient Stability Studies, all generators, exciters, governors, and motors have to use
frequency dependent models.
This chapter describes the different types of machine models, machine control unit models, load models,
and explains their applications in motor starting and Transient Stability Studies. It also describes tools
that assist you in selecting those models and specifying model parameters.
The induction machine models section describes five different types of induction machine models and the
frequency dependent forms of these models. These are Circuit Models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, and
DBL2) and Characteristic Curve Models, Descriptions of five different types of synchronous machine
models and the frequency dependent forms of these models are provided in the synchronous machine
models section. These consist of an Equivalent Model, Transient Model for round-rotor machines,
Subtransient Model for round-rotor machines, Transient Model for salient-pole machines, and
Subtransient Model for salient-pole machines. Motor starting and Transient Stability Studies also require
the utility tie system to be modeled as an equivalent machine. A description of the modeling of power
grid systems is found in the section Power Grid. Different types of exciter and automatic voltage regulator
(AVR) models, including standard IEEE models and vendor special models, are defined in the Exciter
and AVR Models section. Governor-turbine models that are also based on both IEEE standards and
vendors product manuals are listed in the Governor-turbine Models section. PSS models that are also
based on both IEEE Standards and vendors product manuals are listed in the PSS Models section.
Finally, the types of load models are described in the Mechanical Load section. Dynamics of lumped load
is described in the Dynamic Lumped Motor Load Model section. Please contact OTI for wind turbine
generator models.
24-1
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1 Induction Machine

ETAP provides six different types of induction machine models, which cover all commonly, used
induction machine designs. These models consist of:
Single1 CKT Model

Single2 CKT Model
DBL1 CKT Model
DBL2 CKT Model
Characteristic Curve Model
In general, Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2 are referred to as CKT (circuit) models, because they all
use equivalent circuits to represent an induction machine stator and rotor windings. These models can be
used for both dynamic motor starting and transient stability studies. Characteristic models use machine
performance curves specified at some discrete points to represent an induction machine. This model can
be used for dynamic motor starting studies, but is not suitable for Transient Stability Studies.
Note: The models described in this section are also employed by synchronous motors for Motor Starting
Studies since, during starting, synchronous motors behave similar to induction motors. This modeling
procedure is an accepted method according to current industry standards.
Notations and Symbols

The following notations are used in defining various parameters for induction machine models:
Rs =
Xs =
Xm =
Rr =
Xr =
Xlr =
Xoc =
Tdo =
X/R =
Stator resistance
Stator reactance
Magnetizing reactance
Rotor resistance
Rotor reactance
Locked-rotor reactance ( = Xs + XmXr/(Xm + Xr) )
Open-circuit reactance ( = Xs + Xm )
Rotor open-circuit time constant ( = (Xm + Xr)/(2fRr) )
Machine X/R ratio
These additional notations are used in the machine electrical and mechanical equations:
E
It
s
m
s
f
H
D
Pm
Pe
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Machine internal voltage

Machine terminal current
Machine synchronous speed
Machine mechanical speed
Machine slip ( = (s - m)/s )
Synchronous frequency
Machine shaft inertia
Damping factor (this value is negligible)
Mechanical output power
Electrical input power
24-2
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1.1 Single1 Model

This is the least complex model for a single-cage induction machine, with no deep-bars. It is essentially
using a Thevenin equivalent circuit to represent the machine. The rotor circuit resistance and reactance
are assumed constants; but the internal voltage will change depending on the machine speed.
Parameters for this model are:

E
Machine internal voltage
X
Transient reactance ( = Xlr = Xs + XmXr/(Xm + Xr))
Xoc
Open-circuit reactance ( = Xs + Xm )
Tdo
Rotor open-circuit time constant ( = (Xm + Xr)/(2fRr) )
X/R
Machine X/R ratio ( = X/R)
Note: The X/R value is obtained from the library and is not the same X/R used for short-circuit
calculations.
24-3
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1.2 Single2 Model

This is the standard model for induction machines, representing the magnetizing branch, stator, and rotor
circuits, and accounts for the deep-bar effect. The rotor resistance and reactance linearly change with the
machine speed.
Rs
Xs
Xm
Rrfl
Rrlr
Xrfl
Xrlr
Stator resistance
Stator reactance
Rotor resistance at full load
Rotor resistance at locked-rotor
Rotor reactance at full load
Rotor reactance at locked-rotor
24-4
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
The actual rotor resistance and reactance are calculated based on the full load and locked-rotor values and
machine operating slip. The relationships of rotor impedance with slip are shown below:
24-5
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1.3 DBL1 Model

This CKT model represents double-cage induction machines with integrated bars. The rotor resistance
and reactance of each cage are constant for all machine speeds; however, the equivalent impedance of the
two rotor circuits becomes a non-linear function of the machine speed.
Rs
Xs
Xm
Rr1
Rr2
Xr1
Xr2
Stator resistance
Stator reactance
Rotor resistance for the first rotor circuit
Rotor resistance for the second rotor circuit
Rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit
Rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit
24-6
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1.4 DBL2 Model

This is another representation of double-cage induction machines with independent rotor bars. Just as in
the DBL1 model, the rotor resistance and reactance of each cage are constant for all machine speeds, and
the equivalent impedance of the two rotor circuits is a non-linear function of the machine speed. The
DBL2 model has a different characteristic than the DBL1 model.

Rs
Stator resistance
Xs
Stator reactance
Xm
Rr1
Rr2
Xr1
Rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit
Xr2
Rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit
24-7
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1.5 Characteristic Curve Model

This model provides the capability to model induction machines directly based on machine performance
curves provided by the manufacturer. Although only a discrete set of points is required to specify each
curve, ETAP uses advanced curve fitting techniques to generate continuous curves for calculation
purposes.
Curves specified in this model include:
Torque vs. Slip

Current (I) vs. Slip
Power Factor (PF) vs. Slip
Note: This model is only used for Motor Starting Studies. For Transient Stability Studies you can use the
Machine Parameter Estimation Program to convert this model into one of the CKT models.
24-8
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1.6 Frequency Dependent Model

The frequency dependent models of induction machines are used in Transient Stability Studies. ETAP
provides the frequency dependent forms for the four types of circuit models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, and
DBL2). In these models, the stator and rotor reactance and slip of machine are functions of system
frequency. The following is the equivalent circuit for a double-cage induction machine model with
independent rotor bars (DBL2).
Rs
sLs
is
Vs
sLr1
sLr2
Rr1/s
Rr2/s
sLm
The parameters for this model are:
Rs
Ls
Lm
Rr1
Rr2
Lr1
Lr2
s
s
Stator resistance
Stator inductance
Magnetizing inductance
Rotor inductance for the first rotor circuit
Rotor inductance for the second rotor circuit
System speed
Motor slip
The data interface and library for the frequency dependent forms of the four types of induction machine
models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2) are the same as the corresponding regular induction
machine models. ETAP internally converts the reactance in machine interface to inductance.
The model also can be expressed as the following equivalent circuit in terms of transient inductance and
transient internal electromagnetic-force.
Rs
sL
is
sE
Vs
The parameters in this circuit are:
Ls
E
Transient inductance
Transient internal electromagnetic-force
24-9
Dynamic Models
Induction Machine
24.1.7 Shaft Torsion Model

If the torsion effect is included for the multiple mass shaft of machine, a shaft torsion model is used in
ETAP. The shaft model can be represented in a general form as follows:
Coupling Gear Swing Equation:
2H C
d C
= D1 ( C M ) K 1 ( 2 1 ) D2 ( C L ) K 2 ( 2 3 )
dt
Load Swing Equation:
2H L
d L
= TL D2 ( L C ) K 2 ( 3 2 )
dt
Parameters for the induction machine shaft model are:
M
C
L
1
2
3
HC
HL
D1
D2
K1
K2
TL
Motor speed
Coupling gear speed
Load speed
Motor angle displacement
Coupling gear angle displacement
Load angle displacement
Inertia constant of coupling gear
Inertia constant of load
Damping coefficient between motor and coupling gear
Damping coefficient between coupling gear and load
Spring coefficient between motor and coupling gear
Spring coefficient between coupling gear and load
Load torque
24-10
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2 Synchronous Machine

ETAP provides five different types of synchronous machine models to choose from for Transient
Stability Studies and frequency dependent models for generator starting and frequency dependent
Transient Stability Studies. The complexity of these models ranges from the simple Equivalent Model to
a model that includes the machine saliency, damper winding, and variable field voltage. These models
are:
Equivalent Model
Transient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
Transient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
Subtransient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
Subtransient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
Synchronous generators and synchronous motors share the same models. In the following discussion, the
generator case is taken as an example.
Notations and Symbols

The following notations are used for defining various parameters for synchronous machine models:
Xd
Xd
Xd
Xq
Xq
Xq
Xl
Ra
X/R
Tdo
Tdo
Tqo
Tqo
S100
S120
H
D
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Direct-axis subtransient synchronous reactance

Direct-axis transient synchronous reactance
Direct-axis synchronous reactance
Quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance
Quadrature-axis synchronous reactance
Quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance
Armature leakage reactance
Armature resistance
Machine X/R ratio (= Xd/Ra)
Direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant
Direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant
Quadrature -axis subtransient open-circuit time constant
Quadrature -axis transient open-circuit time constant
Saturation factor corresponding to 100 percent terminal voltage
Saturation factor corresponding to 120 percent terminal voltage
Total inertia of the shaft
Shaft damping factor
24-11
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
General Concept of Modeling Synchronous Machines

A synchronous machine is, in general, modeled by an equivalent internal voltage source and its equivalent
resistance and reactance. The equivalent internal voltage source is connected to the machine internal bus
behind the equivalent resistance and reactance, as shown in the diagram.
Depending on the structure (round-rotor or salient-pole) and design (with or without damper windings),
the equivalent internal voltage and equivalent impedance are calculated differently. These differences are
reflected in differential equations describing different types of synchronous machine models.
Parks transformation is adopted and the following notations and symbols are employed in the differential
equations for synchronous machine models:
Efd
f()
Eq
=
=
Ed
Eq
Ed
Eq
Ed
Ei
It
Id
Iq
=
=
=
=
=
Term representing the field voltage acting along the quadrature-axis. It is

calculated from the machine excitation system
Function to account machine saturation effect
Quadrature-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine
subtransient reactance
Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine subtransient
reactance
transient reactance
Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine transient
reactance
reactance
Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine reactance
Voltage proportional to field current
Machine terminal current
Direct-axis component of machine terminal current
Quadrature-axis component of machine terminal current
24-12
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
Saturation
The synchronous machine saturation effect needs to be considered in the modeling. This effect is
represented by two parameters S100 and S120, as defined in the following figure and equations:
S100 =
S120 =
I f 100
If
I f 120
1.2 I f
where
If
= Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the air gap line (no saturation)
If100
= Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open-circuit saturation

curve
= Field current corresponding to 120% terminal voltage on the open-circuit saturation
curve
If120
For Generator Starting Studies, another factor, Sbreak, is required to correct machine inductance as shown
in the above generator saturation curve. The factor Sbreak is defined as %Vt at the saturation break point.
24-13
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2.1 Equivalent Model

The screen below shows the equivalent model, its parameters, and the typical data.
This model uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and quadrature-axis reactance
to model a synchronous machine. The voltage source is proportional to the machine field flux linkages.
The model includes the effect of variable field voltage and the effect of saliency in the case of salient-pole
machines.
For this model, Req and Xeq are defined as:
Req
Xeq
= Ra
= Xq
24-14
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2.2 Transient Model for Round-Rotor Machine

The screen below shows the transient model for a round-rotor machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model uses an internal voltage source behind a fictitious impedance Rh + jXh. Rh and reactance Xh
that are used to replace Req and Xeq to achieve a faster calculation convergence.
24-15
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2.3 Subtransient Model for Round-Rotor Machine

The screen below shows the subtransient model for a round-rotor machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model also consists of an equivalent internal voltage source and a fictitious impedance Rh + jXh. This
model is a more comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machines. In addition to the
machines transient parameters, the subtransient parameters are included to model the machines
subtransient characteristics. This model is particularly useful for machines with damper windings.
24-16
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2.4 Transient Model for Salient-Pole Machine

The screen below shows the transient model for a salient-pole machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model is IEEE 2.1 model as defined in IEEE Std. 1110-2002, IEEE Guide for Synchronous
Generator Modeling Practices and Applications in Power System Stability Analyses, with the damper
winding in the Q-Axis ignored.
24-17
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
The model circuit diagrams are shown below:
Ra
Xf1d - Xad
Xl
id
X1d
Xad
Vd
Xfd
Rfd
R1d
Vfd
D-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Transient Model
Ra
Xl
iq
X1q
Xaq
Vq
R1q
Q-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Transient Model

Model circuit parameters are:
Rs
Xl
Xad
Xaq
Xf1d
X1d
R1d
Xffd
Rfd
X1q
R1q
Vfd
d
q
Stator resistance
Stator leakage reactance
Direct-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Quadrature-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Field to direct-axis rotor mutual reactance
Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Field leakage reactance
Field resistance
Qaudrature-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
Qaudrature-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Field voltage
Direct-axis flux linkages
Quadrature-axis flux linkages
24-18
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2.5 Subtransient Model for Salient-Pole Machine

The screen below shows the subtransient model for a salient-pole machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model is IEEE 2.2 model as defined in IEEE Std. 1110-2002, IEEE Guide for Synchronous
Generator Modeling Practices and Applications in Power System Stability Analyses, with one damper
winding in the Q-Axis ignored.
24-19
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
The model circuit diagrams are shown below:

Ra
Xf1d - Xad
Xl
id
X1d
Xad
Vd
Xfd
Rfd
R1d
Vfd
D-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Subtransient Model

Ra
Xl
iq
X1q
Vq
X2q
Xaq
R1q
R2q
Q-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Subtransient Model

Model circuit parameters are:
Rs
Stator resistance
Xl
Stator leakage reactance
Xad
Direct-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Xaq
Quadrature-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Xf1d
Field to direct-axis rotor mutual reactance
X1d
Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R1d
Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Field leakage reactance
Xffd
Rfd
Field resistance
X1q
Qaudrature-axis first rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R1q
Qaudrature-axis first rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
X2q
Qaudrature-axis second rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R2q
Qaudrature-axis second rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Vfd
Field voltage
d
q
24-20
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2.6 Frequency Dependent Model

A subtransient synchronous machine model with frequency dependency in ETAP is developed based on a
standard IEEE 2.1 synchronous generator model. An equivalent circuit diagram of the model is shown
here:
sq
Ra
Lf1d - Lad
Ll
id
L1d
Lffd
Lad
Vd
Rfd
+
R1d
Vfd
-
D-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Frequency Dependent Model

Ra
sd
Ll
iq
L1q
Laq
Vq
R1q
Q-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Frequency Dependent Model
Parameters in the circuits are:
Rs
Ll
Lad
Laq
Lf1d
L1d
R1d
Stator resistance
Stator leakage inductance
Direct-axis stator to rotor mutual inductance
Quadrature-axis stator to rotor mutual inductance
Field to direct-axis rotor mutual inductance
Direct-axis rotor equivalent leakage inductance
Direct-axis rotor equivalent resistance
24-21
Dynamic Models
Lffd
Rfd
L1q
R1q
Vfd
d
q
s
Synchronous Machine
Field leakage inductance

Field resistance
Qaudrature-axis rotor equivalent leakage inductance
Qaudrature-axis rotor equivalent resistance
Field voltage
System speed
The data interface for the frequency dependent subtransient synchronous machine model is the same as
the regular subtransient model with a salient-pole. ETAP internally calculates the required parameters for
the frequency dependent model from the data in generator interface.
24-22
Dynamic Models
Synchronous Machine
24.2.7 Shaft Torsion Model

If the torsion effect is included for the multiple mass shaft of machine, a shaft torsion model is used in
ETAP. The shaft model can be represented in a general form as follows:
Synchronous Motor
Parameters for the machine shaft model are:
G
Ref
M
C
T
L
1
2
3
HG
HM
HC
HL
D
Generator speed
Reference machine speed
Motor speed
Coupling gear speed
Turbine speed
Load speed
Motor angle displacement
Coupling gear angle displacement
Load angle displacement
Inertia constant of Generator
Inertia constant of motor
Inertia constant of coupling gear
Inertia constant of load
Damping coefficient of generator
24-23
Dynamic Models
D1
D2
K1
K2
TG
TM
TL
Synchronous Machine
Damping coefficient between turbine (motor) and coupling gear

Damping coefficient between coupling gear and generator (load)
Spring coefficient between turbine (motor) and coupling gear
Spring coefficient between coupling gear and generator (load)
generator torque
Motor torque
Load torque
24-24
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
24.3 Power Grid

A power grid (utility system) must be modeled with an equivalent machine for Motor Starting and
Transient Stability Studies. This is due to the fact that a power grid is generally considered as an
interfacing point to the power grid whose voltage and frequency is supported by a larger system and
therefore unlikely to change. It is valid to assume this equivalent machine has a constant internal voltage
source and an infinite inertia. Thus the power grid is modeled in ETAP with the following Thevenin
equivalent:
where Ei is calculated from the initial terminal bus voltage and Req and Xeq are from positive sequence R
and X of the Power Grid Editor, as shown below:
24-25
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
24.4 Excitation System

To accurately account for dynamics from exciter and AVR systems in power system transient responses,
complete modeling of these systems is usually necessary.
ETAP provides the following exciter and AVR models:
IEEE Type 1
IEEE Type 2
IEEE Type 3
IEEE Type 1S
IEEE Type DC1
IEEE Type DC2
IEEE Type DC3
IEEE Type ST1
IEEE Type ST2
IEEE Type ST3
IEEE Type AC1
IEEE Type AC2
IEEE Type AC3

IEEE Type AC4
IEEE Type AC5A
Basler SR8F & SR125A
HPC 840
JEUMONT Industrie
IEEE Type ST1D
IEEE Type AC8B
IEEE Type AC1A
IEEE Type ST4B
User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
For IEEE type exciter and AVR systems, the equivalent transfer functions and their parameter names are
in accordance with the IEEE recommended types from the following references:
IEEE Committee Report, Computer Representation of Excitation System, IEEE Trans. on PAS,
Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp 1460-1464.
IEEE Committee Report, Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies, IEEE
Trans. on PAS, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981, pp 494-509.
IEEE Std. 412.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992.
Excitation System Saturation

The following is a typical block diagram used for exciters:
24-26
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
This diagram shows the output of the AVR is applied to the exciter after a saturation function SE is
subtracted from it. The exciter parameter KE represents the setting of the shunt field rheostat when a selfexcited shunt field is used.
It should be noted that there is a dependency between exciter ceiling Efdmax, AVR ceiling VRmax,
exciter saturation SE and exciter constant KE. These parameters are related by the following equation (the
sign of KE is negative for a self-excited shunt field):
VR ( KE + SE ) Efd = 0
for Efdmin < Efd < Efdmax
At excitation ceiling ( Efd = Efdmax ) the above equation becomes:

VRmax = (KE +SEmax ) - Efdmax
Therefore, it is important that the exciter parameters entered satisfy the above equation, when applicable.
ETAP will check this condition at run time and flag any violations.
The exciter saturation function (SE) represents the increase in exciter excitation due to saturation. It is
defined as:
where the quantities A and B are defined as the exciter field currents which produce the exciter output
voltage on the constant-resistance-load saturation curve and air gap line, respective, as shown in the
exciter saturation curve below
ETAP assumes that SE is specified at the following exciter voltages:

Saturation Factor
SEmax
SE.75max
Exciter Voltage
Efdmax
0.75Efdmax
24-27
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (1)
24.4.1 IEEE Type 1
IEEE Type 1 - Continuously Acting Regulator and Exciter (1)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents a continuously acting regulator with a rotating exciter
system. Some vendors' units represented by this model include:
Westinghouse Brushless Systems with TRA, Mag-A-Stat, Silverstat, or Rotoroal Regulator

Allis Chalmers Systems with Regulex Regulator
General Electric Systems with Amplidyne or GDA Regulator
Parameters and Sample Data

Parameters for this model and their sample data are shown in this screen capture of the Exciter page:
24-28
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (1)
Parameter Definitions and Units

Parameter definitions and their units are provided in the following table:
Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KA
KE
KF
TA
TE
TF
TR
Definition
Maximum value of the regulator output voltage
Minimum value of the regulator output voltage
The value of excitation function at Efdmax
The value of excitation function at 0.75 Efdmax
Maximum exciter output voltage
Regulator gain
Exciter constant for self-excited field
Regulator stabilizing circuit gain
Regulator amplifier time constant
24-29
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (2)
24.4.2 IEEE Type 2
IEEE Type 2 - Rotating Rectifier System (2)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents a rotating rectifier exciter with static regulator system. Its
characteristics are similar to IEEE Type 1 exciter, except for the feedback-damping loop. This system is
applicable to units where the main input to the damping loop is provided from the regulator output rather
than the exciter output. To compensate for the exciter damping which is not included in the damping loop,
the feedback transfer function contains one additional time-constant.
An example of such a system is the Westinghouse Brushless System, which was in service up to 1966.

Parameters for this model and their sample data are shown in the following screen capture:
24-30
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (2)

Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KA
KE
KF
TA
TE
TF1
TF2
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
Regulator stabilizing circuit first time constant
Regulator stabilizing circuit second time constant
24-31
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (3)
24.4.3 IEEE Type 3
IEEE Type 3 - Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (3)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents static excitation systems with compound terminal voltage
and current feedback. The regulator transfer function for this model is similar to IEEE Type 1. In this
model, the regulator output is combined with a signal, which represents the self-excitation from the
generator terminals.
An example of such a system is the General Electric SCPT System.

24-32
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (3)

Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
Vbmax
KA
KE
KF
KI
KP
XL
TA
TE
TF
TR
Definition
Max. value of field voltage (saturated value)
Regulator gain
Current circuit gain coefficient (on system base 100MVA)
24-33
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (1S)
24.4.4 IEEE Type 1S
IEEE Type 1S - Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage (1S)

In this type of exciter and AVR system, excitation is obtained through terminal voltage rectification. In
this model, the maximum regulated voltage (VRmax) is proportional to terminal voltage Vt.

24-34
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (1S)

Parameter
VRmin
Efdmax
KA
KF
KP
TA
TF
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
24-35
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC1)
24.4.5 IEEE Type DC1
IEEE Type DC1 - DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation (DC1)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used to model field-controlled DC-Commutator exciters with
continuous voltage regulators. Examples of this model are:
Allis Chalmers Regulex regulator

General Electric Amplidyne and GDA regulator
Westinghouse Mag-A-Stat, Rototrol, Silverstat, and TRA regulators

24-36
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC1)

Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KA
KE
KF
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
Voltage regulator time constant
24-37
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC2)
IEEE Type DC2 - DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and Supplies from
Terminal Voltage (DC2)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for field-controlled DC commutator exciters with continuous
voltage regulators supplied from the generator or auxiliarys bus voltage. Its only difference from IEEE
Type DC1 is the regulator output limits, which are now proportional to terminal voltage Vt.

24-38
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC2)

Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KA
KE
KF
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
24-39
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC3)
I
EEE Type DC3 - DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation (DC3)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for the older DC commutator exciters with non-continuously
acting regulators.
Examples of this model are:
General Electric exciter with GFA4 regulator

Westinghouse exciter with BJ30 regulator
24-40
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC3)


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KE
KV
TE
TR
TRH
Definition
Fast raise/Lower contact setting
Rheostat travel time
24-41
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST1)
24.4.8 IEEE Type ST1
IEEE Type ST1 - Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter (ST1)

This type of exciter and AVR system is used to represent potential-source, controlled-rectifier excitation
systems. This model applies to all systems supplied through a transformer from the generator terminals.
Examples of this model include:
Canadian General Electric Silcomatic exciters

Westinghouse Canada Solid State Thyristor exciters
Westinghouse type PS static excitation systems with type WTA or WHS regulators
24-42
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST1)


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
VImax
VImin
KA
KC
KF
TA
TB
TC
TF
TR
Definition
Maximum internal signal within voltage regulator
Minimum internal signal within voltage regulator
Regulator gain
Regulator gain
Voltage Regulator amplifier time constant
Voltage Regulator amplifier time constant
24-43
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST3)
IEEE Type ST2 - Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (ST2)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for compound source rectifier excitation systems. These
systems use both current and voltage sources.
An example of this model is General Electric static exciter SCT-PPT or SCPT.
24-44
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST3)


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
Efdmax
KA
KC
KE
KF
KI
KP
TA
TE
TF
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
Regulator gain
24-45
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST3)
IEEE Type ST3 - Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter (ST3)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents compound-source rectifier excitation systems. These
exciters utilize internal quantities within the generator as the source of power.
Examples of this model are:
General Electric GENERREX exciter

Shunt-Thyristor exciter
24-46
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST3)


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
Efdmax
VGmax
VImax
VImin
KA
KC
KG
KI
KJ
KPreal
KPimg
TA
TB
TC
TE
TR
XL
Definition
Maximum inner loop voltage feedback
Maximum internal signal within voltage regulator
Minimum internal signal within voltage regulator
Regulator gain
Inner loop feedback constant
First stage regulation gain
Real part of potential circuit gain coefficient
Reactive part of potential circuit gain coefficient
24-47
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC1)
24.4.11 IEEE Type AC1
IEEE Type AC1 - Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and Field
Current Feedback (AC1)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents alternator-rectifier excitation systems with noncontrolled rectifiers and exciter field current feedback. There is no self-excitation and the source of
voltage regulator power is not affected by external transients.
Westinghouse Brushless Excitation Systems fall under this type of exciter model.
24-48
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC1)


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KA
KC
KD
KE
KF
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
Demagnetizing factor
24-49
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC2)
IEEE Type AC2 - High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System (AC2)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents high-initial-response, field-controlled alternator-rectifier
excitation systems. The model uses an alternator main exciter and non-controlled rectifiers. It is similar to
IEEE Type AC1 exciter model but has two additional field current feedback loops.
An example of this model is Westinghouse High-Initial-Response Brushless Excitation System.
24-50
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC2)


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
VAmax
VAmin
Efdmax
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
Definition
Maximum regulator internal voltage
Minimum regulator internal voltage
Regulator gain
Second stage regulator gain
24-51
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC2)
Parameter
KH
KL
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
TR
VLR
Definition
Gain of exciter field current limit
Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants
Exciter field current limit reference
24-52
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC3)
IEEE Type AC3 - Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter (AC3)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents field-controlled, alternator-rectifier excitation systems. It
can model systems that derive voltage regulator power from the exciter output voltage and simulate their
non-linearity.
An example of this model is General Electric ALTERREX excitation system using static voltage
regulators.
24-53
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC3)


Parameter
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
EFDN
VAmax
VAmin
VLV
KA
KC
KD
KE
KF
KLV
Definition
Value of Efd at which feedback gain changes
Maximum regulator internal voltage
Minimum regulator internal voltage
Exciter low voltage limit reference
Regulator gain
Gain of the exciter low voltage limit signal
24-54
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC3)
Parameter
KN
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
TR
KR
Definition
Exciter control system stabilizer gain
Constant for regulator and alternator field power supply
24-55
Unit
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC4)
IEEE Type AC4 - High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter (AC4)

This type of exciter and AVR system represents alternator-supplied, controlled-rectifier excitation
systems. A high-initial response excitation system, it has a Thyristor bridge at the output circuit.
General Electric ALTHYREX and Rotating Thyristor excitation systems are examples of this type of
exciter.

24-56
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC4)

Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
VImax
VImin
KA
KC
TA
TB
TC
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
24-57
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
AC5A
24.4.15 IEEE Type AC5A
IEEE Type AC5A - Simplified Rotating Rectifier Excitation System (AC5A)

This type of exciter and AVR system is a simplified model for brushless excitation systems. The regulator
is supplied from a source, such as a permanent magnet generator, which is not affected by system
disturbances.
This model can be used to represent small excitation systems such as those produced by Basler and
Electric Machinery.

24-58
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
AC5A
24-59
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
AC5A

Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KA
KE
KF
TA1
TA2
TA3
TE
TF1
TF2
TF3
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
Exciter control system time constant
24-60
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
24.4.16 Basler SR8F & SR125A
Basler SR8F & SR125A Excitation System (SR8F)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used to represent Basler SR8F and SR125A Exciter Systems.
24-61
Dynamic Models
Excitation System


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
KA
KF
TA
TB
TF1
TF2
TR
Definition
Regulator gain
Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant (Rot. Rec.)
24-62
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
HPC 840 (HPC)
24.4.17 HPC 840
HPC 840 Excitation and AVR System (HPC)
This type of exciter and AVR system includes both forward gain and feedback damping loops. There are
three compensation signals that regulate excitation voltages. These signals are terminal voltage
magnitude, real power generation, and reactive power generation.
24-63
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
HPC 840 (HPC)


Parameter
Amax
Amin
Bmax
Bmin
C
D
Efdmax
Kpow
KQ
KE
SE .75
SEmax
Definition
Regulator internal maximum limit (Amax = VImax * Ka)
Regulator internal minimum limit (Amin = VImin * Ka)
Integrator upper limit (Bmax = LIMmax * Ka)
Integrator lower limit (Bmin = LIMmin * Ka)
Combined excitation system (C = Kg * kp * Ka)
Combined stabilizing feedback gain (D = Kd * Kf/Kp)
Maximum Exciter output voltage
Active power compensation factor
Reactive power compensation factor
Value of excitation saturation function at 0.75 Efdmax
Value of excitation saturation function at Efdmax
24-64
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
HPC 840 (HPC)
TL
T4
TD
Tdsty
TE
TF
TP
TQ
VRmax
VRmin
Control Bus
Integration time constant

Excitation system total delay
Stabilizing feedback time constant
Voltage transducer filter time constant
Active power compensation time constant
Reactive power compensation time constant
Voltage feedback bus ID
24-65
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
JEUMONT Industrie (JEUM)
24.4.18 JEUMONT Industries
JEUMONT - JEUMONT Industrie (JEUM)
This type of exciter and AVR system consists of a voltage block, a current block, a voltage regulator
block, and an excitation block. It uses a rotating rectifier for the excitation system.
24-66
Dynamic Models
Excitation System


Parameter
AV1
AV2
AV3
AV4
AV5
AV6
AV7
AV8
AV9
AV10
AV11
Ai1
Definition
Gain of voltage control loop
Constant of voltage control loop
Constant of voltage control loop
Gain of reference voltage
Time constant of voltage control loop
Parameter of voltage control loop
Gain of current control loop
24-67
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
Parameter
Ai2
Ai3
Ai4
Ai5
Ai6
Ai7
Ai8
Ai9
Ai10
Ai11
Ai12
AR1
AR2
KU1
KU2
Vres
VSUP
Te
Ke
SEmax
SE.75max
Efdmax
Kae
Kif
Max1
Min1
Max2
Min2
Max3
Min3
Max4
Min4
Max5
Min5
Max6
Min6
Max7
Min7
Control Bus
Definition
Gain of supply voltage to current control loop
Time constant of current control loop
Gain of regulator
Regulator reference
Gain of terminal voltage feedback
Gain of regulator
Supply voltage of thy-bridge
Supply voltage of current control loop
Time constant of exciter loop
Gain of exciter loop
Saturation coefficient at maximum field voltage
Saturation coefficient at 0.75 maximum field
voltage
Maximum field voltage
Gain of field current feedback loop
Gain of field current feedback
Maximum value 1 of voltage control loop
Minimum value 1 of voltage control loop
Maximum value 4 of current control loop
Minimum value 4 of current control loop
Voltage feedback bus ID
24-68
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
V
V
V
Sec.
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
24.4.19 IEEE Type ST1D
IEEE Type ST1D- Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (ST1D)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for compound source rectifier excitation systems with voltsper-hertz limiter. These systems use both current and voltage sources.
24-69
Dynamic Models
Excitation System


Parameter
RC
XC
TR
TC
TB
KA
TA
KF
TF
KC
VVLR
KVL
TVL
Definition
Resistive part of reactive droop compensation
Inductive part of reactive droop compensation
Transducer time constant
Transient gain reduction lead time constant
Transient gain reduction lag time constant
Amplifier gain
Amplifier time constant
Stabilizing feedback signal gain
Stabilizing feedback signal time constant
Field current gain
Set point of V/Hz limiter
Over-excitation feedback signal gain
Over-excitation feedback signal time constant
24-70
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
Sec.
p.u.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
Parameter
KVF
TH
VImax
VImin
VRmax
VRmin
Vdc
Rf
Vref
TD
VHZ
Ifb
Vfb
Definition
Stabilizing feedback signal gain
Measurement time constant
Maximum error limit
Minimum error limit
Maximum regular output
Minimum regular output
Field flashing battery voltage
Field flashing battery and external circuit resistance
Voltage reference
Pickup delay time
V/Hz pickup value
Exciter base current
Exciter base voltage
24-71
Unit
p.u.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Volts
Ohms
p.u.
Sec.
p.u.
Amps
Volts
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC8B)
24.4.20 IEEE Type AC8B

24-72
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC8B)

Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KP
KI
KD
KA
KE
TD
TA
TE
Definition
Maximum value of the regulator output voltage in pu
Minimum value of the regulator output voltage in pu
Saturation value of exciter at Efdmax
Saturation value of exciter at 0.75 Efdmax
Maximum exciter output voltage in pu
Proportional control gain in pu
Integral control gain in pu
Derivative control gain in pu
Regulator gain in pu
Exciter constant for self-excited field in pu
Derivative control time constant in sec
Regulator amplifier time constant in sec
Exciter time constant in sec
24-73
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC1A)
IEEE Type AC1A Exciter (AC1A)
24-74
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC1A)


Parameter
VAmax
VAmin
VRmax
VRmin
VUEL
VOEL
SEmax
SE.75
Efdmax
KA
Definition
Maximum value of the regulator output voltage in pu
Minimum value of the regulator output voltage in pu
Maximum regulator internal voltage in pu
Minimum regulator internal voltage in pu
Underexcitation limiter in pu
Overexcitation limiter in pu
Saturation value of exciter at Efdmax in pu
Saturation value of exciter at 0.75 Efdmax in pu
Regulate gain in pu
24-75
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC1A)
Parameter
KC
KD
KF
KE
TA
TC
TB
TE
TF
TR
a1
a2
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
b9
b10
Definition
Rectifier loading factor in pu
Demagnetizing factor in pu
Regulate stabilizing circuit gain in pu
Exciter gain in pu
Regulator amplifier time constant in sec
Internal signal lead time constant in sec
Internal signal lag time constant in sec
Exciter time constant in sec
Regulate stabilizing time constant in sec
Regulate input filter time in sec
Rectifier regulation characteristic coefficient in pu
24-76
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST4B)
24.4.22 IEEE Type ST4B
IEEE ST4B Exciter
24-77
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST4B)


Parameter
VRmax
VRmin
VMmax
VMmin
VBmax
VOEL
VUEL
KC
Definition
Maximum AVR output
Minimum AVR output
Maximum inner loop output
Minimum inner loop output
Maximum Source Voltage
Over excitation limit input
Under excitation limit input
Rectifier loading factor
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
24-78
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST4B)
KG
KI
KPM
KIM
KPR
KIR
KPreal
KPimg
TA
TR
XL
Field voltage feedback gain

Current source constant (on system base 100MVA)
Inner loop proportional gain
Inner loop integral gain
AVR proportional gain
AVR integral gain
Real part of potential source constant
Imaginary part of potential source constant
AVR time constant
AC sensor time constant
Source leakage reactance
24-79
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec
sec
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC4B)
24.4.23 IEEE Type DC4B
IEEE Type DC4B DC commutator exciter with PID style regulator
24-80
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC4B)

24-81
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (DC4B)

Parameters
Description
VRmax
VRmin
VEmin
VOEL
VUEL
E1
SE1
E2
SE2
KP
KI
KD
KF
KE
KA
TA
TF
Maximum controller output in pu

Minimum controller output in pu
Exciter minimum output voltage in pu
Overexcitation limiter output
Underexcitation limiter output
Exciter flux at SE1 in pu
Saturation factor at E1
Regulator proportional gain in pu
Regulator integral gain in pu
Regulator derivative gain in pu
Rate feedback gain in pu
Exciter field proportional constant
Regulator output gain
Regulator output time constant in second
Rate feedback time constant in second
Regulator derivative filter time constant in
second
Exciter field time constant
Regulator input filter time constant in second
TD
TE
TR
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Note: Alternative VOEL and VUEL are considered as summation at the input of PID controller.
24-82
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC7B)
24.4.24 IEEE Type AC7B
IEEE Type AC7B Alternator-rectifier excitation system
24-83
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC7B)

IEEE Type AC7B - Dataset 1
24-84
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC7B)
IEEE Type AC7B - Dataset 2
24-85
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC7B)

Parameters
Description
Unit
VAmax
VAmin
VRmax
VRmin
VEmin
VFEmax
VUEL
E1
SE1
E2
SE2
KPR
KIR
KDR
KPA
KIA
KP
KL
KE
Maximum voltage regulator output in pu

Minimum voltage regulator output in pu
Minimum available exciter voltage
Maximum fast exciter current limit
Regulator proportional gain in pu
Regulator derivative gain in pu
Voltage regulator proportional gain in pu
Voltage regulator integral gain in pu
Low band gain
Exciter constant related to self-excited field in pu
Demagnetizing factor, A function of exciter alternator reactances in
pu
Excitation control system stabilizer gain in pu
Rate feedback loop gain in pu
Rectifier loading factor proportional to commutating reactance in pu
Exciter time constant, integration rate associated with exciter
control in second
Excitation control system stabilizer time constant in second
Regulator derivative filter time constant in second
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
KD
KF1
KF2
KF3
KC
TE
TF
TDR
TR
24-86
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST1A)
24.4.25 IEEE Type ST1A
IEEE Type ST1A Potential-source, controlled-rectifier exciter
24-87
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST1A)

IEEE Type ST1A - Dataset 1
24-88
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST1A)
IEEE Type ST1A - Dataset 2
24-89
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST1A)

Parameters
Description
Unit
VAmax
VAmin
VImax
VImin
VRmax
VRmin
VUEL
VOEL
KA

Maximum voltage regulator input limit in pu
Minimum voltage regulator input limit in pu
Voltage regulator gain in pu
Rectifier loading factor proportional to
commutating reactance in pu
Exciter output current limiter gain in pu
Exciter output current limit reference
Voltage regulator time constant in second
Excitation control system stabilizer time constant
in second
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
KC
KF
KLR
ILR
TB
TB1
TC
TC1
TA
TF
TR
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Note: Alternative VUEL and stabilizer input are considered as summation at the input of controller.
24-90
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC2A)
IEEE Type AC2A High initial response alternator-rectifier excitation system with non-controlled
rectifiers and feedback from exciter field current
24-91
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC2A)

24-92
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (AC2A)

Parameters
VAmax
VAmin
VRmax
VRmin
VUEL
VOEL
VFEmax
E1
SE1
E2
SE2
KA
KB
KC
KD
KE
KF
KH
TA
TB
TC
TE
TF
TR
Description
Maximum fast exciter current limit
Second stage regulator gain in pu
Demagnetizing factor, A function of exciter alternator reactances in
pu
Excitation time constant, integration rate associated with exciter
control in second
Excitation control ystem stabilizer time constant in second
24-93
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST2A)
24.4.27 IEEE Type ST2A
IEEE Type ST2A Compound-source rectifier exciter
24-94
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST2A)

24-95
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
IEEE Type (ST2A)

Parameters
VRmax
VRmin
VUEL
Efdmax
KA
KC
KE
KF
KI
KP
TA
TE
TF
TR
Description
Exciter time constant, integration rate associated with exciter control in
second
Excitation control ystem stabilizer time constant in second
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Note: Alternative VUEL input is considered as summation at the input of controller.

Note:
24-96
Dynamic Models
Excitation System
User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
24.4.28 User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)

You can access the UDM models that have been created and saved using the exciter type list.
Details on how to use UDM models are described in User-defined Dynamic Models chapter.
24-97
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5 Governor-Turbine
Modeling of a governor-turbine system in transient stability studies is essential for simulation time frames
of more than a second.
ETAP provides the following governor-turbine models:
Steam-Turbine (ST)
Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST1)
Tandem-Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)
Tandem-Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)
IEEE General Steam-Turbine (STM)
Gas-Turbine (GT)
Gas-Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
General Purpose (GP)
Diesel-Engine (DT)
Woodward Steam-Turbine 505
Woodward UG-8
Woodward Governor 2301
GE Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTH)
GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTS)
Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set (MARS)
Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)
GHH BROSIG Steam-Turbine Governor (GHH)
Woodward Hydraulic Governor-turbine (HYDR)
IEEE Gas -Turbine (SGT)
PowerLogic Governor-turbine Model A (PL-A)
Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine/Governor (ST60)
Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine/Governor (ST70)
Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-2)
Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-3)
Combustion Turbine and Governor (CT251)
GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers (GGOV3)
For IEEE type governor-turbine systems, the equivalent transfer functions and their parameter names are
in accordance with the IEEE recommended types from the following reference:
IEEE Committee Report, "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System
Studies", IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and System, Vol. PAS-92, No. 6, Nov./Dec. 1973,
pp. 1904-1915.
IEEE Committee Report, "Dynamic Models for Fossil Fueled Steam Units in Power System Studies",
IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, Vol. PS-6, No. 2, May 1991, pp. 753-761.
24-98
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Steam Turbine (ST)
24.5.1 Steam-Turbine (ST)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple steam-turbine and speed governing system.
ST Governor System Representation (ST)

24-99
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Steam Turbine (ST)

Parameter
Mode
Droop
Fhp
Pmax
Pmin
Tc
Tch
Trh
Tsr
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Steady-state speed droop
(Shaft capacity ahead of reheater)/(Total shaft capacity)
Maximum shaft power (rated MW)
Minimum shaft power ( > = 0)
Control Amplifier (servomotor) time constant
Steam chest time constant
Reheater time constant
Speed relay time constant
24-100
Unit
%
p.u.
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5.2 Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST1)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a two-stage steam-turbine with a reheat and speed
governing system. It consists of a speed relay, a control amplifier, a steam chest, and a reheater.

24-101
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

Parameter
Mode
Droop
Fhp
Pmax
Pmin
Tc
Tch
Tdrp
Tsr
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Steam time constant
Load sensor time constant
Speed relay time constant in second
24-102
Unit
%
p.u.
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Compound Single-Reheat Steam (ST2)
24.5.3 Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a tandem-compound, single-reheat steam-turbine, and
speed governing system. It is a type ST1 model with a block representing crossover piping to the lowpressure turbines.
Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)
24-103
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Compound Single-Reheat Steam (ST2)


Parameter
Mode
Droop
Fhp
Fip
Flp
Pmax
Pmin
Tc
Tch
Tco
Trh
Tsr
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Intermediate pressure turbine power fraction
Low pressure turbine power fraction
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Crossover time constant
Reheater time constant
24-104
Unit
%
p.u.
p.u.
p.u
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)
24.5.4 Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a tandem-compound, double-reheat steam-turbine, and
speed governing system. It is similar to type ST2 model except for the added block representing reheated
steam between the very-high pressure and high-pressure turbines.
24-105
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
Mode
Droop
Fhp
Fip
Flp
Fvhp
Pmax
Pmin
Tc
Tch
Tco
Trh1
Trh2
Tsr
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Intermediate pressure turbine power fraction
Low pressure turbine power fraction
Very high pressure turbine power fraction
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Crossover time constant
First reheater time constant
Second reheater time constant
24-106
Unit
%
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5.5 IEEE General Steam-Turbine (STM)

This type of governor-turbine system represents an IEEE suggested general steam-turbine and speed
governing system. It may be used for modeling the steam systems represented by ST, ST1, ST2, and ST3,
as well as the cross-compound, single-reheat and cross-compound, double-reheat systems.
24-107
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
Mode
Droop
DB
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
Pmax
Pmin
T1
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Steady-state speed droop in second
Speed deadband
Partial very high pressure turbine power fraction
Partial high pressure turbine power fraction
Partial high pressure turbine power fraction
Partial intermediate pressure turbine power fraction
Partial intermediate pressure turbine power fraction
Partial low pressure turbine power fraction
Partial low pressure turbine power fraction
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Amplifier/Compensator time constant
24-108
Unit
%
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
MW
MW
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Parameter
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
UC
UO
Definition
Load sensor (droop) time constant
Control Amp./current driver time constant
Actuator time constant
Engine dead time constant
Limit of value closing
Limit of value opening
24-109
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas Turbine (GT)
24.5.6 Gas-Turbine (GT)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple gas-turbine and speed governing system.
Gas-Turbine (GT)

24-110
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas Turbine (GT)

Parameter
Mode
Droop
Pmax
Pmin
Tc
Tsr
Tt
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Turbine relay time constant
24-111
Unit
%
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
24.5.7 Gas-Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a steam-turbine and speed governing system, with the
inclusion of the fuel system.
GasTurbine including Fuel System (GTF)

24-112
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)

Parameter
Mode
Droop
Ff
KD
Kf
Kr
Pmax
Pmin
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
VL
VU
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Minimum fuel flow
Governor gain
Fuel system feedback gain Kf = 0 or 1
Fuel system transfer function gain
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Load sensor (droop) time constant
Fuel value time constant
Fuel system lead time constant
Lower incremental power limit
Upper incremental power limit
24-113
Unit
%
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5.8 General Purpose (GP)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a general-purpose governor-turbine system.
24-114
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter definitions and their units are given in the following table:
Parameter
Mode
Droop
Pmax
Pmin
Ta
Tc
Tdrp
Tsr
Tt
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Governor reset time constant
Turbine relay time constant
Unit
%
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
24-115
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Diesel-Engine (DT)
24.5.9 Diesel-Engine (DT)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple diesel-engine and speed governing system.
Diesel-Engine (DT)
24-116
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Diesel-Engine (DT)


Parameter
Mode
Droop
Pmax
Pmin
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Definition
Isoch only
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Fuel valve time constant
24-117
Unit
%
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Woodward Steam-Turbine 505 (505)
24.5.10 Woodward Steam-Turbine 505

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward 505 and 505E PID governor for
extraction steam-turbine system.
Speed
Ref
Speed
1 + sD1
1 + sT f 1
e 1.5Ts
Speed Ctrl Loop

L1
P1
Ratio/
Limiter
HP
Turbine Shaft
1
1 + sT a1
1
1 + sT m1
Pm
1
1 + sT m 2
EF
L2
Dr1
1
1 + s / I1
Steam
Map
L3
+
P2
Inverse
Ratio/
Limiter
1
1 + sT a 2
L4
Dr 2
LP
1
1+ s / I2
Extraction Flow
Extraction Ctrl Loop

Ext Press
e 1.5Ts
1 + sD2
1 + sT f 2
Ext Pres
Ref
Woodward 505 and 505E Steam-Turbine (505)
24-118
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
Mode
Droop1
Droop2
Efmax
ExtFlow
ExtPress
Hpa
HPb
HPc
Hpmax
I1 <D>
I1 <I>
I2
L1
L2
L3
L4
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Extraction loop droop
Max. extraction flow
Turbine extraction flow
Extraction pressure
Min. extraction @ max. power
Max. extraction @ min. power
Min. extraction @ min. power
Max. HP flow
Speed loop integral (Droop mode)
Speed loop integral gain in (Isoch mode)
Extraction loop integral gain
Up limit for speed loop output
Low limit for speed loop output
Up limit for extraction loop output
Low limit for extraction loop output
24-119
Unit
%
%
T/Hr
%
%
T/Hr
T/Hr
T/Hr
T/Hr
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Parameter
P1 <D>
P1 <I>
P2
RampRate
Sa
Sb
Sc
SDR1
SDR1 <I>
SDR2
Smax
Ta1
Ta2
Tm1
Tm2
TS
Definition
Speed loop proportional gain (Droop mode)
Speed loop proportional gain (Isoch mode)
Extraction loop proportional gain
Speed reference ramp rate
Max. power @ min. extraction
Min. power @ max. extraction
Min. power @ min. extraction
Speed loop parameter (Droop mode)
Speed loop parameter (Isoch mode)
Extraction loop parameter
Max. power
HP valve actuator time constant
LV valve actuator time constant
Turbine time constant (shaft power output)
Turbine time constant (extraction flow)
Controller sample time
24-120
Unit
%
%
%
%/Sec.
kW
kW
kW
%
%
%
kW
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Woodward UG-8 (UG-8)
24.5.11 Woodward UG-8

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward UG-8 governor, used mainly for diesel
generators. This model includes a representation for a ball head filter, amplifier/compensator, and a diesel
engine.
Woodward UG-8 (UG-8)
24-121
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Woodward 2301 (2301)


Parameter
Mode
A1
A2
A3
Ad
B1
B2
C1
K1
Pmax
Pmin
T7
T8
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Compensator constant
Permanent droop constant
Ball head filter constant
Ball head filter constant
Governor drive ratio
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Fuel value time constant
24-122
Unit
rad/Sec.
rad/Sec.
rad/Sec.
rpm/in
Deg/in
MW
MW
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5.12 Woodward Governor 2301

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward 2301 and 2301A speed governing systems
with a diesel turbine system and load sharing capability.
Woodward Governor 2301A and 2301 (2301)
24-123
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

Load Sharing (MW Sharing)

To share load (MW) between generators, you must set LS GP# (Load Sharing Group Number) of 2301
governors to the same group number.
Note: in order to use this capability, load sharing governors must be in Isochronous Mode.

Parameter
Mode
LS GP#
Droop
max
min
K1
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Load sharing group number
Min. shaft position in degrees
Max. shaft position in degrees
Gain setting
Reset setting
Actuator compensation setting
Partially very high pressure power fraction
24-124
Unit
%
Deg
Deg
Deg/A
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Parameter
T1
T2
Pmax
Pmin
k
Definition
Engine Dead Time constant
Amplifier/compensator time constant
Maximum shaft power
Minimum shaft power
Internal variable ( 1.0 p.u. Pm/(max-max))
24-125
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
MW
MW
Pm p.u./Deg
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
GE Heavy Duty Governor Gas Turbine (GTH)
24.5.13 GE Heavy Duty Governor - Gas Turbine (GTH)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the GE heavy-duty gas turbine speed governing system.
Note: For Isoch: W=KD, and for Droop W=KI where KD = 1/Droop (pu)
f1
f2
= (Tr - 700 (1 - WF) + 550 (1 -N))/[1+.0027(59-Ta)]

= 1.3 (WF - 0.23) + 0.5 (1 -N)
Deg F
Deg F
GE Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTH)
24-126
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
Mode
Droop
Max
Min
Term.Ctrl
Acc.Ctrl
X
Y
Z
a
b
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Fuel upper limit (VCE' upper limit)
Fuel lower limit (VCE' lower limit)
Flag to include temperature control loop
Flag to include acceleration control loop
Governor transfer function coefficient
Fuel system transfer function coefficient
24-127
Unit
%
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
c
Kf
K1
Tf
Tcr
Tcd
Ttd
T
Tt
Tr
ta

Fuel system feedback gain, Kf = 0 or 1
Gain for Isoch mode
Fuel system time constant
Combustion reaction time delay
Compressor discharge volume time constant
Turbine & exhaust system transportation delay
Transportation delay
Temperature controller integration rate
Turbine rated exhaust temperature
Ambient Temperature
24-128
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
Deg.F
DegF
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor Gas Turbine (GTS)
24.5.14 GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor - Gas Turbine (GTS)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the GE simplified single shaft gas turbine speed
governing system.
GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTS)
24-129
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor Gas Turbine (GTS)


Parameter
Mode
Droop
Max
Min
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
R
S
T
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Fuel upper limit
Fuel lower limit
Fast load pickup operating zone limit
24-130
Unit
%
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5.15 Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set (MARS)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Turbine MARS governor set for gas turbine and
speed governing systems.
24-131
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

24-132
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

Parameter
Mode
Droop
MaxGov
MinGov
Max2
Min2
Max3
Min3
Maxo
Mino
Wover
Tref
Ks
Kt
Ko
Ku
Kl
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Th1
Th2
Definition
Unit
Speed droop
Governor maximum at no load
Governor minimum at no load
Maximum mechanical power
Minimum mechanical power
%
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Maximum gas producer

Minimum gas producer
Maximum overspeed control
Minimum overspend control
Over speed reference
Temperature reference
Speed control gain
Temperature control gain
Overspeed control gain
Loader delta maximum fuel
Loader delta minimum fuel
Governor reset time
Combustor time constant
Gas producer time constant
Controller delay time constant
Speed Lead/Lag lead time constant
Speed Lead/Lag lag time constant
Thermocouple time constant
Controller recursion time constant
24-133
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Detroit Diesel (DDEC)
24.5.16 Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Detroit Diesel turbine with DDEC controller and the
Woodward DSLC unit system.
Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)

24-134
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Detroit Diesel (DDEC)

Parameter
Mode
Droop
PMmax
PMmin
K1
K2
R1
Ts
T1
T2
T3
Definition
Droop or Isoch
Maximum shaft power (rated MW/kW)
Minimum shaft power (>=0)
PL control gain
Lead/Lag controller gain
PL control constant
Load share system sampling time constant
PTO filter time constant
Filter and Delay delay constant
Filter and Delay time constant
24-135
Unit
%
MW/kW
MW/kW
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor (GHH)
24.5.17 GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor (GHH)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the GHH BROSIG steam turbine governor system.
GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor System (GHH)
24-136
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
KP1
KP2
KP3
KP4
GL
GM
GH
Tn1
Tn2
Tn3
Definition
Generator load control gain
Extraction 1 control gain
Extraction 2 control gain
Speed control gain
Low pressure steam valve control gain
Medium pressure steam valve control gain
High pressure steam valve control gain
Time constant of generator load control
Time constant of extraction 1 control
Time constant of extraction 2 control
24-137
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Parameter
Tn5
Tn6
TL
TM
TH
HP
MP
VLmax
VLmin
VMmax
VMmin
VHmax
VHmin
PLmax
PLmin
PMmax
PMmin
PHmax
PHmin
Pa
Pb
Pc
Pd
Pe
Pf
LFa
LFc
LFd
EX2f
LFv1
LFv2
LFv3
LF1
LF2
LF3
KFM0
FM0
FM1
KFL0
FL0
FL1
Definition
Time constant of medium pressure steam valve control
Time constant of low pressure steam valve control
Time constant of low pressure steam valve control loop
Time constant of medium pressure steam valve control loop
Time constant of high pressure steam valve control loop
Extraction 1 pressure
Extraction 2 pressure
Maximum value of low pressure valve control signal
Minimum value of low pressure valve control signal
Maximum value of medium pressure valve control signal
Minimum value of medium pressure valve control signal
Maximum value of high pressure valve control signal
Minimum value of high pressure valve control signal
Maximum value of low pressure valve position
Minimum value of low pressure valve position
Maximum value of medium pressure valve position
Minimum value of medium pressure valve position
Maximum value of high pressure valve position
Minimum value of high pressure valve position
Power output value at point A of steam map
Power output value at point B of steam map
Power output value at point C of steam map
Power output value at point D of steam map
Power output value at point E of steam map
Power output value at point F of steam map
Maximum value of live steam flow
Live steam flow value at point C of steam map
Minimum value of live steam flow
Extraction 2 steam value at point F of steam map
Valve position value at point 1 of live steam flow characteristics
Flow value at point 1 of live steam flow characteristics
Exponential coefficient of medium pressure steam flow characteristics
Minimum flow value of medium pressure steam flow characteristics

Coefficient of medium pressure steam flow characteristics
Exponential coefficient of low pressure steam flow characteristics
Minimum flow value of low pressure steam flow characteristics
Coefficient of low pressure steam flow characteristics
24-138
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
bar
bar
mm/Sec.
mm/Sec.
mm/Sec.
mm/Sec.
mm/Sec.
mm/Sec.
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
MW
t/h
t/h
t/h
t/h
mm
mm
mm
t/h
t/h
t/h
1/mm
t/h
t/h
1/mm
t/h
t/h
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
m1
m2
m3
e1
e2
Esf1
Esf2
Initia2
Valve control parameter

Initial extraction 1 steam flow
Initial extraction2 steam flow
t/h
t/h
Steam Map Diagram
24-139
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Woodward Hydraulic (HYDR)
24.5.18 Woodward Hydraulic Governor-turbine (HYDR)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward hydraulic governing systems.
Woodward Hydraulic Governor-Turbine (HYDR)
24-140
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
VO
VC1
VC2
GMAX1
GMAX2
GMIN
Q
RP
RT
TP
Definition
Gate opening speed
Gate closing speed inside of the buffer zone
Gate closing speed outside of the buffer zone
Max gate position (RPM>RPM2)
Max gate position.(RPM<RPM2)
Min gate position
Servo gain
Permanent droop
Temporary droop
Pilot and servo motor time constant
24-141
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Parameter
TG
TR
Zt
Zp1
ft
fp1
Tt
Tp1
At1
QNL
Q2
Wref
Href
GC
Damp
RPM1
RPM2
RPM3
GBUFF
m
B
Definition
Main servo time constant
Dashpot time constant
Surge impedance of tunnel
Surge impedance of penstock
Head loss coefficient of tunnel
Head loss coefficient of penstock
Travel time constant of tunnel in
Travel time constant of penstock
Proportionality factor
No load flow in first unit
Flow rate in second unit
Speed reference
Head reference
Gate conversion factor
Damping coefficient
Gate limit speed set point 1
Buffer zone gate limit
Partial shutdown gate position coefficient
Partial shutdown gate position coefficient
24-142
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
IEEE Gas-Turbine (SGT)
24.5.19 IEEE Gas-Turbine (SGT)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the IEEE gas-turbine governing systems.
24-143
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
Pref
Pmax
Pmin
K1
K2
K3
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
TR
Definition
Load reference
Maximum power limit
Minimum power limit
Gain 1
Gain 2
Gain 3
Governor time constant 1
Turbine time constant 1
Load setting time constant
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u
p.u.
Sec.
Sec
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
24-144
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5.20 PowerLogic Governor-Turbine Model A (PL-A)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Siemens Westinghouse PowerLogic model A
governing systems.
PowerLogic Turbine/Governor Model A (PL-A)
24-145
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
PowerLogic Governor-Turbine Model A (PL-A)


Parameter
Model
Plimit
TP
TL
TQ
TLD
TLG
TA
TC
TD
Definition
Liquid fuel or Gas fuel
Turbine base load
Load transducer time constant
Filter time constant in sec
Speed transducer time constant
Lead time constant
Leg time constant
Speed/load controller time constant
Speed/load controller time constant
Current to pneumatic pressure transmitter time constant
24-146
Unit
p.u.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
PowerLogic Governor-Turbine Model A (PL-A)
Parameter
TV
TPL
TPG
TC1
TC2
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
TX5
KL
KI
KA
KC
KT
DL
JRL1
JRL2
TFLD
Tref
GovBase
Definition
Valve servo time constant
Liquid piping time constant
Gas piping time constant
Combustion time constant
Combustion time constant
Temperature controller time constant
Speed droop
Speed/load controller gain
Temperature controller gain
Decel limiter
Jump rate limiter1
Instantaneous jump rate limiter1
Loading time from no-load to full load
Governor base
24-147
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
V/F
V/V
V/BTU/Sec
p.u.
%/Sec
%/Sec
min
p.u./100
MW
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel (ST60)
24.5.21 Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor

(ST60)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel systems.
Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Governor-Turbine System
24-148
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
Mode
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Definition
Unit

Speed compensator lead time constant
Speed compensator lag time constant
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
24-149
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Parameter
Th1
Th2
KS
KT
Kmax
Kmin
MinGOV
Pmax
Pmin
Gmax1
Gmin1
Gmax2
Definition
Speed control gain
Loader delta maximum fuel gain
Loader delta minimum fuel gain
Governor minimum at no load
Maximum fuel
Unit
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Gmin2
Psolo
R
Tref
Minimum fuel
Solonox control threshold
Speed droop
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
24-150
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
24.5.22 Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor

(ST70)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel systems.
Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Governor-Turbine System
24-151
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

24-152
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

Parameter
Mode
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Gp
Th1
Th2
KS
KT
Pmax
Pmin
Gmax1
Gmin1
R
Tref
Definition
Unit

Speed compensator lead time constant
Speed compensator lag time constant
Gas producer constant
Speed control gain
Speed droop
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
24-153
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas-Turbine (GT-2)
24.5.23 Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-2)

This type of governor-turbine system represents gas turbine with windup limits.
Gas-Turbine and Governor System (GT-2)

24-154
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas-Turbine (GT-2)

Parameter
Pref
Plimt
Vmax
Vmin
Base
R
TR
T1
T2
T3
KT
Definition
Load reference
Ambient temperature load limit
Maximum fuel valve opening
Minimum fuel valve opening
Governor base
Speed droop
Load sensing time constant
Governor time constant
Combustion-chamber time constant
Turbine thermal time constant
Load limit thermal sensitivity gain
24-155
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
MW
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas-Turbine (GT3)
24.5.24 Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT3)

This type of governor-turbine system represents gas-turbine with non-windup limits.
Gas-Turbine and Governor-Turbine System (GT3)

24-156
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Gas-Turbine (GT3)

Parameter
Pref
Plimt
Vmax
Vmin
Base
R
TR
T1
T2
T3
KT
Description
Load reference
Ambient temperature load limit
Maximum fuel valve opening
Minimum fuel valve opening
Governor base
Speed droop
Governor time constant
Combustion-chamber time constant
Turbine thermal time constant
Load limit thermal sensitivity gain
24-157
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
MW
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Combustion Turbine (CT251)
24.5.25 Combustion Turbine-Governor (CT251)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a combustion turbine-governor.
Combustion Turbine and Governor System (CT251)

24-158
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Combustion Turbine (CT251)

Parameter
R
TR
T1
TV
TE
K1
K2
KP
Definition
Speed droop
PID Integral time constant
Throttle valve time constant
Piping combustion time constant
PID input scaling factor
PID output scaling factor
PID proportional gain
24-159
Unit
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
GE Mark V/Mark VI Turbine Controllers (GGOV3)
24.5.26 GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers-Governor

(GGOV3)
This type of governor-turbine system represents a gas turbine or single shaft combined cycle turbine as
seen at the generator terminals.
GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers (GGOV3)
24-160
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine


Parameter
R
Rselect
Ldref
Tpelec
Kimw
Pmwset
Kpgov
Kigov
Definition
Permanent droop
Feedback signal for governor droop
= 1 electrical power
= 0 none (isochronous governor)
= -1 fuel valve stroke (true stroke)
= -2 governor output (requested stroke)
Load limiter reference value
Electrical power transducer time constant, sec.
Power controller (reset) gain
Power controller setpoint, MW
Governor proportional gain
Governor integral gain
24-161
Units
p.u.
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Kdgov
Tdgov
Kpload
Kiload
Ka
Ta
Aset
Dm
Vmax
Vmin
Ffa
Ffb
Ffc
Ffd
Dnrate
Dnhi
Dnlo
Ropen
Rclose
Rup
Rdown
Maxerr
Minerr
Kturb
Wfnl
Tact
Tb
Tc
Db
Tsa
Tsb
Tfload
Tbd
Tcd
Teng
Cp
Cf
Flag
Turbrate
Governor derivative gain

Governor derivative controller time constant
Load limiter proportional gain for PI controller
Load limiter integral gain for PI controller
Acceleration limiter gain
Acceleration limiter time constant, sec.
Acceleration limiter setpoint
Speed sensitivity coefficient
Maximum valve position limit
Minimum valve position limit
Frequency filter low break speed
Frequency filter high break speed
Frequency filter gain high speed
Frequency filter gain low speed
Fuel transient limiter rate limit
Fuel transient limiter high speed limit
Fuel transient limiter low speed limit
Maximum valve opening rate
Maximum valve closing rate
Maximum rate of load limit increase
Maximum rate of load limit decrease
Maximum value for speed error signal
Minimum value for speed error signal
Turbine gain
No load fuel flow
Turbine lag time constant
Turbine lead time constant
Speed governor dead band
Temperature detection lead time constant, sec.
Temperature detection lag time constant, sec.
Load limiter time constant
Fuel system lag time constant
Transport lag time constant for diesel engine
Power Controller Gain
Speed Controller Gain
Switch for fuel source characteristic
0 fuel flow independent of speed
1 fuel flow proportional to speed
Turbine Rating
24-162
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec
p.u./sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u./sec
p.u./sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
MW
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Solar Turbine Governor Model (SGOV1)
24.5.27 Solar Turbine Governor Model (SGOV1)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a solar gas turbine with DLN (Dry Low NOx)
combustion systems.
24-163
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

Parameters for this model and the sample data are shown in the following screen capture:

Parameter
R
Tpelec
Definition
Permanent droop
Electrical power transducer time constant
Kpg
Kig

Governor integral gain
24-164
Units
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Tc
tb
Tvalve
Vmin
Kturb
Wfnl
tref
Tgv
Gvmin
Kpt
Ttmp
Dlnmin
Dlndel
Dlntset
Cp
Cf
Ldb
Kimw
Pmwset
Nref
Tbase
Speed controller lead time constant

Speed controller lag time constant
Fuel valve time constant
Turbine gain
No load fuel flow
Temperature limit setting
Guide vane actuation time constant
Minimum guide vane opening
Temperature limiter proportional gain
Temperature measurement time constant
Minimum fuel command for DLN operation
DLN turn on delay
DLN exhaust temperature setting
Selector for power control (normally 0 or 1)
Speed bias/gain for power/speed control
Load controller dead band
Power controller setpoint (initialized internally)
Reference speed setpoint (Read-Only)
Turbine base power (ISO rated power of the turbine, base for per unit
parameters
24-165
sec
sec
sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec
sec
p.u.
sec
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
MW
p.u.
MW
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Westinghouse Turbine Governor Model (WGOV1)
24.5.28 Westinghouse Turbine Governor Model (WGOV1)

The WGOV1 is an implementation of a turbine control model presented by Westinghouse.
24-166
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine

Parameters for this model and the sample data are shown in the following screen capture:

Parameter
Definition
R
Tpelec
Kpgov
Vmin
Tact
Kturb
Wfnl
Permanent droop
Electrical power transducer time constant
Turbine gain
No load fuel flow
24-167
Units
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
Tb
Tc
Tload
Kpload
Ldref
Dm
Ropen
Rclose
Pmwset
Tgov
Tth
Ttr
Kpjrl
Tjrl
Pjrl
Kjrl
Mjrl
Tjrf
Rjrl
Tsa
Tsb
Tbf
Tcf
Turbrate
Cp
Cf
Ldb
Kimw
Turbine lag time constant

Turbine lead time constant
Temperature limit controller time constant
Load limiter proportional gain for PI controller
Load limiter upper limit
Speed sensitivity coefficient
Maximum valve opening rate
Maximum valve closing rate
Supervisory power controller setpoint
Governor controller time constant
Temperature limit reset rate
JRL controller proportional gain
JRL controller time constant
JRL reference setting (per unit of MCR)
JRL load dependent value gain
JRL minimum step setting
JRL generator power filter time constant
JRL loading rate setting
Temperature detection lead time constant
Temperature detection lag time constant
Fuel system lag time constant
Turbine base power (ISO rated power of the turbine, base for per unit
parameters)
Selector for power control (normally 0 or 1)
Speed bias/gain for power/speed control
Load controller dead band
24-168
sec
sec
sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u./sec
p.u./sec
MW
sec
sec
p.u./sec
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
MW
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Governor-Turbine
User-Defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
24.5.29 User-Defined Dynamic Model (UDM)

You can access UDM models that have been created and saved from the governor type list.
Details on how to use the UDM model are described in User-defined Dynamic Models chapter.
24-169
Dynamic Models
Power System Stabilizer (PSS)
24.6 Power System Stabilizer (PSS)

Power system stabilizer (PSS) is an auxiliary device installed on synchronous generator and tuned to help
with system stability.
ETAP provides two standard IEEE type models:

The reference for these two types of PSS is from:
IEEE Std. 412.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992
24-170
Dynamic Models
24.6.1 IEEE Type 1 PSS (PSS1A)
24-171
Dynamic Models


Parameter
VSI
KS
VSTmax
VSTmin
Vtmin
TDR
A1
A2
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
Definition
PSS input (speed, power or frequency) in pu
PSS gain
Maximum PSS output
Minimum PSS output
Terminal undervoltage comparison level
Reset time delay for discontinuous controller
PSS signal conditioning frequency filter constant
PSS signal conditioning frequency filter constant
PSS lead compensation time constant
PSS leg compensation time constant
PSS washout time constant
24-172
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec
p.u.
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
Dynamic Models
24.6.2 IEEE Type 2 PSS (PSS2A)
24-173
Dynamic Models

24-174
Dynamic Models

Parameter
VSI1
VSI2
KS1
KS2
KS3
VSTmax
VSTmin
VTmin
TDR
Tw1
Tw2
Tw3
Tw4
N
M
T1
T2
T3
T4
T6
T7
T8
T9
Definition
PSS first input (speed, power or frequency)
PSS second input (speed, power or frequency)
PSS gain
PSS gain
PSS gain
Maximum PSS output
Minimum PSS output
Terminal undervoltage comparison level
Reset time delay for discontinuous controller
Integer filter constant
Integer filter constant
PSS transducer time constant
PSS transducer time constant
PSS filter time constant
PSS filter time constant
24-175
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
Dynamic Models
Mechanical Load
24.7 Mechanical Load

When you are simulating accelerating motors in motor starting studies and dynamically modeled motors
in Transient Stability Studies, the connecting mechanical loads should be modeled so that the calculation
determines the motors acceleration and deceleration characteristics. Mechanical loads are modeled based
on load torque curves that are either curves based or point based, as shown in the following screen
capture:
When Polynomial type of load toque curve is selected, the following editor is available to select the
mechanical load model.
24-176
Dynamic Models
Mechanical Load
A load curve is expressed by a third order generic polynomial equation:

T=A0+A1 +2 2+3 3
where
T
= Load torque in percent of the rated torque of the driving motor
= Per unit speed of the load ( = m/s)

A0, A1, A2, A3 = Coefficients
When the Curve type of load torque curve is selected, the following editor is available to select the
mechanical load model. Curve type can be used to create any custom shaped load torque curve that cannot
be expressed in the form of a polynomial equation.
ETAP provides a number of the most common load models for you to choose from. Load torque curves
can be added to the ETAP Motor Load Library and are made accessible from the Load Model pages in the
Induction Machine and Synchronous Motor Editors.
24-177
Dynamic Models
Static Var Compensator Type 1
24.8 Static Var Compensator Models

The Static Var Compensator Control model can be accessed from the SVC Editor, Model page. It is
imperative that you model this control when performing Transient Stability Studies to determine the
dynamic response of the SVC under different conditions.
ETAP contains the following SVC control models:
Type1
Type2
Type3
24-178
Dynamic Models
24.8.1 SVC Control Model Type1

24-179
Dynamic Models

Parameter
K
A1
A2
T
Tm
Tb
Td
T1
T2
TBmax
TBmin
Definition
Voltage regulator gain
Additional control signal gain
Voltage regulator time constatnt
Thyristor phase control time constant
Thyristor phase control delay
Maximum susceptance limit
Minimum susceptance limit
Parameter
Model
Type
TBmax
TBmin
All
All
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
p.u.
p.u.
Calculations
if Vini > Vref then K = 100 / SLL
if Vini Vref then K = 100 / SLC
TBmax = 1.0
if (abs(Bc) < 0.00001 ) TBmin = -1.0
else
TBmin = BL / Bc
24-180
Dynamic Models

24-181
Dynamic Models

Parameter
K
Ks
A1
A2
T
Tm
Tb
Td
Ts
T1
T2
Xsl
TBmax
TBmin
Definition
Synchronizing control gain
Synchronizing control time constant
Slope
Parameter
Model
Type
TBmax
TBmin
All
All
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u
p.u.
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Calculations
TBmax = 1.0
if (abs(Bc) < 0.00001 ) TBmin = -1.0
else
TBmin = BL / Bc
24-182
Dynamic Models

24-183
Dynamic Models

Parameter
K
Ks
Ksr
A1
A2
VSRmax
VSRmin
Bset
T
Tm
Tb
Td
Ts
T1
T2
Xsl
Definition
Synchronizing control gain
Susceptance regulator gain
Maximum voltage limit
Minimum voltage limit
Susceptance set point
Synchronizing control time constant
Slope
24-184
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
p.u.
Dynamic Models
TBmax
TBmin

Parameter
Model
Type
TBmax
TBmin
All
All
p.u.
p.u.
Calculations
TBmax = 1.0
if (abs(Bc) < 0.00001 ) TBmin = -1.0
else
TBmin = BL / Bc
24-185
Dynamic Models
Lumped Motor Load Model
24.9 Dynamic Lumped Motor Load Model

The motor load portion of lumped loads for conventional load type and unbalanced load type can be
modeled dynamically with system frequency variations. This dynamic model can be accessed from the
Lumped Load Editor, Dyn Model page.
Ta
Motor load time constant

Motor load frequency coefficient
24-186
Dynamic Models
24.10 Wind Turbine Generator

24.10.1 WTG Type 1 WECC
Fixed-speed, conventional induction generator
24-187
Dynamic Models
Wind Turbine Generator Model

The Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) is modeled by a doubly-fed induction machine. Its circuit model is
the same as Single2 induction machine model. See Chapter 11 for more information.
24-188
Dynamic Models
Wind Turbine Model

The Wind Turbine Model page is shown below:
Wind turbine is modeled by the following function:
v = wind speed
= blade pitch angle

= rotor speed
R
v
tip-speed ratio
P = Ar v 3 C p ( , )
2
Pmech = shaft power
= air density
Ar = swept area of blade
R = radius of blade
Typical curves of Cp vs. are shown below:
24-189
Dynamic Models
The Wind Turbine Model Editor provides a Cp generic model to represent the Cp curve, which is shown
below:
C7
C2
i
C5
C p = C1 C3 C4 C6 e
i
where
i =
C1
C
1
39
+ C8 + 1
= turbine blade tip speed ratio

= turbine blade pitch angle
24-190
Dynamic Models
Wind Model
The Wind Model page is shown below:
The Wind Model Editor allows you to specify the simulation wind pattern which includes wind ramp,
wind gust and wind noise.
24-191
Dynamic Models
Pitch Control Model
speed
From
Turbine
Model
pgen
1
1 + sTpe
From
Generator
Model
Kp
wref
1
1 + sT1
Ki
pimax
Kdroop
1
s
s2
pimin
1
1 + sT2
s3
pmech
To
Governor
Model
s1
s0
pref

Parameter
Kdroop
Kp
Ki
Tpe
T1
T2
Pimax
Pimin
Definition
Droop gain of generator
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Power filter time constant
Output filter 1 time constant
Maximum output limit
Minimum output limit
Unit
p.u.
sec.
sec.
sec.
24-192
Dynamic Models

Variable slip, induction generators with variable rotor resistance.
24-193
Dynamic Models

The Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) is modeled by a doubly-fed induction machine. Its circuit model is
the same as Single2 induction machine model.
Wind and Turbine model pages are the same as WTG Type 1 WECC. Please refer to that part for more
information.
24-194
Dynamic Models
Rotor Resistance Control Model
From
Generator
Model
Pgen
Kp
1 + sTp
Rmax
s1
+
Speed
From
Turbine
Model
Rext
Kpp + Kip / s
s0
Rmin
Kw
To
Generator
Model
1 + sTw
s2
P vs. slip curve

Parameter
Kp
Kw
Kpp
Kip
Tp
Tw
Rmax
Rmin
Definition
Power filter gain
Speed filter gain
PI-controller proportional gain
PI-controller integrator gain (=1/time constant)
Speed filter time constant
24-195
Unit
sec.
sec.
Dynamic Models
Pitch Control Model
speed
From
Turbine
Model
pgen
1
1 + sTpe
From
Generator
Model
Kp
wref
1
1 + sT1
Ki
pimax
Kdroop
1
s
1
1 + sT2
s3
s2
pimin
pmech
To
Governor
Model
s1
s0
pref

Parameter
Kdroop
Kp
Ki
Tpe
T1
T2
Pimax
Pimin
Definition
Droop gain of generator
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Unit
p.u.
sec.
sec.
sec.
24-196
Dynamic Models

Variable speed, doubly-fed asynchronous generators with rotor-side converter.
24-197
Dynamic Models
Eq"cmd
1
1+ 0.02s
(efd)
From
exwtge
-1
High Voltage
X"
Reactive Current
s0
Management
LVPL & rrpwr

IPcmd
(ladifd)
From
exwtge
Low Voltage
Active Current
IPlv
1
1+ 0.02s
Isorc
Management
s1
LVPL
Vterm
1.11
Lvplsw = 0
LVPL
Lvplsw = 1
jX"
s2
V
zerox
(0.50)
1
1+ 0.02s
brkpt
(0.90)
Low Voltage Power Logic
24-198
Dynamic Models

Parameter
X
T1
T2
T3
Lvplsw
Lvpl1
Lvpl2
zerox
brkpt
rrpwr
Definition
Low Voltage Power Logic Switch
LVPL ramp rate limit
Unit
sec.
sec.
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Wind Turbine Model
24-199
Dynamic Models

Parameter
V Rated
Swept Area
Air Density
Cut-in Speed
Diameter
RPM
Cut-out Speed
Pitch Angle
Kaero
Theta2
Theta0
Definition
Turbine rated wind speed
Rotor swept area
Air density
Minimum wind speed
Rotor diameter
Rotor/Turbine
Maximum wind speed
Rotor blade pitch angle
Aerodynamic gain
Blade pitch angle
Initial blade pitch angle
Unit
m/s
m^2
kg/m^3
m/s
meters
RPM
m/s
degrees
degree
degree
24-200
Dynamic Models
Reactive Power Control Model
24-201
Dynamic Models

Parameter
Kiv
Kpv
Kqi
Kqv
Fn
Tc
Tr
Tv
Tp
varflg
vltflg
Qmax
Qmin
Vmax
Vmin
XlQmax
XlQmin
Definition
Integral gain in voltage regulator
Proportional gain in voltage regulator
Reactive control gain
Terminal voltage control gain
Filter time constant in voltage regulator
Voltage transduce time constant
Proportional path time constant
Power factor regulator time constant
Var control type flag
Voltage flag
Maximum reactive power limit in voltage regulator
Minimum reactive power limit in voltage regulator
Maximum voltage limit
Minimum voltage limit
Terminal voltage regulator maximum limit
Minimum voltage regulator maximum limit
Unit
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Active Power (Torque) Control Model
24-202
Dynamic Models

Parameter
Kptrq
Kitrq
Ipmax
Tsp
Tpc
Pmax
Pmin
Tmax
Tmin
dPmax/dt
f(Pgen)
Definition
Torque control proportional gain
Torque control integral gain
Maximum reactive current order
Active power time constant
Power control time constant
Maximum power order
Minimum power order
Torque control block anti-wind upper limit
Torque control block anti-wind lower limit
Active power control rate limit
Substitutes with typical data automatically
Unit
p.u. (rated current)

sec.
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
Pitch Control Model
24-203
Dynamic Models

Parameter
Kpp
Kip
Kpc
Kic
Tp
Pset
Wmax
Wmin
Pmax
Pmin
Plrate
PImax
PImin
Definition
Pitch control proportional gain
Pitch compensator integral gain
Pitch compensator proportional gain
Pitch compensator integral gain
Blade response time constant
Power set point
Pitch control anti-windup upper limit
Pitch control anti-windup lower limit
Pitch compensator anti-windup upper limit
Pitch compensator anti-windup lower limit
Pitch rate limit
Maximum pitch angle
Minimum pitch angle
24-204
Unit
deg./pu
deg./(pu P-sec.)
deg./pu P
deg./(pu P-sec.)
sec.
p.u.
deg./sec.
deg.
deg.
Dynamic Models
24.10.4 WTG Type 3 Generic

Generator and Turbine model page of this exciter is modeled the same as WTG Type1 WECC.
Operation mode of this wind turbine generator is Mvar Control.
Pturbine
Doubly Fed Induction

Generator
Pstator
Pout
Grid
Gear
Box
Converter
Protor
Converter Control Model
Q and P Order Controller Parameters

The Converter Control Model Editor is shown below:
24-205
Dynamic Models

Parameter
Rc
Xc
Ti
Tr
Tv
Tpc
Ki
Kpv
Kiv
Kp
Pmax
Pmin
Qmax
Qmin
Vmax
Vmin
Rate_max
Rate_min
Definition
Load compensate resistance
Load compensate reactance
Convert time constant
Voltage control time constant
Voltage control time constant
P order controller time constant
Convert integral gain
Voltage PI control gain
Voltage PI control gain
Convert proportional gain
P order controller power maximum limit
P order controller power minimum limit
var control maximum limit
var control minimum limit
Maximum rotor voltage
Minimum rotor voltage
P order controller maximum change rate
P order controller minimum change rate
24-206
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
sec
sec
sec
sec
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Sec
Sec
Sec
Sec
%
%
%/sec
%/sec
Dynamic Models
Converter control model is shown in the following block diagram:
PRref
QRref
VGref
Qgen
Pgen
Vdc
QGref
Qgrid
Grid-Side
Control
iR a, b, c
iG a, b, c
uR a, b, c
uG a, b, c
Grid-Side
Converter
Rotor-Side
Converter
The converter controller is mainly used to control the generator output power based on the wind speed
and rotor speed. When wind speed is between cut-in and rated speed, the generator power is controlled to
reach to optimal Cp mode. When wind speed is beyond turbine rated wind speed and the rotor speed is
between rated and maximum speed, the generator power is controlled at constant power mode. The power
is governed by the controller limiter Pmx and Pmin. Also, the converter controller can regulate the
generator terminal voltage under the limit of Qmax and Qmin. The generator output power profile is
shown below.
Power
Max Cp Control
Cut-in
Constant Power
Control
Pitch Angle
Control
Max Rotor
Speed
Rated Wind
Speed
24-207
Cut-off
Wind
Speed
Dynamic Models
Pitch Angle Control Model

The Pitch Angle Control Model Editor is shown below:
The Pitch angle control model is shown in the following block diagram:
max
Rotor Speed
Limit Check
Pitch Angle
Controller
Pitch Angle
Limit Check
The Pitch angle controller is used to adjust turbine blade pitch angle. So that the generator can operate at
rated power and maximum rotor speed under a higher wind speed having not reached to cut-off speed.
The adjustable pitch angle is limited by the max and min.
24-208
Dynamic Models
Pitch Angle Controller Type 1

Parameter
K
Ts
Rmax
Rmin
Theta_max
Theta_min
Wmax
Definition
Speed input gain
Speed input time constant
Angle maximum change rate
Angle minimum change rate
Maximum angle limit
Minimum angle limit
Maximum generator operation speed
Unit
p.u.
sec
%/sec
%/sec
%
%
%
Pitch Angle Controller Type 2
24-209
Dynamic Models

Parameter
Kpp
Kip
Rmax
Rmin
Theta_max
Theta_min
Tp
Phmax
Phmin
Wmax
Definition
Speed PI control gain
Speed PI control gain
Angle maximum change rate
Angle minimum change rate
Maximum angle limit
Minimum angle limit
Control time constant
Speed PI control maximum limit
Speed PI control minimum limit
Maximum generator operation speed
24-210
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
%/sec
%/sec
%
%
sec
%/sec
%/sec
%
Dynamic Models

Variable speed, asynchronous generators with full converter interface.
24-211
Dynamic Models
24-212
Dynamic Models

Parameter
X
T1
T2
T3
Lvpl1
Lvpl2
zerox
brkpt
Lvplsw
rrpwr
Definition
Power Logic Switch
LVPL Ramp Rate limit
Unit
sec.
sec.
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Wind Turbine Model
24-213
Dynamic Models

Pref
Pelec
1
1 + sTpw
From Wind
Generator Model
wt4g
s0
Pref
dPmx
piin
Kpp +
Kip
piou
Pord
To wt4e
s1
(vsig)
dPmn
(pelec)
sKf
1 + sTf
s2

Parameter
Kpp
Kip
Kf
Tpw
Tf
dPmx
dPmn
Definition
Proportional gain
Integral gain
Turbine feedback gain
Turbine time constant
Turbine feedback time constant
Maximum power change
Minimum power change
Unit
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
24-214
Dynamic Models
Converter Electrical Control Model
24-215
Dynamic Models

Vrfq
(vref)
Vreg
1
1+ sTr
Qmax
Kiv/s
s4
1/fN
Kpv
1+ sTv
s3
Qord
1
1+ sTc
Qwv
s5
Qmin
varflg
s2
WindCONTROL
Emulator
Qref
PFAref
(vref)
tan
(vref)
Qmax
-1
Qcmd
Qmin
Pelec
1
1+ sTp
Qord
(vref)
s6
pfaflg
Qgen
Vmax
Qcmd
+
Vterm
Iqmx
Vref
Kqi / s
s0
Vmin
+ -
P,Q Priority Flag
Pord
s1
Iqmn
Converter Current Limit
Porx
(vsig)
from Wind
Turbine Model
wt4t
.
.
IQcmd
Kvi / s
(efd)
to Wind
Generator
Model
wt4g
Ipmx
IPcmd
(ladifd)
to Wind
Generator Model
wt4g
Vterm

Parameter
pfaflg
Kiv
Kpv
Kqi
Kvi
Fn
Tc
Tr
Tv
Tp
varflg
Qmax
Qmin
Vmax
Vmin
Definition
0=Q priority; 1=PF priority
Wind control regulator integral gain
Wind control regulator proportional gain
Q control integral gain
V control integral gain
Time constant between wind control output and wind turbine
Wind control voltage measurement time constant
Time constant in proportional path of wind control emulator
Time constant in power measurement for PFA control
Var control type flag
Maximum Q command
Minimum Q command
Maximum V at regulated bus
Minimum V at regulated bus
24-216
Unit
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
p.u.
Dynamic Models
Converter Current Limiter Model

P,Q Priority Flag
(pqflag)
Iqmn
Vt
Iqmx
Iqmx
Iqmn
Iqmxv
Q Priority
P Priority
1.6
qmax
Vt
1.0
-1
-1
Iqmxv
Iqhl
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum
ImaxTD2 - IPcmd2
ImaxTD
IQcmd
IPcmd
ImaxTD2 - IQcmd2
Iphl
Minimum
Minimum
Ipmx
Ipmx

Parameter
ImaxTD
Iqhl
Iphl
pqflag
Vt1
Vt2
Iqmxv1
Iqmxv2
Definition
Converter current limit
Hard limit on reactive current
Hard limit on real current
P, Q priority flag
Vt point 1 (qmax)
Vt point 2
Iqmxv point 1
Iqmxv point 2
Unit
p.u.
p.u.
24-217
Chapter 25
User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM)

The ETAP User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM) program is a graphic logic editor (GLE) interpreter
tool which allows the creation of user-defined governor, exciter, and Power System Stabilizer (PSS)
models for synchronous machines, generic load and wind turbine generator models. This module allows
the models to be linked to ETAPs transient stability program. The models can be built in the ETAP
UDM Graphic Logic Editor or can be imported from Matlab Simulink files. ETAP uses these dynamic
models at run time when conducting Transient Stability Studies. This tool has been extremely enhanced
and is now fully integrated into ETAP to allow the creation of dynamic models without the need to buy
additional Matlab Simulink software.
The main application of the UDM module is to model dynamic control elements which are not part of the
standard ETAP dynamic model library.
This chapter covers the scope of the application of the UDM Graphic Logic Editor and how it is used to
create the following types of control / dynamic models:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Synchronous Motors Exciter / AVR models

Synchronous Generator Exciter / AVR models
Synchronous Generator Turbine, Engine / Speed Control models
Synchronous Generator PSS (Power System Stabilizer) models
Wind Turbine Generator Models
Generic Load Models (Lumped Load Element Dynamic Models)
This chapter also covers the basics of how to model and simplify and debug compiler and initialization
routines required to make the models work properly for Transient Stability Studies.
25-1
User-Defined Dynamic Models
UDM Graphic Logic Editor
25.1 UDM Graphic Logic Editor

This section describes how to open the GLE interface and how to use all of its related general toolbars
and functionalities.
25.1.1 Accessing the UDM Interface

There are two ways to access the UDM Editor. The first method is from the system toolbar. A new Icon is
added at that location. The second method to access the UDM Editor is from the synchronous generator
editor individual pages (Governor, Exciter & PSS pages), synchronous motor exciter page, dynamic page
of the lumped load editor and the Info page of the wind turbine generator editor. Please note that the
model type is inherited from the editor from which the UDM GLE interface was accessed.
If you open the UDM Editor from the Individual Editors:

If the UDM Editor is opened from the synchronous generator, synchronous motor, lumped load or wind
turbine editor, any content that is not related to the individual element is filtered out. This means that only
the models created specifically for the given machine will be listed in the model selection drop list. If
there is no model created, then the UDM model selection drop list is blank. Clicking on the UDM Editor
Button opens the UDM GLE Interface. At this time, a new model can be created. When the model is
saved, it will be associated it with the element from which the editor was accessed. The model can be
associated with other elements or added to the model library later on if required.
Once the UDM editor is opened from the generator element, the default directory for the file save and
open is the current project directory.
The following image illustrates the process of opening a UDM model for the first time from the generator
editor:
Once the model is saved the model will be linked to the element for which it was created using the
following naming convention
<Element ID>_<Type>_<Model Name>.
More on the naming convention is presenting under the file saving section of this chapter.
25-2
UDM Graphic Logic Editor
If you open the UDM Editor from the System Toolbar:

Opening the UDM Editor from the system toolbar allows you to modify all model files including the ones
in the current project directory or the ones from the library. The program file open and file save directory
are defaulted to the UDM library directory (\\ETAP Installation Directory\UDM). However, it is possible
to save and link to an element as long as the model is saved in the project directory with the proper
naming convention. If this is done, the model would be linked exclusively to an element and can be
accessed from the element itself.
The following image show how to access the UDM GLE Interface from the system toolbar by clicking on
the UDM Interface Icon:
25-3
UDM Model Files
25.2 Saving UDM Model Files

The UDM GLE Interface saves the models using a *.udm extension. The files will be stored in two
locations. The first will be the project directory. The other will be the UDM library directory (i.e.
template directory).
If the models are saved to the library, then they will be saved in the following directories inside of the
ETAP installation director:
Governor Models
Exciter Models
PSS Models
Generic Load
Wind Turbine
\UDM\Gov
\UDM\Exc
\UDM\PSS
\UDM\Generic
\UDM\WTG
Please note that the UDM directory is located inside of the ETAP installation directory such as
C:\ETAP7.5.1\UDM
Note: When naming the device and the UDM file, do not include backward slash, forward slash or
underscore characters in the name: \, /, or _.
Please note that you can also place Simulink files to be imported or converted to a *.udm format by
placing them in the same locations as described above.
Please note that *.mdl file can only be imported into the UDM editor. These files will only be visible to
the UDM GLE Interface if the user selects the import or export function.
File Naming convention for UDM Models (files with extensions *.udm, *.bin & *.doc):
The files which are purposely saved as specific models for certain generators need to have the following
naming convention.
<Element ID>_<Type>_<Model Name>.UDM
Element ID-> Where the Element ID is the Element ID from ETAP Element. This could be the
synchronous generator or synchronous motor ID.
25-4
UDM Model Files
Model Name-> IEEE1, IEEEAC7B, GELM2500, etc, etc. This is the actual model name as shown in the
element editor UDM model selection drop list.
The types available are:
Type->EXC
Type->GOV
Type->PSS
Type->Generic
Type->WTG
For example: if an exciter from the library (i.e. IEEE1.UDM) is to be associated with Generator 1, then
the file should be named:
Gen1_EXC_IEEE1.UDM
Other Examples would be:
GeneratorXYZ_GOV_DT.UDM
EmergencyDiesel_EXC_IEEEAC7B.UDM
Gen1_PSS_STAB2A.UDM
SynchMotor_EXC_IEEE1.UDM
Lump1_GENERIC_CONV1.UDM
Lump2_GENERIC_SEQ1.UDM,
Etc, etc.
This naming convention achieves the following:
If the Type is EXC, then this file is only visible from the Exciter pages of the Synchronous Generator and
Motor. If the Type is GOV, then the model is only visible from the Governor page of the synch generator
and finally, if the type is PSS, then it would only be visible from the PSS page. If the Type is GENERIC,
then this file is only visible from the Dynamic Page of the Lumped Load. If the type is WTG then the
models are only visible from the WTG editors.
The following are the file types are also generated by the UDM GLE Interface after the model is
compiled:
*.DOC & *.BIN
The *.bin files generated by the compiler have the following naming convention:
<Element ID>_<Type>_<Model Name>.bin
The *.bin files generated by the compiler have the following naming convention:
<Element ID>_<Type>_<Model Name>_data.doc
25-5
UDM Model Files
This naming convention has the same purpose and it is to associate the models with their respective
elements.
25.2.1 UDM Editor Presentation

This section describes the toolbars, menu items and all the capabilities of the UDM graphic logic editor
interface. The image below shows the UDM Graphic Logic Editor Interface with an exciter model open.
File Menu Items:

The file menu items allow the user to open, save and import information into the UDM Editor. The
following are the options available through this drop down menu:
25-6
UDM Model Files
New
This menu item allows the user to create a new UDM model.
Open
The open option allows the user to open a UDM model. The open function opens a dialog which has as
default directory. The default is the project directory. The file open dialog opens only the files with
extension *.udm.
Open from Library

This option is used to open the UDM models stored in the UDM model library directories for Exc, Gov,
Pss, Generic and WTG models. The location or path for this is always the ETAP project in the UDM
directory (i.e. C:\ETAP 800\UDM\). Once in the library directory, the user can browse inside each
directory and choose which file to open.
Close
Close the currently selected model.
Save
This option saves the UDM file into the current project directory unless the user specifies a different
location. Depending from where the file was opened, the save button will also link a model to an element
and type.
If the UDM model was opened from the generator editor, then upon saving the program would name the
model as:
<Element ID>_<Type>_<Model Name>.UDM
If the UDM model was opened from the system toolbar, then the UDM modeled will be saved based on
the user given name. The program would not rename the model.
Save as
Saves the *.udm file as specified and where specified by the user. The remaining options to save as EMF,
GIF, PNG, BMP, JPEG, TIFF, SVG file are allowed and save the UDM model as a graphical image.
Save to library
This function allows the user to save the current model as part of the library items. When saved in the
library, the user is free to specify the name and the interface does not follow the naming convention since
the model is meant to be a generic library model.
Import (from *.mdl Simulink files)
This function allows the user to import models into the UDM editor which were created in Simulink.
The following mapping table is used in order to map the inputs and outputs from Simulink into the
ETAP UDM Graphic Logic Editor format.
25-7
UDM Model Files
If the type of the model is a GOV, PSS, Generic or WTG then the mapping table adjusts to show the input
and output ports for those elements only. Please note that any unmapped input and output ports are
removed since they would not be supported by the ETAP compiler.
The blocks supported from Simulink which are recognized by the UDM compiler are shown below:
25-8
UDM Model Files
Please note that any block which is imported into the UDM editor which is not supported is automatically
deleted in the imported UDM model. The import program supports imported Simulink models up to
version 7.11.0.584 (R2010b).
The models which can be imported into ETAP should follow the model design rules of previous versions
of the UDM compiler. If those model design rules are not followed, the model may not compile properly
in the new UDM compiler. Those rules are summarized below:
The maximum order of a transfer function (Transfer Fcn) block is a third order function.
The function types that can be used in an Fcn block consist of: sin, cos, tan, atan, abs, exp, sqrt, and
log.
The input/output variable names in Simulink can be specified arbitrarily and then mapped to ETAP
input/output variable names using the System Variable Selection Editor. This was true up to version
7.5.3. However, In ETAP11 we recommend using the following key words for the input/output
variable names. The appropriate key words reserved for ETAP UDM Turbine/Governor,
Exciter/AVR, and PSS models, are provided in the following tables:
Turbine/Governor Model
Key Word
Description
Pe
Generator Real Electrical Power
Input
W
Generator Speed
Output
Pm
Turbine Output Mechanical Power
Exciter/AVR Models
Key Word
Vt
CVt
It
CIt
Pe
Input
Qe
Vs
Ifd
Fre
PF
Output
Efd
Description
Machine Terminal Voltage
Machine Terminal Voltage in complex form
Machine Terminal Current
Machine Terminal Current in complex form
Machine Real Power
Machine Reactive Power
PSS Signal
Machine Field Current
Machine Terminal Voltage Frequency
Machine Power Factor
Exciter Output Voltage
25-9
UDM Model Files

PSS Model
Key Word
Vt
W
f
Input
Pe
Pm
Ang
Output
Vs
Description
Generator Terminal Voltage
Shaft Speed
Generator Terminal Voltage Frequency
Generator Real Power
Generator Mechanical Power
Generator Rotor Angle
PSS Output Signal
Using these input/output variable names will simplify the import process significantly since in ETAP11,
those inputs and output names are fixed block types.
The check box Save the imported UDM model into library allows the user to automatically same the
imported model into the corresponding library of UDM models. This is done according to the model type.
Export
This function allows the user to export the *.udm file into a *.mdl file. Default settings are used for the
parameters not included in the *.udm model file.
The export function supports up to version 7.11.0.584 (R2010b) of Simulink.
Page Setup
Regular page setup function (landscape, portrait, page size, etc).
Print Preview
regular print preview tool.
Print
Regular printing utility
Exit
Exit the project. Prompt if the file has not been saved or has been modified since the last save.
Edit Menu Items:

This menu list contains following functions:
25-10
UDM Model Files
Undo
Undo a certain action such as hiding or moving an element. You may also undo adding or deleting a
connection. The Undo feature can revert back up to 20 actions.
Redo
This option allows yout to Redo up to 20 actions. The following image shows an example of the
Undo and Redo functions.
Cut
The Cut command on the Edit menu will delete selected elements from the work space and place them in
memory. You can also cut selected elements by right-clicking and selecting the cut command from the
pop-up menu. To select a group of elements, click and hold the left mouse button down while dragging
the pointer across the elements you want to select.
Copy
The Copy command from the Edit Menu copies selected elements from the workspace. You can also copy
multiple elements selecting them (press and hold the left mouse button down while dragging the pointer
across the elements you want to select) and then right-clicking and pressing the Copy command from the
pop-up menu.
Paste
To paste an element or a group of elements from the memory, select the Paste command from the Edit
menu or you can right-click and select the Paste command from the pop-up menu.
Format
This option includes Fill and Shadow to set the inside color and shadow of the selected objects. Basically
you can change color and format of the selected blocks in this section.
25-11
UDM Model Files
Fill
Under Edit menu go to Format then click on Fill. The FillStyle Dialog allows you to change the
background and fore color of the selected blocks. Also different brush styles can be selected.
Shadow
Under Edit menu go to Format then click on Shadow. The ShadowStyle Dialog allows you to configure
the shadow for a particular element block. The shadow style is shown in the Preview section.
25-12
UDM Model Files
View Menu Items:

The View menu contains the following functions:
Rulers
The horizontal and vertical rulers in the UDM Grapical Logic editor are often used to align text, graphics,
tables, and other elements in the workspace.
Symbol Palette
This option activates the Control Element Symbol Palette (shown on the left hand side of the workspace
by default)
25-13
UDM Model Files
Properties
This command shows the properties window (shown on the right hand side of the workspace by default)
When copying and pasting elements from one model to another, the diagram size should be set to a size
appropriate to hold all the pasted elements. If this is not the case, the copy/paste action will not take effect
until the size is modified accordingly. The image below shows the location of the diagram size dialog.
25-14
UDM Model Files
Pan Zoom Window

This window can be used to preview a panoramic view of the elements in the workspace. The panoramic
view can be modified by dragging the pan box around the workspace preview window. This tool is useful
to zoom in and out and to navigate through very complext and large models.
There is a pin icon on top of the toolbox shown as
toolbox in UDM.
25-15
. By clicking this pin you can Hide/Show the
UDM Model Files
Before:
After:
Document Explorer
This window provides good information about the elements in the selected model. It lists all the elements
by type. This tool can be used to navigate through the model elements and make changes to the individual
properties without having to find the block graphically in the workspace.
25-16
UDM Model Files
Layers (will be available in future)

To add a block to a layer you need to make the layer active while
you are dragging the block to your work space. If two layers are
active at the same time, the created block will belong to both
layers and if you hide one of the layers, all the blocks which
belong to the layer will be invisible.
Element changes are applicable to all active layers. If an element
or connection is to appear only in one layer, then all the remaining
layers must be de-activated. Only the desired layer should be
active when the element block is added or the connection is made.
The image below illustrates the end result of associating some
elements and connections to different layers. Elements not active
during simulation will not be considered active in the
mathematical calculations. This tool will not be active in the first
release of the UDM Graphic Logic Editor.
25-17
UDM Model Files
Model 1
Model 2
Layer 1 is Visible
Layer 2 is Visible
Layer 1 is Visible
Layer 2 is
Invisible
Layer 1 is
Invisible Layer 2
is Visible
Header Footer
With this option you can add your desired header and footer to your model. The header and footer
contents can be customized by applying different font styles and colors.
25-18
UDM Model Files
Page Borders
You can select different borders, weight, and style. Also by changing the color and transparency, you
have option to choose your desired color for borders.
Actions Menu Items

After you select some functions block, from Actions toolbar, the Align option can perform the actions
as described below:
Action
Align Left
Align Center
Align Right
Align Top
Align Middle
Align Bottom
Result
moves all blocks to the most left side of the reference block
moves center of all blocks to the center of the reference block
moves all blocks to the most right side of the reference block
moves all blocks to the top side of the reference block
moves all blocks to the middle line of the reference block
moves all blocks to the bottom line of the reference block
Please note that the first block has been created is the reference block
25-19
UDM Model Files
Before
After
Align Left
Align Center
Align Right
Before
Align Top
After
Align Middle
Align Bottom
25-20
UDM Model Files
Flip
The flip option causes a 180 degree rotation of the selected block. The blocks can be flipped horizontally
or vertically. The following image illustrates the result of flipping some blocks horizontally.
25-21
UDM Model Files
Rotate
This function help to rotate selected object 90 degree clockwise or counter-clockwise. You can activate
the rotation by clicking right mouse button and selecting the different rotate commands from the menu.
Figure 17- Rotate Toolbar
Mouse right click

Figure 18- Using Rotate option from Mouse Right Click popup menu
Figure 19- Rotate Toolbar
25-22
UDM Model Files
Window Menu Item

Tabbed MDI
It is a control that allows you to use tabbed document interface and change the project windows view as
shown below:
25-23
UDM Model Files
Translator (Compiler) Toolbar:

The translator / compiler toolbar is used to save, link and compile the UDM models in preparation for
their use in ETAPs transient stability calculations. The following image shows the toolbar and its
location:
Run compiler
The run compiler icon is used to compile the model once it has been created. While the compiling
takes place, a progress bar (located on the lower right hand side of the interface) and a message is
displayed when the compiling is complete.
25-24
UDM Model Files
Warning or compiler error messages may be displayed during the compiler process. These message
windows will indicate certain conditions such as missing required parameters or illegal block
combinations or connections. An example of a warning message is shown below:
25-25
UDM Model Files
Run Test Simulation (only applicable for Exc, Gov and PSS UDM models)
When clicking on the run test simulation icon the program launches a test simulation which is geared to
test the exciter, governor and power system stabilizer models by simulating certain disturbances like
faults, load acceptance and load rejection (shed). The test settings and initialization settings must be
configured prior to running any test routines.
The progress bar is also displayed during the time the simulation test is running. When the test is
complete, a message window appears indicating this as shown below:
Please note that as soon as the test simulation is launched, the model must be initialized by the compiler.
The initialization may take a considerable amount of time depending on the intitialization method
selected or the time constant values used in the model. If the model is not configured properly for
initialization a message or warning will appear and the test will not start. It may take several minutes in
extreme cases for a model to initialize. The progress bar will only start to advance until the model has
been initialized.
Prior to running the test simulation the Initialization, test settings and system reference setting must be
configured. The image below shows the location of the model parameters property sheet where these
settings are stored:
25-26
UDM Model Files
The image below shows an enhanced view of the system parameters property sheet.
View Test Simulation Results

When clicking on the view test simulation results icon, the program displays a plot showing the results
of the simulation. If the test simulation was a fault, then the test results might look like the ones shown
below:
Plot of Test Results for a Load Shed Simulation
25-27
UDM Model Files
Plot of Test Results for a Load Acceptance Simulation
Plot of Test Results for a Fault Simulation
25-28
UDM Model Files
25.2.2 Model Global Properties

The model property sheet is used to configure the global model parameters which are used for compiling
the model so that it can be used in a transient stability calculation. The property sheet includes sections
for setting the model type, initialization and testing. The following table describes each of the parameters
available in the property sheet and describes their individual use.
Parameters
Name
This field is used to enter the model name.
Appearance
Backgroound Color
Change the background color.
Diagram Size
Modify the document size and orientation such as landscape or portrait.
System Model Parameters

The following table describes the System Model Parameters in detail:

Parameter
Data /
Options
Description
Model Type
Exciter
Governor
PSS
Generic Load
WTG
Initialization Method
Iterative
Direct
Iterative Method Settings

Iteration Time
Settle Time
Time Step
Direct Method Settings
Max Iterations
Precision
Increment Step
This should be a list which allows the program to

know the type of model If the exciter model is
selected, then hide the GOV Test Settings and PSS
test settings. The same should apply if GOV and
PSS are selected (hide EXC & PSS or EXC &
GOV).
This field allows the selection of the initialization
method. The direct method is faster, but can only be
used typically for simpler models. The iterative
method is slower but can be used for the majority of
models.
100
30
0.002
Number of iterations to initialize

Settle time for initialization procedure
Time step for initialization procedure
2000
Maximum number of iterations for the direct

method
Precision for direct method initialization
Increment step for the direct method initialization
0.0001
0.0035
25-29
UDM Model Files

Data /
Options
Parameter
System Reference (Exciter)
Vref
Qref
Pref
var Share Group #
Exciter Test Settings
Test Type
Terminal Voltage (Vt)

Terminal Current (It)
Real Power (Pe)
Reactive Power (Qe)
PSS Signal (Vs)
Field Current (Ifd)
Terminal Frequency (Fre)
Power Factor (PF)
Complex Terminal Voltage
(CVt)
Terminal Current (Cit)

(sec)
(sec)
System Reference (Governor)
Wref
Pref
Tref
Governor Test Settings
Test Type

(sec)
(sec)
Speed (W)
Description
procedure
Applicable for exciter models
Vref
Exciter voltage reference in per-unit
Qref
Exciter reactive power output reference value in
per-unit
Pref
Exciter real power output reference value in per-unit
0
Reactive power share group number (0-10)
Applicable for exciter models
Load
Shed/ This should be a drop list to allow the test type
Load
selection
Acceptance/Fa
ult Bus
1
Exciter test terminal voltage (p.u)
1
Exciter test terminal current (p.u) (Display only)
0
Exciter test real power (electrical power) (p.u)
0
Exciter test reactive power (p.u)
0
Power System Stabilizer signal (p.u.)
0
Exciter field current (p.u)
1
Exciter test generator terminal frequency (p.u)
0.624695
Exciter test power factor (p.u)
0.6247
Exciter test generator complex terminal voltage
j0.7809
(Display Only)
0.624659
Exciter test generator complex terminal current
j0.780869
Display only)
0.002
40
Applicable for governor models
Governor speed reference in per-unit
Governor real power output reference value in perunit
Tref
Governor temperature reference
Applicable for governor models
Load
Shed/ This should be a drop list to allow the test type
Load
selection
Acceptance/Fa
ult Bus
0.005
Governor test simulation time step (sec)
Wref
Pref
40
Governor test total simulation time (sec)
Generator speed input (p.u)
25-30
UDM Model Files

Data /
Options
Parameter
Elec Power (Pe)
Mech Power (Pm)
PSS Test Settings
(sec)
(sec)
PSS Test Shaft Speed (W)
PSS Test Terminal Voltage
(Vt)
PSS Test Real Power (Pe)
PSS Test Rotor Angle in
rad (Ang)
PSS Test Mech Power
(Pm)
PSS Test Voltage
Frequency
PSS Test PSS Signal (Vs)
1
0
0.002
40
Description
Generator electrical power output (p.u)
This should be a read only field displaying 0
Applicable for PSS models
Power System Stabilizer Test Simulation Time Step
(sec)
Power System Stabilizer Test total simulation time
(sec)
0.005
1
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0
Logic for the System Reference (i.e. Qref, Pref, Vref, etc)
These fields are used to tell the program which blocks are used for specific signal references required by
each type of model.
For example for an exciter you may need to select a constant block which will serve the purpose of being
the exciter reference voltage (Vref). You may also need Qref and Pref depending on the type of model or
controller being implemented.
The same applies to governor models. Please note that the following rules and best practices apply to the
selection of the reference constant blocks:
The following logic applies to these fields:
1) The best practice is to name the constant block in the model the same as the expected name in the
compiler. If you named to voltage reference block AVRReFVoltage, it may be easier to name
the constant block Vref instead.
25-31
UDM Model Files
2) The selection is unique. The same block may not be used as reference more than once. For
example, if you select C1 constant block for Vref, then you are not be able to select C1 as
constant block for Pref.
3) The System Reference Signals have sorting which gives preference to any constant blocks named
similarly to the expected reference signal name. For example, if we are trying to select the
constant blocks for Vref, then any block named Vr, V1, Vreference, Vr1, is placed at the
top of the list. Any constant block starting with V or Vr is placed at the top of the list. All
the other constants fall below with regular sorting in descending order.
4) The system reference selection is checked at the time the model is compiled. If a selection is not
made, then there are warning messages displayed (i.e. for exciter models Vref needs to be
selected and for Governor Wref needs to be selected as well)
25-32
UDM Model Files
The following image shows three models with their respective constant block system reference selections
25-33
Input and Output Blocks
25.2 Input and Output Blocks

The input/output blocks or elements are the variables which are used by the compiler to transfer data back
and forth between transient stability calculation and the UDM model. Each model type has an expesific
list of inputs and outputs which are handled by the compiler and have specific meanings.
25.2.1 List of Inputs/Outputs based on Model Type

These inputs and outputs come from the synchronous machines, lumped loads and wind turbine generator
elements. The following tables list the inputs and outputs which are available for direct interface to the
transient stability calculation:
Please note that any additional input (besides those listed in the tables below) may defined by the user by
using mathematical equations and constant blocks. Any output can be defined by using special plotter
element blocks (described later in this chapter). The list if inputs and outputs below have been predefined as the most important parameters between TS and UDM Models.
List of UDM Inputs/Outputs for an Exciter Model
UDM Tool Tip
Description
Input
Synch machine control bus voltage - magnitude in pu (bus base
Vt
Terminal Voltage
kV)
Synch machine control bus volatge - complex (real, imag) in pu
(bus base kV) Note: The voltage passed to UDM from transient
stability is the bus voltage without phase angle adjustment. The
Vt,c
Terminal Voltage, Complex magnitude will be the same but the phase angle is not referenced
to the system reference angle. This does not affect the model
behavior since all the other complex values passed to UDM are
not referenced to the system angle.
Vs
PSS Voltage Signal
PSS voltage signal to exciter in pu (machine base)
Synch machine terminal current magnitude in pu (100 MVA
It
Terminal Current
Base)
Synch machine terminal current- complex (real, imag) in pu
It,c
Terminal Current, Complex
(100 MVA Base)
Ifd
Exciter Field Current
Exciter field current in pu (machine base)
P
Real Power Output
Synch machine real power output in pu (100 MVA Base)
Q
Reactive Power Output
Synch machine reactive power output in pu (100 MVA Base)
PF
Power Factor
Synch machine output power factor in pu
Freq
Frequency
Synch machine control bus frequency in pu
UDM Tool Tip
Description
Output
Efd
Exc Field Voltage
Exciter field voltage in pu (machine base)
25-34
List of UDM Inputs/Outputs for a Governor Model

UDM Tool Tip
Description
Input
Vt
Generator Speed
Generator speed in pu (machine rated RPM)
P
Real Power output
Generator real power output in pu (machine rated MW base)
Psh
Load Sharing Signal
Load sharing power signal in pu (machine rated MW base)
UDM Tool Tip
Description
Output
Turbine/Engine mechanical power output in pu (machine rated
Pm
Mechanical Power
MW base)
List of UDM Inputs/Outputs for a PSS Model
UDM Tool Tip
Description
Input
Generator control bus voltage - magnitude in pu (control bus
Vt
Terminal Voltage
base kV)
P
Real Power output
Generator real power output in pu (100 MVA base)
Turbine/ Engine mechanical power output in pu (100 MVA
Pm
Mechanical Power
base)
W
Generator Speed
Generator speed in pu (machine rated RPM)
Ang
Rotor Angle
Generator rotor angle in radians
Freq
Terminal Frequency
Synch machine control bus frequency in pu
UDM Tool Tip
Description
Output
Vs
PSS Voltage Signal
PSS voltage signal to exciter in pu (machine base)
List of UDM Inputs/Outputs for a Generic Load Model

UDM Tool Tip
Description
Input
Vt
Bus Voltage
Terminal bus voltage - magnitude in pu (bus nominal kV base)
Terminal bus voltage - complex (real, imag) in pu (bus nominal
Vt,c
Bus Voltage, Complex
kV base)
Freq
Bus Frequency
Termainal bus frequency in pu
UDM Tool Tip
Description
Output
P
Load Real Power
Load real power in pu (1 MW base)
Q
Load Reactive power
Load reactive power in pu (1 MVAR base)
List of UDM Inputs/Outputs for a WTG Model

UDM Tool Tip
Description
Input
Ws
Wind Speed
Wind speed in meter per second (m/s)
WTG terminal bus voltage - magnitude in pu (bus nominal kV
Vt
Terminal Bus Voltage
base)
WTG control bus voltage - magnitude in pu (bus nominal kV
Vc
Control Bus Voltage
base)
P
WTG Real Power Output
WTG real power output in pu (machine MVA base)
25-35
Q
Freq
UDM
Output
P
Q
WTG
Reactive
Output
Frequency
Tool Tip
Power
WTG reactive power output in pu (machine MVA base)
WTG terminal bus frequency in pu (system frequency base)
Description
WTG Output Real Power

WTG output real power in pu (1 MW base)
WTG
Output
Reactive
power
WTG output reactive power in pu (1 MVAR base)
25.2.2 Input/Output Blocks Data Sheet Properties

This section describes the parameters of the inputs/outputs blocks in the UDM Graphic Logic Editor
Interface.
Equations for the Input/output blocks

The equation of this block is: y = u
If the block is an input, then u is the input variable from ETAP Transient Stability(TS) (whatever it may
be according to tables in section 25.3.1) passed to the UDM model. If the block is an output, then u is
the output variable from the UDM model passed back to the ETAP TS.
Name
Input / Output name or Id. This can be a more descriptive name than the abbreviations used to define each
input by the compiler.
Input Port Number

Inherited parameter used by previous versions of ETAP which used Matlabs Simulink interface input and
output ports numbering system. This field is still used for import and export to Simulink purposes.
Line Style
This section provides general symbol graphical properties customization options.
Font
This section provides parameter to configure the fonts to be used for labels of the block.
25-36
Control Blocks
25.3 Control Blocks

The control elements are the fundamental elements which can be used to build more complex transfer
function or logical expressions. They are the building blocks of all the models which can be created in the
UDM Graphic Logic Editor Interface.
25.3.1 List of Control Blocks (fundamental elements)

The following image shows all the block symbols:
The following table lists all of the control elements available for simulation
Block Name
Transfer function
Integrator
Derivative
Function
LV/HV Gate
Delay
Saturation
Look-up Table
Dead Zone
Multiplication
Division
Sum
Real-Imag to Complex
Complex to Real-Imag
Symbol
Switch
Manual Switch
Gain
Constant
Logical Operator
Relational Operator
Relay
Simulation Time
Rate Limiter
Zero-Order Hold
Data Plotter
Complex to Mag-Angle
Absolute Value
25-37
Control Blocks
25.3.2 Transfer Function Block:

The benefit of this element is the implementation of a classical text book transfer function block with a
maximum of third order. The block is shown below:
Block Equations
The behavior of this block should be the same as that of the existing Zero Order Hold Block in
Simulink.
Block Properties
The image below shows the property sheet for the transfer function block.
The following table describes each of field under the parameter section of the property sheet.
Parameters
Name
Transfer Function
Numerator
1,0.06,1
Enter the coefficient and the order of the
numerator of the transfer function. The order
of the numerator must be less than or equal
to that of the denominator
Denominator
1,1,1
Enter the coefficient and the order of the
denominator of the transfer function. The
order of the denominator must be greater
than or equal to that of the numerator
25-38
Control Blocks
Parameter Range
Numerator Coefficients can have a range of:
999999999.999999
The transfer funtion numerator or denominator can only handle up to third order coefficients. If higher
orders are required then simplification techniques must be used (i.e. place two lower order transfer
function in series so that the end result is higher order transfer function)
This would translate into the following coefficients for the numerator and denominator:
Numerator = 1,-1,0.06,1
Denominator = 1,1,-1,1
Parameter Defaults
Numerator = 1
Denominator = 0.01,1
General Logic Information

The order of the numerator must be lower or equal to the order of the denominator. If this is not the case,
then the following message is posted:
The values of the coefficient of denominator and numerator can be separated by commas space or space
commas
The editor property sheet numerator and denominator reject the changes and force the user to enter the
correct order for the coefficients. An example of invalid parameters is given below:
Numerator = 1,1,1
Denominator = 0.01,1
25-39
Control Blocks
25.3.3 Integrator Block

This block performs a numerical integration.
Block Equations
The equatio of this block is shown below:
Block Properties
The following table shows the properties of rthe integrator block.
Parameters
Name
Activate Saturation Limits
Upper Saturation Limit
Lower Saturation Limit
Integrator
True
999999999.999999
-999999999.99999
Setting this parameter activates the

limits for the integrator block.
upper saturation limit
lower saturation limit
Parameter Range
Upper Limit = 999999999.999999
Lower Limit = 999999999.999999
Activate Saturation Limits = True or False
Parameter Defaults
Upper Saturation Limit = 9999999999.99999
Lower Saturation Limit = -9999999999.99999
Activate Saturation Limits = True (read only and cannot be changed for this release).

The upper saturation limit must be greater than the lower saturation limit. The editor enforces this
condition as the data is being entered. The following message is displayed if this condition is present:
25-40
Control Blocks
25.3.4 Derivative Block

This block performs a numerical derivative
Block Equations
The equation of this block is a numerical derivative of the input. The linearization time constant is:
The derivative block can be modeled with a transfer function as shown below to improve the accuracy
and linearization depending on the time step selected.
25-41
Control Blocks
25.3.5 Function Block:

The benefit of this block is the implementation of a mathematical function block.
Block Equations
The equations (expressions) supported for this block are listed below:
sin, cos, tan, atan, acos, asin, abs, exp, sqrt, log (being the natural log = ln)
The supported operators are ( ) ^ + - * /
Block Properties
This block has an expression input field. An example of the expression is displayed in the table below
Parameters
Expression
f(u) = 0.363*exp(0.229*u)
Any of the folowing key words

can be used: sin, cos, tan, atan,
acos, asin, abs, exp, sqrt, log,
Parameter Range
Coefficient range = 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
f(u)

If the text strings typed into the expression field do not match one of those listed in the table above a
warning message is displayed as shown below:
25-42
Control Blocks
25.3.6 LVHVGate Block:

This block is used to pass to the output the low value or the high value of all the inputs.
Block Equations
The following equations apply to this block. The equations can be generalized for more than two inputs
Block Properties
The following table lists the LVHV Gate block properties
Parameters
Name
Inputs
Function Type
LVHVGate
2
Number of inputs to be
compared (minimum is two)
Set the LVHV Gate to
function as a LV Gate or HV
Gate
Drop List Options:

LVGate
HVGate
Parameter Range:
Inputs = Up to 100 inputs.
Function Type =
LV Gate
HV Gate
Parameter Parameter Defaults
Inputs = 2
Function Type = LV Gate
25-43
Control Blocks
25.3.7 Delay Block

This block allows the implementation of a time delay.
Block Equations
This block specifies a time delay as described in the block symbol.
Block Properties
This block has the following properties:
Parameters
Name
Time Delay (Td) (sec)
Delay
0.02
Show the value in Td (inside block)
Parameter Range
Time Delay (Td) = 999999999.999999 to 0
It is recommended that the time delay be used for delays less than 1 second. If the delay is greater than
one second, it is recommended that a different block combination be used to model the delay.
Parameter Defaults
Td = 0.02
25-44
Control Blocks
25.3.8 Saturation Block

This block allows the implementation of a saturation function
Block Equations
The equations of this block are described below:
if u L X , then y = L X
if u LN , then y = LN
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Upper Saturation Value (LX)
Lower Saturation Value (LN)
Label Upper Limit
Label Lower Limit
Saturation
1.5
0
LX
LN
Editor would show LX = 1.5

Editor would show LN = 0
Parameter Range
LX = 999999999.999999
LN = 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
LX 1.5
LN 0
25-45
Control Blocks
25.3.9 Look-Up Table Block

This block allows the implementation of a look-up table function.
Block Equations
This block performs linear interpolation for input values between the given ranges and performs
extrapolation based on the last two end points for values outside the range. The plot below shows the
interpolation section solid lines and the extrapolation sections with dashed lines.
Block Properties
The look-Up Table block element has the following properties:
Parameters
Name
Table Data
Look-Up Table
0,1,2,3,4,..Xn (n = m)
0,1,3,4,5,..Ym (m = n)
25-46
points must have matching dimension
Control Blocks
Import / Export
The import and export function allow you to directly import points from spreadsheets in MS Excel
format. Please note that only the first two columns in excel are imported automatically. This means that
the excel data would have to in the format as shown below in order to duplicate the data which is shown
in the previous Table Data dialog.
Parameter Range
Inputs = 999999999.999999
Outputs = 999999999.999999

The dimension of the inputs and outputs must match. If for some reason the parameters dimensions do not
match, a warning message shown below may be displayed.
Invalid Parameters for Look-up table. Dimension of Input and output must match
However, the spreadsheet design in the Table Data dialog automatically rejects data points which do not
matching dimensions to prevent this condition.
The Input values must be in sequential order (i.e. in increasing fashion like, -1,0.2,3.3,4,). If they are
not, then the lookup table may not yield consistent results. The following warning message may be
dsiplayed if this is not the case.
Invalid Parameters for Look-up table. Input values must be entered in sequence
25-47
Control Blocks
25.3.10 Dead Zone Block

This block is used to define dead zone function
Block Equations
The equations of this block are shown below:
if LN u L X , then y = 0
where L X is the upper dead zone limit
where L N is the lower dead zone limit
else y = u
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Dead Zone Upper limit
Dead Zone Lower Limit
Dead Zone
0.010
-0.010
End of Dead Zone (upper limit)

Start of Dead zone (lower limit)
Parameter Range
Dead Zone Upper Limit: 999999999.999999
Dead Zone Lower Limit: 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
Dead Zone Upper Limit: 0.010
Dead Zone Lower Limit: -0.010

The value of the dead zone lower limit must be lower or equal to the value of the dead zone upper limit. If
the dead zone lower limit is higher than the upper limit, then the following message is displayed:
The values are rejected and the parameters should be re-entered.
25-48
Control Blocks
25.3.11 Multiplication/Division Block

This block represents a multiplication and division function.
Block Equations
This is a scalar value only multiplication of all the inputs.
if mult only, then y = u1 u 2 u 3 u n +1 ........ u n
for mult and division (example of four inputs), then y =
u1 u 2
u3 u 4
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Input Type
Mult-Div
*/** (see logic section)
Multiplication or Division
Parameter Range
Input Type = */*********.//**** (up to 100 different */ signs)
Parameter Defaults
Input Type = ** (multiplication for two inputs)

The Input Types field accepts multiplication and division (asterisk * and forward slash /) symbols
inputs to indicate the desired operation. This block outputs the results of the specified mult-div
combination. For example:
25-49
Control Blocks
If the following sequence: **/*/* is entered, then the program should creates a block with 6 inputs and
one output. The value of the 6 inputs and the result (output) of the block are shown below:
If only one input is entered, then the following message is displayed:
25-50
Control Blocks
25.3.12 Sum Block

This block implements a scalar mathematical summation.
Block Equations
This block can be used to add and subtract the inputs according to input signs specified.
y = u1 u2 u3 ........un
where n is the number of inputs
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Input Signs
Show Label
Sum
+,+,+,-,-,.
True or False
(or +,-,+,-,+,+,+, etc) default = +,+

Show the symbol inside the block
Parameter Defaults
Input Signs = +,+

The Input Signs input field determines the arithmetic operations performed by the sum block. The
operations are of type subtraction or addition, The following message is displayed if any invalid
characters are inputted into the block.
25-51
Control Blocks
25.3.13 Real-Complex Block (Real-Imag to Complex)

This block converts real and imaginary components into a complex format.
Block Equations
This block converts two scalar inputs representing the real and imaginary components into a complex
number of the form:
y = Re + i (Im)
where Re is real
and Im is imaginary
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Real-Complex
(short for Real-Imag to Complex)
Real Part
Imaginary Part
If the Imaginary option is selected, this

input can be used to specify the real part of
the complex number output.
If the Real option is selected, this input
can be used to specify the imaginary part of
the complex number output.
The Real-Imaginary option allows the
input of both the real and imaginary parts.
The input selection of Real or
Imaginary allows as input only the
selected part.
Input Type
Real-Imaginary
Real
Imaginary
Parameter Range
Real Part = 999999999.999999
Imaginary Part = 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
Real Part = 0
Imaginary Part = 0

If the option Real-Imaginary is selected, then the block shows two inputs. The top input is the Real part
of the complex number. The bottom input is the imaginary part of the complex number. If the option
Real is selected, then only the real part input is displayed. If the option Imaginary is selected, then the
block only has the imaginary input. The complex number can be completed with real and/or imaginary
25-52
Control Blocks
part which can be specified as input in the editor. The images below shows how the inputs are
reconfigured based on the input type selection.
25-53
Control Blocks
25.3.14 Complex-Real Block (Complex to Real-Imag)

This block can be used to separate the real and imaginary components of a complex number.
Block Equations
The block equations are shown below:
y1 = Re(u ) = Re
y 2 = Im(u ) = Im
u is a complex number
Re = real part of u
Im = imaginary part of u
Block Properties
This block contains the following properties:
Parameters
Name
Output Type
Complex-Real
Real-Imaginary
Real
Imaginary
Short for Complex to Real-Imag

The Real-Imaginary option allows the
output of both the real and imaginary
parts. The selection of Real or
Imaginary allows the output of only
the selected part.
Parameter Defaults
Output Type = Real-Imaginary

If the option Real-Imaginary is selected, then the block shows two outputs. The top output is the Real
part of the complex number. The bottom output is the imaginary part of the complex number.
If the option Real is selected, then only the real part output is displayed. If the option Imaginary is
selected, then the block only has the imaginary output. The images below show how the inputs are
reconfigured based on the input type selection.
25-54
Control Blocks
25.3.15 Absolute Value Block

This block implements an absolute value function.
Block Equations
The equation for this block is shown below. The ouput is the scalar magnitude of the input. The input can
be complex or scalar.
25.3.16 Switch Block

The benefit of this block is the implementation of a switch block.
Block Equations
The equations for this block are shown below:
if the condition is " True"
y = Input1
if the condition is " False"
y = Input 3
Conditions :
Input 2 Threshold
Input 2 > Threshold
Input 2 0
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Threshold
Condition
Switch
0.5
Input 2 >= Threshold
Input 2 > Threshold
Input 2 ~= 0
Any number between the range.

The c Input2 >= Threshold ,
25-55
Control Blocks
Parameter Range
Threshold Range = 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
Threshold = 0.5

The top input is Input 1, the middle input is input2 and the bottom input is input 3. The middle input2 is
used to make the decision of which input to pass as the output (i.e. input 1 or input 3). The switch block
only accepts and outputs scalar values.
Input 1
Output can be Input 1 or Input 3
Input 2
Input 3
25.3.17 Manual Switch Block

This block implements a manual switch.
Block Equations
The behavior of this block should be the same as that of the existing Switch Block in Simulink.
if switch is in position "0, " then
y = input 0
if switch is in position "1 , " then
y = input1
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Switch Position
Manual Switch
0 or 1
Allow selection of Input 1 (Top)

Input 0 (bottom)
Parameter Range
Switch Position = 0 or 1
25-56
Control Blocks
Parameter Defaults
Switch Position = 1 (top input as shown in image below)
General Logic Information:

The top input is Input 1, the bottom is input 0. When selecting Input1, the position of the switch is
graphically switched towards the input selected.
Input 1
Output = Input 1
Input 0
25.3.18 Gain Block

This block implements a gain block.
Block Equations
The equation for this block is shown below.
y = K (u )
where K is the gain multiplier
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Gain (K)
Gain (default)
1
Gain value
Parameter Range
Gain (K) range is 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
Gain (K) = 1
25-57
Control Blocks
25.3.19 Constant Block

This block can be used to enter a constant value.
Block Equations
The equation of this block is shown below:
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Constant (C)
Constant
1
Constant value
Parameter Range
Constant value range = 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
Constant value default = 1

The value of the constant is displayed inside the symbol. This device only has one output and it outputs
scalar constant values only.
25-58
Control Blocks
25.3.20 Logical Operator Block

This block can be used to implement different logic operations.
Block Equations
The supported logical operations are: AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR, NOT. The output is the boolean
logic value (1 or 0).
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Logical Operator
Logical Operator
AND
NAND
OR
NOR
XOR
NOT
Number of Inputs
Selection of the logical operation. The

number of inputs will be restricted
based on the type of logical operation
selected.
Number of inputs for multiple input

operations.
Parameter Range
Number of Inputs = 1 to 100 (for selected functions AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR) and only 1 for the
NOT function.
Parameter Defaults
Logical Operator Selection = AND
Number of Inputs = 2

The logical operation is displayed inside of the block. If the NOT function is selected, then there in only
one input which gets inverted as shown below. The number if inputs field becomes display only.
25-59
Control Blocks
25.3.21 Relational Operator Block

This block allows the implementation of relational operators in the UDM models.
Block Equations
The supported relational operations are >=, <=, <, >, ~= and ==. The output of the block is 1 or 0,
(true = 1 or false= 0), depending on the selected relational operation.
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Relation Type
Relational Operator
Drop list selections:
<=
>=
<
>
~=
==
Relation type selection.
Parameter Defaults
Relation Operator = >= (greater or equal)

The relational operation is displayed inside of the block.
25.3.22 Relay Block

This block allows the simulation relays as part of UDM models.
Block Equations
The relay block has a switch on value and switch off value. If the input u is:
25-60
Control Blocks
if u switch on value, then

y = Value _ when _ on
if u switch off value, then
y = Value _ when _ off
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Switch On at
Relay
1
Switch Off at
Value when on
Value when off
0
1
0
Enter any value between the range. This value must be

>= than the Switch Off at value.
Enter any value between the range.
Enter any value between the range
Enter any value between the range
Parameter Range
Switch on at Value = 999999999.999999
Switch off at Value = 999999999.999999
Value when On = 999999999.999999
Value when Off = 999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
Switch On at Value = 1
Switch Off at Value = 0
Value when On = 1
Value when Off = 0

The Switch On At value must be greater or equal than the Switch Off At value. The editor enforces
this logic. The message below would be displayed if the incorrect parameters are entered.
The condition Switch On at value = Switch Off at is valid. The relay still outputs the Vale when On
only when the input equals the single value.
25-61
Control Blocks
25.3.23 Rate Limiter Block

This block can be used to limit the rate of change of the input signal.
Block Equations
The first derivative of the input signal is limited to the rising and falling rates specified. The equations
below show how the output is determined:
du
> (Rising Rate of change Limit), then
dt
yi = t (Rising Rate of change Limit) + yi 1
if
du
< (Falling Rate of change Limit), then
dt
yi = t (Falling Rate of change Limit) + yi 1
if
if (Falling Rate of change Limit)
du
(Rising Rate of change Limit), then
dt
y i = ui
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Rising Rate of Change
Falling Rate of Change
Rate Limiter
1
-1
Rising rate of change limit

Falling rate of change limit
Parameter Range
Rising Rate of Change = 0 to +999999999.999999
Falling Rate of Change = 0 to -999999999.999999
Parameter Defaults
Rising Rate of Change = 1
Falling Rate of Change = -1

The value of the rising rate must be greater or equal to zero. The value of the rising rate must be greater
than that of the falling rate. The rising and falling rate can be equal only if both values are zero. The
following message is displayed if any parameter inconsistency is detected:
25-62
Control Blocks
If both the Rising and Falling Rates are zero, then the output of this block is always zero.
25.3.24 Sample Hold Block
Block Equations
The sample hold block holds the input for the specified sample time. This block is typically used to
account for discretization of the input signal. The following plot shows the input and output signals for a
sample hold block with a hold time of 0.1 seconds.
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Sample Hold Time
Sample Hold
0.025
Sample hold time
25-63
Control Blocks
Parameter Range
Sample Time = 999999999.999999 to 0
Parameter Defaults
Sample Time = 0.025 sec.

The value of the sample hold time can be any value equal to zero or higher. The value of the Sample
Time field must be positive and greater than zero. The following message is displayed if this condition is
not true:
25-64
Control Blocks
25.3.25 Complex-Polar Block (Complex to Magnitude-Angle)

This block outputs the magnitude and angle of a complex value input.
Block Equations
This block outputs the magnitude and angle (radians) of a complex input value.
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Output Type
Complex-Polar
Magnitude-Angle
Magnitude
Angle
Short for Complex to Magnitude-Angle

Selection of the output type for this
block
Defaults:
Output Type = Magnitude-Angle

The output ports of the block are displayed based on the Output Type selection. The selection controls
which parameter output port. The images below show this:
25-65
Control Blocks
25.3.26 Data Plotter Block

The benefit of this block is the implementation of a data plotter block which allows the value of any
intermediate parameters (variables) inside the model to be plotted by exporting the results to a comma
separated file (*.csv file):
Block Equations
This block outputs internal variables in the model from the time the transient stability simulation starts to
run. In the case of generic lumped loads and WTG models, the data plotter starts to plot internal variables
during the initialization procedure.
The output Yplot is the plotted value at every plot time step defined by the TS calculation engine.
Block Properties
Parameters
Name
Number of Plots
Data Plotter
1
Number of inputs for generating plots
Parameter Range
Maximum Number of Plots = 10
Parameter Defaults
Number of Plots = 1

The Number of Plots input field allows you define the number of inputs and plots to be generated by
the program in *.csv format. In the image below, the number of plots was selected as 3.
Please note that the first value to be outputted into the *.csv output file is the first or top input. The
indication of the input number is added to the column name. For example, if a two input data plotter block
is plotted, then its name is used to generate the column name and the input number is appended as shown
below:
Data Plotter ID_<Input Number>

Data Plotter_1
Data Plotter_2
25-66
Control Blocks
25.3.27 Simulation Time Block

The benefit of this block is the implementation of a clock which brings the simulation time into the
model. The simulation time comes from the transient stability calculation.
Block Equations
The behavior of this block is the same as that of the existing integrator block in Simulink.
Yout = t
The output Yout is the simulation time which is accumulated based on the time step from the TS
calculation. It is recommended that the time step from TS be smaller or equal to the time step used
internally to initialize the governor, exciter and power system stailizer models. For generic lumped load
and WTG models, the time step from TS is used directly to initialize the models.
Block Properties
This block only allows the user to define its ID or block name.

This element is very simple in its application yet it serves a very powerful role in dynamic simulations. In
combination with lookup table blocks, it allows the definition of any time based action which occurs
internally in the model. This allows the definition of internal actions which are synchronized with the
transient stabilitiy simulation time.
25-67
Creating UDM Models
25.4 Creating UDM Models

This section is meant to provide the step by step process of creating different types of UDM models. This
section also covers some of the concepts required to model them using the fundamental blocks.
25.4.1 Creating AVR / EXC UDM Models

The automatic voltage regulators (AVR) and exciter (EXC) models can be created for the synchronous
machines (motor/generator). The AVR and EXC are both part of the same dynamic models. The job of
the exciter is to generate a control signal which determines the amount of excitation applied by the exciter
on the generator field windings.
Typically the AVR has a summing type input where the reference signal (Vref) and the terminal bus
voltage (in p.u. bus base kV) generate a difference signal which is then amplified and process by an
amplifier. The amplifier output is used by the exciter to determine the proportional excitation voltage
applied on the field winding. The output of the exciter model is the exciter field voltage (Efd in p.u based
on the exciter rated output voltage). The base of the efd output voltage can be thought of the value of
excitation required to provide 1.0 p.u. rated current based on the generator rated current.
The following steps summarize the process of creating an EXC/AVR model:
1) Create a new model by opening the UDM editor from the synchronous generator/motor exciter
page or from the system toolbar (it is recommended to create the model from the element so that
the naming convention is automatically applied and the model is automatically linked to the
element).
2) Name the model and define the model type from the System Model Parameter section. In this
case the model type is Exciter
3) Select an Initialization method. The default method to initialize the exciter model is the Iterative
method. The direct method or the iterative method can be selected (please refer to the
initialization techniques section for more information on these methods). For the purpose of this
example, the direct method can be selected.
4) Define the inputs and outputs and reference blocks. For this example, Vt, Vref and Efd
should be defined.
5) The AVR transfer function can be entered. The AVR function can be tested with a simple exciter
to verify its performance.
6) The Exciter transfer function can be entered.
7) The model can be tested using the test routine or with a simple system in transient stability.
8) Once the model has been developed, it can be saved and linked to other generators or it can be
added to the exciter model library.
Step 1
Please refer to section 25.1.1. Create a new UDM project as shown below:
Step 2
Name the model and define the system parameters model type. Name the model EXC1. Define the model
as an Exciter.
Step 3
Select the initialization method as Direct.
25-68
Creating UDM Models
Step 4
The inputs and outputs can be defined. Select click on the Inputs section of the element toolbar as shown
below and enter the first input Vt. Then click on the output section and select the output to be Efd.
From the control blocks section select a constant block and name it Vref
25-69
Creating UDM Models
Before proceeding to Step 5 select the Vref block to be the reference voltage signal for this exciter model.
Do this from the system parameter section under the System Reference section.
Step 5
Now construct the AVR transfer function by adding the summing point (sum block), a transducer (to
simulate the measuring circuit time constant) and the regulator blocks.
25-70
Creating UDM Models
Once the AVR is built, it is a good idea to run a quick test to determine if it works well. If the AVR
portion of the model does not work, then it may be difficult to determine what is wrong with the model
once a many more blocks are added. The best practice would be to do some quick tests on this portion of
the model first. In order to do this a simple time constant block can be used to represent the exciter.
Connecting the exciter block and the output we get a simple exciter model that which may be used to test
the AVR portion.
We can compile the model and run a few test routines to check the behavior of the exciter. A six second
total simulation time is used for all three tests.
25-71
Creating UDM Models
Load Shed Test Results
Load Acceptance Test Results
Fault Test Results
The UDM models for the synchronous motor are exactly the same as those for the synchronous generator.
The only difference is that the exciter for synchronous motors is selected from the exciter page of the
motor element.
25-72
Creating UDM Models
25.4.2 Creating GOV/Turbine UDM Models

This section describes the process of creating and testing a GOV/Turbine Model using the UDM editor.
The Governors or speed controllers (GOV) and Turbine / Engine Models can be created for the
synchronous generators. Typically, a speed/output power controls a turbine or engine model. Both of
these components are contained within the type of modeled defined and called Governor. The job of the
speed and power controllers is to regulate the shaft speed and mechanical power output of the
turbine/engine. The turbine/engine model represents the dynamics of the mechanical system which
provides the power to the generator.
Typically the speed/power controller has a summing type input where the reference speed (Wref) and the
shaft speed (in p.u. generator rated RPM) generate a difference signal which is then amplified and
processed. This signal can be sent to a variety of devices including valves, actuators, servomotors, gates
etc. These devices exert control on the fuel, steam and even water flow in order to adjust the speed and
power delivered by the mechanical system to the generator. The output of the governor model is the
mechanical power (Pm in p.u. based on the machine rated MW base). 1.0 p.u. for a 10 MW generator
equates to 10 MW of mechanical power delivered by the shaft to the generator unit.
The following steps summarize the process of creating a governor model:
1) Create a new model by opening the UDM editor from the synchronous generator governor page
or from the system toolbar (it is recommended to create the model from the element so that the
naming convention is automatically applied and the model is automatically linked to the element).
2) Name the model GMdl1 and define the model type from the System Model Parameter section.
In this case the model type is Governor
example, the iterative method can be selected.
4) Define the inputs and outputs and reference blocks. For this example, W, Wref and Pm
should be defined.
5) The speed controller transfer function can be entered. The speed controller function can be tested
with a simple governor to verify its performance.
6) The turbine/engine transfer function can be entered.
added to the governor model library.
Step 1
Please refer to section 25.1.1. Create a new UDM project.
Step 2
Name the model and define the system parameters model type. Name the model 1. Define the model as a
Governor.
Step 3
Select the initialization method as Iterative.
25-73
Creating UDM Models
Step 4
below and enter the first input W. Enter the second input P Then click on the output section and
select the output to be Pm. From the control blocks section select a constant block and name it Wref.
25-74
Creating UDM Models
Before proceeding to Step 5 select the Wref block to be the reference voltage signal for this exciter
model. Do this from the system parameter section under the System Reference section.
Step5
Now we can create the speed controller. To do that we can add and connect the blocks as shown below.
Please note that this is a proportional integral type controller.
Step6
We can test the speed controller by using a simple engine model (transfer function) and connecting it to
the mechanical power output pm. The image below shows the process and quick load shed test result.
25-75
Creating UDM Models
Step7
Now we can create a simple actuator and model the fuel delay of the engine (in most cases the fuel system
time delay is the only portion model for the engine). The images below show the actuator and fuel system
models.
The image above shows the conversion of the PID output to the actuator degree base. There is an actuator
time delay and a limiter which shows that the actuator can only go from -60 to +60 degrees. The
integrator and the feedback complete the dynamic representation of the actuator. At the end of the image
we convert back from actuator units (degrees to per unit). The per unit output can then be coupled to the
engine model shown in the image below:
In the previous image, the Act to Torque conversion serves as a gain and couples the actuator to the
engine power limit block (limiter) and to the fuel system dynamics. The output is the mechanical power.
It is important to understand that the Pm output should be in per-unit. Where 1.0 p.u. represents the
machine rated MW base (Generator rated MW and not the engine rated MW).
Step 8
Now we can connect the speed controller to the actuator and engine models. The image below shows the
completed model (the temporary transfer function representing the engine has been removed).
Please note that the generator real power output input block has been left unconnected until now. This
input can be used to add base loading control to the speed controller. The model we have created will
operate only in isochronous mode.
25-76
Creating UDM Models
The model can be tested using the iterative method and default settings. The images below show the
results for a fault, load shed and load acceptance tests. As can be expected during a fault, the mechanical
power output (not the speed) starts to reduce. The mechanical power output goes up or down for the load
change tests.
Fault Test Results
Load Acceptance Test Results
Load Shed Test Results
25-77
Creating UDM Models
25.4.3 Creating UDM Models for Power System Stabilizers

This section describes the process of creating and testing a PSS Model using the UDM editor.
The power system stabilizer can be created for synchronous generators only. Typically PSS units are
added to a power system to enhance the damping to extend power transfer limits. A PSS works in
conjunction with the excitation system of the synchronous machine to modify the torque angle of the shaft
to increase damping.
The PSS has different types of inputs. They include speed, frequency, power, accelerating power and
integral of accelerating power. ETAP UDM uses the terminal voltage, electrical power, mechanical
power, speed, rotor angle, and frequency as possible inputs. The output typically is signal fed directly into
the summing point of the automatic voltage regulator.
The following steps summarize the process of creating a PSS model:
1) Create a new model by opening the UDM editor from the synchronous generator PSS page or
from the system toolbar (it is recommended to create the model from the element so that the
2) Name the model PSSMdl1 and define the model type from the System Model Parameter
section. In this case the model type is PSS
example, the direct method can be selected.
4) Define the inputs and outputs and reference blocks. For this example, Pe and Vs should be
defined.
5) The PSS controller transfer function can be entered. PSS units are electronic devices which are
tied in most cases directly to the exciter controls.
added to the governor model library.
Step 1
Step 2
Name the model and define the system parameters model type. Name the model 1. Define the model as a
PSS.
Step 3
Select the initialization method as Direct.
25-78
Creating UDM Models
Step 4
The inputs and outputs can be defined. lick on the Inputs section of the element toolbar as shown below
and enter the first input P or Pe. Now click on the output section and select the output to be Vs.
From the control blocks section select a constant block and name it Wref.
There are no reference constant blocks which need to be defined for a power system stabilizer in ETAP
UDM.
Step5
Now we can create the PSS transfer function. To do that we can add and connect the blocks as shown
below.
25-79
Creating UDM Models
Step6
Now we can test the power system stabilizer model. Please add the test settings as shown below in the test
setting section of the model parameters prior to running the test.
The power system stabilizer only has one type of test. The test results are shown below. Typically the
PSS has limited output to the AVR. In this case, the test disturbance shows that the signal has been
limited to 0.05 per unit.
25-80
Creating UDM Models
25.4.4 Creating General Load / Source UDM Models

This section describes the process of creating and testing the generic load / source UDM models.
Note: The lumped load type must be set to conventional, in the nameplate tab, to utilize a user-defined
dynamic model through a lumped load and run a transient stability study.
The generic models can be created by using the lumped load editor. Different types of models can be
created and they include:
1) Static Load Models
Exponential
Polynomial
Comprehensive
2) Dynamic Load Models
Discharge Lighting Loads
Thermal and overcurrent relays and motor starters
Thermostatically controlled loads (space heaters)
3) MOV and Motor Models (for acceleration studies)
Static motor models
Dynamic motor models
DC motor acceleration models
4) Time-Domain Model (recorded signals or loads used as part of the model)
Load Profiles
Signals recorded over some time period
5) AC to DC Source Models for dynamic studies
Inverters
Converters
6) PV array and inverter models Solar Models
7) Wind Turbine Models
Simple induction generator models
Full and half converter models
8) SVC / STATCOM Models
9) More
This example shows the creation of static and dynamic load models.
The following steps summarize the process of creating a simple generic load (static) model:
1) Create a new model by opening the UDM editor from the lumped load dynamic model page or
from the system toolbar (it is recommended to create the model from the element so that the
2) Name the model ExponentialMdl and define the model type from the System Model Parameter
section. In this case the model type is Generic
3) The initialization method for generic loads is different than for exciters, governors and pss. The
initialization is done forward. The output P & Q of the lumped load depends on the input
parameters. In the case of the synchronous generator models the output values are calculated prior
to initialization and the internal reference values are modified until a solution is reached. The only
intialization parameter which is required for the generic load models is located under the ETAP
25-81
Creating UDM Models
Preferences\Options editor (TS section). The following image shows the entry and the suggested
value for this example. The value of 1 second is good enough for most load models.
4) Define the inputs and outputs. For this example, Vt, Freq, P and Q should be defined.
The input Vt and Freq inputs are in per-unit. Transient stability uses 1.0 MW as base for the
real power and 1.0 MVAR as base for the reactive power.
5) The mathematical relationship for the load should be entered.
6) The output should be converted to the desired base.
7) Once the model has been developed, it can be saved and linked to other lumped loads or it can be
added to the generic model library.
Step 1
Step 2
Name the model and define the system parameters model type. Name the model exponential. Define the
model as a Generic Load model.
Step 3
below and enter the inputs Vt and Freq. Now click on the output section and select the outputs to be
P and Q.
Step4
Now we can create the generic load mathematical representation. To do that we can add and connect the
blocks as shown below. Please note that the equations used to represent the load are shown below:
25-82
Creating UDM Models
For this example, the value of the a & b exponents is 2 for both. This means that the load will behave as a
constant impedance load. The system frequency changes play a factor along with the gains Kpf and
Kqf. A function block can be used instead of the multiplier blocks (to obtain the square of the voltage).
Step5
Compile and link the system to a lumped load. This can be done in the end system for which the model
was created or it can be done in a test system like the one described in step 6.
Step6
Before using the load model in the actual system, it can be tested using a simplified test system. The test
system should have very little voltage drop so that the internal voltage input value is close to 1.0 p.u. This
helps with the initial debugging of the UDM model equations.
25-83
Creating UDM Models
As expected the real and reactive power of the lumped load is very close to 2 MW and 1 MVAR since the
voltage and frequency are very close to 1.0 p.u.
Step 7
To convert the generic lumped load into a source of power, all we have to do is to add a nagative
multiplier to the P and Q outputs.
The image below shows the TS load flow results after compiling and running the simulation. As can be
seen the power is now flowing into the system and the generic load is behaving as a voltage dependent
P & Q source.
25-84
Creating UDM Models
25.4.5 UDM Model Parameter Report

After compile an UDM model, a report file with Microsoft Word format (.doc) for UDM model
parameters will be generated in the same folder as project files. The name of report file is combined with
generator ID and UDM name, as shown as follows:
25-85
Sharing Modes
25.5 EXC/ GOV MW/Var Sharing Modes

The exciter and governor models can be configured to share real and reactive power between several
generator units.
25.5.1 Load Sharing
Load Share (Psh)

Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of load sharing to the ETAP key word (Psh). This is the
governor load sharing power reference in per-unit of generator MW.
Group Number
The group number allows you to take several generators and group them together for load sharing. In the
image above, you would select Gen1,2,3 as Group Number 1 and Gen4,5,6 as Group Number 2,
otherwise this pull-down list will be grayed out. The default group number 0 means no load sharing
available.
25-86
Sharing Modes
25.5.2 Exciter Var Sharing Mode

For the exciter cross current compensation model, the number (ID) of the group in which the generator
participates in var sharing need to be specified in UDM Exciter Editor, as shown in the example below.
The default group number 0 means no var sharing available and the selection box is grayed out.
var Share Group Number

The group number allows you to take several generators and group them together for var sharing. In the
image above, you would select Gen1,2,3 as var Share Group Number 1 and Gen4,5,6 as var Share Group
Number 2, otherwise this pull-down list will be grayed out. The default group number 0 means no var
sharing available.
25-87
Test Model
25.6 Testing UDM Models

The UDM Program also allows you to perform a stand-alone test for your UDM equation files.
Depending on the model type that you have selected, click the Run Test Simulation button to launch the
test simulation for the Governor, Exciter or PSS models. These system test settings are located under the
system parameters section of the UDM editor and are provided to allow you to specify the appropriate
system input variable values and the test types like Load Shedding, Load Acceptance, and Fault Bus for a
simple power system. The test power system consists of a single generator connected to a single load via
a transmission line as shown below. The parameters of the power system are built into the program.
Governor
Vt
Generator
Exciter
ZL
25.6.1 Governor Model Test

The Governor Model test parameters are located in the model parameters section. The system test
input/output values, simulation time, system output and test types are described below.
Test Type
Load Shed
Select this option to simulate a power system load shed of 50%.
Load Acceptance
Select this option to simulate a power system load addition of 50%.
Fault Bus
Select this option to simulate short-circuit fault on the generator terminal bus.
Test
When the test input values and simulation times are specified and a test type is selected in the Governor
Model Test Editor, you can implement the governor model testing by clicking the Run Simulation Test
button.
Plot
When the testing is successfully completed, the results are available for plot. Click the Plot Test
Results button to view the results.
25-88
Test Model
25.6.2 Exciter Model Test

The Exciter Model test parameters are located in the model parameters section. The system test
input/output values, simulation time, system output and test types are described below.
Test Type
Load Shed
Select this option to simulate a power system load shed of 50%.
Load Acceptance
Select this option to simulate a power system load adding of 50%.
Fault Bus
Select this option to simulate a short-circuit fault on the generator terminal bus.
Test
Once the test input values and simulation times are specified and a test type is selected in the Exciter
Model Test Editor, you can implement the exciter model testing by clicking the Run Test Simulation
button.
Plot
When the testing is successfully completed, you can view the results as plots. Click the Plot Test
Results button to view the results.
25-89
Test Model
25.6.3 PSS Model Test

The PSS Model test parameters are located under the model parameters section of the UDM editor. The
test input/output values, simulation time, and test types are described below:
Time Step (sec)

This parameter defines the simulation time step in seconds. The default value is 0.002.
Total Time (sec)

This parameter defines the total simulation time in seconds. The default value is 40.0.
System Output (pu)

PSS Signal (Vs)
This field displays the PSS output signal in per-unit.
Test
Once the test input values and simulation times are specified in the PSS Model Test Editor, you can
implement the PSS model testing by clicking the Run Test Simulation button. The PSS model test is
conducted by placing a pulse disturbance only on input signals.
Plot
When the testing is successfully completed, you can view the results as a plot. Click the Plot Test Results
button to view the results.
25-90
Test Model
25.7 Advanced Topics

25.7.1 Report of middle state variables of UDM model
If you want to see the outputs of some middle state variables of UDM model, you can use the Data
Plotter block to connect to the point you are interested in the UDM model as shown below in an example
of UDM block diagram.
After the simulation is completed, a report file with Microsoft Excel format (.csv) for the specified middle
state variable outputs will be generated in the same folder as the project file. The name of report file is a
combineation of the generator ID and UDM name, as shown as follows:
25-91
Test Model
25.7.2 Switching governor between Droop and Isochronous Modes

If a governor has Droop and Isochronous Operation Mode options, the UDM can allow you to simulate
the switch behavior between Droop and Isochronous Modes. In order to do that, first, you need to use an
ETAP reserved key word Drp block to flag the initial operation mode in the UDM model. The
following diagram shown below is an example to set up the switch options between the Droop and
Isochronous Modes. The Drp constant block is only handled for EXC/GOV/PSS models.
Then, you need to create in the ETAP Transient Stability Study Case Editor an action event to switch the
Operation Mode for the generator. The event setting is shown as follows:
25-92
Test Model
25.7.3 By-pass some blocks during initialization process

If you use Iterative method for UDM initialization, for some models a special setting for some control
blocks such as MinMax or Saturation blocks may cause the UDM initialization to fail. These blocks may
need to be by-passed during the initialization process in order to successfully initialize the
EXC/GOV/PSS models. An ETAP UDM reserved key word iniCnst constant block can be used to
control the path for initialization loop or simulation loop. The following diagram is an example to show
how to set up the control structure. The initial value of iniCnst block is set to 1; the initialization loop
is on during initialization process. Once the initialization is successfully completed, the value of
iniCnst block will be automatically changed to 0 and the normal simulation loop will be switched to
on.
Please note that the iniCnst constant block is only used for the EXC/GOV/PSS models. The simulation
time block can be used to by-pass blocks for the Generic Load and WTG udm models.
25-93
Test Model
25.7.4 General Load and WTG Modeling in Transient Stability

The General Load and WTG udm models and handled as constant power loads in the transient stability
calculation. This assumption requires certain modeling techniques fo simulations where the terminal bus
voltage connected to these loads goes to values near zero. The modeling techniques are listed below:
1) Under low bus voltage conditions and constant power modeling, the resuslting load current
becomes very high and it will eventually cause the solution to diverge
2) The VLC limit setting in the dynamic page of the transient stability study will cause the constant
power load or source models to automatically switch to constant impedance ones.
3) The transient stability program automatically sets the current equal to zero if the the terminal
voltage becomes very low (i.e. approximately less than 0.1% or less of bus nominal kV).
Because of the previous modelign issues the following design considerations and effect on the results are
obtained:
1) The VLC limit must be set to a small value in order to prevent the general load/source/wtg model
from being switched to a constant impedance model.
2) The real and reactive power outputs must be multiplied by the voltage or the square of the voltage
in order to make the reduce to zero under the condition where the input terminal bus voltage goes
to zero.
3) The behavior of the model under fault current conditions will not be accurate since there is no
internal machine model or internal voltage present in order to contribute current into the system.
This is no problem for most load models like converters (rectifiers) or dynamic loads, but is a
problem if the UDM intents to represent an load which can contribute current to a fault on its
input terminal (such as is the case with induction motor models being represented with UDM).
4) Wind turbine models with terminal bus faults will also contribute to the fault, but this behavior
may not be accurately modeled using the UDM technique. The existing WTG built-in models can
be used for fault analysis.
The following image shows a test system used to show the condition described above:
25-94
Test Model
The bus terminal voltage plots for Bus1 and Bus5 are shown below.
25-95
Test Model
The real and reactive power output plots show that there is a dependency on the input voltage:
25-96
Test Model
The real power output shows that as the voltage goes down, so does the real power output. This behavior
is accomplished by multiplying the real power output in the UDM model by the voltage as showns below:
If the input voltage is set completely to zero during simulation and the model does not handle this
condition internally, then the load/source current may be set to zero at this point the model may not be
part of the system.
The addition of different modeling techniques in the future will help in the modeling of this condition. In
the mean time special attention should be paid to the simulation conditions described in this section.
25-97
Chapter 26
The ETAP Parameter Estimation Module calculates equivalent circuit model parameters for induction
machines and synchronous motors at starting condition. This calculation is based on an advanced
mathematical estimation and curve fitting technique, which requires only the machine performance
characteristic data. This data is readily available from machine manufactures or can be obtained from
field tests. The estimated model parameters include the resistance and reactance representing the machine
stator, rotor and magnetizing branches characteristics. The estimated model, together with its parameters,
can be used to represent the machine dynamics during motor starting and Transient Stability Studies.
This chapter describes the interfaces, input and output data involved in running the Parameter Estimation
Program. All other related operations including data update, plot and print will also be explained. An
overview of the calculation algorithm is provided for your reference.
This chapter is organized into five sections. The Start Parameter Estimation section describes how to start
the parameter estimation calculation. The Parameter Estimation Editor section explains each input data
and the calculated data for and from the calculation, as well as additional output information. The Motor
Parameter Update Editor section details the updateable data provided to the Machine Editor when using
the estimated model and its parameters. The Calculation Method provides some technical background on
the algorithm used for the estimation calculation. And finally, the Output Reports section provides a
detailed description of the available Output Reports, their various formats and how to view and print
them.
26-1
Start Parameter Estimation
26.1 Start Parameter Estimation

To launch a Parameter Estimation, click on the Parameter Estimation Start button located in the Model
page of the Induction Machine Editor.
Click this button to open the Parameter Estimation Editor.
26-2
Parameter Estimation Editor
26.2 Parameter Estimation Editor

The Parameter Estimation Editor consists of a Parameters page and a Curve page.
26.2.1 Parameters Page

This page provides entry fields for all input data necessary to run a parameter estimation calculation.
Estimated parameters and other output data is also displayed on this page.
Requirement
In this area, there are three sets of data: input, calculated and deviation. The input fields are user-defined,
while the remaining fields are calculated by ETAP.
Input
The Input section contains machine performance characteristic data, which is available from the machine
manufacturer, machine nameplate, or derived from field tests. This data must be provided in order to run
a parameter estimation calculation. The first time this page is opened, the input data fields will be
automatically filled using data contained in the Machine Editor Nameplate and Model pages. However,
you can modify any of this automatically input data independently of the Machine Editor.
26-3
Calculated
If the calculation converges, the machine performance characteristic data using the estimated model
parameters will be displayed here. This data is provided for comparison purposes.
Deviation
The deviation fields show the percent deviation between the input data and the calculated data.
Locked Rotor I
The machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV). The input and calculated data are a percentage of
the rated full load current of the machine, and the deviation is also a percentage.
Locked Rotor PF
The machine locked-rotor power factor in percent.
Locked Rotor T
The machine locked-rotor torque. The input and calculated data is in percent of the machine rated power
and synchronous speed. The deviation is in percent.
Tmax
The machine maximum torque. The input and calculated data are in percent of the machine rated power
and synchronous speed. The deviation is in percent.
Full Load Slip

The machine full load slip, in percent.
Full Load PF
The machine full load power factor, in percent.
Full Load Eff

The machine full load efficiency, in percent.
Refresh Button
Every time the Parameters page of the Parameter Estimation Editor is opened, the input data will be
compared with the Machine Editor data. If any difference exists, this button will be enabled; otherwise it
is disabled (grayed out). Press this button to re-compare all input data with the Machine Editor data.
Solution Parameters
This section defines and displays the solution parameters of the calculation.
Max Deviation
Displays the maximum allowed value among all deviations in the Requirement section. The value is a
percentage.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision (in percent) that is used to check for calculation convergence.
The calculation stops when all deviations are less than, or equal to this value. The recommended value
for this setting is between 1.0 and 5.0 percent. The default is 2 percent.
26-4
Acceleration Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 0.1
and 0.5. The default value is 0.25.
Estimated Parameters
This section displays the estimated (calculated) machine equivalent circuit model parameters.
Xs
Displays the machine stator reactance in percent on the machine base.
Rs
Displays the machine stator resistance in percent on the machine base.
Xm
Displays the machine magnetizing branch reactance in percent on the machine base.
Xr lr
Displays the machine rotor reactance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Xr fl
Displays the machine rotor reactance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.
Rr lr
Displays the machine rotor resistance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Rr fl
Displays the machine rotor resistance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.
Estimate Button
Press this button to run the parameter estimation calculation.
Update Button
When a calculation is completed successfully, the Update button will be enabled. Click this button to
open the Motor Parameter Update Editor whose functions will be described separately in its own section.
Parameter Estimation Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the parameter estimation calculations in the current project
folder. Select a file to view the report or to run a new calculation.
Note: In the latter case, the existing file will be over written. When Prompt is selected, a new file will be
created.
26-5
Parameter Estimation Report Manager Button

The Parameter Estimation Report Manager button is used to access the various Output Reports. The
functions of the Parameter Estimation Report Manager will be described separately in its own section.
Help
This opens the Help file topic for the Parameter Estimation section.
Close
This closes the Parameter Estimation Editor and saves all data.
Cancel
This closes the Parameter Estimation Editor without saving any modified data.
26-6
26.2.2 Curves Page

This page displays the machine equivalent circuit model, its parameters, and the characteristic curves
generated from the model.
Update Button
When a calculation is completed successfully, the Update button will be enabled. Click this button to
open the Motor Parameter Update Editor, whose functions will be described separately in its own section.
Parameter Estimation Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the parameter estimation calculations that are included in the
current project folder. Select a file to view the report or to run a new calculation.
Note: In the latter case, the existing file will be over written. When Prompt is selected, a new file will be
created.
Parameter Estimation Report Manager Button
26-7
The Parameter Estimation Report Manager button is used to access the various Output Reports.
Functions of the Parameter Estimation Report Manager will be described separately in its own section.
Help
Cancel
This closes the Parameter Estimation Editor without saving any modified data.
26-8
Parameter Estimation Update Editor
26.3 Motor Parameter Update Editor

This editor provides options that allow you to update machine data that were based on the calculated
equivalent circuit model.
Model Data
The data in the lower portion (non-boxed area) is from the machine Model page under the Model section.
This data is compared with the calculated data (boxed area) from the estimated model.
Rs
The machine stator resistance in percent on the machine base.
Xs
The machine stator reactance in percent on the machine base.
Xm
The machine magnetizing branch reactance in percent on the machine base.
Xr lr
The machine rotor reactance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Xr fl
The machine rotor reactance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.
26-9
Rr lr
The machine rotor resistance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Rr fl
The machine rotor resistance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.
Nameplate Data
The Existing data is from the machine Nameplate page under the Ratings section, which is compared with
the calculated data list from the estimated model (located above the Existing data).
kVA
The machine rated kVA.
FLA
The machine rated full load current in amperes.
PF
The machine rated power factor at 100% loading in percent.
Eff
The machine rated efficiency at 100% loading in percent.
H
The machine total inertia in MW-Sec/MVA.
Torque
The machine rated torque in ft-lb in English unit system or in N-m in Metric unit system.
Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Nameplate Data.
Loading Data
The Existing data is derived from the machine Nameplate page under the Ratings section, which is
compared with the calculated data list above from the estimated model (located above the Existing data).
PF 50%
PF 75%
Eff 50%
Eff 75%
26-10
Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Loading Data.
Short-Circuit Data
The Existing data is from the machine Model page under the Locked Rotor section, ANSI Short-Circuit Z
section, and Parameters section respectively. This data is compared with the calculated data list above the
estimated model (located above the Existing data).
LRC
The machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the
machine.
PFlr
The machine locked-rotor power factor in percent.
cy X
The machine short-circuit impedance in percent on machine base; used for ANSI cycle fault
calculation.
1.5-4 cy X
The machine short-circuit impedance in percent on machine base; used for ANSI 1.5-4 cycle fault
calculation.
X/R
The machine X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra).
Td'
The machine transient time constant in seconds.
Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Short-Circuit Data.
Characteristic Data
The Existing data is generated from the machine Nameplate page under the Ratings section and Model
page under the Torque section, respectively. This data is compared with the calculated data list above the
estimated model (located above the Existing data).
LRT
The machine locked-rotor torque in percent.
MaxT
The machine maximum torque in percent.
FLT
The machine full load torque in percent.
S@MaxT
The machine slip at the maximum torque in percent.
26-11
Sr
The machine rated slip in percent.
Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Characteristic Data.
Help Button
Update Button
This updates the data in any of the sections that have their Update boxes checked.
Cancel Button
This closes the Motor Parameter Update Editor without updating any data.
26-12
Calculation Method

Reference Paper
The machine equivalent circuit model parameter estimation calculation method uses an algorithm based
on limited available data, which is described in the following reference paper:
Sonchai Ansuj, Farrokh Shokooh, and Roland Schinzinger, Parameter Estimation for Induction
Machines Based on Sensitivity Analysis, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, Vol. IAS
25 pp. 1035-1040, Nov./Dec. 1989.
Equivalent Circuit Model

This algorithm estimates the parameters in the following equivalent induction machine circuit model.
Rs
Xs
Xm
Rr lr
Rr fl
Xr lr
Xr fl
Stator resistance
Stator reactance
Rotor resistance at locked-rotor
Rotor resistance at full load
Rotor reactance at locked-rotor
Rotor reactance at full load
This data is indicated in the machine steady-state performance curve below:
26-13
Calculation Method
The algorithm starts with a simplified equivalent circuit that omits the magnetizing branch. Using this
simplified model, the model parameters are evaluated first. These parameters are then used to arrive at
the more accurate values using the detailed equivalent circuit model. At this stage, a sensitivity analysis
is applied using an iterative process that continuously adjusts the estimated parameters until the percent
deviations fall within a specified tolerance between the calculated values for the input parameters and the
actual input.
Both rotor parameters Rr and Xr are functions of slip and their respective cage factors. Therefore, two
sets of Rr and Xr are estimated, with Rr lr and Xr lr representing the values at the locked-rotor condition,
and Rr fl and Xr fl representing the values at the full load condition. The induction machine equivalent
circuit described above can actually represent any type of rotor design. Single-cage, double-cage, and
even wound-rotor types are accurately accounted for by the two sets for Rr and Xr.
The program requires that the machine nameplate data, along with two specific points from the machine
performance curves, are available. These points, which include the locked-rotor torque, locked-rotor
current, locked-rotor power factor and breakdown torque, may be obtained from actual machine tests or
from curves supplied by the manufacturer. Indeed, these points are often the only reliable information
available from the performance curves, since the rest of the curve might have been provided merely as an
indication of the machines generic behavior.
26-14
Required Data
26.5 Required Data

The input data for the algorithm is the machine performance characteristic data, grouped according to the
three loading conditions usually specified for the machine, described as follows:
Locked-Rotor
Ilr
Locked-rotor current
PFlr
Locked-rotor power factor
Tlr
Locked-rotor torque
Full Load
Sr
PFfl
Eff fl
Rated full load slip

Full load power factor
Full load efficiency
Maximum Torque
Tmax
Maximum torque
26-15
Output Reports
26.6 Output Reports

If the current calculation succeeds or a valid output file name is selected from the Parameter Estimation
Report Selection List, the Output Reports can be accessed by pressing the Parameter Estimation Report
Manager button. The Parameter Estimation Report Manager button is located next to the Parameter
Estimation Report Selection List as shown in the figure below.
26.6.1 Parameter Estimation Report Manager

Click the Parameter Estimation Report Manager button to open the Parameter Estimation Report
Manager. The Parameter Estimation Report Manager offers various report formats and consists of four
pages.
Complete Page
Use this page to select the Complete Output Report.
You can view the file using the Viewer, or create a file that can be printed or emailed (PDF, MS Word,
Rich Text Format, MS Excel). Your selection can also be assigned as the default report format if you
check the Set As Default box. These selection buttons are offered on all four pages of the Report
Manager.
26-16
Output Reports
The first page of the Complete Report provides input data, estimated model parameters and a
comparison between the input data and similar data generated by the estimated model.
The second page of the Complete Report tabulates the machine characteristics for all key quantities as a
function of machine slip. These quantities include machine speed, torque, current, power factor, and
efficiency. It also reports the machine power factor and the efficiency at different loading conditions.
26-17
Output Reports
26-18
Output Reports
Input Page
This page allows you to select the Input Data Report.
The Input Report displays the input data, and is equivalent to the input data section in the Complete
Report.
Result Page
This page allows you to select different data formats for your calculation results.
26-19
Output Reports
The Estimated Parameters Report is equivalent to the Estimated Parameters and Input & Results sections
in the Complete Report.
The Loading Characteristics Report is the same as the loading section of the second page of the
Complete Report.
The Motor Characteristics Report is equivalent to the tabulation portion of the second page of the
Complete Report.
Summary Page
This page provides the data format for calculation summary.
The Summary Report is equivalent to the Input & Results sections in the Complete Report.
26-20
Chapter 27
Harmonics
Because of the wide and ever increasing applications of power electronic devices and other electronic and
digital controllers, such as variable speed drives, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), static power
converters, rectifiers, Static Var Compensator (SVC), etc., power system voltage and current quality has
been severely affected in some areas. In these areas components other than that of fundamental frequency
can be found to exist in the distorted voltage and current waveforms. These components usually are the
integer multipliers of the fundamental frequency, called harmonics. In addition to electronic devices,
some other nonlinear loads, or devices including saturated transformers, arc furnaces, fluorescent lights,
and cyclo-converters are also responsible for the deterioration in power system quality.
27-1
Harmonic Analysis
Overview
The presence of harmonics in a power system can give rise to a variety of problems including equipment
overheating, reduced power factors, deteriorating performance of electrical equipment, the incorrect
operation of protective relays, interference with communication devices, and in some cases, circuit
resonance to cause electric apparatus dielectric failure and other types of severe damage. Even worse,
harmonic currents generated in one area can penetrate into the power grid and propagate into other areas,
resulting in voltage and current distortions for the entire system. This phenomenon has become a major
concern for power quality due to the ever-increasing usage of electronic devices and equipment in power
systems.
Using computer simulation, the phenomena of power system harmonics can be modeled and analyzed.
The ETAP Harmonic Analysis Module provides you with the best tool to accurately model various power
system components and devices to include their frequency dependency, nonlinearity, and other
characteristics under the presence of harmonic sources. This module employs two analytical methods,
Harmonic Load Flow Method and Harmonic Frequency Scan Method. Both methods are the most popular
and powerful approaches for power system harmonic analysis. By using those two methods in
combination, different harmonic indices are computed and compared with the industrial standard
limitations, existing and potential power quality problems, along with security problems associated with
harmonics can be easily revealed. Causes to those problems can be identified and different mitigation and
corrective schemes can be tested and finally verified.
Some of the main features of the ETAP Harmonic Load Flow Study are summarized below:
Common and integrated database

Fully inherited 3-D data structure, including infinite presentations, unlimited configurations, &
multiple data revisions
Handles Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with multiple swing buses
Systems with isolated subsystems
Systems with zero impedance branches (tie circuit breakers)
Systems with de-energized buses and branches
Automatic adjustment of cable/line resistance according to operating temperatures
Automatic adjustment of overload heater resistance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of cable/line length according to their tolerance
Automatic adjustment of transformer impedance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of current limiting reactor impedance according to tolerance
Multiple Loading Categories
Multiple Generation Categories
Load diversity factors
Complete fundamental load flow calculation
Automatic LTC settings for fundamental load flow
Modeling of frequency dependency of rotary machine impedance
Modeling of nonlinearity and frequency dependency of cable/line and transformer impedance
Modeling of frequency dependency of other power system components and loads
Effect of transformer phase shifting to harmonic flow
Effect of machine and transformer winding connections and grounding types to harmonic flow
Short-line and long-line model for cable and transmission line
Harmonic Current Injection Method
Positive, negative, and zero sequence harmonics
Harmonic order up to 73rd
27-2
Harmonic Analysis
Overview
Model harmonic voltage source

Model harmonic current source
User-expandable harmonic source library
Harmonic source defined by either spectrum or device parameters
Generation of harmonic source based on device parameters for VFD, UPS, charger, inverter, SVC
and HVDC
User-selected harmonic source inclusion by device categories
Calculation of various harmonic indices based on IEEE standards
Total Harmonic Distortions (THD) for both bus voltages and branch currents
Total RMS value for both bus voltages and branch currents
Total arithmetic summation value (ASUM) for both bus voltages and branch currents
Telephone Influence Factors (TIF) for both bus voltages and branch currents
I*t product for branch currents
Built-in harmonic filters in different types
Automatic filter sizing based on different criteria
Check and flag filter overloading
Verifying performance of harmonic filters
Graphic one-line display of study results
Slider bar to display fundamental load flow, total and individual harmonic distortion
Graphic plots of voltage and current waveform for viewing and printing
Graphic plots of voltage and current spectrums for viewing and printing
Text report for input data, fundamental load flow results, voltage and current harmonic indices,
tabulated voltage and current harmonic
Crystal Reports for preformatted reports
Flag violations of bus total and individual harmonic distortion limits
Transformer K-factor rating
Alert for VTHD, VIHD, transformer, filter, capacitor, cable
One-line display for capacitor and filter current
Some of the main features of the ETAP Harmonic Frequency Scan Study are summarized below:
Same system and component modeling capabilities for harmonic load flow and fundamental load
flow
Modeling of frequency dependency of rotary machine impedance
Modeling of nonlinearity and frequency dependency of cable/line and transformer impedance
Modeling of frequency dependency of other power system components and loads
Transformer phase shifting
Machine and transformer winding connections and grounding types
Built-in harmonic filters in different types
Automatic filter sizing based on different criteria
User-definable frequency scan range and step
Graphic one-line display of study results
Slider bar to display bus driving point impedance magnitude and phase angle at selected frequencies
Graphic plots of bus driving point impedance in ohms for viewing and printing
Graphic plots of bus driving point impedance phase angle for viewing and printing
Text report for input data, fundamental load flow results, tabulated bus driving point impedance
magnitudes and phase angles
Report resonance frequencies and magnitudes
27-3
Harmonic Analysis
Study Toolbar
27.1 Study Toolbar

The Harmonic Analysis Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Harmonic Analysis
Study Mode. This toolbar has eight function keys as shown below:
Run Harmonic Load Flow

Run Frequency Scan
Display Options
Alert View
Report Manager
Harmonic Analysis Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run Harmonic Load Flow

Select a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar when you are in Harmonic Analysis Study Mode. Click
on the Run Harmonic Load Flow button to perform a Harmonic Load Flow Study. A dialog box will
appear for you to specify the output report name if the output file name is set to Prompt in the Output
Report list box. The Harmonic Load Flow Study results will appear on the one-line diagram and can be
viewed in output report text and plot formats after the calculation completes.
Run Frequency Scan

After selecting a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar, click on the Run - Frequency Scan button to
perform a Harmonic Frequency Scan Study. A dialog box will pop up asking you the output file name if
Prompt is set in the Output Report list box. As in the Harmonic Load Flow Study, study results are
displayed on the one-line diagram and can be viewed in output report text and plot formats after the
calculation completes.
Display Options
Click on the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation display options under
the Harmonic Analysis Study Mode. See Display Options for more information.
27-4
Harmonic Analysis
Study Toolbar
Alert View
After performing a Harmonic Load Flow Study or Harmonic Frequency Scan, you can click on this
button to open the Alert View, which lists all equipment with critical and marginal violations based on the
settings in the Study Case.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view optimal power Output Reports.
Transient Stability Analysis Reports are provided in CrystalReport Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich Text,
Summary pages respectively.
The Report Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the
different parts of the report. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed on each page of the
Report Manager.
The preformatted Crystal Reports names are:
Complete
Adjustments
Branch Zero Seq Z
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Filter
27-5
Harmonic Library
Harmonic Source
Impedance
Line
Machine
Reactor
SVC
Transformer
Harmonic Analysis
Study Toolbar
Load Flow Report

Results
Alert Freq Scan
Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Filter Overloading
Summary
VIHD Report
VTHD Report
You can also select output files from the Output Report pull-down list.
This list contains all the output files in the current project folder with the same file extension specified.
The output reports for harmonic load flow studies have an extension of .HA1.
Harmonic Analysis Plots

Click on the Harmonic Analysis Plots button to select and plot the curves from the selected output plot
file. The plot file name is the same as the output text file displayed in the Output Report pull-down list.
Plot files for harmonic load flow have .hfp as an extension. Plot files for harmonic frequency scan have
.fsp as an extension.

The stop sign button is normally disabled. When a harmonic load flow or a harmonic frequency scan has
been initiated, this button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will
terminate the current calculation. The one-line diagram displays and plots will not be available if you
terminate the calculation before it completes, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get Online Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature, you can copy the online data from the
online presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature, you can copy the archived data to the
current presentation.
27-6
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor

The Harmonic Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, and a variety of
options for Output Reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases.
Load flow calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the Study Case
selected in the toolbar. You can easily switch between Study Cases without the trouble of resetting the
Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision data.
When you are in Harmonic Analysis mode, you can access the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor by
clicking on the Study Case button from the Harmonic Analysis Study Case toolbar. You can also access
this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Harmonic Analysis Study Case folder.
There are two ways you can create a new Study Case. You can click on the New Study Case button in the
Study Case toolbar, as shown above. It will open the Duplicate Study Case dialog box for you to specify
names of an existing Study Case and the new Study Case you want to create.
You can also create a new Study Case from the Project View, by right-clicking on the Harmonic Analysis
Study Case folder and selecting Create New. ETAP will then create a new Study Case, which is a copy of
the default Study Case, and adds it to the Harmonic Analysis Study Case folder.
27-7
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
When you are in the Harmonic Analysis Mode, you can access the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor
by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from the
Project View by clicking on the Harmonic Analysis subfolder under the Study Cases folder.
The Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor consists of five pages: Info, Plot, Model, and Adjustment,
Alert.
27-8
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
27.2.1 Info Page

This page is provided for you to specify some general solution parameters, loading conditions, report
options, and Study Case information.
Study Case ID
entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the navigator button
at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to another.
Initial Load Flow

In this group you can select a load flow calculation method. The methods available are Newton-Raphson
and Accelerated Gauss-Seidel.
For the Newton-Raphson, a few Gauss-Seidel iterations are made first to establish a set of sound initial
values for the bus voltages (since convergence of the Newton-Raphson Method is highly dependent on
the initial bus voltages).
These settings are used for the fundamental load flow calculation solution control, and apply to both
Harmonic Load Flow and Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
27-9
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number for iterations. If the solution has not converged before the specified number
of iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. When using Accelerated Gauss-Seidel, the
recommended and default value for maximum iteration is 2000. When using Newton-Raphson, the
recommended and default value for maximum iteration is 99.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision, which is used to check for the fundamental load flow
convergence. This value determines how precise you want the final solution to be. When using the
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method, the default and recommended value for precision is 0.000001. When
using Newton-Raphson, the recommended and default value for precision is 0.0001.
Accel. Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor for the fundamental load flow calculation. Typical values are
between 1.2 and 1.7. The default value is 1.45. Note that the Acceleration Factor is not used for NewtonRaphson.
Frequency Scan
These values are only used for harmonic frequency scan calculations.
From
Specify the starting frequency in Hz for frequency scan. The default is the system fundamental frequency.
To
Specify the finishing frequency in Hz for frequency scan. This value should be greater than the From
frequency and is an integer multiplier of the system fundamental frequency.
Step (df)
Specify the frequency step in Hz. This value is the interval between two adjacent frequency points during
a harmonic frequency scan study, and is a positive integer number.
Plot Step
This value determines the resolution of the frequency scan plot. The smaller it is, the smoother the plot
will look, but requires more data to be recorded. The default value for it is 1, which means every point
calculated from the harmonic frequency scan study will be plotted.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for this Study Case. With the selection of any category, ETAP
Rating page for most load components. Harmonic filter loading is calculated from its parameters.
Operating P, Q
loads updated from online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load Flow Study.
27-10
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
Generation Category
Select one of the ten generation categories for the current Optimal Power Flow Study. With the selection
of any category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating
page of the Generator and Power Grid Editors. The generator controls will be different depending on the
Operating Mode
Swing
Voltage Control
MVAR Control
PF Control

%V and Angle
%V and MW
MW and MVAR
MW and PF
Operating P, Q, V
operating values update from the online data or a previous Load Flow Study will be utilized in the Load
Flow Study.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category group of the Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load group of the Charger Editor.
Note: If this option is selected, it is required that a DC load flow calculation is run first in order to

Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for the fundamental load flow as well as Harmonic Load Flow
and Frequency Scan Analysis. The choices are:
None
Bus Maximum
can define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different maximum
diversity factor. This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be
considered.
27-11
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
Bus Minimum
define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.
investigated.
Global
Constant kVA
Constant Z
Constant I
Generic
model.
Study Remarks
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all Study Cases and entered in the Project
Information Editor.
27-12
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
27.2.2 Plot Page

Select the components you want to display on the one-line diagram and in plot format. The selections are
applied to both the Harmonic Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
Device Type
Select the type of components or devices from the list. Only the components associated with the listed
types can be selected for plotting.
Plot Options
Device ID
This table provides a list of the devices or components for the given Device Type.
Plot/Tabulate
You also can include a device or component in the plot list by first selecting that device or component,
and then checking this box. An X will be placed next to this device or component in the Plot/Tabulate
column.
27-13
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
27.2.3 Model Page

This page is provided for you to choose the modeling methods for different types of components.
Skip Harmonic Source

In this group, you can specify globally what types of components you do NOT want to model as harmonic
sources. The results will affect both the Harmonic Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
For example, if a type of component is selected to not be modeled as a harmonic source, then all
components of this type will be modeled as impedances with the appropriate values in both the Harmonic
Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
Utility
If this box is checked, then all the power grid (utility) components will not contribute harmonics to the
system. This corresponds to the situation where the grid has no or negligible harmonic contamination.
Generator Saturation
If this box is checked, then all synchronous generator components will not be considered as harmonic
sources. This corresponds to the situation that generators are not significantly saturated; thus, they
generate near-ideal sinusoidal voltages.
27-14
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
Transformer Saturation
If this box is checked, then all transformer components, both 2-winding and 3-winding, will not be
considered as harmonic sources. This is true for transformers, which are close to their rated loading
conditions.
Charger/Converter
If this box is checked, then all charger and converter components will not be considered as harmonic
sources.
Inverter
If this box is checked, then all inverter components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
UPS
If this box is checked, then all UPS components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
VFD
If this box is checked, then all VFD components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
Static Load
If this box is checked, then all static load components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
Transmission Line/Cable
This section allows you to select and model transmission line and cable using either the short line model
or the long line model. The short line model is the simple lumped circuit model in Pi equivalent circuit,
whereas the long line model is the distributed circuit model by considering the propagation effect of
current wave and voltage wave. For a 60 Hz system, a line or a cable that is longer than 250 km or 150
mi is considered as a long line or cable.
In this section, first select a type of element, Transmission Line or Cable, then to set up the appropriate
parameters to work with it.
Use Short Line Model

If this option is checked, then the selected category of element will be modeled in a short line model.
Use Long Line Model

If this option is checked, then the element in the selected category will be modeled as a long line model if
the criteria for the length are met.
27-15
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor

This page allows the user to specify tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to impedance values for transformer, reactor,
and overload heater.

adjustment in harmonic analysis calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent
tolerance value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted
impedance used in the load flow calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.
of Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides
any individual transformer tolerance value.
27-16
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. Harmonic Analysis increases the reactor impedance
by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop.
For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted reactor
impedance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the
Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any
individual reactor tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Load Flow Module increases the
OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
corresponding field of Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Length Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line lengths.

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. Harmonic Analysis increases the cable length by the
specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop. For
the load flow calculation is 210 ft.
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable
tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. Harmonic Analysis increases the transmission
line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the tolerance is 2.5%, then
the adjusted transmission line length used in the load flow calculation is 2.05 miles.
of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides
any individual transmission line tolerance value.
27-17
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor

This group allows the user to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature
on the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. Harmonic Analysis adjusts the conductor
resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating temperature is greater
than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is increased.
field of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature correction
value overrides any individual Cable Impedance page maximum temperature. Refer to the Cable Editor
Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. Harmonic Analysis adjusts the
the corresponding field of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global
temperature correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum
temperature. Refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).
27-18
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
27.3.4 Alert Page

The Alert page in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor is used to specify the setup of all the
Simulation Alerts provided to notify the user of an abnormal loading condition based on predetermined,
allowable, percent values and system topology. The functional capability of the Simulation Alert
System is to generate alerts when there is an overload in transformers, cables, filters and capacitors. The
alerts are reported either graphically on the one-line diagram or via the Alert View window.

There are two types of simulation alerts generated after a Harmonic Analysis Study. The difference
between Marginal and Critical Alerts is their use of different percent value conditions to determine if an
alert should be generated. If a condition for a Critical Alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the
Alert View window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for
Marginal Alerts, except that the overloaded component will be displayed in magenta color. Also, the
Marginal Alerts checkbox must be selected if the user desires to display the Marginal Alerts. If a device
alert qualifies for both Critical and Marginal Alerts, only Critical Alerts are displayed. It should be noted
that in order for ETAP to generate alerts for an element type, both the element rating and the percent
value entered in this page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the
following groups:
27-19
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
Bus VTHD / VIHD

A Critical or Marginal Alert will be generated based on acceptable bus VIHD/VTHD settings. These
VIHD and VTHD limits are given in IEEE 519-1992 (Recommended Practices and Requirements for
Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems) page 85.
Individual
When this option is selected, ETAP uses VIHD and VTHD limits specified in every individual Bus
Editor.
Global
When this option is selected, VTHD and VIHD limits can be specified globally for all buses. ETAP will
then use these values irrespective of what has been included in individual Bus Editors.
Transformer
A Critical or Marginal Alert will be generated after Harmonic Load Flow Analysis has been run if the
transformer current exceeds the specified percent value. The critical and marginal current ratings are
entered on transformer K factor base.
Filter
Critical or Marginal Alerts will be generated if any filter in the electrical system is subjected to overload
conditions.
Capacitor kV
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if capacitor peak voltage rating is being exceeded in the
harmonic filter. The critical and marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the capacitor rated
maximum kV.
Inductor Amps
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if inductor rms current rating is being exceeded in the harmonic
filter. The critical and marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the inductor allowable maximum
current rating in amps.
Capacitor kV
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if capacitor peak voltage rating is being exceeded. The critical
and marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the capacitor rated maximum kV.
Cable Ampacity
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if cable rms current rating is being exceeded. The critical and
marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the cable allowable ampacity. (Cable Editor Ampacity
page).
Frequency Scan
The following conditions are monitored and reported when harmonic frequency scan is run for an
electrical system.
27-20
Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor
Parallel Resonance
ETAP checks the impedance plot of the bus being plotted to determine possible existence of parallel
resonance in the system.
Generally, the inductive reactance of that power system increases and the capacitive reactance decreases
as the frequency increases. At a given frequency there will be a crossover point where the inductive and
capacitive reactances are almost equal in magnitude but opposite in sign. This point is called the parallel
resonant point. Because industrial system is primarily inductive, every industrial system with a capacitor
has a parallel resonant point. ETAP detects these points of resonance at all buses being plotted and reports
them as alerts.
Parallel resonance causes problems only if a source of harmonics exists at a bus where the frequency of
the harmonic matches or is close to the resonance frequency. This is typically called harmonic resonance.
Harmonic resonance normally results in very high harmonic voltages at the resonant frequency since most
the parallel resonance generates very high impedance at the bus. Harmonic resonance is a steady-state
phenomenon triggered by an event in which the harmonic source changes or the source impedance or
capacitor size changes, such as if capacitors are switched on or off in steps.
IEEE Standard 18-2002, standard for shunt power capacitors, states that power capacitors must withstand
a maximum continuous RMS over voltage of 110% and an overcurrent of 180%, based on the nameplate
rating. This over voltage and overcurrent includes both the fundamental frequency and any harmonic
contributions. The standard also states that the VA rating of the capacitor can't exceed 135%.
Recommended capacitor protection may be done at 135% of its full load current. Protection at a higher
percentage will prevent overcurrent protection from operating during capacitor energizing.
27-21
Harmonic Analysis
Display Options

The Harmonic Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and
Colors information annotations.
27.3.1 Results Page

Select the result information to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Bus
Select kV or % to display bus voltages in kV or percent of the bus nominal voltage.
Show Units
Click on this checkbox to include or hide bus display units.
Flows
Branch Current
Click on this checkbox to include or suppress one-line displays for branch current and other information
for branches from the harmonic load flow and the harmonic frequency scan calculations.
27-22
Harmonic Analysis
Display Options
Show Units
Click on this checkbox to include or hide branch display units.
Total Harmonic Info

In this group, you can select specific information to display for buses and branches. The information is
related to the total harmonic distortion, etc.
Bus Voltage
RMS or ASUM
Choose to display the bus total voltage in RMS or ASUM (Arithmetic Summation) including
contributions from the fundamental component and all harmonic components.
THD or TIF
Choose to display the bus voltage THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) or TIF (Telephone Influence Factor).
Branch Current
RMS or ASUM
Choose to display the branch total current in RMS or ASUM, including contributions from the
fundamental component and all harmonic components.
THD or TIF
Choose to display the branch current THD or TIF.
Frequency Scan
This group sets the option for one-line display of the harmonic frequency scan results.
Z Magnitude
Click on this checkbox to display the bus driving point impedance magnitude.
Z Angle
Click on this checkbox to display the bus driving point impedance phase angle.
Show Unit
Click on this checkbox to show units for the bus display from the harmonic frequency scan study.
27-23
Harmonic Analysis
Display Options
27.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
27-24
Harmonic Analysis
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT and CT
Display Options
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
Display Tag, entered in Info Page of Relay Editor
kV
A
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
% LRC
Impedance in ohms
D-Y
one-line diagram.
Composite Mtr
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

27-25
Harmonic Analysis
Display Options
27.3.3 AC-DC Page

ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
AC kVA and DC kW (or MVA/MW)
DC kW and AC kVA (or MW/MVA)
kVA
HP/kW
kV
27-26
Harmonic Analysis
Display Options
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA and DC FLA
DC FLA and AC FLA
Input, output, and DC FLA
Composite Network
Use Default Options

27-27
Harmonic Analysis
Display Options
27.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements on the one-line diagram
Color Theme
A previously-defined color theme can be selected from the list. The selected color theme will be used
27-28
Harmonic Analysis
Display Options
Annotations
Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the global color themes option has been
previously selected.
27-29
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Methods

Power System Harmonic Analysis involves modeling the frequency characteristics of different
components of power systems, computing harmonic indices at given buses and branches, identifying
problems associated with the existing harmonics, and providing an environment to simulate and test any
mitigation methods. This section briefly discusses these topics and prepares you to use the ETAP
Harmonic Analysis Module to carry on your projects or analyze your systems in a most effective way.
27.4.1 Standards Compliance

ETAP Harmonic Analysis Module fully complies with the latest version of the following standards:
IEEE Standards 519-1992, IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems
ANSI/IEEE Standard 399-1997, IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power
System Analysis (Brown Book)
IEEE Standard 141-1993, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial
Plants (Red Book)
27.4.2 Component Modeling

For Harmonic Analysis, frequency characteristics, and the nonlinearity of power system components must
be recognized and modeled appropriately. Depending on their nature and behavior, these components are
modeled in very different ways.
Nonlinear loads in power systems are essentially either injecting harmonic currents into the system or
applying harmonic voltages at the given points. Therefore, they are conventionally modeled as current
sources and voltage sources with harmonic frequencies. Normal power sources such as power grids or
generators, if they contain harmonic components in their fixed voltages, are modeled as voltage sources
with harmonic frequencies.
Harmonic Current Source

Nonlinear loads that can be modeled as a harmonic current source in ETAP are:
Static Load
UPS
Charger/Converter
VFD
SVC
Transformer
Static loads, chargers/converters and VFDs, if they are modeled as a harmonic current source, will inject
harmonic current into the connected buses.
27-30
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Methods
A saturated transformer can also be modeled as a harmonic current source when it contributes significant
harmonic current into the system (most likely when the transformer is lightly loaded). Harmonic current
source generated by a transformer is normally placed at the primary side; however, if there is a triple nth
harmonic current specified for a transformer and the transformer winding and ground connections do not
allow the triple nth harmonic current to flow in the primary winding, the secondary side and then the
tertiary side will be considered as the location for the harmonic current source.
When a UPS is modeled as a load, it injects harmonic current into the connected bus. On the other hand,
if a UPS is modeled as a branch, then it will inject harmonic current into both the AC input bus and the
AC output bus. As a result, the path from the AC input bus to the AC output bus inside the UPS would be
opened in harmonic load flow calculations.
To model a component as a harmonic current source, go to the Harmonic page of that component and
select an appropriate harmonic current library via the Library button and Harmonic Library Quick Pick
Editor. Magnitudes of harmonic current from a harmonic current source are in percentage of the
component rated fundamental current.
Harmonic Voltage Source

The following components can be modeled as a harmonic voltage source in ETAP:
Power Grid
Inverter
Charger/Converter
Static Load
Polluted power grids (utilities) or saturated synchronous generators can be modeled as harmonic
voltage sources if they contain significant voltage distortion.
Inverters, chargers/converters, and static loads can also be modeled as harmonic voltage sources if they
primarily cause voltage distortion instead of current distortion.
To model a component as a harmonic voltage source, go to the Harmonic page of that component and
select an appropriate harmonic voltage library via the Library button and Harmonic Library Quick Pick
Editor. Magnitudes of harmonic voltage from a harmonic voltage source are in percentage of the nominal
voltage at the connected bus.
Harmonic Impedance for Rotating Machines

If a rotating machine is not modeled as a harmonic source, its equivalent harmonic impedance is its
negative impedance.
Harmonic Impedance for Load Components

For a load or a shunt component, when it is not modeled as a harmonic source, its equivalent harmonic
impedance is calculated from its fundamental loading using an equivalent parallel R and X circuit.
The reactance part of the harmonic impedance for rotating machines and load components are adjusted
linearly based on the order of harmonic.
27-31
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Methods
Harmonic Impedance for Branch Components

Harmonic impedance of a branch component is computed from the impedance at the fundamental
frequency by considering adjustments due to harmonic frequency. For an impedance branch, the
adjustment is linear and only applies to the reactive part. For cable, transmission line, transformer, and
reactor components, the adjustment applies to both the resistive and reactive parts. This is because of the
skip effect and nonlinear change in their reactance under high frequency.
27-32
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Methods
Zero Sequence Impedance

If triplen harmonics (3rd, 6th, 9th, etc.) exist in the system, then zero sequence impedance of a component is
used for the calculation. For rotating machines and some of the branch components, if their zero sequence
impedances are specified in their editors, these impedances will be used with the adjustment to the
harmonic frequency. For other components, their equivalent zero sequence impedances are assumed to be
the same as their positive counterpart. It is very important to point out that for rotating machines
(including the utility grid), transformers and harmonic filters, Delta or Wye connections, grounding
methods, and grounding impedances will all affect the triplen harmonic flow in the system.
Harmonic Indices
The effect of harmonics is usually measured in terms of several indices that are defined below.
Note: The definitions are applied to both voltage and current.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), also known as Harmonic Distortion Factor (HDF), is the most popular
index to measure the level of harmonic distortion to voltage and current. It is a measure that shows the
ratio of the mean-square-root of all harmonics to the fundamental component. For an ideal system, THD
is equal to zero. THD is determined by:
THD =
F1
where Fi is the amplitude of the ith harmonic, and F1 is that for the fundamental component.
Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD)

Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD) simply calculates the ratio of a given harmonic component to the
fundamental component. This value is sometimes used to track the effect of each individual harmonic and
examine its magnitude. IHD is determined by:
Fi
F1
IHD =
Root Mean Square (RMS) - Total
This is the square root of the sum of the squares of the magnitudes of the fundamental plus all harmonics
in the system. For a system with no harmonics at all, the total RMS should be equal to the fundamental
component RMS. The total RMS is determined by:
RMS =
27-33
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Methods
Arithmetic Summation (ASUM)

This is the arithmetic summation of the magnitudes of the fundamental and all harmonics. It adds the
magnitudes of all components directly to have a conservative estimation of the crest value of voltage and
current, and is useful for the evaluation of the maximum withstanding ratings of a device. ASUM is
determined by:
ASUM = Fi
1
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)

Telephone Influence Factor (TIF) is a variation of the THD with a different weight given to each of the
harmonics based on its amount of interference to an audio signal in the same frequency range. Normally,
the current TIF has a more significant impact on adjacent communication systems. The TIF is determined
by:
TIF =
(Wi Fi )
where Wi is the TIF weighting factor. The values for the weighting factors for different 60 Hz harmonic
frequencies are given in the IEEE Standard 519. For non 60 Hz harmonics systems the weighting factors
are linearly interpolated.
I*T Product (I*T)

I*T Index is known as the inductive influence. It is a product of current components (fundamental and
harmonics) and weighting factors, as shown in the formula below:
I T =
(I
h =1
where Ih
Th
h
H
=
=
=
=
Th ) 2
current component magnitude

weighting factor
harmonic order (h=1 for fundamental)
maximum harmonic order to account
The balanced I*T product (I*TB) is calculated the same as above but takes only the summation of positive
and negative sequence harmonics. Similarly, the residual I*T product (I*TR) takes only the summation of
zero sequence harmonics.
27-34
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Methods
27.4.3 Harmonic Load Flow Study

The Harmonic Load Flow Study first carries out a load flow calculation at the fundamental frequency.
The results of the fundamental load flow sets the base for the fundamental bus voltages and branch
currents which are used later to calculate different harmonic indices. Then, for each harmonic frequency
at which any harmonic source exists in the system, a direct load flow solution is found by using the
Current Injection Method. The harmonic frequencies considered are all the low order frequencies from
the 2nd to the 15th, plus the characteristic harmonics from the 17th up to the 73rd. Impedance of components
is adjusted based on the harmonic frequencies and the types of components. For a triplen harmonic
frequency, zero sequence impedance is adjusted to the actual frequency, and the zero sequence network is
used.
From the harmonic load flow calculation, the harmonic components for bus voltages and branch currents
are found, and then all harmonic indices are computed accordingly. The computed bus THD and IHDs are
compared with their limits as specified by the user in the Bus Editor and, if any violations are detected,
flags are placed in the text report next to the associated bus in the Harmonic Information section.
The Harmonic Load Flow Study generates output reports showing the system input data, fundamental
load flow results, system harmonic information, and tabulation of bus voltages and branch currents with
all harmonic contents. These results can also be viewed directly from the one-line diagram using the
Harmonic Load Flow Slider and the Harmonic Display Options Editor. Along with the text report and
one-line display, bus voltage and branch current plots are also available to show both voltage and current
waveforms in time domain and the harmonic spectrums in a bar chart.
27.4.4 Harmonic Frequency Scan Study

One particular concern with harmonics is the resonance condition in the power system. Because of the
existence of both inductive components and capacitive components in the system, at certain frequencies,
resonance conditions might occur at some buses. If the resonance occurs at a bus where a harmonic
current is injected into the system, an over voltage condition will be observed.
The ETAP Frequency Scan Program is the best tool to investigate the system resonance problem. It
calculates and plots the magnitudes and phase angles of bus driving point impedance over a frequency
range specified by the user; thus, any parallel resonance condition and its resonance frequency can be
clearly identified. The harmonic frequency scan study also allows users to tune their harmonic filter
parameters and test the final results.
The frequency range for scanning is defined by the user, which starts from the fundamental frequency and
can go as high as the user needs.
The results from the Frequency Scan Study are reported in reports which includes the system input data,
the fundamental load flow results, and a tabulation listing bus driving point impedances. The same
tabulated information is also given on the one-line diagram, as well as in a plot format.
27-35
Harmonic Analysis
Calculation Methods
27.4.5 Harmonic Filter

Harmonic filters are extensively used to mitigate harmonic problems. A properly designed harmonic filter
can prevent the harmonic current from injecting into the system, or it can provide a low impedance path at
the tuned frequency to remove a parallel resonance.
The Harmonic Filter Editor provides all the practical and popular filter structures for you to choose from.
A Filter Sizing program is also available in this editor for the Single Tuned filter type, with which users
can optimize the filter parameters based on different installation or operation criteria.
Harmonic filter loading is usually a concern in practical application. Two loading conditions are to be
checked: capacitor Max. kV and inductor Max. I, both of those values are specified in the Harmonic Filter
Editor, Parameter page. The capacitor Max. kV is a peak value, calculated by considering voltage drop
across the capacitor, and the inductor Max. I is an RMS value, calculated by considering current flow
through the inductor.
Note: When calculating these values, all voltage and current components of the fundamental and
harmonics are included. If Filter Overloading is to be considered, check the Filter Overloading checkbox
in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor, Info page. Comparisons will be made between the
calculated values and the specified values by Harmonic Load Flow study. The percentage of overloading
will then be computed and reported in the Filter Overloading report.
27.4.6 Transformer Phase Shift

Properly configuring transformer phase-shift can be helpful for cancellation of certain harmonics, thus
improving system power quality.
The ETAP Harmonic Analysis Module uses transformer phase-shift to adjust network impedance phase
angle in the Harmonic Load Flow study. Transformer phase-shift is specified in the Transformer Editor
Grounding page.
27-36
Harmonic Analysis
Required Data
27.5 Required Data

To run a Harmonic Analysis Study, you need to provide all the data required for load flow and shortcircuit calculations. In addition to that, you need to provide some harmonic related data, such as harmonic
sources, modeling methods, and filters. A summary of these data for different types of components is
given in this section.
Note: Except for the harmonic library information, which is required only for the harmonic load flow
study, all other data are mandatory for both the Harmonic Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan
Studies.
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factors (when Loading is set to Maximum or Minimum Diversity Factor)
Harmonic Limit Category
VTHD (Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion) Limit
VIHD (Voltage Individual Harmonic Distortion) Limit
Branch Data
2-Winding and 3-Winding Transformers
Transformer ID
Bus connections
Rated kV and MVA
Positive and zero sequence impedance and X/R ratios
Z Variation
Z Tolerance
Fixed Tap and LTC settings
Winding connections for all windings
Grounding type and parameters for all windings
Phase Shift
Harmonic Library Information, if any
Cable
Cable ID
Bus connections
Cable type, rated kV and size if use library data
Cable's positive and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use user entered
data
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Max temperature
Transmission Line
Bus connections
27-37
Harmonic Analysis
Required Data

Phase conductor, ground wire and configuration parameters (from library or user enter) if use
calculated value
Lines positive, negative and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use userdefined value
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Maximum temperature
Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus connections
Positive and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Reactor
Reactor ID
Bus connections
Positive and zero sequence impedance and X/R ratios
Impedance Tolerance
Protective Device Data
Protective Device ID
Bus and branch connections
Status
Machine Data
Power Grid Data
Power Grid ID
Bus connection
Operating Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control or PF Control)
Rated kV
3-Phase and 1-Phase MVAsc and X/R values
Harmonic Library information, if any
Bus connection
Rated MW
Rated kV
Rated %PF
27-38
Harmonic Analysis
Required Data
Rated MVA
Rated %Eff
Number of poles
Negative Sequence Impedance X2
Zero Sequence Impedance X0
Machine Negative Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X2/R2
Machine Zero Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X0/R0
Negative Sequence Resistance R2
Zero Sequence Resistance R0
Winding connection
Grounding connection type and parameters
Synchronous Motor ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated power factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings
Rated efficient and efficient factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings
Negative Sequence Impedance X2
Zero Sequence Impedance X0
Machine Negative Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X2/R2
Machine Zero Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X0/R0
Negative Sequence Resistance R2
Zero Sequence Resistance R0
Winding connection
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
27-39
Harmonic Analysis
Required Data

Negative sequence impedance X2
Zero sequence impedance Xo
X/R Ratio
Winding connection
MOV Data
MOV ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated Power Factor
Rated Efficiency
Load Data
Static Load Data
Static Load ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Status and associated Demand Factors
Rated kV
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated Power Factor
Lumped Load Data
Lumped Load ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Model type
Rated kVA/MVA and rated %PF or rated kW/MW and rated kvar/Mvar and Load Type (% Constant
kVA and % Constant Z) for Conventional model
Ratings for phase A, B, and C or phase AB, BC, and CA load in terms of kVA/MVA, kW/MW,
kvar/Mvar and %PF, and Load Type (% Constant MVA, % Constant Z and % Constant I) for
Unbalanced load
P0, Q0, a, b, Kpf and Kqf for Exponential load
P0, Q0, p1, p2, p3, q1, q2, q3, Kpf and Kqf for Polynomial load
27-40
Harmonic Analysis
Required Data
P0, Q0, a1, a2, b1, b2, p1, p2, p3, p4, p5, q1, q2, q3, q4, q5, Kpf1, Kpf2, Kqf1, and Kqf2 for
Comprehensive load
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Panel Schedule
Panel Schedule ID
Phase connection
Rating per phase (circuit) for internal link (load)
Connection and loads for each external link (load)
Loading Category ID and % Loading for each loading category for each phase (circuit)
Harmonic Filter Data
Harmonic Filter ID
Bus connection
Status
Filter Type
Rated kV and 1-Phase kvar for capacitors
Xl and Q factor for reactors
R, if applicable
AC-DC Device Data

UPS
UPS ID
Bus connections
AC Ratings (including Operating Input PF selection)
Load Flow Analysis Bypass Switch Status
Loading Category ID & % Loading for each category OR
Specify UPS Load Based on Connected Load
Harmonic Library information, if any and Harmonic Library option is selected
Harmonic related parameters, if any and UPS Parameters option is selected
27-41
Harmonic Analysis
Required Data
VFD
VFD ID
Input Bus and Load connections
Input and Output ratings (including Operating Input PF selection)
Load Flow Analysis Bypass Switch Status
V/Hz in %
Loading Category ID and % Frequency
Harmonic Library Information, if any and User Library Data option is selected
Harmonic related parameters, if any and Calculated Based on Parameters option is selected
Charger
Charger ID
Bus Connections
Status and Associated Demand Factor
AC Ratings
Harmonic Library information, if any and Use Library Data option is selected
Harmonic related parameters, if any and Calculate Based on Parameters option is selected
Inverter
Inverter ID
AC Bus connection
DC Bus connection
AC Ratings
DC Ratings
Efficiency
AC Operating Mode and associated controls
Harmonic Library information, if any and Harmonic Library option is selected
Harmonic related parameters, if any and Inverter Parameters option is selected
Study Case ID
Max. Iteration
Precision
Accel. Factor
From frequency (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
To frequency (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Step (df) (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Plot Step (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Loading Category
Loading Condition (Operating P, Q flag)
Const. kVA, Const Z, Const. I and Generic load for Global Load Diversity Factor
Charger Loading condition (from Loading Category or from Operating Load)
Devices/elements to be plotted
Exclude Harmonic Source information
Transmission Line/Cable information
Adjustment information
27-42
Harmonic Analysis
Required Data
Alert information
27-43
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
27.6 Output Reports

Output Reports for Harmonic Analysis Studies are available in different levels and are arranged into three
formats: Crystal Report, one-line diagram displays, and plots.

picture shown below, the Output Report name is HA-LF and the selected Output Report is the Complete
Crystal Report.
27-44
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
27.6.2 Harmonics Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar to open the Harmonics Report
Manager. The Harmonics Report Manager provides five formats for report text. They are Crystal
Reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and MS Excel formats. The
Harmonics Report Manager consists of four pages.
Complete Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the Complete Output Report.
27-45
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
A sample of the Complete Report is shown below:
27-46
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
Input Page
This page provides the reports for different input data. The following reports are available:
Adjustments
Branch Zero Seq Z
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Filter
Harmonic Library
Harmonic Source
Impedance
Line
Machine
Reactor
SVC
Transformer
27-47
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
A sample of the Harmonic Library Report is shown below.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results. The following two formats are available:
Load Flow Report

Results
27-48
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
A sample of the Results Report is shown below.
27-49
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
Summary Page
This page provides the formats for different summaries from both input data and calculation results. The
following formats are available:
Alert Freq Scan

Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Filter Overloading
Summary
VIHD Report
VTHD Report
A sample of the Summary Report is shown below.
27-50
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
27-51
Harmonic Analysis
Output Reports
27.6.3 Harmonic Frequency Scan Report

If the last study you have run is the harmonic frequency scan, then by clicking on the Report Manager
button on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar you will be able to open and view the Crystal Report for the
Harmonic Frequency Scan Study.
The Harmonic Frequency Scan Report shares the same sections for Cover Page, Adjustments, Bus Input
Data, branch input data, Branch Connections, Machine Input Data, as the Harmonic Load Flow Report. It
does not have Harmonic Library Data and Harmonic Source Data, since the harmonic frequency scan
does not actually use any harmonic source information. The main results from the Harmonic Frequency
Scan Study are listed in Frequency Scan section.
Frequency Scan
This section of the repot shows the driving point impedance, and its magnitude and phase angle, at each
frequency point as specified in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor.
Note: Only the buses that are selected for plotting are tabulated. Below is a sample from this section of
the report.
27-52
Harmonic Analysis

The one-line diagram displays the study results after the current calculation is complete. Based on the
study type and selected options from the Display Options, different results are displayed.
27.7.1 Harmonic Load Flow Display

By using the Harmonic Load Flow Slider and the Harmonic Analysis Display Options Editor, you can
choose different results to be displayed on the one-line diagram for the harmonic load flow analysis study.
Harmonic Order Slider

The Harmonic Order Slider is located on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar. It will be shown automatically
after a harmonic load flow study is done. To make it visible, you need to check the Harmonic Order
Slider option under the View menu. This slider has three sections. They are: Total, 1 (fundamental
frequency), and h (a harmonic order from 2 to 73). To set the slider to different positions, put your mouse
pointer on top of the pointer, hold the left mouse button down, and then drag it to the desired location on
the slider.
Position Total
At this position, harmonic information of buses and branches is displayed. The information displayed is:
Bus Voltage RMS or ASUM, and Bus Voltage THD or TIF

Branch Current RMS or ASUM, and Branch Current THD or TIF
Position 1 (Fundamental Frequency)
At this position, the fundamental load flow results are displayed. The information displayed is:
Bus Voltage Magnitude in kV or in Percent of the bus nominal voltage base

Bus Voltage Phase Angle in Degree
Branch Current in Amperes
Branch Current in Percent of fundamental current base
27-53
Harmonic Analysis
Positions Harmonic Order h (h from 2 to 73)
At this position, the bus voltages and branch currents for the given harmonic order are displayed. The
information displayed is:
Bus Voltage Magnitude in kV or in Percent of the bus nominal voltage base

Bus Voltage phase angle in degree
Branch Current in Amperes
Branch Current in Percent of the fundamental current base
The following screen capture shows a one-line diagram display with the slide position at Total.
27-54
Harmonic Analysis
27.7.2 Harmonic Frequency Display

By using the Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider and the Harmonic Analysis Display Options Editor, you
can choose different results to display on the one-line diagram for the Harmonic Frequency Scan Analysis
Study.
Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider

The Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider is located on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar. It will be shown
automatically after a harmonic frequency scan is done. To make it visible, you need to check the
Harmonic Frequency Slider option under the View menu. This slider goes from the From frequency to
the To frequency with a step change of the Plot Step specified by the user. The values of From frequency,
To frequency, and Plot Step are all specified in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor. You can use
the same technique as described for the Harmonic Order Slider to move the pointer to any available
frequency and see the one-line diagram display changes.
The Harmonic Frequency Slider displays the magnitude and phase angle of the bus driving point
impedance for the selected frequency. Only those buses, which are selected in the Harmonic Study Case
Editor for plotting, are available to display. The following is a screen capture of a Harmonic Frequency
Scan one-line display.
27-55
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
27.8 Plots
Plots are available for both the Harmonic Load Flow Study and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Study.
27.8.1 Harmonic Analysis Plot Selection

The plot files share the same name as the output files. To select a plot, click on the Harmonic Analysis
Plots button located on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar.
Harmonic Load Flow

Check this option button for plots of the Harmonic Load Flow Study.
Frequency Scan
Check this option button for plots of the Harmonic Frequency Scan Study.
Device Type
Select a device type from the list.
Device ID
Select the devices that you want to plot from the list. This box lists all the devices, which are selected in
the Harmonic Study Case Editor, Plot page, for the selected device type. Multiple devices can be selected.
Plot Type
For Harmonic Load Flow plots, the following curves are available:
27-56
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
Waveform
Plot voltage or current waveforms for the selected devices. Curves are plotted in the time domain for one
cycle duration. The scale for voltage waveform is in percent of the nominal bus voltage. The scale for
current waveform is in percent of the fundamental branch current.
Spectrum
Plot voltage or current harmonic spectrum. Voltage is in percent of the bus nominal voltage base and
current is in percent of its fundamental component base.
The following curves are available for harmonic frequency scan plots:
Z Magnitude
Plot the driving point impedance magnitudes for buses in Ohms.
Z Angle
Plot the driving point impedance angles for buses in radians.
Display
The harmonic plot X-axis can be set to the following:
Order
Display Harmonic Spectrum from Harmonic Load Flow or Z magnitude and Z Angle from Harmonic
Frequency Scan with respect to harmonic order.
Hz
Display Harmonic Spectrum from Harmonic Load Flow or Z magnitude and Z Angle from Harmonic
Frequency Scan with respect to harmonic frequency in Hz.
27-57
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
27.8.2 Harmonic Load Flow Plots

A set of sample plots for a Harmonic Load Flow Study is shown below.
27-58
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
27-59
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
27.8.3 Harmonic Frequency Scan Plots

A set of sample plots for a Harmonic Frequency Scan Study is shown below.
27-60
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
27-61
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
27.8.3 Alert View

The functional objective of the Alert View is to provide an immediate list of all the alerts generated by the
Harmonic Analysis calculation. The Alert View window may be configured to automatically display as
soon as the Harmonic Analysis calculation is over by selecting the Auto Display checkbox in the Alarm
page of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case. It may also be accessed by a left-click on the Alert View
icon. The Alert View provides several tabulated sections of information about the reported alerts.
Device ID
The Device Identification group of the Alert View lists the names of all the components that qualified as
alerts after the load flow calculation.
Type
The Type group of the Alert View displays information about the type of the device having the displayed
alert.
Condition
The Condition group of the Alert View provides a brief comment about the type of alert being reported.
In the case of harmonic alerts such exceeding limits.
27-62
Harmonic Analysis
Plots
Rating/Limit
The Rating group of the Alert View provides the rating information being used by the Harmonic Analysis
Module to determine whether an alert should be reported and of what kind.
Operating
The Calculated group of the Alert View displays the results from the Harmonic calculation. The results
listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to determine the operating
percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the Alert page of the Harmonic
Analysis Study Case Editor.
%Operating
This group displays the percent operating values calculated based on the harmonic results and the
different element ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of monitored
parameters entered directly into the Alert page of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor. Based on the
element type, system topology and given conditions, the Alert Simulation program uses these percent
values to determine if and what kind of alert should be displayed.
Harmonic
Displays the Harmonic Order for which the alarm is generated.
27-63
Chapter 28
Optimal Power Flow Analysis
The ETAP Optimal Power Flow (OPF) Module is an extremely powerful simulation program for power
system design, planning, and operation. It solves power system load flow, but at the same time can
optimize system operating conditions and automatically adjust control variable settings, while ensuring
system operating constraints are not violated. The optimized system will reduce the installation and/or
operating cost, improve system overall performance, and increases its reliability and security. Besides
minimizing the operating and installation cost, the program also provides a variety of other choices of
optimization objectives, which covers virtually all the optimization criteria for a real power system. Any
practical control means in a power system such as transformer LTC, generator AVR control, shunt and
series compensations, and load shed can all be considered in the calculation. Constraints for bus voltage,
branch flow in different types (MVA, MW, Mvar, and Amp), as well as control variable adjustable
bounds are also available for users to select and enforce. By using state-of-the-art optimization
algorithms and advanced programming techniques, this program is proven very capable, robust, and
effective. Systems with over 20,000 buses can be solved at incredible speed.
28-1
Optimal Power Flow
Overview
Some of the key features of the Optimal Power Flow Program are summarized below:
Common and integrated database

Fully inherited 3-D data structure, including infinite presentations, unlimited configurations, &
multiple data revisions
Handles Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with multiple swing buses
Systems with isolated sub-systems
Systems with zero impedance branches (tie circuit breakers)
Systems with de-energized buses and branches
Automatic adjustment of cable/line resistance according to operating temperatures
Automatic adjustment of overload heater resistance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of cable/line length according to their tolerance
Automatic adjustment of transformer impedance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of current limiting reactor impedance according to tolerance
Multiple loading categories
Multiple generation categories
Load diversity factors
Accurate AC modeling
State-of-the-art Interior Point Algorithm
Logarithmic Barrier Function (handles both equality & inequality constraints)
Primal-Dual Direction Search Method
Controlled solution parameters
Minimize system real power losses
Minimize system reactive power losses
Minimize swing bus power
Minimize shunt Mvar devices
Minimize fuel cost
Minimize series compensation
Minimize generation cost
Minimize control movement
Minimize control adjustment
Maximize voltage security indexes
Maximize line flow security indexes
Flatten voltage profile
User-defined objective functions
Bus voltage constraint
Line flow constraint
Control limit constraint
Generator Var limit constraint
Transmission interface limit constraint
Smooth function of any variables
Generator MW & Mvar control
Transformer LTC control
Transformer phase-shifter control
Shunt compensation control
Series compensation control
Switching capacitor control
28-2
Optimal Power Flow
Study Toolbar
28.1 Study Toolbar

The Optimal Power Flow Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in Optimal Power Flow
Study Mode. This toolbar has six function keys, as shown below:
Run Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
Report Manager
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
Run Optimal Power Flow

Select a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar when you are in Optimal Power Flow Analysis Study
Mode. Click on the Run Optimal Power Flow button to perform an Optimal Power Flow Study. A
dialog box will appear for you to specify the Output Report name if the output file name is set to Prompt
in the Output Report drop-down list. The Optimal Power Flow Study results will appear on the one-line
diagram and can be viewed in output report text and plot formats after the calculation completes.
Display Options
Click on the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation display options under
the Optimal Power Flow Analysis Study Mode. See Display Options for more information.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view Optimal Power Flow Output Reports.
Transient Stability Analysis reports are provided in Crystal Report Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich Text,
Summary pages, respectively.
The Report Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the
different parts of the report. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed on each page of the
Report Manager.
28-3
Optimal Power Flow
Study Toolbar
You can also select output files from the Output Report drop-down list.
This list contains all the output files in the current project folder with the same file extension specified.
To change output file extensions, you can click on the List Output Reports button next to the Output
Report drop-down list, which will allow you to select a different output file extension.
The Output Reports for Optimal Power Flow Studies have an extension of .OP1.
28-4
Optimal Power Flow
Study Toolbar

The stop sign button is normally disabled. When an optimal power flow has been initiated, this button
becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the current calculation.
The one-line diagram displays and plots will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it
completes, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get On-Line Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is enabled in your ETAP. Click this
button to use Real-Time values such as loading, bus voltages, etc., as your initial conditions for OPF.
Note: This function can allow you to optimize the existing operation of your system. EMS uses OPF
calculations for optimization on-line. See the EMS chapter for more details.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is enabled in your ETAP. Click this button
to use Archived values such as loading, bus voltages, etc as your initial conditions for OPF.
Note: Using archived values gives you the opportunity to study previous operating conditions from any
of ETAP Modules and define alternate solutions.
28-5
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor

The Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, objective selections,
constraint settings, control variable activation, system loading conditions, and report options. ETAP
allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases for each type of study. Like any other
study types, you can easily switch between different Optimal Power Flow Study Cases. This feature is
designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
A Study Case can be used for any combination of configuration status, one-line diagram presentation, and
Base/Revision Data.
To create a new Optimal Power Flow Study Case, go to the Project Editor, right-click on the Optimal
Power Flow sub-folder inside the Study Cases folder, and select Create New. The program will then
create a new Study Case, which is a copy of the default Study Case, and adds it to the Optimal Power
Flow sub-folder.
When you are in Optimal Power Flow Study Mode, you can access the Optimal Power Flow Study Case
Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor
from the Project Editor by clicking on the Optimal Power Flow sub-folder under the Study Cases folder.
The Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor consists of the following nine pages: Info page, Objective
page Bus Voltage Constraint page, and Branch Flow Constraint page, LTC page, Generator AVR page,
Generator MW page, Shunt Comp page, and Adjustment page.
28-6
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
ID and entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the
Solution Parameters
Barrier Factor
This is the fixed value of barrier factor used in the barrier function. It is defaulted to 0.0000001. The
program starts the barrier factor at 1 and will automatically reduce it during the calculation iteration.
28-7
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Power Mismatch
This is the power flow mismatch. The default value is 0.001 per unit on 1 MVA base.
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged at the specified number of
iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default value is 50.
Advanced
Click on this button to open up the Advanced Solution Parameter Editor and set additional solution
parameters for the Optimal Power Flow Study.
Advanced Solution Parameter Editor

Currently there is only one parameter available in this editor.
Objective Precision
This parameter defines the precision for the objective function convergence. The default value is 0.001.
It is recommended that you do not change this parameter in most cases.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories for this Study Case. With the selection of any category, ETAP
Rating page for most load components. Harmonic filter loading is calculated from its parameters.
Operating P, Q
loads updated from online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load Flow Study.
Generation Category
Select one of the ten generation categories for the current Optimal Power Flow Study. With the selection
of any category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating
page of the Generator and Power Grid Editors. The generator controls will be different depending on the
28-8
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Operating Mode
Swing
Voltage Control
MVAR Control
PF Control

%V and Angle
%V and MW
MW and MVAR
MW and PF
Note: In optimal power flow calculation, a generator or a power grid can be set as an AVR (voltage)
control and/or a MW control. In such a case, the generation controls from the Generation Category will
be superseded by the optimal power flow control settings.
Operating P, Q, V
operating values update from the online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the load
flow study.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category group of the Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load group of the Charger Editor.

Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for the fundamental load flow as well as Harmonic Load Flow
and Frequency Scan Analysis. The choices are:
None
Bus Maximum
can define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different maximum
diversity factor. This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be
considered.
Bus Minimum
28-9
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.
investigated.
Global
Constant kVA
Constant Z
Constant I
Generic
model.
Initial Condition
purposes.
Use Bus Voltage

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editor. Using this
option, you can set load flow initial conditions to use bus voltages.
Use Fixed Voltage

This option allows you to set initial load flow conditions using a fixed bus voltage magnitude and phase
angle for all buses. When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage
value as the percent of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude
and zero degree for bus voltage angle.
Fuel / Energy Cost

This section is for selecting a generator and/or a power grid fuel/energy cost category.
Cost Profile
Select a fuel/energy cost category from the list. The fuel/energy functions in the selected category will be
used for fuel minimization calculation.
28-10
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Update
This section is for updating the control settings from Optimal Power Flow Study results.
Note: Only those controls, which are activated for the present Study Case, will be updated if their settings
are ever changed.
Generator Voltage
If this box is checked, the generator and the power grid operating voltage will be updated.
LTC
If this box is checked, the transformer operating LTC will be updated.
Generator var
If this box is checked, the generator and the power grid operating kvar/Mvar will be updated.
Generator MW
If this box is checked, the generator and the power grid operating kW/MW will be updated.
Shunt Compensation
If this box is checked, the operating kvar/Mvar for the shunt compensation components (capacitor and
SVC) will be updated.
Infeasibility Handling Editor

Click on the Infeasibility Handling button to open this editor.
28-11
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Strategy
This section provides different strategies for handling infeasibility due to various conflicts in objective
functions, constraints, and power balancing equations that might be encountered during the optimal power
flow calculation. The selected strategy will be automatically enforced if an infeasible condition occurs
during the calculation.
Relax Generator Voltage Constraints

Select this option to remove constraints on the generator and the power grid voltages.
Relax Load Bus Voltage Constraints

Select this option to remove constraints on the load bus voltages.
Relax All Voltage Constraints

Select this option to remove voltage constraints on all buses, including the generator and the power grid
buses and the load buses.
Ignore and Continue

Select this option to continue the optimization without any of the constraint relaxation. The calculation
will continue until either a feasible solution is reached within the given number of iterations or the
maximum number of iterations is reached.
Quit Calculation
Select this option to quit the calculation once infeasibility is encountered.
28-12
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.1 Objective Page

This page is provided for you to choose the objectives for this Study Case.
Objective Selection
Select objectives for this Study Case. You can select multiple objectives and use the weight factors to
combine them.
Minimize Real Power Losses

Select this option to minimize the real power losses in the system.
Minimize Reactive Power Losses

Select this option to minimize the reactive power losses in the system.
28-13
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Minimize Swing Bus Power

Select this option to minimize the real power generation at the swing bus(es).
Minimize Shunt var Devices

Select this option to minimize the utilization of the var generation from available shunt var control
devices.
Note: When this objective is selected, you must specify some shunt devices (capacitors) on the Shunt
Comp page.
Minimize Fuel Cost

Select this option to minimize the total generation cost from the available generators.
Note: When this objective is selected, you must specify some generator MW controls on the Generator
MW page.
Minimize Series Compensation

Select this option to minimize the utilization of the var generation from the available series var control
devices. This objective is temporarily disabled.
Minimize Load Shedding

Select this option to minimize the load to be shed from the available bus load shed schedule. This
objective is temporarily disabled.
Minimize Control
There are two ways to minimize controls. One is to minimize control movement. In this case, the total
number of controls to be adjusted is minimized. Another way is to minimize the control adjustment. In
this case, the overall adjustment from all controls is minimized. All the controls selected in the Study
Case such as LTC, Shunt Comp., etc are affected.
Optimize Voltage Security Index

Select this option to optimize bus voltage security index. The following bus voltage security index
function will be minimized:
J=
All Buses
Vi Vi ,avg
dVi
2n
where
Vi,avg =
dVi =
(Vi,max + Vi,min)/2
(Vi,max Vi,min)/2
28-14
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Optimize Line Flow Security Index

Select this option to optimize line flow security index. The following line flow security index function
will be minimized by:
J=
All Branches
Pj
F
j
2n
where Pj is the line real power flow and F j is the line (branch) flow constraint maximum limit.
Flat Voltage Profile

Select this option to optimize the system control variable settings for a flat bus voltage profile, i.e., the
voltage magnitude differences for all the buses are minimal.
Weight
Assign weighting factors for the each objective. A larger weighting factor represents a higher weight and
will be given to its associated objective.
Exponent
Variable n in the associated bus voltage and line flow index functions.
28-15
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.2 LTC Page

This page allows you to choose the LTC controls and set weighting factors. Min Tap and Max Tap are
directly from the transformer LTC parameters.
Active Controls
This box lists the information on all of the selected transformer LTCs, including their associated
transformer ID, location (primary, secondary, or tertiary), maximum and minimum taps, and weighting
factor. Only the selected LTCs are treated as active controls in the optimization process.
Select / Deselect Buttons

First highlight a generator from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the generators
in the system for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted
generator into the Active Controls box. Highlighting a generator in the Active Controls box and clicking
28-16
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button to become an inactive
control.
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available generators in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the available generators in the system. Select the By Category option
to show the available generators by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories
can be chosen. For generator AVR control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone.
An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option
is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Weight
This sets the weighting factors for the selected LTC controls. You need to set the weighting factor first
before you click on the Select button to activate an LTC. This number determines the weight between
different LTC controls, with 100% being the maximum and highest weight.
28-17
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.3 Generator AVR Page

This page allows you to choose the generator voltage (AVR) controls and set weighting factors, Vmax
and Vmin values. MVA rating is directly from the Generator Editors.
Active Control
This box lists information on the entire selected generator AVR controls, including the generator ID,
MVA rating, voltage control range, and weighting factor. Only the selected generators are treated as
active controls in the optimization process.

28-18
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button to become an inactive
control.
Selection Option
All / By Category
can be chosen. For generator AVR control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone.
An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option
is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Vmax / Vmin
This option sets the maximum and minimum voltage limits (in %) for the selected generator AVR
controls. You need to set Vmax and Vmin first before you click on the Select button to activate a
generator AVR control.
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected generator AVR controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a generator AVR control. This
number determines the weight between different generators AVR controls, with 100% the maximum and
the highest weight.
28-19
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.4 Generator MW Page

This page allows you to choose the generator and/or utility real power control and set weighting factors.
MVA, Max MW and Min MW are directly for the Generator Editors.
Active Control
This box lists information on the entire selected generator/power grid MW controls, including the
generator ID, MVA rating, MW control range, and weighting factor. Only the selected generators/power
girds are treated as active controls in the optimization process.

28-20
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button and become an
inactive control.
Selection Option
All / By Category
can be chosen. For generator MW control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone. An
area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option is
temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected generator MW controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a generator MW control. This
number determines the weight between different generator MW controls, with 100% being the maximum
and the highest weight.
28-21
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.5 Shunt Comp Page

This page allows you to choose the shunt compensation controls and set their associated parameters.
Active Controls
This box lists information on all the selected shunt compensation controls, including the device ID, Mvar
range, initial Mvar, and weighting factor. Only the selected shunt compensation devices are treated as
active controls in the optimization process.

First highlight a shunt compensation device from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists
all the generators in the system for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move
the highlighted generator into the Active Controls box. Highlighting a shunt compensation device in the
28-22
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Active Controls box and clicking on the Deselect button will move that device into the box underneath
the button and become an inactive control.
Capacitor and SVC are the shunt compensation devices.
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available shunt compensation devices in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the available shunt compensation devices in the system. Select the By
Category option to show the shunt compensation devices by category. Either one or any number of
combinations of the categories can be chosen. For shunt compensation control, there are two categories
available: By Area and By Zone. An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for
By Zone. This option is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Min Mvar
This option sets the minimum Mvar limit for the selected shunt compensation controls. You need to set
Min Mvar before you click on the Select button to activate a shunt compensation control. This value
should be 0 or negative for the capacitive power compensation (reactive power into the system).
Max Mvar
The same as Min Mvar, but the Max Mvar option sets the maximum Mvar limit for the selected shunt
compensation controls. This value should be negative for the capacitive power compensation (reactive
power into the system).
Initial Mvar
The same as Min Mvar and Max Mvar, but the Initial Mvar option sets the initial Mvar for the selected
shunt compensation controls. This value should be negative for the capacitive power compensation
(reactive power into the system).
Weight
This sets the weighting factors for the selected shunt compensation controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a shunt compensation control. This
number determines the weight between different shunt compensation controls, with 100% being the
maximum and the highest weight.
28-23
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.6 Bus Voltage Constraint Page

This page allows you to set the bus voltage constraints and their associated parameters.
Enforced Constraints
This box lists information on all the enforced bus voltage constraints for load buses, including the bus ID,
bus kV rating, range of variation and weighting factor. Only the selected buses are constrained in the
optimization process.

First highlight a bus from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all buses in the system
for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted bus into the
Enforced Constraints box. Highlighting a bus in the Enforced box and clicking on the Deselect button
will move that bus into the box underneath the button and become an unconstrained bus.
28-24
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the load buses in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the load buses in the system. Select the By Category option to show
the load buses by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories can be chosen.
For bus voltage constraints, there are three categories available: By Area, By Zone and By kV. An area
number needs to be given for By Area, a zone number for By Zone, and a kV rating for By kV. This
option is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Max. V
This option sets the maximum voltage limit in percent of bus nominal voltage for the selected bus
voltages. You need to set Max. V first before you click on the Select button to enforce that bus voltage
constraint.
Min. V
The same as Max. V, but this option sets the minimum voltage limit in percent of bus nominal voltage for
the selected bus voltages.
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected bus voltage constraints. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to enforce a bus voltage constraint. This
number determines the weight between different bus voltage constraints, with 100% being the maximum
and the highest weight.
28-25
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
28.2.7 Branch Flow Constraint Page

This page allows you to set the branch (line) flow constraints and their associated parameters.
Enforced Constraints
This box lists information on all the enforced branch flow constraints for load buses, including the branch
ID, branch type, constraint type, base rating, maximum and minimum allowable branch flow, and
weighting factor. Only the selected branches are constrained in the optimization process.

First highlight a branch from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all branches in the
system for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted branch
into the Enforced Constraints box. Highlighting a branch in the Enforced box and clicking on the
Deselect button will move that branch into the box underneath the button and become an unconstrained
bus.
28-26
Optimal Power Flow
Study Case Editor
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all branches in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the branches in the system. Select the By Category option to show the
branches by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories can be chosen. For
bus branch flow constraints, there are three categories available: Xfmr, Cable, and Reactor.
Default Settings Button

Click on this button to bring up the Branch Flow Constraint Editor.
From this box you can set and edit constraint parameters for different types of branches. All the
parameters need to be set before clicking on the Select button to enforce constraints for any branches.
Constraint
Choose a type of branch flow to constrain. There are four types of branch constraints available: MW,
Mvar, MVA, and Amp.
Max.
Maximum branch flow limit in percent of the base of branch rating for the given branch type and
constraint type.
Min.
Minimum branch flow limit in percent of the base of branch rating for the given branch type and
constraint type.
28-27
Optimal Power Flow
Display Options

The Optimal Power Flow Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and
Colors info annotations.
28.3.1 Results Page

This page controls the result annotations of the OPF which are displayed on the one-line diagram.
28-28
Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
Voltage
Voltage
From the dropdown list, select either % (percent of bus nominal kV) or kV.
Bus
Click on this checkbox to display bus voltages.
Power Flows
kVA or MVA
Select kVA or MVA from the dropdown list.
KW + jkvar, kVA, and Amp

Select the kW + jkvar, kVA, or Amp option to display the corresponding power flows.
%PF
Check this box to display branch flow units.
Meters
Select from the checkboxes in this section to display readings for the corresponding meters. Meter
readings available for display are:
Ammeter
Voltmeter
Multi-Meter
Show Units
Check this box to show units for all flow displays.
Required Setting
Select options in this section to display the required control changes/updates. Controls whose required
settings can be displayed are:
Generator V
Generator Mvar
LTC
Shunt Compensation
Show Final Results

Click on this option to display the final value of the control variables.
Show Requested Changes

Click on this option to display the delta changes of the control variables. This option is temporarily
disabled.
Elements
Click on any or all of the checkboxes in this section to display annotation information.
28-29
Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
28.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
28-30
Optimal Power Flow
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
Display Options
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
kV
A
Z
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
% LRC
Impedance in ohms
D-Y
one-line diagram.
28-31
Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

28-32
Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
28.3.3 AC-DC Page

ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
28-33
Optimal Power Flow

Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Display Options
Rating
KVA
HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
Use Default Options

28-34
Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
28.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements on the one-line diagram
Color Theme
whenever the Global Theme option button is selected.
Annotations
28-35
Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
selected.
28-36
Optimal Power Flow
Calculation Methods

In traditional load flow studies, the final settings of many system control parameters are based on the
engineers experience and judgment. Sometimes an iterative process is required to reach the final overall
satisfactory settings. This process can be very exhaustive for large systems. These system control
parameters are typically transformer LTC settings, generator MW generation or fuel cost, generator AVR
settings or reactive power generations, series and shunt static var compensation device settings, the
amount of load shed, and some others. In practice, any of those control settings or any combination of
them can be used in a particular system. The Optimal Power Flow Study can be understood as an
intelligent load flow. It employs an optimization technique to automatically adjust the power system
control settings while it solves the load flow equation at the same time. Moreover, it allows you to
specify a wide range of optimization criteria for your system and enforce limits on system quantities (bus
voltage, line flow, etc.) during the optimization process. These optimization criteria are called objectives,
usually the system performance indexes, and the limits are called constraints.
Mathematically, the optimal power flow study can be expressed as:
Min = f(x,u)
(1)
subject to the equality constraints:
P(x,u) = 0
Q(x,u) = 0
(2)
(3)
and the inequality constraints:

umin u umax
(4)
y(x,u)min y(x,u) y(x,u)max
(5)
where:
x
u
f
y
=
=
=
=
P
Q
=
=
Bus voltage vector, called state variable set

System control vector, called control variable set
Objective functions, expressed in terms of x and u
System output vector, a variable set typically including line flows, etc.
as a function of x and u
Real power, expressed in terms of x and u
Reactive power, expressed in terms of x and u
Equation (1) indicates the specified objective function to be minimized or optimized. Equations (2) and
(3) show the system power balance equation (load flow equation) to be solved. Equation (4) specifies the
control upper and lower limits, and equation (5) sets the upper and lower limits for output variables.
The ETAP Optimal Power Flow Analysis uses the state-of-the-art interior point optimization technique
with the logarithm barrier function and the prime-dual direction searching method. The algorithm is very
efficient and robust, suitable for large size systems with both equality and inequality constraints. On the
power system modeling side, a true AC model is used, which makes it possible for this program to
achieve the ultimate accuracy and capability in solving power system optimal power flow problems of
any size under any feasible conditions.
28-37
Optimal Power Flow
Required Data
28.5 Required Data

The Optimal Power Flow Study essentially requires all the data needed for a regular Load Flow Study,
plus a few additional data specific for the optimal power flow calculation, and all the settings in the
Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor. A summary of the required data for different types of
components for OPF calculations is given in this section.
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factors (Loading Option is Set to Max or Min Diversity Factor)
Area number & Zone number
Branch Data
2-Winding & 3-Winding Transformers
Transformer ID
Bus connections
Rated kV
Rated MVA
Positive sequence impedance and X/R ration
Z Variation
Z Tolerance
Fixed tap settings
LTC Settings, if the transformer LTC is used as a control
Max MVA, if the transformer flow is constrained
Cable
Cable ID
Cable type, rated kV and size if use library data
Cable's positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use user entered data
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Max temperature
Allowable Ampacity, if the cable flow is constrained
Transmission Line
Bus connections
Phase conductor, ground wire and configuration parameters (from library or user enter) if use
calculated value
Lines positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use user-defined value
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Maximum temperature
Allowable Ampacity, if the line flow is constrained
28-38
Optimal Power Flow
Required Data
Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus connections
Positive and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Reactor
Reactor ID
Bus connections
Positive sequence impedance and X/R ratio
Impedance Tolerance
Amp Rating, if the reactor flow is constrained
Machine Data
Power Grid Data
Power Grid ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Energy price data (Min MW, Max MW, MW and $/MWh points)
Bus connection
Rated MW
Rated kV
Rated %PF
Rated MVA
Rated %Eff
Number of poles
Fuel cost data (Model Type, Profile category, Curve Type, Min MW, Max MW, MW, $/hr and
$/MWh points)
Bus connection
28-39
Optimal Power Flow
Required Data
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated power factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings
Rated efficient and efficient factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
MOV Data
MOV ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated Power Factor
Rated Efficiency
Load Data
Static Load Data
Static Load ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kV
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated Power Factor
28-40
Optimal Power Flow
Required Data
Lumped Load Data
Lumped Load ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Model type
Rated kVA/MVA and rated %PF or rated kW/MW and rated kvar/Mvar and Load Type (% Constant
kVA and % Constant Z) for Conventional model
Ratings for phase A, B, and C or phase AB, BC, and CA load in terms of kVA/MVA, kW/MW,
kvar/Mvar and %PF, and Load Type (% Constant MVA, % Constant Z and % Constant I) for
Unbalanced load
P0, Q0, a, b, Kpf and Kqf for Exponential load
P0, Q0, p1, p2, p3, q1, q2, q3, Kpf and Kqf for Polynomial load
P0, Q0, a1, a2, b1, b2, p1, p2, p3, p4, p5, q1, q2, q3, q4, q5, Kpf1, Kpf2, Kqf1, and Kqf2 for
Comprehensive load
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Harmonic Filter Data
Harmonic Filter ID
Bus connection
Status
Filter Type
Rated kV and 1-Phase kvar for capacitors
Xl and Q factor for reactors
R, if applicable
AC-DC Device Data

UPS
UPS ID
Bus connections
Rated AC kW/MW
Rated AC Input and Output kV
Rated % PF & % EFF
28-41
Optimal Power Flow
Required Data
VFD
VFD ID
Input Bus and Load connections
Charger
Charger ID
Bus Connections
Status and Associated Demand Factor
AC Ratings
Inverter
Inverter is not considered in the Optimal Power Flow Study.
Study Case ID
Barrier Factor
Power Mismatch
Max. Iteration
Objective Precision
Loading Category
Loading Condition (Operating P, Q flag)
Charger Loading condition (from Loading Category or from Operating Load)
Generation Category
Generation condition (Operating P, Q, V flag)
Fuel / Energy Cost Profile
Infeasibility Handling Option
Objectives & Weight Factors; Exponents, if Applicable
LTC Controls & Associated Parameters
Generator AVR Controls & Associated Parameters
Generator MW Controls & Associated Parameters
Shunt Compensation Controls & Associated Parameters
Bus Voltage Constraints & Associated Parameters
Branch Flow Constraints & Associated Parameters
28-42
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
28.6 Output Reports

The OPF calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the text format. You can
use the Optimal Power Flow Report Manager (from the Study toolbar) or View Output Report button
(from the Study Case toolbar) to view the Output Reports.
28.6.1 Optimal Power Flow Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Optimal Power Flow toolbar to open the Optimal Power Flow
Report Manager. The Optimal Power Flow Report Manager provides five formats for report text. They
are Crystal reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and MS Excel
formats. The Optimal Power Flow Report Manager consists of four pages.

From this page you can select the report format that gives you the Complete Output Report.
28-43
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
A sample of the Complete Report is shown below.
28-44
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
28.6.3 Input Page

This page provides the reports for different input data. The following reports are available:
Adjustments
Branch
Bus
Cable
Controls and Constraints
Cover
Fuel Cost
Generator
Impedance
Objectives
Power Grid
Reactor
SVC
Transformer
28-45
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
A sample of the Input Report is shown below.
28-46
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
28.6.4 Result Page

This page provides the formats for different calculation results. The following two formats are available:
Load Flow Report

Optimal Settings
28-47
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
A sample of the Optimal Settings Report is shown below.
28-48
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
28.6.5 Summary Page

This page provides the formats for different summaries from both input data and calculation results. The
following formats are available:
Summary
28-49
Optimal Power Flow
Output Reports
A sample of the Summary Report is shown below.

automatically opens the output report listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format. In the
picture shown below, the output report name is OPF and the selected output report is the Complete
Crystal Report.
28-50
Optimal Power Flow

The one-line diagram display shows study results after the current calculation is completed. Different
results can be chosen and displayed by setting appropriate options in the Optimal Power Flow Display
Option Editor. A sample one-line diagram display for an Optimal Power Flow Study is shown here.
28-51
Chapter 29
The majority of power systems operate at a lagging power factor due to inductive loads and delivery
apparatus (lines and transformers). Power systems are inductive in nature, and require additional reactive
power flow from the power grid. But excessive reactive power demands result in reduced system
capacity, increased losses, and decreased voltage, as well as higher operating costs. Shunt capacitor banks
are able to compensate for var requirements, but bank size, location, the capacitor control method, and
cost considerations are important issues that need to be optimized during the design phase. An ideal
solution would be a capacitor placement tool able to weigh all these factors and that considers load levels.
This solution should also be able to place capacitors for voltage support and power factor correction,
while minimizing the total cost of installation and operation. ETAP now provides just such an application
in its Optimum Capacitor Placement (OCP) Module.
As described in the IEEE Standard 1036-1992 (IEEE Guide for Application of Shunt Power Capacitors),
the purposes of shunt capacitor applications are:
Purpose
Benefits
Var support
Yields a primary benefit for transmission systems and a

secondary benefit for distribution systems.
Yields a primary benefit for both transmission and
distribution systems.
Yields a secondary benefit for transmission systems and a
primary benefit for distribution systems.
Yields a secondary benefit for transmission systems and a
Does not apply to transmission systems, but yields a
Voltage control
System capacity increase
System power loss reduction
Billing charge reduction
To place shunt capacitors in power systems, it is necessary to:
Determine bank size in kvar

Determine connection location
29-1
Overview
Determine a control method

Determine a connection type (wye or delta)
The capacitor size and the appropriate location for voltage support and power factor correction can be
determined in different ways. A common method applies rules of thumb techniques, and then runs
multiple load flow studies to fine-tune the size and location. Unfortunately, this method may not yield the
optimal solution. And it can also be very time consuming and impractical for large systems.
It is also important to minimize cost, while mathematically determining the capacitor size and location.
Because this is an optimization issue, an optimization approach should be employed. This is where the
ETAP OCP module excels. It is an extremely powerful simulation tool specifically designed for this
application. The OCP module allows you to place capacitors for voltage support and power factor
correction while minimizing total cost. The advanced graphic interface provides the flexibility to control
the capacitor placement process, while allowing you to view the results instantly. The precise calculation
approach automatically determines the best location and bank sizes. In addition, it reports the branch
capacity release and savings during the planning period due to var loss reduction. The capabilities of the
OCP module are summarized below:
Key Features
Calculate the most cost-effective installation locations and best bank size
Minimize total installation and operation cost
Consider voltage support and power factor correction
Evaluate Capacitor control method
Allow review of capacitor impact on the system
Employ most advanced optimum techniques
Flexible Operation
Show available locations

Apply user-selected load categories
Utilize individual and global constraints
Handle unlimited network configurations
Use only user selected installation locations
Constrain maximum capacitors installed at a location to user specified quantity
Capability
Advanced graphic user interface

User friendly input and output
Instantly view new capacitors
Speed and precision control
Integrated load flow results
Standard Crystal reports
29-2
Overview
Plotting
Loss reduction savings during the planning period

Capacitor operation cost during the planning period
Profit during the planning period
Reporting
Capacitor properties
Capacitor locations and sizes
Load flow results for maximum, average and minimum loads
Branch capacity release
Cost summary
29-3
Study Toolbar
29.1 Study Toolbar

The Optimal Capacitor Placement (OCP) toolbar appears when ETAP is in OCP mode. The OCP toolbar
command icons are shown and described below.
Run Optimal Capacitor Placement

Display Options
Alert View
Report Manager
Optimal Capacitor Placement Plots
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
Run Optimal Capacitor Placement

Clicking this icon launches the OCP calculation. All required data must have been entered into the device
and study case pages prior to running an optimal capacitor placement calculation; otherwise an error
report will be generated. The error report will list the problems encountered. When these issues are
resolved, the calculation will be processed automatically.
To generate OCP reports for a study:
1. In OCP Mode, select an output report name from the Output Report List, then select a report
format from the Report Manager.
2. Click the Report Manager button.
Display Options
You can customize the OCP one-line diagram annotation display options:
1. In OCP mode, click the Display Options button.
2. For detailed information on using these Display Options, section of this chapter.
Alert View
The Alert View button is not enabled for this release.
29-4
Study Toolbar
Report Manager
Clicking on the OCP Report Manager icon provides access to the following report configuration pages:
Complete
Input
Result
Summary
For example, to open the OCP Report Manager and select a specific report for review, follow these steps:
1. Click the Report Manager button from the Study toolbar to display the OCP Report Manager.
Select a format for the output files by clicking on its button in the right-hand column.
2. Click the Result page.
3. Select one of the report types displayed. (Clicking Set as Default sets the selected format for all
subsequent reports.
4. Click OK to display the output report.
For a detailed explanation of the OCP Report Manager, see section 29.6, Output Reports.
Optimal Capacitor Placement Plots

To view optimal capacitor placement plots, follow these steps:
1. Click the OCP Plots button on the Study toolbar. The selection dialog box appears.
29-5
Study Toolbar
2. Select from the combination of plots to view; Loss Reduction Saving During Planning Period,
Capacitor Operation Cost During Planning Period, and Profit During Planning Period.

To stop the current OCP calculation, click the Halt Current Calculation button (a red circle with an X icon
on the OCP toolbar).
Note: The Halt Current Calculation button is normally disabled. When an OCP calculation begins, this
button becomes enabled and appears as a button with a red circled X icon. If you terminate the calculation
before it completes, one-line diagram displays will not be available, and the output report will be
incomplete.
Get On-Line Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is online. Click on this button to use
the current real-time data as initial conditions.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is online. Click on this button to use the
selected archived data as initial conditions for this analysis.
29-6
Study Case Editor

The Optimal Capacitor Placement (OCP) Study Case Editor contains solution control variables. ETAP
allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases for each type of study. Just as in other
study types, it is possible to switch between different OCP Study Cases. This feature allows you to
organize study efforts and save time.
In the OCP mode, the Capacitor Placement Study Case Editor can be accessed by:
1. Clicking on the Edit Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar shown above.
Note: The Study Case Editor can also be accessed from the Project View by clicking the Capacitor
Placement subfolder in the Study Case folder.
A Study Case can be used for any combination of configuration status; one-line diagram presentation, and
base/revision data. The Capacitor Placement Study Case Editor consists of the following pages:
Info
Loading
Bus kV Constraint
Power Factor Constraint
Capacitor
Adjustment
To create a new OCP study case, simply:

1. Go to the Project View.
2. Right-click on the Capacitor Placement subfolder inside the Study Case folder.
3. Select Create New.
Note: A new Study Case can also be created by clicking the New button on the OCP Study Case toolbar.
The module creates a new Study Case, which is a copy of the default Study Case. This can be added to
the Optimal Capacitor Placement subfolder.
29-7
Study Case Editor
A graphic example of this is shown below:
29-8
Study Case Editor
Info Page
The Info page of the OCP Study Case Editor lets you enter general solution parameters and Study Case
information for the OCP study case.
A graphic of the Info page and descriptions of the information required for these sections are presented
below:
Study Case ID
The study case ID (OCP) is shown in the field in this example. To rename a study case, highlight the text,
delete the old ID and enter a new ID. The study case ID field is limited to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Use the arrow buttons at the bottom-right of the editor to go from one study case to another.
29-9
Study Case Editor
Objective
In the Objective group select the capacitor placement objective. This allows the OCP module to place
capacitors to perform voltage support, power factor correction, or perform both at the same time.
Voltage Support
With this option selected the OCP Module checks only voltage limits and places capacitors to meet the
voltage limits when minimizing the cost.
Power Factor Correction

With this option selected the OCP Module checks only load power factor limits and places capacitors to
meet the load power factor limits when minimizing the cost.
Both
With this option selected, the OCP Module checks voltage limits and load power factor limits, and places
capacitors to meet the voltage limits and load power factor limits when minimizing the cost.
Load Flow Parameters

In this group you can set parameters for load flow calculations to control load flow solutions.
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number of load flow iterations used to attempt convergence. If the solution does not
converge before the specified number of iterations completes, the load flow calculation will stop. If it is
running initial load flow calculations, the OCP module will inform you, just as it does in the load flow
analysis. However, during the capacitor placement process, the OCP module will abandon the solution if
a reasonable capacitor placement does not result.
Precision
Enter the value for load flow solution precision. The OCP module uses this value to check for
convergence. For more information, see Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Precision / Speed Ratio

Move the slider to adjust the precision to speed ratio of the OCP study case. Precision and speed are
linked inversely. The precision setting decreases from 10 to 1 when the speed setting increases from 1 to
10. The upper value shows the current speed setting. The lower value shows the current precision setting.
Position the slider to the left to obtain the optimal solution. Moving the slider to the right will speed up
the solution but may yield a less than optimal result.
General Parameter
You can specify cost and control parameters in the General Parameter group.
Source Energy Cost

If you select this option, the energy cost in $/kWh will be calculated from the generation sources. For
more information, see the Energy Cost pages of Power Grid and Generator in Chapter 8, AC Elements.
Average Energy Cost

If you enable this option, an average energy cost value will be used.
Cost
Enter the value for average energy cost ($/kWh) in the Cost field.
Planning Period
Enter the period (years) required to get the maximum benefit by installing capacitors. The OCP
module analyzes the cost, saving, and profit achieved during these years.
Interest Rate
Enter the interest rate (%/year) that will be used to calculate the cost, saving, and profit by years.
29-10
Study Case Editor
Initial Condition
Initial conditions for all bus voltages and angles can be specified in this section.
Use Bus Voltages

Select this option to use the bus voltages and angles entered on the Info page of the bus editors. This
option allows OCP studies with different initial voltage conditions for different buses.
Use Fixed Value

This option permits simulation of OCP studies using a fixed bus voltage and angle for all buses. When the
fixed initial condition option is selected, the initial voltage value must be entered as a percent of the bus
nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude and zero degrees for bus voltage
angle.

Enable this option to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found in the transformer editor.
Study Remarks
Annotate your output pages in the Study Remarks group. Enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters
in this field. Information entered here will be printed on the second line of every output page header line.
These remarks can provide specific information for each study case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all study cases and is entered in the Project
Information editor.
29-11
Study Case Editor
Loading Page
The Loading page is where you specify the system loading information.
Loading Category
System loading can be specified by selecting a loading category in the Loading Category group of the
OCP Study Case Editor.
Average Load
Select one of the loading categories from the Average Load drop-down list for the OCP Study Case.
For any category selected, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as
specified for the selected category.
Note: Assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Induction Machine
editor and Synchronous Motor editor and from the Loading or Rating page of the other Load Component
Editors.
29-12
Study Case Editor
Operating P, Q
This option is available if the ETAP installation has the Real-Time module activated. When this box is
checked, the operating loads uploaded from on-line data, or the previous Load Flow Study, is utilized in
the Load Flow Study.
Generation Category
Generation Category
Select one of the ten-generation categories for the OCP Study Case. For more information, see Chapter
15, Load Flow Analysis.
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if the ETAP installation has the Real-Time Module. When this box is checked,
the operating generations uploaded from on-line data, or the previous load flow study, is utilized in the
load flow study.
Charger Loading
The option to use loading category load or operating load is available for chargers.
Note: The operating load for a charger can only be updated from a DC Load Flow Study.

This group allows specific load diversity factors to be applied on the Loading Category load.
Individual Bus Min. & Max.

When this option is selected, the OCP module uses the individual bus Load Diversity Factor that is
specified for each bus. For more information, see the descriptions of the Bus editor in Section 8.1, Bus.
Global
When this option is selected, the OCP Module uses a global load diversity factor for all buses. Enter the
maximum and minimum global load diversity factor in percentage.
Time Distribution of Load

Enter the load duration for maximum and minimum load in a percentage of hours per year. The hour for
average load is calculated, since the total hour percentage is 100.
Note: You can use the load duration to investigate capacitor placement effects on a power system. When
the maximum load duration is not zero, OCP places capacitors to meet a maximum load requirement and
displays load flow results for maximum load. If maximum load duration is zero, OCP places capacitors to
meet an average load requirement. OCP displays load flow results for an average load. If load durations
for both maximum and minimum loads are zero, OCP places capacitors to meet the maximum load
requirement, and displays load flow results for a maximum load. In all cases OCP outputs load flow result
reports for maximum, minimum and average load.
Example for Using Load Duration to Investigate Capacitor Placement Effect

The load duration may be set for minimum load to 100 so that OCP finds the fixed capacitor banks and
sizes for minimum load conditions. Then, the setting may be changed to actual load durations for
maximum, minimum, and average loads to find the switched capacitor banks for load levels above the
minimum condition up to peak load.
29-13
Study Case Editor
Voltage Constraint
The Voltage Constraint page allows you to specify the bus kV constraints.
General Constraint
In this group, you can specify general voltage constraint for maximum and minimum voltages.
General Constraint
When General Constraint is selected, enter the percentage values for maximum and minimum
voltages.
29-14
Study Case Editor
Maximum Voltage
The Maximum Voltage is the global limit (in percent) for the maximum voltage of all buses, except the
ones selected for the Individual Constraint list.
Minimum Voltage
The Minimum Voltage is the global limit (in percent) for the minimum voltage of all buses, except the
ones selected for the Individual Constraint list.
Individual Constraint
This group displays information on all the selected buses, including the Bus ID, kV rating, and maximum
and minimum voltage. The global constraint does not apply to these buses.
Select/Deselect Buttons
1. Highlight a bus from the list box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the buses in
the system for the specified Available Bus option.
2. Click the Select button to move the highlighted bus into the Individual Constraint box.
Note: Highlighting a bus in the Individual Constraint box, and clicking the Deselect button,
moves that bus into the list box underneath the button to let the bus use global constraints.
Available Bus
You can specify which of the available buses will be visible in this group.
All
Show all buses in the system.
High Voltage
Show all buses in the system whose rated voltage is higher than 1 kV.
Low Voltage
Show all buses in the system whose rated voltage is equal to or lower than 1 kV.
Include Nodes
Check this box to include nodes as buses.
Default Settings
This group sets the voltage limits for the buses that are selected for the Individual Constraint list.
Max. Voltage
This option sets the maximum voltage limit in percent.
Min. Voltage
This option sets the minimum voltage limit in percent.
29-15
Study Case Editor
Power Factor Constraint

The Power Factor Constraint page allows a specific bus power factor constraint.
Allow Over Compensation

If this option is selected, when it is economically justified the OCP Module may place capacitors to
supply a level of reactive power that is more than the loads reactive power demand at that bus. If this
option selected, the maximum power factor constraint is not applied.
General Constraint
This group allows you to specify general constraints for the maximum and minimum power factor. By
selecting General Constraint, you can enter the values for maximum and minimum power factors.
Max. PF
The maximum power factor is the global limit for the maximum power factor of all buses, except the ones
selected for the Individual Constraint list. Max Power Factor is not available when you enable Allow
Over Compensation.
29-16
Study Case Editor
Min. PF
Min Power Factor is the global limit for the minimum power factor of all buses, except the ones selected
for the Individual Constraint list.
Individual Constraint
This box lists information about all the selected buses, including the Bus ID, kV rating, and maximum
and minimum power factor in percentage. The global constraint does not apply to these buses.
Select/Deselect Buttons
1. Highlight a bus from the box beneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the buses in the
system for the specified Available Bus option.
2. Click the Select button to move the highlighted bus into the Individual Constraint box.
Note: Highlighting a bus in the Individual Constraint box and clicking the Deselect button moves
that bus into the box beneath the button so that the bus uses global constraints.
Available Bus
Use this group to specify which of the available buses will be visible.
All
Shows all buses in the system.
High Voltage
Shows all buses in the system with rated voltage higher than 1 kV.
Low Voltage
Show all buses in the system with rated voltage equal to, or lower than 1 kV.
Include Nodes
Select this box to include nodes as buses.
Default Settings
This group allows the power factor limits for the buses which will be selected for the Individual
Constraint to be specified.
Max. PF
Specify the maximum power factor limit (in percent).
Min. PF
Specify the minimum power factor limit (in percent).
29-17
Study Case Editor
Capacitor
This page lets you specify the capacitor parameters.
Capacitor Info
Allow entering specific capacitor related information in this group. Each numbered row provides rating,
bank size and pricing information organized from lowest to highest Max. kV for each type of capacitor.
Max. kV
Enter the maximum possible rated voltage level (in kV) to which this type of capacitor can be used.
Bank Size (kvar)

Enter the bank size in kvar for this type of capacitor.
Max#Banks
Enter the maximum number of banks that can be installed at a bus using this type of capacitor. The
default maximum value is 30. However, this limit can be increased using the MaxCapOCP setting
accessible through ETAP Preferences.
29-18
Study Case Editor
Purchase ($/kvar)
Enter the purchase cost in $/kvar of this type of capacitor.
Install ($)
Enter the installation cost of this type of capacitor for one location.
Operating ($/BankYr)
Enter the operating cost in $ per bank, per year, of this type of capacitor.
Note: The cost is for the current year and the Interest Rate is considered during the planning period.
Bus Candidates
Buses
Shows all available buses in the Bus Category option.
Bus Category
All Buses
HV Buses
LV Buses
HV SWGR
LV SWGR/MCC
Shows all buses in the system.

Shows all buses in the system whose rated voltage is higher than
1 kV.
Shows all buses in the system whose rated voltage is equal to or
lower than 1 kV.
Shows all switchgear buses in the system whose rated voltage is
higher than 1 kV.
Shows all switchgear and MCC buses in the system whose rated
voltage is equal to or lower than 1 kV.
Candidates
Lists all candidates for capacitor installation.
Note: Use the Add and Remove buttons to add or remove bus candidates.
29-19
Study Case Editor
Adjustment
The page allows you to specify the adjustment settings. Adjustments are typically used for load flow
studies. For more information, see Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
29-20
Display Options

There are four pages in the Optimal Capacitor Placement (OCP) Display Options Editor:
1. Results
2. AC
3. AC-DC
4. Color annotations
Results Page
Assign display annotations for each study on the Results page.
29-21
Display Options
Show Units
Select this option to show units for displaying power flow and current on the one-line diagram.
Check All
Select this option to show all available result annotations.
Note: When this box is cleared, all previous settings are restored.
Voltage
This group defines how the voltage is displayed.
Voltage
To select how the voltages will be displayed on the one-line diagram, select either kV, or percent, from
the drop-down list.
Bus Mag.
Select this option to display bus voltages on the one-line diagram.
Note: Bus voltages are displayed at 15 degrees.
Bus Angle
Select this option to display bus angle (in degrees) on the one-line diagram.
Note: Bus voltage angles are displayed at -15 degrees.
Load Term. Mag.

Select this option to display load (motors, lump loads, and static loads) terminal voltages on the one-line
diagram.
Note: Load terminal voltages are displayed at 15 degrees. Load terminal voltages based on load rated kV
or bus nominal kV can be displayed, depending on the selection in Load Term. Base kV.
Load Term. Base kV

This group allows a base kV for load terminal magnitude to be selected, when the voltage is displayed as
a percentage.
Note: This group will be disabled if kV is selected as the voltage display.
Load Rated kV
Bus Nom. kV
Voltage Drop
This group lets you configure how the voltage drop is displayed.
Line / Cable
Load FDR
Select a unit for power flow, or current flow from the list to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Power Flows
This group lets you configure how the power flows are displayed.
Units
Select the unit (kVA or MVA) to be used to display power flow on the one-line diagram.
29-22
Display Options
kW + jkvar
Select the kW + jkvar option to display power flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar.
kVA
Select the kVA option to display power flow in kVA or MVA.
Amp
Select the Amp option to display current flow in amperes.
%PF
When either the kVA or Amp option selected; the power factor of power flow shows along with the
current.
Flow Results
This group lets you configure how the flow results are displayed.
Branch
power flow at one end of a branch (the end that has a positive kW value flowing into the branch). For 3winding transformers, all three power flows are displayed.
Source
Load
Composite Motor
Composite Network
Select this option to display power flow into composite networks.
Panel System
Select this option to display results for panel systems on the one-line diagram, assuming the Calc. Panel
System option is selected, in the study case when the load flow calculation was performed.
Note: If the Calc. Panel System option was not enabled in the load flow study case, or in the Panel
System display option, no result will be displayed on the one-line diagram. For more information, see
Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Branch Losses
Select this option to display branch losses on the one-line diagram.
Note: Losses are displayed inside a bracket in [kW+jkvar] or [MW+jMvar].
Meters
This group lets you configure how the meters are displayed.
Ammeter
Select this option to display the primary current for the branch to which an ammeter is attached.
Voltmeter
Select this option to display the primary voltage for the bus to which a voltmeter is attached.
29-23
Display Options
Multi-Meter
Select this option to display the measurements of a multi-meter, including bus voltage, branch current,
AC Page
This page permits displaying specific information annotations for AC elements.
29-24
Display Options
ID
diagram.
Rating
Device Type
Rating
Generator
Motor
Load / Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable / Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
kW / MW
MVAsc
HP / kW
kVA / MVA and connection type ( # of phases - # of wires)
kVA / MVA
Base MVA
Continuous amps
# of cables - # of conductor / cable - size
kA bracing
Bus bracing (kA)
Rated interrupting (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
50/51 for over-current relays
Transformer rated turn ratio
kV
Select the appropriate checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the
selected elements on the one-line diagram.
Note: For cables/lines, the kV checkbox is replaced by a T button. Click this button to display the
cable/line conductor type on the one-line diagram.
A
Select the appropriate checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings (continuous or fullload ampere) of the selected elements on the one-line diagram.
Note: For cables/lines, the Amp checkbox is replaced by an L button. Click this button to display the
cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
Z
29-25
Display Options
Device Type
Impedance
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable / Line
Subtransient reactance Xd"

Positive sequence impedance in % of 100 MVA (R + j X)
% LRC
Positive sequence impedance (R + j X per unit length)
Impedance in ohms
Positive sequence impedance (R + j X in ohms or per unit length)
D-Y
Select the appropriate checkboxes under this heading to display the connection types of the selected
Composite Mtr
Select this option to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, and then select the
color for displaying the IDs.
Use Default Options

29-26
Display Options
AC-DC Page
This page allows the display options
AC-DC elements and composite networks.
to
29-27
be
specified
for
information
annotations
for
Display Options
ID
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC elements on the oneline diagram.
Device Type
Rating
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
AC kVA & DC kW (or MVA / MW)

DC kW & AC kVA (or MW / MVA)
kVA
HP / kW
kV
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements on
A
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the oneline diagram.
Device Type
Amp
Charger
Inverter
UPS
AC FLA & DC FLA

DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
ID
Select this option to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram
Color
Select the color for displaying the IDs.
Use Default Options

29-28
Display Options
Colors Page
29-29
Display Options
Color Theme
Annotations
Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously selected.
29-30
Calculation Method

ETAP currently utilizes the genetic algorithm for optimal capacitor placement. The genetic algorithm is
an optimization technique based on the theory of natural selection. A genetic algorithm starts with a
generation of solutions with wide diversity to represent characteristics of the whole search space. By
mutation and crossover, good characteristics are selected and carried to the next generation. The optimal
solution can be reached through repeated generations.
OCP uses the present worth method to perform alternative comparisons. It considers initial installation
and operating costs, which include maintenance, depreciation, and loss reduction savings.
Objective Function of OCP

The objective of optimal capacitor placement is to minimize the cost of the system. This cost is measured
in four ways:
1. Fixed capacitor installation cost
2. Capacitor purchase cost
3. Capacitor bank operating cost (maintenance and depreciation)
4. Cost of real power losses
Cost can be represented mathematically as:
Min objective function =

N bus
(x C
i =1
N load
0i
+ Qci C1i + Bi C 2iT) + C 2 Tl PLl

l =1
N bus - Number of bus candidates

x 0 / 1, 0 means no capacitor installed at bus i
i
C Installation cost
0i
C Per kVar cost of capacitor banks
1i
Qci - Capacitor bank size in kVar
Bi Number of capacitor banks
C 2i Operating cost of per bank, per year
T - Planning period (years)
C 2 - Cost of each kWh loss, in $/kWh
l - Load levels, maximum, average and minimum
Tl - Time duration, in hours, of load level l
PLl - Total system loss at load level l
29-31
Calculation Method
Constraints
The main constraints for capacitor placement are to meet the load flow constraints. In addition, all voltage
magnitudes of load (PQ) buses should be within the lower and upper bars. Load Power Factor (PF) should
be greater than the minimum. It may be a maximum power factor bar.
The constraints can be represented mathematically as:
1) Load Flow: F ( x, u ) = 0
Vmin V Vmax , PFmin PF PFmax for all PQ buses
29-32
Required Data
29.5 Required Data

Bus Data
The data required for optimal capacitor placement (OCP) is the same required for load flow calculations.
Bus data must include:
Nominal kV
%V and angle (when the Initial Condition option is set to Use Bus Voltages)
Load diversity factor (when the Loading option is set to Use Bus Diversity Factor on the Load
page of the Study Case Editor)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the branch editors (Transformer, Transmission Line, and Cable, Reactor, and
Impedance editors). The data required for OCP is the same as that needed for load flow calculations. Data
for a branch must include:
Power Grid Data

The data required for OCP calculations includes:
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, or Mvar Control)
Nominal kV
%V and angle for swing mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode of operation
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode
Energy cost data (Min MW, Max MW, MW and $Cost Points, if the Use Source Energy Cost
option is selected on the Info page of the Study Case Editor)

The data required for OCP calculations for synchronous generators includes:
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kV
%V and angle for swing mode of operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode of operation
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode of operation
Fuel cost data (Min MW, Max MW, Model Type, MW and $Cost Points, if the Use Source
Energy Cost option is selected on the Info page of the Study Case Editor)
Inverter Data
The data required for OCP calculations for inverters includes:
Inverter ID

The data required for OCP calculations for synchronous motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV
Loading category ID and % loading
29-33
Required Data

The data required for OCP calculations for induction motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV
Static Load Data

The data required for OCP calculations for static loads includes:
Static load ID
Power factor
Existing Capacitor Data

The data required for OCP calculations for an existing capacitor includes:
Capacitor ID
Lumped Load Data

The data required for OCP calculations for lumped load includes:
Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % motor load
Charger and UPS Data

The data required for OCP calculations for chargers and UPSs includes:
Element ID
Rated AC kV, MVA, and power factor, as well as DC rating data
Other Data
There are some study case related data that must also be provided. See the Study Case editor for study
case data requirements.
Note: On the Capacitor page, a bus candidate for the OCP module must be selected in order to run the
simulation successfully.
29-34
Output Reports
29.6 Output Reports

Optimal capacitor placement calculation results are reported on the one-line diagram and in Crystal
Reports format. The one-line diagram displays bus voltages, branch flows and voltage drops, and load
power consumption for maximum, minimum, or average load that are generated as a result of the
calculation.
Use the Display Options editor to specify the content to be displayed. The one-line diagram also displays
new capacitor information, which includes the total number of banks, rated kV, rated kvar, operating
kvar, and amps.
The Crystal Reports format provides reports containing detailed information about capacitor installation
and Load Flow Analysis. Use the OCP Report Manager to view the Output Report.
Crystal Reports
Study Case Toolbar
The Study Case toolbar provides a shortcut for the OCP Report Manger options.
1. Click the List Output Reports button.
ETAP automatically opens the List Output Report dialog box, and displays the output report listed in the
Study Case toolbar in your selected format. In the example toolbar shown below, the output report name
is OCP and the selected format is Cable.
Report Manager
The OCP Report Manager includes four pages, which represent different sections of the output report.
They are as follows:
Complete
Input
Result
Summary
Click the Report Manager button on the Optimal Capacitor Placement toolbar. The OCP Report Manager
lets you select from the listed formats for each section of the report.
Use the column of radio buttons on the right of the dialog to select the report format in which to view
(Viewer, PDF, MS Word, and more).
Several fields and buttons are common to every page.
29-35
Output Reports
Output Report Name

This field displays the name you entered for the output report. .
Path
This field displays the name of the project file, depending on which report was generated, along with the
Help
OK / Cancel
1. Click OK to close the OCP Report Manager and display the Crystal Reports view. This shows the
selected section of the output report.
Note: the OCP Report Manager will close if no selection is made.
2. Click Cancel to close the OCP Report Manager without viewing the report.
Complete Page
Selecting Complete in the left column of this page will cause all reports to be printed in the format you
have selected.
Input Page
The input data is grouped according to the data types listed below.
Adjustments
Branch
Bus Constraints
Bus
Cable
Capacitor Info Data
Cover
Impedance
Reactor
SVC
Transformer
Sample 1: Input Data

This section lists system input parameters for buses, transmission lines and cables, transformers, reactors,
impedances, and all connections including tie circuit breakers, fuses, and switches. For more information,
see Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Result Page
This page allows different formats to be selected to view the result report. These formats include:
LF Report Average
LF Report Maximum
LF Report Minimum
OCP Results
29-36
Output Reports
Sample 2: Load Flow Report

This section of the report tabulates detailed load flow results. The results reported include:
Bus ID and nominal kV
Calculated voltage magnitudes and angles
MW and Mvar generation and loading
Branch flows from the bus to all buses connected to it
Flows are given in MW and Mvar, amps, and %PF measured at the bus. Flows into 3-winding
transformers are indicated as flows from one of the bus windings to the other two bus windings (from
Main Bus to Sub 2B and Sub 3).
The settings of tap-changing transformers are also indicated at buses to which a tap side is connected.
These tap settings include the fixed taps and results from the LTCs. Regulated (voltage-controlled) buses
are flagged with an asterisk (*).
Load flow results are reported for average, maximum, and minimum loads.
29-37
Output Reports
Sample 3: OCP Results Report

This section of the report tabulates capacitor placement results. The results reported include:
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Calculated voltage magnitudes and angles
Power factor and capacitor bank information (capacitor rated kV, rated kvar per bank, total
number of banks installed, installation cost, total purchase cost, and total operation cost)
Summary Page
This page allows different formats to be selected to view the Result Summary Report. They are as
follows:
Branch Capacity Release
Branch Loading
Bus Loading
Losses
OCP Cost Summary
Summary
29-38
Output Reports
Sample 4: OCP Cost Summary Report

This section of the report tabulates the system cost information. The information summarizes the cost for
each year during the planning period. The costs include installation cost, operation cost, savings, and
profit.
Note: The interest rate is considered for the calculation.
29-39
Output Reports
Sample 5: Branch Capacity Release Report

Branch capacity release is the MVA difference of the branch before and after the capacitors are installed.
29-40
Output Reports
Plots
Report data can be plotted using three different curves. These curves consist of:
Loss Reduction Saving During Planning Period ($)
Capacitor Operation Cost During Planning Period ($)
Profit During Planning Period ($)
Click the Plot button on the Optimal Capacitor Placement toolbar to plot report data.
The Optimal Capacitor Placement Plot Selection dialog box appears. A combination of plots may be
selected from the list of checkboxes.
29-41
Output Reports
Loss Reduction Saving During Planning Period

This plot shows savings in dollars due to loss reduction vs. years. When interest is considered, the actual
saving will increase as a function of time.
Capacitor Operating Cost During Planning Period

This plot shows the operating cost in dollars vs. years. When interest is considered, the actual cost will
increase as a function of time.
29-42
Output Reports
Profit During Planning Period

This plot depicts profit in dollars vs. years. The savings accrued each year will be used to pay off the
operating cost and installation cost. Any unpaid dollars is considered as fixed cost for the following year.
A positive profit can be yielded when the loss reduction saving is bigger than the operating cost for each
year.
Note: The purpose of placing capacitors is not entirely about making profit. It is possible that profit may
be negative during the entire planning period for some systems.
29-43
Output Reports
One-Line Diagram
When OCP finishes a capacitor installation calculation, the Calculation in Progress dialog box disappears.
Capacitor installation and load flow results are then displayed on the one-line diagram. The loading
condition depends on the load duration setting.
For more information, see Section 23.3.2, Loading page.
In the following example, one 4.16 kV, 200 kvar capacitor is installed at bus Sub 3.
29-44
Chapter 30
Reliability Assessment Analysis

Distribution system reliability assessment deals with the availability and quality of power supply at each
customers service entrance. Analysis of customer failure statistics show that, compared to other portions
of electrical power systems, distribution system failures contribute as much as 90% towards the
unavailability of supply to a load. These statistics show how important the reliability evaluation of
distribution systems can be.
The basic reliability indices normally used to predict or assess the reliability of a distribution system
consist of three reliability indices:
Load point average failure rate

Average outage duration r
Annual unavailability U
In order to evaluate the severity or significance of a system outage, using the three basic indices
mentioned above, two expanded sets of indices listed below must also be calculated. The two expanded
sets of indices include the number and average load of customers connected at each load point in the
system, and the customer interruption cost. The first set is the system reliability index, which consists of:
System Average Interruption Frequency Index (SAIFI),

System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI),
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index (CAIDI),
Average Service Availability Index (ASAI),
Average Service Unavailability Index (ASUI)
These additional indices can be used to assess the overall behavior of the distribution system. The second
set includes the reliability cost/worth index:
Expected Energy Not Supply (EENS),

Expected Interruption Cost (ECOST),
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate (IEAR)
30-1
Overview
The indices EENS, ECOST, and IEAR can be those specifically for each load point or for the overall
system. All of these indices can be used to evaluate the reliability of an existing distribution system and
to provide useful planning information regarding improvements to existing systems and the design of new
distribution systems. Moreover, in order to analyze the sensitivity of a reliability index EENS or ECOST
with respect to failure rate of different elements, element contributions to that index and their rankings
can be used. The rankings can be for a load point or the overall system.
All of the indices and rankings given above can be evaluated using the ETAP Reliability Analysis
module. This module provides you with the best tool to efficiently model various power system elements
and devices to include their effects on the distribution system reliability, such as fault isolation and load
restoration through the operation of switching devices. This module is suitable for reliability analysis of
large-scale systems of general configurations. By using this module you can assess the distribution
system reliability, and the merits of various reinforcement schemes that are available to the planner can be
quantitatively evaluated to ensure that limited capital resources are used to achieve the greatest possible
improvement in system reliability.
Some of the main features of the ETAP Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study are summarized
below:
Common & Integrated Database

Fully Inherited 3-D Data Structure, Including Infinite Presentations, Unlimited Configurations, &
Multiple Data Revisions
Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with Multiple Source Buses (Generators/Utilities)
Systems with Isolated Sub-Systems
Systems with De-Energized Buses & Branches
Fault Isolation and Load Restoration
Modeling of single and double contingencies
Modeling of Single-Pole Double-Throw Switches
Modeling of Normally Closed/Open Tie Circuit Connections
User-Expandable Sector Interruption Cost Library
Three Basic Reliability Indices (, r, U) for each load point
Overall System Reliability Indices (SAIFI, SAIDI, CAIDI, ASAI, ASUI)
Reliability Cost/Worth Indices EENS, ECOST and IEAR for each load point
Reliability Cost/Worth Indices EENS, ECOST and IEAR for the Overall System
Element Contributions to the Load Point EENS and ECOST and Their Rankings
Element Contributions to the Overall System EENS and ECOST and Their Rankings
Graphic One-Line Display of Study Results
Graphic Plots of Element Contributions and Their Rankings for the Load Point EENS and ECOST for
Viewing & Printing
Graphic Plots of Element Contributions and Their Rankings for the Overall System EENS and
ECOST for Viewing & Printing
Tabulated Input Data, Load Point Reliability Indices, Overall System Reliability Indices, Element
Contributions and their rankings
30-2
System Analysis Toolbar
30.1 Reliability System Analysis Toolbar

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis toolbar appears on the screen when you are in the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Mode. This toolbar has six function keys as shown
below.
Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis

Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options
View Distribution System Reliability Output File
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis

Select a study case from the Study Case toolbar when you are in Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Study Mode. Click on the Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis button to perform a
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study. A dialog box will appear that allows you to specify the
output report name if the output file name is set to the Prompt in the Output Report list box. The
Distribution System Reliability Analysis study results will appear on the one-line diagram and can be
viewed in an output report in both tabulated formats and plot formats.
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options

Click on the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options button to customize the one-line
diagram annotation display options under the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study mode, and
to specify the load point reliability indices you wish displayed. See Display Options for more
information.
View Output File

Click on this button to open up the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager dialog box,
from which you can select a variety of pre-formatted output files. Select a file type and click on the OK
button to bring up the output file. A detailed explanation of the Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Output Report Manager is provided in section 30.6.
30-3
System Analysis Toolbar
You can also select output files from the Output Report list box.
This list contains all the output files in the current project folder.
Distribution Reliability Analysis Plots

Click on this icon to view plots of EENS/ECOST rankings, and bring up a dialog box that allows you to
select load points/buses/system from a list.

The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. Only when a distribution system reliability analysis has been
initiated does this button becomes enabled as a red stop sign. Click on this button to terminate the current
calculation. If you terminate the calculation before it completes one-line diagram displays will not be
available, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get Online Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is online. Click on this button to use
real-time data as initial conditions for this analysis.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is online. Click on this button to use
archived data as initial conditions for this analysis.
30-4
Study Case Editor

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, report
options, and permits component/system plot display selection. ETAP allows you to create and save an
unlimited number of study cases for each type of study. Just like any other study types, you can easily
switch between different distribution system Reliability Analysis Study Cases. This feature is designed to
organize your study efforts and save you time.
A Study Case can be used for any combination of any configuration status, one-line diagram presentation,
and Base/Revision Data.
To create a new distribution system reliability analysis study case, go to the Project View, right-click on
the Distribution System Reliability Analysis sub-folder inside the Study Case folder, and select Create
New. The module will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default study case, and it can
be added to the Distribution System Reliability Analysis sub-folder.
When you are in the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Mode, you can access the Distribution
System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case
Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Distribution System
Reliability Analysis sub-folder under the Study Cases folder.
The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor consists of three pages: Info page,
Sensitivity Analysis Report page, and the Plot page.
30-5
Study Case Editor
30.2.1 Info Page

This page permits you to specify general solution parameters and Study Case information.
Study Case ID
ID and entering a new ID. Study Case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters long. Use the
Method
This section allows you to specify whether you wish to use the single or double contingency levels for the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis.
Single Contingency Level

Check this box to use the single contingency for the Distribution System Reliability Analysis.
Double Contingency Level

Check this box to use the double contingency for the Distribution System Reliability Analysis.
30-6
Study Case Editor
Loading
You can specify the system loading conditions for the Distribution System Reliability Analysis in this
section.
Loading Category
Select one of the 10 loading categories for this study case from the pull-down list. Upon selection of any
category, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and static loads as specified for the selected
category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the 10 categories in the Nameplate page, Loading page, or
Rating page for induction machines, synchronous motors, static loads, lumped loads, MOVs, capacitors,
UPSs, inverters, and chargers, respectively.
Operating P, Q,V
Check this option to use operating P and Q as specified in the relevant Component Editors.
Note: If this option is selected, you must run a load flow calculation first to obtain the operating load.

You can specify the load diversity factors in this section.
None
Click on this button to select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected
loading category, i.e., no diversity factor is considered.
Bus Maximum
When the Maximum bus loading option is selected, the loading of all motors and static loads will be
multiplied by the maximum diversity factor of the bus to which they are directly connected. Using this
option, you can define the different loading for reliability analysis studies with each bus having a different
maximum diversity factor. This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system
has to be considered.
Bus Minimum
When the Minimum bus loading option is selected, the loading of all motors and static loads will be
multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor of the bus to which they are directly connected. Using
this option, you can define the different loading for reliability analysis studies with each bus having a
different minimum diversity factor.
This study option may be useful in cases where the effect of light loading condition needs to be
investigated.
Global
When this option is selected, ETAP will ask you to enter global diversity factors for motors and static
loads, respectively. When you select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all motors and static loads
of the selected loading category with the entered values. When using this option, you can define the
different loading for reliability analysis studies with fixed diversity factors for all loads.
30-7
Study Case Editor
25% above their values as specified by the selected loading category. This value can be smaller or greater
than 100%.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category section of Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load section of the Charger Editor.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remarks box. Information entered here will be
printed on the second line of every output report page header. These remarks can provide specific
information regarding each study case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all study cases and entered in the Project
Information Editor.
30-8
Study Case Editor
30.2.2 System Index Report Page

You can use this page to specify the numbers of elements that contribute most to system reliability indices
EENS and ECOST and their rankings will be reported.
System Contribution Ranking for Reporting

No of Most Contributing Elements to EENS
Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index EENS from the pull-down list.
No of Most Contributing Elements to ECOST

Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index ECOST from the pull-down list.
30-9
Study Case Editor
30.2.3 Load Index Report Page

Using this page, you can specify the numbers of elements that contribute most to load point reliability
indices EENS and ECOST and their rankings will be reported.
Element Contribution Ranking for Reporting

No of Most Contributing Elements to EENS
Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index EENS from the drop-down list.
No of Most Contributing Elements to ECOST

Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index ECOST from the drop-down list.
30-10
Study Case Editor
30.2.4 Plot Page

Select the elements you want to display in plot format.
System Index
Plot/Tabulate System Reliability Indices
Check this box to plot/tabulate system reliability indices.
Element Index
You can specify the load points that will be plotted in this section.
Element Type
Select types of components or devices from the list. Only the components associated with the listed types
can be selected for plotting/tabulating.
30-11
Study Case Editor
Plot Options
Device ID
This table provides a list of the devices or components for the given Device Type. Select a device or
component and click next to it to place an X under the Plot/Tabulate column.
Plot/Tabulate
You also can include a device or component in the plot list by first selecting that device or component,
and then checking this box. An X will be placed next to this device or component in the Plot/Tabulate
column.
30-12
Modeling and Calculation Method

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages
for AC, AC-DC, and DC info annotations.
Note: The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study case are specific to that study
30.3.1 Results Page

Select the information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
30-13
Load Point Reliability Indices

Average Failure Rate
Check this box to display the average failure rate for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Display Results below.
Average Outage Duration r

Check this box to display the average outage duration for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Annual Outage U
Check this box to display the annual unavailability for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Expected Energy Not Supplied EENS

Check this box to display the EENS for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display Results
below.
Note: The EENS for a bus is defined as the EENS of the loads that are directly connected to the bus
owing to the interruption of this bus.
Expected Interruption Cost ECOST

Check this box to display the ECOST for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display
Results below. Note that the EENS for a bus is defined as the ECOST of the loads that are directly
connected to the bus owing to the interruption of this bus.
Interruption Energy Assessment Rate IEAR

Check this box to display the IEAR for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display Results
below.
Display Results
Buses
Check this box to display the reliability indices checked from the section of Load Point Reliability Indices
for buses.
Generators
for generators.
Load Points
for load points.
30-14
30.3.2 AC Info Page

This page allows you to check the boxes for element and information annotations that you wish to be
displayed on the one-line diagram.
30-15
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load/Panel
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Switch
PT & CT
Meter
Relay
Branch
Transformer
Line
Cable
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA / Conn. Type (# of Phases - # of Wires)
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
Base MVA
kVA/MVA
# of lines - # of conductor/ size
kV
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
Z
one-line diagram.
D-Y
one-line diagram.
Line/Cable: click on the appropriate checkboxes to display the size, type and length of the line or cable.
Composite Motor
Click on this checkbox to display the composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color
in which the IDs will be displayed.
30-16
Composite Network
Use Default Options

Show Eq Cable
Click this checkbox to display equivalent cables.
30-17
30.3.3 AC-DC Info Page

Color
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
30-18
AC/DC
ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Z
Select the checkbox under this heading to display the impedance values of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
Line/Cable: click on the appropriate checkboxes to display the size, type and length of the line or cable.
Composite Network
Use Default Options

Click on this checkbox to use PowerStations default display options.
DC
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected DC elements on the oneline diagram.
Device Type
Battery
Motor
Load
Composite CSD
Converter
Bus
30-19
Node
CB
Fuse
Switch
Branch
Cable
kV
on the one-line diagram. Click on this button to display the cable/line conductor type on the one-line
diagram.
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram. Click on this button to display the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
Z
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Click on this checkbox to display the composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color
in which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options

30-20
30.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Select the color theme for information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram from the dropdown list. If you wish to create a new theme click on the Theme button and a color palette will appear that
permits you to assign colors and specify a name for this unique theme. You can also select an existing
theme in the pull-down list, make modifications to the theme, and then save it under a new theme name.
Annotations
Click on the Theme button to assign the ETAP theme for annotations, or click on the User-Defined button
and select colors from the pull-down lists to assign your own unique theme to the annotations for AC,
DC, Composite, AC DC, and Results.
30-21
30.4 Modeling and Calculation Method

Electric distribution system reliability analysis involves modeling different components of distribution
systems, computing reliability indices at load points and for the overall AC system, and ranking the
elements that contribute to the load point/bus/system indices EENS and ECOST. This section briefly
discusses some fundamentals and underlying principles of the ETAP Distribution System Reliability
Analysis Module.
30.4.1 AC Component and System Modeling
A two-state up/down representation is used for the operation/repair cycle of an element (such as lines,
cables, transformers, breaks, fuses, switches, loads and bus bars).
Normally open tie circuit connections can be taken into account. Currently, a normally open tie
circuit connection is defined in the ETAP as the connection that satisfies: (i) the two buses that it is
connected are energized (ii) it is composed of only the components of PDs, (iii) the connection is in
service and (iv) it contains at least one normally open PD.
As a default option of a sector interruption cost library, a Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) is
used to divide customers into seven categories: large user, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
residential, government & institutions and office & buildings. You can modify this cost library.
The sector interruption cost library gives the Sector Customer Damage Functions (SCDF), i.e., the
interruption costs for several discrete outage durations. A log-log interpolation of the cost data is
used where the interruption duration lies between two separate times. In the case of durations greater
than the largest duration, a linear extrapolation with the same slope as that between the second largest
and largest durations will be used to calculate the interruption cost.
Any switching device, such as breaker, fuse, contactor, and switch, has the function of fault isolation.
Only an overcurrent protective device (such as breaker and fuse) can interrupt fault currents.
A fault in a radial sub-system is interrupted by the nearest overcurrent PD on its source side; a fault in
a meshed sub-system is interrupted by its surrounding nearest overcurrent PDs. The associated set of
interrupted load points (LPs) is called the interrupted LP zone of the faulted element.
A fault in a radial sub-system is isolated by the nearest switching device of any kind on its source
side; a fault in a meshed sub-system is isolated by its surrounding nearest switching devices. The
associated set of isolated load points is called the isolated LP zone of the faulted element.
The affected load points in the isolated LP zone of an element will be connected after the repair of the
faulty component, while the ones contained in its interrupted LP zone but outside its isolated LP zone
will have the supply restored after a short switching or sectionalizing time.
The switching time for a load is internally set to the switching time of the component that is the
nearest to this load. The component may be an equivalent cable, switching device, or bus.
The EENS and ECOST for a bus are respectively defined as the Expected Energy Not Supply and
Expected Interruption Cost of the loads that are directly connected to that bus due to the outage of
that bus.
30.4.2 AC-DC Converter Models

In the current version of ETAP, the distribution system reliability analysis involves only AC systems.
The AC-DC converters are modeled below.
Charger & UPS

In the current version of ETAP, when performing AC Reliability Analysis, chargers and UPSs are
considered as loads connected to their input AC buses.
30-22
Inverter
An inverter is treated as a power supply source like a generator or utility.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

A VFD can only be inserted between a motor or a lump load and its terminal bus, and is treated as a
branch between the terminal bus and the motor.
30.4.3 Modeling Assumptions/Limitations

The current distribution system reliability analysis makes the following assumptions:
Only AC systems are considered.

All switching devices operate successfully when required.
Switching devices can be opened whenever possible to isolate a fault. Power supply can be restored
to provide power to as many load points as possible using appropriate switching actions and available
alternative supplies.
All failures are statistically independent. Second-order faults can be considered.
30.4.4 Distribution System Reliability Indices

The distribution system reliability is usually measured in terms of several indices that are defined below.
Average Failure Rate at Load Point I, i(f/yr)
i =
jNe
e, j
Where e,j is the average failure rate of element j; Ne is the total number of the elements whose faults will
interrupt load point i.
Annual Outage Duration at Load Point i, Ui(hr/yr)
Ui =
jNe
e , j ij
where rij is the failure duration at load point i due to a failed element j.
Average Outage Duration at Load Point i, ri(hr)
ri = U i / i
30-23
Expected Energy Not Supplied Index at Load Point i, EENSi(MWhr/yr)

EENSi = Pi U i
where Pi is the average load of load point i.
Expected Interruption Cost Index at Load Point i, ECOSTi(k$/yr)
ECOSTi = Pi
f ( r )
jNe
ij
e, j
where f(rij) is the SCDF.
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate Index at Load Point i, IEARi($/kWhr)
IEARi =
ECOSTi
EENS i
System Average Interruption Frequency Index, SAIFI(f/customer.yr)
SAIFI =
Total number of customer interruptions

=
Total number of customer served
N
N
i
where N i is the number of customers at load point i; the symbol means the summation for all load
points.
System Average Interruption Duration Index, SAIDI(hr/customer.yr)
SAIDI =
Sum of customer interruption durations

=
U N
N
i
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index, CAIDI(hr/customer interruption)
CAIDI =
Sum of customer interruption duration s

=
Total number of customer interruptions
30-24
U N
N
i
Average Service Availability Index, ASAI(pu)
ASAI =
=
Customer hours of available service

Customer hours demanded
8760 N iU i
N 8760
i
Where 8760 is the number of hours in a calendar year.
Average Service Unavailability Index, ASUI(pu)

ASUI = 1 ASAI
System Expected Energy Not Supplied Index, EENS(MWhr/yr)

EENS = Total energy not supplied by the system =
EENS
System Expected Interruption Cost Index, ECOST(k$/yr)
ECOST = ECOSTi
Average Energy Not Supplied Index, AENS(MWhr/customer.yr)
AENS =
Total energy not supplied by the system

=
EENS
N
System Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate Index, IEAR($/kWhr)
IEAR =
ECOST
EENS
30-25
30.4.5 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis employs a new analytical algorithm to assess the reliability
indices of mixed radial and meshed distribution systems. This algorithm basically uses the algorithm for
radial distribution systems since the meshed network, if any, is first converted to a radial network.
Therefore, the employed algorithm is quite efficient and suitable for large-scale distribution systems of
general configurations.
The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study generates crystal output reports showing the system
input data, reliability indices results, element ranking information, and tabulation of the results. Some of
these results can also be viewed directly from the one-line diagram using the Distribution System
Reliability Display Options Editor.
30-26
Required Data
30.5 Required Data

To run a Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study, you need to provide reliability-related data, such
as failure rates, repair times, and switching times of network elements. A summary of these data for
different types of elements is given in this section.
Note: Maintenance Outage Rate and Maintenance Outage Time are not used in reliability calculation for
this version.
Bus Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Branch Data
2-Winding & 3-Winding Transformers
Active Failure Rate

Passive Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Cable/Transmission Line
Length
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Impedance & Current-Limiting Reactor
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Power Grid (Utility) & Synchronous Generator Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
30-27
Required Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Quantity (No. of Loads)
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Static Load Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Lumped Load Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
UPS Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
VFD Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
30-28
Required Data
Charger Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Inverter Data
Active Failure Rate

Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Study Case ID
Report Option (for Plots and Crystal Reports)
30-29
Output Report
30.6 Output Report

Output reports for Distribution System Reliability Analysis Studies are available in different levels and
are arranged into two formats: Crystal Output Report, One-Line Diagram Display.
30.6.1 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager

Click on the View Output File button on the Distribution System Reliability Analysis toolbar to open the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager. The Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Report Manager provides different formats for Crystal Reports and consists of four pages.
Complete Page
This page allows you to select the Complete Output Report. All four pages give you the option of viewing
the selected reports in Crystal Reports, or creating a file for printing or emailing in PDF, MS Word, Rich
Text Format, MS Excel format. You can set this choice as the default format for any reports that are
generated.
Input Page
This page provides the formats for different input data.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results.
Summary Page
This page provides the summary from calculation results.
30-30
Output Report
30.6.2 Distribution System Reliability Crystal Report

If the last study run is the distribution system reliability analysis, then if you click on the Report Manager
button on the Study Case toolbar or by select the Crystal Report format from the Reliability Analysis
toolbar, you will be able to open and view the Crystal Output Report for the distribution system reliability
analysis study. The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Crystal Report contains the following
major sections:
Cover Page
This is the first page of the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Crystal Report. It includes the
information from a number of different types of buses, branches, unit system, project file name, and the
output file name and its location.
30-31
Output Report
Bus Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system buses, including their ID, nominal kV, failure rate,
repair time, switching time and replacement time.
Load Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system loads that include synchronous motor, induction
machine, static load, lumped load, UPS, charger, capacitor, and filter. The input data reported are load ID
and type, connected bus ID, average load, user sector ID, # of loads, failure rate, repair time and
replacement time.
30-32
Output Report
Source Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system sources that include power grid (utility) and
synchronous generator. The input data reported are source connected bus ID, source ID and type, failure
rate, repair time, switching time and replacement time.
Branch Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system branches that include cables, transmission lines,
impedances, reactors, and 2-winding and 3-winding transformers. The input data reported are branch ID,
branch type, length (if any), total failure rate, active failure rate, repair time, switching time, and
replacement time.
30-33
Output Report
Branch Connection
This section reports branch connection information for all branches in the system. It shows the branch
ID, the branch type, and the bus that it originates from and to which bus it is connected.
30-34
Output Report
Sector Interruption Cost Library Data

This section lists the library data of sector interruption cost.
30-35
Output Report
Switching Device Input Data

This section reports the input data related to protective devices. The input data reported are switching
device ID, switching device type, active failure rate, passive failure rate, repair time, switching time and
replacement time.
30-36
Output Report
Load Point Report

In the Load Point Report section, the load point ID, user sector, load point connected bus ID (if any),
average (active) failure rate, average outage duration, annual outage duration, EENS, ECOST and IEAR
are reported.
Note: Only the buses that are selected for plotting in the Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor are
tabulated.
30-37
Output Report
EENS Sensitivity Analysis

In the EENS Sensitivity Analysis section, the system/bus/load point ID and type, corresponding
contributing element ID, type and EENS are reported.
30-38
Output Report
ECOST Sensitivity Analysis

In the ECOST Sensitivity Analysis section, the system/bus/load point ID and type, corresponding
contributing element ID, type and ECOST are reported.
30-39
Output Report
Summary
The Summary section incorporates the information from a number of different types of buses, branches,
system frequency, unit system, project file name, output file name, and its location.
30-40
Output Report
30.6.3 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display

You can choose how the results are displayed on the one-line diagram for the Distribution System
Reliability Analysis Study by using the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options Editor.
The following screen capture shows a one-line diagram display.
30-41
Plots
30.7 Plots
Plots are available for EENS ranking and ECOST ranking of system/load points. Click on the Reliability
Analysis Plots button located on the Reliability Analysis toolbar to select a plot.
Device Type
Select a device type.
Device ID
Select the devices that you wish to plot. This box lists all the devices that are selected in the Reliability
Study Case Editor, Plot page, for the selected device type. Multiple devices can be selected.
Plot Type
For Reliability Analysis plot, the following curves are available.
EENS
Plot EENS ranking for the selected devices.
ECOST
Plot ECOST ranking for the selected devices.
30-42
Plots
A set of sample plots is shown below.
30-43
Chapter 31
Transformer MVA Sizing

In power systems, there are many devices whose proper size is critical to the design of a power delivery
system. One of the most important is the power transformer. There are several factors involved in the
process of sizing a transformer. ANSI and IEC Standards provide a set of guidelines that list these factors
and how they can be used to determine if a transformer can handle its required operating load.
Inadequately sized transformers may shorten the equipments operating life or cause overloading failures.
ETAP has compiled the information contained on standards ANSI/IEEE C57, IEC 60076-2 & 60726 into
a program that can easily determine the proper size of a power transformer. The method used by the
program considers several factors like ambient temperature, altitude, cooling stage and type (dry or liquid
fill). When sizing a transformer, it is also very important to consider the expected future growth of the
required load. The MVA sizing module uses adjusting factors to take this into account. The transformer
short-circuit requirement transformer impedance and basic impulse level (BIL), are also considered by
the MVA sizing module. The module has built in functions that compare the calculated size and
impedance against the minimum values recommended by the standards.
The ETAP Transformer Sizing Module provides two sizing calculations. One calculation is to size the
transformer MVA rating (rated, 1st and 2nd stage ratings when applicable) and %Z along with X/R ratio
for single-phase, three 1-phase and 3-phase 2-winding transformers, based on ANSI and IEC standards.
Another calculation is to optimize a generator unit transformer tap ratio based on ANSI standards. The
first calculation is hereafter referred to as Transformer MVA Sizing, whereas the second calculation is
referred to hereafter as Transformer Tap Optimization. Transformer Tap Optimization is explained in
detail in Chapter 27.
This chapter describes the interfaces, input, and output data involved in running the Transformer MVA
Sizing Module. Other associated operations including data update will also be explained. A brief view of
the related standards is included as well.
The Transformer MVA Sizing chapter describes how to start the transformer MVA sizing calculation, the
input data and output results of the calculation, and how to use the sizing results to update the transformer
editor. The section on calculation methods provides some technical background on the calculations
involved with transformer MVA sizing.
31-1
Transformer Sizing
2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing
31.1 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing

The 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing calculation sizes the transformer rated MVA, 1st and 2nd stage
MVA (when applicable), %Z, and X/R based on the transformer loading, installation, insulation level, and
short-circuit duties. Load variation factors can also be included in the sizing calculation. This section
describes how to access the Transformer MVA Sizing calculation, sizing options, required input data, and
available results.
To access the Transformer MVA Sizing Module, double-click on the transformer icon in the one-line
diagram to access the Transformer editor. Next, select the Sizing page.
You may access the Transformer editor from the Project view as well.
On the Sizing page, you can select or enter the transformer loading data, transformer installation, and
transformer insulation data to run the sizing calculation, select the recommended sizing results and update
the transformer ratings based on the calculated size.
31-2
Transformer Sizing
Transformer Loading
The Transformer Loading group allows you to find the operating load or the connected load to this
transformer and then use either load for sizing purposes. Also, you can manually enter a loading for the
transformer.
MVA
Enter the loading seen by the transformer. The loading MVA can be entered manually or updated
automatically by clicking on the Operating or Connected Load buttons. This value is used as the
transformer load MVA in the sizing calculations.
Operating MVA, MW and Mvar

If you run Load Flow Analysis and select the option to update Operating Load & V from the Load Flow
Study Case Editor, the transformer operating MVA, MW and Mvar will be updated and displayed in these
fields and the Operating button will be enabled.
The operating MVA is the maximum value of the MVA calculated on the From or To side of the twowinding transformer.
Load Flow Study Case Info Page
Two Winding Transformer Sizing Page
Clicking on the Operating button will update the MVA field and at the same time run the sizing
calculations.
Connected MVA, MW and Mvar

If the loading on a transformer is due to a radial system, the connected loading can then be automatically
computed, displayed in these fields, and the Connected button will be available for selection. If a nonradial or looped configuration is encountered, a message displaying Loop configuration detected. No
Calculations! will appear.
Click on the Connected button to update the load MVA field and run the sizing calculations.
Spare Loads
You can use this option while calculating the total connected load downstream to a transformer to include
all spare loads to determine the final connected load to the transformer. A spare load is defined as having
a configuration status set to spare in the respective Element Editor.
31-3
Transformer Sizing
Demand Factor
Load Variation
This section defines load variation factors that affect MVA sizing calculation.
Growth Factor
The growth factor is an allowance for future growth. This percent value indicates how much of a future
load increase should be expected for the given transformer. The growth factor is used for calculating the
required Rated MVA of the transformer. If you select the option Use GF for Max. MVA, then the growth
factor will be used for calculating the maximum MVA size.
Load Factor
The load factor is defined as the ratio of the average load to the peak load over a designated period of
time. You may calculate the Load Factor as a percentage from the following relation:
% Load Factor = 100 *
kWi * Ti
kWp * Tt
where:
i
kWi
Ti
kWp
Tt
Ton
Toff
Interval of time when the load is non-zero

Load at interval i
Number of hours of interval i
Peak load
Ton + Toff
If the transformer carries load at every interval, then the relationship may be simplified to:
% Load Factor = 100 *
Ton
Tt
The Load Factor is equal to 100% if the transformer carries the required load continuously all the time.
Installation
This group defines the transformer installation conditions that affect MVA sizing calculations.
31-4
Transformer Sizing
Altitude
Enter the altitude of the transformer installation in feet or meters. ETAP adjusts the calculated Required
MVA ratings based on this altitude value.
ETAP uses the following derating factors, per Standards C57.92-1981 and C57.96-1986, for every 330 ft.
(100 m) above 3300 ft. (1000 m), for transformers installed at an altitude greater than 3300 ft. (1000 m).
Types of Cooling
Liquid-immersed air-cooled
Liquid-immersed water-cooled
Liquid-immersed forced-air-cooled
Liquid-immersed forced-liquid-cooled
With liquid-to-air cooler
Liquid-immersed forced-liquid-cooled
With liquid-to-water cooler
Dry type, Self-Cooled (AA)
Dry type, Forced-Air-Cooled (AA/FA and AFA)
Derating Factor (%)

0.4
0.0
0.5
0.5
0.0
0.3
0.5
For IEC rated transformers, naturally cooled, the limit of average winding temperature rise is reduced by
1k for every 400m above 1000m. For forced cooled transformers, the reduction shall be 1k for every
250 m.
Ambient Temp.
Enter the ambient temperature of the transformer location in degrees Celsius. ETAP adjusts the Required
MVA ratings based on the ambient temperature value.
Impedance
This data section defines the transformer Basic Impulse Level (BIL) and primary and secondary short
circuit duties that affect calculations of the transformer impedance.
BIL Limit
Enter the Basic Impulse Level of the transformer. ETAP utilizes this value for determining the
transformer minimum impedance according to ANSI/IEC standards.
Limit Short-Circuit kA
If you select this option, ETAP will use the short circuit current contribution, the BIL value, and the
transformer type to determine the impedance of the transformer.
@ Prim.
Enter the primary winding short-circuit current requirement in kA. ETAP will use this value to calculate
the transformer impedance. This value indicates the short circuit current contribution for the transfer from
secondary to primary.
@ Sec.
Enter the secondary winding short circuit current requirement in kA. This value indicates the short circuit
current contribution for the transfer from primary to secondary.
ETAP will determine either the primary or secondary short circuit current contribution if either value is
known based on the rated voltage ratio.
31-5
Transformer Sizing
Options
This group defines additional options used for Transformer MVA Sizing calculation.
Use GF for Max. MVA

If you select this option, ETAP will use the Growth Factor to adjust the required maximum MVA value
calculated by the program.
Result
This data section displays all the results from the Transformer MVA Sizing calculation.
One Size Larger (Standard)

Required Size (Non-Standard)
One Size Smaller (Standard)
Larger Size
The calculated Rated MVA, 1st stage MVA (where applicable), 2nd stage MVA (where applicable), %Z
and X/R will be displayed in these fields for the One Size Larger Transformer. ETAP first will calculate
the Required MVA ratings, %Z and X/R. Then, based on the ANSI or IEC Standard Tables, ETAP will
select a standard larger size from the required values.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Larger Size values by pressing on the
Larger Size button.
31-6
Transformer Sizing
Required Size
ETAP calculates the required Rated MVA, 1st stage MVA (where applicable), 2nd stage MVA (where
applicable), %Z and X/R. And then, the calculated values are displayed in these fields.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Required Size values by pressing on the
Required Size button.
Smaller Size
Calculated Rated MVA, 1st stage MVA (where applicable), 2nd stage MVA (where applicable), %Z and
X/R will be displayed in these fields for the One Size Smaller Transformer. ETAP first will calculate the
Required MVA ratings, %Z and X/R. Then, based on the ANSI or IEC Standard Tables, ETAP will select
a standard smaller size from the required values.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Smaller Size values by pressing on the
Smaller Size button.
31-7
Transformer Sizing
Calculation Method

Standard Compliance
ETAP Transformer MVA Sizing calculation complies with the following standards:
ANSI/IEEE C57-1994
IEC 60076-2 (liquid)
IEC 60726 (Dry)
ETAP Transformer MVA Sizing Module follows recommended transformer sizing procedures as
described in ANSI/IEEE C57, IEC 60076-2, and IEC 60726. The standard transformer sizes used by the
program are taken from transformer size tables described by these standards. The MVA sizing module
determines the transformer required size based on the use of several multiplying factors. The different
multiplying factors are based on the transformer installation altitude, ambient temperature, and insulation
/encapsulation type, number of phases, cooling stage, and transformer size. For example, a transformer
installed at an ambient temperature of 20 degrees Celsius will have a higher MVA capacity than a
transformer installed at a 30 degrees Celsius location. ANSI/IEEE Standards require that the transformer
be sized based on the output MVA requirement. IEC Standards require that the transformer be sized based
on the output MVA requirement plus the transformer losses. This means that when you size a transformer
based on IEC Standards, the losses of the transformer are included in the calculated required size.
ETAP will show N/A for the next larger MVA or next smaller MVA if the value is not available from the
standard ANSI/IEC transformer sizes.
For a (3) 1-phase transformer connection, the sizing calculations are performed for the equivalent 3-phase
bank assuming all three transformers are identical.
The Transformer MVA Sizing module also provides the user with the typical percent impedance and X/R
ratio values for the calculated required size, next larger size, and next smaller size. For an IEC
transformer, the typical percent impedance and X/R ratio values pertain to the largest MVA rating. If the
Limit Short-Circuit kA option is enabled, the %Z value is determined based on the primary short circuit
current and the full load current of the required MVA load. The BIL rating of the transformer is used to
determine the minimum impedance that the transformer should have in case the required short circuit
current is too high.
31-8
Transformer Sizing
Required Data
31.3 Required Data

Input Data
The input data required for the Transformer MVA Sizing calculation is found in the Transformer Editor.
The data is located in three pages.
2-Winding Transformer Editor Info page:
Standard
Connection
2-Winding Transformer Editor Rating page:
Primary Winding kV rating

Type
Subtype
Class
Temp. Rise
2-Winding Transformer Editor Sizing page:
Growth factor
Load Factor
Altitude
Ambient Temperature
BIL
Primary/Secondary SC kA requirement
Operating load
Connected load
31-9
Chapter 32

The purpose of the ETAP Transformer Tap Optimization is to optimize a step up generator unit
transformer tap ratio based on ANSI/IEEE Standard C57.116-1989. This module is used to determine the
optimal transformer tap (turns ratio) so that the transformer is capable of delivering the maximum Mvar
output range within the expected system and generator operating voltage variation ranges. This module
can also be used to check the Mvar delivering range for a given transformer tap setting (turns ratio).
This chapter describes the interfaces, input, and output data necessary to run the Transformer Tap
Optimization Module. Other associated operations including data update, plotting, and printing will also
be explained, along with a brief view of the related standard. The calculation method and the data
required for the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation will be outlined as well.
Auxiliary Load
Unit Transformer
and Tap
Transformer
Primary
Cable
Transformer
Secondary
Cable
System
Unit Generator
32-1
32.1 Transformer Tap Optimization

The Transformer Tap Optimization calculation optimizes a unit transformer tap, or equivalently, its turn
ratio, to ensure that the generator unit voltage remains within its upper and lower variation range
(typically 95% to 105%), while producing its full MW and Mvar capability under the system voltage
variation.
The following sections describe how to perform the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation, enter
required input data, and view available output results. To access the Transformer Tap Optimization
calculation go to the Tap page within the 2-Winding Transformer editor. Check the Unit Transformer for
Generator check box and the Tap Optimization button will appear on the right of this page. Select a
generator from the pull-down list, and then click on the button to launch the Transformer Tap
Optimization Editor.
The Transformer Tap Optimization editor has two pages:

Tap Optimization
Mvar Delivery Curve
32-2
Tap Optimization Page
32.2 Tap Optimization Page
Transformer
Enter the transformer data or click Get Data to select the transformer rated MVA, % Z, and X/R to be
used in the optimization calculation. The Update button will only be enabled if there is an existing
difference between the values shown on this page and the values contained on the Rating page.
Use Z Tolerance
Check this box to include the Z tolerance for the selected transformer in the calculation.
Step Sizes
This button opens the Tap Optimization Step Editor to enter the Min, Max, and Step values for the tap.
These parameters are initially defaulted to the following values.
32-3
Tap Optimization
Rated MVA
Enter the transformer Rated MVA or click Get Data to enter the transformer rated MVA from the Rating
page.
%Z
Enter percent impedance or click Get Data to enter the transformer positive sequence impedance from the
Rating page, with the transformer rated MVA and kV ratings as the base values.
X/R
Enter transformer X/R ratio or update X/R ratio from the Rating page.
Get Data
Click the Get Data button to substitute the Rated MVA, % Z, and X/R into these fields. The transformer
ID is displayed alongside this button.
Primary Side Cable Impedance (Ohms)

Enter or click Get Data to select the transformer primary side cable impedance.
R
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer primary side cable resistance in Ohms.
Note that this value should include the following factors:
Actual primary side cable resistance
Any equivalent system internal resistance
X
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer primary side cable reactance in Ohms.
Actual primary side cable reactance
Any equivalent system internal reactance
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute cable R and X values into the Primary Side Cable Impedance
section from the connected primary cable. The primary cable ID is displayed alongside this button. None
will be displayed if there is no cable connected to the primary side of the transformer.
32-4
Tap Optimization
Secondary Side Cable Impedance (Ohms)

Enter or select the transformer secondary side cable impedance.
R
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer secondary side cable reactance in ohms.
Actual secondary side cable resistance
X
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer secondary side cable reactance in ohms.
Actual secondary side cable reactance
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute cable R and X values into the Secondary Side Cable Impedance
section from the connected secondary cable. The secondary cable ID is displayed alongside this button.
None will be displayed if there is no cable connected to the secondary side of the transformer.
System
Enter the data or click Get Data to automatically update the system kV.
System kV
Enter or update the system voltage in kV. This voltage is also the transformer primary bus voltage if the
primary side cable does not exist.
%Variation (+) / % Variation (-)

Enter the system voltage variations in percent. These two values are used to generate Mvar delivery
curves corresponding to the upper and lower voltage variation from the system operating voltages. The
default value is +/- 5.
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute the transformer primary side bus nominal kV into the System kV.
The transformer primary side bus ID is displayed alongside this button.
Generator
Enter or click Get Data to update the generator rated kV, MW, Max, and Min Mvar.
Rated kV
Enter or update the generator rated voltage in kV from the one-line diagram.
%Variation
Enter the generator voltage variation in percent. This value is used to calculate the upper and lower
voltage variation from the rated voltage. The default value is 5.
MW
Enter or update generator MW rating from the generator Rating page.
32-5
Tap Optimization
Max Mvar
Enter or update generator Max Mvar limits from the generator Rating page.
Min Mvar
Enter or update generator Min Mvar limits from the generator Rating page.
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute the generator rated kV, MW, Max Mvar, and Min Mvar fields into
the Generator group of this page. The generator ID is displayed alongside this button, if there exists a
generator connecting to the transformer secondary side through no more than one cable. If there is no
generator that matches the criteria, then None will be displayed.
Auxiliary Load
Enter the generator unit auxiliary load. The auxiliary load is treated as a motor load (constant power). The
generator unit auxiliary load MVA is computed from the MW and Mvar and is a display-only field.
MW
Enter the generator unit auxiliary load MW.
Mvar
Enter the generator unit auxiliary load Mvar.
MVA
MVA is computed from MW and Mvar and is a display-one filed.
Optimization and Results

ETAP displays the calculation results if the calculation succeeds in this group.
Optimization Primary Tap

Select this option to calculate the optimal transformer primary tap and generate the Mvar delivery curve.
Use Existing Primary Tap

Select this option to generate the Mvar delivery curve using the existing transformer primary tap. When
this option is selected, the existing transformer primary tap will display in the Prim % Tap and kV Tap
fields.
% Tap
This column displays the calculated optimal transformer tap on the primary side and the tap used in the
calculation on the secondary side, both in percent. Note that the transformer tap on the secondary side
used in the calculation is always zero.
32-6
Tap Optimization
kV Tap
This column displays the calculated optimal transformer tap on the primary side and the tap used in the
calculation on the secondary side, both in kV. Note that the transformer tap on the secondary side used in
the calculation is always zero.
Calculate
Click this button to run the calculation once all required input data has been entered. Successful
calculation returns the optimized transformer % Tap and kV Tap on the primary side in the %Tap and kV
Tap fields and the Mvar delivery curve if the Optimize Primary Tap is selected, or just generates the Mvar
delivery curve if the Use Existing Primary Tap option is selected.
Update Button
Click this button to update the Transformer Tap page with the calculation results, as shown below.
Transformer Tap Optimization Page
Transformer Tap Page
32-7
Tap Optimization
Mvar Delivery Curve Page

This page displays the results of the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation in a graphical format. The
plot depicts generator voltage vs. the generator reactive power output. This format is also called the
generator reactive power (Mvar) delivery capability, because it shows the generator reactive power output
range at the calculated transformer tap and system operating voltages. The plot below contains three
delivery curves at three different system-operating voltages. The first voltage is the actual system rated
voltage while the other two plots are based on the voltage variation (max and min) specified in the editor.
Print Graph
Click this button to send a copy of the Delivery Curve to the default printer. The default printer can be
configured in your Windows Operating System.
32-8
Calculation Method

Standard Compliance
The ETAP Transformer Tap Optimization calculation complies with the latest ANSI/IEEE Standard, cited
below:
- ANSI/IEEE Standard, C57.116-1989, IEEE Guide for Transformers Directly Connected to Generator
ANSI/IEEE Std. C57.116-1989 requires that the generator be capable of operating at a rated KVA,
frequency, and power factor within a defined rated voltage range, typically 5%. This program addresses
the optimal selection of the generator unit transformer tap in order to let the generator fully utilize its
reactive power generation capability. The program performs a series of load flow calculations for the
system under consideration, including the system voltage level, transformer primary and secondary
cables, transformer rating and impedance, generator design MW and Mvar range, as well as generator unit
auxiliary power. As a result, the program calculates a transformer tap setting on the transformer primary
side that will allow the generator to acquire the widest range of reactive power generation. This result is
corresponding to the line in the Mvar Delivery Curve marked for Vs = System Nominal kV. To check the
conditions while the system varies, two additional lines in the Mvar Delivery Curve marked for Vs =
System Nominal kV + Variation and Vs = System Nominal kV Variation are also given.
Note: The final calculation result depends on the user-defined tap step. If the tap step is specified as 1%,
then the final optimal tap will be calculated to 1% precision, e.g., 4.0%, 5.0%, 6.0%, etc. On the other
hand, if the tap step is chosen as 0.5%, then the final optimal tap will be calculated with 0.5% precision,
e.g., 4.0%, 4.5%, 5.0%, 5.5%, 6.0%, etc. The tap step is set in the Tap Optimization page of the 2Winding Transformer Editor.
32-9
Required Data
32.4 Required Data

The input data for the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation includes system, transformer, and
generator unit (including the auxiliary load) data, as listed below:
System
Nominal kV
% Variation (+)
% Variation (-)
System nominal operation voltage

System operating voltage positive variation
System operating voltage negative variation
Transformer
Rated MVA
%Z
X/R
Use Z Tolerance
Step Sizes
Transformer rated MVA

Transformer rated positive sequence impedance
Transformer rated positive sequence X/R ratio
Flag to use or not use Z Tolerance along with the values of Z Variation
Transformer step sizes including Min, Max, and Step
Cables (Optional)
Primary Cable R
Primary Cable X
Secondary Cable R
Secondary Cable X
Transformer primary side cable resistance

Transformer primary side cable reactance
Transformer secondary side cable resistance
Transformer secondary side cable reactance
Generator
Rated kV
kV % Variation
MW
Max Mvar
Min Mvar
Generator rated voltage

Generator voltage variation
Generator design active power generation
Generator maximum reactive power generation
Generator minimum reactive power generation
Auxiliary Load (Optional)
Auxiliary Load MW
Auxiliary Load Mvar
Generator unit auxiliary real power

Generator unit auxiliary reactive power
32-10
Output Reports
32.5 Output Reports

The Transformer Tap Optimization calculation results are reported both in the Transformer editor as well
as in Crystal Reports format. The Crystal Reports format provides you with the detailed information of a
Transformer Turn Optimization calculation. The Transformer Tap Optimization Report Manager gives
you access to the Output Reports.
32.5.1 Transformer Tap Optimization Report Manager

Click on the Transformer Tap Optimization Report Manager button to open the Report Manager. The
report manager allows you to select formats available for different portions of the report and view it via
Crystal Reports. The editor includes three pages (Complete, Input, and Result) representing different
sections of the Output Report.
Complete Page
You can select the Complete Output Report from this page. The complete report consists of input and
result sections of the report.
You can view the report in the viewer, or select a format to print to e-mail by clicking one of the selection
buttons (PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or MS Excel).
32-11
Output Reports
The first page of the Complete Report gives the system input data and other cover page information as
shown below:
32-12
Output Reports
The second page of the Complete Report displays the calculated optimal transformer tap both in % and in
kV. It then tabulates the system operating conditions under different system voltage and generator
voltage. The covered system operating voltage range is from 95% to 105% of its nominal operating
voltage, and the covered generator operating voltage range is also from 95% to 105% of its rated voltage.
In this table, generator MW and Mvar generation, generator terminal voltage, and the transformer input
power and output power are reported at the optimal tap setting.
32-13
Output Reports
Input Page
This page provides the data format for input data. You can view the report in the viewer, or select a
format to print to e-mail by clicking one of the selection buttons (PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or
MS Excel).
The Cover Data Report gives the input data. This report is the same as the first page of the the Complete
Report.
32-14
Output Reports
Result Page
This page provides different data formats for calculation results.
32-15
Output Reports
The following is a sample of the Results Report:
32-16
Chapter 33
To assure the safe operation of DC systems, whenever there are any changes in the system related to
sources, loads, and power transmission components, a DC Short-Circuit Analysis must be carried out to
evaluate system conditions under a fault and assess protective device ratings. A complete short-circuit
calculation should provide details of fault current variations at the fault location as well as for
contributing branches, from the initiation of the fault to its end. Due to the complexities involved in
source behaviors and the nonlinearity characteristics of the equipment, such calculations are very
extensive and therefore the maximum short-circuit current is often calculated for examination of
protective device ratings.
33-1
Overview
In compliance with IEEE Standard 946, the ETAP DC Short-Circuit Module calculates the total fault
current, current contributions from different sources, and the rise time constant of the total fault current. It
can conduct calculations on both radial and looped systems. The fault under consideration is a shortcircuit between the positive and the negative terminals at the fault location. The contributing sources to
the short-circuit current include charger/rectifier, UPS, battery, and DC motor. These sources can be
modeled as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind an impedance. For a
charger/rectifier source, the AC system equivalent impedance on the AC side can also be considered.
For each DC protective device, ETAP calculates the bus fault current as well as the maximum current that
flows through the device and flags the user in a prominent color for underrated devices.
The calculation results are reported in a Crystal Reports format as well as in a one-line diagram display.
The Crystal Reports format provides detailed information about the study, including all the input data
used in the calculation, fault current, contributions from different sources, and device rating validation
summary, etc. The user can customize the format and content of the Crystal Reports output report. The
one-line diagram display provides you with a direct visual representation of the system under fault
conditions. It displays the short-circuit current at the faulted bus, fault current contributions on
surrounding branches, as well as the system voltage profile under the fault.
33-2
Study Toolbar
33.1 Study Toolbar

The DC Short-Circuit Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in DC Short-Circuit Study
Mode.
Run DC Short-Circuit Analysis

DC Short-Circuit Display Options
DC Short-Circuit Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run DC Short-Circuit Analysis

Click on this button to run a DC short-circuit calculation.
Display Options
Click on this button to customize the information and results annotations displayed on the one-line
diagram in DC Short-Circuit mode.
DC Short-Circuit Report Manager

Click on this button to open the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager. You can specify the Crystal Reports
format for your output reports here. A detailed explanation of the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager is in
the Output Reports section.

Click on the Stop Sign button to halt the current calculation.
Get Online Data

Get Archived Data

33-3
Study Case Editor

The DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains parameter settings required to perform a short-circuit
calculation. The calculation results are dependent on these settings. When a new study case is created,
ETAP provides you with the default parameters. However, you should check these parameters to make
sure that they are set as required.
The DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains two pages: the Info page and the Source Model page.
On the Info page, you can select faulted buses and specify contribution level, etc. In the Source Model
page, you specify the type of model for chargers and batteries, as well as what loads need to be
considered in a study.
33.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 12 characters.
Report
Specify the contribution level the report should encompass.
Bus Selection
33-4
Study Case Editor
Use this area to select which buses to Fault, Dont Fault, or click on the All Buses checkbox to fault all
buses.
Note: You can fault buses (or remove faults) directly from the one-line diagram by right-clicking on the
desired bus.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remark box. The information entered here will be
information regarding each study case. The first line of the header information is global for all study cases
and entered in the Project Information editor.
33.2.2 Source Model Page

This page allows you to specify the type of models you wish the program to use in a short-circuit
calculation.
Charger Contributions Based on

A charger can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects a constant current into the system when a fault occurs.
33-5
Study Case Editor
Editor Selection
Click on this option to select the model type as specified in the editor for individual chargers.
Fixed SC Contribution
Click on this option to use the constant current model for all the charges in the system.
AC System Impedance
Click on this option to use the constant voltage model for all the charges in the system.
Battery Contributions Based on

A battery can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects a constant current into the system when a fault occurs. The current
injected into the system is equal to a constant multiplied by its 1-minute discharge rate.
Editor Selection
Click on this option to select the model type as specified in the editor for individual batteries.
Constant Current (K*1-Min-Rating*String)

Click on this option to use the constant current model for all the batteries in the system.
Voc Behind Battery Impedance

Click on this option to use the constant voltage model for all the batteries in the system.
Motor Internal Voltage

A motor, or the motor load portion of a lump load, is modeled as a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. You can specify the internal voltage value by selecting one of the following two options:
100% of Motor Rated Voltage

Click on this option to use the motor rated voltage as the internal voltage.
Percent of Motor Rated Voltage

Click on this option to specify the motor internal voltage in percent based on the motor rated voltage.
Short-Circuit Contributions Based on

This group provides you with an option to skip certain load elements in a short-circuit analysis.
Static loads are also considered in a DC Short-Circuit Analysis and their presence reduces total fault
current.
Load Status Only

Select this option to include loads in the Short-Circuit Study based on load status. For the current system
configuration, loads that have either the Continuous or Intermittent status will be considered in the study.
Loads that have the Spare status will be excluded from the study. When this option is selected, all of the
Composite CSD loads will be included in the study.
Load Category Only

Select this option to use the loading percent to determine which loads will be included in the short-circuit
calculation. Once this option is selected, you can specify a loading category in the Loading Category
selection box. All loads that have non-zero loading percent for the selected Loading Category will be
included in the short-circuit calculation.
33-6
Study Case Editor
Use Both Above Options

Select this option to use both load status and loading category to determine loads to be included in the
short-circuit calculation. When this option is selected, all the loads that satisfy either or both of the above
two criterions will be included in the Short-Circuit Study.
33-7
Display Options

The DC Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, ACDC, and Color information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
33.3.1 Results Page
33-8
Display Options
Show Units
When this box is checked the unit for the calculation results will be displayed on the one-line diagram
along with the results.
Voltage
Bus
Click on this checkbox to display bus voltage on the one-line diagram.
Bus Voltage Unit Selection

From the drop-down list you can select to display bus voltage as a percentage or in volts.
Display Faulted Bus

Fault Current Rise Time-Constant
Click on this option to display the fault current rise time-constant in ms for faulted buses.
Equivalent Fault R
Click on this option to display the equivalent fault resistance in ohms for faulted buses.
Display Contribution
Converter, Battery, & Load
Click on any or all of these checkboxes to display short-circuit contribution from these components on the
one-line diagram.
33-9
Display Options
33.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
33-10
Display Options
Rating
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
PT & CT
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
Connection Type Number of Phases - Number of Wires)
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
kV
A
Z
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
% LRC
Impedance in ohms
33-11
Display Options
D-Y
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

Click on this checkbox to use ETAPs default display options
33.3.3 AC-DC Page

ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
33-12
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Display Options
Rating
kVA
HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
Use Default Options

33-13
Display Options
33.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Annotations
33-14
Display Options
Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously selected.
33-15
Calculation Methods

The ETAP DC Short-Circuit module can perform fault analysis for a radial or a looped system. It
calculates the maximum system fault current and contributions from individual sources. The fault under
consideration is assumed to be a short-circuit between the positive and negative terminals at the fault
location. Fault current contributing sources include chargers/rectifiers, UPS, batteries, and DC motors.
These sources can be modeled either as constant current sources or constant voltage sources behind
impedance, as specified by the user. It is assumed that these sources will reach their maximum
contribution level at the same time, which results in a conservative solution. ETAP also calculates the rise
time of fault current based on the equivalent R and L at the fault location. When calculating short-circuit
current, inductance values for all of the system components are neglected. These inductance values are
used in calculating fault current rise time.
33.4.1 Procedure for DC Short-Circuit Calculation

In a DC short-circuit calculation, a contributing source may be represented by different models, either as a
voltage source or as a current source. Even the sources that are represented as constant voltage sources
may have different per unit values. This is different from the AC short-circuit calculation by the IEEE
method, where a prefault voltage is specified and a circuit network is solved to find the fault current. In
the DC short-circuit calculation, a two-step procedure is adopted that applies the superposition theorem to
calculate fault current. The two steps are voltage profile calculation and short-circuit current calculation.
In the first step of the calculation, the short-circuit current sources such as charger, UPS, battery, and
motor are modeled as specified in the study case editor and individual element editors. They may be
modeled as constant current sources or as constant voltage sources behind impedance. Based on this
system, a load flow calculation is conducted to determine system voltage profile and current flows. These
voltage values will be used in the second step as the prefault voltage for short current calculation.
In the second step of the calculation, the program calculates fault current and contributions for each bus to
be faulted with the bus voltage calculated in the first step as the prefault voltage.
In addition to fault current, the program also calculates the equivalent R and L at the faulted bus, based on
the separate R and L network. Using the equivalent R and L, it calculates the current rise time constant for
the fault.
33.4.2 Short-Circuit Current Rise Time Constant Calculation

The short-circuit current reaches its maximum value at a rate depending on the system configuration and
the resistance and inductance values of all the elements in the system. For a radial system, it depends on
the system R/L ratio, which is simple to calculate. However, for a looped network with multiple sources,
it is rather complicated to determine the rise time constant of the short-circuit current.
ETAP calculates the rise time constant based on the equivalent R and L at the fault location.
33-16
Calculation Methods
33.4.3 Device Rating Evaluation

One of the major purposes of conducting a short-circuit calculation is to evaluate the device rating under
fault conditions, such as bus rating and protective device ratings. For each DC protective device, ETAP
calculates the bus fault current and the maximum current that flows through the device. The program then
compares the device rating against the maximum through current. If an underrated condition occurs,
ETAP will flag the underrated condition in the text report as well as in the one-line display.
33.4.4 Component Models

Charger
A charger can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. As a constant current source, it injects into the system a constant current equal to its rated
current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of the charger editor.
When modeled as a constant voltage source behind impedance, the rated voltage is used as the internal
voltage. The AC system Z specified in the Short-Circuit page of the Charger editor is converted to the DC
side and used as the impedance in the model.
UPS
A UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) is represented as a constant current source. It injects into the
system a constant current equal to its rated current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of
the UPS editor.
Battery
A battery can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects into the system a constant current equal to its 1 minute discharging
current multiplied by a K factor specified in the Short-Circuit page of the Battery Editor.
When modeled as a constant voltage source behind impedance, the internal voltage depends on the option
selected in the Battery Editor. These options include using the rated voltage or the value calculated based
on the battery specific gravity and minimum operating temperature.
DC Converter
A DC converter is used to change the voltage level in a DC system. If a fault occurs on the output side of
the system, the DC converter is modeled as a constant current source injecting into the system a constant
current. This current is equal to its rated current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of the
DC Converter Editor.
When calculating fault current contributions, the calculation does not extend into the input side of the
system. In case a DC converter has the same input and output rated voltage values and is involved in any
loop as the only DC converter, the calculation will stop and post a message to inform the user.
33-17
Calculation Methods
DC Motor
A DC motor is modeled as a constant voltage source behind impedance. The internal voltage value can be
specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The impedance is specified in the Short-Circuit page
of the DC Motor Editor.
DC Lumped Load
The constant power portion of a DC lumped load is modeled as a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. The internal voltage value can be specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case editor. The
impedance is specified in the Short-Circuit Imp page of the DC Lumped Load editor.
Note: Only the motor loads of the lumped loads contribute short-circuit currents, i.e., if the percent motor
load of a lumped load is greater than zero, the motor load part will be modeled the same as a DC motor.
The static load part will be represented as a static load and the constant current load portion will be
ignored in the short-circuit calculation.
DC Static and Composite CSD Loads

DC static loads are included in short-circuit calculations. The presence of static loads provides shunt paths
for short-circuit current and hence reduce the total fault current. A Composite CSD (CCSD) load is
treated the same as a static load.
DC Cable
In order to achieve conservative results, in a DC short-circuit analysis, the cable resistance is calculated at
the minimum temperature entered in the Cable editor.
33-18
Required Data
33.5 Required Data

33.5.1 Source
Charger
Info Page
Charger ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page is required for DC Load Flow calculations
SC Page
Data in the SC Contribution for DC System section

AC System Z data is required if the Based on AC System Z option is selected
UPS
Info Page
UPS ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
AC rating data
DC rating data
Auction diode option
SC Imp Page
SC Contribution to DC System section data
Battery
Info Page
Battery ID
Bus connection data
Number of strings
Rating Page
Number of cells
SC Page
Battery Library type data: Rp, time constant, SG, VPC, and 1-min-rating
Short-circuit model data
External impedance data
Voc per cell data
33-19
Required Data
33.5.2 Load
DC Motor
Info Page
Motor ID
Bus connection data
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating data
Load category data
SC Page
SC parameters
Lump Load
Info Page
Lump load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data

Motor/static load percent
Load category data
SC Imp Page
SC parameters
Static Load
Info Page
Static load ID
Bus connection data
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data

Load category data
33-20
Required Data
CCSD Load
Info Page
CCSD load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data

Load category data
33.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
Info Page
Cable ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Number of cables per phase
Impedance Page
Cable resistance and inductance

Units section data
Base and minimum operating temperature
DC Impedance
Info Page
DC impedance ID
Bus connection data
Impedance resistance and inductance
33.5.4 DC Converter
Info Page
DC converter ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data

SC contribution data
33-21
Required Data
33.5.5 Protective Device

If the data for a protective device has been entered by the user, the DC short-circuit calculation will
compare the short-circuit current against device rating and flag the user if the device is underrated.
DC CB
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
SC kA
DC Fuse
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rated V
Interrupting kA
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
Momentary kA
DC Double-Throw Switch
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
Momentary kA
33.5.6 Study Case

Similar to any other study, you are always required to run a DC short-circuit calculation. When a DC
short-circuit calculation is initiated by the user, ETAP uses the study case currently showing in the study
case editor in the calculation. Every field in a study case has its default value. However, it is important to
set the values in the study case correctly to meet your calculation requirements.
33-22
Output Reports
33.6 Output Reports

The DC short-circuit calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal
Reports format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated fault currents, time constant for
current rise, equivalent resistance at the faulted bus, as well as fault contributions from neighboring buses.
You can use the Display Options editor to specify the content to be displayed. It also flags underrated
protective devices in red.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a DC Short-Circuit Analysis. You
can utilize the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager to help you view the output report.
33.6.1 DC Short-Circuit Report Manager

To open the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager, click on the Report Manager button on the DC ShortCircuit toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing
different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for
Output Report Name

Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel
of the output report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to close the
editor without viewing the report.
33-23
Output Reports
Complete Page
On this page there is only one format available, Complete, which opens the complete report for the DC
Short-Circuit Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
Format, or Excel formats. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default
checkbox.
33-24
Output Reports
Input Data Page

include:
Battery
Branch
Bus
Cable
Converter
Cover
Impedance
Loads
checkbox.
33-25
Output Reports
Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the short-circuit result portion of the Output Report.
checkbox.
33-26
Output Reports
Summary Page
This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the Output Report. The only summary
report format available is the Interrupting Current format.
checkbox.
33-27
Output Reports

automatically opens the output report, which is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format.
In the picture shown below, the output report name is DCSC and the selected format is Complete.
33.6.3 Input Data

Input data are grouped together according to element type. The following are some samples of input data.
Cable & Impedance Data

The cable and impedance input data page prints resistance and inductance values for these branches,
along with connection information. The resistance value for cables has been adjusted to the minimum
operating temperature. The inductance value is used to calculate time constant for fault current rise.
33-28
Output Reports
Converter Input Data

The converter input data section includes converter rating and the model used in the study. UPS and DC
converters are always represented as constant current sources. A charger may be modeled as a constant
voltage source behind system Z or a constant current source, depending on the selection in the DC ShortCircuit Study Case Editor and the Charger Editor. When modeled as a constant V behind system Z, the
constant V is the charger AC input bus voltage converted to the DC side based on the rated voltage ratio.
The value is printed in the Vsys column.
Load Data
The load data section prints input data for motors, lump loads, static loads, and CCSD loads. The Vin
column shows the internal voltage of motors and the motor load portion of lump loads.
33-29
Output Reports
33.6.4 Short-Circuit Report

This section of the report shows the calculation results, arranged in such a way that each faulted bus is
started from a new page. It shows the total fault current as well as bus voltage and short-circuit
contributions from the neighboring buses up to the level specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case
editor. It also prints the equivalent R and L at the faulted bus and the time constant for fault current rise.
33-30
Output Reports
33.6.5 Short-Circuit Summary

The Summary page presents the comparison between fault current and protective device capability. In
order for the program to make the comparison, the interrupting capability has to be entered from the
editors of individual protective devices. The kA Fault Current column prints the total bus fault current as
well as the maximum fault current flowing through the protective device. If the device capability is less
than the maximum fault current for a device, a flag will be raised for the device.
33-31
Chapter 34

The DC power system is an integral part of the entire electric power system, providing power to control
circuits and backup power during emergency conditions. It includes DC power sources, their distribution
systems, and vital supporting systems that supply power to critical equipment.
Due to lack of analytical tools in the past, DC power system design and validation studies have been
mainly done by hand-calculations, limited to simplified calculations on simple system configurations.
Such simplified hand-calculations cannot meet todays requirement for DC system analysis, especially for
the nuclear power industry. The ETAP Load Flow Analysis Module is the perfect tool to perform DC
system studies. It provides a diversity of DC components and calculations required for conducting DC
power system design and validation studies. It can handle any system configuration at ease, including
radial system; loop system and AC-DC interconnected system.
A variety of DC components and AC-DC power conversion components are available for you to model
the DC power system, including:
DC battery
DC bus and node
DC cable
DC machine, static load, lumped load, and Composite CSD (CCSD) load
DC protective devices, such as circuit breaker, fuse, switch, and contact
DC composite network and DC composite motor
DC-DC converter
AC-DC power conversion components, such as charger/rectifier, inverter, and UPS
DC load flow analysis is an essential study for DC system design and operating condition assessment.
The ETAP Load Flow Program calculates bus voltage profile and branch power flows for a user-specified
loading category. It validates the calculated operating conditions against element operating limits, such as
bus maximum/minimum operating voltage, branch allowable current, and source maximum output, etc. In
case any abnormal operating condition occurs in the system, ETAP flags the user in the one-line diagram
by showing the element in an outstanding color.
34-1
Overview
In order to simulate correctly various operating modes for AC-DC interface components in actual
operations, ETAP provides different models to represent them in load flow studies. It automatically
selects the one that is suitable for the actual operating condition. For example, a charger may be operating
in constant voltage, constant current or non-effective modes, depending on its terminal bus voltage and
loading conditions.
The calculation results are reported in a Crystal Reports format as well as in the one-line diagram display.
The Crystal Reports format provides detailed information about the study, including all the input data
used in the calculation, system voltage profile, branch power flows, and overloading validation results,
etc. The one-line diagram display provides you with a direct visual representation of system operating
conditions.
34-2
Study Toolbar
34.1 Study Toolbar

The DC Load Flow Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in DC Load Flow Study Mode.
Run DC Load Flow Studies

DC Load Flow Display Options
DC Load Flow Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run DC Load Flow Studies

Click on this button to run a DC load flow calculation using the parameters currently selected in the DC
Load Flow Study Case Editor. ETAP will give you error message list indicating missing information if
your system is not set up properly.
DC Load Flow Display Options

diagram in DC Load Flow Mode.
DC Load Flow Report Manager

Click on this button to open the DC Load Flow Report Manager. The Report Manager allows you to
select the Crystal Reports format for your output reports. A detailed explanation of the DC Load Flow
Report Manager is in the Output Reports section.

Click on the Stop Sign button to halt the current calculation.
Get On-Line Data

Get Archived Data

34-3
Study Case Editor

The DC Load Flow Study Case Editor allows you to specify variables related to DC load flow
calculations and Output Reports.
Study Case ID
ID, which consists of the letters DCLF plus an integer, starting with the number 1 and increases as the
number of study cases increases.
Solution Parameters (Newton-Raphson)

The ETAP DC load flow study uses the Newton-Raphson Method for calculation.
Max. Iteration
of iterations, a message will show up to flag the user.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision to be used to check for convergence. This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. A load flow solution is considered reached if, between two
iterations, the maximum bus voltage difference in per unit is less than the specified precision value.
34-4
Study Case Editor
Loading
Loading Category
Select one of the 10 Loading Categories for this Load Flow Study. The selection applies to all DC load
elements and UPS.

None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Max.
When the maximum loading option is selected, each load will be multiplied by the Maximum Load
Diversity Factor entered in the Bus editor for the bus where the load is connected.
Bus Min.
When the minimum loading option is selected, each load will be multiplied by the Minimum Load
Diversity Factor entered in the Bus editor for the bus where the load is connected.
The minimum bus loading study option may be used to check system voltages under a minimum (light)
loading condition.

When this option is selected, the Constant kVA and Constant Z edit boxes will be enabled, allowing you
to enter the diversity factors in percent for constant kVA and constant impedance loads.
These factors are global throughout the whole system. A motor load multiplying factor of 125% implies
that the motor loads of all buses are increased by 25% above their nominal values. This value can be
smaller or greater than 100%.
Constant kVA
Enter the global diversity factor in percent for constant kVA loads.
Constant Z
Enter the global diversity factor in percent for constant impedance loads.
Inverter Loading
There are two options for including inverter loads: Operating Load and Loading Category.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the load displayed in the operating load section on the Loading page of the
Inverter Editor. When the operating load is used, the diversity factor will not be applied to the inverter
load. These operating loading values can only be updated by running an AC load flow calculation. They
cannot be edited directly by the user.
34-5
Study Case Editor
Loading Category
Select this option to use the loading category selected in the Category list.
Motor Load
A motor normally behaves as a constant power load when its terminal voltage is close to its rated voltage.
However, when its terminal voltage deviates considerably from its rated voltage, its behavior becomes
similar to a static load. This group allows you to set the voltage range within which you want a motor to
be modeled as a constant power load.
Constant kW if V is within Range

Click on this checkbox for setting VMin and VMax. If this box is not checked, all of the motor loads will
be modeled as constant power loads regardless of their terminal voltage. Please note that when only
constant current sources in the system are present, this can prohibit load flow calculations from reaching a
solution.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage as a percentage of its rated voltage, below which the motor load will be
modeled as a constant impedance load.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage as a percentage of its rated voltage, above which the motor load will be
modeled as a constant impedance load.
Initial Condition
Use Bus Voltage
Select this option to use the initial voltage value in the Bus editor as the initial voltage in a load flow
calculation. The bus initial voltage can be updated automatically in load flow studies.
Use Fixed Value

This option allows you to specify a flat initial voltage for all buses in a load flow calculation.
Report
Critical Voltage
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum voltages that any bus may achieve before it is
flagged and included in the critical undervoltage and overvoltage bus summary report.
Marginal Voltage
flagged as a marginally undervoltage or overvoltage bus.
Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference by clicking on Percent or kV.
Update
The selected options will be updated after the subsequent load flow run.
34-6
Study Case Editor
Initial Bus Voltage

Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of this load flow run.
Charger/UPS Operating Load

Select this option to update the load provided by chargers/rectifiers. When a UPS is operating as a source
to the DC system, its operating load will also be updated. The AC loads for these sources are calculated
based on the DC power they provide, the losses involved, and their operating power factor.
Study Remarks
information regarding each study case. The first line of the header information is global for all study cases
and entered in the Project Information editor.
34-7
Display Options

The DC Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
and Color information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
34.3.1 Results Page
Show Units
When this box is checked the unit for the calculation results will be displayed on the one-line diagram
Voltage
Bus
Click on this checkbox to show the bus voltage in the one-line diagram.
Bus Display Unit

From the drop-down list box, you can select to display the bus voltage in percent or in volt.
34-8
Display Options
Power Flows
Power Flow Display Units
Select to display the power flow in kW or MW.
kW and Amp
Select the kW to display power flow Amp to display current in ampere.
% Voltage Drop
Click on the Cable/Z checkbox to display voltage drop across cables and impedance.
Branch Losses
Click on the kW checkbox to display branch losses in kW.
Flow Results
Click on these checkboxes to display load flow results for different types of elements, including Branch,
Source, Load/UPS, Composite Motor, and Composite Network.
34-9
Display Options
34.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
34-10
Display Options
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
kVA/MVA
Base MVA
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
kV
A
Z
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
% LRC
Impedance in %
Impedance in ohms
D-Y
one-line diagram.
34-11
Display Options
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

Click on this checkbox to display equipment cables symbols. This option does not display cable
information. Double-click on the equipment cable symbol to open up the Cable Editor for the selected
cable.
34-12
Display Options
34.3.3 AC-DC Page

ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
kVA
HP/kW
34-13
Display Options
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
Click on this checkbox to display the AC Composite Network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
Use Default Options

34-14
Display Options
34.3.4 Colors Page

Color Page Theme

Annotations
Theme
User-Defined
34-15
Display Options
Theme Button
Theme Editor
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the Set Global option has been previously
selected.
34-16
Calculation Methods

The ETAP DC Load Flow calculation is an iterative process, due to the presence of constant power loads
and power converter components. The objective of a load flow calculation is to find bus voltage values
with specified system loads and sources. Based on the obtained bus voltage results, branch flows can then
be calculated. The Newton-Raphson method is used in solving DC load flow calculations. This method is
fast in convergence speed, bus it has a relatively high requirement on initial bus voltage values.
In a DC load flow calculation, the loads involved in the system are constant power loads and constant
impedance loads. The sources include constant voltage source and constant current source. A constant
voltage source maintains its terminal bus voltage at a fixed value, while a constant current source injects a
fixed value of current into the system.
Because a converter component, such as a charger, has a maximum current limit, it is a constant voltage
source only when its output current is not larger than its current limit. Once the output current is over the
limit, it becomes a current source. Therefore, the operating mode of a converter component and its model
cannot be predefined. It varies depending on system loads and configurations, and is determined during
the process of calculation.
Newton-Raphson Method
The Newton-Raphson method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:
J V = I
where I is a vector for bus current injection mismatch between the specified value and the calculated
value. Here the constant power loads are converted to current injections using the calculated voltage. V
is a vector for bus voltage incremental and J is a coefficient matrix called the Jacobian Matrix.
The Newton-Raphson method possesses a unique quadratic convergence characteristic. It usually has a
very fast convergence speed compared to other load flow calculation methods. However, the method is
highly dependent of the initial value of bus voltages. A careful selection of bus voltage initial values is
strongly recommended.
When the system contains constant power loads and a charger (or a UPS) is the only source in the system,
and the source is overloaded and changes to a constant current source, there may be problems in reaching
a solution. This can occur when the source switches to a constant current source; it provides less current
than it would as a constant voltage source. For a constant power load, its terminal voltage increases when
it draws less current in order to maintain a constant power. It can lead to abnormally high voltage values
as the calculation resolves. At such high voltage values, the motor loads actually behave as constant
impedance loads. In order to resolve this situation, you may check the option of Constant kW if V within
Range in the study case and properly set the VMin and VMax values.
34-17
Calculation Methods
34.4.1 Component Models and Operations

Charger
Model
In DC load flow calculations, a charger can be represented in one of three models: constant voltage source
model, constant current source model, and inactive mode model.
A charger is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus voltage at the
regulated value specified in the Charger editor. However, when the current drawn from the charger is
more than Imax, the maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage constant at the
same time, it becomes a constant current source. The current drawn from the charger is then kept at Imax,
while the terminal voltage drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.
Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a charger, it will try to raise the
voltage to the regulated value until the charger current reaches Imax. On the contrary, if for some reason,
such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher than the
charger regulated voltage, the charger becomes inactive as if it is switched off from the system.
Operating Mode
As a constant voltage source, a charge can operate in either the Constant Vdc Mode or the Fixed Firing
Angle mode, depending on the selection made in the Rating page of the Charger Editor.
In the Constant Vdc Mode, the charger output voltage is regulated at either the floating voltage or the
equalizing voltage, as selected in the Rating page of the Charger Editor.
In the Fixed Firing Angle Mode, the output voltage depends on the firing angle and the input bus voltage
value. When the load to the charge varies, its output voltage should change accordingly. However, since
the internal voltage drop of a charger is not considered in the calculation, the charger output voltage is
assumed to be constant in the load flow studies.
Converter
From the Information page of the Charger Editor, you may select the type of charger as Converter, which
means it is actually a rectifier. As a rectifier, it behaves almost the same as a charger, except that it does
not have floating and equalizing voltage values. When operating in the Constant Vdc Mode, the regulated
voltage is equal to its rated output voltage.
UPS
UPS as Source or Load
To the DC system, a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) can be a source or a load. When a UPS is
connected to an energized input AC bus and it does not have an auction diode (the Auction Diode option
in the Rating page of the UPS Editor is not checked), it is considered as a source to the DC system.
When a UPS is not connected to an energized AC input bus, it becomes a load to the DC system.
34-18
Calculation Methods
When a UPS is connected to an energized input AC bus, but it has an auction diode, the diode prevents
the flow from entering into the DC system, so the UPS will not be a source to the DC system. In this case,
either the DC system or the AC input bus may provide the power to loads connected to the UPS output
AC bus, depending on the voltage values of the AC input bus and the DC bus. After converting to the
UPS AC output terminal using the UPS rated voltage ratio, if the DC bus voltage is higher than the AC
bus voltage, the DC system will provide the power to the UPS output load; otherwise, the AC input bus
provides the power to the load.
UPS as Source to the DC System

A UPS behaves very similarly to a charger when operating as a source to the DC system. It can be
represented in one of three models: constant voltage source model, constant current source model, and
inactive mode model.
As a source, a UPS is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus
voltage at its rated voltage. However, when the current drawn from the UPS is more than Imax, the
maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage constant at the same time, it becomes
a constant current source. The current drawn from the UPS is then kept at Imax, while the terminal voltage
drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.
Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a UPS, it will try to raise the
voltage to the regulated value, until the UPS current reaches Imax. On the contrary, if for some reason,
such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher than the UPS
regulated voltage, the UPS becomes inactive as if it is switched off from the system.
Constant Voltage Source Operating Mode

As a constant voltage source, a UPS can operate in either the Constant Vdc mode or the Fixed Firing
Angle mode, depending on the selections made in the Rating page of the UPS Editor.
In the Constant Vdc mode, the UPS output voltage is regulated at its rated DC voltage.
In the Fixed Firing Angle mode, the output voltage depends on the firing angle and the input bus voltage
value. When the load to the UPS varies, its output voltage should change accordingly. However, since the
internal voltage drop of a UPS is not considered in the calculation, the UPS output voltage is assumed to
be constant in Load Flow Studies.
UPS as Load to the DC System

When a UPS is a load to the DC system, it is a constant kW load. The loading category load is used in
Load Flow Studies.
Battery
Under normal operation conditions, a battery serves as a backup source. It actively provides power to
loads only when other sources, such as chargers, become de-energized or fail to maintain system voltage
at the required level.
In DC load flow analyses, a battery can be represented in one of two models: a constant voltage source
model or an inactive mode model. When the terminal bus voltage is higher or equal to the rated voltage of
a battery, it is in the inactive mode and is not supplying any power to the system. A battery that has just
been discharged is actually a load to the DC system. Due to the complexity in determining quantitatively
the load for a charging battery, it is not considered as a load in the DC load flow analysis. It is considered
in the battery sizing calculation.
34-19
Calculation Methods
When the terminal bus voltage of a battery is lower than its rated voltage, the battery becomes an active
source. It is represented by a constant voltage source (at battery rated voltage) behind battery resistance.
DC Converter
A DC converter can change DC voltage from one level to another, either increasing or decreasing the
voltage value. It has the capability of regulating the output voltage as long as it is not overloaded. It is
unidirectional in terms of power flow, allowing the current flowing from the input terminal to the output
terminal only.
In DC load flow calculations, a DC converter can be represented in one of three models: constant voltage
source model, constant current source model, and inactive mode model.
A DC converter is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus voltage at
the regulated value specified in the DC converter editor. However, when the current drawn from the DC
converter is more than Imax, the maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage
constant at the same time, it becomes a constant current source. The current drawn from the DC converter
is then kept at Imax, while the terminal voltage drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.
Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a DC converter, it will try to
raise the voltage to the regulated value, until the DC converter current reaches Imax. On the contrary, if for
some reason, such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher
than the DC converter regulated voltage, the DC converter becomes inactive as if it is switched off from
the system.
When a DC converter is operating as a source, either a constant voltage source or a constant current
source, it is a constant power load to its input bus, with a load equal to output power plus converter losses.
34.4.2 Factors Considered in DC Load Flow Calculations

Load Flow Convergence
DC load flow may have convergence problems for some ill-conditioned systems and some special
operating conditions due to the iterative process used for solving load flow and the Newton-Raphson
Method used.
You should consider a system that contains motor loads and a charger (or a UPS) as the only source in the
system. If the source is overloaded and it changes to a constant current source, there may be problems in
reaching a solution. This is because when the source switches to a constant current source, it provides less
current than it would as a constant voltage source. For a constant power load, its terminal voltage
increases when it is drawing less current in order to maintain a constant power. It can lead to abnormally
high voltage values and causes the calculation process to fail to converge.
In the real world, at such high voltage values, the motor loads actually behave as constant impedance
loads. In order to resolve this situation, the DC load flow study case provides you with the opportunity to
set a voltage range for motor loads to be modeled as constant power loads. In the DC Load Flow Study
Case Editor, you can check the option of Constant kW if V within Range and properly set the VMin
and VMax values. Once the motor terminal voltage is outside this range, the motor will be modeled as a
constant impedance load. However, inverter or UPS loads are always modeled as constant power loads.
34-20
Required Data
34.5 Required Data

34.5.1 Source
Charger
Info Page
Charger ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page are required for DC load flow calculations
UPS
Info Page
UPS ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page are required for DC load flow calculations
Loading Page
Loading data. If a UPS is a load to the DC system, that is, when it is not connected to an energized
AC input bus or the Auction Diode option in the Rating page is checked, the data entered is used to
determine the UPS load to the DC system.
Battery
Info Page
Battery ID
Bus connection data
Number of strings
Battery Library type data. The resistance per positive plate (Rp) is used to calculate battery internal
resistance.
Rating Page
Number of cells
Rated voltage
SC Page
External resistance R
34-21
Required Data
34.5.2 Load
DC Motor
Info Page
Motor ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data

Load category data
Lumped Load
Info Page
Lumped load ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Rating Page
Rating section data

Motor/static load percent
Load category data
Static Load
Info Page
Static load ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data

Load category data
34-22
Required Data
CCSD Load
Info Page
CCSD load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data

Load category data
Inverter
Info Page
Inverter ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Rating Page
AC rating section data

DC rating section data
Loading Page
Loading Category data
34.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
Info Page
Cable ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Number of cables per phase
Impedance Page
Cable resistance
Units section data
Base and maximum operating temperature
DC Impedance
Info Page
DC impedance ID
34-23
Required Data
Bus connection data

Impedance resistance
Tie PD (CB, Fuse, Single-Throw, and Double-Throw Switches)

Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
34.5.4 DC Converter
Info Page
DC converter ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data

Operating Vout
34.5.5 Study Case

Similar to any other study, you are always required to run a DC load flow calculation. When a DC load
flow calculation is initiated by the user, ETAP uses the study case currently showing in the Study Case
Editor for the calculation. Every field in a study case has its default value. However, it is important to set
the values correctly in the study case to meet your calculation requirements.
34-24
Output Reports
34.6 Output Reports

The DC load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal Reports
format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows and voltage
drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be
displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and over or under
voltage buses, in different colors.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a DC Load Flow Analysis. You
can utilize the DC Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the output report.
34.6.1 DC Load Flow Report Manager

To open the DC Load Flow Report Manager, click on the View Report File button on the DC Load Flow
toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different
sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different
portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to
every page, as described below.
Output Report Name

Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel

checkbox.
34-25
Output Reports
Complete Page
On this page there is only one format available, Complete, which opens the complete report for the DC
Load Flow Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
checkbox.
34-26
Output Reports
Input Data Page

include:
Battery
Branch
Bus
Cable
Charger
Cover
DC Converter
Impedance
Inverter
Loads
UPS
34-27
Output Reports
Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the load flow result portion of the Output Report.
34-28
Output Reports
Summary Page
This page allows you to select different portions of the load summary to view. Note that some portions of
the summary are available only when you selected specific options in the study case, such as Critical and
Marginal Voltage options.
Branch Flow Summary
Overvoltage & Undervoltage Buses
Summary
Total Sources and Demands
34-29
Output Reports

This is a shortcut for the Report Manger. When you click on the View Output Report button, ETAP
automatically opens the Output Report, which is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format.
In the picture shown below, the output report name is DCLoadFlow and the selected format is Cable.
34.6.3 Input Data

Bus Input Data
34-30
Output Reports
Cable and Impedance Input Data
Charger, UPS and DC Converter Input Data
34-31
Output Reports
Load Input Data
34.6.4 Load Flow Results

The result section of the output report includes the calculated results of a DC Load Flow Analysis,
including bus voltage, bus loading, and branch flows.
34-32
Output Reports
34.6.5 Summary Reports

The load flow summary portion of the output report includes the Branch Flow Summary, the bus over/undervoltage summary, and the summary of total system sources and demands.
34-33
Chapter 35
Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis

Batteries are an essential part of a critical DC power system, serving as the backup power source under
emergency conditions. During normal operating conditions, a DC system is generally powered by AC
sources through chargers or other AC-DC interface components. However, the battery has to provide
power to the system under one of the following conditions:
1. Load on the DC system exceeds the maximum output of the battery charger
2. Output of the battery charger is interrupted
3. Auxiliary AC power is lost
The battery should be sized to meet the most severe of these conditions, which most likely is the third
condition. When the AC power is lost, batteries will provide power to critical loads and control circuits
for a specified time period so that the AC power source can be recovered or the critical equipment can be
adequately shut down. For example, in U.S. nuclear power plants, it is required that batteries have
sufficient capacity to supply the required load during a loss of AC power for field flashing, control
circuits, DC fuel oil booster pumps, and DC lube oil pumps for a period of four hours. In order to meet
this requirement, battery sizing calculations need to be carried out to determine the appropriate battery
size.
The ETAP Battery Sizing Module provides you with a powerful tool to accomplish this task. In
complying with IEEE Standard 485, it determines the number of strings, number of cells, and cell size of
a battery for a designated duty cycle. The number of cells is determined to satisfy the maximum system
voltage during the battery charging period and the minimum system voltage during the battery
discharging period. The number of strings and cell size is determined to provide sufficient power to the
load cycle considering the minimum system voltage and the minimum operating temperature. It also
considers different factors that affect battery performance, such as design margin, aging compensation,
initial capacity, and temperature, etc.
The duty cycle for the battery can be a summation of the duty cycles of all the loads that the battery is to
supply power for. It can also be calculated using DC load flow, which considers different characteristics
of constant power load and constant impedance load, their variations to voltage changes, branch voltage
drops and losses.
35-1
Overview
The battery duty cycle includes both random load and non-random load from individual loads. In
compliance with IEEE Standard 485, the load impulses in the battery duty cycle that are less than one
minute are automatically extended to one minute.
ETAP also provides a Battery Discharging Analysis Module to verify the performance of an existing or a
sized battery. The module calculates the battery capacity, voltage, current, and output power as the battery
discharges through a duty cycle. The battery duty cycle can be calculated from either load current
summation or load flow calculations. When the battery duty cycle is calculated from load flow, the
Battery Discharging Analysis also provides bus voltage and branch power along with battery output
results. Several correction factors used in battery sizing calculation, such as battery temperature, aging
and initial capacity, can also be considered in the battery discharge calculations.
35-2
35.1 Battery Sizing Toolbar

The Battery Sizing Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in Battery Sizing Study Mode.
Run Battery Sizing Calculation

Click on this button to initiate a battery sizing calculation. If the battery size is determined, a battery
discharging calculation will automatically follow to verify the battery capability. An error message
indicating missing information will appear if you have not entered all of the data required for the
calculation.
Run Battery Discharge Calculation

Click on this button to initiate a battery discharge calculation on an existing battery using the method
specified in the Battery Study Case. Just like in battery sizing, ETAP will give you an error message if
any required data is still missing.
Display Options
diagram in Battery Sizing Mode.
Battery Sizing Report Manager

Click on this button to open the Battery Sizing Report Manager. You can also view output reports by
clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case toolbar.
Battery Sizing Plots

Click on this button to view output plots.
35-3

Click on the Stop Sign button to halt the current calculation. The icon button is normally disabled. When
running a DC Load Flow Study, this button becomes enabled. Clicking on this button will terminate the
current calculation. The one line diagram display will not be available if you terminate the calculation
before it completes the output report will be incomplete.
Get Online Data

Get Archived Data

35-4
Study Case Editor

The Battery Sizing Study Case Editor contains parameter settings required to perform a battery sizing
calculation. The calculation results are dependent on these settings. When a new study case is created,
ETAP provides the default parameters. However, it is important to set the values correctly in the study
case to meet your calculation requirements.
The Battery Sizing Study Case Editor includes six pages: Information, Sizing, Discharge, Adjustment,
CSD, and (when the Report CSD Voltage Drop Results box is checked) Alert. You specify the battery to
be sized on the Information Page, select the duty cycle to be considered, and enter the diversity factor that
allows you to globally adjust system load.
On the Sizing page you specify sizing requirements and correction factors for the calculation.
The Discharge page contains parameters for battery discharging calculations.
The Adjustment page allows you to specify modification of equipment and device parameters, such as
resistance adjustment for operating temperature and length tolerance for cable and wire, etc.
On the CSD page, select the options related to Control System Diagrams.
The Alert page allows you to specify options for alerts on Control System Diagrams. This page becomes
enabled only when you have clicked the check box to report voltage drop calculation results in the CSD
page.
35-5
Study Case Editor
35.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
ID for a new Study Case.
Battery
ID
Select a battery to be sized from the drop-down list.
Battery Characteristic Curve

In the battery discharge calculation, the battery voltage at a given time is calculated based on the battery
characteristic curves entered in the battery library. As the battery characteristics are represented by a
limited number of discrete points in the library, interpolation and extrapolation of the battery
characteristic curves are needed in battery voltage calculations. This group provides you with different
options for extracting data from battery characteristic curves. In the previous version of ETAP, these
options were provided as ETAP INI file entries.
35-6
Study Case Editor
Use Time-Amp Curve Interpolate at Fixed Amp

With this option, the Time vs. Amp type curves from battery library will be used directly for interpolation
and extrapolation, and they are always done at fixed ampere value.
Use AH-Amp Curve
With this option, the Time vs. Amp type curves from battery library will first be converted to AH vs.
Amp curves and the converted curves are then used for interpolation and extrapolation. The interpolation
and extrapolation can be done at either fixed AH value or fixed Amp value.
Use AH-Amp Curve Interpolate at Fixed Amp
With this option, the Time vs. Amp type curves from battery library will be used directly for interpolation
and extrapolation, and they are always done at fixed ampere value.
Calculation Method
In this group, you specify the method used for determining the battery duty cycle based on duty cycle of
individual loads.
Load Summation
Select this option to determine the battery duty cycle by using the load summation method. The battery
duty cycle will be equal to the sum of the load duty cycles for all the loads powered by the battery. This
method treats all loads as constant current type loads.
Load Flow Calculation
Select this option to determine the battery duty cycle by performing DC load flow calculations. This
method considers branch losses and voltage drops in determining battery duty cycle. When this option is
selected, the Load Model section will be enabled to allow you to specify how to model a load for its duty
cycle.
Load Model
In this group, you specify how to determine load types, such as constant power, constant impedance, or
constant current, for each duty cycle section of a load. This group is applicable only when the Load Flow
Calculation option is selected in the Calculation Method group, since when the Load Summation is
chosen all loads are considered as constant current loads.
Based on Type of Elements

When this option is selected, a load (of the same type) is modeled for the whole duty cycle and the type is
the same as determined in a DC Load Flow Study. For example, a DC motor will be modeled as a
constant power load and a static load will be modeled as a constant impedance load for the whole duty
cycle. The Type specified in the Duty Cycle page of a load editor is ignored when this option is selected.
Based on Duty Cycle Type

When this option is selected, the Type specified for each section in the duty cycle of a load will be used to
represent the load for that section. For example, as shown in the picture below, load section stage1 will
be modeled as constant current load, load section stage2 will be modeled as constant power load, and
load section stage3 will be modeled as a constant impedance load.
35-7
Study Case Editor
Load
Duty Cycle
Select the duty cycle from the drop-down list for battery sizing. Every load has five different duty cycles.
The name of the duty cycles are defined in Duty Cycle Category in the Project/Setting menu bar.
Duration
Select either the Hours or Duty Cycle Span option to specify the length of time to size the battery. If the
Hours option is selected, you must specify the length of duration (number of hours) by either selecting a
value from the drop-down list or entering a value.
If the Duty Cycle Span option is selected, the Duration will be the longest time span of individual load
duty cycles from all loads involved in the calculation.
Diversity Factor
Specify the load diversity factor in percent. The load used in battery sizing will be multiplied by this
diversity factor.
Correction Factor
Battery Min. Temperature
Click on this option to use the battery minimum temperature from the Battery Editor for battery
temperature correction factor calculation.
User-Defined Temperature
Click on this option to specify a temperature to be used for battery temperature correction factor
calculation.
Aging Compensation
Use this field to enter the aging compensation correction factor in percent to be used in sizing and
discharge calculations.
Initial Capacity
Use this field to enter the initial capacity correction factor in percent to be used for the battery sizing and
discharge calculations.
Study Remarks
information regarding each study case. The first line of the header information is global for all Study
Cases and entered in the Project Information Editor.
35-8
Study Case Editor
35.2.2 Sizing Page
Voltage Requirements
Max. System Voltage Deviation
Specify the maximum system operating voltage as a percentage based on the nominal voltage of the
terminal bus of the battery selected for sizing.
Min. System Voltage Deviation

Specify the minimum system operating voltage as a percentage based on the nominal voltage of the
terminal bus of the battery selected for sizing.
Battery Charge Voltage

Specify the required voltage in V/Cell to charge the battery to be sized.
Battery Min. Discharge Voltage

Specify the minimum discharge voltage in V/Cell for the battery to be sized.
Correction Factor
Use this group to specify the correction factors to be considered in battery sizing calculations.
35-9
Study Case Editor
Temperature
Click on this checkbox to use the temperature correction factor in battery sizing calculations. The
temperature value specified in the Info page is displayed here.
The temperature correction factor is applied according to the IEEE Method described in standard 485 for
correcting cell size in sizing calculations. IEEE provides values between 4C and +52C. Any value
outside of this range is curve fitted using the IEEE recommended curve-shifting method (ETAP checks
the temperature value and provides a user message indicating that the entered temperature is out of
normal range). When the box is not checked, the temperature correction factor is assumed to be 100%.
Aging Compensation
Click on this check box to use the aging compensation correction factor specified in the Info page.
Initial Capacity
Click on this check box to use the initial capacity correction factor specified in the Info page.
Design Margin
Click on this check box to use the design margin correction factor specified in the edit box.
Battery Library
Use Sizes Given in Library Only
Select this option to use only the sizes given in the library. For example, if the library has battery curves
for 11, 13, and 21 plates, then only these three sizes will be considered in the battery sizing calculation.
Use Sizes in Library as Min/Max Range

Select this option to use the sizes given in the library as the maximum and minimum limits. For example,
if the library has battery curves for 11, 13, and 21 plates, then it is assumed that batteries with 15, 17, and
19 plates are also available and the characteristic curves of these sizes are assumed to be the same as that
for the 21-plate battery.
Options
Desirable Number of Cells
When the battery sizing calculation box is checked, , the value entered in the edit box will be the number
of cells for the battery, if this number is within the acceptable range of voltage requirements. In case this
number is outside the acceptable range, the number of the cells will be selected so that the battery rated
voltage is closest to the terminal bus rated voltage.
Update Battery Size

When this box is checked, the battery size will be replaced by the new calculated battery size. This option
is only enabled when the Use Sizes Given in Library Only option has been selected in the Battery Library
group.
35-10
Study Case Editor
35.2.3 Discharge Page
Vd Calculation Parameters
The battery discharge calculation uses the information included in these fields to determine how the
voltage drop calculation will be performed.
Time Step
The Time Step parameter is the time interval at which a plot point is to be generated. A plot point is also
generated at the times when load changes occur. This value will affect time of calculations, especially in
the case that the battery duty cycle is obtained by the load flow method.
Vmax Limit
This feature allows the user to specify the maximum voltage value at the battery terminal. The default
value is 100% of the battery rated voltage. The calculated battery voltage will be limited at this value.
35-11
Study Case Editor
Duty Cycle Span Option

The duty cycle for a battery is an aggregation of all the loads connected, including DC motor, static load,
and control system diagram load. These loads can show variations within seconds or even intervals less
than a second. Considering battery discharging characteristics, IEEE Standard 485 requires that when
sizing a battery, if a discrete load sequence can be established, the load for a one-minute period should
assume the maximum current at any instant within that minute. Hence, the maximum load is expanded to
the whole minimum time span of one minute.
ETAP provides three options for duty cycle span with different features and they may give different
calculated battery and load terminal voltage values. It is recommended that the One-minute Span for
Battery Only option be used, as it is consistent with IEEE-485 standard and provides conservative
battery voltage and more accurate load terminal bus voltage.
Figure 1 show 3 loads in a duty cycle: 40 amperes for 5 seconds, 80 amperes for 10 seconds and 30
amperes for 20 second. Figure 2 is the one-minute span of the duty cycle. 80 amperes is spanned to the
whole minute.
Actual Time Span of Duty Cycle
One-Minute Span for Battery and Load

If this option is selected, in ETAP calculations of battery discharge and load flow, the one-minute span
will be applied to the battery duty cycle as well as load duty cycles used for load flow. This option
performs a load flow calculation with a frequency equal to the time step. Load changes occurring within
a given time step (and specifically within a given minute) do not result in an interim load flow calculation
with this option. The worst (highest) coincident loading within a given time step is summed up internal to
ETAP. The load flow calculation for each time step is performed at the instant within the time period
when the battery coincident loading is greatest. The battery terminal voltage at this instant is determined
based on this amp value (and the cumulative amp hrs removed). The voltages at this instant are reported
for the entire time step.
It should be noted that, since the worst (highest) coincident loading within a given time step is used to
represent system operating condition for the whole time step, it does not guarantee to give the worst
voltage in the time step for all load terminal buses in the system even though this option gives the worst
battery voltage for the time step,
The figure below shows the one-minute span of the duty cycle. Eighty amperes spans the entire minute.
35-12
Study Case Editor
One-minute Span of Duty Cycle

Note: The above figure is the one-minute span of the duty cycle, eighty amperes is spanned to the whole
minute
Load Duty Cycle - No One-minute Span

If this option is selected, in ETAP calculations of battery discharge and load flow, the one-minute span
will be applied for both battery duty cycle as well as load duty cycles used for loads.. This option gives
the most conservative voltage results.. Therefore, this option results in a load flow calculation with a
frequency equal to the time step plus an additional load flow calculation every time the loading changes
within a given time step. As part of the load flow calculation, the battery terminal voltage is recalculated
based on the amps and amp-hours removed at the instant of the load change. Thus, the battery voltage
will change as frequently as the load current changes.
It should be noted that IEEE-485 standard dictates that the battery current used for sizing the battery
within a one minute time period is equal to the highest coincident load current within that minute. This
approach is conservative as it results in the maximum expected battery load current for a given minute
even though the load current can change throughout the minute. The battery voltage will change within a
given minute as the current increases and decreases and as amp-hours are removed from the battery.
However, there is a limit to how quickly the battery terminal voltage will respond to a step change in
load. For example, an instantaneous decrease from 500A to 50 amps may not result in a corresponding
instantaneous increase in cell voltage to a value corresponding to 50A of load assuming the same amphours removed value. The voltage will eventually increase to this value, but the change is not
instantaneous due to the chemical process with the cells.
One-minute Span for Battery Only

If this option is selected, in ETAP calculation of battery discharge, the one-minute span will be applied to
the battery duty cycle, while the actual load time span of the duty cycle will be used for system load flow
calculation. This option is a hybrid of the previous two options. The battery terminal voltage in this
option is fixed within a given minute even if the load current changes within that minute. The battery
terminal voltage is based on the maximum coincident load current within a given minute similar to the
One-minute Span for Battery and Load option.
35-13
Study Case Editor
This method is consistent with IEEE-485 standard for sizing and does not model instantaneous battery
terminal voltage changes resulting from load changes. It performs a load flow every instant that the load
current changes similar to the Load Duty Cycle - No One-minute Span option. Thus, the battery
terminal voltage is fixed for a given time step, but the load flow is performed every time the load current
changes using actual load currents.
Note: For battery sizing calculations, the one-minimum span is always applied on battery duty cycle.
Correction Factors
This group of the battery discharge page provides a set of correction factors to be used during the battery
discharge cycle. Similar to battery sizing calculations, the correction factors have either a positive or a
negative effect on the battery AH capacity (Amp Hour) or the battery duty cycle. With these features, the
user is able to simulate the effect of temperature, battery maintenance conditions, and aging factor on the
battery. The user has the choice of applying the correction factors to the battery duty cycle or to the
battery initial AH capacity. The program calculates a total correction factor by multiplying the
temperature CF and the Aging Compensation CF and then dividing by the initial Capacity CF.
Adjust Battery Duty Cycle Only

This option determines the battery terminal voltage using battery amps multiplied by the total correction
factor in the same manner as in the "Adjust Load Duty Cycle" option. However, when performing the
load flow calculations, the actual uncorrected load currents are used. Thus, the battery terminal voltage is
determined consistent with IEEE 485, however, the load terminal voltages are not unnecessarily low due
to load currents in modeled in excess of the actual load currents
Adjust Load Duty Cycle

If you select this option, the correction factor is applied directly on the duty cycle of individual loads
when carrying out load flow calculations. Based on the load flow calculation results, the battery duty
cycle is formulated and used to discharge the battery without any further correction.
This method reflects the method outlined in IEEE 485 standard, Annex C. The adjusted load currents are
used to determine the voltage drop across the cables throughout the system
Note: This is equivalent to applying diversity factor to the loads. The load diversity factor field is located
in the Info page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case Editor.
Adjust Battery Capacity

When this option is selected, the correction factors are used to modify the battery capacity. This option
imposes a penalty on the battery by removing a certain amount of amp hours from the battery prior to
performing the discharge calculation. The amount of amp hours removed is equal to the amp hour rating
of the battery minus the amp hour rating of the battery divided by the total correction factor. For
example, for a total correction factor of 1.396 and a battery with a 900AH rating, the amp hours removed
from the battery is calculated as 900AH 900AH/1.369 = 255.4 AH.
This method of determining a battery volt/cell value from the fan curve is not contained within IEEE 485
standard, Annex C, however, the bus and node voltages throughout the system are calculated based on
actual currents and not corrected currents. This method provides more realistic system voltages.
35-14
Study Case Editor
Temperature
Click this checkbox if you want the temperature correction factor to be used in battery discharge
calculations. This factor has the effect of either increasing or decreasing battery capacity. The temperature
correction factor is applied according to the IEEE method described in standard 485 for correcting cell
size in sizing calculations. The same standard applies for discharge calculations. IEEE provides values
between 4C and +52C. Any value outside of this range is curve fitted using the IEEE recommended
curve-shifting method. (ETAP checks the temperature value and provides a user message indicating that
the entered temperature is out of normal range). When the box is not checked, the temperature correction
factor is assumed to be 100%.
Aging Compensation
Click this checkbox if you would like to use the aging compensation correction factor in battery discharge
calculations. When this factor is applied, the battery discharge simulation includes a decrease in battery
capacity due to aging. When the box is not checked, the aging correction factor is assumed to be 100%.
Initial Capacity
Click this checkbox to use the initial capacity correction factor percent specified in the Information page.
When the box is not checked, the initial capacity correction factor is assumed to be 100%.
LF Parameters (Newton-Raphson)
This group of the Discharge page becomes active if the Load Flow duty cycle calculation method is
selected form the Info page. If the Current Summation method is used, this group remains grayed out.
Max. Iteration
of iterations, a message will appear to flag the user.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision to be used to check for convergence. This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. A load flow solution is reached if, between two iterations, the
maximum bus voltage difference in per unit is less than the specified precision value.
Initial Condition
Similar to the LF Parameter group, this part of the discharge page only has an effect if the Load Flow
Method for battery discharge is selected from the Info page. If the load flow method is indeed selected,
then the information entered in this area is used to initialize the Newton-Raphson load flow calculation.
Use Bus Voltage

The Newton-Raphson calculation method is highly dependent on initial conditions. If this radio button is
selected, the initial bus voltage will be set according to the bus nominal voltage multiplied by the initial
voltage entered in the Bus editor. It should be noted that the DC Load Flow calculation performed for
battery discharge does not update the initial bus voltage values. If initial bus voltage values are required,
then the user should run a DC Load Flow study to update the initial bus voltages, and then select this
option to run the discharge calculation using bus initial voltage values.
Use Fixed Value

When this option is selected, the voltage values used to initialize the Newton-Raphson calculation are
equal to the flat fixed voltage percent value specified here.
35-15
Study Case Editor
Motor Load
A motor normally behaves as a constant power load when its terminal voltage is close to its rated voltage.
However, as the battery terminal voltage deviates considerably from its rated voltage, its behavior
becomes similar to a static load. This group allows you to set the voltage range within which you want a
motor to be modeled as a constant power load.
Similar to the LF Parameter group, this part of the Discharge page only has an effect if the Load Flow
Method for battery discharge is selected from the Info page.
Constant kW if V is within Range

Click on this checkbox for setting Vmin and Vmax. When the motor terminal voltage is within this
range, it is represented as a constant power load. However, once the voltage is outside this range, it is
automatically converted to a constant impedance load.
If this box is not checked, all of the motor loads will be modeled as constant power loads regardless of
their terminal voltage. When there are only constant current sources in the system, this may prohibit load
flow calculations from reaching a solution.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage as a percentage, below which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage as a percentage, above which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Report
Similar to DC Load Flow Calculations, if at any point during the specified battery discharge cycle (using
DCLF method) a bus voltage falls below the percent value specified in the Under Voltage field, this
information will be flagged in the one-line diagram. The same is true for buses exceeding the over voltage
limit.
Critical Voltage
flagged. The buses violating the critical voltage limits will be flagged in red color in the one-line diagram.
Marginal Voltage
flagged as a marginally undervoltage or overvoltage bus. The buses violating the marginal voltage limits
will be flagged in pink color in the one-line diagram.
Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages displayed in the plot and one-line diagram can be given in kV or in percent of the
bus nominal voltages. Select your preference by clicking on Percent or V options.
35-16
Study Case Editor

In this page, you select the options for equipment adjustment. Some of the options are for equipment in
the DC system and others are for devices in a Control System Diagram, which are applicable only when a
Control System Diagram is involved in the calculations. These options include resistance temperature
correction for wires and cables, length tolerance adjustment for wires and cables, resistance tolerance for
control relays and solenoids, and resistance for contacts, circuit breakers, fuses, switches, and push
buttons located in a Control System Diagram.

Equipment resistance varies according to temperature, normally increasing as the temperature elevates.
You specify the temperature used for equipment resistance correction in this group.
Wire / Cable
Check this box to apply temperature correction on resistance of wires and cables. Once this box is
checked, you can specify the temperature used for the correction. There are two choices available. You
can select to use the individual maximum temperature entered in the Wire or Cable editor, so that each
wire or cable uses its own operating temperature for correction. Alternatively, you can also specify a
global temperature applied to all wires and cables.
35-17
Study Case Editor
Tolerance
Wire / Cable Length
When the length of a wire or a cable is not certain, the length tolerance can be used to account for this
uncertainty in the calculation. In Battery Sizing and Discharge calculation, ETAP considers wire and
cable tolerance as a positive value, so that a non-zero length tolerance will increase the length and hence
the resistance of a wire or cable.
Check the box to apply length tolerance on wires and cables. Once this box is checked, you can specify
the tolerance to be used. There are two choices available. You can select to use the individual tolerance
entered in the Wire or Cable editor, so that each wire or cable uses its own length tolerance for correction.
Alternatively, you can also specify a global length tolerance applied to all wires and cables.
Control Relay / Solenoid Burden

This option allows you to adjust the burden of a control relay or solenoid located in a Control System
Diagram. The burden of control relay or solenoid is specified by a power rating under the device rated
voltage. In order to obtain conservative calculation results, this tolerance is considered to be a positive
value. For example, a non-zero tolerance value will give a higher burden power than you entered in the
device editor.
Check the box to apply a burden tolerance on control relays and solenoids. Once this box is checked, you
can specify the tolerance to be used. There are two choices available. You can select to use the individual
tolerance entered in the Rating page of Control Relay editor or Solenoid editor. Alternatively, you can
also specify a global burden tolerance applied to all control relays and solenoids.
Resistance for CSD Elements

This group provides you with options on including in calculation the resistance of contacts, push buttons
and other switching devices in a Control System Diagram. Since the resistance value for these devices are
normally very small, you can select to include or exclude them in the calculation. If you decide to include
them in the calculation, you can specify the resistance value for these devices as well.
Contact
Check the box to include contact resistance in the calculation. Once this box is checked, you can specify
the resistance to be used. There are two choices available. You can select the individual contact resistance
entered in the Contact page of the Control Relay or Solenoid editor, so that each contact uses its own
resistance. Alternatively, you can also specify a global resistance to be applied to all contacts.
CB, Switch, Push Button

Check the box to include resistance values for circuit breakers, switches, and push buttons in a Control
System Diagram in the calculation. Once this box is checked, you can specify a global resistance value
for all these devices.
Fuse
Check the box to include resistance values for circuit fuses in a Control System Diagram in the
calculation. Once this box is checked, you can specify a global resistance value for all these devices.
35-18
Study Case Editor
35.2.5 CSD Page

Similar to the AC system representation, ETAP uses a layered model to represent DC systems and
Control System Diagrams. A Control System Diagram (CSD) contains a number of devices and wires.
These devices are connected in a certain way between the positive and negative DC buses. In ETAP, all
these devices are modeled in a Control System Diagram View, in which you set up a control system
similar to an AC system in a One-Line View. In a DC System, a Control System Diagram is aggregated
by a Composite CSD element. The Composite CSD element sums up the total load for all devices in a
Control System Diagram. It also serves as an equivalent source to all the devices in the Control System
Diagram. In a sense, the Composite CSD element makes a link between the Control System Diagram and
the DC system. Since a Composite CSD element can also be a simple DC load, to make a distinction, a
Composite CSD element that serves as an equivalent source in a Control System Diagram is called a
composite CSD element in ETAP. If there are composite CSD elements in the DC system, you can use
this page to set up options related to Control System Diagrams.
Duty Cycle of Composite CSD Elements

The duty cycle displayed in the Duty Cycle page of a composite CSD element (Composite CSD element)
represents the total load for all devices in the Control System Diagram that the composite CSD element is
associated. The duty cycle can be entered from the Duty Cycle editor. It can also be updated
automatically by ETAP based on calculations from the Control System Diagram. This group allows you
to specify options for the duty cycle of composite CSD elements.
35-19
Study Case Editor
Calculate and Update Duty Cycle Based on Individual Element Inside CSD
When this option is selected, the duty cycle of a composite CSD element will be calculated based on the
individual element inside the Control System Diagram that the composite CSD element is linked to. The
calculation is carried out according to the sequence defined in the duty cycle entered in all devices in the
Control System Diagram. The total load will be summed up and updated to the composite CSD element
and used in the Battery Sizing or Discharge calculation.
When this option is selected, the other sections on this page are enabled.
Use Duty Cycle of Composite CSD Elements

When this option is selected, the duty cycle displayed in the Duty Cycle page of a composite CSD
element will be used in the Battery Sizing or Discharge calculation.
Note: The duty cycle can be entered from the Duty Cycle editor directly, or automatically updated by
ETAP from a previous study.
When this option is selected, the other sections on this page are not applicable and are hidden.
Report CSD Voltage Drop Results

When you checked the option of Calculate and Update Duty Cycle Based on Individual Element Inside
CSD for the duty cycle of composite CSD elements, the checkbox of Report CSD Voltage Drop Results
becomes enabled. If you check this option, ETAP will report voltage drop results for all devices for the
whole duty cycle based on the calculated battery voltage during discharging calculation.
Note: This check box will enable the Alert tab in the study case editor.
Device Model
There are two ways provided in the device editor to model the behavior of a device: burden and inrush
rating model and duty cycle model. This section allows you to specify the model type to use in the
calculation.
Burden & Inrush Rating

When this option is selected, the burden and inrush rating model will be used in calculation for all
devices, disregarding the model type selected in the Info page of individual devices.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, the duty cycle model will be used in calculation for all devices, disregarding
the model type selected in the Info page of individual devices.
Note: In the current version of ETAP, if the duty cycle model is used for a device, the control logic
between the device and the controlled contacts will not be simulated in the simulation.
Individual Editor
When this option is selected, the model type used for each device in calculation is dependent on the
Calculation Model selected in the Info page of individual device editor.
Note: In the current version of ETAP, if the duty cycle model is used for a device, the control logic
between the device and the controlled contacts will not be simulated in the simulation.
35-20
Study Case Editor
Pickup Voltage
Pickup voltage of a device is a limit of minimum voltage value across the device in order for it to
successfully change the state of controlled contacts from normal state to off-normal state. After a device
become energized, if the voltage across the device remain equal to or higher than the pickup voltage for a
time duration equal to or longer than the operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will switch to
its off-normal state. This voltage limit is used in simulation of sequence operation of a control system as
well as alert checking. This section allows you to specify pickup voltage for control relay, solenoid, and
general load. For a general load, the pickup voltage is only used for alert checking.
Individual Vpickup
When this option is selected, the pickup voltage for a control relay or a solenoid will be the value defined
in the Rating page of device editor.
Global V if Individual Vpickup = 0

in the Rating page of device editor, if this value is greater than zero. For devices with this value being
zero in the editor, the global value for pickup voltage will be used. This option is useful for cases where
some of devices are lack of pickup voltage values from manufacturer.
Global Vpickup
When this option is selected, the global value for pickup voltage will be used for all control relays and
solenoids. The global Vpickup can be entered in the edit box next to the selection and is defined in
percent of device rated voltage.
Dropout Voltage
Dropout voltage of a device is a limit of voltage across the device. While a device has been energized, if
the voltage across a device is below this voltage limit, the device will not be able to keep its controlled
contacts at off-normal state. Under this condition, a controlled contact will return to its normal state if the
voltage across the device remains below Vdropout for a time duration equal to or longer than the release
time of the contact. This voltage limit is used in simulation of sequence operation of a control system as
well as alert checking. This section allows you to specify dropout voltage for control relay, solenoid, and
general load. For a general load, the dropout voltage is only used for alert checking.
Individual Vdropout
When this option is selected, the dropout voltage for a control relay or a solenoid will be the value defined
in the Rating page of device editor.
Global V if Individual Vdropout = 0

in the Rating page of device editor, if this value is greater than zero. For devices with this value being
zero in the editor, the global value for dropout voltage will be used. This option is useful for cases where
some of devices are lack of dropout voltage values from manufacturer.
Global Vdropout
When this option is selected, the global value for dropout voltage will be used for all control relays and
solenoids. The global Vdropout can be entered in the edit box next to the selection and is defined in
35-21
Study Case Editor
35.2.6 Alert Page

CSD simulation generates two groups of alerts. The first group includes pickup and dropout voltages for
control relays and solenoid. The second group provides current alerts for control relays, solenoids,
contacts, switch devices, and wires.
Marginal
Two checkboxes in this page allow for device marginal alerts, one for device voltage alerts and another
for device current alerts. Check these boxes if you want ETAP to generate marginal alerts.
Note: If the Marginal box is not checked, the corresponding percentage fields for marginal limit will not
be editable.
Pickup Voltage
For this selection group, specify the pickup voltage alert limits for the control relay, solenoid, and general
load. The pickup voltage alert check is applied to devices that are to be energized to execute a given task,
such as changing the state of a controlled contact. Since pickup voltage alerts are under-voltage alerts, the
limit for a marginal alert must be higher than for critical alerts.
35-22
Study Case Editor
Control Relay
Check the box to enable alert checking on pickup voltage for control relays. Once it is checked, the
critical voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a
percentage value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked.
The limits are percentages based on the control relay pickup voltage previously specified for Vpickup
option on the Model page. For example, if the global Vpickup was specified at 80% and you entered
110% for the Marginal Limit for Control Relay pickup voltage, the voltage limit for a marginal alert is
88% of the rated voltage of control relays. When a control relay becomes energized and the voltage across
it is less than 88% of its rated voltage, a marginal alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the control
relay.
Solenoid
Check this box to enable alert checking on the pickup voltage for solenoids. Once checked, the critical
voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a percentage
value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked.
These limits are percentages based on the solenoids pickup voltage specified for Vpickup option on the
Adjustment page. For example, if the global specification for Vpickup was 80% and a percentage of
100% for the Critical Limit for solenoid pickup voltage was set, the voltage limit for a critical alert will be
80% of the rated voltage of the solenoids. When a solenoid becomes energized and the voltage across it is
less than 80% of its rated voltage, a critical alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the solenoid. In
such an instance, the solenoid will not be able to execute the task it is supposed to accomplish.
General Load
This checkbox enables alert checking on pickup voltage for general loads. Once checked, the critical
voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a value for
marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked. The limits are a percentage
based on the general load pickup voltage previously specified for Vpickup option on the Adjustment
page.
Dropout Voltage
In this selection group you can specify the dropout voltage alert limits for the control relay, solenoid, and
general load. The dropout voltage alert check is applied to a device that is energized. If the voltage across
the device is below the dropout voltage limit, the device will not be able to continue its normal function,
such as keeping a controlled contact in a certain state. Since dropout voltage alerts are under-voltage
alerts, the limit for the marginal alert should be higher than that for critical alerts.
Dropout Voltage Limit for Control Relay

Check this box to enable alert checking on the dropout voltage for control relays. Once checked, the
percentage value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box must also be checked.
These limits are percentages based on the control relay dropout voltage previously specified for the V
dropout option on the Adjustment page. For example, if a global percentage for Vpickup of 30% and a
percentage of 100% were specified for the Critical Limit for Control Relay dropout voltage, the voltage
limit for a critical alert is 30% of the rated voltage of control relays. When a control relay is energized and
the voltage across it is less than 30% of its rated voltage, a critical alert on dropout voltage will be
generated for that control relay. In this instance, the control relay will not be able to execute the task it is
supposed to accomplish.
35-23
Study Case Editor
Dropout Voltage Limit for Solenoid

Check this box to enable alert checking on the dropout voltage for solenoids. Once checked, the critical
The limits are percentages based on the solenoids dropout voltage specified previously for the V dropout
option on the Adjustment page. For example, if it was specified to use a global V dropout of 30% and
110% was entered for the Marginal Limit of the solenoid dropout voltage, the voltage limit for a marginal
alert is 33% of the rated voltage of solenoids. When a solenoid is energized and the voltage across it is
less than 33% of its rated voltage, a marginal alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the solenoid.
General Load
Check this box to enable alert checking for dropout voltage on general loads. Once checked, the critical
based on the general loads pickup voltage specified previously for the Vdropout option on the Adjustment
page.
Loading
In this selection group, specify the critical and marginal alert limits for device overload alerts.
Control Relay
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for control relay overload alerts. The limits are a percentage
based on the rated burden current entered on the Rating page of the Control Relay Editor.
Solenoid
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for solenoid overload alerts. The limits are a percentage based
on the rated burden current entered on the Rating page of the Solenoid Editor.
Contact
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for contact overload alerts. The limits are a percentage based on
the rated inductive current entered on the Contact page of the Control Relay Editor or Solenoid Editor.
Switching Device
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for switching devices, such as circuit breakers, fuses, and
switches. The limits are a percentage based on the rated inductive current entered on the Contact page of
the Control Relay Editor or Solenoid Editor.
Wire / Cable
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for wires and cables. The limits are a percentage based on the
rated continuous current of the wire or cable.
Auto Display
This is a two-state button that can be clicked on or off. When Auto Display is activated the Alert View
will display automatically after a simulated sequence-of-operation is completed.
35-24
Display Options

The Battery Sizing Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and DC
info annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are specific to that study.
35.3.1 Results Page
Voltage
Bus Display Unit
Select whether to display the bus voltage as a percentage or in volts from the drop-down list.
Battery
Click on this checkbox to show the battery voltage in the one-line diagram.
Bus
Click on this checkbox to show the bus voltage in the one-line diagram.
Note: Bus voltage results are available for display only when the Load Flow Calculation Option is
selected for Calculation Method in the Info page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case.
35-25
Display Options
Show Units
Click this checkbox to show units along with results in the one-line diagram.
Power Flows
Power flow results are available for display only when the Load Flow Calculation Option is selected for
Calculation Method in the Info page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case.
Power Flow Display Units

Select the power flow to be displayed in kW or MW.
kW and Amp
Select kW to display power flow or select Amp to display the current in amperes.
Show Units
Check this box to show the unit with calculation results displayed on the one-line diagram.
Flow Results
Click on these checkboxes to display load flow results for different types of elements, including Branch,
Battery, Composite Motor, and Composite Network. These results are available for display only when the
Load Flow Calculation Option is selected for Calculation Method in the Info page of the DC Battery
Sizing Study Case.
35-26
Display Options
35.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
Device Type
Gen. (Generator)
Motor
Load
Panel
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Rating
kW/MW
MVAsc
HP/kW
kVA/MVA
Impedance in %
Base MVA
35-27

Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Bus
Node
CB
Fuse
Relay
Display Options
Continuous Amps
kA Bracing
Bus Bracing (kA)
Interrupting (ka)
kV
A
Z
Device Type
Generator
Motor
Transformer
Branch, Impedance
Branch, Reactor
Cable/Line
Impedance
% LRC
Impedance in ohms
D-Y
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Click on this checkbox to display the AC Composite Network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
Use Default Options

grayed out.
35-28
Display Options
35.3.3 AC-DC Page

networks.
ID
Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
Rating
kVA
HP/kW
kV
35-29
Display Options
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
Amp
AC FLA & DC FLA
DC FLA & AC FLA
Composite Network
For cables, click the checkboxes to display the cable/line and the size, length and type on the one-line
diagram.
Use Default Options

35-30
Display Options
35.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements and results on the one-line
diagram.
Color Theme
whenever the Theme option is selected in the Annotation section.
.
Theme
35-31
Display Options
Theme Editor
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the Set Global option has been previously
selected.
Annotations
Theme
theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button
User-Defined
35-32
Calculation Methods

The ETAP Battery Sizing and Discharging calculations comply with IEEE Standard 485-1997, the IEEE
Recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations.
Based on the characteristic curves from the Battery Library, it determines the number of strings, number
of cells, and cell size of a battery for a designated duty cycle.
35.4.1 Battery Duty Cycle

The duty cycle of a battery is the combination of the duty cycles of all the loads supplied by the battery.
The duty cycle of a battery can be determined by two different methods: load duty cycle summation and
load flow calculation. The first method simply sums up duty cycles for all the loads, with the conversion
of load current from the load rated voltage to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus. The load
flow calculation method runs a series of load flow calculations to determine battery load that considers
system losses and branch voltage.
Individual Load Duty Cycle

The individual load supplied by a battery can generally be classified into continuous and non-continuous
loads. Continuous loads are the ones that last for the whole duty cycle. Typical continuous loads include
lighting, continuously operating motors, inverters, indicating lights, continuously energized coils, and
annunciator loads, etc.
Non-continuous loads are on only during a portion of the duty cycle. Typical non-continuous loads
include emergency pump motors, critical ventilation system motors, communication system power
supplies, and fire protection systems, etc. Some of the non-continuous loads can occur repeatedly in a
duty cycle but are of short duration, less than one minute in any occurrence. These loads are called
momentary loads. Typical momentary loads include switchgear operations, motor-driven valve
operations, isolating switch operations, field flashing of generators, motor starting currents, and inrush
currents, etc.
If the time of occurrence of a non-continuous load cannot be predetermined, it is called a random load.
The random loads should be shown at the most critical time of a duty cycle. In battery sizing calculations,
these loads are treated differently from non-random loads.
In order to explain how the program determines the battery duty cycle, let us consider a sample case, in
which a battery supplies power to two loads: Load 1 and Load 2. The following two tables list the
load duty cycle as entered in the Duty Cycle page of the Load editor. Notice that the tables have two
columns: Non-Random Load and Random Load. The Non-Random Load includes continuous, noncontinuous, and momentary loads.
Load Items for Load 1 Duty Cycle (Time in Seconds)
Item Name
L1
L2
L3
Non-Random Load
Amp
St Time Duration
280
0
12
60
60
7140
80
1800
1800
35-33
Random Load
Item Name
Amp
Duration
Ld
100
60
Item Name
Stage1
Stage2
Stage3
Stage4
Calculation Methods
Load 2 Duty Cycle (Time in Seconds)

Non-Random Load
Random Load
Amp
St Time Duration
Item Name
Amp
Duration
40
0
1800
Ld1
50
120
140
1800
5400
40
7200
3540
120
10740
60
The load duty cycle for Load 1 is plotted in the following figure. In figure A, it is plotted in load items
as entered in the Load Editor, while in figure B it is the combination of all load items plotted as a function
of time. Notice that the random load is also displayed in the curve.
Duty Cycle Diagram for Load 1
Duty Cycle Diagram for Load 2
35-34
Calculation Methods
Battery Duty Cycle Current Summation Method

When using the summation method, the battery duty cycle is the sum of all load currents at every time
moment in the duty cycle, with the current value converted from the load rated voltage to the bus nominal
voltage of the battery terminal bus. This is equivalent to assume that the all loads are constant current
loads. The non-random loads and random loads are summed up separately, as shown in the figure below.
Battery Duty Cycle Diagram Load 1 Plus Load 2
Battery Non-Random Load

The summation of non-random loads for the battery duty cycle is very straight forward, as seen in the
battery duty cycle diagram. It should be noted that at the beginning of the duty cycle, the duration for the
320-ampere load section is extended from 12 seconds to one minute. According to IEEE Standard 485,
the load for a one-minute period shall be assumed to be the maximum current at any instant. After
summing up the non-random loads from individual loads, ETAP searches through the duty cycle for
current peaks. If the duration for any peak is less than one minute, the peak current value will be used as
the load for the one-minute period from the beginning of the peak.
Battery Random Load

The summation of random loads for the battery duty cycle is different from that of non-random loads. The
duration of the battery random load is equal to the longest duration of all random loads from individual
loads. The random loads from individual loads are summed up so that they are aligned at the end of the
duration of the battery random load. This ensures that the maximum random load value occurs at the end
of the duration, to produce the severest duty cycle for the battery.
35-35
Calculation Methods
After summing up random loads, if there is any peak with duration less than one minute, it will also be
extended to a one minute time period, similar to the process applied on the non-random load.
Battery Combined Duty Cycle

In the battery sizing calculation, the non-random and random loads are handled separately. The battery
total capacity is equal to the sum of the capacity that can provide power to the non-random load and
random load respectively. However, in the battery discharge calculation, the load applied on the battery is
the combined duty cycle, in which the random load is add on top of the non-random load. Per IEEE
Standard 485, to consider the worst case, the random load should be added to the non-random load at the
time where the battery has the lowest voltage value. In the example case, assuming that at 120 minutes the
battery has the lowest voltage value when the load consists of only the non-random load, the combined
battery duty cycle will be constructed by adding the random load backward at the 120-minute time, as
shown below.
Battery Combined Duty Cycle Diagram
35-36
Calculation Methods
Battery Duty Cycle Load Flow Method

When using the load flow method to determine battery duty cycle, the load current at each moment is
determined by the DC load flow calculation, with the battery being the only constant voltage source. In
the battery sizing calculation, since the parameters are not available, the battery is modeled as a constant
voltage source at the nominal voltage of the terminal bus. In the battery discharging calculation, the
battery voltage is calculated based on the battery characteristic curves and duty cycle in previous steps.
The battery duty cycle determined based on the load flow method will give more accurate representation
of the actual load. With the load flow calculation, the load can be modeled as constant power or constant
impedance load depending on the load type. As the responses of these two types of load with respect to
voltage variations are very different, correctly modeling these loads provides more accurate battery load
current. In the load flow calculation, the battery load can also include losses on cables and other branches.
Additionally, when the load flow method is used in the discharge calculation, ETAP calculates bus
voltages and loads and branch flows for the whole system along with battery results.
35.4.2 Battery Library Data

The battery sizing calculation is based on the battery characteristics from the library of the battery to be
sized. Therefore, in order to size a battery, the battery has to be linked with the Battery Library, which is
done from the Battery Editor by clicking on the Library button in the Rating page and selecting a battery
from the Battery Library Quick Pick Editor. Once you have selected a battery from the library, the battery
is linked to the Battery Library and the battery type information appears in the Battery Type section in the
editor. The battery type information includes manufacturer, voltage per cell, resistance per positive plates,
etc. The same section also displays information on the selected size for the battery including number of
plates, cell capacity, and one-minute-discharge rate.
In the battery sizing calculation, ETAP retrieves the battery characteristic curves according to the battery
type information. Since this link between the battery and the library is dynamic, any changes you make on
the battery characteristics in the library may affect the battery sizing results afterward.
The ETAP Battery Library provides two types of battery characteristic curves: Time vs. Amp type and
Time vs. Kt type. The following figure displays sample curves for both types, taken from IEEE Standard
485. On the left is the Time vs. Amp type and on the right Time vs. Kt type. The Time vs. Amp type
curves provide values for Rt, which is the number of amperes that each positive plate can supply for a
specified time, at 25 C and to a definite end-of-discharge voltage. Time vs. Kt type curves provide
values for Kt, which is the ratio of rated ampere-hour capacity (at a standard time rate, at 25 C, and to a
standard end-of-discharge voltage) of a cell, to the amperes that can be supplied by that cell for a
specified time, at 25 C and to a definite end-of-discharge voltage.
35-37
Calculation Methods
In the above sample curves, the set of curves may apply to batteries of different sizes or to only one size.
In ETAP, you specify a set of characteristic curves for a given size. If you want to use a given set of
curves for batteries of different sizes, you can indicate this in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor. Please
see the Study Case Editor section for more information.
Estimated Battery Characteristic Curves

In Battery Sizing calculation, according to IEEE Standard 485, a battery is sized so that at end of the duty
cycle, the battery terminal voltage will not be less than the battery minimum discharge voltage. In ETAP,
this minimum discharge voltage is specified in the Sizing page of the Battery Sizing Study Case. During
calculations, the battery characteristic curve, that has end-of-discharge voltage equal to this minimum
discharge voltage, will be used to size the battery.
When you size a battery to a specific end-of-discharge voltage, i.e. 1.75V per cell, your battery library
should normally contain characteristic curves at an end-of-discharge voltage at 1.75V. In case the battery
library does not contain the characteristic curve at 1.75V, ETAP will estimate a characteristic curve at
1.75V based on curves in the library for other end-of-discharge voltage values. Since the behavior of
battery discharging is very nonlinear, this estimation can only provide approximate results.
Several methods for battery characteristic estimation have been developed and the best one has been used
in ETAP to match actual manufacturer curves more accurately. However, the estimated curve is always
an approximation of the actual battery behavior. When estimated battery characteristic curves are used for
battery sizing calculations, the results may be different from that obtained from manufacturer provided
battery characteristic curves. Various tests have been conducted on estimation of battery characteristic
curves from a limited number of manufactures. In each of the test, a manufacture curve at a specific endof-discharge voltage was first removed from the battery library and ETAP is used to estimate the curve
based on the rest manufacturer curves. The ETAP estimated curve was then compared against the
manufacture curve removed. It should be pointed out that noticeable differences have been observed, and
in some cases the estimated curves were less conservative.
35-38
Calculation Methods
In order to obtain accurate battery sizing results, we suggest that when you size a battery, make sure that
the battery library contains a battery characteristic curve with end-of-discharge voltage equal to the
Battery Min. Discharge Voltage you have entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case.
It should be stressed that estimation of battery characteristic curves is needed only when the calculation
performed is Battery Sizing, and the battery library used does not contain a characteristic curve of end-ofdischarge voltage equal to the Battery Min. Discharge Voltage value that you have specified in the
Battery Sizing Study Case. If you perform battery discharge calculation for an existing battery,
estimation of battery characteristic curves will not be required at all.
35.4.3 Battery Sizing Method

The battery sizing calculation includes determining the number of cells to meet the system voltage
requirement and determining the battery size and number of strings to meet the load duty cycle
requirement.
Number of Cells
The number of cells should be determined to satisfy system minimum and maximum voltage
requirements:
1. When charging the battery, the voltage to be applied to the battery should not be greater than the
maximum system voltage.
2. When discharging the battery, the battery minimum discharge voltage should not be smaller than the
minimum system voltage.
Let N be the number of cells. The voltage requirements can be given in the following equation
V sys, min
V cell, disch
V sys, max
V cell, ch
Where
Vsys,min is the minimum system voltage that is equal to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus
multiplied by the minimum system voltage deviation entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
Vsys,max is the maximum system voltage that is equal to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus
multiplied by the maximum system voltage deviation entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
Vcell,ch is the battery charge voltage in V/Cell entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
Vcell,disch is the battery discharge voltage in V/Cell entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
It is clear that the number of cells of the battery is dependent on the four values for voltage requirement
entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor. It can happen that for some incompatible values, we
cannot determine a value for N to satisfy the above equation. When this situation occurs, ETAP will
display a message indicating that it cannot determine the number of cells.
In practical cases, there is often a range of values that N can take to satisfy the above equation. In this
case, ETAP will select the value for N that results in the battery rated voltage being closest to its terminal
bus nominal voltage.
35-39
Calculation Methods
Cell Size
In determining the battery size, ETAP will find the smallest size that can provide sufficient power for the
specified duty cycle. The capacity of a battery can be increased either by using a larger size or by adding
more strings. Since ETAP allows you to enter different characteristic curves for different sizes of
batteries, in the battery sizing calculation, the program starts with one string and the smallest size
available for the calculation. If it fails to meet the load requirement, the program first increases the size
and performs calculations with the characteristic curves for the new size. When no available sizes can
meet the load requirement for the given number of strings, it then increases the string number and
performs the calculation with the smallest size again. This process continues until a battery size and a
string number are found to meet the load requirement.
Load Sections in Battery Duty Cycle

A battery duty cycle generally can be represented as a square waveform. It consists of a number of time
periods, with a constant current value during a period. The figure below shows a sample duty cycle for a
battery. It consists of six periods, designated as P1, P2, P6. A load section Si is a combination of a
number of load periods, defined as:
Si =
P
j =1
35-40
Calculation Methods
In the sample duty cycle there are six load sections.
Load Sections for a Sample Battery Duty Cycle
Determination of Cell Size Based on Battery Characteristic Curves

Based on a given set of battery characteristic curves, we can determine the required battery size for a
specified duty cycle. Let F represent cell size. It is equal to:
F= Max Fi
i=1,..Sm
where Sm is the total number of load sections and Fi is the size calculated for the ith load section. The
calculation of Fi depends on the type of battery library curves.
35-41
Calculation Methods
For the Time vs. Amp type battery library, the cell size Fi is the number of positive plates, which is
calculated as:
Fi =
P =i
A p AP 1
P =1
Rt
where Ap is the load current value in period P. RT is the value obtained from the battery characteristic
curve, which is the number of amperes that each positive plate can supply for t minutes, at 25 C, and to
the end-of-discharge voltage specified in the Study Case.
For the Time vs. Kt type battery library, the cell size Fi is the capacity in ampere-hours, which is
calculated as:
Fi =
P =i
(A
P =1
AP 1 ) K t
where Ap is the load current value in period P. Kt is the value obtained from the battery characteristic
curve, which is the ratio of rated ampere-hour capacity (at a standard time rate, at 25 C and to a standard
end-of-discharge voltage) of a cell, to the amperes that can be supplied by that cell for t minutes, at 25 C,
and to the end-of-discharge voltage specified in the study case.
Random Load and Non-Random Load

In general, the duty cycle for a battery consists of random loads and non-random loads. ETAP determines
the cells for random and non-random loads separately in the same way as described in the previous
section. The sum of the two cell size values is the uncorrected cell size for the given duty cycle.
Adjusting Factors
In the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor, you can select several adjusting factors to be considered in
calculating battery size. These factors include temperature factor, design margin factor, aging
compensation factor, and initial capacity factor. The uncorrected battery size is adjusted by multiplying
the first three factors and dividing that value by the initial capacity factor.
Calculation Cycle
It is clear from the equations for determining cell size that the cell size is calculated based on a given set
of battery characteristic curves, which is for a given cell size. If the calculated cell size is different from
the one corresponding to the characteristic curves used, we have to do the calculation again with the
battery characteristic curves for the calculated cell size, which may again result in a new size because of
different characteristic curves used. This process continues until the calculated size matches with the
curves used in the calculation. Sometimes the calculation may get into a cycle of changing cell size and
characteristic curves, especially if the curves were not entered correctly. ETAP has implemented a
scheme to break the cycle.
35-42
Calculation Methods
35.4.4 Battery Discharging Calculation Method

The purpose of battery discharge calculation is to determine battery performance for a specified duty
cycle. One of the key parameters for battery performance is the battery terminal voltage. When the battery
is supplying the load as the sole source, it should be able to maintain voltage level for the whole period of
the specified duty cycle.
Battery Characteristic Curves for Voltage Interpolation

The terminal voltage of a battery is dependent on the current drawing from the battery and the amperehour capacity contained in the battery. This relationship is described by the battery characteristic curve
and is very nonlinear. In ETAP, the battery characteristics are described in the battery library as discrete
points. Because no closed form equation is available to describe the battery characteristics, numerical
interpolation methods have to be used to find the points missing in the curves. Apparently, the more
curves are entered in the battery library, the more accurate the calculated results will be. The minimum
number of the characteristic curves entered in the library is two. ETAP will post an error message if the
number of curves in the library for the battery to be discharged is less than two.
In this release of ETAP, the discharge calculation is performed only when the battery is linked to the
Time vs. Amp type library. The library data required by the discharge calculation for the characteristic
curves is described in section 35.5.1. The battery characteristic curves can be used to interpolate voltage
values in different ways. Because of the nonlinearity of battery characteristics and often limited curves
available, voltage values interpolated from battery curves sometimes may not seem reasonable. For
example, the interpolated voltage value for a very small current at the beginning of discharging could be
larger than the rated voltage of battery. The method used in ETAP first convert the curves from Time vs.
Amp curves to equivalent AH vs. Amp curves, and then interpolate for voltage values at a fixed
current value. This method is chosen for ETAP due its consistent results for a constant discharging
current.
Battery Combined Duty Cycle

When the load powered by the battery includes random load, the random load should be added to the nonrandom load at the worst point, or when the battery has the lowest voltage value when only the nonrandom load is considered. To identify this time moment, ETAP first performs a battery discharge
calculation excluding the random load. It then determines the worst point, adds the random load to the
non-random load and performs discharge calculation from the time when the random load takes effect all
the way to the end of the battery duty cycle.
Battery Voltage Calculation

An iterative process is conducted to calculate battery discharge voltage values. A battery voltage value is
reported at each time step specified in the battery sizing study case and at each moment when there is a
change in the load duty cycle. By changing the step size from the battery sizing study case, the user can
adjust the level of detail information on discharge calculation to be reported.
If the battery duty cycle is calculated by the load current summation method, the battery current will
change only when there is a change in any load duty cycle. When the load flow method is selected in the
study case, even if there is no change in the load duty cycle, the battery current will change due to
decrease in the battery voltage. In this case the battery current is calculated by a full load flow calculation,
considering different types of loads and system losses. In this load flow calculation, the battery is
modeled as a constant voltage source with the voltage calculated in the previous step. The calculated
battery current will be used in the current step for battery voltage calculation.
35-43
Calculation Methods
Along with battery voltage and current, the battery discharge module also calculates battery discharge
capacity. When there is change in the load current, two values of voltage and current are calculated, at t and t+, one for before the load change and one for after the load change.
When the battery is calculated using the load flow method, the battery discharge calculation also provides
considerable information on the system performance, including bus voltage, bus loading, branch power
and current, etc.
35.4.5 CSD in Battery Sizing and Discharging Calculation

ETAP provides options to integrate Control System Diagram with DC system in battery sizing and
discharge calculations. Hence, it extends DC system calculation down to the control system device level.
The involvement of CSD in the calculation has two aspects: calculation of CSD duty cycle and simulation
of CSD sequence of operation with battery discharge voltage. Both apply the Load Flow Method to
simulate CSD sequence of operation.
Calculating and Updating CSD Duty Cycle

If, the Calculate and Update duty Cycle Based on Individual Element Inside (CSD) option is selected in
the CSD page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case, ETAP will simulate sequence of operation for each
CSD powered by the battery under consideration. As results of these simulations, duty cycles for all
composite CSD elements are calculated and automatically updated to the Composite CSD element in the
DC system. The updated duty cycle is separated into constant power, constant impedance, and constant
current groups in order to accurately represent CSD devices at any voltage level. This duty cycle will be
used for battery sizing and discharge calculations.
In calculating CSD duty cycle, the sequence of operation simulated is dependent on other options in the
CSD page of DC battery Sizing Study Case, as well as the logical set up in the CSD. These options
include Device Model, Pickup Voltage and Dropout Voltage. Different options selected can result in very
different sequence of operation and therefore different duty cycles.
Calculating CSD Voltage Drop

If, the Report CSD Voltage Drop Results option is selected in the CSD page of DC Battery Sizing
Study Case, as part of the battery discharge calculation, Voltage Drop calculation will be carried out for
each CSD with DC bus voltage calculated from battery discharge. This process allows the CSD voltage
drop calculation to be integrated into battery discharge calculation to simulate control operations in real
system under emergency conditions. Using this tool, you can accurately size the battery and predict
system behavior down to the control system diagram level.
The voltage drop calculation results for all CSDs are placed in a single output report, which can be open
from any CSD view involved in the calculation. The CSD Events View and Alert View are also provided
for you to verify operation sequence and identify abnormal conditions.
35-44
Required Data
35.5 Required Data

35.5.1 Source
In battery sizing calculation, the only source is the battery to be sized. Batteries may only be
sized/discharged one at a time as specified in the study case. A UPS may be considered as a load to the
system when its input bus is not connected to an energized bus.
Battery
ID
Bus connection data
Battery library type data. This information is used to retrieve library data for calculations.
If only the battery discharge calculation is conducted, the following additional information is also
required:
Battery number of plates and capacity

Number of cells
Number of strings
SC page battery external resistance
35.5.2 Load
UPS
When a UPS is not connected to an energized input AC bus, it is considered a load in battery sizing
calculations.
ID
Bus connection data
DC rated voltage
kW and kVA
Duty Cycle page
(If duty cycle data is not entered, this load will be assumed to be zero.)
DC Motor
ID
Bus connection data
Quantity
Rated voltage
kW or HP and efficiency
Duty Cycle page
35-45
Required Data
Lumped Load
ID
Bus connection data
Rated voltage
kW Rating
Duty Cycle Page
Static Load
ID
Bus connection data
kW rating
Rated voltage
Duty Cycle page
Composite CSD (CCSD) Load
ID
Bus connection data
Rated voltage
kW rating
Duty Cycle page
Inverter
ID
Bus connection data
DC rated voltage
kVA, PF, DC kW rating
Duty Cycle page

When you select the option to include CSD simulations in the study case, all the data for CSD elements is
required for a simulation of sequence of operation when using the Load Flow Method.
35-46
Required Data
35.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Resistance and inductance and cable length units
DC Impedance
ID
Bus connection data
Resistance and inductance impedance information
Tie PD (CB, Fuse, Single-Throw and Double-Throw Switches)
ID
Bus connection data
DC Converter
ID
Bus connection data
kW rating and rated kV input and output
35.5.4 Other
Library
Library type data

Battery characteristic curve data
Study Case
When you initiate a battery sizing calculation, ETAP uses the study case currently selected from the
Study Case toolbar. Every field in the Study Case editor is set to its default value. However, it is
important to set the values in the study case correctly to meet your calculation requirements.
35-47
Output Reports
35.6 Output Reports

The battery sizing calculation results are reported graphically on the one-line diagram, in plots and in the
Crystal Reports format. The graphical one-line display shows the number of cells, number of strings, cell
size, etc. You can use the Display Options editor to specify the content to be displayed.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a battery Sizing Study. You can
utilize the Battery Sizing Report Manager to help you view the output report.
35.6.1 Battery Sizing Report Manager

To open the Battery Sizing Report Manager, click on the View Output File button on the Battery Sizing
Study toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing
different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for
Output Report Name

This field displays the name to the output report you want to view.
Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel

checkbox.
35-48
Output Reports
checkbox.
35-49
Output Reports
Input Page
This page allows you to select categories to view different input data, grouped according to type. These
include the following available categories:
Battery Characteristics
Branch
Bus and Connected Load
Cable
Cover
DC Converter
Impedance
Inverter
Load Duty Cycle
UPS
Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the result portion of the output report, including
Calculation Results, Battery Load Profile, Battery Characteristics, Battery Tabulation, Bus Tabulation,
and Sizing Results. The Calculation Results portion prints the uncorrected cell size for each load section
in non-random load and random load. The Battery Load Profile is the battery duty cycle generated based
on load duty cycles. The Battery Characteristics are mostly data entered by the user. However, if the
characteristic data does not contain a curve corresponding to the minimum discharge voltage specified in
the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor, the calculation program will generate a new curve based on data
entered by the user. Therefore, the Battery Characteristics portion is placed in both the Input and Results
lists of the report manager. The Battery Tabulation and Bus Tabulation are battery discharge calculation
results. The Sizing Results show the results of battery sizing stages in the same format as given in the
IEEE Standard 485.
35-50
Output Reports
You can view these reports in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
checkbox.
Summary Page
This page allows you to select available formats to view the result summary portion of the report. The
summary portion contains the final result for battery sizing calculations.
35-51
Output Reports

This is a shortcut for the Report Manger. When you click on the View Output Report button, ETAP
the example shown below, the output report name is BattSizing and the selected format is Complete
35.6.3 Input Data

Input data are grouped together according to element type. The bus and branch connection data for battery
sizing are similar to DC load flow input data. The following are some samples of input data specific for
battery sizing calculations.
Load Duty Cycle

In battery sizing calculations, the load comes from the duty cycle of all the connected loads. In order for a
load to be considered in the study, you must enter load duty cycle data in the Duty Cycle page of the Load
editor.
In the sample below, there are duty cycles for a lump load, a static load, and a CSD load. The lump load
and the static load are continuous load, maintaining constant load current over the whole duty cycle. The
CSD load has both non-random and random loads. Notice that in the report the non-random load is the
combination of all load items entered in the Duty Cycle page, shown as a series of square waveforms as a
function of time. The random load is printed in load items, each with different load duration. If you have
entered two random load items that have the same load duration, they will be summed up and shown as
one item in the report.
35-52
Output Reports
Battery Duty Cycle

The battery duty cycle is the total load used to size the battery. In this page, the battery name (ID) is
shown, the method used for obtaining the battery duty cycle, and the battery duty cycle. Notice that for
the battery duty cycle, both the non-random and random load profiles are printed as a function of time. In
the load profiles, any peaks that last less than one minute have been extended to one minute.
Depending on the options you selected in the Correction Factor section of the Discharge page of the DC
battery Sizing Study Case, the battery duty cycle used for battery sizing and discharge calculation may
not be the same. For example, if you selected the option of Adjust Battery Duty Cycle in the section, the
correction factors for temperature, aging and initial condition will be used to change the battery duty
cycle used in the battery discharge calculation. In the report, ETAP prints the duty cycle lists for both
sizing and discharge calculations, if you run the battery sizing calculation. When you run the discharge
calculation, only one duty cycle will be reported.
35-53
Output Reports
Battery Characteristics
In this page, the information from the Battery Library is printed. It starts with the library type information
including battery manufacturer, model, characteristic curve type, base temperature, V/Cell, resistance per
positive plate, etc. It is then followed by the information for the final battery size used. In the Battery
Library there may be a set of characteristic curves for each battery size, but only one set of curves is
printed in the report, and it is the one used to determine the cell size. In this sample, curves for the battery
size with 21 plates are printed, including four curves with final discharge voltages at 1.75, 1.91, 1.84, and
1.88 volts, respectively. This page also prints the option you selected in the Battery Sizing Study Case
editor on how to use the battery library data: as Sizes Given in Library Only or as Min/Max Ranges. In
this case, the Min/Max ranges option was selected.
35-54
Output Reports
35.6.4 Results Report

The cell sizes for each load section are printed on this page. There are two columns, one for non-random
load, and one for random load. The maximum value from each column is selected and the sum of the two
values is the uncorrected cell size.
It can be seen that for some load sections, such as sections 2 and 4, the cell size is printed as zero. This is
because the calculation skipped these sections. If the load current for the last load period of a load section
is less than the current of the next load period, the calculation for the load section is skipped, because its
size is surely smaller than the size for the next load section. In this sample case, it can be seen from the
Battery Load Profile in the Battery Duty Cycle section above that, for load periods 2 and 4, their load
currents are smaller than their next load period. Therefore, the calculation for load sections 2 and 4 are
skipped and the report prints zero for those sections.
35-55
Output Reports
35.6.5 Battery Sizing Summary

This page summarizes the results of a battery sizing calculation. It shows the battery to be sized, the
requirements applied, and the final results.
The Correction Factors group prints the individual and total adjusting factors used in the calculation. If
you have indicated in the Study Case Editor not to use one or more adjusting factors, they will be printed
as 100 in this section.
The Cell Size group prints the curve used in the calculation. In this sample case, the curves for cell size 21
were used in the calculation. It also prints the cell sizes for maximum non-random and maximum random
load, as well as the uncorrected and the recommended sizes. When the curves used are the Time vs. Amp
type, the first three values are the number of positive plates, while the last is the total number of plates.
When the curves used are the Time vs. Kt type, all four values are capacity in ampere-hour.
35-56
Output Reports
35-57

ETAPs Battery Discharge module displays the results from a battery discharge calculation on the oneline diagram. The Battery Discharge Time Slider is a tool that may be used to change the displayed results
as they change throughout the discharge cycle. The user may click or move the time slider to any desired
position, and the results corresponding to that particular time are displayed on the OLV. The range of the
time slider is set from the beginning to end of the simulation time duration. If the pointer position is
clicked and dragged, the numerical time displayed is updated throughout the motion. The numerical value
displayed has units of minutes.
If the Current Summation Method for battery discharge is used, the displayed results are the discharged
Battery AH Capacity, Terminal Current (Amps), and the Terminal Voltage. These three results vary with
the time slider. When the time is equal to zero, the capacity displayed in the one-line diagram as the
sizing result is the rated capacity. Furthermore, ETAP will also display the number of positive plates,
strings, and cells it used for the discharge calculation. The following diagram provides an example of how
the parameters are displayed in the one-line diagram. The Battery Discharge Time Slider displays the
results at time equal to 59 minutes.
If the DCLF Method of Battery Discharge is used, branch flow results along with bus voltages may be
displayed on the one-line diagram. Branch flows displayed are Current (Amps) and Power (kW or MW).
Bus Voltage may be displayed in terms of kV or %Nominal Voltage.
35-58
35-59
Plots
35.8 Plots
ETAPs Battery Discharge Module provides Simulation Plots for the purpose of examining calculation
results graphically. To view the Battery Discharge plots, click on the Battery Sizing Plots icon located on
the Battery Sizing toolbar. This will open a Battery Sizing Plot selection window. You can select the
Device by its ID and chose from one of several plots generated by the program. The device types
currently plotted by the program are Batteries, Battery Duty Cycles, Battery Characteristics, Branches and
Buses.
Modifying Plot Parameters
35-60
Plots
Plots generated for the battery includes:
Battery voltage, amp, and discharged AH

Battery duty cycle for non-random load, random load, and combined duty cycle
Battery characteristic curves used for the discharge calculation
If the load flow method is used to generate battery duty cycle, ETAP also generates a plot for system bus
and branch, including:
Bus voltage and load

Branch load current
Plot parameters such as the plot line type, axis, legend, and text may be modified directly from the plot
view. For example, to modify the attributes of the line, double-click on the plot line to open the Plot
Parameter Editor and click in Line Attributes and change the attributes.
To modify the plot axis, double-click on the axis (horizontal or vertical) to open the editor where you can
specify several parameters, such as values range, ticks, grids, etc. Also, clicking on the button attributes
will display an editor where you can specify the line color, type and width.
35-61
Plots
Unless it is for axis labels, the annotations of the plot are Text boxes. To modify the textbox double-click
on the Textbox to display the editor where you can specify a new text sentence, font type, color size and
style.
To modify the Label Axis (horizontal or vertical) double click on annotation axis to display the Label
Editor as shown in the figure below, where you can specify label position, format (decimal, scientific,
date, etc.), date parameters, etc.. Also clicking on the Text Parameters button will display the Text
Parameter Editor where you can specifcy the font, type, color, size and style.
35-62
35-63
Plots
Chapter 36
Panel Systems
Panel Systems are an integral part of ETAP used for representing power and lighting panels in electrical
systems. ETAP provides a comprehensive model for designing and scheduling AC panel systems
including 3-Phase and 1-Phase panels. 3-Phase panels can be either 3-Wire or 4-Wire panels. 1-Phase
panels can be set up as 2-Wire or 3-Wire.
A panel is a collection of branch circuits feeding system loads. ETAP supports an unlimited number of
circuits within a panel. A branch circuit in a panel is modeled with complete details, which includes
connected load information, protective device ratings, and feeder data. The ETAP panel model is
supported by comprehensive breaker, fuse, and cable libraries. Default and typical data are provided to
save you time and money when designing and scheduling panels. ETAP allows you to graphically
connect subpanels to upstream panels. There is no limit to the number of subpanels you can connect.
In ETAP, a panel branch circuit load can be modeled as an internal or external load. If the load is
connected physically to a panel on the one-line diagram, for example the motor BLR-MTR in the diagram
below, it is considered an external load. Loads that are not connected physically to the panel are referred
as Internal Loads.
The total load fed by branches connected to a panel circuit are calculated and displayed on the panel
schedule. The system connected to a panel circuit may itself represent a complete subsystem with all
ETAP elements. For example, in the diagram below, one of the Main-Panel circuits is connected to the
Panel-67 through a cable and a transformer. In this case, ETAP calculates the total load of the Panel-67
and displays it on the corresponding circuit in the Main-Panel schedule. ETAP performs the calculation to
include all downstream loads. Connections forming loops between branches emanating from panel
circuits are not allowed.
36-1
Panel Systems
Overview
ETAP maintains the electrical integrity of the system while allowing you to make panel connections. For
example, ETAP will not allow connection of a 3-Phase 4-Wire panel to a panel circuit that is 1-Phase.
36-2
Panel Systems
Graphical User Interface (GUI)
36.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

ETAP provides a fully Graphical User Interface (GUI) for adding a panel to your one-line diagram. Using
this interface, you can graphically add, delete, relocate, connect elements, zoom in or out, display grid on
or off, change element size, change element orientation, change symbols, hide or show protective devices,
enter properties, set operating status, etc.
36.1.1 Add Panels

To add a panel to a one-line diagram, click the panel symbol
from the AC Edit toolbar, which
changes the mouse pointers shape to a panels icon. Now you can drop the panel at any position on the
one-line diagram by clicking the mouse. After dropping the panel, the mouse pointer goes back to its
original arrow shape. If you double-click the Edit toolbar, you can place multiple copies of the panel in
36.1.2 Panel Pins

Each panel has one or more (5, 9, 13, 17, 21 or 25) pins. A pin is a graphical tool (represented by a small,
red square indicating the connection point) to connect elements together. You can right click a panel in
the one-line diagram to select the number of pins (external connections) allowed from a panel as shown
below. ETAP allows up to 24 external load connections. The default is four external connections.
36-3
Panel Systems
The figure below shows the panel pin assignment. The pin assignments are not necessarily the same as the
panel circuit numbers. Pin 0 is the top pin of the panel. This pin is used to connect the panel to its source
element. The top pin of a panel can be connected only to a bus or to any pin other than the top pin of
another panel. The connection may include protective devices.
External loads including a subpanel can be connected to Pins 1 through 24 of a Panel. These pins can be
connected to all ETAP elements excluding DC elements, three-winding transformer, power grid,
synchronous generator, and composite motor.
36-4
Panel Systems
36.1.3 Panel Connections

ETAP maintains electrical integrity while making connections in the one-line diagram. The panel top pin
can be connected to a bus or another panel circuit (through an external load pin) only when the connection
is electrically feasible.
The following are the rules of connecting the top pin of a panel to a bus or another panel circuit.
Connecting a panel refers to connecting the top pin of the panel.
3-Phase Panels
A 3-Phase 3-Wire or 3-Phase 4-Wire panel can be connected to a 3-Phase bus. It cannot be
connected to a 1-Phase bus.
A 3-Phase 3-Wire or 3-Phase 4-Wire panel can be connected to a panel circuit with 3 poles. It
cannot be connected to Panel circuits with 1 or 2 poles.
1-Phase 3-Wire Panels
A 1-Phase 3-Wire panel can be connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus. It cannot be connected to a 3Phase or 1-Phase 2-Wire bus.
A 1-Phase 3-Wire panel cannot be connected directly to a panel circuit.
A 1-Phase 2-Wire panel can be connected to a 3-Phase, 1-Phase 3-Wire or 1-Phase 2-Wire bus.
A 1-Phase 2-Wire panel can be connected to a panel circuit with 1 or 2 poles. It cannot be
connected directly to a panel circuit with 3 poles.
36.1.4 External and Internal Loads

There are two types of loads linked to ETAP Panels: External and Internal loads. ETAP provides these
two options to make data entry easier and system representation more concise. There is no physical
difference between internal and external loads.
External loads are graphically connected to a panel through external pin on the one-line diagram. ETAPs
graphical representation of a panel allows for up to 24 connections externally. For example, in the
diagram below, AC, Mtr9, and Panel-15 are the external loads connected to Panel-21.
36-5
Panel Systems
Internal loads are embedded in the Panel Schedule Editor and are not graphically connected to the panel
on the one-line diagram. For example, in the diagram below, Load1, Load2, Main-Pump, Load5, and
Load6 are internal loads in the panel.
36-6
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor
36.2 Panel Schedule Editor

The Panel Schedule Editor provides a user-friendly graphical interface with a lot of suitable default values
and built-in electrical intelligence. The editor fields are designed in a manner to minimize data entry
errors, while eliminating the repetitive task in completing panel schedules.
The properties associated with a panel can be entered in the Panel Schedule Editor. The Panel Schedule
Editor contains the following six pages:
Info for entering panel id, phase connection, status of main disconnect
Rating for entering panel rating, main disconnect rating, # of circuits
Schedule for entering rating/loading/pd/feeder of individual circuits
Summary for entering loading summary, total connected, continuous, non-continuous and code
demand load
Remarks for entering remarks and other user information
Comment for entering text comment
The header on each page of the Panel Schedule Editor displays the rated kV and rated Amps of the panel.
36-7
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor Info Page
36.3 Panel Schedule Editor - Info Page

You can specify the panel ID and connected bus; whether the panel is in or out of service; the equipment
feeder tag, name, description, data type, and load priority; the configurations main disconnect status; the
phase connection; and the phase arrangement within the Info page.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each panel. The assigned IDs consist of default panel ID plus
an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of panels increase. The default
panel ID (Pnl) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus or upstream element for the panel. If the terminal is not connected to
any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a panel to a bus, select a bus
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the panel resides. For example,
If a panel is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the panel to a
new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Aux-Loads is reconnected from Bus4 to Bus5.
36-8
Panel Systems
A panel can also be connected to another panel as shown below. In this case, ETAP displays the ID of the
upstream panel.
In Service or Out of Service

The operating condition of a panel can be selected by choosing either the In-Service or Out-of-Service
options. The properties of an Out-of-Service panel can be edited like an In-Service panel; however, an
Out-of-Service panel will not be included in any system studies. When the continuity check is activated,
an Out-of-Service panel automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
Configuration
Main Disconnect Status
You can change the status of the panel main disconnect (for the selected configuration) by clicking the
manipulation of the status will be saved under the specified configuration.
If the Main Disconnect on the Rating page is set to None (Lugs Only), the status is set to close and
disabled (grayed out).
Status is not a part of the panel engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration
status is shown above the Main Disconnect Status of the panel to indicate that this is the main disconnect
status under the specific configuration.
36-9
Panel Systems
For example, you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following
example, status of a panel is shown as Close under Normal configuration and Open under Emergency
configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the
source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types. Their names can be changed. From the ETAP
Project menu, point to Settings and select the Data Type command.
Priority
Select the load priority of this panel from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priorities may be
chosen from the ETAP Project menu by pointing to Settings and selecting the Load Priority command.
Connection
ETAP classifies panels into the following four types depending on their connection:
3-phase 4-wire panel

1-phase 2-wire Panel
ETAP has built-in electrical intelligence that allows a panel to be connected to buses or elements that
have compatible phase connections. For example, a 3-Phase 4-Wire panel cannot be connected to a 1Phase bus, and a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel cannot be connected to a 3-Phase bus.
A panel connection can be changed only if there are no external connections from the panel. When panel
connection is changed the data for all circuits on the Schedule page is reset.
36-10
Panel Systems
1-Phase or 3-Phase
This is the phase connection of the panel. Select either 1-Phase or 3-Phase connection.
Wire
For a 3-Phase panel, select 3 Wires or 4 Wires. For a 1-Phase panel, select 2-wires or 3 Wires.
1-Phase 2-Wire Phase

When a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel is connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus, the options for panel connection are
L1, L2, and LL.
When a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus, the options for panel connection are:
A
B
C
AB
BC
CA
This option is not displayed for any other type of panel connection.
Upstream Connection
The Upstream Connection display box displays the connection phase type of the upstream element for a
1-Phase 3-Wire Panel connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus, or a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel connected to a 1Phase 2-Wire bus. If the panel is not connected to an upstream element the display box shows
Unknown.
The display box is not shown for a 3-Phase panel and 1-Phase 2-Wire panel connected to a 3-Phase bus
the display box is not shown.
Phase Arrangement
Select from the following phase arrangements for a 3-Phase panel:
ABC
CBA
NEC
If NEC is selected, the phase arrangement shall be on A, B, C from top to bottom or left to right from the
front of the panel. Also, for this option phase B shall be the highest voltage (LG) on a 3-phase, 4-wire
delta connected system (midpoint grounded).
1st Ckt
Select one of the following phase designations of the first circuit in the panel:
A
B
C
This option is disabled (grayed out) if the NEC phase arrangement is selected.
36-11
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor Rating Page
36.4 Panel Schedule Editor - Rating Page

You can specify the panel Rated kV, Rated Amps, ANSI, or IEC Standard, number of Branch Circuits,
Layout, and Main Disconnect information on the Rating page.
Rating
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the panel in kV. The panel rated voltage can also be selected from the list box.
If this is a 3-Phase panel, kV is the line-to-line voltage. For 1-Phase panels, the rated voltage must be
consistent with the way this panel is connected to the system. For example, if the bus nominal kV is 4.16
and this load is connected between phase A and neutral, and then the rated voltage of the panel must be in
the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this panel is connected
between phase A and phase B, then the rated voltage of the panel must be in the neighborhood of 4.16
kV.
If a 3-Phase panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus or another 3-Phase panel, the default rated voltage of the
panel is set to the nominal kV of the upstream bus. For example, if a 3-Phase panel is connected to
another 3-Phase panel that is connected to a 3-Phase bus having a nominal voltage equal to 0.48 kV, the
default rated kV of both the panels is set to 0.48 kV.
The default rated voltage of a 1-Phase panel connected to a 3-Phase bus is set to the line to neutral kV of
the bus. For example, if a 1-Phase panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus having a nominal voltage equal to
0.48 kV, the default rated kV of the panel is set to (0.48/1.732 =) 0.277 kV.
36-12
Panel Systems
Panel rated voltage is for information purposes only and it is not used in calculation of the connected
panel load.
Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the panel in Amperes. The rated amps can also be selected from the
list box.
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard.
If ANSI is selected, all the applicable libraries within the panel are based on ANSI Standard. If IEC is
selected, all the applicable libraries within the panel are set to IEC Standard.
Branch Circuits
# of Circuits
Select a panel circuit size from the list or enter the total number of circuits (panel size). Panel size should
be an even integer. If an odd number is entered, panel size is reset to the next largest even number.
For panels with external connections, the number of circuits cannot be decreased. The data on the
Schedule page is deleted if the number of circuits in a panel is reduced.
Layout
Standard or Column
Select either the Standard or Column layout type.
Standard layout has its protective devices on both sides (1, 3, 5, 7 and 2, 4, 6, 8). Column layout has
its protective devices on one-side only (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). The circuits on the Schedule page are arranged per
the selected layout.
The layout of a panel having externally connected branches or loads cannot be changed. Data on the
Schedule page is reset, if the panel layout is changed.
Mounting
Enter the mounting type of the panel in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively,
select one of the following options:
Flush
Surface
Switchboard
The default mounting type is Flush.
Feed
Enter panel incoming feed location in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively,
select one of the following options:
Top
36-13
Panel Systems
Bottom
Left
Right
The Default panel incoming feed location is Top.
Enclosure
Enter panel enclosure in this field, using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively, select one of the
following options:
For ANSI Standard the options are:
NEMA 1
NEMA 3S
NEMA 4X
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R
NEMA 4
NEMA 5
For IEC Standard the options are:
IP10
IP14
IP54
IP11
IP52
IP67
Main Disconnect
Select the type of main disconnect for the panel from the following options:
None (Lugs Only)

Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through lugs only.
Breaker
Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through a circuit breaker.
Fusible Switch
Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through a fuse.
The default option is None when the panel is connected to a bus or an element through lugs only.
The Main Disconnect Status on the Info page is set to Close and disabled (grayed out) if option None
is selected.
Library
To access ANSI Standard library data, click the ANSI selection and then click the Library button. Use the
same procedure for accessing IEC Standard library data. As you change the standard from ANSI to IEC,
the data fields change accordingly.
To select a circuit breaker or a fuse from the corresponding Libraries, click the Library button and the
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker (Molded Case, with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device) or the
Library Quick Pick Fuse will appear depending on the type of Main Disconnected selected. If the type
of Main Disconnect is None, the Library button is disabled (grayed out).
36-14
Panel Systems
From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit breaker or a fuse by highlighting the manufacturer name and
model/class ID. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to
the editor.
Note: After you select library data, the manufacturer's name and model number is displayed in the fields
above the Library button.
STAR Plot
After selecting a main disconnect protective device, the user can plot the selected device in a STAR view
by clicking on the panel and adding it to a STAR View. For more information on adding an element to a
STAR View, see Chapter 16 STAR Device Coordination Analysis.
Breaker Rating, ANSI Standard

Click ANSI Standard and Main Disconnect Breaker to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in
accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards. To view and make changes to the ratings and settings click on
the Rating/Setting button.
36-15
Panel Systems
Library
Click the library button to open the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker. Note: The selection is
limited to Molded Case with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device.
Size
Select the breaker size, as stated by the manufacturer, from the list.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the low voltage circuit breaker in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down
list.
36-16
Panel Systems
Cont. Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes, or select the rating from
the drop-down list.
Interrupting kA
Enter the rated interrupting capability in rms kA, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Test PF
This is the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the circuit breaker has been established.
Breaker Rating, IEC Standard

Click IEC Standard and Main Disconnect Breaker to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in
accordance with the IEC Standards. To view and make changes to the ratings and settings click on the
Rating/Setting button.
36-17
Panel Systems
Library
Click the library button to open the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker. Note: The selection is
limited to Molded Case with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device.
Size
Select the breaker size, as stated by the manufacturer, from the list.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the low voltage circuit breaker in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down
list.
36-18
Panel Systems
Rated Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes, or select the rating from
the drop-down list.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in peak kA, or select the rating from the
list box. The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum
possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Min. Delay
from the drop-down list.
Ultimate Breaking
Enter the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA, or select
the rating from the drop-down list.
Service Breaking
Enter the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA, or select
the rating from the drop-down list.
Tkr
Enter the value of the short time (Tkr) of the low voltage circuit breaker in seconds, or select the rating
ST Withstand
Enter the rated short-time withstand current of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA, or select the rating
Breaker Trip Device

The trip device settings can be modified here. Note: The trip device type is limited to Thermal Magnetic.
To view and make changes to the ratings and settings click on the Rating/Setting button.
36-19
Panel Systems
Trip Device Type

Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the trip device types. In this case, Thermal Magnetic
TM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the manufacturer name for Thermal Magnetic trip
type.
TM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
36-20
Panel Systems
TM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display TM ID for the selected Thermal Magnetic trip model.
Next to TM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected TM ID.
Thermal
Fixed
be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the Thermal group displays FIXED in the thermal Trip field.
Adjustable
can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the Thermal group displays a drop-down list of the
available adjustable thermal trip in percent of trip device ampere rating. Also, next to the adjustable Trip
drop-down list, the actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable, or
continuous adjustable. The settings available are described below.
Fixed
maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed, the Magnetic group displays
FIXED in the magnetic Trip field.
36-21
Panel Systems
Discrete Adjustable
values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a drop-down list of the
available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable Trip drop-down list.
adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a Trip field to enter the magnetic setting in multiples trip device
ampere rating or in actual amperes. Next to the Trip field, the actual value of the trip in amperes is
displayed. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed. Note: the Trip field is
bounded by the Trip Range.
Fusible Switch Rating, ANSI Standard

Click ANSI Standard and Main Disconnect Fusible Switch to enter the fuse ratings according to the
ANSI standards.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the fusible switch in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
36-22
Panel Systems
Size
Enter the size of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Cont. Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the dropdown list.
Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the fusible switch in symmetrical rms kA, or select the rating
Test PF
Enter the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the fusible switch has been established.
Fusible Switch Rating, IEC Standard

Click IEC to enter the fuse ratings according to the IEC standards.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the fusible switch in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Size
Enter the size of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Cont. Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the dropdown list.
AC Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the fusible switch in kA, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the fusible switch in kV.
36-23
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor Schedule Page
36.5 Panel Schedule Editor - Schedule Page

The properties associated with each circuit in the panel can be entered on the Schedule page. The
Schedule page contains the following six tabs of properties:
Description
Rating
Loading
Protective Device
Feeder
Some properties of a panel circuit are shown on all the tabs for reference.
Action Buttons
ETAP provides action buttons to facilitate data entry on the Schedule page. These options can be used to
print, copy, paste, and erase rows on the Schedule page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
Print
Copy the content of the selected row to clipboard. Circuit number, Phase, Pole, Load Name, Link and
State are not copied.
Copy
Copy the content of the selected row to clipboard. Circuit number, Phase, Pole, Load Name, Link and
State are not copied.
36-24
Panel Systems
Paste
Paste the entire content (of the copied row) in the selected row. This will work when the Link Type is
other than space or unusable, and only for fields which are not blocked.
Erase
Blank out the contents of the entire selected row.
#
Indicates the panel circuit number. Circuits (rows) in the Panel Schedule page are analogous to the slots in
a physical panel board. The order of circuit numbers is based on the panel layout type, Standard or
Column. This is not editable. For a panel with Standard Layout, the odd circuit numbers are laid out first
followed by the even circuit numbers. Panel circuit numbers for Standard and Column Layouts are shown
in the below figure.
Circuit Numbers with

Standard Layout
Circuit Numbers with

Column Layout
Phase
This represents the phase of the circuit. This column is not shown for 1-Phase, 2-Wire connection. For 1Phase, 3-Wire connection this column may have one of the following values, depending on the number of
poles:
Poles Phase
1
L1 or L2
2
LL
L1 or L2 phase connection implies that the circuit is connected between the center tap and one of the
lines. LL phase connection implies that the circuit is connected between the two lines.
For 3-Phase, 3-Wire and 3-Phase, 4-Wire panels, the value for this column is determined using the Phase
Arrangement and 1st Circuit information from the Info page. For example, if the Phase Arrangement is
CBA and the 1st Ckt is C, the phase for the first circuit will be C, followed by B and A for the consecutive
circuits. This phase order will be repeated for other circuits.
36-25
Panel Systems
Pole
Specify number of poles for the circuit. ETAP uses the built in electrical intelligence to determine the
number of poles for a circuit. For example, the last row of a panel circuit is not allowed to have a number
of poles greater than 1.
The number of poles for a circuit depends on the phase of the load connected to the circuit. If a 3-Phase
load is connected to a panel circuit, the number of poles for this circuit will be 3. For a load connected
between two phases of a 3-Phase system, the number of poles will be 2. For a load connected between
one of the phases of a 3-phase system and the neutral wire, the pole is set to 1
Name
Enter load name (ID) in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Link
Select from the following options:
Internal
Ext-#
Spare
Unusable (row is blocked)
Space (row is blank and blocked)
The default option set is Space (blank)
Internal
These are loads specified internally and not connected externally to the panel on the one-line diagram.
Loads for which Link is set to Internal are referred as Internal Loads.
External
External loads are those connected to the panel externally via the one-line. Sub panels are considered
external loads to the upstream panel. In calculations, ETAP will include loads connected externally.
Once the link option is set to External (for example Ext. 1), placing the mouse pointer over the external
pin displays the pin number and phase connection.
When an external load is connected to a panel:
Data is automatically updated on the Rating Tab and Loading Tab of the Schedule page, from the
External Load Editor.
A protective device can be specified on the Protective Device Tab of the Schedule page.
On the Description Tab a Load Description can be entered. The Load Type and Status fields are
blocked.
The fields on Feeder Tab are blocked.
When an external load is deleted from a pin, the load type assignment is changed to Space and the
external connection is removed.
36-26
Panel Systems
Spare
A panel circuit with link option set to Spare is intended to be used as a spare circuit. Protective device
data can be entered on the Protective Device Tab of the Schedule page. Other than this, data cannot be
entered for fields on other tabs of the Schedule page.
Unusable
A circuit may become unusable due to its phase connection and the number of poles. In this case, data
cannot be entered on any tab of the Schedule page. For example, in case of 3-Phase 3-Wire connection, if
Pole = 1, the Link is set to Unusable and cannot be changed. This is because a 1-Phase load cannot be
connected to a 3-Phase 3-Wire panel.
Space
A blank circuit in a panel that is a circuit to which a load has not yet been assigned and has Link option
set to Space. This is the default value for Link option. In this case, data cannot be entered on any tab of
the Schedule page.
Changing Links
If link is changed to Spare, data is blanked on Description, Rating, Loading, and Feeder pages.
If link is changed to Unusable or Space, data is blanked on Description, Rating, Loading, Protective
Device, and Feeder pages.
If link is changed to Ext.#, data is blanked on Description (except Load Description field), Rating,
Loading, and Feeder pages.
When link is set to Ext.# and an external connection exists, the link cannot be changed to any other type
before deleting the external connection.
State
Specify the state (status) of the circuit. This also applies to the state of the protective device for the given
circuit. Click the button to change the state.
Note: The state of the protective device is not related to the status configuration. The default state of a
circuit is on.
36.5.1 Heading Tab

Enter data for Load Type, Status, and Load Description of a panel circuit within the Description tab.
36-27
Panel Systems
Load Type
Select load type from the list. The first 15 load items in the list are based on NEC 1999. The next ten
items in the list are user definable.
You can specify the last ten load types in the Panel Code Factor Table. The Panel Code Factor table can
be edited from the ETAP Project menu by pointing to Settings and selecting the Panel Code Factors
command. Load Type is used to determine the Code Factors used in calculating the total panel load.
Load Type options are available for internal links only. External loads are classified as motor load or
static load according to the element types.
Status
This field is enabled only for internal loads, that is, for circuits whose Link field is Internal. There are two
options available:
Continuous
Non-Continuous
For the purpose of panel code demand calculations, all circuits in a panel maintain the same Load Status
for a particular Load Type. For example, consider a panel having three circuits (say 1, 7 and 9) with Load
Type being Hospital and Load Status being Continuous. If the Load Status for circuit 1 is changed to
Non-Continuous, the Load Status for circuits 7 and 9 will also be changed to Non-Continuous.
The load status is used for the panel load calculations. The load status is determined from the connected
loads demand factor status for external links.
36-28
Panel Systems
Load Description
Enter the load description in this field, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
36.5.2 Rating Tab

You can specify the connected load ratings for each panel circuit within the Rating Tab.
VA, W, kV, and A

Enter the connected load in VA, Watts, or Amperes and the rated kV for an internal load. ETAP
calculates the fields accordingly based on the %PF and kV for each load. For external load, these fields
are calculated based on the connected load.
When you first define a load to be internal for a panel that is connected to an upstream bus with valid
nominal kV, ETAP automatically calculates and sets the defaults for the circuit kV based on the following
criteria:
Panel
Connection
3-phase
3-phase
1-phase 3-wire
1-phase 3-wire
1-phase 2-wire
Number
of Poles
3 or 1
2
1
2
1
kV
Bus nominal kV / 3
Bus nominal kV
Bus nominal kV /2
Bus nominal kV
Bus nominal kV
When you first define a load to be internal, if a panel is not connected to an upstream bus or bus nominal
kV is not specified, the default branch circuit kV is set based on the panel rated kV (as defined in the
Rating page of the Panel) using the following criteria:
Panel
Connection
Number
of Poles
kV
36-29
Panel Systems
Panel
Connection
3-phase
3-phase
1-phase 3-wire
1-phase 3-wire
1-phase 2-wire
Number
of Poles
3 or 1
2
1
2
1
kV
Panel Rated kV / 3
Panel Rated kV
Panel Rated kV /2
Panel Rated kV
Panel Rated kV
Note: The rated kV of a branch circuit is user-definable. If both the bus nominal kV and panel rated kV
are not specified (zero), panel calculation are not preformed.
A 3-phase load that has Pole = 3, is represented by three panel circuits. Enter per phase VA, W, or
Amperes for this load. For example, if total Watts for a 3-phase load are 1200, enter W as 400 (=1200/3).
The next two rows after a row with Pole = 3 on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page in a panel are
disabled (grayed out) and have VA, W, A and %PF values same as the Row with Pole = 3.
The row next to a row with Pole = 2, on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page in a panel is blocked.
The Amp value for a panel circuit depends on the circuit VA and the circuit kV.
Amps = Circuit VA per phase/( kV 3 1000)
For external loads, the Amp values are calculated based on upstream connected bus nominal voltage
(adjusted for phase connection, where applicable).
%PF
Enter the percent power factor for the selected circuit for internal loads in this field. This power factor
applies to all three phases of the circuit. The default value of %PF is 100. For external loads, this is the
calculated power factor of the connected external loads and is disabled (grayed out).
QTY
Enter the quantity of internal load in this field. This is used to calculate the total connected load. This is
blocked for external loads.
36-30
Panel Systems
36.5.3 Loading Tab

This tab is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for the loading of
each panel circuit that is each panel circuit can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
Loading Category. You can select any of these loading categories when conducting AC Load Flow
Studies.
Loading Category
Select the desired Loading Category (up to ten loading categories) from the drop-down box on the top of
the Schedule page. These are the same loading categories used by other loads in ETAP. To edit the
Loading Category names from the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the Loading Category
command.
VBus
This field displays the upstream connected bus nominal kV. The panel loading is calculated based on this
value (adjusted for phase connection, where applicable).
% Loading
For an external load this field is blank and cannot be edited. For internal loads, enter the % loading for the
selected Loading Category.
VA, W, A, %PF
These display columns show the total calculated loading in VA, W, and A, including the %loading and
QTY (on Rating Tab) for both external and internal loads. For an external load, the PF column displays
the rated % PF (at 100% load for motors). For internal loads, the %PF displayed is the same as entered in
the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
VA operating (Loading Tab) = Connected VA (Rated VA Rating Page) X QTY X %Loading
For Example, if Connected VA = 500, QTY = 3, % Loading = 90,
VA operating = 500 X 3 X 90% = 1,350 VA
36-31
Panel Systems
Amp values are calculated based on the upstream connected bus nominal kV for both internal and
external loads.
36.5.4 Protective Device Tab

You can enter information about the protective device used with each panel circuit within the Protective
Device tab.
Lib
To select a circuit breaker or a fuse from the corresponding Libraries, click the Library button and
the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker (Molded Case, with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device)
or the Library Quick Pick - Fuse will appear depending on the Type of protective device selected.
Select a circuit breaker or a fuse by highlighting the manufacturer name and model/class ID from the
Library Quick Pick. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it
to the editor. After you make a selection from library data, the manufacturer's name and model number
are displayed in the fields MFR and Model, respectively.
Lock
If this box is checked, then breaker/fuse sizing will not be allowed for this circuit. This feature is not
currently available. It will be available in future releases of ETAP.
Type
Select the type of PD for the selected circuit from a drop-down menu from the following options:
Fuse
Breaker
MFR
This field displays the protective device manufacturer. This field is filled out based on the selected library
manufacturer.
Model
This field displays the protective device model. This field is filled out based on the selected library model.
36-32
Panel Systems
Cont. Amps
Select a rating from the drop-down list of ratings or enter a value. Default is set per the selected library
continuous amp rating.
Int. kA
Select a rating from the drop-down list of values or enter a value. The default is set according to the
selected interrupting rating of the device based on the library selection.
STAR Plot
After selecting all the protective devices for all the circuits, the user can plot the protective devices in a
STAR view by clicking on the panel and adding it to a STAR View. To remove any protective devices
within the Panel from STAR View, go to the preference tab of STAR View Plot Options and uncheck
Phase. For more detailed information on adding an element to a STAR View, see Chapter 16 STAR
Device Coordination Analysis. For more detailed information on removing protective devices from the
STAR View, see Chapter 17 STAR Views.
36.5.5 Feeder Tab

Within the Feeder tab enter Feeder Tag, Type, #/Phase, Size, and Length of cables feeding each panel
circuit with internal loads. Feeder information for external loads is entered in the external Load Editor.
The row in Feeder tab is blocked for circuits with external loads.
Lib
To select cables from the Cable Library, click the Lib button at the top of the Schedule page and
the Cable Library Quick Pick will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library
type and size at the same time. The selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are
transferred to the Feeder tab.
Cable Z Button
Click this button on the top of the Schedule page to launch Cable Impedance Data Editor for
viewing and editing the cable impedance data. The default values impedance values displayed are
based on the cable selected from the library. See the Cable Impedance Data Editor Section below,
for a description of the editors options.
36-33
Panel Systems
Note 1: To be able to enter an impedance for the cable, first select the cable from the library, and then
you will be able to change the impedance by clicking on this button.
Note 2: Base temperature for the cable resistance is displayed next to the impedance (static). Default is 75
degrees Celsius. The impedances are adjusted based on the system frequency.
feet or meter
Select the unit of measure for cable length from the following options:
Feet
Meter
FDR Tag
Enter or change Cable ID in this field using up to 25 Characters.
Type
This field displays the cable type selected from the library.
#/Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase in this field.
Size
This field displays the cable size selected from the library.
Length
Enter the cable length in this field.
Vd
This field displays the % voltage drop for internal loads based on the cable data.
GND Wire
Enter the Ground wire description in this field using up to 25 Characters.
Conduit
Enter or select from the drop-down list the Conduit size and description using up to 25 Characters.
Notes
Enter notes related to the selected panel circuit using up to 25 Characters.
36-34
Panel Systems
Cable Impedance Data Editor
Cable Header
This information is displayed on top of the Cable Impedance Data Editor to reflect the cable type and size
selected from the Cable Library. This is a partial list of the library header which includes the library
source name (ICEA, NEC), rated voltage (0.6, 5, 15 kV), voltage class (100%, 133%), # of conductors
per cable (1/C, 3/C), conductor type (CU, AL), insulation type (Rubber, XLPE), installation type
(Magnetic/Non-Mag.), and cable size (350 kcmil, 180 mm2). The unit for cable sizes will be in
AWG/kcmil for English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables.
Impedance (per conductor)

Pos. and Zero Sequence Resistances (R & R0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence resistances at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length,
per conductor. This is for each line or cable, not the total resistance per phase. ETAP corrects these
resistances for different studies based on the specified temperature limits.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X & X0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence reactances, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor. This is
for each line or cable, not the total reactance per phase. These reactances must be entered at the system
operating frequency specified for this data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50
Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically corrects for the system operating frequency. After this value is entered
here, ETAP will not make any adjustment to this value.
Base Temp.
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistances are entered.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a
length should also be designated, including a unit from the list box. Units available are: feet, miles,
36-35
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor Summary Page
36.6 Panel Schedule Editor Summary Page

The Summary page displays information pertaining to panel loading. The information is divided into two
sections. The first section on the left side shows the continuous and non-continuous load on each phase,
total continuous load, total non-continuous load, connected load on each phase, total connected load, code
demand load on each phase, total continuous code demand load, total non-continuous code demand load
and total code demand load.
The second section on the right-side of the Summary page shows the operating load of the panel for all
ten Loading Categories.
Connected Load
The connected load for a panel circuit is the rated load specified on the Rating tab of the Schedule page.
Note: Connected loads are calculated based on the upstream connected nominal bus kV.
Continuous A/Continuous B/Continuous C

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase A/B/C for internal loads with Load
Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Continuous and for external loads connected to
the panel with Status on the Info page set to Continuous. Loads in OFF state are not included. These
fields are displayed for 3-Phase panels.
Continuous L1/Continuous L2/Continuous LL

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase L1/L2/LL for internal loads with
Load Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Continuous and for external loads
36-36
Panel Systems
connected to the panel with Status on the Info page set to Continuous. Loads in OFF state are not
included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase 3-Wire panels.
Total Continuous
This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included. This field is displayed for 1-Phase and 3-Phase panels.
Non-Continuous A/Non-Continuous B/Non-Continuous C

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase A/B/C for internal loads with Load
Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Non-Continuous and for external loads
connected to the panel with Status on the Info page set to Intermittent/Spare. Loads in OFF state are not
included. These fields are displayed for 3-Phase panels
Non-Continuous L1/Non-Continuous L2/Non-Continuous LL

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase L1/L2/LL for internal loads with
Load Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Non-Continuous and for external loads
connected to the panel with Status on the Info page set to Intermittent/Spare. Loads in OFF state are not
included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase 3-Wire panels.
Total Non-Continuous
This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for non-continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included. This field is displayed for 1-Phase and 3-Phase panels.
Connected A/Connected B/Connected C

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase A/B/C. Loads in OFF state are not included.
Connected L1/Connected L2/Connected LL

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase L1/L2/LL. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed only for 1Phase 3-Wire panels.
Total Connected
This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for loads connected to all the phases. Loads in
OFF state are not included.
Code Demand A/Code Demand B/Code Demand C

This row displays the total code demand VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase A/B/C. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed for 3-Phase
panels.
Code Demand L1/Code Demand L2/Code Demand LL

This row displays the total code demand VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase L1/L2/LL. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase
3-Wire panels.
Total Code Demand Continuous

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included.
36-37
Panel Systems
Total Code Demand Non-Continuous

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for non-continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included.
Total Code Demand

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for loads connected to all the phases. Loads in
OFF state are not included.
Operating Load
This section displays the VA, W, A and %PF for all the ten loading categories of 3-Phase and 1-Phase 2Wire panels. For 1-Phase 3-Wire panels the operating load for phases L1, L2, and LL is displayed,
corresponding to each Loading Category.
Load Calculation
The load values displayed in the Summary page include both internal and external loads. The calculations
are performed based on the equations given below.
Connected Load
Total Continuous Load
= (Internal ckt continuous VA load X QTY) + External ckt continuous VA load
Total Non-Continuous Load
= (Internal ckt Non-continuous VA load X QTY) + External ckt Non-continuous VA load
Total Connected Load
= (Continuous VA + Non-Continuous VA)
Code Demand Load

Total Continuous Code Demand Loading
= Continuous Load Multiplier X (Continuous Code Demand Load)
Total Non-Continuous Code Demand Loading
= Non-Continuous Load Multiplier (Non-Continuous Code Demand Load)
Code Demand Loading
= (Total Continuous Code Demand Load) + (Total Non-Continuous Code Demand Loading)
Operating Load
Operating Load (per Loading Category)
= Connected VA X %Loading (per Loading Category)
Note: The calculations on this page are only performed when the panel is energized.
36-38
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page
36.7 Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed. From the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the
User-Defined Fields command.




36-39
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
36-40
Panel Systems
Panel Schedule Editor Comment Page
36.8 Panel Schedule Editor Comment Page

36-41
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods

This section discusses the assumptions made in panel calculations, method used to calculate the panel
loading per phase, panel connected load, panel code demand load and the panel model used in ETAP
Study Modules.
36.9.1 Assumptions
Following are the assumptions made in panel calculation methods:
The rated voltage of an internal load connected to the panel is equal to the rated panel voltage. If
a 1-Phase load is connected to a 3-Phase panel circuit, the rated voltage of the panel circuit is
(1/3) times the rated panel voltage.
The voltage of L1 or L2 phase in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is (1/2) times the rated voltage of the
panel.
There are no losses in the feeders connecting a load to the panel.
Static loads are calculated based on their rated voltage then adjusted based on the upstream
connected bus nominal bus kV.
36.9.2 Loading Per Phase

3-Phase 4-Wire or 3-Phase 3-Wire Panels
3-Phase Load
In case of a 3-phase load connected to a panel circuit, the load per phase is calculated based on load
rating, rated voltage, and rated power factor, loading percent. The rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power
factor for each phase of a 3-Phase load are displayed on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Neutral)

For a 1-Phase load connected between one of the phases of a three 3-Phase system and the neutral wire,
the load per phase is same as the values specified on the rating page. The rated VA, Watts, Amps and
power factor for a 1-Phase are displayed on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Line)

In case of a 1-Phase load (load connected between two phases of a 3-Phase system) connected to a panel
circuit, the method used to calculate the per phase load, is described below. For a 1-Phase load (with Pole
= 2), the total rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor (instead of per phase values) are displayed on the
Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
Consider a case when a panel circuit feeds a 2-Phase load (that is a load connected between two phases of
a 3-Phase system). Assume that the load is connected between phases B and C, as shown in the below
figure.
A
B
C
IBC
36-42
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
However, in the Summary page, this load needs

to be spilt into phases B and C to be added to individual
Load
phase loads. ETAP splits the load in such a way that under the rated current phase load current and the
total load power are the same as the original load. Considering the following circuit, let
A
B
C
IB = IBC
IC = -IBC
LoadC
LoadB
The line voltage between phases B and C = VBC

Phase A voltage = VA
Phase B voltage = VB
Phase C voltage = VC
Load current = IBC
The current flowing into the load connected to phase B = IB = IBC
And the current flowing into the load connected to phase C = IC = -IBC
Angle by which load current IBC lags the load voltage =
Therefore, for load connected between phases B and C:
SBC = VBC.IBC
PBC = VBC.IBC.cos
QBC = VBC.IBC.sin
We can represent this case by the phasor diagram shown in the below figure. The phasor diagram shows
that the load current IB leads the phase B voltage VB by an angle of ( - 30). Also the phase current IC
lags the phase C voltage VC by an angle of ( + 30).
Therefore, for load connected to phase B
SB = VB.IB
PB = VB.IB.cos ( - 30)
QB = VB.IB.sin ( - 30)
And, for load connected to phase C
SC = VC.IC
PC = VC.IC.cos ( + 30)
QC = VC.IC.sin ( + 30)
36-43
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
IC = -IBC
VC
( - 30)
( + 30)
VA
30
IB = IBC
VB
VBC
Similar calculations are made for loads connected between phase A and phase B, phase C and phase A, or
any two phases.

1-Phase Load (Line-to-Neutral)
For a 1-Phase load connected between one of the phases of a three 3-Phase system and the neutral wire,
the load per phase is same as the values specified on the rating page
The rated VA, Watts, Amps and power factor for a 1-Phase are displayed on the Rating Tab of the
Schedule page.

A typical 1-Phase 3-Wire system in ETAP is shown in the below diagram.
L1
Load1
VL1 = 120 V
Load1-2
VLL = 240V
Load2
VL2 = 120 V
L2
36-44
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
Line-to-Center Load
An example of a line-to-neutral load, in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is Load1 shown in the above figure. For a
load connected between line L1 or line L2 and the neutral wire, the voltage applied on the load is equal to
half of the Line-to-Line voltage.
The rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor for a load connected to L1-phase are displayed on the
Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
Line-to-Line Load
An example of a line-to-line load, in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is Load1-2 shown in the above figure. The
rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor for a load connected to LL phase are displayed on the Rating
Tab of the Schedule page.
36.9.3 Connected Load

This section describes the method used to calculate the total connected load, connected continuous load
and connected non-continuous load (VA, Watts, Amps and power factor) on the Summary page of the
Panel Schedule Editor.
The connected load is calculated as the sum of all connected loads, both internal and external ones, which
have the ON State. The load rating values are used in calculating Connected Load, such as VA, W, and
PF for internal loads and rated KVA and PF for external loads. The Amp values are calculated based on
the nominal kV of panel terminal bus (upstream connected bus).
When calculating connected continuous load, either individual phases or the total load, it excludes:
Internal loads with Status set to Non-Continuous

External loads with Status set to Intermittent or Spare.
When calculating connected non-continuous load PA, PB and PC will exclude internal loads and external
loads with Status set to Continuous.
The connected load is sum of the connected continuous load and connected non-continuous load.
36.9.4 Operating Load

The operating load for the panel is calculated for each of ten loading categories. It summarizes total load
power, current, and power factor, including both internal and external loads for all phases. Loads with
OFF State are not included in the operating load.
The operating load is calculated similar to the connected load. In additional to the factors used in
calculating the connected load, load percent for each individual load is considered, and for external loads
the demand factor is also considered. The Amp value is calculated based on the panel terminal bus
nominal kV. For a three-phase panel, this current is an average value.
36-45
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
Code Demand Load

This section describes the method used to calculate the total connected continuous code demand load,
connected non-continuous code demand load and total connected code demand load parameters (VA,
Watts, Amps and power factor) on the Summary page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
Panel Code Factors

Code demand load depends on Panel Code Factors that are specified on the Panel Code Factor Editor. To
display the Panel Code Factors Editor, from the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the
Panel Code command.
Continuous Load Multiplier

This value is used for code load calculation for all continuous designated panel loads. The default value is
1.25.
Non-Continuous Load Multiplier

This value is used for code load calculation for all non-continuous designated panel loads. The default
value is 1.
Load Type
Each panel circuit load has a load type. The load types are based on NEC 1999. The first 14 load type ID
defined as per National Electric Code and cannot be changed. The remaining 10 load type fields are by
default User Defined 1 through User Defined 10. These load types can be changed. The Load Types are
displayed under the Description Tab of the Schedule page under Load Type column for each panel circuit.
36-46
Panel Systems
Notes:
NDU
DU
Ltg
HCF
Calculation Methods
= Non Dwelling Unit

= Dwelling Unit
= Lighting
= Health Care Facility
Units
Select from following options.
Volt-Amps
Largest Unit
# of Units
The first fourteen have fixed formats per NEC 1999.
Limit & Code Factors (CF)

The limit columns represent the VA limit, largest unit limit, or number of unit limit for a specified load
type based on selected format. There are five limit columns (Limit 1 through Limit 5). Corresponding to
each of the five limits there are five Code Factors. The sixth Code Factor is used for values exceeding the
fifth limit.
Note: By default, the code demand factors are based on NEC 1999 version. The demand factors are
user-editable and can be modified as applicable.
VA
Enter typical VA for the load type in this field. This value appears as default value on the VA column of
the Rating Tab in the Schedule page of the Panel Schedule Editor whenever that particular load type is
selected.
%PF
Enter typical power factor for the specified load type in this field. This value appears as default value on
the %PF column of the Rating Tab in the Schedule page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
This section lists the steps used to calculate the code demand load for a panel. In the following discussion
a panel load is a panel circuit with Link Type set to Internal or Ext.# and in ON state.
In calculating code demand load for internal loads, code factors as well as multiplication factors are
applied. However, for external loads, only multiplication factors are applied, which means that the code
factor for all external loads is assumed equal to 1.
Because ETAP allows you to define different code factors for various types of internal loads. Code
demand load calculation for internal loads are done for each types of load separately and then summed up.
A given load type can be associated with one of three different code factor units: Volt-amps, Largest Unit,
and # of Unit. Each of the three code factor units has a special way of applying the code factors, as
described below.
36-47
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
Rules for Code Demand Load with Volt-Amps Units

The limits set for Volt-Amps load type are in VA. The following rules are applied to this type of loads.
For load VA up to Limit 1, multiply the load VA by CF1.

If Limit 2 is greater than zero, then for load VA greater than Limit 1 and less than Limit 2,
multiply the load VA by CF2; otherwise for multiply load VA greater than Limit 1 by CF2 and
stop.
multiply the load VA by CF3; otherwise multiply load VA greater than Limit 2 by CF3 and stop.
For load VA greater than Limit 5 multiply the load VA by CF6.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by
Continuous Load Multiplier else multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous Load
Multiplier.
For example, let

Load Type = Generic
Load Status = Continuous
Continuous Load Multiplier (CLM) = 1.25
Load VA
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Limit 5
= 120,000
= 30000
= 50000
=0
=0
=0
CF1
CF2
CF3
CF4
CF5
CF6
= 1.0
= 0.5
= 0.3
=0
=0
=0
Therefore
Code Demand Load
= (Limit 1 X CF1 + Limit 2 X CF2 + (Load VA Limit 1 Limit 2) X CF3) X CLM

= (30000 X 1 + 50000 X 0.5 + (120,000 50000 30000) X 0.3) X 1.25
= 83750
36-48
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
Rules for Code Demand Load with Largest Unit

The limits set for Largest Unit loads are in number of units. In calculation, all loads are first sorted in
descending order of rated VA and then multiply by a code factor according to the limits. Let
Limit 1 = N1
Limit 2 = N2
Limit 3 = N3
Limit 4 = N4
Limit 5 = N5
The following rules apply in the calculation:
Starting from the first panel load, if N1 > 0 then up to N1 panel loads multiply each panel load
VA by CF1; otherwise multiply each panel load by CF1 and stop.
Starting from the (N1 + 1) panel load, if N2 > 0 then up to N2 panel loads multiply each panel
load VA by CF2; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF2 and stop.
load VA by CF3; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF3 and stop.
load VA by CF4; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF4 and stop
load VA by CF5; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF5 and stop
Starting from (N5 + 1) panel load, multiply each panel load by CF6 and stop.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by
Continuous Load Multiplier; otherwise multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous
Load Multiplier.
For example, let

Load Type = Motor (for all loads below)
Load Name
Load 1
Load 2
Load 3
Load 4
Load 5
Load 6
Load 7
Load 8
Load 9
Load 10
VA
3000
5000
3400
2500
6200
2000
1900
2200
3300
4300
Quantity
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Load Status for Load Type Motor = Continuous

Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Motor are:
36-49
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Limit 5
=3
=2
=1
=0
=0
CF1
CF2
CF3
CF4
CF5
CF6
= 1.25
= 1.05
= 0.75
= 0.5
=0
=0
Sort the loads in descending order by VA, as shown below.

Load Name
Load 5
Load 2
Load 10
Load 3
Load 9
Load 1 - 1
Load 1 - 2
Load 4
Load 8
Load 6
Load 7
VA
6200
5000
4300
3400
3300
3000
3000
2500
2200
2000
1900
For simplicity, assume that the power factor is 100% for all the loads, ETAP will perform complex
addition while adding up the load VA, that is it will take into account the power factor of individual loads
while adding the VA of loads.
Load with Code Factors
= 1.25 (6200 + 5000 + 4300) +

1.05 (3400 + 3300) +
0.75 (3000) +
0.5 (3000 + 2500 + 2200 + 2000 + 1900)
= 7750 + 7035 + 2250 + 5800
= 22835
Code Demand Load
= Load with Code Factors X CLM

= 22835 X 1.25
= 28543.75
36-50
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
Rules for Code Demand Load with # of Units

Similar to the Largest Unit loads, the limits for # of Units are also in number of load units. However,
in calculation, total load VA is multiplied by a coded factor according to total number of internal load
circuits connected. Let
Limit 1 = N1
Limit 2 = N2
Limit 3 = N3
Limit 4 = N4
Limit 5 = N5
and
N
= Number of panel loads for the load type
Total_VA = Sum of all panel loads for the load type
The following rules apply in calculation:
If N1 > zero and N <= N1 then multiply Total_VA by CF1 and stop.
If N2 > 0 and N > N1 and N <= N2 then multiply Total_VA by CF2 and stop.
If N5 > 0 and N > N5 then multiply Total_VA by CF6 and stop.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by Continuous
Load Multiplier or else multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous Load Multiplier.
One special case for # of Units load is that if the load type is Kitchen NDU, the code factor load
calculated as described above is compared to the sum of first two largest loads. If the sum of the first two
largest loads is larger than the calculated code factor load, then this load sum will be used in place of the
code factor load to be multiplied by the applicable Load Multiplier.
For example, let
Load Type = Motor (for all loads below)
Load Name
Load 1
Load 2
Load 3
Load 4
Load 5
Load 6
Load 7
Load 8
Load Type
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor
Generic
Generic
VA
3000
5000
3400
2500
6200
2000
1900
2200
Quantity
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
Load Status for Load Type Motor = Continuous

Load Status for Load Type Generic = Non-Continuous
36-51
Panel Systems
Calculation Methods
Non-Continuous Load Multiplier (NCLM) = 0.75
Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Motor are:

Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Limit 5
=2
=3
=5
=0
=0
CF1
CF2
CF3
CF4
CF5
CF6
= 1.25
= 1.05
= 0.75
= 0.5
=0
=0
CF1
CF2
CF3
CF4
CF5
CF6
= 1.5
= 1.25
= 1.15
= 0.5
=0
=0
Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Generic are:

Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Limit 5
=4
=5
=7
=0
=0
For simplicity, assume that the power factor is 100% for all the loads, ETAP will perform complex
addition while adding up the load VA, that is it will take into account the power factor of individual loads
while adding the VA of loads.
For Load Type = Motor
Number of loads, N = 7
For Load Type = Generic
Number of loads, N = 5
Motor Load
As N = 7, we will use CF3 = 0.75
Load with Code Factors = 0.75 (2 X 3000 + 5000 + 3400 + 2500 + 6200 + 2000)
= 18825
Code Demand Load
= Load with Code Factors 3 CLM
= 18825 X 1.25
= 23531.25
Generic Load
As N = 5, we will use CF2
Load with Code Factors = 1.25 (1900 X 3 + 2200 X 2)
= 12625
Code Demand Load
= Load with Code Factors X NCLM
= 18825 X 0.75
36-52
Panel Systems
Panels in System Studies
36.10 Panels in System Studies

This section describes how the panel loads are considered in System Studies. In the current version of
ETAP, the downstream elements from a top panel are not considered in details in a system study. Instead,
all the loads connected downstream from the top panel are summed up to the top panel. A top panel must
be one that is connected to a three-phase bus and is not powered from another upstream panel.
36.10.1 Load Flow Type System Studies and Reliability Study

The load flow type System Studies are the ones that are required to perform load flow calculations,
including load flow, motor starting, harmonic load flow, transient stability, optimal power flow. In these
studies as well as reliability study, the downstream loads connected to a top panel are aggregated to get
the total panel load. And this top panel is considered as a single load in the System Studies.
Radial System
To sum up load for a top panel, in the current version of ETAP, It is required that the system powered by
a top panel must be a radial system. It is not allowed for downstream elements from a top panel to form
any loops. Furthermore, the top panel must be the only source for all the downstream elements. Before
carrying out a System Study, ETAP checks if loops are involved in any top panels. If a loop is detected,
an error message will be displayed and the calculation is stopped.
Top Panel Load

The load aggregated to a top panel includes panel internal loads as well as all the connected external
loads. Since external connections to a panel may involve any elements except three-winding transformers,
utilities, and generators, it can form a full radial system. In summing up the load for the top panel, ETAP
considers all the loads connected. Because no load flow calculations are conducted, the load summation
does not include losses on the branches and equipment cables.
The aggregated load values are displayed in the Summary page of the Panel Schedule Editor. Depending
on the Study Case options, appropriate load diversity factors can also be applied.
Panel System Load Flow Calculation

When performing load flow calculations, if the Calc. Panel System option is checked in the load flow
Study Case, the load flow calculation will be carried out for all the panel systems. Bus voltages and
branch flows for panel systems will be reported on the one-line diagram and the output report. Section
15.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation provides detailed information on the calculation method for
panel systems.
36.10.2 Short-Circuit Type System Studies

Because panels are mostly involved in low voltage power equipment, in the current version of ETAP, it is
assumed that top panels do not make any short-circuit contributions to any fault occurred in the system.
36-53
Panel Systems
Output Reports
36.11 Output Reports

The panel load schedule and load summary are reported in the Panel Schedule Editor and in Crystal
Reports format.
The Crystal Reports format provides a summary of the panel information. The Panel Schedule Report
Manager helps you to view the output report.

To access the Report Manager, open the Panel Schedule Editor and click the Print button located on the
Schedule page. The Report Manager allows you to select different sections of the report and view it via
Crystal Report, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel formats. If you wish this
selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
The header of the Report Manager displays the type of panel connection for which the report is being
generated.
There are several fields and buttons available on this page, as described below.
Panel Schedule
This page allows you to select different formats for viewing load data. They include Loading Schedule
and Loading Summary.
36-54
Panel Systems
Output Reports
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the output report you want to view. This name will be the same as the
project file name.
Project File Name

This field displays the name of the project file from which the report is being generated, along with the
Help
OK/Cancel
Click the OK button to close the editor and open the Crystal Reports view to show the selected portion of
the output report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click the Cancel button to close the
Sample Panel Loading Schedule - 3-Phase 3-Wire
36-55
Panel Systems
Output Reports
Report Header
The report header contains information about ETAP Version, Project Name, Location of Company,
Contract Number, Engineer Name, File Name, Page Number, Date, Revision, and Configuration. This
information can be changed. From the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the Information
command.
Panel Rating
This section contains the rating information for the panel including the Main Disconnect used for the
panel. This information can be changed on the Rating page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
Panel Rating Table

The Panel Rating Table is prepared from the Rating tab on the Schedule page and is only a summary of
the actual table in the Panel Schedule Editor. The values entered in the Watts column are the rating of the
connected load and do not take quantity into consideration. The columns displayed are Load Name, Watts
(shown per phase), FDR Size, Number of Poles, CB Amp Rating, and Circuit Number. The table below
the rating table lists the Total Watts, Total Continuous Watts, and Total Non-Continuous Watts per phase.
Total Watts/phase = Total Continuous Watts/phase + Total Non-Continuous Watts/phase
36-56
Panel Systems
Output Reports
Sample reports for 3-Phase 3-Wire and 1-Phase 3-Wire panel systems are shown below:
Sample Panel Loading Schedule 1-Phase 3-Wire

For 1-Phase 3-Wire systems the Line-Neutral and Line-Line Ratings are displayed in the Output Report
as shown below.
36-57
Panel Systems
Output Reports
Sample Panel Loading Summary - 3-phase 3-Wire

The loading summary contains the same header and rating information as in the loading schedule. The
other data displayed is connected, continuous and non-continuous Volt-Amps, Watts, Amps, and %PF, all
displayed per phase as well as totals.
Loading Category
The Loading Category page is included in the Loading Summary page and displays Volt-Amps, Watts,
Amps (avg), and %PF for the ten user-defined Loading Categories.
36-58
Panel Systems
Output Reports
Sample Panel Loading Summary - 1-Phase 3 Wire

The Loading Summary contains the same header and rating information as in the loading schedule. The
other data displayed is connected, continuous and non-continuous Volt-Amps, Watts, Amps, and %PF, all
displayed as Line-Neutral or Line-Line depending upon the load connection.
36-59
Panel Systems
Output Reports
Loading Category
The Loading Category page is included in the Loading Summary page and displays Volt-Amps, Watts,
Amps (avg) and %PF for the ten user-defined Loading Categories based on Line-Neutral or Line-Line
load connections.
36-60
Chapter 37
ETAP DataX (Data Exchange)

ETAP DataX represents a rich set of customizable ETAP interfaces used to bridge gaps between ETAP
and external software. The data exchange program works in three different levels:
Level 1: Importing Data into an ETAP Project
Level 2: One-Way Synchronization of Data
Level 3: Two-Way Synchronization of Data
Furthermore the Data Exchange Modules can be categorized into three groups:
ETAP Built-In Data Exchange Capabilities
ETAP Add-On Data Exchange Modules
ETAP Data Exchange Consulting Services
In ETAP, the following data exchange options are available under the base package:
Export to DXF (AutoCAD / MicroStation)
Export to Metafile
Import ETAP DOS Projects
Import CSV
Import PowerPlot Projects
Export Report to MS Excel
Export Report to MS Word
Export Report to PDF
Export Configuration Status
Export to COMTRADE Format (IEC 363)
ETAP Add-On Data Exchange Modules
GIS Map
Equipment List Data Exchange
Project Merge
e-DPP Data Exchange
SmartPlant Electrical Data Exchange
Excel Data Conversion
Configuration Status Import
ETAP Data Exchange Consulting Services Available:
Bus Reducer
Third Party Data Conversions
37-1
Data X
DataX Levels of Exchange
37.1 DataX Levels of Exchange

Level 1: Importing Data into an ETAP Project:
One time data conversion involves conversion of the data from a third party database into an ETAP
project. The conversion program automatically generates a multi-layered graphical one-line diagram. A
multi-layered one-line consists of multiple nested composite networks.
Level 2: One-Way Synchronization of Data
One-way data synchronization consists of all the capabilities in Level 1. In addition, it has the capability
to transfer data multiple times from a third party database into an ETAP project. The program recognizes
out-of-sink data and provides you with Add, Modify, and Delete Actions.
Level 3: Two-Way Synchronization of Data
Two-way data synchronization consists of all the capabilities in Level 2. In addition, it also provides the
capability to transfer data multiple times from ETAP to the third party database.
37-2
Data X
ETAP Data Exchange Services
37.2 ETAP Data Exchange Services

OTIs Consulting Services supports clients worldwide in the performing and model validation of database
conversions and data exchange projects. We have a staff of engineers and database specialists dedicated
to conduct database conversions and synchronization between your existing data files and ETAP project
databases.
We have developed conversion programs for interpreting, automating, integrating, and quality checking
of your system information that can minimize the time and cost of re-entering the system data from
existing data files into ETAP. The conversion programs can import available electrical data and network
connections from IEEE, ASCII, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft SQL Server, Microsoft Access, Oracle,
Sybase IBM DB2, Informix, and other commercially available third party databases.
Our services can be employed for converting and setting up data files as well as the development of new
conversion and data exchange programs for ETAP based on your specific needs. The following services
are available:
Database Conversion
Convert the existing electrical power system database to ETAP.
automatically generate a multi-layered graphical one-line diagram.
The conversion program will
Data range checking

Typical data substitution for missing parameters
Data validation
Data consistency checking
Library data addition
One-line diagram generation
Database Verification & Validation

As the next step, load flow and short circuit runs are performed for validation of the converted data.
Results are compared with the original database. For data verification purposes, the pre-existing load
flow and short circuit results must be provided along with the database.
Model Presentations Setup

The auto-generated one-line diagram is based on logical layout. Some cosmetic layout changes may be
required for various study requirements and engineering uses. Where applicable, the ETAP model will be
arranged to include nested networks (substations) and will be setup for proper impedance, relay, and
study presentations of the one-line diagram.
Model Expansion
The system model can be expanded and modified to include new substations or subsystems that have not
already been modeled in the existing database / system model. This also can include as-built model
validation.
37-3
Data X
ETAP Data Exchange Services
Database Synchronization
Our database services also provide data automation and exchange with other databases such as GIS,
Project Master Database, and Plant Historians. These services include:
Data interpretation
Data integration
Format conversion and mapping
Procedures development
Turnkey database synchronization
Quality assurance services
Project and technical management
Contact Operation Technology, Inc. (www.etap.com) for more information about data exchange products
and services.
37-4
Data X
PowerPlot to ETAP Star Migration
37.3 PowerPlot to ETAP Star Migration

ETAP 5.x features a fully integrated and completely redesigned protective device coordination/selectivity
package called ETAP Star. This document is provided to assist you with the migration from PowerPlot to
ETAP Star.
The PowerPlot - ETAP Star Conversion program is designed to facilitate the conversion of protective
device settings modeled in PowerPlot to ETAP Star. Every effort has been taken to make this transition as
comprehensive as possible through automated tools. However, given that PowerPlot project data is stored
in a separate database than that of ETAP as well as the fact that the two programs were not fully
integrated and synchronized, for some cases a direct conversion and transfer of data from PowerPlot to
ETAP Star is not practical hence requiring manual data transfer. As for any data conversion process, it is
vital that the converted data is verified for completeness and correctness. A detailed conversion log and
report are provided to aid you in this process.
37.3.1 Conversion Procedure

ETAP provides an import program for conversion of Time Current Curve (TCC) data from existing
PowerPlot projects to ETAP Star. The program converts the PowerPlot settings to ETAP Star for the
Base revision of ETAP. This process is implemented in two stages - (1) Import of PowerPlot device
data and (2) Conversion of the data to ETAP Star.
The outcome of the conversion depends on the manner in which the PowerPlot project was created and
maintained. This can be categorized into two cases:
1. PowerPlot projects which were created via ETAP using the data link between the ETAP and
PowerPlot programs.
2. PowerPlot projects created independent of ETAP (stand-alone).
In the first case, the device IDs were used as the only link between the two programs, i.e., in order for a
protective device to share properties between ETAP (4.x version and earlier) and PowerPlot, it must have
had the same ID in both programs. Therefore, even if PowerPlot was used as a stand-alone program and
the PowerPlot project contained device IDs identical to the ETAP project device IDs, the integrity of the
data link would still be maintained between the two programs.
Data Categories
The PowerPlot ETAP Star conversion procedure can be better understood by a closer examination of
the data in PowerPlot project files. A PowerPlot project consists of one file with a .plt extension. Each
PowerPlot project file (*.plt) may consist of a number of TCC files. Each TCC file may include the
number of protective device characteristic curves created and added to the TCC file. The data contained
in PowerPlot project files can be classified into four data categories:
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
Protective Device Settings / Parameters (i.e., Relay, LVSST, etc.)

Fixed Points / Damage Curves (i.e., Motor Starting Curves, Cable Damage Curve, etc.)
TCC Plot Settings (i.e., Voltage / Current Scale, Legend, etc.)
Special Devices / Features (i.e., Typical Overload Heater Curves, Custom Labels, etc.)
37-5
Data X
The conversion of each data category in a PowerPlot project to ETAP Star is summarized in the table
below:
Data
Category
II
Cable (Damage Curve)
Converted ETAP Star

Device(s)
Cable
Overcurrent Relay
Overcurrent Relay (OCR)
MV Solid State Trip
MV Solid State Trip

(MVSST)
Fuse
Fuse
II
Transformer (Damage
Curve)
Transformer
LV Solid State Trip
LVCB with LV Solid State

Trip (LVSST) Device
Electro-Mechanical Trip
Thermal-Magnetic Trip
LVCB with ElectroMechanical Trip (EM)

Device
LVCB with ThermalMagnetic Trip (TM)
Device

Unit without Typical
OLR Curve
LVCB with Motor Circuit

Protector Unit (MCP)
Device
I, IV

Unit with Typical OLR
Curve
LVCB with Motor Circuit

Protector Unit (MCP)
Device and Overload
Heater
II
Motor (Starting Curve)

without Typical OLR
Curve
Motor
II, IV
Motor (Starting Curve)

with Typical OLR Curve
Motor and Overload Heater
Motor Relay
Motor Relay (MR)
PowerPlot Device
37-6
Conversion Procedure
If an identical device ID is found, ETAP data is
retained, else new cable created with PowerPlot
data.
If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
settings are imported, else new overcurrent relay
created with PowerPlot settings.
settings are imported, else new MVSST created
with PowerPlot settings.
settings are imported, else new fuse created with
PowerPlot settings.
retained, else new transformer created with
PowerPlot data.
settings are imported to Trip Device page of
LVCB, else new LVCB created with PowerPlot
settings.
Manufacturer and model conversion only. Trip
Settings require manual transfer.
settings.
settings.
For MCP, If an identical device ID is found,
PowerPlot settings are imported to Trip Device
page of LVCB, else new LVCB created with
PowerPlot settings. For OLR curve, a new
overload heater created with PowerPlot settings.
retained, else new motor created with PowerPlot
data. If the full load starting time in ETAP is zero,
PowerPlot starting time is mapped over.
Otherwise, starting time remains as is.
For Motor, If an identical device ID is found,
ETAP data is retained, else new motor created
with PowerPlot data. For OLR curve, a new
overload heater created with PowerPlot settings. If
the full load starting time in ETAP is zero,
PowerPlot starting time is mapped over.
Otherwise, starting time remains as is.
settings are imported, else new motor relay created
with PowerPlot settings.
Data X
Data
Category
I
Recloser
Converted ETAP Star

Device(s)
Recloser
IV
User Curve
User Curve
III
TCC Scale (Voltage and

Current)
Primary X-Axis Voltage

and Current Multiplier
III
Legend
Legend
IV
Custom Label
Added to Device Label
One-Line
PowerPlot Device
Conversion Procedure
retained, else new cable created with PowerPlot
data.
A new User Curve is created. If an identical device
ID is found in ETAP Star View, then the
PowerPlot User Curve data is mapped over. Note
that User Curve ID in ETAP has to be unique.
PowerPlot TCC Scale values imported to Primary
Axis voltage and current multiplier for the specific
TCC ID
PowerPlot
Legend
fields
imported
to
corresponding Legend fields in Star View for the
specific TCC ID
Custom label from PowerPlot imported and added
to device label
Not converted to ETAP
Category I Protective Device Settings / Parameters

The PowerPlot devices that fall in this category include Low Voltage Solid State Trip (LVSST), ThermalMagnetic Trip (TM), Electro-Mechanical Trip (EM), Motor Circuit Protector Trip (MCP), Fuse,
Overcurrent Relay (OCR), Motor Relay (MR), and MV Solid State Trip (MVSST). A mapping database
with tables for each device library is provided to cross-reference the PowerPlot device library to the
ETAP Star library. The conversion program imports and reads the device ID from PowerPlot and then
searches the mapping table (of corresponding device) to find the match for the device heading (i.e.,
Manufacturer, Model, Type, etc.) with the equivalent ETAP Star device library.
If the program finds a match in the table, the PowerPlot settings for the mapped device are transferred to
the corresponding ETAP device type. A summary of the device settings imported from PowerPlot is listed
in the Comment page of the specific device, as shown below.
If no match is found, the program generates a log entry for the device (under the appropriate device type)
and provides a detailed explanation as to the status of the converted device and the reason for no
conversion. The log file TCCConvert_Log.xml located in the same folder as the PowerPlot project
report files (*.CSV) by default and can be opened using Internet Explorer.
37-7
Data X
Category II Fixed Point / Damage Curves

The PowerPlot devices that fall in this category include Cable Damage Curves, Motor Starting Curves,
and Transformer Damage Curves. The conversion program retains the ETAP data, if an identical device
ID exists in ETAP.
For the case of Motor Starting Curves, if the motor full load acceleration time is not defined in ETAP and
the conversion program finds identical motor IDs in PowerPlot and ETAP projects, it uses the motor
acceleration time as defined in the PowerPlot project.
Category III TCC Plot Settings

PowerPlot TCC settings such as TCC Scale and Legend fall in this category. The conversion program
imports the PowerPlot TCC Plot settings to the applicable Plot Option (Primary Axis Scale / Legend) in
the ETAP Star view for each TCC ID.
Category IV Special Devices / Features

For the Typical OLR Curve (included in MCP, and Motor Starting Curve in PowerPlot), the conversion
program creates a new Overload Heater device in ETAP with PowerPlot OLR data. User Curve is created
in ETAP Star View based on the PowerPlot User Curve parameters.
37-8
Data X
37.3.2 Importing to New / Existing ETAP Projects

When a PowerPlot project is imported into a New ETAP Project (no one-line diagram or elements), the
conversion program creates a Composite Network with ID in the format PP_Star_Date_Time and adds
an element for each device, with device IDs as defined in PowerPlot. Note that in this case, all devices
imported will have PowerPlot data (no ETAP devices defined).
When a PowerPlot project is imported to an Existing ETAP Project, the data conversion will be as per
the table in Section 1.2.1 for different PowerPlot Data categories. It is recommended to check the device
IDs is identical on the PowerPlot and ETAP projects to ensure a more accurate conversion. A few
scenarios are given below for better understanding:
1. If an ETAP project has a fuse element with ID Fuse1 and a PowerPlot project has a fuse curve
with ID Fuse1, the conversion program will import the PowerPlot Fuse1 data in ETAP fuse
element Fuse1.
2. If a PowerPlot project has a unique Cable ID, not existing in an ETAP project, the conversion
program adds a cable in a composite network (with ID in the format PP_Star_Date_Time), with
cable ID and cable data as defined in PowerPlot.
3. If an ETAP project has an induction motor with ID Motor1 and a PowerPlot project has a relay
curve with ID Motor1 (identical ID but different devices), the conversion program detects two
different elements during conversion and hence will create a composite network (with ID in the
format PP_Star_Date_Time) and add a New Relay element with ID Motor1-1 as Motor1
already exists ID in ETAP.
Note: In either case, the conversion program creates Star TCC Views with the same TCC IDs and device
curves as defined in a PowerPlot project. If the devices in a PowerPlot project are not included in TCC
views, the program still converts the device data to ETAP.
Setup for PowerPlot Star Conversion

Prior to importing a PowerPlot project into ETAP Star, ensure the following:
1. PowerPlot projects are upgraded to PowerPlot Release 183 or above.
2. Where applicable, convert the old relay elements (created in ETAP version 3.0.2 and earlier) to
the new relay format via ETAP prior to converting the PowerPlot file.
3. The project reports (*.CSV) are created for all applicable devices to be imported. It is
recommended to save the project reports in the same folder as the PowerPlot project. This greatly
helps during conversion, as the same folder will be used for the selection of projects and reports
in the TCC Import window shown below and the resulting LOG file will be saved in the same
folder.
4. For the case of importing PowerPlot project to an existing ETAP project, check to ensure that the
data link between ETAP and PowerPlot projects is maintained.
37-9
Data X
5. You should also review the various options listed in the TCC Import window shown below,
such as Fuse Short Circuit Ratings, CT Ratios, etc., and select them after careful evaluation of
your conversion scenario. Refer to Section 1.3 for a detailed explanation of these options.
37.3.3 Device Conversion Details

The conversion details for different PowerPlot devices and features, when imported to New / Existing
ETAP projects is described below. Refer to Sections 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 for general information on the
conversion procedure.
Cable Damage Curve

Import to New Project
The conversion program adds a cable with the ID and data as defined in PowerPlot in a composite
network.
Import to Existing Project

If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical Cable ID, the conversion program retains the ETAP Cable
Editor data, even if the PowerPlot cable data is different compared to ETAP data. This is because the
ETAP cable library data is given precedence, considering the data and modeling accuracy in ETAP.
Further, if the I2t checkbox in the Cable Editor Protection page is not checked, the program will check it
during conversion.
The LOG file will record a message Device(s) below already exist in ETAP, properties from PowerPlot
were NOT overwritten to ETAP properties and list the cable IDs that apply to this case.
Transformer Damage Curve

The conversion for Transformer Damage Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the Cable
Damage Curve.
37-10
Data X
Motor Starting Curve

The conversion for Motor Starting Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the Cable Damage
Curve.
In addition, when importing to an existing ETAP project, if PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical
Motor ID and if the motor full load acceleration time is not defined in ETAP, then the conversion
program uses the motor acceleration time as defined in a PowerPlot project. Also, if the Draw Typical
Thermal OLR Curve option is checked for a MCP device in PowerPlot as shown below, the conversion
program will create an Overload Heater element (in the composite network) with the same device ID as
specified in PowerPlot and import the data for the Overload Thermal Curve. If the full load starting time
in ETAP is zero, PowerPlot starting time is mapped over. Otherwise, starting time remains as is.
Fuse Curve
The conversion program adds a fuse with the ID and data as defined in PowerPlot in a composite
network. The options Fuse Short Circuit Ratings Update using ETAP 5.x Library Values OR Keep
Existing Values do not have any effect on the conversion of fuse data for this case.

If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical Fuse ID, the conversion program replaces the ETAP Fuse
Editor data with the fuse data in PowerPlot.
It should be noted that in this case, the conversion program imports the PowerPlot fuse Manufacturer,
Model, Type, and Size data only. Other fuse parameters in ETAP such as Continuous Amp, Short Circuit
Rating, Test PF, etc. will depend on the option selected Update using ETAP 5.x Library Values OR
Keep Existing Values, on the TCC Import window prior to conversion. Selecting the Update using ETAP
5.x Library Values option overwrites these existing (user modified) parameters with values from the
ETAP 5.x library. Selecting the Keep Existing Values option preserves existing (user modified)
parameters.
37-11
Data X
LV Solid State Trip (LVSST) Curve

The conversion program adds a LV circuit breaker with the ID and LVSST settings (on the Trip Device
page) as defined in PowerPlot, in a composite network.

If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical device IDs, the conversion program replaces the ETAP
Breaker Editor data (Trip Device page) with the LVSST settings in PowerPlot.
It should be noted that the conversion replaces the ETAP breaker trip device data, even if the existing trip
device in ETAP is pre-assigned to the breaker. As an example, if ETAP has a CB6 breaker defined as
ABB E1 power breaker with SACE PR111 trip unit and PowerPlot has a CB6 LVSST device with
General Electric RMS-9 trip, the conversion replaces the SACE PR111 trip with GE RMS-9 trip data. In
such cases, a separate log file will be generated indicating the mismatch between the imported PowerPlot
trip unit and the selected breaker in ETAP. This logic will apply to other breaker trip units, i.e., ThermalMagnetic, Electro-Mechanical, and Motor Circuit Protector devices.
LVSST Ground Curve in PowerPlot

If the LVSST device in PowerPlot has a ground element (for the same device ID; refer LVSST curves
CB1 and CB1-Ground as shown below), the conversion program will detect this case, check the ground
element and import the ground settings for the corresponding LV breaker (Trip Device page) in ETAP.
Thus, for the PowerPlot LVSST units CB1 and CB1-Ground shown below, the conversion will result in
Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, and Ground settings of CB1 and CB1-Ground units imported to
Phase and Ground elements in CB1 breaker (Trip Device page) in ETAP. Further, a Star View with ID
TCC-1 will be created with the Long-Time, Short-Time, and Instantaneous settings plotted in Phase
Mode and Ground settings plotted in Ground Mode.
37-12
Data X
Electro-Mechanical (EM) Curve

Electro-Mechanical trip units have been modeled as per manufacturer specifications in ETAP
and differ in structure and design from the modeling technique implemented in PowerPlot. Hence the
conversion program will import PowerPlot Manufacturer and Model only for the EM trip unit and
remaining parameters are to be set manually. This is to avoid any discrepancies during conversion.
The conversion for Electro-Mechanical Trip Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the LV
Solid State Trip Curve; with the exception of the Ground Curve case.
Thermal-Magnetic Trip (TM) Curve

The conversion for Thermal-Magnetic Trip Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the LV Solid
State Trip Curve; with the exception of the Ground Curve case.
Note: PowerPlot models the Adjustable Instantaneous Trip as a continuous adjustable ampere setting
for all models. However, many thermal-magnetic trip units such as Cutler-Hammer HKD (shown below
as continuous adjustable in PowerPlot) have discrete adjustable instantaneous settings. In such cases, the
conversion program will set the instantaneous setting to the closest discrete value (multiple or amperes)
available for the model in ETAP.
37-13
Data X
Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Curve

The conversion for Motor Circuit Protector Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the LV Solid
State Trip Curve with the exception of the Ground Curve case.
In addition, similar to Thermal-Magnetic Trip, PowerPlot models the Instantaneous Trip as a continuous
adjustable ampere setting for all models. In such cases, the conversion program will set the instantaneous
setting to the closest discrete value (multiple or amperes) available for the model in ETAP.
Also, if the Draw Typical Thermal OLR Curve option is checked for a MCP device in PowerPlot as
shown below, the conversion program will create an Overload Heater element (in the composite network),
with the same device ID as specified in PowerPlot and import the data for the Overload Thermal Curve.
Relay / Motor Relay Curve

Overcurrent and Motor relays are modeled in great detail and true-to-the-form per manufacturer
specifications in ETAP. The Overcurrent Relay Editor in ETAP includes settings for all elements that
may be available for the relay such as Phase, Ground, Sensitive Ground, Neutral, and Negative Sequence
along with Directional and Voltage Control/Restraint features. Similarly the Motor Relay Editor includes
data for Thermal, Jam, Instantaneous, and Ground elements.
PowerPlot, however, does not distinguish different elements and levels available in relays and models
relay curves with 51/50 pickup settings only. Hence, importing of relay settings should be done after a
careful evaluation of the relay IDs used (check if identical to ETAP) and the type of protection intended
for (Phase, Ground, etc.), while modeling in PowerPlot. Two possible scenarios are described below for
better understanding.
37-14
Data X
1. Assume that the ETAP one-line has two relays R1 and R2; R1 for the Phase function and R2 for
the Ground function respectively. If the PowerPlot file to be imported into ETAP also has relays
R1 and R2, the conversion will import the relay settings in PowerPlot to R1 and R2 relays in
ETAP.
2. Assume that the ETAP one-line has two relays R1 and R2; R1 for the Phase function and R2 for
the Ground function respectively. However, there are two PowerPlot projects RelayP.plt, with
device R1 for Phase function and RelayG.plt, with device R1 for Ground function. In this case,
the R1 data imported in ETAP will depend on the PLT file imported first. Thus in this case it
must be ensured that the device IDs for the relays in the two PLT files are identical to those
defined in ETAP.

The conversion program adds an overcurrent/motor relay with the ID and settings as defined in PowerPlot
in a composite network. The options CT Ratios Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot OR Keep Existing
ETAP 5.x CT Ratio on the TCC Import window do not have any effect on the conversion of relay data
for this case.
37-15
Data X

If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical Relay IDs, the conversion program replaces the ETAP
Relay Editor data with the relay data in PowerPlot.
The Relay CT ratios in ETAP after conversion will depend on the option selected (Update CT Ratios
from PowerPlot OR Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio) on the TCC Import window prior to conversion.
Selecting the Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot option will overwrite the existing ratios (user modified)
of current transformers connected to relay with the ratio specified on the Relay / Motor Relay Editor in
PowerPlot. Selecting the Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio option will preserve the existing CT ratios
(user modified) in the ETAP project.
Note: Cascaded connected relays do not support the conversion of CT ratio from PowerPlot.
CT Ratios
While importing an overcurrent/motor relay, the following should be noted regarding CT Ratio
conversion, when the Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot option is selected:
1. If there is a physical CT connected to the relay, then the conversion will overwrite the CT ratings
in the Input page of the Relay Editor and the Info page of the CT Editor.
2. If there is no physical CT connection to the relay, the conversion will overwrite the CT ratings for
all available terminals on the Input page of the Relay Editor.
Migrating Old OC Relays

For Relay elements created in ETAP version 3.0.2 and earlier, there is a special conversion tool provided
to move the old overcurrent relays to the new relay format. This option is provided from the File menu
for an ETAP project where old overcurrent relays are detected. For such cases, you must first convert the
old relay elements to the new relay format from ETAP prior to converting the PowerPlot project.
37-16
Data X
MV Solid State Trip (MVSST)

The conversion for MV Solid State Trip Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the relays.
One-Line Connectivity
It should be noted that the one-line drawing that can be created in PowerPlot is purely graphic. The
elements in the one-line do not carry any data or connectivity logic, as is the case with ETAP.
Thus, when a PowerPlot project is imported into a new ETAP project, the one-line diagram connectivity
is not imported to the one-line or Star TCC View. ETAP creates new elements in a composite network,
which may be connected once the conversion is complete.
When a PowerPlot project is imported into an existing ETAP project, the connected one-line diagram may
be already available in ETAP. For this case, any Star TCC Views with curves imported from PowerPlot
would not reflect the connectivity.
37-17
Data X
37.3.4 Conversion Tutorial

The tutorial below provides a step-by-step procedure on how to convert a sample PowerPlot file to a new
ETAP 7.0 (or current version) project.
Convert PowerPlot Sample Project File to ETAP Star

1. Launch PowerPlot and from the File menu, select Open Project. Browse to the PowerPlot
installation path, select the Sample project Sample.plt, and then click Open.
2. The Sample project in the PowerPlot window appears as shown below.
37-18
Data X
3. From the Tools menu, select the Project Report option. Browse the path for saving the reports and
click OK to generate reports for selected (checked) devices. It is recommended to use the same
folder location of the PowerPlot project file. Note that devices from PowerPlot will not be
converted to Star without the project reports.
Steps 1 3 can be skipped, if the PowerPlot projects report (*.csv) is already available.
4. Launch ETAP and from the File menu select New Project. Enter a name for the new project file
(for example, PowerPlotconvert), and click OK. Note that PowerPlot files can also be imported to
an existing ETAP project. Refer to section 1.2 for more details on conversion to existing ETAP
projects.
37-19
Data X
5. ETAP will prompt you for your user information. Enter the user name and access level
information (if required) and click OK to continue. To learn more about setting up user accounts
and access levels, refer to User Access Management chapter of the User Guide or click the Help
button.
37-20
Data X
6. The one-line diagram view will open in ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, select Data Exchange,
and then select Import PowerPlot Project.
37-21
Data X
7. If a library file is not associated with the ETAP project prior to using the Import PowerPlot
Project command, ETAP will ask you to select a library file. Browse to the location of the library
file, select it and click Open.
Note: The Import PowerPlot Project program requires an ETAP 5.x library file that has information
related to time current characteristics of protective devices. Lower versions of ETAP library files do not
have this information.
8. Once the library file is selected, ETAP will launch the PowerPlot Project Import Program as
shown below.
37-22
Data X
The various fields available in the PowerPlot Import program are briefly described below.
Select PowerPlot Project

Select the PowerPlot project file, which has the Time Current Curves (TCCs) to be imported into
the ETAP project. PowerPlot project files have the extension .PLT.
Select Location of Project Reports

Select the location of PowerPlot project reports. PowerPlot project report files have the extension
.CSV.
Star TCC Labels - Label ID / Label ID + Setting

Select this option to show only the ID or the ID and settings of different devices in ETAP Star
TCC View.
System Frequency
Select the system frequency to be used in the ETAP project. This is used to convert seconds to
cycles for time delays.
Fuse Short Circuit Ratings Update using ETAP 5.x values / Keep existing values
This option is applicable when PowerPlot projects are imported into an existing ETAP project.
Selecting the Update using ETAP 5.x values option will overwrite the existing (user modified)
Fuse Short Circuit Ratings with values from ETAP 5.x library. Selecting the Keep existing
values option will preserve the existing (user modified) Fuse Short Circuit Ratings in ETAP
project.
CT Ratios Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot / Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio
This option is applicable when PowerPlot projects are imported into an existing ETAP project.
Selecting the Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot option will update the ratios of current
transformers connected to relays with the ratio specified on the Relay / Motor Relay Editor in
PowerPlot. Selecting the Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio option will preserve the existing
CT ratios in the ETAP project.
9. Select the different options as desired and click OK to import and convert the PowerPlot project.
Note that the importing time depends on the number of TCCs and devices in the PowerPlot
project.
37-23
Data X
10. Once the conversion is complete, ETAP generates a composite network containing the devices in
the selected PowerPlot project. Refer to section 1.2 for more details on PowerPlot conversion to
existing ETAP projects.
11. A Star TCC View is also generated with the TCC curves of the devices as was plotted in
PowerPlot. The Star View is as shown below. The Star View can be accessed from the Project
Editor.
12. ETAP also generates a detailed log file in XML format that is saved in the same directory
location as the PowerPlot Project file.
37-24
Data X
Import IEEE Format
37.4 Import IEEE Format

The Import IEEE Format File command can be invoked by going to the File menu, Data Exchange
sub menu as shown below:
As the tools are used to add or modify data in the ETAP project, they are active only in the Edit mode.
Clicking on the command displays the ETAP IEEE Data Converter Editor as shown below.
37-25
Data X
Import IEEE Format
37.4.1 Selecting IEEE Data File (text)

Type or select the IEEE data file and click it on the OK button to convert it into an ETAP project. Once
the conversion is done, it will display the Exchange successful dialog box as shown below.
37.4.2 IEEE Data File

ETAP IEEE Data Converter reads data from IEEE format files which are space delimited files and have
three main sections:
The title data section provides the base MVA

The bus data section provides generation, load and shunt impedance information
The branch data section provides the impedance of branches
Title Data Section

The main information available in this section is the base MVA specified in the columns 31 through 37.
The base MVA read from this section is used to convert per unit quantities specified in the other sections
of the file to actual values.
Bus Data Section

This section provides the final bus voltages and angles calculated by load flow. These values are mapped
to Initial Voltage and Angle fields on the Info page of the ETAP Bus Editor. The nominal bus voltage in
ETAP is set to 1 kV, for cases were the base voltage is not specified. Note that the comment page of the
Bus Editor provides the information read from the IEEE data file.
The information in this section is also used to create lumped loads with 100% motor load (constant kVA
load) in ETAP. Nameplate ratings of the lumped load are calculated from per unit load MW and load
Mvar values and the base MVA.
Synchronous generators nameplate ratings are set based on per unit generation MW and Mvar values and
the base MVA.
The shunt impedance values are used to create static loads at buses. Static load nameplate ratings are
calculated based on the shunt impedance values and the base MVA.
Branch Data Section

A branch in IEEE format data file may represent an impedance or a transformer depending on the
specified branch type. Transformers may be modeled as fixed tap or with on-line tap changers as
specified in the IEEE format file.
37-26
Data X
Import Raw Data Files
37.5 Import Raw Format

The Import Raw Data File command can be invoked by going to the File menu and the Data
Exchange sub menu as shown below:
As the tools are used to add or modify data in the ETAP project, they are active only in the Edit mode.
Clicking on the command displays the ETAP Raw Data Converter Editor as shown below.
37-27
Data X
37.5.1 Selecting Raw Data File

Select Raw Data File
Type or select the raw data file. Raw data files are files with extension raw (*.raw) and exported
represent a solved load flow case. They are text formatted files with data fields separated by blank spaces
or commas. If there are any sequence and dynamic data files in the same folder as the raw data file, the
sequence and dynamic data files would also be imported. The sequence files are files with extension
seq (*.seq) and dynamic files are the files with extension dyr (*.dyr). Note that all three files, the raw
data file, sequence file, and dynamic file, must all have the same name to be imported.
Impedance Tolerance (p.u.)

This value is the Zero Impedance Line Threshold Tolerance (THRSHZ). If branch reactance is less than
this value and resistance is 0, the conversion program will create a switch in ETAP instead of impedance.
Raw Data File Version

Presently the conversion program supports version 29 and later of the raw data files.
Delimiter
Select the delimiter used in the raw data file; this may be comma or blank space.
OK
Click on the OK button to convert the raw data file into an ETAP project. Once the conversion is done, it
will display the Exchange successful dialog box as shown below.
Cancel
Click on the cancel button to cancel the conversion.
37.5.2 Raw Data File

ETAP Raw Data File Converter reads data from raw data format files. Data in raw data files is arranged in
the following sections:
Case Identification Data

Bus Data
Load Data
Generator Data
Non-Transformer Branch Data
Transformer Data
Switched Shunt Data
Area Interchange Data *
Two Terminal DC Line Data *
37-28
Data X
Voltage Source Converter DC Line Data *

Transformer Impedance Correction Table Data *
Multi-Section DC Line Data *
Multi-Section Line Grouping Data *
Zone Data *
Inter Area Transfer Data *
Owner Data *
FACTS Control Device Data *
Currently these sections are not considered during conversion. The log file created by the conversion
program logs a message to indicate that data in these sections was not converted.
Case Identification Data

This section includes information about the change code, system base MVA and remarks. For cases when
the change code is 1, implying that the file was created to add information to a working case, ETAP raw
data file will log a message and conversion will not be performed. Conversion is performed for cases
which represent data for base case. The remarks present on the second and third line of this section are not
used by the conversion program.
Bus Data
Bus data includes information about buses and shunts. Bus IDs are assigned by concatenating bus names
and base voltages. If this results in a bus ID that already exists, a unique number is suffixed at the end of
the ID.
Static load or lumped loads are used to model shunt admittances and susceptances represented by nonzero values of GL and BL parameters in the bus data section of the raw data file. For positive values of
GL static loads are created, whereas for negative values of GL, lumped loads with negative percentage
loadings are created.
Load Data
For each record in the load data section a lumped load is created in ETAP. Load IDs are assigned by
prefixing the ID specified in the raw data file with Load_UniqueNumber, where UniqueNumber is a
unique number. For cases where the total real power is negative, the lumped load percentage loading is
set to -100%. If the total MVA specified is 0, the lumped load is set out of service.
37-29
Data X
Generator Data
Generator IDs are assigned by prefixing the ID specified in the raw data file with Gen_ UniqueNumber,
where UniqueNumber is a unique number. For cases when the real power specified for a generator is
negative, a lumped load is created instead of a generator. The IDs of lumped loads is assigned in a manner
similar to generator IDs. The efficiency for a generator is set to 100%. Generator step up transformer data
is presently not used. For cases where the step up transformer impedance is non zero a message is logged.
37-30
Data X
Import a Ground Grid in AutoCAD to ETAP
37.6 Import a Ground Grid in AutoCAD to ETAP

AutoCAD drawings representing a Ground Grid may be imported into an ETAP project. An overview of
the process is shown below:
Ground Grid in
AutoCAD
Drawing (DWG)
File
Select & export

entities representing
conductors and rod
XML file with

conductor and
rod location and
dimensions
Import XML
File into ETAP
New ETAP
Ground Grid
Presentation in
FEM mode
The process involves two steps:
Creating an ETAP Extended Markup Language (XML) file from AutoCAD

Importing the ETAP XML file into an ETAP project
37.6.1 Creating an ETAP XML File from AutoCAD

This section explains the process of exporting the ETAP XML file from an AutoCAD drawing with the
ground grid laid out.
Setting up the ETAP Tools Menu in AutoCAD

The ETAP tools menu allows you to access the command for exporting the Ground Grid in an AutoCAD
drawing into an ETAP XML file. Following are the steps to set up the tool in AutoCAD.
For AutoCAD Versions prior to 2006

On the command line type the command MENULOAD and press the Enter key. This will show the Menu
Customization Editor as shown below:
37-31
Data X
Click on the Browse button and select the file ETMenu.mnu located in the folder C:\ETAP 7.0
\AutoCAD_GGS(1). Click on the Load button to load the file as an item in Menu Groups
(1)
The location may vary for each version or if ETAP is installed in a folder different from the default
installation folder. In this case the contents of the file ETMenu.mnu also needs to be changed.
The contents of the file ETMenu.mnu are:

//ETAP Menu
***POP17
**ETAPTOOLS
M_ETAPTools [ETAP Tools]
M_ExportGGS
[Export
Ground
Grid]
-vbarun
/ExportToETAP.dvb!ThisDrawing.ExportGridAndRods;
C:/ETAP
7.0
/AutoCAD_GGS
If ETAP is installed in a folder different from the default installation folder, replace the underlined
portion with the fully qualified location of the file ExportToETAP.dvb.
Click on the page Menu Bar and select the Menu Group C:\ETAP 7.0 (or current
version)\AutoCAD_GGS\ETMenu.mnu. This will add the menu ETAP Tools to the Menus list as shown
below:
37-32
Data X
Select the last item Help in the list Menu Bar and click on the Insert button. Finally click on the Close
button. This will add the ETAP Tools menu to the AutoCAD main menu, as shown below:
For AutoCAD 2006 or later Versions

On the command line type the command MENULOAD and press the Enter key. This will show the Menu
Customization Editor as shown below:
37-33
Data X
The Menu Customization editor for AutoCAD 2009 is shown below:
37-34
Data X
Click on the Browse button and select the file ETMenu2006.cui located in the folder C:\ETAP 7.0 (or
current version)\AutoCAD_GGS. Click on the Load button to load the file as an item in Menu Groups.
Finally click on the Close button. This will add the ETAP Tools menu to the AutoCAD 2006 main menu
as shown below:
The AutoCAD main menu is displayed differently for the 2009 version but after the previous steps will
still include ETAP Tools as shown below:
Creating up the ETAP XML File

Open the drawing file having the Ground Grid. Use the command Export Ground Grid in the ETAP
Tools menu in AutoCAD to export the ground grid data into an ETAP XML file.
Clicking on the command Export Ground Grid will prompt for selection of entities in the AutoCAD
drawing that represent Ground Grid Elements as shown below.
37-35
Data X
Once the entities representing ground grid elements are selected, press the Enter button, the Default
Parameters Editor is shown.
Conductor Type
Select the type of conductor material. The ground grid created in ETAP will have all conductors with this
type of material.
Rod Type
Select the type of rod material. The ground grid created in ETAP will have all rods with this type of
material.
AutoCAD Drawing Unit

Select the current unit of measurement. The unit of rods and conductors created in ETAP will be
converted into feet, inches, meters, and centimeters according to the unit systems.
Offset (in ETAP Drawing Units)

Type the X and Y coordinates of the top left corner of the ground grid in ETAP.
OK
Click on the OK button to create the ETAP XML file with the name ETAP_GGS.XML in the same
location as the AutoCAD drawing file. If the file already exists, a dialog box is displayed to confirm
overwriting it. Once the file is created a message as shown below is displayed.
37-36
Data X
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to cancel the creation of ETAP XML file.
AutoCAD Entity to ETAP Element Mapping

Following table shows the mapping of AutoCAD entities to ETAP Ground Grid elements.
AutoCAD Entity
Line
Polyline
Polygon
Rectangle
Revision Cloud
Circle
Ellipse
Ellipse Arc
Blocks
Other than above
ETAP Ground Grid Element

One conductor
One or more conductors
3-1024 conductors
4 conductors
One or more conductors
One rod
One rod
One rod
Blocks will be broken down into one or more
AutoCAD entity types listed above.
Disregard
For example, a polyline in an AutoCAD drawing will be converted to one or more conductors in an ETAP
project.
37-37
Data X
37.6.2 Importing the ETAP XML File into an ETAP Project

Import the XML file created in the first step into ETAP. Open an ETAP project and drop a ground grid
element on the ETAP one-line diagram. Double-click on the element to create a new ground grid
presentation by selecting Finite Element Method (FEM) study model. IEEE Method study model does not
support import of ground grids.
Use the command Import From XML File shown below to import the ETAP XML file and create a
Ground Grid.
37-38
Data X
Load Ticket
37.7 Load Ticket

37.7.1 Load Ticket Definition
Load ticket is a method to generate equipment data from an ETAP project file in a flexible excel format.
Load Ticket & Equipments

Load ticket can generate the following equipments data:
Induction Machine ETAP 11.0 Release
Synchronous Machine Future Release
Two-Winding Transformer Future Release
Three-Winding Transformer Future Release
Cable Future Release
Load Ticket Generation

Load ticket(s) can be generated inside ETAP, when a project is open through the following sequence:
Go to File\Data Exchange\Export Load Ticket menu
Click on Induction Motor Only option available in ETAP 11.0 release
37-39
Data X
Load Ticket
Format of the Generated Load Ticket

Project Info
Each worksheet of the generated excel file contains the project information retrieved from the related
ETAP project. In this section there are two designated locations to place the required logos. One can be
ETAP logo and other one can be the contactor logo. The following image shows an example of this:
Contents
The generated load ticket has a Contents page (worksheet) as the first page which contains a list of all
the equipments from the related ETAP project. This list also has brief information on the rating of the
listed equipments as shown in the following image:
Equipment Data Worksheet (Induction Motor)

Beside the contents page of the generated excel file, the rest of the worksheet(s) belong to the equipment
data worksheets which in this case (ETAP 11.0 Release) all of them would be induction motor tickets
(worksheets). The number of the generated tickets depends on the number of the induction motors present
in the related ETAP project.
Each ticket has the following data regarding each motor in two sections in the same page (worksheet):
37-40
Data X
Load Ticket
Motor ID, Equipment & General Info

Motor ID, equipment info and general info are included in this section:
Rating
Rating data of induction motor has been specified in this section:
37-41
Data X
Load Ticket
Torque, Locked Rotor, Short Circuit, Protection and Grounding

All the torque, locked rotor, short circuit, grounding and protection data have been specified in this
section:
Inertia, Damping, and Loading

All the inertia, damping and loading data have been specified in this section:
Model Load Data, Graphs Project Info & Logos

Model data, load data and their related graphs along with the project info have been specified in these
sections:
37-42
Data X
Load Ticket
Starting Device
Starting devices data will be provided in this sections:
Eq. Cable, Cable Ampacity, and Reliability

Equipment cable, ampacity, overload heater and reliability data will be provided in these sections:
Remarks, Comments, and Project Info

Remarks, comments and project info are provided in these sections:
37-43
Data X
Load Ticket
Load Ticket Overall Image
37-44
Chapter 38
CSD Elements
This chapter describes the editors for Control System Diagram (CSD) elements. Except for an
element ID and element connections, all remaining data that appears in the editors are
engineering properties. Each element available on the CSD Edit toolbar has its own customized
editor.
Pointer
Bus
Fuse
Switch
Contact
Macro-Controlled Contact
Display Options
Node
CB
Push Button
Double Contact
Wire
Impedance
General Load
Light
Control Relay
Solenoid
38-1
Control System Diagram Simulation
Pointer
38.1 Pointer
The pointer is the basic selection and editing tool in a control system presentation. When you are
finished using any of the CSD options, click this button to return to the pointer.
38-2
Display Options

38.2.1
Device Page
This page presents the options for displaying info annotations for CSD elements. These settings
can be specified for each individual CSD view and for different modes.
ID
Select any of the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected CSD elements
that are in use on the control system diagram. If a box is not checked, the element information
will not appear on the diagram (CSD).
V
Select any of the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the
selected elements on the CSD.
When you wish to check wire information, the V checkbox is replaced by an S button. Click on
this button to display the size of your wires on the CSD.
38-3
Display Options
Continuous Rating
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the Burden VA rating of the selected CSD
devices on the CSD.
To show the conductor type for wires, the Continuous Rating checkbox is replaced by a
button. Click on this button to display the conductor type on the CSD.
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements
on the CSD.
Device Type
Rating
Control Relay
Burden Amp
Solenoid
Burden Amp
Light
Burden Amp
General Load
Burden Amp
Contact
Current Rating for Inductive Load (Amp, I)
CB
Continuous Amp
Fuse
Continuous Amp
Switch
Continuous Amp
To show wire length, the A checkbox is replaced by a

the wire length on the one-line diagram.
button. Click on this button to display
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the burden impedance values for control
relays, solenoids, lights, and general loads, and the impedance values of the wires and impedance
branches on the CSD.
For contacts, CBs, fuses, and switches, the Z checkbox is replaced by the button. Click on this
button to display the NO (Normally Open) annotation for contacts, CBs, and switches on the
CSD, if their normal status is open.
Inrush A
Click on this checkbox to display the inrush amp rating on CSD for control relays, solenoids,
lights, and general loads, providing they have an inrush rating entered in the editor.
Note: In the Rating page of the Device Editor, there is an Inrush Rating checkbox to
enable/disable the Inrush Rating section.
Use Default Options
38-4
Display Options
38.2.2 Colors Page

This page allows you to select a pre-defined global color theme by name from the drop-down
list, or to create and name your own unique color themes for device annotations.
Color Theme
If you have already created one or more previously defined color themes, you can select one
from the list by its name. The selected color theme will apply whenever the Global Theme
option button is selected.
Theme
Clicking on the Theme button brings up the Theme Editor, where existing color themes can be
edited and saved under a new name or an entirely new color theme can be defined. Color themes
are applied globally within a project file.
Note: Changes made to any color theme displayed on this page and saved under the same name
could affect the appearance of other modes and presentations if the color theme has been
previously applied in a global fashion.
38-5
Display Options
Theme
This option specifies that the color theme selected in the color Theme list for element
annotations is to be applied globally throughout all CSD diagrams. When this option is selected,
the name assigned to the applied color theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.
User-Defined
Use this option to specify a color for CSD element annotations. When this option is selected, the
DC element annotation color selection list appears and allows you to choose a new annotation
color.
DC Element Annotation Color
When the User-Defined annotation color option is selected, this field is enabled, allowing you to
define a color for DC element annotations in the CSD.
38-6
CSD Elements
DC Bus Editor
38.3 DC Bus Editor

Enter the properties of the DC buses in your control system diagram in this Data Editor. A DC
bus in a CSD always appears in a paired presentation that includes a positive bus and a negative
bus. The buses can be stretched and moved together. They share the same property editor. You
can connect CSD elements, such as devices, wires, and protective devices, between the positive
and negative buses to create a control system circuit.
38.3.1 Info Page

The Info page is where you specify the bus ID, In/Out of Service, FDR Tag, Equipment Name
and Description. The ETAP program automatically updates Nominal kV and Initial/Operating
Voltage.
38-7
CSD Elements
DC Bus Editor
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters. ETAP automatically assigns
a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
(dcBus) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses
increases.
The default ID (dcBus) for the DC bus can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar
or from the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Nominal V
The Nominal V of a bus is automatically updated by ETAP from the connected CSD source, which is
normally an Elementary Diagram element in the DC system. The rated voltage of the connected CSD
source is placed in this field. If a bus is connected to multiple sources, the rated voltage of one of the
sources will be set to this field. If a bus is not connected to any source, the Nominal V will be zero.
Note: This value will not affect CSD calculations.
In Service /Out of Service

The operating condition can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out
of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of Service element can be
edited like an In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any
system studies. When the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is
automatically color coded with the deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a
deenergized element is grey.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you
can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision Data
Initial Voltage%
Enter the initial bus voltage in percent of the bus nominal voltage. This value is not used in CSD
calculations. The voltage defaults to 100 percent.
Operating Voltage
After CSD studies are run, the operating voltage of the bus is displayed in this field. This value
will not change until a new simulation study is run, i.e., the operating voltage of the bus for the
last steady state of the CSD simulation is displayed.
Polarity
Positive & Negative
This radio button pair indicates the bus from which the editor is opened. When the editor is
opened from Positive (or Negative) bus on CSD, the Positive (or Negative) option will appear to
be selected. Both buttons are shown as semi-transparent since they are not user selectable.
38-8
CSD Elements
DC Bus Editor
Equipment
Tag #
This allows the user to enter the the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric
characters.
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Click to lock / unlock the editor properties of the current element. When the editor properties are
locked, all engineering data is displayed as read-only expect condition information. The user can
change condition information (service & state) even though the element properties are locked.
38-9
CSD Elements
38.3.2
DC Bus Editor
Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields permit you to track additional data associated with this component. The names of
the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the
menu bar.
This is a number field with the default name Eq. Ref. You can change the name of this field and
enter the equipment reference number or any other number here, use up to five digits.
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can change the name of this
field and enter any additional data for this element here, use up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Next Maint. You can change the name of
this field and enter any additional data for this element here, use up to 12 alphanumeric
characters.
38-10
CSD Elements
DC Bus Editor

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Tests Req. You can change the name of this
field and enter any additional data for this element here, use up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field A5. You can change the name of
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element; use up to 50
alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, use up to 50
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element in this field, use up to 25 alphanumeric
characters.
Purchasing Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element in this field, use up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
38-11
CSD Elements
DC Bus Editor
38.3.3 Comment Page

Enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies,
associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase
the size of this field, refer to entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard keys
such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information.
38-12
CSD Elements
Node Editor
38.4 Node Editor

Click on one of the nodes on the CSD View to activate the CSD DC Node Editor.
Info
ID
This field allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each CSD Node. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID Node plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
buses increases.
Operating Voltage
After CSD studies are run, the operating voltage of the node is displayed here. This value will
not change until a new simulation study is run, i.e., the operating voltage of the node for the last
steady state of the CSD simulation is displayed.
38-13
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
38.5 Fuse Editor

You can enter the properties associated with DC fuses of the CSD in this editor. The process is
very similar to that of the DC Fuse Editor for a DC fuse in a DC system. DC fuse protection
devices are available for a full range of voltages. However, in the current version of ETAP, the
information relating to protection specified in this editor is not used in CSD calculations.
The Fuse Editor consists of header information and tabs for the seven pages listed below:
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected fuse model on each page of the DC Fuse Editor.
Fuse
Manufacturer
Fuse Model
Fuse Max. Volts
Speed
Selected Fuse
Size ID
Lock Icon
Short-Circuit data
for selected size
Manufacturer
Manufacturer name of the fuse selected from the library.
Max. Volts
Displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected fuse in Volts.
Size
Displays the ID of the selected size for the fuse.
Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked
(user-specified).
Model
This field displays the model name of the fuse as selected from the library.
Speed
This field displays the speed classification of the selected fuse.
38-14
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
Interrupting data
This field displays the short-circuit interrupting kA for the selected fuse size.
38.5.1 Info Page

Specify the DC fuse ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag,
Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the DC fuse online status in the Info
page.
Info
ID
This field allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC fuse.
The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, which starts with the number one and
increases as the number of DC fuses increases. The default ID (dcFuse) for DC fuses can be
changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
38-15
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a DC fuse (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry is shown for its
bus ID. If a terminal of a DC fuse is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the
branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC fuse to a
bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will update to show the new connection
after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the fuse to other dc elements that reside in the same view
where it resides or you can connect them to elements that reside in other views by connecting the
external and internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot establish connections to
elements that have been deleted and reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
DC fuse to a new bus from this editor will also reconnect the last protective device in the circuit
to the new bus, as shown below, where DCFuse1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
As a convenience, ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses in close proximity to the From and
To bus IDs.
Condition
Service
can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision Data.
38-16
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close
or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load)
will save under the specified configuration.
Note: Status is not included as part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of
the configuration status appears above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status
under this specific configuration, i.e., you can have a different operating status under other
configurations. In the following example, the status of a fuse shows as closed in the Normal
configuration and open in the Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
characters.
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
38-17
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38-18
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
38.5.2 Rating Page
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard. Note that once the fuse is
selected from the fuse library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the library entry and is for
display only (the selection is grayed out and cannot be edited, as shown above).
38-19
DC Elements
Fuse Editor

Click on the ANSI Standard button to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with the
ANSI/IEEE Standards. When a DC Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters
shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the
exception of Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a fuse from library Quick Pick will cause
the header to turn a blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
Voltage
Select a voltage from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in
Volts. When a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. voltage
selected from library Quick Pick.
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse. Note
that the Size field will be empty when no fuse is selected from the library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amps
Select an Amps value from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC
Fuse in amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is
Interrupting
Select an Interrupting kA rating from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for
the DC Fuse in kA. Note that when a Fuse is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal
to the kA value for the selected fuse size from library Quick Pick.

Click on IEC Standard to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with IEC Standards. When
a DC Fuse is selected from the library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to
their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the
value(s) after selecting a fuse from library Quick Pick will turn the header text to a dark blue
color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
38-20
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
Voltage
Select a voltage from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in
Volts. When a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. Voltage
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from the library Quick Pick.
Rated Amps
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the rated continuous current for the DC Fuse
in amperes. When you select a fuse from the library Quick Pick, the Continuous Amp value will
be set equal to the fuse size.
Breaking
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the breaking for the DC Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the breaking value will be set equal to the kA value for the fuse
size selected from the library Quick Pick.
Library (Quick Pick)

To select a Fuse from the Fuse Library click on the Library button and the Library Quick Pick
Fuse window will appear. Select a Fuse from the Library Quick Pick by highlighting the
Manufacturer name and fuse Model-Max V-Speed, which are unique records. Then select the
desired size and short-circuit interrupting kA. Now click on the OK button. This will retrieve the
selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: When a selection is made from library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name along
with other details are displayed on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the
retrieved library data afterwards, the text in the header area will change from black to a dark blue
color to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the Fuse Library Quick Pick is described below.
38-21
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select a device standard.
Note: The Standard selection in the Fuse library Quick Pick (and hence the fuse models
displayed) will default to the selection made for the standard on the Rating page. You can change
the standard selection on the Quick Pick if you so desire.
AC/DC
Displays that the Fuse is DC. This option is shown grayed out and is non-editable.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This area displays a list of all DC Fuse manufacturers that are included in the library for the
selected standard. Click the manufacturer name to highlight it and select.
38-22
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is ETAP issued (and therefore locked)
or unlocked (meaning user-specified). Only unlocked entries can be modified.
Reference
This area displays the Manufacturer reference, if one is available, for the selected manufacturer.
For example, Siemens is the reference manufacturer for ITE.
Link
This area displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays a list of all fuse models for the selected standard and fuse
manufacturer. These models are displayed in the format of Model Max V Speed, which
forms a unique record name in the fuse library. Click on the preferred Model Max V Speed
entry to highlight it and select it.
Lock
Size and Short-Circuit data

Size
This column displays a list of all the sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Speed
record for DC fuse. To select a size from the Quick Pick, click on it to highlight it. Note that the
sizes listed for the selected Fuse model is not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere value
provided by the manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This column displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.
This column displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA that corresponds to each size for
the selected ANSI fuse model.
38-23
DC Elements
Fuse Editor

This column displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected
IEC fuse model.
Lock
Model Info
The five areas to the right of the three Quick Pick libraries provide additional reference
information about your fuse selection:
Class
This field displays the Class (Fuse link, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This field displays the Type (Power Fuse, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Brand Name
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
This field displays the application for the selected fuse model
38-24
DC Elements
Fuse Editor

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC fuse curves in Star View are specified in the
TCC kA page of the DC Fuse Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be set to Calculated or
User-Defined, the default setting being the User-Defined option.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-defined option allows you to enter the short-circuit kA values for TCC
clipping.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value. This
value will not be updated by ETAP for a fuse in CSD, since no short-circuit calculation is
available for CSD.
Check this box to enable the fault arrow in Star view.
38-25
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
Fault kA
If the Calculated option has been selected, this field displays the short-circuit current in kA. The
fault kA field is editable if the User-Defined option is selected.
Base V
Base V is for display only if the Calculated option is selected. In the User-Defined option, Base
V is editable.
Note: The selected device curve is plotted in reference to its base voltage value. For example, if
a device base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device
curve will shift by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.
Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values for the
selected fuse.
38-26
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
Model Info
This page displays information regarding the selected fuse model.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Brand Name
Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected fuse model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number of the selected fuse model.
Description
This field displays the description of the selected fuse model.
Application
This field displays the application of the selected fuse model.
38-27
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
38.5.5 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
This field displays the name of the last person making modifications to the data.
Date
This field displays the date of the last change. The format for the date can be modified from the
Checked by
User Name
This field displays the name of the person logging in as a Checker to check the data.
Date
This field displays the date when the data was checked. The format for the date entry can be
modified from the Projects menu in the menu bar.
38-28
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
38.5.6 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. The names of
the User-Defined (UD) fields can be modified from the Settings option in the Project menu in the
menu bar.
This is a number field with the default name Num. Field. You can change the name of this field
and enter the equipment reference number or any other number here, entering up to five digits.
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Install Date. You can change the name of
this field and enter any extra data for this element here, entering up to 12 alphanumeric
characters.
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can change the name of
this field and enter any extra data for this element here, use up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
38-29
DC Elements
Fuse Editor

this field and add any extra data for this element here, entering up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field 5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field 5. You can change the name of
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, entering up
to 50 alphanumeric characters. For example, the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, entering up to 50
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element here, entering up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element here, entering up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
38-30
DC Elements
Fuse Editor
38.5.7 Comment Page
This field allows you to enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance,
tests, or studies, that you want associated with this element. The additional text can be up to
64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the
ETAPS.INI file.
combinations, such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V, can be used to cut, copy, and paste new
information.
38-31
DC Elements
Circuit Breaker Editor
38.6 Circuit Breaker Editor

Use this editor to enter the properties associated with DC circuit breakers. This editor functions
much the same as the DC Circuit Breaker Editor for a DC fuse in a DC system. DC circuit
breaker protection devices are available for a full range of voltages. However, in the current
version of ETAP, the information related to protection can be specified in the editor, but it is not
used in CSD calculations.
The DC Circuit Breaker Editor contains eight pages of information and the header information
for each page.
Header Information
Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA (Short-circuit clipping) Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected breaker model and trip device information on each page of the
DC Circuit Breaker Editor.
Breaker
Manufacturer
Breaker Max.
Volts
Breaker
Interrupting data
Lock Icon
Breaker Model
and Pole
Breaker
available sizes
Trip device
Manufacturer
Trip device
Model
Trip device
ID
Manufacturer
This field shows the Manufacturer name of the breaker as selected from the library.
V max.
This field displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected breaker in Volts.
Interrupting Data
This field displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the
breaker.
38-32
DC Elements
Lock
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified).
Model
This field shows the model name of the breaker that you have selected from the library.
Pole
This field displays the breaker pole that you have selected from the library.
Size
The drop-down list displays the size choices in amperes available for the selected breaker. Click
on an entry to highlight it and select.
Trip device manufacturer
This field displays the name of the manufacturer of the selected trip device.
Trip device model
This field displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Trip device ID
This field displays the trip ID for the device you have selected from the library.
38-33
DC Elements
38.6.1 Info Page

You specify the DC circuit breaker ID, connected bus/load, In/Out of Service, Ratings,
Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, and Configuration Status in the Info Page.
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters in this field.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of
the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and incrementing as the number of
CBs increases. The default ID (dcCB) for DC circuit breakers can be changed from the Defaults
38-34
DC Elements
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses.
If a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown
for its bus ID. If a terminal of a DC breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the
ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC
breaker to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the
new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the circuit breaker to other dc elements that reside in the
same view as it, or you can connect it to elements that reside in other views by connecting the
external and internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that are
currently residing in the Dumpster.
If a DC breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection
of the DC breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where DCCB1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
For your convenience, ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses connected to the From and To
bus IDs.
Condition
Service
38-35
DC Elements
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on
the Close or Open options. Once the configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation,
any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static
load) will save under the specified configuration.
Note: Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the DC circuit breaker to indicate that this is the
breaker status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under
different configurations. In the following example, the status of a DC circuit breaker shows as
closed under Normal configuration and open under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
characters.
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
38-36
DC Elements
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38.6.2
Rating Page
Standard
To select an electrical standard click on either the ANSI or IEC option.
38-37
DC Elements
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the Breaker Library Quick Pick, the standard field is set
based on the library entry, shows grayed out, and non-editable.
Type
Select the type of breaker from the drop-down list. DC circuit breakers include Molded Case,
Power, and Insulated case breakers.
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the Breaker Library Quick Pick, the LVCB type is set
based on the library entry and is non-editable.

Click on the Library button to select the DC circuit breaker data for a selected standard and type.
Exclude Trip Device
Check this box to exclude the trip device selection from DCCB Library Quick Pick. The Breaker
Library Quick Pick will launch without the trip device information.
Note: The Exclude Trip Device checkbox is not a saved property of the editor and hence will
reset to unchecked once the Rating page is refreshed.
38-38
DC Elements

To select a circuit breaker from the DC Circuit Breaker Library click on the Library button and
the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker window will appear. Select a DC circuit breaker
from the Library Quick Pick by highlighting the Manufacturer name and breaker Model-Max VPole, which is a unique record. Select the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting
kA. Select the size and the desired trip device for that size. Then click on the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: Upon selection of library data, the breaker manufacturer, model and trip device details will
display on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the
library header text will change to a dark blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has
been modified.
The information available in the Breaker Library Quick Pick is described below.
Standard
Note: The Standard selection in the Breaker Library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models
displayed) will default to the standard selected on the Rating page. The standard selection can be
AC/DC
This field indicates that the breaker is DC. This option is grayed out and is non-editable.
Type
Select the breaker type from the drop-down list. The DC breaker types include Molded Case,
Power and Insulated Case breakers.
Note: The Type selection in the Breaker Library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models
displayed) will default to what you have selected as the breaker type on the Rating page. The
breaker type selection can be changed on the Quick Pick if desired.
38-39
DC Elements
38-40
DC Elements
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This field displays a list of all DC breaker manufacturers included in the library for the selected
breaker standard and type. Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This field displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For
example, Westinghouse is the reference manufacturer for Cutler Hammer.
Link
Lock
The lock indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified).
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays a list of all models available for the selected standard, breaker type
and breaker manufacturer. The models are displayed in the form of Model Max V Pole,
which forms a unique record name in the breaker library. Select the Model Max V Pole by
highlighting it.
Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked
(user-specified).
Short-Circuit data
ANSI Short-Circuit data
When you select ANSI standard, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts and the
short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA for all breaker types. The shortcircuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied
voltage and short-circuit data by highlighting the entry, as shown below.
38-41
DC Elements
IEC Short-Circuit data

When the IEC Standard is selected the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts, the
ultimate breaking capacity in kA (Icu) and the service breaking capacity in kA (Ics) for all
breaker types. Short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select
a desired applied voltage and short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Fused/UnFused
This field displays whether the breaker is fused or unfused.
Size
Size
This area lists all sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Pole record for the breaker.
Highlight a size from the Quick Pick to select it.
Lock
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (userspecified).
Model Info
Additional information about the selected breaker is displayed according to the parameters
described below.
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, of the selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, of the selected breaker model.
Application
Trip Device
The trip device(s) assigned to the selected breaker can be selected by highlighting the trip device
type, manufacturer name, model name and trip ID. The trip device types for a DC breaker
include Thermal Magnetic, Solid state, Motor Circuit Protector and Electro-Mechanical.
38-42
DC Elements
Trip Device Type

Select a trip device type from the drop-down list for the selected breaker.
Highlight a trip device manufacturer for the selected trip device type to select it from the list.
Trip Device Model
Highlight the trip device model for the selected trip device to select it from the list.
ID
Highlight the trip device ID for the selected trip device model from the list to select it.
Note: The ID is labeled as TM ID for Thermal Magnetic trip, Sensor ID for Solid-State trip,
MCP ID for Motor Circuit Protector trip, and EM ID for Electro-Mechanical trip.
When the Exclude Trip Device box is checked on the Rating page, the Breaker Library Quick
Pick appears as shown below.
38-43
DC Elements

Click the button to select the ANSI standard and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for
DC circuit breaker in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards. When a breaker is selected
from the library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values
as assigned from the Quick Pick. With the exception of the Size field, changing any of these
value(s) after selecting a breaker from library Quick Pick will cause the header text to turn a dark
blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select a breaker size in amps from the drop-down list.
Note: The Size field will be empty if a breaker is not chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amps
You can select a rating from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC
circuit breaker in amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size
when a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick.
Rated V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC
circuit breaker in Volts. When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Rated V
value will be set equal to the applied voltage.
Fused
Click on the provided selection box to select a fused or unfused category for all breaker types.
Note: When a DC breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the
same status as that selected from the Quick Pick.
Max. V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC
circuit breaker in Volts. When a breaker is selected, the Max.V value will be set equal to the
maximum voltage for the selected breaker.
38-44
DC Elements
Interrupting kA
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the DC circuit
breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for
the selected applied voltage indicated by the library Quick Pick.

If you click on the IEC standard button, you can choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for
DC circuit breaker in accordance with the IEC standards. When a breaker is selected from the
library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values
according to the Quick Pick values. With the exception of the Size field, changing the value(s)
once a breaker has been selected from the library Quick Pick will cause the header text to turn a
dark blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
You must select an entry from the drop-down list to display the size in amperes for the selected
breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty if a breaker is not chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.
Rated Amps
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the ampere rating of the DC circuit
breaker. When a breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, the Rated Amps value will be set
equal to the breaker size.
Rated V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the voltage rating for the DC circuit
breaker in kV. When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Rated V value will be
set equal to the applied voltage selected.
Max. V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC
circuit breaker in kV. When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Max.V value
will be set equal to the maximum voltage for the selected breaker.
38-45
DC Elements
Ultimate Breaking
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of the shortcircuit breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under
specified test conditions.
Select an entry from the drop-down list or enter a value for the Ultimate breaking capacity for
the DC circuit breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Ultimate breaking kA value
will be set equal to the Icu (breaking capacity) kA value for the selected applied voltage.
Service Breaking
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of service shortcircuit breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for the rated operational voltage
under specified test conditions.
Select from an entry from the drop-down list or enter the value of the Service breaking capacity
for the DC circuit breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Service breaking kA value will
be set equal to the Ics (service capacity) kA value for the selected applied voltage.
Fused
For all breaker types, select fused or unfused by clicking on the provided selection box.
Note: The Fused checkbox is displayed only when a breaker is not selected from the library
Quick Pick.
38-46
DC Elements

The trip devices for a DC circuit breaker include Thermal Magnetic, Solid-state, Motor Circuit
Protector and Electro-mechanical types. The Trip device page allows you to select and set these
trip units.
CB & Trip Device selection logic

The selection of the circuit breaker on the Rating page, affects the data displayed on the Trip
Device page. The logic for this is as described below.
Case 1 DC Circuit Breaker & Trip Device
When a DC circuit breaker is selected along with its associated trip unit from the library Quick
Pick on the Rating page of the Circuit Breaker Editor, the Trip Device page displays the selected
trip unit (Manufacturer, Model, ID).
Case 2 Circuit Breaker only (Exclude Trip device)

When a circuit breaker is selected from the Breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, with
Exclude Trip Device box checked, the Trip Device page will not include the trip device
information. A No Trip device selected message will appear in the Trip Device page status
line.
38-47
DC Elements

This section describes the settings available for a Thermal Magnetic trip unit on the Trip Device
page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Select a type from the drop-down list. In this case, Thermal Magnetic trip type is selected.
TM Manufacturer
Select the manufacturer from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for a Thermal
Magnetic trip device.
TM Model
Select model from the drop-down list to display the model name for the selected manufacturer.
TM ID
Select an ID from the drop-down list to display a TM ID for the selected Thermal magnetic trip
model. Beside the TM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected
TM ID.
38-48
DC Elements
Thermal
The Thermal element of a Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as either a fixed or an adjustable
trip. The available settings are described below.
Fixed Thermal
Fixed thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve shape that
cannot be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the thermal section displays FIXED in the
thermal trip field.
Adjustable Thermal
The term adjustable thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed
curve shape that can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the thermal section
displays a drop-down list of the available adjustable thermal trip in a percent of the trip device
ampere rating. In addition, the actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the
adjustable trip drop-down list.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable or
continuous adjustable. The available settings are described below.
Fixed Magnetic
The term fixed magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by
fixed minimum and maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed,
the magnetic section displays FIXED in the magnetic trip field.
38-49
DC Elements
The term discrete adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is
defined by discrete values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the magnetic section
displays a drop-down list of the available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device
ampere rating, or in actual amperes. The actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to
the discrete adjustable drop-down list.
Continuous Adjustable Magnetic

The term continuous adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve
is defined by continuously adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic
trip is continuously adjustable, the magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the
magnetic setting in multiples trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The actual value of
the trip in amperes is displayed next to the Trip field. The trip range available for the selected
trip unit is also displayed. Note that the Trip field is bounded by the Trip Range.
38-50
DC Elements

This section describes the settings available for Low Voltage Solid State Trip unit (LVSST) on
the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select the trip device type from the drop-down list to display the Trip device type. In this case,
the Solid State trip type is selected.
38-51
DC Elements
SST Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the drop-down list to display a manufacturer name for a Solid State
trip.
SST Model
Select a model from the drop-down list to display the model name for a selected manufacturer.
Sensor ID
Select an ID from the drop-down list to display the Sensor ID for the selected Solid State trip
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected Sensor ID next to the
Sensor ID field.
Rating Plug
The Rating Plug field is displayed only if the selected Sensor ID has rating plugs defined in the
library. Rating plugs can be defined in amperes, multiples or percent. Select an entry from the
drop-down list to display the Rating Plug for the selected Sensor ID. The Rating plug unit
(amperes/multiples/percent) and the actual value of the trip in amperes are displayed next to the
Rating Plug Field for the selected Rating plug. An example of Rating plugs in multiples and the
actual trip displayed is shown below.
Phase Settings
The Phase settings for Solid State trip unit includes three elements Long-Time, Short-Time,
and Instantaneous (or Override). Each element is defined by its pickup and band settings. The
available settings are described below.
Long -Time
Check this box to enable the Long-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then
Long-Time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Long -Time Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting for the selected
sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual
long-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed
next to the Long-Time pickup field.
38-52
DC Elements
Long -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time band setting for the selected
sensor ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For your
convenience, the continuously adjustable Long-Time band, the range of the band, the multiple at
which the band is defined and band step are displayed next to the Long-Time band field.
Short -Time
Check this box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Short-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then
Short-Time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Short-Time Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter a Short-Time pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. These pickup settings can be either discrete values or continuously adjustable. The
actual Short-Time pickup in amperes and the pickup step (for continuously adjustable pickup)
are displayed next to the Short-Time pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected
sensor ID. The band settings can be either discrete values or continuously adjustable. For your
convenience, for the continuously adjustable Short-Time band, the band step is displayed next to
the Short-Time band field.
38-53
DC Elements
Short-Time I2T Band

Select the Short-Time I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Short-Time I2T band has two
settings, i.e. IN and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Short-Time
band curve inward (sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the Short-Time band curve outward
(L-shaped).
Instantaneous
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element remains unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID,
then Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the editor.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter an Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual
Instantaneous pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are
displayed next to the Instantaneous pickup field.
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous Override setting. Checking this box displays the
actual instantaneous override in amperes, for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous Override is enabled, the Instantaneous pickup is grayed out and vice
versa.
Control System Diagram Simulation Display Options
Ground Settings
The Ground element settings for a Solid State trip unit includes the Ground Pickup, Band and I2T
settings. The available settings are described below.
38-54
DC Elements
Ground
Check this box to enable the Ground element setting for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Ground element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then the
Ground tab is not displayed in the editor.
Ground Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Ground pickup setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time
pickup in amperes and the pickup step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to
the Short-Time pickup field.
Ground Band
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Ground band setting for the selected sensor
ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For your convenience,
the band step of the continuously adjustable Ground band is displayed next to the Ground band
field.
Ground Band I2T
Select the Ground I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Ground I2T band has two settings,
i.e. IN and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Ground band curve
inward (sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the Ground band curve outward (L-shaped).

This section describes the settings available for the Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) unit on the
Trip Device page.
38-55
DC Elements
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the Trip device type. In this case, the Motor
Circuit Protector type is selected.
MCP Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for Motor Circuit
Protector.
MCP Model
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
38-56
DC Elements
MCP ID
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the MCP ID for the selected Motor Circuit
Protector model. The actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the MCP ID field for
the selected MCP ID.
The Motor Circuit Protector unit can be set as discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The
available settings are described below.
Discrete Adjustable
The Discrete Adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by discrete values.
When the magnetic trip is discretely adjustable, the magnetic section displays a drop-down list of
the available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating, or in actual
amperes.
The Continuous Adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by
continuously adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is
continuously adjustable, the magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic
setting in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The trip range available for
the selected trip unit is also displayed.
38-57
DC Elements

This section describes the settings available for the Electro-Mechanical unit on the Trip Device
page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the Trip device type. In this case, the ElectroMechanical trip type is selected.
EM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for Electro-Mechanical
trip unit.
38-58
DC Elements
EM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the model name for the selected manufacturer.
EM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the EM ID for the selected Electro-Mechanical
trip model. Next to the EM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the
selected EM ID.
Long-Time
Long -Time
Check this box to enable the Long-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element remains unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then
Long-Time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Long -Time Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list, or enter the Long-Time pickup setting, for the selected
EM ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual longtime pickup in amperes and the pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next
to the Long-Time pickup field.
Long -Time Band

Select the Long-Time band curve label from drop-down list for the selected EM ID. Each label
for the Long-Time band is associated with a fixed-point based curve that defines the shape of the
Long-Time band curve.
Short-Time
Short-Time
Check this box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Short-Time element remains unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then
Short-Time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Short-Time Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting, for the selected
EM ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual ShortTime pickup in amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to
the Short-Time pickup field.
38-59
DC Elements
Short -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected EM
ID. The band settings can be discrete or continuously adjustable. For your convenience, the band
step is displayed next to the Short-Time band field for the continuously adjustable Short-Time
band.
When the Short-Time band is discrete, it can be defined as a Horizontal band
(Minimum/Maximum clearing times) or as a point based Curve. The example below shows the
discrete Short-Time band defined as a Horizontal band.
Note: The term for this field is Horizontal Band.
Another example with discrete Short-Time band defined as a curve is shown below.
Note: The term for this field is Band.
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Check the box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then
Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the editor.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected
EM ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual
Instantaneous pickup in amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are
displayed next to the Instantaneous pickup field.
38-60
DC Elements

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC breaker trip unit curves in Star View are
specified in the TCC kA page of DC Circuit Breaker Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be
set to Calculated or User-Defined, the default setting is the User-Defined option.
User-Defined
When you select the User-defined option you are able to enter the short-circuit kA values for
TCC clipping.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value.
Currently, this value will not be updated from ETAP, since short-circuit is not available in CSD.
38-61
DC Elements

Check this box to enable the fault arrow in Star view.
Fault kA
This field displays the short-circuit current in kA for the Calculated option. When using the
User-defined option, the fault kA field is editable.
Base V
The Base V text is display only when using the Calculated option. For the User-Defined option,
Base V is editable.
Note: The selected device curve is plotted in reference to its base voltage value. For example, if
a device base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device
curve will shift by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.
Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values for the
selected breaker only.
38-62
DC Elements
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available, of the selected breaker model
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, of the selected breaker model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number of the selected breaker model.
38-63
DC Elements
Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This field displays a description of the selected breaker model.
Application
38.6.6 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
This field displays the name of the last person who made modifications to the data.
38-64
DC Elements
Date
This field displays the date of that change. The format for the date can be changed from the
Checked by
User Name
Date
This field displays date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed
from the Projects menu in the menu bar.
38.6.7 Remarks Page
38-65
DC Elements
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to maintain additional data associated with this component. The names of
menu bar.
This is a number field with the default name Num. Field. You can change the name of this field
and enter the equipment reference number, or any other number here, up to five digits in length.
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Install Date. You can change the name of
this field and enter any additional data for this element here, up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
this field and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric
characters.
characters.
UD Field 5
characters.
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element in this field, up to 50
alphanumeric characters. An example is the title of a manufacturer diagram or the titles and part numbers
of specifications for this element.
Reference
38-66
DC Elements
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric
characters.
Purchase Date
38.6.8 Comment Page
combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste
information.
38-67
DC Elements
Switch Editor
38.7 Switch Editor

The properties associated with a switch used in the CSD can be entered in this editor. This is the
same editor as the DC Single-Throw Switch Editor for a Single-Throw Switch in a DC system.
The Single-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
38.7.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the DC single-throw switch ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of
Service, Ratings, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status,
view the online status of the DC single-throw switch (closed or open), and its application or
association and that ID. The field at the bottom of the Info page is a pull down list of all the DC
switches in the CSD.
38-68
DC Elements
Switch Editor
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID having a maximum of 25 characters in this field. ETAP
automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC single-throw
switches increases.
The default ID (dcS) for DC single-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in
the menu bar, or from the Project View.
To & From
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC single-throw switch are designated as From and To
buses. If a terminal of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be
shown for the bus ID. If a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly),
the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a
switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the
new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the switch to other dc elements that reside in the same
view where it resides or you can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the
external and internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that are
currently residing in the Dumpster.
If a DC single-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPST1 is reconnected from
DCBus10 to DCBus4.
ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses next to the From and To bus IDs for your
convenience.
38-69
DC Elements
Switch Editor
Condition
Service
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC single-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by
clicking on the Closed or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line
presentation, any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or
static load) will save under the specified configuration.
Note: Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the switch
status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under
different configurations. In the following example, the status of a DC single-throw switch shows
as closed under Normal configuration and open under Emergency configuration.
Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC single-throw switch in volts in this field, or select the rating
from the drop-down list box.
38-70
DC Elements
Switch Editor
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC single-throw switch in amperes in this field, or
select the rating from the drop-down list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV. This value is not used in any calculations at this point.
Momentary
Enter the rated short-circuit withstand capability of the DC single-throw switch in kA or select
the rating from the list box. This value represents the momentary capability (making or bracing)
of the switch and is used in DC short-circuit studies to compare against the calculated fault duty
of the connected bus.
Equipment
Tag #
characters.
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38-71
DC Elements
Switch Editor
38.7.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
menu bar.

38-72
DC Elements
Switch Editor

characters.
characters.
field and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element in this field,
up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for
this element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element in this field, using up
to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchasing Date
38-73
DC Elements
38.7.3
Switch Editor
Comment Page
38-74
CSD Elements
Push Button Editor
38.8 Push Button Editor

38.8.1 Info Page
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters in this field. ETAP
automatically assigns a unique ID to each pushbutton element. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID (PB) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
buses increases.
The default ID (PB) for the pushbutton can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar
or from the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From / To
This two fields display the ID of the connected elements of a pushbutton. A pushbutton can be
connected between two nodes, a bus and a node, a bus and a device, or a bus and a branch.
38-75
CSD Elements
Push Button Editor
Condition
Service
State
Operating Time
The pushbutton represented in ETAP is of the momentary contact type. Without external force, it
is at the Initial (Normal) state, which can be defined by the user. When pressed, it will stay in
the Off-Normal state for a short time and then return to the Normal state. Operating time is the
time duration in millisecond that the pushbutton stays in the Off-Normal state once pressed.
Initial (Normal) State

A pushbutton takes this state when no external force is applied. There are two options to choose
from: Normally Open and Normally Closed.
Normally Open
When the Normally Open is selected, the pushbutton will stay open when no external force is
applied. Once pressed, it will be closed for a short time defined in the Operating Time field and
then returns to an open state.
Normally Closed
When the Normally Closed is selected, the pushbutton will stay closed when no external force is
applied. Once pressed, it will be open for a short time defined in the Operating Time field and
then returns to a closed state.
Equipment
Tag #
characters.
38-76
CSD Elements
Push Button Editor
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Equipment
Tag #
characters.
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38-77
CSD Elements
Push Button Editor
38.8.2 Remarks Page
User Defined Info

These fields allow you to keep track of additional data associated with this component. The
names of the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project
menu in the menu bar.
38-78
CSD Elements
Push Button Editor

characters.
UD Field 5
characters.
UD Field 6
characters.
UD Field 7
characters.
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, using up to
50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, using up to 50
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchase Date
38-79
CSD Elements
Push Button Editor
38.8.3 Comment Page

information.
38-80
CSD Elements
Control Relay Editor
38.9 Control Relay Editor

In ETAP, four elements in the Control System Diagram are called devices. They are Control
Relay, Solenoid, General Load, and Light. The Property Editors for these devices have a similar
set up.
38.9.1 Info Page
Info
ID
a unique ID to each control relay element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (Dev) plus
an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.
38-81
CSD Elements
The default ID (Dev) for the control relay can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control
System diagram submenu, Device item) in the menu bar or from the Project View by entering a
new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From Node
A device, such as a control relay, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field
shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the From side of the control relay.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the control relay.
Service
State
Calculation Model
ETAP provides two methods to model a control relay: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle.
The method can be selected from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control
System Diagram Study Case.
When this option is selected in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Rating page of the
Device Editor will be used to represent the device. The model includes burden rating and inrush
rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of
the Device Editor will be used to represent the device.
Note: In the current version of ETAP, if this option is selected, the control logic between this
control relay and the contacts listed in the Contact page will not be simulated in the calculations.
These contacts will stay in their normal state during CSD simulations.
38-82
CSD Elements
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38.9.2 Rating Page

The Rating page holds parameters for voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush rating of a control
relay. The parameters can be entered manually, or retrieved from the Control Relay Library.
The rating parameters consist of three sections: voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
38-83
CSD Elements
Library Quick Pick

Click the Library button to retrieve control relay parameters from the Control Relay library.
When the library button is clicked, the CSD Library Quick Pick dialog box will appear. It
displays all control relays entered in the library associated with the project. The Quick Pick
dialog includes a Manufacturer list, Model list, and Device list. When a new Manufacturer is
selected, the Model list will be filled with all model types for the selected manufacturer. Once a
specific model is selected from the Model list, all the control relays for the model will be listed
in the Device list.
To select a device from the library, click on its entry in the device list and press the OK button.
The control relay data will then be substituted in the Control Relay Editor.
Note: The control relay selected from library may have contacts associated with it. These
contacts are controlled by the control relay. If this is the case, the contact information will also
be retrieved from the library and substituted in the Contact page of the Control Relay Editor.
38-84
CSD Elements
The Quick Pick dialog also contains several other buttons. Clicking on the Help button will bring
up ETAP online help. Clicking on the Cancel button will close the Quick Pick dialog without
any data being transferred.
If the None button is clicked, the library data information located next to the Library button in
the Rating page of the Control Relay Editor will be blanked out. However, the data in the
Control Relay Editor that may have been retrieved previously from the library will not be
changed. Additionally, when the None button is clicked, if there are unassigned contacts on the
Contact page that has Relay Lib as a Source, these contacts will be removed from the contact list.
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the control relay. This value serves as the base for other
voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the control relay. The value is a percentage
based on the rated voltage.
38-85
CSD Elements
%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the control relay. The value is a percentage based on the
rated voltage. This is the minimum voltage across the relay required to change the state of
controlled contacts from their normal state to off-normal state when the control relay becomes
energized. If the voltage drop on the relay becomes less than the Vpickup value anytime from
the moment that the relay becomes energized up to the operating time of a controlled contact, the
contact will fail to operate and stay in the normal state.
%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the control relay. The value is in percent based on the
rated voltage. This is the maximum voltage across the relay that will result in changing the state
of controlled contacts from their off-normal state to normal state. While the control relay is
energized, if the voltage drop on the relay becomes less than the Vdropout value for a duration of
the release time of a controlled contact, the contact will change from its off-normal sate to
normal state.
Operating Temp.
Tmin
This field allows you to enter the minimum operating temperature in degree of Celsius. This
value is currently not used in CSD calculations.
Tmax
This field allows you to enter the maximum operating temperature in degree of Celsius. This
value is currently not used in CSD calculations.
Burden Rating
Burden rating is the continuous rating of the control relay. When a control relay is energized, for
a short time the inrush current flows through the control relay, which can be several times higher
than the burden current. After this initial inrush period, the behavior of a control coil is defined
by the burden rating.
The burden rating values are related to each other and to the rated voltage. Once a rating value,
such as the Amp value, is changed, the other rating values will be automatically updated to keep
the integrity of parameters based on Ohms law.
W
Enter the power rating in watts. This is the continuous power rating of a DC control relay.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a DC control relay.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere. For a DC control relay, the VA rating is the
same as the W rating.
38-86
CSD Elements
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the control relay under normal operating conditions, that is,
when the rated voltage is applied across the control relay.
%Tol
Enter the burden rating tolerance as a percent. This value is used to adjust the burden load of a
control relay. In CSD calculations, the burden is adjusted in a conservative way. When a 10%
tolerance is entered, for a constant Z device its resistance will be reduced by 10% and for a
constant VA (or I) device its VA (or I) will be increased by 10%.
Burden Load Type Constant VA, Constant Z, or Constant I
In CSD calculation, a control relay can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant I device
as a burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to make this selection.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a control relay applies to the initial short duration (in milliseconds) after it
becomes energized. In general, the inrush rating of a control relay is several times higher than its
burden rating.
Being similar to the burden rating parameters, the inrush rating values are also related to each
other and to the rated voltage. Once one rating value, such as the Amp value, is changed, the
other rating values will be automatically updated to keep the integrity of parameters based on
Ohms law.
Inrush Rating
Because many control relay manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of
their control relays, ETAP provides this checkbox to indicate availability of inrush parameters.
If this box is checked, non-zero inrush rating parameters (such as power and current) must be
entered. Otherwise, the CSD calculations will be blocked. If no inrush rating data is available,
simply uncheck this box.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field.
relay.
This is the inrush power rating of a DC control
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the inrush current rating of a DC control
relay.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere. For DC control relay, the VA rating is the
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms for the control relay during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, it is equivalent
to the case that the Inrush Rating box is not checked.
38-87
CSD Elements
38.9.3 Contact Page

A control relay controls the states of multiple contacts in order to achieve its control objectives,
such as motor starting control or power circuit breaker operations. The data related to the
contacts controlled by a control relay is entered in the Contact page. From this page, you can
add/delete contacts, associate an unassigned contact with this control relay, and modify contact
parameters.
The link between a control relay and its contacts is established by assigning the contacts to the
relay. The assignment can be done either from the CSD view or from the Contact page. When a
new contact is added to a CSD, it is not assigned to any controlling device initially. Double
clicking on the contact will open the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog, where you
can select a controlling device, such as a control relay or a solenoid, to make this assignment.
Once a contact has been assigned to a controlling device, double clicking on the contact will
open the Contact page of the controlling device.
38-88
CSD Elements
Contact List
The contact list in the Contact page contains all the contacts controlled by the control relay.
These contacts may or may not be associated with assigned contact elements in the CSD view.
You can make an assignment from this list for an unassigned contact in CSD view, change
contact type, change contact source type, and modify a contact parameter.
When you are retrieving control relay data from a library, if the selected control relay
library data has controlled contacts, these contacts will be added to the contact list with
all contact parameter values. Each contact will generate a new row with contact
parameters displayed in the fields on the row. Initially, the Contact ID will be blank for
these contacts, indicating that no contact element in the CSD view has been assigned to
it. Once a contact element in a CSD view is assigned to a contact in the list, the ID of the
contact element will be displayed in the Contact ID field.
#
This is the order number of contacts controlled by the control relay. When assigning a contact to
a relay, this number is used to identify the individual contact. Once assigned, it becomes part of
the ID for the contact.
Contact ID
For contacts in the list that have been assigned to contact elements in a CSD view, this field
displays the ID of that contact element. The contact element ID is a combination of the
controlling device and the order number of the contact in the contact list.
The assignment of a contact can also be carried out from the Contact ID field. To make an
assignment, click on the Contact ID field of a contact that has not been assigned to a contact
element, as an example, contact number 5 has been selected below. If the CSD view that
contains this control relay has unassigned contact elements, a list will appear when you click the
Contact ID field. All unassigned contacts that have the same type (Convertible or Form C) as
contact number 5 are shown in the list. Selecting a contact from the list will complete the
assignment.
38-89
CSD Elements
Type
There are two types of contacts in ETAP: Convertible contacts and Form C contacts. For
contacts that have data from a library, either the Control Relay Library or the Contact Library,
their type is provided by the manufacturer and therefore it cannot be changed. These contacts
have Relay Lib or Relay Lib Overwrite displayed in the Source field.
For contacts that are added to the list by clicking on the add button, their type can be changed
from the Type field. Clicking on the Type field brings up a selection list where you can choose
the required type.
Source
This field shows the data source of a contact. When a contacts data comes from a library, either
from the Control Relay Library or from the Contact Library, this field shows Relay Lib or
Contact Lib. In general, if the parameters of a contact originate from a library, they cannot be
modified. There are two exceptions. One is the Status field, since it is operating related. The
second exception is the Type field when the Source is Contact Lib, because the Type information
is not part of Contact Library data.
If you have retrieved contact data from the library and you wish to modify it, change the source
type from Relay Lib (or Contact Lib) to Relay Lib Overwrite (Contact Lib Overwrite). This
change allows you to modify contact parameters. However, if the Source is Relay Lib
Overwrite, the contact Type still cannot be changed, since the manufacturer of the control relay
has fixed the type of a contact.
For the contacts added from the page by clicking on the Add button, the Source is initially set as
User Defined. For these contacts, all contact parameters can be modified from the editor.
Status
This field defines the normal status of a contact, which is the state of the contact when the
controlling device is not energized. For a Form C contact, the Status can be either Pos A or Pos
B. For a Convertible or a Fixed contact, the Status can be either NO (Normally Open) or NC
(Normally Closed). The Status field can be changed except when the data Source is Relay Lib
and the contact Type is Fixed.
Vrated
Enter rated voltage of the contact in volts. This is the rated operating voltage of the contact.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum contact operating voltage in a percentage based on rated voltage.
R
Enter contact resistance in milliohms. This is the resistance value to be considered in CSD
calculations. In the CSD Study Case, there are options to use individual contact resistance or
global contact resistance. Many contact manufacturers do not provide this value. Since contact
resistance is so small comparing to the resistance values of other elements in ETAP, neglecting
contact resistance does not cause a significant difference in calculation results.
38-90
CSD Elements
Amp,r
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for resistive load. This rating is for control systems
that do not contain any inductive coils.
Amp,i
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for inductive load. This rating is for control systems
that have a substantial amount of loads as inductive coils. For control systems in electrical
power systems, this rating will be used since most of the loads are control relays and solenoids.
Top
Enter the operating time in milliseconds for the contact. This is one of the most important
parameters of contacts in CSD simulations. Top is the time for a contact, initially at its normal
state, to change to off-normal state, assuming that during the period of Top the voltage drop
across the controlling device (a control relay) of the contact is maintained higher than or equal to
the pickup voltage of the controlling device. It should be noted that different contacts controlled
by the same device might have different operating times.
Trelease
Enter the release time in milliseconds for the contact. This is one of the most important
parameters of contacts in CSD simulations. Trelease is the time for a contact, initially at its offnormal state, to change to normal state, assuming that during the period of Trelease the voltage
drop across the controlling device (a control relay) of the contact is maintained below the
dropout voltage of the controlling device. It should be noted that different contacts controlled by
the same device might have different release times.
38-91
CSD Elements
Contact Lib
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Part ID from the Contact
Library. Otherwise, the field is blank.
Remark
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Remark from the Contact
Library. When the Source for the contact is User Defined or Lib Overwrite, this field becomes
editable, where you can enter text for up to 50 characters as long as the field width is set wide
enough.
Note: The field width can be adjusted from the top of the contact list.
Data Rev.
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Data Revision from the
Contact Library. When the Source for the contact is User Defined or Lib Overwrite, this field
becomes editable, where you can enter text for up to 25 characters as long as the field width is
set wide enough.
38-92
CSD Elements
Reference
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Reference from the Contact
editable and you can enter up to 25 characters of text as long as the field width is set wide
enough.
Contact Library
The Contact Library button allows you to retrieve contact data for the selected contact from the
Contact Library, assuming that the Source of the contact is User Defined, Contact Lib, or
Contact Lib Overwrite. When the Source of the contact is Relay Lib or Relay Lib Overwrite, the
button is disabled.
To retrieve contact data from the Contact Library, select a contact from the list that has the
Source of the contact displayed as User Defined, Contact Lib, or Contact Lib Overwrite and then
click the Contact Library button. This will bring up the Contact CSD Library Quick dialog box,
as shown below. This Quick Pick dialog allows you to make a selection from a list of all
contacts in the library.
When an entry in the Contact Quick Pick dialog is selected, clicking on the Ok button will
substitute the selected data to the Contact page of the Control Relay Editor. Pressing the None
button will close the dialog and set the data to zero for the selected contact in the Contact page as
well as setting the Source for the contact to User Defined. When the Cancel button is pressed,
ETAP will close the Contact Library Quick Pick dialog without any data transfer.
38-93
CSD Elements
Unassign
The Unassign button allows you to remove the link between a CSD contact element and this
control relay. This button becomes enabled when an assigned contact is selected in the contact
list of the Contact page. Clicking the button will convert the contact into an unassigned contact
and the Contact ID will become blank. The data in the in the contact list will stay the same. The
contact element in the CSD view can then be assigned to another controlling device or another
unassigned contact in the contact list.
Add
When the Add button is clicked, a new contact will be added to the end of the contact list in the
Contact page. The newly added contact is unassigned and has User Defined as its Source.
Delete
When the delete button is clicked, the selected contact from the contact list will be removed from
the list. If it is an assigned contact, the corresponding contact element in CSD will change to an
unassigned contact.
Revisions for Data in the Contact Page

In the current release of ETAP, the data revision feature is not supported for the data in the
Contact page of the Control Relay Editor. This means that information in the Contact page can
only be modified while the ETAP project is in the Base revision. The information contained in
the Contact page includes two categories: contact assignment and contact engineering data.
When switched to a revision other than the Base, the entire Contact page is disabled, so that
neither category of the contact information can be changed. Accordingly, while the project is in
a revision other than the Base, you cannot make an assignment for an unassigned contact. When
you double-click on an unassigned contact, the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog
will not appear.
38-94
CSD Elements

You can specify the duty cycle category and load profile for each duty cycle within the Duty
Cycle page. ETAP displays the load profile for viewing and printing.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify a load profile for each one of the five duty cycle categories. A
load profile defined by a duty cycle consists of a number of consecutive load segments. Each
segment is a square form and is entered in a line in the duty cycle list.
Duty Cycle Category
Select a duty cycle category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each
load can have up to five duty cycle categories with independent load profiles. You can name the
duty cycle categories from the Project menu bar.
38-95
CSD Elements
Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When this field is clicked,
a list of load types appears. The options include Other, Load, Motor, solenoid, Control Relay,
Contact, Constant P, Constant Z, and Constant I. If Constant I is selected, the device will behave
as a constant current load for the load segment. If Constant P or Motor is selected, the device
will behave as a constant power load for the load segment. If any other option is selected, the
device will behave as a constant Z load for the load segment.
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in this field, which allows you to identify a load segment.
It is not necessary to assign different names for different sections.
%Load
Enter the load for a segment as a percent of the rated burden Amps of the device in this field.
When a new value is entered in this field, the Amp field for the same section will update
automatically.
Note: The %Load field for the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile
must end with zero value.
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes in this field. When a new value is entered in this field,
the %Load field for the same segment will update automatically.
Note: The Amp field for the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must
end with a zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds in this field. This is the time when the
current load segment starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the
St Time of the following load segment.
Load Profile
To add a load section to the load profile, click on the Ins button to create a new row in the load
profile table. Each row represents a segment of the load profile for this duty cycle.
To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking the number of the row, then click on the
Del button or press the Delete key.
Click on the Print-> button, and the displayed load profile curve for the selected duty cycle will
print.
Note: You can select any of the duty cycle categories when conducting CSD studies. To edit the
loading category names, select Duty Cycle Category from the Project menu.
38-96
CSD Elements
38.9.5 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. The names of
menu bar.
38-97
CSD Elements

characters.
characters.
UD Field A5
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the title of a manufacturers diagram or the
part number or title of a specification for this element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchase Date
38-98
CSD Elements
38.9.6 Comment Page

Enter any additional data or comments regarding the condition, maintenance, tests, or studies,
information.
38-99
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
38.10 Solenoid Editor

Solenoid is a control device in ETAP used to control valves and contacts.
38.10.1 Info Page
Info
ID
automatically assigns a unique ID to each solenoid element. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID (Dev) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
buses increases.
38-100
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
The default ID (Dev) for the solenoid can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control
From Node
A device, such as a solenoid, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field
shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the From side of the solenoid.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the solenoid.
Condition
Service
Calculation Model
ETAP provides two methods to model a solenoid: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle. The
method can be selected from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control System
Diagram Study Case.
When this option is selected, the model entered in the Rating page of the Device Editor will be
used to represent the device in a CSD simulation. The model includes burden rating and inrush
rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of the Device Editor will
be used to represent the device in a CSD simulation.
Note: In the current version of ETAP, if this option is selected, the control logic between this
solenoid and the contacts listed in the Contact page will not be simulated in the calculations.
These contacts will stay in their normal state during CSD simulations.
Equipment
Tag #
38-101
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
.
38-102
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
38.10.2 Rating Page

The Rating page presents the parameters for voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush rating of a
solenoid. These parameters can be entered manually or retrieved from the Solenoid Library.
The rating parameters consist of three sections: voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
Library
Click the Library button to retrieve solenoid parameters from the Solenoid library. When the
library button is clicked, the CSD Library Quick Pick dialog box will appear. It displays all
solenoids entered in the library that are associated with the project. The Quick Pick dialog
includes Manufacturer list, Model list, and Device list. When a new Manufacturer is selected,
the Model list will display all model types for the selected manufacturer. Once a specific model
is selected from the Model list, all the solenoids for that model will be listed in the Device list.
38-103
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
To select a device from the library, click on its row in the device list and press the OK
button. The solenoid data will then be substituted in the Solenoid Editor. The solenoid
you select from the library may have contacts associated with it. These contacts are
controlled by the solenoid. If this is the case, the contact information will also be
retrieved from the library and substituted in the Contact page of the Solenoid Editor.
The Quick Pick dialog also contains several other buttons. Clicking on the Help button will bring
up ETAP online help. Clicking on the Cancel button will close the Quick Pick dialog without
If the None button is clicked, the library data information that appears next to the Library
button in the Rating page of the Solenoid Editor will be blanked out. However, the data in the
Solenoid Editor that may have been previously retrieved from the library will not change.
Additionally, when the None button is clicked, if there are unassigned contacts in the Contact
page that has Solenoid Lib as Source, these contacts will be removed from the contact list.
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the solenoid in this field. This value serves as the base for other
voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the solenoid in this field. The value is a
percent based on the rated voltage.
38-104
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the solenoid in this field. The value is a percent based on
the rated voltage. This is the minimum voltage across the solenoid that is required to change the
state of controlled contacts from their normal state to an off-normal state when the solenoid
becomes energized. If the voltage drop on the solenoid becomes less than the Vpickup value
starting from the moment that the solenoid becomes energized up to the operating time of a
controlled contact, the contact will fail to operate and will stay in the normal state.
%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the solenoid in this field. The value is a percent based
on the rated voltage. This is the maximum voltage across the solenoid that will result in
changing the state of controlled contacts from their off-normal state to normal state. While the
solenoid is energized, if the voltage drop on the solenoid becomes less than the Vdropout value
for a duration of the release time of a controlled contact, the contact will change from its offnormal sate to normal state.
Operating Temp.
Tmin
Enter the minimum operating temperature in degrees Celsius in this field. This value is not
currently used in CSD calculations.
Tmax
Enter the maximum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is not currently used in
CSD calculations.
Burden Rating
The Burden rating is the continuous rating of the solenoid. When a solenoid is initially
energized, for a brief period the inrush current can be several times higher than the burden
current. After the initial inrush period, the behavior of a control coil is defined by the burden
rating.
The burden rating values are related to each other and to the rated voltage. Once one rating
value, such as the Amp value, is changed, the other rating values will automatically update to
keep the integrity of parameters based on Ohms law.
W
solenoid.
This is the continuous power rating of a DC
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the continuous current rating of a DC
solenoid.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-amperes.
38-105
For DC solenoid, the VA rating is the
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the solenoid under normal operating condition in this field,
that is, when the rated voltage is applied across the solenoid.
%Tol
Enter the burden rating tolerance as a percentage in this field. This value is used to adjust the
burden load of a solenoid. In CSD calculations, the burden is adjusted in a conservative way.
When a 10% tolerance is entered, the resistance of a constant Z device will reduce by 10% and
for a constant VA (or I) device its VA (or I) will increase by 10%.
In CSD calculations, a solenoid can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant I
device as a burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to select one of the three
choices.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a solenoid applies to the initial short duration (in milliseconds) just after it
becomes energized. In general, the inrush rating of a solenoid is several times higher than its
burden rating.
Similar to the burden rating parameters, the inrush rating values are also related to each other and
to the rated voltage. Once one rating value, such as the Amp value, is changed, the other rating
values will automatically update to keep the integrity of parameters based on the Ohms law.
Inrush Rating
Because many solenoid manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of their
solenoids, ETAP provides a checkbox to indicate availability of inrush parameters. If this box is
checked, non-zero inrush rating parameters (such as power and current) must be entered.
Otherwise, the CSD calculations will be blocked. If no inrush rating data is available, simply
uncheck this box.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the inrush power rating of a DC solenoid.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field.
solenoid.
This is the inrush current rating of a DC
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere. For DC solenoid, the VA rating is the same
as the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the solenoid during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
38-106
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, this is
equivalent to a case where the Inrush Rating box is not checked.
Duty
Select the duty of a solenoid from the list or enter the duty in percent in the box. This is the
percentage of time that a solenoid is in service. This field is for user information only, as CSD
calculation does not utilize it.
38.10.3 Contact Page

A solenoid can control the states of multiple contacts in order to achieve its control objectives,
such as valve control operations. The data related to the contacts controlled by a solenoid are
entered in the Contact page. This page allows you to add/delete contacts, associate unassigned
contacts with this solenoid, and modify contact parameters.
The link between a solenoid and its contacts is established by assigning the contacts to the
solenoid. This assignment can be accomplished either from the CSD view or from the Contact
page. When a new contact is added to a CSD, it initially is not assigned to any controlling
device. Double clicking on the contact will open the Contact Controlling Device Assignment
dialog, where you can select a controlling device, such as a solenoid or a solenoid, to make the
assignment. Once a contact has been assigned to a controlling device, double clicking on the
contact will open the Contact page of the controlling device.
38-107
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Contact List
The contact list in the Contact page contains all the contacts controlled by the solenoid. These
contacts may or may not be associated with assigned contact elements in the CSD view. You
can make an assignment from this list for an unassigned contact in CSD view, change the contact
type, change the contact source type, and modify a contact parameter.
When retrieving solenoid data from a library, if the selected solenoid library data has
controlled contacts, these contacts will add to the contact list with all contact parameter
values. Each contact will generate a new row with contact parameters displayed in the
fields on the row. Initially, the Contact ID will be blank for these contacts, indicating that
no contact element in the CSD view has been assigned to it. Once a contact element in a
CSD view is assigned to a contact in the list, the ID of the contact element will display in
the Contact ID field.
#
This is the order number of contacts controlled by the solenoid. When assigning a contact to a
relay, this number is used to identify individual contacts. Once assigned, it becomes part of the
ID for the contact.
Contact ID
This field displays the ID of the contact element for contacts in the list that have been assigned to
contact elements in a CSD view. The contact element ID is a combination of the controlling
device and the order number of the contact in the contact list.
The assignment of a contact can also be carried out from the Contact ID field. To make an
assignment, click on the Contact ID field of a contact that has not been assigned to a contact
element, for example contact number 5 as shown below. If the CSD view that contains this
solenoid has unassigned contact elements, a list will appear as you click the Contact ID field.
All unassigned contacts that have the same type (Convertible or Form C) as contact number 5 are
included in the list. Selecting a contact from the list will implement the assignment.
Type
There are two types of contacts in ETAP: Convertible contact and Form C contact. For contacts
that have data from library, either the Solenoid Library or the Contact Library, their type is
provided by the manufacturer and therefore it cannot be changed. These contacts have Solenoid
Lib or Solenoid Lib Overwrite displayed in the Source field.
38-108
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
The type of contacts that were added to the list by clicking on the add button can be changed
from the Type field. Clicking on the Type field brings up a selection list from which you can
select the required type.
Source
This field shows the data source of a contact. For contacts whose data comes from the Solenoid
Library or the Contact Library, this field indicates Solenoid Lib or Contact Lib. In general, if the
parameters of a contact originate from a library, they cannot be modified. There are two
exceptions. One is the Status field, since it is operating related. The second exception is the
Type field when the Source is Contact Lib, because the Type information is not part of Contact
Library data.
If you have retrieved contact data from the library and you wish to modify it, change the source
type from Solenoid Lib (or Contact Lib) to Solenoid Lib Overwrite (Contact Lib Overwrite).
This change allows you to modify contact parameters. However, if the Source is Solenoid Lib
Overwrite, the contact Type still cannot be changed, since the manufacturer of the solenoid has
fixed the type of a contact.
For the contacts added from the page by clicking on the Add button, the Source is initially set as
User Defined. For these contacts, all contact parameters can be modified from the editor.
Status
This field defines the normal status of a contact, which is the state of the contact when the
controlling device is not energized. For a Form C contact, the Status can be either Pos A or Pos
B. For a Convertible or a Fixed contact, the Status can be either NO (Normally Open) or NC
(Normally Closed). The Status field can still be changed except when the data Source is
Solenoid Lib and the contact Type is Fixed.
Vrated
Enter the rated voltage of the contact in volts in this field. This is the rated operating voltage of
the contact.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum contact operating voltage in percent based on rated voltage in this field.
R
Enter contact resistance in milliohms in this field. This is the resistance value considered in CSD
calculations. In the CSD Study Case, there are options to use individual contact resistance or
global contact resistance. Many contact manufacturers do not provide this value. Since it is so
small comparing to the resistance values of other elements in ETAP, neglecting contact
resistance does not cause a significant difference in calculation results.
Amp,r
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for resistive load in this field. This rating is for
control systems that do not contain any inductive coils.
38-109
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Amp,i
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for inductive load in this field. This rating is for
control systems that have a substantial amount of loads as inductive coils. For control systems in
electrical power systems, this rating will be used since most of the loads are control relays and
solenoids.
Top
Enter the operating time in milliseconds for the contact in this field. This is one of the most
important parameters for contacts in CSD simulations. Top is the time for a contact, initially at
its normal state, to change to off-normal state, assuming that during the Top interval the voltage
drop across the controlling device (a solenoid) of the contact is maintained higher than or equal
to the pickup voltage of the controlling device. It should be noted that different contacts
controlled by the same device might have a different operating time.
Trelease
Enter the release time in milliseconds for the contact in this field. This is one of the most
important parameters for contacts in CSD simulations. Trelease is the time for a contact, initially
at its off-normal state, to change to normal state, assuming that during the interval of Trelease the
voltage drop across the controlling device (a solenoid) of the contact is maintained below the
dropout voltage of the controlling device. It should be noted that different contacts controlled by
the same device might have a different release time.
38-110
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Contact Lib
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Part ID from the Contact
Library. Otherwise, the field is blank.
Remark
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Remark from the Contact
editable, where you can enter text for up to 50 characters provided the field width is set wide
enough.
Data Rev.
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Data Revision from the
Contact Library. When the Source for the contact is User Defined or Lib Overwrite, this field
becomes editable, where you can enter text for up to 25 characters provided the field width is set
wide enough.
38-111
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Reference
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Reference from the Contact
editable, where you can enter text for up to 25 characters provided the field width is set wide
enough.
Contact Library
The Contact Library button allows you to retrieve contact data for the selected contact from the
Contact Library, assuming that the Source of the contact is User Defined, Contact Lib, or
Contact Lib Overwrite. When the Source of the contact is Solenoid Lib or Solenoid Lib
Overwrite, the button is disabled.
To retrieve contact data from the Contact Library, select a contact from the list that has the
Source of the contact displayed as User Defined, Contact Lib, or Contact Lib Overwrite and then
click the Contact Library button. This will bring up the Contact CSD Library Quick Pick dialog
box, shown below. The Quick Pick dialog lists all the contacts in the library from which you can
make a selection.
When an entry in the Contact Quick Pick dialog is selected, clicking on the Ok button will
substitute this selected data to the Contact page of the Solenoid Editor. Pressing the None button
will close the dialog and the data for the selected contact in the Contact page will be set to zero
as well as setting the Source for the contact information to User Defined. When the Cancel
button is pressed, ETAP will close the Contact Library Quick Pick dialog without transferring
any data.
38-112
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Unassign
The Unassign button allows you to remove the link between a CSD contact element and this
solenoid. This button becomes enabled when an assigned contact is selected in the contact list of
the Contact page. Clicking on the button will make the contact an unassigned one and the
Contact ID will become blank. The data in the in the contact list will stay the same. The contact
element in the CSD view can then be assigned to another controlling device or another
unassigned contact in the contact list.
Add
When the Add button is clicked, a new contact will be added to the end of the contact list in the
Contact page. The newly added contact is unassigned and has User Defined as its Source.
Delete
When the delete button is clicked, the selected contact from the contact list will be removed from
the list. If it is an assigned contact, the corresponding contact element in CSD will change to an
unassigned contact.
Revisions for Data in the Contact Page

In the current release of ETAP, the data revision feature is not supported for the data in the
Contact page of the Control Relay Editor. Therefore, any item of information in the Contact page
can only be modified while the ETAP project is in the Base revision. The information contained
in the Contact page includes two categories: contact assignment and contact engineering data.
When switched to a revision other than the Base, the whole Contact page is disabled, so that
neither category of the contact information can be changed. Accordingly, while the project is in
a revision other than the Base, you cannot make assignment for an unassigned contact. When
double-clicking on an unassigned contact, the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog
will not appear.
38-113
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor

You can use the Duty Cycle page to specify the duty cycle category and load a profile for each
duty cycle. ETAP displays the load profile for viewing and printing.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify the load profile for each of the five duty cycle categories. A load
profile is defined by a duty cycle that consists of a number of consecutive load segments. Each
Duty Cycle Category
Select a duty cycle category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each
38-114
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When the field is clicked, a
list of load types shows up. The options include Other, Load, Motor, Solenoid, Control Relay,
will behave as a constant power load for the load segment. If any other option is selected, the
device will behave as a constant Z load for the load segment.
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in this field. It allows you to identify a load segment. The
names for different sections do not have to be different.
%Load
Enter the load for a segment in percent of the rated burden Amps of the device in this field.
When a new value is entered here, the Amp field for the same section will update automatically.
The %Load field for the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must end
with zero value.
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes. When a new value is entered in this field, the %Load
field for the same segment will update automatically. The Amp field for the last load segment is
always zero, indicating that a load profile must end with zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds. This is the time when the current load
segment starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the St Time of
next following load segment.
Load Profile
To add a load section to the load profile, click on the Ins button to create a row in the load
print.
38-115
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor
User-Defined Info
menu bar.
38-116
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor

characters.
characters.
UD Field A5
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
alphanumeric characters. For example, the title of a manufacturers diagram or specifications for
this element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchase Date
38-117
CSD Elements
Solenoid Editor

information.
38-118
CSD Elements
Light Editor
38.11 Light Editor

Lights are visual indicating devices used to draw an operators attention to various conditions in
the system, such as the status of a circuit breaker. Lights are common devices in a control
system diagram.
38.11.1 Info Page
38-119
CSD Elements
Light Editor
Info
ID
automatically assigns a unique ID to each light element. The assigned IDs consist of the default
ID (Dev) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses
increases.
The default ID (Dev) for the light can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control System
diagram submenu, Device item) in the menu bar or from the Project View by entering a new
name having up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From Node
A device, such as a light, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field shows
the ID of the node/bus connected at the From side of the light.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the light.
Condition
Service
Calculation Model
ETAP provides two methods to model a light: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle. The
method can be selected from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control System
Diagram Study Case.
When this option is selected, in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Rating page of the
Device Editor will be used to represent the device. The model includes burden rating and inrush
rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of
the Device Editor will be used to represent the device.
Equipment
38-120
CSD Elements
Light Editor
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38.11.2 Rating Page

The Rating page holds parameters for voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush rating of a light.
The parameters can be entered manually. The rating parameters consist of three separate
sections: voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
38-121
CSD Elements
Light Editor
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the light. This value serves as the base for other voltage
values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the light. The value is a percentage based on
the rated voltage.
38-122
CSD Elements
Light Editor
Burden Rating
Burden rating is the continuous rating of the light. When a light is first energized, for a brief
interval it takes an inrush current that can be several times higher than the burden current. After
this initial inrush period, the behavior of a control coil is defined by the burden rating.
keep the integrity of parameters based on the Ohms law.
W
Enter the power rating in watts. This is the continuous power rating of a DC light.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a DC light.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-amperes. For a DC light, the VA rating is the same
as the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms for the light under normal operating condition, that is, when the
rated voltage is applied across the light.
In CSD calculation, a light can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant I device
as a burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to select the load type you prefer.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a light applies to the initial brief interval (in milliseconds) after it becomes
energized. In general, the inrush rating of a light is several times higher than its burden rating.
Very similar to the burden rating parameters, inrush rating values are also related to each other
and to the rated voltage. Once one rating value, such as the Amp value, is changed, the other
rating values will automatically update to keep the integrity of parameters based on the Ohms
law.
Inrush Rating
Because many light manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of their lights,
ETAP provides a checkbox to indicate availability of inrush parameters. If this box is checked,
non-zero inrush rating parameters (such as power and current) must be entered. Otherwise, the
CSD calculations will be blocked. If no inrush rating data available, simply uncheck this box.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the inrush power rating of a DC light.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the inrush current rating of a DC light.
38-123
CSD Elements
Light Editor
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere in this field. For DC light, the VA rating is
the same as the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the light during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, it is the
equivalent of leaving the Inrush Rating box unchecked.

You can use the Duty Cycle page to specify the duty cycle category and load profile for each
38-124
CSD Elements
Light Editor
Duty Cycle
This section allows you to specify a load profile for each one of the five duty cycle categories. A
Duty Cycle Category
Select a duty cycle category from the list box to view the load profile for it on this page. Each
Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When this field is clicked,
a list of load types appears. The options include Other, Load, Motor, Solenoid, Control Relay,
will behave as a constant power load for the load segment. If any of the remaining options are
selected, the device will behave as a constant Z load for the load segment.
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in the field. This allows you to identify a load segment.
The names for different sections do not have to be different.
%Load
Enter the load for a segment in percent of the rated burden Amps of the device. When a new
value is entered in this field, the Amp field for the same section will update automatically. The
%Load field for the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must end with
zero value.
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes in this field. When a new value is entered in this field,
the %Load field for the same segment will update automatically. The Amp field for the last load
segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must end with zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds in this field. This is the time when the
current load segment starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the
St Time of next following load segment.
Load Profile
To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking on the number of that row, then click on
the Del button or press the Delete key.
38-125
CSD Elements
Light Editor
print.
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to enter additional data associated with this component. The names of the
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the
menu bar.
38-126
CSD Elements
Light Editor

this field and enter any extra data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
characters.
UD Field A5
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
alphanumeric characters. For example, a manufacturers diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchase Date
38-127
CSD Elements
Light Editor

This page allows you to enter any additional data or comments regarding condition,
maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a
default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
information.
38-128
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
38.12 General Load Editor

A general load is a catch-all category for a generic type of elements used to represent devices
in a CSD that are not control relays, solenoids, or lights. For example, a spring charging motor
for a circuit breaker can be represented by a general load.
38.12.1 Info Page
38-129
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
Info
ID
automatically assigns a unique ID to each general load element. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID (Dev) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
buses increases.
The default ID (Dev) for the general load can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control
From Node
A device, such as a general load, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field
shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the From side of the general load.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the general load.
Condition
Service
Calculation Model
ETAP provides you with two methods to model a general load: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty
Cycle. You select the method from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control
System Diagram Study Case.
If this option is selected, the model entered in the Rating page of the Device Editor will be used
to represent the device in the CSD simulation. The model includes burden rating and inrush
rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of the Device Editor will
be used to represent the device in a CSD simulation.
38-130
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38.12.2 Rating Page

The Rating page lets you set the parameters for the voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush
rating of a general load. These parameters can be entered manually. The rating parameters are
grouped in three sections: voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
38-131
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the general load in this field. This value serves as the base for
other voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the general load in this field. The value is a
percentage based on the rated voltage.
38-132
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
%Vpickup
Enter the pickup voltage as a percentage of the rated voltage of the general load. Since a general
load does not control other devices, the Vpickup value serves to alert you to possible problem
areas. For example, when the voltage across a spring charging motor is too low, the CB may fail
for the next operation. In CSD simulation, a alert can be generated when the voltage across a
general load is less than the Vpickup value, if this option is selected in the CSD Study Case.
%Vdropout
Enter the dropout voltage as a percentage of the rated voltage of the general load. Since a
general load does not control other devices, the Vdropout value serves to alert you to possible
problem areas. In CSD simulation, an alert can be generated when the voltage across a general
load is less than the Vdropout value, if this option is selected in the CSD Study Case.
Burden Rating
Burden rating is the continuous rating of the general load. When a general load is first energized,
for a brief interval the inrush current can be several times higher than the burden current. After
this initial inrush period, the behavior of a control coil is defined by the burden rating.
keep the integrity of parameters based on Ohms law.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the continuous power rating of a DC general
load.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the continuous current rating of a DC
general load.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere in this field. For DC general load, the VA
rating is the same as the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms for the general load under normal operating conditions. That is,
when the rated voltage is applied across the general load.
In a CSD calculation, a general load can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant
I device as a burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to select your preference.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a general load applies to the initial brief interval (in milliseconds) after it
becomes energized. In general, the inrush rating of a general load is several times higher than its
burden rating.
38-133
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
Very similar to burden rating parameters, the inrush rating values are also related to each other
and to the rated voltage. Once one rating value, such as the Amp value, is changed, the other
rating values will automatically update to maintain the integrity of parameters based on Ohms
law.
Inrush Rating
Because many general load manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of
their general loads, ETAP includes a checkbox that lets you indicate the availability of inrush
parameters. If this box is checked, non-zero inrush rating parameters (such as power and
current) must be entered. Otherwise, the CSD calculations will be blocked. If no inrush rating
data are available, simply uncheck this box.
W
load.
This is the inrush power rating of a DC general
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the inrush current rating of a DC general
load.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-amperes. For DC general load, the VA rating is the
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the general load during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds in this field. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, it is
the equivalent of leaving the Inrush Rating box unchecked.
38-134
CSD Elements
General Load Editor

Using the Duty Cycle page, you can specify the duty cycle category and load profile for each
Duty Cycle
This section allows you to specify a load profile for each of the five duty cycle categories. A
segment is a square form and is entered on a line in the duty cycle list.
38-135
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
Duty Cycle Category

You can select a duty cycle category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this
page. Each load can have up to five duty cycle categories with independent load profiles. You
can name the duty cycle categories from the Project menu bar.
Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When the field is clicked, a
list of load types appears. The options include Other, Load, Motor, Solenoid, Control Relay,
will behave as a constant power load for the load segment. If any of the remaining options are
selected, the device will behave as a constant Z load for the load segment.
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in the field. This allows you to identify a load segment.
The names for different sections do not have to be different.
%Load
Enter the load for a segment as a percentage of the rated burden Amps of the device. When a
new value is entered in this field, the Amp field for the same section will update automatically.
The %Load field for the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must end
with zero value.
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes. When a new value is entered in this field, the %Load
field for the same segment will update automatically. The Amp field for the last load segment is
always zero, indicating that a load profile must end with zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds. This is the time when the current load
segment starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the St Time of
next following load segment.
Load Profile
print.
38-136
CSD Elements
General Load Editor
User-Defined Info
the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu of the
menu bar.
enter the equipment reference number or another number here, using up to five digits.
38-137
CSD Elements
General Load Editor

characters.
characters.
UD Field A5
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchase Date
38-138
CSD Elements
General Load Editor

When entering information on this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key
information.
38-139
CSD Elements
Contact Editor
38.13 Contact Editor

A contact is a controlled switch whose status is dependent on the operating condition of its
controlling devices, such as a control relay or a solenoid. The logic established between contacts
and their controlling devices is the essential part of control system that supports the functioning
of the entire control mechanism.
In ETAP, there are two types of contacts: regular contact and Form C contact. A regular contact
has two terminals. A Form C contact has three terminals and is similar to two regular contacts
connected back to back, with one always being open and the other always being closed.
Due to the natural logic relationship between a contact and its controlling device, a contact does
not have its own property editor. The engineering property of a contact is entered through the
Contact page of the Property Editor of the controlling device of the contact. When a new contact
is added to a CSD view, it is called an unassigned contact because its controlling device has not
yet been determined. When you double click on the unassigned contact, the Contact Controlling
Device Assignment dialog will open, allowing you to select a controlling device for the contact.
Once its controlling device is selected, the contact becomes an assigned contact. When you
double-click on an assigned contact, ETAP opens the Property Editor of the controlling device.
The contact information will be located in the Contact page of this editor, and you can obtain
contact data from Contact Library or manually specify this information.
38.13.1 Contact Controlling Device Assignment Dialog

The Contact Controlling Device Assignment Dialog allows you to assign an unassigned contact
to a controlling device.
Controlling Device Type

Select a type of controlling device from the list. There are two types of controlling devices in the
current version of ETAP: Control Relay and Solenoid. Once you have selected a controlling
device type, the Controlling Device list will update automatically with all the devices of the
selected device type.
Controlling Device
This list presents all device IDs of the selected device type in a CSD View. Clicking on an ID
will highlight that row and the Available Contacts list will update with all unassigned contacts
that appear in the Contact page of the Device Editor.
Available Contacts
This list presents available contacts from the controlling device that you selected in the
Controlling Device list. An available contact is one that appears in the Contact page of the
controlling Device Editor that does not have a contact element assigned to it from the CSD view.
The Contact ID field is blank for available contacts in the Contact page of the Controlling Device
Editor.
38-140
CSD Elements
Contact Editor
The contacts displayed in the list are also determined by the type of the contact element from
which this dialog was opened. If the contact element is a regular contact, the list will include all
unassigned Fixed and Convertible contacts, plus the Form C contacts that have User Defined or
Contact Lib Overwrite shown as their data source. If the contact element is a Form C contact,
the list will include all unassigned Form C contacts, plus the Fixed and Convertible contacts that
have User Defined or Contact Lib Overwrite shown as their data source.
If a CSD contact element is assigned to a contact in the list that has different type, the type of the
CSD element will overwrite the type in the Contact page of the Device Editor. For example,
when the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog shown above is opened from a Form C
contact, the Available Contact list includes two Form C contacts (5 and 8) and one Convertible
contact (9). If number 9 is selected for the assignment, the type of this contact in the Contact
page of control relay M will change from a Convertible contact to a Form C contact.
38-141
CSD Elements
Contact Editor
Select
Clicking on the Select button completes the assignment of the contact element in CSD to your
selected available contact from the controlling device. The Contact Controlling Device
Assignment dialog will close.
Select/Editor
Clicking this button completes the assignment of the contact element in CSD to the selected available
contact from the controlling device. The Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog will close and
the editor of the controlling device for the contact that was just assigned will be brought up as the Contact
page.
Cancel
If you click on this button the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog closes without making any
contact assignment.
38-142
CSD Elements
Macro Controlled Contact
38.14 Macro Controlled Contact

A Macro Controlled Contact is an element in ETAP used to simulate a time-controlled switch.
Its primary purpose is to represent the control logic of a CSD when device duty cycle model is
chosen to represent devices. In this case, a controlling device cannot control the state of
contacts, but macro controlled contacts can be utilized to simulate the same logic to change
system configurations. The behavior of a macro controlled contact is defined by its duty cycle
where its status, open or closed, can be flexibly defined as a function of time.
38.14.1 Info Page
38-143
CSD Elements
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters in this field. ETAP automatically
assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (MC)
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.
The default ID (MC) for the DC bus can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View by entering a new name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From / To
These two fields display the ID of the connected elements of a macro controlled contact. A macro
controlled contact can be connected between two nodes, a bus and a node, a bus and a device, or a bus
and a branch.
Condition
Service

This is the state a macro controlled contact takes when the CSD view is in the Edit mode and when ETAP
determines the initial steady state of the CSD in the Study mode. There are two options: Normally Open
and Normally Closed.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
38-144
CSD Elements
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
.
38-145
CSD Elements

The behavior of a macro controlled contact is defined by its duty cycle, which specifies the state
of the macro controlled contact in a time sequence.
Duty Cycle
The duty cycle of a macro controlled contact consists of a number of states in a sequence of
increasing time intervals. The duty cycle list is presented in three columns: Name (of the duty
cycle step), State (On or Off), and Time (interval). Each state is defined as a row of this duty
cycle list.
Duty Cycle Category
Select one of the five duty cycles from the list box to establish the category. States for each
category can be added and named. When a duty cycle is selected, the data will display in the duty
cycle list and can be modified.
38-146
CSD Elements
Name
Enter a description of a step of the duty cycle in this field, using up to 25 alphanumerical letters.
State
Select the state of the macro controlled contact. When you click on this field, an arrow for a
drop-down list appears; click on it and two options appear: ON and OFF. Click on your choice.
Time
Specify time for a state. The duty cycle list is refreshed when you change a page or duty cycle
category and it is sorted according to the time column in increasing order when the list is
refreshed.
Ins
The Insert button becomes enabled when a row (other than row 1) is selected in the duty cycle
list. Clicking this button will insert an empty row in the duty cycle list above the selected row.
Add
Clicking on the Add button will add an empty row underneath the selected row of the duty cycle
list.
Del
The Delete button becomes enabled when a row is selected in the duty cycle list. Clicking on
this button will delete the selected row.
Print
Clicking on this button sends the duty cycle curve to the selected printer.
38-147
CSD Elements
User-Defined Info
menu bar.
38-148
CSD Elements


UD Field A5
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
using up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchasing Date
38-149
CSD Elements

combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste.
38-150
CSD Elements
38.15 Control Cable Schedule

Wires in a control system are typically much smaller than power cables. A control cable
installed between locations A and B can contain a number of wires being used in a control
system. In ETAP, all control cables are created in the Control Cable Schedule, which is a
holding place located at the ETAP project level for all control cables. Using the Control Cable
Schedule, you can create/delete control cables, modify control cable parameter, and assign CSD
wires to control cables. Any cables created in the Control Cable schedule will not appear in an
ETAP one-line view, since the Control Cable Schedule is primarily a place that defines the
properties for CSD wires that physically form a control cable.
38.15.1
Control Cable Schedule Dialog
To open the Control Cable Schedule, go to the Project menu and select the Control Cable
Schedule option. This opens the CSD Control Cable Schedule dialog, which presents a list of all
control cables in the project and several buttons for adding, deleting, and modifying cable
parameters.
Control Cable List

The Control Cable List displays all control cables in the project. These are display only fields
and the data can be modified in the Control Cable Schedule Editor. The list shows the cable
information and wire assignment information for each cable. A detailed explanation of each
field is given in the Control Cable Schedule Editor section.
38-151
CSD Elements
Add
Clicking the Add button will bring up a blank Control Cable Schedule Editor, where you can
create a new control cable.
Delete
Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected control cable.
Edit
Clicking the Edit button will bring up the Control Cable Schedule Editor and allow you to
modify the parameters for the selected control cable.
Print Schedule
Clicking the Print Schedule button will send the displayed control cable list to the selected
printer.
38.15.2 Control Cable Schedule Editor

Using the Control Cable Schedule Editor, you can enter cable parameters, change the number of
wires for a cable, and set the status of an unassigned wire.
38-152
CSD Elements
Connection
Enter the cable ID and the two physical locations of the cable in this section.
ID
a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
(CtrlCable) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses
increases.
From Loc
Enter an alphanumeric location with a maximum of 22 characters or select an existing location
from the list. This is the physical From location of the control cable. This information is for your
reference only and does not affect a CSD calculation.
To Loc
Enter an alphanumeric location with a maximum of 22 characters or select an existing location
from the list. This is the physical To location of the control cable. This information is for your
information only and does not affect a CSD calculation.
Length
Enter the cable length in this field. This length value will be used to calculate wire impedance.
Unit
Select a unit of measure for the cable length from the drop-down list. There are four options
available: ft, mile, m, and km.
%Tol.
Enter cable length tolerance as a percentage.
calculations to increase wire length.
This tolerance value will be used in CSD
Z
Enter or modify cable impedance values in the Z section in this field. If Impedance values
originate from the Cable Library, when the values are modified, the cable header information
will change to a dark blue color, indicating that the original data from the Cable Library has been
modified.
R
Enter the cable DC resistance value in Ohms at the specified length unit and base temperature in
this field.
L
Enter the cable DC inductance value in Henries at the specified length unit in this field.
38-153
CSD Elements
Length Unit
Select length unit for cable resistance and inductance. There are two options: total Z value or Z
per unit length. When the total Z value option is selected, the R and L values entered are for the
entire cable, no matter what the length of the cable. When the Z per unit length option is
selected, the R and L values entered are for the specified unit length. ETAP will calculate the
cable impedance automatically for the study based on the cable length.
Unit Length
When the Z per unit length option is selected, this field and the field for the unit for Unit Length
become enabled. Enter unit length at the unit for Unit Length.
Unit for Unit Length
When the Z per unit length option is selected, this field and the Unit Length field become
enabled. Select a unit of measure for Unit Length from the drop-down list. There are four
options available: ft, mile, m, and km.
Base Temp.
Enter a temperature or select from the drop-down list a base temperature for cable DC resistance.
This is the temperature value at which the DC resistance is specified. In CSD calculations, the
cable resistance value will automatically adjust to the operating temperature based on the
specified Study Case and Wire Editor options.
Wire
This section includes fields for specifying number of wires contained in the cable and a list of all
wires with status. For assigned wires, it also displays the name of the assigned wire element and
its CSD location.
Status
This column identifies the status of a wire contained in the cable. A wire can have one of three
different statuses: Assigned, Reserved, and Free.
The Assigned status indicates that this wire has been assigned to a CSD wire element. Such an
assignment can only be made from the Wire Editor. In addition, a wire can only be assigned to
one CSD wire element. Once assigned, the CSD wire element takes all of its wire parameters
from the cable specifications in the Cable Schedule for CSD calculations.
A Reserved status indicates that this wire has been set aside for future use and cannot be
assigned to any CSD wire element. The Free status indicates that this wire is available for
assignment or can be defined as reserved for future use.
You may change the wire status between Free to Reserved. To make this change, click on the
status field of a wire that shows either Reserved or Free and a list with two options will appear
that allows you to make the selection.
Name
This column applies to wires that have Assigned status and displays the ID of the CSD wire
element to which this wire has been assigned.
38-154
CSD Elements
CSD
This column applies to wires that have Assigned status and displays the ID of the CSD view in
which the assigned wire element is located.
Total
Enter the total number of wires contained in the cable in this field.
Note: If changing this quantity to a smaller value, the value cannot be less than the number of
wires that have Assigned or Reserved status.
Assigned
This display only field shows the total number of assigned wire in the cable. The assigned wires
are identified in the wire list.
Reserved
This display only field shows the total number of reserved wire for the cable. The reserved wires
are identified in the wire list.
Free
This display only field shows the total number of free wires for the cable. The free wires are
identified in the wire list.
Cable Library
Clicking the Cable Library button will bring up the Cable Library Quick Pick dialog shown
below to retrieve cable data from the library. The data retrieved from Cable Library includes
cable header information and parameters in the Z section. If any parameter in the Z section is
changed, the cable header text will turn a dark blue color to indicate that the cable data extracted
originally from the library has been modified.
38-155
CSD Elements
38.15.3 Revisions for Control Cable Schedule

Due to the complexity of the Control Cable Schedule and the required flexibility in control cable
assignments, the procedure for revisions to the Control Cable Schedule follows specific rules,
which are explained in this section.
Rules for Control Cable Schedule Revisions

The data contained in Control Cable Schedule classifies into two groups: the cable engineering
parameters and the wire assignment information. These two groups of data behave differently in
revisions.
Cable Engineering Data
The cable engineering data includes parameters in the following sections: Cable Header,
Connection, Length, and Z. In the current version of ETAP, these parameters are not supported
by revisions. This means that these parameters cannot be changed in a revision. In any revision,
they are always the same as the values in the Base revision.
Wire Assignment Data
Wire assignment data includes assignment table, number of free and total wires. The data
revision of wire assignment works on individual wire slot basis.
A revision for a wire slot is created when the status of the wire slot is changed. After the status
of a wire slot is changed in a revision, any change on the same wire slot in Base will not affect
the status of the wire slot in the revision.
A change in the status of a wire slot is made when the status is changed from Free to Reserved or
vise versa, when the status is changed from Assigned to Free by un-assigning a wire, or when the
status is change from Free to Assigned by assigning a wire to the wire slot.
Note: When an assigned wire slot is reassigned with a different wire, the revision for the slot is
also made, since the process requires you to un-assign the wire slot first.
When implementing a revision, the number of Total or Free wires can be changed, as long as the
Total wire number is not less than the last assigned or reserved wire number. However, after you
have made changes to these numbers in a revision, if you increase the Total wire number in Base
to a value larger than the Total wire number in the revision, the Total and Free wire number in
the revision will update accordingly. This is because as the Total wire number is changed in
Base, new wire slots are added to the system in both Base and revisions.
Rules for Wire Editor Revision Related to Control Cable Schedule

Parameters in the Impedance page of the Wire Editor are related to Control Cable Schedule.
Revisions of these parameters follow some specific rules as described below. Revisions for
parameters on other pages behave the same as other elements.
If a wire element is not assigned to a control cable and the impedance page data has been
changed in a revision, when you make assignment of this wire to a control cable in Base, the
same assignment will take effect in the revision. In the revision, this wire will assume control
cable impedance parameters.
38-156
CSD Elements
If a wire element is not assigned to a control cable and, in a revision, it has retrieved impedance
data from a Cable Library, when you make assignment of this wire to a control cable in Base, the
assignment will not take effect in the revision. In the revision, this wire will still use the
impedance parameters from the Cable Library, even though in the Control Cable Schedule it may
show that the wire is assigned to a wire slot.
If a wire has been unassigned from a control cable in a revision, when you assign this
wire to the same or a different wire slot in Base, the assignment will not take effect in the
revision. In the revision, this wire will use the impedance parameters displayed in the
Wire Editor, even though in the Control Cable Schedule it may show that the wire is
assigned to a wire slot.
If a wire has been assigned to a control cable in a revision, when you make assignment of
additional wire slots from the same control cable to the wire in Base, the additional
assignment will take effect in the revision, as long as these additional wire slots have no
revision data in the revision.
In some cases, an assignment made in Base may cause a conflict in a revision. For
example, in Base a wire element (wire-A) is assigned to a wire slot (slot-1) of a control
cable, but in a revision the same wire slot (slot-1) has already been assigned by another
wire element (wire-B). Even though wire-A may have no revision data in the revision,
the wire slot (slot-1) has revision data already and hence it does not follow the change in
the Base.
When such conflicts occurs, if wire-A is only assigned to s single slot (slot-1) in Base, a
message will be displayed in the revision. If wire-A has multiple wire slots assigned in
Base, ETAP will keep only non-conflict assignments for wire-A in the revision.
In some special cases, the Cable Schedule assignment list may not agree with what is
shown in the Wire Editor, as in the cases discussed in items 2 and 3. Under all
conditions, the impedance data displayed in the Wire Editor will be used in the CSD
calculation.
Revision Merge for Control Cable Schedule and Wire Impedance Data
When merge control cable schedule and wire impedance data from one revision to another,
conflicts in wire assignments may occur. If this occurs, the assignments with conflicts will drop
in the destination revision (the To Revision). However, under all conditions the impedance data
displayed in the Wire Editor will be used in the CSD calculations.
38-157
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
38.16 Wire Editor

38.16.1 Info Page
Info
ID
automatically assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist
of the default ID (Wire) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of buses increases.
The default ID (Wire) for the wires can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
from the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
38-158
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
From / To
These two fields display the buses or nodes connected at two terminals of the wire.
Condition
Service
Equipment
Tag #
characters.
Name
Description
Data Type
Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
38-159
CSD Elements
Wire Editor

Wire impedance parameters are specified in the Impedance page of the CSD Wire Editor. There
are three ways to enter wire impedance data. You can enter wire impedance parameter directly
to the fields in the editor, you can assign the CSD wire to a control cable to utilize the parameters
from the Control Cable Schedule, or you can retrieve parameters from the Cable Library.
Library Header
The top of the page displays library header information, which includes cable library source,
insulation type, voltage level, conductor type, and cable size, etc. If the wire impedance data
originates from the Cable Library, or from a Cable Schedule that retrieved data from the Cable
Library, the library information will display in the header section. Otherwise, the library header
section will be blank.
38-160
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
Size
If the wire parameters have been retrieved from the Cable Library, the wire size can be changed
by selecting a new size form the list. If the wire parameters are from the Cable Schedule, this
field is disabled, since the size of the cable can only be changed form the Cable Schedule.

Clicking on the Control Cable Schedule opens the CSD Control Cable Quick Pick dialog. You
can assign the CSD wire to different wires slots in a cable from the Control Cable Schedule from
this dialog. Once a wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this wire becomes
part of the cable and all impedance parameters of the wire will come from the Cable Editor in the
Control Cable Schedule.
Wire Name
This field displays the name of the CSD wire for which you opened the Quick Pick dialog. Any
wire assignment changes done from the dialog applies to this wire.
Cables
This list itemizes all control cables entered in the Control Cable Schedule. When a cable is
selected by clicking on its ID in the list, all the wire assignments for the cable displays in the
Wires list at right.
38-161
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
Wire Slot (Wire Number)

This column in the Wires list gives the order number of all wires contained in the selected cable
(CCable-B). The numbers are not necessarily in sequence. Each number represents a wire in the
cable. As given in the example above, CCable-B has ten wires in total, five assigned wires, two
reserved wires and three free wires.
Status
Each wire can be in one of the three different statuses: Assigned, Reserved, and Free. You can
use the CSD Control Cable Quick Pick dialog to change a Free status wire to Assigned, but the
Assigned and Reserved status cannot be changed. By changing the status of a wire from Free to
Assigned, you are assigning the wire from the control cable to the CSD wire. For example, wire
number 9 has been assigned to Wire2. This can be seen from the Name column of wire number
9 as well as the number displayed in the Selected Wires field. Note that multiple wires can be
assigned to the same CSD wire element.
Name
For the assigned wires, this field displays the name of the CSD wire element to which the wire
has been assigned.
CSD
For the assigned wires, this field displays the CSD name of the wire element to which the wire
has been assigned.
Selected Wires
This field displays all the wires that are to be assigned to the CSD wire element (Wire 2).
Select
Clicking this button will accept the assignment made from the CSD Control Cable Quick Pick
dialog and return to the CSD Wire Editor.
Note: Wires assigned to a CSD wire element must be from the same control cable. If the CSD
wire element has been assigned with wires from another control cable other than the currently
selected cable, clicking the Select button will remove the previous assignment and set the status
of the wires previously assigned to the CSD wire element to Free.
None
Clicking this button will remove all assignment to the CSD wire element, close the CSD Control
Cable Quick Pick dialog, and return to the CSD Wire Editor. The impedance data in the CSD
Wire Editor will remain unchanged.
Cancel
Clicking this button will close the CSD Control Cable Quick Pick dialog without making any
assignment changes.
38-162
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
Cable Library
Clicking on the Cable Library button will bring up the Cable Library Quick Pick, where you can
select cable impedance data for the CSD wire. The selected cable impedance data will be copied
to the wire Editor. The data includes parameters in the Impedance section, Unit section, and the
wire Base Temperature.
The data retrieved from a Cable Library may also be modified in the Wire Editor. If any data
retrieved from Cable Library is changed in the editor, the Library Header text will turn to a dark
blue color, indicating that the original library data has been modified. You may also select a new
size from the Cable Library from the Size list in the Cable Header section.
Link to Library
This checkbox becomes enables when the wire has complete cable header information. The wire
will have cable header information under one of the two conditions: one, the wire data have been
retrieved from a Cable Library; and two, the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable
Schedule and that cable has retrieved data from the Cable library.
When the Link to Library box is checked, the impedance data displayed in the wire Editor are
directly from the Cable Library as described in the cable header. These are the data used in CSD
calculations.
38-163
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
Control Cable
No. of Wires
This field shows the number of physical wires that form the wire element. When assigned to a
cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this is a display field only. Otherwise, it is an editable field
for you to enter number of wires for the wire element. In CSD calculations, ETAP will
automatically adjust wire total impedance accordingly.
Cable ID
When the wire element is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this field displays
the ID of the assigned cable. Otherwise, the field is hidden.
Wire No.
When the wire element is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this field displays
the wire slot number of the cable the wire element has been assigned to. Otherwise, the field is
hidden.
Length
Length
Enter the length of the wire at the unit in this field. If the wire is assigned to a cable in the
Control Cable Schedule, this field becomes a display only field.
Unit
Select a unit for wire length from the drop-down list. The available options include foot, mile,
meter and kilometer. If the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this field
becomes a display only field.
Tolerance
Enter the length tolerance in percent for the wire in this field. The CSD Study Case also provides
an option to apply length tolerance for the wire. When applied, the tolerance will be used as
positive value to increase the length of the wire. If the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control
Cable Schedule, this field becomes a display only field.
Impedance (per conductor)

R
Enter the wire resistance per conductor in Ohms at the unit specified in the Unit section in this
field. When the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library
box is checked, this field becomes display only.
L
Enter wire inductance per conductor in Henrys at the unit specified in the Unit section. When
the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is
checked, this field becomes display only.
38-164
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
Unit
Z per / Z
There are two ways to specify the unit for wire impedance. When the Z per option is selected, the
R and L of the wire are entered at the unit specified in the Unit Length and Unit for Unit Length
next to the selection. The actual per conductor impedance value for the wire will be calculated
considering the wire length. If the Z option is selected, the impedance value specified in the
Impedance section will be the total wire impedance per conductor.
When the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is
checked, this field is grayed out and is non-editable.
Unit Length
When the Z per option is selected, this field becomes enabled. Enter the unit length at the unit in
the next field. When the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to
Library box is checked, this field is grayed out and is non-editable.
Unit for Unit Length
When the Z per option is selected, this field becomes enabled. Select a unit for unit length. The
available options include foot, mile, meter and kilometer. When the wire is assigned to a cable
in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is checked, this field is grayed out and
is non-editable.
Wire Temperature
Base
Enter the base temperature in Celsius for the wire resistance in this field. When the wire is
assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is checked, this
field becomes display only, showing the based temperature from the cable or the library.
Min.
Enter the minimum temperature in Celsius for the wire resistance in this field.
Max.
Enter the maximum temperature in Celsius for the wire resistance in this field. This temperature
may be used to adjust wire resistance depending on the option selected in the CSD Study Case.
Revision Data for Wire Impedance

When the wire is not assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, the revision data for the
impedance page behaves the same as the data in any other page and the same as other elements
in ETAP. However, if the wire is assigned or has been assigned to a cable in the Control Cable
Schedule, specific rules apply. For details, see section Revisions for Control Cable Schedule in
Control Cable Schedule (42.15.3).
38-165
CSD Elements
Wire Editor
User-Defined Info
38-166
CSD Elements
Wire Editor

characters.
UD Field A5
characters.
UD Field A6
characters.
UD Field A7
characters.
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for
this element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchasing Date
38-167
CSD Elements
Wire Editor

You can use this page to enter any additional data or comments regarding conditions,
maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a
default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste.
38-168
CSD Elements
Impedance Editor
38.17 Impedance Editor

38.17.1 Info Page
Info
ID
automatically assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist
of the default ID (dcZ) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of buses increases.
The default ID (dcZ) for the DC Impedance can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
bar or from the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From / To
This two fields display the buses or nodes connected at two terminals of the impedance.
38-169
CSD Elements
Impedance Editor
In Service / Out of Service

The operating condition of impedance can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of Out of Service impedance can be edited similar to an In Service
bus; however, Out of Service impedance will not be included in any system studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, Out of Service impedance automatically becomes grayed out in
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Enter the equipment description in this field, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Data Type
estimate, typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be
changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are ten data types and you can change their
name from the Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this battery from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. You can select from ten different priorities on the
list and you can change their name from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Impedance
R
Enter impedance resistance in Ohms.
L
Enter wire inductance in Henrys.
38-170
CSD Elements
Impedance Editor
User Defined Info

38-171
CSD Elements
Impedance Editor

characters.
UD Field 5
characters.
UD Field 6
characters.
UD Field 7
characters.
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
using up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
characters.
Purchase Date
38-172
CSD Elements
Impedance Editor

Enter any additional data or comments regarding conditions, maintenance, tests, or studies,
information
38-173
Chapter 39
Control System Diagram (CSD)
ETAP now provides the ability to create a Control Systems Diagram (CSD) as a separate presentation.
The icon for this feature, shown below, is accessed on the System (left) toolbar.
The CSD presentation feature allows you to construct a control systems diagram and simulate
complicated sequences of control operations, such as motor starting control and power circuit breaker
operations. In a CSD, any number of devices, wires, and other components can be placed and connected
in the same manner as a real control system inserted between the positive and negative buses. This highly
flexible tool allows the user to establish control logic between the controlling devices (control relays and
solenoids) and the controlled switches (contacts). This technique is the key to simulating a sequence-ofoperations in a control system. Using the ETAP Control System Diagram, the user can model and
simulate control systems just as ETAP can model DC and AC systems. This is a powerful tool for design
and verification of control system diagrams.
This chapter is organized into seven sections:
1. The Control System Diagram Presentation section describes the creation of a CSD. There are several
ways you can create new CSD presentations and this section covers each method.
2. The Edit Mode section describes the functions and display options in the Edit Mode.
3. The Voltage Drop Mode section covers items related to CSD calculations, including the Study
toolbar, CSD Study Case Editor, display options, and CSD Calculation Methods.
4. The Required Data section lists the parameters necessary to perform CSD calculations.
5. The Output Reports section describes the reporting schemes available to the user after performing
CSD calculations, which include Crystal Reports, the Event Viewer, and the Alert Viewer.
39-1
Control System Diagram Presentation
39.1 Control System Diagram Presentation

A Control System Diagram (CSD) Presentation is an interactive diagram view generated by ETAP. All
the different CSD devices can be inserted and connected in this presentation to form complex logical
diagrams. The motor starter control circuit shown below is a typical example of such a diagram.
Using ETAP you can create as many CSD presentations as needed. However, it should be noted that,
unlike elements in One-Line-Diagram presentations, the elements contained in any two CSD
presentations are completely different physical elements. That is, ETAP does not permit the same
element to appear in more than one CSD presentation. Each CSD presentation models a separate control
circuit diagram.
The following sections describe the three methods available to create a CSD presentation.
From the ETAP System toolbar

From the New Presentation button
From the ETAP Project view
39-2
39.1.1 Creating a CSD Presentation from the System Toolbar

If the ETAP project does not have any CSD presentations, clicking on the Control System Diagram
button will bring up the Create Presentation dialog box shown below. This dialog box provides a
suggested ID for a new CSD presentation. The default name is (CSD) with a number suffix. This ID can
be modified to meet your specific needs.
39.1.2 Creating a CSD Presentation from the CSD Presentation

Toolbar
If there is at least one CSD presentation in the project, the CSD Presentation toolbar will display its name
as shown below. This toolbar also contains a New Presentation button. Clicking on the New Presentation
button will bring up the Create Presentation dialog box, which permits the user to create more CSD
presentations if needed.
Note: The Create Presentation dialog has a Copy option. When the Copy option is selected, the user can
specify the From and To CSD presentation files. The Copy function means the new CSD (CSD6) will
have the same types of elements and connections as the source CSD1 (except for the sources).
Note: A CSD source can only appear in one CSD presentation. Sources in a CSD presentation must be
brought in by separate actions (see Section 42.2.1, Element Connections in CSD Presentations, CSD
Source).
39-3
39.1.3 Creating a CSD Presentation from the ETAP Project View

The third way to create a CSD presentation is from the ETAP Project View. In this view, you will find a
folder named Control Systems. Right mouse clicking on this folder will bring up the Create New
option. When this option is selected, it brings up the Create Presentation dialog box.
39-4
Edit Mode
39.2 Edit Mode

The CSD presentation can be placed under two modes. Edit Mode and Voltage Drop Mode. In the Edit
Mode, a control system can be constructed and modified. This includes adding and deleting elements,
making connections, and changing element parameters. A variety of elements are provided by ETAP for
inclusion in the control system diagram, as listed below:
CSD Bus
CSD Node
CSD Control Relay
CSD Solenoid
CSD Light
CSD General Load
CSD Contact
CSD Double Contact (Form C Contact)
CSD Macro Controlled Contact
CSD Push-Button
CSD Fuse
CSD Breaker
CSD Switch
CSD Wire
CSD Impedance
Adding, deleting (cutting), and copying elements in a CSD presentation is done in an identical manner as
in the regular One-Line Diagram (OLD) presentations. The right-mouse-click menu also provides the
same options as the OLD presentation tools.
The control logic between the controlling devices (control relays and solenoids) and the controlled
switches (contacts) can be set up by assigning contacts to a controlling device (a control relay or a
solenoid). Once assigned, the status of a contact will be determined by the state of the controlling device
(i.e., energized or not energized).
39.2.1 Element Connections in CSD Presentations

Bus and Node
Each CSD bus element consists of two separate parallel lines when drawn on the CSD. These two CSD
buses share the same Bus Editor and move as if locked together when extended in a horizontal
direction. However, a selected bus can be moved independently of the other, up or down, when it is
shifted in a vertical direction, as shown below.
A bus can be connected to a CSD source directly, or through a protective device, or a branch, which
might be a wire or impedance. Two buses of the same polarity can be connected through protective
devices or a branch. A device, such as a control relay, a solenoid, a light, or a general load, can be
connected directly between two buses of different polarity, but a branch or a protective device cannot be
connected directly between a positive and a negative bus.
39-5
Initial insertion
Horizontal Extension
Edit Mode
Vertical Shift of One Bus
A node in a CSD is a connection point for two or more devices and branches. When a device or branch is
connected to another device or branch, a node will be automatically inserted.
CSD Source
CSD elements are energized when they are connected to a CSD source. In the current version of ETAP,
the only source element is a composite CSD that serves as a voltage source. In a DC system, it is a load
element aggregating all the elements in the CSD that are powered by it. Therefore, in ETAP a CSD
source is not a real element in an actual system, but rather an abstract element that serves as a bridge
between a DC bus and a CSD.
A CSD source cannot be added to a CSD, it can only be placed on the CSD by dragging it from a one-line
diagram. Furthermore, this composite CSD can appear as a source element in only one CSD. To drag a
composite CSD element into a CSD, it is necessary to make both the OLD presentation and the CSD
presentation appear side by side. Select the composite CSD element in the OLD presentation and then
drag the composite CSD element into the CSD presentation by the left mouse button while pressing and
holding down the Shift button.
In an OLD presentation, the status (energized or not) of a composite CSD element is dependent on the In
Service field of the element, as well as the status configuration attached to the OLD presentation.
However, since status configurations are not supported in a CSD, if there are multiple OLD presentations
attached to different configurations these could result in different status states for the composite CSD
element. To resolve this possible conflict, ETAP is designed so that the status (energized or not) of a CSD
source in a CSD presentation is solely dependent on the selection of the In Service field, no matter if the
corresponding composite CSD element is energized or not according to the status configuration in an
OLD presentation.
Continuity Check in a CSD Presentation

When the Check Circuit Continuity button is selected, a continuity check is always running to show
elements according to the specified color scheme, normally black for energized elements and grey for deenergized elements. In a CSD, the continuity check also enforces the rule that all contacts on the diagram
assigned to a CSD device are always shown in their normal position. The normal position of an assigned
contact is defined as the position of the contact when the controlling device is in a de-energized state.
Unassigned contacts, protective devices, and pushbuttons may be placed in any desired condition by
selecting the appropriate entry on the right-click menu.
For an element to be energized in a CSD presentation, it must be connected as part of a path between an
energized positive bus and an energized negative bus.
39-6
Edit Mode
39.2.2 Display Options in Edit Mode

Device Page
The device page presents the display options for various CSD elements. The checkboxes for the element,
and its related information, must be checked for this information to be shown on the CSD diagram.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the CSD elements listed on the control
system diagram.
39-7
Edit Mode
V
Selecting the V checkboxes displays the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements on the CSD.
For wires, the V checkbox is replaced by the S button. Click on this button to display the size of wires on
CSD.
Continuous Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the Burden VA rating of the selected CSD devices on
the CSD.
For wires, click on the checkbox to display the conductor type on the CSD Diagram.
A
To display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the CSD, check the boxes under the A heading.
Device Type
Control Relay
Solenoid
Light
General Load
Contact
CB
Fuse
Switch
Rating
Burden Amp
Burden Amp
Burden Amp
Burden Amp
Current Rating for Inductive Load (Amp,I)
Continuous Amp
Continuous Amp
Continuous Amp
For cables, click the checkbox to display the wire length on the one-line diagram.
Z
Selecting the checkboxes under this heading displays the burden impedance values for control relays,
solenoids, lights, and general loads, and the impedance values of the wires and impedance branches on
the CSD.
Under the Z category the CB, fuse, and pushbutton switch checkboxes are replaced by the
button.
Check this button to display the NO (Normally Open) annotation for contacts, CBs, and switches in the
CSD diagram, providing their normal status is open.
Inrush A
Click on this checkbox to display the inrush amp rating for control relays, solenoids, lights, and general
loads on the CSD diagram, if there is an inrush rating entered in the editor.
Note: On the Rating page of the Device Editor, there is an Inrush Rating checkbox to enable/disable the
Inrush Rating section.
Use Default Options

This checkbox applies ETAPs default display options, making it unnecessary for you to configure the
checkboxes described above.
39-8
Edit Mode
Colors Page
This page includes options for selecting color themes.
Color Theme
Theme
Clicking on the Theme button brings up the Theme Editor, where existing color themes or a new color
theme can be defined.
39-9
Edit Mode
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously
selected.
Theme
globally throughout all CSD diagrams. When the option is selected, the name assigned to the applied
User-Defined
Select this option to specify a color for CSD element annotations. When this option is chosen, the DC
element annotation color selection list will appear.

When the User-Defined annotation color option is selected, the field is enabled and allows the user to
define a color for DC element annotations in the CSD.
39-10
Voltage Drop Mode (Study Mode)
39.3 Voltage Drop Mode (Study Mode)

While in Study Mode, the Auto-Run button on the Study Mode (right) toolbar allows the user to turn CSD
auto-run mode on and off. When Auto-Run Mode is on, the CSD behaves as a simulator that imitates
control operations triggered by events such as a pushbutton action. When in the study mode, the
simulator controls the position of pushbuttons and all contacts that are assigned to CSD devices. On the
other hand, the position of unassigned contacts, protective devices, and pushbuttons may be changed
using the right-click menu.
When Study Mode is initially entered, Auto-Run Mode is on as the default condition and the CSD starts
the simulator. This resets all assigned contacts to their normal state, engages the state machines, and
determines the initial steady state of the control system. The CSD then stays in the initial steady state and
waits for a triggering event to start a new simulation sequence.
A simulation sequence is initiated by a triggering event, such as a status change from a pushbutton, a
protective device, or an unassigned contact. The triggering event can cause other CSD elements to react in
a time sequence, actions such as energizing (or de-energizing) elements and executing control logics set
between different devices and contacts. The generated sequence encompasses all actions produced by
status changes of CSD elements and terminates when the simulator can no longer generate additional
actions. The CSD diagram reaches a new steady state at this point and the simulator becomes inactive
again, waiting for the next triggering event to initiate the next sequence.
For each simulation sequence generated from the two steady states of a control system diagram, ETAP
reports all simulation steps and voltage drop calculation results in a CSD report. It also generates an alert
report for device pickup voltage and dropout voltage. The Event View also reports the detailed steps of
the control process of the system as it evolves to its new state.
39.3.1 Study Toolbar

The CSD Study toolbar will appear on the right side of the screen when you are in CSD Voltage Drop
Mode.
Auto-Run Mode
Run Simulation with Vd
Display Options
Alert View
Report Manager
Event Viewer
39-11
Auto-Run Mode
The Auto-Run Mode button is a two-state button, which switches between down and up states as it is
clicked. The Auto-Run Mode is on when the button is at the down state. As the CSD is switched from
Edit Mode to Study mode, Auto-Run Mode is the default mode. While the Auto-Run Mode is on, ETAP
will determine an initial steady state according to the Study Case settings and the initial state of various
elements.
When Auto-Run Mode is on, the CSD behaves as if it were a control system simulator and remains at a
steady state condition. Any single change of state on protective devices, such as a switch or circuit
breaker being closed or opened, will trigger the CSD to evolve from the current steady state to the next
condition according to the control logics setup between controlling devices and contacts. If the CSD
contains macro-controlled contacts or devices that are modeled by duty cycles, as the CSD evolves from
one steady state to the next, these devices will also perform as specified in their duty cycles. If any
parameters are changed that have an effect on calculations results, such as control relay rating data or
Study Case parameters, the current steady state is invalidated and the Auto-Run Mode will be
automatically turned off.
While the Auto-Run Mode is off, CSD will not perform simulations. This means you can change any
element parameter or the Study Case settings. However, should the state of protective devices be
changed, a continuity check will be conducted, providing the Check Circuit Continuity is on.
Run Simulation with Vd

This button is enabled when the Load flow Calculation Method is checked in the selected Study Case.
Clicking on this button will reinitialize the initial state of the CSD and start a simulated sequence-ofoperations. Load flow calculations will be conducted and device pickup and dropout voltage limits will be
checked at each step. In this condition, the sequence-of-operations of the CSD evolves according to the
duty cycle of the devices that have been selected for modeling by the duty cycle model in the Study Case
or the Device Editor.
This button is enabled when the Sequence-of-Operation Method is selected in the active Study Case.
Clicking this button will reinitialize the initial state of the CSD and start simulating a sequence-ofoperations. However, in this mode, ETAP will only simulate the logic sequence of the control system
without conducting load flow calculations or checking device voltage limits. This is the primary
difference between this option and the Run Simulation with Vd option. In this mode, the sequence-ofoperations of the CSD also evolves according to the duty cycle of devices that have been selected to be
modeled by the duty cycle model in the Study Case or Device Editor.
Because load flow calculation is not conducted when the Sequence-of-Operation option is selected, the
simulation results are reported only in Event Viewer and a Crystal Report will not be generated.
Display Options
Click this button to customize the information and results annotations displayed in the CSD view.

Clicking this button will halt the current calculation.
39-12
Alert View
This button will bring up a list of all alert information when it is clicked.
Report Manager
Click on this button to open the CSD Voltage Drop Report Manager. Use this tool to define the Crystal
Reports format for your Output Reports. A detailed explanation of the CSD Voltage Drop Report
Manager is provided in section 42.5, Output Reports.
CSD Event Viewer

When clicked, the CSD Events Viewer button brings up a page that lists all steps of the sequence-ofoperations. A sample CSD Events page is presented below. The events can be sorted by step number,
time, device type, etc. There is also a filter that only shows the most essential events in the window. The
filter can be activated by clicking on the Verbose checkbox.
39-13
39.3.2 Study Case Editor

The CSD Study Case Editor allows the user to view and modify the parameter settings required to
perform a specific simulation of a sequence-of-operations. The calculation results are dependent on these
settings and will change if they are modified. When a new Study Case is created, ETAP generates default
parameters. However, it is important that the user check these default Study Case values and modify them
where necessary so that all calculation requirements can be met.
The CSD Study Case Editor presents four pages: Info, Model, Adjustment, and Alert. The Information
page is where you specify the Simulation Method and other parameters related to general Calculation
Method. The Model page allows the device model type and device voltage limit for the pickup voltage
and dropout voltage to be defined. The Adjustment page allows you to modify the elements in a CSD.
This could be the resistance consideration for switching devices, resistance adjustment for operating
temperature for wires, tolerance for device burden rating and wire length, etc. The Alert page permits the
user to configure the alerts for device pickup and dropout voltages as well as current ratings for devices
and wires to specific requirements.
39.3.3 Info Page
39-14
Study Case ID
ID, which consists of the letters CSD plus an integer, the number 1, which increments up as the number
of Study Cases increases.
Simulation Method
Two Simulation Methods are provided: Sequence-of-Operation and Load Flow Calculation.
When the Sequence-of-Operation Method is selected, ETAP will simulate a logical sequence based only
on the logical setup in devices and duty cycle. A voltage drop calculation is not carried out to check if the
voltage across a device is sufficient to perform the required control task. Because of this, the pickup and
dropout voltage requirements are ignored. When this option is selected, the sections for Constant Power
Load Model, CSD Source Voltage, and Solution Parameters will be hidden.

When the Load Flow Method is selected, ETAP will simulate sequence-of-operations based on the logical
setup of devices and their duty cycle as well as performing voltage drop calculations for each step.
Pickup and dropout voltage requirements are checked and the operation sequence is altered depending on
the calculated voltages. For example, if the voltage across a just energized control relay is less than its
pickup voltage, it will not cause its controlled contact to change from normal state to off-normal state.
When this method is selected, an alert list will also be generated.
Duty Cycle
The duty cycle is selected from the duty cycle list. There are five duty cycles in the list. The names of
the duty cycles are defined from the Project menu, Settings, Duty Cycle Categories option. When a duty
cycle is selected it is applied to any device in the CSD that is to be modeled by duty cycle. This is also
the duty cycle that is selected to be updated to a composite CSD element (Elementary Diagram) in a DC
system, if the Update Composite CSD option is checked.
Update Composite CSD

Check this box to update the composite CSD element (Elementary Diagram) duty cycle based on the
simulation of sequence-of-operation.
Note: This option is available only when the Load Flow Calculation Method is selected.
Initial Time Shift

This field is enabled only when the Update Composite CSD option is checked. The initial time shift is
the time offset added to the duty cycle when the composite CSD duty cycle is updated.
Constant Power Load Model

A device in a CSD can be represented as a constant power device, a constant impedance device, or a
constant current device. An example of a constant power device is a spring charging motor. It behaves as
a constant power device when the voltage across it remains close to its rated voltage. However, as the bus
voltage deviates considerably from its rated voltage, its behavior becomes similar to a static load. This
group allows you to set the voltage range within which you want such a device to be modeled as a
constant power device.
39-15
Constant Power if V is within Range

Click on this checkbox to set the Vmin and Vmax limits. When the device terminal voltage is within this
range, it is represented as a constant power device. However, once the voltage is outside this range, it is
automatically converted to a constant impedance device.
If this box is not checked, all of the constant power device will be modeled as such regardless of their
terminal voltage.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage as a percentage, below which the constant power device will be modeled as a
constant impedance device.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage as a percentage, above which the constant power device will be modeled as a
constant impedance device.
Solution Parameters (Newton-Raphson)

The ETAP CSD voltage drop computation uses the Newton-Raphson Method.
Max. Iteration
of iterations is reached, a pop-up message will alert you.
Precision
Enter a value to specify the precision of the final solution that will be used to check for convergence. A
load flow solution is attained if, when measured between two iterations, the maximum bus or node
voltage difference per unit is less than the specified precision value.
CSD Source Voltage

ETAP provides the user with four different choices for voltage values of CSD sources.
Note: A CSD source represents an Elementary Diagram element in the DC system. This Elementary
Diagram element is also called a Composite CSD element. During simulation, CSD sources are modeled
as constant voltage sources.
Nominal Voltage of Composite CSD Terminal Bus Multiplied by Initial V%

When this option is selected, the CSD source voltage will remain a constant value during the entire
sequence-of-operation simulation. This voltage value is equal to the nominal voltage of the terminal bus
of the composite CSD multiplied by the bus initial voltage.
Nominal Voltage of Composite CSD Terminal Bus Multiplied by V%

When this option is selected, the CSD source voltage will remain at a constant value for the entire
sequence-of-operation simulation. This voltage value is equal to the nominal voltage of the terminal bus
of the composite CSD multiplied by a specified V%. When this option is selected, an edit box on the
right of the button is enabled so that the user can enter a value for V%.
Rated Voltage of Composite CSD Multiplied by V%

When this option is selected, the CSD source voltage remains at a constant value for the entire sequenceof-operation simulation. This voltage value is equal to the rated voltage of the composite CSD multiplied
39-16
by a specified V%. When this option is selected, an edit box to the right of the button will be enabled for
the user to enter a value for V%.
Voltage Profile of Composite CSD Terminal Bus Offset by Toffset

When this option is selected, the CSD source voltage will be the terminal bus voltage of the composite
CSD element obtained from a Battery Discharge calculation. The starting point of the bus voltage can be
offset by a user specified value. When this option is selected, Toffset can be entered in the edit box to the
right of the button.
This option allows the user to apply the battery discharge results in CSD simulation to simulate the worst
condition in a CSD. The Toffset value can be set to any time for simulation. To simulate the worst case,
set it to the time when the bus has the lowest voltage.
In order to use this option, first run a Battery Sizing or Battery Discharge calculation. The bus voltage
will be saved internally for CSD calculation. Open the bus plot from the DC system to check the bus
voltage values.
The voltage plot at the bus might look something like the one shown below:
Case2
Case1
The CSD Terminal bus voltage points are taken from the bus voltage profile. Please note that the CSD
Terminal Bus voltage profile points are usually collected at 1 minute intervals. The table below shows the
voltage profile points in tabulated format:
39-17
CSD Terminal Bus Voltage Profile points

CSD Terminal Bus
Time (min)
Description
Voltage (V dc)
T = 20 104.435
Instant before CSD is energized
T = 20 +
101.54
Instant right after CSD is energized
T = 21 101.27
Terminal bus voltage at the end of the 20 minute
T = 21 +
104.177
voltage at the beginning of the 21 minute
T = 23 103.75
voltage at the end of the 22 minute
T = 23 +
103.75
T = 24 103.52
voltage at the end of the 23 minute
T = 24 +
103.52
The following rules apply for transferring the values from the bus voltage profile to the CSD terminal
source:
Case 1: CSD operation occurs exactly at a bus voltage plot step where there is a voltage change.
At transition points like, T = 20+ and 20-, the program will always select the T+ point. For this case, the
value passed to CSD will be 101.54 V dc.
Case 2: CSD operation does not occur at a bus voltage plot step and there is no voltage change.
Always Use the lower value between Vt-1 and Vt+1. This means that if the CSD action takes place in
between T = 23+ (103.75 V dc) and T = 24- (103.52 V dc), that the T = 24- value would be passed to
CSD since it is the lower of the two values. (103.52 V dc at T = 24- would be used in this case).
Please note that previous versions of ETAP (i.e. ETAP 7.0.0 or before), for Case1, ETAP would use the
T- value (104.435 V dc) and for Case2, ETAP would use the T = 23+ value (103.75 Vdc).
Study Remarks
Up to 74 alphanumeric characters can be entered in the remarks box at the bottom of the page.
Information entered here will be printed on the second line of every Output Report page header. These
remarks can be used to provide specific information regarding each Study Case. The first line of the
header information is global for all study cases and is entered in the Project Information Editor.
39-18
39.3.4 Model Page

ETAP provides two alternative methods to represent a device in a simulation: the burden and inrush
rating, which can be entered from the Rating page of Device Editor, and a duty cycle model that is
entered from the Duty Cycle page of Device Editor. Selecting the Model page of the Study Case, specify
the device model type that is to be used in the device simulation. Using this page, you can also designate
the pickup and dropout voltage for devices. These voltage values are very important in CSD sequence-ofoperation, since they can change the control sequence in a simulation, in addition to serving as the voltage
base for alert checking.
Device Model
There are two methods in ETAP to model a device: the Burden and Inrush Rating model and the Duty
Cycle model. These two models are specified from the Rating and Duty Cycle pages of a Device Editor
respectively. It should be noted that, in the current version of ETAP, the control logic between a device
(control relay or solenoid) and its controlled contacts is supported only when the Burden and Inrush
Rating model is used. If you decide to use the Duty Cycle model, the control logic and timing can be
easily built into the duty cycles of devices and Macro Controlled Contacts. The Macro Controlled
Contact is a time controlled switch whose status (open or close) can be designated by a duty cycle.
39-19

When this Global option is selected, all the devices will be modeled by the burden and inrush rating
model entered from the Rating page of the Device Editor. The Calculation Model option that has been
selected in the Device Editor will be ignored.
Duty Cycle
When this Global option is selected, the model entered from the Duty Cycle page of the Device Editor
will represent the device. The Calculation Model option selected in the Device Editor will be ignored.
Note: When a new device is created, its duty cycle has a zero current value that is interpreted by ETAP as
indicating that the device is out of service.
Individual Editor
When this option is selected, a device is modeled in the simulation according to the Calculation Model
option selected in the Device Editor.
Pickup Voltage
The pickup voltage of a device is the limit of the minimum voltage value across the device that allows it
to successfully change the state of controlled contacts from normal state to off-normal state. Once a
device become energized, if the voltage across the device remains equal to or higher than the pickup
voltage for a time duration equal to or longer than the operating time of a controlled contact, the contact
will switch to its off-normal state. This voltage limit is used for simulating the sequence-of-operation of a
control system, as well as for alert checking. This section allows you to specify pickup voltage for control
relay, solenoid, and general load. For a general load, the pickup voltage is only used for alert checking.
Individual Vpickup
on the Rating page of the Device Editor.
Global V if Individual Vpickup = 0

on the Rating page of the Device Editor, providing this value is greater than zero. For devices where this
value is zero, the global value for the pickup voltage will be used. This option is useful in situations
where pickup voltage values have not been supplied by the manufacturer.
Global Vpickup
When this option is selected, the global value for pickup voltage will be used for all control relays and
solenoids. The global Vpickup can be entered in the edit box next to the selection and is defined as a
percentage of device rated voltage.
Dropout Voltage
The dropout voltage of a device is the limit of voltage across the device. While a device is energized, if
the voltage across a device falls below this voltage limit, the device will not be able to keep its controlled
contacts at off-normal state. Under this condition, a controlled contact will return to its normal state if the
voltage across the device remains below Vdropout for a time duration equal to, or longer than the release
time of the contact. This voltage limit is used in simulations of the sequence operation of a control
system as well as for alert checking. In this section you can specify the dropout voltage for a control
relay, solenoid, and general load. For a general load, the dropout voltage is used only for alert checking.
39-20
Individual Vdropout
on the Rating page of Device Editor.
Global V if Individual Vdropout = 0

on the Rating page of Device Editor, if this value is greater than zero. When devices have a value of zero
assigned in the editor, the global value for dropout voltage will be used. This option is useful in situations
where pickup voltage values have not been supplied by the manufacturer.
Global Vdropout
When this option is selected, the global value for dropout voltage will be used for all control relays and
solenoids. The global Vdropout value can be entered in the edit box next to the selection and is defined in

In the Adjustment page, options are selected that setup equipment parameters. These options include
resistance temperature correction for wires and cables, length tolerance adjustment for wires and cables,
resistance tolerance for control relays and solenoids, and resistance for contacts, circuit breakers, fuses,
switches, and push buttons located in a Control System Diagram.
39-21
Resistance
This selection group allows the user to specify the resistance of contacts, push buttons and other
switching devices in the calculation for a Control System Diagram. Since the resistance value of these
devices is typically very small, ETAP provides an option to the user to either include or exclude this
information.
Contact
Use this checkbox to include contact resistance in the CSD calculation. Then specify the resistance to be
used. There are two choices available: using the individual contact resistance entered on the Contact page
of the Control Relay or Solenoid Editor (so that each contact uses its own unique resistance), or click the
global button and specify the resistance value to be applied to all contacts.
CB, Switch, Push Button

Check this box to include resistance values for circuit breakers, switches, and push buttons in the
calculation for a Control System Diagram. With this box checked, a global resistance value can be entered
for all these devices.
Fuse
Check this box to include resistance values for fuses in the calculation for a Control System Diagram.
With this box checked, a global resistance value can be entered for all these devices.

Wire and cable resistance varies according to operating temperature, typically increasing as the
temperature is elevated. This selection group allows the user to specify a temperature that will be used for
resistance correction.
Wire / Cable
Check this box to apply a temperature correction for wire and cable resistance. Once this box is checked,
the user can specify the temperature to be used for the correction. There are two choices available: use the
individual maximum temperature entered in the Wire or Cable Editor (each wire or cable will use its own
operating temperature for correction) or specify a global temperature that will be applied to all wires and
cables.
Tolerance
Wire / Cable Length
When the actual length of a wire or a cable is not known, the tolerance selection group can be used to
account for this uncertainty in the calculation. In its CSD calculations, ETAP considers wire and cable
tolerance as a positive value, so a non-zero length tolerance will increase the length and therefore the
resistance of a wire or cable.
Checking the box applies length tolerance on wires and cables. Once this box is checked, specify the
tolerance to be used. There are two choices available: use the individual tolerance entered in the Wire or
Cable Editor (each wire or cable will then use its own length tolerance for correction) or specify a global
length tolerance that will be applied to all wires and cables.
Control Relay / Solenoid Burden

This option permits the adjustment of the burden of a control relay or solenoid located in a Control
System Diagram. This tolerance is applied only to devices that are modeled by burden and inrush rating
39-22
and only when burden rating is used. When this tolerance is considered the devices will consume more
power under the rated voltage.
The application of this burden tolerance differs for devices modeled as constant Z, constant VA or
constant I. For devices modeled as constant Z, the tolerance is taken as a negative value on device
impedance to reduce its value. For example, a 10% tolerance will reduce the device impedance by 10%.
For devices modeled as constant VA or I, this tolerance is considered to be a positive value to increase
VA or I. For example, 10 % tolerance will increase the device power consumption by 10%.
Check the box to apply a burden tolerance on control relays and solenoids. Once this box is checked, you
can specify the tolerance to be used. There are two choices available: use the individual tolerance entered
on the Rating page of Control Relay Editor or Solenoid Editor, or specify a global burden tolerance that
will be applied to all control relays and solenoids.
39.3.6 Alert Page

CSD simulation generates two groups of alerts. The first group includes pickup and dropout voltages for
control relays and solenoid. The second group provides current alerts for control relays, solenoids,
contacts, switch devices, and wires.
39-23
Marginal
Two checkboxes in this page allow for device marginal alerts, one for device voltage alerts and another
for device current alerts. Check these boxes if you want ETAP to generate marginal alerts.
Note: If the Marginal box is not checked, the corresponding percentage fields for marginal limit will not
be editable.
Pickup Voltage
For this selection group, specify the pickup voltage alert limits for the control relay, solenoid, and general
load. The pickup voltage alert check is applied to devices that are to be energized to execute a given task,
such as changing the state of a controlled contact. Since pickup voltage alerts are under-voltage alerts, the
limit for a marginal alert must be higher than for critical alerts.
Control Relay
Check the box to enable alert checking on pickup voltage for control relays. Once it is checked, the
percentage value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked.
The limits are percentages based on the control relay pickup voltage previously specified for Vpickup
option on the Model page. For example, if the global Vpicup was specified at 80% and you entered 110%
for the Marginal Limit for Control Relay pickup voltage, the voltage limit for a marginal alert is 88% of
the rated voltage of control relays. When a control relay becomes energized and the voltage across it is
less than 88% of its rated voltage, a marginal alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the control
relay.
Solenoid
Check this box to enable alert checking on the pickup voltage for solenoids. Once checked, the critical
These limits are percentages based on the solenoids pickup voltage specified for Vpickup option on the
Adjustment page. For example, if the global specification for Vpicup was 80% and a percentage of 100%
for the Critical Limit for solenoid pickup voltage was set, the voltage limit for a critical alert will be 80%
of the rated voltage of the solenoids. When a solenoid becomes energized and the voltage across it is less
than 80% of its rated voltage, a critical alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the solenoid. In such
and instance, the solenoid will not be able to execute the task it is supposed to accomplish.
General Load
This checkbox enables alert checking on pickup voltage for general loads. Once checked, the critical
based on the general load pickup voltage previously specified for Vpickup option on the Adjustment
page.
39-24
Dropout Voltage
In this selection group you can specify the dropout voltage alert limits for the control relay, solenoid, and
general load. The dropout voltage alert check is applied to a device that is energized. If the voltage across
the device is below the dropout voltage limit, the device will not be able to continue its normal function,
such as keeping a controlled contact in a certain state. Since dropout voltage alerts are under-voltage
alerts, the limit for the marginal alert should be higher than that for critical alerts.
Dropout Voltage Limit for Control Relay

Check this box to enable alert checking on the dropout voltage for control relays. Once checked, the
percentage value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box must also be checked.
These limits are percentages based on the control relay dropout voltage previously specified for the V
dropout option on the Adjustment page. For example, if a global percentage for Vpicup of 30% and a
percentage of 100% was specified for the Critical Limit for Control Relay dropout voltage, the voltage
limit for a critical alert is 30% of the rated voltage of control relays. When a control relay is energized and
the voltage across it is less than 30% of its rated voltage, a critical alert on dropout voltage will be
generated for that control relay. In this instance, the control relay will not be able to execute the task it is
supposed to accomplish.
Dropout Voltage Limit for Solenoid

Check this box to enable alert checking on the dropout voltage for solenoids. Once checked, the critical
The limits are percentages based on the solenoids dropout voltage specified previously for the V dropout
option on the Adjustment page. For example, if it was specified to use a global V dropout of 30% and
110% was entered for the Marginal Limit of the solenoid dropout voltage, the voltage limit for a marginal
alert is 33% of the rated voltage of solenoids. When a solenoid is energized and the voltage across it is
less than 33% of its rated voltage, a marginal alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the solenoid.
General Load
Check this box to enable alert checking for dropout voltage on general loads. Once checked, the critical
based on the general loads pickup voltage specified previously for the Vdropout option on the Adjustment
page.
Loading
In this selection group, specify the critical and marginal alert limits for device overload alerts.
Control Relay
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for control relay overload alerts. The limits are a percentage
based on the rated burden current entered on the Rating page of the Control Relay Editor.
Solenoid
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for solenoid overload alerts. The limits are a percentage based
on the rated burden current entered on the Rating page of the Solenoid Editor.
39-25
Contact
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for contact overload alerts. The limits are a percentage based on
the rated inductive current entered on the Contact page of the Control Relay Editor or Solenoid Editor.
Switching Device
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for switching devices, such as circuit breakers, fuses, and
switches. The limits are a percentage based on the rated inductive current entered on the Contact page of
the Control Relay Editor or Solenoid Editor.
Wire / Cable
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for wires and cables. The limits are a percentage based on the
rated continuous current of the wire or cable.
Auto Display
This is a two-state button that can be clicked on or off. When Auto Display is activated the Alert View
will display automatically after a simulated sequence-of-operation is completed.
39.3.7 Display Options

The CSD Display Options for voltage drop calculation consist of a Results page, a Device page, and a
Colors page. The colors and displayed annotations selected for the CSD are specific to a CSD view.
39-26
39.3.8 Results Page
Show Units
When this box is checked the units of the calculation results will be displayed on the CSD presentation
Check All
When this box is checked, all the display item options on the page are selected, providing a fast and easy
method of having all annotations visible on a CSD diagram.
39-27
Voltage Drop
Control Relay and Solenoid
Click this checkbox to display the calculated voltage drop across control relays and solenoids shown on
the CSD diagram. The voltage drop is displayed in volts based on the rated voltage of the devices.
Light
Click this checkbox to display the calculated voltage drop across lights shown on the CSD diagram. The
voltage drop is displayed in volts based on the rated voltage of the lights.
General Load
Click this checkbox to display the calculated voltage drop across general loads shown on the CSD
diagram. The voltage drop is displayed in volt based on the rated voltage of the general loads.
Wire
Click this checkbox to display the calculated voltage drop across wires shown on the CSD diagram. The
voltage drop is displayed in volts.
Impedance
Click this checkbox to display the calculated voltage drop across impedance elements shown on the CSD
diagram. The voltage drop is displayed in volts.
Voltage
Node
Click this checkbox to display the calculated voltage in volts at the connection nodes.
Note: Voltage values at buses are always displayed.
Flow Results
VA
Click this checkbox to display the calculated flow results in VA for devices, wires, and impedances. The
VA through an element is calculated by multiplying the current through it by its terminal node voltage.
Amp
Click this checkbox to display the calculated flow results in Amps for devices, wires, and impedances.
Control Relay and Solenoid

Click this checkbox to display the flow result through relays and solenoids, in VA or Amps depending on
the type of selection made above.
Light
Click this checkbox to display the flow result through lights, in VA or Amps depending on the type of
selection made above.
General Load
Click this checkbox to display the flow result through general loads, in VA or Amps depending on the
type selection made above.
39-28
Wire
Click this checkbox to display the flow result through wires, in VA or Amps depending on the type
selection made above.
Impedance
Click this checkbox to display the flow result through impedance elements, in VA or Amps depending on
the type selection made above.
Device Page
The Device page of the Display Option in Study Mode is the same as that in the Edit Mode. See section
42.2.2 for detailed descriptions.
39-29
39.3.9 Colors Page

This page provides options for setting up user defined color themes.
Color Theme
Select a previously defined color theme from the pull down list. The selected color theme will be applied
when the Theme option is selected.
39-30
Theme
Clicking on the Theme button brings up the Theme Editor. This is where existing color themes can be
modified by the user or a new color theme can be created.
Note: Color themes are applied globally within a project file. Changes made on a color theme here may
also affect other modes and presentations if global color themes are used.
Theme
Select this option to apply the color theme selected in the color Theme list for element annotations. When
this option is selected, the name of the applied color theme is displayed to the right of the Theme button.
User-Defined
Select this option to specify a color for CSD element annotations. When this option is chosen, color
selection fields, hidden when the Theme option is active, will appear below the button.

When the User-Defined annotation color option is selected, the field becomes enabled and you can assign
a color for DC element annotations in the CSD.
Results Color
When the User-Defined annotation color option is selected, the field becomes enabled and you can assign
a color for calculation results in the CSD.
39.3.10 CSD Simulator and Calculation Method

CSD Simulator
While in Voltage Drop Mode with Auto-Run Mode on, the CSD behaves as a simulator that imitates the
control operations of an actual control system diagram. During operation, the simulator controls the
status of pushbuttons and all contacts assigned to CSD devices based on the logics setup by the user. The
status of unassigned contacts, protective devices, and pushbuttons may be changed while working in
Study Mode by using the right-click menu, but this option is disabled once the simulator is running.
When the simulator starts, Auto-Run Mode is automatically activated and ETAP finds the initial steady
state for the CSD and uses it as a starting point. If no device or macro-controlled contact is modeled by a
duty cycle, the simulator will stay in the steady state waiting for a triggering event to start a sequence-ofoperation. If there are devices or macro controlled contacts that are modeled by duty cycle, it will
simulate the sequence-of-operations and find the new steady state. It then stays in this steady state and
waits for a triggering event to start a new sequence-of-operation. A simulation sequence is defined as the
process between two steady states.
For each simulation sequence, ETAP prepares an event log that provides detailed information on a stepby-step process for the simulated sequence-of-operation. If the Load Flow Method is used, a Crystal
Report is also generated and provides detailed voltage drop calculation results.
A simulation sequence is defined as the process between two steady states. The simulator typically
executes a sequence that begins with the current status of the CSD diagram (a steady state) once a status
change is triggered from a protective device, unassigned contact, or other CSD element. This generated
39-31
sequence encompasses all actions that result from the status change and terminates when the simulator
can no longer generate additional actions. The CSD diagram is said to be in a steady state at this point
and the simulator becomes inactive, waiting for the next triggering event (any status change of a
switching device) to generate the next sequence.
Never-Ending Loop
If a steady state does not result from the simulator-generated actions, the simulator may execute in a
manner where one action causes another action which undoes the first action, etc., leading to a neverending loop. To detect and prevent this type of loop, each CSD device participating in the simulation
counts the number of energized actions that it receives. If the CSD device is energized a given number of
times within a sequence, the simulator determines that the CSD diagram is not stable and places the CSD
device into an ERROR state. The ERROR state prohibits the CSD device from participating in any
subsequent actions generated by the simulator.
Initial Steady State

The CSD simulator determines its initial steady state through one of the following two conditions: while
switched to the Voltage Drop Mode or when the Run Voltage Drop button is pressed. To determine the
initial steady state, the simulator resets all assigned contacts to their normal state and runs a single
simulation sequence.
Once the initial steady state is determined, if there are devices or macro controlled contacts modeled by
duty cycles, the CSD simulator will begin a sequence-of-operation by executing the duty cycles.
Otherwise, it will stay in the initial steady state.
It is possible that the CSD can be set up so that it never discovers an initial steady state, and while
attempting to determine the initial steady state the simulator enters in a never-ending loop. If this occurs,
an error message will be displayed to warn you of this situation.
Triggering Event
Once a steady state is reached, the simulator will stay in this state and wait for a triggering event to launch
a new sequence. A triggering event can be any action by the user that makes the current steady state
invalid. These actions include:
Pressing a pushbutton to momentarily switch it to off-normal state

A change of status for a fuse, a circuit breaker, or a switch through right-click menu option
Because a steady state is also an operating state of a control system and any parameter change of a device
will change that state, while it is in Study Mode ETAP disables the editor fields for all elements, in effect,
anything that could falsely affect a steady state condition.
Simulation Method
There are two methods of simulation in ETAP: Sequence-of-Operation and Load Flow Calculation. The
Simulation Method is selected from the Info page of the Control System Diagram Study Case.
In a Sequence-of-Operation simulation, ETAP models a sequence-of-operation without calculating
voltage drops across any devices. ETAP assumes that all voltage requirements are satisfactory for the
devices to operate. The control logics set between control devices and contacts and time sequence in duty
39-32
cycles will be simulated. When designing a control system, this method can be used to replicate a control
sequence to check logics.
Because the voltage drop is not calculated by this method, ETAP will not generate a Crystal Report for
this simulation. Instead, use the Event Viewer to check the detailed control sequence.

When the Load Flow Calculation Method is used, the CSD simulator will carry out load flow calculations
at each step of a sequence. The calculated voltage drop across devices will be compared with the
requirements for pickup voltage and dropout voltage. The devices can operate as specified only when
these requirements are met. Therefore, this method not only simulates the control logics for a control
sequence, by enforcing the voltage requirements in the simulation, it also simulates an actual real world
sequence.
In a load flow simulation, ETAP will generate both a Crystal Report and an event log that lists the results
of the simulation. The Crystal Report is refreshed for each sequence-of-operation, while the event log
accumulates events across sequences. Each can be reset either manually, or by clicking on the Run
Voltage Drop button.
Device Duty Cycle Model

ETAP provides two types of device models: the Burden and Inrush Rating model and the Duty Cycle
model. Specify the device model you wish to use from the Model page of the Control System Diagram
Study Case and the Info page of Device Editor.
In the current version of ETAP, if a device is modeled by its duty cycle, ETAP will not simulate the
control logic between the device and the contacts listed on the Contact page of the device. The contacts
will remain in their normal state for the entire simulation process.
39.3.11 Calculation Method

Calculations conducted in the CSD simulator are load flow type calculations. The CSD sources are
modeled as constant voltage sources using the voltage value specified on the Info page of the Control
System Diagram Study Case. At any given time, a device may be modeled as a constant power, constant
impedance, or a constant current device. The current Injection Method is used to determine CSD voltage
and current flows. Using these calculation results, the device voltage requirements are verified. In this
section, several issues related to CSD calculation will be explained.
Device Modeling
ETAP uses two types of device modeling: Burden and Inrush Rating model and Duty Cycle model. The
type of device modeling is selected on the Model page of the Control System Diagram Study Case. If the
Burden & Inrush Rating option is selected in the Device Model section, all devices will be modeled by
their burden and inrush rating as entered on the Rating page of Device Editor. If the Duty Cycle option is
selected, all devices will be modeled by their duty cycle, as entered on the Duty Cycle page of the Device
Editor. If the Individual Editor option is selected, the model for a device is dependent upon the option
selected in the Calculation Model section of the Info page of Device Editor. You can select either Burden
& Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle from the Device Editor.
39-33
Burden and Inrush Rating Model

The burden and Inrush Rating of a device is entered on the Rating page of the Device Editor. If the
Inrush Rating box is checked, you can enter the inrush rating data in this section. The inrush rating is
applied each time a device is energized. In the inrush rating duration, the device will be represented as a
constant impedance element according to the rating data set in this section. Once beyond the inrush rating
duration, the device will be modeled according to its Burden Rating parameters. If the Inrush Rating box
is not checked, the device will be modeled by its burden rating only.
You can specify the type of device burden model in the Burden Rating section. Three options are
available: Constant VA, Constant Z, and Constant I. When the device is energized, and after its inrush
duration, the device will be modeled according to the model type selected.
Duty Cycle Model

If a device is modeled by its duty cycle, its behavior will be dominated by that duty cycle and its
connection to the source. At any given interval, a device is included in the calculation only when it is
energized and its duty cycle current at the time is not zero. Whenever the duty cycle current is equal to
zero, the device is considered of being out of service. Otherwise, it will be modeled according to its load
type and current value defined in the duty cycle.
When determining the initial steady state of a Control System Diagram, devices that are modeled by their
duty cycle will take the current value at the start time (t = 0). Thereafter, in each sequence-of-operation
simulation, either initiated by status change of a protective device or a click on the Run Voltage Drop
button, the device duty cycle sequence will be executed.
In the current version of ETAP, if a device is modeled by its duty cycle, ETAP will not simulate the
control logic between the device and the contacts listed on the Contact page of the device. The contacts
will remain in their normal state for the entire simulation process.
Macro Controlled Contact Modeling

A macro-controlled contact is a time-controlled switch used to change system connectivity as function of
time. You can specify the initial (normal) state of the switch from the Info page and the control sequence
on the Duty Cycle page. During the initial steady state, a macro-controlled contact takes its initial
(normal) state. In each simulation of sequence-of-operation, the duty cycle of a macro-controlled contact
will be executed.
A macro-controlled contact can be used to simulate control logics between a device and controlled circuit
when the device is modeled by duty cycle, and where the automatic logic between the device and its
contacts is not simulated in the current version of ETAP. It can also be used to simulate a triggering
event when a Control System Diagram is part of a battery discharge calculation, since in this case no
manual triggering event is allowed.
Special Conditions
Several circumstances require special considerations in control system diagram calculation.
Voltage Range for Constant Power Device

Because CSD calculation derives from load flow type calculations, in the rare case where the voltage
across a constant power type device is small, the current flowing through the device will be large. This
will then cause a large voltage drop on series connected elements, which in turn could make the voltage
across the device smaller and the current flowing through the device larger. This process can lead to a
convergence problem for CSD calculations. To avoid this situation, open the Info page of the Control
39-34
System Diagram Study Case and specify a voltage range in the constant Power Load Model section.
When the voltage across a constant power device is within this range, the device will behave as a constant
power load. Once the voltage across the device is outside this range, it will be automatically switched by
ETAP to a constant impedance device. Since most of the constant power devices in a CSD are motors,
this option provides more accurate modeling of this type of device.
Devices Connected in Series

In most control systems, devices (such as control relays and solenoids, etc.) are connected in series with
wires and switching elements and in parallel with other devices. ETAP does not restrict the user from
connecting several devices in series. However, you cannot connect multiple constant power or constant
current devices in series because of the conflicts this creates in system modeling. For example, two
constant current devices may have different current values. The CSD error check routine detects these
connections and an error message will be posted if such a connection is detected.
Note: It is possible to connect constant impedance devices in series, or connect a constant power (or
constant current) device in series with other constant impedance devices.
Duty Cycle Update

Click the checkbox for the Update Composite CSD option in the Duty Cycle section of the Info page of
the Control System Diagram Study Case and ETAP will automatically update the calculated CSD duty
cycle for the source elements. These are Elementary Diagram elements in a DC system. The duty cycle
update is calculated based on the power provided from each source in the simulation of the latest
sequence-of-operation. When any change is made in a CSD, or the Run Voltage Drop button is clicked, a
new sequence-of-operation is simulated and the duty cycle for each CSD source element is updated for
this new sequence.
Because a CSD can contain devices of constant power, constant impedance, and constant current, the duty
cycle updated to CSD source elements also can include a duty cycle for different types of loads. The load
type is indicated in the Type field for each section of duty cycle. If a CSD is powered by multiple source
elements connected together, the duty cycle for each source element will be based on the actual power
provided by each source element.
Bus Voltage Profile
39-35
Required Data
39.4 Required Data

The two methods the ETAP Control System Diagram uses for simulation (Sequence-of-Operation and
Load Flow Calculation) require different data.
When the Sequence-of-Operation is selected, the CSD will only simulate logics built into the control
sequence without performing voltage drop calculations. Therefore, device rating data and wire
impedance data are not required.
When the Load Flow Calculation Method is selected, device rating data and wire impedance data are
required for the voltage drop calculations.
The following sections identify the data required for the specified elements and the page where the data
can be entered.
39.4.1 Source Data

DC Composite CSD Element
Info Page
ID
Bus connection
Rating Page
Rating data kW, V, and FLA. This data is required if the Load Flow Calculation Method is
selected.
39.4.2 Control Relay, Solenoid, General Load and Light

Info Page
ID
From Node and To Node
Rating Page
Voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating data. This data is required if the Load Flow
Calculation Method is selected.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle data is required if the device is to be modeled by Duty Cycle model.
39-36
Required Data
39.4.3 Contact Data

Fixed, Convertible, and Form-C Contacts
Contacts do not have their own editors. Once a contact is assigned to a controlling device, for example a
control relay or a solenoid, the contact parameters can be entered from the Contact page of the controlling
Device Editor.
ID
Type
State
Top
Trelease

Info Page
ID
From and To connection
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle data
39.4.4 Branch Data

DC Cable
Info Page
ID
Impedance Page
Impedance page data is required only if the Load Flow Calculation Method is selected.
No. of wires
Link to Library
Impedance section data
Length section data
Wire Temperature section data
DC Impedance
Info Page
DC impedance ID
Impedance resistance required only if the Load Flow Calculation Method is selected.
39-37
Required Data
Protective Devices (CB, Fuse, Switch, and Pushbutton)

Info Page
ID
Status for CB, Fuse and Switch. Initial (Normal) State) for Pushbutton.
39-38
Output Reports
39.5 Output Reports

The CSD simulation results are reported in several ways. The CSD view displays the calculation results,
which include the bus voltages, device voltage drops, and flows through devices, wires, impedances, and
protective devices. Use the Display Options Editor to specify the content that you want to be displayed.
CSD results are also presented in Crystal Reports, the Event Viewer, and Alert View. The Crystal
Reports listing provides input data for all elements involved in a simulation and detailed calculation
results for each step of the simulation. Use the CSD Report Manager to view the Output Report.
The Event Viewer provides a detailed list of the operation sequence for a simulation, including control
device operations, contact operating time, and voltage limit checking results. This report page is designed
to be an easy to use reference tool for the design and verification of the control logic of a control system.
The Alert View list all critical and marginal alerts detected in the simulation based on the settings on the
Alert page of the CSD Study Case.
Note: The Crystal Report and Alert View will be generated only when the Load Flow Calculation option
is selected on the Info page of the CSD Study Case, since a load flow calculation is required to prepare
these results.
39.5.1 CSD Simulation Report Manager

Open the CSD Simulation Report Manager by clicking on the Report Manager button on the CSD
Simulation toolbar.
The Report Manager Editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Results, and Summary) each
representing different sections of the Output Report. The Report Manager allows you to select the formats
that are available for different portions of the report and view them through Crystal Reports. There is an
option to specify the format of the report you wish to view. Use the Crystal Reports viewer to read the
report, or have ETAP convert the report to one of your favorite document formats, such as PDF, MS
Word, Rich Text Format, and MS Excel, etc. Several fields and buttons are common to every page. These
are described below.
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the Output Report.
Path
Help
39-39
Output Reports
Help/OK/Cancel
Click on the OK button to close the editor and open the Crystal Reports viewer to show the selected
portion of the Output Report. Click on the Cancel button to close the editor without viewing the report.
Clicking on Help will bring up the ETAP Help Text for the Report Manager topic.
Report Document Format

You can choose one of the document formats listed on the page to display the Output Report. Click on the
button to select that format. If you select the Viewer option, ETAP will show the results in Crystal
Reports. If you choose one of the other options, such as PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, and MS
Excel, ETAP will convert the report to this format for viewing.
Set As Default
When this box is checked, the selected document format becomes the default format to display the CSD
simulation result for all future reports. If this box is not checked, the default viewing option will be the
Viewer.
Complete Page
On this page there is only one format available, Complete, which opens the complete report for the CSD
Simulation. The Complete Report includes the Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
39-40
Output Reports
Input Data Page

On this page the different categories of input data are grouped according to type. They include:
Bus and Source

Contact
Cover
Device
Duty Cycle
Study Case
Wire - Impedance
Clicking on one of the categories in the list will select it for report generation.
39-41
Output Reports
Results Page
This page is used for the selection of the Output Report format for the voltage drop and power flow result
portion of the output report. Click on the report format button to select it. The selected format can be used
as the default format by clicking the Set As Default box.
39-42
Output Reports
Summary Page
This page allows you to select different portions of the load summary for viewing. The categories are
listed below:
Alert Complete
Alert Critical
Alert Marginal
Summary
39-43
Output Reports

This pull-down menu is a shortcut to the Report Manager. When you click on the View Output Report
button, ETAP automatically opens the Output Report, which is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the
selected format. In the Study Case sample below, the Output Report name is Untitled and the selected
category is alert Complete.
39.5.3 Input Data

Study Case Option Samples

The following pages present Study Case Reports.
39-44
Output Reports
39-45
Output Reports
CSD Device Input Data
Wire, Impedance and Protective Device Input Data
39-46
Output Reports
39.5.4 Voltage Drop and Power Flow Results

The results section of the Output Report includes the calculated results of voltage drops across devices
and power flows through devices and branches.
39-47
Output Reports
39.5.5 Summary Reports

The summary portion of the Output Report includes the Alert option settings from the Study Case and
critical and marginal alerts generated from the simulation.
39-48
Output Reports
39.5.6 Event Viewer

The Event Viewer provides detailed information generated for each device and contact during a
simulation. The information includes the energizing status of devices, operating conditions of devices,
status of contacts, and pickup and dropout voltage check results of devices. This information makes it
possible to trace the control system states occurring at each step of a simulation. It is a very useful tool
for logic design and verification of a control system.
The Event Viewer can float on top of the CSD view during a simulation to CSD simulation results online. As the CSD simulation develops according to its logic, the progress of the control system and
elements stats are displayed in the Event Viewer.
Clear
When the Clear button is clicked, the Event Viewer is refreshed.
Note: When the Event Viewer is open, it appends simulation results for consecutive simulations until the
Clear button is clicked.
Verbose
When the Verbose box is checked, the Event Viewer will display extra information, such as the steps for
checking for pickup and dropout voltage that has not lead to any violations.
39-49
Output Reports
39.5.7 Alert Viewer

The Alert Viewer displays critical and marginal alerts generated during CSD simulation that is based on
the options set on the Alert page of the CSD Study Case. The Alert View can be brought up manually by
clicking on the Alert View button in the CSD Simulation toolbar. If the Auto Display button on the Alert
page of the CSD Study Case has been clicked and set to on, the Alert View will be automatically open
after a simulation, assuming that alerts have been generated during simulation.
39-50
Output Reports
39-51
Data X
Data Synchronization
Chapter 40
ETAP DataX (Data Synchronization)
ETAP Data Exchange (DataX) modules for Microsoft (MS) Access and Excel, e-DPP and
SmartPlant Electrical are used to import data from a Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access file, a
MS Access database exported from e-DPP or a XML file exported from SmartPlant Electrical
into an ETAP project. This import can be done multiple times to update data in the ETAP project
whenever the data in the Microsoft Excel file or the Microsoft Access database, e-DPP exported
MS Access database or SmartPlant exported XML file changes.
The block diagram shown below explains the data flow process.
MS Excel file
or MS Access
database
Data
Mapping
Tool
Data
Exchange
Interface
ETAP
Add, Modify,
Rename &
Delete Actions
User
Confirmation
The Data Mapping Tool may be used to customize the mapping of data in the MS Excel
worksheets and MS Access database table, e-DPP exported MS Access database table or
SmartPlant exported XML file with ETAP element and their attributes. Once the mapping is
available the Data Exchange Interface compares the data in MS Excel file, MS Access database
or XML file with the data in the ETAP project and creates a list of Add, Modify, Delete and
Rename actions. Accepted actions are applied to the ETAP project.
40-1
Data X
Accessing the DataX Tools
40.1 Accessing the DataX Tools

The DataX MS Access, DataX MS Excel, DataX e-DPP or DataX SmartPlant
Electrical commands can be invoked by going to the File | Data Exchange menu as shown
below:
As the tools are used to add or modify data in the ETAP project, they are active only in the Edit
Mode.
40-2
Data X
Access Database
40.2 Access Database

The Access Database command is used to transfer data from a MS Access database into an
ETAP project.
40.2.1 Select Data File Editor

Click on this command to display the Select Data File Editor shown below. Use this command
to select:
The equipment list that is linked to the ETAP project and

The database with default mapping of elements in the equipment list and ETAP
Default Database
Displays the fully qualified name of the selected default database file that will be used to create
the new ETAP Microsoft Access data exchange project. Click on the Browse button to change or
select a different default database.
The default database includes information about default mapping between the equipment in the
MS Access table and ETAP elements.
Equipment Data File

Displays the fully qualified name of the selected Microsoft Access database file that is linked
with the ETAP project. Click on the Browse button to select an equipment data file.
40-3
Data X
Access Database
The structure of the equipment data file required by the data exchange program is described
below. Please refer to the \DataExExamples\DataX MS Access\EquipList.mdb file under the
ETAP installed folder for the template.
The column NEW ITEM NO is present only for projects that require renaming of equipment
tag numbers.
Data from the table representing equipment data in the Access database is imported into
ETAP. An option is provided to specify the name for this table. The default name for this
table is set to EQUIPMENT DATA. Data is not transferred from any other table in the
database.
The table having equipment data will always have one field with a name containing ITEM
NO. This field will represent the unique ID of equipments.
The field with name containing EQ CODE is used to determine the type of equipment,
which may be bus, motor, VFD, capacitor, non-motor load, two-winding transformer, threewinding transformer, cable, reactor, heater, or heat exchanger.
For all elements in ETAP, UserField 7 is reserved and is used by the program. Information
in this field should not be altered.
Additional columns may be added to the equipment data table. However they need to be
mapped before the initial transfer. Data columns may not be added after the initial data
transfer. If new columns are required, a new project may be created.
Cable Sizing File

This file is presently not required and is for future use.
OK
Click on the OK button to start the data synchronization process. This will activate the Data
Synchronization Editor.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to cancel the data synchronization process.
40-4
Data X
Access Database
40.2.2 Data Synchronization Editor

When the OK button on the Select Data File Editor is clicked, the Data Synchronization Editor is
Equipment List
This is the name of the Microsoft Access source file from which data is transferred.
ETAP Project
This is the name of the ETAP project file with which the data from Microsoft Access file
(equipment list) is synchronized.
Map Data
Click on this button to perform data mapping. This action displays the Data Mapping Editor.
Save As Default
Check this option to save:
The Equipment List ETAP elements map as default table map

The Equipment attributes ETAP element attributes map as default field map
Once the mapping information for a project (e.g. Project A) is saved as default, it may be selected
as Default Database on the Select Data File Editor, while creating a new project (e.g. Project
B). This will ensure that the equipment and attribute mapping used in the new project (Project B)
is the same as Project A.
40-5
Data X
Access Database
Set Defaults
Click on this option to set the default parameters associated with the Microsoft Access Data
Synchronization Project. The editor is shown below:
System Frequency
Select the system frequency. Default value of system frequency is 60 Hz. This value is used to
calculate the number of poles in a motor, using the relation:
Number of poles = 120 * System Frequency / Speed in RPM
Multi Equipment Delimiter

Set the character used as multi-equipment delimiter in the string representing equipment ID. The
default value used is \.
Cable Length
Set cable length. The default value is 50 units.
% PF for Heaters
Set power factor for heater equipment. The default power factor is 100%.
% PF for Non-Motor Loads

Set power factor for non-motor loads. The default power factor is 90%.
Composite Motor Threshold

The value set for this parameter determines whether or not a composite motor will be created at a
bus or not. If the number of motors directly connected to a bus is more than or equal to this value
a composite motor is created, otherwise the motors are directly connected to the bus. This setting
is valid only when transferring data for the first time.
40-6
Data X
Access Database
Global Flags
A list of modifications is prepared after comparing the Equipment List database and existing data
in the ETAP project. Global flags are used for accepting global modifications and are described
in the table below.
Flag
Accept All Actions
Accept All Add Actions
Accept All Modify Actions
Accept All Delete Actions
Accept All Rename Actions
Action
All commands will be accepted.
All additions will be accepted, otherwise an option will be
provided to accept or reject each addition
All modifications will be accepted, otherwise an option will
be provided to accept or reject each modification
All delete commands will be accepted, otherwise an option
will be provided to accept or reject a delete command
All commands for renaming will be accepted, otherwise an
option will be provided to accept or reject a command for
renaming
Transfer Data
Click on this button to synchronize data, that is add, modify, delete, or rename elements in the
ETAP project based on the data in the equipment list. Clicking on the Transfer Data button
displays the list of modifications prepared after comparison of existing ETAP project data and the
data in the Microsoft Access file (equipment list).
Close
Click on the Close button to close the editor. Data synchronization will not be performed.
40.2.3 The Data Mapping Editor

Equipment attributes in the MS Access equipment list can be mapped to ETAP element attributes
using the Data Mapping Editor as shown below. The Data Mapping Editor performs the
following functions:
It analyses the data in the Microsoft Access equipment list to determine the types of different
equipment. The criteria used to determine equipment type is described above in the
Equipment Data file section.
The Data Mapping Editor determines the attributes associated with each equipment type.
Equipment attributes are same as the fields in the EQUIPMENT DATA table of the MS
Access equipment list.
It serves as an interface for mapping equipment types with ETAP elements.
It serves as an interface for mapping equipment attributes (fields) with ETAP element
attributes.
40-7
Data X
Access Database
Map Equipment Types

Microsoft Access Equipment
This column displays a list of equipment in the table EQUIPMENT DATA of the Microsoft
Access Equipment List.
ETAP Element
Select an ETAP element corresponding to the element in Microsoft Access Equipment List.
More than one equipment can be mapped to the same ETAP element. For example, both the nonmotor load and heater are mapped to a static load in ETAP.
40-8
Data X
Access Database
Following is a list of ETAP elements that may be mapped to Microsoft Access equipment in the
present release:
Bus
Cable
Capacitor
Induction Machine
Reactor
Static Load
Synchronous Motor
Three-Winding Transformer
Two-Winding Transformer
VFD
Criteria for Determining Equipment Type

The table below describes the criteria used to determine the type of equipment represented by a
record in equipment list. All comparisons in the table are not case sensitive. The order in which
criteria is checked is the same order in which they appear in the table below:
Criteria
First two characters of Equipment Code = EC
First two characters of Equipment Code = EK
First two characters of Equipment Code = ES
Equipment Code = MUMI
Equipment Code = MUMR
Equipment Code = MUMS
Equipment Code = MUVO
Equipment Code = MUVE
Equipment Code = EVV1
First two characters of Equipment Code = MG
First two characters of Equipment Code = EQ, EA, ED, EE, EF, EH
First two characters of Equipment Code = EU, EM, EP
First two characters of Equipment Code = EV
First two characters of Equipment Code = ET & Ter kV > 0
First two characters of Equipment Code = ET & Ter kV = 0
40-9
Element Type
Bus
Induction Motor
Synchronous Motor
VFD
Non-Motor Load
Three-Winding
Transformer
Two-Winding
Data X
Access Database
First three characters of Equipment Code = EYU

First three characters of Equipment Code = EYR
First character of Equipment Code = M & Rating Unit = kW (kW is
non zero)
First character of Equipment Code = M & Rating Unit = kVA (kVA
is non zero)
Transformer
Capacitor
Reactor
Heater
Non-Motor Load
Map Fields
Click on the Microsoft Access Equipment node (the + sign on the left hand side of the editor)
to display the attribute mapping for the equipment. The rows in the attribute mapping table
highlighted with Lavender color are blocked, that is, the ETAP field corresponding to the
Microsoft Access Equipment List field may not be modified for such rows. Blocked rows have a
hard-coded mapping associated with them.
Microsoft Access Equipment Field

This column displays a list of Microsoft Access Equipment attributes associated with the
equipment.
ETAP Field
Select an ETAP element attribute corresponding to the Microsoft Access Equipment attribute.
Field Mapping Rules

This section describes the logic for mapping Equipment List attributes to ETAP element
attributes. All fields, other than those mentioned in this section are mapped directly, that is the
value of the ETAP field is made equal to the value of mapped attribute in Equipment List. The
text comparisons made in the program are not case sensitive.
Unit for Voltage

If the value of voltage in Equipment List is less than equal to 100, the units for voltage in
Equipment List is assumed to be kV, otherwise the unit is assumed to be Volts.
Motor Rating
If the name of the column in Equipment List representing motor rating contains HP, the unit for
motor rating is assumed to be in HP. If the name of the column in Equipment List representing
motor rating contains kW, the unit for motor rating is assumed to be kW. If neither HP nor
40-10
Data X
Access Database
kW is part of the column representing motor rating, the unit for motor rating is assumed to be
HP.
Multiple-Field Mapping
If a field in ETAP is mapped to more than one field in the Equipment List, the value of ETAP
field will be determined using the following relation:
ETAP Field =
Eq. List Field 1 + Eq. List Field 2 + . + Eq. List Field n
This type of mapping will be allowed only to ETAP fields of type text.
Default Values
ETAP creates new elements (in case of Add action) by using default values for element
attributes, and then it replaces the default values with actual imported values. Therefore, when
there are no actual imported values, the default values will be used.
Default Value of Power Factor

For non-motor loads the default value of power factor is 90% and for heater loads the default
value of power factor is 100%. These values may be changed using the Set Defaults command
button from the Data Mapping Editor.
For all other types of static load the default power factor is assumed to be 100%.
Percentage Loading
The percentage loading for equipments of the type motor in Equipment List will be calculated
using the value of the field OPER HP and MOTOR HP. The relation used is as follows:
If OPER HP > 0 then
Percentage Loading = (OPER HP / MOTOR HP) * 100
Else
Percentage Loading = 100
This relation is hard coded.
Load Status
The field RUN_IN_SP in Equipment List is mapped to status field in ETAP (for all equipments).
The table below shows the mapping:
RUN_IN_SP (Equipment List) Status (ETAP)
R or C
Continuous
I
Intermittent
S
Spare
Mapping for Load Status
Power Required
If the value of the field POWER_REQ in Equipment List does not start with Y or y, the
record is not transferred to ETAP. If this column is not present in the equipment list, data will not
be transferred.
40-11
Data X
Access Database
Estimated or Actual
If the value of the field EST_ACT in Equipment List is E or e, Data Type in ETAP is set to
Data Type #1. (Name for Data Type #1 is set to Estimated using the Project -> Setting Data
Type Editor in ETAP)
If the value of the field EST_ACT in Equipment List is A or a, Data Type in ETAP is set to
Data Type #2. (Name for Data Type #2 is set to Actual using the Project -> Setting Data Type
Editor in ETAP)
If the value of the field EST_ACT in Equipment List is not equal to E or e or A or a, Data
Type in ETAP is set to Data Type #1. A message is added to the log file in this case.
Motor RPM
Number of poles for a motor will be calculated from the motor RPM using the following relation:
Poles = 120 * Frequency / RPM
A message is logged if the number of poles calculated from RPM is odd and the number of poles
in this case is set to the next even number higher than calculated number of poles.
The frequency value used can be set with the help of Set Defaults command button of the Data
Mapping Editor.

Multiple equipments are created in ETAP for one record in the equipment list database, if the
following conditions are satisfied:
(a) The value of field representing equipment quantity is greater than one.
(b) The equipment ID includes a multi equipment delimiter.
(c) The last three characters of the equipment ID will be of the form / or \, where / and
/ are the multi equipment delimiters, and are represent alphabets in ascending order.
For example if the equipment ID is K-8100A\D, then the individual equipment IDs will be K8100A, K-8100B, K-8100C and K-8100D.
The following rules are for processing equipments with ID having a multi equipment delimiter:
(a) An option is provided for setting the value of multi equipment delimiter for a project. The
default value for this is \.
(b) If \ or / is chosen as the multi equipment delimiter, both \ and / will be assumed to be
the multi equipment delimiters.
(c) If the field Quantity and number of alphabets between and (both inclusive) do not
match, an error will be logged. The elements will not be created.
(d) Add, modify, rename, and delete commands will be generated by comparing the record in the
equipment list with all the elements (corresponding to the same multi equipment ID) in
ETAP.
(e) The character before the multi equipment delimiter represents the suffix for first equipment
ID and the character after the multi equipment delimiter represents the suffix for last
equipment ID. Intermediate equipment IDs will have suffixes equal to the next character
after the first equipment ID suffix.
40-12
Data X
Access Database
Single-Phase Loads
Data is transferred for single-phase loads from the Equipment List formats. The single-phase
loads include induction motor, synchronous motor, static load, lumped load, and capacitor.
The logic for identifying single-phase loads in the three formats is as follows:
Check if the field named Single-Phase Y/N (case insensitive) exists.

If it does not exist, there will be no single-phase loads.
If it exists and the first character of the value is Y or y, the record will represent a singlephase load.
If it exists and the value is blank or the first character of the value is N or n, the record
will not represent a single-phase load.
Transformer Cooling Code

Two-winding transformer cooling codes will be imported during data exchange. Proper maximum
ratings, impedance values and X/R ratios will be set based on the cooling code.
A field named Cooling Code in the Equipment List is mapped to the Class field on the Info
page of the Transformer Editor in ETAP. The Maximum MVA for a transformer will be updated
based on the value of this field. If the System Frequency in the project is set to 60 Hz (on the
Defaults Editor) the project will be assumed to follow ANSI Standard. Projects with System
Frequency set to 50 Hz will be assumed to follow IEC Standard.
The following is a list of valid values for this field for a project based on ANSI standard:
OA, OW, OW/A, OA/FA, OA/FA/FA, OA/FA/FOA, OA/FOA/FOA, FOA, FOW
The following is a list of valid values for this field for a project based on IEC standard:
ONAN, ONWN, ONWN/ONAN, ONAN/ONAF, ONAN/ONAF/ONAF, ONAN/ONAF/OFAF,
ONAN/OFAF/OFAF, OFAF, OFWF, ODWF, ONAN/OFAN/OFAF, OFAN, OFAN/OFAF,
ONWF
If the value of the field is different from values in the above list, the value of the Class field on
the Info page of the Transformer Editor in ETAP will be set to Other and the Maximum MVA
will not be updated.
If the positive and zero sequence impedance / X/R ratio of the transformer is 0, it is set to a
typical value based on the Transformer rated MVA and rated voltages.
Blank Fields
If a value for a numeric field exists in ETAP but is blank or zero in the Equipment List, modify
action will not be generated for it. Note that this does not apply to fields representing a text value.
Typical Data for Induction and Synchronous Motors

If a Modify or Add action is generated for induction and / or synchronous motors, and:
If the power factor and efficiency of the motor in the equipment list are blank or 0 the kVA /
HP, full load amp and impedance data for the motor will be updated.
40-13
Data X
Access Database
If the power factor and efficiency of the motor in the equipment list are non-zero, the kVA /
HP and full load amp of the motor will be updated. Impedance data will not be updated for
this case.
If the power factor or efficiency is blank or zero, an error message will be logged and no
action will be generated.
If mapping is missing for power factor at 75% loading and power factor at 50% loading, they
will be set equal to the field mapped to power factor at 100% loading.
If mapping is missing for efficiency at 75% loading and efficiency at 50% loading, they will
be set equal to the efficiency at 100% loading.
40.2.4 Data Transfer

When the Transfer Data button on the Data Synchronization Editor is clicked a comparison is
made between the existing ETAP project data and the equipment data in the MS Access database
file. Based on the comparison a list of actions is prepared and displayed on the Accept / Reject
Actions Editor as shown below.
Date / Time
The top-left corner of the editor displays the date and time on which the ETAP project and the
MS Access File are synchronized.
40-14
Data X
Access Database
User Name
The top-right corner displays the name of the user performing the synchronization.
Action List
Item No.
This column displays the unique identifier of the element in the ETAP project on which the action
is performed.
Equipment Type
This column displays the type of element on which the modification is performed.
Action
This column displays the type of action that is to be performed on the ETAP element. It may be
Add, Modify or Delete.
Accept
Check / Uncheck the box in this column to accept or reject the action.
Modification
This column displays the new and old values of the first modified attribute. Click on the cell to
display the new and old values of all the modified attributes.
Accept Actions
Click on the Add, Modify or Delete command buttons in this group to accept all add, modify or
delete actions respectively shown in the modification list. Click on the All button in this group to
accept all actions in the list.
Reject Actions
Click on the Add, Modify or Delete command buttons in this group to reject all add, modify or
reject all actions in the list.
Continue
Click on the Continue button to perform data transfer to ETAP per the accepted and rejected
action list.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to cancel data transfer to ETAP. No changes are made in the ETAP
project.
40-15
Data X
Excel - Fixed Format
40.3 Excel - Fixed Format

This Excel Fixed Format command is used to transfer data from a MS Excel file with
fixed format into an ETAP project.
40.3.1 Data Comparison Logic

Elements inside an ETAP project always have unique identifiers known as GUID or Global
Unique Identifier. GUIDs are assigned to each created element inside a project automatically
apart from their IDs which user would assign them. Therefore each element when it is created
will have an ID (assigned by user or from default) and also will have a GUID automatically
assigned by ETAP.
When importing from excel to ETAP the equipments between ETAP project (if exists any) and
excel will get compared based on their GUIDs and the required actions will be determined
accordingly. However importing excel equipments would not have GUIDs assigned to them. This
assignment will be done automatically by ETAP at the import time and will be written to the
excel file for each equipment.
40.3.2 Select Data File Editor

Click on this command to display the Select Data File Editor shown below. Use this command
to select:
The equipment list that is linked to the ETAP project and

The database with default mapping of elements in the equipment list and ETAP
Default Database
40-16
Data X
Displays the fully qualified name of the selected default database file that will be used to create
the new ETAP Microsoft Access data exchange project. Click on the Browse button to change or
select a different default database.
The default database includes information about default mapping between the equipment in the
MS Excel Sheets and ETAP elements.
Equipment Data File

Displays the fully qualified name of the selected Microsoft Excel file that is linked with the
ETAP project. Click on the Browse button to select an equipment data file.
The structure of the equipment data file required by the data exchange program is described
below. Please refer to \DataExExamples\DataX MS Excel\Excel to Etap.xls file in the ETAP
installed folder for the template.
There are 12 Sheets in-order for entering equipment data. The default names are: Impedance,
Reactor, XLIne, Cable, VFD, MOV, NonMotorLoad, Heater, 3W-Transformer, 2WTransformer, Motor and Bus.
The sheet having equipment data will always have one field with a name containing
Equipment ID. This field will represent the unique ID of equipments.
For all elements in ETAP, UserField 7 is reserved and is used by the program. Information
in this field should not be altered.
Additional columns may be added to the equipment data table. However they need to be
mapped before the initial transfer. Data columns may not be added after the initial data
transfer. If new columns are required, a new project may be created.
To assist data entry, comment has been added to the head for some of the columns when
needed. Please point the mouse to the column head for comment.
At the time of import, right after pressing the OK button on ETAP MS Excel DataX: Select
Data File dialog box a warning message will pop up informing the user that GUIDs will be
written to each worksheet for each component. For information about GUID please refer to
Data Comparison Logic section.
Cable Sizing File

40-17
Data X
This file is presently not required and is for future use.
OK
Click on OK to start the data synchronization process.
Synchronization Editor.
This will activate the Data
Cancel
Click on Cancel to cancel the data synchronization process.
OK
Press OK to proceed with writing GUIDs to importing excel file for all equipments contained in
each worksheet
Cancel
Press cancel to quite importing the excel file to ETAP
GUIDs written in Excel

Right after the first import of the excel file to ETAP there will be a new column added to each
existing worksheet inside the excel file (if those worksheets contain any equipment) named as
OtiGUID. This column will contain a global unique identifier for each element (each existing
row of data).
As soon as this column is created it will be automatically blocked by ETAP from any changes
from the user. ETAP will recognize this excel file as a protected excel file from now then. The
reason is that each GUID needs to remain intact during the cycle of multiple imports of this file
thus ETAP project can recognize the differences between existing elements (in ETAP project &
excel file) vs. newly added elements to excel.
40-18
Data X
As part of the OtiGUID column blocking, insertion of new rows or deletion of existing rows also
will be blocked, unless user manually unblock each worksheet by Unprotect Sheet command
located under Review tab of MS Excel 2007.
In the case of unblocking the worksheet it has to be made sure that the OtiGUID column values
remain intact. In the case of changing any GUID for any element, in the next run of excel import
that element will be recognized as a new element.

When the OK button on the Select Data File Editor is clicked, the Rows Per Record Editor is
Enter the number of rows per record in the data sheets. The default is 1 row per record.
When the OK button on the Select Data File Editor is clicked, the Data Synchronization Editor is
40-19
Data X
Equipment List
This is the name of the Microsoft Access source file from which data is transferred.
ETAP Project
This is the name of the ETAP project file with which the data from Microsoft Excel file
(equipment list) is synchronized.
Map Data
Save As Default
Check this option to save:
The Equipment List ETAP elements map as default table map

The Equipment attributes ETAP element attributes map as default field map
Once the mapping information for a project (e.g. Project A) is saved as default, it may be selected
as Default Database on the Select Data File Editor, while creating a new project (e.g. Project
B). This will ensure that the equipment and attribute mapping used in the new project (Project B)
is the same as Project A.
Set Defaults
This is the same as for DataX MS Access.
Transfer Data
Click on this button to synchronize data, that is add, modify, delete, or rename elements in the
ETAP project based on the data in the equipment list. Clicking on the Transfer Data button
40-20
Data X
displays the list of modifications prepared after comparison of existing ETAP project data and the
data in the Microsoft Excel file (equipment list).
Close
Click on the Close button to close the editor. Data synchronization will not be performed.
40-21
Data X

Equipment attributes in the MS Excel equipment list can be mapped to ETAP element attributes
using the Data Mapping Editor as shown below. The Data Mapping Editor performs the same as
for DataX MS Access.
Following is a list of ETAP elements that may be mapped to Microsoft Excel equipment in the
present release:
Bus
Cable
Impedance
Induction Machine
MOV
Reactor
Static Load
Transmission Line
Three-Winding Transformer
40-22
Data X
Two-Winding Transformer
VFD
Criteria for Determining Equipment Type

The table below describes the criteria used to determine the type of equipment represented by a
record in equipment list. All comparisons in the table are not case sensitive. The order in which
criteria is checked is the same order in which they appear in the table below.
Criteria
First two characters of Equipment Code = EC
First two characters of Equipment Code = EK
First two characters of Equipment Code = ES
Equipment Code = MUMI
Equipment Code = MUMR
Equipment Code = MUMS
Equipment Code = MUVO
Equipment Code = MUVE
First two characters of Equipment Code = MG
First two characters of Equipment Code = EQ, EA, ED, EE, EF, EH
First two characters of Equipment Code = EU, EM, EP
First two characters of Equipment Code = EV
First two characters of Equipment Code = ET & Ter kV > 0
Element Type
Bus
Induction Motor
Synchronous Motor
VFD
Non-Motor Load
Three-Winding
Transformer
First two characters of Equipment Code = ET & Ter kV = 0
Two-Winding
Transformer
First three characters of Equipment Code = EYU
Capacitor
First three characters of Equipment Code = EYR
Reactor
First character of Equipment Code = M & Rating Unit = kW (kW is Heater
non zero)
First character of Equipment Code = M & Rating Unit = kVA (kVA Non-Motor Load
is non zero)
Map Fields
Click on the Microsoft Access Equipment node (the + sign on the left hand side of the editor)
to display the attribute mapping for the equipment. The rows in the attribute mapping table
highlighted with Lavender color are blocked, that is, the ETAP field corresponding to the
Microsoft Access Equipment List field may not be modified for such rows. Blocked rows have a
hard-coded mapping associated with them.
Microsoft Excel Equipment Field

This column displays a list of Microsoft Access Equipment attributes associated with the
equipment.
ETAP Field
Select an ETAP element attribute corresponding to the Microsoft Access Equipment attribute.
40-23
Data X
Field Mapping Rules

This section describes the logic for mapping Equipment List attributes to ETAP element
attributes. All fields, other than those mentioned in this section are mapped directly, that is the
value of the ETAP field is made equal to the value of mapped attribute in Equipment List. The
text comparisons made in the program are not case sensitive.
Unit for Voltage

If the value of voltage in Equipment List is less than equal to 100, the units for voltage in
Equipment List is assumed to be kV, otherwise the unit is assumed to be Volts.
Motor Rating
If the name of the column in Equipment List representing motor rating contains HP, the unit for
motor rating is assumed to be in HP. If the name of the column in Equipment List representing
motor rating contains kW, the unit for motor rating is assumed to be kW. If neither HP nor
kW is part of the column representing motor rating, the unit for motor rating is assumed to be
HP.
Multiple-Field Mapping
If a field in ETAP is mapped to more than one field in the Equipment List, the value of ETAP
field will be determined using the following relation:
ETAP Field =
Eq. List Field 1 + Eq. List Field 2 + . + Eq. List Field n
This type of mapping will be allowed only to ETAP fields of type text.
Default Values
ETAP creates new elements (in case of Add action) by using default values for element
attributes, and then it replaces the default values with actual imported values. Therefore, when
Default Value of Power Factor

For non-motor loads the default value of power factor is 90% and for heater loads the default
value of power factor is 100%. These values may be changed using the Set Defaults command
button from the Data Mapping Editor.
For all other types of static load the default power factor is assumed to be 100%.
Percentage Loading
40-24
Data X
The percentage loading for equipments of the type motor in Equipment List will be calculated
using the value of the field OPER HP and MOTOR HP. The relation used is as follows:
If OPER HP > 0 then
Percentage Loading = (OPER HP / MOTOR HP) * 100
Else
Percentage Loading = 100
This relation is hard coded.
Load Status
The field RUN_IN_SP in Equipment List is mapped to status field in ETAP (for all equipments).
The table below shows the mapping:
RUN_IN_SP (Equipment List) Status (ETAP)
R or C
Continuous
I
Intermittent
S
Spare
Mapping for Load Status
Power Required
If the value of the field POWER_REQ in Equipment List does not start with Y or y, the
record is not transferred to ETAP. If this column is not present in the equipment list, data will not
be transferred.
Estimated or Actual
If the value of the field EST_ACT in Equipment List is E or e, Data Type in ETAP is set to
Data Type #1. (Name for Data Type #1 is set to Estimated using the Project -> Setting Data
Type Editor in ETAP)
If the value of the field EST_ACT in Equipment List is A or a, Data Type in ETAP is set to
Data Type #2. (Name for Data Type #2 is set to Actual using the Project -> Setting Data Type
Editor in ETAP)
If the value of the field EST_ACT in Equipment List is not equal to E or e or A or a, Data
Type in ETAP is set to Data Type #1. A message is added to the log file in this case.
Motor RPM
Number of poles for a motor will be calculated from the motor RPM using the following relation:
Poles = 120 * Frequency / RPM
A message is logged if the number of poles calculated from RPM is odd and the number of poles
in this case is set to the next even number higher than calculated number of poles.
The frequency value used can be set with the help of Set Defaults command button of the Data
Mapping Editor.
40-25
Data X

Multiple equipments are created in ETAP for one record in the equipment list database, if the
following conditions are satisfied:
(a) The value of field representing equipment quantity is greater than one.
(b) The equipment ID includes a multi equipment delimiter.
(c) The last three characters of the equipment ID will be of the form / or \, where / and
/ are the multi equipment delimiters, and are represent alphabets in ascending order.
For example if the equipment ID is K-8100A\D, then the individual equipment IDs will be K8100A, K-8100B, K-8100C and K-8100D.
The following rules are for processing equipments with ID having a multi equipment delimiter:
(a) An option is provided for setting the value of multi equipment delimiter for a project. The
default value for this is \.
(b) If \ or / is chosen as the multi equipment delimiter, both \ and / will be assumed to be
the multi equipment delimiters.
(c) If the field Quantity and number of alphabets between and (both inclusive) do not
match, an error will be logged. The elements will not be created.
(d) Add, modify, rename, and delete commands will be generated by comparing the record in the
equipment list with all the elements (corresponding to the same multi equipment ID) in
ETAP.
(e) The character before the multi equipment delimiter represents the suffix for first equipment
ID and the character after the multi equipment delimiter represents the suffix for last
equipment ID. Intermediate equipment IDs will have suffixes equal to the next character
after the first equipment ID suffix.
Single-Phase Loads
Data is transferred for single-phase loads from the Equipment List formats. The single-phase
loads include induction motor, synchronous motor, static load, lumped load, and capacitor.
The logic for identifying single-phase loads in the three formats is as follows:
Check if the field named Single-Phase Y/N (case insensitive) exists.
If it does not exist, there will be no single-phase loads.
If it exists and the first character of the value is Y or y, the record will represent a singlephase load.
If it exists and the value is blank or the first character of the value is N or n, the record
will not represent a single-phase load.
40-26
Data X
Transformer Cooling Code

Two-winding transformer cooling codes will be imported during data exchange. Proper maximum
ratings, impedance values and X/R ratios will be set based on the cooling code.
A field named Cooling Code in the Equipment List is mapped to the Class field on the Info
page of the Transformer Editor in ETAP. The Maximum MVA for a transformer will be updated
based on the value of this field. If the System Frequency in the project is set to 60 Hz (on the
Defaults Editor) the project will be assumed to follow ANSI Standard. Projects with System
Frequency set to 50 Hz will be assumed to follow IEC Standard.
The following is a list of valid values for this field for a project based on ANSI standard:
OA, OW, OW/A, OA/FA, OA/FA/FA, OA/FA/FOA, OA/FOA/FOA, FOA, FOW
The following is a list of valid values for this field for a project based on IEC standard:
ONAN, ONWN, ONWN/ONAN, ONAN/ONAF, ONAN/ONAF/ONAF, ONAN/ONAF/OFAF,
ONAN/OFAF/OFAF, OFAF, OFWF, ODWF, ONAN/OFAN/OFAF, OFAN, OFAN/OFAF,
ONWF
If the value of the field is different from values in the above list, the value of the Class field on
the Info page of the Transformer Editor in ETAP will be set to Other and the Maximum MVA
will not be updated.
If the positive and zero sequence impedance / X/R ratio of the transformer is 0, it is set to a
typical value based on the Transformer rated MVA and rated voltages.
Blank Fields
If a value for a numeric field exists in ETAP but is blank or zero in the Equipment List, modify
action will not be generated for it. Note that this does not apply to fields representing a text value.

If a Modify or Add action is generated for induction and / or synchronous motors, and:
If the power factor and efficiency of the motor in the equipment list are blank or 0 the kVA /
HP, full load amp and impedance data for the motor will be updated.
If the power factor and efficiency of the motor in the equipment list are non-zero, the kVA /
HP and full load amp of the motor will be updated. Impedance data will not be updated for
this case.
If the power factor or efficiency is blank or zero, an error message will be logged and no
action will be generated.
If mapping is missing for power factor at 75% loading and power factor at 50% loading, they
will be set equal to the field mapped to power factor at 100% loading.
If mapping is missing for efficiency at 75% loading and efficiency at 50% loading, they will
be set equal to the efficiency at 100% loading.
40-27
Data X

When the Transfer Data button on the Data Synchronization Editor is clicked a comparison is
made between the existing ETAP project data and the data in the MS Excel file. Based on the
comparison a list of actions is prepared and displayed on the Accept / Reject Actions Editor as
shown below.
Date / Time
The top-left corner of the editor displays the date and time on which the ETAP project and e-DPP
project is synchronized.
User Name
Action List
Item No.
is performed.
40-28
Data X
Equipment Type
Action
Accept
Modification
Accept Actions
Reject Actions
Continue
action list.
Cancel
project.
40.3.6 Special Cases

There are some special cases at importing from excel to ETAP which need to be paid attention:
Multiple Imports
At the first import the one-line diagram will be laid out automatically by ETAP based on an
internal logic. After the first import (second and up) in case that there are new elements added to
excel, ETAP will not use the auto-layout program anymore and if those new elements will not be
connected to an existing equipment (such as a bus) inside the project they will be laid out on the
top most right corner of the one-line diagram.
40-29
Data X
Excel Open Format
40.4 Excel - Open Format

ETAP Microsoft (MS) Excel Open Format Data Exchange program (henceforth referred to as
Excel Open Format DataX) is used to import generic Microsoft Excel files with data arranged in
columns for synchronous motors, induction motors, lumped loads, static loads two-winding
transformers, cables and buses.
The program intelligently determines the mapping of data from Excel worksheet columns to
ETAP element attributes. It allows users to modify the mapping interpreted by the program. The
program works with minimal user input and provides default values and options for all
parameters required for data exchange.
Excel Open Format DataX program can be used to import data multiple times which allows the
user to update the ETAP model whenever data in the Microsoft Excel file changes.
The following block diagram explains the import of data from a Microsoft Excel file into an
ETAP project as well as data export from ETAP to Microsoft Excel.
The Data Map module may be used to customize the mapping of data in the MS Excel
worksheets with ETAP elements and their attributes. Once the mapping is available, the Data
Exchange Interface compares the data in the MS Excel file with the data in the ETAP project and
creates a list of Add, Modify, and Delete actions. Accepted actions are applied to the ETAP
project.
It is also possible to add more intelligence to the program with the help of a customizable
Extended Markup Language (XML) file.
40-30
Data X
Excel Open Format
40.4.1 Accessing DataX Excel Open Format

The Excel - Open Format commands can be invoked by going to the File | Data Exchange
menu as shown below.
The tool is active only in Edit mode because it is used to add or modify data in an ETAP project.
The Excel - Open Format command is used to transfer data from a MS Excel file into an
ETAP project.
40-31
Data X
Excel Open Format
40.4.2 Basic Requirements for MS Excel File

The - MS Excel file from which data is transferred to ETAP may have data in any format as long
as the format satisfies the following minimum requirements.
Data for various types of elements should be arranged in individual worksheets of the MS
Excel file, thereby, allowing mapping of individual worksheets to one type of ETAP
element. There is one exception to this rule data for induction motors, synchronous
motors, lumped loads and static loads may be in the same worksheet.
Column captions in a worksheet may be formed by merging multiple columns and/or

rows. However one column will represent one ETAP element attribute. This means data
columns should not be merged.
Data in hidden columns and/or rows will not be transferred.
One row in a worksheet should represent the attributes of one ETAP element, that is, data
for one ETAP element should not be specified in more than one row.
ETAP data exchange program will automatically add a column at the end of the last
mapped column for writing unique ETAP identifiers, henceforth referred as OtiGUIDs
(OTI Global Unique Identifiers). The identifiers facilitate comparison of element data.
End of data records in a worksheet will be identified by a row in which the entry for the
column representing element ID is blank. Rows in the worksheet after a row with blank
ID column are not processed.
40.4.3 Data Exchange Knowledge Base

Excel Open Format DataX program uses a customizable knowledge base (henceforth referred as
DataX Knowledge Base) for analyzing data in the MS Excel file and performing data exchange.
This knowledge base is in the form of an extended markup language (XML) file which may be
viewed in Internet Explorer and modified using Notepad or any XML editing tool. The XML file
is named ExcelFreeFormatRules.xml and is located in the DataExRes folder. The DataExRes
folder is located in the folder where ETAP is installed (by default C:\ETAP1100 or current ETAP
version).
The DataX Knowledge Base is organized into several sections or tables. Following is a
description of each section.
WorksheetNamesToIgnore
This table has only one column named IgnoreName.
Example
<WorksheetNamesToIgnore IgnoreName="Cover" />

<WorksheetNamesToIgnore IgnoreName="Cvr" />
<WorksheetNamesToIgnore IgnoreName="Cover Sheet" />
40-32
Data X
Excel Open Format
<WorksheetNamesToIgnore IgnoreName="Cvr Sheet" />
Ignore Name
Data in worksheets with names matching one of the entries in this column is not transferred to
ETAP.
WorskheetTypeMap
This table has two columns InternalType and WSName and relates worksheet names and
internal types. An internal type represents an ETAP element type or a group of ETAP element
types.
Example


<WorksheetTypeMap InternalType="Load" WSName="Load" />

<WorksheetTypeMap InternalType="Motor" WSName="Mtr" />
<WorksheetTypeMap InternalType="Motor" WSName="Motor Load" />

<WorksheetTypeMap InternalType="Induction Machine" WSName="IndMotor" />
<WorksheetTypeMap InternalType="Induction Machine" WSName="Ind" />
InternalTypes
Entries in InternalType column are types recognized internally by Excel Open Format DataX
program. This version of Excel Open Format DataX program supports the following
InternalTypes.
Load
A worksheet which has one or more ETAP element load types (induction
machine, synchronous motor, static load and lumped load) and includes a column
for connected bus.
Load MCC
machine, synchronous motor, static load and lumped load) and the worksheet
name represents the connected bus. If a worksheet name does not match any
entries in WSName column of the WorksheetTypeMap table it is assumed to be a
bus ID.
Motor
A worksheet which has one or more induction machine or synchronous motor

element data records and includes a column for connected bus. The worksheet
name in this case does not represent the connected bus.
Induction
Machine
A worksheet which has only induction machine loads.
Synchronous
Motor
A worksheet which has only synchronous motor loads.
Lumped Load A worksheet which has only lumped loads.

Static Load
A worksheet which has only static loads.
40-33
Data X
Excel Open Format
Bus
A worksheet which has only buses.
Cable
A worksheet which has only cables.
Two-winding
Transformers
A worksheet which has only two-winding transformers.
WSName
This column represents a user specified worksheet name.
Field Dictionary Sections

These sections in the DataX Knowledge Base specify default mapping of ETAP element
attributes to column captions in a MS Excel file worksheet. These sections are
ComFieldDict,
IndMotorFieldDict,
SynMotorFieldDict,
LumpedLoadFieldDict,
StaticLoadFieldDict,
BusFieldDict,
CableFieldDict,
Xform2WfieldDict.
Each of these sections has two columns FieldName and ColCaption.
All the field dictionary sections except the ComFieldDict section specify possible column
captions of ETAP Element attributes for individual ETAP elements.
ComFieldDict section defines possible column caption of fields that are common to all ETAP
elements. For a list of attributes that are common to all ETAP elements refer to the FieldName
section below.
Example
<ComFieldDict FieldName="ID" ColCaption="ETAP ID" />

<ComFieldDict FieldName="ID" ColCaption="Equipment ID Number" />
<LumpedLoadFieldDict FieldName="MVA" ColCaption="kVA"/>
<LumpedLoadFieldDict FieldName="MVA" ColCaption="kVA / kW"/>
FieldName
This represents an ETAP element field or attribute name.
In the ComFieldDict section the FieldName column represents a field that applies to all ETAP
elements, henceforth referred to as common field. Common fields are all fields on Remarks and
Comment page and some fields on Info page of ETAP element editors. In the ComFieldDict
section this column can have one of the following entries, classified according to the ETAP
element editor page in which they are available.
Info Page
ID, Status, In Service
40-34
Data X
Excel Open Format
Remarks Page
MFR Name, Drawing / Diagram - One-Line, Drawing / Diagram Reference,

MFR Purchasing Date, User Field 1, User Field 2, User Field 3, User Field 4,
User Field 5, User Field 6, User Field 7
Comment Page
Comment
For the other field dictionary sections this field represents one of the individual element field
names.
ColCaption
This column represents a user given column caption which corresponds to the ETAP field or
attribute specified in the FieldName column.
ElementTypeLogic
As mentioned earlier, Excel Open Format DataX program is capable of transferring data from a
worksheet with multiple types of ETAP elements. This table in DataX Knowledge Base provides
a way to specify the logic for determining the type of ETAP element. It has seven columns
InternalType, ETAPElement, LogicID, FieldName, Op, Value and Join. These columns
correspond to those seen on the Element Type Logic editor as shown below.
Example
Example
<ElementTypeLogic
InternalType="Load"
ETAPElement="Induction Machine"
LogicID="1"
FieldName="Description"
Op="Contains" Value="ASD" Join="" />
<ElementTypeLogic
InternalType="Load"
ETAPElement="Static Load"
LogicID="1"
FieldName="Rated kVA"
Op="GreaterThan" Value="0" Join="AND"
/>
<ElementTypeLogic
InternalType="Load"
ETAPElement="Static Load"
LogicID="1"
FieldName="PF"
Op="EqualTo" Value="1" Join=""
/>
40-35
Interpretation
In a Load ]type (internal) worksheet
the data in a row represents an
ETAP Induction Machine if the
worksheet column with the caption
Description contains the text
ASD.
In a Load type (internal) worksheet

the data in a row represents an
ETAP Static Load if the worksheet
column with the caption RatedkVA
is greater than 0 and the worksheet
column with the caption PF is equal
to 1.
Data X
Excel Open Format
InternalType
Similar to the InternalType column in the WorksheetTypeMap section, entries in this column are
worksheet types recognized internally by Excel Open Format DataX program. However, the only
applicable InternalTypes which require logic for determining element types are the ones
representing a group of ETAP element types Load, LoadMCC, and Motor.
ETAPElement
This column represents the type of ETAP element for which the logic applies. If the logic
condition specified by other columns in this table results in a true value for a row in the MS Excel
file worksheet, the row will represent the ETAP element specified by this column.
LogicID
Represents a unique numeric value. Each logic condition which may be represented by multiple
entries in the ElementTypeLogic table is identified by a unique numeric identifier. Typically,
using a number more than the highest LogicID is acceptable.
FieldName
FieldName represents one of the ETAP Element fields which is selected from one of the entries in
FieldName column of the tables: ComFieldDict, IndMotorFieldDict, SynMotorFieldDict,
LumpedLoadFieldDict or StaticLoadFieldDict.
Op (Operator)
This field represents the operator which is used while defining a logic condition. It can have one
of the following values - Contains,
EqualTo, NotEqualTo, LessThan, LessThanEqual,
GreaterThan, and GreaterThanEqual. The operator Contains is used with text fields for checking
if it contains the text specified in the Value column.
Value
This is a text or numeric value applicable to the logic condition.
Join
Use the Join column to combine logic statements. The possible values are And, Or and blank. A
blank value defaults to Or condition.Excel Open Format Importing Data
Use this option to import a MS Excel file into ETAP. The following sections provide details on
importing data into ETAP.
40.4.4 Specifying the MS Excel File

Clicking on the Excel - Open Format command shows the ETAP Microsoft Excel Data
Exchange editor as shown below.
40-36
Data X
Excel Open Format
Data Exchange
Select Import to transfer data from a MS Excel file into ETAP.
Export Using
This option is not applicable while importing data from a MS Excel file and is disabled while
importing data.
Microsoft Excel Data File

This field is used to specify a MS Excel file from which data is imported into an ETAP project or
a file into which data is exported from an ETAP project depending upon the selected Data
Exchange option.
Click "Browse" to select an existing MS Excel file as shown below:
Reset
Clicking on the Reset button displays the following dialog box.
Selecting the Yes option will remove information (if any) pertaining to ETAP MS Excel Data
Exchange from the selected MS Excel File. Selecting the No option cancels the Reset command
40-37
Data X
Excel Open Format
40.4.5 Worksheet Parameters

After selecting the MS Excel File from which data needs to be imported into ETAP and clicking
OK, the ETAP Microsoft Excel Data Exchange will evaluate the data in the existing spreadsheet.
Based on the evaluated worksheet parameters the editor shown below is displayed.
View
Click on the view button to open the MS Excel file from which data needs to be imported. The
file is opened in Read Only mode to facilitate specification of worksheet parameters.
Worksheet Parameters
The options in this section allow for the specification of individual parameters pertaining to each
worksheet in the MS Excel file for facilitating data transfer to ETAP.
Individual Worksheet Parameters

The Individual Worksheet Parameters data grid allows specification of parameters that facilitate
data transfer from a worksheet in the MS Excel file to ETAP.
40-38
Data X
Excel Open Format
Name
This column displays the names of worksheets in the MS Excel file. The names cannot be
modified.
Type
When data is transferred for the first time, Excel Open Format DataX program tries to determine
the type of worksheet based on the name of the worksheet and information in DataX Knowledge
Base.
This version of Excel Open Format DataX program supports the following types of worksheets:
Load
machine, synchronous motor, static load and lumped load) and includes a column
for connected bus.
Load MCC
machine, synchronous motor, static load and lumped load) and the worksheet
name represents the connected bus. If a worksheet name does not match any
entries in WSName column of the WorksheetTypeMap table, it is assumed to be
a bus ID.
Motor
A worksheet which has one or more induction machine or synchronous motor

element data records and includes a column for connected bus. The worksheet
name in this case does not represent the connected bus.
Induction
Machine
A worksheet which has only induction machine loads.
Synchronous
Motor
A worksheet which has only synchronous motor loads.
Lumped Load A worksheet which has only lumped loads.

Static Load
A worksheet which has only static loads.
Bus
A worksheet which has only buses.
Cable
A worksheet which has only cables.
Two-winding
Transformers
A worksheet which has only two-winding transformers.
Note that if a match between type of worksheet and worksheet name is not found, the Excel Open
Format DataX program sets the worksheet type to Load MCC. There is a possibility that an
incorrect match is made by the program. In such cases , the worksheet type may be modified.
Skip Import
Check the Skip Import check box to disable transfer of data from a worksheet to ETAP. When
data is transferred for the first time, this checkbox is checked for cover / summary worksheets
that have worksheet names matching entries in IgnoreName column of
WorksheetNamesToIgnore section of DataX Knowledge Base.
40-39
Data X
Excel Open Format
Caption Start Row

Caption End Row
Default Type
Startis Row
This Data
column
applicable only for worksheets that have more than one type of ETAP element,
that is, Load, Load MCC and Motor type worksheets. If none of the specified logic conditions
apply to a row in the worksheet, the row is assumed to represent the ETAP element type specified
for this field. The allowed values for this version of the program are Induction Machine,
Synchronous Motor, Lumped Load, Static Load, Bus, Cable, Two-winding Transformer and n/a
(not applicable).
Voltage Value or Cell

In the case that the voltage value has not been specified in the worksheet for a component, it can
be specified in this column for each individual element. The voltage unit can be specified along
with the voltage value however if the unit is not provided, it is assumed to be as kV.
Enter either a numeric value or a cell address in Excel A1 style reference. Optionally one of the units 'kV'
or 'V' may be added. The default unit is kV. Examples of acceptable values are described below.
Voltage
Specified Value
400 V
0.4 kV
0.4
B12 (kV)
B12 (V)
Magnitude
400
0.4
0.4
value in cell B12
value in cell B12
B12
value in cell B12
Unit
Volt
kV
kV (default)
kV
V
If V or kV is specified in
B12 it is selected as the unit,
otherwise the unit is kV
Caption Range
This parameter is used to define the address of the range in an Excel worksheet that has a caption range of
all columns from which data is transferred to ETAP. A valid caption range is an A1 style Excel range
address. The following rules apply while specifying a caption range.
It should include a start row and an optional end row.
Alternatively it may include start and/or end columns.
The start column should be less than the end column.
It should not overlap into the Data Range.
It should have the same start and end columns as the Data Range.
Examples of acceptable values are

Caption
Range
Rows
Start
Columns
End
Start
40-40
End
Remark
Data X
Excel Open Format

Caption
Range
Start
Rows
End
Columns
3 (n/s)
3:4
A3:4
3:Y4
A3:Y4
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
Start
End
not specified (n/s)

n/s
A
n/s
A
n/s
n/s
Y
Y
Remark
minimum
Required
Complete
When the end row is not specified it is assumed to be the same as the start row. The caption rows are all the
rows from the start row to the end row.
When the start column is not specified it is assumed to be the firt column with a non-blank entry in the
caption rows. When the end column is not specified it is assumed to be the column before the first column
with a blank entry in the caption rows after the Start column.
Data Range
This parameter is used to define the address of the range in an Excel worksheet that has all the rows from
which data is transferred to ETAP. A valid data range is an A1 style Excel range address. The following
rules apply while specifying a caption range.
It should include a start row and an optional end row.
Alternatively it may include start and/or end columns.
The start column should be less than the end column.
It should not overlap the Caption Range.
It should have the same start and end columns as the Caption Range.
Examples of acceptable values are

Data Range
Rows
Columns
Start
End
6 (n/s)
6:8
A6:8
6:Y8
A6:Y8
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
Start
End
not specified (n/s)

n/s
A
n/s
A
n/s
n/s
Y
Y
Remark
minimum
Required
Complete
Types
This is also applicable only for worksheets that have more than one type of ETAP element, that
is, Load, Load MCC and Motor type worksheets. For these types of worksheets, this column
displays a button with ellipses (). For other type of worksheets, this column displays n/a (not
applicable).
Clicking on the button displays an editor used to specify Logic for Determining Element Types.
Refer to the next section for details on entering data in this editor.
Apply
Click on the Apply button to copy the current worksheet parameters to all other worksheets.
40-41
Data X
Excel Open Format
OK
Click on OK to save changes and display the Data Synchronization editor.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to discard changes and cancel data exchange.
40.4.6 Logic for Determining Element Types

This editor is used to specify the logic for determining element types in a worksheet that has more
than one type of ETAP element.
Worksheet
This shows the name of the worksheet to which the logic conditions apply. It also displays the
type of the selected worksheet which may be Load, Load MCC and Motor.
ETAP Element
When the specified logic conditions are true the ETAP element that will apply is selected using
this field.
Logic ID
This is an auto-generated display only number. Select the Logic ID row and click on the Add
button to create a new Logic ID with another set of logic conditions.
40-42
Data X
Excel Open Format
Column
This drop-down field lists column captions read from the Excel
file. If the column captions are not correct the most common
reason is incorrect specification of caption start and end rows for
the worksheet.
Select the column caption to which the logic condition applies.
Operator
Select the operator in the logic condition. The available operators are shown
alongside.
The operator Contains is used with text fields for checking if it contains the
text specified in the Value column.
Value
This is a text or numeric value applicable to the logic condition.
Join
Use the Join column to combine logic statements. The possible values are
shown alongside. Blank value defaults to Or condition.
Add
Use the Add button to add a new logic condition. Select the Logic ID row itself to select a new
set of logic conditions. If the Logic ID row is not selected the logic condition is added to the
currently active Logic ID.
Delete
Click on Delete to delete the selected logic condition.
OK
Click on OK to save the specified logic conditions and close the editor.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to discard changes in the specified logic conditions and close the editor.

When the OK button on the ETAP Microsoft Excel Data Exchange editor is clicked, the Data
Synchronization editor is displayed as shown below.
40-43
Data X
Excel Open Format
Microsoft Excel File

This is the name of the Microsoft Excel source file from which data is exchanged.
ETAP Project
This is the name of the ETAP project file with which the data from Microsoft Excel file is
synchronized.
Map Data
Click on this button to perform data mapping. This action displays the Data Mapping editor.
Transfer Data
Click on this button to synchronize data, that is add, modify, or delete elements in the ETAP
project based on the data in the MS Excel file. Clicking on the Transfer Data button displays the
list of modifications prepared after comparison of existing ETAP project data and the data in the
MS Excel file.
Close
Click on Close to close the editor. Data synchronization will not be performed.

Equipment attributes in the MS Excel file can be mapped to ETAP element attributes using the
Data Mapping Editor as shown below.
40-44
Data X
Excel Open Format
Equipment
This column shows a list of different types of elements in the MS Excel file. The entries in this
column cannot be edited.
ETAP Element
The ETAP elements mapped to MS Excel equipment are displayed in this column.
Map Fields
Click on the MS Excel equipment node (the + sign on the left hand side of the editor) to display
the attribute mapping for the equipment. The rows in the attribute mapping table highlighted with
Lavender color are blocked, that is, the ETAP field corresponding to the Microsoft Excel
Worksheet column may not be modified for such rows. Blocked rows have a hard-coded mapping
associated with them.
Equipment Field
This column displays a list of MS Excel equipment attributes associated with the equipment.
ETAP Field
Select an ETAP element attribute corresponding to the MS Excel equipment attribute.
40-45
Data X
Excel Open Format

When the Transfer Data button on the Data Synchronization editor is clicked a comparison is
made between the existing ETAP project data and the data in the MS Excel file. Based on the
comparison a list of actions is prepared and displayed on the Accept / Reject Actions editor as
shown below.
Date / Time
The top-left corner of the editor displays the date and time on which the ETAP project and MS
Excel project is synchronized.
User Name
40-46
Data X
Excel Open Format
Action List
Item No.
is performed.
Equipment Type
Action
Accept
Modification
Accept Actions
Reject Actions
Continue
Click on Continue to perform data transfer to ETAP per the accepted and rejected action list.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to cancel data transfer to ETAP. No changes are made in the ETAP project.
40-47
Data X
Project Merge
40.5 Project Merge

Keywords:
TCC = Star Time Characteristic Curve (in this document)
OLV = One Line Diagram
Project merge provides the capability of comparing and merging two projects at a time which this
process usually starts from the source project (master) going to the sync project (copy) for
making changes and finally merge back to the source project as indicated in the following
diagram.
Master/Source Project: is supposed to be a project which all the copy projects will be
merged into it.
Copy/Sync Project: is a copy retrieved from the master project in order to make required
changes which at the end can be merged into master project
The following shows the algorithm of project merge process:
40-48
Data X
Project Merge
40.5.2 Project Merge and ETAP Databases

The following table shows necessary information regarding ETAP databases which can be used
for project merge:
ETAP Database
MS Access Database
SQL Express 2000
Maximum
Limit
2 GB
2 GB
Size Database
Compaction
Applicable
N/A
Recommended for Merge
SQL Express 2005
4 GB
N/A
Yes
SQL Express 2008

SQL Express 2008
R2
SQL Server 2005
SQL Server 2008
SQL Server 2010
Oracle 10g Database
4 GB
10 GB
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
4 GB
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Important Notes:
If the maximum size limit of the master project database is not reached, unlimited
number of components can be merged into master (elements + star views)
It is crucial to check the size of the master project regularly since it might reach the
maximum capacity while merging
Reaching the maximum capacity of the master project database while merging to it, will
quite the merge process automatically with no merge actions processed
It is crucial to always maintain master project with backups in the case of any corruption /
crash while or after merging
The process of comparison and merging projects may take a long time depending on the
size of the master/copy projects
40.5.3 Merge Algorithm

Note: It is recommended to be familiar with the process of merging through the followings
chapters then refer to the Project Merge (key Notes)
In this document and also Project Merge Administrator Guide (provided as a separate manual)
before performing the merge process in order to understand different possibilities and scenarios in
project merge process.
In this document and also Project Merge Administrator Guide (provided as a separate manual)
before performing the merge process in order to understand different possibilities and scenarios in
project merge process.
40-49
Data X
Project Merge
Merge Cycle
In order to perform merging between the master and copy projects the following cycle needs to be
maintained (algorithm is shown in the above picture Figure 1):
Assign a project as a master project
Send a copy of master to designated engineer(s)
Make required changes to copy project(s)
Export the portion of copy project with changes to be merged to master
Comparison of the master and copy projects
Automatic determination of the merge actions per identifiers
Merge copy to master project with the accepted actions
Send copies of master to engineer(s) again to maintain this loop
Why updating engineers with the latest master project?

There is a loop that needs to be maintained between the master and copy projects in order to
maintain the existing identifiers of the elements and TCCs.
As indicated before, when an element/TCC is created an Identifier will be assigned to it instantly.
In the case of sending a copy of master to engineers, all those Identifier s for elements/TCCs will
be there in the copy project so engineers either work with the same elements to make changes to
them or start adding new elements. Any new element in any project will have a new Identifier and
will be accounted as a new element for the master project when merging. All the existing
Identifiers across the projects though will be identified as same elements but maybe modified
properties.
Now when all the copy projects are merged into master, all the engineers should get a new copy
of master with the designated areas that they are assigned to work on in order to maintain the
existing Identifiers inside the master project. This will help to keep track of the existing elements
between the master and copy projects all the time if this loop is maintained.
It is also recommended to follow a weekly schedule for merging the copy projects into master so
right after the merge everyone can be updated with the latest changes in the master project
otherwise it will be hard to keep all the projects synchronized.
40.5.4 Process of Merging

Start from Existing Master Project
This section is showing the case that the master project is already specified and built with existing
elements and TCCs. From this point on this project will be sent to several engineers to work on
different portions of it and finally merge back into the master project periodically based on
weekly basis preferably. At the end of merging all the engineers that are assigned to continue
working on this project will get updated with the latest complete master project or portions of it.
Sending Copies to Engineers

Projects can be sent using two methods:
Copying the master project for the engineer (only applicable to projects with MS Access
database MDB)
Exporting the master project fully or partially (applicable to all project databases)
40-50
Data X
Project Merge
Copying Project To (MS Access only)

Copying the complete master project to other engineers can be done as specified in the following
steps:
Click on File menu
Click on Copy project To
Specify the name/location of the project to be saved in Copy Project To window
Press Save button
The saved project is ready to be sent to user/engineer.
Send by Email or FTP Server (MS Access only)

In this method the complete project will be sent or uploaded for the engineer(s). the following
shows how to send a project by email or upload to FTP server:
40-51
Data X
Project Merge
Select one of the following options to send your project by email, FTP server or save on the hard
drive. This will automatically zip the project file for you.
40-52
Data X
Project Merge
Export from a Project (MS Access & SQL Databases)

Exporting from a project can be done in two methods:
Full Export
Partial Export
Partial Export
There are situations that only a portion of the model/network needs to be sent to the designated
engineer. In this case partial export will help.
Open the project
Highlight/rubber-band a portion of the one-line diagram which needs to be sent out. That
portion will turn into red color representing the selected portion
Click on File menu

Browse Data Exchange menu
Browse Project Merge menu
Click on Export Archive
40-53
Data X
Project Merge
There will pop up a message asking if you would like to export the selected portion or export the
whole project by ignoring the selection:
Yes: export the selected portion partial export
No: export all elements
Cancel: cancel the export completely
By clicking on Yes button the selected portion will be exported and ETAP will ask you where
to save the exporting file.
Important Note: partial export only includes the elements and wont include any TCCs in the
exported file.
Full Export
For full export the same steps need to be followed mentioned in Partial Export section except
there is no need to select an area/portion. This will automatically include the whole model as a
full export including all TCCs.
Export Revisions
Exporting from the base and revision(s) of a project is available in project merge. It needs to be
emphasized that the items mentioned in the following table become locked in the revisions. They
40-54
Data X
Project Merge
are set and propagated always from the base which means while merging those properties always
need to be changed in the base of the master project firstly then get reflected in the revision(s)
otherwise those cannot be changed inside the revisions independently from the base:
Element Type
2w-Transformer
3w-Transformer
Cable
Line
Reactor
Impedance
Power Grid
Generator
Ind. Machine
Sync. Motor
Lumped Load
MOV
Static Load
Capacitor
Panel System
Phase Adapter
Open Delta Trans
Bus Duct
Grounding/Earth Adapter
MG Set
Recloser
UPS
Inverter
VFD
ST/ DT Switch / Contactor
LVCB/HVCB/Fuse
HVDC
Static Var
Wind Turbine
PV Array
Harmonic Filter
Overload Heater
Ground Switch
In-Line Relay
CT / PT
Relays
Volt/Amp Meter
Multi Meter
Battery
Charger
Composite CSD
DC-DC Converter
-
Editor Property
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
From Bus
Bus
Bus
Bus
From Bus
Bus
From Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
Standard
Standard
Parameter Est.
Grounding
Grounding
BIL Limit
Grounding
Grounding
Grounding
Grounding
Grounding
Grounding
#of Circuits
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
Standard
Grounding
Impedance
Grounding
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
Phasing
DC Bus
Phasing
Phasing
Grounding
Grounding
Phasing
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
To Bus
Grounding
Library Rating
To Bus
Phasing
To Bus
User would be able to export base or a revision(s) of a project one at a time.
40-55
Data X
-
Project Merge
Base/revision can be exported from master/copy projects using either partial/full
methods.
Each revision can be exported individually one at a time.
Exported revision will only contain the records of data for that revision plus the base
data which there are no records of those in that revision.
Connectivity and phase data is always coming from the base of a project.
In the case of merging a revision to a brand new project, that revision will become
the base of that project
Options to Save Exported File

There are two options for saving the exported file:
OTA (.ota): this format will contain all the elements in the exported file.
XML (.xml): this will only include the elements in the exported file with no TCC.
Working on Copy Project

Engineer can start working on the copy project by opening the project if it is an existing project or
if he/she is assigned to start from scratch he/she can create a new project.
If the exported file is given to the engineer (.ota or .xml) as the copy project he/she needs to
import that file into a blank project then start making changes. This import is similar process of
merging which will be covered in How to Merge and Merge & Sync Interface in the following
sections.
40-56
Data X
Project Merge
Assuming that the copy project is ready to be worked on (either it is the complete project or
partial project which has been imported to a blank project). By having the project open the
engineer can start making the required changes such as:
Add new elements or TCCs
Delete the existing elements or TCCs
Modify the existing elements or TCCs
Reroute the connections between the elements
Modify the existing revision data for elements or TCCs
Add new revisions
When the changes are to the point that copy project is ready to be merged to master, the engineer
needs to export the copy project as indicated in the export project section so it can be utilized for
merging. The exported file needs to be sent to the master project administrator or it needs to be
located in such a way that administrator has access to that file (could be placed in a network).
How to Merge
When the export file is submitted to the master project administrator, merge can be started using
the following steps:
Make sure that one of the OLV presentations are active/selected
Make sure that Edit mode is selected
Make sure that Base revision is selected not other revisions
Click on File menu
Browse Data Exchange menu
Browse Project Merge menu
Click on Merge From
ETAP will ask you for the exported file from the copy project (.ota or .xml) along with
the desired revision to merge into as shown in the following pictures:
40-57
Data X
Project Merge
button user can browse to locate the exported file from the copy
By clicking on
project.
There is a drop down in this dialog as Select Revision to merge changes into when
merging into master. This drop down list reflects the existing revisions inside the
current project plus the Prompt option. By selecting Prompt option and pressing
OK button the Project Revision Control Create dialog will appear ready for
creating a new revision to be used to merge the copy project export file into it. The
40-58
Data X
Project Merge
administrator of merging can decide what revision/base to be selected and used for
merging.
By pressing OK button the process of merging will be started. An archive file for the
selected revision (revision records plus base data for missing revision records) will
also be exported from the master project in order to run a comparison between the
exported file from copy project and exporting file from master project.
By pressing on Cancel button the merging process will be canceled.
As soon as exporting the master project is done, ETAP starts comparing the two
files in order to determine the proper actions between the two files:
Exported .ota or .xml from copy project
40-59
Data X
Project Merge
Exported .ota or .xml from master project

The results of the comparison of the two files will appear in the Merge & Sync
Interface as shown in the following:
Merge & Sync Interface Elements Wizard

When this interface pops up there are already actions determined by the program as a result of
comparing the master and copy files based on the element GUIDs. User would be able to review
those actions and make decision in order to accept/reject them.
State & Action

Those columns list all the determined actions and their associated states for the listed elements
between the master and copy projects.
The following actions/states are predicted for merge:
Action
None
State
Same
None
Deleted (To)
Description
Identifiers match No property difference
between two elements
Identifiers match element in master is
inside dumpster / element in copy is inside
one-line no further action required
40-60
Data X
Project Merge
None
Deleted (Both)
None
Deleted (From)
Add
New
Modify
Modified
Delete
Deleted (From)
Identifiers match both elements in master

and copy are inside dumpster no further
action required
Identifiers match element in copy has
been purged & doesnt exist in dumpster /
element in master is inside one-line no
further action required
No match could be found for the element
from copy project add it to the master
Identifiers match property/properties of
matched elements between master/copy
files have changed
Identifiers match element in copy is
inside dumpster / element in master is
inside one-line delete that element from
master
Important Note:
Only the elements within the same category or element type will be accounted for
comparison/syncing in the Merge & Sync interface. For example all the buses will go
through the process of comparison within the bus category.
Observing Element Properties

Observing the element properties will help the user to identify the differences/similarities
between the properties of the same element across master and copy projects within the same row.
By clicking the plus sign of an element listed on the From Project column the list of all
properties for those elements across copy and master project will be opened in a window named
as Properties Dialog. This either will show the list of the properties for the matched elements
within the same row or individual element on either side depending on type of action determined
for that row:
40-61
Data X
Project Merge
Properties Dialog
This dialog as explained in previous section, shows all the properties (attributes along with their
values) belonging to that row.
If there are two elements matched up in the same row this dialog will show the differences of the
values between the master (To) and copy (From) projects for that element otherwise it will show
only the list of the properties the individual element on one side.
There are three types of colors inside this dialog which determines the property value status:
White color = identical values
Gray color = specifically assigned to color of Identifier, ID and IID of elements if they
are the same
Yellow color = different values this overwrites the gray color if the Identifier, IDs or
IIDs are different
40-62
Data X
Project Merge
Action Filter
The action filter list includes all the actions as shown in the following picture:
The actions were previously explained in State & Action section. This filter allows the user to
specify what actions to be shown/hidden with their related row in the action list of Merge &
Sync Interface. In the above picture (Figure 15) Add and None actions are only selected as
filters to be shown on the interface.
Device Selection Filter

This filter allows the user to specify what type of elements to be shown in the Merge & Sync
interface.
There are three selections at the top as followings:

AC: only show the AC elements in the From/To Project list and filter out DC elements
DC: only show the DC elements in the From/To Project list and filter out AC elements
AC & DC: show both AC and DC elements which essentially would include all elements
Each of the three main filter categories (AC, DC and AC & DC) has subcategory selections
which allow the user to look into specific subcategories of elements. Following shows an
example of this:
AC All Elements = all the AC elements to be shown
AC Cable = all AC cables to be shown
40-63
Data X
Project Merge
Element Type Column

This column is a static column which only displays the type of elements listed in this list. This
will help the user to know what type of elements he is dealing with if he is looking for a specific
element between the existing element types.
This column can be sorted by clicking on its header.
Accept Column
By checking the accept check box for any element, that action will be accepted and will be ready
for merge process.
Merge as Partial Project (Initially Exported as Partial Project)
In the cases that master project is sent to the assigned engineers in the form of partial export,
when merging back to master project there could be some undesired disconnections happening as
a result of merging. The reason for it is, in the partial export not all the elements and subsequently
not all the connections are present. In this case when merging back, master project assumes that
the copy project has deleted those connections therefore they get deleted in the master project.
In order to avoid this by checking this check box user will override this rule and will consider the
copy project as a partial export (no matter if it was exported as partial/full from the copy project)
and will maintain the connections inside the master project.
Example:
Figure 1
Merge the exported composite network in a new project:
40-64
Data X
Project Merge
Figure 2
After making changes to this composite network in the copy project, export this project. When
exporting the project, if a portion of the OLV is not highlighted the export will be treated as full
export. In this case by clicking on the indicated check box the merging process will assume the
exported file is a partial export therefore the connections need to be maintained.
Accept All / Reject All Button

User can globally accept all or reject all actions by clicking on those buttons.
Important Note_1: This global accept/reject actions will only apply for the shown elements and
will not apply to the filtered elements.
Important Note_2: by accepting all the None actions program will perform the rerouting of
the connections and any necessary reconnection/disconnection if there are any coming from the
copy to master project. If none actions are not accepted there will be no rerouting of the
connections for the elements if applied in the copy project.
Finish Button
This will proceed with merging the accepted actions for the elements only and will finish merging
the elements without merging TCCs.
When this button is pushed a progress bar will show the merging progress for elements.
TCC Merge
This will proceed to TCC merging page. User will be able to accept/reject determined actions for
TCCs.
Cancel Button
This button will cancel the merge process and no actions in this case will be processed.
Help Button
This button will launch the User-Guide for project merge.
40-65
Data X
Project Merge
Merge Base/Revision
Project merge is able to merge revisions or base one at time. The following table shows the
possible merge options between the base/revisions across copy and master project files:
Merge Direction
Copy Base
Copy Revision
Master Base
Merge To
Merge To
Master Revision
Merge To
Merge To
Base to Base Merge

In this type of merge, base of the copy project will be merged into the base of the master project.
All the components data (i.e. engineering data) along with their connectivity, rerouting of the
connectors and phase arrangements will be merged from the base of the copy project to base of
the master project.
No change will happen to any revisions of the master project. The following table shows this
case:
Copy Base
Master Base (Existing)
Master Rev. (Existing)
Master Base (After Merge)
Master Rev. (After Merge)
Element
HP
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
1500
2500
2500
1500*
2500
Connection
MCC_1
Bus1
Bus1
MCC_1*
MCC_1*
Base to Revision Merge

In this case all the required data for merging from the copy project is included in the base of the
copy project which will get merged to the revision of the master project. Those data include
connectivity data, phasing, engineering data and etc. which all comes from the base of the copy
project.
If the base of the copy project gets merged to a revision of the master project what project merge
program does is to:
Detect the new elements, connections or phase arrangements between the BASE of the
copy and the BASE of the master project.
Prompt user to make changes (new/changed entities) to the base of the master project in
the accept/reject action list. This will resolve any differences regarding those entities
across copy and master projects. This is necessary to do because if there are new
elements added to the base of the copy project those needs to be added to the base of the
master project as well otherwise making changes into the revision of the master project
regarding the new entities become impossible. If user does not accept those specific
changes only changes regarding the existing elements/connections/phases can be merged.
Assuming that user accepts the new changes, the new changes will be made to the base of the
master project, and then propagated to the existing revisions of the master project. Then the
elements data from the base of the copy will be merged into the selected revision of the master
project. For example:
40-66
Data X
Copy Base
Project Merge
Element
HP
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
1500
2500
2500
2500
1500*
Connection
MCC_1
Bus1
Bus1
MCC_1*
MCC_1*
*This shows that the property has changed.

If user does not accept the new changes/additions/deletions the only available actions will be
limited to the existing common elements between the copy and master projects.
Revision to Revision Merge
Revision to Revision merging is very similar to Base to Revision merging (as described in above
section).
The only difference is that here the revision from the copy project is contains the necessary data
for merging instead of base which contains the revision records (i.e. changed data) for some
certain elements inside the revision plus the base data for connectivity, phasing and etc. (i.e. all
the blocked data in the revisions which directly comes from the base). Therefore the above table
will look like as:
Copy Rev.
Element
HP
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
1500
2500
2500
2500
1500*
Connection
MCC_1
Bus1
Bus1
MCC_1*
MCC_1*
Revision to Base Merge

In this case (which is similar to above merging sections) all the merging data is contained in the
revision of the copy project which will be merged into the base of the master project.
The only difference here is the revision of the copy project is bringing the engineering data plus
the other info from the base of the copy project such as connectivity, phasing and etc. and will
merge them into the base of the master without changing any revision data in the master project.
The following example shows this case:
Copy Rev.
Element
HP
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
Mtr1
1500
2500
2500
1500*
2500
40-67
Connection
MCC_1
Bus1
Bus1
MCC_1*
MCC_1*
Data X
Project Merge
Star TCC Merge Wizard

By clicking TCC Merge the program will go through the comparison of TCCs and then Merge
TCC wizard appear. In this wizard the actions for TCCs are determined similar to the elements in
the previous wizard based on the TCC Identifiers.
40-68
Data X
Project Merge
All the functionalities of this wizard are similar to Merge & Sync interface for elements. Same
logic used for elements to determine the actions is also used for TCCs.
From Project To Project

From Project: listed TCCs under From Project column are the TCCs from Copy project.
To Project: listed TCCs under To Project column are the TCCs from Master project.
Observing Star TCC Properties

By clicking on the plus sign for any of the available TCCs in Merge & Sync Star TCC wizard the
list of the existing elements inside that TCC will be expanded.
40-69
Data X
Project Merge
From Project: will show a list of all the elements inside the TCC on the copy (From)
project side.
To Project: will show a list of all the elements inside the TCC on the master (To) project
side.
Not necessarily the components listed under each TCC will match between the copy and
master (From & To) project sides for the matched up TCCs.
Important Note: Star TCC merge for matched up TCCs (in a row) is based on replacing the
TCCs from copy project to master project if user accepts the associated action. In another word, if
two TCCs are matched up in a row and user accepts the action of modification the TCC inside the
master (To) project will get replaced by the TCC from the copy (From) project. All the settings
will also get replaced with the replaced TCC.
Action Filter
The action filter includes all the actions as shown in the following picture:
40-70
Data X
Project Merge
The action filter was previously explained for the elements and the functionality of this filter is
identical for both (elements and TCCs).
Accept Column
By checking the accept check box for any TCC, that action will be accepted and will be ready for
merge process.
Accept All / Reject All Button

User can globally accept all or reject all actions for TCCs by clicking on those buttons.
Important Note: This global accept/reject actions will only apply for the shown TCCs and will
not include the filtered TCCs.
Help Button
This button will launch the User-Guide for project Merge.
Cancel Button
This button will cancel the merge process.
Finish Button
This button will finish the merge process including the accepted actions for TCCs.
When this button is pushed a progress bar will show the final merge progress.
40.5.5 Project Merge (Important Key Notes)

Please note the following key notes in regards to the project merge before performing this
process:
40-71
Data X
Project Merge
General
Merging to ETAP v.11 from old versions will add node(s) in between VFDs and motors
which will add up to the number of buses used in the network
Accepted modified action for element/TCC will replace all the properties at once, not
only the changed properties
Elements with the same Identifiers and different IDs will end up getting renamed in the
master project by ETAP default naming convention (ETAP will add sequential number to
the end of it) example: Old ID = Mtr1 New ID = Mtr1 + 1 = Mtr2
Merging to the selected presentation might change the location of the
elements/connections depending on what presentation had been selected on the exporting
copy project.
Status of the protective devices will only get merged in master if only the name of the
selected configuration exported from copy matches with the name of the configuration
selected in the master project when merging.
Connections & NONE Actions

If connectors of the elements in copy have been modified without changing the location
of the elements there will be no action generated when comparing two files. However in
case that those are required to be merged into master all the None actions need to be
accepted upon merging. This is because information for rerouted connectors is hidden
when merging inside the NONE actions.
The connections are always enforced from copy to master project (if the related actions
for them are accepted). What this means is, if connection are changed in the copy project
and the related action to those are accepted on the master project side, the master project
will be overwritten with the new connections and old connections will change to new
ones. Imagine the copy project looks like the following:
Master project has the same components however there is a circuit breaker added
between the transformer and the bus:
40-72
Data X
Project Merge
When merge from copy to master project there will be NONE actions generated for some
elements which in this case they are Transformer = T22 and Bus = Sub22 which have the
breaker in between them and there are no other modifications made to them. Those
NONE actions do not exactly mean there are no actions involved. If there is a change of
connection for any element(s) which is involved in that change, assuming there are no
other modifications to those elements a NONE action will be generated. By accepting
NONE actions user is accepting the change of connections as well which will be
performed automatically upon merging.
If the NONE actions for those elements are not accepted there will not be any change for
the connections inside the master project. Therefore user needs to pay attention when
accepting actions and if he/she is aware of the possible disconnections in the master
project.
40-73
Data X
Project Merge
The None actions are a way to represent also the connection changes right now. In the
next release of ETAP the connections will appear in the list of actions and user will be
able to see the actual changes for connections.
TCC Star Views
For modified star views (TCCs), merging will replace the whole TCC at once from the
copy to master project instead of modifying the existing TCC settings.
In the case of partial export, no star view (TCC) will be included in the exported file.
Revision Merge Notes

Any existing revision including base can be exported from master/copy project one at a
time.
In the case of selecting a revision in master project in order to merge into it, if there are
new elements coming in, those new elements will be automatically added to the base of
the current merging project along with all the existing revisions (if the relative actions are
accepted by the user) then the engineering data/properties will get modified accordingly
in the selected revision inside the master project.
The same logic applies for the deleted elements (similar to above). If there are elements
which are marked as deleted across copy and master projects they will be removed from
the base of the master project along with all the revisions first (if those actions are
accepted by the user) then the modification of the properties will take place accordingly
for the selected revision in the master project.
If user decides to reject the add/delete actions while merging to a revision of the master
project, those actions will not take place in the base and revision of the master project at
the same time.
There are some modification actions for certain properties across the copy and master
project which must be modified inside the base of the master project first. Without
changing those inside the base, revisions cannot reflect those property changes. Those
properties which are always dependent on the base of the project were explained in the
Export Revision section.
All the other properties which are being indicated in the table of Export Revisions
section must be treated and merged carefully since changing those will affect the merging
of the base and revisions (both) inside the master project. Basically those properties are
dictated from the base to the revisions.
Upon changing some certain properties/data (which are not part of the engineering
properties/data) for elements there will be revision records created for them when inside
the master project after merging to revisions. This only happens because merge program
sees any property change as a modification action to that element and as soon as there is a
modification to an element, a revision record needs to be created for it inside the merging
revision.
However this behavior is not observed in ETAP when changing those properties across
base/revisions within the editor of the elements.
40-74
Data X
Project Merge
An example of this is shown in the following:

Changing the state in the editor of a transformer the engineering data is the same as
base but the state is changed to Future and Service = In for Revision1:
Same element in base with different conditions:
Now this will be shown through project merge process.

First the state of the same element in copy project is changed to = Future and Service =
In:
40-75
Data X
Project Merge
Existing condition of the same element inside the master project:
Now merge to a new revision of the master project which has the above element with
those existing conditions:
The revision data gets changed to the new revision (123) even though there are no
engineering data involved in this change after merge although this does not happen when
changing the states only across editors. User must be aware of this change when using
project merge.
Phase Merging
As an example, if the user decides to change the phasing on the base of the copy project,
all the revisions will also inherit the same phasing for the elements inside the copy
project as well. Subsequently, when merging to the revision of the master project those
changes need to go through the base of the master project first in order to be propagated
in all the existing revisions. If the user does not accept changes which requires phase
changing on the base of the master project (which will have an effect on the revision
merging as described) ETAP will decide to disconnect the elements that do not have
matching phases inside the base of the master project (the same will be automatically
propagated to the revisions as well). The below image is showing an example of this
situation:
40-76
Data X
Project Merge
It is recommnded to include the whole single phase system in a partial export so at the
other end (when merging to master) all the changes for all the phase adapters and the
elements connected below them go through otherwise if the partial export do not include
the phase adapters involved in that specific circuit (as shown in the above image inside
the blue circle) master project will end up having diconnected element(s).
For single phase circuits in ETAP if there is a to be made connection as shown in the
following image which circuit 1 has phase arrangement of AB and circuit 2 has
phase arrangement of B:
40-77
Data X
Project Merge
If user decides to connect those elements together (transformer T7 to circuit breaker

down below it) ETAP would not allow that action. ETAP only allows direct connections
from a branch only for buses not for protective devices (LVCB, HVCB, Fuse, Switch,
and etc.) unless the circuit breaker is disconnected first from the bus, transformer is
connected to circuit breaker then the breaker can be connected to the bus. Therefore when
merging projects this needs to be taken into consideration that for single phase circuits (as
shown in above) if there is a protective device (only between a branch and bus similar to
above) which is connecting two circuits which have different phase arrangements, there
will be disconnection expected in the master project.
State Merging
Different actions will be generated for elements when merging to the master project. In the case
of having the following actions the Condition\State of the element will change depending on if it
is merging to base or revision.
Add
Modify
The following image and table show the merging results for those actions and their new state in
the master project:
Revision in Master
Base
Base
Revision
Revision
Action Copy to Master

Modify
Add
Add
Modify
Element State in Master

Modified
New
Future
Future
Example of merging to the base of the master project when Motor = Mtr1 is modified in the base
of the master project then its state will change to Modified:
40-78
Data X
Project Merge
40-79
Data X
e-DPP
40.6 e-DPP
e-DPP is an electrical data processing program. It provides a feature rich GUI for processing and
organizing large amounts of electrical data into manageable formats. It has functionalities that
automate the generation of a variety of data sheets and schedules. With the growing popularity of
e-DPP in recent years, the data exchange interface between ETAP and e-DPP is now provided as
a menu command in ETAP.
An e-DPP project includes data for electrical equipment in an industrial plant, such as loads,
cables, transformers, switchgear, motor control centers, protective devices etc. The electrical
properties of these equipments are transferred to the ETAP project via the ETAP e-DPP DataX
interface. This eliminates data re-entry and saves time.
In addition to a one-time auto-creation of one-line diagrams, ETAP e-DPP DataX also facilitates
multiple data transfers (synchronization) between e-DPP and ETAP. This essentially means
adding new equipment, updating existing equipment data, and removing equipment no longer in
use. As a result, data in ETAP and e-DPP are kept consistent without going through the manual
process of recording additions and modifications in both systems.
e-DPP
Project
Electrical
Equipment Data
INT
Database
Data
Exchange
Interface
ETAP
Add, Modify
& Delete
Actions
User
Confirmation
ETAP e-DPP Data Exchange: Data Flow
An intermediate (INT) database is exported from e-DPP. This Microsoft (MS) Access database
has the electrical data for equipment in the e-DPP project and is imported into ETAP using the
Data Exchange interface. Following sections describe the details of the process.
40-80
Data X
e-DPP
40.6.1 Accessing the DataX e-DPP Module

This DataX e-DPP command is used to transfer data from an intermediate database exported
from an e-DPP project into an ETAP project.
The intermediate database exported from an e-DPP project is in the form of a MS Access
database. The steps involved in linking an e-DPP intermediate database file to an ETAP project
are as follows:
Select the intermediate MS Access database file, usually named in the format
INTprojectname.mdb (where projectname is the name of the e-DPP project) file that has to
be linked to the ETAP project.
Perform mapping of equipment fields in MS Access database with ETAP element fields. The
default mapping available in the interface may be used.
Add, Modify or Delete actions are determined by the ETAP Data Exchange program after
comparison of existing ETAP project data and data in the intermediate MS Access database
file.
Actions may be accepted or rejected by a user. By default all actions except the delete actions
are accepted.
Transfer and update data into the ETAP project.
40.6.2 Selecting an INT Database File

When the DataX e-DPP selected, the Data Synchronization Editor is displayed as shown
below:
Data File Exported From e-DPP

Type the name of the intermediate database file created from the e-DPP project. Alternatively
select the file by clicking on Browse.
Browse
Click on Browse to select the intermediate database file created from the e-DPP project. The
editor shown below appears when Browse is clicked. It allows selection of MS Access database
files (with extension mdb). The selected file is linked with the ETAP project.
40-81
Data X
e-DPP
Show Log Message

Check this checkbox to display the log message file after data transfer is completed. By default
this checkbox is unchecked and the log message file is not displayed after the data transfer is
completed.

When the OK button on the ETAP - e-DPP Editor is clicked, the Data Synchronization Editor
as shown below will be displayed.
40-82
Data X
e-DPP
e-DPP Intermediate Database

This is the name of the e-DPP intermediate database file (MS Access database) from which data
is transferred.
ETAP Project
This is the name of the ETAP project file which is synchronized with the data from the
intermediate database file (exported from the e-DPP project). The name and location of the
currently open ETAP project is displayed here.
Map Data
Set Defaults
Click on this option to set the default parameters associated with ETAP e-DPP DataX interface.
The editor is shown below:
40-83
Data X
e-DPP
Global Flags
A list of modifications is prepared after comparing the data in the e-DPP project and in the ETAP
project. Global flags are used for setting up default values for actions displayed in the Accept /
Reject Actions Editor and are described below.
Flag
Action
If this option is checked all commands will be marked as
Accept All Actions
accepted by default, in the Accept / Reject Actions Editor
If this option is checked all Add commands will be marked
Accept All Add Actions
as accepted by default, in the Accept / Reject Actions Editor
If this option is checked all Modify commands will be
Accept All Modify Actions
marked as accepted by default, in the Accept / Reject Actions
Editor
If this option is checked all delete commands will marked as
Accept All Delete Actions
accepted by default, in the Accept / Reject Actions Editor
Accept All Rename Actions This option is presently not used
Composite Motors
This parameter controls the creation of composite motors, when data is transferred into an ETAP
project. If the number of motors or loads directly connected to a bus (including those connected
through protective devices and equipment cable) is more than this value a composite motor is
created in the ETAP project. By default this value is set to 10, that is, a composite motor will be
created when the number of motors or loads connected directly to a bus exceeds 10.
Composite Networks
This parameter controls the creation of composite networks, when data is transferred into an
ETAP project. If the no. of radial components in a branch exceeds this number a composite
network is created by the automatic layout program in ETAP. By default this value is set to a 100,
that is, a composite network will be created only when the number of radial elements connected is
more than 100.
Do not display buses as nodes

The automatic layout program detects instances, where in a bus may be represented as a node. For
example when there is feeder connected at the primary or secondary terminal of a transformer, it
may not be required to represent display the junction between the transformer and the feeder as a
bus, so the layout program sets such nodes to be displayed as a node.
By default this option is checked which implies that when data is transferred to ETAP all the
buses are represented as a bus and no nodes are created.
Element Position
This section is reserved for future use.
Transfer Data
Click on this button to synchronize data between the e-DPP project and the ETAP project. The
ETAP DataX interface performs a comparison between the two sets of data and generates Add,
Modify and Delete actions. The actions are displayed in the Accept / Reject Actions Editor.
Close
Click on Close to close the editor. Data synchronization is not performed.
40-84
Data X
e-DPP

Equipment attributes in an e-DPP project may be mapped to ETAP element attributes using the
Data Mapping Editor as shown below. The Data Mapping Editor serves as a user interface for
mapping e-DPP and ETAP projects. It performs the following functions:
Analyses the data in the intermediate database file exported from the e-DPP project to
determine the equipment types.
Determines the attributes associated with each equipment type.
Serves as an interface for mapping e-DPP equipment types with ETAP elements.
Serves as an interface for mapping e-DPP equipment attributes (fields) with ETAP element
attributes.
40-85
Data X
e-DPP
Map Equipment Types

e-DPP Equipment
This column displays a list of e-DPP equipment. Following types of e-DPP equipment are
available by default.
Bus
Cable
Capacitor
Contactor
Fuse
HVCB
Induction Motor
Lumped Load
LVCB
MOV
Overload Heater
Power Grid
Static Load
Generator
Synchronous Motor
UPS
Two-winding Transformer
Three-winding Transformer
(INTBus)
(INTCable)
(INTCAP)
(INTContactor)
(INTFuse)
(INTHVCB)
(INTIndMotor)
(INTLump)
(INTLVCB)
(INTMOV)
(INTOLH)
(INTPowerGrid)
(INTStaticLoad)
(INTSynGen)
(INTSynMotor)
(INTUPS)
(INTXFMR2)
(INTXFMR3)
ETAP Element
Select an ETAP element corresponding to the e-DPP equipment.
40-86
Data X
e-DPP
Following is a list of ETAP elements that may be mapped to e-DPP equipment. A default
mapping is displayed in the Mapping Editor.
Bus
Cable
Capacitor
Contactor
Fuse
HVCB
Impedance
Induction Machine
Lumped Load
LVCB
MOV
Overload Heater
Power Grid
Reactor
Static Load
Synchronous Motor
VFD
UPS
Map Fields
Click on the e-DPP Equipment node (the + sign on the left hand side of the editor) to display
the attribute mapping for the equipment. The rows in the attribute mapping table highlighted with
Lavender color are blocked, that is, the ETAP field corresponding to the e-DPP field may not
be modified for such rows. Blocked rows have a hard-coded mapping associated with them.
e-DPP Field
This column displays a list of e-DPP fields associated with the e-DPP equipment.
ETAP Field
Select an ETAP element attribute corresponding to the e-DPP equipment field.
40-87
Data X
e-DPP
Field Mapping Rules

This section describes the logic for mapping third party equipment fields in the e-DPP project
database to ETAP element attributes. All fields, other than those mentioned in this section are
mapped directly, that is the value of the ETAP field is made equal to the value of mapped field in
e-DPP project database. The text comparisons made in the program are case sensitive.
Default values
ETAP creates new elements (in case of Add action) by using default values for some element
attributes, and then replacing the default values with actual imported values. Therefore, when
Blank Fields
If a value for a numeric field exists in ETAP but is blank or zero in e-DPP project database,
modify action will not be generated for it. Note that this does not apply to fields representing a
text value.

If a Modify or Add action is generated for induction and / or synchronous motors, the
impedance data for the motor (LRC, LR PF, X/R, X, X, X0, X1) is set using typical values from
ETAP library based on kV, HP and speed of the motor.
Typical Data for Cables

When the size of a cable (linked to ETAP library) in ETAP project is modified in subsequent data
transfers, appropriate cable impedance and physical data is selected from the ETAP library based
on the modified cable size from e-DPP.
Note that if a cable parameter set in e-DPP has a value different from that in the ETAP library,
the value in the ETAP library takes precedence and is set in the ETAP project, for cases when a
cable is selected from the ETAP library.
40-88
Data X
e-DPP

When Transfer Data on the Data Synchronization Editor is clicked a comparison is made between
the existing ETAP project data and the data in the intermediate database file exported from the eDPP project. Based on the comparison a list of actions is prepared and displayed on the Accept /
Reject Actions Editor as shown below.
Date / Time
The top-left corner of the editor displays the date and time on which the ETAP project and e-DPP
User Name
Action List
Item No.
is performed.
40-89
Data X
e-DPP
Equipment Type
Action
Accept
Modification
Accept Actions
Click on the Add, Modify or Delete command in this group to accept all add, modify or delete
actions respectively shown in the modification list. Click on All in this group to accept all actions
in the list.
Reject Actions
Click on the Add, Modify or Delete command in this group to reject all add, modify or delete
actions respectively shown in the modification list. Click on All in this group to reject all actions
in the list.
Continue
Click on Continue to perform data transfer to ETAP per the accepted and rejected action list.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to cancel data transfer to ETAP. No changes are made in the ETAP project.
40.6.6 Using e-DPP Library Cables

When a cable is imported into an ETAP project, the ETAP e-DPP DataX program has the
capability to pick cables from the library associated with the ETAP project and set cable
parameters using the library data. However, if the default ETAP library (shipped with ETAP) is
associated with the ETAP project, it will not include e-DPP cable library data and hence the cable
parameters are not set.
The e-DPP cable library data is available in the ETAP library located in the folder C:\ ETAP
5.5\DataExExamples\DataX e-DPP (assuming that ETAP is installed in default installation
location C:\ETAP 5.5). The e-DPP cable data available in this library may be transferred to the
default ETAP library using the ETAP Copy/Merge command available in the ETAP Library
menu as shown below:
40-90
Data X
e-DPP
Note that the merge process should be performed prior to importing the e-DPP intermediate
database file into ETAP.
40-91
Data X
40.7 SmartPlant Electrical

SmartPlant Electrical is developed by Intergraph, as a complimentary product to its suite of
SmartPlant tools. It is a highly flexible tool that handles large amounts of electric power system
data. SmartPlant Electrical (SPEL) has comprehensive equipment data sheet templates, schedule
templates, one-line diagrams, and customizable default libraries. The ETAP - SmartPlant
Electrical (SPEL) interface is a tool for exchanging data between ETAP and SPEL. The block
diagram shown below explains the data flow process.
ETAP - SPEL Data Exchange Data Flow

ETAP Data Exchange Interface in ETAP uses information available in SPEL and ETAP to add,
modify, and delete elements in both tolls. In addition to a one-time auto-creation of one-line
diagrams, it also facilitates multiple data transfers (synchronization) between ETAP and SPEL.
This essentially means adding new equipment, updating existing equipment data, and removing
equipment no longer in use. As a result, data in ETAP and SPEL are kept consistent without
going through the manual process of recording additions and modifications in both systems.
An XML is published from SPEL (Please refer to SPEL User Guide for publishing XML file
from SPEL). This XML file has the electrical data for equipment and connectivity info in the
SPEL project and is imported into ETAP using the ETAP Data Exchange interface.
ETAP can export a XML file for SPEL to import. This can be invoked through menu: File | Data
Exchange | SmartPlant Electrical | Export ETAP Project Data.
SPEL Data Exchange Interface is available from SPEL release version 2008. For importing data
from ETAP to SPEL please refer to SPEL User Guide.
40-92
ETAP Data Exchange
40.7.1 Accessing the DataX SmartPlant Electrical Module

The commands under menu SmartPlant Electrical are used to transfer data between ETAP and
SPEL as shown below.
If the Import SPEL Project Data is selected it will import data from an intermediate XML file
exported from a SPEL project into the ETAP project. The steps involved in linking a SPEL
project published XML file to an ETAP project are as follows:
Select the XML file.

Add, Modify or Delete actions are determined by the ETAP Data Exchange interface after
comparison of existing ETAP project data and data in the XML file.
Actions may be accepted or rejected by a user. By default all actions are accepted.
Import and update data into the ETAP project.
40-93
ETAP Data Exchange
40.7.2 Import from SPEL XML File

For a new project, when the Import SPEL Project Data menu is selected, choose an ETAP
library file:
Then the DataX Path selector is displayed as shown below. If it is the second import, it will not
ask for the library file and opens the DataX Path selector.
40-94
ETAP Data Exchange
Browse
Click on Browse to select the XML file published from the SPEL project. The editor shown
below appears when the Browse button is pressed. It allows selection of XML files (with
extension xml). The selected file is linked with the ETAP project.
Note that one ETAP project corresponds to one SPEL plant. If an XML file published from SPEL
is from a different plant, data synchronization will reject the import.
Data Synchronization Editor

After a SPEL published XML file is selected, ETAP will read through the XML and after a while
depending on the size of the imported Plant from SPEL, the Data Synchronization editor will be
40-95
ETAP Data Exchange
SmartPlant Electrical XML File

This is the path and name of the XML file from which data is transferred.
ETAP Project
This is the path and name of the ETAP project file, which is synchronized with the data from the
XML file (exported from the SPEL project). The name and location of the currently open ETAP
project is displayed here.
Mapping Table
When this button is pushed, the Mapping Table dialog as shown in the next section will appear.
The invoked dialog here is read only which allows users to review device and field mapping
between ETAP / SPEL. Please refer to the next section for more details about Mapping Table.
Import
Click on this button to synchronize data between the SPEL project and the ETAP project. ETAP
DataX interface performs a comparison between the two sets of data and generates Add, Modify
and Delete actions. The actions are displayed in the Accept / Reject actions editor.
Cancel
Click on "Cancel to close the editor. Data synchronization is not performed.
40.7.3 ETAP-SPEL Mapping Table Editor

The default mapping between SPEL equipment attributes and ETAP element attributes are
predetermined. User can set up special mapping for different projects.
40-96
ETAP Data Exchange
Equipment attributes in a SPEL project may be mapped to ETAP element attributes using the
Data Mapping Table with the Editor as shown below. The Mapping Table editor serves as a user
interface for mapping SPEL and ETAP projects. It performs the following functions:
Serves as an interface to view the mapping of SPEL equipment types with ETAP elements.
Serves as an interface for mapping SPEL equipment attributes (fields) with ETAP element
attributes.
The Mapping Table interface can be invoked from the Mapping Table menu. When this
menu is selected the following dialog appears to allow user to map data based on special SPEL
published XML file. This will only map the SPEL equipments which are in this SPEL project.
Browse
Click on this button to select the SPEL published XML for mapping. If a SPEL published XML
file is not available please select the default one which includes all the SPEL equipments
available for mapping. This file is named SPELDefault.xml which is saved in a subfolder
DataExRes under ETAP installation directory.
Note that while importing data from a SPEL published XML file, data mapping will be done
automatically based on this XML file.
Ok
Click on "Ok to continue the data mapping. The Mapping Table dialog shown below will
appear.
Cancel
Click on "Cancel to cancel the data mapping.
40-97
ETAP Data Exchange
SPEL Equipment
This column displays a list of SPEL equipment which are the supported elements in DataX. The
following list displays the supported elements between ETAP and SPEL and which one in SPEL
is mapped to what in ETAP.
ETAP Element
Bus
Cable
Capacitor
Contactor
Contactor
Fuse
Generator
HVCB
SPEL Equipment
Bus, LocalPanel, Junction Box
Cable
Capacitor
Contactor
Starter
Fuse
Generator
CircuitBreaker High Voltage CB
40-98
ETAP Data Exchange

Induction Motor
LVCB
Power Grid
Overload Relay
Current Transformer
Static Load
Static Load
Static Load
Static Load
Static Load
Static Load
Static Load
Static Load
Single Through Switch
Synchronous Motor
Reactor
Impedance
Harmonic Filter
VFD
UPS
Charger
MOV
Overload Heater
Overload Heater
Lumped Load
Motor
CircuitBreaker Low Voltage CB
OffSitePower
OverloadRalay
Current Transformer
Cabinet
Resistor
Heater
HeatTrace
Lighting Fixture
SocketOutlet
WeldingOutlet
Instrument
DisconnectSwitch
Motor Synchronous Motor
Transformer - ThreeWinding
Transformer TwoWinding
CurrentLimitingReactor
Busway
HamonicFilter
VariableFrequencyDrive
UPS
BatteryCharger
Motor- Motorized Valve
Overload Relay
In Line Overload Relay
Other Electrical Equipment (Lumped Load)
ETAP Element
This column displays a list of ETAP element corresponding to the SPEL equipment.
Note:
Any equipment which is not listed in the above table will not be supported in this release of
ETAP, such as DC equipment, Inverter, etc.
Map Fields
Click on the SmartPlant Equipment node (the + sign on the left hand side of the editor) to
display the attribute mapping for the equipment. The rows in the attribute mapping table which
are highlighted with Lavender color are blocked against changing. the blocked attributes may
not be modified for such rows. Blocked rows have a hard-coded mapping associated with them.
SmartPlant Field
This column displays a list of SPEL fields associated with the SPEL equipment.
40-99
ETAP Data Exchange
ETAP Field
Select an ETAP element attribute corresponding to the SPEL equipment field.
Mapping Direction
This field shows the mapping direction: From SPEL to ETAP, from ETAP to SPEL or Both
Directions. User can change the mapping direction by selecting the dropdown list.
40-100
ETAP Data Exchange
User can select the left hand rim and right click to bring up a popup menu. Through this
menu, the user can append a new row by selecting Append New Property Mapping for
some further mapping.
The user can only delete the appended mapping fields by clicking on "Delete Selected
Property Mapping."
40-101
ETAP Data Exchange
Note that rows that were not appended may not be deleted.
Field Mapping Rules

This section describes the logic for mapping properties in the SPEL project database to ETAP
element attributes. All fields, other than those mentioned in this section are mapped directly, that
is the value of the ETAP field is made equal to the value of mapped field in SPEL project
database. The text comparisons made in the program are case sensitive.
Default values
ETAP creates new elements (in case of Add action) by using default values for some element
attributes, and then replacing the default values with actual imported values. Therefore, when
Blank Fields
If a value for a numeric field exists in ETAP but is blank or zero in SPEL project database,
modify action will not be generated for it. Note that this does not apply to fields representing a
text value.

If a Modify or Add action is generated for induction and/or synchronous motors, the
impedance data for the motor (LRC, LR PF, X/R, X, X, X0, X1) is set using typical values from
ETAP library based on kV, HP and speed of the motor.
Typical Data for Cables

When the size of a cable (linked to ETAP library) in ETAP project is modified in subsequent data
transfers, appropriate cable impedance and physical data is selected from the ETAP library based
on the modified cable size from SPEL.
Note that if a cable parameter set in SPEL has a value different from the ETAP library, for the
cases when a cable is selected from the ETAP library, the value in the ETAP library takes
precedence and is set in the ETAP project.
Limitations
The supported system in the current release of both tools is Radial systems. No tie PDs
will be included in data exchange.
The system should have only one source as either a utility or a generator.
Static Load with type set to "Other" in ETAP is not supported.
DC components, Inverter, Induction Generator, Relays, PT, CT, Metering Equipments,
Composite Networks, Transmission Line, Wind Turbine, MG Set, Remote Connector,
Phase Adapter, HVDC, Composite Motor, Double-Throw Switch, HVAC and Ground
Grid components are not supported for this release of ETAP.
40-102
ETAP Data Exchange
40.7.4 Import Data

When the Import button on the Data Synchronization editor is clicked a comparison is made
between the existing ETAP project data and the data in the intermediate database file exported
from the SPEL project. Based on the comparison a list of actions is prepared and displayed on the
Accept / Reject Actions editor as shown below.
Note:
If partial publish is selected from SPEL, Delete actions wont be generated.
In importing back to ETAP from SPEL (round-trip), if the project has been initiated in
ETAP, the modification actions should be ignored for all the PDs (protective devices)
since the connectivity is different in ETAP vs. SPEL.
Date / Time
The top-left corner of the editor displays the date and time on which the ETAP project and SPEL
User Name
40-103
ETAP Data Exchange
Action List
Item No.
is performed.
Equipment Type
Action
This column displays the type of action which is to be performed on the ETAP element. It may
be Add, Modify or Delete.
Accept
Modification
Accept Actions
Reject Actions
Continue
action list.
Cancel
project.
40-104
ETAP Data Exchange
40.7.5 Export XML File from ETAP Project

In the case of selecting an element(s) in the one line diagram and running Export ETAP Project
Data, the below dialog will appear to confirm partial or full exporting. This dialog wont appear
if there are no devices selected in the one line diagram.
For both full and partial exporting the "Save As" dialog will appear as shown below.
In order to save the exported XML file, select the destination folder and the XML file name. Note
that if an existing XML file is selected the existing data will be overwritten.
40-105
ETAP Data Exchange
40.7.6 ETAP SPEL Cable Library Synchronization

ETAP SPEL cable library synchronization interface allows users to share cable library data
between ETAP and SPEL projects. The following block diagram shows data flow of cable library
synchronization.
SmartPlant
Electrical
System
SPEL Lib
Utility
SPEL Cable
Reference
ETAP Lib
Utility
MS Access
Database
ETAP
Project
ETAP
Cable Lib
ETAP SPEL cable library data synchronization is bridged by a MS Access database. Users can
import or export ETAP project cable library data from or into the MS Access database by using
the ETAP Lib Utility. Through SPEL Lib Utility in SPEL System project, the user can also
export or import cable library data into or from the MS Access database.
Logic to Do Cable Library Data Synchronization

Import Cable Library Data from SPEL
1) A cable is not in ETAP cable library A new cable header with its info will be added
into the ETAP cable library.
2) A cable header exists in ETAP cable library The cable library data will be updated.
Export Cable library data to SPEL

Cable library data in ETAP can be exported. Note that the exported cable library data is only for
the cables used in current ETAP project.
Access the ETAP Lib Utility

The Import SPEL Cable Lib and Export ETAP Cable Lib commands can be invoked by
going to the File | Data Exchange | SmartPlant Electrical menu then select Import/Export Cable
Lib.
When the Export ETAP Cable Lib command is selected, the following dialog will appear to
allow the user to save the exported cable library data into a MS Access file which will be used in
the SPEL side to import the cable data.
40-106
ETAP Data Exchange
When the Import ETAP Cable Lib command is selected, the following dialog will appear to
allow the user to select the MS Access file which has been exported from SPEL.
40-107
Chapter 41
ETAP DataX (GIS Map)
Many utilities use Geographic Information Systems (GIS) to maintain network connectivity as
well as asset information. Foremost, the network connectivity and nameplate data of most
electrical equipment already exists within many GIS databases. This information is leveraged in
ETAP GIS Map Module to auto-create corresponding electrical diagrams that can be used for
System Studies. ETAP GIS Map Module provides the facility to synchronize GIS map updates to
the ETAP project for maintaining consistency between the two systems. In addition to this, results
obtained from System Studies are transferred graphically to GIS maps. With such a system in
place, System Studies are more accurate and take far less time to perform.
41-1
Data X
GIS Map
41.1 GIS Map

A GIS map is an accurate geo-spatial representation of the actual system layout, unlike one-line
diagrams, which are designed as a non-geo-dimensional summary of an electrical system. ETAP
GIS Map Module uses maps (MXD documents) developed in ESRI's ArcGIS 9.1 (or later) suite
of products.
Once a GIS map representing an electrical system is available, it is possible to transfer
information dynamically from the GIS map into ETAP. This eliminates the need to re-enter data
in ETAP resulting in saving time and the reduction of data entry errors. In addition, one-line
diagrams can be automatically generated and data can be automatically checked for errors, which
reduces the effort required to begin doing System Studies. ETAP one-line diagrams provide a
logical view of the electrical connectivity behind a complex GIS map.
In addition to a one-time auto-creation of one-line diagrams, ETAP GIS Map also facilitates
multiple data transfers (synchronization) between the GIS map and ETAP. This essentially means
adding new equipment, updating existing equipment data, and removing equipment no longer in
use. As a result, data in ETAP and GIS map are kept consistent without going through the manual
process of recording additions and modifications in both systems.
Results, which are available from the analysis of a geo-synchronized one-line diagram, are
transferred to the results database for graphical display within the GIS map. GIS maps are then
configured to display different study results.
GIS systems represent an organized collection of computer hardware, software, geographic data,
and personnel designed to efficiently capture, store, update, manipulate, analyze, and display all
forms of geographically referenced information.
Typical GIS maps for an electrical system (transmission and distribution systems, industrial
power systems, and power utility systems) are based on one or more geometric networks. A
geometric network in a GIS map represents a one-dimensional linear network such as a utility
network, or an electrical power distribution network. Features participating in a geometric
network are mapped to ETAP elements.
The topology information available in a geometric network, along with the features, is used to
develop electrical one-line diagrams in ETAP when transferring data for the first time. These oneline diagrams are supplemented with ETAP typical values and library data. The combined
information is used to perform power System Studies; common examples include Power Flow
Studies and Fault Analysis. Results available after performing the System Studies are transferred
to the GIS map via the results database.
41-2
Data X
GIS Map
Analysis Results
ETAP
Results
Database
GIS Map
Geometric
Network Feature
Classes
Data
Mapping
Tool
Data
Exchange
Interface
ETAP
Add, Modify
& Delete
Actions
User
Confirmation
ETAP and ESRI ArcGIS Map: Data Flow
41-3
Data X
Activating GIS Map Module
41.2 Activating the GIS Map Module

Clicking on the Geographical Information Systems (GIS) button in the System toolbar, as shown
below activates the ETAP GIS Map Module.
Geographical
Information System
(GIS) button
41.2.1 Geographical Information System (GIS) Icon

Click on this button to create a new GIS Presentation or to open an existing GIS Presentation. An
ETAP GIS Presentation represents a presentation that is linked to an ESRI ArcGIS map document
and is capable of displaying it.
41-4
Data X
Creating a New GIS Presentation
41.3 Creating a New GIS Presentation

A GIS Presentation is created in the same way as any other presentation in ETAP, however
additional information pertaining to the linked ESRI ArcGIS map document is required. The
Select Map Editor is displayed when a new GIS presentation is created.
Each GIS Map presentation links to a map document. A map document is the disk-based
representation of a map and has an .mxd file extension. A map document represents a map, which
contains one or more layers of geographic data and various supporting map elements such as a
scale bar. A layer is a collection of similar geographic featuressuch as primary overhead lines,
two-winding transformers, capacitor banks, or switchgear assembliesin a particular electrical
distribution system referenced together for display on a map. It references geographic data stored
in a data source, such as a geodatabase feature class. Layers on a map are contained in data
frames. A data frame displays layers occupying the same geographic area.
Map File
Displays the name of the map document selected using the Browse button.
41-5
Data X
Creating a New GIS Presentation
A map document is the disk-based representation of a map and has an .mxd file extension. A map
document represents a map, which contains one or more layers of geographic data and various
supporting map elements such as a scale bar.
Map
Once a map file is selected, this drop-down list shows the list of data frames in the map file. A
GIS Presentation is associated with one of the data frames in the map document.
As mentioned earlier, layers on a map are contained in data frames. A data frame displays layers
occupying the same geographic area. A layer is a collection of similar geographic features, such
as primary overhead lines, two-winding transformers, capacitor banks, or switchgear assemblies,
in a particular electrical distribution system referenced together for display on a map. It
references geographic data stored in a data source, such as a geodatabase feature class.
41-6
Data X
Data Transfer from GIS Map to ETAP
41.4 GIS Map Toolbar

The toolbar is active when you are in ETAP GIS Map Mode.
Set Default Mouse Cursor

Select Annotations
Select Features
Identify Feature
Measure Distances
Transfer GIS Data to ETAP Project
Transfer Analysis Results to GIS Presentation
Display Options for GIS Presentation
Results Options for GIS Presentation
Set Default Mouse Cursor

Click on this button to restore the normal mouse cursor and cancel the action being carried out by
other ETAP GIS Map tools. This is used typically after using the Select Annotation or Graphic
Element and Select Features tools.
Select Annotations
Use this option to select and change the position of the Feature Annotations.
Select Features
Click on this button to select features. This tool may be used to select features by clicking
individual features one-by-one or by rubber banding a rectangular area in the GIS Presentation.
Identify Feature
Click on this button to identify a feature and display the properties of the selected feature.
Measure Distances
Click on this button to measure the distance between two points and the total distance of a path in
the map.
41-7
Data X
GIS Map Toolbar
Transfer GIS Data to ETAP Project

Click on the button to transfer data to ETAP project. Refer to Section 40.4 for details.
Transfer Analysis Results to GIS Presentation

Click on this button to transfer analysis results displayed on an ETAP presentation to ETAP GIS
Map presentation. See Section 40.7 for details.
Display Options for GIS Presentation

Click on this button to hide or unhide the features displayed on the ETAP GIS Map Presentation.
Show
Check the Show checkbox below a layer node in the Presentations Display Options Editor to
show all the features and uncheck it to hide all the features corresponding to the layer.
41-8
Data X
Results Options for GIS Presentation

Click on this button to select the features for results displayed on the ETAP GIS Map
Presentation. For more information please refer to Load Flow and Short-Circuit Display Options.
41-9
Data X
41.5 Data Transfer from GIS Map to ETAP

Click on the button Transfer GIS Data to ETAP Project for transferring data from a GIS map
to ETAP project.
41.5.1 Selecting Features

Once the button is clicked ETAP will prompt you to select an area in the GIS presentation that
has the features to be transferred to the ETAP project.
Click on OK and select an area in the GIS presentation. Click the left mouse button and drag it
until the features to be transferred appear inside the gray shaded rectangle to select an area on the
GIS presentation as shown below:
If all the features in the GIS presentation are to be transferred, click on the Transfer GIS Data to
ETAP Project button again without selecting any features on the GIS presentation. This will
prompt you to confirm the action as shown below:
41-10
Data X
Clicking on the Yes button will start data transfer for all the features in the GIS project. Clicking
on No will allow you to select the features again.
Data transfer may be cancelled any time during this process by pressing the Esc key, which will
prompt you to confirm the action as shown below:
Clicking on Yes will cancel the data transfer. Clicking on No will allow you to select the features
again.
After selecting an area in the GIS presentation click on the Transfer GIS Data to ETAP Project
button again for starting the data transfer.
41.5.2 Selecting a Geometric Network

A geometric network is a topological relationship between feature classes in a collection.
Conceptually, networks are comprised of two fundamental components, edges, and junctions.
Transmission lines and underground cables are examples of edges. Fuses, switches, and service
taps are some examples of junctions. Edges connect together at a junction. Each feature has a role
in the geometric network of either an edge or a junction. A GIS map may have one or more
geometric networks. For example, a GIS map representing an electrical distribution system may
have two geometric networks one representing the overhead electrical distribution and the other
representing the underground raceway system.
When the data transfer process is complete, an option is provided to select the geometric network
from a list of geometric networks in the selected GIS map, as shown below.
41-11
Data X
Select the relevant geometric network from the drop-down list and click on the OK button to start
the data transfer process. If a library has not been associated with the project, a dialog box will
open to select the location of the library file to be associated with the project. The Data
Synchronization Editor is then displayed.
41-12
Data X
41.6 Data Synchronization

The Data Synchronization Editor is the central point for data transfer process.
External Data Source

This field displays the name of the map document from which GIS data is transferred to ETAP
project.
ETAP Project
This field displays the name of the ETAP project to which GIS data is transferred.
Map Data
Click on this button to map GIS feature classes and their attributes with ETAP elements and
properties. See section 40.5.2 for details.
Transfer Data
Click on this button to transfer data from a GIS map to an ETAP project. See Section 40.5.3 for
details.
Close
Click on this button to close the Data Synchronization Editor and cancel data transfer from the
GIS map to the ETAP project.
41-13
Data X
41.6.1 Data Mapping

The Data Mapping Editor is shown below. This editor is invoked when the Map Data button on
the Data Synchronization Editor is clicked. It provides facility to map geodatabase feature classes
to ETAP elements and feature class attributes to ETAP element properties.
Mapping Equipment
The Data Mapping Editor represents an interface for defining relations between GIS map feature
classes and ETAP elements. For example primary overhead conductor and primary underground
conductor feature classes in a GIS map representing an electrical distribution network may be
mapped to transmission lines and cables, respectively, in the analysis tool. The above figure
shows such a mapping interface along with the default mapping for feature classes in a GIS map
representing a typical electrical distribution system and ETAP elements.
The left hand column in the table shown in the Data Mapping Editor represents feature classes in
the GIS map associated with the GIS presentation. ETAP detects these feature classes with the
help of the information stored in one or more geodatabases associated with the GIS map.
41-14
Data X
The right hand column in the table shown in the Data Mapping Editor represents the elements
from ETAP. These elements are conveniently selected from the drop-down list provided in the
mapping interface.
It is possible to map multiple GIS map feature classes to the same element in the analysis tool.
For example the feature classes Switch and Miscellaneous Network Feature are both mapped to
ST (Single Throw) Switch ETAP element.
Mapping Equipment Attributes

The feature classes or layers in a GIS map have attributes that represent information describing a
map feature. The attributes of a primary overhead conductor, for example, might include its
length, size, and height above ground. Often, this is the information collected during field surveys
while creating the GIS map. Some of the attributes hold information useful for performing power
system analysis. These attributes are mapped to the ETAP element properties. This is performed
after mapping the feature class to an ETAP element.
Click on the + sign on the left-hand side of the Data Mapping Editor as shown below to display
the feature class attributes. Use the drop-down list in the right-hand column to select ETAP
element attributes corresponding to the feature class attribute.
41-15
Data X
The Data Mapping Editor allows direct mapping of feature class attributes and ETAP element
properties. Direct mapping implies that the text or value in the feature class attribute is directly
transferred to ETAP without processing. For example, the length of a primary overhead
conductor measured in feet is mapped directly to the length of the transmission line in ETAP,
provided that ETAP stores the length value in feet. However, if the length value available in the
geodatabase is in meters, then a direct mapping is not possible. For such cases, logic is
implemented to convert the data prior to transferring it to ETAP.
ETAP provides default equipment and attribute mapping for the electrical distribution system
model in ESRI ArcGIS 8.3. The default mapping includes hard coded logic for conversion of
geodatabase values to ETAP compatible values.
Blocked Rows
The rows in the Data Mapping interface with the background color set to Lavender indicate
blocked rows. Blocked rows are rows for which you are not allowed to change the ETAP
element property set by default. For example, the feature class property OBJECT ID is mapped to
ETAP element property Drawing / Diagram Reference and is not allowed to be mapped to any
other ETAP element property.
Linking Map Features with One-Line Diagram Elements

GIS map features (a record or row in the feature class is referred as a feature) representing reallife equipment are mapped to an element in ETAP. This mapping requires a unique identifier,
which does not change throughout the life of the entity, in ETAP and the GIS map. This mapping
is fundamental for relating data in a GIS map and an ETAP project hence the mapping tool
enforces it. For example in the case of default database, the unique identifier for all the feature
classes is the Equipment Name attribute and the unique identifier for all elements in ETAP is the
ID property.
Save
Clicking on the Save button will save any changes that are made on the Data Mapping Editor.
41.6.2 Accepting and Rejecting Actions

When the Transfer Data button on the Data Synchronization Editor is clicked information in the
GIS map and the ETAP project is compared. The comparison is based on the mapping of unique
equipment identifiers in the GIS map and ETAP. When data is transferred for the first time from
the GIS map into ETAP, the Auto-Layout Generator Module in ETAP creates a one-line diagram.
Elements are created in the project per equipment mapping information specified through the
Data Mapping Editor.
During subsequent data transfers a comparison is made between the information in ETAP project
database and the GIS map, for each element. Changes in attribute values for existing equipment
result in modify commands. Add commands are created for new equipment added to the GIS map
and delete commands are created for elements removed from the GIS map. The list of these
commands is presented to you for confirmation as shown below.
ETAP processes commands that are accepted and makes corresponding changes in the ETAP
project.
41-16
Data X
Accept Actions
Click the Add button to accept all the Add actions.
Click the Modify button to accept all the Modify actions.
Click the Rename button to accept all the Rename actions.
Click the Delete button to accept all the Delete actions.
Click the All button to accept all the Add, Modify, Rename, and Delete actions.
Reject Actions
Click the Add button to reject all the Add actions.
Click the Modify button to reject all the Modify actions.
Click the Rename button to reject all the Rename actions.
Click the Delete button to reject all the Delete actions.
Click the All button to reject all the Add, Modify, Rename and Delete actions.
41-17
Data X
Auto Layout Generation
41.7 Auto Layout Generation

A geometric network is a topological relationship between a collection of feature classes.
Conceptually networks are comprised of two fundamental components, edges, and junctions.
Transmission lines and underground cables are examples of edges. Fuses, switches, and service
taps are some examples of junctions. Edges connect together at a junction. Each feature has a role
in the geometric network of either an edge or a junction.
The ETAP GIS Map Module extracts the logical network from the geometric network during the
data transfer process. This means that the connections between edges and junctions (both simple
and complex) in a GIS map are transformed into electrical connections between elements in
ETAP during data transfer from a GIS map into an ETAP project. Once this connectivity
information is available ETAP auto layout generator creates a sophisticated one-line diagram
including grouping of elements into composite networks.
41-18
Data X
Performing System Studies
41.8 Performing System Studies

After transferring the data from a GIS map and creating a one-line diagram, it is possible to
perform System Studies like Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Optimal Capacitor Placement, Harmonic
Analysis, Motor Acceleration Studies, etc.
GIS maps may not have all the information required to perform detailed electrical analysis of a
system, as geodatabases may not include field equipment data available in design sheets. A
geodatabase represents an object-oriented geographic database that provides services for
managing geographic data. These services include validation rules, relationships, and topological
associations. A geodatabase contains feature datasets and is hosted inside of a relational database
management system. Geodatabases typically include connectivity information and device
nameplate ratings available while performing a field survey. Information missing in
geodatabases, which is required for performing electrical system analysis, is made available in the
libraries provided with the ETAP. ETAP also provides typical values for missing parameters and
also substitutes relevant data from built-in libraries.
41-19
Data X
Updating GIS Maps with Results
41.9 Updating GIS Maps with Results

ETAP provides a command button on the ETAP GIS Map toolbar to transfer system study results
to the main GIS map. The transfer of results is based on the mapping between the unique
identifiers for GIS map equipment and ETAP elements.
When results are transferred from ETAP to a GIS map, they are written to another database
referred to as the results database. The results database has tables to store analysis results from
different types of studies like load flow, short-circuit, harmonic load flow, motor acceleration,
transient stability, optimal power flow, etc. It also has information to create links with the
geodatabase associated with the GIS map. The results database tables are joined to the
geodatabase feature class tables with the help of the unique identifier. This process is automatic
and does not require user input. The analysis results are kept in a separate database to ensure the
integrity of the primary geodatabase, which is usually locked from external modifications by third
party programs.
41-20
Chapter 42
Ground Grid Systems

Since the early days of the electric power industry, the safety of personnel in and around electric power
installations has been a primary concern. With ever increasing fault current levels in todays
interconnected power systems, there is renewed emphasis on safety. The safety of personnel is
compromised by the rise in the ground potential of grounded structures during unbalanced electric power
faults. At such times, humans touching grounded structures can be subjected to high voltages. However,
the magnitude and duration of the electric current conducted through the human body should not be
sufficient to cause ventricular fibrillation
Years of research on the effects of electric current on the human body have lead to the development of
standards of permissible values to avoid electrocution. The Ground Grid Systems Module utilizes the
following four methods of computation:
FEM - Finite Element Method

IEEE 80-1986
IEEE 80-2000
IEEE 665-1995
The Ground Grid Systems Module calculates the following:
The Maximum Allowable Current for specified conductors. Warnings are issued if the specified
conductor is rated lower than the fault current level.
The Step and Touch potentials for any rectangular/triangular/L-shaped/T-shaped configuration of a
ground grid, with or without ground rods (IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
The tolerable Step and Mesh potentials and compares them with actual, calculated Step and Mesh
potentials (IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
Graphic profiles for the absolute Step and Touch voltages, as well as the tables of the voltages at
various locations (Finite Element Method).
The optimum number of parallel ground conductors and rods for a rectangular/triangular/L-shaped/Tshaped ground grid. The cost of conductors/rods and the safety of personnel in the vicinity of the
substation/generating station during a ground fault are both considered. Design optimizations are
42-1
Ground Grid Systems
Overview
performed using a relative cost effectiveness method (based on the IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
The Ground Resistance and Ground Potential rise (GPR).
Some of the main features of the Ground Grid Systems Analysis Study are summarized below:
Calculate the tolerable Step and Touch potentials

Compare potentials against the actual, calculated Step and Touch potentials
Optimize number of conductors with fixed rods based on cost and safety
Optimize number of conductors and rods based on cost and safety
Calculate the maximum allowable current for specified conductors
Compare allowable currents against fault currents
Calculate ground system resistance
Calculate ground potential rise
Allow a two-layer soil configuration in addition to the surface material
Ground grid configurations showing conductor and rod plots
Display 3-D/contour touch voltage plots
Display 3-D/contour step voltage plots
Display 3-D/contour absolute voltage plots
Calculate Absolute, Step and Touch potentials at any point in the configuration
Conductor/Rod can be oriented in any possible 3-D direction
Handle irregular configurations of any shape
42-2
Ground Grid Systems
Ground Grid Systems Presentation
42.1 Ground Grid Systems Presentation

The GGS presentation is composed of a Top View, a Soil View, and a 3-D View. The Top View is used
to edit the ground conductors/rods of a ground grid. The Soil View is used to edit the soil properties of the
surface, top, and lower layers of soil. The 3-D View is used for the three-dimensional display of the
ground grid. The 3-D View also allows the display of the ground grid to rotate, offering views from
various angles. The GGS presentation allows for graphical arrangement of the conductors and rods that
represent the ground grid, and to provide a physical environment to conduct Ground Grid Design Studies.
Each GGS presentation is a different and independent ground grid system. This concept is different from
the multi-presentation approach of the one-line diagram, where all presentations have the same elements.
There is no limit to the number of GGS presentations that can be created.
42.1.1 Create a New Ground Grid Presentation

To create a ground grid system in ETAP, click on the Ground Grid tool and drag-and-drop a ground grid
from the AC Elements toolbar in the one-line diagram:
The AC Elements toolbar is only available on the Edit Mode.

After placing the ground grid on the one-line diagram, you can double-click on the grid to invoke the
ETAP Ground Grid Design Editor.
Select the method of Study Model you wish to use and click OK. This will take you to the Ground Grid
Systems Module. After you create your model and save it, you can double-click on the ground grid in
your one-line diagram, the Ground Grid Systems Module will come up automatically.
42-3
Ground Grid Systems
42.1.2 Grid Editor

You may right-click any location inside an OLV grid box and select Properties to open the Grid Editor.
The editor is composed of the following pages:
Info
Results
Remarks
Comment
42.1.3 Info Page
Info
ID
42-4
Ground Grid Systems
Current Symbol
This area displays the symbol that was selected for the grid in the one-line diagram. This symbol can be
changed by going into the one-line diagram, right-clicking on the grid and selecting symbol from the
menu that appears. You can then select a new symbol or reselect the same symbol from the Grid Style
drop-down list.
Grid Style
This allows you to select a grid style in which the OLV grid box will be displayed. Once a grid style is
selected, the corresponding symbol also will show up in the Current Symbol on this page.
Grid Presentation
Press the Grid Presentation button to invoke a GRD presentation.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Enter the grid tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description
42.1.4 Results Page

This page displays the results of the Ground Grid System Analysis. The results are updated from the
Ground Grid Graphical User Interface window once you perform a calculation using IEEE or FEM
Methods. If you performed a FEM calculation, the Method Field will be updated and the corresponding
results are displayed.
42-5
Ground Grid Systems
Calculated Potentials
The Grid Editor Results page displays the calculated potentials from the ground grid system calculation.
Touch Potential
This field displays the Calculated Touch Potential in units of Volts.
Step Potential
This field displays the Calculated Step Potential in units of Volts.
Tolerable Potentials
The Grid Editor Results page displays the Tolerable Potentials. ETAP determines the Tolerable Potentials
based on the information provided on the Ground Grid Study Case Editor. Please refer to the Modeling
and Calculation Methods section for more information on how to calculate the Tolerable Step and Touch
Potentials.
Touch Potential
This field displays the Tolerable Touch Potential calculated by the Ground Grid calculation in units of
Volts.
Step Potential
This field displays the Tolerable Step Potential calculated by the Ground Grid calculation in units of
Volts.
42-6
Ground Grid Systems
Calculated Ground Resistance and Potential Rise

The Grid Editor Results page also displays the Calculated Ground resistance and Ground Potential Rise
values.
Ground Resistance (Rg)

This field displays the calculated Ground Resistance Value in units of Ohms ().
Ground Potential Rise (GPR)

This field displays the calculated Ground Potential Rise in units of Volts.
X-Y Coordinates of Maximum Potentials

If you performed a finite element calculation, the Grid Editor Results page will also display the (X,Y)
coordinates of the Maximum Calculated Step and Touch Potentials.
X-Y for Maximum Touch Potential

The Grid Editor displays the location of the Maximum Calculated Touch Potential. The Same result may
be obtained from the GRD Analysis Alert View window, from the FEM Report and the Step Potential
Plot.
X-Y for Maximum Step Potential

The Grid Editor displays the location of the Maximum Calculated Step Potential. The Same result may be
obtained from the GRD Analysis Alert View window, from the FEM Report and the Step Potential Plot.
Method
The Grid Editor Results page has a display field called the Method. This field tells you what calculation
method was used for the Ground Grid Analysis. If it is an IEEE Method, the X-Y coordinates of
Maximum Step and Touch Potentials are not displayed.
42-7
Ground Grid Systems
FEM Editor Toolbar
42.2 FEM Editor Toolbar

The FEM Editor Toolbar appears when the FEM Study Model is selected, and when you are in the
Ground Grid Systems Edit Mode. This toolbar has the following function keys:
Pointer
Conductor
Rod
FEM Rectangular Shape
FEM T-Shape
FEM L-Shape
FEM Triangular Shape
Pointer
The cursor takes the shape of the element selected from the Edit toolbar. Click on the Pointer icon to
return the cursor to its original arrow shape, or to move an element placed on the Top View of the GGS
presentation.
Conductor
Click on the Conductor icon to create a new conductor and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See
the Conductor/Rod Editor section (for FEM) for more information on conductors.
Rod
Click on the Rod icon to create a new rod and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See the
Conductor/Rod Editor section (for FEM) for more information on rods.
FEM Rectangular Shape

Click on the FEM Rectangular Shape icon to create a new FEM grid of rectangular shape and to place it
on the Top View of the GGS. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.
FEM T-Shape
Click on the FEM T-Shape icon to create a new FEM T-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of
the GGS. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.
FEM L-Shape
Click on the FEM L-Shape icon to create a new FEM L-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of
the GGS. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.
FEM Triangular Shape

Click on the FEM Triangular Shape icon to create a new FEM grid of triangular shape and to place it on
the Top View. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.
42-8
Ground Grid Systems
IEEE Editor Toolbar
42.3 IEEE Editor Toolbar

The IEEE Editor Toolbar appears when the IEEE Study Model is selected, and when in the Ground Grid
Systems Edit Mode. This toolbar has the following function keys:
Pointer
IEEE Rectangular Shape
IEEE T-Shape
IEEE L-Shape
IEEE Triangular Shape
Pointer
The cursor takes the shape of the element selected from the Edit toolbar. Click on the Pointer icon to
return the cursor to its original arrow shape, or to move an element placed on the Top View of the GGS
presentation.
IEEE Rectangular Shape

Click on the IEEE Rectangular Shape icon to create a new IEEE grid of rectangular shape and to place it
on the Top View of the GGS. See the IEEE Group Editor section for more information on grids.
IEEE T-Shape
The IEEE T-Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Standard. 80-2000 Method. Click on the IEEE T-Shape
icon to create a new IEEE T-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See the IEEE
Group Editor section for more information on grids.
IEEE L-Shape
The IEEE L-Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Standard 80-2000 Method. Click on the IEEE L-Shape
icon to create a new IEEE L-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See the IEEE
Group Editor section for more information on grids.
IEEE Triangular Shape

The IEEE Triangular Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Standard 80-2000 Method. Click on the IEEE
Triangular Shape icon to create a new IEEE grid of triangular shape and to place it on the Top View. See
the IEEE Group Editor section for more information on grids.
42-9
Ground Grid Systems
Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar
42.4 Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar

The Ground Grid Study Method toolbar appears when the GGS Study Mode is selected. This toolbar has
the following function keys:
Ground-Grid Calculation
Optimized Conductors
Optimized Conductors and Rods
Summary and Warning
Plot Selection
Report Manager
Stop
Ground-Grid Calculation
Click on the Ground-Grid Calculation button to calculate:
Step and Touch (mesh) Potentials

Ground Resistance
Ground Potential Rise
Tolerable Step and Touch Potential Limits
Potential Profiles (only for the FEM method)
Optimized Conductors
Click on the Optimized Conductors button to calculate the minimum number of conductors (that satisfy
the tolerable limits for the Step and Touch potentials) for a fixed number of ground rods. This
optimization function is for IEEE Standard methods only.
Optimized Conductors and Rods

Click on the Optimized Conductors button to calculate the optimum numbers of conductors and ground
rods needed to limit the Step and Touch potentials. This optimization function is for IEEE Standard
methods only.
Summary and Warning

Click on this button to open the GRD Analysis Alert View dialog box of Summary and Warning for the
Ground Grid Systems Calculation.
42-10
Ground Grid Systems
Plot Selection
This function is valid only for the FEM method. Click on this button to open the Plot Selection dialog box
to select a variety of potential profile plots to review, and click OK to generate the output plots.
42-11
Ground Grid Systems
Export Plot Data

The data from the 3-D plot can be exported using a metafile, bitmap, or text file format by right-clicking
on the 3-D plot and selecting the export dialog option.
Export
Plot data can be exported using either image file formats like metafile (.wmf) or bitmap (.bmp). The data
can also be exported using the text (.txt) or data (.dat) file formats.
42-12
Ground Grid Systems
Export Destination
Once the file format is selected, the export destination option can be used to select the location of the
exported data. The data can be placed either on the clipboard (system memory) to be used later by some
other program, physical file, or sent directly to a default printer.
Object Size
Use this option to adjust the size of the exported image file. When metafile format is used, the image can
be scaled during export by adjusting in millimeters, inches, or points. When bitmap format is used, the
image can be scaled during export by adjusting the pixels only.
Report Manager
Click on this button to open the Ground Grid Design Report Manager dialog box to review and select
from a variety of pre-formatted output plots. Select a plot type and click OK to open the output plot. A
detailed explanation of the Ground Grid Design Report Manager is provided in section 37.15.
Output Report files can be selected from the Output Report list box on the Study Case toolbar shown
below.
42-13
Ground Grid Systems
Study Case Toolbar
Stop
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled, and becomes enabled once a Ground Grid Systems
Calculation is initiated. Clicking on this button will terminate calculations in progress, resulting in
incomplete Output Reports.
42-14
Ground Grid Systems
Edit A GGS
42.5 Edit A GGS

You can add conductors, rods, and grids of various shapes to the Top View of the Ground Grid Systems
presentation. These elements are located on the Edit toolbar of the GGS Module.
42.5.1 Select Elements

Place the cursor on an element located on the Edit toolbar and click the left mouse button.
Note: When a grid shape is selected, regardless of the number of conductors or rods it contains, the shape
is considered to be one element. If a selected shape is deleted or copied, the shape and its contents will
also be deleted or copied. You can control-click on multiple elements to either select or de-select them.
42.5.2 Add Elements

To add a new element to the GGS presentation, select a new element from the Edit toolbar by clicking on
the appropriate element button. Notice that the shape of the cursor changes to correspond to that of the
selected element.
Place the selected element by clicking the mouse anywhere in the Top View section of the GGS
presentation, and note that the cursor returns to its original shape. Double-click on any element in the Edit
toolbar to place multiple copies of the same element in the Top View section of the GGS presentation.
Rules
Elements can be added ONLY in Edit mode

Two conductors/rods cannot overlap each other
Only one IEEE shape can be added in the Top View
FEM group shapes can overlap each other
Add Conductors
Click on the Conductor button on the FEM Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and
click to place the conductor on the Top View. ETAP creates the new conductor using default values.
Add Rods
Click on the Rod button on the FEM Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and click to
place the rod on the Top View. ETAP creates the new rod using default values.
Add Grid Shapes

Click on the desired Shape button on the FEM Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and
click to place the element on the Top View. ETAP creates the new grid shape using default values.
Add Conductors by Ungrouping FEM Shapes

An FEM shape added on the Top View of a GGS presentation can be ungrouped into individual
conductors. To ungroup, move the cursor inside the selected shape, right-click, and select Ungroup.
42-15
Ground Grid Systems
Edit A GGS
42.5.3 Move / Relocate Elements

When an element is added to a GGS presentation its position coordinates (x, y, and z) are updated
automatically in the editor/spreadsheet and in the Help line at the bottom of your screen. The element may
be relocated to new coordinates by changing the coordinate values at the editor/spreadsheet (x, y, and z
coordinates for conductors/rods, and Lx, Ly, Depth, # of Rods and # of Conductors in X/Y Directions for
various typical grid shapes) or by dragging the element and watching the Help line change to the desired
position.
To drag an element, first select the element to be moved. Place the mouse cursor on top of the selected
element; drag the element to the desired position, and release.
Move Conductors/Rods
Select the element; drag the element to the new position, and release.
Move Shapes
Shapes can be graphically moved within the Top View. Select the shape, drag the shape to the new
location, and release.
42.5.4 Cut (Delete) Elements

Select the element or group of elements and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
42.5.5 Copy Elements

Select an element or group of elements, right-click, and select Copy from the pop-up menu.
42.5.6 Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cells from the Dumpster into the GGS presentation.
42.5.7 Size of Elements

When an element is added to a GGS presentation, its size is set by default. The width and height of grid
shapes and the length of conductors can be graphically changed. Select the element and move the cursor
to a corner or edge of the element. Once the cursor changes its form, drag the element to its new size.
Conductor/rod sizes can be changed from the spreadsheet or shape editors. When the length is altered, X1,
Y1, and Z1 will remain unchanged, and X2, Y2, and Z2 will change accordingly. The cross-sectional area of
a conductor, the outside diameter, and/or length of a rod can only be changed from the Conductor or Rod
Editor.
Rules
Sizing elements can ONLY be done in Edit Mode.

Elements cannot overlap each other.
42-16
Ground Grid Systems
Study Case Editor

The GGS Study Case Editor contains Average Weight, Ambient Temperature, Current Projection Factor,
Fault Current Durations, option to input or compute Fault Current Parameters (i.e., fault current to
ground, current division factor, and X/R ratio), and Plot Parameters (for the Finite Element Method only).
ETAP allows for the creation and saving of an unlimited number of Study Cases for each type of study,
allowing the user to easily switch between different GGS Study Cases. This feature is designed to
organize the study efforts and to save time. To create a new GGS Study Case, go to the Study Case menu
on the toolbar and select Create New to open the GGS Study Case Editor.
42.6.1 Study Case Page
Study Case ID
A Study Case can be renamed by deleting the old Study Case ID and entering a new one. The Study Case
ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use of the navigator buttons at the bottom of the Study Case
Editor allows the user to go from one Study Case to another.
42-17
Ground Grid Systems
Study Case Editor
Options
In this group, select the average body weight for the person working above the ground grid and the
ambient temperature. The weight is used to calculate the Tolerable Step and Touch Potentials.
50 kg
Click on this option to select an average body weight of 50 kg.
70 kg
Click on this option to select an average body weight of 70 kg.
Ambient Temperature
Enter the soil ambient temperature in 0C. This parameter is used for determining the ampacity of the
ground conductors.
Reports and Plots

Specify the report/plot parameters.
Auto Display of Summary and Alert

Check this box to automatically show the result window for Summary and Warning.
Report Details
Check this box to report intermediate results for an IEEE standard method or voltage profiles for the
Finite Element method.
Plot Step
Plot Step is valid only for the FEM Study Model. This value is entered in meters or feet, and it is used to
find the points (or locations) where Absolute/Step/Touch potentials need to be computed and plotted.
Note: The smaller this number, the more calculations are required, increasing calculation time, but
yielding smoother plots. The recommended value is 1 meter. If higher resolution is needed, decrease this
number.
Boundary Extension
Enter the boundary extension in meters or feet. This value is used to extend the grid boundaries inside
which the Absolute/Step/Touch potentials need to be computed.
Fault Durations
Allows the user to specify fault current durations.
tf
Enter the duration of fault current in seconds to determine decrement factor. The fault duration (tf) (tc) and
shock duration (ts) are normally assumed to be equal, unless the fault duration is the sum of successive
shocks.
42-18
Ground Grid Systems
Study Case Editor
tc
Enter in seconds the duration of fault current for sizing ground conductors.
ts
Enter in seconds the duration of shock current to determine permissible levels for the human body.
Grid Current Factors

In this group, the Corrective Projection Factor and the Current Division Factor can be specified.
Sf
Enter the Current Division Factor in percent, relating the magnitude of fault current to that of its portion
flowing between the grounding grid and the surrounding earth.
Cp
Enter the Corrective Projection Factor in percent, accounting for the relative increase of fault currents
during the station lifespan. For a zero future system growth, Cp = 100.
Update
Check this box to update/replace the number of conductors/rods in the Conductor/Rod Editor with the
number of conductors/rods calculated by using optimization methods. This box is only valid with the
IEEE Methods.
Ground Short-Circuit Current

This group is used to specify the fault current conditions for the GGS.
User Specified
Click on this option to input and display values for 3I0 and X/R specified by the user.
Short-Circuit Study
Click on this option to use and display the 3I0 and X/R values obtained from a Short-Circuit Study
performed on a one-line diagram.
42-19
Ground Grid Systems
Study Case Editor
Ifg
Enter the rms value of the fault current to ground in kA. The Maximum Grid Current is determined from
this rms value, the Decrement Factor, Current Projection Factor, and Current Division Factor.
X/R
Enter the ratio of Inductive Reactance to Resistance. This value is used to calculate the decrement factor.
Remarks 2nd Line

Up to 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this remark box. Information entered here will be
Information Editor.
42-20
Ground Grid Systems
Ground Short-Circuit Current Values
42.7 Ground Short-Circuit Current Values

This feature allows the user to link the Ground Grid Systems Module with the one-line diagram, to update
and use the total 3I0 and the equivalent X/R values obtained directly from the one-line diagram
representation of the power system.
Updating Ground Short-Circuit Current

To update and use the 3I0 and X/R values, with values obtained by performing an Unbalanced Fault
Short-Circuit Study on a one-line diagram, select the Short-Circuit Study option located in the Ground
Short-Circuit Current group of the GRD dialog box, and follow these steps:
Perform an Unbalanced Fault Short-Circuit Study
An Unbalanced Fault Short-Circuit Study must be performed on the one-line diagram power system
representation. The following conditions must be met:
For the ANSI SC Unbalanced Fault Calculation only the half-cycle values are transferred.
For the IEC SC Unbalanced Fault Calculation only the IEC 909 values are transferred.
Select a Grid to be Updated

At the one-line diagram, right-click on the grid of interest, and choose the Update Fault kA option from
the menu. This option is only available when successful Unbalanced Fault Current Calculation results are
obtained, for the ANSI and IEC Standards specified. All the buses covered by the grid are considered by
the update function. However, only the results for the bus with the highest total short-circuit current will
be used.
The GRD Short-Circuit Current Updating dialog box will be displayed. The new short-circuit current
values will be used only if the user clicks on the Replace button, located on this dialog box.
42-21
Ground Grid Systems
42.7.1 Update Ground Grid Short-Circuit Current

All the fields in this dialog box are for display only.
GRD ID
This field displays the ID of the selected grid.
Faulted Bus
Bus ID
This field displays the ID of the faulted bus used for the Study Case.
Fault Type
This field displays the type of fault used to calculate the New SC kA value. Currently only Line-Ground
faults are used, but additional fault types will be added in future versions of ETAP.
Ground Fault Current

Existing Value - kA
This field displays the existing short-circuit kA value used with the selected grid.
Existing Value - X/R
This field displays the existing short-circuit X/R value used with the selected grid.
New Value - kA
This field displays the new Short-Circuit kA value to be updated for the selected grid.
42-22
Ground Grid Systems
New Value - X/R

This field displays the new short-circuit X/R value to be updated for the selected grid. The Range and
format are the same as those for the X/R field in the Induction Motor Editor.
Replace
Click on this button to update the New SC kA and X/R values for the selected grid.
Cancel
Click on this button to close the dialog box and retain the existing SC kA and X/R values.
42-23
Ground Grid Systems
Soil Editor
42.8 Soil Editor

Double-click at any location inside the Soil View to open the Soil Editor to specify earth/surface
materials, soil resistivity and depths for various layers.
Surface Material
These fields are used to specify the resistivity, depth, and material type for the surface layer.
Resistivity
Enter the Resistivity of the Surface Material in ohm-m in this field.
Material
Select the type of Surface Material from the drop-down list.
Depth
Enter the Surface Material depth in meters or feet.
Top Layer
Used to specify the resistivity, depth, and material type for the top layer soil.
Resistivity
Enter the material resistivity of the Top Layer soil in ohm-m in this field.
Material
Select the type of material of the Top Layer soil from the drop-down list.
42-24
Ground Grid Systems
Soil Editor
Depth
Enter the depth of the Top Layer soil in meters or feet, referenced from the bottom of the Surface
Material.
Lower Layer
Used to specify the resistivity and material type used for Lower Layer soil.
Resistivity
Enter the resistivity of the material of the Lower Layer soil in ohm-m.
Material
Select the type of material of the Lower Layer soil from the drop-down list.
The table below provides some typical thermal resistivity of common types of soil (Source: Electric
Power Distribution Equipment and Systems).
United Soil
Classification System
(USCS)
Soil
Thermal Resistivity
(Wet)
Degrees C-cm/W
GW
GP
GM
GC
SW
SP
SM
SC
ML
CL
OL
MH
CH
OH
Pt
Well graded gravel

Poor graded gravel
Silty gravel
Clayey gravel
Well graded sand
Uniform sand
Silty sand
Clayey sand
Silt
Silty clay
Organic silt
Micaceous silt
Clay
Soft organic clay
Silty peat
42-25
40
45
50
55
40
45
55
60
65
70
90
75
85
110
150
Thermal Resistivity
(Dry)
Degrees C-cm/W
120
190
140
150
130
300
170
180
240
210
350
300
270
400
> 600
Ground Grid Systems
IEEE Group Editor
42.9 IEEE Group Editor

When an IEEE Study Model is used, double-click on any location inside the selected grid shape in the
Top View of the GGS to open the IEEE Group Editor. The editor is used to specify conductor/rod
parameters for the grid shape.
42.9.1 Conductors Page

You can specify the parameters of the conductors and the grid size within the Conductors page.
Grid Size
Lx/Lx,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet. Show Lx if the rectangular/triangular
shape is selected; show Lx,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.
Ly/Ly,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet. Show Ly if the rectangular/triangular
shape is selected; show Ly,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.
42-26
Ground Grid Systems
IEEE Group Editor
Lx,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet in this field. Lx,short appears only if the
L-shape or T-shape is selected.
Ly,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet in this field. Ly,short shows only if the
# of Conductors
X Direction
Enter the number of the conductors in the X direction in this field.
Y Direction
Enter the number of the conductors in the Y direction in this field.
Conductors
Depth
Enter the depth of the conductor grip in meters or feet in this field.
Type
Select the type of the conductor material from the drop-down list.
Size
Select the conductor size in AWG/kcmil or mm2 from the drop-down list
Cost
Enter the cost of the conductor in $/m or $/ft in this field.
Material Constants
This information is displayed on the Conductors page to reflect the selected conductor type (the conductor
constants are from an internal conductor library/file GRDLib.mdb which can be modified using Microsoft
Access). It includes Material Conductivity (%), Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity at 20 0C (1/0C), K0
Factor (0C), Fusing Temperature (0C), Resistivity of the Ground Conductor at 20 0C in cm, and the
Thermal Capacity Factor in J/cm3/0C.
42-27
Ground Grid Systems
IEEE Group Editor
42.9.2 Rods Page

You can specify the parameters of the rods within the Rods page.
Rods
# of Rods
Enter the number of rods in this field.
Diameter
Enter the diameter of the rod in inches or centimeters in this field.
Length
Enter the length of the rod in meters or feet in this field.
Arrangement
Select the arrangement of the rods throughout the grid area using the pull-down list
42-28
Ground Grid Systems
IEEE Group Editor
Type
Select the type of rod material from the drop-down list.
Cost
Enter the cost of the rod in $/rod in this field.
Material Constants
This information is displayed on the Rods page to reflect the selected rod type (the conductor constants
are from an internal conductor library/file GRDLib.mdb which can be modified using Microsoft Access).
It includes Material Conductivity (%), Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity at 20 0C (1/0C), K0 Factor (0C),
Fusing Temperature (0C), Resistivity of the Ground Conductor at 20 0C in cm, and the Thermal
Capacity Factor in J/cm3/0C.
42-29
Ground Grid Systems
FEM Group Editor
42.10 FEM Group Editor

When an FEM Study Model is used, double-click on any location inside the selected grid shape in the
Top View of the GGS to open the FEM Group Editor. The editor is used to specify conductor/rod
parameters and grid size for the shape.
42.10.1 Group Conductors Page
Grid Size
Lx/Lx,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet in this field. Show Lx if the
rectangular/triangular shape is selected; show Lx,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.
Ly/Ly,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet in this field. Show Ly if the
rectangular/triangular shape is selected; show Ly,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.
42-30
Ground Grid Systems
FEM Group Editor
Lx,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet in this field. Lx,short appears only if the
Ly,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet in this field. Ly,short appears only if the
# of Conductors
X Direction
Enter the number of conductors in the X direction in this field.
Y Direction
Enter the number of conductors in the Y direction in this field.
Conductors
Depth
Enter the depth of conductor grip in meters or feet in this field.
Size
Select the conductor size in AWG/kcmil or mm2 from the drop-down list.
Type
Select the type of conductor material from the drop-down list.
Insulation
Select the type of conductor insulation (Bare or Insulated) from the drop-down list. If Insulated is
selected, this grid group will not be reconsidered for calculation/plotting.
Cost
Enter the cost of the conductor in $/m or $/ft.
42-31
Ground Grid Systems
Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM)
42.11 Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM)

The Conductor/Rod Editor is used with the FEM study model only. To edit the data for a conductor/rod, a
conductor/rod must be selected from the FEM Edit toolbar and placed on the Top View of the GGS.
Double-click on a conductor/rod on the Top View to open the Conductor/Rod Spreadsheet Editor.
The Material Constants of the conductor/rod are displayed at the top of the spreadsheet according to the
material type. Each conductor/rod record (row) is a unique set of data. Each conductor/rod record must
have a unique identifier: ConID. Duplicate records with the same data are overwritten.
42-32
Ground Grid Systems
Label
This is the symbol representing a conductor/rod.
Length
This is the length of the conductor/rod in m/ft. If the length is altered, X2, Y2, and Z2 are changed
accordingly. If X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, and Z2 values are entered, the length is changed accordingly.
X1
This is the X coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Y1
This is the Y coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Z1
This is the Z coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet, referenced from the top edge of
the top layer.
X2
This is the X coordinate of the other end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Y2
This is the Y coordinate of the other end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Z2
This is the Z coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet, referenced from the top edge of
the top layer.
Diameter
This is the Rod diameter in cm or inches, used only in the Rod Editor.
Type
This is the type of conductor/rod material.
Size
This is the conductor cross-sectional area in AWG/kcmil or mm2, used only in the Conductor Editor.
Insulation
This is the conductor insulation type, used only in the Conductor Editor.
Cost
This is the cost in $/m or $/ft for a conductor, cost in $/rod for a rod.
42-33
Ground Grid Systems
Ascent/Descent Function
You may sort a column by ascending or descending order. To do so, place the mouse on the title of a
column and right click to bring up the menu. All columns will be sorted based off of the column selected.
42-34
Ground Grid Systems
Calculation Methods

The Ground Grid Systems Module includes the following methods of computation:
Finite Element Method

ANSI/IEEE Std 80-1986
IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
ANSI/IEEE Std 80-2000
IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
ANSI/IEEE Std 665 - 1995
IEEE Guide for Generating Station Grounding
Optimization of Conductors
ANSI/IEEE Std Based Methods
Optimization of Conductors and Rods
ANSI/IEEE Std Based Methods
42.12.1 Finite Element Method

The Finite Element method (FEM) is based on a method of images, and assumes that the grounding
system is an equipotential structure. The uniform or two-layer soil view is also used with the FEM
method.
42.12.2 IEEE Std Methods

IEEE Std 80-2000, IEEE Std 80-1986, or IEEE Std 665-1995 is optional for the calculation of Step and
Touch (mesh) Potentials, Ground Resistance, Ground Potential Rise, Tolerable Step and Touch Potential
Limits. IEEE Std 80-1986 or IEEE Std 665-1995 is used only for the Square/Rectangular shapes of
ground grids; IEEE Std 80-2000 can be used for Square/Rectangular, Triangular, L-Shaped, or T-Shaped
ground grids.
When computing step and touch potential in a two-layer soil structure using the IEEE-80 Method, ETAP
uses the soil resistivity defined for the layer where the ground grid is located, and the formulas in IEEE80 for single layer soil model. This is because IEEE-80 does not provide formulas for step and touch
potential calculations for two-layer soil structure.
42.12.3 Optimization of Conductors

ETAP determines the minimum number of conductors that satisfy the tolerable limits for the Step and
Touch potentials for a fixed number of ground rods. The GGS Module begins calculations with a grid
consisting of only two conductors on each side, and increases the number of conductors (keeping the
mesh almost square) until a solution is reached. This optimization function applies to IEEE Std methods
only.
42-35
Ground Grid Systems
Calculation Methods
42.12.4 Optimization of Conductors and Rods

The GGS Module performs a cost optimization routine to determine the optimum number of conductors
and ground rods needed to limit the Step and Touch potentials. ETAP begins the optimization routine
with a minimum of two parallel conductors horizontally, two parallel conductors vertically, and four rods.
With each iteration, the number of rods and conductors is increased based on their cost effectiveness in
reducing unwanted potential levels. This optimization function is for IEEE Standard methods only.
42.12.5 Fundamental Formulas

Some fundamental formulas are given below.
Reflection Factor, K
K=
s
+ s
Where is the resistivity of the earth beneath the surface material in ohm-m; s is the surface layer soil
resistivity in ohm-m.
Surface Layer Derating Factor, Cs
For IEEE Std 80-2000
Cs = 1
0.09(1 / s )
2hs + 0.09
Where hs is the thickness of the surface layer in meters.

For IEEE Std 80-1986, IEEE Std 665-1995
1
Cs =
0.96
Kn
1 + 2
2
n =1 1 + (2nh / 0.08)
s
Cs is 1 when K=0
Decrement Factor, Df
Df = 1+
Ta
2t / T
1 e f a
tf
Where Ta is the equivalent system subtransient time constant in seconds.
Tolerable Step Potential, Estep and Etouch
42-36
Ground Grid Systems
Calculation Methods
For body weight of 50 kg
Estep 50 = (1000 + 6Cs s )
0.116
ts
Etouch 50 = (1000 + 1.5Cs s )
0.116
ts
For body weight of 70 kg

Estep 70 = (1000 + 6Cs s )
Etouch 70 = (1000 + 1.5Cs s )
0.157
ts
0.157
ts
Maximum Grid Current, IG

I G = S f C p D f (3I 0 )
42.12.6 Calculation Timeout

The default calculation timeout is 1800 second for FEM and is 60 second for IEEE method. These values
can be reset from Options (Preferences).
1. Switch back to One Line View (OLV).
2. Select menu Tools | Options (Preferences).
3. In the Ground Grid Systems section change the Timeout for FEM and IEEE calculation separately.
Below
shows an example:
42-37
Ground Grid Systems
Calculation Methods
42-38
Ground Grid Systems
Required Data
42.13 Required Data

The following related data is necessary to run a Ground Grid Systems Study: Soil Parameters, Grid Data,
and System Data. A summary of these data for different types of calculation methods is given in this
section.
System Data
System Frequency
Average Weight of Worker
Ambient Temperature
Short-Circuit Current
Short-Circuit Current Division Factor
Short-Circuit Current Projector Factor
Durations of Fault
System X/R Ratio
Plot Step (for FEM model only)
Boundary Extension (for FEM model only)
Soil Parameters
Surface Material Resistivity

Surface Material Depth
Upper Layer Soil Resistivity
Upper Layer Soil Depth
Lower Layer Soil Resistivity
Ground Conductor Library
Material Conductivity
Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity
K0 Factor
Fusing Temperature
Ground Conductor Resistivity
Thermal Capacity Factor
Grid Data (IEEE Standards Only)
Shape
Material Type
Conductor Cross Section
Grid Depth
Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction
Maximum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction
Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (for IEEE Std. 80-2000 L-shaped or T-shaped grids
only)
Minimum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction (for IEEE Std. 80-2000 L-shaped or T-shaped grids
only)
Number of Conductors in the X Direction
Number of Conductors in the Y Direction
Cost
42-39
Ground Grid Systems
Required Data
Rod Data (IEEE Standards Only)
Material Type
Number of Rods
Average Length
Diameter
Arrangement
Cost
Conductor Data (FEM Model Only)
Material Type
Insulation
Cross Section
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of Other End of Conductor
Cost
Rod Data (FEM Model Only)
Material Type
Insulation
Diameter
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Rod
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of Other End of Rod
Cost
Optional FEM Model Grid Group Data
Shape
Material Type
Conductor Cross Section
Grid Depth
Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction
Maximum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction
Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (for L-shaped or T-shaped grids)
Minimum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction (for L-shaped or T-shaped grids)
Number of Conductors in the X Direction
Number of Conductors in the Y Direction
Cost
42-40
Ground Grid Systems
Output Report
42.14 Output Report

Output reports for the Ground Grid Systems Studies are available in different levels and are arranged in
two formats: Crystal Output Report and Pop-Up Window display.
The naming procedure for the Ground Grid Systems Output Reports has been changed in ETAP 4.7.0.
The new method automatically attaches the name of the Ground Grid System presentation to the front of
the Output Report name. For example, if the report name is Rpt1, and the GGS presentation name is
Grid1, then the report name will be Grid1_Rpt1. The sections of the report name are separated by an
underscore.
If you convert a GGS project into ETAP version 4.7.0 or higher, any old Crystal Reports will not be listed
on the report name drop-down list because they do not have the name of the presentation as a prefix. To
correct this situation you need to add the name of the presentation and the underscore to each existing
Output Report. If you correctly renamed the existing reports, you will see them listed on the report name
drop-down list. You need to rename both of the GGS Output Report files (with extensions *.GR1 and
*.grp).
For example, if the existing GGS presentation and Output Report names are Grid2 and Rpt2
respectively, then you can browse for the location of the *.grp and *.GR1 files and rename them using
Windows Explorer.
42-41
Ground Grid Systems
Ground Grid Systems Report Manager
42.15 Ground Grid Systems Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Ground Grid Study Method toolbar to open the Ground Grid
Systems Report Manager dialog box. The Ground Grid Systems Report Manager consists of four pages
and provides different formats for the Crystal Reports.
checkbox.
Complete Page
Selects a report format that provides the Complete Output Report.
42-42
Ground Grid Systems
Input Page
Provides the format for different input data.
Result Page
Provides the format for different calculation results.
42-43
Ground Grid Systems
Summary Page
Provides the summary from the calculation results.
42.15.1 Ground Grid Systems Crystal Report

After running the Ground Grid Systems Study, click on the Report Manager button located on the Study
Case toolbar, or select the Crystal Report format from the Ground Grid Systems toolbar, to open and view
the Crystal Report output. The Ground Grid Systems Study Crystal Report contains the following major
sections:
Cover Page
This is the first page of the Ground Grid Systems study Crystal Report. It includes information from the
number of conductors and rods, unit system, project file name, and the output file name and its location.
42-44
Ground Grid Systems
Input Data
This section reports the input data related to the System, Soil, Grid, and Conductor Library.
System Input Data

This section reports the input data related to the system including the System Frequency, Average Weight
of Worker, Ambient Temperature, Short-Circuit Current, Short-Circuit Current Division Factor, ShortCircuit Current Projector Factor, Durations of Fault, System X/R Ratio, Plot Step (for FEM model only),
and Boundary Extension (for FEM model only).
42-45
Ground Grid Systems
Soil Input Data

This section reports the input data related to Soil including the Surface Material Resistivity, Surface
Material Depth, Upper Layer Soil Resistivity, Upper Layer Soil Depth, and Lower Layer Soil Resistivity.
Conductor Library
This section reports Conductor Library information. It shows the Material Conductivity, Thermal
Coefficient of Resistivity, K0 Factor, Fusing Temperature, Ground Conductor Resistivity, and Thermal
Capacity Factor.
Grid Data (for IEEE Standards)

This section reports the input data related to the grid including the Shape, Material Type, Conductor Cross
Section, Grid Depth, Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction, Maximum Length of the Grid in the
Y Direction, Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (only for IEEE Std. 80-2000 L-shaped or Tshaped grid).
Rod Data (for IEEE Standards)

This section reports the input data related to the grid including the Material Type, Number of Rods,
Average Length, Diameter, Arrangement, and Cost.
42-46
Ground Grid Systems
Conductor Data (for FEM model)

This section reports the conductor input data for the FEM model including Material Type, Insulation, Cross
Section, X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor, X, Y and Z Coordinates of Other End of
Conductor, and Cost.
Rod Data (for FEM model)

This section reports the rod input data for the FEM model including the Material Type, Insulation,
Diameter, X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor, X, Y, and Z Coordinates of Other End of
Conductor, and Cost.
Cost Data
Lists the cost data of conductors/rods.
42-47
Ground Grid Systems
Result
This section reports the results related to Intermediate Constants, Potential Profiles, Summary, and
Warning.
Report of Intermediate Constants for IEEE Standards

In this section the intermediate results Kim, Kis, Km, Ks, Kii, K1, K2 are reported, if the Report Details box
in the Study Case Editor dialog box is checked.
Summary for IEEE Standards

In this section, the Ground Resistance Rg, GPR, Step and Touch potentials, Reflection Factor K, Derating
Factor Df, and Maximum Grid Current and Warning information are reported.
42-48
Ground Grid Systems
Report of Potential Profiles for the FEM Model

The three Potential Profiles are reported if the Report Details box in the Study Case Editor is checked in
this section.
Summary for the FEM Model

The Ground Resistance Rg, GPR, Step and Touch Potentials, Reflection Factor K, Derating Factor Df, and
Maximum Grid Current and Warning information are reported in this section.
42-49
Ground Grid Systems
42.15.2 Summary and Warning

After running the Ground Grid Systems Study, click on the Summary and Warning button located on the
Ground Grid System toolbar, to open the GRD Analysis Alert View dialog box. If the Auto Display of
Summary and Warning box located on the Study Case Editor dialog box is checked, this view will open
automatically after the Ground Grid Systems calculations are executed.
42-50
Ground Grid Systems
Plot Selection
42.16 Plot Selection

Plots are used only with the FEM method, and are available for Absolute/Step/Touch Voltages. To select
a plot, open the Plot Selection dialog box by clicking on the Plot Selection button located on the Ground
Grid Systems toolbar.
Plot Selection
The following 3-D Potential profiles are available for analysis of GGS Study Case results:
Absolute Voltage
Check this to plot an Absolute Potential profile.
Touch Voltage
Check this to plot a Touch Potential profile.
Step Voltage
Check this to plot a Step Potential profile.
Plot Type
The following plot types are available for analysis of GGS Study Case results:
3-D
Plot a 3-D Potential profile for the Absolute/Touch/Step voltage.
Contour
Plot a Contour Potential profile for the Absolute/Touch/Step voltage.
Display Over Limit Voltage

Show areas with potentials exceeding the tolerable limits for 3-D Touch/Step Potential profiles. This
function is disabled when the Contour plot type is selected. A set of sample plots is shown below.
42-51
Ground Grid Systems
Plot Selection
42-52
Ground Grid Systems
Plot Selection
42-53
Chapter 43
Grounding System & Earthing Types
The grounding / earthing system feature is an integrated tool within ETAP one line diagram that
automatically detects the system earthing configuration based on source and transformer grounding /
earthing type selection. The resulting earthing types are displayed both on the one line diagram and in the
Cable editor .
The scope of this tool includes 3-phase and 1-phase AC systems of 1 kV or less and DC systems of 1.5
kV or less.
The grounding / earthing system detection is used for sizing of Protective Earthing (PE) Conductors and
for Electric Shock Protection calculations.
ETAP makes a distinction between grounding system and earthing types by using the following
definitions:
Grounding System
There are four grounding systems available in ETAP:
Solid Grounded
Low Impedance Grounded
High Impedance Grounded
Ungrounded
The grounding is determined by the connected energized sources in the system. Grounding types can also
be determined if multiple sources exist the system. The selection of a grounding system will enable the
selection of earthing types.
Earthing Type
For solidly grounded system the following earthing types are available:
TN-C
TN-C-S
TN-S
TT
NEC
For other grounding systems (including ungrounded systems) the following earthing types are available:
43-1
System Grounding
Grounding
System
Open
Resistor
Reactor
Xfmr-Reactor
Xfmr-Resistor
Delta
Overview
Earthing
Type
IT-Collective, IT-Individual, and IT-In Groups
For more information on the definition of the earthing types, refer to section 43.4.1 of this chapter.
43-2
System Grounding
Quick Start Guide
43.1 Quick Start Guide

43.1.1 Automatic Earthing Type Detection
1) Verify that the earthing walk option is enabled by going to the Tools drop down menu and
then selecting Options (Preferences). Set the Earthing Type determination for Grounding/PE
Sizing option to true inside the Cable Sizing section.
2) In the project tool bar, turn on the continuity check button and then click the Theme
button.
3) In order to be able to determine the grounding / earthing type on the one-line diagram, select
either the grounding or earthing theme from the Active Color Code menu inside the theme
manager.
43-1
System Grounding
Quick Start Guide
4) For determination of grounding types, the system can be any voltage level; however, for
earthing type, the scope of the search is based on 1 kV or less for AC systems and 1.5 kV
volts or less for DC system. (Refer to chapter 9.1.6 for more information)
5) Connect source and transformer to the system and select their grounding types from inside
their editors.
a. For 3-phase power grid, select Wye (Star)-Solid or delta grounding
b. For 1-phase power grid, check the grounded check box
c. For 3-phase transformer and generator, select Wye-Solid, Wye-Open, Delta
grounding, or any of the other Wye impedance type grounding
d. For 1-phase transformer, check the grounded check box
e. For the rest of the sources (e.g. UPS, charger, etc.), check the grounding check box
6) Select the earthing type for source and transformer.
43-4
System Grounding
Multiple Grounding
43.2 Definition of Earthing Types

For low voltage systems in ETAP, the choice of earthing types inside of the source and transformer
editors are a reflection of the way the load side of the sources (Power Grid, UPS, etc.) and transformers
are connected to earth and how the chassis of the loads are protected during a fault condition.
The definitions of TN earthing types are as follows:
TT
TN-C
TN-S
TN-C-S
NEC
43.2.1 TT, TN, TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S Systems

The earthing type for a TN system is marked by using 2, 3, or 4 letters:
The first letter, T, is defined by Terre which defines how the source or transformer neutral is
connected to the earth.
The second letter indicates how the load chassis is connected:
o T is defined by Terre, which gives a TT system, which is the how the load chassis is
grounded to earth using an earthing electrode.
43-9
System Grounding
Earthing Types
N is defined by Neutral which defines the load chassis as connected to neutral. This
gives a TN system, which is how the load chassis is connected to earth using either a
neutral or a protective earthing (PE) conductor.
The third letter indicate how the neutral and PE conductors are utilized:
o C is defined by Combined which means that the neutral and PE conductors are
combined into one conductor (PEN conductor) that acts as the current return conductor
during both steady state and fault conditions.
S is defined by Separated which means that the neutral and PE conductors are
separated and independent from each other.
43-6
System Grounding
Earthing Types
The TN-C-S earthing type has four letters and the fourth letter, just like the third letter, indicates
how the neutral and PE conductors are utilized. The TN-C-S start from the source (such as a
utility company) with a combined PEN conductor until a service entry point, e.g. a residential
unit, is reached. As soon as the customers service entry point is crossed, the earthing conductor
will separate into two separate conductors, which are the neutral and the PE conductors.
43-7
System Grounding
Earthing Types
43.2.2 IT System
The earthing type for an IT system is marked by using 2 letters and a term:
The first letter, I, is defined by Isolated which defines the neutral as is either not connected to
earth or indirectly connected to earth through a high impedance.
The second letter, T, is defined by Terre which defines the load chassis as connected to earth
using an earthing electrode.
The term that follows the IT earthing types are defined as follows:
o Individual: The chassis of each load is earthed separately from the neighboring load
chassis.
o In Groups: Different loads are separated into groups and then the chassis of each load in a
group is interconnected with the other chassis within the same group. The different
groups are then earthed individually.
o Collective: All of the chassis of all the loads are interconnected and then earthed.
o
NEC earthing type identification is supported; however, shock protection calculations that are
described in chapter 45 are not supported for it.
43-8
System Grounding
Multiple Grounding
43.3 Multiple Grounding / Earthing Handling

When ETAP analyzes the system and encounters an area (that is bounded by transformers, sources, and
loads) with multiple sources and transformers with different grounding types, the grounding type that
offers the least impedance will be considered the dominant grounding type.
For example, if an element is connected to both a solidly grounded and a high resistance grounded source,
then the element will be considered as solidly grounded since a path of lesser impedance back to the
source is available from the point of view of the element.
When ETAP encounters an area with multiple sources and transformers, the resulting determined earthing
type may differ based on the earthing types selected from the sources and transformers. If the earthing
type yields as Undetermined set the earthing types to be the same for the multiple source and
transformers.
43-9
Chapter 44
Cable Ampacity and Sizing
This chapter covers more specifically the different cable ampacity calculation methods available from the
Ampacity/Capacity page of the cable editor. These methods are listed as followed:
BS 7671
ICEA P-54-440
IEC 60364-5-52
IEEE 399
NEC
For each method, the input parameters and their definition are exposed. In addition, their effect and how
they are used in each calculation method is explained.
44-1
Ampacity Parameters
44.1 Cable Editor Ampacity/Capacity Parameters

44.1.1 Capacity/Ampacity Page
Calculation Methods and Standards

Depending on the cable installation type, different methods can be used to calculate cable ampacity.
IEEE 399
This calculation method is according to the IEEE Std 399, IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems Analysis. It covers installation types of underground duct and directly
buried. The calculation is based on ampacity at a base condition and adjustment factors derived from
detailed calculations using the Neher-McGrath Method.
These factors established a maximum feasible load capacity, which results in no reduction of the cables
expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several components as listed on the
following page.
Fta
Ftc
Fth
Fg
Fc
Fm
=
=
=
=
=
=

44-2

Fce
Fm
Ffc
Ffs
Ffw
=
=
=
=
=
Ampacity Parameters

Derating factor for A/G conduit (NEC and diversity factor)
ICEA P-54-440
The method based on ICEA P-54-440 applies to cables in above ground trays using calculated derating
factors based on tray size, cable fill, and environment conditions. The actual values of tray depth, width,
and % fill entries will be taken into account, which gives more accurate results and is based on the
method described in the Stolpe paper (Paper 70 TP 557-PWR)1. However, the Stolpe Method may
provide a smaller ampacity for large cables (for example, 750 mm2) compared to those from ICEA P-54440.
In addition, if both the ambient temperature and conductor temperature differ from those shown in the
ICEA Standard (40 0C ambient temperature and 90 0C conductor temperature), the resulting ampacity
values may be smaller because the standard used the product of both correction factors as the temperature
correction. In ETAP calculations, the ambient temperature and conductor temperature values are used
directly in the calculation and, therefore, yield more accurate results.
In the used method, the following AC resistance equations for temperature corrections are employed:
R = R(234.5 + Tc) / (234.5 + Tb) Copper Conductors
R = R(228.1 + Tc) / (228.1 + Tb) Aluminum Conductors
Where:
R = Resistance at the base temperature Tb
R = Resistance at the operating temperature Tc
Tb = Conductor base temperature in OC
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in OC
NEC (NFPA 70)

This method calculates derating factors according to National Eclectic Code (NEC). It applies to cables
in above ground trays, above ground conduits, air drop, and underground direct buried and underground
conduits. NEC does not provide ampacity derating due to bottom cover or correction of the ampacity
multiplying factors due to the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fireproofing. In
general, cable sizes of 2/0 AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner, with
a maximum of two cables high.
Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a uniform depth up to the maximum
of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here corresponds to a maximum fill condition
and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal depths.
For NEC standard, the selected cable Base ampacity must be in accordance with the ampacities listed in
the tables from NEC Article 310 and Appendix B.
Users have the option to select to read the cable Base ampacity from either the Library or directly from
the NEC tables. This option can be set from the Tools | Options (Preferences) available from the main top
menu of ETAP. False will force the algorithm to read the Base ampacity from the NEC tables (available
44-3
Ampacity Parameters
from ETAP 11 release) whereas True will force the algorithm to read the Base ampacity from the cable
Library.
The NEC method is only applicable to a cable insulation voltage rating of 35 kV or less.
Ambient temperature correction factor should be calculated based on the equation below, as required by
NEC standard.
I 2 = I1
TC TA2 TD
where:
TC TA1 TD
I1 = ampacity from tables at ambient TA1

I2 = ampacity at desired ambient TA2
TC = conductor temperature in degree Celsius (oC)
TA1 = surrounding ambient from tables in degree Celsius (oC)
TA = desired ambient in degree Celsius (oC)
TD = dielectric loss temperature rise.
ETAP currently uses the following equations:
Correction Factor =
Tc Ta
234.5 + Tcbase
.
for CU conductors
Tcbase Tabase 234.5 + Tc
44-4

Correction Factor =
Ampacity Parameters
Tc Ta
228.1 + Tcbase
for AL conductors
.
Tcbase Tabase 228.1 + Tc
These formulae come from AIEE-IPCEA Power Cable Ampacities Copper Conductors, p. III. B
and IEEE Std. 242-1986, section 8.5.2.4.
In case the Ta ambient temperature checkbox is checked under the Ampacity/Capacity page of the cable
editor, these two equations will be applied for the operating conductor temperatures that are outside the
range provided by the NEC tables for both A/G and U/G installations. The Ta adjustment will come from
the NEC tables if the checkbox is checked. If the checkbox is unchecked, these equations will apply to
both the Ta and Tc temperature correction factors.
If the Base Tc of the selected cable from the Library does not match any of the NEC tables, the Base
ampacity will be set to 0. If the Base Ta of the selected cable from the Library does not match any of the
NEC tables, ETAP will automatically convert the ambient temperature to the one of the NEC tables,
retrieve the ampacity, and convert back to display the ampacity at the Base ambient temperature. The
conversion factor will depend on whether the Ta adjustment per NEC Table is checked or not.
In case an insulation type is not listed in any of the NEC tables, e.g. XLPE, SBR, Neoprene, etc, no
ampacity shall be provided by the NEC ampacity calculation method. It is also important to know that
both insulation type and conductor base temperature (Base Tc) must match the header of the said NEC
table. An exception shall be made for Rubber and Rubber 2 insulation types as they are general types of
insulation and were present since the earliest version of ETAP and, therefore, were mapped to any of the
columns that supported rubber-based insulation types at 75 oC. For instance, the under-ground ampacity
44-5
Ampacity Parameters
tables in Appendix B are all listed at 75 oC. If the header of the selected cable mentions 90 oC instead of
75 oC, then the method will read the base ampacity from NEC tables 310.16 and 310.17 based on the
number of conductors per cable and installation type.
Grouping factor is applied based on the number of conductors per cable and the number of conductors per
location controlled by # C/Loc field under the Grouping section. Rows and Columns can be defined for
cables installed in conduits in either air or in duct bank per NEC Figure 310.60 for high voltage cables
and Figure B.310.2 for low voltage cables. Load diversity can be applied at 50 % and at 100 % (Without
Load Diversity option). The entire grouping factor can be bypassed by checking the Without Grouping
Effect option under the Amp Adjustment section of the Ampacity/Capacity page of the cable editor. For
more than 4 conductors in cable or location, NEC tables 310.15(B)(2)(a) and B.310.11 shall apply.
For above ground (A/G) installation in trays, NEC sections 392.11 for low voltage cables and 392.13 for
high voltage cables shall apply. These two sections also handle the Top Cover and Maintained Spacing
options for A/G Trays installations as displayed in the figure below.
In case the Without Grouping option is checked, even if the cable is a 4/C through 10/C, the grouping
factor will be equal to 1 and the ampacity of that cable will be obtained from the NEC tables, which are
designed for 1/C, 2/C, and 3/C only. Therefore only 1 through 3 conductors of the cable will be
considered for current-carrying.
BS 7671 Standard
This method is based on BS 7671 - 2008 (17th Edition): Requirements for Electrical Installation. It
applies to a number of types of installation, including above ground and underground configurations. This
method can be used for cables at nominal voltages up to and including 1000V a.c. and 1500V d.c.
44-6
Ampacity Parameters
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30 Co for cables in Air and 20 Co for buried
cables directly in soil or in ducts in the ground per BS 7671. The actual cable operating ambient
temperature can be specified in the Operating Ta field. The cables Base and Operating conductor
temperature (Tc) is determined based on cable conductor type and insulation type corresponding to Tables
4D1A and onwards of BS 7671.
Cable Base Ampacity (Current-Carrying Capability) is from Tables 4D1A and onwards of BS 7671.
Under certain conditions, the base ampacity may not be available from these tables and the Base
Ampacity field will show zero or/ and a message will be posted. In this case you may refer to ETAP log
pane for more information.
Cable Ampacity/Capacity calculation result is displayed in the Derated Ampacity field. The following
correction factors are considered for cable Capacity calculation:
Ca Correction factor for ambient temperature. This factor is from Table 4B1 or Table 4B2 of BS 7671
Appendix 4.
Cg Correction factor for grouping. This factor is from Tables 4C1, 4C2, 4C3, 4C4 or 4C5 of BS 7671
Appendix 4.
Ci Correction factor for conductors embedded in thermal insulation. Refer to Section 523.7 of BS 7671
for detailed information.
Cc Correction factor for the type of protective device or installation condition, such as a BS 3036 Fuse.
A factor of 0.725 is applied for cables protected by a Fuse to BS 3036 and 0.653 is applied for cables
protected by a Fuse to BS 3036 and the installation method is in a duct in the ground or buried direct .
Refer to Section 5 of BS 7671 Appendix 4 for detailed information. A BS 3036 Fuse is specified on the
Protection page of cable editor by selecting Device ID or User-Defined Overload Protection device.
Cr Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity. Refer to Section 2.2 and Table 4B3 of BS 7671 for
Note: Interpolation or extrapolation may be used if a factor cannot be found directly from the tables.
If a correction factor cannot be determined, the Derated Ampacity field on the Ampacity page will
show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Sheath/Armor and Jacket Layer

According to BS 7671, sheath layer is an important factor in current-carrying capacity calculation and the
sheath layer can be either metallic or non-metallic.
Determination of the Base Ampacity for a cable for a particular installation method may require the cable
to be Armored and/or Sheathed. Such setup can be performed in the Physical page of the Cable Editor.
In some cases a message will be posted providing information of such requirement. In other cases Base
and Derated Ampacity will be displayed as zero. You may also refer to ETAP log pane for more
information.
In the current version of ETAP, a sheath layer is only metallic: lead or aluminum. For 1/C cables, Steel
Armor is considered as non-magnetic. A Jacket in ETAP is treated as non-metallic sheath for BS 7671
based calculation. Therefore, for current- carrying capacity calculations based on BS 7671, a cable is
considered to have a sheath layer if the cable has either a sheath type or a jacket type specified. It is
required to enter a nonzero thickness value if a Sheath/Amor or Jacket Type is selected. Note that Paper
type Jacket is not treated as a sheath for BS 7671 based calculation.
44-7
Ampacity Parameters
Note: Flexible cable is not handled in this ETAP release.
IEC 60364 Standard

This method is based on IEC 60364-5-52: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Wiring
systems. It applies to a number of types of installation, including above ground and underground
configurations. This method can be used for cables with nominal voltages up to and including 1000V a.c.
and 1500V d.c.
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30 C for in air installation and 20 C for
in ground per IEC 60364-5-52. The actual cable operating ambient temperature can be specified in the
Operating Ta field. The cables Base and Operating conductor temperature (Tc) is determined based on
cable conductor type and insulation type corresponding to Tables A.52-1 to A.52-13 of Annex A, IEC
60364-5-52.
Cable Base Ampacity (Current-Carrying Capability) is from Tables A.52-2 to A.52-13 of Annex A, IEC
60364-5-52. Under certain conditions, the base ampacity may not be available from these tables and the
Base Ampacity field will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Cable Current Carrying Capacity Calculation result is displayed in the Derated Ampacity field. The
following correcting factors are considered for cable Current Carrying Capacity calculation:
Ca Correction factor for ambient temperature. This factor is from Table A.52-14 or Table A.5215 of IEC 60364-5-52 Annex A.
Cg Correction factor for grouping. This factor is from Tables A.52-17 to A.51-21 of IEC
60364-5-52 Annex A. For a group containing different sizes of insulated conductors or
cables are
not considered for this ETAP release.
Cr Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity. Correction is considered based on Table
A.52-16 for soil thermal resistivities other than 2.5 K-m/W (250 C-cm/W).
44-8
Ampacity Parameters
Note: Interpolation or extrapolation may be used if a factor cannot be found directly from the
tables.
If a correction factor cannot be determined, the Derated Ampacity field on the Ampacity page will
show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Sheath and Jacket Layer
According to IEC 60364-5-52, sheath layer is an important factor in Current Carrying Capacity
calculation and it can be either metallic or non-metallic. In the current version of ETAP, a sheath layer is
only metallic: lead or aluminum. A Jacket in ETAP is treated as non-metallic sheath for 60364-5-52 based
calculation. Therefore, for Current Carrying Capacity calculation based on 60364-5-52, a cable is
considered to have a sheath layer if the cable has either a sheath type or a jacket type specified. It is
required to enter a nonzero thickness value if a Sheath/Amor or Jacket Type is selected. Note that Paper
type Jacket is not treated as a sheath for 60364-5-52 based calculation.
Type
If the option of Installation Type is selected, the Installation Type list field contains all the installation
types currently available in ETAP. When one of these installation types is selected, the Standard list field
will contain only the standards applicable to the selected installation type. The table below gives all the
installation types and applicable standards.
Installation
Type
IEEE
399
UG Duct
UG Buried
Trenches
Embedded
Direct
A/G Trays
Brackets
Cleats
Ladder
10
A/G Conduit
ICEA
P54-440
BS 7671
IEC
60364
NE
C
44-9
Installation
Pictures

11
Open &
Clipped
Direct
Air Drop
12
Ampacity Parameters
13
Building
Voids
14
15
Trunking
Wire Mesh
X
X
X
X
16
Channel
17
Architrave/
Window
Frame
Masonry
18
Sub-Type
When the BS 7671 or IEC 60364 Standard is selected in the Standard field, the installation Sub-Type and
installation Method will also show up along with the installation Type. You can select a different
installation sub-type from the list.
Method
This field displays the installation method for the selected sub-type per Table 4A2 of BS 7671:2008,
Requirements for Electrical Installations as shown below.
This field displays the installation method for the selected sub-type per Table 52-3, IEC 603645-52, Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Wiring systems as shown below.
44-10
Ampacity Parameters
Note: Magnetic/Non-Magnetic Installation

cables. The following table shows when to use cable libraries designated as Magnetically and Nonmagnetically Installed cables:
Magnetically Installed
NonInstalled
X
U/G Buried
A/G Tray No Cover
Magnetically
A/G Conduit - PVC

Air Drop
Results
Operating/FLA
This field displays the required load current for the cable. For a branch cable, the required current will be
the Average or Phase Max operating current entered by user or updated by load flow calculations in the
Loading page of the cable editor. For an equipment cable user can select to display either the operating or
full load current (FLA) of the load.
44-11
Ampacity Parameters
Base
The full rated current value in amperes for the chosen cable before any correction occurs. Depending on
the selected standard, this value is the base Ampacity in ETAP cable library or is from NEC tables or is
the current-carrying capability from tables of IEC 60364-5-52 or BS 7671.
This is the ampacity stated or specified by the manufacturer or other authoritative sources, such as NEC,
IEC or BS. Note that if the calculation standard is ICEA P-54-440, this field is hidden, since the base
ampacity is not required for the calculation by the standard.
Derated
The calculated maximum allowed current carrying Capacity (Ampacity) for the chosen cable after all the
correction factors have been applied to the Base Ampacity based on the specified installation conditions.
Allowable Ampacity / Capacity (Alert)

This is the maximum allowable current carrying Capacity (Ampacity) of the cable. It is used in the Load
Flow output reports to indicate the percent of cable overloading. This value is also used as a base for the
cable flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
ETAP provides the following options for selecting the maximum allowable current:
Derated
User-Defined
UGS Calculated
Select this option to make the calculated current carrying Capacity (Ampacity)
results the maximum allowable current for this cable.
Select this option to enter the maximum allowable current for this cable
Select this option to use the Ampacity calculated by the Underground
Raceways Systems module.
Temperature/RHO
This section includes information about cable temperature and earth soil thermal resistivity if the
installation type is U/G Duct or U/G Buried.
44-12
Ampacity Parameters
Base
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius obtained from the library or from the current-carrying
capability tables of the corresponding Standard for the base capacity (ampacity). The ambient temperature
is the temperature at a cable installation location when the cable installation is absent. Base Capacity
(Ampacity) for A/G (Above Ground) cables is usually given at 30 degree Celsius and for U/G (Under
Ground) cables is usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
This is the conductor temperature in degrees Celsius obtained from the library or from the currentcarrying capability tables based on the corresponding Standard for the base capacity (ampacity). This
order is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C-cm/Watt) obtained
from the library or from tables of corresponding Standard for the base capacity (ampacity). This field will
be hidden if the installation type is not U/G Duct or U/G Buried.
Operating
Ta
This is the actual ambient temperature for the actual installations in degrees Celsius. The operating
ambient temperature is the temperature at the cable installation location when the installation is absent.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable actual operating conductor temperature for the actual installations in
degrees Celsius.
RHO
This is the actual thermal resistivity of the soil for the underground installation in degrees Celsius
centimeters per Watt.
Ta Adjustment per NEC Table

This Check Box only appears when NEC standard is selected. Please refer to NEC standard section.
Note: This checkbox is only available when Tools | Options (Preferences) set to FALSE and for cable
insulation voltages below 2 kV.
Ampacity (Capacity)
Ampacity (Capacity) ratings are displayed for comparison of base, derated and, required ampacities. The
method used here is based on a concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity
(capacity) to calculate the derated ampacity (capacity).
Id = F x Ib, where Id is the derated ampacity (capacity), F is the total derating factor and Ib is the base
ampacity (capacity).
44-13
Ampacity Parameters
Tray
This section is enabled when the installation type is A/G Trays and the Standard is either ICEA P-54-440
or NEC.
Top Cover
Select Top Cover if there is a removable top cover on the cable tray.
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Cumulative Effect
cable trays. The following table summarizes the factors ETAP uses:
Fire Coating
X
X
X
X
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
X
Bottom Cover
X
X
X
Top Cover
X
X
X
44-14
X
X
X
X
PS Uses
Fire Wrap
Smaller
Smaller
Top & Bottom
Wrap
Wrap
Wrap
Ampacity Parameters
Maintained Spacing
Check this box to indicate that cables are kept in the tray with maintained spacing.
Ampacity Adjustment
The Ampacity Adjustment section is enabled when the cable installation type is A/G conduit and the
Standard is NEC. From this section, you can select options to consider grouping effect.
Without Grouping Effect

NEC Standards do not allow for grouping effects (that is, the number of rows and columns) of cables. If
the checkbox is not selected, grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered. Note
that when this box is checked, the Rows and Columns fields and the Fire Protection section will be
hidden.
With 50% Load Diversity and Without Load Diversity

The level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be either 50% or none.
Layout
This section is enabled when the standard is BS 7671 and the installation type is one of the above ground
types.
44-15
Ampacity Parameters
This section or part of this section is enabled when the standard is IEC 60364.
44-16
Ampacity Parameters
44-17
Ampacity Parameters
Horizontal
Select Horizontal layout with Touching or Spaced if applicable. Note that this field is hidden if it is not
applicable for the selected installation type.
Vertical
Select Vertical layout with Touching or Spaced if applicable. Note that this field is hidden if it is not
Trefoil
Select Trefoil layout. Note that this field is hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type.
Spaced
Select this option if the cables are placed with required spacing (spaced by a clearance between adjacent
surfaces of at least one cable diameter (De)) between them. Note that this field is hidden if it is not
Touching
Select this option if the cables are placed touching each other in the installation. Note that this field is
hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type.
Please refer to BS 7671 and IEC 60364 for the definitions of Spaced and Touching.
No of Trays
Select No of Trays for determining correction factor for grouping based on Tables A.52-20 or A.52-21 of
IEC 60364-5-52. If BS 7671 Standard is used, the correction factor is based on Tables 4C4 or 4C5 of BS
7671 - 2008 (17th Edition)
<= 0.3*Cable OD or > 0.3*Cable OD
Switch between these two selections for different Installation Methods. Refer to Table 52-3 of
IEC 60364-5-52. If BS 7671 Standard is used, refer to Table 4A2 of BS 7671 - 2008 (17th
Edition)
44-18
Ampacity Parameters
<= 0.3*Cable OD or > 0.3*Cable OD

Switch between these two selections with different Installation Methods. Refer to Table 52-3 of IEC
60364-5-52.
1.5 De <= V < 20 De or V > 20 De

Switch between these two selections with different Installation Methods. Refer to Table 52-3 of IEC
60364-5-52. If BS 7671 Standard is used, refer to Table 4A2 of BS 7671 - 2008 (17th Edition)
Circuit Clearance
This field is enabled when in ground (UG Duct or U/G Buried) installation is selected. Refer to Tables
A.52-18 and A.52-19 of IEC 60364-5-52. If BS 7671 Standard is used, refer to Tables 4C2 and 4C3 of
BS 7671 - 2008 (17th Edition)
Grouping
In this section, user can specify the installation information related to the calculation of cable grouping
factors. The fields in this section are dependent on the installation type and standard selected.
Note: For BS 7671 and IEC 60364 standards, this section is unavailable if a cable is a Copper conductor,
Mineral insulated and the Conductor Temperature (Tc) is set to 105 C based on the standard. For more
information refer to Tables A.52-7 and A.52-9 of IEC 60364-5-52 and Table 4G2A of BS 7171 BS 7671 2008 (17th Edition)
Parameters in Grouping Section for IEEE 399 Standard, U/G Raceway

Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the ampacity, the number
of rows and columns of the duct bank must be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.
Parameters in Grouping Section for NEC Standard, A/G Conduit

44-19
Ampacity Parameters

50 % Load Diversity
80 %
70 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 24
25 through 42
43 and above
4 through 6
7 through 9
10 through 20
21 through 30
31 through 40
41 through 60
No Load Diversity
80 %
70 %
50 %
45 %
40 %
35 %
Parameters in Grouping Section for ICEA P-54-440 Standard, A/G Trays

The following items are displayed only when ICEA is selected.
Height
Height of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
44-20
Ampacity Parameters
Width
% Fill
The total amount of cable tray cross-sectional area used by cables placed in the tray, including gap
between cables.
Where ni is the number of cables in the tray with diameter di and l is the number of different sizes of
cables in the tray.
Depth
Depth of cable mass calculated in inches or centimeters using Height*%Fill/100. If the calculated depth is
smaller than the cable diameter, an * sign will be displayed on the right of Depth and above Derated, and
the cable diameter will be treated as the depth for derating calculation.
Fire Protection for ICEA or NEC Standards, A/G Installation

The fire protection area provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices.
Each of the three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with
the cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection
material specifications selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
44-21
Ampacity Parameters
For maintained spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between
adjacent cables or groups to less than the required values, the cable shall be considered to be nonmaintained spacing. On the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable
coating and no other cable can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for a reduction in cable % fill
below nominal value.
Fire retardant coating is not a standard procedure for A/G conduits.
Fire Stop
tray routed through fire stops. Note: for A/G conduits, there may not be any reason to derate the cable for
fire stops since typical fire stops are constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is
considered to be insufficient to cause an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
Fire Protection for BS 7671 Standard, A/G Installation

This section is about thermal insulation. Refer to Section 523, BS 7671 for detailed information.
According to BS 7671-16th Edition, thermal insulation for fire protection may be considered for all
installation types, except Installation Methods 4 and 6. For Installation Method 4 or 6, cables are in
conduits which are in thermally insulated walls or above thermally insulated ceilings, and the effect of
thermal insulation is already considered in the current-carrying capacity tables.
44-22
Ampacity Parameters
BS 7671 - 17th Edition

Refer to Section 523.7, BS 767117th Edition for detailed information.
According to BS 7671-17th Edition, thermal insulation for fire protection may be considered for all
installation types, except Installation Methods 1, 2, and 3. For Installation Methods 1, 2 and 3 the cables
are in conduits which are in thermally insulated walls or above thermally insulated ceilings, and the effect
of thermal insulation is already considered in the current-carrying capacity tables.
Thermal Insulation Applied

Check this box if the cable has thermal insulation.
Insulation Length
Enter the length of cable thermal insulation section in mm.
No. of Circuit
This field is enabled when BS 7671 or IEC 60364 is selected. This is used for reduction factor of
grouping. The maximum allowable number of circuits is limited based on the appropriate standards.
Correction Factors
The correction Factors tool is only available when BS-7671 or IEC 60364 standard is selected.
Correction Factor Button

Click on the Correction Factors button to display the Correction Factors Editor
44-23
Ampacity Parameters
Correction Factors Editor

The editor displays the correction factor value that is being applied when the installation conditions differ
from those for which the base capacity (ampacity) value was specified.
Ambient Temperature
Ca Correction factor for Ambient Temperature
Grouping
Cg Correction factor for Grouping.
Thermal Insulation
Ci Correction factor for conductors embedded in thermal insulation.
44-24
Ampacity Parameters
Protective Device or Installation Condition

Cc Correction factor for the type of protective device or installation condition.
Note: Only applies for BS 7671 while the BS 3036 Fuse option is checked in Overload Protection device
section of the Cable Protection Page or for installation method is "in a duct in the ground" or "buried
direct".
Soil Thermal Resistivity

Cr Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity
44-25
Ampacity Parameters
Cable Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the cable calculations in the current project folder. Select a file
to view the report or to create a new report. Note: in the latter case, the existing file will be overwritten.
When Prompt is selected, a new file will be created.
Cable Report Manager Button

The Cable Report Manager button is used to access the various output reports.
44-26
Capacity Calculations
44.2 Current-Carrying Capacity Calculations

1. Choose a cable from the ETAP cable Library in the Info page of the Cable Editor.
2. In the Info Page enter the Length of the cable and the No. of Conductors/Phase.
3. In the Physical Page, verify that the appropriate Sheath/Armor and Jacket Type have been
entered. Also, verify that the appropriate thickness for Sheath/Armor and Jacket has been
entered.
4. Navigate to the Capacity (Ampacity) Page of the Cable Editor
a. In the Installation section, select the applicable standard.
b. Choose the Installation Type and Sub-type for the required cable installation.
c. In the Layout section, make the appropriate Layout selections that apply to the cable
installation.
d. In the Group section, specify the number of circuits under consideration if cables are
grouped.
e. If thermal insulation is applied to the Cable, specify this in the Fire Protection section.
This can be specified by checking the Thermal Insulation Applied option and entering the
Insulation Length in mm. Note this option is only available for BS 7671 current carrying
capacity calculations.
Note: A/G Conduit - In Thermally insulated Wall Installations will not display this
option.
f. In the temperature section:
g. Enter the ambient temperature (Ta) in the Operating Ta field.
h. Select the conductor temperature (Tc) in the Operating Tc dropdown list (if available).
i. For U/G Duct or U/G Buried installations, enter the thermal resistivity of the soil in the
Operating RHO field.
5. Navigate to the Protection Page of the Cable Editor:
a. Select the appropriate Overload protective device. User defined values can also be
selected.
b. If the cable is protected by a BS 3036 Fuse. Select Device ID and the available Fuse or
select the User-Defined option for Overload Protection. Then proceed onto checking the
Fuse to BS 3036 option.
Note: Please note that the Fuse to BS 3036 option is available only for BS 7671 and the
Overload Protection Device is a Fuse or the User-Defined option is selected.
c. Select the proper Overcurrent protective device. User defined values can also be selected.
6. Navigate back to the Capacity (Ampacity) Page of the Cable Editor.
44-27
Cable Sizing Calculations
44.3 Current-Carrying Capacity Calculations

Methodology
The Current Carrying -Capacity calculations are based on BS7671 or IEC 60364-5-54 depending on
which standard is selected in the Installation section.
44.3.1 Methodology
The method used to determine the current- carrying capacity is based on a concept of correction factors
which are dependent on the installation condition. These factors are applied against a base capability
(ampacity) to calculate the derated current capacity.
Derated Current Capacity = Base Current x Cf, where Cf is the overall correction factor.
Overall Correction Factor (Cf)

This is the correction factor which takes into account the overall differences in the cables actual
capacity, which results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall correction factor is
Ca= Correction factor for ambient temperature.

Cg = Correction factor for cable grouping.
Cr = Correction factor for underground soil thermal resistivity.
Ci = Correction factor for conductors embedded in thermal insulation.
Cc = Correction factor for the type of protective device or installation condition.
44.3.2 Current-Carrying Capacity Calculations Display

Once the maximum current capacity has been determined, it will be displayed in the Derated display field
in the Results section of the Ampacity Page of the Cable Editor. Clicking on the Correction Factors
button will allow the correction factors that were applied to the calculation to be displayed.
44-28
Ampacity Parameters
44.4 Cable Editor Sizing Phase

44.4.1 Sizing Phase Page
Standard
The Standard field displays the standard selected in the Ampacity page. When the Loading requirement is
checked in the Requirements section, the ampacity calculation in cable sizing will be based on the
standard displayed.
Results
number of conductors per phase that meets the specified constraints. Additionally, ETAP provides one
cable size smaller than the optimal size for your selection. For the voltage drop results, Vd is in percent
based on bus nominal kV. If cable is directly connected to the output of a VFD, Vd is in percent based on
VFD output nominal kV. Vst is in percent based on motor rated kV.
Along with the calculation results, this section also displays the required cable size, Ampacity (Current
Carrying Capacity), percent of voltage drop Vd, and percent of starting voltage Vt if cable sizing options
for the corresponding constraints are checked. The required cable size is the largest size from all the
requirements. The requirement ampacity is the larger value from Loading and Overload constraint. Note
that if the "Use MF for Ampacity" option is selected, the Loading used for sizing will be multiplied by the
MF value displayed in the Cable Application section.
Constraints
You can select one or multiple constraints for determining the recommended size of cable. Note that some
of the options are dependent on the installation type, standard used and if the cable is an equipment cable
for a motor.
44-29
Ampacity Parameters
Loading
If Loading is selected as one of the constraints, sizing will be conducted to meet the load current
requirement based on the cable installation and ambient conditions specified in the Capacity (Ampacity)
page. The load ampere value displayed is based on the option selected in the Loading Current for Sizing
section in the Loading page. Average or Maximum of 3 phase load may be used depending on the
selection in the Loading page.
Voltage Drop (Vd)

If you check Vd, ETAP will size the cable based on the percent voltage drop value you enter here.
Voltage drop is in percent of nominal kV of the bus connected to the cable. If the nominal voltages of the
From Bus and To Bus are different, nominal kV of the From Bus is selected. If the cable is directly
connected to the output of a VFD, Vd is in percent based on VFD output nominal kV. The following table
shows the methods used for calculating the voltage drop for different types of load currents flowing
through the cable. Note: The Load Type is selected on the Loading page when "FLA of Element" is
selected.
Load Type
Motors
Static Load
Bus
Circuit Breaker
Fuse
Transformer
Generator
MOV
Calculation Method
Constant Power
Constant Impedance
Constant Current
Constant Current
Constant Current
Constant Current
Constant Current
Constant Impedance
44-30
Ampacity Parameters
If the cable is an equipment cable, the cable voltage drop is calculated based on a fixed bus voltage that is
equal to the bus Initial %V multiplied by the bus nominal kV. The load will be treated as given in the
above table. The calculated voltage drop is the magnitude difference between bus voltage and load
terminal voltage values.
If the cable is a branch cable connected between two buses, the voltage drop is calculated by multiplying
the cable impedance by the current.
If the cable is connected with an overload heater, the resistance of the overload heater will be considered
in Vd calculation as well.
Base kV for Vd
This field displays the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus, or the VFDs rated output voltage, if the
cable is directly connected to the output side of the VFD.
Starting Voltage (Vst)

This option is enabled only when the cable is an equivalent cable of a motor, or when the Loading is FLA
of a motor.
If the option of Vst is selected, cable sizing calculation considers the motor starting voltage requirement.
At starting, the motor terminal voltage must be higher than the Vst limit, which is in percent based on
motor rated voltage. The motor starting voltage is calculated based on a fixed bus voltage that is equal to
the bus Initial %V multiplied by the bus nominal kV. The motor is represented by its locked-rotor
impedance.
If the cable is connected with an overload heater, the resistance of the overload heater will be considered
in Vst calculation as well.
Base kV for Vst

This field displays the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus.
Short-Circuit
If this is checked, sizing will be based on the cable short-circuit capacity to withstand the short-circuit
current magnitude specified or defined in the Protection page for the corresponding time (duration). The
Standard used to calculate the cable size based on the Short-Circuit kA and the Short-Circuit Time can be
found in either ICEA Publication P-32-382 or the Buff book IEEE 242 Standard.
Min. Size for Short-Circuit

The required minimum cable size calculated based on the short-circuit current and duration is displayed in
this field.
Short-Circuit kA
This field displays the used Fault kA from the Short-Circuit Current section in the Protection page.
Short-Circuit Time (s)

This field displays the Time value from the Protection Device section in the Protection page.
Overload
This option is enabled only when BS 7671 Edition or IEC 60364 is selected as the standard in the
Installation section of the Capability (Ampacity) page.
44-31
Ampacity Parameters
If this box is checked, overload protection will be considered for cable sizing. ETAP calculates the
minimum size required by the overload protection conditions. The cable at the Min. Size for Overload
protection must meet the following two conditions:
o 1.45 times De-rated Ampacity >= I2

o De-rated Ampacity >= In
where the De-rated Ampacity is that for the cable at the Min Size. In and I2 are the nominal and operating
current of the overload protective device respectively. Please refer to Sections 4 and 5 in Appendix 4 of
BS 7671 - 17th Edition or Section 433 of IEC 60364-4-43 for detailed information.
Overload Min. Size

This field displays the required minimum cable size for overload protection calculated based on BS 7671
or IEC 60364.
Overload kA
This field displays the Overload Protective Device In current value from the Protective Device section in
the Protection page. It is the nominal current of the protective device.
Cable Application
This section is enabled when the Standard selected in the Installation section of the Ampacity page is not
BS 7671 or IEC 60364. It allows the user to specify cable application type for cable ampacity and voltage
drop calculation.
MF
Ampacity MF from the Menu Bar. This Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity
Use MF for Ampacity

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Multiplying Factor (MF)
displayed in the MF field.
Options
Use Motor Service Factor (SF) (Motor Equipment Cables Only)
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the motor Service Factor (SF) as
specified for the motor in the Nameplate page.
44-32
Ampacity Parameters
Use Load Growth Factor (GF)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Growth Factor as specified for
this cable in the Operating Load / Current section of the Loading page.
Cable Library Selection

Use Available Cable Sizes Only
Use only cable sizes which are flagged as Available in the Cable Library for the specified cable type
(cable library header).
Use All Cable Sizes From Library

Use all cable sizes, which exist, in the cable library for the specified cable type (cable library header).
Report
This section is used to access and print various output cable reports. Model Forms used in BS 7671
Appendix 6 can also be accessed. These forms will open using Microsoft Word, and will contain
populated data applicable to the cable.
Cable Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the cable calculations in the current project folder. Select a file
to view the report or to create a new report. Note: in the latter case, the existing file will be overwritten.
When Prompt is selected, a new file will be created.
Cable Report Manager Button

Click the button to access reports for Cable Ampacity and Cable Sizing results as well as the cable data.
44-33
Ampacity Parameters
Model Forms Button

Click this button to view and generate Model forms based on the BS7671 standard. The templates of the
Model forms are saved in ETAP installed folder. It is in subfolder named "Cable Model Forms" under
folder Formats1100. Users can modify the templates in MS Word. For users who use MS Word 2003 may
use the files with _2003 in the file names. The default templates from ETAP are saved also in the
subfolder "BACKUP".
44-34
Ampacity Parameters
44.4.2 Cable Sizing Algorithm for BS 7671

Cable sizing calculation will select a proper cable size from the library based on your settings on the
Loading, Protection, Capacity (Ampacity) and Sizing-Phase pages.
Loading Requirement
Cable derated ampacity must be greater than or equal to loading ampacity specified on the Loading page.
If the Overload requirement is checked, ampacity requirement is also calculated based on Section 4 of
Appendix 4, BS 7671.
Max Vd Requirement
Voltage drop (Vd) calculation reads impedance z from tables 4D1B to 4J4B of Appendix 4. Voltage drop
in kV is calculated as:
Vd = L x I x Ct x z/1000
Where:
L Cable length in meter,

I Cable loading current in Amp,
Ct Temperature correction factor:
z - Cable impedance value from Tables 4D1B to 4J4B of Appendix 4, BS 7671
Please refer to Section 6.1 of BS 7671 Appendix 4 for Ct calculation. Note that in this ETAP release Ct is
applied only to cables that do not have a BS 3036 Fuse as a protective device and where the ambient
temperature is equal to or greater than 30 C.
Overload Requirement
ETAP determines a minimum cable size based on the nominal current and operating current of overload
protection devices of the cable. The minimum size cable must meet the following two conditions:
1.45 times De-rated Ampacity >= I2
De-rated Ampacity >= In>= Loading Current
where the De-rated Ampacity is the Current Carrying Capacity of the cable in this installation. In and I2
are the nominal and operating current of the protective device respectively. In and I2 are entered or
displayed on Protection page. Please refer to Sections 4 and 5 in Appendix 4 of BS 7671 for detailed
information on Overload requirement.
Harmonic Requirement(s) Zero Sequence/Triple Harmonic and Other

Harmonic (Cf)
As per standard, if the neutral conductor carries current without any reduction in the load of line
conductors, the harmonic current distortion in the neutral conductor needs to be considered in the
determination of the Current Carrying Capacity of the circuit.
ETAPs Zero sequence/Triple Harmonic and Other Harmonic (Cf) constraints for Cable Sizing
calculation are based on BS 767117th Edition, Appendix 11 Effect of Harmonic Currents on Balanced
Three Phase Systems.
44-35
Ampacity Parameters
To apply Harmonic Constraint(s) to Cable Sizing, the following requirements must be met:
Cable must be a Three Phase cable with 4 or more cores

Cable size must be less than 50mm
Cable must have a neutral conductor specified in the Main cable from the Configuration page
The neutral and line (phase) conductors must be of the same size
Zero Sequence/Triple Harmonic

This field displays the Zero Sequence/Triple harmonic content (expressed as total harmonic distortion) in
percent of line current. This value is entered or calculated on the Harmonic Section of the Loading page.
The following Rating Factors for Triple Harmonic Currents, from Table11A of Appendix 11from BS7671 17th Edition Standard are used in the Sizing Calculation, when applicable.
44-36
Ampacity Parameters
Other Harmonic (Cf)

This field displays the Cf factor for other order of harmonics (excluding multiples of 3rd order harmonics).
This value is entered or calculated on the Harmonic Section of the Loading page.
The following formula, from Section3 of Appendix 11of BS-7671 17th Edition Standard is used in the
determination of the Cf factor.
Where: If = fundamental current

Ih5 = 5th harmonic current
Ihn = nth harmonic current
44.4.3 Cable Sizing Algorithm for IEC 60364

Cable sizing calculation will select a proper cable size from the library, based on your settings on the
Loading, Protection, Capability (Ampacity) and Sizing-Phase pages.
Loading Requirement
Cable derated ampacity must be greater than or equal to the loading ampacity specified on the Loading
page.
Overload Requirement
ETAP determines a minimum cable size based on the nominal current and operating current of overload
protection devices of the cable. The minimum size cable must meet the following two conditions:
(i) 1.45 times De-rated Ampacity >= I2

(ii) De-rated Ampacity >= In >= Loading Current
44-37
Ampacity Parameters
where the De-rated Ampacity is the Current- Carrying Capacity of the cable. In and I2 are the nominal
and operating current of the protective device respectively. In and I2 are entered or diaplyed on Protection
page. Please refer to Sections 433 of IEC 60364-4-43 for detailed information on Overload Requirement.
Harmonic Requirement(s) Zero Sequence/Triple Harmonic

As per standard, if the neutral conductor carries current without any reduction in the load of line
conductors, the harmonic current distortion in the neutral conductor needs to be considered in the
determination of the Current- Carrying Capacity of the circuit.
ETAPs Zero sequence/Triple Harmonic constraint for Cable Sizing calculation is based on IEC 60364-552, Annex D Effect of Harmonic Currents on Balanced Three Phase Systems.
To apply Harmonic Requirement(s) to Cable Sizing, the following requirements must be met:
Cable must be a Three Phase cable with 4 or more cores

Cable size must be less than 50mm
Cable must have a neutral conductor specified in the Main cable from the Configuration page
The neutral conductor is the same size as the line conductors
44-38
Ampacity Parameters
Zero Sequence/Triple Harmonic

This field displays the Zero Sequence/Triple harmonic content (expressed as total harmonic distortion) in
percent of line current. This value is entered or calculated on the Harmonic Section of the Loading page.
The following Rating Factors for Triple Harmonic Currents, from Table D.52-1 of Annex D from IEC
60364-5-52 Standard are used in the Sizing Calculation, when applicable.
44-39
Cable Sizing Calculations
44.5 Steps to Perform Cable Sizing Calculations

1. Perform Current-Carrying Capacity study following steps described in section 44.2.
2. Verify that the Length of the cable and the No. of Conductors/Phase have been entered.
3. In the Physical Page, verify that the appropriate Sheath/Armor and Jacket Type have been loaded
from cable library. Also, verify that the appropriate thickness for Sheath/Armor and Jacket has
been loaded.
Note: Cable Sizing calculation requires the Sheath/Armor and Jacket Type and thickness
information to come from the Library. If this information is entered through the Physical Page of
the Cable Editor but not available in cable library, sizing cannot be performed.
4. Navigate to the Loading Page of the Cable Editor
a. In the "Loading Current for Sizing" section, select the option for the appropriate loading
current to be used to size the cable. Verify that the selected option has a value for the
loading current.
b. If applicable, enter or load the Zero Sequence/Triple Harmonic content in percent of line
current and the Cf factor for other Harmonic Orders in the Harmonic section.
c. If it is a 4/C or more conductor cable and at least one conductor is Neutral, Navigate to
the Configuration Page of the Cable Editor:
Enable the Main Neutral Conductor by checking the option. Select the Number of
Neutral Conductors.
Note: Neutral conductor is necessary for Harmonic constraints to be taken into
consideration in cable Sizing calculations.
5. Navigate to the Sizing Page, select the constraints to be applied in the determination of the Cable
Sizing Results.
44.5.1 Cable Sizing Calculations Display

number of conductors per phase that meets the specified constraints. Additionally, ETAP provides one
size smaller cable than the optimal size for your selection.
44-40
Chapter 45
Low Voltage PE Conductor Sizing & Electric
Shock Protection Calculation
This chapter describes the Protective Earthing (PE)/Grounding Conductor Thermal Sizing and Electric
Shock Protection calculation features in the Sizing GND/PE page of the cable editor
.
45-1
Electric Shock and Thermal Sizing
Overview
PE Conductor Sizing feature is based on the following standards:

NFPA 70 NEC (Section 250.122)
BS 7671
IEC 60364-5-54
Electric Shock Protection calculation is based on the following standards and publications:
BS 7671
IEC 60364-4-41
The following output reports are available for PE Conductor Sizing and Electric Shock Protection:
Neutral Grounding/PE Sizing Report
Summary Report
The Electric Shock Protection report formats are in accordance with BS 7671, Appendix 6, Model Forms
and are customizable using Microsoft Word:
Electrical Installation Certificate
Minor Electrical Installation Works Certificate
Period Inspection Report for an Electrical Installation
45-2
Thermal Sizing
45.1 PE/Grounding Conductor Thermal Sizing

The following section provides an overivew on how to perform the PE Conductor Sizing calculation
based on various Standards.
45.1.1 PE Conductor Sizing - BS 7671 and IEC 60364 Standards

From the Cable editor, select a low voltage cable (1 kV or less for AC, 1.5 kV or less for DC) from the
Cable library in the Info page. The cable selection from the library must include a PE/Neutral
conductor(s) or additional conductors that can be used as Main PE conductor(s).
In the Cable editors Ampacity (Capacity) page, select the Installation Standard (BS 7671, IEC 60364).
1. In the Configuration page:
Check Main Protective conductor (Main PE data can only be populated through library
selection)
Check Auxiliary Protective conductor (if applicable) Use the cable library parameters,
Typical R and X, and/or user-defined values
Check (if applicable) Aux Cable Bunched
2. In the Protection page:
Select Initial Temperature method and, if Operating Temp is selected, enter the Protective
conductor value under the Conductor Temp section
Select Final Temperature standard - Note that Initial and Final Temperature selections
apply to Main Protective conductor only
Select Calculated or User-Defined Short-Circuit Current (refer to Chapter 16 for more
information on performing Star Short-Circuit analysis)
Select an Overcurrent Device ID , a BS 7671 standard based device, or enter the UserDefined Ground disconnection time in seconds to determine device clearing time
3. In the Sizing GND/PE page:
Under the Thermal Constraint section enter the Leakage Current in milliamps
For Main PE select either Formula or Tables method for Factor k
For Aux PE only Tables method is available for Factor k
Check the Size check box in the Thermal Requirement Size table to perform the
calculation the Main or Auxiliary PE conductor. The next available size is selected where
applicable
The results should appear under the Required column in the Thermal Required Size
section
45-3
Thermal Sizing
Note: The calculation is not intended for sizing the PEN conductor of TN-C earthing systems. When
performing thermal sizing for the PE conductors of TN-C cables, the sizing is based on the assumption
that the PEN conductor is a PE conductor. Refer to standards IEC 60364 and BS7671, section 543.4 for
more details.
45.1.2 PE Conductor Sizing NEC Standard

The cable selection from the library must include a PE/Ground conductor(s) or additional conductors that
can be used as PE conductor(s).
In the Ampacity (Capacity) page select the Installation Standard as NEC. Note that IEEE and ICEA
selection utilize the NEC Section 250.122 for PE/Grounding conductcor sizing.
Check Main Protective Conductor (Main PE data can only be populated through library
selection)
Check Auxiliary Protective Conductor (if applicable) Use the cable library parameters,
Typical R and X, and/or user-defined values
Select an Overcurrent Device ID or User-Defined
Enter Overrcurrent Device Rating if Overcurrent device in the Protection page is set to
User-Defined
4. Check the Size check box in the Thermal Requirement Size table to perform the calculation the
Main or Auxiliary PE conductor. The next available size is selected where applicable
45-4
Calculation Inputs
45.2 PE Conductor Sizing Calculation Inputs

The following sections describe the input data that are required for performing PE Conductor Sizing
calculation.
45.2.1 Cable Library Selection

The Cable library contains cable information from various standards and manufacturers. The selected
cable will load the data from the library to the Cable editor for purposes of analysis. For more information
Refer to Chapter 11, AC Elements for more information on Cable element and library selection.
The Main Neutral/PE conductor(s) are integrated with the Main cable inside an overall jacket. Cables
with integrated PE/Grounding/Neutral conductor(s) are displayed in the Size section under the heading
PE in the Cable Library Quick Pick editor. Note that additional unused Phase conductors can be
assigned as PE/Ground/Neutral conductor(s) in the Cable editors Configuration page.
45.2.2 Ampacity (Capacity) Page

The Ampacity page of the Cable editor contains the Installation Standards for PE Conductor Sizing
calculation.
45-5
Calculation Inputs
IEEE 399
ICEA P-54-440
NEC
IEC 60364
BS 7671

The Configuration page of the Cable editor allows for entering the Main and Auxiliary Protective
conductors data.
Main Protective (PE) Conductor

The Main PE/Neutral/Armor conductor(s) are bunched (grouped) as a part of the Main cable. For more
information, refer to the Configuration page of the AC cable in chapter 11.6.12.
Main Protective Conductor data must be loaded from library including the insulation type. The insulation
type is dependent on the insulation of the Main cable and is shown in the Cable editor header (e.g.
XLPE).
45-6
Calculation Inputs
If the Main cable selected from the library contains integrated PE/Neutral conductor(s) then the size of the
PE/Neutral conductor(s) is displayed in under the Size column. Note that unused Main Phase conductor
size can be utilized as the Main PE/Neutral conductor(s).
45-7
Calculation Inputs
Auxiliary Protective (PE) Conductor

The Auxiliary PE/Neutral conductor(s) are defined as separate additional cable runs which are auxiliary
to the Main cable (feeding the same circuit as the Main cable).
To include Auxiliary PE conductor, the rows check box must be checked and the required data must
either be entered manually, loaded from library, or be filled in using the Typical R,X button. The library
button and the Typical R, X buttons are located at the bottom of the page when the auxiliary row is
selected.
For example, if choosing to enter the data manually, the conductor material type must be selected
(Copper, Aluminum, or Steel) and the Insulation type (e.g. Bare, Fire Risk, or Thermosetting) must be
selected as well. However, if cable data is loaded from the library, then ETAP will size the conductor
based on the insulation type associated with the cable that is chosen from the library
Aux Cable Bunched

Check if the Auxiliary PE cable is bunched with other conductors. This option is used when the auxiliary
cable is in close thermal proximity of other cables.

The Protection page allows entering the PE/Grounding conductor temperatures; short-circuit current and
overcurrent protective device data for PE Conductor sizing.
Temperature Entry
Initial Temperature
The initial temperature value for the Main PE can be set by the selection of either the Factor k Tables or
Formula method in the Sizing GND/PE page.
If either Tables or Formula method is used for Main PE sizing, then the initial temperature value is
acquired from the Thermal Damage Curve section from the Protection page.
The initial temperature of the conductor can be selected based on either base or operating temperature of
the cable.
If Factor k Tables method is used for the Aux PE, then the initial temperature value is determined based
on the standard selected from the Ampacity page.
The base and operating temperatures of the cable are loaded from the library and displayed in the
Ampacity page.
45-8
Calculation Inputs
45-9
Calculation Inputs
Final Temperature
The Final Temp value for the Main PE can be set by the selection of either the Tables or Formula method.
If Formula method is used for the Main PE calculation, then the final temperature value is based on the
Thermal Damage Curve section from the Protection page.
If Tables method is used for either the Main or Aux PE sizing calculation, then the final temperature
value is based on the standard selected in the Ampacity.
Select either Calculated or User-Defined in the Short-Circuit Current section. If the cable is 3-Phase, then
based on the Ground disconnection time in the Protective Device section, the Ground short-circuit current
with the highest thermal energy will be selected.
In the PE conductor sizing calculation for 1-Phase cable, if the Calculated option is selected, the
Ground field is hidden and the short-circuit calculation will be displayed instead in the Sizing
GND/PE page. Otherwise, if User-Defined is selected, then the Ground field appears in the Protection
page and is used instead.
Protective Device
If a protective device is protecting the selected cable, then it can be selected from the ID/Type menu and
its disconnection time will be determined automatically.
Protection devices from the BS 7671 standard can be selected and the short-circuit current will be used to
determine the disconnection time.
45-10
Calculation Inputs
The disconnection time can also be user-defined.

Note: Panel (Distribution Board) element internal protective devices are not utilized in PE Conductor
sizing. An external fuse element in the One Line View must be protecting the cable in order for
calculation to be performed.

The Sizing GND/PE page allows entering input into the Thermal Constraints to perform the PE
Conductor Sizing and performing the sizing.
Check the Size check box next to the Main Cable row or the Aux row to calculate the required size for
either the PE conductor in the Main Cable or Aux row.
The short-circuit current values and protective device fault clearing times are imported from the
Protection page of the cable and displayed in the thermal sizing section.
The leakage current can be entered as an additional parameter to size the PE.
Once the results are calculated, the existing size of the PE in the Main or Aux Protective rows of the
configuration page can be compared with the Required size calculated by ETAP.
The Update Size button will be activated once the size of the PE conductor in Aux row has been
calculated and, when clicked, will update the Size field in the Protective row in the Configuration page.
45-11
Calculation Inputs
Minimum Sizes
The minimum sizes for PEs are listed below. Minimum sizes are calculated based on the assumption that
conductors are protected against mechanical damage.
Leakage Current Standard
Conductor Type
Minimum
Size
above 10 mA?
Calculated (mm2)
Yes
BS 7671
CU
4
Yes
BS 7671
AL
10
Yes
BS 7671
ST
10
Yes
IEC 60364
CU
10
Yes
IEC 60364
AL
16
Yes
IEC 60364
ST
50
No
BS 7671
CU
2.5
No
BS 7671
AL
10
No
BS 7671
ST
10
No
IEC 60364
CU
2.5
No
IEC 60364
AL
16
No
IEC 60364
ST
16
45-12
Protection Calculation
45.3 Electric Shock Protection Calculation

The following section describes an overiew on how to perform Electric Shock Protection calculation
based on various Standards.
45.3.1 Electrical Shock Protection BS 7671 and IEC 60364

Standards
The Earthing Type automatic determination option must be selected. Refer to Chapter 43 for more
information.
Set the System Grounding and Earthing Type for all sources.
In the Ampacity (Capacity) page select the Installation Standard (BS 7671, IEC 60364).
From the Cable editor, select a low voltage cable (1 kV or less for AC, 1.5 kV or less for DC) from the
Cable library. The cable selection from the library must include a PE/Neutral conductor(s) or additional
conductors that can be used as Main PE or Neutral conductor(s).
Check Main Neutral and/or Protective conductor(s) (Main Neutral or PE data can only
be retrieved from the cable library)
Check Armor conductor - Use Typical Armor Z user-defined or values
Check Auxiliary Neutral and/or Protective conductor (if applicable) Use the cable
library parameters, Typical R and X, and/or user-defined values
Check Structure (if applicable) and enter user-defined values
Select Calculated or User-Defined Short-Circuit Current (refer to Chapter 16 for more
information on performing Star Short-Circuit analysis)
Select an Overcurrent Device ID or a BS 7671 standard based device
Select a RCD, if applicable, Device ID or a BS 7671 standard based device
Under the Electric Shock Constraint section enter, if applicable, Local Resistance to
Ground/Earth in ohms
Select the Load Type
Check, if applicable, the EN 50122 checkbox
Check, if applicable, Exclude Second Earth Fault for IT System
The results should appear under the Electric Shock Results section
45-13
45.4 Required Electrical Shock Protection Calculation

Inputs
The following sections describe the input data that are required for performing Electric Shock Protection
Calculation.
Note: For detailed definitions of all the fields in the Electric Shock Results section, please refer to
chapter 11, Cable editors Configuration page.
45.4.1 System Grounding and Earthing Type Selection

System Grounding Type
Winding Connection
For a source (e.g. 3-Phase Power Grid, 3-Phase Transformer), the System Grounding Type can be set by
selecting the winding connection as either Wye (star) or Delta. For 1-Phase sources, the System
Grounding Type is determined by the Grounded checkbox.
Grounding
For elements such as 3-Phase transformers, Synchronous Generators and Wind Turbine Generators, the
Neutral earthing is determined by the Grounding selection.
45-14
Earthing Type
This selection will only appear if the source and the bus connected to it are low voltage (1 kV or less for
AC, 1.5 kV or less for DC).
Sources, such as Transformers, Power Grids, Generators, need their Earthing Type selected in order to
initiate Electric Shock Protection Calculation.
Depending on the winding connection, such as Wye (Star) or Delta, the earthing type will be displayed
accordingly.
Distributed
This checkbox appears for Non-Solid System Grounding Types
Rg
This is the earthing resistance (e.g. earthing electrode for small sized sources and substation ground grid
resistance for large sources) including the soil resistance.
Note: For ground grid resistance, this value can be calculated using ETAPs Ground Grid Module. Refer
to Chapter 47 for more information.
Note: In order for the Earthing Type menu and the Distributed Neutral check box to appear, the source
and the bus connected to it must be 1 kV or less for AC systems and 1.5 kV or less for DC systems.
Note: Electric Shock Protection calculation will disregard sources with incomplete data that are connected
in parallel with other sources.
Ampacity (Capacity) Page

The Ampacity page contains the standards that the Electric Shock Protection calculation will follow.
The following standards can be selected:

IEC 60364
BS 7671
45-15

Refer to section 45.2.3 for the required input data for PE/Neutral conductor(s). For Electric Shock
Protection calculations additional information is required for Main cable Armor and Structure.
Main Conductor
Armor R, X data can be manually entered or, if the cable is less than 3.3 kV, automatically calculated by
selecting the Typical Armor Z button at the bottom of the page.
The Armor can be utilized as an earthing conductor and its resistance value is multiplied by 1.1 in Shock
Protection calculations.
Auxiliary Conductor
To include auxiliary PE or Neutral conductors, the applicable rows check box must be checked and the
required data must either be entered manually, loaded from library, or be filled in using the Typical R, X
button. The library button and the Typical R, X buttons are located at the bottom of the page when the
applicable row is selected.
Choose up to 10 PE and/or 10 Neutral conductors under the No. of Cond. column.
For TN-C and TN-C-S Earthing Types, the Neutral conductor, and Protective conductor if selected, is
utilized as the PEN conductor.
For TT and IT Earthing Types, any type of Structure (e.g. Cable Tray) that is outside of the main cable
and can be used as a path to earth can have its R,X values entered in the structure row.
45-16
Link to Library option in cable info page

Shock protection calculation does not utilize values loaded from library when the Link to Library
option is selected in the info page. Only the values displayed in the cable editor will be considered.
Cable Tolerances
Cable tolerances (e.g. length and temperature) are not utilized in shock protection calculation except when
performing regular short-circuit calculation for determining 3-Phase IT First Fault Touch Voltage.
45-17

Select either Calculated or User-Defined in the Short-Circuit Current section. If the cable is 3-Phase, then
based on the Ground disconnection time in the Protective Device section, the Ground short-circuit current
will be used for IT First Fault Touch Voltage Calculation.
Refer to Chapter 16 in order to run Star Short-Circuit analysis.
Calculation of 1-Phase IT First Fault Touch Voltage can only be done by user-defined Ground shortcircuit value in this release.
Protective Device
Overcurrent Protection of the cable can be determined by selecting an Overcurrent protective Device ID
or a BS 7671 standard based device.
User-defined Overcurrent disconnection time cannot be utilized for Electric Shock Protection Calculation.
Residual current protection of the cable can be determined by selecting a RCD Device ID or a BS 7671
standard based device.
The BS 7671 standard based devices are based on Appendix 3 of the standard.

The Electric Shock Protecion Calculation determines both Actual and Allowed calculation results. If
Actual results exceed the Allowed, then the Actual fields highlight as Magenta color indicating that the
Allowed values have been exceeded.
Electrical Shock Protection calculation is based on BS 7671 and IEC 60364-4-41 standards.
The results shown in the image below for IT and TN/TT Earthing Types, respectively, will be calculated:
45-18
Electric Shock Constraints

Local Resistance to Ground/Earth is total resistance from the load chassis to the surface of the earth.
Load Type
Depending on the load type selected, the allowed results of electric shock parameters will vary. The load
types are based on sections 411.3.2.2 of BS7671 and 411.3.2.2 of IEC 60364 standards.
"TT Equipotential Bonding" load type is based on section 411.3.2.2 of BS7671 and in 411.3.2.2 of IEC
60364 standards and will only display shock protection results when the source Earthing Type is TT.
Reduced Low Voltage load type is based on section 415.2.2 of BS7671 standard.
EN 50122
Check to re-calculate the Allowed Touch results as per EN 50122 Standard.
Exclude Second Earth Fault for IT system
Check to hide calculated 2nd earth faults for both display and output reports.
45-19
Electric Shock Results

Actual IT First and Second Fault Touch Voltages
The Actual First Fault Touch Voltage will be calculated based on the short-circuit current, with the
highest thermal energy, in the Protection page.
Actual TN / TT Touch Voltages

The Table below shows the conditions in which the TN / TT Touch voltages and IT Second Fault Touch
Voltages are calculated and displayed in the Electric Shock Results section based on Earthing Type.
Earthing Type
Standard
BS7671
BS7671
IEC
IEC
BS7671
BS7671
IEC
IEC
BS7671
EN 50122
Checkbox
checked
Unchecked
checked
Unchecked
checked
Unchecked
checked
Unchecked
checked
Actual voltage
Displayed?
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No (for second fault)
Yes
No (for second fault)
Yes
TN
TN
TN
TN
IT-Collective
IT-Collective
IT-Collective
IT-Collective
IT-Individual, IT-In
Groups
Groups
Groups
Groups
BS7671
Unchecked
Yes
IEC
checked
Yes
IEC
Unchecked
Yes
1-Phase and DC IT Earthed Cable First Fault Touch Voltages

First Fault Touch Voltages for IT cables will display once a User-Defined Line to Ground short-circuit
current value has been entered in the Protection page of the cable.
Allowed IT Touch Voltages

45-20
The allowed Touch Voltages are 50 Volts for AC systems and 120 Volts for DC systems.
If EN50122 checkbox is checked, the allowed Touch Voltages will recalculate to reflect the standards
requirements.
Actual Disconnection Time

The Actual Disconnection Time is protective device dependant. For Electric Shock Protection Calculation
to occur, a protective device that contains a trip device must be selected from the Overcurrent or RCD
section in the Protection page.
Note: Panel element (Distribution Board) internal protective devices are not utilized in Electric Shock
Protection Calculation or PE/Grounding Conductor Sizing. An Overcurrent (or RCD Protective Device
for Electric Shock Protection) ID or a BS7671 standard based device must be selected in the Protection
page for calculation to be performed.
Allowed Disconnection Time

Allowed Disconnection Time is dependent on the Load Type chosen from the Electric Shock
Constraints section.
Actual Loop Impedance

ETAP will determine the Actual Loop Impedance based on data entered in all of the low voltage elements
modeled in the One Line View.
Allowed Loop Impedance

The Allowed Loop Impedance is dependent on the Load Type menu in the Electric Shock Constraints
section.
Earthing Adapter in Electric Shock Loop Impedance Calculation

The Earthing Adapter is a virtual device that will convert a TN Earthing Type to another in the One Line
View Without the use of transformers.
Defining the Installation Service Entry Point Using the Earthing Adapter
When using TN-C-S earthing sources, the transition from the utility to the installation service entry point
must be defined manually by using an Earthing Adapter with a TN-S secondary. Otherwise, cables
downstream of elements, such as panels, will be calculated as TN-C Earthing Types.
Protective Multiple Earthing (PME)

For TN and TT earthed systems, Electric Shock Protection Calculation is based on earthing at both the
source and the load chassis.
The sources earthing resistance for TN/TT Earthing Types is represented by the Rg field at the
sources respective Grounding sections/pages.
For IT earthed systems, Electric Shock Protection Calculation is based on earthing at the loads chassis.
The loads earthing resistance for TN/TT/IT Earthing Types is represented by the Local Resistance to
Ground/Earth field in the Sizing GND/PE page.
45-21
Required Data
45.5 Required Data

*The Asterisk refers to required data needed to conduct PE/Grounding Conductor Sizing Calculation.
Bus Data
Nominal kV
3-phase Power Grid Data
Rated kV
Grounding Type
Earthing Type
Rg (for TT Earthing Type)
Short-Circuit Positive sequence %R and %X
Neutral Conductor R and X (depending on Earthing Type)
Earthing Conductor R and X (depending on Earthing Type)
Distributed Neutral status
1-phase Power Grid
Line SC Rating
Earth/Ground SC Rating
Grounding Type
Earthing Type
Rg (for TT Earthing Type)
Line Impedance (depending on Earthing Type)
Earth/Ground Loop Impedance (depending on Earthing Type)
3-phase 2-winding transformer
Rated kVA/MVA
Primary and secondary voltage ratings
Positive sequence impedance
Positive sequence X/R
Primary and secondary winding type
Load side Earthing Type
Rg
3-Winding transformer
Rated kVA/MVA
Primary, secondary, and tertiary voltage ratings
Positive sequence impedance
Positive sequence X/R
Primary, secondary, and tertiary winding type
Load side Earthing Types
Rg and Distributed Neutral status
45-22
Required Data
Branch Data
Branch R, X,
Number of conductors per phase (if applicable)
Cable
Impedance page R and X *

No. of of conductors / phase
length and unit
Main and Aux Neutral conductor information *
Main and Aux PE information *
Armor R and X
Structure R and X
Protection page Overcurrent device information *
Protection page GFCI/RCD device information
Load Type
Leakage Current * (For Thermal Sizing)
EN 50122
Factor k
Initial temperature determination method *
Final temperature standard selection *
1 phase 2 winding transformer
Rated kVA/MVA
Primary and secondary voltage ratings
impedance
X/R
Load side grounding status
Rg
Rated kVA
Rated voltage
Xd, Xd/Ra
Winding connection
Earthing Type
Rg
Open Delta transformer
Rated kVA/MVA and Open Delta/Wye Voltage Ratings
45-23
Required Data
Impedance
X/R
Load grounding status
Rg
Wind Turbine Generators (Type 1-3)
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated voltage
Xsc (1/2 cycle)
X/R
Winding type
Earthing Type
Rg
Wind Turbine Generators (Type 4)
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated voltage
Power Factor (%PF)
Efficiency (%EFF)
Inverter SC Contribution
Grounding status
Earthing Type
Rg
Inverters (includes the one in PV Arrays)
Rated AC out FLA

Rated AC out kV
Ksc
Grounding status
Earthing Type
Rg
UPS (AC secondary)
Rated AC out FLA

Rated AC out kV
Ksc
Grounding status
Earthing Type
Rg and Distributed Neutral Status
45-24
Required Data
UPS (DC Grounding)
DC Output Voltage
Kdc
DC FLA
Grounding status
Earthing Type
Rg
Charger
DC Output Voltage
Kdc
DC FLA
Grounding status
Earthing Type
Rg
VFD
Rated FLA
Rated kV
Ksc
Grounding status
Earthing Type
Rg
Battery
Number of Cells
Number of Strings
External R(ohms)
Cell Resistance (Rp) (from library)
Number of Positive Plates (from library)
Grounding status
Earthing Type
Rg
Earthing Adapter
Secondary Earthing Type

ANSI standard circuit breaker
Trip device TCC curve data
IEC standard circuit breaker
Min Delay
Trip device and its associated TCC curve.
45-25
Required Data
Over Current Relay
CT connections / Assignments
Interlocked Devices, Device ID
TCC curves
Fuse
TCC curve
45-26
Output Reports
45.6 Output Reports

The PE Sizing Calculation and Electric Shock Protection results are reported in the cable editor and in
Crystal Reports format. The Crystal Reports format provides detailed of the input data as well as the
calculation results.
Cable Report Manager

Click on the Cable Report Manager button to open the report manager. The report manager allows
selection of formats available for different portions of the report and to view it via Crystal Reports. The
editor includes three pages (Cable Ampacity, Cable Sizing, Neutral Grounding PE Sizing, and Summary)
representing different sections of the output report.
Cable Ampacity
Refer to the output report section of the Chapter 44.
Cable Sizing
Refer to the output report section of the Chapter 44
45-27
Output Reports
Neutral Grounding PE Sizing

The Neutral Grounding PE Sizing page can be selected from this page. The following is a sample of the
report.
Summary
The Summary page can be selected from this page. In order for the report to be fully populated, the
following pages must have their results calculated and their pages visited prior to launching this report.
Sizing - Phase
Sizing GND/PE
Ampacity (Capacity)
45-28
Output Reports
Model Forms For Certification and Reporting

The Model forms are part of the BS7671, Appendix 6, guidelines. They are required of individuals
responsible of the design, construction, inspection, and testing of the work.
After the shock protection results for any cable has been calculated, the forms, can be customized in
Microsoft Word 2003 and higher versions.
45-29
Chapter 46

Cable derating analysis is an important part of power system design and analysis. When you are designing
a new system, this determines the proper size of cables to carry the specified loads. When performing an
analysis of an existing system, it examines cable temperatures and determines their ampacities.
Overview
ETAP provides five types of calculations for cable derating analysis, namely, steady-state temperature
calculation, uniform-ampacity cable ampacity calculation, uniform-temperature cable ampacity
calculation, cable sizing, and transient temperature calculation. The steady-state temperature calculation is
based on the IEC 60287 or the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath Method.
The IEC 60287 steady-state temperature calculation fully complies with the latest standards as listed
below:
Standard
IEC 60287-1-1 Ed. 1.2 b:2001
IEC 60287-2-1 Ed. 1.1 b:2001

IEC 60287-2-1 Amd.1 Ed. 1.0 b:2001
IEC 60287-2-1 Amd.2, 2006-03
I EC 60287-3-1 Ed. 1.1 b:1999
IEC 60287-3-1 Amd.1 Ed. 1.0 b:1999
Title
Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1-1:
Current rating equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of
losses - General
Thermal resistance - Calculation of thermal resistance
Amendment 1
Amendment 2
Sections on operating conditions - Reference operating
conditions and selection of cable type
Amendment 1
The cable ampacity calculation and cable sizing are based on the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath Method
only. The transient temperature calculation is based on a dynamic thermal circuit model. All of these
calculations can handle multi-raceway systems and consider the effect of heat generated by neighboring
cables and external heat sources.
This chapter contains the following sections:
The GUI section explains the various toolbars and their functions, how to launch calculations, open
and view an Output Report, and how to select display options.
The Editor section explains how to add/edit elements of the system, how to create a new Study Case,
and what parameters are required to specify a Study Case, and how to set them.
The Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system
parameters and the output results on the UGS diagram, and how to set them.
The Calculation Methods section briefly describes calculation methods for steady-state temperature
calculation, cable ampacity calculation, cable sizing, and transient temperature calculation.
The Required Data section describes what data is necessary to perform Cable Ampacity Derating
calculations and where to enter them.
The Output Reports and Plots section illustrates and explains the data contents of the Output Report
and how to interpret results on the plots.
The Tutorial section provides an overview of the operation and of some key functions of the
Underground Raceway Systems Module.
46-2
ETAP 11.0
46.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

The UGS presentation is conceptually a cross-section of desired raceways, conduits/locations, cables, and
heat sources, which are in the same vicinity. The UGS presentation allows you to graphically arrange
raceways, conduits, cables, and external heat sources to represent cable routing and to provide a physical
environment to conduct cable ampacity derating studies.
Each UGS presentation is a different cross-section of the underground system. This is a different concept
than the multi-presentation of the one-line diagram, where all presentations have the same elements.
You can create as many UGS presentations as you wish. There is no limit on the number of raceways and
heat sources that can be created/added in one presentation. In UGS, each presentation acts independently.
If you add a raceway to a UGS presentation, this raceway will not be shown in the other UGS
presentations. However, raceways from any UGS presentation can be added to the other UGS
presentations as existing raceways. Also, if you delete a raceway from a UGS presentation into the
Dumpster, this raceway can be added to other UGS presentations as an existing raceway.
46-3
ETAP 11.0
46.1.1 Create a New UGS Presentation

When a new project is created, by default, a UGS presentation is not created. You must create UGS
presentations as necessary. There are two methods of creating new UGS presentations. The first method
involves right clicking on U/G Raceway System in the Project View, then clicking on Create New.
Creating A UGS Presentation
The second method involves clicking on the UGS System Icon on the System toolbar. If this is new
project with no existing UGS presentations, the following window will appear.
If there are existing UGS presentations in the ETAP project then click on the New Presentation icon to
create additional UGS presentations.
46-4
ETAP 11.0
In either method, a graphical user interface window with a UGS presentation will be displayed on your
screen. The ID (name) of the displayed presentation is UGS1 by default (default name appended with a
number). The name may be changed to any unique name (maximum 12 characters) that you choose.
Double-click anywhere inside the UGS1 presentation to change the name.
Change ID (Name) of a UGS Presentation

Another way you can change the name of a UGS presentation is to right-click on UGS1 in the Project
View, then click on Properties, as shown below. Enter a new name from the dialog box.
Right-Click on UGS1, to View, Save, Rename, or Purge UGS1
46-5
ETAP 11.0
46.1.2 Edit Toolbar
New Duct Bank Raceway Wizard

Add New Direct Buried RWs
Add Existing Direct Buried RWs

Add Existing Cables
Add New Cables

Add New Duct Bank RWs
Add Existing Duct Bank RWs

Add New Conduits for Duct Banks RWs
Add New Locations for Direct Buried RWs
Add Existing Heat Sources
Add New Heat Sources
Display Options
UGS Edit Toolbar
Pointer
The mouse pointer allows you to select or move items. Clicking on the Pointer icon returns the cursor to
its original shape after an element icon has been clicked on, displaying an element to be placed into the
UGS.
46-6
ETAP 11.0
New Raceway Wizard

The new raceway wizard allows you to create new duct bank raceways using one of the following
raceway arrangement options:
Uniform
Non-Uniform
Circuit Level
Existing External Heat Source

Click on the Existing External Heat Source icon to open a drop-down list from which you can choose an
external heat source that has been previously created.
46-7
ETAP 11.0
If no existing external heat sources are available a message box will appear. These external heat sources
can be found either in the Dumpster or in other underground systems. For more information on external
heat sources see the External Heat Source Editor.
New External Heat Source

Click on the New External Heat Source icon to create a new external heat source. This will enable you to
place it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on external heat sources see
External Heat Source Editor.
Existing Cable
Click on the Existing Cable icon to open a drop-down list from which you can choose a cable that has
been previously created. This list includes one-line, equipment, and UGS cables.
The cables in this list can be found in the one-line diagram (either as a one-line or equipment cable),
Dumpster (deleted cables), or in other underground raceway systems (UGS cables). Cables selected from
the one-line diagram will be converted from one-line or equipment cables to compound cables. A
compound cable represents a cable that exits in the one-line diagram and UGS. For more information on
cables, see Cable Editor Overview.
Note: You can graphically add existing one-line cables to any location (conduit) in UGS. To do this, press
and hold Control+Shift and drag the cable from the one-line diagram into a location in UGS.
A message will appear if no existing cables are available. These cables can be found in the one-line
diagram, Dumpster, or in other underground raceway systems. Cables selected from the one-line diagram
will be converted from one-line cables to compound cables. For more information on cables, see Cable
Editor Overview.
New Cable
Click the New Cable icon to create a new cable. This will enable you to place it in the UGS wherever
there is space available. This cable will be a UGS cable since it only exists in the UGS. To add this cable
(or any other cable in the UGS) to the one-line diagram press and hold Control+Shift and drag the cable,
using the mouse, from the UGS into the one-line diagram. For more information on cables see the Cable
Editor Overview.
46-8
ETAP 11.0
Existing Duct Bank Raceway

Click the Existing Duct Bank Raceway icon to open a dialog box from which you can choose a duct bank
raceway that has been previously created.
A message will appear if no existing duct bank raceways are available. These duct bank raceways can be
found either in the Dumpster or in other underground systems. For more information on duct bank
raceways, see Duct Bank Raceway Editor.
New Duct Bank Raceway

Click the New Duct Bank Raceway icon to create a new duct bank raceway. This will enable you to place
it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on duct bank raceways, see Duct
Bank Raceway Editor.
Existing Direct Buried Raceway

Click the Existing Direct Buried Raceway icon to open a dialog box from which you can choose a direct
buried raceway that has been previously created.
A message will appear if no existing direct buried raceways are available. These direct buried raceways
can be found either in the Dumpster or in other U/G Systems. For more information on direct buried
raceways, see Direct Buried Raceway Editor.
New Direct Buried Raceway

Click the New Direct Buried Raceway icon to create a new direct buried raceway. This will enable you to
place it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on direct buried raceways,
see Direct Buried Raceway Editor.
46-9
ETAP 11.0
New Conduit
Click the New Conduit icon to create a new conduit. This will enable you to place it in any duct bank
raceway wherever there is space available. For more information on conduits, see Conduit Editor.
New Location
Click the New Location icon to create a new location. This will enable you to place any Direct Buried
Raceway wherever there is space available. For more information on locations, see Location Editor.
Display Option
Click on the Display Options icon to change the appearance of element IDs and ratings in the UGS. For
more information, see Display Options.
46-10
ETAP 11.0
Study Toolbar
46.2 Study Toolbar
Click on this icon to calculate the steady-state temperature of cables in the raceway system under the
specified loading conditions. ETAP uses the IEC 60287 or the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath Method for
these calculations. It determines steady-state conductor temperature for the specified cable loading and
raceway system configuration, considering the effect of heat generated by neighboring cables and external
heat sources.
Uniform-Ampacity Cable Ampacity Calculation

Click on this icon to calculate cable ampacity under uniform ampacity conditions for all cables in the
raceway system. This calculation assumes that the loading of all cables is increased/decreased uniformly
based on cable base ampacity, which is defined in the cable library. The cable ampacity is calculated by
increasing the loading of all cables until the temperature of the hottest cable reaches the maximum
allowable limit. ETAP uses the Neher-McGrath Method for this calculation. This icon is disabled when
the IEC 60287 Method is used.
Uniform-Temperature Cable Ampacity Calculation

Click on this icon to calculate cable ampacity under uniform temperature conditions for all cables in the
raceway system. This calculation adjusts individual cable loading to maintain uniform temperature
throughout the raceway system. The cable ampacity is obtained when the cable temperature reaches its
maximum allowable limit. ETAP uses the Neher-McGrath Method for this calculation. This icon is
disabled when the IEC 60287 Method is used.
46-11
ETAP 11.0
Study Toolbar
Cable Sizing
Click on this icon to automatically optimize cable sizes for the specified cable loading and cable
temperature limit. The result of this study yields the smallest possible sizes for all cables in the raceway
system that can carry the specified loading within the temperature limit. ETAP uses the Neher-McGrath
Method for this calculation. This icon is disabled when the IEC 60287 Method is used.
Transient Cable Temperature Calculation

Click on this icon to calculate cable transient temperatures as a function of time. The cables carry timevarying loads, as defined in the Load Profile of the Cable Editor. This study allows you to investigate
cable transient operating conditions and verify cable temperatures against time for determining the shorttime loading limit. This calculation is based on a dynamic thermal circuit model. This icon is disabled
when the IEC 60287 Method is used.
Display Options
Click on this icon to open the Cable Derating Display Options dialog box to display calculation results.
Report Manager
Click on this button to open the Cable Derating Report Manager dialog box to select a variety of preformatted output files to review. Select a file type and click OK to open the output file. A detailed
explanation of the Cable Derating Report Manager is given in Section 46.13, Output Reports.
Output Report files can be selected from the Output Report List Box on the Study Case toolbar shown
below.
Study Case Toolbar
46-12
ETAP 11.0
Study Toolbar
Cable Transient Temperature Plot

Click on the Plot icon to select and plot the calculated temperatures of the cables in the raceway.
Get Online Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature (ETAP Real-Time), you can copy the
online data to the cables in the current U/G system.
Get Archived Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature (ETAP Real-Time), you can copy the
archived data to the current U/G system.
46-13
ETAP 11.0
Study Case Editor
The Cable Derating Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, cable loading parameters, and
options for Output Reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases.
Cable derating calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings you have specified
in the Study Case Editor.
Note: You can have an unlimited number of Study Cases and can easily switch between the Study Cases
without the trouble of resetting the Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize
your study efforts and save you time.
To conduct studies, you first need to switch to the Calculation Mode by clicking on the U/G Cable
Raceways button on the Mode toolbar.
The Cable Derating Study Case Editor can be accessed by clicking on the Study Case button located on
the Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Cable
Derating Study Case folder.
46-14
ETAP 11.0
Study Case Editor
There are two methods to create a new Study Case. The first method involves going to the Project View,
right clicking on the Cable Derating Study Cases folder, and selecting Create New. A new Study Case is
created, which is a copy of the default Study Case and it is added to the Cable Derating Study Case folder.
The second method involves clicking on the New Study Case button on the Study Case Toolbar as shown
above.
Study Case ID
entering the new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
button at the bottom of the editor to move between Study Cases.
Methods
Use this area to specify the Calculation Method by clicking one of the two buttons.
Neher-McGrath
When this option is selected, the Neher-McGrath Method is employed.
46-15
ETAP 11.0
Study Case Editor
IEC 60287
When this option is selected, the IEC 60287 Method is used for the steady-state temperature calculation.
Initial/Steady-State Amp
Use this area to specify the cable loading for the Study Case by clicking one of the two buttons. The
loading amps are entered into the Loading page of the Cable Editor. The cable current specified in the
Cable Editor is the phase current, and the current each conductor carries is equal to the phase current
divided by the number of conductors per phase.
Load Profile
When this option is selected, the first current value in the Transient Load Profile list in the Loading page
of the Cable Editor will be used as the initial load current for the transient temperature calculation, and as
the load current for the steady-state temperature calculation.
Operating Load
When this option is selected, the operating load in the Loading page of the Cable Editor will be used as
the initial load current for the transient temperature calculation and as the load current for the steady-state
temperature calculation. The operating load current can be updated with the load flow calculation result
by clicking on the Update Cable Load Current button on the Load Flow toolbar.
Multiplication Factor
ETAP provides several multiplication factors, which allow you to vary the cable loading both individually
and globally. These options furnish flexibility in raceway system design and allow you to project future
load variation.
Use Application MF
When this box is checked, the Application MF selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor will be
utilized to modify the cable load. Prior to performing the cable derating calculation, the cable load current
is multiplied by the Application MF.
Individual GF
Select this option to apply the individual load projection multiplication factor that you have entered in the
Loading page of the Cable Editor. The cable load will be multiplied by this factor prior to calculation.
Global GF
The cable load, which you have specified in the Cable Editor, is multiplied by this factor prior to
calculation, allowing you to globally change the system load.
Transient Temperature Study

Enter the time limit and plot time step for a Cable Transient Temperature Study in this section.
Max. Time
Maximum Time is the length of time, at the unit selected, for which the transient temperature calculation
will be performed.
Output Step Size
Output Step Size specifies the time step, at the unit selected, at which plot points will be generated. The
total number of plot points generated is approximately equal to the Max. Time divided by the Output Step
Size.
46-16
ETAP 11.0
Study Case Editor
Units
The Units list box allows you to select time units for the Max. Time and Output Step Size. Time unit
options include days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Update
This group is provided for you to flag ETAP to update your cable data.
Currents from Ampacity Calculation
If the box is checked, after running a UT ampacity or UA ampacity calculation, ETAP will update the
allowable current for each cable involved with the calculated ampacity.
Size from Cable Sizing Calculation
If the box is checked, ETAP will update all the cables involved with the calculated optimal size after
running a cable sizing calculation.
46-17
ETAP 11.0
Display Options

46.4.1 Cable Derating Result Display Options
This dialog box allows you to specify the format for information annotations associated with an
Underground Raceway Systems presentation.
Default
This checkbox is used to edit the display options specified by the Project Default Display Options. When
this option is selected, the Info group in this dialog box will be disabled and all the customized selections
displayed will be ignored and replaced by the default settings.
Results
This group allows the user to enable / disable the calculation results from the steady state temperature and
uniform ampacity calculations. Results from the transient temperature calculation are available via output
reports and plots.
Temperature
Select this option to display the calculated cable temperature in degrees Celsius.
Ampacity
Select this option to display the cable current in amps.
Info
This group becomes accessible only when the Use Default Display Options box is not checked; otherwise,
the information in this group will not apply.
Color
This selection box allows you to select one of the sixteen available colors for information annotations.
Cable ID
Select the checkbox to display the cable ID in the raceway view.
Conduit/Location ID
Select the checkbox to display the conduit/location ID in the raceway view.
46-18
ETAP 11.0
Display Options
Raceway ID
Select the checkbox to display the raceway ID in the raceway view.
Heat Source ID
Select the checkbox to display the external heat source ID in the raceway view.
46.4.2 U/G Raceway Display Options

This dialog box is used to specify the format and content of the annotations to be displayed for each
individual element on the Underground Raceway Systems presentation.
Default
If the Use Project Default Options box is selected, the project default settings will be used on the UGS
presentation.
Options
Color
Select from a variety of colors to display annotations for each element.
ID
For each element type (cable, conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to
display their ID in the UGS presentation.
Size
For each element type (conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to display
their size (in inches or cm) on the UGS presentation.
46-19
ETAP 11.0
Display Options
Results
% Fill
Select this option to display the conduit percent fill expressed as a percentage. The %fill is a dynamically
calculated number that is updated each time the cable size is changed and/or cables are moved between
conduits.
46.4.3 Default Display Options - UGS

This dialog box is used to specify the default format and content of the annotations to be displayed for
each individual element on UGS presentations.
Underground Raceway System Annotations

Color
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed.
ID
For each element type (cable, conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to
display their ID on the UGS presentation.
Size
For each element type (conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to display
their size (in inches or cm) on the UGS presentation.
Annotation Font
IDs
Select the font, style, and size to display all IDs selected in Display Options.
46-20
ETAP 11.0
Display Options
Ratings
Select the font, style, and size to display all ratings selected in Display Options.
Results
Select the font, style, and size to display all study results selected in their respective Display Options.
46-21
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
46.5 Editing a UGS

This section addresses editors for elements in the U/G Raceway Systems (UGS). Except for the elements
ID, all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties.
The elements that are included in this chapter are shown below.
Add Elements
Duct bank raceways and direct buried raceways, conduits for duct bank raceways, locations for direct
buried raceways, external heat sources, and cables are the elements that can be adding to an underground
raceway system. This is done by clicking on the Edit toolbar.
Rules
Elements can be added ONLY in Edit Mode when the Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT be added when you are in Study Mode or in a Revision level of the database.
You CANNOT drop two raceways on top of each other.
You CANNOT drop an external heat source inside a raceway.
Cables can ONLY be placed inside of a conduit or location.
Conduits and locations can ONLY be added inside of their respective raceway types.
Conduits and raceways CANNOT overlap each other.
46-22
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
A UGS Presentation
To add a new element to your UGS presentation, select a new element from the Edit toolbar, which
changes the cursor symbol to a picture of that element. You may place the element anywhere in the UGS
(where there is room) by clicking the mouse. After dropping the element, the cursor goes back to its
original arrow shape. If you double-click on an element in the Edit toolbar, you can place multiple copies
of the same element in the UGS.
To add an existing element to a UGS presentation, select an existing element in the Edit toolbar (red
symbols), which changes the cursor shape to a picture of that element. Move the cursor into the UGS
presentation and click. It will open an editor (dialog box), which allows you to select an element from the
list box to be added as an existing element, and then click on OK. The element will be added with the
same ID (name) with all of the engineering properties preserved.
External Heat Source
Duct Bank Raceway
Cable
Direct Buried Raceway
Add Raceways and External Heat Sources

Click on the Raceway or External Heat Source button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the UGS
presentation, and drop it into place by clicking. If a new raceway or heat source is selected from the
toolbar, ETAP creates the new raceway or external heat source using the default values. If an existing
46-23
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
raceway or heat source is selected, ETAP prompts you with a drop-down list to select an element from the
already existing ones.
Add Cables
Click on the Cable button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor inside of a conduit or location, and drop it
into place by clicking. If you select new cables from the toolbar, a new cable (UGS cable) is created with
a dummy cable diameter. If an existing cable is selected, ETAP provides a drop-down list that you can
use to select a one-line cable, equipment cable, or UGS cable.
Add Conduits
Click on the Conduit button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor inside of a duct bank raceway, and drop
it into place by clicking. Conduits are always created. You cannot add existing conduits to a raceway. The
drop point of a conduit or location is its center. The cursor is marked with an X if your drop point is too
close to the raceways edge causing it to overlap the outside of the raceway.
Add Locations
Click on the Location button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor inside of a direct buried raceway, and
drop it into place by clicking. Locations are used for placing and locating cables in direct buried raceways
and do not physically exist. Locations are always created. You cannot add existing locations to a raceway.
The drop point of a location is its center. The cursor is marked with an X if your drop point is too close to
the raceway edge causing it to overlap outside of the raceway.
Add One-Line Cables

You can graphically add cables from one-line diagrams (one-line cables) to underground raceways. To do
this from a one-line diagram presentation, use <Ctrl><Shift>+Drag to select and graphically drag a oneline cable to a conduit or location in a UGS presentation. At first, the cursor becomes a cable symbol with
a big X marked on top of it. Once the cursor inside a conduit or location, the X disappears and you can
drop it. The cable that you have just placed inside a U/G raceway appears both in the one-line diagram
and the UGS presentations. The property of this cable can be changed from either presentation.
Note: You can also use <Ctrl><Shift> + Drag to add UGS cables to the one-line diagram.
Select Elements
To select an element, click the left mouse button while the cursor (arrow shape) is on top of the element.
To rubber band multiple raceways, click the left mouse outside the raceway and drag the mouse across the
raceways you want to select. It will show you a dotted rectangle. When the mouse is released, only the
raceways inside the rectangle will be selected.
Note: When a raceway is selected, no matter how many conduits, locations, or cables it contains, the
raceway is considered to be one element. For example, if you cut or copy a selected raceway, the raceway
and its contents will be cut or copied.
Selecting & Deselecting Multiple Elements
<Ctrl>+Click on the elements that you want to select or deselect.
Move/Relocate Elements
When an element (other than a cable) is added to a UGS presentation, according to the drop point, its
coordinates (x and y) are updated automatically in its editor and in the Help Line at the bottom of your
46-24
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
screen. You may relocate the element to new coordinates, either from its editor (Ref. X and Ref. Y for
raceways and external heat sources, and Horiz. Dist. and Vert. Dist. for conduits and locations relative to
their raceways reference point) or by dragging the element and watching the Help Line change to the
desired position, as shown below.
X and Y Coordination of an Element in the Help Line

To drag an element, first select the element that you want to move, place the cursor on top of the selected
element. Click and hold the left mouse button, drag the element to the desired position, and release the
left button.
Move Raceways, Heat Sources, and Locations (Conduits)

Select the element, hold the left button, drag it to the new position, and then release the left button. When
the cursor is placed on a selected element, the cursor becomes a movement symbol.
The following graph shows the relationship between raceway reference points and other elements.
46-25
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
The value of the reference Y for raceways and heat sources represents the depth of the elements below the
earths surface. The value of the reference X determines the relative horizontal distance between
raceways and heat sources. The reference X is irrelevant for a UGS presentation that has only one
raceway.
Rules
Elements CANNOT be relocated in Study Mode or in a Revision level of the database.
Elements CANNOT be overlapped.
All three phases of a cable must be routed through the same raceway, i.e., if you move one of the
conductors, ETAP prompts you to move all conductors (placed together).
You can also move a raceway (reference X and Y) or a location/conduit (horizontal and vertical distance)
from its editor as shown below.
Move Cables
You can graphically move any cable within a UGS. To move a cable, select the cable, hold the left button,
drag it to the new location (conduit), and then release the left button. When you move a cable from one
raceway to another raceway, all conductors for that cable will be moved.
46-26
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
Move Cable2 from One Conduit to Another
Move Cable4 from Raceway RW1 to RW2
Cut (Delete) Elements

When elements are cut, they are placed into the Dumpster (inside a Dumpster Cell). You can cut elements
in Edit Mode only. When you cut an element or group of elements, they are deleted from UGS and placed
in the Dumpster with the same IDs (engineering properties are preserved).
Elements can be cut (deleted) three ways:
Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then click on Cut.

Click on the Cut button on the Project toolbar.
Press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Rules
Elements can be cut in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Elements have to be selected in order for them to be Cut (deleted).
When a conduit or location that contains cables is cut, the cables are not deleted. They are moved into
a container attached underneath of the raceway. This container is used to hold cables that belong to
this raceway but are not assigned to a specific conduit or location.
When one or more raceways, cables, or heat sources are placed in the Dumpster, ETAP forms a new
Dumpster Cell (element group) that holds these elements. ETAP automatically assigns the name of
the Dumpster Cell.
46-27
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
Copy Elements
Elements are copied into the Dumpster (inside a Dumpster Cell). To copy an element or group of
elements, right-click on top of the element and select Copy. When you copy an element or group of
elements, they get copied into the Dumpster with new IDs while the engineering properties are preserved.
Elements can be copied two ways:
Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then select Copy.

Click on the Copy button in the Project toolbar.
Rules
Element can be copied in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Date is active.
Element must be selected before they can be copied.
When one or more raceways, cables, or heat sources are placed in the Dumpster, ETAP forms a new
Dumpster Cell (element group) that holds these elements. ETAP automatically assigns the name of
the Dumpster Cell.
Select a raceway and <Shift>+Drag to graphically copy raceways from a UGS presentation to the
Dumpster. At first, the cursor becomes a preventive symbol (a red circle with a line across it). When you
move the cursor on top of the Dumpster, it becomes a box symbol with a plus sign indicating that you can
copy it to the Dumpster.
Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cell from the Dumpster into the UGS presentation. To paste
a copy of the elements from a Dumpster Cell, first select the Cell from the Dumpster, activate the UGS
presentation view you want the element to be pasted into, and then click on Paste. When you paste
elements, they get copied into the UGS presentation with new IDs (engineering properties are preserved).
Elements can be pasted two ways:
Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then select Paste.

Click on the Paste icon in the Project toolbar.
Rules
You CANNOT paste if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
Pasting can be done in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Conduits or locations in the Dumpster CANNOT be deleted or purged unless the raceway containing
these conduits or locations is deleted or purged.
You can paste any Dumpster Cell you wish to by making it active from the Dumpster presentation.
When you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the
active Cell.
You CANNOT paste part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are pasted.
You CANNOT paste Dumpster Cells that contain one-line diagram elements in UGS presentations.
A UGS presentation can contain multiple raceways but not a duplicate raceway (i.e., a raceway
CANNOT be placed twice in the same UGS presentation).
46-28
ETAP 11.0
Editing a UGS
Size Elements
When an element is added into a UGS presentation, its size is set to the default. You can graphically
change the width and height of raceways, as well as, the outside diameter of conduits, locations, and heat
sources. To change the size, select the element, move the cursor to the corner or edges of the selected
element, and, when the cursor changes its shape, release the mouse button. You can see the new sizes on
the Help Line.
Note: You can also change the sizes from the Raceway Editor. Outside diameter (OD) of cables can only
be changed from the Cable Editor.
Rules
Sizing elements can be done in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT overlap each other.
Hyperlinks
You can add hyperlinks to the raceway presentation or cables.
46-29
ETAP 11.0
Underground System Rule Book
46.6 Underground Raceway System Rule Book

A rule book is a system level file that contains various engineering rules / rules of thumb, standards and
best practices for performing routine engineering tasks. The advantage of utilizing the rule book is that it
can be shared across the organization ensuring that the companies / industry engineering standards are
being followed consistently. A user can open and create their own rule files similar to library files. Along
with copying and merging different rule files together.
Rules Menu
The rule book can be access from the Rules menu either in Network Analysis or UGS system as shown
below.
The following options are available under the Rules menu:
UGS
Open
Save
Save As
Create
Copy/Merge
Purge
UGS
This option launches the Underground Raceway System Rule Book Editor.
Open
This option allows you to associate a rule book with your current ETAP project. When you open a new
rule book, the association between the ETAP project and its existing rule book will be disconnected. A
warning message as shown below is issued.
46-30
ETAP 11.0
Save Rule Book

Select this option to save the entire associated rule book file. The Save option in the Library menu only
saves the associated rule book file and is independent of the ETAP Save Project function in the File
menu.
Save As Rule Book
Select this option to save the current rule book file as a new rule book file. This new rule book file
contains all the information in the current rule book file but now has a new name in an independent
location. If the name for the new rule book file already exists in the selected location, it will request
permission to overwrite the old rule book file, and then do so if you click Yes. The new rule book must
have a .rul extension.
Create Rule Book
This option allows you to create a new rule book and associate it with the current project file. The old rule
book file will be disconnected.
Copy / Merge Rule Book
ETAP allows merging of two rule book files (*.rul) using the copy/merge function. The typical
application of the rule book Copy/Merge function can be accessed on the following two menus:
1. Rules menu on the main toolbar.
2. Right-click menu on the Rules folder in the Project View.
The Copy/Merge function allows you to merge partial (selected rules) or complete rule book file from one
rule book (source) to another rule book (sink). The Copy/Merge function is enabled only for the Project
Editor and Librarian access levels. The source rule book overwrites any duplicate information found in
the sink rule book during the merge process.
46-31
ETAP 11.0
First Rule file

The first rule file in the copy / merge is selected here. By default this file is the same as the project rule
file.
Second Rule file
The second rule file in the copy / merge is selected here. By default this field is blank.
File
Opens a dialog to select the rule file to copy / merge.
Arrow
The direction of Copy/Merge is specified by this button. The tail of the arrow is the source and the head
of the arrow is the destination. It has two positions one is downward
, the other is upwards
Connect the project to the merged rule

When checked the project will automatically connect to the merged rule file (destination). For example, if
the project is connected to the first rule file, but the merge is to the second rule file, then after completing
the merge, the project will automatically connect to the second rule file.
Copy / Merge List
A list of rule books and rules within the source rule file are displayed here. Checkboxes are available to
check / uncheck which rules are copied to the destination rule file. If UGS is expanded the individual
Rules will be available for checking and unchecking.
Copy / Merge Confirmation
Clicking on Next will bring the Copy/Merge Confirmation dialog. A list of rules that will be copied is
displayed, and another list of rule that will not be copied is also displayed.
Purge Rule Book
This action will permanently delete all data from the current rule book file but not the rule book file itself.
Be certain that you no longer require the rule book data prior to clicking on the Purge button.
Access Levels
The type of actions a user can perform on the rule books will depend on the type of Access Level they are
logged in as. Furthermore, ETAP needs to keep track of the Lock, Edited, and Checked by information
(name and date) for individual rules defined within the rule book.
Add / Edit a Rule
The access level and lock/unlock status determines if a rule can be added or edited by a user. A locked
rule cannot be edited by a user until it is first unlocked.
When a rule is first added it is unlocked, therefore, the Project Editor, Base Editor, Revision Editor, and
Librarian can add a new rule.
An unlocked rule can be edited by a Project Editor, Base Editor, Revision Editor, and Librarian.
46-32
ETAP 11.0
Access Level
Edit Unlocked Rule
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
X
X
X
X
-
View Rule
A locked rule can be viewed but not edited if the user has Project Editor, Base Editor, Revision Editor,
Checker, or Librarian access level.
Access Level
View Locked Rule
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
X
X
X
X
X
-
Lock/Unlock Rule
Only Project Editors and Librarians have the rights to Lock or Unlock a Rule
Access Level
Lock Rule
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
X
X
-
Delete Rule
The access level and lock/unlock status determines if a rule can be deleted by a user. A locked rule cannot
be deleted by any access level. A rule must first be unlocked before it can be deleted. An unlocked rule
can be deleted by a Project Editor, Base Editor, Revision Editor, and Librarian.
46-33
ETAP 11.0
Access Level
Delete Unlocked Rule
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
X
X
X
X
-
Check Rule
To check a rule the user must be logged in as Checker.
Access Level
Check Rule
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
X
-
Copy/Merge
To Copy/Merge Rules from other rule files, the user must have Project Editor or Librarian access level.
Access Level
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
Copy/Merge
Rule File
X
X
-
Change Project Rule File

To change the rule file used by the project the user must be logged in as Project Editor.
Access Level
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
46-34
Change
Rule File
X
-
ETAP 11.0
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
Save Rule File

Access levels that can edit rules can save them as well
Access Level
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
Save Rule
File
X
X
X
X
-
Create Rule File

To create a new rule file the user must be logged in as Project Editor
Access Level
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
Create
Rule File
X
-
Purge Rule File

To delete a rule file the user must be logged in as Project Editor or Librarian.
Access Level
Project Editor
Base Editor
Revision Editor
Checker
Browser
Librarian
Controller
Operator
46-35
Copy/Merge
Rule File
X
X
-
ETAP 11.0
UGS Rule Book Manager

This manager is also launched when the UGS rule book is selected from the Rules menu option.
Rule List
The rules that are part of the selected rule book are listed here.
Lock
A Locked
or Unlocked image is displayed here. If the rule is locked, then the locked image will be
displayed. If the rule is unlocked, then the unlocked image is displayed.
ID
The ID of the rule is displayed here.
Type
The type of the rule is displayed here, Non-Uniform or Circuit Level.
Unit
Display the unit of measurement to sort the rules (inches or cm).
Edit
Opens the rule editor for the selected rule.
Add
Opens the rule editor for a new rule.
Delete
Deletes the selected rule from the rule book. A confirmation message is displayed if an unlocked rule is
deleted. Note that locked rules cannot be deleted unless they are unlocked.
46-36
ETAP 11.0
Copy
Copies the selected rule to a new rule with the user-defined name.
Reference
Edit or view the rule reference as a text.
Description
Edit or view the rule description as alphanumeric text up to 100 characters.
Edited By
The Edited by Name and Date are displayed here.
Checked By
The Checked by Name and Date are displayed here.
Locked By
The Locked by Name and Date are displayed here.
46-37
ETAP 11.0
UGS Rule Book Editor Non-Uniform Rules Adding Rules

Clicking on Add in the Rule Book editor will open the Rule Book Editor. Note: When the rule has been
locked, all fields become Display Only.
Rule ID
The ID of the Rule is entered here. If Edit was clicked to open the rule editor, then the ID of the selected
rule will be displayed, but cannot be changed.
Type
The rule type is selected from the list. If Edit was clicked to open the rule editor, then the Type field is
display only and cannot be changed. Rule types include:
-
Non-Uniform
Circuit Level
Unit
Select the display units in inches or cm. If Edit was clicked to open the rule editor then the unit field is
display only and cannot be changed.
Reference
Edit the rule reference as a text.
Description
Edit the rule description as alphanumeric text up to 100 characters.
46-38
ETAP 11.0
UGS Rule Book Editor Non-Uniform Rules - Info Page

Clicking on Edit in the Rule Book will also open the Rule Book Editor. The info page will include the
edited by, checked by and locked by information in addition to the information entered when the rule was
created.
Rule ID
ID of the selected rule is displayed and cannot be changed.
Type
Type field is display only and cannot be changed. Rule types include:
- Non-Uniform
- Circuit Level
Unit
Unit field is display only and cannot be changed.
Reference
Description
Edited By
Checked By
46-39
ETAP 11.0
Locked By
UGS Rule Book Editor Non-Uniform Rules Size Page

The purpose for the non-uniform rules is to allow the user to specify the following rules for an
underground raceway system setup:
1. Specify the conduit types commonly used for designing underground raceway systems
2. Specify the conduit sizes considered for various conduit types
3. Specify the minimum separation to maintain when placing conduits of various sizes to create an
underground raceway
The size page is used to define items 1 and 2, i.e. the commonly used conduit types and the sizes
considered based on the conduit types.
Used Conduit Types

These are the available conduit types / conduit materials that will be utilized as part of this rule. Note that
if the company standard is to utilize e.g. PVC Schedule 40 then only that particular conduit type must be
checked. Checking one conduit material in this list does not imply that the other types will not be
available within the conduit editor. This selection only impacts raceways that are built using the UGS
raceway wizard.
46-40
ETAP 11.0
Available
Select whether a particular size is available for the selected conduit material. This selection only impacts
raceways that are built using the UGS raceway wizard and is only saved with the selected rule. You can
always change the conduit size using the conduit editor.
Trade Size
Size specifies the standard diameter of a conduit in inches or centimeters. There are a variety of sizes to
choose from. The English trade sizes are shown below:
- 0.50
- 0.75
- 1.00
- 1.25
- 1.50
- 2.00
- 2.50
- 3.00
- 3.50
- 4.00
- 5.00
- 6.00
ID
This is a non-editable field showing the internal diameter of the conduit in inches or cm.
OD
This is a non-editable field showing the outside diameter of the conduit in inches or cm.
Thickness
This is a non-editable field showing the conduit wall thickness in inches or cm.
UGS Rule Book Editor Non-Uniform Rules Spacing Page

The spacing page is used to enter or view the edge-edge spacing between conduit walls for various
conduit sizes. This is a matrix of spacing between various conduit sizes and can be adjusted per the
company rules or standards. The default values for this rule are obtained from General Cable Installation
Manual and are primarily based on satisfying thermal requirements.
46-41
ETAP 11.0
Size
Based on the available sizes checked on the description page, generate a cumulative list of available sizes.
Spacing value
The spacing rules are user-defined numeric fields that give edge to edge spacing between conduits of
various sizes. Note that this list is symmetrical so you only need to enter spacing between the sizes once.
Spacing for example between 1 and 3 is used between size 3 and 1.
Top-Edge
This is a user-defined field where the raceway top edge to conduit edge spacing is defined.
Side-Edge
This is a user-defined field where the raceway side edge to conduit edge spacing is defined.
Bottom-Edge
This is a user-defined field where the raceway bottom edge to conduit edge spacing is defined.
UGS Rule Book Editor Circuit Level Rules - Info Page

Clicking on Edit in the Rule Book will also open the Rule Book Editor. The info page will include the
edited by, checked by and locked by information in addition to the information entered when the rule was
created.
46-42
ETAP 11.0
Rule ID
ID of the selected rule is displayed and cannot be changed.
Type
Type field is display only and cannot be changed. Rule types include:
-
Non-Uniform
Circuit Level
Unit
Unit field is display only and cannot be changed.
Reference
Description
Edited By
Checked By
Locked By
46-43
ETAP 11.0
UGS Rule Book Editor Circuit Level Rules Size Page

The purpose for the circuit level rules is to allow the user to specify the following rules for an
underground raceway system setup:
1. Specify the conduit types commonly used for designing underground raceway systems
2. Specify the conduit sizes considered for various conduit types
3. Specify the minimum separation to maintain when placing conduits of various circuit or power
levels next to each other
The size page is used to define items 1 and 2, i.e. the commonly used conduit types and the sizes
considered based on the conduit types.
Used Conduit Types

These are the available conduit types / conduit materials that will be utilized as part of this rule. Note that
if the company standard is to utilize e.g. PVC Schedule 40 then only that particular conduit type must be
checked. Checking one conduit material in this list does not imply that the other types will not be
available within the conduit editor. This selection only impacts raceways that are built using the UGS
raceway wizard.
Available
Select whether a particular size is available for the selected conduit material. This selection only impacts
raceways that are built using the UGS raceway wizard and is only saved with the selected rule. You can
always change the conduit size using the conduit editor.
Trade Size
Size specifies the standard diameter of a conduit in inches or centimeters. There are a variety of sizes to
choose from. The English trade sizes are shown below:
46-44
ETAP 11.0

-
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
5.00
6.00
ID
This is a non-editable field showing the internal diameter of the conduit in inches or cm.
OD
This is a non-editable field showing the outside diameter of the conduit in inches or cm.
Thickness
This is a non-editable field showing the conduit wall thickness in inches or cm.
UGS Rule Book Editor Circuit Level Rules Circuit Level Page
The rules page of the rule book will contain the following information when type of rule selected is circuit
level based. These levels are based on circuit power levels, i.e. control power, LV power and/or MV
power.
46-45
ETAP 11.0
Circuit Level #
ANSI 518-1982 defines circuit levels from level 1 through 4S. Additional circuit levels are provided for
future expansion or handling of other standards. The following table is the overall summary of ANSI 5181982 standard. For more details, please refer to the standard.
Circuit
Level
Type
Voltage
Amps
Analog Signal
Digital Signal
< 50 V
< 16 V
Analog Signal
Switching Signal
> 50 V
< 50 V
Switching Signal
Analog Signal
AC Feeders
> 50 V
> 50 V
-
< 20 A
AC & DC
0 - 1 kV
20 - 800 A
4S
AC & DC
> 1 kV
> 800 A
Avail.
Clicking this selection indicates whether a particular condition (circuit level) is to be used as part of the
overall rule or not.
ID
This is the ID given to each condition. Circuit Level IDs 1 through 4S are fixed and cannot be changed.
This ID is displayed in the conduit editor. Circuit Level 5, 6, 7 and 8 are user-defined and are editable.
Type
This refers to the default type of conduit material used for each circuit level. This is a fixed list with the
list of all available conduit types.
Conduit Size
This refers to the size of conduit used for each circuit level. This is a fixed list with all available conduit
sizes.
UGS Rule Book Editor Circuit Level Rules Spacing Page

The spacing page is used to enter or view the edge-edge spacing between conduit walls for various circuit
levels. This is a matrix of spacing between various circuit levels and can be adjusted per the company
rules or standards. The default values for this rule are obtained from ANSI 518-1982. For the default rule
the circuit level spacing has certain spaces that are colored in blue. The blue color indicates that these
values are not based on ANSI 518-1982 electromagnetic interference standard but based on thermal
spacing requirements.
46-46
ETAP 11.0
Underground Syst

ETAP 11.0.0 User Guide

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ETAP 11.0.0 User Guide

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ETAP 11.

Operation Technology, Inc.

Certification No. 10002889 QM08

Operation Technology, Inc.

System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 2

System Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 6

Operation Technology, Inc.

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

3.20 Tutorial ................................................................................................................................. 65

Chapter 4 Options (Preferences)

Options (Preferences) Editor .................................................................................................. 2

Chapter 5 Database and Project Management

Chapter 6 User Access Management

Access Levels ......................................................................................................................... 3

Chapter 7 Printing and Plotting

Schedule Report Manager ...................................................................................................... 3

Chapter 8 Engineering Libraries

Library Utility Tools .............................................................................................................. 3

Operation Technology, Inc.

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

8.18 Solid State Trip Device Library ......................................................................................... 164

Chapter 9 One-Line Diagram GUI

Edit A One-Line Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3

Chapter 10 Menu Bars

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

11.15 Synchronous Motor............................................................................................................ 318

Chapter 12 Instrumentation Elements

Chapter 13 AC-DC Elements

UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)..................................................................................... 2

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Analysis

Chapter 16 STAR Device Cordination Analysis

Chapter 17 STAR View

Chapter 18 Arc Flash Analysis

Bus Editor .............................................................................................................................. 3

Operation Technology, Inc.

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

18.7 Required Data .................................................................................................................... 109

Chapter 19 Load Flow Analysis

Chapter 20 Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis

Chapter 21 Motor Starting Analysis

Chapter 22 Transient Stability Analysis

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

Chapter 23 Generator Start-Up

Chapter 24 Dynamic Models

Chapter 25 User Defined Dynamic Models

Chapter 26 Parameter Estimation

Start Parameter Estimation..................................................................................................... 2

Chapter 27 Harmonic Analysis

Operation Technology, Inc.

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

Chapter 28 Optimal Power Flow

Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3

Chapter 29 Optimal Capacitor Placement

Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 4

Chapter 30 Reliabitliy Analysis

Chapter 31 Transformer MVA Sizing

Chapter 32 Transformer Tap Optimization

Transformer Tap Optimization .............................................................................................. 2

Chapter 33 DC Short-Circuit Analysis

Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3

Operation Technology, Inc.

ETAP 11.0 User Guide

Chapter 34 DC Load Flow Analysis